## Table of contents

## 1 Introduction

### 1.1 Where does this specification fit?

This specification defines a big part of the Web platform, in lots of detail. Its place in the Web platform specification stack relative to other specifications can be best summed up as follows:

### 1.2 Is this HTML5?

This section is non-normative.

In short: Yes.

In more length: The term "HTML5" is widely used as a buzzword to refer to modern Web technologies, many of which (though by no means all) are developed at the WHATWG. This document is one such; others are available from the WHATWG specification index.

Although we have asked them to stop doing so, the W3C also republishes some parts of this specification as separate documents. There are numerous differences between this specification and the W3C forks; some minor, some major. Unfortunately these are not currently accurately documented anywhere, so there is no way to know which are intentional and which are not.

### 1.3 Background

This section is non-normative.

HTML is the World Wide Web's core markup language. Originally, HTML was primarily designed as a language for semantically describing scientific documents. Its general design, however, has enabled it to be adapted, over the subsequent years, to describe a number of other types of documents and even applications.

### 1.4 Audience

This section is non-normative.

This specification is intended for authors of documents and scripts that use the features defined in this specification, implementors of tools that operate on pages that use the features defined in this specification, and individuals wishing to establish the correctness of documents or implementations with respect to the requirements of this specification.

This document is probably not suited to readers who do not already have at least a passing familiarity with Web technologies, as in places it sacrifices clarity for precision, and brevity for completeness. More approachable tutorials and authoring guides can provide a gentler introduction to the topic.

In particular, familiarity with the basics of DOM is necessary for a complete understanding of some of the more technical parts of this specification. An understanding of Web IDL, HTTP, XML, Unicode, character encodings, JavaScript, and CSS will also be helpful in places but is not essential.

### 1.5 Scope

This section is non-normative.

This specification is limited to providing a semantic-level markup language and associated semantic-level scripting APIs for authoring accessible pages on the Web ranging from static documents to dynamic applications.

The scope of this specification does not include providing mechanisms for media-specific customization of presentation (although default rendering rules for Web browsers are included at the end of this specification, and several mechanisms for hooking into CSS are provided as part of the language).

The scope of this specification is not to describe an entire operating system. In particular, hardware configuration software, image manipulation tools, and applications that users would be expected to use with high-end workstations on a daily basis are out of scope. In terms of applications, this specification is targeted specifically at applications that would be expected to be used by users on an occasional basis, or regularly but from disparate locations, with low CPU requirements. Examples of such applications include online purchasing systems, searching systems, games (especially multiplayer online games), public telephone books or address books, communications software (e-mail clients, instant messaging clients, discussion software), document editing software, etc.

### 1.6 History

This section is non-normative.

For its first five years (1990-1995), HTML went through a number of revisions and experienced a number of extensions, primarily hosted first at CERN, and then at the IETF.

With the creation of the W3C, HTML's development changed venue again. A first abortive attempt at extending HTML in 1995 known as HTML 3.0 then made way to a more pragmatic approach known as HTML 3.2, which was completed in 1997. HTML4 quickly followed later that same year.

The following year, the W3C membership decided to stop evolving HTML and instead begin work on an XML-based equivalent, called XHTML. This effort started with a reformulation of HTML4 in XML, known as XHTML 1.0, which added no new features except the new serialisation, and which was completed in 2000. After XHTML 1.0, the W3C's focus turned to making it easier for other working groups to extend XHTML, under the banner of XHTML Modularization. In parallel with this, the W3C also worked on a new language that was not compatible with the earlier HTML and XHTML languages, calling it XHTML2.

Around the time that HTML's evolution was stopped in 1998, parts of the API for HTML developed by browser vendors were specified and published under the name DOM Level 1 (in 1998) and DOM Level 2 Core and DOM Level 2 HTML (starting in 2000 and culminating in 2003). These efforts then petered out, with some DOM Level 3 specifications published in 2004 but the working group being closed before all the Level 3 drafts were completed.

In 2003, the publication of XForms, a technology which was positioned as the next generation of Web forms, sparked a renewed interest in evolving HTML itself, rather than finding replacements for it. This interest was borne from the realization that XML's deployment as a Web technology was limited to entirely new technologies (like RSS and later Atom), rather than as a replacement for existing deployed technologies (like HTML).

A proof of concept to show that it was possible to extend HTML4's forms to provide many of the features that XForms 1.0 introduced, without requiring browsers to implement rendering engines that were incompatible with existing HTML Web pages, was the first result of this renewed interest. At this early stage, while the draft was already publicly available, and input was already being solicited from all sources, the specification was only under Opera Software's copyright.

The idea that HTML's evolution should be reopened was tested at a W3C workshop in 2004, where some of the principles that underlie the HTML5 work (described below), as well as the aforementioned early draft proposal covering just forms-related features, were presented to the W3C jointly by Mozilla and Opera. The proposal was rejected on the grounds that the proposal conflicted with the previously chosen direction for the Web's evolution; the W3C staff and membership voted to continue developing XML-based replacements instead.

Shortly thereafter, Apple, Mozilla, and Opera jointly announced their intent to continue working on the effort under the umbrella of a new venue called the WHATWG. A public mailing list was created, and the draft was moved to the WHATWG site. The copyright was subsequently amended to be jointly owned by all three vendors, and to allow reuse of the specification.

The WHATWG was based on several core principles, in particular that technologies need to be backwards compatible, that specifications and implementations need to match even if this means changing the specification rather than the implementations, and that specifications need to be detailed enough that implementations can achieve complete interoperability without reverse-engineering each other.

The latter requirement in particular required that the scope of the HTML5 specification include what had previously been specified in three separate documents: HTML4, XHTML1, and DOM2 HTML. It also meant including significantly more detail than had previously been considered the norm.

In 2006, the W3C indicated an interest to participate in the development of HTML5 after all, and in 2007 formed a working group chartered to work with the WHATWG on the development of the HTML5 specification. Apple, Mozilla, and Opera allowed the W3C to publish the specification under the W3C copyright, while keeping a version with the less restrictive license on the WHATWG site.

For a number of years, both groups then worked together. In 2011, however, the groups came to the conclusion that they had different goals: the W3C wanted to publish a "finished" version of "HTML5", while the WHATWG wanted to continue working on a Living Standard for HTML, continuously maintaining the specification rather than freezing it in a state with known problems, and adding new features as needed to evolve the platform.

Since then, the WHATWG has been working on this specification (amongst others), and the W3C has been copying fixes made by the WHATWG into their fork of the document, as well as making other changes, some intentional and some not, with no documentation listing or explaining the differences.

### 1.7 Design notes

This section is non-normative.

It must be admitted that many aspects of HTML appear at first glance to be nonsensical and inconsistent.

HTML, its supporting DOM APIs, as well as many of its supporting technologies, have been developed over a period of several decades by a wide array of people with different priorities who, in many cases, did not know of each other's existence.

Features have thus arisen from many sources, and have not always been designed in especially consistent ways. Furthermore, because of the unique characteristics of the Web, implementation bugs have often become de-facto, and now de-jure, standards, as content is often unintentionally written in ways that rely on them before they can be fixed.

Despite all this, efforts have been made to adhere to certain design goals. These are described in the next few subsections.

#### 1.7.1 Serialisability of script execution

This section is non-normative.

To avoid exposing Web authors to the complexities of multithreading, the HTML and DOM APIs are designed such that no script can ever detect the simultaneous execution of other scripts. Even with workers, the intent is that the behavior of implementations can be thought of as completely serialising the execution of all scripts in all browsing contexts.

The `navigator.yieldForStorageUpdates()` method, in this model, is equivalent to allowing other scripts to run while the calling script is blocked.

#### 1.7.2 Compliance with other specifications

This section is non-normative.

This specification interacts with and relies on a wide variety of other specifications. In certain circumstances, unfortunately, conflicting needs have led to this specification violating the requirements of these other specifications. Whenever this has occurred, the transgressions have each been noted as a "willful violation", and the reason for the violation has been noted.

#### 1.7.3 Extensibility

This section is non-normative.

HTML has a wide array of extensibility mechanisms that can be used for adding semantics in a safe manner:

- Authors can use the `class` attribute to extend elements, effectively creating their own elements, while using the most applicable existing "real" HTML element, so that browsers and other tools that don't know of the extension can still support it somewhat well. This is the tack used by microformats, for example.

- Authors can include data for inline client-side scripts or server-side site-wide scripts to process using the `data-*=""` attributes. These are guaranteed to never be touched by browsers, and allow scripts to include data on HTML elements that scripts can then look for and process.

- Authors can use the `<meta name="" content="">` mechanism to include page-wide metadata by registering extensions to the predefined set of metadata names.

- Authors can use the `rel=""` mechanism to annotate links with specific meanings by registering extensions to the predefined set of link types. This is also used by microformats.

- Authors can embed raw data using the `<script type="">` mechanism with a custom type, for further handling by inline or server-side scripts.

- Authors can create plugins and invoke them using the `embed` element. This is how Flash works.

- Authors can extend APIs using the JavaScript prototyping mechanism. This is widely used by script libraries, for instance.

- Authors can use the microdata feature (the `itemscope=""` and `itemprop=""` attributes) to embed nested name-value pairs of data to be shared with other applications and sites.

### 1.8 HTML vs XHTML

This section is non-normative.

This specification defines an abstract language for describing documents and applications, and some APIs for interacting with in-memory representations of resources that use this language.

The in-memory representation is known as "DOM HTML", or "the DOM" for short.

There are various concrete syntaxes that can be used to transmit resources that use this abstract language, two of which are defined in this specification.

The first such concrete syntax is the HTML syntax. This is the format suggested for most authors. It is compatible with most legacy Web browsers. If a document is transmitted with the `text/html` MIME type, then it will be processed as an HTML document by Web browsers. This specification defines the latest HTML syntax, known simply as "HTML".

The second concrete syntax is the XHTML syntax, which is an application of XML. When a document is transmitted with an XML MIME type, such as `application/xhtml+xml`, then it is treated as an XML document by Web browsers, to be parsed by an XML processor. Authors are reminded that the processing for XML and HTML differs; in particular, even minor syntax errors will prevent a document labeled as XML from being rendered fully, whereas they would be ignored in the HTML syntax. This specification defines the latest XHTML syntax, known simply as "XHTML".

The DOM, the HTML syntax, and the XHTML syntax cannot all represent the same content. For example, namespaces cannot be represented using the HTML syntax, but they are supported in the DOM and in the XHTML syntax. Similarly, documents that use the `noscript` feature can be represented using the HTML syntax, but cannot be represented with the DOM or in the XHTML syntax. Comments that contain the string "`-->`" can only be represented in the DOM, not in the HTML and XHTML syntaxes.

### 1.9 Structure of this specification

This section is non-normative.

This specification is divided into the following major sections:

Introduction
  Non-normative materials providing a context for the HTML standard.
Common infrastructure
  The conformance classes, algorithms, definitions, and the common underpinnings of the rest of the specification.
Semantics, structure, and APIs of HTML documents
  Documents are built from elements. These elements form a tree using the DOM. This section defines the features of this DOM, as well as introducing the features common to all elements, and the concepts used in defining elements.
The elements of HTML
  Each element has a predefined meaning, which is explained in this section. Rules for authors on how to use the element, along with user agent requirements for how to handle each element, are also given. This includes large signature features of HTML such as video playback and subtitles, form controls and form submission, and a 2D graphics API known as the HTML canvas.
Microdata
  This specification introduces a mechanism for adding machine-readable annotations to documents, so that tools can extract trees of name-value pairs from the document. This section describes this mechanism and some algorithms that can be used to convert HTML documents into other formats. This section also defines some sample Microdata vocabularies for contact information, calendar events, and licensing works.
User interaction
  HTML documents can provide a number of mechanisms for users to interact with and modify content, which are described in this section, such as how focus works, and drag-and-drop.
Loading Web pages
  HTML documents do not exist in a vacuum — this section defines many of the features that affect environments that deal with multiple pages, such as Web browsers and offline caching of Web applications.
Web application APIs
  This section introduces basic features for scripting of applications in HTML.
Web workers
  This section defines an API for background threads in JavaScript.
The communication APIs
  This section describes some mechanisms that applications written in HTML can use to communicate with other applications from different domains running on the same client. It also introduces a server-push event stream mechanism known as Server Sent Events or `EventSource`, and a two-way full-duplex socket protocol for scripts known as Web Sockets.
Web storage
  This section defines a client-side storage mechanism based on name-value pairs.
The HTML syntax
The XHTML syntax
  All of these features would be for naught if they couldn't be represented in a serialised form and sent to other people, and so these sections define the syntaxes of HTML and XHTML, along with rules for how to parse content using those syntaxes.
Rendering
  This section defines the default rendering rules for Web browsers.

There are also some appendices, listing obsolete features and IANA considerations, and several indices.

#### 1.9.1 How to read this specification

This specification should be read like all other specifications. First, it should be read cover-to-cover, multiple times. Then, it should be read backwards at least once. Then it should be read by picking random sections from the contents list and following all the cross-references.

As described in the conformance requirements section below, this specification describes conformance criteria for a variety of conformance classes. In particular, there are conformance requirements that apply to producers, for example authors and the documents they create, and there are conformance requirements that apply to consumers, for example Web browsers. They can be distinguished by what they are requiring: a requirement on a producer states what is allowed, while a requirement on a consumer states how software is to act.

For example, "the `foo` attribute's value must be a valid integer" is a requirement on producers, as it lays out the allowed values; in contrast, the requirement "the `foo` attribute's value must be parsed using the rules for parsing integers" is a requirement on consumers, as it describes how to process the content.

Requirements on producers have no bearing whatsoever on consumers.

Continuing the above example, a requirement stating that a particular attribute's value is constrained to being a valid integer emphatically does not imply anything about the requirements on consumers. It might be that the consumers are in fact required to treat the attribute as an opaque string, completely unaffected by whether the value conforms to the requirements or not. It might be (as in the previous example) that the consumers are required to parse the value using specific rules that define how invalid (non-numeric in this case) values are to be processed.

#### 1.9.2 Typographic conventions

This is a definition, requirement, or explanation.

This is a note.

This is an example.

This is an open issue.

This is a warning.

    interface Example {
      // this is an IDL definition
    };

variable = object . `method`( [ optionalArgument ] )

  This is a note to authors describing the usage of an interface.

    /* this is a CSS fragment */

The defining instance of a term is marked up like this. Uses of that term are marked up like this or like this.

The defining instance of an element, attribute, or API is marked up like `this`. References to that element, attribute, or API are marked up like `this`.

Other code fragments are marked up `like this`.

Variables are marked up like this.

In an algorithm, steps in synchronous sections are marked with ⌛.

In some cases, requirements are given in the form of lists with conditions and corresponding requirements. In such cases, the requirements that apply to a condition are always the first set of requirements that follow the condition, even in the case of there being multiple sets of conditions for those requirements. Such cases are presented as follows:

This is a condition
This is another condition
  This is the requirement that applies to the conditions above.
This is a third condition
  This is the requirement that applies to the third condition.

### 1.10 Privacy concerns

This section is non-normative.

Some features of HTML trade user convenience for a measure of user privacy.

In general, due to the Internet's architecture, a user can be distinguished from another by the user's IP address. IP addresses do not perfectly match to a user; as a user moves from device to device, or from network to network, their IP address will change; similarly, NAT routing, proxy servers, and shared computers enable packets that appear to all come from a single IP address to actually map to multiple users. Technologies such as onion routing can be used to further anonymise requests so that requests from a single user at one node on the Internet appear to come from many disparate parts of the network.

However, the IP address used for a user's requests is not the only mechanism by which a user's requests could be related to each other. Cookies, for example, are designed specifically to enable this, and are the basis of most of the Web's session features that enable you to log into a site with which you have an account.

There are other mechanisms that are more subtle. Certain characteristics of a user's system can be used to distinguish groups of users from each other; by collecting enough such information, an individual user's browser's "digital fingerprint" can be computed, which can be as good, if not better, as an IP address in ascertaining which requests are from the same user.

Grouping requests in this manner, especially across multiple sites, can be used for both benign (and even arguably positive) purposes, as well as for malevolent purposes. An example of a reasonably benign purpose would be determining whether a particular person seems to prefer sites with dog illustrations as opposed to sites with cat illustrations (based on how often they visit the sites in question) and then automatically using the preferred illustrations on subsequent visits to participating sites. Malevolent purposes, however, could include governments combining information such as the person's home address (determined from the addresses they use when getting driving directions on one site) with their apparent political affiliations (determined by examining the forum sites that they participate in) to determine whether the person should be prevented from voting in an election.

Since the malevolent purposes can be remarkably evil, user agent implementors are encouraged to consider how to provide their users with tools to minimise leaking information that could be used to fingerprint a user.

Unfortunately, as the first paragraph in this section implies, sometimes there is great benefit to be derived from exposing the very information that can also be used for fingerprinting purposes, so it's not as easy as simply blocking all possible leaks. For instance, the ability to log into a site to post under a specific identity requires that the user's requests be identifiable as all being from the same user, more or less by definition. More subtly, though, information such as how wide text is, which is necessary for many effects that involve drawing text onto a canvas (e.g. any effect that involves drawing a border around the text) also leaks information that can be used to group a user's requests. (In this case, by potentially exposing, via a brute force search, which fonts a user has installed, information which can vary considerably from user to user.)

Features in this specification which can be used to fingerprint the user are marked as this paragraph is.

Other features in the platform can be used for the same purpose, though, including, though not limited to:

- The exact list of which features a user agents supports.
- The maximum allowed stack depth for recursion in script.
- Features that describe the user's environment, like Media Queries and the `Screen` object. [MQ] [CSSOMVIEW]
- The user's time zone.

#### 1.10.1 Cross-site communication

The `postMessage()` API provides a mechanism by which two sites can communicate directly. At first glance, this might appear to open a new way by which the problems described above can occur. However, in practice, multiple mechanisms exist by which two sites can communicate that predate this API: a site embedding another can send data via an `iframe` element's dimensions; a site can use a cross-site image request with a unique identifier known to the server to initiate a server-side data exchange; or indeed the fingerprinting techniques described above can be used by two sites to uniquely identify a visitor such that information can then be exchanged on the server side.

Fundamentally, users that do not trust a site to treat their information with respect have to avoid visiting that site at all.

### 1.11 A quick introduction to HTML

This section is non-normative.

A basic HTML document looks like this:

    <!DOCTYPE html>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Sample page</title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <h1>Sample page</h1>
      <p>This is a <a href="demo.html">simple</a> sample.</p>
      <!-- this is a comment -->
     </body>
    </html>

HTML documents consist of a tree of elements and text. Each element is denoted in the source by a start tag, such as "`<body>`", and an end tag, such as "`</body>`". (Certain start tags and end tags can in certain cases be omitted and are implied by other tags.)

Tags have to be nested such that elements are all completely within each other, without overlapping:

    <p>This is <em>very <strong>wrong</em>!</strong></p>

    <p>This <em>is <strong>correct</strong>.</em></p>

This specification defines a set of elements that can be used in HTML, along with rules about the ways in which the elements can be nested.

Elements can have attributes, which control how the elements work. In the example below, there is a hyperlink, formed using the `a` element and its `href` attribute:

    <a href="demo.html">simple</a>

Attributes are placed inside the start tag, and consist of a name and a value, separated by an "`=`" character. The attribute value can remain unquoted if it doesn't contain space characters or any of `"` `'` ``` `=` `<` or `>`. Otherwise, it has to be quoted using either single or double quotes. The value, along with the "`=`" character, can be omitted altogether if the value is the empty string.

    <!-- empty attributes -->
    <input name=address disabled>
    <input name=address disabled="">

    <!-- attributes with a value -->
    <input name=address maxlength=200>
    <input name=address maxlength='200'>
    <input name=address maxlength="200">

HTML user agents (e.g. Web browsers) then parse this markup, turning it into a DOM (Document Object Model) tree. A DOM tree is an in-memory representation of a document.

DOM trees contain several kinds of nodes, in particular a `DocumentType` node, `Element` nodes, `Text` nodes, `Comment` nodes, and in some cases `ProcessingInstruction` nodes.

The markup snippet at the top of this section would be turned into the following DOM tree:

- DOCTYPE: `html`
- `html`
  - `head`
    - `#text`: ⏎␣␣
    - `title`
      - `#text`: Sample page
    - `#text`: ⏎␣
  - `#text`: ⏎␣
  - `body`
    - `#text`: ⏎␣␣
    - `h1`
      - `#text`: Sample page
    - `#text`: ⏎␣␣
    - `p`
      - `#text`: This is a
      - `a` `href`="`demo.html`"
        - `#text`: simple
      - `#text`: sample.
    - `#text`: ⏎␣␣
    - `#comment`: this is a comment
    - `#text`: ⏎␣⏎

The root element of this tree is the `html` element, which is the element always found at the root of HTML documents. It contains two elements, `head` and `body`, as well as a `Text` node between them.

There are many more `Text` nodes in the DOM tree than one would initially expect, because the source contains a number of spaces (represented here by "␣") and line breaks ("⏎") that all end up as `Text` nodes in the DOM. However, for historical reasons not all of the spaces and line breaks in the original markup appear in the DOM. In particular, all the whitespace before `head` start tag ends up being dropped silently, and all the whitespace after the `body` end tag ends up placed at the end of the `body`.

The `head` element contains a `title` element, which itself contains a `Text` node with the text "Sample page". Similarly, the `body` element contains an `h1` element, a `p` element, and a comment.

This DOM tree can be manipulated from scripts in the page. Scripts (typically in JavaScript) are small programs that can be embedded using the `script` element or using event handler content attributes. For example, here is a form with a script that sets the value of the form's `output` element to say "Hello World":

    <form name="main">
     Result: <output name="result"></output>
     <script>
      document.forms.main.elements.result.value = 'Hello World';
     </script>
    </form>

Each element in the DOM tree is represented by an object, and these objects have APIs so that they can be manipulated. For instance, a link (e.g. the `a` element in the tree above) can have its "`href`" attribute changed in several ways:

    var a = document.links[0]; // obtain the first link in the document
    a.href = 'sample.html'; // change the destination URL of the link
    a.protocol = 'https'; // change just the scheme part of the URL
    a.setAttribute('href', 'http://example.com/'); // change the content attribute directly

Since DOM trees are used as the way to represent HTML documents when they are processed and presented by implementations (especially interactive implementations like Web browsers), this specification is mostly phrased in terms of DOM trees, instead of the markup described above.

HTML documents represent a media-independent description of interactive content. HTML documents might be rendered to a screen, or through a speech synthesiser, or on a braille display. To influence exactly how such rendering takes place, authors can use a styling language such as CSS.

In the following example, the page has been made yellow-on-blue using CSS.

    <!DOCTYPE html>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Sample styled page</title>
      <style>
       body { background: navy; color: yellow; }
      </style>
     </head>
     <body>
      <h1>Sample styled page</h1>
      <p>This page is just a demo.</p>
     </body>
    </html>

For more details on how to use HTML, authors are encouraged to consult tutorials and guides. Some of the examples included in this specification might also be of use, but the novice author is cautioned that this specification, by necessity, defines the language with a level of detail that might be difficult to understand at first.

#### 1.11.1 Writing secure applications with HTML

This section is non-normative.

When HTML is used to create interactive sites, care needs to be taken to avoid introducing vulnerabilities through which attackers can compromise the integrity of the site itself or of the site's users.

A comprehensive study of this matter is beyond the scope of this document, and authors are strongly encouraged to study the matter in more detail. However, this section attempts to provide a quick introduction to some common pitfalls in HTML application development.

The security model of the Web is based on the concept of "origins", and correspondingly many of the potential attacks on the Web involve cross-origin actions. [ORIGIN]

Not validating user input
Cross-site scripting (XSS)
SQL injection

  When accepting untrusted input, e.g. user-generated content such as text comments, values in URL parameters, messages from third-party sites, etc, it is imperative that the data be validated before use, and properly escaped when displayed. Failing to do this can allow a hostile user to perform a variety of attacks, ranging from the potentially benign, such as providing bogus user information like a negative age, to the serious, such as running scripts every time a user looks at a page that includes the information, potentially propagating the attack in the process, to the catastrophic, such as deleting all data in the server.

  When writing filters to validate user input, it is imperative that filters always be whitelist-based, allowing known-safe constructs and disallowing all other input. Blacklist-based filters that disallow known-bad inputs and allow everything else are not secure, as not everything that is bad is yet known (for example, because it might be invented in the future).

  For example, suppose a page looked at its URL's query string to determine what to display, and the site then redirected the user to that page to display a message, as in:

      <ul>
       <li><a href="message.cgi?say=Hello">Say Hello</a>
       <li><a href="message.cgi?say=Welcome">Say Welcome</a>
       <li><a href="message.cgi?say=Kittens">Say Kittens</a>
      </ul>

  If the message was just displayed to the user without escaping, a hostile attacker could then craft a URL that contained a script element:

      http://example.com/message.cgi?say=%3Cscript%3Ealert%28%27Oh%20no%21%27%29%3C/script%3E

  If the attacker then convinced a victim user to visit this page, a script of the attacker's choosing would run on the page. Such a script could do any number of hostile actions, limited only by what the site offers: if the site is an e-commerce shop, for instance, such a script could cause the user to unknowingly make arbitrarily many unwanted purchases.

  This is called a cross-site scripting attack.

  There are many constructs that can be used to try to trick a site into executing code. Here are some that authors are encouraged to consider when writing whitelist filters:

  - When allowing harmless-seeming elements like `img`, it is important to whitelist any provided attributes as well. If one allowed all attributes then an attacker could, for instance, use the `onload` attribute to run arbitrary script.
  - When allowing URLs to be provided (e.g. for links), the scheme of each URL also needs to be explicitly whitelisted, as there are many schemes that can be abused. The most prominent example is "`javascript:`", but user agents can implement (and indeed, have historically implemented) others.
  - Allowing a `base` element to be inserted means any `script` elements in the page with relative links can be hijacked, and similarly that any form submissions can get redirected to a hostile site.
Cross-site request forgery (CSRF)

  If a site allows a user to make form submissions with user-specific side-effects, for example posting messages on a forum under the user's name, making purchases, or applying for a passport, it is important to verify that the request was made by the user intentionally, rather than by another site tricking the user into making the request unknowingly.

  This problem exists because HTML forms can be submitted to other origins.

  Sites can prevent such attacks by populating forms with user-specific hidden tokens, or by checking `Origin` headers on all requests.

Clickjacking

  A page that provides users with an interface to perform actions that the user might not wish to perform needs to be designed so as to avoid the possibility that users can be tricked into activating the interface.

  One way that a user could be so tricked is if a hostile site places the victim site in a small `iframe` and then convinces the user to click, for instance by having the user play a reaction game. Once the user is playing the game, the hostile site can quickly position the iframe under the mouse cursor just as the user is about to click, thus tricking the user into clicking the victim site's interface.

  To avoid this, sites that do not expect to be used in frames are encouraged to only enable their interface if they detect that they are not in a frame (e.g. by comparing the `window` object to the value of the `top` attribute).

#### 1.11.2 Common pitfalls to avoid when using the scripting APIs

This section is non-normative.

Scripts in HTML have "run-to-completion" semantics, meaning that the browser will generally run the script uninterrupted before doing anything else, such as firing further events or continuing to parse the document.

On the other hand, parsing of HTML files happens asynchronously and incrementally, meaning that the parser can pause at any point to let scripts run. This is generally a good thing, but it does mean that authors need to be careful to avoid hooking event handlers after the events could have possibly fired.

There are two techniques for doing this reliably: use event handler content attributes, or create the element and add the event handlers in the same script. The latter is safe because, as mentioned earlier, scripts are run to completion before further events can fire.

One way this could manifest itself is with `img` elements and the `load` event. The event could fire as soon as the element has been parsed, especially if the image has already been cached (which is common).

Here, the author uses the `onload` handler on an `img` element to catch the `load` event:

    <img src="games.png" alt="Games" onload="gamesLogoHasLoaded(event)">

If the element is being added by script, then so long as the event handlers are added in the same script, the event will still not be missed:

    <script>
     var img = new Image();
     img.src = 'games.png';
     img.alt = 'Games';
     img.onload = gamesLogoHasLoaded;
     // img.addEventListener('load', gamesLogoHasLoaded, false); // would work also
    </script>

However, if the author first created the `img` element and then in a separate script added the event listeners, there's a chance that the `load` event would be fired in between, leading it to be missed:

    <!-- Do not use this style, it has a race condition! -->
     <img id="games" src="games.png" alt="Games">
     <!-- the 'load' event might fire here while the parser is taking a
          break, in which case you will not see it! -->
     <script>
      var img = document.getElementById('games');
      img.onload = gamesLogoHasLoaded; // might never fire!
     </script>

#### 1.11.3 How to catch mistakes when writing HTML: validators and conformance checkers

This section is non-normative.

Authors are encouraged to make use of conformance checkers (also known as validators) to catch common mistakes. The WHATWG maintains a list of such tools at: http://validator.whatwg.org/

### 1.12 Conformance requirements for authors

This section is non-normative.

Unlike previous versions of the HTML specification, this specification defines in some detail the required processing for invalid documents as well as valid documents.

However, even though the processing of invalid content is in most cases well-defined, conformance requirements for documents are still important: in practice, interoperability (the situation in which all implementations process particular content in a reliable and identical or equivalent way) is not the only goal of document conformance requirements. This section details some of the more common reasons for still distinguishing between a conforming document and one with errors.

#### 1.12.1 Presentational markup

This section is non-normative.

The majority of presentational features from previous versions of HTML are no longer allowed. Presentational markup in general has been found to have a number of problems:

The use of presentational elements leads to poorer accessibility

  While it is possible to use presentational markup in a way that provides users of assistive technologies (ATs) with an acceptable experience (e.g. using ARIA), doing so is significantly more difficult than doing so when using semantically-appropriate markup. Furthermore, even using such techniques doesn't help make pages accessible for non-AT non-graphical users, such as users of text-mode browsers.

  Using media-independent markup, on the other hand, provides an easy way for documents to be authored in such a way that they work for more users (e.g. text browsers).

Higher cost of maintenance

  It is significantly easier to maintain a site written in such a way that the markup is style-independent. For example, changing the colour of a site that uses `<font color="">` throughout requires changes across the entire site, whereas a similar change to a site based on CSS can be done by changing a single file.

Larger document sizes

  Presentational markup tends to be much more redundant, and thus results in larger document sizes.

For those reasons, presentational markup has been removed from HTML in this version. This change should not come as a surprise; HTML4 deprecated presentational markup many years ago and provided a mode (HTML4 Transitional) to help authors move away from presentational markup; later, XHTML 1.1 went further and obsoleted those features altogether.

The only remaining presentational markup features in HTML are the `style` attribute and the `style` element. Use of the `style` attribute is somewhat discouraged in production environments, but it can be useful for rapid prototyping (where its rules can be directly moved into a separate style sheet later) and for providing specific styles in unusual cases where a separate style sheet would be inconvenient. Similarly, the `style` element can be useful in syndication or for page-specific styles, but in general an external style sheet is likely to be more convenient when the styles apply to multiple pages.

It is also worth noting that some elements that were previously presentational have been redefined in this specification to be media-independent: `b`, `i`, `hr`, `s`, `small`, and `u`.

#### 1.12.2 Syntax errors

This section is non-normative.

The syntax of HTML is constrained to avoid a wide variety of problems.

Unintuitive error-handling behavior

  Certain invalid syntax constructs, when parsed, result in DOM trees that are highly unintuitive.

  For example, the following markup fragment results in a DOM with an `hr` element that is an earlier sibling of the corresponding `table` element:

      <table><hr>...

Errors with optional error recovery

  To allow user agents to be used in controlled environments without having to implement the more bizarre and convoluted error handling rules, user agents are permitted to fail whenever encountering a parse error.

Errors where the error-handling behavior is not compatible with streaming user agents

  Some error-handling behavior, such as the behavior for the `<table><hr>...` example mentioned above, are incompatible with streaming user agents (user agents that process HTML files in one pass, without storing state). To avoid interoperability problems with such user agents, any syntax resulting in such behavior is considered invalid.

Errors that can result in infoset coercion

  When a user agent based on XML is connected to an HTML parser, it is possible that certain invariants that XML enforces, such as comments never containing two consecutive hyphens, will be violated by an HTML file. Handling this can require that the parser coerce the HTML DOM into an XML-compatible infoset. Most syntax constructs that require such handling are considered invalid.

Errors that result in disproportionally poor performance

  Certain syntax constructs can result in disproportionally poor performance. To discourage the use of such constructs, they are typically made non-conforming.

  For example, the following markup results in poor performance, since all the unclosed `i` elements have to be reconstructed in each paragraph, resulting in progressively more elements in each paragraph:

      <p><i>He dreamt.
      <p><i>He dreamt that he ate breakfast.
      <p><i>Then lunch.
      <p><i>And finally dinner.

  The resulting DOM for this fragment would be:

  - `p`
    - `i`
      - `#text`: He dreamt.
  - `p`
    - `i`
      - `i`
        - `#text`: He dreamt that he ate breakfast.
  - `p`
    - `i`
      - `i`
        - `i`
          - `#text`: Then lunch.
  - `p`
    - `i`
      - `i`
        - `i`
          - `i`
            - `#text`: And finally dinner.
Errors involving fragile syntax constructs

  There are syntax constructs that, for historical reasons, are relatively fragile. To help reduce the number of users who accidentally run into such problems, they are made non-conforming.

  For example, the parsing of certain named character references in attributes happens even with the closing semicolon being omitted. It is safe to include an ampersand followed by letters that do not form a named character reference, but if the letters are changed to a string that does form a named character reference, they will be interpreted as that character instead.

  In this fragment, the attribute's value is "`?bill&ted`":

      <a href="?bill&ted">Bill and Ted</a>

  In the following fragment, however, the attribute's value is actually "`?art©`", not the intended "`?art&copy`", because even without the final semicolon, "`&copy`" is handled the same as "`&copy;`" and thus gets interpreted as "`©`":

      <a href="?art&copy">Art and Copy</a>

  To avoid this problem, all named character references are required to end with a semicolon, and uses of named character references without a semicolon are flagged as errors.

  Thus, the correct way to express the above cases is as follows:

      <a href="?bill&ted">Bill and Ted</a> <!-- &ted is ok, since it's not a named character reference -->

      <a href="?art&amp;copy">Art and Copy</a> <!-- the & has to be escaped, since &copy is a named character reference -->

Errors involving known interoperability problems in legacy user agents

  Certain syntax constructs are known to cause especially subtle or serious problems in legacy user agents, and are therefore marked as non-conforming to help authors avoid them.

  For example, this is why the U+0060 GRAVE ACCENT character (`) is not allowed in unquoted attributes. In certain legacy user agents, it is sometimes treated as a quote character.

  Another example of this is the DOCTYPE, which is required to trigger no-quirks mode, because the behavior of legacy user agents in quirks mode is often largely undocumented.

Errors that risk exposing authors to security attacks

  Certain restrictions exist purely to avoid known security problems.

  For example, the restriction on using UTF-7 exists purely to avoid authors falling prey to a known cross-site-scripting attack using UTF-7. [UTF7]

Cases where the author's intent is unclear

  Markup where the author's intent is very unclear is often made non-conforming. Correcting these errors early makes later maintenance easier.

  For example, it is unclear whether the author intended the following to be an `h1` heading or an `h2` heading:

      <h1>Contact details</h2>

Cases that are likely to be typos

  When a user makes a simple typo, it is helpful if the error can be caught early, as this can save the author a lot of debugging time. This specification therefore usually considers it an error to use element names, attribute names, and so forth, that do not match the names defined in this specification.

  For example, if the author typed `<capton>` instead of `<caption>`, this would be flagged as an error and the author could correct the typo immediately.

Errors that could interfere with new syntax in the future

  In order to allow the language syntax to be extended in the future, certain otherwise harmless features are disallowed.

  For example, "attributes" in end tags are ignored currently, but they are invalid, in case a future change to the language makes use of that syntax feature without conflicting with already-deployed (and valid!) content.

Some authors find it helpful to be in the practice of always quoting all attributes and always including all optional tags, preferring the consistency derived from such custom over the minor benefits of terseness afforded by making use of the flexibility of the HTML syntax. To aid such authors, conformance checkers can provide modes of operation wherein such conventions are enforced.

#### 1.12.3 Restrictions on content models and on attribute values

This section is non-normative.

Beyond the syntax of the language, this specification also places restrictions on how elements and attributes can be specified. These restrictions are present for similar reasons:

Errors involving content with dubious semantics

  To avoid misuse of elements with defined meanings, content models are defined that restrict how elements can be nested when such nestings would be of dubious value.

  For example, this specification disallows nesting a `section` element inside a `kbd` element, since it is highly unlikely for an author to indicate that an entire section should be keyed in.

Errors that involve a conflict in expressed semantics

  Similarly, to draw the author's attention to mistakes in the use of elements, clear contradictions in the semantics expressed are also considered conformance errors.

  In the fragments below, for example, the semantics are nonsensical: a separator cannot simultaneously be a cell, nor can a radio button be a progress bar.

      <hr role="cell">

      <input type=radio role=progressbar>

  Another example is the restrictions on the content models of the `ul` element, which only allows `li` element children. Lists by definition consist just of zero or more list items, so if a `ul` element contains something other than an `li` element, it's not clear what was meant.

Cases where the default styles are likely to lead to confusion

  Certain elements have default styles or behaviors that make certain combinations likely to lead to confusion. Where these have equivalent alternatives without this problem, the confusing combinations are disallowed.

  For example, `div` elements are rendered as block boxes, and `span` elements as inline boxes. Putting a block box in an inline box is unnecessarily confusing; since either nesting just `div` elements, or nesting just `span` elements, or nesting `span` elements inside `div` elements all serve the same purpose as nesting a `div` element in a `span` element, but only the latter involves a block box in an inline box, the latter combination is disallowed.

  Another example would be the way interactive content cannot be nested. For example, a `button` element cannot contain a `textarea` element. This is because the default behavior of such nesting interactive elements would be highly confusing to users. Instead of nesting these elements, they can be placed side by side.

Errors that indicate a likely misunderstanding of the specification

  Sometimes, something is disallowed because allowing it would likely cause author confusion.

  For example, setting the `disabled` attribute to the value "`false`" is disallowed, because despite the appearance of meaning that the element is enabled, it in fact means that the element is disabled (what matters for implementations is the presence of the attribute, not its value).

Errors involving limits that have been imposed merely to simplify the language

  Some conformance errors simplify the language that authors need to learn.

  For example, the `area` element's `shape` attribute, despite accepting both `circ` and `circle` values in practice as synonyms, disallows the use of the `circ` value, so as to simplify tutorials and other learning aids. There would be no benefit to allowing both, but it would cause extra confusion when teaching the language.

Errors that involve peculiarities of the parser

  Certain elements are parsed in somewhat eccentric ways (typically for historical reasons), and their content model restrictions are intended to avoid exposing the author to these issues.

  For example, a `form` element isn't allowed inside phrasing content, because when parsed as HTML, a `form` element's start tag will imply a `p` element's end tag. Thus, the following markup results in two paragraphs, not one:

      <p>Welcome. <form><label>Name:</label> <input></form>

  It is parsed exactly like the following:

      <p>Welcome. </p><form><label>Name:</label> <input></form>

Errors that would likely result in scripts failing in hard-to-debug ways

  Some errors are intended to help prevent script problems that would be hard to debug.

  This is why, for instance, it is non-conforming to have two `id` attributes with the same value. Duplicate IDs lead to the wrong element being selected, with sometimes disastrous effects whose cause is hard to determine.

Errors that waste authoring time

  Some constructs are disallowed because historically they have been the cause of a lot of wasted authoring time, and by encouraging authors to avoid making them, authors can save time in future efforts.

  For example, a `script` element's `src` attribute causes the element's contents to be ignored. However, this isn't obvious, especially if the element's contents appear to be executable script — which can lead to authors spending a lot of time trying to debug the inline script without realizing that it is not executing. To reduce this problem, this specification makes it non-conforming to have executable script in a `script` element when the `src` attribute is present. This means that authors who are validating their documents are less likely to waste time with this kind of mistake.

Errors that involve areas that affect authors migrating to and from XHTML

  Some authors like to write files that can be interpreted as both XML and HTML with similar results. Though this practice is discouraged in general due to the myriad of subtle complications involved (especially when involving scripting, styling, or any kind of automated serialisation), this specification has a few restrictions intended to at least somewhat mitigate the difficulties. This makes it easier for authors to use this as a transitionary step when migrating between HTML and XHTML.

  For example, there are somewhat complicated rules surrounding the `lang` and `xml:lang` attributes intended to keep the two synchronized.

  Another example would be the restrictions on the values of `xmlns` attributes in the HTML serialisation, which are intended to ensure that elements in conforming documents end up in the same namespaces whether processed as HTML or XML.

Errors that involve areas reserved for future expansion

  As with the restrictions on the syntax intended to allow for new syntax in future revisions of the language, some restrictions on the content models of elements and values of attributes are intended to allow for future expansion of the HTML vocabulary.

  For example, limiting the values of the `target` attribute that start with an U+005F LOW LINE character (_) to only specific predefined values allows new predefined values to be introduced at a future time without conflicting with author-defined values.

Errors that indicate a mis-use of other specifications

  Certain restrictions are intended to support the restrictions made by other specifications.

  For example, requiring that attributes that take media query lists use only valid media query lists reinforces the importance of following the conformance rules of that specification.

### 1.13 Suggested reading

This section is non-normative.

The following documents might be of interest to readers of this specification.

Character Model for the World Wide Web 1.0: Fundamentals [CHARMOD]

  > This Architectural Specification provides authors of specifications, software developers, and content developers with a common reference for interoperable text manipulation on the World Wide Web, building on the Universal Character Set, defined jointly by the Unicode Standard and ISO/IEC 10646. Topics addressed include use of the terms 'character', 'encoding' and 'string', a reference processing model, choice and identification of character encodings, character escaping, and string indexing.

Unicode Security Considerations [UTR36]

  > Because Unicode contains such a large number of characters and incorporates the varied writing systems of the world, incorrect usage can expose programs or systems to possible security attacks. This is especially important as more and more products are internationalized. This document describes some of the security considerations that programmers, system analysts, standards developers, and users should take into account, and provides specific recommendations to reduce the risk of problems.

Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0 [WCAG]

  > Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0 covers a wide range of recommendations for making Web content more accessible. Following these guidelines will make content accessible to a wider range of people with disabilities, including blindness and low vision, deafness and hearing loss, learning disabilities, cognitive limitations, limited movement, speech disabilities, photosensitivity and combinations of these. Following these guidelines will also often make your Web content more usable to users in general.

Authoring Tool Accessibility Guidelines (ATAG) 2.0 [ATAG]

  > This specification provides guidelines for designing Web content authoring tools that are more accessible for people with disabilities. An authoring tool that conforms to these guidelines will promote accessibility by providing an accessible user interface to authors with disabilities as well as by enabling, supporting, and promoting the production of accessible Web content by all authors.

User Agent Accessibility Guidelines (UAAG) 2.0 [UAAG]

  > This document provides guidelines for designing user agents that lower barriers to Web accessibility for people with disabilities. User agents include browsers and other types of software that retrieve and render Web content. A user agent that conforms to these guidelines will promote accessibility through its own user interface and through other internal facilities, including its ability to communicate with other technologies (especially assistive technologies). Furthermore, all users, not just users with disabilities, should find conforming user agents to be more usable.

## 2 Common infrastructure

### 2.1 Terminology

This specification refers to both HTML and XML attributes and IDL attributes, often in the same context. When it is not clear which is being referred to, they are referred to as content attributes for HTML and XML attributes, and IDL attributes for those defined on IDL interfaces. Similarly, the term "properties" is used for both JavaScript object properties and CSS properties. When these are ambiguous they are qualified as object properties and CSS properties respectively.

Generally, when the specification states that a feature applies to the HTML syntax or the XHTML syntax, it also includes the other. When a feature specifically only applies to one of the two languages, it is called out by explicitly stating that it does not apply to the other format, as in "for HTML, ... (this does not apply to XHTML)".

This specification uses the term document to refer to any use of HTML, ranging from short static documents to long essays or reports with rich multimedia, as well as to fully-fledged interactive applications. The term is used to refer both to `Document` objects and their descendant DOM trees, and to serialised byte streams using the HTML syntax or XHTML syntax, depending on context.

In the context of the DOM structures, the terms HTML document and XML document are used as defined in the DOM specification, and refer specifically to two different modes that `Document` objects can find themselves in. [DOM] (Such uses are always hyperlinked to their definition.)

In the context of byte streams, the term HTML document refers to resources labeled as `text/html`, and the term XML document refers to resources labeled with an XML MIME type.

The term XHTML document is used to refer to both `Document`s in the XML document mode that contains element nodes in the HTML namespace, and byte streams labeled with an XML MIME type that contain elements from the HTML namespace, depending on context.

For simplicity, terms such as shown, displayed, and visible might sometimes be used when referring to the way a document is rendered to the user. These terms are not meant to imply a visual medium; they must be considered to apply to other media in equivalent ways.

When an algorithm B says to return to another algorithm A, it implies that A called B. Upon returning to A, the implementation must continue from where it left off in calling B.

The term "transparent black" refers to the colour with red, green, blue, and alpha channels all set to zero.

#### 2.1.1 Resources

The specification uses the term supported when referring to whether a user agent has an implementation capable of decoding the semantics of an external resource. A format or type is said to be supported if the implementation can process an external resource of that format or type without critical aspects of the resource being ignored. Whether a specific resource is supported can depend on what features of the resource's format are in use.

For example, a PNG image would be considered to be in a supported format if its pixel data could be decoded and rendered, even if, unbeknownst to the implementation, the image also contained animation data.

An MPEG-4 video file would not be considered to be in a supported format if the compression format used was not supported, even if the implementation could determine the dimensions of the movie from the file's metadata.

What some specifications, in particular the HTTP specification, refer to as a representation is referred to in this specification as a resource. [HTTP]

The term MIME type is used to refer to what is sometimes called an Internet media type in protocol literature. The term media type in this specification is used to refer to the type of media intended for presentation, as used by the CSS specifications. [RFC2046] [MQ]

A string is a valid MIME type if it matches the `media-type` rule defined in section 3.1.1.1 "Media Type" of RFC 7231. In particular, a valid MIME type may include MIME type parameters. [HTTP]

A string is a valid MIME type with no parameters if it matches the `media-type` rule defined in section 3.1.1.1 "Media Type" of RFC 7231, but does not contain any U+003B SEMICOLON characters (;). In other words, if it consists only of a type and subtype, with no MIME Type parameters. [HTTP]

The term HTML MIME type is used to refer to the MIME type `text/html`.

A resource's critical subresources are those that the resource needs to have available to be correctly processed. Which resources are considered critical or not is defined by the specification that defines the resource's format.

#### 2.1.2 XML

To ease migration from HTML to XHTML, UAs conforming to this specification will place elements in HTML in the `http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml` namespace, at least for the purposes of the DOM and CSS. The term "HTML elements", when used in this specification, refers to any element in that namespace, and thus refers to both HTML and XHTML elements.

Except where otherwise stated, all elements defined or mentioned in this specification are in the HTML namespace ("`http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml`"), and all attributes defined or mentioned in this specification have no namespace.

The term element type is used to refer to the set of elements that have a given local name and namespace. For example, `button` elements are elements with the element type `button`, meaning they have the local name "`button`" and (implicitly as defined above) the HTML namespace.

Attribute names are said to be XML-compatible if they match the `Name` production defined in XML and they contain no U+003A COLON characters (:). [XML]

The term XML MIME type is used to refer to the MIME types `text/xml`, `application/xml`, and any MIME type whose subtype ends with the four characters "`+xml`". [RFC3023]

#### 2.1.3 DOM trees

The root element of a `Document` object is that `Document`'s first element child, if any. If it does not have one then the `Document` has no root element.

The term root element, when not referring to a `Document` object's root element, means the furthest ancestor element node of whatever node is being discussed, or the node itself if it has no ancestors. When the node is a part of the document, then the node's root element is indeed the document's root element; however, if the node is not currently part of the document tree, the root element will be an orphaned node.

When an element's root element is the root element of a `Document` object, it is said to be in a `Document`. An element is said to have been inserted into a document when its root element changes and is now the document's root element. Analogously, an element is said to have been removed from a document when its root element changes from being the document's root element to being another element.

A node's home subtree is the subtree rooted at that node's root element. When a node is in a `Document`, its home subtree is that `Document`'s tree.

The term tree order means a pre-order, depth-first traversal of DOM nodes involved (through the `parentNode`/`childNodes` relationship).

When it is stated that some element or attribute is ignored, or treated as some other value, or handled as if it was something else, this refers only to the processing of the node after it is in the DOM. A user agent must not mutate the DOM in such situations.

A content attribute is said to change value only if its new value is different than its previous value; setting an attribute to a value it already has does not change it.

The term empty, when used of an attribute value, `Text` node, or string, means that the length of the text is zero (i.e. not even containing spaces or control characters).

#### 2.1.4 Scripting

The construction "a `Foo` object", where `Foo` is actually an interface, is sometimes used instead of the more accurate "an object implementing the interface `Foo`".

An IDL attribute is said to be getting when its value is being retrieved (e.g. by author script), and is said to be setting when a new value is assigned to it.

If a DOM object is said to be live, then the attributes and methods on that object must operate on the actual underlying data, not a snapshot of the data.

In the contexts of events, the terms fire and dispatch are used as defined in the DOM specification: firing an event means to create and dispatch it, and dispatching an event means to follow the steps that propagate the event through the tree. The term trusted event is used to refer to events whose `isTrusted` attribute is initialised to true. [DOM]

#### 2.1.5 Plugins

The term plugin refers to a user-agent defined set of content handlers used by the user agent that can take part in the user agent's rendering of a `Document` object, but that neither act as child browsing contexts of the `Document` nor introduce any `Node` objects to the `Document`'s DOM.

Typically such content handlers are provided by third parties, though a user agent can also designate built-in content handlers as plugins.

A user agent must not consider the types `text/plain` and `application/octet-stream` as having a registered plugin.

One example of a plugin would be a PDF viewer that is instantiated in a browsing context when the user navigates to a PDF file. This would count as a plugin regardless of whether the party that implemented the PDF viewer component was the same as that which implemented the user agent itself. However, a PDF viewer application that launches separate from the user agent (as opposed to using the same interface) is not a plugin by this definition.

This specification does not define a mechanism for interacting with plugins, as it is expected to be user-agent- and platform-specific. Some UAs might opt to support a plugin mechanism such as the Netscape Plugin API; others might use remote content converters or have built-in support for certain types. Indeed, this specification doesn't require user agents to support plugins at all. [NPAPI]

A plugin can be secured if it honors the semantics of the `sandbox` attribute.

For example, a secured plugin would prevent its contents from creating pop-up windows when the plugin is instantiated inside a sandboxed `iframe`.

Browsers should take extreme care when interacting with external content intended for plugins. When third-party software is run with the same privileges as the user agent itself, vulnerabilities in the third-party software become as dangerous as those in the user agent.

Since different users having differents sets of plugins provides a fingerprinting vector that increases the chances of users being uniquely identified, user agents are encouraged to support the exact same set of plugins for each user.

#### 2.1.6 Character encodings

A character encoding, or just encoding where that is not ambiguous, is a defined way to convert between byte streams and Unicode strings, as defined in the WHATWG Encoding standard. An encoding has an encoding name and one or more encoding labels, referred to as the encoding's name and labels in the Encoding standard. [ENCODING]

An ASCII-compatible character encoding is a single-byte or variable-length encoding in which the bytes 0x09, 0x0A, 0x0C, 0x0D, 0x20 - 0x22, 0x26, 0x27, 0x2C - 0x3F, 0x41 - 0x5A, and 0x61 - 0x7A, ignoring bytes that are the second and later bytes of multibyte sequences, all correspond to single-byte sequences that map to the same Unicode characters as those bytes in Windows-1252. [ENCODING]

This includes such encodings as Shift_JIS, HZ-GB-2312, and variants of ISO-2022, even though it is possible in these encodings for bytes like 0x70 to be part of longer sequences that are unrelated to their interpretation as ASCII. It excludes UTF-16 variants, as well as obsolete legacy encodings such as UTF-7, GSM03.38, and EBCDIC variants.

The term a UTF-16 encoding refers to any variant of UTF-16: UTF-16LE or UTF-16BE, regardless of the presence or absence of a BOM. [ENCODING]

The term code unit is used as defined in the Web IDL specification: a 16 bit unsigned integer, the smallest atomic component of a `DOMString`. (This is a narrower definition than the one used in Unicode, and is not the same as a code point.) [WEBIDL]

The term Unicode code point means a Unicode scalar value where possible, and an isolated surrogate code point when not. When a conformance requirement is defined in terms of characters or Unicode code points, a pair of code units consisting of a high surrogate followed by a low surrogate must be treated as the single code point represented by the surrogate pair, but isolated surrogates must each be treated as the single code point with the value of the surrogate. [UNICODE]

In this specification, the term character, when not qualified as Unicode character, is synonymous with the term Unicode code point.

The term Unicode character is used to mean a Unicode scalar value (i.e. any Unicode code point that is not a surrogate code point). [UNICODE]

The code-unit length of a string is the number of code units in that string.

This complexity results from the historical decision to define the DOM API in terms of 16 bit (UTF-16) code units, rather than in terms of Unicode characters.

### 2.2 Conformance requirements

All diagrams, examples, and notes in this specification are non-normative, as are all sections explicitly marked non-normative. Everything else in this specification is normative.

The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in the normative parts of this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC2119. The key word "OPTIONALLY" in the normative parts of this document is to be interpreted with the same normative meaning as "MAY" and "OPTIONAL". For readability, these words do not appear in all uppercase letters in this specification. [RFC2119]

Requirements phrased in the imperative as part of algorithms (such as "strip any leading space characters" or "return false and abort these steps") are to be interpreted with the meaning of the key word ("must", "should", "may", etc) used in introducing the algorithm.

For example, were the spec to say:

    To eat an orange, the user must:
    1. Peel the orange.
    2. Separate each slice of the orange.
    3. Eat the orange slices.

...it would be equivalent to the following:

    To eat an orange:
    1. The user must peel the orange.
    2. The user must separate each slice of the orange.
    3. The user must eat the orange slices.

Here the key word is "must".

The former (imperative) style is generally preferred in this specification for stylistic reasons.

Conformance requirements phrased as algorithms or specific steps may be implemented in any manner, so long as the end result is equivalent. (In particular, the algorithms defined in this specification are intended to be easy to follow, and not intended to be performant.)

#### 2.2.1 Conformance classes

This specification describes the conformance criteria for user agents (relevant to implementors) and documents (relevant to authors and authoring tool implementors).

Conforming documents are those that comply with all the conformance criteria for documents. For readability, some of these conformance requirements are phrased as conformance requirements on authors; such requirements are implicitly requirements on documents: by definition, all documents are assumed to have had an author. (In some cases, that author may itself be a user agent — such user agents are subject to additional rules, as explained below.)

For example, if a requirement states that "authors must not use the `foobar` element", it would imply that documents are not allowed to contain elements named `foobar`.

There is no implied relationship between document conformance requirements and implementation conformance requirements. User agents are not free to handle non-conformant documents as they please; the processing model described in this specification applies to implementations regardless of the conformity of the input documents.

User agents fall into several (overlapping) categories with different conformance requirements.

Web browsers and other interactive user agents

  Web browsers that support the XHTML syntax must process elements and attributes from the HTML namespace found in XML documents as described in this specification, so that users can interact with them, unless the semantics of those elements have been overridden by other specifications.

  A conforming XHTML processor would, upon finding an XHTML `script` element in an XML document, execute the script contained in that element. However, if the element is found within a transformation expressed in XSLT (assuming the user agent also supports XSLT), then the processor would instead treat the `script` element as an opaque element that forms part of the transform.

  Web browsers that support the HTML syntax must process documents labeled with an HTML MIME type as described in this specification, so that users can interact with them.

  User agents that support scripting must also be conforming implementations of the IDL fragments in this specification, as described in the Web IDL specification. [WEBIDL]

  Unless explicitly stated, specifications that override the semantics of HTML elements do not override the requirements on DOM objects representing those elements. For example, the `script` element in the example above would still implement the `HTMLScriptElement` interface.

Non-interactive presentation user agents

  User agents that process HTML and XHTML documents purely to render non-interactive versions of them must comply to the same conformance criteria as Web browsers, except that they are exempt from requirements regarding user interaction.

  Typical examples of non-interactive presentation user agents are printers (static UAs) and overhead displays (dynamic UAs). It is expected that most static non-interactive presentation user agents will also opt to lack scripting support.

  A non-interactive but dynamic presentation UA would still execute scripts, allowing forms to be dynamically submitted, and so forth. However, since the concept of "focus" is irrelevant when the user cannot interact with the document, the UA would not need to support any of the focus-related DOM APIs.

Visual user agents that support the suggested default rendering

  User agents, whether interactive or not, may be designated (possibly as a user option) as supporting the suggested default rendering defined by this specification.

  This is not required. In particular, even user agents that do implement the suggested default rendering are encouraged to offer settings that override this default to improve the experience for the user, e.g. changing the colour contrast, using different focus styles, or otherwise making the experience more accessible and usable to the user.

  User agents that are designated as supporting the suggested default rendering must, while so designated, implement the rules in the rendering section that that section defines as the behavior that user agents are expected to implement.

User agents with no scripting support

  Implementations that do not support scripting (or which have their scripting features disabled entirely) are exempt from supporting the events and DOM interfaces mentioned in this specification. For the parts of this specification that are defined in terms of an events model or in terms of the DOM, such user agents must still act as if events and the DOM were supported.

  Scripting can form an integral part of an application. Web browsers that do not support scripting, or that have scripting disabled, might be unable to fully convey the author's intent.

Conformance checkers

  Conformance checkers must verify that a document conforms to the applicable conformance criteria described in this specification. Automated conformance checkers are exempt from detecting errors that require interpretation of the author's intent (for example, while a document is non-conforming if the content of a `blockquote` element is not a quote, conformance checkers running without the input of human judgement do not have to check that `blockquote` elements only contain quoted material).

  Conformance checkers must check that the input document conforms when parsed without a browsing context (meaning that no scripts are run, and that the parser's scripting flag is disabled), and should also check that the input document conforms when parsed with a browsing context in which scripts execute, and that the scripts never cause non-conforming states to occur other than transiently during script execution itself. (This is only a "SHOULD" and not a "MUST" requirement because it has been proven to be impossible. [COMPUTABLE])

  The term "HTML validator" can be used to refer to a conformance checker that itself conforms to the applicable requirements of this specification.

  XML DTDs cannot express all the conformance requirements of this specification. Therefore, a validating XML processor and a DTD cannot constitute a conformance checker. Also, since neither of the two authoring formats defined in this specification are applications of SGML, a validating SGML system cannot constitute a conformance checker either.

  To put it another way, there are three types of conformance criteria:

  1. Criteria that can be expressed in a DTD.
  2. Criteria that cannot be expressed by a DTD, but can still be checked by a machine.
  3. Criteria that can only be checked by a human.

  A conformance checker must check for the first two. A simple DTD-based validator only checks for the first class of errors and is therefore not a conforming conformance checker according to this specification.

Data mining tools

  Applications and tools that process HTML and XHTML documents for reasons other than to either render the documents or check them for conformance should act in accordance with the semantics of the documents that they process.

  A tool that generates document outlines but increases the nesting level for each paragraph and does not increase the nesting level for each section would not be conforming.

Authoring tools and markup generators

  Authoring tools and markup generators must generate conforming documents. Conformance criteria that apply to authors also apply to authoring tools, where appropriate.

  Authoring tools are exempt from the strict requirements of using elements only for their specified purpose, but only to the extent that authoring tools are not yet able to determine author intent. However, authoring tools must not automatically misuse elements or encourage their users to do so.

  For example, it is not conforming to use an `address` element for arbitrary contact information; that element can only be used for marking up contact information for the author of the document or section. However, since an authoring tool is likely unable to determine the difference, an authoring tool is exempt from that requirement. This does not mean, though, that authoring tools can use `address` elements for any block of italics text (for instance); it just means that the authoring tool doesn't have to verify that when the user uses a tool for inserting contact information for a section, that the user really is doing that and not inserting something else instead.

  In terms of conformance checking, an editor has to output documents that conform to the same extent that a conformance checker will verify.

  When an authoring tool is used to edit a non-conforming document, it may preserve the conformance errors in sections of the document that were not edited during the editing session (i.e. an editing tool is allowed to round-trip erroneous content). However, an authoring tool must not claim that the output is conformant if errors have been so preserved.

  Authoring tools are expected to come in two broad varieties: tools that work from structure or semantic data, and tools that work on a What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get media-specific editing basis (WYSIWYG).

  The former is the preferred mechanism for tools that author HTML, since the structure in the source information can be used to make informed choices regarding which HTML elements and attributes are most appropriate.

  However, WYSIWYG tools are legitimate. WYSIWYG tools should use elements they know are appropriate, and should not use elements that they do not know to be appropriate. This might in certain extreme cases mean limiting the use of flow elements to just a few elements, like `div`, `b`, `i`, and `span` and making liberal use of the `style` attribute.

  All authoring tools, whether WYSIWYG or not, should make a best effort attempt at enabling users to create well-structured, semantically rich, media-independent content.

User agents may impose implementation-specific limits on otherwise unconstrained inputs, e.g. to prevent denial of service attacks, to guard against running out of memory, or to work around platform-specific limitations.

For compatibility with existing content and prior specifications, this specification describes two authoring formats: one based on XML (referred to as the XHTML syntax), and one using a custom format inspired by SGML (referred to as the HTML syntax). Implementations must support at least one of these two formats, although supporting both is encouraged.

Some conformance requirements are phrased as requirements on elements, attributes, methods or objects. Such requirements fall into two categories: those describing content model restrictions, and those describing implementation behavior. Those in the former category are requirements on documents and authoring tools. Those in the second category are requirements on user agents. Similarly, some conformance requirements are phrased as requirements on authors; such requirements are to be interpreted as conformance requirements on the documents that authors produce. (In other words, this specification does not distinguish between conformance criteria on authors and conformance criteria on documents.)

#### 2.2.2 Dependencies

This specification relies on several other underlying specifications.

Unicode and Encoding

  The Unicode character set is used to represent textual data, and the WHATWG Encoding standard defines requirements around character encodings. [UNICODE]

  This specification introduces terminology based on the terms defined in those specifications, as described earlier.

  The following terms are used as defined in the WHATWG Encoding standard: [ENCODING]

  - Getting an encoding
  - The encoder and decoder algorithms for various encodings, including the UTF-8 encoder and UTF-8 decoder
  - The generic decode algorithm which takes a byte stream and an encoding and returns a character stream
  - The UTF-8 decode algorithm which takes a byte stream and returns a character stream, additionally stripping one leading UTF-8 Byte Order Mark (BOM), if any

  The UTF-8 decoder is distinct from the UTF-8 decode algorithm. The latter first strips a Byte Order Mark (BOM), if any, and then invokes the former.

  For readability, character encodings are sometimes referenced in this specification with a case that differs from the canonical case given in the WHATWG Encoding standard. (For example, "UTF-16LE" instead of "utf-16le".)

XML and related specifications

  Implementations that support the XHTML syntax must support some version of XML, as well as its corresponding namespaces specification, because that syntax uses an XML serialisation with namespaces. [XML] [XMLNS]

  The attribute with the tag name `xml:space` in the XML namespace is defined by the XML specification. [XML]

  This specification also references the `<?xml-stylesheet?>` processing instruction, defined in the Associating Style Sheets with XML documents specification. [XMLSSPI]

  This specification also non-normatively mentions the `XSLTProcessor` interface and its `transformToFragment()` and `transformToDocument()` methods.

URLs

  The following terms are defined in the WHATWG URL standard: [URL]

  - URL
  - Absolute URL
  - Relative URL
  - Relative schemes
  - The URL parser
  - Parsed URL
  - The scheme component of a parsed URL
  - The scheme data component of a parsed URL
  - The username component of a parsed URL
  - The password component of a parsed URL
  - The host component of a parsed URL
  - The port component of a parsed URL
  - The path component of a parsed URL
  - The query component of a parsed URL
  - The fragment component of a parsed URL
  - Parse errors from the URL parser
  - The URL serialiser
  - Default encode set
  - Percent encode
  - UTF-8 percent encode
  - Percent decode
  - Decoder error
  - The domain to ASCII algorithm
  - The domain to Unicode algorithm
  - `URLUtils` interface
  - `URLUtilsReadOnly` interface
  - `href` IDL attribute
  - `protocol` IDL attribute
  - The get the base hook for `URLUtils`
  - The update steps hook for `URLUtils`
  - The set the input algorithm for `URLUtils`
  - The query encoding of an `URLUtils` object
  - The input of an `URLUtils` object
  - The url of an `URLUtils` object

  A number of schemes and protocols are referenced by this specification also:

  - The `about:` scheme [ABOUT]
  - The `blob:` scheme [FILEAPI]
  - The `data:` scheme [RFC2397]
  - The `http:` scheme [HTTP]
  - The `https:` scheme [HTTP]
  - The `mailto:` scheme [MAILTO]
  - The `sms:` scheme [SMS]
  - The `urn:` scheme [URN]
HTTP and related specifications

  The following terms are defined in the HTTP specifications: [HTTP]

  - `Accept` header
  - `Accept-Language` header
  - `Cache-Control` header
  - `Content-Disposition` header
  - `Content-Language` header
  - `Content-Length` header
  - `Host` header
  - `Last-Modified` header
  - `Referer` header

  The following term is defined in the Web Origin specification: [ORIGIN]

  - `Origin` header

  The following terms are defined in the Cookie specification: [COOKIES]

  - cookie-string
  - receives a set-cookie-string
  - `Cookie` header

  The following term is defined in the Web Linking specification: [WEBLINK]

  - `Link` header
Fetch

  The following terms are defined in the WHATWG Fetch specification: [FETCH]

  - cross-origin request
  - cross-origin request status
  - custom request headers
  - simple cross-origin request
  - redirect steps
  - omit credentials flag
  - resource sharing check

  This specification does not yet use the "fetch" algorithm from the WHATWG Fetch specification. It will be updated to do so in due course. Some of the terms mentioned above are obsolete; this will be fixed when the spec is updated to use the new algorithm.

Web IDL

  The IDL fragments in this specification must be interpreted as required for conforming IDL fragments, as described in the Web IDL specification. [WEBIDL]

  The following terms are defined in the Web IDL specification:

  - Supported property indices
  - Determine the value of an indexed property
  - Support named properties
  - Supported property names
  - Unenumerable
  - Determine the value of a named property
  - Platform array objects
  - Read only (when applied to arrays)
  - Callback this value
  - Convert a `DOMString` to a sequence of Unicode characters

  The Web IDL specification also defines the following types that are used in Web IDL fragments in this specification:

  - `Array`
  - `boolean`
  - `Boolean`
  - `Date`
  - `DOMString`
  - `double`
  - `Error`
  - `Function`
  - `long`
  - `Map`
  - `Number`
  - `Object`
  - `RegExp`
  - `Set`
  - `String`
  - `unrestricted double`
  - `unsigned long`

  When this specification requires a user agent to create a `Date` object representing a particular time (which could be the special value Not-a-Number), the milliseconds component of that time, if any, must be truncated to an integer, and the time value of the newly created `Date` object must represent the resulting truncated time.

  For instance, given the time 23045 millionths of a second after 01:00 UTC on January 1st 2000, i.e. the time 2000-01-01T00:00:00.023045Z, then the `Date` object created representing that time would represent the same time as that created representing the time 2000-01-01T00:00:00.023Z, 45 millionths earlier. If the given time is NaN, then the result is a `Date` object that represents a time value NaN (indicating that the object does not represent a specific instant of time).

JavaScript

  Some parts of the language described by this specification only support JavaScript as the underlying scripting language. [ECMA262]

  The term "JavaScript" is used to refer to ECMA262, rather than the official term ECMAScript, since the term JavaScript is more widely known. Similarly, the MIME type used to refer to JavaScript in this specification is `text/javascript`, since that is the most commonly used type, despite it being an officially obsoleted type according to RFC 4329. [RFC4329]

  The term JavaScript global environment refers to the global environment concept defined in the ECMAScript specification.

  The ECMAScript `SyntaxError` and `TypeError` exceptions are also defined in the ECMAScript specification. [ECMA262]

  The ArrayBuffer and related object types and underlying concepts from the ECMAScript Specification are used for several features in this specification. [ECMA262]

  The following helper IDL is used for referring to `ArrayBuffer`-related types:

      typedef (Int8Array or Uint8Array or Uint8ClampedArray or
               Int16Array or Uint16Array or
               Int32Array or Uint32Array or
               Float32Array or Float64Array or
               DataView) ArrayBufferView;

  In particular, the `Uint8ClampedArray` type is used by some 2D canvas APIs, and the `WebSocket` API uses `ArrayBuffer` objects for handling binary frames.

DOM

  The Document Object Model (DOM) is a representation — a model — of a document and its content. The DOM is not just an API; the conformance criteria of HTML implementations are defined, in this specification, in terms of operations on the DOM. [DOM]

  Implementations must support DOM and the events defined in DOM Events, because this specification is defined in terms of the DOM, and some of the features are defined as extensions to the DOM interfaces. [DOM] [DOMEVENTS]

  In particular, the following features are defined in the DOM specification: [DOM]

  - `Attr` interface
  - `Comment` interface
  - `DOMImplementation` interface
  - `Document` interface
  - `XMLDocument` interface
  - `DocumentFragment` interface
  - `DocumentType` interface
  - `DOMException` interface
  - `ChildNode` interface
  - `Element` interface
  - `Node` interface
  - `NodeList` interface
  - `ProcessingInstruction` interface
  - `Text` interface
  - node document concept
  - `HTMLCollection` interface
  - `HTMLCollection.length` attribute
  - `HTMLCollection.item()` method
  - `HTMLCollection.namedItem()` method
  - The terms collections and represented by the collection
  - `DOMTokenList` interface
  - `DOMSettableTokenList` interface
  - `DOMSettableTokenList.value` attribute
  - `createDocument()` method
  - `createHTMLDocument()` method
  - `createElement()` method
  - `createElementNS()` method
  - `getElementById()` method
  - `getElementsByClassName()` method
  - `insertBefore()` method
  - `childNodes` attribute
  - `localName` attribute
  - `parentNode` attribute
  - `namespaceURI` attribute
  - `tagName` attribute
  - `id` attribute
  - `textContent` attribute
  - The insert, append, remove, replace, and adopt algorithms for nodes
  - The nodes are inserted and nodes are removed concepts
  - An element's adopting steps
  - The attribute list concept.
  - The data of a text node.
  - `Event` interface
  - `EventTarget` interface
  - `EventInit` dictionary type
  - `target` attribute
  - `currentTarget` attribute
  - `isTrusted` attribute
  - `initEvent()` method
  - `addEventListener()` method
  - The type of an event
  - The concept of an event listener and the event listeners associated with an `EventTarget`
  - The concept of a target override
  - The concept of a regular event parent and a cross-boundary event parent
  - The encoding (herein the character encoding) and content type of a `Document`
  - The distinction between XML documents and HTML documents
  - The terms quirks mode, limited-quirks mode, and no-quirks mode
  - The algorithm to clone a `Node`, and the concept of cloning steps used by that algorithm
  - The concept of base URL change steps and the definition of what happens when an element is affected by a base URL change
  - The concept of an element's unique identifier (ID)
  - The concept of a DOM range, and the terms start, end, and boundary point as applied to ranges.
  - `MutationObserver` interface
  - Promise interface
  - The resolver concept
  - The fulfill and reject algorithms

  The term throw in this specification is used as defined in the DOM specification. The following `DOMException` types are defined in the DOM specification: [DOM]

  1. `IndexSizeError`
  2. `HierarchyRequestError`
  3. `WrongDocumentError`
  4. `InvalidCharacterError`
  5. `NoModificationAllowedError`
  6. `NotFoundError`
  7. `NotSupportedError`
  8. `InvalidStateError`
  9. `SyntaxError`
  10. `InvalidModificationError`
  11. `NamespaceError`
  12. `InvalidAccessError`
  13. `SecurityError`
  14. `NetworkError`
  15. `AbortError`
  16. `URLMismatchError`
  17. `QuotaExceededError`
  18. `TimeoutError`
  19. `InvalidNodeTypeError`
  20. `DataCloneError`

  For example, to throw a `TimeoutError` exception, a user agent would construct a `DOMException` object whose type was the string "`TimeoutError`" (and whose code was the number 23, for legacy reasons) and actually throw that object as an exception.

  The following features are defined in the DOM Events specification: [DOMEVENTS]

  - `MouseEvent` interface
  - The `MouseEvent` interface's `relatedTarget` attribute
  - `MouseEventInit` dictionary type
  - The `FocusEvent` interface
  - The `FocusEvent` interface's `relatedTarget` attribute
  - The `UIEvent` interface
  - The `UIEvent` interface's `view` attribute
  - The `UIEvent` interface's `detail` attribute
  - `click` event
  - `dblclick` event
  - `mousedown` event
  - `mouseenter` event
  - `mouseleave` event
  - `mousemove` event
  - `mouseout` event
  - `mouseover` event
  - `mouseup` event
  - `mousewheel` event
  - `keydown` event
  - `keyup` event
  - `keypress` event

  The following features are defined in the Touch Events specification: [TOUCH]

  - `Touch` interface
  - Touch point concept

  This specification sometimes uses the term name to refer to the event's type; as in, "an event named `click`" or "if the event name is `keypress`". The terms "name" and "type" for events are synonymous.

  The following features are defined in the DOM Parsing and Serialization specification: [DOMPARSING]

  - `DOMParser`
  - `innerHTML`
  - `outerHTML`

  The `Selection` interface is defined in the HTML Editing APIs specification. [EDITING]

  User agents are encouraged to implement the features described in the HTML Editing APIs specification. [EDITING]

  The following parts of the Fullscreen specification are referenced from this specification, in part to define the rendering of `dialog` elements, and also to define how the Fullscreen API interacts with the sandboxing features in HTML: [FULLSCREEN]

  - The top layer concept
  - `requestFullscreen()`
  - The fullscreen enabled flag
  - The fully exit fullscreen algorithm
File API

  This specification uses the following features defined in the File API specification: [FILEAPI]

  - `Blob` interface
  - `File` interface
  - `FileList` interface
  - `Blob.close()`
  - `Blob.type`
  - The concept of read errors
Media Providers

  This specification references the following interfaces:

  - `MediaStream` [MEDIASTREAM]
  - `MediaSource` [MEDIASOURCE]
XMLHttpRequest

  This specification references the XMLHttpRequest specification to describe how the two specifications interact and to use its `ProgressEvent` features. The following features and terms are defined in the XMLHttpRequest specification: [XHR]

  - `XMLHttpRequest` interface
  - `XMLHttpRequest.responseXML` attribute
  - `ProgressEvent` interface
  - `ProgressEvent.lengthComputable` attribute
  - `ProgressEvent.loaded` attribute
  - `ProgressEvent.total` attribute
  - Fire a progress event named e
Media Queries

  Implementations must support the Media Queries language. [MQ]

CSS modules

  While support for CSS as a whole is not required of implementations of this specification (though it is encouraged, at least for Web browsers), some features are defined in terms of specific CSS requirements.

  In particular, some features require that a string be parsed as a CSS <color> value. When parsing a CSS value, user agents are required by the CSS specifications to apply some error handling rules. These apply to this specification also. [CSSCOLOR] [CSS]

  For example, user agents are required to close all open constructs upon finding the end of a style sheet unexpectedly. Thus, when parsing the string "`rgb(0,0,0`" (with a missing close-parenthesis) for a colour value, the close parenthesis is implied by this error handling rule, and a value is obtained (the colour 'black'). However, the similar construct "`rgb(0,0,`" (with both a missing parenthesis and a missing "blue" value) cannot be parsed, as closing the open construct does not result in a viable value.

  The term CSS element reference identifier is used as defined in the CSS Image Values and Replaced Content specification to define the API that declares identifiers for use with the CSS 'element()' function. [CSSIMAGES]

  Similarly, the term provides a paint source is used as defined in the CSS Image Values and Replaced Content specification to define the interaction of certain HTML elements with the CSS 'element()' function. [CSSIMAGES]

  The term default object size is also defined in the CSS Image Values and Replaced Content specification. [CSSIMAGES]

  Implementations that support scripting must support the CSS Object Model. The following features and terms are defined in the CSSOM specifications: [CSSOM] [CSSOMVIEW]

  - `Screen` interface
  - `LinkStyle` interface
  - `CSSStyleDeclaration` interface
  - `cssText` attribute of `CSSStyleDeclaration`
  - `StyleSheet` interface
  - The terms create a CSS style sheet, remove a CSS style sheet, and associated CSS style sheet
  - CSS style sheets and their properties: type, location, parent CSS style sheet, owner node, owner CSS rule, media, title, alternate flag, disabled flag, CSS rules, origin-clean flag
  - Alternative style sheet sets and the preferred style sheet set
  - Serialising a CSS value
  - Scroll an element into view
  - Scroll to the beginning of the document
  - The `resize` event
  - The `scroll` event
  - The features argument of `window.open`

  The term environment encoding is defined in the CSS Syntax specifications. [CSSSYNTAX]

  The term CSS styling attribute is defined in the CSS Style Attributes specification. [CSSATTR]

  The `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's use of fonts depends on the features described in the CSS Fonts and Font Loading specifications, including in particular `FontFace` objects and the font source concept. [CSSFONTS] [CSSFONTLOAD]

SVG

  The following interface is defined in the SVG specification: [SVG]

  - `SVGMatrix` interface
WebGL

  The following interface is defined in the WebGL specification: [WEBGL]

  - `WebGLRenderingContext` interface
WebVTT

  Implementations may support WebVTT as a text track format for subtitles, captions, chapter titles, metadata, etc, for media resources. [WEBVTT]

  The following terms, used in this specification, are defined in the WebVTT specification:

  - WebVTT file
  - WebVTT file using cue text
  - WebVTT file using chapter title text
  - WebVTT file using only nested cues
  - WebVTT parser
  - The rules for updating the display of WebVTT text tracks
  - The rules for interpreting WebVTT cue text
  - The WebVTT text track cue writing direction
  - `VTTCue` interface
The WebSocket protocol

  The following terms are defined in the WebSocket protocol specification: [WSP]

  - establish a WebSocket connection
  - the WebSocket connection is established
  - validate the server's response
  - extensions in use
  - subprotocol in use
  - headers to send appropriate cookies
  - cookies set during the server's opening handshake
  - a WebSocket message has been received
  - send a WebSocket Message
  - fail the WebSocket connection
  - close the WebSocket connection
  - start the WebSocket closing handshake
  - the WebSocket closing handshake is started
  - the WebSocket connection is closed (possibly cleanly)
  - the WebSocket connection close code
  - the WebSocket connection close reason
  - `Sec-WebSocket-Protocol` field
ARIA

  The terms strong native semantics is used as defined in the ARIA specification. The term default implicit ARIA semantics has the same meaning as the term implicit WAI-ARIA semantics as used in the ARIA specification. [ARIA]

  The `role` attribute is defined in the ARIA specification, as are the following roles: [ARIA]

  - `alert`
  - `alertdialog`
  - `application`
  - `article`
  - `banner`
  - `button`
  - `checkbox`
  - `columnheader`
  - `combobox`
  - `complementary`
  - `contentinfo`
  - `dialog`
  - `directory`
  - `document`
  - `grid`
  - `gridcell`
  - `group`
  - `heading`
  - `img`
  - `link`
  - `list`
  - `listbox`
  - `listitem`
  - `log`
  - `main`
  - `marquee`
  - `menu`
  - `menubar`
  - `menuitem`
  - `menuitemcheckbox`
  - `menuitemradio`
  - `navigation`
  - `note`
  - `option`
  - `presentation`
  - `progressbar`
  - `radio`
  - `region`
  - `row`
  - `rowgroup`
  - `rowheader`
  - `search`
  - `separator`
  - `slider`
  - `spinbutton`
  - `status`
  - `tab`
  - `tablist`
  - `textbox`
  - `toolbar`
  - `tree`
  - `treeitem`

  In addition, the following `aria-*` content attributes are defined in the ARIA specification: [ARIA]

  - `aria-checked`
  - `aria-describedby`
  - `aria-disabled`
  - `aria-expanded`
  - `aria-hidden`
  - `aria-invalid`
  - `aria-label`
  - `aria-level`
  - `aria-multiline`
  - `aria-multiselectable`
  - `aria-owns`
  - `aria-readonly`
  - `aria-required`
  - `aria-selected`
  - `aria-sort`
  - `aria-valuemax`
  - `aria-valuemin`
  - `aria-valuenow`

This specification does not require support of any particular network protocol, style sheet language, scripting language, or any of the DOM specifications beyond those required in the list above. However, the language described by this specification is biased towards CSS as the styling language, JavaScript as the scripting language, and HTTP as the network protocol, and several features assume that those languages and protocols are in use.

A user agent that implements the HTTP protocol must implement the Web Origin Concept specification and the HTTP State Management Mechanism specification (Cookies) as well. [HTTP] [ORIGIN] [COOKIES]

This specification might have certain additional requirements on character encodings, image formats, audio formats, and video formats in the respective sections.

#### 2.2.3 Extensibility

Vendor-specific proprietary user agent extensions to this specification are strongly discouraged. Documents must not use such extensions, as doing so reduces interoperability and fragments the user base, allowing only users of specific user agents to access the content in question.

If such extensions are nonetheless needed, e.g. for experimental purposes, then vendors are strongly urged to use one of the following extension mechanisms:

- For markup-level features that can be limited to the XML serialisation and need not be supported in the HTML serialisation, vendors should use the namespace mechanism to define custom namespaces in which the non-standard elements and attributes are supported.

- For markup-level features that are intended for use with the HTML syntax, extensions should be limited to new attributes of the form "`x-vendor-feature`", where vendor is a short string that identifies the vendor responsible for the extension, and feature is the name of the feature. New element names should not be created. Using attributes for such extensions exclusively allows extensions from multiple vendors to co-exist on the same element, which would not be possible with elements. Using the "`x-vendor-feature`" form allows extensions to be made without risk of conflicting with future additions to the specification.

  For instance, a browser named "FerretBrowser" could use "ferret" as a vendor prefix, while a browser named "Mellblom Browser" could use "mb". If both of these browsers invented extensions that turned elements into scratch-and-sniff areas, an author experimenting with these features could write:

      <p>This smells of lemons!
      <span x-ferret-smellovision x-ferret-smellcode="LEM01"
            x-mb-outputsmell x-mb-smell="lemon juice"></span></p>

Attribute names beginning with the two characters "`x-`" are reserved for user agent use and are guaranteed to never be formally added to the HTML language. For flexibility, attributes names containing underscores (the U+005F LOW LINE character) are also reserved for experimental purposes and are guaranteed to never be formally added to the HTML language.

Pages that use such attributes are by definition non-conforming.

For DOM extensions, e.g. new methods and IDL attributes, the new members should be prefixed by vendor-specific strings to prevent clashes with future versions of this specification.

For events, experimental event types should be prefixed with vendor-specific strings.

For example, if a user agent called "Pleasold" were to add an event to indicate when the user is going up in an elevator, it could use the prefix "`pleasold`" and thus name the event "`pleasoldgoingup`", possibly with an event handler attribute named "`onpleasoldgoingup`".

All extensions must be defined so that the use of extensions neither contradicts nor causes the non-conformance of functionality defined in the specification.

For example, while strongly discouraged from doing so, an implementation "Foo Browser" could add a new IDL attribute "`fooTypeTime`" to a control's DOM interface that returned the time it took the user to select the current value of a control (say). On the other hand, defining a new control that appears in a form's `elements` array would be in violation of the above requirement, as it would violate the definition of `elements` given in this specification.

When adding new reflecting IDL attributes corresponding to content attributes of the form "`x-vendor-feature`", the IDL attribute should be named "`vendorFeature`" (i.e. the "`x`" is dropped from the IDL attribute's name).

When vendor-neutral extensions to this specification are needed, either this specification can be updated accordingly, or an extension specification can be written that overrides the requirements in this specification. When someone applying this specification to their activities decides that they will recognise the requirements of such an extension specification, it becomes an applicable specification for the purposes of conformance requirements in this specification.

Someone could write a specification that defines any arbitrary byte stream as conforming, and then claim that their random junk is conforming. However, that does not mean that their random junk actually is conforming for everyone's purposes: if someone else decides that that specification does not apply to their work, then they can quite legitimately say that the aforementioned random junk is just that, junk, and not conforming at all. As far as conformance goes, what matters in a particular community is what that community agrees is applicable.

User agents must treat elements and attributes that they do not understand as semantically neutral; leaving them in the DOM (for DOM processors), and styling them according to CSS (for CSS processors), but not inferring any meaning from them.

When support for a feature is disabled (e.g. as an emergency measure to mitigate a security problem, or to aid in development, or for performance reasons), user agents must act as if they had no support for the feature whatsoever, and as if the feature was not mentioned in this specification. For example, if a particular feature is accessed via an attribute in a Web IDL interface, the attribute itself would be omitted from the objects that implement that interface — leaving the attribute on the object but making it return null or throw an exception is insufficient.

#### 2.2.4 Interactions with XPath and XSLT

Implementations of XPath 1.0 that operate on HTML documents parsed or created in the manners described in this specification (e.g. as part of the `document.evaluate()` API) must act as if the following edit was applied to the XPath 1.0 specification.

First, remove this paragraph:

> A QName in the node test is expanded into an expanded-name using the namespace declarations from the expression context. This is the same way expansion is done for element type names in start and end-tags except that the default namespace declared with `xmlns` is not used: if the QName does not have a prefix, then the namespace URI is null (this is the same way attribute names are expanded). It is an error if the QName has a prefix for which there is no namespace declaration in the expression context.

Then, insert in its place the following:

> A QName in the node test is expanded into an expanded-name using the namespace declarations from the expression context. If the QName has a prefix, then there must be a namespace declaration for this prefix in the expression context, and the corresponding namespace URI is the one that is associated with this prefix. It is an error if the QName has a prefix for which there is no namespace declaration in the expression context.

> If the QName has no prefix and the principal node type of the axis is element, then the default element namespace is used. Otherwise if the QName has no prefix, the namespace URI is null. The default element namespace is a member of the context for the XPath expression. The value of the default element namespace when executing an XPath expression through the DOM3 XPath API is determined in the following way:

> 1. If the context node is from an HTML DOM, the default element namespace is "http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml".
> 2. Otherwise, the default element namespace URI is null.

> This is equivalent to adding the default element namespace feature of XPath 2.0 to XPath 1.0, and using the HTML namespace as the default element namespace for HTML documents. It is motivated by the desire to have implementations be compatible with legacy HTML content while still supporting the changes that this specification introduces to HTML regarding the namespace used for HTML elements, and by the desire to use XPath 1.0 rather than XPath 2.0.

This change is a willful violation of the XPath 1.0 specification, motivated by desire to have implementations be compatible with legacy content while still supporting the changes that this specification introduces to HTML regarding which namespace is used for HTML elements. [XPATH10]

XSLT 1.0 processors outputting to a DOM when the output method is "html" (either explicitly or via the defaulting rule in XSLT 1.0) are affected as follows:

If the transformation program outputs an element in no namespace, the processor must, prior to constructing the corresponding DOM element node, change the namespace of the element to the HTML namespace, ASCII-lowercase the element's local name, and ASCII-lowercase the names of any non-namespaced attributes on the element.

This requirement is a willful violation of the XSLT 1.0 specification, required because this specification changes the namespaces and case-sensitivity rules of HTML in a manner that would otherwise be incompatible with DOM-based XSLT transformations. (Processors that serialise the output are unaffected.) [XSLT10]

This specification does not specify precisely how XSLT processing interacts with the HTML parser infrastructure (for example, whether an XSLT processor acts as if it puts any elements into a stack of open elements). However, XSLT processors must stop parsing if they successfully complete, and must set the current document readiness first to "`interactive`" and then to "`complete`" if they are aborted.

This specification does not specify how XSLT interacts with the navigation algorithm, how it fits in with the event loop, nor how error pages are to be handled (e.g. whether XSLT errors are to replace an incremental XSLT output, or are rendered inline, etc).

There are also additional non-normative comments regarding the interaction of XSLT and HTML in the `script` element section, and of XSLT, XPath, and HTML in the `template` element section.

### 2.3 Case-sensitivity and string comparison

Comparing two strings in a case-sensitive manner means comparing them exactly, code point for code point.

Comparing two strings in an ASCII case-insensitive manner means comparing them exactly, code point for code point, except that the characters in the range U+0041 to U+005A (i.e. LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A to LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z) and the corresponding characters in the range U+0061 to U+007A (i.e. LATIN SMALL LETTER A to LATIN SMALL LETTER Z) are considered to also match.

Comparing two strings in a compatibility caseless manner means using the Unicode compatibility caseless match operation to compare the two strings, with no language-specific tailoirings. [UNICODE]

Except where otherwise stated, string comparisons must be performed in a case-sensitive manner.

Converting a string to ASCII uppercase means replacing all characters in the range U+0061 to U+007A (i.e. LATIN SMALL LETTER A to LATIN SMALL LETTER Z) with the corresponding characters in the range U+0041 to U+005A (i.e. LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A to LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z).

Converting a string to ASCII lowercase means replacing all characters in the range U+0041 to U+005A (i.e. LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A to LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z) with the corresponding characters in the range U+0061 to U+007A (i.e. LATIN SMALL LETTER A to LATIN SMALL LETTER Z).

A string pattern is a prefix match for a string s when pattern is not longer than s and truncating s to pattern's length leaves the two strings as matches of each other.

### 2.4 Common microsyntaxes

There are various places in HTML that accept particular data types, such as dates or numbers. This section describes what the conformance criteria for content in those formats is, and how to parse them.

Implementors are strongly urged to carefully examine any third-party libraries they might consider using to implement the parsing of syntaxes described below. For example, date libraries are likely to implement error handling behavior that differs from what is required in this specification, since error-handling behavior is often not defined in specifications that describe date syntaxes similar to those used in this specification, and thus implementations tend to vary greatly in how they handle errors.

#### 2.4.1 Common parser idioms

The space characters, for the purposes of this specification, are U+0020 SPACE, U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab), U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), and U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR).

The White_Space characters are those that have the Unicode property "White_Space" in the Unicode `PropList.txt` data file. [UNICODE]

This should not be confused with the "White_Space" value (abbreviated "WS") of the "Bidi_Class" property in the `Unicode.txt` data file.

The control characters are those whose Unicode "General_Category" property has the value "Cc" in the Unicode `UnicodeData.txt` data file. [UNICODE]

The uppercase ASCII letters are the characters in the range U+0041 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A to U+005A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z.

The lowercase ASCII letters are the characters in the range U+0061 LATIN SMALL LETTER A to U+007A LATIN SMALL LETTER Z.

The ASCII digits are the characters in the range U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0) to U+0039 DIGIT NINE (9).

The alphanumeric ASCII characters are those that are either uppercase ASCII letters, lowercase ASCII letters, or ASCII digits.

The ASCII hex digits are the characters in the ranges U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0) to U+0039 DIGIT NINE (9), U+0041 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A to U+0046 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F, and U+0061 LATIN SMALL LETTER A to U+0066 LATIN SMALL LETTER F.

The uppercase ASCII hex digits are the characters in the ranges U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0) to U+0039 DIGIT NINE (9) and U+0041 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A to U+0046 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F only.

The lowercase ASCII hex digits are the characters in the ranges U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0) to U+0039 DIGIT NINE (9) and U+0061 LATIN SMALL LETTER A to U+0066 LATIN SMALL LETTER F only.

Some of the micro-parsers described below follow the pattern of having an input variable that holds the string being parsed, and having a position variable pointing at the next character to parse in input.

For parsers based on this pattern, a step that requires the user agent to collect a sequence of characters means that the following algorithm must be run, with characters being the set of characters that can be collected:

1. Let input and position be the same variables as those of the same name in the algorithm that invoked these steps.

2. Let result be the empty string.

3. While position doesn't point past the end of input and the character at position is one of the characters, append that character to the end of result and advance position to the next character in input.

4. Return result.

The step skip whitespace means that the user agent must collect a sequence of characters that are space characters. The collected characters are not used.

When a user agent is to strip line breaks from a string, the user agent must remove any U+000A LINE FEED (LF) and U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters from that string.

When a user agent is to strip leading and trailing whitespace from a string, the user agent must remove all space characters that are at the start or end of the string.

When a user agent is to strip and collapse whitespace in a string, it must replace any sequence of one or more consecutive space characters in that string with a single U+0020 SPACE character, and then strip leading and trailing whitespace from that string.

When a user agent has to strictly split a string on a particular delimiter character delimiter, it must use the following algorithm:

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Let tokens be an ordered list of tokens, initially empty.

4. While position is not past the end of input:

   1. Collect a sequence of characters that are not the delimiter character.

   2. Append the string collected in the previous step to tokens.

   3. Advance position to the next character in input.

5. Return tokens.

For the special cases of splitting a string on spaces and on commas, this algorithm does not apply (those algorithms also perform whitespace trimming).

#### 2.4.2 Boolean attributes

A number of attributes are boolean attributes. The presence of a boolean attribute on an element represents the true value, and the absence of the attribute represents the false value.

If the attribute is present, its value must either be the empty string or a value that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the attribute's canonical name, with no leading or trailing whitespace.

The values "true" and "false" are not allowed on boolean attributes. To represent a false value, the attribute has to be omitted altogether.

Here is an example of a checkbox that is checked and disabled. The `checked` and `disabled` attributes are the boolean attributes.

    <label><input type=checkbox checked name=cheese disabled> Cheese</label>

This could be equivalently written as this:

    <label><input type=checkbox checked=checked name=cheese disabled=disabled> Cheese</label>

You can also mix styles; the following is still equivalent:

    <label><input type='checkbox' checked name=cheese disabled=""> Cheese</label>

#### 2.4.3 Keywords and enumerated attributes

Some attributes are defined as taking one of a finite set of keywords. Such attributes are called enumerated attributes. The keywords are each defined to map to a particular state (several keywords might map to the same state, in which case some of the keywords are synonyms of each other; additionally, some of the keywords can be said to be non-conforming, and are only in the specification for historical reasons). In addition, two default states can be given. The first is the invalid value default, the second is the missing value default.

If an enumerated attribute is specified, the attribute's value must be an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the given keywords that are not said to be non-conforming, with no leading or trailing whitespace.

When the attribute is specified, if its value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the given keywords then that keyword's state is the state that the attribute represents. If the attribute value matches none of the given keywords, but the attribute has an invalid value default, then the attribute represents that state. Otherwise, if the attribute value matches none of the keywords but there is a missing value default state defined, then that is the state represented by the attribute. Otherwise, there is no default, and invalid values mean that there is no state represented.

When the attribute is not specified, if there is a missing value default state defined, then that is the state represented by the (missing) attribute. Otherwise, the absence of the attribute means that there is no state represented.

The empty string can be a valid keyword.

#### 2.4.4 Numbers

##### 2.4.4.1 Signed integers

A string is a valid integer if it consists of one or more ASCII digits, optionally prefixed with a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-).

A valid integer without a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-) prefix represents the number that is represented in base ten by that string of digits. A valid integer with a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-) prefix represents the number represented in base ten by the string of digits that follows the U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS, subtracted from zero.

The rules for parsing integers are as given in the following algorithm. When invoked, the steps must be followed in the order given, aborting at the first step that returns a value. This algorithm will return either an integer or an error.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Let sign have the value "positive".

4. Skip whitespace.

5. If position is past the end of input, return an error.

6. If the character indicated by position (the first character) is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-):

   1. Let sign be "negative".
   2. Advance position to the next character.
   3. If position is past the end of input, return an error.

   Otherwise, if the character indicated by position (the first character) is a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+):

   1. Advance position to the next character. (The "`+`" is ignored, but it is not conforming.)
   2. If position is past the end of input, return an error.

7. If the character indicated by position is not an ASCII digit, then return an error.

8. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits, and interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let value be that integer.

9. If sign is "positive", return value, otherwise return the result of subtracting value from zero.

##### 2.4.4.2 Non-negative integers

A string is a valid non-negative integer if it consists of one or more ASCII digits.

A valid non-negative integer represents the number that is represented in base ten by that string of digits.

The rules for parsing non-negative integers are as given in the following algorithm. When invoked, the steps must be followed in the order given, aborting at the first step that returns a value. This algorithm will return either zero, a positive integer, or an error.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let value be the result of parsing input using the rules for parsing integers.

3. If value is an error, return an error.

4. If value is less than zero, return an error.

5. Return value.

##### 2.4.4.3 Floating-point numbers

A string is a valid floating-point number if it consists of:

1. Optionally, a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-).
2. One or both of the following, in the given order:
   1. A series of one or more ASCII digits.
   2. 1. A single U+002E FULL STOP character (.).
      2. A series of one or more ASCII digits.
3. Optionally:
   1. Either a U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E character (e) or a U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E character (E).
   2. Optionally, a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) or U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+).
   3. A series of one or more ASCII digits.

A valid floating-point number represents the number obtained by multiplying the significand by ten raised to the power of the exponent, where the significand is the first number, interpreted as base ten (including the decimal point and the number after the decimal point, if any, and interpreting the significand as a negative number if the whole string starts with a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) and the number is not zero), and where the exponent is the number after the E, if any (interpreted as a negative number if there is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) between the E and the number and the number is not zero, or else ignoring a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) between the E and the number if there is one). If there is no E, then the exponent is treated as zero.

The Infinity and Not-a-Number (NaN) values are not valid floating-point numbers.

The best representation of the number n as a floating-point number is the string obtained from applying the JavaScript operator ToString to n. The JavaScript operator ToString is not uniquely determined. When there are multiple possible strings that could be obtained from the JavaScript operator ToString for a particular value, the user agent must always return the same string for that value (though it may differ from the value used by other user agents).

The rules for parsing floating-point number values are as given in the following algorithm. This algorithm must be aborted at the first step that returns something. This algorithm will return either a number or an error.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Let value have the value 1.

4. Let divisor have the value 1.

5. Let exponent have the value 1.

6. Skip whitespace.

7. If position is past the end of input, return an error.

8. If the character indicated by position is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-):

   1. Change value and divisor to −1.
   2. Advance position to the next character.
   3. If position is past the end of input, return an error.

   Otherwise, if the character indicated by position (the first character) is a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+):

   1. Advance position to the next character. (The "`+`" is ignored, but it is not conforming.)
   2. If position is past the end of input, return an error.

9. If the character indicated by position is a U+002E FULL STOP (.), and that is not the last character in input, and the character after the character indicated by position is an ASCII digit, then set value to zero and jump to the step labeled fraction.

10. If the character indicated by position is not an ASCII digit, then return an error.

11. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits, and interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Multiply value by that integer.

12. If position is past the end of input, jump to the step labeled conversion.

13. Fraction: If the character indicated by position is a U+002E FULL STOP (.), run these substeps:

    1. Advance position to the next character.

    2. If position is past the end of input, or if the character indicated by position is not an ASCII digit, U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E (e), or U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E (E), then jump to the step labeled conversion.

    3. If the character indicated by position is a U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E character (e) or a U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E character (E), skip the remainder of these substeps.

    4. Fraction loop: Multiply divisor by ten.

    5. Add the value of the character indicated by position, interpreted as a base-ten digit (0..9) and divided by divisor, to value.

    6. Advance position to the next character.

    7. If position is past the end of input, then jump to the step labeled conversion.

    8. If the character indicated by position is an ASCII digit, jump back to the step labeled fraction loop in these substeps.

14. If the character indicated by position is a U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E character (e) or a U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E character (E), run these substeps:

    1. Advance position to the next character.

    2. If position is past the end of input, then jump to the step labeled conversion.

    3. If the character indicated by position is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-):

       1. Change exponent to −1.
       2. Advance position to the next character.

       3. If position is past the end of input, then jump to the step labeled conversion.

       Otherwise, if the character indicated by position is a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+):

       1. Advance position to the next character.

       2. If position is past the end of input, then jump to the step labeled conversion.

    4. If the character indicated by position is not an ASCII digit, then jump to the step labeled conversion.

    5. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits, and interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Multiply exponent by that integer.

    6. Multiply value by ten raised to the exponentth power.

15. Conversion: Let S be the set of finite IEEE 754 double-precision floating-point values except −0, but with two special values added: 21024 and −21024.

16. Let rounded-value be the number in S that is closest to value, selecting the number with an even significand if there are two equally close values. (The two special values 21024 and −21024 are considered to have even significands for this purpose.)

17. If rounded-value is 21024 or −21024, return an error.

18. Return rounded-value.

##### 2.4.4.4 Percentages and lengths

The rules for parsing dimension values are as given in the following algorithm. When invoked, the steps must be followed in the order given, aborting at the first step that returns a value. This algorithm will return either a number greater than or equal to 1.0, or an error; if a number is returned, then it is further categorised as either a percentage or a length.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Skip whitespace.

4. If position is past the end of input, return an error.

5. If the character indicated by position is a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+), advance position to the next character.

6. Collect a sequence of characters that are U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0) characters, and discard them.

7. If position is past the end of input, return an error.

8. If the character indicated by position is not one of U+0031 DIGIT ONE (1) to U+0039 DIGIT NINE (9), then return an error.

9. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits, and interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let value be that number.

10. If position is past the end of input, return value as a length.

11. If the character indicated by position is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.):

    1. Advance position to the next character.

    2. If position is past the end of input, or if the character indicated by position is not an ASCII digit, then return value as a length.

    3. Let divisor have the value 1.

    4. Fraction loop: Multiply divisor by ten.

    5. Add the value of the character indicated by position, interpreted as a base-ten digit (0..9) and divided by divisor, to value.

    6. Advance position to the next character.

    7. If position is past the end of input, then return value as a length.

    8. If the character indicated by position is an ASCII digit, return to the step labeled fraction loop in these substeps.

12. If position is past the end of input, return value as a length.

13. If the character indicated by position is a U+0025 PERCENT SIGN character (%), return value as a percentage.

14. Return value as a length.

##### 2.4.4.5 Lists of integers

A valid list of integers is a number of valid integers separated by U+002C COMMA characters, with no other characters (e.g. no space characters). In addition, there might be restrictions on the number of integers that can be given, or on the range of values allowed.

The rules for parsing a list of integers are as follows:

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Let numbers be an initially empty list of integers. This list will be the result of this algorithm.

4. If there is a character in the string input at position position, and it is either a U+0020 SPACE, U+002C COMMA, or U+003B SEMICOLON character, then advance position to the next character in input, or to beyond the end of the string if there are no more characters.

5. If position points to beyond the end of input, return numbers and abort.

6. If the character in the string input at position position is a U+0020 SPACE, U+002C COMMA, or U+003B SEMICOLON character, then return to step 4.

7. Let negated be false.

8. Let value be 0.

9. Let started be false. This variable is set to true when the parser sees a number or a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-).

10. Let got number be false. This variable is set to true when the parser sees a number.

11. Let finished be false. This variable is set to true to switch parser into a mode where it ignores characters until the next separator.

12. Let bogus be false.

13. Parser: If the character in the string input at position position is:

    A U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character

      Follow these substeps:

      1. If got number is true, let finished be true.
      2. If finished is true, skip to the next step in the overall set of steps.
      3. If started is true, let negated be false.
      4. Otherwise, if started is false and if bogus is false, let negated be true.
      5. Let started be true.
    An ASCII digit

      Follow these substeps:

      1. If finished is true, skip to the next step in the overall set of steps.
      2. Multiply value by ten.
      3. Add the value of the digit, interpreted in base ten, to value.
      4. Let started be true.
      5. Let got number be true.
    A U+0020 SPACE character
    A U+002C COMMA character
    A U+003B SEMICOLON character

      Follow these substeps:

      1. If got number is false, return the numbers list and abort. This happens if an entry in the list has no digits, as in "`1,2,x,4`".
      2. If negated is true, then negate value.
      3. Append value to the numbers list.
      4. Jump to step 4 in the overall set of steps.
    A character in the range U+0001 to U+001F, U+0021 to U+002B, U+002D to U+002F, U+003A, U+003C to U+0040, U+005B to U+0060, U+007b to U+007F (i.e. any other non-alphabetic ASCII character)

      Follow these substeps:

      1. If got number is true, let finished be true.
      2. If finished is true, skip to the next step in the overall set of steps.
      3. Let negated be false.
    Any other character

      Follow these substeps:

      1. If finished is true, skip to the next step in the overall set of steps.
      2. Let negated be false.
      3. Let bogus be true.
      4. If started is true, then return the numbers list, and abort. (The value in value is not appended to the list first; it is dropped.)

14. Advance position to the next character in input, or to beyond the end of the string if there are no more characters.

15. If position points to a character (and not to beyond the end of input), jump to the big Parser step above.

16. If negated is true, then negate value.

17. If got number is true, then append value to the numbers list.

18. Return the numbers list and abort.

##### 2.4.4.6 Lists of dimensions

The rules for parsing a list of dimensions are as follows. These rules return a list of zero or more pairs consisting of a number and a unit, the unit being one of percentage, relative, and absolute.

1. Let raw input be the string being parsed.

2. If the last character in raw input is a U+002C COMMA character (,), then remove that character from raw input.

3. Split the string raw input on commas. Let raw tokens be the resulting list of tokens.

4. Let result be an empty list of number/unit pairs.

5. For each token in raw tokens, run the following substeps:

   1. Let input be the token.

   2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

   3. Let value be the number 0.

   4. Let unit be absolute.

   5. If position is past the end of input, set unit to relative and jump to the last substep.

   6. If the character at position is an ASCII digit, collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits, interpret the resulting sequence as an integer in base ten, and increment value by that integer.

   7. If the character at position is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.), run these substeps:

      1. Collect a sequence of characters consisting of space characters and ASCII digits. Let s be the resulting sequence.

      2. Remove all space characters in s.

      3. If s is not the empty string, run these subsubsteps:

         1. Let length be the number of characters in s (after the spaces were removed).

         2. Let fraction be the result of interpreting s as a base-ten integer, and then dividing that number by 10length.

         3. Increment value by fraction.

   8. Skip whitespace.

   9. If the character at position is a U+0025 PERCENT SIGN character (%), then set unit to percentage.

      Otherwise, if the character at position is a U+002A ASTERISK character (*), then set unit to relative.

   10. Add an entry to result consisting of the number given by value and the unit given by unit.

6. Return the list result.

#### 2.4.5 Dates and times

In the algorithms below, the number of days in month month of year year is: 31 if month is 1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 10, or 12; 30 if month is 4, 6, 9, or 11; 29 if month is 2 and year is a number divisible by 400, or if year is a number divisible by 4 but not by 100; and 28 otherwise. This takes into account leap years in the Gregorian calendar. [GREGORIAN]

When ASCII digits are used in the date and time syntaxes defined in this section, they express numbers in base ten.

While the formats described here are intended to be subsets of the corresponding ISO8601 formats, this specification defines parsing rules in much more detail than ISO8601. Implementors are therefore encouraged to carefully examine any date parsing libraries before using them to implement the parsing rules described below; ISO8601 libraries might not parse dates and times in exactly the same manner. [ISO8601]

Where this specification refers to the proleptic Gregorian calendar, it means the modern Gregorian calendar, extrapolated backwards to year 1. A date in the proleptic Gregorian calendar, sometimes explicitly referred to as a proleptic-Gregorian date, is one that is described using that calendar even if that calendar was not in use at the time (or place) in question. [GREGORIAN]

The use of the Gregorian calendar as the wire format in this specification is an arbitrary choice resulting from the cultural biases of those involved in the decision. See also the section discussing date, time, and number formats in forms (for authors), implemention notes regarding localization of form controls, and the `time` element.

##### 2.4.5.1 Months

A month consists of a specific proleptic-Gregorian date with no time-zone information and no date information beyond a year and a month. [GREGORIAN]

A string is a valid month string representing a year year and month month if it consists of the following components in the given order:

1. Four or more ASCII digits, representing year, where year > 0
2. A U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)
3. Two ASCII digits, representing the month month, in the range 1 ≤ month ≤ 12

The rules to parse a month string are as follows. This will return either a year and month, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Parse a month component to obtain year and month. If this returns nothing, then fail.

4. If position is not beyond the end of input, then fail.

5. Return year and month.

The rules to parse a month component, given an input string and a position, are as follows. This will return either a year and a month, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not at least four characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the year.

2. If year is not a number greater than zero, then fail.

3. If position is beyond the end of input or if the character at position is not a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character, then fail. Otherwise, move position forwards one character.

4. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not exactly two characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the month.

5. If month is not a number in the range 1 ≤ month ≤ 12, then fail.

6. Return year and month.

##### 2.4.5.2 Dates

A date consists of a specific proleptic-Gregorian date with no time-zone information, consisting of a year, a month, and a day. [GREGORIAN]

A string is a valid date string representing a year year, month month, and day day if it consists of the following components in the given order:

1. A valid month string, representing year and month
2. A U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)
3. Two ASCII digits, representing day, in the range 1 ≤ day ≤ maxday where maxday is the number of days in the month month and year year

The rules to parse a date string are as follows. This will return either a date, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Parse a date component to obtain year, month, and day. If this returns nothing, then fail.

4. If position is not beyond the end of input, then fail.

5. Let date be the date with year year, month month, and day day.

6. Return date.

The rules to parse a date component, given an input string and a position, are as follows. This will return either a year, a month, and a day, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Parse a month component to obtain year and month. If this returns nothing, then fail.

2. Let maxday be the number of days in month month of year year.

3. If position is beyond the end of input or if the character at position is not a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character, then fail. Otherwise, move position forwards one character.

4. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not exactly two characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the day.

5. If day is not a number in the range 1 ≤ day ≤ maxday, then fail.

6. Return year, month, and day.

##### 2.4.5.3 Yearless dates

A yearless date consists of a Gregorian month and a day within that month, but with no associated year. [GREGORIAN]

A string is a valid yearless date string representing a month month and a day day if it consists of the following components in the given order:

1. Optionally, two U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (-)
2. Two ASCII digits, representing the month month, in the range 1 ≤ month ≤ 12
3. A U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)
4. Two ASCII digits, representing day, in the range 1 ≤ day ≤ maxday where maxday is the number of days in the month month and any arbitrary leap year (e.g. 4 or 2000)

In other words, if the month is "`02`", meaning February, then the day can be 29, as if the year was a leap year.

The rules to parse a yearless date string are as follows. This will return either a month and a day, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Parse a yearless date component to obtain month and day. If this returns nothing, then fail.

4. If position is not beyond the end of input, then fail.

5. Return month and day.

The rules to parse a yearless date component, given an input string and a position, are as follows. This will return either a month and a day, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Collect a sequence of characters that are U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (-). If the collected sequence is not exactly zero or two characters long, then fail.

2. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not exactly two characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the month.

3. If month is not a number in the range 1 ≤ month ≤ 12, then fail.

4. Let maxday be the number of days in month month of any arbitrary leap year (e.g. 4 or 2000).

5. If position is beyond the end of input or if the character at position is not a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character, then fail. Otherwise, move position forwards one character.

6. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not exactly two characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the day.

7. If day is not a number in the range 1 ≤ day ≤ maxday, then fail.

8. Return month and day.

##### 2.4.5.4 Times

A time consists of a specific time with no time-zone information, consisting of an hour, a minute, a second, and a fraction of a second.

A string is a valid time string representing an hour hour, a minute minute, and a second second if it consists of the following components in the given order:

1. Two ASCII digits, representing hour, in the range 0 ≤ hour ≤ 23
2. A U+003A COLON character (:)
3. Two ASCII digits, representing minute, in the range 0 ≤ minute ≤ 59
4. If second is non-zero, or optionally if second is zero:
   1. A U+003A COLON character (:)
   2. Two ASCII digits, representing the integer part of second, in the range 0 ≤ s ≤ 59
   3. If second is not an integer, or optionally if second is an integer:
      1. A 002E FULL STOP character (.)
      2. One, two, or three ASCII digits, representing the fractional part of second

The second component cannot be 60 or 61; leap seconds cannot be represented.

The rules to parse a time string are as follows. This will return either a time, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Parse a time component to obtain hour, minute, and second. If this returns nothing, then fail.

4. If position is not beyond the end of input, then fail.

5. Let time be the time with hour hour, minute minute, and second second.

6. Return time.

The rules to parse a time component, given an input string and a position, are as follows. This will return either an hour, a minute, and a second, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not exactly two characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the hour.

2. If hour is not a number in the range 0 ≤ hour ≤ 23, then fail.

3. If position is beyond the end of input or if the character at position is not a U+003A COLON character, then fail. Otherwise, move position forwards one character.

4. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not exactly two characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the minute.

5. If minute is not a number in the range 0 ≤ minute ≤ 59, then fail.

6. Let second be a string with the value "0".

7. If position is not beyond the end of input and the character at position is a U+003A COLON, then run these substeps:

   1. Advance position to the next character in input.

   2. If position is beyond the end of input, or at the last character in input, or if the next two characters in input starting at position are not both ASCII digits, then fail.

   3. Collect a sequence of characters that are either ASCII digits or U+002E FULL STOP characters. If the collected sequence is three characters long, or if it is longer than three characters long and the third character is not a U+002E FULL STOP character, or if it has more than one U+002E FULL STOP character, then fail. Otherwise, let the collected string be second instead of its previous value.

8. Interpret second as a base-ten number (possibly with a fractional part). Let second be that number instead of the string version.

9. If second is not a number in the range 0 ≤ second < 60, then fail.

10. Return hour, minute, and second.

##### 2.4.5.5 Local dates and times

A local date and time consists of a specific proleptic-Gregorian date, consisting of a year, a month, and a day, and a time, consisting of an hour, a minute, a second, and a fraction of a second, but expressed without a time zone. [GREGORIAN]

A string is a valid local date and time string representing a date and time if it consists of the following components in the given order:

1. A valid date string representing the date
2. A U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character (T) or a U+0020 SPACE character
3. A valid time string representing the time

A string is a valid normalised local date and time string representing a date and time if it consists of the following components in the given order:

1. A valid date string representing the date
2. A U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character (T)
3. A valid time string representing the time, expressed as the shortest possible string for the given time (e.g. omitting the seconds component entirely if the given time is zero seconds past the minute)

The rules to parse a local date and time string are as follows. This will return either a date and time, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Parse a date component to obtain year, month, and day. If this returns nothing, then fail.

4. If position is beyond the end of input or if the character at position is neither a U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character (T) nor a U+0020 SPACE character, then fail. Otherwise, move position forwards one character.

5. Parse a time component to obtain hour, minute, and second. If this returns nothing, then fail.

6. If position is not beyond the end of input, then fail.

7. Let date be the date with year year, month month, and day day.

8. Let time be the time with hour hour, minute minute, and second second.

9. Return date and time.

##### 2.4.5.6 Time zones

A time-zone offset consists of a signed number of hours and minutes.

A string is a valid time-zone offset string representing a time-zone offset if it consists of either:

- A U+005A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z character (Z), allowed only if the time zone is UTC

- Or, the following components, in the given order:

  1. Either a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) or, if the time-zone offset is not zero, a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-), representing the sign of the time-zone offset
  2. Two ASCII digits, representing the hours component hour of the time-zone offset, in the range 0 ≤ hour ≤ 23
  3. Optionally, a U+003A COLON character (:)
  4. Two ASCII digits, representing the minutes component minute of the time-zone offset, in the range 0 ≤ minute ≤ 59

This format allows for time-zone offsets from -23:59 to +23:59. Right now, in practice, the range of offsets of actual time zones is -12:00 to +14:00, and the minutes component of offsets of actual time zones is always either 00, 30, or 45. There is no guarantee that this will remain so forever, however, since time zones are used as political footballs and are thus subject to very whimsical policy decisions.

See also the usage notes and examples in the global date and time section below for details on using time-zone offsets with historical times that predate the formation of formal time zones.

The rules to parse a time-zone offset string are as follows. This will return either a time-zone offset, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Parse a time-zone offset component to obtain timezonehours and timezoneminutes. If this returns nothing, then fail.

4. If position is not beyond the end of input, then fail.

5. Return the time-zone offset that is timezonehours hours and timezoneminutes minutes from UTC.

The rules to parse a time-zone offset component, given an input string and a position, are as follows. This will return either time-zone hours and time-zone minutes, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. If the character at position is a U+005A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z character (Z), then:

   1. Let timezonehours be 0.

   2. Let timezoneminutes be 0.

   3. Advance position to the next character in input.

   Otherwise, if the character at position is either a U+002B PLUS SIGN (+) or a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-), then:

   1. If the character at position is a U+002B PLUS SIGN (+), let sign be "positive". Otherwise, it's a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-); let sign be "negative".

   2. Advance position to the next character in input.

   3. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. Let s be the collected sequence.

   4. If s is exactly two characters long, then run these substeps:

      1. Interpret s as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the timezonehours.

      2. If position is beyond the end of input or if the character at position is not a U+003A COLON character, then fail. Otherwise, move position forwards one character.

      3. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not exactly two characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the timezoneminutes.

      If s is exactly four characters long, then run these substeps:

      1. Interpret the first two characters of s as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the timezonehours.

      2. Interpret the last two characters of s as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the timezoneminutes.

      Otherwise, fail.

   5. If timezonehours is not a number in the range 0 ≤ timezonehours ≤ 23, then fail.
   6. If sign is "negative", then negate timezonehours.
   7. If timezoneminutes is not a number in the range 0 ≤ timezoneminutes ≤ 59, then fail.
   8. If sign is "negative", then negate timezoneminutes.

   Otherwise, fail.

2. Return timezonehours and timezoneminutes.

##### 2.4.5.7 Global dates and times

A global date and time consists of a specific proleptic-Gregorian date, consisting of a year, a month, and a day, and a time, consisting of an hour, a minute, a second, and a fraction of a second, expressed with a time-zone offset, consisting of a signed number of hours and minutes. [GREGORIAN]

A string is a valid global date and time string representing a date, time, and a time-zone offset if it consists of the following components in the given order:

1. A valid date string representing the date
2. A U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character (T) or a U+0020 SPACE character
3. A valid time string representing the time
4. A valid time-zone offset string representing the time-zone offset

Times in dates before the formation of UTC in the mid twentieth century must be expressed and interpreted in terms of UT1 (contemporary Earth solar time at the 0° longitude), not UTC (the approximation of UT1 that ticks in SI seconds). Time before the formation of time zones must be expressed and interpeted as UT1 times with explicit time zones that approximate the contemporary difference between the appropriate local time and the time observed at the location of Greenwich, London.

The following are some examples of dates written as valid global date and time strings.

"`0037-12-13 00:00Z`"
  Midnight in areas using London time on the birthday of Nero (the Roman Emperor). See below for further discussion on which date this actually corresponds to.
"`1979-10-14T12:00:00.001-04:00`"
  One millisecond after noon on October 14th 1979, in the time zone in use on the east coast of the USA during daylight saving time.
"`8592-01-01T02:09+02:09`"
  Midnight UTC on the 1st of January, 8592. The time zone associated with that time is two hours and nine minutes ahead of UTC, which is not currently a real time zone, but is nonetheless allowed.

Several things are notable about these dates:

- Years with fewer than four digits have to be zero-padded. The date "37-12-13" would not be a valid date.
- If the "`T`" is replaced by a space, it must be a single space character. The string "`2001-12-21 12:00Z`" (with two spaces between the components) would not be parsed successfully.
- To unambiguously identify a moment in time prior to the introduction of the Gregorian calendar (insofar as moments in time before the formation of UTC can be unambiguously identified), the date has to be first converted to the Gregorian calendar from the calendar in use at the time (e.g. from the Julian calendar). The date of Nero's birth is the 15th of December 37, in the Julian Calendar, which is the 13th of December 37 in the proleptic Gregorian calendar.
- The time and time-zone offset components are not optional.
- Dates before the year one can't be represented as a datetime in this version of HTML.
- Times of specific events in ancient times are, at best, approximations, since time was not well coordinated or measured until relatively recent decades.
- Time-zone offsets differ based on daylight savings time.

A string is a valid normalised forced-UTC global date and time string representing a date, time, and a time-zone offset if it consists of the following components in the given order:

1. A valid date string representing the date converted to the UTC time zone
2. A U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character (T)
3. A valid time string representing the time converted to the UTC time zone and expressed as the shortest possible string for the given time (e.g. omitting the seconds component entirely if the given time is zero seconds past the minute)
4. A U+005A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z character (Z)

The rules to parse a global date and time string are as follows. This will return either a time in UTC, with associated time-zone offset information for round-tripping or display purposes, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Parse a date component to obtain year, month, and day. If this returns nothing, then fail.

4. If position is beyond the end of input or if the character at position is neither a U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character (T) nor a U+0020 SPACE character, then fail. Otherwise, move position forwards one character.

5. Parse a time component to obtain hour, minute, and second. If this returns nothing, then fail.

6. If position is beyond the end of input, then fail.

7. Parse a time-zone offset component to obtain timezonehours and timezoneminutes. If this returns nothing, then fail.

8. If position is not beyond the end of input, then fail.

9. Let time be the moment in time at year year, month month, day day, hours hour, minute minute, second second, subtracting timezonehours hours and timezoneminutes minutes. That moment in time is a moment in the UTC time zone.

10. Let timezone be timezonehours hours and timezoneminutes minutes from UTC.

11. Return time and timezone.

##### 2.4.5.8 Weeks

A week consists of a week-year number and a week number representing a seven-day period starting on a Monday. Each week-year in this calendaring system has either 52 or 53 such seven-day periods, as defined below. The seven-day period starting on the Gregorian date Monday December 29th 1969 (1969-12-29) is defined as week number 1 in week-year 1970. Consecutive weeks are numbered sequentially. The week before the number 1 week in a week-year is the last week in the previous week-year, and vice versa. [GREGORIAN]

A week-year with a number year has 53 weeks if it corresponds to either a year year in the proleptic Gregorian calendar that has a Thursday as its first day (January 1st), or a year year in the proleptic Gregorian calendar that has a Wednesday as its first day (January 1st) and where year is a number divisible by 400, or a number divisible by 4 but not by 100. All other week-years have 52 weeks.

The week number of the last day of a week-year with 53 weeks is 53; the week number of the last day of a week-year with 52 weeks is 52.

The week-year number of a particular day can be different than the number of the year that contains that day in the proleptic Gregorian calendar. The first week in a week-year y is the week that contains the first Thursday of the Gregorian year y.

For modern purposes, a week as defined here is equivalent to ISO weeks as defined in ISO 8601. [ISO8601]

A string is a valid week string representing a week-year year and week week if it consists of the following components in the given order:

1. Four or more ASCII digits, representing year, where year > 0
2. A U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)
3. A U+0057 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W character (W)
4. Two ASCII digits, representing the week week, in the range 1 ≤ week ≤ maxweek, where maxweek is the week number of the last day of week-year year

The rules to parse a week string are as follows. This will return either a week-year number and week number, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not at least four characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the year.

4. If year is not a number greater than zero, then fail.

5. If position is beyond the end of input or if the character at position is not a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character, then fail. Otherwise, move position forwards one character.

6. If position is beyond the end of input or if the character at position is not a U+0057 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W character (W), then fail. Otherwise, move position forwards one character.

7. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. If the collected sequence is not exactly two characters long, then fail. Otherwise, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer. Let that number be the week.

8. Let maxweek be the week number of the last day of year year.

9. If week is not a number in the range 1 ≤ week ≤ maxweek, then fail.

10. If position is not beyond the end of input, then fail.

11. Return the week-year number year and the week number week.

##### 2.4.5.9 Durations

A duration consists of a number of seconds.

Since months and seconds are not comparable (a month is not a precise number of seconds, but is instead a period whose exact length depends on the precise day from which it is measured) a duration as defined in this specification cannot include months (or years, which are equivalent to twelve months). Only durations that describe a specific number of seconds can be described.

A string is a valid duration string representing a duration t if it consists of either of the following:

- A literal U+0050 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P character followed by one or more of the following subcomponents, in the order given, where the number of days, hours, minutes, and seconds corresponds to the same number of seconds as in t:

  1. One or more ASCII digits followed by a U+0044 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D character, representing a number of days.

  2. A U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character followed by one or more of the following subcomponents, in the order given:

     1. One or more ASCII digits followed by a U+0048 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H character, representing a number of hours.

     2. One or more ASCII digits followed by a U+004D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M character, representing a number of minutes.

     3. The following components:

        1. One or more ASCII digits, representing a number of seconds.

        2. Optionally, a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) followed by one, two, or three ASCII digits, representing a fraction of a second.

        3. A U+0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S character.

  This, as with a number of other date- and time-related microsyntaxes defined in this specification, is based on one of the formats defined in ISO 8601. [ISO8601]

- One or more duration time components, each with a different duration time component scale, in any order; the sum of the represented seconds being equal to the number of seconds in t.

  A duration time component is a string consisting of the following components:

  1. Zero or more space characters.

  2. One or more ASCII digits, representing a number of time units, scaled by the duration time component scale specified (see below) to represent a number of seconds.

  3. If the duration time component scale specified is 1 (i.e. the units are seconds), then, optionally, a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) followed by one, two, or three ASCII digits, representing a fraction of a second.

  4. Zero or more space characters.

  5. One of the following characters, representing the duration time component scale of the time unit used in the numeric part of the duration time component:

     U+0057 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W character
     U+0077 LATIN SMALL LETTER W character
       Weeks. The scale is 604800.
     U+0044 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D character
     U+0064 LATIN SMALL LETTER D character
       Days. The scale is 86400.
     U+0048 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H character
     U+0068 LATIN SMALL LETTER H character
       Hours. The scale is 3600.
     U+004D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M character
     U+006D LATIN SMALL LETTER M character
       Minutes. The scale is 60.
     U+0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S character
     U+0073 LATIN SMALL LETTER S character
       Seconds. The scale is 1.

  6. Zero or more space characters.

  This is not based on any of the formats in ISO 8601. It is intended to be a more human-readable alternative to the ISO 8601 duration format.

The rules to parse a duration string are as follows. This will return either a duration or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Let months, seconds, and component count all be zero.

4. Let M-disambiguator be minutes.

   This flag's other value is months. It is used to disambiguate the "M" unit in ISO8601 durations, which use the same unit for months and minutes. Months are not allowed, but are parsed for future compatibility and to avoid misinterpreting ISO8601 durations that would be valid in other contexts.

5. Skip whitespace.

6. If position is past the end of input, then fail.

7. If the character in input pointed to by position is a U+0050 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P character, then advance position to the next character, set M-disambiguator to months, and skip whitespace.

8. Run the following substeps in a loop, until a step requiring the loop to be broken or the entire algorithm to fail is reached:

   1. Let units be undefined. It will be assigned one of the following values: years, months, weeks, days, hours, minutes, and seconds.

   2. Let next character be undefined. It is used to process characters from the input.

   3. If position is past the end of input, then break the loop.

   4. If the character in input pointed to by position is a U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character, then advance position to the next character, set M-disambiguator to minutes, skip whitespace, and return to the top of the loop.

   5. Set next character to the character in input pointed to by position.

   6. If next character is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.), then let N equal zero. (Do not advance position. That is taken care of below.)

      Otherwise, if next character is an ASCII digit, then collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits, interpret the resulting sequence as a base-ten integer, and let N be that number.

      Otherwise next character is not part of a number; fail.

   7. If position is past the end of input, then fail.

   8. Set next character to the character in input pointed to by position, and this time advance position to the next character. (If next character was a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) before, it will still be that character this time.)

   9. If next character is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.), then run these substeps:

      1. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits. Let s be the resulting sequence.

      2. If s is the empty string, then fail.

      3. Let length be the number of characters in s.

      4. Let fraction be the result of interpreting s as a base-ten integer, and then dividing that number by 10length.

      5. Increment N by fraction.

      6. Skip whitespace.

      7. If position is past the end of input, then fail.

      8. Set next character to the character in input pointed to by position, and advance position to the next character.

      9. If next character is neither a U+0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S character nor a U+0073 LATIN SMALL LETTER S character, then fail.

      10. Set units to seconds.

      Otherwise, run these substeps:

      1. If next character is a space character, then skip whitespace, set next character to the character in input pointed to by position, and advance position to the next character.

      2. If next character is a U+0059 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y character, or a U+0079 LATIN SMALL LETTER Y character, set units to years and set M-disambiguator to months.

         If next character is a U+004D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M character or a U+006D LATIN SMALL LETTER M character, and M-disambiguator is months, then set units to months.

         If next character is a U+0057 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W character or a U+0077 LATIN SMALL LETTER W character, set units to weeks and set M-disambiguator to minutes.

         If next character is a U+0044 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D character or a U+0064 LATIN SMALL LETTER D character, set units to days and set M-disambiguator to minutes.

         If next character is a U+0048 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H character or a U+0068 LATIN SMALL LETTER H character, set units to hours and set M-disambiguator to minutes.

         If next character is a U+004D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M character or a U+006D LATIN SMALL LETTER M character, and M-disambiguator is minutes, then set units to minutes.

         If next character is a U+0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S character or a U+0073 LATIN SMALL LETTER S character, set units to seconds and set M-disambiguator to minutes.

         Otherwise if next character is none of the above characters, then fail.

   10. Increment component count.

   11. Let multiplier be 1.

   12. If units is years, multiply multiplier by 12 and set units to months.

   13. If units is months, add the product of N and multiplier to months.

       Otherwise, run these substeps:

       1. If units is weeks, multiply multiplier by 7 and set units to days.

       2. If units is days, multiply multiplier by 24 and set units to hours.

       3. If units is hours, multiply multiplier by 60 and set units to minutes.

       4. If units is minutes, multiply multiplier by 60 and set units to seconds.

       5. Forcibly, units is now seconds. Add the product of N and multiplier to seconds.

   14. Skip whitespace.

9. If component count is zero, fail.

10. If months is not zero, fail.

11. Return the duration consisting of seconds seconds.

##### 2.4.5.10 Vaguer moments in time

A string is a valid date string with optional time if it is also one of the following:

- A valid date string
- A valid global date and time string

The rules to parse a date or time string are as follows. The algorithm will return either a date, a time, a global date and time, or nothing. If at any point the algorithm says that it "fails", this means that it is aborted at that point and returns nothing.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Set start position to the same position as position.

4. Set the date present and time present flags to true.

5. Parse a date component to obtain year, month, and day. If this fails, then set the date present flag to false.

6. If date present is true, and position is not beyond the end of input, and the character at position is either a U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character (T) or a U+0020 SPACE character, then advance position to the next character in input.

   Otherwise, if date present is true, and either position is beyond the end of input or the character at position is neither a U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character (T) nor a U+0020 SPACE character, then set time present to false.

   Otherwise, if date present is false, set position back to the same position as start position.

7. If the time present flag is true, then parse a time component to obtain hour, minute, and second. If this returns nothing, then fail.

8. If the date present and time present flags are both true, but position is beyond the end of input, then fail.

9. If the date present and time present flags are both true, parse a time-zone offset component to obtain timezonehours and timezoneminutes. If this returns nothing, then fail.

10. If position is not beyond the end of input, then fail.

11. If the date present flag is true and the time present flag is false, then let date be the date with year year, month month, and day day, and return date.

    Otherwise, if the time present flag is true and the date present flag is false, then let time be the time with hour hour, minute minute, and second second, and return time.

    Otherwise, let time be the moment in time at year year, month month, day day, hours hour, minute minute, second second, subtracting timezonehours hours and timezoneminutes minutes, that moment in time being a moment in the UTC time zone; let timezone be timezonehours hours and timezoneminutes minutes from UTC; and return time and timezone.

#### 2.4.6 Colours

A simple colour consists of three 8-bit numbers in the range 0..255, representing the red, green, and blue components of the colour respectively, in the sRGB colour space. [SRGB]

A string is a valid simple colour if it is exactly seven characters long, and the first character is a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), and the remaining six characters are all ASCII hex digits, with the first two digits representing the red component, the middle two digits representing the green component, and the last two digits representing the blue component, in hexadecimal.

A string is a valid lowercase simple colour if it is a valid simple colour and doesn't use any characters in the range U+0041 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A to U+0046 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F.

The rules for parsing simple colour values are as given in the following algorithm. When invoked, the steps must be followed in the order given, aborting at the first step that returns a value. This algorithm will return either a simple colour or an error.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. If input is not exactly seven characters long, then return an error.

3. If the first character in input is not a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), then return an error.

4. If the last six characters of input are not all ASCII hex digits, then return an error.

5. Let result be a simple colour.

6. Interpret the second and third characters as a hexadecimal number and let the result be the red component of result.

7. Interpret the fourth and fifth characters as a hexadecimal number and let the result be the green component of result.

8. Interpret the sixth and seventh characters as a hexadecimal number and let the result be the blue component of result.

9. Return result.

The rules for serialising simple colour values given a simple colour are as given in the following algorithm:

1. Let result be a string consisting of a single U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#).

2. Convert the red, green, and blue components in turn to two-digit hexadecimal numbers using lowercase ASCII hex digits, zero-padding if necessary, and append these numbers to result, in the order red, green, blue.

3. Return result, which will be a valid lowercase simple colour.

Some obsolete legacy attributes parse colours in a more complicated manner, using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, which are given in the following algorithm. When invoked, the steps must be followed in the order given, aborting at the first step that returns a value. This algorithm will return either a simple colour or an error.

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. If input is the empty string, then return an error.

3. Strip leading and trailing whitespace from input.

4. If input is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`transparent`", then return an error.

5. If input is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the keywords listed in the SVG color keywords section of the CSS3 Color specification, then return the simple colour corresponding to that keyword. [CSSCOLOR]

   CSS2 System Colors are not recognised.

6. If input is four characters long, and the first character in input is a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), and the last three characters of input are all ASCII hex digits, then run these substeps:

   1. Let result be a simple colour.

   2. Interpret the second character of input as a hexadecimal digit; let the red component of result be the resulting number multiplied by 17.

   3. Interpret the third character of input as a hexadecimal digit; let the green component of result be the resulting number multiplied by 17.

   4. Interpret the fourth character of input as a hexadecimal digit; let the blue component of result be the resulting number multiplied by 17.

   5. Return result.

7. Replace any characters in input that have a Unicode code point greater than U+FFFF (i.e. any characters that are not in the basic multilingual plane) with the two-character string "`00`".

8. If input is longer than 128 characters, truncate input, leaving only the first 128 characters.

9. If the first character in input is a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), remove it.

10. Replace any character in input that is not an ASCII hex digit with the character U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0).

11. While input's length is zero or not a multiple of three, append a U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0) character to input.

12. Split input into three strings of equal length, to obtain three components. Let length be the length of those components (one third the length of input).

13. If length is greater than 8, then remove the leading length-8 characters in each component, and let length be 8.

14. While length is greater than two and the first character in each component is a U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0) character, remove that character and reduce length by one.

15. If length is still greater than two, truncate each component, leaving only the first two characters in each.

16. Let result be a simple colour.

17. Interpret the first component as a hexadecimal number; let the red component of result be the resulting number.

18. Interpret the second component as a hexadecimal number; let the green component of result be the resulting number.

19. Interpret the third component as a hexadecimal number; let the blue component of result be the resulting number.

20. Return result.

The 2D graphics context has a separate colour syntax that also handles opacity.

#### 2.4.7 Space-separated tokens

A set of space-separated tokens is a string containing zero or more words (known as tokens) separated by one or more space characters, where words consist of any string of one or more characters, none of which are space characters.

A string containing a set of space-separated tokens may have leading or trailing space characters.

An unordered set of unique space-separated tokens is a set of space-separated tokens where none of the tokens are duplicated.

An ordered set of unique space-separated tokens is a set of space-separated tokens where none of the tokens are duplicated but where the order of the tokens is meaningful.

Sets of space-separated tokens sometimes have a defined set of allowed values. When a set of allowed values is defined, the tokens must all be from that list of allowed values; other values are non-conforming. If no such set of allowed values is provided, then all values are conforming.

How tokens in a set of space-separated tokens are to be compared (e.g. case-sensitively or not) is defined on a per-set basis.

When a user agent has to split a string on spaces, it must use the following algorithm:

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Let tokens be an ordered list of tokens, initially empty.

4. Skip whitespace

5. While position is not past the end of input:

   1. Collect a sequence of characters that are not space characters.

   2. Append the string collected in the previous step to tokens.

   3. Skip whitespace

6. Return tokens.

#### 2.4.8 Comma-separated tokens

A set of comma-separated tokens is a string containing zero or more tokens each separated from the next by a single U+002C COMMA character (,), where tokens consist of any string of zero or more characters, neither beginning nor ending with space characters, nor containing any U+002C COMMA characters (,), and optionally surrounded by space characters.

For instance, the string "`a ,b,,d d` " consists of four tokens: "a", "b", the empty string, and "d d". Leading and trailing whitespace around each token doesn't count as part of the token, and the empty string can be a token.

Sets of comma-separated tokens sometimes have further restrictions on what consists a valid token. When such restrictions are defined, the tokens must all fit within those restrictions; other values are non-conforming. If no such restrictions are specified, then all values are conforming.

When a user agent has to split a string on commas, it must use the following algorithm:

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Let tokens be an ordered list of tokens, initially empty.

4. Token: If position is past the end of input, jump to the last step.

5. Collect a sequence of characters that are not U+002C COMMA characters (,). Let s be the resulting sequence (which might be the empty string).

6. Strip leading and trailing whitespace from s.

7. Append s to tokens.

8. If position is not past the end of input, then the character at position is a U+002C COMMA character (,); advance position past that character.

9. Jump back to the step labeled token.

10. Return tokens.

#### 2.4.9 References

A valid hash-name reference to an element of type type is a string consisting of a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#) followed by a string which exactly matches the value of the `name` attribute of an element with type type in the document.

The rules for parsing a hash-name reference to an element of type type, given a context node scope, are as follows:

1. If the string being parsed does not contain a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character, or if the first such character in the string is the last character in the string, then return null and abort these steps.

2. Let s be the string from the character immediately after the first U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character in the string being parsed up to the end of that string.

3. Return the first element of type type in tree order in the subtree rooted at scope that has an `id` attribute whose value is a case-sensitive match for s or a `name` attribute whose value is a compatibility caseless match for s.

#### 2.4.10 Media queries

A string is a valid media query list if it matches the `<media-query-list>` production of the Media Queries specification. [MQ]

A string matches the environment of the user if it is the empty string, a string consisting of only space characters, or is a media query list that matches the user's environment according to the definitions given in the Media Queries specification. [MQ]

### 2.5 URLs

#### 2.5.1 Terminology

A URL is a valid URL if it conforms to the authoring conformance requirements in the WHATWG URL standard. [URL]

A string is a valid non-empty URL if it is a valid URL but it is not the empty string.

A string is a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces if, after stripping leading and trailing whitespace from it, it is a valid URL.

A string is a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces if, after stripping leading and trailing whitespace from it, it is a valid non-empty URL.

This specification defines the URL `about:legacy-compat` as a reserved, though unresolvable, `about:` URL, for use in DOCTYPEs in HTML documents when needed for compatibility with XML tools. [ABOUT]

This specification defines the URL `about:srcdoc` as a reserved, though unresolvable, `about:` URL, that is used as the document's address of `iframe` `srcdoc` documents. [ABOUT]

The fallback base URL of a `Document` object is the absolute URL obtained by running these substeps:

1. If the `Document` is an `iframe` `srcdoc` document, then return the document base URL of the `Document`'s browsing context's browsing context container's node document and abort these steps.

2. If the document's address is `about:blank`, and the `Document`'s browsing context has a creator browsing context, then return the document base URL of the creator `Document`, and abort these steps.

3. Return the document's address.

The document base URL of a `Document` object is the absolute URL obtained by running these substeps:

1. If there is no `base` element that has an `href` attribute in the `Document`, then the document base URL is the `Document`'s fallback base URL; abort these steps.

2. Otherwise, the document base URL is the frozen base URL of the first `base` element in the `Document` that has an `href` attribute, in tree order.

#### 2.5.2 Resolving URLs

Resolving a URL is the process of taking a relative URL and obtaining the absolute URL that it implies.

To resolve a URL to an absolute URL relative to either another absolute URL or an element, the user agent must use the following steps. Resolving a URL can result in an error, in which case the URL is not resolvable.

1. Let url be the URL being resolved.

2. Let encoding be determined as follows:

   If the URL had a character encoding defined when the URL was created or defined or when this algorithm was invoked
     The URL character encoding is as defined.
   If the URL came from a script (e.g. as an argument to a method)
     The URL character encoding is the API URL character encoding specified by the script's settings object.
   If the URL came from a DOM node (e.g. from an element)
     The node has a `Document`, and the URL character encoding is the document's character encoding.

3. If encoding is a UTF-16 encoding, then change the value of encoding to UTF-8.

4. If the algorithm was invoked with an absolute URL to use as the base URL, let base be that absolute URL.

   Otherwise, let base be the element's base URL.

5. Apply the URL parser to url, with base as the base URL, with encoding as the encoding.

6. If this returns failure, then abort these steps with an error.

7. Let parsed URL be the result of the URL parser.

8. Let serialised URL be the result of apply the URL serialiser to parsed URL.

9. Return serialised URL as the resulting absolute URL and parsed URL as the resulting parsed URL.

Given an element, the element's base URL is the base URI of the element, as defined by the XML Base specification, with the base URI of the document entity being defined as the document base URL of the `Document` that owns the element. [XMLBASE]

For the purposes of the XML Base specification, user agents must act as if all `Document` objects represented XML documents.

It is possible for `xml:base` attributes to be present even in HTML fragments, as such attributes can be added dynamically using script. (Such scripts would not be conforming, however, as `xml:base` attributes are not allowed in HTML documents.)

#### 2.5.3 Dynamic changes to base URLs

When an `xml:base` attribute is set, changed, or removed, the attribute's element, and all descendant elements, are affected by a base URL change.

When a document's document base URL changes, all elements in that document are affected by a base URL change.

The following are base URL change steps, which run when an element is affected by a base URL change (as defined by the DOM specification):

If the element creates a hyperlink

  If the absolute URL identified by the hyperlink is being shown to the user, or if any data derived from that URL is affecting the display, then the `href` attribute should be re-resolved relative to the element and the UI updated appropriately.

  For example, the CSS `:link`/`:visited` pseudo-classes might have been affected.

  If the hyperlink has a `ping` attribute and its absolute URL(s) are being shown to the user, then the `ping` attribute's tokens should be re-resolved relative to the element and the UI updated appropriately.

If the element is a `q`, `blockquote`, `ins`, or `del` element with a `cite` attribute

  If the absolute URL identified by the `cite` attribute is being shown to the user, or if any data derived from that URL is affecting the display, then the URL should be re-resolved relative to the element and the UI updated appropriately.

Otherwise

  The element is not directly affected.

  For instance, changing the base URL doesn't affect the image displayed by `img` elements, although subsequent accesses of the `src` IDL attribute from script will return a new absolute URL that might no longer correspond to the image being shown.

### 2.6 Fetching resources

#### 2.6.1 Terminology

User agents can implement a variety of transfer protocols, but this specification mostly defines behavior in terms of HTTP. [HTTP]

The HTTP GET method is equivalent to the default retrieval action of the protocol. For example, RETR in FTP. Such actions are idempotent and safe, in HTTP terms.

The HTTP response codes are equivalent to statuses in other protocols that have the same basic meanings. For example, a "file not found" error is equivalent to a 404 code, a server error is equivalent to a 5xx code, and so on.

The HTTP headers are equivalent to fields in other protocols that have the same basic meaning. For example, the HTTP authentication headers are equivalent to the authentication aspects of the FTP protocol.

A referrer source is either a `Document` or a URL.

#### 2.6.2 Processing model

When a user agent is to fetch a resource or URL, optionally from an origin origin, optionally using a specific referrer source as an override referrer source, and optionally with any of a synchronous flag, a manual redirect flag, a force same-origin flag, and a block cookies flag, the following steps must be run. (When a URL is to be fetched, the URL identifies a resource to be obtained.)

1. If there is a specific override referrer source, and it is a URL, then let referrer be the override referrer source, and jump to the step labeled clean referrer.

2. Let document be the appropriate `Document` as given by the following list:

   If there is a specific override referrer source
     The override referrer source.
   When navigating
     The active document of the source browsing context.
   When fetching resources for an element
     The element's node document.

3. While document is an `iframe` `srcdoc` document, let document be document's browsing context's browsing context container's node document instead.

4. If the origin of Document is not a scheme/host/port tuple, then set referrer to the empty string and jump to the step labeled clean referrer.

5. Let referrer be the document's address of document.

6. Clean referrer: Apply the URL parser to referrer and let parsed referrer be the resulting parsed URL.

7. Let referrer be the result of applying the URL serialiser to parsed referrer, with the exclude fragment flag set.

8. If referrer is not the empty string, is not a `data:` URL, and is not the URL "`about:blank`", then generate the address of the resource from which Request-URIs are obtained as required by HTTP for the `Referer` (sic) header from referrer. [HTTP]

   Otherwise, the `Referer` (sic) header must be omitted, regardless of its value.

9. If the algorithm was not invoked with the synchronous flag, perform the remaining steps asynchronously.

10. If the `Document` with which any tasks queued by this algorithm would be associated doesn't have an associated browsing context, then abort these steps.

11. This is the main step.

    If the resource is to be obtained from an application cache, then use the data from that application cache, as if it had been obtained in the manner appropriate given its URL.

    If the resource is identified by an absolute URL, and the resource is to be obtained using an idempotent action (such as an HTTP GET or equivalent), and it is already being downloaded for other reasons (e.g. another invocation of this algorithm), and this request would be identical to the previous one (e.g. same `Accept` and `Origin` headers), and the user agent is configured such that it is to reuse the data from the existing download instead of initiating a new one, then use the results of the existing download instead of starting a new one.

    Otherwise, if the resource is identified by an absolute URL with a scheme that does not define a mechanism to obtain the resource (e.g. it is a `mailto:` URL) or that the user agent does not support, then act as if the resource was an HTTP 204 No Content response with no other metadata.

    Otherwise, if the resource is identified by the URL `about:blank`, then the resource is immediately available and consists of the empty string, with no metadata.

    Otherwise, at a time convenient to the user and the user agent, download (or otherwise obtain) the resource, applying the semantics of the relevant specifications (e.g. performing an HTTP GET or POST operation, or reading the file from disk, or expanding `data:` URLs, etc).

    For the purposes of the `Referer` (sic) header, use the address of the resource from which Request-URIs are obtained generated in the earlier step.

    For the purposes of the `Origin` header, if the fetching algorithm was explicitly initiated from an origin, then the origin that initiated the HTTP request is origin. Otherwise, this is a request from a "privacy-sensitive" context. [ORIGIN]

12. If the algorithm was not invoked with the block cookies flag, and there are cookies to be set, then the user agent must run the following substeps:

    1. Wait until ownership of the storage mutex can be taken by this instance of the fetching algorithm.

    2. Take ownership of the storage mutex.

    3. Update the cookies. [COOKIES]

    4. Release the storage mutex so that it is once again free.

13. If the fetched resource is an HTTP redirect or equivalent, then:

    If the force same-origin flag is set and the URL of the target of the redirect does not have the same origin as the URL for which the fetch algorithm was invoked

      Abort these steps and return failure from this algorithm, as if the remote host could not be contacted.

    If the manual redirect flag is set

      Continue, using the fetched resource (the redirect) as the result of the algorithm. If the calling algorithm subsequently requires the user agent to transparently follow the redirect, then the user agent must resume this algorithm from the main step, but using the target of the redirect as the resource to fetch, rather than the original resource.

    Otherwise

      First, apply any relevant requirements for redirects (such as showing any appropriate prompts). Then, redo main step, but using the target of the redirect as the resource to fetch, rather than the original resource. For HTTP requests, the new request must include the same headers as the original request, except for headers for which other requirements are specified (such as the `Host` header). [HTTP]

      The HTTP specification requires that 301, 302, and 307 redirects, when applied to methods other than the safe methods, not be followed without user confirmation. That would be an appropriate prompt for the purposes of the requirement in the paragraph above. [HTTP]

14. If the algorithm was not invoked with the synchronous flag: When the resource is available, or if there is an error of some description, queue a task that uses the resource as appropriate. If the resource can be processed incrementally, as, for instance, with a progressively interlaced JPEG or an HTML file, additional tasks may be queued to process the data as it is downloaded. The task source for these tasks is the networking task source.

    Otherwise, return the resource or error information to the calling algorithm.

If the user agent can determine the actual length of the resource being fetched for an instance of this algorithm, and if that length is finite, then that length is the file's size. Otherwise, the subject of the algorithm (that is, the resource being fetched) has no known size. (For example, the HTTP `Content-Length` header might provide this information.)

The user agent must also keep track of the number of bytes downloaded for each instance of this algorithm. This number must exclude any out-of-band metadata, such as HTTP headers.

The application cache processing model introduces some changes to the networking model to handle the returning of cached resources.

The navigation processing model handles redirects itself, overriding the redirection handling that would be done by the fetching algorithm.

Whether the type sniffing rules apply to the fetched resource depends on the algorithm that invokes the rules — they are not always applicable.

#### 2.6.3 Encrypted HTTP and related security concerns

Anything in this specification that refers to HTTP also applies to HTTP-over-TLS, as represented by URLs using the `https:` scheme. [HTTPS]

User agents should report certificate errors to the user and must either refuse to download resources sent with erroneous certificates or must act as if such resources were in fact served with no encryption.

User agents should warn the user that there is a potential problem whenever the user visits a page that the user has previously visited, if the page uses less secure encryption on the second visit.

Not doing so can result in users not noticing man-in-the-middle attacks.

If a user connects to a server with a self-signed certificate, the user agent could allow the connection but just act as if there had been no encryption. If the user agent instead allowed the user to override the problem and then displayed the page as if it was fully and safely encrypted, the user could be easily tricked into accepting man-in-the-middle connections.

If a user connects to a server with full encryption, but the page then refers to an external resource that has an expired certificate, then the user agent will act as if the resource was unavailable, possibly also reporting the problem to the user. If the user agent instead allowed the resource to be used, then an attacker could just look for "secure" sites that used resources from a different host and only apply man-in-the-middle attacks to that host, for example taking over scripts in the page.

If a user bookmarks a site that uses a CA-signed certificate, and then later revisits that site directly but the site has started using a self-signed certificate, the user agent could warn the user that a man-in-the-middle attack is likely underway, instead of simply acting as if the page was not encrypted.

#### 2.6.4 Determining the type of a resource

The Content-Type metadata of a resource must be obtained and interpreted in a manner consistent with the requirements of the MIME Sniffing specification. [MIMESNIFF]

The sniffed type of a resource must be found in a manner consistent with the requirements given in the MIME Sniffing specification for finding the sniffed media type of the relevant sequence of octets. [MIMESNIFF]

The rules for sniffing images specifically, the rules for distinguishing if a resource is text or binary, and the rules for sniffing audio and video specifically are also defined in the MIME Sniffing specification. These rules return a MIME type as their result. [MIMESNIFF]

It is imperative that the rules in the MIME Sniffing specification be followed exactly. When a user agent uses different heuristics for content type detection than the server expects, security problems can occur. For more details, see the MIME Sniffing specification. [MIMESNIFF]

#### 2.6.5 Extracting character encodings from `meta` elements

The algorithm for extracting a character encoding from a `meta` element, given a string s, is as follows. It either returns a character encoding or nothing.

1. Let position be a pointer into s, initially pointing at the start of the string.

2. Loop: Find the first seven characters in s after position that are an ASCII case-insensitive match for the word "`charset`". If no such match is found, return nothing and abort these steps.

3. Skip any space characters that immediately follow the word "`charset`" (there might not be any).

4. If the next character is not a U+003D EQUALS SIGN (=), then move position to point just before that next character, and jump back to the step labeled loop.

5. Skip any space characters that immediately follow the equals sign (there might not be any).

6. Process the next character as follows:

   If it is a U+0022 QUOTATION MARK character (") and there is a later U+0022 QUOTATION MARK character (") in s
   If it is a U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (') and there is a later U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (') in s
     Return the result of getting an encoding from the substring that is between this character and the next earliest occurrence of this character.
   If it is an unmatched U+0022 QUOTATION MARK character (")
   If it is an unmatched U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (')
   If there is no next character
     Return nothing.
   Otherwise
     Return the result of getting an encoding from the substring that consists of this character up to but not including the first space character or U+003B SEMICOLON character (;), or the end of s, whichever comes first.

This algorithm is distinct from those in the HTTP specification (for example, HTTP doesn't allow the use of single quotes and requires supporting a backslash-escape mechanism that is not supported by this algorithm). While the algorithm is used in contexts that, historically, were related to HTTP, the syntax as supported by implementations diverged some time ago. [HTTP]

#### 2.6.6 CORS settings attributes

A CORS settings attribute is an enumerated attribute. The following table lists the keywords and states for the attribute — the keywords in the left column map to the states in the cell in the second column on the same row as the keyword.

Keyword | State | Brief description
--- | --- | ---
`anonymous` | Anonymous | Cross-origin CORS requests for the element will have the omit credentials flag set.
`use-credentials` | Use Credentials | Cross-origin CORS requests for the element will not have the omit credentials flag set.

The empty string is also a valid keyword, and maps to the Anonymous state. The attribute's invalid value default is the Anonymous state. For the purposes of reflection, the canonical case for the Anonymous state is the `anonymous` keyword. The missing value default, used when the attribute is omitted, is the No CORS state.

#### 2.6.7 CORS-enabled fetch

When the user agent is required to perform a potentially CORS-enabled fetch of an absolute URL URL with a mode mode that is either "No CORS", "Anonymous", or "Use Credentials", optionally using a referrer source referrer source, with an origin origin, and with a default origin behaviour default which is either "taint" or "fail", it must run the first applicable set of steps from the following list. The default origin behaviour is only used if mode is "No CORS". This algorithm wraps the fetch algorithm above, and labels the obtained resource as either CORS-same-origin or CORS-cross-origin, or blocks the resource entirely.

If the URL has the same origin as origin
If the URL is a `data:` URL
If the URL is `about:blank`

  Run these substeps:

  1. Fetch URL, using referrer source if one was specified, with the manual redirect flag set.

  2. Loop: Wait for the fetch algorithm to know if the result is a redirect or not.

  3. Follow the first appropriate steps from the following list:

     If the result of the fetch is a redirect, and the origin of the target URL of the redirect is not the same origin as origin

       Set URL to the target URL of the redirect and return to the top of the potentially CORS-enabled fetch algorithm (this time, one of the other branches below might be taken, based on the value of mode).

     If the result of the fetch is a redirect

       The origin of the target URL of the redirect is the same origin as origin.

       Transparently follow the redirect and jump to the step labeled loop above.

     Otherwise

       The resource is available, it is not a redirect, and its origin is the same origin as origin.

       The tasks from the fetch algorithm are queued normally, and for the purposes of the calling algorithm, the obtained resource is CORS-same-origin.

If mode is "No CORS" and default is taint

  The URL does not have the same origin as origin.

  Fetch URL, using referrer source if one was specified.

  The tasks from the fetch algorithm are queued normally, but for the purposes of the calling algorithm, the obtained resource is CORS-cross-origin. The user agent may report a cross-origin resource access failure to the user (e.g. in a debugging console).

If mode is "No CORS"

  The URL does not have the same origin as origin, and default is fail.

  Discard any data fetched as part of this algorithm, and prevent any tasks from such invocations of the fetch algorithm from being queued. For the purposes of the calling algorithm, the user agent must act as if there was a fatal network error and no resource was obtained. The user agent may report a cross-origin resource access failure to the user (e.g. in a debugging console).

If mode is "Anonymous" or "Use Credentials"

  The URL does not have the same origin as origin.

  Run these steps:

  1. Perform a cross-origin request with the request URL set to URL, with the CORS referrer source set to referrer source if one was specified, the source origin set to origin, and with the omit credentials flag set if mode is "Anonymous" and not set otherwise. [FETCH]

  2. Wait for the CORS cross-origin request status to have a value.

  3. Jump to the appropriate step from the following list:

     If the CORS cross-origin request status is not success

       Discard all fetched data and prevent any tasks from the fetch algorithm from being queued. For the purposes of the calling algorithm, the user agent must act as if there was a fatal network error and no resource was obtained. If a CORS resource sharing check failed, the user agent may report a cross-origin resource access failure to the user (e.g. in a debugging console).

     If the CORS cross-origin request status is success

       The tasks from the fetch algorithm are queued normally, and for the purposes of the calling algorithm, the obtained resource is CORS-same-origin.

### 2.7 Common DOM interfaces

#### 2.7.1 Reflecting content attributes in IDL attributes

Some IDL attributes are defined to reflect a particular content attribute. This means that on getting, the IDL attribute returns the current value of the content attribute, and on setting, the IDL attribute changes the value of the content attribute to the given value.

In general, on getting, if the content attribute is not present, the IDL attribute must act as if the content attribute's value is the empty string; and on setting, if the content attribute is not present, it must first be added.

If a reflecting IDL attribute is a `DOMString` attribute whose content attribute is defined to contain a URL, then on getting, the IDL attribute must resolve the value of the content attribute relative to the element and return the resulting absolute URL if that was successful, or the empty string otherwise; and on setting, must set the content attribute to the specified literal value. If the content attribute is absent, the IDL attribute must return the default value, if the content attribute has one, or else the empty string.

If a reflecting IDL attribute is a `DOMString` attribute whose content attribute is defined to contain one or more URLs, then on getting, the IDL attribute must split the content attribute on spaces and return the concatenation of resolving each token URL to an absolute URL relative to the element, with a single U+0020 SPACE character between each URL, ignoring any tokens that did not resolve successfully. If the content attribute is absent, the IDL attribute must return the default value, if the content attribute has one, or else the empty string. On setting, the IDL attribute must set the content attribute to the specified literal value.

If a reflecting IDL attribute is a `DOMString` attribute whose content attribute is an enumerated attribute, and the IDL attribute is limited to only known values, then, on getting, the IDL attribute must return the conforming value associated with the state the attribute is in (in its canonical case), if any, or the empty string if the attribute is in a state that has no associated keyword value or if the attribute is not in a defined state (e.g. the attribute is missing and there is no missing value default); and on setting, the content attribute must be set to the specified new value.

If a reflecting IDL attribute is a nullable `DOMString` attribute whose content attribute is an enumerated attribute, then, on getting, if the corresponding content attribute is in its missing value default then the IDL attribute must return null, otherwise, the IDL attribute must return the conforming value associated with the state the attribute is in (in its canonical case); and on setting, if the new value is null, the content attribute must be removed, and otherwise, the content attribute must be set to the specified new value.

If a reflecting IDL attribute is a `DOMString` attribute but doesn't fall into any of the above categories, then the getting and setting must be done in a transparent, case-preserving manner.

If a reflecting IDL attribute is a `boolean` attribute, then on getting the IDL attribute must return true if the content attribute is set, and false if it is absent. On setting, the content attribute must be removed if the IDL attribute is set to false, and must be set to the empty string if the IDL attribute is set to true. (This corresponds to the rules for boolean content attributes.)

If a reflecting IDL attribute has a signed integer type (`long`) then, on getting, the content attribute must be parsed according to the rules for parsing signed integers, and if that is successful, and the value is in the range of the IDL attribute's type, the resulting value must be returned. If, on the other hand, it fails or returns an out of range value, or if the attribute is absent, then the default value must be returned instead, or 0 if there is no default value. On setting, the given value must be converted to the shortest possible string representing the number as a valid integer and then that string must be used as the new content attribute value.

If a reflecting IDL attribute has a signed integer type (`long`) that is limited to only non-negative numbers then, on getting, the content attribute must be parsed according to the rules for parsing non-negative integers, and if that is successful, and the value is in the range of the IDL attribute's type, the resulting value must be returned. If, on the other hand, it fails or returns an out of range value, or if the attribute is absent, the default value must be returned instead, or −1 if there is no default value. On setting, if the value is negative, the user agent must throw an `IndexSizeError` exception. Otherwise, the given value must be converted to the shortest possible string representing the number as a valid non-negative integer and then that string must be used as the new content attribute value.

If a reflecting IDL attribute has an unsigned integer type (`unsigned long`) then, on getting, the content attribute must be parsed according to the rules for parsing non-negative integers, and if that is successful, and the value is in the range 0 to 2147483647 inclusive, the resulting value must be returned. If, on the other hand, it fails or returns an out of range value, or if the attribute is absent, the default value must be returned instead, or 0 if there is no default value. On setting, first, if the new value is in the range 0 to 2147483647, then let n be the new value, otherwise let n be the default value, or 0 if there is no default value; then, n must be converted to the shortest possible string representing the number as a valid non-negative integer and that string must be used as the new content attribute value.

If a reflecting IDL attribute has an unsigned integer type (`unsigned long`) that is limited to only non-negative numbers greater than zero, then the behavior is similar to the previous case, but zero is not allowed. On getting, the content attribute must first be parsed according to the rules for parsing non-negative integers, and if that is successful, and the value is in the range 1 to 2147483647 inclusive, the resulting value must be returned. If, on the other hand, it fails or returns an out of range value, or if the attribute is absent, the default value must be returned instead, or 1 if there is no default value. On setting, if the value is zero, the user agent must throw an `IndexSizeError` exception. Otherwise, first, if the new value is in the range 1 to 2147483647, then let n be the new value, otherwise let n be the default value, or 1 if there is no default value; then, n must be converted to the shortest possible string representing the number as a valid non-negative integer and that string must be used as the new content attribute value.

If a reflecting IDL attribute has a floating-point number type (`double` or `unrestricted double`), then, on getting, the content attribute must be parsed according to the rules for parsing floating-point number values, and if that is successful, the resulting value must be returned. If, on the other hand, it fails, or if the attribute is absent, the default value must be returned instead, or 0.0 if there is no default value. On setting, the given value must be converted to the best representation of the number as a floating-point number and then that string must be used as the new content attribute value.

If a reflecting IDL attribute has a floating-point number type (`double` or `unrestricted double`) that is limited to numbers greater than zero, then the behavior is similar to the previous case, but zero and negative values are not allowed. On getting, the content attribute must be parsed according to the rules for parsing floating-point number values, and if that is successful and the value is greater than 0.0, the resulting value must be returned. If, on the other hand, it fails or returns an out of range value, or if the attribute is absent, the default value must be returned instead, or 0.0 if there is no default value. On setting, if the value is less than or equal to zero, then the value must be ignored. Otherwise, the given value must be converted to the best representation of the number as a floating-point number and then that string must be used as the new content attribute value.

The values Infinity and Not-a-Number (NaN) values throw an exception on setting, as defined in the Web IDL specification. [WEBIDL]

If a reflecting IDL attribute has the type `DOMTokenList` or `DOMSettableTokenList`, then on getting it must return a `DOMTokenList` or `DOMSettableTokenList` object (as appropriate) whose associated element is the element in question and whose associated attribute's local name is the name of the attribute in question. The same `DOMTokenList` or `DOMSettableTokenList` object must be returned every time for each attribute.

If a reflecting IDL attribute has the type `HTMLElement`, or an interface that descends from `HTMLElement`, then, on getting, it must run the following algorithm (stopping at the first point where a value is returned):

1. If the corresponding content attribute is absent, then the IDL attribute must return null.
2. Let candidate be the element that the `document.getElementById()` method would find when called on the content attribute's element's node document if it were passed as its argument the current value of the corresponding content attribute.
3. If candidate is null, or if it is not type-compatible with the IDL attribute, then the IDL attribute must return null.
4. Otherwise, it must return candidate.

On setting, if the given element has an `id` attribute, and has the same home subtree as the element of the attribute being set, and the given element is the first element in that home subtree whose ID is the value of that `id` attribute, then the content attribute must be set to the value of that `id` attribute. Otherwise, the content attribute must be set to the empty string.

#### 2.7.2 Collections

The `HTMLAllCollection`, `HTMLFormControlsCollection`, `HTMLOptionsCollection`, and `HTMLPropertiesCollection` interfaces are collections derived from the `HTMLCollection` interface.

##### 2.7.2.1 HTMLAllCollection

The `HTMLAllCollection` interface is used for the legacy `document.all` attribute. It operates similarly to `HTMLCollection`; the main differences are that its `namedItem()` method returns an `HTMLCollection` object when there are multiple matching elements, and that its `item()` method can be used as a synonym for its `namedItem()` method.

All `HTMLAllCollection` objects are rooted at a `Document` and have a filter that matches all elements, so the elements represented by the collection of an `HTMLAllCollection` object consist of all the descendant elements of the root `Document`.

    interface HTMLAllCollection : HTMLCollection {
      // inherits length and 'getter'
      Element? item(unsigned long index);
      (HTMLCollection or Element)? item(DOMString name);
      legacycaller getter (HTMLCollection or Element)? namedItem(DOMString name); // shadows inherited namedItem()
    };

collection . `length`

  Returns the number of elements in the collection.

element = collection . `item`(index)
collection[index]

  Returns the item with index index from the collection. The items are sorted in tree order.

element = collection . `item`(name)
collection = collection . `item`(name)
element = collection . `namedItem`(name)
collection = collection . `namedItem`(name)
element = collection(name)
collection = collection(name)
collection[name]

  Returns the item with ID or name name from the collection.

  If there are multiple matching items, then an `HTMLCollection` object containing all those elements is returned.

  Only `button`, `form`, `iframe`, `input`, `map`, `meta`, `object`, `select`, and `textarea` elements can have a name for the purpose of this method; their name is given by the value of their `name` attribute.

The object's supported property indices are as defined for `HTMLCollection` objects.

The `item()` method, when invoked with a numeric argument, must act like the item() method inherited from `HTMLCollection`.

The following elements are "all"-named elements: `a`, `applet`, `button`, `embed`, `form`, `frame`, `frameset`, `iframe`, `img`, `input`, `map`, `meta`, `object`, `select`, and `textarea`

The supported property names consist of the non-empty values of all the `id` attributes of all the elements represented by the collection, and the non-empty values of all the `name` attributes of all the "all"-named elements represented by the collection, in tree order, ignoring later duplicates, with the `id` of an element preceding its `name` if it contributes both, they differ from each other, and neither is the duplicate of an earlier entry.

The properties exposed in this way must be unenumerable.

The `item(name)` and `namedItem(name)` methods must act according to the following algorithm:

1. If name is the empty string, return null and stop the algorithm.

2. Let collection be an `HTMLCollection` object rooted at the same `Document` as the `HTMLAllCollection` object on which the method was invoked, whose filter matches only elements that are either:

   - "all"-named elements with a `name` attribute equal to name, or,
   - elements with an ID equal to name.
3. If, at the time the method is called, there is exactly one node in collection, then return that node and stop the algorithm.
4. Otherwise, if, at the time the method is called, collection is empty, return null and stop the algorithm.
5. Otherwise, return collection.

##### 2.7.2.2 HTMLFormControlsCollection

The `HTMLFormControlsCollection` interface is used for collections of listed elements in `form` and `fieldset` elements.

    interface HTMLFormControlsCollection : HTMLCollection {
      // inherits length and item()
      legacycaller getter (RadioNodeList or Element)? namedItem(DOMString name); // shadows inherited namedItem()
    };

    interface RadioNodeList : NodeList {
              attribute DOMString value;
    };

collection . `length`

  Returns the number of elements in the collection.

element = collection . `item`(index)
collection[index]

  Returns the item with index index from the collection. The items are sorted in tree order.

element = collection . `namedItem`(name)
radioNodeList = collection . `namedItem`(name)
collection[name]
collection(name)

  Returns the item with ID or `name` name from the collection.

  If there are multiple matching items, then a `RadioNodeList` object containing all those elements is returned.

radioNodeList . value [ = value ]

  Returns the value of the first checked radio button represented by the object.

  Can be set, to check the first radio button with the given value represented by the object.

The object's supported property indices are as defined for `HTMLCollection` objects.

The supported property names consist of the non-empty values of all the `id` and `name` attributes of all the elements represented by the collection, in tree order, ignoring later duplicates, with the `id` of an element preceding its `name` if it contributes both, they differ from each other, and neither is the duplicate of an earlier entry.

The properties exposed in this way must be unenumerable.

The `namedItem(name)` method must act according to the following algorithm:

1. If name is the empty string, return null and stop the algorithm.
2. If, at the time the method is called, there is exactly one node in the collection that has either an `id` attribute or a `name` attribute equal to name, then return that node and stop the algorithm.
3. Otherwise, if there are no nodes in the collection that have either an `id` attribute or a `name` attribute equal to name, then return null and stop the algorithm.
4. Otherwise, create a new `RadioNodeList` object representing a live view of the `HTMLFormControlsCollection` object, further filtered so that the only nodes in the `RadioNodeList` object are those that have either an `id` attribute or a `name` attribute equal to name. The nodes in the `RadioNodeList` object must be sorted in tree order.
5. Return that `RadioNodeList` object.

Members of the `RadioNodeList` interface inherited from the `NodeList` interface must behave as they would on a `NodeList` object.

The `value` IDL attribute on the `RadioNodeList` object, on getting, must return the value returned by running the following steps:

1. Let element be the first element in tree order represented by the `RadioNodeList` object that is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state and whose checkedness is true. Otherwise, let it be null.

2. If element is null, return the empty string.

3. If element is an element with no `value` attribute, return the string "`on`".

4. Otherwise, return the value of element's `value` attribute.

On setting, the `value` IDL attribute must run the following steps:

1. If the new value is the string "`on`": let element be the first element in tree order represented by the `RadioNodeList` object that is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state and whose `value` content attribute is either absent, or present and equal to the new value, if any. If no such element exists, then instead let element be null.

   Otherwise: let element be the first element in tree order represented by the `RadioNodeList` object that is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state and whose `value` content attribute is present and equal to the new value, if any. If no such element exists, then instead let element be null.

2. If element is not null, then set its checkedness to true.

##### 2.7.2.3 HTMLOptionsCollection

The `HTMLOptionsCollection` interface is used for collections of `option` elements. It is always rooted on a `select` element and has attributes and methods that manipulate that element's descendants.

    interface HTMLOptionsCollection : HTMLCollection {
      // inherits item()
               attribute unsigned long length; // shadows inherited length
      legacycaller HTMLOptionElement? (DOMString name);
      setter creator void (unsigned long index, HTMLOptionElement? option);
      void add((HTMLOptionElement or HTMLOptGroupElement) element, optional (HTMLElement or long)? before = null);
      void remove(long index);
               attribute long selectedIndex;
    };

collection . `length` [ = value ]

  Returns the number of elements in the collection.

  When set to a smaller number, truncates the number of `option` elements in the corresponding container.

  When set to a greater number, adds new blank `option` elements to that container.

element = collection . `item`(index)
collection[index]

  Returns the item with index index from the collection. The items are sorted in tree order.

element = collection . `namedItem`(name)
nodeList = collection . `namedItem`(name)
collection[name]
collection(name)

  Returns the item with ID or `name` name from the collection.

  If there are multiple matching items, then the first is returned.

collection . `add`(element [, before ] )

  Inserts element before the node given by before.

  The before argument can be a number, in which case element is inserted before the item with that number, or an element from the collection, in which case element is inserted before that element.

  If before is omitted, null, or a number out of range, then element will be added at the end of the list.

  This method will throw a `HierarchyRequestError` exception if element is an ancestor of the element into which it is to be inserted.

collection . `selectedIndex` [ = value ]

  Returns the index of the first selected item, if any, or −1 if there is no selected item.

  Can be set, to change the selection.

The object's supported property indices are as defined for `HTMLCollection` objects.

On getting, the `length` attribute must return the number of nodes represented by the collection.

On setting, the behavior depends on whether the new value is equal to, greater than, or less than the number of nodes represented by the collection at that time. If the number is the same, then setting the attribute must do nothing. If the new value is greater, then n new `option` elements with no attributes and no child nodes must be appended to the `select` element on which the `HTMLOptionsCollection` is rooted, where n is the difference between the two numbers (new value minus old value). Mutation events must be fired as if a `DocumentFragment` containing the new `option` elements had been inserted. If the new value is lower, then the last n nodes in the collection must be removed from their parent nodes, where n is the difference between the two numbers (old value minus new value).

Setting `length` never removes or adds any `optgroup` elements, and never adds new children to existing `optgroup` elements (though it can remove children from them).

The supported property names consist of the non-empty values of all the `id` and `name` attributes of all the elements represented by the collection, in tree order, ignoring later duplicates, with the `id` of an element preceding its `name` if it contributes both, they differ from each other, and neither is the duplicate of an earlier entry.

The properties exposed in this way must be unenumerable.

The legacy caller of the `HTMLOptionsCollection` interface must act like the `namedItem()` method on the ancestor `HTMLCollection` interface.

When the user agent is to set the value of a new indexed property or set the value of an existing indexed property for a given property index index to a new value value, it must run the following algorithm:

1. If value is null, invoke the steps for the `remove` method with index as the argument, and abort these steps.

2. Let length be the number of nodes represented by the collection.

3. Let n be index minus length.

4. If n is greater than zero, then append a `DocumentFragment` consisting of n-1 new `option` elements with no attributes and no child nodes to the `select` element on which the `HTMLOptionsCollection` is rooted.

5. If n is greater than or equal to zero, append value to the `select` element. Otherwise, replace the indexth element in the collection by value.

The `add(element, before)` method must act according to the following algorithm:

1. If element is an ancestor of the `select` element on which the `HTMLOptionsCollection` is rooted, then throw a `HierarchyRequestError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If before is an element, but that element isn't a descendant of the `select` element on which the `HTMLOptionsCollection` is rooted, then throw a `NotFoundError` exception and abort these steps.

3. If element and before are the same element, then return and abort these steps.

4. If before is a node, then let reference be that node. Otherwise, if before is an integer, and there is a beforeth node in the collection, let reference be that node. Otherwise, let reference be null.

5. If reference is not null, let parent be the parent node of reference. Otherwise, let parent be the `select` element on which the `HTMLOptionsCollection` is rooted.

6. Act as if the DOM `insertBefore()` method was invoked on the parent node, with element as the first argument and reference as the second argument.

The `remove(index)` method must act according to the following algorithm:

1. If the number of nodes represented by the collection is zero, abort these steps.

2. If index is not a number greater than or equal to 0 and less than the number of nodes represented by the collection, abort these steps.

3. Let element be the indexth element in the collection.

4. Remove element from its parent node.

The `selectedIndex` IDL attribute must act like the identically named attribute on the `select` element on which the `HTMLOptionsCollection` is rooted

##### 2.7.2.4 HTMLPropertiesCollection

The `HTMLPropertiesCollection` interface is used for collections of elements that add name-value pairs to a particular item in the microdata model.

    interface HTMLPropertiesCollection : HTMLCollection {
      // inherits length and item()
      getter PropertyNodeList? namedItem(DOMString name); // shadows inherited namedItem()
      readonly attribute DOMString[] names;
    };

    typedef sequence<any> PropertyValueArray;

    interface PropertyNodeList : NodeList {
      PropertyValueArray getValues();
    };

collection . `length`

  Returns the number of elements in the collection.

element = collection . `item`(index)
collection[index]

  Returns the element with index index from the collection. The items are sorted in tree order.

propertyNodeList = collection . `namedItem`(name)

  Returns a `PropertyNodeList` object containing any elements that add a property named name.

collection[name]

  Returns a `PropertyNodeList` object containing any elements that add a property named name. The name index has to be one of the values listed in the `names` list.

collection . `names`

  Returns an array with the property names of the elements in the collection.

propertyNodeList . `getValues`()

  Returns an array of the various values that the relevant elements have.

The object's supported property indices are as defined for `HTMLCollection` objects.

The supported property names consist of the property names of all the elements represented by the collection, in tree order, ignoring later duplicates.

The properties exposed in this way must be unenumerable.

The `names` attribute must return a live read only array object giving the property names of all the elements represented by the collection, listed in tree order, but with duplicates removed, leaving only the first occurrence of each name. The same object must be returned each time.

The `namedItem(name)` method must return a `PropertyNodeList` object representing a live view of the `HTMLPropertiesCollection` object, further filtered so that the only nodes in the `PropertyNodeList` object are those that have a property name equal to name. The nodes in the `PropertyNodeList` object must be sorted in tree order, and the same object must be returned each time a particular name is queried.

Members of the `PropertyNodeList` interface inherited from the `NodeList` interface must behave as they would on a `NodeList` object.

The `getValues` method the `PropertyNodeList` object must return a newly constructed array whose values are the values obtained from the `itemValue` IDL attribute of each of the elements represented by the object, in tree order.

#### 2.7.3 DOMStringMap

The `DOMStringMap` interface represents a set of name-value pairs. It exposes these using the scripting language's native mechanisms for property access.

When a `DOMStringMap` object is instantiated, it is associated with three algorithms, one for getting the list of name-value pairs, one for setting names to certain values, and one for deleting names.

    [OverrideBuiltins, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface DOMStringMap {
      getter DOMString (DOMString name);
      setter creator void (DOMString name, DOMString value);
      deleter void (DOMString name);
    };

The supported property names on a `DOMStringMap` object at any instant are the names of each pair returned from the algorithm for getting the list of name-value pairs at that instant, in the order returned.

To determine the value of a named property name in a `DOMStringMap`, the user agent must return the value component of the name-value pair whose name component is name in the list returned by the algorithm for getting the list of name-value pairs.

To set the value of a new or existing named property name to value value, the algorithm for setting names to certain values must be run, passing name as the name and the result of converting value to a `DOMString` as the value.

To delete an existing named property name, the algorithm for deleting names must be run, passing name as the name.

The `DOMStringMap` interface definition here is only intended for JavaScript environments. Other language bindings will need to define how `DOMStringMap` is to be implemented for those languages.

The `dataset` attribute on elements exposes the `data-*` attributes on the element.

Given the following fragment and elements with similar constructions:

    <img class="tower" id="tower5" data-x="12" data-y="5"
         data-ai="robotarget" data-hp="46" data-ability="flames"
         src="towers/rocket.png alt="Rocket Tower">

...one could imagine a function `splashDamage()` that takes some arguments, the first of which is the element to process:

    function splashDamage(node, x, y, damage) {
      if (node.classList.contains('tower') && // checking the 'class' attribute
          node.dataset.x == x && // reading the 'data-x' attribute
          node.dataset.y == y) { // reading the 'data-y' attribute
        var hp = parseInt(node.dataset.hp); // reading the 'data-hp' attribute
        hp = hp - damage;
        if (hp < 0) {
          hp = 0;
          node.dataset.ai = 'dead'; // setting the 'data-ai' attribute
          delete node.dataset.ability; // removing the 'data-ability' attribute
        }
        node.dataset.hp = hp; // setting the 'data-hp' attribute
      }
    }

#### 2.7.4 DOMElementMap

The `DOMElementMap` interface represents a set of name-element mappings. It exposes these using the scripting language's native mechanisms for property access.

When a `DOMElementMap` object is instantiated, it is associated with three algorithms, one for getting the list of name-element mappings, one for mapping a name to a certain element, and one for deleting mappings by name.

    interface DOMElementMap {
      getter Element (DOMString name);
      setter creator void (DOMString name, Element value);
      deleter void (DOMString name);
    };

The supported property names on a `DOMElementMap` object at any instant are the names for each mapping returned from the algorithm for getting the list of name-element mappings at that instant, in the order returned.

To determine the value of a named property name in a `DOMElementMap`, the user agent must return the element component of the name-element mapping whose name component is name in the list returned by the algorithm for getting the list of name-element mappings.

To set the value of a new or existing named property name to value value, the algorithm for mapping a name to a certain element must be run, passing name as the name value as the element.

To delete an existing named property name, the algorithm for deleting mappings must be run, passing name as the name component of the mapping to be deleted.

The `DOMElementMap` interface definition here is only intended for JavaScript environments. Other language bindings will need to define how `DOMElementMap` is to be implemented for those languages.

#### 2.7.5 Transferable objects

Some objects support being copied and closed in one operation. This is called transferring the object, and is used in particular to transfer ownership of unsharable or expensive resources across worker boundaries.

The following `Transferable` types exist:

- `ArrayBuffer` [ECMA262]
- `CanvasProxy` (defined in this specification)
- `MessagePort` (defined in this specification)

The following IDL block formalizes this:

    typedef (ArrayBuffer or CanvasProxy or MessagePort) Transferable;

To transfer a `Transferable` object to a new owner, the user agent must run the steps defined for the type of object in question. The steps will return a new object of the same type, and will permanently neuter the original object. (This is an irreversible and non-idempotent operation; once an object has been transferred, it cannot be transferred, or indeed used, again.)

To transfer an `ArrayBuffer` object old to a new owner owner, a user agent must create a new `ArrayBuffer` object pointing at the same underlying data as old, thus obtaining new, must neuter the old object, and must finally return new. [ECMA262]

Rules for how to transfer a `CanvasProxy` object and how to transfer a `MessagePort` object are given in the relevant sections of this specification.

#### 2.7.6 Safe passing of structured data

When a user agent is required to obtain a structured clone of a value, optionally with a transfer map, it must run the following algorithm, which either returns a separate value, or throws an exception. If a transfer map is provided, it consists of an association list of `Transferable` objects to placeholder objects.

1. Let input be the value being cloned.

2. Let transfer map be the transfer map passed to the algorithm, if any, or the empty list otherwise.

3. Let memory be an association list of pairs of objects, initially empty. This is used to handle duplicate references. In each pair of objects, one is called the source object and the other the destination object.

4. For each mapping in transfer map, add a mapping from the `Transferable` object (the source object) to the placeholder object (the destination object) to memory.

5. Let output be the value resulting from calling the internal structured cloning algorithm with input as the "input" argument, and memory as the "memory" argument.

6. Return output.

The internal structured cloning algorithm is always called with two arguments, input and memory, and its behavior is as follows:

1. If input is the source object of a pair of objects in memory, then return the destination object in that pair of objects and abort these steps.

2. If input is a primitive value, then return that value and abort these steps.

3. Let deep clone be none.

4. The input value is an object. Jump to the appropriate step below:

   If input is a `Boolean` object

     Let output be a newly constructed Boolean object with the same value as input.

   If input is a `Number` object

     Let output be a newly constructed Number object with the same value as input.

   If input is a `String` object

     Let output be a newly constructed String object with the same value as input.

   If input is a `Date` object

     Let output be a newly constructed `Date` object with the same value as input.

   If input is a `RegExp` object

     Let output be a newly constructed `RegExp` object with the same pattern and flags as input.

     The value of the `lastIndex` property is not copied.

   If input is a `Blob` object

     If input has been disabled through the `close()` method, throw a `DataCloneError` exception and abort the overall structured clone algorithm. Otherwise, let output be a newly constructed object of the same class as input, corresponding to the same underlying data.

   If input is a `FileList` object

     Let output be a newly constructed `FileList` object containing a list of newly constructed `File` objects corresponding to the same underlying data as those in input, maintaining their relative order.

   If input is an `ImageData` object

     Let output be a newly constructed `ImageData` object whose `width` and `height` have values equal to the corresponding attributes on input, and whose `data` attribute has the value obtained from invoking the internal structured cloning algorithm recursively with the value of the `data` attribute on input as the new "input" argument and memory as the new "memory" argument.

   If input is an `ImageBitmap` object

     Let output be a newly constructed `ImageBitmap` object whose bitmap data is a copy of input's bitmap data.

   If input is an `ArrayBuffer` object

     If input has been neutered, throw a `DataCloneError` exception and abort the overall structured clone algorithm. Otherwise, let output be a newly constructed `ArrayBuffer` object whose contents are a copy of input's contents, with the same length.

   If input is an object with a [[DataView]] internal slot

     Let output be a newly constructed object of the same class as input, with its [[DataView]] internal property present, its [[ViewedArrayBuffer]] internal property set to the value obtained from invoking the internal structured cloning algorithm recursively with the value of the internal property on input as the new "input" argument and memory as the new "memory" argument, and with the [[ByteLength]] and [[ByteOffset]] internal properties set to the same value as their counterparts on input.

   If input is an `Array` object

     Let output be a newly constructed empty `Array` object whose `length` is equal to the `length` of input, and set deep clone to own.

     This means that the length of sparse arrays is preserved.

   If input is an `Object` object

     Let output be a newly constructed empty `Object` object, and set deep clone to own.

   If input is a `Map` object

     Let output be a newly constructed empty `Map` object, and set deep clone to map.

   If input is a `Set` object

     Let output be a newly constructed empty `Set` object, and set deep clone to set.

   If input is an object that another specification defines how to clone

     Let output be a clone of the object as defined by the other specification.

   If input is another native object type (e.g. `Error`, `Function`)
   If input is a host object (e.g. a DOM node)

     Throw a `DataCloneError` exception and abort the overall structured clone algorithm.

   For the purposes of the algorithm above, an object is a particular type of object class if its [[Class]] internal property is equal to class.

   For example, "input is an `Object` object" if input's [[Class]] internal property is equal to the string "`Object`".

5. Add a mapping from input (the source object) to output (the destination object) to memory.

6. If deep clone is set to map, then run these substeps. These substeps use the terminology and typographic conventions used in the JavaScript specification's definition of Maps. [ECMA262]

   1. Let source be the List that is the value of input's [[MapData]] internal slot, if any. If there is no such slot, then instead throw a `DataCloneError` exception and abort the overall structured clone algorithm. [ECMA262]

   2. Let target be the List that is the value of output's [[MapData]] internal slot.

   3. For each Record {[[key]], [[value]]} entry that is an element of source, run the following substeps:

      1. Let key have the value obtained from invoking the internal structured cloning algorithm recursively with entry.[[key]] as the new "input" argument and memory as the new "memory" argument.

      2. Let value have the value obtained from invoking the internal structured cloning algorithm recursively with entry.[[value]] as the new "input" argument and memory as the new "memory" argument.

      3. Let new entry be the Record {[[key]]: key, [[value]]: value}.

      4. Append new entry as the last element of target.

   4. Set deep clone to own.

7. If deep clone is set to set, then run these substeps. These substeps use the terminology and typographic conventions used in the JavaScript specification's definition of Sets. [ECMA262]

   1. Let source be the List that is the value of input's [[SetData]] internal slot, if any. If there is no such slot, then instead throw a `DataCloneError` exception and abort the overall structured clone algorithm. [ECMA262]

   2. Let target be the List that is the value of output's [[SetData]] internal slot.

   3. For each entry that is an element of source that is not empty, run the following substeps:

      1. Let new entry have the value obtained from invoking the internal structured cloning algorithm recursively with entry as the new "input" argument and memory as the new "memory" argument.

      2. Append new entry as the last element of target.

   4. Set deep clone to own.

8. If deep clone is set to own, then, for each enumerable own property in input, run the following steps:

   1. Let name be the name of the property.

   2. Let source value be the result of calling the [[Get]] internal method of input with the argument name. If the [[Get]] internal method of a property involved executing script, and that script threw an uncaught exception, then abort the overall structured clone algorithm, with that exception being passed through to the caller.

   3. Let cloned value be the result of invoking the internal structured cloning algorithm recursively with source value as the "input" argument and memory as the "memory" argument. If this results in an exception, then abort the overall structured clone algorithm, with that exception being passed through to the caller.

   4. Add a new property to output having the name name, and having the value cloned value.

   The order of the properties in the input and output objects must be the same, and any properties whose [[Get]] internal method involves running script must be processed in that same order.

   This does not walk the prototype chain.

   Property descriptors, setters, getters, and analogous features are not copied in this process. For example, the property in the input could be marked as read-only, but in the output it would just have the default state (typically read-write, though that could depend on the scripting environment).

   Properties of Array objects are not treated any differently than those of other Objects. In particular, this means that non-index properties of arrays are copied as well.

9. Return output.

This algorithm preserves cycles and preserves the identity of duplicate objects in graphs.

#### 2.7.7 Callbacks

The following callback function type is used in various APIs that interact with `File` objects:

    callback FileCallback = void (File file);

#### 2.7.8 Garbage collection

There is an implied strong reference from any IDL attribute that returns a pre-existing object to that object.

For example, the `document.location` attribute means that there is a strong reference from a `Document` object to its `Location` object. Similarly, there is always a strong reference from a `Document` to any descendant nodes, and from any node to its owner `Document`.

### 2.8 Namespaces

The HTML namespace is: `http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml`

The MathML namespace is: `http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML`

The SVG namespace is: `http://www.w3.org/2000/svg`

The XLink namespace is: `http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink`

The XML namespace is: `http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace`

The XMLNS namespace is: `http://www.w3.org/2000/xmlns/`

Data mining tools and other user agents that perform operations on content without running scripts, evaluating CSS or XPath expressions, or otherwise exposing the resulting DOM to arbitrary content, may "support namespaces" by just asserting that their DOM node analogues are in certain namespaces, without actually exposing the above strings.

In the HTML syntax, namespace prefixes and namespace declarations do not have the same effect as in XML. For instance, the colon has no special meaning in HTML element names.

## 3 Semantics, structure, and APIs of HTML documents

### 3.1 Documents

Every XML and HTML document in an HTML UA is represented by a `Document` object. [DOM]

The document's address is the URL associated with a `Document` (as defined in the DOM standard). It is initially set when the `Document` is created, but that can change during the lifetime of the `Document`; for example, it changes when the user navigates to a fragment identifier on the page and when the `pushState()` method is called with a new URL. [DOM]

Interactive user agents typically expose the document's address in their user interface. This is the primary mechanism by which a user can tell if a site is attempting to impersonate another.

When a `Document` is created by a script using the `createDocument()` or `createHTMLDocument()` APIs, the document's address is the same as the document's address of the responsible document specified by the script's settings object, and the `Document` is both ready for post-load tasks and completely loaded immediately.

The document's referrer is an absolute URL that can be set when the `Document` is created. If it is not explicitly set, then its value is the empty string.

Each `Document` object has a reload override flag that is originally unset. The flag is set by the `document.open()` and `document.write()` methods in certain situations. When the flag is set, the `Document` also has a reload override buffer which is a Unicode string that is used as the source of the document when it is reloaded.

When the user agent is to perform an overridden reload, given a source browsing context, it must act as follows:

1. Let source be the value of the browsing context's active document's reload override buffer.

2. Let address be the browsing context's active document's address.

3. Navigate the browsing context to a resource whose source is source, with replacement enabled and exceptions enabled. The source browsing context is that given to the overridden reload algorithm. When the navigate algorithm creates a `Document` object for this purpose, set that `Document`'s reload override flag and set its reload override buffer to source.

   When it comes time to set the document's address in the navigation algorithm, use address as the override URL.

#### 3.1.1 The `Document` object

The DOM specification defines a `Document` interface, which this specification extends significantly:

    enum DocumentReadyState { "loading", "interactive", "complete" };

    [OverrideBuiltins]
    partial /*sealed*/ interface Document {
      // resource metadata management
      [PutForwards=href, Unforgeable] readonly attribute Location? location;
               attribute DOMString domain;
      readonly attribute DOMString referrer;
               attribute DOMString cookie;
      readonly attribute DOMString lastModified;
      readonly attribute DocumentReadyState readyState;

      // DOM tree accessors
      getter object (DOMString name);
               attribute DOMString title;
               attribute DOMString dir;
               attribute HTMLElement? body;
      readonly attribute HTMLHeadElement? head;
      readonly attribute HTMLCollection images;
      readonly attribute HTMLCollection embeds;
      readonly attribute HTMLCollection plugins;
      readonly attribute HTMLCollection links;
      readonly attribute HTMLCollection forms;
      readonly attribute HTMLCollection scripts;
      NodeList getElementsByName(DOMString elementName);
      NodeList getItems(optional DOMString typeNames = ""); // microdata
      readonly attribute DOMElementMap cssElementMap;
      readonly attribute HTMLScriptElement? currentScript;

      // dynamic markup insertion
      Document open(optional DOMString type = "text/html", optional DOMString replace = "");
      WindowProxy open(DOMString url, DOMString name, DOMString features, optional boolean replace = false);
      void close();
      void write(DOMString... text);
      void writeln(DOMString... text);

      // user interaction
      readonly attribute WindowProxy? defaultView;
      readonly attribute Element? activeElement;
      boolean hasFocus();
               attribute DOMString designMode;
      boolean execCommand(DOMString commandId, optional boolean showUI = false, optional DOMString value = "");
      boolean queryCommandEnabled(DOMString commandId);
      boolean queryCommandIndeterm(DOMString commandId);
      boolean queryCommandState(DOMString commandId);
      boolean queryCommandSupported(DOMString commandId);
      DOMString queryCommandValue(DOMString commandId);
      readonly attribute HTMLCollection commands;

      // special event handler IDL attributes that only apply to Document objects
      [LenientThis] attribute EventHandler onreadystatechange;

      // also has obsolete members
    };
    Document implements GlobalEventHandlers;

#### 3.1.2 Resource metadata management

document . `referrer`

  Returns the address of the `Document` from which the user navigated to this one, unless it was blocked or there was no such document, in which case it returns the empty string.

  The `noreferrer` link type can be used to block the referrer.

The `referrer` attribute must return the document's referrer.

In the case of HTTP, the `referrer` IDL attribute will match the `Referer` (sic) header that was sent when fetching the current page.

Typically user agents are configured to not report referrers in the case where the referrer uses an encrypted protocol and the current page does not (e.g. when navigating from an `https:` page to an `http:` page).

document . `cookie` [ = value ]

  Returns the HTTP cookies that apply to the `Document`. If there are no cookies or cookies can't be applied to this resource, the empty string will be returned.

  Can be set, to add a new cookie to the element's set of HTTP cookies.

  If the contents are sandboxed into a unique origin (e.g. in an `iframe` with the `sandbox` attribute), a `SecurityError` exception will be thrown on getting and setting.

The `cookie` attribute represents the cookies of the resource identified by the document's address.

A `Document` object that falls into one of the following conditions is a cookie-averse `Document` object:

- A `Document` that has no browsing context.
- A `Document` whose address does not use a server-based naming authority.

On getting, if the document is a cookie-averse `Document` object, then the user agent must return the empty string. Otherwise, if the `Document`'s origin is not a scheme/host/port tuple, the user agent must throw a `SecurityError` exception. Otherwise, the user agent must first obtain the storage mutex and then return the cookie-string for the document's address for a "non-HTTP" API, decoded using the UTF-8 decoder. [COOKIES]

On setting, if the document is a cookie-averse `Document` object, then the user agent must do nothing. Otherwise, if the `Document`'s origin is not a scheme/host/port tuple, the user agent must throw a `SecurityError` exception. Otherwise, the user agent must obtain the storage mutex and then act as it would when receiving a set-cookie-string for the document's address via a "non-HTTP" API, consisting of the new value encoded as UTF-8. [COOKIES] [ENCODING]

Since the `cookie` attribute is accessible across frames, the path restrictions on cookies are only a tool to help manage which cookies are sent to which parts of the site, and are not in any way a security feature.

document . `lastModified`

  Returns the date of the last modification to the document, as reported by the server, in the form "`MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss`", in the user's local time zone.

  If the last modification date is not known, the current time is returned instead.

The `lastModified` attribute, on getting, must return the date and time of the `Document`'s source file's last modification, in the user's local time zone, in the following format:

1. The month component of the date.
2. A U+002F SOLIDUS character (/).
3. The day component of the date.
4. A U+002F SOLIDUS character (/).
5. The year component of the date.
6. A U+0020 SPACE character.
7. The hours component of the time.
8. A U+003A COLON character (:).
9. The minutes component of the time.
10. A U+003A COLON character (:).
11. The seconds component of the time.

All the numeric components above, other than the year, must be given as two ASCII digits representing the number in base ten, zero-padded if necessary. The year must be given as the shortest possible string of four or more ASCII digits representing the number in base ten, zero-padded if necessary.

The `Document`'s source file's last modification date and time must be derived from relevant features of the networking protocols used, e.g. from the value of the HTTP `Last-Modified` header of the document, or from metadata in the file system for local files. If the last modification date and time are not known, the attribute must return the current date and time in the above format.

document . `readyState`

  Returns "`loading`" while the `Document` is loading, "`interactive`" once it is finished parsing but still loading sub-resources, and "`complete`" once it has loaded.

  The `readystatechange` event fires on the `Document` object when this value changes.

Each document has a current document readiness. When a `Document` object is created, it must have its current document readiness set to the string "`loading`" if the document is associated with an HTML parser, an XML parser, or an XSLT processor, and to the string "`complete`" otherwise. Various algorithms during page loading affect this value. When the value is set, the user agent must fire a simple event named `readystatechange` at the `Document` object.

A `Document` is said to have an active parser if it is associated with an HTML parser or an XML parser that has not yet been stopped or aborted.

The `readyState` IDL attribute must, on getting, return the current document readiness.

#### 3.1.3 DOM tree accessors

The `html` element of a document is the document's root element, if there is one and it's an `html` element, or null otherwise.

document . `head`

  Returns the `head` element.

The `head` element of a document is the first `head` element that is a child of the `html` element, if there is one, or null otherwise.

The `head` attribute, on getting, must return the `head` element of the document (a `head` element or null).

document . `title` [ = value ]

  Returns the document's title, as given by the `title` element for HTML and as given by the SVG `title` element for SVG.

  Can be set, to update the document's title. If there is no appropriate element to update, the new value is ignored.

The `title` element of a document is the first `title` element in the document (in tree order), if there is one, or null otherwise.

The `title` attribute must, on getting, run the following algorithm:

1. If the root element is an `svg` element in the SVG namespace, then let value be a concatenation of the data of all the child `Text` nodes of the first `title` element in the SVG namespace that is a child of the root element. [SVG]

2. Otherwise, let value be a concatenation of the data of all the child `Text` nodes of the `title` element, in tree order, or the empty string if the `title` element is null.

3. Strip and collapse whitespace in value.

4. Return value.

On setting, the steps corresponding to the first matching condition in the following list must be run:

If the root element is an `svg` element in the SVG namespace [SVG]

  1. Let element be the first `title` element in the SVG namespace that is a child of the root element, if any. If there isn't one, create a `title` element in the SVG namespace, append it to the root element, and let element be that element. [SVG]

  2. Act as if the `textContent` IDL attribute of element was set to the new value being assigned.

If the root element is in the HTML namespace

  1. If the `title` element is null and the `head` element is null, then abort these steps.

  2. If the `title` element is null, then create a new `title` element and append it to the `head` element, and let element be the newly created element; otherwise, let element be the `title` element.

  3. Act as if the `textContent` IDL attribute of element was set to the new value being assigned.

Otherwise

  Do nothing.

document . `body` [ = value ]

  Returns the body element.

  Can be set, to replace the body element.

  If the new value is not a `body` or `frameset` element, this will throw a `HierarchyRequestError` exception.

The body element of a document is the first child of the `html` element that is either a `body` element or a `frameset` element. If there is no such element, it is null.

The `body` attribute, on getting, must return the body element of the document (either a `body` element, a `frameset` element, or null). On setting, the following algorithm must be run:

1. If the new value is not a `body` or `frameset` element, then throw a `HierarchyRequestError` exception and abort these steps.
2. Otherwise, if the new value is the same as the body element, do nothing. Abort these steps.
3. Otherwise, if the body element is not null, then replace that element with the new value in the DOM, as if the root element's `replaceChild()` method had been called with the new value and the incumbent body element as its two arguments respectively, then abort these steps.
4. Otherwise, if there is no root element, throw a `HierarchyRequestError` exception and abort these steps.
5. Otherwise, the body element is null, but there's a root element. Append the new value to the root element.

document . `images`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the `img` elements in the `Document`.

document . `embeds`
document . `plugins`

  Return an `HTMLCollection` of the `embed` elements in the `Document`.

document . `links`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the `a` and `area` elements in the `Document` that have `href` attributes.

document . `forms`

  Return an `HTMLCollection` of the `form` elements in the `Document`.

document . `scripts`

  Return an `HTMLCollection` of the `script` elements in the `Document`.

The `images` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only `img` elements.

The `embeds` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only `embed` elements.

The `plugins` attribute must return the same object as that returned by the `embeds` attribute.

The `links` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only `a` elements with `href` attributes and `area` elements with `href` attributes.

The `forms` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only `form` elements.

The `scripts` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only `script` elements.

collection = document . `getElementsByName`(name)

  Returns a `NodeList` of elements in the `Document` that have a `name` attribute with the value name.

The `getElementsByName(name)` method takes a string name, and must return a live `NodeList` containing all the HTML elements in that document that have a `name` attribute whose value is equal to the name argument (in a case-sensitive manner), in tree order. When the method is invoked on a `Document` object again with the same argument, the user agent may return the same as the object returned by the earlier call. In other cases, a new `NodeList` object must be returned.

element . `cssElementMap`

  Returns a `DOMElementMap` object for the `Document` representing the current CSS element reference identifiers.

The `cssElementMap` IDL attribute allows authors to define CSS element reference identifiers, which are used in certain CSS features to override the normal ID-based mapping. [CSSIMAGES]

When a `Document` is created, it must be associated with an initially-empty CSS ID overrides list, which consists of a list of mappings each of which consists of a string name mapped to an `Element` node.

Each entry in the CSS ID overrides list, while it is in the list and is either in the `Document` or is an `img`, `video`, or `canvas` element, defines a CSS element reference identifier mapping the given name to the given `Element`. [CSSIMAGES]

On getting, the `cssElementMap` IDL attribute must return a `DOMElementMap` object, associated with the following algorithms, which expose the current mappings:

The algorithm for getting the list of name-element mappings

  Return the `Document`'s CSS ID overrides list, maintaining the order in which the entries were originally added to the list.

The algorithm for mapping a name to a certain element

  Let name be the name passed to the algorithm and element be the `Element` passed to the algorithm.

  If element is null, run the algorithm for deleting mappings by name, passing it name.

  Otherwise, if there is an entry in the `Document`'s CSS ID overrides list whose name is name, replace its current value with element.

  Otherwise, add a mapping to the `Document`'s CSS ID overrides list whose name is name and whose element is element.

The algorithm for deleting mappings by name

  If there is an entry in the `Document`'s CSS ID overrides list whose name is the name passed to this algorithm, remove it. This also undefines the CSS element reference identifier for that name. [CSSIMAGES]

The same object must be returned each time.

document . `currentScript`

  Returns the `script` element that is currently executing. In the case of reentrant `script` execution, returns the one that most recently started executing amongst those that have not yet finished executing.

  Returns null if the `Document` is not currently executing a `script` element (e.g. because the running script is an event handler, or a timeout).

The `currentScript` attribute, on getting, must return the value to which it was most recently initialized. When the `Document` is created, the `currentScript` must be initialised to null.

The `Document` interface supports named properties. The supported property names at any moment consist of the values of the `name` content attributes of all the `applet`, exposed `embed`, `form`, `iframe`, `img`, and exposed `object` elements in the `Document` that have non-empty `name` content attributes, and the values of the `id` content attributes of all the `applet` and exposed `object` elements in the `Document` that have non-empty `id` content attributes, and the values of the `id` content attributes of all the `img` elements in the `Document` that have both non-empty `name` content attributes and non-empty `id` content attributes. The supported property names must be in tree order, ignoring later duplicates, with values from `id` attributes coming before values from `name` attributes when the same element contributes both.

To determine the value of a named property name when the `Document` object is indexed for property retrieval, the user agent must return the value obtained using the following steps:

1. Let elements be the list of named elements with the name name in the `Document`.

   There will be at least one such element, by definition.

2. If elements has only one element, and that element is an `iframe` element, then return the `WindowProxy` object of the nested browsing context represented by that `iframe` element, and abort these steps.

3. Otherwise, if elements has only one element, return that element and abort these steps.

4. Otherwise return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only named elements with the name name.

Named elements with the name name, for the purposes of the above algorithm, are those that are either:

- `applet`, exposed `embed`, `form`, `iframe`, `img`, or exposed `object` elements that have a `name` content attribute whose value is name, or
- `applet` or exposed `object` elements that have an `id` content attribute whose value is name, or
- `img` elements that have an `id` content attribute whose value is name, and that have a non-empty `name` content attribute present also.

An `embed` or `object` element is said to be exposed if it has no exposed `object` ancestor, and, for `object` elements, is additionally either not showing its fallback content or has no `object` or `embed` descendants.

The `dir` attribute on the `Document` interface is defined along with the `dir` content attribute.

#### 3.1.4 Loading XML documents

    partial interface XMLDocument {
      boolean load(DOMString url);
    };

The `load(url)` method must run the following steps:

1. Let document be the `XMLDocument` object on which the method was invoked.

2. Resolve the method's first argument, relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object. If this is not successful, throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps. Otherwise, let url be the resulting absolute URL.

3. If the origin of url is not the same as the origin of document, throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

4. Remove all child nodes of document, without firing any mutation events.

5. Set the current document readiness of document to "`loading`".

6. Run the remainder of these steps asynchronously, and return true from the method.

7. Let result be a `Document` object.

8. Let success be false.

9. Fetch url from the origin of document, using the API referrer source specified by the entry settings object, with the synchronous flag set and the force same-origin flag set.

10. If the fetch attempt was successful, and the resource's Content-Type metadata is an XML MIME type, then run these substeps:

    1. Create a new XML parser associated with the result document.

    2. Pass this parser the fetched document.

    3. If there is an XML well-formedness or XML namespace well-formedness error, then remove all child nodes from result. Otherwise let success be true.

11. Queue a task to run the following steps.

    1. Set the current document readiness of document to "`complete`".

    2. Replace all the children of document by the children of result (even if it has no children), firing mutation events as if a `DocumentFragment` containing the new children had been inserted.

    3. Fire a simple event named `load` at document.

### 3.2 Elements

#### 3.2.1 Semantics

Elements, attributes, and attribute values in HTML are defined (by this specification) to have certain meanings (semantics). For example, the `ol` element represents an ordered list, and the `lang` attribute represents the language of the content.

These definitions allow HTML processors, such as Web browsers or search engines, to present and use documents and applications in a wide variety of contexts that the author might not have considered.

As a simple example, consider a Web page written by an author who only considered desktop computer Web browsers:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>My Page</title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <h1>Welcome to my page</h1>
      <p>I like cars and lorries and have a big Jeep!</p>
      <h2>Where I live</h2>
      <p>I live in a small hut on a mountain!</p>
     </body>
    </html>

Because HTML conveys meaning, rather than presentation, the same page can also be used by a small browser on a mobile phone, without any change to the page. Instead of headings being in large letters as on the desktop, for example, the browser on the mobile phone might use the same size text for the whole the page, but with the headings in bold.

But it goes further than just differences in screen size: the same page could equally be used by a blind user using a browser based around speech synthesis, which instead of displaying the page on a screen, reads the page to the user, e.g. using headphones. Instead of large text for the headings, the speech browser might use a different volume or a slower voice.

That's not all, either. Since the browsers know which parts of the page are the headings, they can create a document outline that the user can use to quickly navigate around the document, using keys for "jump to next heading" or "jump to previous heading". Such features are especially common with speech browsers, where users would otherwise find quickly navigating a page quite difficult.

Even beyond browsers, software can make use of this information. Search engines can use the headings to more effectively index a page, or to provide quick links to subsections of the page from their results. Tools can use the headings to create a table of contents (that is in fact how this very specification's table of contents is generated).

This example has focused on headings, but the same principle applies to all of the semantics in HTML.

Authors must not use elements, attributes, or attribute values for purposes other than their appropriate intended semantic purpose, as doing so prevents software from correctly processing the page.

For example, the following snippet, intended to represent the heading of a corporate site, is non-conforming because the second line is not intended to be a heading of a subsection, but merely a subheading or subtitle (a subordinate heading for the same section).

    <body>
     <h1>ACME Corporation</h1>
     <h2>The leaders in arbitrary fast delivery since 1920</h2>
     ...

The `hgroup` element is intended for these kinds of situations:

    <body>
     <hgroup>
      <h1>ACME Corporation</h1>
      <h2>The leaders in arbitrary fast delivery since 1920</h2>
     </hgroup>
     ...

The document in this next example is similarly non-conforming, despite being syntactically correct, because the data placed in the cells is clearly not tabular data, and the `cite` element mis-used:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html lang="en-GB">
     <head> <title> Demonstration </title> </head>
     <body>
      <table>
       <tr> <td> My favourite animal is the cat. </td> </tr>
       <tr>
        <td>
         —<a href="http://example.org/~ernest/"><cite>Ernest</cite></a>,
         in an essay from 1992
        </td>
       </tr>
      </table>
     </body>
    </html>

This would make software that relies on these semantics fail: for example, a speech browser that allowed a blind user to navigate tables in the document would report the quote above as a table, confusing the user; similarly, a tool that extracted titles of works from pages would extract "Ernest" as the title of a work, even though it's actually a person's name, not a title.

A corrected version of this document might be:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html lang="en-GB">
     <head> <title> Demonstration </title> </head>
     <body>
      <blockquote>
       <p> My favourite animal is the cat. </p>
      </blockquote>
      <p>
       —<a href="http://example.org/~ernest/">Ernest</a>,
       in an essay from 1992
      </p>
     </body>
    </html>

Authors must not use elements, attributes, or attribute values that are not permitted by this specification or other applicable specifications, as doing so makes it significantly harder for the language to be extended in the future.

In the next example, there is a non-conforming attribute value ("carpet") and a non-conforming attribute ("texture"), which is not permitted by this specification:

    <label>Carpet: <input type="carpet" name="c" texture="deep pile"></label>

Here would be an alternative and correct way to mark this up:

    <label>Carpet: <input type="text" class="carpet" name="c" data-texture="deep pile"></label>

Through scripting and using other mechanisms, the values of attributes, text, and indeed the entire structure of the document may change dynamically while a user agent is processing it. The semantics of a document at an instant in time are those represented by the state of the document at that instant in time, and the semantics of a document can therefore change over time. User agents must update their presentation of the document as this occurs.

HTML has a `progress` element that describes a progress bar. If its "value" attribute is dynamically updated by a script, the UA would update the rendering to show the progress changing.

#### 3.2.2 Elements in the DOM

The nodes representing HTML elements in the DOM must implement, and expose to scripts, the interfaces listed for them in the relevant sections of this specification. This includes HTML elements in XML documents, even when those documents are in another context (e.g. inside an XSLT transform).

Elements in the DOM represent things; that is, they have intrinsic meaning, also known as semantics.

For example, an `ol` element represents an ordered list.

The basic interface, from which all the HTML elements' interfaces inherit, and which must be used by elements that have no additional requirements, is the `HTMLElement` interface.

    interface HTMLElement : Element {
      // metadata attributes
               attribute DOMString title;
               attribute DOMString lang;
               attribute boolean translate;
               attribute DOMString dir;
      readonly attribute DOMStringMap dataset;

      // microdata
               attribute boolean itemScope;
      [PutForwards=value] readonly attribute DOMSettableTokenList itemType;
               attribute DOMString itemId;
      [PutForwards=value] readonly attribute DOMSettableTokenList itemRef;
      [PutForwards=value] readonly attribute DOMSettableTokenList itemProp;
      readonly attribute HTMLPropertiesCollection properties;
               attribute any itemValue; // acts as DOMString on setting

      // user interaction
               attribute boolean hidden;
      void click();
               attribute long tabIndex;
      void focus();
      void blur();
               attribute DOMString accessKey;
      readonly attribute DOMString accessKeyLabel;
               attribute boolean draggable;
      [PutForwards=value] readonly attribute DOMSettableTokenList dropzone;
               attribute DOMString contentEditable;
      readonly attribute boolean isContentEditable;
               attribute HTMLMenuElement? contextMenu;
               attribute boolean spellcheck;
      void forceSpellCheck();

      // command API
      readonly attribute DOMString? commandType;
      readonly attribute DOMString? commandLabel;
      readonly attribute DOMString? commandIcon;
      readonly attribute boolean? commandHidden;
      readonly attribute boolean? commandDisabled;
      readonly attribute boolean? commandChecked;
    };
    HTMLElement implements GlobalEventHandlers;

    interface HTMLUnknownElement : HTMLElement { };

The `HTMLElement` interface holds methods and attributes related to a number of disparate features, and the members of this interface are therefore described in various different sections of this specification.

The `HTMLUnknownElement` interface must be used for HTML elements that are not defined by this specification (or other applicable specifications).

#### 3.2.3 Element definitions

Each element in this specification has a definition that includes the following information:

Categories

  A list of categories to which the element belongs. These are used when defining the content models for each element.

Contexts in which this element can be used

  A non-normative description of where the element can be used. This information is redundant with the content models of elements that allow this one as a child, and is provided only as a convenience.

  For simplicity, only the most specific expectations are listed. For example, an element that is both flow content and phrasing content can be used anywhere that either flow content or phrasing content is expected, but since anywhere that flow content is expected, phrasing content is also expected (since all phrasing content is flow content), only "where phrasing content is expected" will be listed.

Content model

  A normative description of what content must be included as children and descendants of the element.

Tag omission in text/html

  A non-normative description of whether, in the `text/html` syntax, the start and end tags can be omitted. This information is redundant with the normative requirements given in the optional tags section, and is provided in the element definitions only as a convenience.

Content attributes

  A normative list of attributes that may be specified on the element (except where otherwise disallowed), along with non-normative descriptions of those attributes. (The content to the left of the dash is normative, the content to the right of the dash is not.)

DOM interface

  A normative definition of a DOM interface that such elements must implement.

This is then followed by a description of what the element represents, along with any additional normative conformance criteria that may apply to authors and implementations. Examples are sometimes also included.

##### 3.2.3.1 Attributes

Except where otherwise specified, attributes on HTML elements may have any string value, including the empty string. Except where explicitly stated, there is no restriction on what text can be specified in such attributes.

#### 3.2.4 Content models

Each element defined in this specification has a content model: a description of the element's expected contents. An HTML element must have contents that match the requirements described in the element's content model. The contents of an element are its children in the DOM, except for `template` elements, where the children are those in the template contents (a separate `DocumentFragment` assigned to the element when the element is created).

The space characters are always allowed between elements. User agents represent these characters between elements in the source markup as `Text` nodes in the DOM. Empty `Text` nodes and `Text` nodes consisting of just sequences of those characters are considered inter-element whitespace.

Inter-element whitespace, comment nodes, and processing instruction nodes must be ignored when establishing whether an element's contents match the element's content model or not, and must be ignored when following algorithms that define document and element semantics.

Thus, an element A is said to be preceded or followed by a second element B if A and B have the same parent node and there are no other element nodes or `Text` nodes (other than inter-element whitespace) between them. Similarly, a node is the only child of an element if that element contains no other nodes other than inter-element whitespace, comment nodes, and processing instruction nodes.

Authors must not use HTML elements anywhere except where they are explicitly allowed, as defined for each element, or as explicitly required by other specifications. For XML compound documents, these contexts could be inside elements from other namespaces, if those elements are defined as providing the relevant contexts.

For example, the Atom specification defines a `content` element. When its `type` attribute has the value `xhtml`, the Atom specification requires that it contain a single HTML `div` element. Thus, a `div` element is allowed in that context, even though this is not explicitly normatively stated by this specification. [ATOM]

In addition, HTML elements may be orphan nodes (i.e. without a parent node).

For example, creating a `td` element and storing it in a global variable in a script is conforming, even though `td` elements are otherwise only supposed to be used inside `tr` elements.

    var data = {
      name: "Banana",
      cell: document.createElement('td'),
    };

##### 3.2.4.1 The "nothing" content model

When an element's content model is nothing, the element must contain no `Text` nodes (other than inter-element whitespace) and no element nodes.

Most HTML elements whose content model is "nothing" are also, for convenience, void elements (elements that have no end tag in the HTML syntax). However, these are entirely separate concepts.

##### 3.2.4.2 Kinds of content

Each element in HTML falls into zero or more categories that group elements with similar characteristics together. The following broad categories are used in this specification:

- Metadata content
- Flow content
- Sectioning content
- Heading content
- Phrasing content
- Embedded content
- Interactive content

Some elements also fall into other categories, which are defined in other parts of this specification.

These categories are related as follows:

Sectioning content, heading content, phrasing content, embedded content, and interactive content are all types of flow content. Metadata is sometimes flow content. Metadata and interactive content are sometimes phrasing content. Embedded content is also a type of phrasing content, and sometimes is interactive content.

Other categories are also used for specific purposes, e.g. form controls are specified using a number of categories to define common requirements. Some elements have unique requirements and do not fit into any particular category.

###### 3.2.4.2.1 Metadata content

Metadata content is content that sets up the presentation or behavior of the rest of the content, or that sets up the relationship of the document with other documents, or that conveys other "out of band" information.

- `base`
- `link`
- `meta`
- `noscript`
- `script`
- `style`
- `template`
- `title`

Elements from other namespaces whose semantics are primarily metadata-related (e.g. RDF) are also metadata content.

Thus, in the XML serialisation, one can use RDF, like this:

    <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
          xmlns:r="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#">
     <head>
      <title>Hedral's Home Page</title>
      <r:RDF>
       <Person xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/10/swap/pim/contact#"
               r:about="http://hedral.example.com/#">
        <fullName>Cat Hedral</fullName>
        <mailbox r:resource="mailto:hedral@damowmow.com"/>
        <personalTitle>Sir</personalTitle>
       </Person>
      </r:RDF>
     </head>
     <body>
      <h1>My home page</h1>
      <p>I like playing with string, I guess. Sister says squirrels are fun
      too so sometimes I follow her to play with them.</p>
     </body>
    </html>

This isn't possible in the HTML serialisation, however.

###### 3.2.4.2.2 Flow content

Most elements that are used in the body of documents and applications are categorised as flow content.

- `a`
- `abbr`
- `address`
- `area` (if it is a descendant of a `map` element)
- `article`
- `aside`
- `audio`
- `b`
- `bdi`
- `bdo`
- `blockquote`
- `br`
- `button`
- `canvas`
- `cite`
- `code`
- `data`
- `datalist`
- `del`
- `details`
- `dfn`
- `dialog`
- `div`
- `dl`
- `em`
- `embed`
- `fieldset`
- `figure`
- `footer`
- `form`
- `h1`
- `h2`
- `h3`
- `h4`
- `h5`
- `h6`
- `header`
- `hgroup`
- `hr`
- `i`
- `iframe`
- `img`
- `input`
- `ins`
- `kbd`
- `keygen`
- `label`
- `link` (if the `itemprop` attribute is present)
- `main`
- `map`
- `mark`
- `math`
- `menu`
- `meta` (if the `itemprop` attribute is present)
- `meter`
- `nav`
- `noscript`
- `object`
- `ol`
- `output`
- `p`
- `pre`
- `progress`
- `q`
- `ruby`
- `s`
- `samp`
- `script`
- `section`
- `select`
- `small`
- `span`
- `strong`
- `style` (if the `scoped` attribute is present)
- `sub`
- `sup`
- `svg`
- `table`
- `template`
- `textarea`
- `time`
- `u`
- `ul`
- `var`
- `video`
- `wbr`
- Text

###### 3.2.4.2.3 Sectioning content

Sectioning content is content that defines the scope of headings and footers.

- `article`
- `aside`
- `nav`
- `section`

Each sectioning content element potentially has a heading and an outline. See the section on headings and sections for further details.

There are also certain elements that are sectioning roots. These are distinct from sectioning content, but they can also have an outline.

###### 3.2.4.2.4 Heading content

Heading content defines the header of a section (whether explicitly marked up using sectioning content elements, or implied by the heading content itself).

- `h1`
- `h2`
- `h3`
- `h4`
- `h5`
- `h6`
- `hgroup`

###### 3.2.4.2.5 Phrasing content

Phrasing content is the text of the document, as well as elements that mark up that text at the intra-paragraph level. Runs of phrasing content form paragraphs.

- `a`
- `abbr`
- `area` (if it is a descendant of a `map` element)
- `audio`
- `b`
- `bdi`
- `bdo`
- `br`
- `button`
- `canvas`
- `cite`
- `code`
- `data`
- `datalist`
- `del`
- `dfn`
- `em`
- `embed`
- `i`
- `iframe`
- `img`
- `input`
- `ins`
- `kbd`
- `keygen`
- `label`
- `link` (if the `itemprop` attribute is present)
- `map`
- `mark`
- `math`
- `meta` (if the `itemprop` attribute is present)
- `meter`
- `noscript`
- `object`
- `output`
- `progress`
- `q`
- `ruby`
- `s`
- `samp`
- `script`
- `select`
- `small`
- `span`
- `strong`
- `sub`
- `sup`
- `svg`
- `template`
- `textarea`
- `time`
- `u`
- `var`
- `video`
- `wbr`
- Text

Most elements that are categorised as phrasing content can only contain elements that are themselves categorised as phrasing content, not any flow content.

Text, in the context of content models, means either nothing, or `Text` nodes. Text is sometimes used as a content model on its own, but is also phrasing content, and can be inter-element whitespace (if the `Text` nodes are empty or contain just space characters).

`Text` nodes and attribute values must consist of Unicode characters, must not contain U+0000 characters, must not contain permanently undefined Unicode characters (noncharacters), and must not contain control characters other than space characters. This specification includes extra constraints on the exact value of `Text` nodes and attribute values depending on their precise context.

###### 3.2.4.2.6 Embedded content

Embedded content is content that imports another resource into the document, or content from another vocabulary that is inserted into the document.

- `audio`
- `canvas`
- `embed`
- `iframe`
- `img`
- `math`
- `object`
- `svg`
- `video`

Elements that are from namespaces other than the HTML namespace and that convey content but not metadata, are embedded content for the purposes of the content models defined in this specification. (For example, MathML, or SVG.)

Some embedded content elements can have fallback content: content that is to be used when the external resource cannot be used (e.g. because it is of an unsupported format). The element definitions state what the fallback is, if any.

###### 3.2.4.2.7 Interactive content

Interactive content is content that is specifically intended for user interaction.

- `a`
- `audio` (if the `controls` attribute is present)
- `button`
- `details`
- `embed`
- `iframe`
- `img` (if the `usemap` attribute is present)
- `input` (if the `type` attribute is not in the Hidden state)
- `keygen`
- `label`
- `object` (if the `usemap` attribute is present)
- `select`
- `textarea`
- sorting interface `th` elements
- `video` (if the `controls` attribute is present)

The `tabindex` attribute can also make any element into interactive content.

###### 3.2.4.2.8 Palpable content

As a general rule, elements whose content model allows any flow content or phrasing content should have at least one node in its contents that is palpable content and that does not have the `hidden` attribute specified.

This requirement is not a hard requirement, however, as there are many cases where an element can be empty legitimately, for example when it is used as a placeholder which will later be filled in by a script, or when the element is part of a template and would on most pages be filled in but on some pages is not relevant.

Conformance checkers are encouraged to provide a mechanism for authors to find elements that fail to fulfill this requirement, as an authoring aid.

The following elements are palpable content:

- `a`
- `abbr`
- `address`
- `article`
- `aside`
- `audio` (if the `controls` attribute is present)
- `b`
- `bdi`
- `bdo`
- `blockquote`
- `button`
- `canvas`
- `cite`
- `code`
- `data`
- `details`
- `dfn`
- `div`
- `dl` (if the element's children include at least one name-value group)
- `em`
- `embed`
- `fieldset`
- `figure`
- `footer`
- `form`
- `h1`
- `h2`
- `h3`
- `h4`
- `h5`
- `h6`
- `header`
- `hgroup`
- `i`
- `iframe`
- `img`
- `input` (if the `type` attribute is not in the Hidden state)
- `ins`
- `kbd`
- `keygen`
- `label`
- `main`
- `map`
- `mark`
- `math`
- `menu` (if the `type` attribute is in the toolbar state)
- `meter`
- `nav`
- `object`
- `ol` (if the element's children include at least one `li` element)
- `output`
- `p`
- `pre`
- `progress`
- `q`
- `ruby`
- `s`
- `samp`
- `section`
- `select`
- `small`
- `span`
- `strong`
- `sub`
- `sup`
- `svg`
- `table`
- `textarea`
- `time`
- `u`
- `ul` (if the element's children include at least one `li` element)
- `var`
- `video`
- Text that is not inter-element whitespace

###### 3.2.4.2.9 Script-supporting elements

Script-supporting elements are those that do not represent anything themselves (i.e. they are not rendered), but are used to support scripts, e.g. to provide functionality for the user.

The following elements are script-supporting elements:

- `script`
- `template`

##### 3.2.4.3 Transparent content models

Some elements are described as transparent; they have "transparent" in the description of their content model. The content model of a transparent element is derived from the content model of its parent element: the elements required in the part of the content model that is "transparent" are the same elements as required in the part of the content model of the parent of the transparent element in which the transparent element finds itself.

For instance, an `ins` element inside a `ruby` element cannot contain an `rt` element, because the part of the `ruby` element's content model that allows `ins` elements is the part that allows phrasing content, and the `rt` element is not phrasing content.

In some cases, where transparent elements are nested in each other, the process has to be applied iteratively.

Consider the following markup fragment:

    <p><object><param><ins><map><a href="/">Apples</a></map></ins></object></p>

To check whether "Apples" is allowed inside the `a` element, the content models are examined. The `a` element's content model is transparent, as is the `map` element's, as is the `ins` element's, as is the part of the `object` element's in which the `ins` element is found. The `object` element is found in the `p` element, whose content model is phrasing content. Thus, "Apples" is allowed, as text is phrasing content.

When a transparent element has no parent, then the part of its content model that is "transparent" must instead be treated as accepting any flow content.

##### 3.2.4.4 Paragraphs

The term paragraph as defined in this section is used for more than just the definition of the `p` element. The paragraph concept defined here is used to describe how to interpret documents. The `p` element is merely one of several ways of marking up a paragraph.

A paragraph is typically a run of phrasing content that forms a block of text with one or more sentences that discuss a particular topic, as in typography, but can also be used for more general thematic grouping. For instance, an address is also a paragraph, as is a part of a form, a byline, or a stanza in a poem.

In the following example, there are two paragraphs in a section. There is also a heading, which contains phrasing content that is not a paragraph. Note how the comments and inter-element whitespace do not form paragraphs.

    <section>
      <h1>Example of paragraphs</h1>
      This is the <em>first</em> paragraph in this example.
      <p>This is the second.</p>
      <!-- This is not a paragraph. -->
    </section>

Paragraphs in flow content are defined relative to what the document looks like without the `a`, `ins`, `del`, and `map` elements complicating matters, since those elements, with their hybrid content models, can straddle paragraph boundaries, as shown in the first two examples below.

Generally, having elements straddle paragraph boundaries is best avoided. Maintaining such markup can be difficult.

The following example takes the markup from the earlier example and puts `ins` and `del` elements around some of the markup to show that the text was changed (though in this case, the changes admittedly don't make much sense). Notice how this example has exactly the same paragraphs as the previous one, despite the `ins` and `del` elements — the `ins` element straddles the heading and the first paragraph, and the `del` element straddles the boundary between the two paragraphs.

    <section>
      <ins><h1>Example of paragraphs</h1>
      This is the <em>first</em> paragraph in</ins> this example<del>.
      <p>This is the second.</p></del>
      <!-- This is not a paragraph. -->
    </section>

Let view be a view of the DOM that replaces all `a`, `ins`, `del`, and `map` elements in the document with their contents. Then, in view, for each run of sibling phrasing content nodes uninterrupted by other types of content, in an element that accepts content other than phrasing content as well as phrasing content, let first be the first node of the run, and let last be the last node of the run. For each such run that consists of at least one node that is neither embedded content nor inter-element whitespace, a paragraph exists in the original DOM from immediately before first to immediately after last. (Paragraphs can thus span across `a`, `ins`, `del`, and `map` elements.)

Conformance checkers may warn authors of cases where they have paragraphs that overlap each other (this can happen with `object`, `video`, `audio`, and `canvas` elements, and indirectly through elements in other namespaces that allow HTML to be further embedded therein, like `svg` or `math`).

A paragraph is also formed explicitly by `p` elements.

The `p` element can be used to wrap individual paragraphs when there would otherwise not be any content other than phrasing content to separate the paragraphs from each other.

In the following example, the link spans half of the first paragraph, all of the heading separating the two paragraphs, and half of the second paragraph. It straddles the paragraphs and the heading.

    <header>
     Welcome!
     <a href="about.html">
      This is home of...
      <h1>The Falcons!</h1>
      The Lockheed Martin multirole jet fighter aircraft!
     </a>
     This page discusses the F-16 Fighting Falcon's innermost secrets.
    </header>

Here is another way of marking this up, this time showing the paragraphs explicitly, and splitting the one link element into three:

    <header>
     <p>Welcome! <a href="about.html">This is home of...</a></p>
     <h1><a href="about.html">The Falcons!</a></h1>
     <p><a href="about.html">The Lockheed Martin multirole jet
     fighter aircraft!</a> This page discusses the F-16 Fighting
     Falcon's innermost secrets.</p>
    </header>

It is possible for paragraphs to overlap when using certain elements that define fallback content. For example, in the following section:

    <section>
     <h1>My Cats</h1>
     You can play with my cat simulator.
     <object data="cats.sim">
      To see the cat simulator, use one of the following links:
      <ul>
       <li><a href="cats.sim">Download simulator file</a>
       <li><a href="http://sims.example.com/watch?v=LYds5xY4INU">Use online simulator</a>
      </ul>
      Alternatively, upgrade to the Mellblom Browser.
     </object>
     I'm quite proud of it.
    </section>

There are five paragraphs:

1. The paragraph that says "You can play with my cat simulator. object I'm quite proud of it.", where object is the `object` element.
2. The paragraph that says "To see the cat simulator, use one of the following links:".
3. The paragraph that says "Download simulator file".
4. The paragraph that says "Use online simulator".
5. The paragraph that says "Alternatively, upgrade to the Mellblom Browser.".

The first paragraph is overlapped by the other four. A user agent that supports the "cats.sim" resource will only show the first one, but a user agent that shows the fallback will confusingly show the first sentence of the first paragraph as if it was in the same paragraph as the second one, and will show the last paragraph as if it was at the start of the second sentence of the first paragraph.

To avoid this confusion, explicit `p` elements can be used. For example:

    <section>
     <h1>My Cats</h1>
     <p>You can play with my cat simulator.</p>
     <object data="cats.sim">
      <p>To see the cat simulator, use one of the following links:</p>
      <ul>
       <li><a href="cats.sim">Download simulator file</a>
       <li><a href="http://sims.example.com/watch?v=LYds5xY4INU">Use online simulator</a>
      </ul>
      <p>Alternatively, upgrade to the Mellblom Browser.</p>
     </object>
     <p>I'm quite proud of it.</p>
    </section>

#### 3.2.5 Global attributes

The following attributes are common to and may be specified on all HTML elements (even those not defined in this specification):

- `accesskey`
- `class`
- `contenteditable`
- `contextmenu`
- `dir`
- `draggable`
- `dropzone`
- `hidden`
- `id`
- `itemid`
- `itemprop`
- `itemref`
- `itemscope`
- `itemtype`
- `lang`
- `spellcheck`
- `style`
- `tabindex`
- `title`
- `translate`

These attributes are only defined by this specification as attributes for HTML elements. When this specification refers to elements having these attributes, elements from namespaces that are not defined as having these attributes must not be considered as being elements with these attributes.

For example, in the following XML fragment, the "`bogus`" element does not have a `dir` attribute as defined in this specification, despite having an attribute with the literal name "`dir`". Thus, the directionality of the inner-most `span` element is 'rtl', inherited from the `div` element indirectly through the "`bogus`" element.

    <div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" dir="rtl">
     <bogus xmlns="http://example.net/ns" dir="ltr">
      <span xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
      </span>
     </bogus>
    </div>

To enable assistive technology products to expose a more fine-grained interface than is otherwise possible with HTML elements and attributes, a set of annotations for assistive technology products can be specified (the ARIA `role` and `aria-*` attributes). [ARIA]

The following event handler content attributes may be specified on any HTML element:

- `onabort`
- `onautocomplete`
- `onautocompleteerror`
- `onblur`*
- `oncancel`
- `oncanplay`
- `oncanplaythrough`
- `onchange`
- `onclick`
- `onclose`
- `oncontextmenu`
- `oncuechange`
- `ondblclick`
- `ondrag`
- `ondragend`
- `ondragenter`
- `ondragexit`
- `ondragleave`
- `ondragover`
- `ondragstart`
- `ondrop`
- `ondurationchange`
- `onemptied`
- `onended`
- `onerror`*
- `onfocus`*
- `oninput`
- `oninvalid`
- `onkeydown`
- `onkeypress`
- `onkeyup`
- `onload`*
- `onloadeddata`
- `onloadedmetadata`
- `onloadstart`
- `onmousedown`
- `onmouseenter`
- `onmouseleave`
- `onmousemove`
- `onmouseout`
- `onmouseover`
- `onmouseup`
- `onmousewheel`
- `onpause`
- `onplay`
- `onplaying`
- `onprogress`
- `onratechange`
- `onreset`
- `onresize`*
- `onscroll`*
- `onseeked`
- `onseeking`
- `onselect`
- `onshow`
- `onsort`
- `onstalled`
- `onsubmit`
- `onsuspend`
- `ontimeupdate`
- `ontoggle`
- `onvolumechange`
- `onwaiting`

The attributes marked with an asterisk have a different meaning when specified on `body` elements as those elements expose event handlers of the `Window` object with the same names.

While these attributes apply to all elements, they are not useful on all elements. For example, only media elements will ever receive a `volumechange` event fired by the user agent.

Custom data attributes (e.g. `data-foldername` or `data-msgid`) can be specified on any HTML element, to store custom data specific to the page.

In HTML documents, elements in the HTML namespace may have an `xmlns` attribute specified, if, and only if, it has the exact value "`http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml`". This does not apply to XML documents.

In HTML, the `xmlns` attribute has absolutely no effect. It is basically a talisman. It is allowed merely to make migration to and from XHTML mildly easier. When parsed by an HTML parser, the attribute ends up in no namespace, not the "`http://www.w3.org/2000/xmlns/`" namespace like namespace declaration attributes in XML do.

In XML, an `xmlns` attribute is part of the namespace declaration mechanism, and an element cannot actually have an `xmlns` attribute in no namespace specified.

The XML specification also allows the use of the `xml:space` attribute in the XML namespace on any element in an XML document. This attribute has no effect on HTML elements, as the default behavior in HTML is to preserve whitespace. [XML]

There is no way to serialise the `xml:space` attribute on HTML elements in the `text/html` syntax.

##### 3.2.5.1 The `id` attribute

The `id` attribute specifies its element's unique identifier (ID). [DOM]

The value must be unique amongst all the IDs in the element's home subtree and must contain at least one character. The value must not contain any space characters.

There are no other restrictions on what form an ID can take; in particular, IDs can consist of just digits, start with a digit, start with an underscore, consist of just punctuation, etc.

An element's unique identifier can be used for a variety of purposes, most notably as a way to link to specific parts of a document using fragment identifiers, as a way to target an element when scripting, and as a way to style a specific element from CSS.

Identifiers are opaque strings. Particular meanings should not be derived from the value of the `id` attribute.

##### 3.2.5.2 The `title` attribute

The `title` attribute represents advisory information for the element, such as would be appropriate for a tooltip. On a link, this could be the title or a description of the target resource; on an image, it could be the image credit or a description of the image; on a paragraph, it could be a footnote or commentary on the text; on a citation, it could be further information about the source; on interactive content, it could be a label for, or instructions for, use of the element; and so forth. The value is text.

Relying on the `title` attribute is currently discouraged as many user agents do not expose the attribute in an accessible manner as required by this specification (e.g. requiring a pointing device such as a mouse to cause a tooltip to appear, which excludes keyboard-only users and touch-only users, such as anyone with a modern phone or tablet).

If this attribute is omitted from an element, then it implies that the `title` attribute of the nearest ancestor HTML element with a `title` attribute set is also relevant to this element. Setting the attribute overrides this, explicitly stating that the advisory information of any ancestors is not relevant to this element. Setting the attribute to the empty string indicates that the element has no advisory information.

If the `title` attribute's value contains U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters, the content is split into multiple lines. Each U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character represents a line break.

Caution is advised with respect to the use of newlines in `title` attributes.

For instance, the following snippet actually defines an abbreviation's expansion with a line break in it:

    <p>My logs show that there was some interest in <abbr title="Hypertext
    Transport Protocol">HTTP</abbr> today.</p>

Some elements, such as `link`, `abbr`, and `input`, define additional semantics for the `title` attribute beyond the semantics described above.

The advisory information of an element is the value that the following algorithm returns, with the algorithm being aborted once a value is returned. When the algorithm returns the empty string, then there is no advisory information.

1. If the element is a `link`, `style`, `dfn`, `abbr`, or `menuitem` element, then: if the element has a `title` attribute, return the value of that attribute, otherwise, return the empty string.

2. Otherwise, if the element has a `title` attribute, then return its value.

3. Otherwise, if the element has a parent element, then return the parent element's advisory information.

4. Otherwise, return the empty string.

User agents should inform the user when elements have advisory information, otherwise the information would not be discoverable.

The `title` IDL attribute must reflect the `title` content attribute.

##### 3.2.5.3 The `lang` and `xml:lang` attributes

The `lang` attribute (in no namespace) specifies the primary language for the element's contents and for any of the element's attributes that contain text. Its value must be a valid BCP 47 language tag, or the empty string. Setting the attribute to the empty string indicates that the primary language is unknown. [BCP47]

The `lang` attribute in the XML namespace is defined in XML. [XML]

If these attributes are omitted from an element, then the language of this element is the same as the language of its parent element, if any.

The `lang` attribute in no namespace may be used on any HTML element.

The `lang` attribute in the XML namespace may be used on HTML elements in XML documents, as well as elements in other namespaces if the relevant specifications allow it (in particular, MathML and SVG allow `lang` attributes in the XML namespace to be specified on their elements). If both the `lang` attribute in no namespace and the `lang` attribute in the XML namespace are specified on the same element, they must have exactly the same value when compared in an ASCII case-insensitive manner.

Authors must not use the `lang` attribute in the XML namespace on HTML elements in HTML documents. To ease migration to and from XHTML, authors may specify an attribute in no namespace with no prefix and with the literal localname "`xml:lang`" on HTML elements in HTML documents, but such attributes must only be specified if a `lang` attribute in no namespace is also specified, and both attributes must have the same value when compared in an ASCII case-insensitive manner.

The attribute in no namespace with no prefix and with the literal localname "`xml:lang`" has no effect on language processing.

To determine the language of a node, user agents must look at the nearest ancestor element (including the element itself if the node is an element) that has a `lang` attribute in the XML namespace set or is an HTML element and has a `lang` in no namespace attribute set. That attribute specifies the language of the node (regardless of its value).

If both the `lang` attribute in no namespace and the `lang` attribute in the XML namespace are set on an element, user agents must use the `lang` attribute in the XML namespace, and the `lang` attribute in no namespace must be ignored for the purposes of determining the element's language.

If neither the node nor any of the node's ancestors, including the root element, have either attribute set, but there is a pragma-set default language set, then that is the language of the node. If there is no pragma-set default language set, then language information from a higher-level protocol (such as HTTP), if any, must be used as the final fallback language instead. In the absence of any such language information, and in cases where the higher-level protocol reports multiple languages, the language of the node is unknown, and the corresponding language tag is the empty string.

If the resulting value is not a recognised language tag, then it must be treated as an unknown language having the given language tag, distinct from all other languages. For the purposes of round-tripping or communicating with other services that expect language tags, user agents should pass unknown language tags through unmodified, and tagged as being BCP 47 language tags, so that subsequent services do not interpret the data as another type of language description. [BCP47]

Thus, for instance, an element with `lang="xyzzy"` would be matched by the selector `:lang(xyzzy)` (e.g. in CSS), but it would not be matched by `:lang(abcde)`, even though both are equally invalid. Similarly, if a Web browser and screen reader working in unison communicated about the language of the element, the browser would tell the screen reader that the language was "xyzzy", even if it knew it was invalid, just in case the screen reader actually supported a language with that tag after all. Even if the screen reader supported both BCP 47 and another syntax for encoding language names, and in that other syntax the string "xyzzy" was a way to denote the Belarusian language, it would be incorrect for the screen reader to then start treating text as Belarusian, because "xyzzy" is not how Belarusian is described in BCP 47 codes (BCP 47 uses the code "be" for Belarusian).

If the resulting value is the empty string, then it must be interpreted as meaning that the language of the node is explicitly unknown.

User agents may use the element's language to determine proper processing or rendering (e.g. in the selection of appropriate fonts or pronunciations, for dictionary selection, or for the user interfaces of form controls such as date pickers).

The `lang` IDL attribute must reflect the `lang` content attribute in no namespace.

##### 3.2.5.4 The `translate` attribute

The `translate` attribute is an enumerated attribute that is used to specify whether an element's attribute values and the values of its `Text` node children are to be translated when the page is localized, or whether to leave them unchanged.

The attribute's keywords are the empty string, `yes`, and `no`. The empty string and the `yes` keyword map to the yes state. The `no` keyword maps to the no state. In addition, there is a third state, the inherit state, which is the missing value default (and the invalid value default).

Each element (even non-HTML elements) has a translation mode, which is in either the translate-enabled state or the no-translate state. If an HTML element's `translate` attribute is in the yes state, then the element's translation mode is in the translate-enabled state; otherwise, if the element's `translate` attribute is in the no state, then the element's translation mode is in the no-translate state. Otherwise, either the element's `translate` attribute is in the inherit state, or the element is not an HTML element and thus does not have a `translate` attribute; in either case, the element's translation mode is in the same state as its parent element's, if any, or in the translate-enabled state, if the element is a root element.

When an element is in the translate-enabled state, the element's translatable attributes and the values of its `Text` node children are to be translated when the page is localized.

When an element is in the no-translate state, the element's attribute values and the values of its `Text` node children are to be left as-is when the page is localized, e.g. because the element contains a person's name or a the name of a computer program.

The following attributes are translatable attributes:

- `abbr` on `th` elements
- `alt` on `area`, `img`, and `input` elements
- `content` on `meta` elements, if the `name` attribute specifies a metadata name whose value is known to be translatable
- `download` on `a` and `area` elements
- `label` on `menuitem`, `menu`, `optgroup`, `option`, and `track` elements
- `lang` on HTML elements; must be "translated" to match the language used in the translation
- `placeholder` on `input` and `textarea` elements
- `srcdoc` on `iframe` elements; must be parsed and recursively processed
- `style` on HTML elements; must be parsed and recursively processed (e.g. for the values of 'content' properties)
- `title` on all HTML elements
- `value` on `input` elements with a `type` attribute in the Button state or the Reset Button state

Other specifications may define other attributes that are also translatable attributes. For example, ARIA would define the `aria-label` attribute as translatable.

The `translate` IDL attribute must, on getting, return true if the element's translation mode is translate-enabled, and false otherwise. On setting, it must set the content attribute's value to "`yes`" if the new value is true, and set the content attribute's value to "`no`" otherwise.

In this example, everything in the document is to be translated when the page is localized, except the sample keyboard input and sample program output:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html> <!-- default on the root element is translate=yes -->
     <head>
      <title>The Bee Game</title> <!-- implied translate=yes inherited from ancestors -->
     </head>
     <body>
      <p>The Bee Game is a text adventure game in English.</p>
      <p>When the game launches, the first thing you should do is type
      <kbd translate=no>eat honey</kbd>. The game will respond with:</p>
      <pre><samp translate=no>Yum yum! That was some good honey!</samp></pre>
     </body>
    </html>

##### 3.2.5.5 The `xml:base` attribute (XML only)

The `xml:base` attribute is defined in XML Base. [XMLBASE]

The `xml:base` attribute may be used on HTML elements of XML documents. Authors must not use the `xml:base` attribute on HTML elements in HTML documents.

##### 3.2.5.6 The `dir` attribute

The `dir` attribute specifies the element's text directionality. The attribute is an enumerated attribute with the following keywords and states:

The `ltr` keyword, which maps to the ltr state

  Indicates that the contents of the element are explicitly directionally isolated left-to-right text.

The `rtl` keyword, which maps to the rtl state

  Indicates that the contents of the element are explicitly directionally isolated right-to-left text.

The `auto` keyword, which maps to the auto state

  Indicates that the contents of the element are explicitly directionally isolated text, but that the direction is to be determined programmatically using the contents of the element (as described below).

  The heuristic used by this state is very crude (it just looks at the first character with a strong directionality, in a manner analogous to the Paragraph Level determination in the bidirectional algorithm). Authors are urged to only use this value as a last resort when the direction of the text is truly unknown and no better server-side heuristic can be applied. [BIDI]

  For `textarea` and `pre` elements, the heuristic is applied on a per-paragraph level.

The attribute has no invalid value default and no missing value default.

The directionality of an element (any element, not just an HTML element) is either 'ltr' or 'rtl', and is determined as per the first appropriate set of steps from the following list:

If the element's `dir` attribute is in the ltr state
If the element is a root element and the `dir` attribute is not in a defined state (i.e. it is not present or has an invalid value)
If the element is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Telephone state, and the `dir` attribute is not in a defined state (i.e. it is not present or has an invalid value)

  The directionality of the element is 'ltr'.

If the element's `dir` attribute is in the rtl state

  The directionality of the element is 'rtl'.

If the element is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Text, Search, Telephone, URL, or E-mail state, and the `dir` attribute is in the auto state
If the element is a `textarea` element and the `dir` attribute is in the auto state

  If the element's value contains a character of bidirectional character type AL or R, and there is no character of bidirectional character type L anywhere before it in the element's value, then the directionality of the element is 'rtl'. [BIDI]

  Otherwise, if the element's value is not the empty string, or if the element is a root element, the directionality of the element is 'ltr'.

  Otherwise, the directionality of the element is the same as the element's parent element's directionality.

If the element's `dir` attribute is in the auto state
If the element is a `bdi` element and the `dir` attribute is not in a defined state (i.e. it is not present or has an invalid value)

  Find the first character in tree order that matches the following criteria:

  - The character is from a `Text` node that is a descendant of the element whose directionality is being determined.

  - The character is of bidirectional character type L, AL, or R. [BIDI]

  - The character is not in a `Text` node that has an ancestor element that is a descendant of the element whose directionality is being determined and that is either:

    - A `bdi` element.
    - A `script` element.
    - A `style` element.
    - A `textarea` element.
    - An element with a `dir` attribute in a defined state.

  If such a character is found and it is of bidirectional character type AL or R, the directionality of the element is 'rtl'.

  If such a character is found and it is of bidirectional character type L, the directionality of the element is 'ltr'.

  Otherwise, if the element is a root element, the directionality of the element is 'ltr'.

  Otherwise, the directionality of the element the same as the element's parent element's directionality.

If the element has a parent element and the `dir` attribute is not in a defined state (i.e. it is not present or has an invalid value)

  The directionality of the element is the same as the element's parent element's directionality.

Since the `dir` attribute is only defined for HTML elements, it cannot be present on elements from other namespaces. Thus, elements from other namespaces always just inherit their directionality from their parent element, or, if they don't have one, default to 'ltr'.

This attribute has rendering requirements involving the bidirectional algorithm.

The directionality of an attribute of an HTML element, which is used when the text of that attribute is to be included in the rendering in some manner, is determined as per the first appropriate set of steps from the following list:

If the attribute is a directionality-capable attribute and the element's `dir` attribute is in the auto state

  Find the first character (in logical order) of the attribute's value that is of bidirectional character type L, AL, or R. [BIDI]

  If such a character is found and it is of bidirectional character type AL or R, the directionality of the attribute is 'rtl'.

  Otherwise, the directionality of the attribute is 'ltr'.

Otherwise
  The directionality of the attribute is the same as the element's directionality.

The following attributes are directionality-capable attributes:

- `abbr` on `th` elements
- `alt` on `area`, `img`, and `input` elements
- `content` on `meta` elements, if the `name` attribute specifies a metadata name whose value is primarily intended to be human-readable rather than machine-readable
- `label` on `menuitem`, `menu`, `optgroup`, `option`, and `track` elements
- `placeholder` on `input` and `textarea` elements
- `title` on all HTML elements

document . `dir` [ = value ]

  Returns the `html` element's `dir` attribute's value, if any.

  Can be set, to either "`ltr`", "`rtl`", or "`auto`" to replace the `html` element's `dir` attribute's value.

  If there is no `html` element, returns the empty string and ignores new values.

The `dir` IDL attribute on an element must reflect the `dir` content attribute of that element, limited to only known values.

The `dir` IDL attribute on `Document` objects must reflect the `dir` content attribute of the `html` element, if any, limited to only known values. If there is no such element, then the attribute must return the empty string and do nothing on setting.

Authors are strongly encouraged to use the `dir` attribute to indicate text direction rather than using CSS, since that way their documents will continue to render correctly even in the absence of CSS (e.g. as interpreted by search engines).

This markup fragment is of an IM conversation.

    <p dir=auto class="u1"><b><bdi>Student</bdi>:</b> How do you write "What's your name?" in Arabic?</p>
    <p dir=auto class="u2"><b><bdi>Teacher</bdi>:</b> ما اسمك؟</p>
    <p dir=auto class="u1"><b><bdi>Student</bdi>:</b> Thanks.</p>
    <p dir=auto class="u2"><b><bdi>Teacher</bdi>:</b> That's written "شكرًا".</p>
    <p dir=auto class="u2"><b><bdi>Teacher</bdi>:</b> Do you know how to write "Please"?</p>
    <p dir=auto class="u1"><b><bdi>Student</bdi>:</b> "من فضلك", right?</p>

Given a suitable style sheet and the default alignment styles for the `p` element, namely to align the text to the start edge of the paragraph, the resulting rendering could be as follows:

As noted earlier, the `auto` value is not a panacea. The final paragraph in this example is misinterpreted as being right-to-left text, since it begins with an Arabic character, which causes the "right?" to be to the left of the Arabic text.

##### 3.2.5.7 The `class` attribute

Every HTML element may have a `class` attribute specified.

The attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens representing the various classes that the element belongs to.

The classes that an HTML element has assigned to it consists of all the classes returned when the value of the `class` attribute is split on spaces. (Duplicates are ignored.)

Assigning classes to an element affects class matching in selectors in CSS, the `getElementsByClassName()` method in the DOM, and other such features.

There are no additional restrictions on the tokens authors can use in the `class` attribute, but authors are encouraged to use values that describe the nature of the content, rather than values that describe the desired presentation of the content.

The `className` and `classList` IDL attributes, defined in the DOM specification, reflect the `class` content attribute. [DOM]

##### 3.2.5.8 The `style` attribute

All HTML elements may have the `style` content attribute set. This is a CSS styling attribute as defined by the CSS Styling Attribute Syntax specification. [CSSATTR]

In user agents that support CSS, the attribute's value must be parsed when the attribute is added or has its value changed, according to the rules given for CSS styling attributes. [CSSATTR]

Documents that use `style` attributes on any of their elements must still be comprehensible and usable if those attributes were removed.

In particular, using the `style` attribute to hide and show content, or to convey meaning that is otherwise not included in the document, is non-conforming. (To hide and show content, use the `hidden` attribute.)

element . `style`

  Returns a `CSSStyleDeclaration` object for the element's `style` attribute.

The `style` IDL attribute is defined in the CSS Object Model (CSSOM) specification. [CSSOM]

In the following example, the words that refer to colours are marked up using the `span` element and the `style` attribute to make those words show up in the relevant colours in visual media.

    <p>My sweat suit is <span style="color: green; background:
    transparent">green</span> and my eyes are <span style="color: blue;
    background: transparent">blue</span>.</p>

##### 3.2.5.9 Embedding custom non-visible data with the `data-*` attributes

A custom data attribute is an attribute in no namespace whose name starts with the string "`data-`", has at least one character after the hyphen, is XML-compatible, and contains no uppercase ASCII letters.

All attribute names on HTML elements in HTML documents get ASCII-lowercased automatically, so the restriction on ASCII uppercase letters doesn't affect such documents.

Custom data attributes are intended to store custom data private to the page or application, for which there are no more appropriate attributes or elements.

These attributes are not intended for use by software that is not known to the administrators of the site that uses the attributes. For generic extensions that are to be used by multiple independent tools, either this specification should be extended to provide the feature explicitly, or a technology like microdata should be used (with a standardised vocabulary).

For instance, a site about music could annotate list items representing tracks in an album with custom data attributes containing the length of each track. This information could then be used by the site itself to allow the user to sort the list by track length, or to filter the list for tracks of certain lengths.

    <ol>
     <li data-length="2m11s">Beyond The Sea</li>
     ...
    </ol>

It would be inappropriate, however, for the user to use generic software not associated with that music site to search for tracks of a certain length by looking at this data.

This is because these attributes are intended for use by the site's own scripts, and are not a generic extension mechanism for publicly-usable metadata.

Similarly, a page author could write markup that provides information for a translation tool that they are intending to use:

    <p>The third <span data-mytrans-de="Anspruch">claim</span> covers the case of <span
    translate="no">HTML</span> markup.</p>

In this example, the "`data-mytrans-de`" attribute gives specific text for the MyTrans product to use when translating the phrase "claim" to German. However, the standard `translate` attribute is used to tell it that in all languages, "HTML" is to remain unchanged. When a standard attribute is available, there is no need for a custom data attribute to be used.

Every HTML element may have any number of custom data attributes specified, with any value.

element . `dataset`

  Returns a `DOMStringMap` object for the element's `data-*` attributes.

  Hyphenated names become camel-cased. For example, `data-foo-bar=""` becomes `element.dataset.fooBar`.

The `dataset` IDL attribute provides convenient accessors for all the `data-*` attributes on an element. On getting, the `dataset` IDL attribute must return a `DOMStringMap` object, associated with the following algorithms, which expose these attributes on their element:

The algorithm for getting the list of name-value pairs
  1. Let list be an empty list of name-value pairs.
  2. For each content attribute on the element whose first five characters are the string "`data-`" and whose remaining characters (if any) do not include any uppercase ASCII letters, in the order that those attributes are listed in the element's attribute list, add a name-value pair to list whose name is the attribute's name with the first five characters removed and whose value is the attribute's value.
  3. For each name in list, for each U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) in the name that is followed by a lowercase ASCII letter, remove the U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) and replace the character that followed it by the same character converted to ASCII uppercase.
  4. Return list.
The algorithm for setting names to certain values
  1. Let name be the name passed to the algorithm.
  2. Let value be the value passed to the algorithm.
  3. If name contains a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) followed by a lowercase ASCII letter, throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.
  4. For each uppercase ASCII letter in name, insert a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) before the character and replace the character with the same character converted to ASCII lowercase.
  5. Insert the string `data-` at the front of name.
  6. Set the value of the attribute with the name name, to the value value, replacing any previous value if the attribute already existed. If `setAttribute()` would have thrown an exception when setting an attribute with the name name, then this must throw the same exception.
The algorithm for deleting names
  1. Let name be the name passed to the algorithm.
  2. For each uppercase ASCII letter in name, insert a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) before the character and replace the character with the same character converted to ASCII lowercase.
  3. Insert the string `data-` at the front of name.
  4. Remove the attribute with the name name, if such an attribute exists. Do nothing otherwise.

  This algorithm will only get invoked by the Web IDL specification for names that are given by the earlier algorithm for getting the list of name-value pairs. [WEBIDL]

The same object must be returned each time.

If a Web page wanted an element to represent a space ship, e.g. as part of a game, it would have to use the `class` attribute along with `data-*` attributes:

    <div class="spaceship" data-ship-id="92432"
         data-weapons="laser 2" data-shields="50%"
         data-x="30" data-y="10" data-z="90">
     <button class="fire"
             onclick="spaceships[this.parentNode.dataset.shipId].fire()">
      Fire
     </button>
    </div>

Notice how the hyphenated attribute name becomes camel-cased in the API.

Authors should carefully design such extensions so that when the attributes are ignored and any associated CSS dropped, the page is still usable.

User agents must not derive any implementation behavior from these attributes or values. Specifications intended for user agents must not define these attributes to have any meaningful values.

JavaScript libraries may use the custom data attributes, as they are considered to be part of the page on which they are used. Authors of libraries that are reused by many authors are encouraged to include their name in the attribute names, to reduce the risk of clashes. Where it makes sense, library authors are also encouraged to make the exact name used in the attribute names customizable, so that libraries whose authors unknowingly picked the same name can be used on the same page, and so that multiple versions of a particular library can be used on the same page even when those versions are not mutually compatible.

For example, a library called "DoQuery" could use attribute names like `data-doquery-range`, and a library called "jJo" could use attributes names like `data-jjo-range`. The jJo library could also provide an API to set which prefix to use (e.g. `J.setDataPrefix('j2')`, making the attributes have names like `data-j2-range`).

#### 3.2.6 Requirements relating to the bidirectional algorithm

##### 3.2.6.1 Authoring conformance criteria for bidirectional-algorithm formatting characters

Text content in HTML elements with `Text` nodes in their contents, and text in attributes of HTML elements that allow free-form text, may contain characters in the ranges U+202A to U+202E and U+2066 to U+2069 (the bidirectional-algorithm formatting characters). However, the use of these characters is restricted so that any embedding or overrides generated by these characters do not start and end with different parent elements, and so that all such embeddings and overrides are explicitly terminated by a U+202C POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING character. This helps reduce incidences of text being reused in a manner that has unforeseen effects on the bidirectional algorithm. [BIDI]

The aforementioned restrictions are defined by specifying that certain parts of documents form bidirectional-algorithm formatting character ranges, and then imposing a requirement on such ranges.

The strings resulting from applying the following algorithm to an HTML element element are bidirectional-algorithm formatting character ranges:

1. Let output be an empty list of strings.

2. Let string be an empty string.

3. Let node be the first child node of element, if any, or null otherwise.

4. Loop: If node is null, jump to the step labeled end.

5. Process node according to the first matching step from the following list:

   If node is a `Text` node

     Append the text data of node to string.

   If node is a `br` element
   If node is an HTML element that is flow content but that is not also phrasing content

     If string is not the empty string, push string onto output, and let string be empty string.

   Otherwise
     Do nothing.

6. Let node be node's next sibling, if any, or null otherwise.

7. Jump to the step labeled loop.

8. End: If string is not the empty string, push string onto output.

9. Return output as the bidirectional-algorithm formatting character ranges.

The value of a namespace-less attribute of an HTML element is a bidirectional-algorithm formatting character range.

Any strings that, as described above, are bidirectional-algorithm formatting character ranges must match the `string` production in the following ABNF, the character set for which is Unicode. [ABNF]

    string        = *( plaintext ( embedding / override / isolation ) ) plaintext
    embedding     = ( lre / rle ) string pdf
    override      = ( lro / rlo ) string pdf
    isolation     = ( lri / rli / fsi ) string pdi
    lre           = %x202A ; U+202A LEFT-TO-RIGHT EMBEDDING
    rle           = %x202B ; U+202B RIGHT-TO-LEFT EMBEDDING
    lro           = %x202D ; U+202D LEFT-TO-RIGHT OVERRIDE
    rlo           = %x202E ; U+202E RIGHT-TO-LEFT OVERRIDE
    pdf           = %x202C ; U+202C POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING
    lri           = %x2066 ; U+2066 LEFT-TO-RIGHT ISOLATE
    rli           = %x2067 ; U+2067 RIGHT-TO-LEFT ISOLATE
    fsi           = %x2068 ; U+2068 FIRST STRONG ISOLATE
    pdi           = %x2069 ; U+2069 POP DIRECTIONAL ISOLATE
    plaintext     = *( %x0000-2029 / %x202F-2065 / %x206A-10FFFF )
                    ; any string with no bidirectional-algorithm formatting characters

While the U+2069 POP DIRECTIONAL ISOLATE character implicitly also ends open embeddings and overrides, text that relies on this implicit scope closure is not conforming to this specification. All strings of embeddings, overrides, and isolations need to be explicitly terminated to conform to this section's requirements.

Authors are encouraged to use the `dir` attribute, the `bdo` element, and the `bdi` element, rather than maintaining the bidirectional-algorithm formatting characters manually. The bidirectional-algorithm formatting characters interact poorly with CSS.

##### 3.2.6.2 User agent conformance criteria

User agents must implement the Unicode bidirectional algorithm to determine the proper ordering of characters when rendering documents and parts of documents. [BIDI]

The mapping of HTML to the Unicode bidirectional algorithm must be done in one of three ways. Either the user agent must implement CSS, including in particular the CSS 'unicode-bidi', 'direction', and 'content' properties, and must have, in its user agent style sheet, the rules using those properties given in this specification's rendering section, or, alternatively, the user agent must act as if it implemented just the aforementioned properties and had a user agent style sheet that included all the aforementioned rules, but without letting style sheets specified in documents override them, or, alternatively, the user agent must implement another styling language with equivalent semantics. [CSSWM] [CSSGC]

The following elements and attributes have requirements defined by the rendering section that, due to the requirements in this section, are requirements on all user agents (not just those that support the suggested default rendering):

- `dir` attribute
- `bdi` element
- `bdo` element
- `br` element
- `pre` element
- `textarea` element
- `wbr` element

#### 3.2.7 WAI-ARIA

Authors may use the ARIA `role` and `aria-*` attributes on HTML elements, in accordance with the requirements described in the ARIA specifications, except where these conflict with the strong native semantics or are equal to the default implicit ARIA semantics described below. These exceptions are intended to prevent authors from making assistive technology products report nonsensical states that do not represent the actual state of the document. [ARIA]

Authors must not set the ARIA `role` and `aria-*` attributes in a manner that conflicts with the semantics described in the following table, except that the `presentation` role may always be used. Authors must not set the ARIA `role` and `aria-*` attributes to values that match the default implicit ARIA semantics defined in the following two tables.

User agents must implement ARIA semantics on all HTML elements, as defined in the ARIA specifications. The default implicit ARIA semantics defined below must be recognised by implementations for the purposes of ARIA processing. [ARIAIMPL]

The ARIA attributes defined in the ARIA specifications, and the strong native semantics and default implicit ARIA semantics defined below, do not have any effect on CSS pseudo-class matching, user interface modalities that don't use assistive technologies, or the default actions of user interaction events as described in this specification.

The following table defines the strong native semantics and corresponding default implicit ARIA semantics that apply to HTML elements. Each language feature (element or attribute) in a cell in the first column implies the ARIA semantics (any role, states, and properties) given in the cell in the second column of the same row. When multiple rows apply to an element, the role from the last row to define a role must be applied, and the states and properties from all the rows must be combined.

Language feature | Strong native semantics and default implicit ARIA semantics
--- | ---
`area` element that creates a hyperlink | `link` role
`base` element | No role
`datalist` element | `listbox` role, with the `aria-multiselectable` property set to "false"
`details` element | `aria-expanded` state set to "true" if the element's `open` attribute is present, and set to "false" otherwise
`dialog` element without an `open` attribute | The `aria-hidden` state set to "true"
`fieldset` element | `group` role
`head` element | No role, with the `aria-hidden` state set to "true"
`hgroup` element | `heading` role, with the `aria-level` property set to the element's outline depth
`hr` element | `separator` role
`html` element | No role
`img` element whose `alt` attribute's value is empty | `presentation` role
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Checkbox state | `aria-checked` state set to "mixed" if the element's `indeterminate` IDL attribute is true, or "true" if the element's checkedness is true, or "false" otherwise
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Colour state | No role
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Date state | No role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Date and Time state | No role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Local Date and Time state | No role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the E-mail state with no suggestions source element | `textbox` role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the File Upload state | No role
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Hidden state | No role
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Month state | No role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Number state | `spinbutton` role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute, the `aria-valuemax` property set to the element's maximum, the `aria-valuemin` property set to the element's minimum, and, if the result of applying the rules for parsing floating-point number values to the element's value is a number, with the `aria-valuenow` property set to that number
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Password state | `textbox` role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Radio Button state | `aria-checked` state set to "true" if the element's checkedness is true, or "false" otherwise
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Range state and the `multiple` attribute not specified | `slider` role, with the `aria-valuemax` property set to the element's maximum, the `aria-valuemin` property set to the element's minimum, and the `aria-valuenow` property set to the result of applying the rules for parsing floating-point number values to the element's value, if that results in a number, or the default value otherwise
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Range state and the `multiple` attribute not specified | `aria-valuemax` property set to the element's maximum, and the `aria-valuemin` property set to the element's minimum
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Reset Button state | `button` role
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Search state with no suggestions source element | `textbox` role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Submit Button state | `button` role
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Telephone state with no suggestions source element | `textbox` role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Text state with no suggestions source element | `textbox` role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Text, Search, Telephone, URL, or E-mail states with a suggestions source element | `combobox` role, with the `aria-owns` property set to the same value as the `list` attribute, and the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Time state | No role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the URL state with no suggestions source element | `textbox` role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Week state | No role, with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`input` element that is required | The `aria-required` state set to "true"
`keygen` element | No role
`label` element | No role
`link` element that creates a hyperlink | `link` role
`menu` element with a `type` attribute in the popup menu state | No role
`meta` element | No role
`meter` element | No role
`nav` element | `navigation` role
`noscript` element, when scripting is enabled | No role, with the `aria-hidden` state set to "true"
`optgroup` element | No role
`option` element that is in a list of options | `aria-selected` and `aria-checked` states set to "true" if the element's selectedness is true, and "false" otherwise
`option` element that represents a suggestion in a `datalist` element or that is in a list of options of a `select` element with a `multiple` attribute or a display size greater than 1 | `option` role
`param` element | No role
`progress` element | `progressbar` role, with, if the progress bar is determinate, the `aria-valuemax` property set to the maximum value of the progress bar, the `aria-valuemin` property set to zero, and the `aria-valuenow` property set to the current value of the progress bar
`script` element | No role, with the `aria-hidden` state set to "true"
`select` element with a `multiple` attribute | `listbox` role, with the `aria-multiselectable` property set to "true"
`select` element with no `multiple` attribute and with a display size equal to 1 | `aria-multiselectable` property set to "false"
`select` element with no `multiple` attribute and with a display size greater than 1 | `listbox` role, with the `aria-multiselectable` property set to "false"
`select` element with a `required` attribute | The `aria-required` state set to "true"
`source` element | No role
`style` element | No role, with the `aria-hidden` state set to "true"
`summary` element | No role
`table` element | `grid` role with the `aria-readonly` property set to "true"
`tbody` element | `rowgroup` role
`td` element | `gridcell` role
`template` element | No role, with the `aria-hidden` state set to "true"
`textarea` element | `textbox` role, with the `aria-multiline` property set to "true", and the `aria-readonly` property set to "true" if the element has a `readonly` attribute
`textarea` element with a `required` attribute | The `aria-required` state set to "true"
`tfoot` element | `rowgroup` role
`thead` element | `rowgroup` role
`th` element that is a sorting-capable `th` element whose column key ordinality is 1 | `columnheader` role, with the `aria-sort` state set to "ascending" if the element's column sort direction is normal, and "descending" otherwise.
`title` element | No role
`tr` element | `row` role
Element that is disabled | The `aria-disabled` state set to "true"
Element that is inert | The `aria-hidden` state set to "true"
Element with a `hidden` attribute | The `aria-hidden` state set to "true"
Element that is a candidate for constraint validation but that does not satisfy its constraints | The `aria-invalid` state set to "true"

Some HTML elements have native semantics that can be overridden. The following table lists these elements and their default implicit ARIA semantics, along with the restrictions that apply to those elements. Each language feature (element or attribute) in a cell in the first column implies, unless otherwise overridden, the ARIA semantic (role, state, or property) given in the cell in the second column of the same row, but this semantic may be overridden under the conditions listed in the cell in the third column of that row. In addition, any element may be given the `presentation` role, regardless of the restrictions below.

Language feature | Default implicit ARIA semantic | Restrictions
--- | --- | ---
`a` element that creates a hyperlink | `link` role | Role must be either `link`, `menuitem`, `tab`, or `treeitem`
`address` element | No role | If specified, role must be `contentinfo`
`article` element | `article` role | Role must be either `article`, `document`, `application`, or `main`
`aside` element | `complementary` role | Role must be either `complementary`, `note`, or `search`
`audio` element | No role | If specified, role must be `application`
`button` element | `button` role | Role must be either `button`, `menuitem`
`details` element | `group` role | Role must be a role that supports `aria-expanded`
`dialog` element | `dialog` role | Role must be either `alert`, `alertdialog`, `application`, `contentinfo`, `dialog`, `document`, `log`, `main`, `marquee`, `region`, `search`, or `status`
`embed` element | No role | If specified, role must be either `application`, `document`, or `img`
`footer` element | No role | If specified, role must be `contentinfo`
`h1` element that does not have an `hgroup` ancestor | `heading` role, with the `aria-level` property set to the element's outline depth | Role must be either `heading` or `tab`
`h2` element that does not have an `hgroup` ancestor | `heading` role, with the `aria-level` property set to the element's outline depth | Role must be either `heading` or `tab`
`h3` element that does not have an `hgroup` ancestor | `heading` role, with the `aria-level` property set to the element's outline depth | Role must be either `heading` or `tab`
`h4` element that does not have an `hgroup` ancestor | `heading` role, with the `aria-level` property set to the element's outline depth | Role must be either `heading` or `tab`
`h5` element that does not have an `hgroup` ancestor | `heading` role, with the `aria-level` property set to the element's outline depth | Role must be either `heading` or `tab`
`h6` element that does not have an `hgroup` ancestor | `heading` role, with the `aria-level` property set to the element's outline depth | Role must be either `heading` or `tab`
`header` element | No role | If specified, role must be `banner`
`iframe` element | No role | If specified, role must be either `application`, `document`, or `img`
`img` element whose `alt` attribute's value is absent | `img` role | No restrictions
`img` element whose `alt` attribute's value is present and not empty | `img` role | No restrictions
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Button state | `button` role | Role must be either `button`, `menuitem`
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Checkbox state | `checkbox` role | Role must be either `checkbox` or `menuitemcheckbox`
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Image Button state | `button` role | Role must be either `button`, `menuitem`
`input` element with a `type` attribute in the Radio Button state | `radio` role | Role must be either `radio` or `menuitemradio`
`li` element whose parent is an `ol` or `ul` element | `listitem` role | Role must be either `listitem`, `menuitemcheckbox`, `menuitemradio`, `option`, `tab`, or `treeitem`
`main` element | `main` role | Role must be either `document`, `application`, or `main`
`menu` element with a `type` attribute in the toolbar state | `toolbar` role | Role must be either `directory`, `list`, `listbox`, `menu`, `menubar`, `tablist`, `toolbar`, or `tree`
`object` element | No role | If specified, role must be either `application`, `document`, or `img`
`ol` element | `list` role | Role must be either `directory`, `group`, `list`, `listbox`, `menu`, `menubar`, `tablist`, `toolbar`, or `tree`
`option` element that is in a list of options of a `select` element with no `multiple` attribute and with a display size equal to 1 | `option` role | Role must be either `option`, `menuitem`, `menuitemradio`, or `separator`
`output` element | `status` role | No restrictions
`section` element | `region` role | Role must be either `alert`, `alertdialog`, `application`, `contentinfo`, `dialog`, `document`, `log`, `main`, `marquee`, `region`, `search`, or `status`
`select` element with no `multiple` attribute and with a display size equal to 1 | `listbox` role | Role must be either `listbox` or `menu`
`th` element that is not a sorting-capable `th` element or whose column key ordinality is not 1 | `gridcell` role | Role must be either `columnheader`, `rowheader`, or `gridcell`
`ul` element | `list` role | Role must be either `directory`, `group`, `list`, `listbox`, `menu`, `menubar`, `tablist`, `toolbar`, or `tree`
`video` element | No role | If specified, role must be `application`
The body element | `document` role | Role must be either `document` or `application`

The entry "no role", when used as a strong native semantic, means that no role other than `presentation` can be used. When used as a default implicit ARIA semantic, it means the user agent has no default mapping to ARIA roles. (However, it probably will have its own mappings to the accessibility layer.)

Conformance checkers are encouraged to phrase errors such that authors are encouraged to use more appropriate elements rather than remove accessibility annotations. For example, if an `a` element is marked as having the `button` role, a conformance checker could say "Use a more appropriate element to represent a button, for example a `button` element or an `input` element" rather than "The `button` role cannot be used with `a` elements".

These features can be used to make accessibility tools render content to their users in more useful ways. For example, ASCII art, which is really an image, appears to be text, and in the absence of appropriate annotations would end up being rendered by screen readers as a very painful reading of lots of punctuation. Using the features described in this section, one can instead make the ATs skip the ASCII art and just read the caption:

    <figure role="img" aria-labelledby="fish-caption">
     <pre>
     o           .'`/
         '      /  (
       O    .-'` ` `'-._      .')
          _/ (o)        '.  .' /
          )       )))     ><  <
          `\  |_\      _.'  '. \
            '-._  _ .-'       '.)
        jgs     `\__\
     </pre>
     <figcaption id="fish-caption">
      Joan G. Stark, "<cite>fish</cite>".
      October 1997. ASCII on electrons. 28×8.
     </figcaption>
    </figure>

## 4 The elements of HTML

### 4.1 The root element

#### 4.1.1 The `html` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As the root element of a document.
  Wherever a subdocument fragment is allowed in a compound document.
Content model:
  A `head` element followed by a `body` element.
Tag omission in text/html:
  An `html` element's start tag can be omitted if the first thing inside the `html` element is not a comment.
  An `html` element's end tag can be omitted if the `html` element is not immediately followed by a comment.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `manifest` — Application cache manifest
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLHtmlElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `html` element represents the root of an HTML document.

Authors are encouraged to specify a `lang` attribute on the root `html` element, giving the document's language. This aids speech synthesis tools to determine what pronunciations to use, translation tools to determine what rules to use, and so forth.

The `manifest` attribute gives the address of the document's application cache manifest, if there is one. If the attribute is present, the attribute's value must be a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

The `manifest` attribute only has an effect during the early stages of document load. Changing the attribute dynamically thus has no effect (and thus, no DOM API is provided for this attribute).

For the purposes of application cache selection, later `base` elements cannot affect the resolving of relative URLs in `manifest` attributes, as the attributes are processed before those elements are seen.

The `window.applicationCache` IDL attribute provides scripted access to the offline application cache mechanism.

The `html` element in the following example declares that the document's language is English.

    <!DOCTYPE html>
    <html lang="en">
    <head>
    <title>Swapping Songs</title>
    </head>
    <body>
    <h1>Swapping Songs</h1>
    <p>Tonight I swapped some of the songs I wrote with some friends, who
    gave me some of the songs they wrote. I love sharing my music.</p>
    </body>
    </html>

### 4.2 Document metadata

#### 4.2.1 The `head` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As the first element in an `html` element.
Content model:
  If the document is an `iframe` `srcdoc` document or if title information is available from a higher-level protocol: Zero or more elements of metadata content, of which no more than one is a `title` element and no more than one is a `base` element.
  Otherwise: One or more elements of metadata content, of which exactly one is a `title` element and no more than one is a `base` element.
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `head` element's start tag can be omitted if the element is empty, or if the first thing inside the `head` element is an element.
  A `head` element's end tag can be omitted if the `head` element is not immediately followed by a space character or a comment.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLHeadElement : HTMLElement {};

The `head` element represents a collection of metadata for the `Document`.

The collection of metadata in a `head` element can be large or small. Here is an example of a very short one:

    <!doctype html>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>A document with a short head</title>
     </head>
     <body>
     ...

Here is an example of a longer one:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <HTML>
     <HEAD>
      <META CHARSET="UTF-8">
      <BASE HREF="http://www.example.com/">
      <TITLE>An application with a long head</TITLE>
      <LINK REL="STYLESHEET" HREF="default.css">
      <LINK REL="STYLESHEET ALTERNATE" HREF="big.css" TITLE="Big Text">
      <SCRIPT SRC="support.js"></SCRIPT>
      <META NAME="APPLICATION-NAME" CONTENT="Long headed application">
     </HEAD>
     <BODY>
     ...

The `title` element is a required child in most situations, but when a higher-level protocol provides title information, e.g. in the Subject line of an e-mail when HTML is used as an e-mail authoring format, the `title` element can be omitted.

#### 4.2.2 The `title` element

Categories:
  Metadata content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  In a `head` element containing no other `title` elements.
Content model:
  Text that is not inter-element whitespace.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTitleElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString text;
      };

The `title` element represents the document's title or name. Authors should use titles that identify their documents even when they are used out of context, for example in a user's history or bookmarks, or in search results. The document's title is often different from its first heading, since the first heading does not have to stand alone when taken out of context.

There must be no more than one `title` element per document.

If it's reasonable for the `Document` to have no title, then the `title` element is probably not required. See the `head` element's content model for a description of when the element is required.

title . `text` [ = value ]

  Returns the contents of the element, ignoring child nodes that aren't `Text` nodes.

  Can be set, to replace the element's children with the given value.

The IDL attribute `text` must return a concatenation of the contents of all the `Text` nodes that are children of the `title` element (ignoring any other nodes such as comments or elements), in tree order. On setting, it must act the same way as the `textContent` IDL attribute.

Here are some examples of appropriate titles, contrasted with the top-level headings that might be used on those same pages.

      <title>Introduction to The Mating Rituals of Bees</title>
        ...
      <h1>Introduction</h1>
      <p>This companion guide to the highly successful
      <cite>Introduction to Medieval Bee-Keeping</cite> book is...

The next page might be a part of the same site. Note how the title describes the subject matter unambiguously, while the first heading assumes the reader knows what the context is and therefore won't wonder if the dances are Salsa or Waltz:

      <title>Dances used during bee mating rituals</title>
        ...
      <h1>The Dances</h1>

The string to use as the document's title is given by the `document.title` IDL attribute.

User agents should use the document's title when referring to the document in their user interface. When the contents of a `title` element are used in this way, the directionality of that `title` element should be used to set the directionality of the document's title in the user interface.

#### 4.2.3 The `base` element

Categories:
  Metadata content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  In a `head` element containing no other `base` elements.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `href` — Document base URL
  `target` — Default browsing context for hyperlink navigation and form submission
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLBaseElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString href;
                 attribute DOMString target;
      };

The `base` element allows authors to specify the document base URL for the purposes of resolving relative URLs, and the name of the default browsing context for the purposes of following hyperlinks. The element does not represent any content beyond this information.

There must be no more than one `base` element per document.

A `base` element must have either an `href` attribute, a `target` attribute, or both.

The `href` content attribute, if specified, must contain a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

A `base` element, if it has an `href` attribute, must come before any other elements in the tree that have attributes defined as taking URLs, except the `html` element (its `manifest` attribute isn't affected by `base` elements).

If there are multiple `base` elements with `href` attributes, all but the first are ignored.

The `target` attribute, if specified, must contain a valid browsing context name or keyword, which specifies which browsing context is to be used as the default when hyperlinks and forms in the `Document` cause navigation.

A `base` element, if it has a `target` attribute, must come before any elements in the tree that represent hyperlinks.

If there are multiple `base` elements with `target` attributes, all but the first are ignored.

A `base` element that is the first `base` element with an `href` content attribute in a particular `Document` has a frozen base URL. The frozen base URL must be set, synchronously, whenever any of the following situations occur:

- The `base` element becomes the first `base` element in tree order with an `href` content attribute in its `Document`.
- The `base` element is the first `base` element in tree order with an `href` content attribute in its `Document`, and its `href` content attribute is changed.

To set the frozen base URL, resolve the value of the element's `href` content attribute relative to the `Document`'s fallback base URL; if this is successful, set the frozen base URL to the resulting absolute URL, otherwise, set the frozen base URL to the fallback base URL.

The `href` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the result of running the following algorithm:

1. If the `base` element has no `href` content attribute, then return the document base URL and abort these steps.

2. Let fallback base url be the `Document`'s fallback base URL.

3. Let url be the value of the `href` attribute of the `base` element.

4. Resolve url relative to fallback base url (thus, the `base` `href` attribute isn't affected by `xml:base` attributes or `base` elements).

5. If the previous step was successful, return the resulting absolute URL and abort these steps.

6. Otherwise, return the empty string.

The `href` IDL attribute, on setting, must set the `href` content attribute to the given new value.

The `target` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

In this example, a `base` element is used to set the document base URL:

    <!DOCTYPE html>
    <html>
        <head>
            <title>This is an example for the &lt;base&gt; element</title>
            <base href="http://www.example.com/news/index.html">
        </head>
        <body>
            <p>Visit the <a href="archives.html">archives</a>.</p>
        </body>
    </html>

The link in the above example would be a link to "`http://www.example.com/news/archives.html`".

#### 4.2.4 The `link` element

Categories:
  Metadata content.
  If the `itemprop` attribute is present: flow content.
  If the `itemprop` attribute is present: phrasing content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where metadata content is expected.
  In a `noscript` element that is a child of a `head` element.
  If the `itemprop` attribute is present: where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `href` — Address of the hyperlink
  `crossorigin` — How the element handles crossorigin requests
  `rel` — Relationship between the document containing the hyperlink and the destination resource
  `media` — Applicable media
  `hreflang` — Language of the linked resource
  `type` — Hint for the type of the referenced resource
  `sizes` — Sizes of the icons (for `rel`="`icon`")
  Also, the `title` attribute has special semantics on this element: Title of the link; alternative style sheet set name.
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLLinkElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString href;
                 attribute DOMString? crossOrigin;
                 attribute DOMString rel;
        readonly attribute DOMTokenList relList;
                 attribute DOMString media;
                 attribute DOMString hreflang;
                 attribute DOMString type;
        [PutForwards=value] readonly attribute DOMSettableTokenList sizes;

        // also has obsolete members
      };
      HTMLLinkElement implements LinkStyle;

The `link` element allows authors to link their document to other resources.

The destination of the link(s) is given by the `href` attribute, which must be present and must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces. If the `href` attribute is absent, then the element does not define a link.

A `link` element must have either a `rel` attribute or an `itemprop` attribute, but not both.

If the `rel` attribute is used, the element is restricted to the `head` element. When used with the `itemprop` attribute, the element can be used both in the `head` element and in the `body` of the page, subject to the constraints of the microdata model.

The types of link indicated (the relationships) are given by the value of the `rel` attribute, which, if present, must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens. The allowed keywords and their meanings are defined in a later section. If the `rel` attribute is absent, has no keywords, or if none of the keywords used are allowed according to the definitions in this specification, then the element does not create any links.

Two categories of links can be created using the `link` element: Links to external resources and hyperlinks. The link types section defines whether a particular link type is an external resource or a hyperlink. One `link` element can create multiple links (of which some might be external resource links and some might be hyperlinks); exactly which and how many links are created depends on the keywords given in the `rel` attribute. User agents must process the links on a per-link basis, not a per-element basis.

Each link created for a `link` element is handled separately. For instance, if there are two `link` elements with `rel="stylesheet"`, they each count as a separate external resource, and each is affected by its own attributes independently. Similarly, if a single `link` element has a `rel` attribute with the value `next stylesheet`, it creates both a hyperlink (for the `next` keyword) and an external resource link (for the `stylesheet` keyword), and they are affected by other attributes (such as `media` or `title`) differently.

For example, the following `link` element creates two hyperlinks (to the same page):

    <link rel="author license" href="/about">

The two links created by this element are one whose semantic is that the target page has information about the current page's author, and one whose semantic is that the target page has information regarding the license under which the current page is provided.

The `crossorigin` attribute is a CORS settings attribute. It is intended for use with external resource links.

The exact behavior for links to external resources depends on the exact relationship, as defined for the relevant link type. Some of the attributes control whether or not the external resource is to be applied (as defined below).

For external resources that are represented in the DOM (for example, style sheets), the DOM representation must be made available (modulo cross-origin restrictions) even if the resource is not applied. To obtain the resource, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If the `href` attribute's value is the empty string, then abort these steps.

2. Resolve the URL given by the `href` attribute, relative to the element.

3. If the previous step fails, then abort these steps.

4. Do a potentially CORS-enabled fetch of the resulting absolute URL, with the mode being the current state of the element's `crossorigin` content attribute, the origin being the origin of the `link` element's node document, and the default origin behaviour set to taint.

   The resource obtained in this fashion can be either CORS-same-origin or CORS-cross-origin.

User agents may opt to only try to obtain such resources when they are needed, instead of pro-actively fetching all the external resources that are not applied.

The semantics of the protocol used (e.g. HTTP) must be followed when fetching external resources. (For example, redirects will be followed and 404 responses will cause the external resource to not be applied.)

Once the attempts to obtain the resource and its critical subresources are complete, the user agent must, if the loads were successful, queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the `link` element, or, if the resource or one of its critical subresources failed to completely load for any reason (e.g. DNS error, HTTP 404 response, a connection being prematurely closed, unsupported Content-Type), queue a task to fire a simple event named `error` at the `link` element. Non-network errors in processing the resource or its subresources (e.g. CSS parse errors, PNG decoding errors) are not failures for the purposes of this paragraph.

The task source for these tasks is the DOM manipulation task source.

The element must delay the load event of the element's node document until all the attempts to obtain the resource and its critical subresources are complete. (Resources that the user agent has not yet attempted to obtain, e.g. because it is waiting for the resource to be needed, do not delay the load event.)

Interactive user agents may provide users with a means to follow the hyperlinks created using the `link` element, somewhere within their user interface. The exact interface is not defined by this specification, but it could include the following information (obtained from the element's attributes, again as defined below), in some form or another (possibly simplified), for each hyperlink created with each `link` element in the document:

- The relationship between this document and the resource (given by the `rel` attribute)
- The title of the resource (given by the `title` attribute).
- The address of the resource (given by the `href` attribute).
- The language of the resource (given by the `hreflang` attribute).
- The optimum media for the resource (given by the `media` attribute).

User agents could also include other information, such as the type of the resource (as given by the `type` attribute).

Hyperlinks created with the `link` element and its `rel` attribute apply to the whole page. This contrasts with the `rel` attribute of `a` and `area` elements, which indicates the type of a link whose context is given by the link's location within the document.

The `media` attribute says which media the resource applies to. The value must be a valid media query list.

If the link is a hyperlink then the `media` attribute is purely advisory, and describes for which media the document in question was designed.

However, if the link is an external resource link, then the `media` attribute is prescriptive. The user agent must apply the external resource when the `media` attribute's value matches the environment and the other relevant conditions apply, and must not apply it otherwise.

The external resource might have further restrictions defined within that limit its applicability. For example, a CSS style sheet might have some `@media` blocks. This specification does not override such further restrictions or requirements.

The default, if the `media` attribute is omitted, is "`all`", meaning that by default links apply to all media.

The `hreflang` attribute on the `link` element has the same semantics as the `hreflang` attribute on `a` and `area` elements.

The `type` attribute gives the MIME type of the linked resource. It is purely advisory. The value must be a valid MIME type.

For external resource links, the `type` attribute is used as a hint to user agents so that they can avoid fetching resources they do not support. If the attribute is present, then the user agent must assume that the resource is of the given type (even if that is not a valid MIME type, e.g. the empty string). If the attribute is omitted, but the external resource link type has a default type defined, then the user agent must assume that the resource is of that type. If the UA does not support the given MIME type for the given link relationship, then the UA should not obtain the resource; if the UA does support the given MIME type for the given link relationship, then the UA should obtain the resource at the appropriate time as specified for the external resource link's particular type. If the attribute is omitted, and the external resource link type does not have a default type defined, but the user agent would obtain the resource if the type was known and supported, then the user agent should obtain the resource under the assumption that it will be supported.

User agents must not consider the `type` attribute authoritative — upon fetching the resource, user agents must not use the `type` attribute to determine its actual type. Only the actual type (as defined in the next paragraph) is used to determine whether to apply the resource, not the aforementioned assumed type.

If the external resource link type defines rules for processing the resource's Content-Type metadata, then those rules apply. Otherwise, if the resource is expected to be an image, user agents may apply the image sniffing rules, with the official type being the type determined from the resource's Content-Type metadata, and use the resulting sniffed type of the resource as if it was the actual type. Otherwise, if neither of these conditions apply or if the user agent opts not to apply the image sniffing rules, then the user agent must use the resource's Content-Type metadata to determine the type of the resource. If there is no type metadata, but the external resource link type has a default type defined, then the user agent must assume that the resource is of that type.

The `stylesheet` link type defines rules for processing the resource's Content-Type metadata.

Once the user agent has established the type of the resource, the user agent must apply the resource if it is of a supported type and the other relevant conditions apply, and must ignore the resource otherwise.

If a document contains style sheet links labeled as follows:

    <link rel="stylesheet" href="A" type="text/plain">
    <link rel="stylesheet" href="B" type="text/css">
    <link rel="stylesheet" href="C">

...then a compliant UA that supported only CSS style sheets would fetch the B and C files, and skip the A file (since `text/plain` is not the MIME type for CSS style sheets).

For files B and C, it would then check the actual types returned by the server. For those that are sent as `text/css`, it would apply the styles, but for those labeled as `text/plain`, or any other type, it would not.

If one of the two files was returned without a Content-Type metadata, or with a syntactically incorrect type like `Content-Type: "null"`, then the default type for `stylesheet` links would kick in. Since that default type is `text/css`, the style sheet would nonetheless be applied.

The `title` attribute gives the title of the link. With one exception, it is purely advisory. The value is text. The exception is for style sheet links, where the `title` attribute defines alternative style sheet sets.

The `title` attribute on `link` elements differs from the global `title` attribute of most other elements in that a link without a title does not inherit the title of the parent element: it merely has no title.

The `sizes` attribute is used with the `icon` link type. The attribute must not be specified on `link` elements that do not have a `rel` attribute that specifies the `icon` keyword.

The activation behavior of `link` elements that create hyperlinks is to run the following steps:

1. If the `link` element's node document is not fully active, then abort these steps.

2. Follow the hyperlink created by the `link` element.

HTTP `Link:` headers, if supported, must be assumed to come before any links in the document, in the order that they were given in the HTTP message. These headers are to be processed according to the rules given in the relevant specifications. [HTTP] [WEBLINK]

Registration of relation types in HTTP Link: headers is distinct from HTML link types, and thus their semantics can be different from same-named HTML types.

The IDL attributes `href`, `rel`, `media`, `hreflang`, `type`, and `sizes` each must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `crossOrigin` IDL attribute must reflect the `crossorigin` content attribute.

The IDL attribute `relList` must reflect the `rel` content attribute.

The `LinkStyle` interface is also implemented by this element. [CSSOM]

Here, a set of `link` elements provide some style sheets:

    <!-- a persistent style sheet -->
    <link rel="stylesheet" href="default.css">

    <!-- the preferred alternate style sheet -->
    <link rel="stylesheet" href="green.css" title="Green styles">

    <!-- some alternate style sheets -->
    <link rel="alternate stylesheet" href="contrast.css" title="High contrast">
    <link rel="alternate stylesheet" href="big.css" title="Big fonts">
    <link rel="alternate stylesheet" href="wide.css" title="Wide screen">

The following example shows how you can specify versions of the page that use alternative formats, are aimed at other languages, and that are intended for other media:

    <link rel=alternate href="/en/html" hreflang=en type=text/html title="English HTML">
    <link rel=alternate href="/fr/html" hreflang=fr type=text/html title="French HTML">
    <link rel=alternate href="/en/html/print" hreflang=en type=text/html media=print title="English HTML (for printing)">
    <link rel=alternate href="/fr/html/print" hreflang=fr type=text/html media=print title="French HTML (for printing)">
    <link rel=alternate href="/en/pdf" hreflang=en type=application/pdf title="English PDF">
    <link rel=alternate href="/fr/pdf" hreflang=fr type=application/pdf title="French PDF">

#### 4.2.5 The `meta` element

Categories:
  Metadata content.
  If the `itemprop` attribute is present: flow content.
  If the `itemprop` attribute is present: phrasing content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  If the `charset` attribute is present, or if the element's `http-equiv` attribute is in the Encoding declaration state: in a `head` element.
  If the `http-equiv` attribute is present but not in the Encoding declaration state: in a `head` element.
  If the `http-equiv` attribute is present but not in the Encoding declaration state: in a `noscript` element that is a child of a `head` element.
  If the `name` attribute is present: where metadata content is expected.
  If the `itemprop` attribute is present: where metadata content is expected.
  If the `itemprop` attribute is present: where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `name` — Metadata name
  `http-equiv` — Pragma directive
  `content` — Value of the element
  `charset` — Character encoding declaration
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLMetaElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString name;
                 attribute DOMString httpEquiv;
                 attribute DOMString content;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `meta` element represents various kinds of metadata that cannot be expressed using the `title`, `base`, `link`, `style`, and `script` elements.

The `meta` element can represent document-level metadata with the `name` attribute, pragma directives with the `http-equiv` attribute, and the file's character encoding declaration when an HTML document is serialised to string form (e.g. for transmission over the network or for disk storage) with the `charset` attribute.

Exactly one of the `name`, `http-equiv`, `charset`, and `itemprop` attributes must be specified.

If either `name`, `http-equiv`, or `itemprop` is specified, then the `content` attribute must also be specified. Otherwise, it must be omitted.

The `charset` attribute specifies the character encoding used by the document. This is a character encoding declaration. If the attribute is present in an XML document, its value must be an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`UTF-8`" (and the document is therefore forced to use UTF-8 as its encoding).

The `charset` attribute on the `meta` element has no effect in XML documents, and is only allowed in order to facilitate migration to and from XHTML.

There must not be more than one `meta` element with a `charset` attribute per document.

The `content` attribute gives the value of the document metadata or pragma directive when the element is used for those purposes. The allowed values depend on the exact context, as described in subsequent sections of this specification.

If a `meta` element has a `name` attribute, it sets document metadata. Document metadata is expressed in terms of name-value pairs, the `name` attribute on the `meta` element giving the name, and the `content` attribute on the same element giving the value. The name specifies what aspect of metadata is being set; valid names and the meaning of their values are described in the following sections. If a `meta` element has no `content` attribute, then the value part of the metadata name-value pair is the empty string.

The `name` and `content` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name. The IDL attribute `httpEquiv` must reflect the content attribute `http-equiv`.

##### 4.2.5.1 Standard metadata names

This specification defines a few names for the `name` attribute of the `meta` element.

Names are case-insensitive, and must be compared in an ASCII case-insensitive manner.

`application-name`

  The value must be a short free-form string giving the name of the Web application that the page represents. If the page is not a Web application, the `application-name` metadata name must not be used. Translations of the Web application's name may be given, using the `lang` attribute to specify the language of each name.

  There must not be more than one `meta` element with a given language and with its `name` attribute set to the value `application-name` per document.

  User agents may use the application name in UI in preference to the page's `title`, since the title might include status messages and the like relevant to the status of the page at a particular moment in time instead of just being the name of the application.

  To find the application name to use given an ordered list of languages (e.g. British English, American English, and English), user agents must run the following steps:

  1. Let languages be the list of languages.

  2. Let default language be the language of the `Document`'s root element, if any, and if that language is not unknown.

  3. If there is a default language, and if it is not the same language as any of the languages in languages, append it to languages.

  4. Let winning language be the first language in languages for which there is a `meta` element in the `Document` that has its `name` attribute set to the value `application-name` and whose language is the language in question.

     If none of the languages have such a `meta` element, then abort these steps; there's no given application name.

  5. Return the value of the `content` attribute of the first `meta` element in the `Document` in tree order that has its `name` attribute set to the value `application-name` and whose language is winning language.

  This algorithm would be used by a browser when it needs a name for the page, for instance, to label a bookmark. The languages it would provide to the algorithm would be the user's preferred languages.

`author`

  The value must be a free-form string giving the name of one of the page's authors.

`description`

  The value must be a free-form string that describes the page. The value must be appropriate for use in a directory of pages, e.g. in a search engine. There must not be more than one `meta` element with its `name` attribute set to the value `description` per document.

`generator`

  The value must be a free-form string that identifies one of the software packages used to generate the document. This value must not be used on pages whose markup is not generated by software, e.g. pages whose markup was written by a user in a text editor.

  Here is what a tool called "Frontweaver" could include in its output, in the page's `head` element, to identify itself as the tool used to generate the page:

      <meta name=generator content="Frontweaver 8.2">

`keywords`

  The value must be a set of comma-separated tokens, each of which is a keyword relevant to the page.

  This page about typefaces on British motorways uses a `meta` element to specify some keywords that users might use to look for the page:

      <!DOCTYPE HTML>
      <html>
       <head>
        <title>Typefaces on UK motorways</title>
        <meta name="keywords" content="british,type face,font,fonts,highway,highways">
       </head>
       <body>
        ...

  Many search engines do not consider such keywords, because this feature has historically been used unreliably and even misleadingly as a way to spam search engine results in a way that is not helpful for users.

  To obtain the list of keywords that the author has specified as applicable to the page, the user agent must run the following steps:

  1. Let keywords be an empty list.

  2. For each `meta` element with a `name` attribute and a `content` attribute and whose `name` attribute's value is `keywords`, run the following substeps:

     1. Split the value of the element's `content` attribute on commas.

     2. Add the resulting tokens, if any, to keywords.

  3. Remove any duplicates from keywords.

  4. Return keywords. This is the list of keywords that the author has specified as applicable to the page.

  User agents should not use this information when there is insufficient confidence in the reliability of the value.

  For instance, it would be reasonable for a content management system to use the keyword information of pages within the system to populate the index of a site-specific search engine, but a large-scale content aggregator that used this information would likely find that certain users would try to game its ranking mechanism through the use of inappropriate keywords.

##### 4.2.5.2 Other metadata names

Extensions to the predefined set of metadata names may be registered in the WHATWG Wiki MetaExtensions page. [WHATWGWIKI]

Anyone is free to edit the WHATWG Wiki MetaExtensions page at any time to add a type. These new names must be specified with the following information:

Keyword

  The actual name being defined. The name should not be confusingly similar to any other defined name (e.g. differing only in case).

Brief description

  A short non-normative description of what the metadata name's meaning is, including the format the value is required to be in.

Specification
  A link to a more detailed description of the metadata name's semantics and requirements. It could be another page on the Wiki, or a link to an external page.
Synonyms

  A list of other names that have exactly the same processing requirements. Authors should not use the names defined to be synonyms, they are only intended to allow user agents to support legacy content. Anyone may remove synonyms that are not used in practice; only names that need to be processed as synonyms for compatibility with legacy content are to be registered in this way.

Status

  One of the following:

  Proposed
    The name has not received wide peer review and approval. Someone has proposed it and is, or soon will be, using it.
  Ratified
    The name has received wide peer review and approval. It has a specification that unambiguously defines how to handle pages that use the name, including when they use it in incorrect ways.
  Discontinued
    The metadata name has received wide peer review and it has been found wanting. Existing pages are using this metadata name, but new pages should avoid it. The "brief description" and "specification" entries will give details of what authors should use instead, if anything.

  If a metadata name is found to be redundant with existing values, it should be removed and listed as a synonym for the existing value.

  If a metadata name is registered in the "proposed" state for a period of a month or more without being used or specified, then it may be removed from the registry.

  If a metadata name is added with the "proposed" status and found to be redundant with existing values, it should be removed and listed as a synonym for the existing value. If a metadata name is added with the "proposed" status and found to be harmful, then it should be changed to "discontinued" status.

  Anyone can change the status at any time, but should only do so in accordance with the definitions above.

Conformance checkers must use the information given on the WHATWG Wiki MetaExtensions page to establish if a value is allowed or not: values defined in this specification or marked as "proposed" or "ratified" must be accepted, whereas values marked as "discontinued" or not listed in either this specification or on the aforementioned page must be rejected as invalid. Conformance checkers may cache this information (e.g. for performance reasons or to avoid the use of unreliable network connectivity).

When an author uses a new metadata name not defined by either this specification or the Wiki page, conformance checkers should offer to add the value to the Wiki, with the details described above, with the "proposed" status.

Metadata names whose values are to be URLs must not be proposed or accepted. Links must be represented using the `link` element, not the `meta` element.

##### 4.2.5.3 Pragma directives

When the `http-equiv` attribute is specified on a `meta` element, the element is a pragma directive.

The `http-equiv` attribute is an enumerated attribute. The following table lists the keywords defined for this attribute. The states given in the first cell of the rows with keywords give the states to which those keywords map. Some of the keywords are non-conforming, as noted in the last column.

State | Keyword | Notes
--- | --- | ---
Content Language | `content-language` | Non-conforming
Encoding declaration | `content-type` |
Default style | `default-style` |
Refresh | `refresh` |
Cookie setter | `set-cookie` | Non-conforming

When a `meta` element is inserted into the document, if its `http-equiv` attribute is present and represents one of the above states, then the user agent must run the algorithm appropriate for that state, as described in the following list:

Content language state (`http-equiv="content-language"`)

  This feature is non-conforming. Authors are encouraged to use the `lang` attribute instead.

  This pragma sets the pragma-set default language. Until such a pragma is successfully processed, there is no pragma-set default language.

  1. If the `meta` element has no `content` attribute, then abort these steps.

  2. If the element's `content` attribute contains a U+002C COMMA character (,) then abort these steps.

  3. Let input be the value of the element's `content` attribute.

  4. Let position point at the first character of input.

  5. Skip whitespace.

  6. Collect a sequence of characters that are not space characters.

  7. Let candidate be the string that resulted from the previous step.

  8. If candidate is the empty string, abort these steps.

  9. Set the pragma-set default language to candidate.

     If the value consists of multiple space-separated tokens, tokens after the first are ignored.

  This pragma is almost, but not quite, entirely unlike the HTTP `Content-Language` header of the same name. [HTTP]

Encoding declaration state (`http-equiv="content-type"`)

  The Encoding declaration state is just an alternative form of setting the `charset` attribute: it is a character encoding declaration. This state's user agent requirements are all handled by the parsing section of the specification.

  For `meta` elements with an `http-equiv` attribute in the Encoding declaration state, the `content` attribute must have a value that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for a string that consists of: the literal string "`text/html;`", optionally followed by any number of space characters, followed by the literal string "`charset=`", followed by one of the labels of the character encoding of the character encoding declaration.

  A document must not contain both a `meta` element with an `http-equiv` attribute in the Encoding declaration state and a `meta` element with the `charset` attribute present.

  The Encoding declaration state may be used in HTML documents, but elements with an `http-equiv` attribute in that state must not be used in XML documents.

Default style state (`http-equiv="default-style"`)

  This pragma sets the name of the default alternative style sheet set.

  1. If the `meta` element has no `content` attribute, or if that attribute's value is the empty string, then abort these steps.

  2. Set the preferred style sheet set to the value of the element's `content` attribute. [CSSOM]

Refresh state (`http-equiv="refresh"`)

  This pragma acts as timed redirect.

  1. If another `meta` element with an `http-equiv` attribute in the Refresh state has already been successfully processed (i.e. when it was inserted the user agent processed it and reached the last step of this list of steps), then abort these steps.

  2. If the `meta` element has no `content` attribute, or if that attribute's value is the empty string, then abort these steps.

  3. Let input be the value of the element's `content` attribute.

  4. Let position point at the first character of input.

  5. Skip whitespace.

  6. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits, and parse the resulting string using the rules for parsing non-negative integers. If the sequence of characters collected is the empty string, then no number will have been parsed; abort these steps. Otherwise, let time be the parsed number.

  7. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits and U+002E FULL STOP characters (.). Ignore any collected characters.

  8. Skip whitespace.

  9. Let url be the address of the current page.

  10. If the character in input pointed to by position is a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) or a U+002C COMMA character (,), then advance position to the next character. Otherwise, jump to the last step.

  11. Skip whitespace.

  12. If the character in input pointed to by position is a U+0055 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U character (U) or a U+0075 LATIN SMALL LETTER U character (u), then advance position to the next character. Otherwise, jump to the last step.

  13. If the character in input pointed to by position is a U+0052 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R character (R) or a U+0072 LATIN SMALL LETTER R character (r), then advance position to the next character. Otherwise, jump to the last step.

  14. If the character in input pointed to by position is s U+004C LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L character (L) or a U+006C LATIN SMALL LETTER L character (l), then advance position to the next character. Otherwise, jump to the last step.

  15. Skip whitespace.

  16. If the character in input pointed to by position is a U+003D EQUALS SIGN (=), then advance position to the next character. Otherwise, jump to the last step.

  17. Skip whitespace.

  18. If the character in input pointed to by position is either a U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (') or U+0022 QUOTATION MARK character ("), then let quote be that character, and advance position to the next character. Otherwise, let quote be the empty string.

  19. Let url be equal to the substring of input from the character at position to the end of the string.

  20. If quote is not the empty string, and there is a character in url equal to quote, then truncate url at that character, so that it and all subsequent characters are removed.

  21. Strip any trailing space characters from the end of url.

  22. Strip any U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab), U+000A LINE FEED (LF), and U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters from url.

  23. Resolve the url value to an absolute URL, relative to the `meta` element. If this fails, abort these steps.

  24. Perform one or more of the following steps:

      - After the refresh has come due (as defined below), if the user has not canceled the redirect and if the `meta` element's node document's active sandboxing flag set does not have the sandboxed automatic features browsing context flag set, navigate the `Document`'s browsing context to url, with replacement enabled, and with the `Document`'s browsing context as the source browsing context.

        For the purposes of the previous paragraph, a refresh is said to have come due as soon as the later of the following two conditions occurs:

        - At least time seconds have elapsed since the document has completely loaded, adjusted to take into account user or user agent preferences.
        - At least time seconds have elapsed since the `meta` element was inserted into the `Document`, adjusted to take into account user or user agent preferences.

      - Provide the user with an interface that, when selected, navigates a browsing context to url, with the `Document`'s browsing context as the source browsing context.

      - Do nothing.

      In addition, the user agent may, as with anything, inform the user of any and all aspects of its operation, including the state of any timers, the destinations of any timed redirects, and so forth.

  For `meta` elements with an `http-equiv` attribute in the Refresh state, the `content` attribute must have a value consisting either of:

  - just a valid non-negative integer, or
  - a valid non-negative integer, followed by a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;), followed by one or more space characters, followed by a substring that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`URL`", followed by a U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=), followed by a valid URL that does not start with a literal U+0027 APOSTROPHE (') or U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (") character.

  In the former case, the integer represents a number of seconds before the page is to be reloaded; in the latter case the integer represents a number of seconds before the page is to be replaced by the page at the given URL.

  A news organization's front page could include the following markup in the page's `head` element, to ensure that the page automatically reloads from the server every five minutes:

      <meta http-equiv="Refresh" content="300">

  A sequence of pages could be used as an automated slide show by making each page refresh to the next page in the sequence, using markup such as the following:

      <meta http-equiv="Refresh" content="20; URL=page4.html">

Cookie setter (`http-equiv="set-cookie"`)

  This pragma sets an HTTP cookie. [COOKIES]

  It is non-conforming. Real HTTP headers should be used instead.

  1. If the `meta` element has no `content` attribute, or if that attribute's value is the empty string, then abort these steps.

  2. Obtain the storage mutex.

  3. Act as if receiving a set-cookie-string for the document's address via a "non-HTTP" API, consisting of the value of the element's `content` attribute encoded as UTF-8. [COOKIES] [ENCODING]

There must not be more than one `meta` element with any particular state in the document at a time.

##### 4.2.5.4 Other pragma directives

Extensions to the predefined set of pragma directives may, under certain conditions, be registered in the WHATWG Wiki PragmaExtensions page. [WHATWGWIKI]

Such extensions must use a name that is identical to an HTTP header registered in the Permanent Message Header Field Registry, and must have behavior identical to that described for the HTTP header. [IANAPERMHEADERS]

Pragma directives corresponding to headers describing metadata, or not requiring specific user agent processing, must not be registered; instead, use metadata names. Pragma directives corresponding to headers that affect the HTTP processing model (e.g. caching) must not be registered, as they would result in HTTP-level behavior being different for user agents that implement HTML than for user agents that do not.

Anyone is free to edit the WHATWG Wiki PragmaExtensions page at any time to add a pragma directive satisfying these conditions. Such registrations must specify the following information:

Keyword

  The actual name being defined. The name must match a previously-registered HTTP name with the same requirements.

Brief description

  A short non-normative description of the purpose of the pragma directive.

Specification
  A link to the specification defining the corresponding HTTP header.

Conformance checkers must use the information given on the WHATWG Wiki PragmaExtensions page to establish if a value is allowed or not: values defined in this specification or listed on the aforementioned page must be accepted, whereas values not listed in either this specification or on the aforementioned page must be rejected as invalid. Conformance checkers may cache this information (e.g. for performance reasons or to avoid the use of unreliable network connectivity).

##### 4.2.5.5 Specifying the document's character encoding

A character encoding declaration is a mechanism by which the character encoding used to store or transmit a document is specified.

The following restrictions apply to character encoding declarations:

- The character encoding name given must be an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the labels of the character encoding used to serialise the file. [ENCODING]
- The character encoding declaration must be serialised without the use of character references or character escapes of any kind.
- The element containing the character encoding declaration must be serialised completely within the first 1024 bytes of the document.

In addition, due to a number of restrictions on `meta` elements, there can only be one `meta`-based character encoding declaration per document.

If an HTML document does not start with a BOM, and its encoding is not explicitly given by Content-Type metadata, and the document is not an `iframe` `srcdoc` document, then the character encoding used must be an ASCII-compatible character encoding, and the encoding must be specified using a `meta` element with a `charset` attribute or a `meta` element with an `http-equiv` attribute in the Encoding declaration state.

A character encoding declaration is required (either in the Content-Type metadata or explicitly in the file) even if the encoding is US-ASCII, because a character encoding is needed to process non-ASCII characters entered by the user in forms, in URLs generated by scripts, and so forth.

If the document is an `iframe` `srcdoc` document, the document must not have a character encoding declaration. (In this case, the source is already decoded, since it is part of the document that contained the `iframe`.)

If an HTML document contains a `meta` element with a `charset` attribute or a `meta` element with an `http-equiv` attribute in the Encoding declaration state, then the character encoding used must be an ASCII-compatible character encoding.

Authors should use UTF-8. Conformance checkers may advise authors against using legacy encodings. [ENCODING]

Authoring tools should default to using UTF-8 for newly-created documents. [ENCODING]

Encodings in which a series of bytes in the range 0x20 to 0x7E can encode characters other than the corresponding characters in the range U+0020 to U+007E represent a potential security vulnerability: a user agent that does not support the encoding (or does not support the label used to declare the encoding, or does not use the same mechanism to detect the encoding of unlabeled content as another user agent) might end up interpreting technically benign plain text content as HTML tags and JavaScript. Authors should therefore not use these encodings. For example, this applies to encodings in which the bytes corresponding to "`<script>`" in ASCII can encode a different string. Authors should not use such encodings, which are known to include JIS_C6226-1983, JIS_X0212-1990, HZ-GB-2312, JOHAB (Windows code page 1361), encodings based on ISO-2022, and encodings based on EBCDIC. Furthermore, authors must not use the CESU-8, UTF-7, BOCU-1 and SCSU encodings, which also fall into this category; these encodings were never intended for use for Web content. [RFC1345] [RFC1842] [RFC1468] [RFC2237] [RFC1554] [CP50220] [RFC1922] [RFC1557] [CESU8] [UTF7] [BOCU1] [SCSU]

Authors should not use UTF-32, as the encoding detection algorithms described in this specification intentionally do not distinguish it from UTF-16. [UNICODE]

Using non-UTF-8 encodings can have unexpected results on form submission and URL encodings, which use the document's character encoding by default.

In XHTML, the XML declaration should be used for inline character encoding information, if necessary.

In HTML, to declare that the character encoding is UTF-8, the author could include the following markup near the top of the document (in the `head` element):

    <meta charset="utf-8">

In XML, the XML declaration would be used instead, at the very top of the markup:

    <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>

#### 4.2.6 The `style` element

Categories:
  Metadata content.
  If the `scoped` attribute is present: flow content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  If the `scoped` attribute is absent: where metadata content is expected.
  If the `scoped` attribute is absent: in a `noscript` element that is a child of a `head` element.
  If the `scoped` attribute is present: where flow content is expected, but before any other flow content other than inter-element whitespace and `style` elements, and not as the child of an element whose content model is transparent.
Content model:
  Depends on the value of the `type` attribute, but must match requirements described in prose below.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `media` — Applicable media
  `type` — Type of embedded resource
  `scoped` — Whether the styles apply to the entire document or just the parent subtree
  Also, the `title` attribute has special semantics on this element: Alternative style sheet set name.
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLStyleElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString media;
                 attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute boolean scoped;
      };
      HTMLStyleElement implements LinkStyle;

The `style` element allows authors to embed style information in their documents. The `style` element is one of several inputs to the styling processing model. The element does not represent content for the user.

The `type` attribute gives the styling language. If the attribute is present, its value must be a valid MIME type that designates a styling language. The `charset` parameter must not be specified. The default value for the `type` attribute, which is used if the attribute is absent, is "`text/css`". [RFC2318]

When examining types to determine if they support the language, user agents must not ignore unknown MIME parameters — types with unknown parameters must be assumed to be unsupported. The `charset` parameter must be treated as an unknown parameter for the purpose of comparing MIME types here.

The `media` attribute says which media the styles apply to. The value must be a valid media query list. The user agent must apply the styles when the `media` attribute's value matches the environment and the other relevant conditions apply, and must not apply them otherwise.

The styles might be further limited in scope, e.g. in CSS with the use of `@media` blocks. This specification does not override such further restrictions or requirements.

The default, if the `media` attribute is omitted, is "`all`", meaning that by default styles apply to all media.

The `scoped` attribute is a boolean attribute. If present, it indicates that the styles are intended just for the subtree rooted at the `style` element's parent element, as opposed to the whole `Document`.

If the `scoped` attribute is present and the element has a parent element, then the `style` element must precede any flow content in its parent element other than inter-element whitespace and other `style` elements, and the parent element's content model must not have a transparent component.

This implies that scoped `style` elements cannot be children of, e.g., `a` or `ins` elements, even when those are used as flow content containers.

A `style` element without a `scoped` attribute is restricted to appearing in the `head` of the document.

A style sheet declared by a `style` element that has a `scoped` attribute and has a parent node that is an element is scoped, with the scoping root being the `style` element's parent element. [CSSSCOPED]

The `title` attribute on `style` elements defines alternative style sheet sets. If the `style` element has no `title` attribute, then it has no title; the `title` attribute of ancestors does not apply to the `style` element. [CSSOM]

The `title` attribute on `style` elements, like the `title` attribute on `link` elements, differs from the global `title` attribute in that a `style` block without a title does not inherit the title of the parent element: it merely has no title.

The `textContent` of a `style` element must match the `style` production in the following ABNF, the character set for which is Unicode. [ABNF]

    style         = no-c-start *( c-start no-c-end c-end no-c-start )
    no-c-start    = < any string that doesn't contain a substring that matches c-start >
    c-start       = "<!--"
    no-c-end      = < any string that doesn't contain a substring that matches c-end >
    c-end         = "-->"

Whenever one of the following conditions occur for an element whose `Document` is in a browsing context:

- the element is popped off the stack of open elements of an HTML parser or XML parser,
- the element is not on the stack of open elements of an HTML parser or XML parser, and it is inserted into a document or removed from a document,
- the element is not on the stack of open elements of an HTML parser or XML parser, and one of its child nodes is modified by a script,

...the user agent must queue a task to invoke the update a `style` block algorithm that applies for the style sheet language specified by the element's `type` attribute, passing it the element's style data.

For styling languages that consist of pure text (as opposed to XML), a `style` element's style data is the concatenation of the contents of all the `Text` nodes that are children of the `style` element (not any other nodes such as comments or elements), in tree order. For XML-based styling languages, the style data consists of all the child nodes of the `style` element.

The update a `style` block algorithm for CSS (`text/css`) is as follows:

1. Let element be the `style` element.

2. If element has an associated CSS style sheet, remove the CSS style sheet in question.

3. If element is not in a `Document`, then abort these steps.

4. Create a CSS style sheet with the following properties:

   type

     `text/css`

   owner node

     element

   media

     The `media` attribute of element.

     This is a reference to the (possibly absent at this time) attribute, rather than a copy of the attribute's current value. The CSSOM specification defines what happens when the attribute is dynamically set, changed, or removed.

   title

     The `title` attribute of element.

     Again, this is a reference to the attribute.

   alternate flag

     Unset.

   origin-clean flag

     Set.

   location
   parent CSS style sheet
   owner CSS rule

     null

   disabled flag

     Left at its default value.

   CSS rules

     Left uninitialized.

This specification does not define any other styling language's update a `style` block algorithm.

Once the attempts to obtain the style sheet's critical subresources, if any, are complete, or, if the style sheet has no critical subresources, once the style sheet has been parsed and processed, the user agent must, if the loads were successful or there were none, queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the `style` element, or, if one of the style sheet's critical subresources failed to completely load for any reason (e.g. DNS error, HTTP 404 response, a connection being prematurely closed, unsupported Content-Type), queue a task to fire a simple event named `error` at the `style` element. Non-network errors in processing the style sheet or its subresources (e.g. CSS parse errors, PNG decoding errors) are not failures for the purposes of this paragraph.

The task source for these tasks is the DOM manipulation task source.

The element must delay the load event of the element's node document until all the attempts to obtain the style sheet's critical subresources, if any, are complete.

This specification does not specify a style system, but CSS is expected to be supported by most Web browsers. [CSS]

The `media`, `type` and `scoped` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `LinkStyle` interface is also implemented by this element. [CSSOM]

The following document has its stress emphasis styled as bright red text rather than italics text, while leaving titles of works and Latin words in their default italics. It shows how using appropriate elements enables easier restyling of documents.

    <!DOCTYPE html>
    <html lang="en-US">
     <head>
      <title>My favorite book</title>
      <style>
       body { color: black; background: white; }
       em { font-style: normal; color: red; }
      </style>
     </head>
     <body>
      <p>My <em>favorite</em> book of all time has <em>got</em> to be
      <cite>A Cat's Life</cite>. It is a book by P. Rahmel that talks
      about the <i lang="la">Felis Catus</i> in modern human society.</p>
     </body>
    </html>

#### 4.2.7 Interactions of styling and scripting

Style sheets, whether added by a `link` element, a `style` element, an `<?xml-stylesheet?>` PI, an HTTP `Link:` header, or some other mechanism, have a style sheet ready flag, which is initially unset.

When a style sheet is ready to be applied, its style sheet ready flag must be set. If the style sheet referenced no other resources (e.g. it was an internal style sheet given by a `style` element with no `@import` rules), then the style rules must be synchronously made available to script; otherwise, the style rules must only be made available to script once the event loop reaches its update the rendering step.

A style sheet in the context of the `Document` of an HTML parser or XML parser is said to be a style sheet that is blocking scripts if the element was created by that `Document`'s parser, and the element is either a `style` element or a `link` element that was an external resource link that contributes to the styling processing model when the element was created by the parser, and the element's style sheet was enabled when the element was created by the parser, and the element's style sheet ready flag is not yet set, and, the last time the event loop reached step 1, the element was in that `Document`, and the user agent hasn't given up on that particular style sheet yet. A user agent may give up on a style sheet at any time.

Giving up on a style sheet before the style sheet loads, if the style sheet eventually does still load, means that the script might end up operating with incorrect information. For example, if a style sheet sets the colour of an element to green, but a script that inspects the resulting style is executed before the sheet is loaded, the script will find that the element is black (or whatever the default colour is), and might thus make poor choices (e.g. deciding to use black as the colour elsewhere on the page, instead of green). Implementors have to balance the likelihood of a script using incorrect information with the performance impact of doing nothing while waiting for a slow network request to finish.

A `Document` has a style sheet that is blocking scripts if there is either a style sheet that is blocking scripts in the context of that `Document`, or if that `Document` is in a browsing context that has a parent browsing context, and the active document of that parent browsing context itself has a style sheet that is blocking scripts.

A `Document` has no style sheet that is blocking scripts if it does not have a style sheet that is blocking scripts as defined in the previous paragraph.

### 4.3 Sections

#### 4.3.1 The `body` element

Categories:
  Sectioning root.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As the second element in an `html` element.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `body` element's start tag can be omitted if the element is empty, or if the first thing inside the `body` element is not a space character or a comment, except if the first thing inside the `body` element is a `meta`, `link`, `script`, `style`, or `template` element.
  A `body` element's end tag can be omitted if the `body` element is not immediately followed by a comment.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `onafterprint`
  `onbeforeprint`
  `onbeforeunload`
  `onhashchange`
  `onlanguagechange`
  `onmessage`
  `onoffline`
  `ononline`
  `onpagehide`
  `onpageshow`
  `onpopstate`
  `onstorage`
  `onunload`
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLBodyElement : HTMLElement {

        // also has obsolete members
      };
      HTMLBodyElement implements WindowEventHandlers;

The `body` element represents the main content of the document.

In conforming documents, there is only one `body` element. The `document.body` IDL attribute provides scripts with easy access to a document's `body` element.

Some DOM operations (for example, parts of the drag and drop model) are defined in terms of "the body element". This refers to a particular element in the DOM, as per the definition of the term, and not any arbitrary `body` element.

The `body` element exposes as event handler content attributes a number of the event handlers of the `Window` object. It also mirrors their event handler IDL attributes.

The `onblur`, `onerror`, `onfocus`, `onload`, `onresize`, and `onscroll` event handlers of the `Window` object, exposed on the `body` element, replace the generic event handlers with the same names normally supported by HTML elements.

Thus, for example, a bubbling `error` event dispatched on a child of the body element of a `Document` would first trigger the `onerror` event handler content attributes of that element, then that of the root `html` element, and only then would it trigger the `onerror` event handler content attribute on the `body` element. This is because the event would bubble from the target, to the `body`, to the `html`, to the `Document`, to the `Window`, and the event handler on the `body` is watching the `Window` not the `body`. A regular event listener attached to the `body` using `addEventListener()`, however, would be run when the event bubbled through the `body` and not when it reaches the `Window` object.

This page updates an indicator to show whether or not the user is online:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Online or offline?</title>
      <script>
       function update(online) {
         document.getElementById('status').textContent =
           online ? 'Online' : 'Offline';
       }
      </script>
     </head>
     <body ononline="update(true)"
           onoffline="update(false)"
           onload="update(navigator.onLine)">
      <p>You are: <span id="status">(Unknown)</span></p>
     </body>
    </html>

#### 4.3.2 The `article` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Sectioning content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `article` element represents a complete, or self-contained, composition in a document, page, application, or site and that is, in principle, independently distributable or reusable, e.g. in syndication. This could be a forum post, a magazine or newspaper article, a blog entry, a user-submitted comment, an interactive widget or gadget, or any other independent item of content.

When `article` elements are nested, the inner `article` elements represent articles that are in principle related to the contents of the outer article. For instance, a blog entry on a site that accepts user-submitted comments could represent the comments as `article` elements nested within the `article` element for the blog entry.

Author information associated with an `article` element (q.v. the `address` element) does not apply to nested `article` elements.

When used specifically with content to be redistributed in syndication, the `article` element is similar in purpose to the `entry` element in Atom. [ATOM]

The schema.org microdata vocabulary can be used to provide the publication date for an `article` element, using one of the CreativeWork subtypes.

When the main content of the page (i.e. excluding footers, headers, navigation blocks, and sidebars) is all one single self-contained composition, that content may be marked with an `article`, but it is technically redundant in that case (since it's self-evident that the page is a single composition, as it is a single document).

This example shows a blog post using the `article` element, with some schema.org annotations:

    <article itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/BlogPosting">
     <header>
      <h1 itemprop="headline">The Very First Rule of Life</h1>
      <p><time itemprop="datePublished" datetime="2009-10-09">3 days ago</time></p>
      <link itemprop="url" href="?comments=0">
     </header>
     <p>If there's a microphone anywhere near you, assume it's hot and
     sending whatever you're saying to the world. Seriously.</p>
     <p>...</p>
     <footer>
      <a itemprop="discussionUrl" href="?comments=1">Show comments...</a>
     </footer>
    </article>

Here is that same blog post, but showing some of the comments:

    <article itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/BlogPosting">
     <header>
      <h1 itemprop="headline">The Very First Rule of Life</h1>
      <p><time itemprop="datePublished" datetime="2009-10-09">3 days ago</time></p>
      <link itemprop="url" href="?comments=0">
     </header>
     <p>If there's a microphone anywhere near you, assume it's hot and
     sending whatever you're saying to the world. Seriously.</p>
     <p>...</p>
     <section>
      <h1>Comments</h1>
      <article itemprop="comment" itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/UserComments" id="c1">
       <link itemprop="url" href="#c1">
       <footer>
        <p>Posted by: <span itemprop="creator" itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/Person">
         <span itemprop="name">George Washington</span>
        </span></p>
        <p><time itemprop="commentTime" datetime="2009-10-10">15 minutes ago</time></p>
       </footer>
       <p>Yeah! Especially when talking about your lobbyist friends!</p>
      </article>
      <article itemprop="comment" itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/UserComments" id="c2">
       <link itemprop="url" href="#c2">
       <footer>
        <p>Posted by: <span itemprop="creator" itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/Person">
         <span itemprop="name">George Hammond</span>
        </span></p>
        <p><time itemprop="commentTime" datetime="2009-10-10">5 minutes ago</time></p>
       </footer>
       <p>Hey, you have the same first name as me.</p>
      </article>
     </section>
    </article>

Notice the use of `footer` to give the information for each comment (such as who wrote it and when): the `footer` element can appear at the start of its section when appropriate, such as in this case. (Using `header` in this case wouldn't be wrong either; it's mostly a matter of authoring preference.)

#### 4.3.3 The `section` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Sectioning content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `section` element represents a generic section of a document or application. A section, in this context, is a thematic grouping of content, typically with a heading.

Examples of sections would be chapters, the various tabbed pages in a tabbed dialog box, or the numbered sections of a thesis. A Web site's home page could be split into sections for an introduction, news items, and contact information.

Authors are encouraged to use the `article` element instead of the `section` element when it would make sense to syndicate the contents of the element.

The `section` element is not a generic container element. When an element is needed only for styling purposes or as a convenience for scripting, authors are encouraged to use the `div` element instead. A general rule is that the `section` element is appropriate only if the element's contents would be listed explicitly in the document's outline.

In the following example, we see an article (part of a larger Web page) about apples, containing two short sections.

    <article>
     <hgroup>
      <h1>Apples</h1>
      <h2>Tasty, delicious fruit!</h2>
     </hgroup>
     <p>The apple is the pomaceous fruit of the apple tree.</p>
     <section>
      <h1>Red Delicious</h1>
      <p>These bright red apples are the most common found in many
      supermarkets.</p>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h1>Granny Smith</h1>
      <p>These juicy, green apples make a great filling for
      apple pies.</p>
     </section>
    </article>

Notice how the use of `section` means that the author can use `h1` elements throughout, without having to worry about whether a particular section is at the top level, the second level, the third level, and so on.

Here is a graduation programme with two sections, one for the list of people graduating, and one for the description of the ceremony. (The markup in this example features an uncommon style sometimes used to minimise the amount of inter-element whitespace.)

    <!DOCTYPE Html>
    <Html
     ><Head
       ><Title
         >Graduation Ceremony Summer 2022</Title
       ></Head
     ><Body
       ><H1
         >Graduation</H1
       ><Section
         ><H1
           >Ceremony</H1
         ><P
           >Opening Procession</P
         ><P
           >Speech by Validactorian</P
         ><P
           >Speech by Class President</P
         ><P
           >Presentation of Diplomas</P
         ><P
           >Closing Speech by Headmaster</P
       ></Section
       ><Section
         ><H1
           >Graduates</H1
         ><Ul
           ><Li
             >Molly Carpenter</Li
           ><Li
             >Anastasia Luccio</Li
           ><Li
             >Ebenezar McCoy</Li
           ><Li
             >Karrin Murphy</Li
           ><Li
             >Thomas Raith</Li
           ><Li
             >Susan Rodriguez</Li
         ></Ul
       ></Section
     ></Body
    ></Html>

In this example, a book author has marked up some sections as chapters and some as appendices, and uses CSS to style the headers in these two classes of section differently. The whole book is wrapped in an `article` element as part of an even larger document containing other books.

    <article class="book">
     <style>
      section { border: double medium; margin: 2em; }
      section.chapter h1 { font: 2em Roboto, Helvetica Neue, sans-serif; }
      section.appendix h1 { font: small-caps 2em Roboto, Helvetica Neue, sans-serif; }
     </style>
     <header>
      <hgroup>
       <h1>My Book</h1>
       <h2>A sample with not much content</h2>
      </hgroup>
      <p><small>Published by Dummy Publicorp Ltd.</small></p>
     </header>
     <section class="chapter">
      <h1>My First Chapter</h1>
      <p>This is the first of my chapters. It doesn't say much.</p>
      <p>But it has two paragraphs!</p>
     </section>
     <section class="chapter">
      <h1>It Continutes: The Second Chapter</h1>
      <p>Bla dee bla, dee bla dee bla. Boom.</p>
     </section>
     <section class="chapter">
      <h1>Chapter Three: A Further Example</h1>
      <p>It's not like a battle between brightness and earthtones would go
      unnoticed.</p>
      <p>But it might ruin my story.</p>
     </section>
     <section class="appendix">
      <h1>Appendix A: Overview of Examples</h1>
      <p>These are demonstrations.</p>
     </section>
     <section class="appendix">
      <h1>Appendix B: Some Closing Remarks</h1>
      <p>Hopefully this long example shows that you <em>can</em> style
      sections, so long as they are used to indicate actual sections.</p>
     </section>
    </article>

#### 4.3.4 The `nav` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Sectioning content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content, but with no `main` element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `nav` element represents a section of a page that links to other pages or to parts within the page: a section with navigation links.

Not all groups of links on a page need to be in a `nav` element — the element is primarily intended for sections that consist of major navigation blocks. In particular, it is common for footers to have a short list of links to various pages of a site, such as the terms of service, the home page, and a copyright page. The `footer` element alone is sufficient for such cases; while a `nav` element can be used in such cases, it is usually unnecessary.

User agents (such as screen readers) that are targeted at users who can benefit from navigation information being omitted in the initial rendering, or who can benefit from navigation information being immediately available, can use this element as a way to determine what content on the page to initially skip or provide on request (or both).

In the following example, there are two `nav` elements, one for primary navigation around the site, and one for secondary navigation around the page itself.

    <body>
     <h1>The Wiki Center Of Exampland</h1>
     <nav>
      <ul>
       <li><a href="/">Home</a></li>
       <li><a href="/events">Current Events</a></li>
       ...more...
      </ul>
     </nav>
     <article>
      <header>
       <h1>Demos in Exampland</h1>
       <p>Written by A. N. Other.</p>
      </header>
      <nav>
       <ul>
        <li><a href="#public">Public demonstrations</a></li>
        <li><a href="#destroy">Demolitions</a></li>
        ...more...
       </ul>
      </nav>
      <div>
       <section id="public">
        <h1>Public demonstrations</h1>
        <p>...more...</p>
       </section>
       <section id="destroy">
        <h1>Demolitions</h1>
        <p>...more...</p>
       </section>
       ...more...
      </div>
      <footer>
       <p><a href="?edit">Edit</a> | <a href="?delete">Delete</a> | <a href="?Rename">Rename</a></p>
      </footer>
     </article>
     <footer>
      <p><small>© copyright 1998 Exampland Emperor</small></p>
     </footer>
    </body>

In the following example, the page has several places where links are present, but only one of those places is considered a navigation section.

    <body itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/Blog">
     <header>
      <h1>Wake up sheeple!</h1>
      <p><a href="news.html">News</a> -
         <a href="blog.html">Blog</a> -
         <a href="forums.html">Forums</a></p>
      <p>Last Modified: <span itemprop="dateModified">2009-04-01</span></p>
      <nav>
       <h1>Navigation</h1>
       <ul>
        <li><a href="articles.html">Index of all articles</a></li>
        <li><a href="today.html">Things sheeple need to wake up for today</a></li>
        <li><a href="successes.html">Sheeple we have managed to wake</a></li>
       </ul>
      </nav>
     </header>
     <main>
      <article itemprop="blogPosts" itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/BlogPosting">
       <header>
        <h1 itemprop="headline">My Day at the Beach</h1>
       </header>
       <main itemprop="articleBody">
        <p>Today I went to the beach and had a lot of fun.</p>
        ...more content...
       </main>
       <footer>
        <p>Posted <time itemprop="datePublished" datetime="2009-10-10">Thursday</time>.</p>
       </footer>
      </article>
      ...more blog posts...
     </main>
     <footer>
      <p>Copyright ©
       <span itemprop="copyrightYear">2010</span>
       <span itemprop="copyrightHolder">The Example Company</span>
      </p>
      <p><a href="about.html">About</a> -
         <a href="policy.html">Privacy Policy</a> -
         <a href="contact.html">Contact Us</a></p>
     </footer>
    </body>

Notice the `main` elements being used to wrap all the contents of the page other than the header and footer, and all the contents of the blog entry other than its header and footer.

You can also see microdata annotations in the above example that use the schema.org vocabulary to provide the publication date and other metadata about the blog post.

A `nav` element doesn't have to contain a list, it can contain other kinds of content as well. In this navigation block, links are provided in prose:

    <nav>
     <h1>Navigation</h1>
     <p>You are on my home page. To the north lies <a href="/blog">my
     blog</a>, from whence the sounds of battle can be heard. To the east
     you can see a large mountain, upon which many <a
     href="/school">school papers</a> are littered. Far up thus mountain
     you can spy a little figure who appears to be me, desperately
     scribbling a <a href="/school/thesis">thesis</a>.</p>
     <p>To the west are several exits. One fun-looking exit is labeled <a
     href="http://games.example.com/">"games"</a>. Another more
     boring-looking exit is labeled <a
     href="http://isp.example.net/">ISP™</a>.</p>
     <p>To the south lies a dark and dank <a href="/about">contacts
     page</a>. Cobwebs cover its disused entrance, and at one point you
     see a rat run quickly out of the page.</p>
    </nav>

#### 4.3.5 The `aside` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Sectioning content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content, but with no `main` element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `aside` element represents a section of a page that consists of content that is tangentially related to the content around the `aside` element, and which could be considered separate from that content. Such sections are often represented as sidebars in printed typography.

The element can be used for typographical effects like pull quotes or sidebars, for advertising, for groups of `nav` elements, and for other content that is considered separate from the main content of the page.

It's not appropriate to use the `aside` element just for parentheticals, since those are part of the main flow of the document.

The following example shows how an aside is used to mark up background material on Switzerland in a much longer news story on Europe.

    <aside>
     <h1>Switzerland</h1>
     <p>Switzerland, a land-locked country in the middle of geographic
     Europe, has not joined the geopolitical European Union, though it is
     a signatory to a number of European treaties.</p>
    </aside>

The following example shows how an aside is used to mark up a pull quote in a longer article.

    ...

    <p>He later joined a large company, continuing on the same work.
    <q>I love my job. People ask me what I do for fun when I'm not at
    work. But I'm paid to do my hobby, so I never know what to
    answer. Some people wonder what they would do if they didn't have to
    work... but I know what I would do, because I was unemployed for a
    year, and I filled that time doing exactly what I do now.</q></p>

    <aside>
     <q> People ask me what I do for fun when I'm not at work. But I'm
     paid to do my hobby, so I never know what to answer. </q>
    </aside>

    <p>Of course his work — or should that be hobby? —
    isn't his only passion. He also enjoys other pleasures.</p>

    ...

The following extract shows how `aside` can be used for blogrolls and other side content on a blog:

    <body>
     <header>
      <h1>My wonderful blog</h1>
      <p>My tagline</p>
     </header>
     <aside>
      <!-- this aside contains two sections that are tangentially related
      to the page, namely, links to other blogs, and links to blog posts
      from this blog -->
      <nav>
       <h1>My blogroll</h1>
       <ul>
        <li><a href="http://blog.example.com/">Example Blog</a>
       </ul>
      </nav>
      <nav>
       <h1>Archives</h1>
       <ol reversed>
        <li><a href="/last-post">My last post</a>
        <li><a href="/first-post">My first post</a>
       </ol>
      </nav>
     </aside>
     <aside>
      <!-- this aside is tangentially related to the page also, it
      contains twitter messages from the blog author -->
      <h1>Twitter Feed</h1>
      <blockquote cite="http://twitter.example.net/t31351234">
       I'm on vacation, writing my blog.
      </blockquote>
      <blockquote cite="http://twitter.example.net/t31219752">
       I'm going to go on vacation soon.
      </blockquote>
     </aside>
     <article>
      <!-- this is a blog post -->
      <h1>My last post</h1>
      <p>This is my last post.</p>
      <footer>
       <p><a href="/last-post" rel=bookmark>Permalink</a>
      </footer>
     </article>
     <article>
      <!-- this is also a blog post -->
      <h1>My first post</h1>
      <p>This is my first post.</p>
      <aside>
       <!-- this aside is about the blog post, since it's inside the
       <article> element; it would be wrong, for instance, to put the
       blogroll here, since the blogroll isn't really related to this post
       specifically, only to the page as a whole -->
       <h1>Posting</h1>
       <p>While I'm thinking about it, I wanted to say something about
       posting. Posting is fun!</p>
      </aside>
      <footer>
       <p><a href="/first-post" rel=bookmark>Permalink</a>
      </footer>
     </article>
     <footer>
      <nav>
       <a href="/archives">Archives</a> —
       <a href="/about">About me</a> —
       <a href="/copyright">Copyright</a>
      </nav>
     </footer>
    </body>

#### 4.3.6 The `h1`, `h2`, `h3`, `h4`, `h5`, and `h6` elements

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Heading content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of an `hgroup` element.
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLHeadingElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

These elements represent headings for their sections.

The semantics and meaning of these elements are defined in the section on headings and sections.

These elements have a rank given by the number in their name. The `h1` element is said to have the highest rank, the `h6` element has the lowest rank, and two elements with the same name have equal rank.

As far as their respective document outlines (their heading and section structures) are concerned, these two snippets are semantically equivalent:

    <body>
    <h1>Let's call it a draw(ing surface)</h1>
    <h2>Diving in</h2>
    <h2>Simple shapes</h2>
    <h2>Canvas coordinates</h2>
    <h3>Canvas coordinates diagram</h3>
    <h2>Paths</h2>
    </body>

    <body>
     <h1>Let's call it a draw(ing surface)</h1>
     <section>
      <h1>Diving in</h1>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h1>Simple shapes</h1>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h1>Canvas coordinates</h1>
      <section>
       <h1>Canvas coordinates diagram</h1>
      </section>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h1>Paths</h1>
     </section>
    </body>

Authors might prefer the former style for its terseness, or the latter style for its convenience in the face of heavy editing; which is best is purely an issue of preferred authoring style.

The two styles can be combined, for compatibility with legacy tools while still future-proofing for when that compatibility is no longer needed. This third snippet again has the same outline as the previous two:

    <body>
     <h1>Let's call it a draw(ing surface)</h1>
     <section>
      <h2>Diving in</h2>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h2>Simple shapes</h2>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h2>Canvas coordinates</h2>
      <section>
       <h3>Canvas coordinates diagram</h3>
      </section>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h2>Paths</h2>
     </section>
    </body>

#### 4.3.7 The `hgroup` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Heading content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  One or more `h1`, `h2`, `h3`, `h4`, `h5`, `h6`, and `template` elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `hgroup` element represents the heading of a section, which consists of all the `h1`–`h6` element children of the `hgroup` element. The element is used to group a set of `h1`–`h6` elements when the heading has multiple levels, such as subheadings, alternative titles, or taglines.

The rank of an `hgroup` element is the rank of the highest-ranked `h1`–`h6` element descendant of the `hgroup` element, if there are any such elements, or otherwise the same as for an `h1` element (the highest rank). Other elements of heading content in the `hgroup` element indicate subheadings or subtitles.

The section on headings and sections defines how `hgroup` elements are assigned to individual sections.

Here are some examples of valid headings.

    <hgroup>
     <h1>The reality dysfunction</h1>
     <h2>Space is not the only void</h2>
    </hgroup>

    <hgroup>
     <h1>Dr. Strangelove</h1>
     <h2>Or: How I Learned to Stop Worrying and Love the Bomb</h2>
    </hgroup>

The point of using `hgroup` in these examples is to mask the `h2` element (which acts as a secondary title) from the outline algorithm.

How a user agent exposes such multi-level headings in user interfaces (e.g. in tables of contents or search results) is left open to implementors, as it is a user interface issue. The first example above could be rendered as:

    The reality dysfunction: Space is not the only void

Alternatively, it could look like this:

    The reality dysfunction (Space is not the only void)

In interfaces where a title can be rendered on multiple lines, it could be rendered as follows, maybe with the first line in a bigger font size:

    The reality dysfunction
    Space is not the only void

#### 4.3.8 The `header` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content, but with no `header`, `footer`, or `main` element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `header` element represents a group of introductory or navigational aids.

A `header` element is intended to usually contain the section's heading (an `h1`–`h6` element or an `hgroup` element), but this is not required. The `header` element can also be used to wrap a section's table of contents, a search form, or any relevant logos.

Here are some sample headers. This first one is for a game:

    <header>
     <p>Welcome to...</p>
     <h1>Voidwars!</h1>
    </header>

The following snippet shows how the element can be used to mark up a specification's header:

    <header>
     <hgroup>
      <h1>Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) 1.2</h1>
      <h2>W3C Working Draft 27 October 2004</h2>
     </hgroup>
     <dl>
      <dt>This version:</dt>
      <dd><a href="http://www.w3.org/TR/2004/WD-SVG12-20041027/">http://www.w3.org/TR/2004/WD-SVG12-20041027/</a></dd>
      <dt>Previous version:</dt>
      <dd><a href="http://www.w3.org/TR/2004/WD-SVG12-20040510/">http://www.w3.org/TR/2004/WD-SVG12-20040510/</a></dd>
      <dt>Latest version of SVG 1.2:</dt>
      <dd><a href="http://www.w3.org/TR/SVG12/">http://www.w3.org/TR/SVG12/</a></dd>
      <dt>Latest SVG Recommendation:</dt>
      <dd><a href="http://www.w3.org/TR/SVG/">http://www.w3.org/TR/SVG/</a></dd>
      <dt>Editor:</dt>
      <dd>Dean Jackson, W3C, <a href="mailto:dean@w3.org">dean@w3.org</a></dd>
      <dt>Authors:</dt>
      <dd>See <a href="#authors">Author List</a></dd>
     </dl>
     <p class="copyright"><a href="http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/ipr-notic ...
    </header>

The `header` element is not sectioning content; it doesn't introduce a new section.

In this example, the page has a page heading given by the `h1` element, and two subsections whose headings are given by `h2` elements. The content after the `header` element is still part of the last subsection started in the `header` element, because the `header` element doesn't take part in the outline algorithm.

    <body>
     <header>
      <h1>Little Green Guys With Guns</h1>
      <nav>
       <ul>
        <li><a href="/games">Games</a>
        <li><a href="/forum">Forum</a>
        <li><a href="/download">Download</a>
       </ul>
      </nav>
      <h2>Important News</h2> <!-- this starts a second subsection -->
      <!-- this is part of the subsection entitled "Important News" -->
      <p>To play today's games you will need to update your client.</p>
      <h2>Games</h2> <!-- this starts a third subsection -->
     </header>
     <p>You have three active games:</p>
     <!-- this is still part of the subsection entitled "Games" -->
     ...

#### 4.3.9 The `footer` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content, but with no `header`, `footer`, or `main` element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `footer` element represents a footer for its nearest ancestor sectioning content or sectioning root element. A footer typically contains information about its section such as who wrote it, links to related documents, copyright data, and the like.

When the `footer` element contains entire sections, they represent appendices, indexes, long colophons, verbose license agreements, and other such content.

Contact information for the author or editor of a section belongs in an `address` element, possibly itself inside a `footer`. Bylines and other information that could be suitable for both a `header` or a `footer` can be placed in either (or neither). The primary purpose of these elements is merely to help the author write self-explanatory markup that is easy to maintain and style; they are not intended to impose specific structures on authors.

Footers don't necessarily have to appear at the end of a section, though they usually do.

When the nearest ancestor sectioning content or sectioning root element is the body element, then it applies to the whole page.

The `footer` element is not sectioning content; it doesn't introduce a new section.

Here is a page with two footers, one at the top and one at the bottom, with the same content:

    <body>
     <footer><a href="../">Back to index...</a></footer>
     <hgroup>
      <h1>Lorem ipsum</h1>
      <h2>The ipsum of all lorems</h2>
     </hgroup>
     <p>A dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod
     tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim
     veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex
     ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in
     voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla
     pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat cupidatat non proident, sunt in
     culpa qui officia deserunt mollit anim id est laborum.</p>
     <footer><a href="../">Back to index...</a></footer>
    </body>

Here is an example which shows the `footer` element being used both for a site-wide footer and for a section footer.

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <HTML><HEAD>
    <TITLE>The Ramblings of a Scientist</TITLE>
    <BODY>
    <H1>The Ramblings of a Scientist</H1>
    <ARTICLE>
     <H1>Episode 15</H1>
     <VIDEO SRC="/fm/015.ogv" CONTROLS PRELOAD>
      <P><A HREF="/fm/015.ogv">Download video</A>.</P>
     </VIDEO>
     <FOOTER> <!-- footer for article -->
      <P>Published <TIME DATETIME="2009-10-21T18:26-07:00">on 2009/10/21 at 6:26pm</TIME></P>
     </FOOTER>
    </ARTICLE>
    <ARTICLE>
     <H1>My Favorite Trains</H1>
     <P>I love my trains. My favorite train of all time is a Köf.</P>
     <P>It is fun to see them pull some coal cars because they look so
     dwarfed in comparison.</P>
     <FOOTER> <!-- footer for article -->
      <P>Published <TIME DATETIME="2009-09-15T14:54-07:00">on 2009/09/15 at 2:54pm</TIME></P>
     </FOOTER>
    </ARTICLE>
    <FOOTER> <!-- site wide footer -->
     <NAV>
      <P><A HREF="/credits.html">Credits</A> —
         <A HREF="/tos.html">Terms of Service</A> —
         <A HREF="/index.html">Blog Index</A></P>
     </NAV>
     <P>Copyright © 2009 Gordon Freeman</P>
    </FOOTER>
    </BODY>
    </HTML>

Some site designs have what is sometimes referred to as "fat footers" — footers that contain a lot of material, including images, links to other articles, links to pages for sending feedback, special offers... in some ways, a whole "front page" in the footer.

This fragment shows the bottom of a page on a site with a "fat footer":

    ...
     <footer>
      <nav>
       <section>
        <h1>Articles</h1>
        <p><img src="images/somersaults.jpeg" alt=""> Go to the gym with
        our somersaults class! Our teacher Jim takes you through the paces
        in this two-part article. <a href="articles/somersaults/1">Part
        1</a> · <a href="articles/somersaults/2">Part 2</a></p>
        <p><img src="images/kindplus.jpeg"> Tired of walking on the edge of
        a clif<!-- sic -->? Our guest writer Lara shows you how to bumble
        your way through the bars. <a href="articles/kindplus/1">Read
        more...</a></p>
        <p><img src="images/crisps.jpeg"> The chips are down, now all
        that's left is a potato. What can you do with it? <a
        href="articles/crisps/1">Read more...</a></p>
       </section>
       <ul>
        <li> <a href="/about">About us...</a>
        <li> <a href="/feedback">Send feedback!</a>
        <li> <a href="/sitemap">Sitemap</a>
       </ul>
      </nav>
      <p><small>Copyright © 2015 The Snacker —
      <a href="/tos">Terms of Service</a></small></p>
     </footer>
    </body>

#### 4.3.10 The `address` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content, but with no heading content descendants, no sectioning content descendants, and no `header`, `footer`, or `address` element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `address` element represents the contact information for its nearest `article` or `body` element ancestor. If that is the body element, then the contact information applies to the document as a whole.

For example, a page at the W3C Web site related to HTML might include the following contact information:

    <ADDRESS>
     <A href="../People/Raggett/">Dave Raggett</A>,
     <A href="../People/Arnaud/">Arnaud Le Hors</A>,
     contact persons for the <A href="Activity">W3C HTML Activity</A>
    </ADDRESS>

The `address` element must not be used to represent arbitrary addresses (e.g. postal addresses), unless those addresses are in fact the relevant contact information. (The `p` element is the appropriate element for marking up postal addresses in general.)

The `address` element must not contain information other than contact information.

For example, the following is non-conforming use of the `address` element:

    <ADDRESS>Last Modified: 1999/12/24 23:37:50</ADDRESS>

Typically, the `address` element would be included along with other information in a `footer` element.

The contact information for a node node is a collection of `address` elements defined by the first applicable entry from the following list:

If node is an `article` element
If node is a `body` element

  The contact information consists of all the `address` elements that have node as an ancestor and do not have another `body` or `article` element ancestor that is a descendant of node.

If node has an ancestor element that is an `article` element
If node has an ancestor element that is a `body` element

  The contact information of node is the same as the contact information of the nearest `article` or `body` element ancestor, whichever is nearest.

If node's node document has a body element

  The contact information of node is the same as the contact information of the body element of the `Document`.

Otherwise

  There is no contact information for node.

User agents may expose the contact information of a node to the user, or use it for other purposes, such as indexing sections based on the sections' contact information.

In this example the footer contains contact information and a copyright notice.

    <footer>
     <address>
      For more details, contact
      <a href="mailto:js@example.com">John Smith</a>.
     </address>
     <p><small>© copyright 2038 Example Corp.</small></p>
    </footer>

#### 4.3.11 Headings and sections

The `h1`–`h6` elements and the `hgroup` element are headings.

The first element of heading content in an element of sectioning content represents the heading for that section. Subsequent headings of equal or higher rank start new (implied) sections, headings of lower rank start implied subsections that are part of the previous one. In both cases, the element represents the heading of the implied section.

Certain elements are said to be sectioning roots, including `blockquote` and `td` elements. These elements can have their own outlines, but the sections and headings inside these elements do not contribute to the outlines of their ancestors.

- `blockquote`
- `body`
- `details`
- `dialog`
- `fieldset`
- `figure`
- `td`

Sectioning content elements are always considered subsections of their nearest ancestor sectioning root or their nearest ancestor element of sectioning content, whichever is nearest, regardless of what implied sections other headings may have created.

For the following fragment:

    <body>
     <h1>Foo</h1>
     <h2>Bar</h2>
     <blockquote>
      <h3>Bla</h3>
     </blockquote>
     <p>Baz</p>
     <h2>Quux</h2>
     <section>
      <h3>Thud</h3>
     </section>
     <p>Grunt</p>
    </body>

...the structure would be:

1. Foo (heading of explicit `body` section, containing the "Grunt" paragraph)
   1. Bar (heading starting implied section, containing a block quote and the "Baz" paragraph)
   2. Quux (heading starting implied section with no content other than the heading itself)
   3. Thud (heading of explicit `section` section)

Notice how the `section` ends the earlier implicit section so that a later paragraph ("Grunt") is back at the top level.

Sections may contain headings of any rank, but authors are strongly encouraged to either use only `h1` elements, or to use elements of the appropriate rank for the section's nesting level.

Authors are also encouraged to explicitly wrap sections in elements of sectioning content, instead of relying on the implicit sections generated by having multiple headings in one element of sectioning content.

For example, the following is correct:

    <body>
     <h4>Apples</h4>
     <p>Apples are fruit.</p>
     <section>
      <h2>Taste</h2>
      <p>They taste lovely.</p>
      <h6>Sweet</h6>
      <p>Red apples are sweeter than green ones.</p>
      <h1>Colour</h1>
      <p>Apples come in various colours.</p>
     </section>
    </body>

However, the same document would be more clearly expressed as:

    <body>
     <h1>Apples</h1>
     <p>Apples are fruit.</p>
     <section>
      <h2>Taste</h2>
      <p>They taste lovely.</p>
      <section>
       <h3>Sweet</h3>
       <p>Red apples are sweeter than green ones.</p>
      </section>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h2>Colour</h2>
      <p>Apples come in various colours.</p>
     </section>
    </body>

Both of the documents above are semantically identical and would produce the same outline in compliant user agents.

This third example is also semantically identical, and might be easier to maintain (e.g. if sections are often moved around in editing):

    <body>
     <h1>Apples</h1>
     <p>Apples are fruit.</p>
     <section>
      <h1>Taste</h1>
      <p>They taste lovely.</p>
      <section>
       <h1>Sweet</h1>
       <p>Red apples are sweeter than green ones.</p>
      </section>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h1>Colour</h1>
      <p>Apples come in various colours.</p>
     </section>
    </body>

This final example would need explicit style rules to be rendered well in legacy browsers. Legacy browsers without CSS support would render all the headings as top-level headings.

##### 4.3.11.1 Creating an outline

This section defines an algorithm for creating an outline for a sectioning content element or a sectioning root element. It is defined in terms of a walk over the nodes of a DOM tree, in tree order, with each node being visited when it is entered and when it is exited during the walk.

The outline for a sectioning content element or a sectioning root element consists of a list of one or more potentially nested sections. The element for which an outline is created is said to be the outline's owner.

A section is a container that corresponds to some nodes in the original DOM tree. Each section can have one heading associated with it, and can contain any number of further nested sections. The algorithm for the outline also associates each node in the DOM tree with a particular section and potentially a heading. (The sections in the outline aren't `section` elements, though some may correspond to such elements — they are merely conceptual sections.)

The following markup fragment:

    <body>
     <h1>A</h1>
     <p>B</p>
     <h2>C</h2>
     <p>D</p>
     <h2>E</h2>
     <p>F</p>
    </body>

...results in the following outline being created for the `body` node (and thus the entire document):

1. Section created for `body` node.

   Associated with heading "A".

   Also associated with paragraph "B".

   Nested sections:

   1. Section implied for first `h2` element.

      Associated with heading "C".

      Also associated with paragraph "D".

      No nested sections.

   2. Section implied for second `h2` element.

      Associated with heading "E".

      Also associated with paragraph "F".

      No nested sections.

The algorithm that must be followed during a walk of a DOM subtree rooted at a sectioning content element or a sectioning root element to determine that element's outline is as follows:

1. Let current outline target be null. (It holds the element whose outline is being created.)

2. Let current section be null. (It holds a pointer to a section, so that elements in the DOM can all be associated with a section.)

3. Create a stack to hold elements, which is used to handle nesting. Initialise this stack to empty.

4. Walk over the DOM in tree order, starting with the sectioning content element or sectioning root element at the root of the subtree for which an outline is to be created, and trigger the first relevant step below for each element as the walk enters and exits it.

   When exiting an element, if that element is the element at the top of the stack

     The element being exited is a heading content element or an element with a `hidden` attribute.

     Pop that element from the stack.

   If the top of the stack is a heading content element or an element with a `hidden` attribute

     Do nothing.

   When entering an element with a `hidden` attribute

     Push the element being entered onto the stack. (This causes the algorithm to skip that element and any descendants of the element.)

   When entering a sectioning content element

     Run these steps:

     1. If current outline target is not null, run these substeps:

        1. If the current section has no heading, create an implied heading and let that be the heading for the current section.

        2. Push current outline target onto the stack.

     2. Let current outline target be the element that is being entered.

     3. Let current section be a newly created section for the current outline target element.

     4. Associate current outline target with current section.

     5. Let there be a new outline for the new current outline target, initialised with just the new current section as the only section in the outline.

   When exiting a sectioning content element, if the stack is not empty

     Run these steps:

     1. If the current section has no heading, create an implied heading and let that be the heading for the current section.

     2. Pop the top element from the stack, and let the current outline target be that element.

     3. Let current section be the last section in the outline of the current outline target element.

     4. Append the outline of the sectioning content element being exited to the current section. (This does not change which section is the last section in the outline.)

   When entering a sectioning root element

     Run these steps:

     1. If current outline target is not null, push current outline target onto the stack.

     2. Let current outline target be the element that is being entered.

     3. Let current outline target's parent section be current section.

     4. Let current section be a newly created section for the current outline target element.

     5. Let there be a new outline for the new current outline target, initialised with just the new current section as the only section in the outline.

   When exiting a sectioning root element, if the stack is not empty

     Run these steps:

     1. If the current section has no heading, create an implied heading and let that be the heading for the current section.

     2. Let current section be current outline target's parent section.

     3. Pop the top element from the stack, and let the current outline target be that element.

   When exiting a sectioning content element or a sectioning root element (when the stack is empty)

     The current outline target is the element being exited, and it is the sectioning content element or a sectioning root element at the root of the subtree for which an outline is being generated.

     If the current section has no heading, create an implied heading and let that be the heading for the current section.

     Skip to the next step in the overall set of steps. (The walk is over.)

   When entering a heading content element

     If the current section has no heading, let the element being entered be the heading for the current section.

     Otherwise, if the element being entered has a rank equal to or higher than the heading of the last section of the outline of the current outline target, or if the heading of the last section of the outline of the current outline target is an implied heading, then create a new section and append it to the outline of the current outline target element, so that this new section is the new last section of that outline. Let current section be that new section. Let the element being entered be the new heading for the current section.

     Otherwise, run these substeps:

     1. Let candidate section be current section.

     2. Heading loop: If the element being entered has a rank lower than the rank of the heading of the candidate section, then create a new section, and append it to candidate section. (This does not change which section is the last section in the outline.) Let current section be this new section. Let the element being entered be the new heading for the current section. Abort these substeps.

     3. Let new candidate section be the section that contains candidate section in the outline of current outline target.

     4. Let candidate section be new candidate section.

     5. Return to the step labeled heading loop.

     Push the element being entered onto the stack. (This causes the algorithm to skip any descendants of the element.)

     Recall that `h1` has the highest rank, and `h6` has the lowest rank.

   Otherwise

     Do nothing.

   In addition, whenever the walk exits a node, after doing the steps above, if the node is not associated with a section yet, associate the node with the section current section.

5. Associate all non-element nodes that are in the subtree for which an outline is being created with the section with which their parent element is associated.

6. Associate all nodes in the subtree with the heading of the section with which they are associated, if any.

The tree of sections created by the algorithm above, or a proper subset thereof, must be used when generating document outlines, for example when generating tables of contents.

The outline created for the body element of a `Document` is the outline of the entire document.

When creating an interactive table of contents, entries should jump the user to the relevant sectioning content element, if the section was created for a real element in the original document, or to the relevant heading content element, if the section in the tree was generated for a heading in the above process.

Selecting the first section of the document therefore always takes the user to the top of the document, regardless of where the first heading in the `body` is to be found.

The outline depth of a heading content element associated with a section section is the number of sections that are ancestors of section in the outermost outline that section finds itself in when the outlines of its `Document`'s elements are created, plus 1. The outline depth of a heading content element not associated with a section is 1.

User agents should provide default headings for sections that do not have explicit section headings.

Consider the following snippet:

    <body>
     <nav>
      <p><a href="/">Home</a></p>
     </nav>
     <p>Hello world.</p>
     <aside>
      <p>My cat is cute.</p>
     </aside>
    </body>

Although it contains no headings, this snippet has three sections: a document (the `body`) with two subsections (a `nav` and an `aside`). A user agent could present the outline as follows:

1. Untitled document
   1. Navigation
   2. Sidebar

These default headings ("Untitled document", "Navigation", "Sidebar") are not specified by this specification, and might vary with the user's language, the page's language, the user's preferences, the user agent implementor's preferences, etc.

The following JavaScript function shows how the tree walk could be implemented. The root argument is the root of the tree to walk (either a sectioning content element or a sectioning root element), and the enter and exit arguments are callbacks that are called with the nodes as they are entered and exited. [ECMA262]

    function (root, enter, exit) {
      var node = root;
      start: while (node) {
        enter(node);
        if (node.firstChild) {
          node = node.firstChild;
          continue start;
        }
        while (node) {
          exit(node);
          if (node == root) {
            node = null;
          } else if (node.nextSibling) {
            node = node.nextSibling;
            continue start;
          } else {
            node = node.parentNode;
          }
        }
      }
    }

##### 4.3.11.2 Sample outlines

This section is non-normative.

The following document shows a straight-forward application of the outline algorithm. First, here is the document, which is a book with very short chapters and subsections:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>The Tax Book (all in one page)</title>
    <h1>The Tax Book</h1>
    <h2>Earning money</h2>
    <p>Earning money is good.</p>
    <h3>Getting a job</h3>
    <p>To earn money you typically need a job.</p>
    <h2>Spending money</h2>
    <p>Spending is what money is mainly used for.</p>
    <h3>Cheap things</h3>
    <p>Buying cheap things often not cost-effective.</p>
    <h3>Expensive things</h3>
    <p>The most expensive thing is often not the most cost-effective either.</p>
    <h2>Investing money</h2>
    <p>You can lend your money to other people.</p>
    <h2>Losing money</h2>
    <p>If you spend money or invest money, sooner or later you will lose money.
    <h3>Poor judgement</h3>
    <p>Usually if you lose money it's because you made a mistake.</p>

This book would form the following outline:

1. The Tax Book
   1. Earning money
      1. Getting a job
   2. Spending money
      1. Cheap things
      2. Expensive things
   3. Investing money
   4. Losing money
      1. Poor judgement

Notice that the `title` element does not participate in the outline.

Here is a similar document, but this time using `section` elements to get the same effect:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>The Tax Book (all in one page)</title>
    <h1>The Tax Book</h1>
    <section>
     <h1>Earning money</h1>
     <p>Earning money is good.</p>
     <section>
      <h1>Getting a job</h1>
      <p>To earn money you typically need a job.</p>
     </section>
    </section>
    <section>
     <h1>Spending money</h1>
     <p>Spending is what money is mainly used for.</p>
     <section>
      <h1>Cheap things</h1>
      <p>Buying cheap things often not cost-effective.</p>
     </section>
     <section>
      <h1>Expensive things</h1>
      <p>The most expensive thing is often not the most cost-effective either.</p>
     </section>
    </section>
    <section>
     <h1>Investing money</h1>
     <p>You can lend your money to other people.</p>
    </section>
    <section>
     <h1>Losing money</h1>
     <p>If you spend money or invest money, sooner or later you will lose money.
     <section>
      <h1>Poor judgement</h1>
      <p>Usually if you lose money it's because you made a mistake.</p>
     </section>
    </section>

This book would form the same outline:

1. The Tax Book
   1. Earning money
      1. Getting a job
   2. Spending money
      1. Cheap things
      2. Expensive things
   3. Investing money
   4. Losing money
      1. Poor judgement

A document can contain multiple top-level headings:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Alphabetic Fruit</title>
    <h1>Apples</h1>
    <p>Pomaceous.</p>
    <h1>Bananas</h1>
    <p>Edible.</p>
    <h1>Carambola</h1>
    <p>Star.</p>

This would form the following simple outline consisting of three top-level sections:

1. Apples
2. Bananas
3. Carambola

Effectively, the `body` element is split into three.

Mixing both the `h1`–`h6` model and the `section`/`h1` model can lead to some unintuitive results.

Consider for example the following, which is just the previous example but with the contents of the (implied) `body` wrapped in a `section`:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Alphabetic Fruit</title>
    <section>
     <h1>Apples</h1>
     <p>Pomaceous.</p>
     <h1>Bananas</h1>
     <p>Edible.</p>
     <h1>Carambola</h1>
     <p>Star.</p>
    </section>

The resulting outline would be:

1. (untitled page)
   1. Apples
   2. Bananas
   3. Carambola

This result is described as unintuitive because it results in three subsections even though there's only one `section` element. Effectively, the `section` is split into three, just like the implied `body` element in the previous example.

(In this example, "(untitled page)" is the implied heading for the `body` element, since it has no explicit heading.)

Headings never rise above other sections. Thus, in the following example, the first `h1` does not actually describe the page header; it describes the header for the second half of the page:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Feathers on The Site of Encyclopedic Knowledge</title>
    <section>
     <h1>A plea from our caretakers</h1>
     <p>Please, we beg of you, send help! We're stuck in the server room!</p>
    </section>
    <h1>Feathers</h1>
    <p>Epidermal growths.</p>

The resulting outline would be:

1. (untitled page)
   1. A plea from our caretakers
2. Feathers

Thus, when an `article` element starts with a `nav` block and only later has its heading, the result is that the `nav` block is not part of the same section as the rest of the `article` in the outline. For instance, take this document:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>We're adopting a child! — Ray's blog</title>
    <h1>Ray's blog</h1>
    <article>
     <header>
      <nav>
       <a href="?t=-1d">Yesterday</a>;
       <a href="?t=-7d">Last week</a>;
       <a href="?t=-1m">Last month</a>
      </nav>
      <h1>We're adopting a child!</h1>
     </header>
     <main>
      <p>As of today, Janine and I have signed the papers to become
      the proud parents of baby Diane! We've been looking forward to
      this day for weeks.</p>
     </main>
    </article>

The resulting outline would be:

1. Ray's blog
   1. Untitled article
      1. Untitled navigation section
   2. We're adopting a child!

Also worthy of note in this example is that the `header` and `main` elements have no effect whatsoever on the document outline.

The `hgroup` element can be used for subheadings. For example:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Chronotype: CS Student</title>
    <hgroup>
     <h1> The morning </h1>
     <h2> 06:00 to 12:00 </h2>
    </hgroup>
    <p>We sleep.</p>
    <hgroup>
     <h1> The afternoon </h1>
     <h2> 12:00 to 18:00 </h2>
    </hgroup>
    <p>We study.</p>
    <hgroup>
     <h2>Additional Commentary</h2>
     <h3>Because not all this is necessarily true</h3>
     <h6>Ok it's almost certainly not true</h6>
    </hgroup>
    <p>Yeah we probably play, rather than study.</p>
    <hgroup>
     <h1> The evening </h1>
     <h2> 18:00 to 00:00 </h2>
    </hgroup>
    <p>We play.</p>
    <hgroup>
     <h1> The night </h1>
     <h2> 00:00 to 06:00 </h2>
    </hgroup>
    <p>We play some more.</p>

The resulting outline would be:

1. The morning 06:00 to 12:00
2. The afternoon 12:00 to 18:00
   1. Additional Commentary Because not all this is necessarily true Ok it's almost certainly not true
3. The evening 18:00 to 00:00
4. The night 00:00 to 06:00

Exactly how this is represented by user agents, as most interface issues, is left as a matter of implementation preference, but the key part is that the `hgroup`'s descendant `h1`–`h6` elements are what form the element's heading. Thus, the following would be equally valid:

1. The morning — 06:00 to 12:00
2. The afternoon — 12:00 to 18:00
   1. Additional Commentary — Because not all this is necessarily true — Ok it's almost certainly not true
3. The evening — 18:00 to 00:00
4. The night — 00:00 to 06:00

But so would the following:

1. The morning
2. The afternoon
   1. Additional Commentary
3. The evening
4. The night

The following would also be valid, though maybe less practical in most contexts:

1. The morning

   06:00 to 12:00

2. The afternoon

   12:00 to 18:00

   1. Additional Commentary

      Because not all this is necessarily true

      Ok it's almost certainly not true

3. The evening

   18:00 to 00:00

4. The night

   00:00 to 06:00

##### 4.3.11.3 Exposing outlines to users

User agents are encouraged to expose page outlines to users to aid in navigation. This is especially true for non-visual media, e.g. screen readers.

However, to mitigate the difficulties that arise from authors misusing sectioning content, user agents are also encouraged to offer a mode that navigates the page using heading content alone.

For instance, a user agent could map the arrow keys as follows:

``Shift`+`← Left``
  Go to previous section, including subsectons of previous sections
``Shift`+`→ Right``
  Go to next section, including subsections of the current section
``Shift`+`↑ Up``
  Go to parent section of the current section
``Shift`+`↓ Down``
  Go to next section, skipping subsections of the current section

Plus in addition, the user agent could map the ``j`` and ``k`` keys to navigating to the previous or next element of heading content, regardless of the section's outline depth and ignoring sections with no headings.

#### 4.3.12 Usage summary

This section is non-normative.

Element | Purpose
--- | ---
Example
`body` | The main content of the document.
    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head> <title>Steve Hill's Home Page</title> </head>
     <body> <p>Hard Trance is My Life.</p> </body>
    </html>
`article` | A complete, or self-contained, composition in a document, page, application, or site and that is, in principle, independently distributable or reusable, e.g. in syndication. This could be a forum post, a magazine or newspaper article, a blog entry, a user-submitted comment, an interactive widget or gadget, or any other independent item of content.
    <article>
     <img src="/tumblr_masqy2s5yn1rzfqbpo1_500.jpg" alt="Yellow smiley face with the caption 'masif'">
     <p>My fave Masif tee so far!</p>
     <footer>Posted 2 days ago</footer>
    </article>
    <article>
     <img src="/tumblr_m9tf6wSr6W1rzfqbpo1_500.jpg" alt="">
     <p>Happy 2nd birthday Masif Saturdays!!!</p>
     <footer>Posted 3 weeks ago</footer>
    </article>
`section` | A generic section of a document or application. A section, in this context, is a thematic grouping of content, typically with a heading.
    <h1>Biography</h1>
    <section>
     <h1>The facts</h1>
     <p>1500+ shows, 14+ countries</p>
    </section>
    <section>
     <h1>2010/2011 figures per year</h1>
     <p>100+ shows, 8+ countries</p>
    </section>
`nav` | A section of a page that links to other pages or to parts within the page: a section with navigation links.
    <nav>
     <p><a href="/">Home</a>
     <p><a href="/biog.html">Bio</a>
     <p><a href="/discog.html">Discog</a>
    </nav>
`aside` | A section of a page that consists of content that is tangentially related to the content around the `aside` element, and which could be considered separate from that content. Such sections are often represented as sidebars in printed typography.
    <h1>Music</h1>
    <p>As any burner can tell you, the event has a lot of trance.</p>
    <aside>You can buy the music we played at our <a href="buy.html">playlist page</a>.</aside>
    <p>This year we played a kind of trance that originated in Belgium, Germany, and the Netherlands in the mid 90s.</p>
`h1`–`h6` | A section heading
    <h1>The Guide To Music On The Playa</h1>
    <h2>The Main Stage</h2>
    <p>If you want to play on a stage, you should bring one.</p>
    <h2>Amplified Music</h2>
    <p>Amplifiers up to 300W or 90dB are welcome.</p>
`hgroup` | The heading of a section, which consists of all the `h1`–`h6` element children of the `hgroup` element. The element is used to group a set of `h1`–`h6` elements when the heading has multiple levels, such as subheadings, alternative titles, or taglines.
    <hgroup>
     <h1>Burning Music</h1>
     <h2>The Guide To Music On The Playa</h2>
    </hgroup>
    <section>
     <hgroup>
      <h1>Main Stage</h1>
      <h2>The Fiction Of A Music Festival</h2>
     </hgroup>
     <p>If you want to play on a stage, you should bring one.</p>
    </section>
    <section>
     <hgroup>
      <h1>Loudness!</h1>
      <h2>Questions About Amplified Music</h2>
     </hgroup>
     <p>Amplifiers up to 300W or 90dB are welcome.</p>
    </section>
`header` | A group of introductory or navigational aids.
    <article>
     <header>
      <h1>Hard Trance is My Life</h1>
      <p>By DJ Steve Hill and Technikal</p>
     </header>
     <p>The album with the amusing punctuation has red artwork.</p>
    </article>
`footer` | A footer for its nearest ancestor sectioning content or sectioning root element. A footer typically contains information about its section such as who wrote it, links to related documents, copyright data, and the like.
    <article>
     <h1>Hard Trance is My Life</h1>
     <p>The album with the amusing punctuation has red artwork.</p>
     <footer>
      <p>Artists: DJ Steve Hill and Technikal</p>
     </footer>
    </article>

##### 4.3.12.1 Article or section?

This section is non-normative.

A `section` forms part of something else. An `article` is its own thing. But how does one know which is which? Mostly the real answer is "it depends on author intent".

For example, one could imagine a book with a "Granny Smith" chapter that just said "These juicy, green apples make a great filling for apple pies."; that would be a `section` because there'd be lots of other chapters on (maybe) other kinds of apples.

On the other hand, one could imagine a tweet or reddit comment or tumblr post or newspaper classified ad that just said "Granny Smith. These juicy, green apples make a great filling for apple pies."; it would then be `article`s because that was the whole thing.

A comment on an article is not part of the `article` on which it is commenting, therefore it is its own `article`.

### 4.4 Grouping content

#### 4.4.1 The `p` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `p` element's end tag can be omitted if the `p` element is immediately followed by an `address`, `article`, `aside`, `blockquote`, `div`, `dl`, `fieldset`, `footer`, `form`, `h1`, `h2`, `h3`, `h4`, `h5`, `h6`, `header`, `hgroup`, `hr`, `main`, `menu`, `nav`, `ol`, `p`, `pre`, `section`, `table`, or `ul`, element, or if there is no more content in the parent element and the parent element is not an `a` element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLParagraphElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `p` element represents a paragraph.

While paragraphs are usually represented in visual media by blocks of text that are physically separated from adjacent blocks through blank lines, a style sheet or user agent would be equally justified in presenting paragraph breaks in a different manner, for instance using inline pilcrows (¶).

The following examples are conforming HTML fragments:

    <p>The little kitten gently seated himself on a piece of
    carpet. Later in his life, this would be referred to as the time the
    cat sat on the mat.</p>

    <fieldset>
     <legend>Personal information</legend>
     <p>
       <label>Name: <input name="n"></label>
       <label><input name="anon" type="checkbox"> Hide from other users</label>
     </p>
     <p><label>Address: <textarea name="a"></textarea></label></p>
    </fieldset>

    <p>There was once an example from Femley,<br>
    Whose markup was of dubious quality.<br>
    The validator complained,<br>
    So the author was pained,<br>
    To move the error from the markup to the rhyming.</p>

The `p` element should not be used when a more specific element is more appropriate.

The following example is technically correct:

    <section>
     <!-- ... -->
     <p>Last modified: 2001-04-23</p>
     <p>Author: fred@example.com</p>
    </section>

However, it would be better marked-up as:

    <section>
     <!-- ... -->
     <footer>Last modified: 2001-04-23</footer>
     <address>Author: fred@example.com</address>
    </section>

Or:

    <section>
     <!-- ... -->
     <footer>
      <p>Last modified: 2001-04-23</p>
      <address>Author: fred@example.com</address>
     </footer>
    </section>

List elements (in particular, `ol` and `ul` elements) cannot be children of `p` elements. When a sentence contains a bulleted list, therefore, one might wonder how it should be marked up.

For instance, this fantastic sentence has bullets relating to

- wizards,
- faster-than-light travel, and
- telepathy,

and is further discussed below.

The solution is to realise that a paragraph, in HTML terms, is not a logical concept, but a structural one. In the fantastic example above, there are actually five paragraphs as defined by this specification: one before the list, one for each bullet, and one after the list.

The markup for the above example could therefore be:

    <p>For instance, this fantastic sentence has bullets relating to</p>
    <ul>
     <li>wizards,
     <li>faster-than-light travel, and
     <li>telepathy,
    </ul>
    <p>and is further discussed below.</p>

Authors wishing to conveniently style such "logical" paragraphs consisting of multiple "structural" paragraphs can use the `div` element instead of the `p` element.

Thus for instance the above example could become the following:

    <div>For instance, this fantastic sentence has bullets relating to
    <ul>
     <li>wizards,
     <li>faster-than-light travel, and
     <li>telepathy,
    </ul>
    and is further discussed below.</div>

This example still has five structural paragraphs, but now the author can style just the `div` instead of having to consider each part of the example separately.

#### 4.4.2 The `hr` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLHRElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `hr` element represents a paragraph-level thematic break, e.g. a scene change in a story, or a transition to another topic within a section of a reference book.

The following fictional extract from a project manual shows two sections that use the `hr` element to separate topics within the section.

    <section>
     <h1>Communication</h1>
     <p>There are various methods of communication. This section
     covers a few of the important ones used by the project.</p>
     <hr>
     <p>Communication stones seem to come in pairs and have mysterious
     properties:</p>
     <ul>
      <li>They can transfer thoughts in two directions once activated
      if used alone.</li>
      <li>If used with another device, they can transfer one's
      consciousness to another body.</li>
      <li>If both stones are used with another device, the
      consciousnesses switch bodies.</li>
     </ul>
     <hr>
     <p>Radios use the electromagnetic spectrum in the meter range and
     longer.</p>
     <hr>
     <p>Signal flares use the electromagnetic spectrum in the
     nanometer range.</p>
    </section>
    <section>
     <h1>Food</h1>
     <p>All food at the project is rationed:</p>
     <dl>
      <dt>Potatoes</dt>
      <dd>Two per day</dd>
      <dt>Soup</dt>
      <dd>One bowl per day</dd>
     </dl>
     <hr>
     <p>Cooking is done by the chefs on a set rotation.</p>
    </section>

There is no need for an `hr` element between the sections themselves, since the `section` elements and the `h1` elements imply thematic changes themselves.

The following extract from Pandora's Star by Peter F. Hamilton shows two paragraphs that precede a scene change and the paragraph that follows it. The scene change, represented in the printed book by a gap containing a solitary centered star between the second and third paragraphs, is here represented using the `hr` element.

    <p>Dudley was ninety-two, in his second life, and fast approaching
    time for another rejuvenation. Despite his body having the physical
    age of a standard fifty-year-old, the prospect of a long degrading
    campaign within academia was one he regarded with dread. For a
    supposedly advanced civilization, the Intersolar Commonwealth could be
    appallingly backward at times, not to mention cruel.</p>
    <p><i>Maybe it won't be that bad</i>, he told himself. The lie was
    comforting enough to get him through the rest of the night's
    shift.</p>
    <hr>
    <p>The Carlton AllLander drove Dudley home just after dawn. Like the
    astronomer, the vehicle was old and worn, but perfectly capable of
    doing its job. It had a cheap diesel engine, common enough on a
    semi-frontier world like Gralmond, although its drive array was a
    thoroughly modern photoneural processor. With its high suspension and
    deep-tread tyres it could plough along the dirt track to the
    observatory in all weather and seasons, including the metre-deep snow
    of Gralmond's winters.</p>

The `hr` element does not affect the document's outline.

#### 4.4.3 The `pre` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLPreElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `pre` element represents a block of preformatted text, in which structure is represented by typographic conventions rather than by elements.

In the HTML syntax, a leading newline character immediately following the `pre` element start tag is stripped.

Some examples of cases where the `pre` element could be used:

- Including an e-mail, with paragraphs indicated by blank lines, lists indicated by lines prefixed with a bullet, and so on.
- Including fragments of computer code, with structure indicated according to the conventions of that language.
- Displaying ASCII art.

Authors are encouraged to consider how preformatted text will be experienced when the formatting is lost, as will be the case for users of speech synthesizers, braille displays, and the like. For cases like ASCII art, it is likely that an alternative presentation, such as a textual description, would be more universally accessible to the readers of the document.

To represent a block of computer code, the `pre` element can be used with a `code` element; to represent a block of computer output the `pre` element can be used with a `samp` element. Similarly, the `kbd` element can be used within a `pre` element to indicate text that the user is to enter.

This element has rendering requirements involving the bidirectional algorithm.

In the following snippet, a sample of computer code is presented.

    <p>This is the <code>Panel</code> constructor:</p>
    <pre><code>function Panel(element, canClose, closeHandler) {
      this.element = element;
      this.canClose = canClose;
      this.closeHandler = function () { if (closeHandler) closeHandler() };
    }</code></pre>

In the following snippet, `samp` and `kbd` elements are mixed in the contents of a `pre` element to show a session of Zork I.

    <pre><samp>You are in an open field west of a big white house with a boarded
    front door.
    There is a small mailbox here.

    ></samp> <kbd>open mailbox</kbd>

    <samp>Opening the mailbox reveals:
    A leaflet.

    ></samp></pre>

The following shows a contemporary poem that uses the `pre` element to preserve its unusual formatting, which forms an intrinsic part of the poem itself.

    <pre>                maxling

    it is with a          heart
                   heavy

    that i admit loss of a feline
            so           loved

    a friend lost to the
            unknown
                                    (night)

    ~cdr 11dec07</pre>

#### 4.4.4 The `blockquote` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Sectioning root.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `cite` — Link to the source of the quotation or more information about the edit
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLQuoteElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString cite;
      };

  The `HTMLQuoteElement` interface is also used by the `q` element.

The `blockquote` element represents a section that is quoted from another source.

Content inside a `blockquote` must be quoted from another source, whose address, if it has one, may be cited in the `cite` attribute.

If the `cite` attribute is present, it must be a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces. To obtain the corresponding citation link, the value of the attribute must be resolved relative to the element. User agents may allow users to follow such citation links, but they are primarily intended for private use (e.g. by server-side scripts collecting statistics about a site's use of quotations), not for readers.

The content of a `blockquote` may be abbreviated or may have context added in the conventional manner for the text's language.

For example, in English this is traditionally done using square brackets. Consider a page with the sentence "Fred ate the cracker. He then said he liked apples and fish."; it could be quoted as follows:

    <blockquote>
     <p>[Fred] then said he liked [...] fish.</p>
    </blockquote>

Attribution for the quotation, if any, must be placed outside the `blockquote` element.

For example, here the attribution is given in a paragraph after the quote:

    <blockquote>
     <p>I contend that we are both atheists. I just believe in one fewer
     god than you do. When you understand why you dismiss all the other
     possible gods, you will understand why I dismiss yours.</p>
    </blockquote>
    <p>— Stephen Roberts</p>

The other examples below show other ways of showing attribution.

The `cite` IDL attribute must reflect the element's `cite` content attribute.

Here a `blockquote` element is used in conjunction with a `figure` element and its `figcaption` to clearly relate a quote to its attribution (which is not part of the quote and therefore doesn't belong inside the `blockquote` itself):

    <figure>
     <blockquote>
      <p>The truth may be puzzling. It may take some work to grapple with.
      It may be counterintuitive. It may contradict deeply held
      prejudices. It may not be consonant with what we desperately want to
      be true. But our preferences do not determine what's true. We have a
      method, and that method helps us to reach not absolute truth, only
      asymptotic approaches to the truth — never there, just closer
      and closer, always finding vast new oceans of undiscovered
      possibilities. Cleverly designed experiments are the key.</p>
     </blockquote>
     <figcaption>Carl Sagan, in "<cite>Wonder and Skepticism</cite>", from
     the <cite>Skeptical Enquirer</cite> Volume 19, Issue 1 (January-February
     1995)</figcaption>
    </figure>

This next example shows the use of `cite` alongside `blockquote`:

    <p>His next piece was the aptly named <cite>Sonnet 130</cite>:</p>
    <blockquote cite="http://quotes.example.org/s/sonnet130.html">
      <p>My mistress' eyes are nothing like the sun,<br>
      Coral is far more red, than her lips red,<br>
      ...

This example shows how a forum post could use `blockquote` to show what post a user is replying to. The `article` element is used for each post, to mark up the threading.

    <article>
     <h1><a href="http://bacon.example.com/?blog=109431">Bacon on a crowbar</a></h1>
     <article>
      <header><strong>t3yw</strong> 12 points 1 hour ago</header>
      <p>I bet a narwhal would love that.</p>
      <footer><a href="?pid=29578">permalink</a></footer>
      <article>
       <header><strong>greg</strong> 8 points 1 hour ago</header>
       <blockquote><p>I bet a narwhal would love that.</p></blockquote>
       <p>Dude narwhals don't eat bacon.</p>
       <footer><a href="?pid=29579">permalink</a></footer>
       <article>
        <header><strong>t3yw</strong> 15 points 1 hour ago</header>
        <blockquote>
         <blockquote><p>I bet a narwhal would love that.</p></blockquote>
         <p>Dude narwhals don't eat bacon.</p>
        </blockquote>
        <p>Next thing you'll be saying they don't get capes and wizard
        hats either!</p>
        <footer><a href="?pid=29580">permalink</a></footer>
        <article>
         <article>
          <header><strong>boing</strong> -5 points 1 hour ago</header>
          <p>narwhals are worse than ceiling cat</p>
          <footer><a href="?pid=29581">permalink</a></footer>
         </article>
        </article>
       </article>
      </article>
      <article>
       <header><strong>fred</strong> 1 points 23 minutes ago</header>
       <blockquote><p>I bet a narwhal would love that.</p></blockquote>
       <p>I bet they'd love to peel a banana too.</p>
       <footer><a href="?pid=29582">permalink</a></footer>
      </article>
     </article>
    </article>

This example shows the use of a `blockquote` for short snippets, demonstrating that one does not have to use `p` elements inside `blockquote` elements:

    <p>He began his list of "lessons" with the following:</p>
    <blockquote>One should never assume that his side of
    the issue will be recognized, let alone that it will
    be conceded to have merits.</blockquote>
    <p>He continued with a number of similar points, ending with:</p>
    <blockquote>Finally, one should be prepared for the threat
    of breakdown in negotiations at any given moment and not
    be cowed by the possibility.</blockquote>
    <p>We shall now discuss these points...

Examples of how to represent a conversation are shown in a later section; it is not appropriate to use the `cite` and `blockquote` elements for this purpose.

#### 4.4.5 The `ol` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  If the element's children include at least one `li` element: Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Zero or more `li` and script-supporting elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `reversed` — Number the list backwards
  `start` — Ordinal value of the first item
  `type` — Kind of list marker
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLOListElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute boolean reversed;
                 attribute long start;
                 attribute DOMString type;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `ol` element represents a list of items, where the items have been intentionally ordered, such that changing the order would change the meaning of the document.

The items of the list are the `li` element child nodes of the `ol` element, in tree order.

The `reversed` attribute is a boolean attribute. If present, it indicates that the list is a descending list (..., 3, 2, 1). If the attribute is omitted, the list is an ascending list (1, 2, 3, ...).

The `start` attribute, if present, must be a valid integer giving the ordinal value of the first list item.

If the `start` attribute is present, user agents must parse it as an integer, in order to determine the attribute's value. The default value, used if the attribute is missing or if the value cannot be converted to a number according to the referenced algorithm, is 1 if the element has no `reversed` attribute, and is the number of child `li` elements otherwise.

The first item in the list has the ordinal value given by the `ol` element's `start` attribute, unless that `li` element has a `value` attribute with a value that can be successfully parsed, in which case it has the ordinal value given by that `value` attribute.

Each subsequent item in the list has the ordinal value given by its `value` attribute, if it has one, or, if it doesn't, the ordinal value of the previous item, plus one if the `reversed` is absent, or minus one if it is present.

The `type` attribute can be used to specify the kind of marker to use in the list, in the cases where that matters (e.g. because items are to be referenced by their number/letter). The attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a case-sensitive match for one of the characters given in the first cell of one of the rows of the following table. The `type` attribute represents the state given in the cell in the second column of the row whose first cell matches the attribute's value; if none of the cells match, or if the attribute is omitted, then the attribute represents the decimal state.

Keyword | State | Description | Examples for values 1-3 and 3999-4001
--- | --- | --- | ---
`1` (U+0031) | decimal | Decimal numbers | `1.` | `2.` | `3.` | ... | `3999.` | `4000.` | `4001.` | ...
`a` (U+0061) | lower-alpha | Lowercase latin alphabet | `a.` | `b.` | `c.` | ... | `ewu.` | `ewv.` | `eww.` | ...
`A` (U+0041) | upper-alpha | Uppercase latin alphabet | `A.` | `B.` | `C.` | ... | `EWU.` | `EWV.` | `EWW.` | ...
`i` (U+0069) | lower-roman | Lowercase roman numerals | `i.` | `ii.` | `iii.` | ... | `mmmcmxcix.` | `i̅v̅.` | `i̅v̅i.` | ...
`I` (U+0049) | upper-roman | Uppercase roman numerals | `I.` | `II.` | `III.` | ... | `MMMCMXCIX.` | `I̅V̅.` | `I̅V̅I.` | ...

User agents should render the items of the list in a manner consistent with the state of the `type` attribute of the `ol` element. Numbers less than or equal to zero should always use the decimal system regardless of the `type` attribute.

For CSS user agents, a mapping for this attribute to the 'list-style-type' CSS property is given in the rendering section (the mapping is straightforward: the states above have the same names as their corresponding CSS values).

It is possible to redefine the default CSS list styles used to implement this attribute in CSS user agents; doing so will affect how list items are rendered.

The `reversed`, `start`, and `type` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name. The `start` IDL attribute has the same default as its content attribute.

The following markup shows a list where the order matters, and where the `ol` element is therefore appropriate. Compare this list to the equivalent list in the `ul` section to see an example of the same items using the `ul` element.

    <p>I have lived in the following countries (given in the order of when
    I first lived there):</p>
    <ol>
     <li>Switzerland
     <li>United Kingdom
     <li>United States
     <li>Norway
    </ol>

Note how changing the order of the list changes the meaning of the document. In the following example, changing the relative order of the first two items has changed the birthplace of the author:

    <p>I have lived in the following countries (given in the order of when
    I first lived there):</p>
    <ol>
     <li>United Kingdom
     <li>Switzerland
     <li>United States
     <li>Norway
    </ol>

#### 4.4.6 The `ul` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  If the element's children include at least one `li` element: Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Zero or more `li` and script-supporting elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLUListElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `ul` element represents a list of items, where the order of the items is not important — that is, where changing the order would not materially change the meaning of the document.

The items of the list are the `li` element child nodes of the `ul` element.

The following markup shows a list where the order does not matter, and where the `ul` element is therefore appropriate. Compare this list to the equivalent list in the `ol` section to see an example of the same items using the `ol` element.

    <p>I have lived in the following countries:</p>
    <ul>
     <li>Norway
     <li>Switzerland
     <li>United Kingdom
     <li>United States
    </ul>

Note that changing the order of the list does not change the meaning of the document. The items in the snippet above are given in alphabetical order, but in the snippet below they are given in order of the size of their current account balance in 2007, without changing the meaning of the document whatsoever:

    <p>I have lived in the following countries:</p>
    <ul>
     <li>Switzerland
     <li>Norway
     <li>United Kingdom
     <li>United States
    </ul>

#### 4.4.7 The `li` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Inside `ol` elements.
  Inside `ul` elements.
  Inside `menu` elements whose `type` attribute is in the toolbar state.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  An `li` element's end tag can be omitted if the `li` element is immediately followed by another `li` element or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  If the element is a child of an `ol` element: `value` — Ordinal value of the list item
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLLIElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute long value;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `li` element represents a list item. If its parent element is an `ol`, `ul`, or `menu` element, then the element is an item of the parent element's list, as defined for those elements. Otherwise, the list item has no defined list-related relationship to any other `li` element.

If the parent element is an `ol` element, then the `li` element has an ordinal value.

The `value` attribute, if present, must be a valid integer giving the ordinal value of the list item.

If the `value` attribute is present, user agents must parse it as an integer, in order to determine the attribute's value. If the attribute's value cannot be converted to a number, the attribute must be treated as if it was absent. The attribute has no default value.

The `value` attribute is processed relative to the element's parent `ol` element (q.v.), if there is one. If there is not, the attribute has no effect.

The `value` IDL attribute must reflect the value of the `value` content attribute.

The following example, the top ten movies are listed (in reverse order). Note the way the list is given a title by using a `figure` element and its `figcaption` element.

    <figure>
     <figcaption>The top 10 movies of all time</figcaption>
     <ol>
      <li value="10"><cite>Josie and the Pussycats</cite>, 2001</li>
      <li value="9"><cite lang="sh">Црна мачка, бели мачор</cite>, 1998</li>
      <li value="8"><cite>A Bug's Life</cite>, 1998</li>
      <li value="7"><cite>Toy Story</cite>, 1995</li>
      <li value="6"><cite>Monsters, Inc</cite>, 2001</li>
      <li value="5"><cite>Cars</cite>, 2006</li>
      <li value="4"><cite>Toy Story 2</cite>, 1999</li>
      <li value="3"><cite>Finding Nemo</cite>, 2003</li>
      <li value="2"><cite>The Incredibles</cite>, 2004</li>
      <li value="1"><cite>Ratatouille</cite>, 2007</li>
     </ol>
    </figure>

The markup could also be written as follows, using the `reversed` attribute on the `ol` element:

    <figure>
     <figcaption>The top 10 movies of all time</figcaption>
     <ol reversed>
      <li><cite>Josie and the Pussycats</cite>, 2001</li>
      <li><cite lang="sh">Црна мачка, бели мачор</cite>, 1998</li>
      <li><cite>A Bug's Life</cite>, 1998</li>
      <li><cite>Toy Story</cite>, 1995</li>
      <li><cite>Monsters, Inc</cite>, 2001</li>
      <li><cite>Cars</cite>, 2006</li>
      <li><cite>Toy Story 2</cite>, 1999</li>
      <li><cite>Finding Nemo</cite>, 2003</li>
      <li><cite>The Incredibles</cite>, 2004</li>
      <li><cite>Ratatouille</cite>, 2007</li>
     </ol>
    </figure>

While it is conforming to include heading elements (e.g. `h1`) inside `li` elements, it likely does not convey the semantics that the author intended. A heading starts a new section, so a heading in a list implicitly splits the list into spanning multiple sections.

#### 4.4.8 The `dl` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  If the element's children include at least one name-value group: Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Zero or more groups each consisting of one or more `dt` elements followed by one or more `dd` elements, optionally intermixed with script-supporting elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLDListElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `dl` element represents an association list consisting of zero or more name-value groups (a description list). A name-value group consists of one or more names (`dt` elements) followed by one or more values (`dd` elements), ignoring any nodes other than `dt` and `dd` elements. Within a single `dl` element, there should not be more than one `dt` element for each name.

Name-value groups may be terms and definitions, metadata topics and values, questions and answers, or any other groups of name-value data.

The values within a group are alternatives; multiple paragraphs forming part of the same value must all be given within the same `dd` element.

The order of the list of groups, and of the names and values within each group, may be significant.

If a `dl` element has no `dt` or `dd` element children, it contains no groups.

If a `dl` element has one or more non-whitespace `Text` node children, or has child elements that are neither `dt` nor `dd` elements, all such `Text` nodes and elements, as well as their descendants (including any `dt` or `dd` elements), do not form part of any groups in that `dl`.

If a `dl` element has one or more `dt` element children but no `dd` element children, then it consists of one group with names but no values.

If a `dl` element has one or more `dd` element children but no `dt` element children, then it consists of one group with values but no names.

If a `dl` element's first `dt` or `dd` element child is a `dd` element, then the first group has no associated name.

If a `dl` element's last `dt` or `dd` element child is a `dt` element, then the last group has no associated value.

When a `dl` element doesn't match its content model, it is often due to accidentally using `dd` elements in the place of `dt` elements and vice versa. Conformance checkers can spot such mistakes and might be able to advise authors how to correctly use the markup.

In the following example, one entry ("Authors") is linked to two values ("John" and "Luke").

    <dl>
     <dt> Authors
     <dd> John
     <dd> Luke
     <dt> Editor
     <dd> Frank
    </dl>

In the following example, one definition is linked to two terms.

    <dl>
     <dt lang="en-US"> <dfn>color</dfn> </dt>
     <dt lang="en-GB"> <dfn>colour</dfn> </dt>
     <dd> A sensation which (in humans) derives from the ability of
     the fine structure of the eye to distinguish three differently
     filtered analyses of a view. </dd>
    </dl>

The following example illustrates the use of the `dl` element to mark up metadata of sorts. At the end of the example, one group has two metadata labels ("Authors" and "Editors") and two values ("Robert Rothman" and "Daniel Jackson").

    <dl>
     <dt> Last modified time </dt>
     <dd> 2004-12-23T23:33Z </dd>
     <dt> Recommended update interval </dt>
     <dd> 60s </dd>
     <dt> Authors </dt>
     <dt> Editors </dt>
     <dd> Robert Rothman </dd>
     <dd> Daniel Jackson </dd>
    </dl>

The following example shows the `dl` element used to give a set of instructions. The order of the instructions here is important (in the other examples, the order of the blocks was not important).

    <p>Determine the victory points as follows (use the
    first matching case):</p>
    <dl>
     <dt> If you have exactly five gold coins </dt>
     <dd> You get five victory points </dd>
     <dt> If you have one or more gold coins, and you have one or more silver coins </dt>
     <dd> You get two victory points </dd>
     <dt> If you have one or more silver coins </dt>
     <dd> You get one victory point </dd>
     <dt> Otherwise </dt>
     <dd> You get no victory points </dd>
    </dl>

The following snippet shows a `dl` element being used as a glossary. Note the use of `dfn` to indicate the word being defined.

    <dl>
     <dt><dfn>Apartment</dfn>, n.</dt>
     <dd>An execution context grouping one or more threads with one or
     more COM objects.</dd>
     <dt><dfn>Flat</dfn>, n.</dt>
     <dd>A deflated tire.</dd>
     <dt><dfn>Home</dfn>, n.</dt>
     <dd>The user's login directory.</dd>
    </dl>

The `dl` element is inappropriate for marking up dialogue. Examples of how to mark up dialogue are shown below.

#### 4.4.9 The `dt` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Before `dd` or `dt` elements inside `dl` elements.
Content model:
  Flow content, but with no `header`, `footer`, sectioning content, or heading content descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `dt` element's end tag can be omitted if the `dt` element is immediately followed by another `dt` element or a `dd` element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `dt` element represents the term, or name, part of a term-description group in a description list (`dl` element).

The `dt` element itself, when used in a `dl` element, does not indicate that its contents are a term being defined, but this can be indicated using the `dfn` element.

This example shows a list of frequently asked questions (a FAQ) marked up using the `dt` element for questions and the `dd` element for answers.

    <article>
     <h1>FAQ</h1>
     <dl>
      <dt>What do we want?</dt>
      <dd>Our data.</dd>
      <dt>When do we want it?</dt>
      <dd>Now.</dd>
      <dt>Where is it?</dt>
      <dd>We are not sure.</dd>
     </dl>
    </article>

#### 4.4.10 The `dd` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  After `dt` or `dd` elements inside `dl` elements.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `dd` element's end tag can be omitted if the `dd` element is immediately followed by another `dd` element or a `dt` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `dd` element represents the description, definition, or value, part of a term-description group in a description list (`dl` element).

A `dl` can be used to define a vocabulary list, like in a dictionary. In the following example, each entry, given by a `dt` with a `dfn`, has several `dd`s, showing the various parts of the definition.

    <dl>
     <dt><dfn>happiness</dfn></dt>
     <dd class="pronunciation">/'hæ p. nes/</dd>
     <dd class="part-of-speech"><i><abbr>n.</abbr></i></dd>
     <dd>The state of being happy.</dd>
     <dd>Good fortune; success. <q>Oh <b>happiness</b>! It worked!</q></dd>
     <dt><dfn>rejoice</dfn></dt>
     <dd class="pronunciation">/ri jois'/</dd>
     <dd><i class="part-of-speech"><abbr>v.intr.</abbr></i> To be delighted oneself.</dd>
     <dd><i class="part-of-speech"><abbr>v.tr.</abbr></i> To cause one to be delighted.</dd>
    </dl>

#### 4.4.11 The `figure` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Sectioning root.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Either: One `figcaption` element followed by flow content.
  Or: Flow content followed by one `figcaption` element.
  Or: Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `figure` element represents some flow content, optionally with a caption, that is self-contained (like a complete sentence) and is typically referenced as a single unit from the main flow of the document.

Self-contained in this context does not necessarily mean independent. For example, each sentence in a paragraph is self-contained; an image that is part of a sentence would be inappropriate for `figure`, but an entire sentence made of images would be fitting.

The element can thus be used to annotate illustrations, diagrams, photos, code listings, etc.

When a `figure` is referred to from the main content of the document by identifying it by its caption (e.g. by figure number), it enables such content to be easily moved away from that primary content, e.g. to the side of the page, to dedicated pages, or to an appendix, without affecting the flow of the document.

If a `figure` element is referenced by its relative position, e.g. "in the photograph above" or "as the next figure shows", then moving the figure would disrupt the page's meaning. Authors are encouraged to consider using labels to refer to figures, rather than using such relative references, so that the page can easily be restyled without affecting the page's meaning.

The first `figcaption` element child of the element, if any, represents the caption of the `figure` element's contents. If there is no child `figcaption` element, then there is no caption.

A `figure` element's contents are part of the surrounding flow. If the purpose of the page is to display the figure, for example a photograph on an image sharing site, the `figure` and `figcaption` elements can be used to explicitly provide a caption for that figure. For content that is only tangentially related, or that serves a separate purpose than the surrounding flow, the `aside` element should be used (and can itself wrap a `figure`). For example, a pull quote that repeats content from an `article` would be more appropriate in an `aside` than in a `figure`, because it isn't part of the content, it's a repetition of the content for the purposes of enticing readers or highlighting key topics.

This example shows the `figure` element to mark up a code listing.

    <p>In <a href="#l4">listing 4</a> we see the primary core interface
    API declaration.</p>
    <figure id="l4">
     <figcaption>Listing 4. The primary core interface API declaration.</figcaption>
     <pre><code>interface PrimaryCore {
     boolean verifyDataLine();
     void sendData(in sequence&lt;byte> data);
     void initSelfDestruct();
    }</code></pre>
    </figure>
    <p>The API is designed to use UTF-8.</p>

Here we see a `figure` element to mark up a photo that is the main content of the page (as in a gallery).

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Bubbles at work — My Gallery™</title>
    <figure>
     <img src="bubbles-work.jpeg"
          alt="Bubbles, sitting in his office chair, works on his
               latest project intently.">
     <figcaption>Bubbles at work</figcaption>
    </figure>
    <nav><a href="19414.html">Prev</a> — <a href="19416.html">Next</a></nav>

In this example, we see an image that is not a figure, as well as an image and a video that are. The first image is literally part of the example's second sentence, so it's not a self-contained unit, and thus `figure` would be inappropriate.

    <h2>Malinko's comics</h2>

    <p>This case centered on some sort of "intellectual property"
    infringement related to a comic (see Exhibit A). The suit started
    after a trailer ending with these words:

    <blockquote>
     <img src="promblem-packed-action.png" alt="ROUGH COPY! Promblem-Packed Action!">
    </blockquote>

    <p>...was aired. A lawyer, armed with a Bigger Notebook, launched a
    preemptive strike using snowballs. A complete copy of the trailer is
    included with Exhibit B.

    <figure>
     <img src="ex-a.png" alt="Two squiggles on a dirty piece of paper.">
     <figcaption>Exhibit A. The alleged <cite>rough copy</cite> comic.</figcaption>
    </figure>

    <figure>
     <video src="ex-b.mov"></video>
     <figcaption>Exhibit B. The <cite>Rough Copy</cite> trailer.</figcaption>
    </figure>

    <p>The case was resolved out of court.

Here, a part of a poem is marked up using `figure`.

    <figure>
     <p>'Twas brillig, and the slithy toves<br>
     Did gyre and gimble in the wabe;<br>
     All mimsy were the borogoves,<br>
     And the mome raths outgrabe.</p>
     <figcaption><cite>Jabberwocky</cite> (first verse). Lewis Carroll, 1832-98</figcaption>
    </figure>

In this example, which could be part of a much larger work discussing a castle, nested `figure` elements are used to provide both a group caption and individual captions for each figure in the group:

    <figure>
     <figcaption>The castle through the ages: 1423, 1858, and 1999 respectively.</figcaption>
     <figure>
      <figcaption>Etching. Anonymous, ca. 1423.</figcaption>
      <img src="castle1423.jpeg" alt="The castle has one tower, and a tall wall around it.">
     </figure>
     <figure>
      <figcaption>Oil-based paint on canvas. Maria Towle, 1858.</figcaption>
      <img src="castle1858.jpeg" alt="The castle now has two towers and two walls.">
     </figure>
     <figure>
      <figcaption>Film photograph. Peter Jankle, 1999.</figcaption>
      <img src="castle1999.jpeg" alt="The castle lies in ruins, the original tower all that remains in one piece.">
     </figure>
    </figure>

The previous example could also be more succintly written as follows (using `title` attributes in place of the nested `figure`/`figcaption` pairs):

    <figure>
     <img src="castle1423.jpeg" title="Etching. Anonymous, ca. 1423."
          alt="The castle has one tower, and a tall wall around it.">
     <img src="castle1858.jpeg" title="Oil-based paint on canvas. Maria Towle, 1858."
          alt="The castle now has two towers and two walls.">
     <img src="castle1999.jpeg" title="Film photograph. Peter Jankle, 1999."
          alt="The castle lies in ruins, the original tower all that remains in one piece.">
     <figcaption>The castle through the ages: 1423, 1858, and 1999 respectively.</figcaption>
    </figure>

The figure is sometimes referenced only implicitly from the content:

    <article>
     <h1>Fiscal negotiations stumble in Congress as deadline nears</h1>
     <figure>
      <img src="obama-reid.jpeg" alt="Obama and Reid sit together smiling in the Oval Office.">
      <figcaption>Barrak Obama and Harry Reid. White House press photograph.</figcaption>
     </figure>
     <p>Negotiations in Congress to end the fiscal impasse sputtered on Tuesday, leaving both chambers
     grasping for a way to reopen the government and raise the country's borrowing authority with a
     Thursday deadline drawing near.</p>
     ...
    </article>

#### 4.4.12 The `figcaption` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As the first or last child of a `figure` element.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `figcaption` element represents a caption or legend for the rest of the contents of the `figcaption` element's parent `figure` element, if any.

#### 4.4.13 The `main` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `main` element can be used as a container for the dominant contents of another element. It represents its children.

The `main` element is distinct from the `section` and `article` elements in that the `main` element does not contribute to the document outline.

There is no restriction as to the number of `main` elements in a document. Indeed, there are many cases where it would make sense to have multiple `main` elements. For example, a page with multiple `article` elements might need to indicate the dominant contents of each such element.

In this example, the author has used a presentation where each component of the page is rendered in a box. To wrap the main content of the page (as opposed to the header, the footer, the navigation bar, and a sidebar), the `main` element is used.

    <!DOCTYPE html>
    <title>RPG System 17</title>
    <style>
     header, nav, aside, main, footer {
       margin: 0.5em; border: thin solid; padding: 0.5em;
       background: #EFF; color: black; box-shadow: 0 0 0.25em #033;
     }
     h1, h2, p { margin: 0; }
     nav, main { float: left; }
     aside { float: right; }
     footer { clear: both; }
    </style>
    <header>
     <h1>System Eighteen</h1>
    </header>
    <nav>
     <a href="../16/">← System 17</a>
     <a href="../18/">RPXIX →</a>
    </nav>
    <aside>
     <p>This system has no HP mechanic, so there's no healing.
    </aside>
    <main>
     <h2>Character creation</h2>
     <p>Attributes (magic, strength, agility) are purchased at the cost of one point per level.</p>
     <h2>Rolls</h2>
     <p>Each encounter, roll the dice for all your skills. If you roll more than the opponent, you win.</p>
    </main>
    <footer>
     <p>Copyright © 2013
    </footer>

#### 4.4.14 The `div` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLDivElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `div` element has no special meaning at all. It represents its children. It can be used with the `class`, `lang`, and `title` attributes to mark up semantics common to a group of consecutive elements.

Authors are strongly encouraged to view the `div` element as an element of last resort, for when no other element is suitable. Use of more appropriate elements instead of the `div` element leads to better accessibility for readers and easier maintainability for authors.

For example, a blog post would be marked up using `article`, a chapter using `section`, a page's navigation aids using `nav`, and a group of form controls using `fieldset`.

On the other hand, `div` elements can be useful for stylistic purposes or to wrap multiple paragraphs within a section that are all to be annotated in a similar way. In the following example, we see `div` elements used as a way to set the language of two paragraphs at once, instead of setting the language on the two paragraph elements separately:

    <article lang="en-US">
     <h1>My use of language and my cats</h1>
     <p>My cat's behavior hasn't changed much since her absence, except
     that she plays her new physique to the neighbors regularly, in an
     attempt to get pets.</p>
     <div lang="en-GB">
      <p>My other cat, coloured black and white, is a sweetie. He followed
      us to the pool today, walking down the pavement with us. Yesterday
      he apparently visited our neighbours. I wonder if he recognises that
      their flat is a mirror image of ours.</p>
      <p>Hm, I just noticed that in the last paragraph I used British
      English. But I'm supposed to write in American English. So I
      shouldn't say "pavement" or "flat" or "colour"...</p>
     </div>
     <p>I should say "sidewalk" and "apartment" and "color"!</p>
    </article>

### 4.5 Text-level semantics

#### 4.5.1 The `a` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Interactive content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Transparent, but there must be no interactive content descendant.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `href` — Address of the hyperlink
  `target` — Browsing context for hyperlink navigation
  `download` — Whether to download the resource instead of navigating to it, and its file name if so
  `ping` — URLs to ping
  `rel` — Relationship between the document containing the hyperlink and the destination resource
  `hreflang` — Language of the linked resource
  `type` — Hint for the type of the referenced resource
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLAnchorElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString target;
                 attribute DOMString download;
        [PutForwards=value] attribute DOMSettableTokenList ping;
                 attribute DOMString rel;
        readonly attribute DOMTokenList relList;
                 attribute DOMString hreflang;
                 attribute DOMString type;

                 attribute DOMString text;

        // also has obsolete members
      };
      HTMLAnchorElement implements URLUtils;

If the `a` element has an `href` attribute, then it represents a hyperlink (a hypertext anchor) labeled by its contents.

If the `a` element has no `href` attribute, then the element represents a placeholder for where a link might otherwise have been placed, if it had been relevant, consisting of just the element's contents.

The `target`, `download`, `ping`, `rel`, `hreflang`, and `type` attributes must be omitted if the `href` attribute is not present.

If the `itemprop` attribute is specified on an `a` element, then the `href` attribute must also be specified.

If a site uses a consistent navigation toolbar on every page, then the link that would normally link to the page itself could be marked up using an `a` element:

    <nav>
     <ul>
      <li> <a href="/">Home</a> </li>
      <li> <a href="/news">News</a> </li>
      <li> <a>Examples</a> </li>
      <li> <a href="/legal">Legal</a> </li>
     </ul>
    </nav>

The `href`, `target`, `download`, and `ping` attributes affect what happens when users follow hyperlinks or download hyperlinks created using the `a` element. The `rel`, `hreflang`, and `type` attributes may be used to indicate to the user the likely nature of the target resource before the user follows the link.

The activation behavior of `a` elements that create hyperlinks is to run the following steps:

1. If the `a` element's node document is not fully active, then abort these steps.

2. If either the `a` element has a `download` attribute and the algorithm is not allowed to show a popup, or the element's `target` attribute is present and applying the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name, using the value of the `target` attribute as the browsing context name, would result in there not being a chosen browsing context, then run these substeps:

   1. If there is an entry settings object, throw an `InvalidAccessError` exception.

   2. Abort these steps without following the hyperlink.

3. If the target of the `click` event is an `img` element with an `ismap` attribute specified, then server-side image map processing must be performed, as follows:

   1. If the `click` event was a real pointing-device-triggered `click` event on the `img` element, then let x be the distance in CSS pixels from the left edge of the image's left border, if it has one, or the left edge of the image otherwise, to the location of the click, and let y be the distance in CSS pixels from the top edge of the image's top border, if it has one, or the top edge of the image otherwise, to the location of the click. Otherwise, let x and y be zero.
   2. Let the hyperlink suffix be a U+003F QUESTION MARK character, the value of x expressed as a base-ten integer using ASCII digits, a U+002C COMMA character (,), and the value of y expressed as a base-ten integer using ASCII digits.

4. Finally, the user agent must follow the hyperlink or download the hyperlink created by the `a` element, as determined by the `download` attribute and any expressed user preference. If the steps above defined a hyperlink suffix, then take that into account when following or downloading the hyperlink.

a . `text`

  Same as `textContent`.

The IDL attributes `download`, `ping`, `target`, `rel`, `hreflang`, and `type`, must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The IDL attribute `relList` must reflect the `rel` content attribute.

The `text` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the same value as the `textContent` IDL attribute on the element, and on setting, must act as if the `textContent` IDL attribute on the element had been set to the new value.

The `a` element also supports the `URLUtils` interface. [URL]

When the element is created, and whenever the element's `href` content attribute is set, changed, or removed, the user agent must invoke the element's `URLUtils` interface's set the input algorithm with the value of the `href` content attribute, if any, or the empty string otherwise, as the given value.

The element's `URLUtils` interface's get the base algorithm must simply return the element's base URL.

The element's `URLUtils` interface's query encoding is the document's character encoding.

When the element's `URLUtils` interface invokes its update steps with a string value, the user agent must set the element's `href` content attribute to the string value.

The `a` element may be wrapped around entire paragraphs, lists, tables, and so forth, even entire sections, so long as there is no interactive content within (e.g. buttons or other links). This example shows how this can be used to make an entire advertising block into a link:

    <aside class="advertising">
     <h1>Advertising</h1>
     <a href="http://ad.example.com/?adid=1929&amp;pubid=1422">
      <section>
       <h1>Mellblomatic 9000!</h1>
       <p>Turn all your widgets into mellbloms!</p>
       <p>Only $9.99 plus shipping and handling.</p>
      </section>
     </a>
     <a href="http://ad.example.com/?adid=375&amp;pubid=1422">
      <section>
       <h1>The Mellblom Browser</h1>
       <p>Web browsing at the speed of light.</p>
       <p>No other browser goes faster!</p>
      </section>
     </a>
    </aside>

#### 4.5.2 The `em` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `em` element represents stress emphasis of its contents.

The level of stress that a particular piece of content has is given by its number of ancestor `em` elements.

The placement of stress emphasis changes the meaning of the sentence. The element thus forms an integral part of the content. The precise way in which stress is used in this way depends on the language.

These examples show how changing the stress emphasis changes the meaning. First, a general statement of fact, with no stress:

    <p>Cats are cute animals.</p>

By emphasizing the first word, the statement implies that the kind of animal under discussion is in question (maybe someone is asserting that dogs are cute):

    <p><em>Cats</em> are cute animals.</p>

Moving the stress to the verb, one highlights that the truth of the entire sentence is in question (maybe someone is saying cats are not cute):

    <p>Cats <em>are</em> cute animals.</p>

By moving it to the adjective, the exact nature of the cats is reasserted (maybe someone suggested cats were mean animals):

    <p>Cats are <em>cute</em> animals.</p>

Similarly, if someone asserted that cats were vegetables, someone correcting this might emphasise the last word:

    <p>Cats are cute <em>animals</em>.</p>

By emphasizing the entire sentence, it becomes clear that the speaker is fighting hard to get the point across. This kind of stress emphasis also typically affects the punctuation, hence the exclamation mark here.

    <p><em>Cats are cute animals!</em></p>

Anger mixed with emphasizing the cuteness could lead to markup such as:

    <p><em>Cats are <em>cute</em> animals!</em></p>

The `em` element isn't a generic "italics" element. Sometimes, text is intended to stand out from the rest of the paragraph, as if it was in a different mood or voice. For this, the `i` element is more appropriate.

The `em` element also isn't intended to convey importance; for that purpose, the `strong` element is more appropriate.

#### 4.5.3 The `strong` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `strong` element represents strong importance, seriousness, or urgency for its contents.

Importance: The `strong` element can be used in a heading, caption, or paragraph to distinguish the part that really matters from other parts that might be more detailed, more jovial, or merely boilerplate. (This is distinct from marking up subheadings, for which the `hgroup` element is appropriate.)

For example, the first word of the previous paragraph is marked up with `strong` to distinguish it from the more detailed text in the rest of the paragraph.

Seriousness: The `strong` element can be used to mark up a warning or caution notice.

Urgency: The `strong` element can be used to denote contents that the user needs to see sooner than other parts of the document.

The relative level of importance of a piece of content is given by its number of ancestor `strong` elements; each `strong` element increases the importance of its contents.

Changing the importance of a piece of text with the `strong` element does not change the meaning of the sentence.

Here, the word "chapter" and the actual chapter number are mere boilerplate, and the actual name of the chapter is marked up with `strong`:

    <h1>Chapter 1: <strong>The Praxis</strong></h1>

In the following example, the name of the diagram in the caption is marked up with `strong`, to distinguish it from boilerplate text (before) and the description (after):

    <figcaption>Figure 1. <strong>Ant colony dynamics</strong>. The ants in this colony are
    affected by the heat source (upper left) and the food source (lower right).</figcaption>

In this example, the heading is really "Flowers, Bees, and Honey", but the author has added a light-hearted addition to the heading. The `strong` element is thus used to mark up the first part to distinguish it from the latter part.

    <h1><strong>Flowers, Bees, and Honey</strong> and other things I don't understand</h1>

Here is an example of a warning notice in a game, with the various parts marked up according to how important they are:

    <p><strong>Warning.</strong> This dungeon is dangerous.
    <strong>Avoid the ducks.</strong> Take any gold you find.
    <strong><strong>Do not take any of the diamonds</strong>,
    they are explosive and <strong>will destroy anything within
    ten meters.</strong></strong> You have been warned.</p>

In this example, the `strong` element is used to denote the part of the text that the user is intended to read first.

    <p>Welcome to Remy, the reminder system.</p>
    <p>Your tasks for today:</p>
    <ul>
     <li><p><strong>Turn off the oven.</strong></p></li>
     <li><p>Put out the trash.</p></li>
     <li><p>Do the laundry.</p></li>
    </ul>

#### 4.5.4 The `small` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `small` element represents side comments such as small print.

Small print typically features disclaimers, caveats, legal restrictions, or copyrights. Small print is also sometimes used for attribution, or for satisfying licensing requirements.

The `small` element does not "de-emphasize" or lower the importance of text emphasized by the `em` element or marked as important with the `strong` element. To mark text as not emphasized or important, simply do not mark it up with the `em` or `strong` elements respectively.

The `small` element should not be used for extended spans of text, such as multiple paragraphs, lists, or sections of text. It is only intended for short runs of text. The text of a page listing terms of use, for instance, would not be a suitable candidate for the `small` element: in such a case, the text is not a side comment, it is the main content of the page.

The `small` element must not be used for subheadings; for that purpose, use the `hgroup` element.

In this example, the `small` element is used to indicate that value-added tax is not included in a price of a hotel room:

    <dl>
     <dt>Single room
     <dd>199 € <small>breakfast included, VAT not included</small>
     <dt>Double room
     <dd>239 € <small>breakfast included, VAT not included</small>
    </dl>

In this second example, the `small` element is used for a side comment in an article.

    <p>Example Corp today announced record profits for the
    second quarter <small>(Full Disclosure: Foo News is a subsidiary of
    Example Corp)</small>, leading to speculation about a third quarter
    merger with Demo Group.</p>

This is distinct from a sidebar, which might be multiple paragraphs long and is removed from the main flow of text. In the following example, we see a sidebar from the same article. This sidebar also has small print, indicating the source of the information in the sidebar.

    <aside>
     <h1>Example Corp</h1>
     <p>This company mostly creates small software and Web
     sites.</p>
     <p>The Example Corp company mission is "To provide entertainment
     and news on a sample basis".</p>
     <p><small>Information obtained from <a
     href="http://example.com/about.html">example.com</a> home
     page.</small></p>
    </aside>

In this last example, the `small` element is marked as being important small print.

    <p><strong><small>Continued use of this service will result in a kiss.</small></strong></p>

#### 4.5.5 The `s` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `s` element represents contents that are no longer accurate or no longer relevant.

The `s` element is not appropriate when indicating document edits; to mark a span of text as having been removed from a document, use the `del` element.

In this example a recommended retail price has been marked as no longer relevant as the product in question has a new sale price.

    <p>Buy our Iced Tea and Lemonade!</p>
    <p><s>Recommended retail price: $3.99 per bottle</s></p>
    <p><strong>Now selling for just $2.99 a bottle!</strong></p>

#### 4.5.6 The `cite` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `cite` element represents the title of a work (e.g. a book, a paper, an essay, a poem, a score, a song, a script, a film, a TV show, a game, a sculpture, a painting, a theatre production, a play, an opera, a musical, an exhibition, a legal case report, a computer program, etc). This can be a work that is being quoted or referenced in detail (i.e. a citation), or it can just be a work that is mentioned in passing.

A person's name is not the title of a work — even if people call that person a piece of work — and the element must therefore not be used to mark up people's names. (In some cases, the `b` element might be appropriate for names; e.g. in a gossip article where the names of famous people are keywords rendered with a different style to draw attention to them. In other cases, if an element is really needed, the `span` element can be used.)

This next example shows a typical use of the `cite` element:

    <p>My favorite book is <cite>The Reality Dysfunction</cite> by
    Peter F. Hamilton. My favorite comic is <cite>Pearls Before
    Swine</cite> by Stephan Pastis. My favorite track is <cite>Jive
    Samba</cite> by the Cannonball Adderley Sextet.</p>

This is correct usage:

    <p>According to the Wikipedia article <cite>HTML</cite>, as it
    stood in mid-February 2008, leaving attribute values unquoted is
    unsafe. This is obviously an over-simplification.</p>

The following, however, is incorrect usage, as the `cite` element here is containing far more than the title of the work:

    <!-- do not copy this example, it is an example of bad usage! -->
    <p>According to <cite>the Wikipedia article on HTML</cite>, as it
    stood in mid-February 2008, leaving attribute values unquoted is
    unsafe. This is obviously an over-simplification.</p>

The `cite` element is obviously a key part of any citation in a bibliography, but it is only used to mark the title:

    <p><cite>Universal Declaration of Human Rights</cite>, United Nations,
    December 1948. Adopted by General Assembly resolution 217 A (III).</p>

A citation is not a quote (for which the `q` element is appropriate).

This is incorrect usage, because `cite` is not for quotes:

    <p><cite>This is wrong!</cite>, said Ian.</p>

This is also incorrect usage, because a person is not a work:

    <p><q>This is still wrong!</q>, said <cite>Ian</cite>.</p>

The correct usage does not use a `cite` element:

    <p><q>This is correct</q>, said Ian.</p>

As mentioned above, the `b` element might be relevant for marking names as being keywords in certain kinds of documents:

    <p>And then <b>Ian</b> said <q>this might be right, in a
    gossip column, maybe!</q>.</p>

#### 4.5.7 The `q` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `cite` — Link to the source of the quotation or more information about the edit
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLQuoteElement`.

The `q` element represents some phrasing content quoted from another source.

Quotation punctuation (such as quotation marks) that is quoting the contents of the element must not appear immediately before, after, or inside `q` elements; they will be inserted into the rendering by the user agent.

Content inside a `q` element must be quoted from another source, whose address, if it has one, may be cited in the `cite` attribute. The source may be fictional, as when quoting characters in a novel or screenplay.

If the `cite` attribute is present, it must be a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces. To obtain the corresponding citation link, the value of the attribute must be resolved relative to the element. User agents may allow users to follow such citation links, but they are primarily intended for private use (e.g. by server-side scripts collecting statistics about a site's use of quotations), not for readers.

The `q` element must not be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the `q` element for marking up sarcastic statements.

The use of `q` elements to mark up quotations is entirely optional; using explicit quotation punctuation without `q` elements is just as correct.

Here is a simple example of the use of the `q` element:

    <p>The man said <q>Things that are impossible just take
    longer</q>. I disagreed with him.</p>

Here is an example with both an explicit citation link in the `q` element, and an explicit citation outside:

    <p>The W3C page <cite>About W3C</cite> says the W3C's
    mission is <q cite="http://www.w3.org/Consortium/">To lead the
    World Wide Web to its full potential by developing protocols and
    guidelines that ensure long-term growth for the Web</q>. I
    disagree with this mission.</p>

In the following example, the quotation itself contains a quotation:

    <p>In <cite>Example One</cite>, he writes <q>The man
    said <q>Things that are impossible just take longer</q>. I
    disagreed with him</q>. Well, I disagree even more!</p>

In the following example, quotation marks are used instead of the `q` element:

    <p>His best argument was ❝I disagree❞, which
    I thought was laughable.</p>

In the following example, there is no quote — the quotation marks are used to name a word. Use of the `q` element in this case would be inappropriate.

    <p>The word "ineffable" could have been used to describe the disaster
    resulting from the campaign's mismanagement.</p>

#### 4.5.8 The `dfn` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content, but there must be no `dfn` element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  Also, the `title` attribute has special semantics on this element: Full term or expansion of abbreviation.
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `dfn` element represents the defining instance of a term. The paragraph, description list group, or section that is the nearest ancestor of the `dfn` element must also contain the definition(s) for the term given by the `dfn` element.

Defining term: If the `dfn` element has a `title` attribute, then the exact value of that attribute is the term being defined. Otherwise, if it contains exactly one element child node and no child `Text` nodes, and that child element is an `abbr` element with a `title` attribute, then the exact value of that attribute is the term being defined. Otherwise, it is the exact `textContent` of the `dfn` element that gives the term being defined.

If the `title` attribute of the `dfn` element is present, then it must contain only the term being defined.

The `title` attribute of ancestor elements does not affect `dfn` elements.

An `a` element that links to a `dfn` element represents an instance of the term defined by the `dfn` element.

In the following fragment, the term "Garage Door Opener" is first defined in the first paragraph, then used in the second. In both cases, its abbreviation is what is actually displayed.

    <p>The <dfn><abbr title="Garage Door Opener">GDO</abbr></dfn>
    is a device that allows off-world teams to open the iris.</p>
    <!-- ... later in the document: -->
    <p>Teal'c activated his <abbr title="Garage Door Opener">GDO</abbr>
    and so Hammond ordered the iris to be opened.</p>

With the addition of an `a` element, the reference can be made explicit:

    <p>The <dfn id=gdo><abbr title="Garage Door Opener">GDO</abbr></dfn>
    is a device that allows off-world teams to open the iris.</p>
    <!-- ... later in the document: -->
    <p>Teal'c activated his <a href=#gdo><abbr title="Garage Door Opener">GDO</abbr></a>
    and so Hammond ordered the iris to be opened.</p>

#### 4.5.9 The `abbr` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  Also, the `title` attribute has special semantics on this element: Full term or expansion of abbreviation.
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `abbr` element represents an abbreviation or acronym, optionally with its expansion. The `title` attribute may be used to provide an expansion of the abbreviation. The attribute, if specified, must contain an expansion of the abbreviation, and nothing else.

The paragraph below contains an abbreviation marked up with the `abbr` element. This paragraph defines the term "Web Hypertext Application Technology Working Group".

    <p>The <dfn id=whatwg><abbr
    title="Web Hypertext Application Technology Working Group">WHATWG</abbr></dfn>
    is a loose unofficial collaboration of Web browser manufacturers and
    interested parties who wish to develop new technologies designed to
    allow authors to write and deploy Applications over the World Wide
    Web.</p>

An alternative way to write this would be:

    <p>The <dfn id=whatwg>Web Hypertext Application Technology
    Working Group</dfn> (<abbr
    title="Web Hypertext Application Technology Working Group">WHATWG</abbr>)
    is a loose unofficial collaboration of Web browser manufacturers and
    interested parties who wish to develop new technologies designed to
    allow authors to write and deploy Applications over the World Wide
    Web.</p>

This paragraph has two abbreviations. Notice how only one is defined; the other, with no expansion associated with it, does not use the `abbr` element.

    <p>The
    <abbr title="Web Hypertext Application Technology Working Group">WHATWG</abbr>
    started working on HTML5 in 2004.</p>

This paragraph links an abbreviation to its definition.

    <p>The <a href="#whatwg"><abbr
    title="Web Hypertext Application Technology Working Group">WHATWG</abbr></a>
    community does not have much representation from Asia.</p>

This paragraph marks up an abbreviation without giving an expansion, possibly as a hook to apply styles for abbreviations (e.g. smallcaps).

    <p>Philip` and Dashiva both denied that they were going to
    get the issue counts from past revisions of the specification to
    backfill the <abbr>WHATWG</abbr> issue graph.</p>

If an abbreviation is pluralized, the expansion's grammatical number (plural vs singular) must match the grammatical number of the contents of the element.

Here the plural is outside the element, so the expansion is in the singular:

    <p>Two <abbr title="Working Group">WG</abbr>s worked on
    this specification: the <abbr>WHATWG</abbr> and the
    <abbr>HTMLWG</abbr>.</p>

Here the plural is inside the element, so the expansion is in the plural:

    <p>Two <abbr title="Working Groups">WGs</abbr> worked on
    this specification: the <abbr>WHATWG</abbr> and the
    <abbr>HTMLWG</abbr>.</p>

Abbreviations do not have to be marked up using this element. It is expected to be useful in the following cases:

- Abbreviations for which the author wants to give expansions, where using the `abbr` element with a `title` attribute is an alternative to including the expansion inline (e.g. in parentheses).
- Abbreviations that are likely to be unfamiliar to the document's readers, for which authors are encouraged to either mark up the abbreviation using an `abbr` element with a `title` attribute or include the expansion inline in the text the first time the abbreviation is used.
- Abbreviations whose presence needs to be semantically annotated, e.g. so that they can be identified from a style sheet and given specific styles, for which the `abbr` element can be used without a `title` attribute.

Providing an expansion in a `title` attribute once will not necessarily cause other `abbr` elements in the same document with the same contents but without a `title` attribute to behave as if they had the same expansion. Every `abbr` element is independent.

#### 4.5.10 The `ruby` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  See prose.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `ruby` element allows one or more spans of phrasing content to be marked with ruby annotations. Ruby annotations are short runs of text presented alongside base text, primarily used in East Asian typography as a guide for pronunciation or to include other annotations. In Japanese, this form of typography is also known as furigana.

The content model of `ruby` elements consists of one or more of the following sequences:

1. One or the other of the following:
   - Phrasing content, but with no `ruby` elements and with no `ruby` element descendants
   - A single `ruby` element that itself has no `ruby` element descendants
2. One or the other of the following:
   - One or more `rt` elements
   - An `rp` element followed by one or more `rt` elements, each of which is itself followed by an `rp` element

The `ruby` and `rt` elements can be used for a variety of kinds of annotations, including in particular (though by no means limited to) those described below. For more details on Japanese Ruby in particular, and how to render Ruby for Japanese, see Requirements for Japanese Text Layout. [JLREQ]

At the time of writing, CSS does not yet provide a way to fully control the rendering of the HTML `ruby` element. It is hoped that CSS will be extended to support the styles described below in due course.

Mono-ruby for individual base characters in Japanese

  One or more hiragana or katakana characters (the ruby annotation) are placed with each ideographic character (the base text). This is used to provide readings of kanji characters.

      <ruby>B<rt>annotation</ruby>

  In this example, notice how each annotation corresponds to a single base character.

      <ruby>君<rt>くん</ruby><ruby>子<rt>し</ruby>は<ruby>和<rt>わ</ruby>して<ruby>同<rt>どう</ruby>ぜず。

  君くん子しは和わして同どうぜず。

  This example can also be written as follows, using one `ruby` element with two segments of base text and two annotations (one for each) rather than two back-to-back `ruby` elements each with one base text segment and annotation (as in the markup above):

      <ruby>君<rt>くん</rt>子<rt>し</ruby>は<ruby>和<rt>わ</ruby>して<ruby>同<rt>どう</ruby>ぜず。

Mono-ruby for compound words (jukugo)

  This is similar to the previous case: each ideographic character in the compound word (the base text) has its reading given in hiragana or katakana characters (the ruby annotation). The difference is that the base text segments form a compound word rather than being separate from each other.

      <ruby>B<rt>annotation</rt>B<rt>annotation</ruby>

  In this example, notice again how each annotation corresponds to a single base character. In this example, each compound word (jukugo) corresponds to a single `ruby` element.

  The rendering here is expected to be that each annotation be placed over (or next to, in vertical text) the corresponding base character, with the annotations not overhanging any of the adjacent characters.

      <ruby>鬼<rt>き</rt>門<rt>もん</rt></ruby>の<ruby>方<rt>ほう</rt>角<rt>がく</rt></ruby>を<ruby>凝<rt>ぎょう</rt>視<rt>し</rt></ruby>する

  鬼き門もんの方ほう角がくを凝ぎょう視しする

Jukugo-ruby

  This is semantically identical to the previous case (each individual ideographic character in the base compound word has its reading given in an annotation in hiragana or katakana characters), but the rendering is the more complicated Jukugo Ruby rendering.

  This is the same example as above for mono-ruby for compound words. The different rendering is expected to be achieved using different styling (e.g. in CSS), and is not shown here.

      <ruby>鬼<rt>き</rt>門<rt>もん</rt></ruby>の<ruby>方<rt>ほう</rt>角<rt>がく</rt></ruby>を<ruby>凝<rt>ぎょう</rt>視<rt>し</rt></ruby>する

  For more details on Jukugo Ruby rendering, see Appendix F in the Requirements for Japanese Text Layout. [JLREQ]

Group ruby for describing meanings

  The annotation describes the meaning of the base text, rather than (or in addition to) the pronunciation. As such, both the base text and the annotation can be multiple characters long.

      <ruby>BASE<rt>annotation</ruby>

  Here a compound ideographic word has its corresponding katakana given as an annotation.

      <ruby>境界面<rt>インターフェース</ruby>

  境界面インターフェース

  Here a compound ideographic word has its translation in English provided as an annotation.

      <ruby lang="ja">編集者<rt lang="en">editor</ruby>

  編集者editor

Group ruby for Jukuji readings

  A phonetic reading that corresponds to multiple base characters, because a one-to-one mapping would be difficult. (In English, the words "Colonel" and "Lieutenant" are examples of words where a direct mapping of pronunciation to individual letters is, in some dialects, rather unclear.)

  In this example, the name of a species of flowers has a phonetic reading provided using group ruby:

      <ruby>紫陽花<rt>あじさい</ruby>

  紫陽花あじさい

Text with both phonetic and semantic annotations (double-sided ruby)

  Sometimes, ruby styles described above are combined.

  If this results in two annotations covering the same single base segment, then the annotations can just be placed back to back.

      <ruby>BASE<rt>annotation 1<rt>annotation 2</ruby>

      <ruby>B<rt>a<rt>a</ruby><ruby>A<rt>a<rt>a</ruby><ruby>S<rt>a<rt>a</ruby><ruby>E<rt>a<rt>a</ruby>

  In this contrived example, some symbols are given names in English and French.

      <ruby>
       ♥ <rt> Heart <rt lang=fr> Cœur
       ☘ <rt> Shamrock <rt lang=fr> Trèfle
       ✶ <rt> Star <rt lang=fr> Étoile
      </ruby>

  In more complication situations such as following examples, a nested `ruby` element is used to give the inner annotations, and then that whole `ruby` is then given an annotation at the "outer" level.

      <ruby><ruby>B<rt>a</rt>A<rt>n</rt>S<rt>t</rt>E<rt>n</rt></ruby><rt>annotation</ruby>

  Here both a phonetic reading and the meaning are given in ruby annotations. The annotation on the nested `ruby` element gives a mono-ruby phonetic annotation for each base character, while the annotation in the `rt` element that is a child of the outer `ruby` element gives the meaning using hiragana.

      <ruby><ruby>東<rt>とう</rt>南<rt>なん</rt></ruby><rt>たつみ</rt></ruby>の方角

  東とう南なんたつみの方角

  This is the same example, but the meaning is given in English instead of Japanese:

      <ruby><ruby>東<rt>とう</rt>南<rt>なん</rt></ruby><rt lang=en>Southeast</rt></ruby>の方角

  東とう南なん Southeastの方角

Within a `ruby` element that does not have a `ruby` element ancestor, content is segmented and segments are placed into three categories: base text segments, annotation segments, and ignored segments. Ignored segments do not form part of the document's semantics (they consist of some inter-element whitespace and `rp` elements, the latter of which are used for legacy user agents that do not support ruby at all). Base text segments can overlap (with a limit of two segments overlapping any one position in the DOM, and with any segment having an earlier start point than an overlapping segment also having an equal or later end point, and any segment have a later end point than an overlapping segment also having an equal or earlier start point). Annotation segments correspond to `rt` elements. Each annotation segment can be associated with a base text segment, and each base text segment can have annotation segments associated with it. (In a conforming document, each base text segment is associated with at least one annotation segment, and each annotation segment is associated with one base text segment.) A `ruby` element represents the union of the segments of base text it contains, along with the mapping from those base text segments to annotation segments. Segments are described in terms of DOM ranges; annotation segment ranges always consist of exactly one element. [DOM]

At any particular time, the segmentation and categorisation of content of a `ruby` element is the result that would be obtained from running the following algorithm:

1. Let base text segments be an empty list of base text segments, each potentially with a list of base text subsegments.

2. Let annotation segments be an empty list of annotation segments, each potentially being associated with a base text segment or subsegment.

3. Let root be the `ruby` element for which the algorithm is being run.

4. If root has a `ruby` element ancestor, then jump to the step labeled end.

5. Let current parent be root.

6. Let index be 0.

7. Let start index be null.

8. Let parent start index be null.

9. Let current base text be null.

10. Start mode: If index is equal to or greater than the number of child nodes in current parent, then jump to the step labeled end mode.

11. If the indexth node in current parent is an `rt` or `rp` element, jump to the step labeled annotation mode.

12. Set start index to the value of index.

13. Base mode: If the indexth node in current parent is a `ruby` element, and if current parent is the same element as root, then push a ruby level and then jump to the step labeled start mode.

14. If the indexth node in current parent is an `rt` or `rp` element, then set the current base text and then jump to the step labeled annotation mode.

15. Increment index by one.

16. Base mode post-increment: If index is equal to or greater than the number of child nodes in current parent, then jump to the step labeled end mode.

17. Jump back to the step labeled base mode.

18. Annotation mode: If the indexth node in current parent is an `rt` element, then push a ruby annotation and jump to the step labeled annotation mode increment.

19. If the indexth node in current parent is an `rp` element, jump to the step labeled annotation mode increment.

20. If the indexth node in current parent is not a `Text` node, or is a `Text` node that is not inter-element whitespace, then jump to the step labeled base mode.

21. Annotation mode increment: Let lookahead index be index plus one.

22. Annotation mode white-space skipper: If lookahead index is equal to the number of child nodes in current parent then jump to the step labeled end mode.

23. If the lookahead indexth node in current parent is an `rt` element or an `rp` element, then set index to lookahead index and jump to the step labeled annotation mode.

24. If the lookahead indexth node in current parent is not a `Text` node, or is a `Text` node that is not inter-element whitespace, then jump to the step labeled base mode (without further incrementing index, so the inter-element whitespace seen so far becomes part of the next base text segment).

25. Increment lookahead index by one.

26. Jump to the step labeled annotation mode white-space skipper.

27. End mode: If current parent is not the same element as root, then pop a ruby level and jump to the step labeled base mode post-increment.

28. End: Return base text segments and annotation segments. Any content of the `ruby` element not described by segments in either of those lists is implicitly in an ignored segment.

When the steps above say to set the current base text, it means to run the following steps at that point in the algorithm:

1. Let text range be a DOM range whose start is the boundary point (current parent, start index) and whose end is the boundary point (current parent, index).

2. Let new text segment be a base text segment described by the range annotation range.

3. Add new text segment to base text segments.

4. Let current base text be new text segment.

5. Let start index be null.

When the steps above say to push a ruby level, it means to run the following steps at that point in the algorithm:

1. Let current parent be the indexth node in current parent.

2. Let index be 0.

3. Set saved start index to the value of start index.

4. Let start index be null.

When the steps above say to pop a ruby level, it means to run the following steps at that point in the algorithm:

1. Let index be the position of current parent in root.

2. Let current parent be root.

3. Increment index by one.

4. Set start index to the value of saved start index.

5. Let saved start index be null.

When the steps above say to push a ruby annotation, it means to run the following steps at that point in the algorithm:

1. Let rt be the `rt` element that is the indexth node of current parent.

2. Let annotation range be a DOM range whose start is the boundary point (current parent, index) and whose end is the boundary point (current parent, index plus one) (i.e. that contains only rt).

3. Let new annotation segment be an annotation segment described by the range annotation range.

4. If current base text is not null, associate new annotation segment with current base text.

5. Add new annotation segment to annotation segments.

In this example, each ideograph in the Japanese text 漢字 is annotated with its reading in hiragana.

    ...
    <ruby>漢<rt>かん</rt>字<rt>じ</rt></ruby>
    ...

This might be rendered as:

In this example, each ideograph in the traditional Chinese text 漢字 is annotated with its bopomofo reading.

    <ruby>漢<rt>ㄏㄢˋ</rt>字<rt>ㄗˋ</rt></ruby>

This might be rendered as:

In this example, each ideograph in the simplified Chinese text 汉字 is annotated with its pinyin reading.

    ...<ruby>汉<rt>hàn</rt>字<rt>zì</rt></ruby>...

This might be rendered as:

In this more contrived example, the acronym "HTML" has four annotations: one for the whole acronym, briefly describing what it is, one for the letters "HT" expanding them to "Hypertext", one for the letter "M" expanding it to "Markup", and one for the letter "L" expanding it to "Language".

    <ruby>
     <ruby>HT<rt>Hypertext</rt>M<rt>Markup</rt>L<rt>Language</rt></ruby>
     <rt>An abstract language for describing documents and applications
    </ruby>

#### 4.5.11 The `rt` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `ruby` element.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  An `rt` element's end tag can be omitted if the `rt` element is immediately followed by an `rt` or `rp` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `rt` element marks the ruby text component of a ruby annotation. When it is the child of a `ruby` element, it doesn't represent anything itself, but the `ruby` element uses it as part of determining what it represents.

An `rt` element that is not a child of a `ruby` element represents the same thing as its children.

#### 4.5.12 The `rp` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `ruby` element, either immediately before or immediately after an `rt` element.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  An `rp` element's end tag can be omitted if the `rp` element is immediately followed by an `rt` or `rp` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `rp` element can be used to provide parentheses or other content around a ruby text component of a ruby annotation, to be shown by user agents that don't support ruby annotations.

An `rp` element that is a child of a `ruby` element represents nothing. An `rp` element whose parent element is not a `ruby` element represents its children.

The example above, in which each ideograph in the text 漢字 is annotated with its phonetic reading, could be expanded to use `rp` so that in legacy user agents the readings are in parentheses:

    ...
    <ruby>漢<rp> (</rp><rt>かん</rt><rp>) </rp>字<rp> (</rp><rt>じ</rt><rp>) </rp></ruby>
    ...

In conforming user agents the rendering would be as above, but in user agents that do not support ruby, the rendering would be:

    ... 漢 (かん) 字 (じ) ...

When there are multiple annotations for a segment, `rp` elements can also be placed between the annotations. Here is another copy of an earlier contrived example showing some symbols with names given in English and French, but this time with `rp` elements as well:

    <ruby>
    ♥<rp>: </rp><rt>Heart</rt><rp>, </rp><rt lang=fr>Cœur</rt><rp>.</rp>
    ☘<rp>: </rp><rt>Shamrock</rt><rp>, </rp><rt lang=fr>Trèfle</rt><rp>.</rp>
    ✶<rp>: </rp><rt>Star</rt><rp>, </rp><rt lang=fr>Étoile</rt><rp>.</rp>
    </ruby>

This would make the example render as follows in non-ruby-capable user agents:

    ♥: Heart, Cœur. ☘: Shamrock, Trèfle. ✶: Star, Étoile.

#### 4.5.13 The `data` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `value` — Machine-readable value
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLDataElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString value;
      };

The `data` element represents its contents, along with a machine-readable form of those contents in the `value` attribute.

The `value` attribute must be present. Its value must be a representation of the element's contents in a machine-readable format.

When the value is date- or time-related, the more specific `time` element can be used instead.

The element can be used for several purposes.

When combined with microformats or the microdata attributes defined in this specification, the element serves to provide both a machine-readable value for the purposes of data processors, and a human-readable value for the purposes of rendering in a Web browser. In this case, the format to be used in the `value` attribute is determined by the microformats or microdata vocabulary in use.

The element can also, however, be used in conjunction with scripts in the page, for when a script has a literal value to store alongside a human-readable value. In such cases, the format to be used depends only on the needs of the script. (The `data-*` attributes can also be useful in such situations.)

The `value` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

Here, a short table has its numeric values encoded using `data` so that the table sorting model can provide a sorting mechanism on each column, despite the numbers being presented in textual form in one column and in a decomposed form in another.

    <table sortable>
     <thead> <tr> <th> Game <th> Corporations <th> Map Size
     <tbody>
      <tr> <td> 1830 <td> <data value="8">Eight</data> <td> <data value="93">19+74 hexes (93 total)</data>
      <tr> <td> 1856 <td> <data value="11">Eleven</data> <td> <data value="99">12+87 hexes (99 total)</data>
      <tr> <td> 1870 <td> <data value="10">Ten</data> <td> <data value="149">4+145 hexes (149 total)</data>
    </table>

#### 4.5.14 The `time` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `datetime` — Machine-readable value
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTimeElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString dateTime;
      };

The `time` element represents its contents, along with a machine-readable form of those contents in the `datetime` attribute. The kind of content is limited to various kinds of dates, times, time-zone offsets, and durations, as described below.

The `datetime` attribute may be present. If present, its value must be a representation of the element's contents in a machine-readable format.

A `time` element that does not have a `datetime` content attribute must not have any element descendants.

The datetime value of a `time` element is the value of the element's `datetime` content attribute, if it has one, or the element's `textContent`, if it does not.

The datetime value of a `time` element must match one of the following syntaxes.

A valid month string

      <time>2011-11</time>

A valid date string

      <time>2011-11-18</time>

A valid yearless date string

      <time>11-18</time>

A valid time string

      <time>14:54</time>

      <time>14:54:39</time>

      <time>14:54:39.929</time>

A valid local date and time string

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54:39</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54:39.929</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54:39</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54:39.929</time>

  Times with dates but without a time zone offset are useful for specifying events that are observed at the same specific time in each time zone, throughout a day. For example, the 2020 new year is celebrated at 2020-01-01 00:00 in each time zone, not at the same precise moment across all time zones. For events that occur at the same time across all time zones, for example a videoconference meeting, a valid global date and time string is likely more useful.

A valid time-zone offset string

      <time>Z</time>

      <time>+0000</time>

      <time>+00:00</time>

      <time>-0800</time>

      <time>-08:00</time>

  For times without dates (or times referring to events that recur on multiple dates), specifying the geographic location that controls the time is usually more useful than specifying a time zone offset, because geographic locations change time zone offsets with daylight savings time. In some cases, geographic locations even change time zone, e.g. when the boundaries of those time zones are redrawn, as happened with Samoa at the end of 2011. There exists a time zone database that describes the boundaries of time zones and what rules apply within each such zone, known as the time zone database. [TZDATABASE]

A valid global date and time string

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54Z</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54:39Z</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54:39.929Z</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54+0000</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54:39+0000</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54:39.929+0000</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54+00:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54:39+00:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T14:54:39.929+00:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T06:54-0800</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T06:54:39-0800</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T06:54:39.929-0800</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T06:54-08:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T06:54:39-08:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18T06:54:39.929-08:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54Z</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54:39Z</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54:39.929Z</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54+0000</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54:39+0000</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54:39.929+0000</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54+00:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54:39+00:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 14:54:39.929+00:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 06:54-0800</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 06:54:39-0800</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 06:54:39.929-0800</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 06:54-08:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 06:54:39-08:00</time>

      <time>2011-11-18 06:54:39.929-08:00</time>

  Times with dates and a time zone offset are useful for specifying specific events, or recurring virtual events where the time is not anchored to a specific geographic location. For example, the precise time of an asteroid impact, or a particular meeting in a series of meetings held at 1400 UTC every day, regardless of whether any particular part of the world is observing daylight savings time or not. For events where the precise time varies by the local time zone offset of a specific geographic location, a valid local date and time string combined with that geographic location is likely more useful.

A valid week string

      <time>2011-W47</time>

Four or more ASCII digits, at least one of which is not U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0)

      <time>2011</time>

      <time>0001</time>

A valid duration string

      <time>PT4H18M3S</time>

      <time>4h 18m 3s</time>

The machine-readable equivalent of the element's contents must be obtained from the element's datetime value by using the following algorithm:

1. If parsing a month string from the element's datetime value returns a month, that is the machine-readable equivalent; abort these steps.

2. If parsing a date string from the element's datetime value returns a date, that is the machine-readable equivalent; abort these steps.

3. If parsing a yearless date string from the element's datetime value returns a yearless date, that is the machine-readable equivalent; abort these steps.

4. If parsing a time string from the element's datetime value returns a time, that is the machine-readable equivalent; abort these steps.

5. If parsing a local date and time string from the element's datetime value returns a local date and time, that is the machine-readable equivalent; abort these steps.

6. If parsing a time-zone offset string from the element's datetime value returns a time-zone offset, that is the machine-readable equivalent; abort these steps.

7. If parsing a global date and time string from the element's datetime value returns a global date and time, that is the machine-readable equivalent; abort these steps.

8. If parsing a week string from the element's datetime value returns a week, that is the machine-readable equivalent; abort these steps.

9. If the element's datetime value consists of only ASCII digits, at least one of which is not U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0), then the machine-readable equivalent is the base-ten interpretation of those digits, representing a year; abort these steps.

10. If parsing a duration string from the element's datetime value returns a duration, that is the machine-readable equivalent; abort these steps.

11. There is no machine-readable equivalent.

The algorithms referenced above are intended to be designed such that for any arbitrary string s, only one of the algorithms returns a value. A more efficient approach might be to create a single algorithm that parses all these data types in one pass; developing such an algorithm is left as an exercise to the reader.

The `dateTime` IDL attribute must reflect the element's `datetime` content attribute.

The `time` element can be used to encode dates, for example in microformats. The following shows a hypothetical way of encoding an event using a variant on hCalendar that uses the `time` element:

    <div class="vevent">
     <a class="url" href="http://www.web2con.com/">http://www.web2con.com/</a>
      <span class="summary">Web 2.0 Conference</span>:
      <time class="dtstart" datetime="2005-10-05">October 5</time> -
      <time class="dtend" datetime="2005-10-07">7</time>,
      at the <span class="location">Argent Hotel, San Francisco, CA</span>
     </div>

Here, a fictional microdata vocabulary based on the Atom vocabulary is used with the `time` element to mark up a blog post's publication date.

    <article itemscope itemtype="http://n.example.org/rfc4287">
     <h1 itemprop="title">Big tasks</h1>
     <footer>Published <time itemprop="published" datetime="2009-08-29">two days ago</time>.</footer>
     <p itemprop="content">Today, I went out and bought a bike for my kid.</p>
    </article>

In this example, another article's publication date is marked up using `time`, this time using the schema.org microdata vocabulary:

    <article itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/BlogPosting">
     <h1 itemprop="headline">Small tasks</h1>
     <footer>Published <time itemprop="datePublished" datetime="2009-08-30">yesterday</time>.</footer>
     <p itemprop="articleBody">I put a bike bell on his bike.</p>
    </article>

In the following snippet, the `time` element is used to encode a date in the ISO8601 format, for later processing by a script:

    <p>Our first date was <time datetime="2006-09-23">a Saturday</time>.</p>

In this second snippet, the value includes a time:

    <p>We stopped talking at <time datetime="2006-09-24T05:00-07:00">5am the next morning</time>.</p>

A script loaded by the page (and thus privy to the page's internal convention of marking up dates and times using the `time` element) could scan through the page and look at all the `time` elements therein to create an index of dates and times.

For example, this element conveys the string "Tuesday" with the additional semantic that the 18th of November 2011 is the meaning that corresponds to "Tuesday":

    Today is <time datetime="2011-11-18">Tuesday</time>.

In this example, a specific time in the Pacific Standard Time timezone is specified:

    Your next meeting is at <time datetime="2011-11-18T15:00-08:00">3pm</time>.

#### 4.5.15 The `code` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `code` element represents a fragment of computer code. This could be an XML element name, a file name, a computer program, or any other string that a computer would recognize.

There is no formal way to indicate the language of computer code being marked up. Authors who wish to mark `code` elements with the language used, e.g. so that syntax highlighting scripts can use the right rules, can use the `class` attribute, e.g. by adding a class prefixed with "`language-`" to the element.

The following example shows how the element can be used in a paragraph to mark up element names and computer code, including punctuation.

    <p>The <code>code</code> element represents a fragment of computer
    code.</p>

    <p>When you call the <code>activate()</code> method on the
    <code>robotSnowman</code> object, the eyes glow.</p>

    <p>The example below uses the <code>begin</code> keyword to indicate
    the start of a statement block. It is paired with an <code>end</code>
    keyword, which is followed by the <code>.</code> punctuation character
    (full stop) to indicate the end of the program.</p>

The following example shows how a block of code could be marked up using the `pre` and `code` elements.

    <pre><code class="language-pascal">var i: Integer;
    begin
       i := 1;
    end.</code></pre>

A class is used in that example to indicate the language used.

See the `pre` element for more details.

#### 4.5.16 The `var` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `var` element represents a variable. This could be an actual variable in a mathematical expression or programming context, an identifier representing a constant, a symbol identifying a physical quantity, a function parameter, or just be a term used as a placeholder in prose.

In the paragraph below, the letter "n" is being used as a variable in prose:

    <p>If there are <var>n</var> pipes leading to the ice
    cream factory then I expect at <em>least</em> <var>n</var>
    flavors of ice cream to be available for purchase!</p>

For mathematics, in particular for anything beyond the simplest of expressions, MathML is more appropriate. However, the `var` element can still be used to refer to specific variables that are then mentioned in MathML expressions.

In this example, an equation is shown, with a legend that references the variables in the equation. The expression itself is marked up with MathML, but the variables are mentioned in the figure's legend using `var`.

    <figure>
     <math>
      <mi>a</mi>
      <mo>=</mo>
      <msqrt>
       <msup><mi>b</mi><mn>2</mn></msup>
       <mi>+</mi>
       <msup><mi>c</mi><mn>2</mn></msup>
      </msqrt>
     </math>
     <figcaption>
      Using Pythagoras' theorem to solve for the hypotenuse <var>a</var> of
      a triangle with sides <var>b</var> and <var>c</var>
     </figcaption>
    </figure>

Here, the equation describing mass-energy equivalence is used in a sentence, and the `var` element is used to mark the variables and constants in that equation:

    <p>Then he turned to the blackboard and picked up the chalk. After a few moment's
    thought, he wrote <var>E</var> = <var>m</var> <var>c</var><sup>2</sup>. The teacher
    looked pleased.</p>

#### 4.5.17 The `samp` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `samp` element represents sample or quoted output from another program or computing system.

See the `pre` and `kbd` elements for more details.

This element can be contrasted with the `output` element, which can be used to provide immediate output in a Web application.

This example shows the `samp` element being used inline:

    <p>The computer said <samp>Too much cheese in tray
    two</samp> but I didn't know what that meant.</p>

This second example shows a block of sample output. Nested `samp` and `kbd` elements allow for the styling of specific elements of the sample output using a style sheet. There's also a few parts of the `samp` that are annotated with even more detailed markup, to enable very precise styling. To achieve this, `span` elements are used.

    <pre><samp><span class="prompt">jdoe@mowmow:~$</span> <kbd>ssh demo.example.com</kbd>
    Last login: Tue Apr 12 09:10:17 2005 from mowmow.example.com on pts/1
    Linux demo 2.6.10-grsec+gg3+e+fhs6b+nfs+gr0501+++p3+c4a+gr2b-reslog-v6.189 #1 SMP Tue Feb 1 11:22:36 PST 2005 i686 unknown

    <span class="prompt">jdoe@demo:~$</span> <span class="cursor">_</span></samp></pre>

#### 4.5.18 The `kbd` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `kbd` element represents user input (typically keyboard input, although it may also be used to represent other input, such as voice commands).

When the `kbd` element is nested inside a `samp` element, it represents the input as it was echoed by the system.

When the `kbd` element contains a `samp` element, it represents input based on system output, for example invoking a menu item.

When the `kbd` element is nested inside another `kbd` element, it represents an actual key or other single unit of input as appropriate for the input mechanism.

Here the `kbd` element is used to indicate keys to press:

    <p>To make George eat an apple, press <kbd><kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>F3</kbd></kbd></p>

In this second example, the user is told to pick a particular menu item. The outer `kbd` element marks up a block of input, with the inner `kbd` elements representing each individual step of the input, and the `samp` elements inside them indicating that the steps are input based on something being displayed by the system, in this case menu labels:

    <p>To make George eat an apple, select
        <kbd><kbd><samp>File</samp></kbd>|<kbd><samp>Eat Apple...</samp></kbd></kbd>
    </p>

Such precision isn't necessary; the following is equally fine:

    <p>To make George eat an apple, select <kbd>File | Eat Apple...</kbd></p>

#### 4.5.19 The `sub` and `sup` elements

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Use `HTMLElement`.

The `sup` element represents a superscript and the `sub` element represents a subscript.

These elements must be used only to mark up typographical conventions with specific meanings, not for typographical presentation for presentation's sake. For example, it would be inappropriate for the `sub` and `sup` elements to be used in the name of the LaTeX document preparation system. In general, authors should use these elements only if the absence of those elements would change the meaning of the content.

In certain languages, superscripts are part of the typographical conventions for some abbreviations.

    <p>The most beautiful women are
    <span lang="fr"><abbr>M<sup>lle</sup></abbr> Gwendoline</span> and
    <span lang="fr"><abbr>M<sup>me</sup></abbr> Denise</span>.</p>

The `sub` element can be used inside a `var` element, for variables that have subscripts.

Here, the `sub` element is used to represent the subscript that identifies the variable in a family of variables:

    <p>The coordinate of the <var>i</var>th point is
    (<var>x<sub><var>i</var></sub></var>, <var>y<sub><var>i</var></sub></var>).
    For example, the 10th point has coordinate
    (<var>x<sub>10</sub></var>, <var>y<sub>10</sub></var>).</p>

Mathematical expressions often use subscripts and superscripts. Authors are encouraged to use MathML for marking up mathematics, but authors may opt to use `sub` and `sup` if detailed mathematical markup is not desired. [MATHML]

    <var>E</var>=<var>m</var><var>c</var><sup>2</sup>

    f(<var>x</var>, <var>n</var>) = log<sub>4</sub><var>x</var><sup><var>n</var></sup>

#### 4.5.20 The `i` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `i` element represents a span of text in an alternate voice or mood, or otherwise offset from the normal prose in a manner indicating a different quality of text, such as a taxonomic designation, a technical term, an idiomatic phrase from another language, transliteration, a thought, or a ship name in Western texts.

Terms in languages different from the main text should be annotated with `lang` attributes (or, in XML, `lang` attributes in the XML namespace).

The examples below show uses of the `i` element:

    <p>The <i class="taxonomy">Felis silvestris catus</i> is cute.</p>
    <p>The term <i>prose content</i> is defined above.</p>
    <p>There is a certain <i lang="fr">je ne sais quoi</i> in the air.</p>

In the following example, a dream sequence is marked up using `i` elements.

    <p>Raymond tried to sleep.</p>
    <p><i>The ship sailed away on Thursday</i>, he
    dreamt. <i>The ship had many people aboard, including a beautiful
    princess called Carey. He watched her, day-in, day-out, hoping she
    would notice him, but she never did.</i></p>
    <p><i>Finally one night he picked up the courage to speak with
    her—</i></p>
    <p>Raymond woke with a start as the fire alarm rang out.</p>

Authors can use the `class` attribute on the `i` element to identify why the element is being used, so that if the style of a particular use (e.g. dream sequences as opposed to taxonomic terms) is to be changed at a later date, the author doesn't have to go through the entire document (or series of related documents) annotating each use.

Authors are encouraged to consider whether other elements might be more applicable than the `i` element, for instance the `em` element for marking up stress emphasis, or the `dfn` element to mark up the defining instance of a term.

Style sheets can be used to format `i` elements, just like any other element can be restyled. Thus, it is not the case that content in `i` elements will necessarily be italicized.

#### 4.5.21 The `b` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `b` element represents a span of text to which attention is being drawn for utilitarian purposes without conveying any extra importance and with no implication of an alternate voice or mood, such as key words in a document abstract, product names in a review, actionable words in interactive text-driven software, or an article lede.

The following example shows a use of the `b` element to highlight key words without marking them up as important:

    <p>The <b>frobonitor</b> and <b>barbinator</b> components are fried.</p>

In the following example, objects in a text adventure are highlighted as being special by use of the `b` element.

    <p>You enter a small room. Your <b>sword</b> glows
    brighter. A <b>rat</b> scurries past the corner wall.</p>

Another case where the `b` element is appropriate is in marking up the lede (or lead) sentence or paragraph. The following example shows how a BBC article about kittens adopting a rabbit as their own could be marked up:

    <article>
     <h2>Kittens 'adopted' by pet rabbit</h2>
     <p><b class="lede">Six abandoned kittens have found an
     unexpected new mother figure — a pet rabbit.</b></p>
     <p>Veterinary nurse Melanie Humble took the three-week-old
     kittens to her Aberdeen home.</p>
    [...]

As with the `i` element, authors can use the `class` attribute on the `b` element to identify why the element is being used, so that if the style of a particular use is to be changed at a later date, the author doesn't have to go through annotating each use.

The `b` element should be used as a last resort when no other element is more appropriate. In particular, headings should use the `h1` to `h6` elements, stress emphasis should use the `em` element, importance should be denoted with the `strong` element, and text marked or highlighted should use the `mark` element.

The following would be incorrect usage:

    <p><b>WARNING!</b> Do not frob the barbinator!</p>

In the previous example, the correct element to use would have been `strong`, not `b`.

Style sheets can be used to format `b` elements, just like any other element can be restyled. Thus, it is not the case that content in `b` elements will necessarily be boldened.

#### 4.5.22 The `u` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `u` element represents a span of text with an unarticulated, though explicitly rendered, non-textual annotation, such as labeling the text as being a proper name in Chinese text (a Chinese proper name mark), or labeling the text as being misspelt.

In most cases, another element is likely to be more appropriate: for marking stress emphasis, the `em` element should be used; for marking key words or phrases either the `b` element or the `mark` element should be used, depending on the context; for marking book titles, the `cite` element should be used; for labeling text with explicit textual annotations, the `ruby` element should be used; for labeling ship names in Western texts, the `i` element should be used.

The default rendering of the `u` element in visual presentations clashes with the conventional rendering of hyperlinks (underlining). Authors are encouraged to avoid using the `u` element where it could be confused for a hyperlink.

#### 4.5.23 The `mark` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `mark` element represents a run of text in one document marked or highlighted for reference purposes, due to its relevance in another context. When used in a quotation or other block of text referred to from the prose, it indicates a highlight that was not originally present but which has been added to bring the reader's attention to a part of the text that might not have been considered important by the original author when the block was originally written, but which is now under previously unexpected scrutiny. When used in the main prose of a document, it indicates a part of the document that has been highlighted due to its likely relevance to the user's current activity.

This example shows how the `mark` element can be used to bring attention to a particular part of a quotation:

    <p lang="en-US">Consider the following quote:</p>
    <blockquote lang="en-GB">
     <p>Look around and you will find, no-one's really
     <mark>colour</mark> blind.</p>
    </blockquote>
    <p lang="en-US">As we can tell from the <em>spelling</em> of the word,
    the person writing this quote is clearly not American.</p>

(If the goal was to mark the element as misspelt, however, the `u` element, possibly with a class, would be more appropriate.)

Another example of the `mark` element is highlighting parts of a document that are matching some search string. If someone looked at a document, and the server knew that the user was searching for the word "kitten", then the server might return the document with one paragraph modified as follows:

    <p>I also have some <mark>kitten</mark>s who are visiting me
    these days. They're really cute. I think they like my garden! Maybe I
    should adopt a <mark>kitten</mark>.</p>

In the following snippet, a paragraph of text refers to a specific part of a code fragment.

    <p>The highlighted part below is where the error lies:</p>
    <pre><code>var i: Integer;
    begin
       i := <mark>1.1</mark>;
    end.</code></pre>

This is separate from syntax highlighting, for which `span` is more appropriate. Combining both, one would get:

    <p>The highlighted part below is where the error lies:</p>
    <pre><code><span class=keyword>var</span> <span class=ident>i</span>: <span class=type>Integer</span>;
    <span class=keyword>begin</span>
       <span class=ident>i</span> := <span class=literal><mark>1.1</mark></span>;
    <span class=keyword>end</span>.</code></pre>

This is another example showing the use of `mark` to highlight a part of quoted text that was originally not emphasized. In this example, common typographic conventions have led the author to explicitly style `mark` elements in quotes to render in italics.

    <article>
     <style scoped>
      blockquote mark, q mark {
        font: inherit; font-style: italic;
        text-decoration: none;
        background: transparent; color: inherit;
      }
      .bubble em {
        font: inherit; font-size: larger;
        text-decoration: underline;
      }
     </style>
     <h1>She knew</h1>
     <p>Did you notice the subtle joke in the joke on panel 4?</p>
     <blockquote>
      <p class="bubble">I didn't <em>want</em> to believe. <mark>Of course
      on some level I realised it was a known-plaintext attack.</mark> But I
      couldn't admit it until I saw for myself.</p>
     </blockquote>
     <p>(Emphasis mine.) I thought that was great. It's so pedantic, yet it
     explains everything neatly.</p>
    </article>

Note, incidentally, the distinction between the `em` element in this example, which is part of the original text being quoted, and the `mark` element, which is highlighting a part for comment.

The following example shows the difference between denoting the importance of a span of text (`strong`) as opposed to denoting the relevance of a span of text (`mark`). It is an extract from a textbook, where the extract has had the parts relevant to the exam highlighted. The safety warnings, important though they may be, are apparently not relevant to the exam.

    <h3>Wormhole Physics Introduction</h3>

    <p><mark>A wormhole in normal conditions can be held open for a
    maximum of just under 39 minutes.</mark> Conditions that can increase
    the time include a powerful energy source coupled to one or both of
    the gates connecting the wormhole, and a large gravity well (such as a
    black hole).</p>

    <p><mark>Momentum is preserved across the wormhole. Electromagnetic
    radiation can travel in both directions through a wormhole,
    but matter cannot.</mark></p>

    <p>When a wormhole is created, a vortex normally forms.
    <strong>Warning: The vortex caused by the wormhole opening will
    annihilate anything in its path.</strong> Vortexes can be avoided when
    using sufficiently advanced dialing technology.</p>

    <p><mark>An obstruction in a gate will prevent it from accepting a
    wormhole connection.</mark></p>

#### 4.5.24 The `bdi` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  Also, the `dir` global attribute has special semantics on this element.
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `bdi` element represents a span of text that is to be isolated from its surroundings for the purposes of bidirectional text formatting. [BIDI]

The `dir` global attribute defaults to `auto` on this element (it never inherits from the parent element like with other elements).

This element has rendering requirements involving the bidirectional algorithm.

This element is especially useful when embedding user-generated content with an unknown directionality.

In this example, usernames are shown along with the number of posts that the user has submitted. If the `bdi` element were not used, the username of the Arabic user would end up confusing the text (the bidirectional algorithm would put the colon and the number "3" next to the word "User" rather than next to the word "posts").

    <ul>
     <li>User <bdi>jcranmer</bdi>: 12 posts.
     <li>User <bdi>hober</bdi>: 5 posts.
     <li>User <bdi>إيان</bdi>: 3 posts.
    </ul>

When using the `bdi` element, the username acts as expected.
If the `bdi` element were to be replaced by a `b` element, the username would confuse the bidirectional algorithm and the third bullet would end up saying "User 3 :", followed by the Arabic name (right-to-left), followed by "posts" and a period.

#### 4.5.25 The `bdo` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  Also, the `dir` global attribute has special semantics on this element.
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `bdo` element represents explicit text directionality formatting control for its children. It allows authors to override the Unicode bidirectional algorithm by explicitly specifying a direction override. [BIDI]

Authors must specify the `dir` attribute on this element, with the value `ltr` to specify a left-to-right override and with the value `rtl` to specify a right-to-left override. The `auto` value must not be specified.

This element has rendering requirements involving the bidirectional algorithm.

#### 4.5.26 The `span` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLSpanElement : HTMLElement {};

The `span` element doesn't mean anything on its own, but can be useful when used together with the global attributes, e.g. `class`, `lang`, or `dir`. It represents its children.

In this example, a code fragment is marked up using `span` elements and `class` attributes so that its keywords and identifiers can be colour-coded from CSS:

    <pre><code class="lang-c"><span class="keyword">for</span> (<span class="ident">j</span> = 0; <span class="ident">j</span> &lt; 256; <span class="ident">j</span>++) {
      <span class="ident">i_t3</span> = (<span class="ident">i_t3</span> & 0x1ffff) | (<span class="ident">j</span> &lt;&lt; 17);
      <span class="ident">i_t6</span> = (((((((<span class="ident">i_t3</span> >> 3) ^ <span class="ident">i_t3</span>) >> 1) ^ <span class="ident">i_t3</span>) >> 8) ^ <span class="ident">i_t3</span>) >> 5) & 0xff;
      <span class="keyword">if</span> (<span class="ident">i_t6</span> == <span class="ident">i_t1</span>)
        <span class="keyword">break</span>;
    }</code></pre>

#### 4.5.27 The `br` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLBRElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `br` element represents a line break.

While line breaks are usually represented in visual media by physically moving subsequent text to a new line, a style sheet or user agent would be equally justified in causing line breaks to be rendered in a different manner, for instance as green dots, or as extra spacing.

`br` elements must be used only for line breaks that are actually part of the content, as in poems or addresses.

The following example is correct usage of the `br` element:

    <p>P. Sherman<br>
    42 Wallaby Way<br>
    Sydney</p>

`br` elements must not be used for separating thematic groups in a paragraph.

The following examples are non-conforming, as they abuse the `br` element:

    <p><a ...>34 comments.</a><br>
    <a ...>Add a comment.</a></p>

    <p><label>Name: <input name="name"></label><br>
    <label>Address: <input name="address"></label></p>

Here are alternatives to the above, which are correct:

    <p><a ...>34 comments.</a></p>
    <p><a ...>Add a comment.</a></p>

    <p><label>Name: <input name="name"></label></p>
    <p><label>Address: <input name="address"></label></p>

If a paragraph consists of nothing but a single `br` element, it represents a placeholder blank line (e.g. as in a template). Such blank lines must not be used for presentation purposes.

Any content inside `br` elements must not be considered part of the surrounding text.

This element has rendering requirements involving the bidirectional algorithm.

#### 4.5.28 The `wbr` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `wbr` element represents a line break opportunity.

In the following example, someone is quoted as saying something which, for effect, is written as one long word. However, to ensure that the text can be wrapped in a readable fashion, the individual words in the quote are separated using a `wbr` element.

    <p>So then he pointed at the tiger and screamed
    "there<wbr>is<wbr>no<wbr>way<wbr>you<wbr>are<wbr>ever<wbr>going<wbr>to<wbr>catch<wbr>me"!</p>

Here, especially long lines of code in a program listing have suggested wrapping points given using `wbr` elements.

    <pre>...
    Heading heading = Helm.HeadingFactory(HeadingCoordinates[1], <wbr>HeadingCoordinates[2], <wbr>HeadingCoordinates[3], <wbr>HeadingCoordinates[4]);
    Course course = Helm.CourseFactory(Heading, <wbr>Maps.MapFactoryFromHeading(heading), <wbr>Speeds.GetMaximumSpeed().ConvertToWarp());
    ...</pre>

Any content inside `wbr` elements must not be considered part of the surrounding text.

This element has rendering requirements involving the bidirectional algorithm.

#### 4.5.29 Usage summary

This section is non-normative.

Element | Purpose | Example
--- | --- | ---
`a` | Hyperlinks |
    Visit my <a href="drinks.html">drinks</a> page.
`em` | Stress emphasis |
    I must say I <em>adore</em> lemonade.
`strong` | Importance |
    This tea is <strong>very hot</strong>.
`small` | Side comments |
    These grapes are made into wine. <small>Alcohol is addictive.</small>
`s` | Inaccurate text |
    Price: <s>£4.50</s> £2.00!
`cite` | Titles of works |
    The case <cite>Hugo v. Danielle</cite> is relevant here.
`q` | Quotations |
    The judge said <q>You can drink water from the fish tank</q> but advised against it.
`dfn` | Defining instance |
    The term <dfn>organic food</dfn> refers to food produced without synthetic chemicals.
`abbr` | Abbreviations |
    Organic food in Ireland is certified by the <abbr title="Irish Organic Farmers and Growers Association">IOFGA</abbr>.
`ruby`, `rt`, `rp` | Ruby annotations |
    <ruby> OJ <rp>(<rt>Orange Juice<rp>)</ruby>
`data` | Machine-readable equivalent |
    Available starting today! <data value="UPC:022014640201">North Coast Organic Apple Cider</data>
`time` | Machine-readable equivalent of date- or time-related data |
    Available starting on <time datetime="2011-11-12">November 12th</time>!
`code` | Computer code |
    The <code>fruitdb</code> program can be used for tracking fruit production.
`var` | Variables |
    If there are <var>n</var> fruit in the bowl, at least <var>n</var>÷2 will be ripe.
`samp` | Computer output |
    The computer said <samp>Unknown error -3</samp>.
`kbd` | User input |
    Hit <kbd>F1</kbd> to continue.
`sub` | Subscripts |
    Water is H<sub>2</sub>O.
`sup` | Superscripts |
    The Hydrogen in heavy water is usually <sup>2</sup>H.
`i` | Alternative voice |
    Lemonade consists primarily of <i>Citrus limon</i>.
`b` | Keywords |
    Take a <b>lemon</b> and squeeze it with a <b>juicer</b>.
`u` | Annotations |
    The mixture of apple juice and <u class="spelling">eldeflower</u> juice is very pleasant.
`mark` | Highlight |
    Elderflower cordial, with one <mark>part</mark> cordial to ten <mark>part</mark>s water, stands a<mark>part</mark> from the rest.
`bdi` | Text directionality isolation |
    The recommended restaurant is <bdi lang="">My Juice Café (At The Beach)</bdi>.
`bdo` | Text directionality formatting |
    The proposal is to write English, but in reverse order. "Juice" would become "<bdo dir=rtl>Juice</bdo>"
`span` | Other |
    In French we call it <span lang="fr">sirop de sureau</span>.
`br` | Line break |
    Simply Orange Juice Company<br>Apopka, FL 32703<br>U.S.A.
`wbr` | Line breaking opportunity |
    www.simply<wbr>orange<wbr>juice.com

### 4.6 Links

#### 4.6.1 Introduction

Links are a conceptual construct, created by `a`, `area`, and `link` elements, that represent a connection between two resources, one of which is the current `Document`. There are two kinds of links in HTML:

Links to external resources

  These are links to resources that are to be used to augment the current document, generally automatically processed by the user agent.

Hyperlinks

  These are links to other resources that are generally exposed to the user by the user agent so that the user can cause the user agent to navigate to those resources, e.g. to visit them in a browser or download them.

For `link` elements with an `href` attribute and a `rel` attribute, links must be created for the keywords of the `rel` attribute, as defined for those keywords in the link types section.

Similarly, for `a` and `area` elements with an `href` attribute and a `rel` attribute, links must be created for the keywords of the `rel` attribute as defined for those keywords in the link types section. Unlike `link` elements, however, `a` and `area` element with an `href` attribute that either do not have a `rel` attribute, or whose `rel` attribute has no keywords that are defined as specifying hyperlinks, must also create a hyperlink. This implied hyperlink has no special meaning (it has no link type) beyond linking the element's node document to the resource given by the element's `href` attribute.

A hyperlink can have one or more hyperlink annotations that modify the processing semantics of that hyperlink.

#### 4.6.2 Links created by `a` and `area` elements

The `href` attribute on `a` and `area` elements must have a value that is a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

The `href` attribute on `a` and `area` elements is not required; when those elements do not have `href` attributes they do not create hyperlinks.

The `target` attribute, if present, must be a valid browsing context name or keyword. It gives the name of the browsing context that will be used. User agents use this name when following hyperlinks.

When an `a` or `area` element's activation behavior is invoked, the user agent may allow the user to indicate a preference regarding whether the hyperlink is to be used for navigation or whether the resource it specifies is to be downloaded.

In the absence of a user preference, the default should be navigation if the element has no `download` attribute, and should be to download the specified resource if it does.

Whether determined by the user's preferences or via the presence or absence of the attribute, if the decision is to use the hyperlink for navigation then the user agent must follow the hyperlink, and if the decision is to use the hyperlink to download a resource, the user agent must download the hyperlink. These terms are defined in subsequent sections below.

The `download` attribute, if present, indicates that the author intends the hyperlink to be used for downloading a resource. The attribute may have a value; the value, if any, specifies the default file name that the author recommends for use in labeling the resource in a local file system. There are no restrictions on allowed values, but authors are cautioned that most file systems have limitations with regard to what punctuation is supported in file names, and user agents are likely to adjust file names accordingly.

The `ping` attribute, if present, gives the URLs of the resources that are interested in being notified if the user follows the hyperlink. The value must be a set of space-separated tokens, each of which must be a valid non-empty URL. The value is used by the user agent for hyperlink auditing.

The `rel` attribute on `a` and `area` elements controls what kinds of links the elements create. The attribute's value must be a set of space-separated tokens. The allowed keywords and their meanings are defined below.

The `rel` attribute has no default value. If the attribute is omitted or if none of the values in the attribute are recognised by the user agent, then the document has no particular relationship with the destination resource other than there being a hyperlink between the two.

The `hreflang` attribute on `a` and `area` elements that create hyperlinks, if present, gives the language of the linked resource. It is purely advisory. The value must be a valid BCP 47 language tag. [BCP47] User agents must not consider this attribute authoritative — upon fetching the resource, user agents must use only language information associated with the resource to determine its language, not metadata included in the link to the resource.

The `type` attribute, if present, gives the MIME type of the linked resource. It is purely advisory. The value must be a valid MIME type. User agents must not consider the `type` attribute authoritative — upon fetching the resource, user agents must not use metadata included in the link to the resource to determine its type.

#### 4.6.3 Following hyperlinks

When a user follows a hyperlink created by an element subject, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let replace be false.

2. Let source be the browsing context that contains the `Document` object with which subject in question is associated.

3. If the user indicated a specific browsing context when following the hyperlink, or if the user agent is configured to follow hyperlinks by navigating a particular browsing context, then let target be that browsing context.

   Otherwise, if subject is an `a` or `area` element that has a `target` attribute, then let target be the browsing context that is chosen by applying the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name, using the value of the `target` attribute as the browsing context name. If these rules result in the creation of a new browsing context, set replace to true.

   Otherwise, if the hyperlink is a sidebar hyperlink, the user agent implements a feature that can be considered a secondary browsing context, and the user agent intends to use this feature in this instance, let target be such a secondary browsing context.

   Otherwise, if target is an `a` or `area` element with no `target` attribute, but the `Document` contains a `base` element with a `target` attribute, then let target be the browsing context that is chosen by applying the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name, using the value of the `target` attribute of the first such `base` element as the browsing context name. If these rules result in the creation of a new browsing context, set replace to true.

   Otherwise, let target be the browsing context that subject itself is in.

4. Resolve the URL given by the `href` attribute of that element, relative to that element.

5. If that is successful, let URL be the resulting absolute URL.

   Otherwise, if resolving the URL failed, the user agent may report the error to the user in a user-agent-specific manner, may queue a task to navigate the target browsing context to an error page to report the error, or may ignore the error and do nothing. In any case, the user agent must then abort these steps.

6. In the case of server-side image maps, append the hyperlink suffix to URL.

7. Queue a task to navigate the target browsing context to URL. If replace is true, the navigation must be performed with replacement enabled. The source browsing context must be source.

The task source for the tasks mentioned above is the DOM manipulation task source.

#### 4.6.4 Downloading resources

In some cases, resources are intended for later use rather than immediate viewing. To indicate that a resource is intended to be downloaded for use later, rather than immediately used, the `download` attribute can be specified on the `a` or `area` element that creates the hyperlink to that resource.

The attribute can furthermore be given a value, to specify the file name that user agents are to use when storing the resource in a file system. This value can be overridden by the `Content-Disposition` HTTP header's filename parameters. [RFC6266]

In cross-origin situations, the `download` attribute has to be combined with the `Content-Disposition` HTTP header, specifically with the `attachment` disposition type, to avoid the user being warned of possibly nefarious activity. (This is to protect users from being made to download sensitive personal or confidential information without their full understanding.)

When a user downloads a hyperlink created by an element, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Resolve the URL given by the `href` attribute of that element, relative to that element.

2. If resolving the URL fails, the user agent may report the error to the user in a user-agent-specific manner, may navigate to an error page to report the error, or may ignore the error and do nothing. In either case, the user agent must abort these steps.

3. Otherwise, let URL be the resulting absolute URL.

4. In the case of server-side image maps, append the hyperlink suffix to URL.

5. Return to whatever algorithm invoked these steps and continue these steps asynchronously.

6. Fetch URL and handle the resulting resource as a download.

When a user agent is to handle a resource obtained from a fetch algorithm as a download, it should provide the user with a way to save the resource for later use, if a resource is successfully obtained; or otherwise should report any problems downloading the file to the user.

If the user agent needs a file name for a resource being handled as a download, it should select one using the following algorithm.

This algorithm is intended to mitigate security dangers involved in downloading files from untrusted sites, and user agents are strongly urged to follow it.

1. Let filename be the void value.

2. If the resource has a `Content-Disposition` header, that header specifies the `attachment` disposition type, and the header includes file name information, then let filename have the value specified by the header, and jump to the step labeled sanitize below. [RFC6266]

3. Let interface origin be the origin of the `Document` in which the download or navigate action resulting in the download was initiated, if any.

4. Let resource origin be the origin of the URL of the resource being downloaded, unless that URL's scheme component is `data`, in which case let resource origin be the same as the interface origin, if any.

5. If there is no interface origin, then let trusted operation be true. Otherwise, let trusted operation be true if resource origin is the same origin as interface origin, and false otherwise.

6. If trusted operation is true and the resource has a `Content-Disposition` header and that header includes file name information, then let filename have the value specified by the header, and jump to the step labeled sanitize below. [RFC6266]

7. If the download was not initiated from a hyperlink created by an `a` or `area` element, or if the element of the hyperlink from which it was initiated did not have a `download` attribute when the download was initiated, or if there was such an attribute but its value when the download was initiated was the empty string, then jump to the step labeled no proposed file name.

8. Let proposed filename have the value of the `download` attribute of the element of the hyperlink that initiated the download at the time the download was initiated.

9. If trusted operation is true, let filename have the value of proposed filename, and jump to the step labeled sanitize below.

10. If the resource has a `Content-Disposition` header and that header specifies the `attachment` disposition type, let filename have the value of proposed filename, and jump to the step labeled sanitize below. [RFC6266]

11. No proposed file name: If trusted operation is true, or if the user indicated a preference for having the resource in question downloaded, let filename have a value derived from the URL of the resource in a user-agent-defined manner, and jump to the step labeled sanitize below.

12. Act in a user-agent-defined manner to safeguard the user from a potentially hostile cross-origin download. If the download is not to be aborted, then let filename be set to the user's preferred file name or to a file name selected by the user agent, and jump to the step labeled sanitize below.

    If the algorithm reaches this step, then a download was begun from a different origin than the resource being downloaded, and the origin did not mark the file as suitable for downloading, and the download was not initiated by the user. This could be because a `download` attribute was used to trigger the download, or because the resource in question is not of a type that the user agent supports.

    This could be dangerous, because, for instance, a hostile server could be trying to get a user to unknowingly download private information and then re-upload it to the hostile server, by tricking the user into thinking the data is from the hostile server.

    Thus, it is in the user's interests that the user be somehow notified that the resource in question comes from quite a different source, and to prevent confusion, any suggested file name from the potentially hostile interface origin should be ignored.

13. Sanitize: Optionally, allow the user to influence filename. For example, a user agent could prompt the user for a file name, potentially providing the value of filename as determined above as a default value.

14. Adjust filename to be suitable for the local file system.

    For example, this could involve removing characters that are not legal in file names, or trimming leading and trailing whitespace.

15. If the platform conventions do not in any way use extensions to determine the types of file on the file system, then return filename as the file name and abort these steps.

16. Let claimed type be the type given by the resource's Content-Type metadata, if any is known. Let named type be the type given by filename's extension, if any is known. For the purposes of this step, a type is a mapping of a MIME type to an extension.

17. If named type is consistent with the user's preferences (e.g. because the value of filename was determined by prompting the user), then return filename as the file name and abort these steps.

18. If claimed type and named type are the same type (i.e. the type given by the resource's Content-Type metadata is consistent with the type given by filename's extension), then return filename as the file name and abort these steps.

19. If the claimed type is known, then alter filename to add an extension corresponding to claimed type.

    Otherwise, if named type is known to be potentially dangerous (e.g. it will be treated by the platform conventions as a native executable, shell script, HTML application, or executable-macro-capable document) then optionally alter filename to add a known-safe extension (e.g. "`.txt`").

    This last step would make it impossible to download executables, which might not be desirable. As always, implementors are forced to balance security and usability in this matter.

20. Return filename as the file name.

For the purposes of this algorithm, a file extension consists of any part of the file name that platform conventions dictate will be used for identifying the type of the file. For example, many operating systems use the part of the file name following the last dot ("`.`") in the file name to determine the type of the file, and from that the manner in which the file is to be opened or executed.

User agents should ignore any directory or path information provided by the resource itself, its URL, and any `download` attribute, in deciding where to store the resulting file in the user's file system.

##### 4.6.4.1 Hyperlink auditing

If a hyperlink created by an `a` or `area` element has a `ping` attribute, and the user follows the hyperlink, and the value of the element's `href` attribute can be resolved, relative to the element, without failure, then the user agent must take the `ping` attribute's value, split that string on spaces, resolve each resulting token relative to the element, and then each resulting absolute URL ping URL should be fetched from the origin of the `Document` containing the hyperlink (as described below). (Tokens that fail to resolve are ignored.) This may be done in parallel with the primary request, and is independent of the result of that request.

User agents should allow the user to adjust this behavior, for example in conjunction with a setting that disables the sending of HTTP `Referer` (sic) headers. Based on the user's preferences, UAs may either ignore the `ping` attribute altogether, or selectively ignore URLs in the list (e.g. ignoring any third-party URLs).

For each ping URL that is an HTTP URL, the request must be performed using the POST method, with an entity body with the MIME type `text/ping` consisting of the four-character string "`PING`". All relevant cookie and HTTP authentication headers must be included in the request. Which other headers are required depends on the URLs involved, as follows. For the purposes of these requirements, target URL is the resulting absolute URL obtained from resolving the value of the element's `href` attribute.

If both the address of the `Document` object containing the hyperlink being audited and ping URL have the same origin
  The request must include a `Ping-From` HTTP header with, as its value, the address of the document containing the hyperlink, and a `Ping-To` HTTP header with, as its value, the target URL. The request must not include a `Referer` (sic) HTTP header.
Otherwise, if the origins are different, but the document containing the hyperlink being audited was not retrieved over an encrypted connection
  The request must include a `Referer` (sic) HTTP header with, as its value, the address of the document containing the hyperlink, a `Ping-From` HTTP header with the same value, and a `Ping-To` HTTP header with, as its value, target URL.
Otherwise, the origins are different and the document containing the hyperlink being audited was retrieved over an encrypted connection
  The request must include a `Ping-To` HTTP header with, as its value, target URL. The request must neither include a `Referer` (sic) HTTP header nor include a `Ping-From` HTTP header.

To save bandwidth, implementors might also wish to consider omitting optional headers such as `Accept` from these requests.

User agents must, unless otherwise specified by the user, honor the HTTP headers (including, in particular, redirects and HTTP cookie headers), but must ignore any entity bodies returned in the responses. User agents may close the connection prematurely once they start receiving an entity body. [COOKIES]

When the `ping` attribute is present, user agents should clearly indicate to the user that following the hyperlink will also cause secondary requests to be sent in the background, possibly including listing the actual target URLs.

For example, a visual user agent could include the hostnames of the target ping URLs along with the hyperlink's actual URL in a status bar or tooltip.

The `ping` attribute is redundant with pre-existing technologies like HTTP redirects and JavaScript in allowing Web pages to track which off-site links are most popular or allowing advertisers to track click-through rates.

However, the `ping` attribute provides these advantages to the user over those alternatives:

- It allows the user to see the final target URL unobscured.
- It allows the UA to inform the user about the out-of-band notifications.
- It allows the user to disable the notifications without losing the underlying link functionality.
- It allows the UA to optimise the use of available network bandwidth so that the target page loads faster.

Thus, while it is possible to track users without this feature, authors are encouraged to use the `ping` attribute so that the user agent can make the user experience more transparent.

#### 4.6.5 Link types

The following table summarizes the link types that are defined by this specification. This table is non-normative; the actual definitions for the link types are given in the next few sections.

In this section, the term referenced document refers to the resource identified by the element representing the link, and the term current document refers to the resource within which the element representing the link finds itself.

To determine which link types apply to a `link`, `a`, or `area` element, the element's `rel` attribute must be split on spaces. The resulting tokens are the link types that apply to that element.

Except where otherwise specified, a keyword must not be specified more than once per `rel` attribute.

Link types are always ASCII case-insensitive, and must be compared as such.

Thus, `rel="next"` is the same as `rel="NEXT"`.

Link type | Effect on... | Brief description
--- | --- | ---
`link` | `a` and `area`
`alternate` | Hyperlink | Hyperlink | Gives alternate representations of the current document.
`author` | Hyperlink | Hyperlink | Gives a link to the author of the current document or article.
`bookmark` | not allowed | Hyperlink | Gives the permalink for the nearest ancestor section.
`external` | not allowed | Annotation | Indicates that the referenced document is not part of the same site as the current document.
`help` | Hyperlink | Hyperlink | Provides a link to context-sensitive help.
`icon` | External Resource | not allowed | Imports an icon to represent the current document.
`license` | Hyperlink | Hyperlink | Indicates that the main content of the current document is covered by the copyright license described by the referenced document.
`next` | Hyperlink | Hyperlink | Indicates that the current document is a part of a series, and that the next document in the series is the referenced document.
`nofollow` | not allowed | Annotation | Indicates that the current document's original author or publisher does not endorse the referenced document.
`noreferrer` | not allowed | Annotation | Requires that the user agent not send an HTTP `Referer` (sic) header if the user follows the hyperlink.
`pingback` | External Resource | not allowed | Gives the address of the pingback server that handles pingbacks to the current document.
`prefetch` | External Resource | External Resource | Specifies that the target resource should be preemptively cached.
`prev` | Hyperlink | Hyperlink | Indicates that the current document is a part of a series, and that the previous document in the series is the referenced document.
`search` | Hyperlink | Hyperlink | Gives a link to a resource that can be used to search through the current document and its related pages.
`sidebar` | Hyperlink | Hyperlink | Specifies that the referenced document, if retrieved, is intended to be shown in the browser's sidebar (if it has one).
`stylesheet` | External Resource | not allowed | Imports a stylesheet.
`tag` | not allowed | Hyperlink | Gives a tag (identified by the given address) that applies to the current document.

Some of the types described below list synonyms for these values. These are to be handled as specified by user agents, but must not be used in documents.

##### 4.6.5.1 Link type "`alternate`"

The `alternate` keyword may be used with `link`, `a`, and `area` elements.

The meaning of this keyword depends on the values of the other attributes.

If the element is a `link` element and the `rel` attribute also contains the keyword `stylesheet`

  The `alternate` keyword modifies the meaning of the `stylesheet` keyword in the way described for that keyword. The `alternate` keyword does not create a link of its own.

If the `alternate` keyword is used with the `type` attribute set to the value `application/rss+xml` or the value `application/atom+xml`

  The keyword creates a hyperlink referencing a syndication feed (though not necessarily syndicating exactly the same content as the current page).

  The first `link`, `a`, or `area` element in the document (in tree order) with the `alternate` keyword used with the `type` attribute set to the value `application/rss+xml` or the value `application/atom+xml` must be treated as the default syndication feed for the purposes of feed autodiscovery.

  The following `link` element gives the syndication feed for the current page:

      <link rel="alternate" type="application/atom+xml" href="data.xml">

  The following extract offers various different syndication feeds:

      <p>You can access the planets database using Atom feeds:</p>
      <ul>
       <li><a href="recently-visited-planets.xml" rel="alternate" type="application/atom+xml">Recently Visited Planets</a></li>
       <li><a href="known-bad-planets.xml" rel="alternate" type="application/atom+xml">Known Bad Planets</a></li>
       <li><a href="unexplored-planets.xml" rel="alternate" type="application/atom+xml">Unexplored Planets</a></li>
      </ul>

Otherwise

  The keyword creates a hyperlink referencing an alternate representation of the current document.

  The nature of the referenced document is given by the `hreflang`, and `type` attributes.

  If the `alternate` keyword is used with the `hreflang` attribute, and that attribute's value differs from the root element's language, it indicates that the referenced document is a translation.

  If the `alternate` keyword is used with the `type` attribute, it indicates that the referenced document is a reformulation of the current document in the specified format.

  The `hreflang` and `type` attributes can be combined when specified with the `alternate` keyword.

  For example, the following link is a French translation that uses the PDF format:

      <link rel=alternate type=application/pdf hreflang=fr href=manual-fr>

  This relationship is transitive — that is, if a document links to two other documents with the link type "`alternate`", then, in addition to implying that those documents are alternative representations of the first document, it is also implying that those two documents are alternative representations of each other.

##### 4.6.5.2 Link type "`author`"

The `author` keyword may be used with `link`, `a`, and `area` elements. This keyword creates a hyperlink.

For `a` and `area` elements, the `author` keyword indicates that the referenced document provides further information about the author of the nearest `article` element ancestor of the element defining the hyperlink, if there is one, or of the page as a whole, otherwise.

For `link` elements, the `author` keyword indicates that the referenced document provides further information about the author for the page as a whole.

The "referenced document" can be, and often is, a `mailto:` URL giving the e-mail address of the author. [MAILTO]

Synonyms: For historical reasons, user agents must also treat `link`, `a`, and `area` elements that have a `rev` attribute with the value "`made`" as having the `author` keyword specified as a link relationship.

##### 4.6.5.3 Link type "`bookmark`"

The `bookmark` keyword may be used with `a` and `area` elements. This keyword creates a hyperlink.

The `bookmark` keyword gives a permalink for the nearest ancestor `article` element of the linking element in question, or of the section the linking element is most closely associated with, if there are no ancestor `article` elements.

The following snippet has three permalinks. A user agent could determine which permalink applies to which part of the spec by looking at where the permalinks are given.

     ...
     <body>
      <h1>Example of permalinks</h1>
      <div id="a">
       <h2>First example</h2>
       <p><a href="a.html" rel="bookmark">This permalink applies to
       only the content from the first H2 to the second H2</a>. The DIV isn't
       exactly that section, but it roughly corresponds to it.</p>
      </div>
      <h2>Second example</h2>
      <article id="b">
       <p><a href="b.html" rel="bookmark">This permalink applies to
       the outer ARTICLE element</a> (which could be, e.g., a blog post).</p>
       <article id="c">
        <p><a href="c.html" rel="bookmark">This permalink applies to
        the inner ARTICLE element</a> (which could be, e.g., a blog comment).</p>
       </article>
      </article>
     </body>
     ...

##### 4.6.5.4 Link type "`external`"

The `external` keyword may be used with `a` and `area` elements. This keyword does not create a hyperlink, but annotates any other hyperlinks created by the element (the implied hyperlink, if no other keywords create one).

The `external` keyword indicates that the link is leading to a document that is not part of the site that the current document forms a part of.

##### 4.6.5.5 Link type "`help`"

The `help` keyword may be used with `link`, `a`, and `area` elements. This keyword creates a hyperlink.

For `a` and `area` elements, the `help` keyword indicates that the referenced document provides further help information for the parent of the element defining the hyperlink, and its children.

In the following example, the form control has associated context-sensitive help. The user agent could use this information, for example, displaying the referenced document if the user presses the "Help" or "F1" key.

     <p><label> Topic: <input name=topic> <a href="help/topic.html" rel="help">(Help)</a></label></p>

For `link` elements, the `help` keyword indicates that the referenced document provides help for the page as a whole.

For `a` and `area` elements, on some browsers, the `help` keyword causes the link to use a different cursor.

##### 4.6.5.6 Link type "`icon`"

The `icon` keyword may be used with `link` elements. This keyword creates an external resource link.

The specified resource is an icon representing the page or site, and should be used by the user agent when representing the page in the user interface.

Icons could be auditory icons, visual icons, or other kinds of icons. If multiple icons are provided, the user agent must select the most appropriate icon according to the `type`, `media`, and `sizes` attributes. If there are multiple equally appropriate icons, user agents must use the last one declared in tree order at the time that the user agent collected the list of icons. If the user agent tries to use an icon but that icon is determined, upon closer examination, to in fact be inappropriate (e.g. because it uses an unsupported format), then the user agent must try the next-most-appropriate icon as determined by the attributes.

User agents are not required to update icons when the list of icons changes, but are encouraged to do so.

There is no default type for resources given by the `icon` keyword. However, for the purposes of determining the type of the resource, user agents must expect the resource to be an image.

The `sizes` attribute gives the sizes of icons for visual media. Its value, if present, is merely advisory. User agents may use the value to decide which icon(s) to use if multiple icons are available.

If specified, the attribute must have a value that is an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens which are ASCII case-insensitive. Each value must be either an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`any`", or a value that consists of two valid non-negative integers that do not have a leading U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0) character and that are separated by a single U+0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X or U+0058 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X character.

The keywords represent icon sizes in raw pixels (as opposed to CSS pixels).

An icon that is 50 CSS pixels wide intended for displays with a device pixel density of two device pixels per CSS pixel (2x, 192dpi) would have a width of 100 raw pixels. This feature does not support indicating that a different resource is to be used for small high-resolution icons vs large low-resolution icons (e.g. 50×50 2x vs 100×100 1x).

To parse and process the attribute's value, the user agent must first split the attribute's value on spaces, and must then parse each resulting keyword to determine what it represents.

The `any` keyword represents that the resource contains a scalable icon, e.g. as provided by an SVG image.

Other keywords must be further parsed as follows to determine what they represent:

- If the keyword doesn't contain exactly one U+0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X or U+0058 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X character, then this keyword doesn't represent anything. Abort these steps for that keyword.

- Let width string be the string before the "`x`" or "`X`".

- Let height string be the string after the "`x`" or "`X`".

- If either width string or height string start with a U+0030 DIGIT ZERO (0) character or contain any characters other than ASCII digits, then this keyword doesn't represent anything. Abort these steps for that keyword.

- Apply the rules for parsing non-negative integers to width string to obtain width.

- Apply the rules for parsing non-negative integers to height string to obtain height.

- The keyword represents that the resource contains a bitmap icon with a width of width device pixels and a height of height device pixels.

The keywords specified on the `sizes` attribute must not represent icon sizes that are not actually available in the linked resource.

In the absence of a `link` with the `icon` keyword, for `Document`s obtained over HTTP or HTTPS, user agents may instead attempt to fetch and use an icon with the absolute URL obtained by resolving the URL "`/favicon.ico`" against the document's address, as if the page had declared that icon using the `icon` keyword.

The following snippet shows the top part of an application with several icons.

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>lsForums — Inbox</title>
      <link rel=icon href=favicon.png sizes="16x16" type="image/png">
      <link rel=icon href=windows.ico sizes="32x32 48x48" type="image/vnd.microsoft.icon">
      <link rel=icon href=mac.icns sizes="128x128 512x512 8192x8192 32768x32768">
      <link rel=icon href=iphone.png sizes="57x57" type="image/png">
      <link rel=icon href=gnome.svg sizes="any" type="image/svg+xml">
      <link rel=stylesheet href=lsforums.css>
      <script src=lsforums.js></script>
      <meta name=application-name content="lsForums">
     </head>
     <body>
      ...

For historical reasons, the `icon` keyword may be preceded by the keyword "`shortcut`". If the "`shortcut`" keyword is present, the `rel` attribute's entire value must be an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`shortcut icon`" (with a single U+0020 SPACE character between the tokens and no other space characters).

##### 4.6.5.7 Link type "`license`"

The `license` keyword may be used with `link`, `a`, and `area` elements. This keyword creates a hyperlink.

The `license` keyword indicates that the referenced document provides the copyright license terms under which the main content of the current document is provided.

This specification does not specify how to distinguish between the main content of a document and content that is not deemed to be part of that main content. The distinction should be made clear to the user.

Consider a photo sharing site. A page on that site might describe and show a photograph, and the page might be marked up as follows:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Exampl Pictures: Kissat</title>
      <link rel="stylesheet" href="/style/default">
     </head>
     <body>
      <h1>Kissat</h1>
      <nav>
       <a href="../">Return to photo index</a>
      </nav>
      <figure>
       <img src="/pix/39627052_fd8dcd98b5.jpg">
       <figcaption>Kissat</figcaption>
      </figure>
      <p>One of them has six toes!</p>
      <p><small><a rel="license" href="http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php">MIT Licensed</a></small></p>
      <footer>
       <a href="/">Home</a> | <a href="../">Photo index</a>
       <p><small>© copyright 2009 Exampl Pictures. All Rights Reserved.</small></p>
      </footer>
     </body>
    </html>

In this case the `license` applies to just the photo (the main content of the document), not the whole document. In particular not the design of the page itself, which is covered by the copyright given at the bottom of the document. This could be made clearer in the styling (e.g. making the license link prominently positioned near the photograph, while having the page copyright in light small text at the foot of the page.

Synonyms: For historical reasons, user agents must also treat the keyword "`copyright`" like the `license` keyword.

##### 4.6.5.8 Link type "`nofollow`"

The `nofollow` keyword may be used with `a` and `area` elements. This keyword does not create a hyperlink, but annotates any other hyperlinks created by the element (the implied hyperlink, if no other keywords create one).

The `nofollow` keyword indicates that the link is not endorsed by the original author or publisher of the page, or that the link to the referenced document was included primarily because of a commercial relationship between people affiliated with the two pages.

##### 4.6.5.9 Link type "`noreferrer`"

The `noreferrer` keyword may be used with `a` and `area` elements. This keyword does not create a hyperlink, but annotates any other hyperlinks created by the element (the implied hyperlink, if no other keywords create one).

It indicates that no referrer information is to be leaked when following the link.

If a user agent follows a link defined by an `a` or `area` element that has the `noreferrer` keyword, the user agent must not include a `Referer` (sic) HTTP header (or equivalent for other protocols) in the request.

This keyword also causes the `opener` attribute to remain null if the hyperlink creates a new browsing context.

##### 4.6.5.10 Link type "`pingback`"

The `pingback` keyword may be used with `link` elements. This keyword creates an external resource link.

For the semantics of the `pingback` keyword, see the Pingback 1.0 specification. [PINGBACK]

##### 4.6.5.11 Link type "`prefetch`"

The `prefetch` keyword may be used with `link`, `a`, and `area` elements. This keyword creates an external resource link.

The `prefetch` keyword indicates that preemptively fetching and caching the specified resource is likely to be beneficial, as it is highly likely that the user will require this resource.

There is no default type for resources given by the `prefetch` keyword.

##### 4.6.5.12 Link type "`search`"

The `search` keyword may be used with `link`, `a`, and `area` elements. This keyword creates a hyperlink.

The `search` keyword indicates that the referenced document provides an interface specifically for searching the document and its related resources.

OpenSearch description documents can be used with `link` elements and the `search` link type to enable user agents to autodiscover search interfaces. [OPENSEARCH]

##### 4.6.5.13 Link type "`sidebar`"

The `sidebar` keyword may be used with `link`, `a`, and `area` elements. This keyword creates a hyperlink.

The `sidebar` keyword indicates that the referenced document, if retrieved, is intended to be shown in a secondary browsing context (if possible), instead of in the current browsing context.

A hyperlink with the `sidebar` keyword specified is a sidebar hyperlink.

##### 4.6.5.14 Link type "`stylesheet`"

The `stylesheet` keyword may be used with `link` elements. This keyword creates an external resource link that contributes to the styling processing model.

The specified resource is a resource that describes how to present the document. Exactly how the resource is to be processed depends on the actual type of the resource.

If the `alternate` keyword is also specified on the `link` element, then the link is an alternative stylesheet; in this case, the `title` attribute must be specified on the `link` element, with a non-empty value.

The default type for resources given by the `stylesheet` keyword is `text/css`.

The appropriate times to obtain the resource are:

- When the external resource link is created on a `link` element that is already in a `Document`.

- When the external resource link's `link` element is inserted into a document.

- When the `href` attribute of the `link` element of an external resource link that is already in a `Document` is changed.

- When the `crossorigin` attribute of the `link` element of an external resource link that is already in a `Document` is set, changed, or removed.

- When the `type` attribute of the `link` element of an external resource link that is already in a `Document` is set or changed to a value that does not or no longer matches the Content-Type metadata of the previous obtained external resource, if any.

- When the `type` attribute of the `link` element of an external resource link that is already in a `Document` but was previously not obtained due to the `type` attribute specifying an unsupported type is set, removed, or changed.

- When the external resource link changes from being an alternative stylesheet to not being one, or vice versa.

Quirk: If the document has been set to quirks mode, has the same origin as the URL of the external resource, and the Content-Type metadata of the external resource is not a supported style sheet type, the user agent must instead assume it to be `text/css`.

Once a resource has been obtained, if its Content-Type metadata is `text/css`, the user agent must run these steps:

1. Let element be the `link` element that created the external resource link.

2. If element has an associated CSS style sheet, remove the CSS style sheet in question.

3. If element no longer creates an external resource link that contributes to the styling processing model, or if, since the resource in question was obtained, it has become appropriate to obtain it again (meaning this algorithm is about to be invoked again for a newly obtained resource), then abort these steps.

4. Create a CSS style sheet with the following properties:

   type

     `text/css`

   location

     The resulting absolute URL determined during the obtain algorithm.

     This is before any redirects get applied.

   owner node

     element

   media

     The `media` attribute of element.

     This is a reference to the (possibly absent at this time) attribute, rather than a copy of the attribute's current value. The CSSOM specification defines what happens when the attribute is dynamically set, changed, or removed.

   title

     The `title` attribute of element.

     This is similarly a reference to the attribute, rather than a copy of the attribute's current value.

   alternate flag

     Set if the link is an alternative stylesheet; unset otherwise.

   origin-clean flag

     Set if the resource is CORS-same-origin; unset otherwise.

   parent CSS style sheet
   owner CSS rule

     null

   disabled flag

     Left at its default value.

   CSS rules

     Left uninitialized.

   The CSS environment encoding is the result of running the following steps: [CSSSYNTAX]

   1. If the element has a `charset` attribute, get an encoding from that attribute's value. If that succeeds, return the resulting encoding and abort these steps. [ENCODING]

   2. Otherwise, return the document's character encoding. [DOM]

##### 4.6.5.15 Link type "`tag`"

The `tag` keyword may be used with `a` and `area` elements. This keyword creates a hyperlink.

The `tag` keyword indicates that the tag that the referenced document represents applies to the current document.

Since it indicates that the tag applies to the current document, it would be inappropriate to use this keyword in the markup of a tag cloud, which lists the popular tags across a set of pages.

This document is about some gems, and so it is tagged with "`http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gemstone`" to unambiguously categorise it as applying to the "jewel" kind of gems, and not to, say, the towns in the US, the Ruby package format, or the Swiss locomotive class:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>My Precious</title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <header><h1>My precious</h1> <p>Summer 2012</p></header>
      <p>Recently I managed to dispose of a red gem that had been
      bothering me. I now have a much nicer blue sapphire.</p>
      <p>The red gem had been found in a bauxite stone while I was digging
      out the office level, but nobody was willing to haul it away. The
      same red gem stayed there for literally years.</p>
      <footer>
       Tags: <a rel=tag href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gemstone">Gemstone</a>
      </footer>
     </body>
    </html>

In this document, there are two articles. The "`tag`" link, however, applies to the whole page (and would do so wherever it was placed, including if it was within the `article` elements).

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Gem 4/4</title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <article>
       <h1>801: Steinbock</h1>
       <p>The number 801 Gem 4/4 electro-diesel has an ibex and was rebuilt in 2002.</p>
      </article>
      <article>
       <h1>802: Murmeltier</h1>
       <figure>
        <img src="http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/b/b0/Trains_de_la_Bernina_en_hiver_2.jpg"
             alt="The 802 was red with pantographs and tall vents on the side.">
        <figcaption>The 802 in the 1980s, above Lago Bianco.</figcaption>
       </figure>
       <p>The number 802 Gem 4/4 electro-diesel has a marmot and was rebuilt in 2003.</p>
      </article>
      <p class="topic"><a rel=tag href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rhaetian_Railway_Gem_4/4">Gem 4/4</a></p>
     </body>
    </html>

##### 4.6.5.16 Sequential link types

Some documents form part of a sequence of documents.

A sequence of documents is one where each document can have a previous sibling and a next sibling. A document with no previous sibling is the start of its sequence, a document with no next sibling is the end of its sequence.

A document may be part of multiple sequences.

###### 4.6.5.16.1 Link type "`next`"

The `next` keyword may be used with `link`, `a`, and `area` elements. This keyword creates a hyperlink.

The `next` keyword indicates that the document is part of a sequence, and that the link is leading to the document that is the next logical document in the sequence.

###### 4.6.5.16.2 Link type "`prev`"

The `prev` keyword may be used with `link`, `a`, and `area` elements. This keyword creates a hyperlink.

The `prev` keyword indicates that the document is part of a sequence, and that the link is leading to the document that is the previous logical document in the sequence.

Synonyms: For historical reasons, user agents must also treat the keyword "`previous`" like the `prev` keyword.

##### 4.6.5.17 Other link types

Extensions to the predefined set of link types may be registered in the microformats wiki existing-rel-values page. [MFREL]

Anyone is free to edit the microformats wiki existing-rel-values page at any time to add a type. Extension types must be specified with the following information:

Keyword

  The actual value being defined. The value should not be confusingly similar to any other defined value (e.g. differing only in case).

  If the value contains a U+003A COLON character (:), it must also be an absolute URL.

Effect on... `link`

  One of the following:

  Not allowed
    The keyword must not be specified on `link` elements.
  Hyperlink
    The keyword may be specified on a `link` element; it creates a hyperlink.
  External Resource
    The keyword may be specified on a `link` element; it creates an external resource link.
Effect on... `a` and `area`

  One of the following:

  Not allowed
    The keyword must not be specified on `a` and `area` elements.
  Hyperlink
    The keyword may be specified on `a` and `area` elements; it creates a hyperlink.
  External Resource
    The keyword may be specified on `a` and `area` elements; it creates an external resource link.
  Hyperlink Annotation
    The keyword may be specified on `a` and `area` elements; it annotates other hyperlinks created by the element.
Brief description

  A short non-normative description of what the keyword's meaning is.

Specification

  A link to a more detailed description of the keyword's semantics and requirements. It could be another page on the Wiki, or a link to an external page.

Synonyms

  A list of other keyword values that have exactly the same processing requirements. Authors should not use the values defined to be synonyms, they are only intended to allow user agents to support legacy content. Anyone may remove synonyms that are not used in practice; only names that need to be processed as synonyms for compatibility with legacy content are to be registered in this way.

Status

  One of the following:

  Proposed
    The keyword has not received wide peer review and approval. Someone has proposed it and is, or soon will be, using it.
  Ratified
    The keyword has received wide peer review and approval. It has a specification that unambiguously defines how to handle pages that use the keyword, including when they use it in incorrect ways.
  Discontinued
    The keyword has received wide peer review and it has been found wanting. Existing pages are using this keyword, but new pages should avoid it. The "brief description" and "specification" entries will give details of what authors should use instead, if anything.

  If a keyword is found to be redundant with existing values, it should be removed and listed as a synonym for the existing value.

  If a keyword is registered in the "proposed" state for a period of a month or more without being used or specified, then it may be removed from the registry.

  If a keyword is added with the "proposed" status and found to be redundant with existing values, it should be removed and listed as a synonym for the existing value. If a keyword is added with the "proposed" status and found to be harmful, then it should be changed to "discontinued" status.

  Anyone can change the status at any time, but should only do so in accordance with the definitions above.

Conformance checkers must use the information given on the microformats wiki existing-rel-values page to establish if a value is allowed or not: values defined in this specification or marked as "proposed" or "ratified" must be accepted when used on the elements for which they apply as described in the "Effect on..." field, whereas values marked as "discontinued" or not listed in either this specification or on the aforementioned page must be rejected as invalid. Conformance checkers may cache this information (e.g. for performance reasons or to avoid the use of unreliable network connectivity).

When an author uses a new type not defined by either this specification or the Wiki page, conformance checkers should offer to add the value to the Wiki, with the details described above, with the "proposed" status.

Types defined as extensions in the microformats wiki existing-rel-values page with the status "proposed" or "ratified" may be used with the `rel` attribute on `link`, `a`, and `area` elements in accordance to the "Effect on..." field. [MFREL]

### 4.7 Edits

The `ins` and `del` elements represent edits to the document.

#### 4.7.1 The `ins` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Transparent.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `cite` — Link to the source of the quotation or more information about the edit
  `datetime` — Date and (optionally) time of the change
DOM interface:
  Uses the `HTMLModElement` interface.

The `ins` element represents an addition to the document.

The following represents the addition of a single paragraph:

    <aside>
     <ins>
      <p> I like fruit. </p>
     </ins>
    </aside>

As does the following, because everything in the `aside` element here counts as phrasing content and therefore there is just one paragraph:

    <aside>
     <ins>
      Apples are <em>tasty</em>.
     </ins>
     <ins>
      So are pears.
     </ins>
    </aside>

`ins` elements should not cross implied paragraph boundaries.

The following example represents the addition of two paragraphs, the second of which was inserted in two parts. The first `ins` element in this example thus crosses a paragraph boundary, which is considered poor form.

    <aside>
     <!-- don't do this -->
     <ins datetime="2005-03-16 00:00Z">
      <p> I like fruit. </p>
      Apples are <em>tasty</em>.
     </ins>
     <ins datetime="2007-12-19 00:00Z">
      So are pears.
     </ins>
    </aside>

Here is a better way of marking this up. It uses more elements, but none of the elements cross implied paragraph boundaries.

    <aside>
     <ins datetime="2005-03-16 00:00Z">
      <p> I like fruit. </p>
     </ins>
     <ins datetime="2005-03-16 00:00Z">
      Apples are <em>tasty</em>.
     </ins>
     <ins datetime="2007-12-19 00:00Z">
      So are pears.
     </ins>
    </aside>

#### 4.7.2 The `del` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Transparent.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `cite` — Link to the source of the quotation or more information about the edit
  `datetime` — Date and (optionally) time of the change
DOM interface:
  Uses the `HTMLModElement` interface.

The `del` element represents a removal from the document.

`del` elements should not cross implied paragraph boundaries.

The following shows a "to do" list where items that have been done are crossed-off with the date and time of their completion.

    <h1>To Do</h1>
    <ul>
     <li>Empty the dishwasher</li>
     <li><del datetime="2009-10-11T01:25-07:00">Watch Walter Lewin's lectures</del></li>
     <li><del datetime="2009-10-10T23:38-07:00">Download more tracks</del></li>
     <li>Buy a printer</li>
    </ul>

#### 4.7.3 Attributes common to `ins` and `del` elements

The `cite` attribute may be used to specify the address of a document that explains the change. When that document is long, for instance the minutes of a meeting, authors are encouraged to include a fragment identifier pointing to the specific part of that document that discusses the change.

If the `cite` attribute is present, it must be a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces that explains the change. To obtain the corresponding citation link, the value of the attribute must be resolved relative to the element. User agents may allow users to follow such citation links, but they are primarily intended for private use (e.g. by server-side scripts collecting statistics about a site's edits), not for readers.

The `datetime` attribute may be used to specify the time and date of the change.

If present, the `datetime` attribute's value must be a valid date string with optional time.

User agents must parse the `datetime` attribute according to the parse a date or time string algorithm. If that doesn't return a date or a global date and time, then the modification has no associated timestamp (the value is non-conforming; it is not a valid date string with optional time). Otherwise, the modification is marked as having been made at the given date or global date and time. If the given value is a global date and time then user agents should use the associated time-zone offset information to determine which time zone to present the given datetime in.

This value may be shown to the user, but it is primarily intended for private use.

The `ins` and `del` elements must implement the `HTMLModElement` interface:

    interface HTMLModElement : HTMLElement {
               attribute DOMString cite;
               attribute DOMString dateTime;
    };

The `cite` IDL attribute must reflect the element's `cite` content attribute. The `dateTime` IDL attribute must reflect the element's `datetime` content attribute.

#### 4.7.4 Edits and paragraphs

This section is non-normative.

Since the `ins` and `del` elements do not affect paragraphing, it is possible, in some cases where paragraphs are implied (without explicit `p` elements), for an `ins` or `del` element to span both an entire paragraph or other non-phrasing content elements and part of another paragraph. For example:

    <section>
     <ins>
      <p>
       This is a paragraph that was inserted.
      </p>
      This is another paragraph whose first sentence was inserted
      at the same time as the paragraph above.
     </ins>
     This is a second sentence, which was there all along.
    </section>

By only wrapping some paragraphs in `p` elements, one can even get the end of one paragraph, a whole second paragraph, and the start of a third paragraph to be covered by the same `ins` or `del` element (though this is very confusing, and not considered good practice):

    <section>
     This is the first paragraph. <ins>This sentence was
     inserted.
     <p>This second paragraph was inserted.</p>
     This sentence was inserted too.</ins> This is the
     third paragraph in this example.
     <!-- (don't do this) -->
    </section>

However, due to the way implied paragraphs are defined, it is not possible to mark up the end of one paragraph and the start of the very next one using the same `ins` or `del` element. You instead have to use one (or two) `p` element(s) and two `ins` or `del` elements, as for example:

    <section>
     <p>This is the first paragraph. <del>This sentence was
     deleted.</del></p>
     <p><del>This sentence was deleted too.</del> That
     sentence needed a separate &lt;del&gt; element.</p>
    </section>

Partly because of the confusion described above, authors are strongly encouraged to always mark up all paragraphs with the `p` element, instead of having `ins` or `del` elements that cross implied paragraphs boundaries.

#### 4.7.5 Edits and lists

This section is non-normative.

The content models of the `ol` and `ul` elements do not allow `ins` and `del` elements as children. Lists always represent all their items, including items that would otherwise have been marked as deleted.

To indicate that an item is inserted or deleted, an `ins` or `del` element can be wrapped around the contents of the `li` element. To indicate that an item has been replaced by another, a single `li` element can have one or more `del` elements followed by one or more `ins` elements.

In the following example, a list that started empty had items added and removed from it over time. The bits in the example that have been emphasized show the parts that are the "current" state of the list. The list item numbers don't take into account the edits, though.

    <h1>Stop-ship bugs</h1>
    <ol>
     <li><ins datetime="2008-02-12T15:20Z">Bug 225:
     Rain detector doesn't work in snow</ins></li>
     <li><del datetime="2008-03-01T20:22Z"><ins datetime="2008-02-14T12:02Z">Bug 228:
     Water buffer overflows in April</ins></del></li>
     <li><ins datetime="2008-02-16T13:50Z">Bug 230:
     Water heater doesn't use renewable fuels</ins></li>
     <li><del datetime="2008-02-20T21:15Z"><ins datetime="2008-02-16T14:25Z">Bug 232:
     Carbon dioxide emissions detected after startup</ins></del></li>
    </ol>

In the following example, a list that started with just fruit was replaced by a list with just colours.

    <h1>List of <del>fruits</del><ins>colours</ins></h1>
    <ul>
     <li><del>Lime</del><ins>Green</ins></li>
     <li><del>Apple</del></li>
     <li>Orange</li>
     <li><del>Pear</del></li>
     <li><ins>Teal</ins></li>
     <li><del>Lemon</del><ins>Yellow</ins></li>
     <li>Olive</li>
     <li><ins>Purple</ins></li>
    </ul>

#### 4.7.6 Edits and tables

This section is non-normative.

The elements that form part of the table model have complicated content model requirements that do not allow for the `ins` and `del` elements, so indicating edits to a table can be difficult.

To indicate that an entire row or an entire column has been added or removed, the entire contents of each cell in that row or column can be wrapped in `ins` or `del` elements (respectively).

Here, a table's row has been added:

    <table>
     <thead>
      <tr> <th> Game name           <th> Game publisher   <th> Verdict
     <tbody>
      <tr> <td> Diablo 2            <td> Blizzard         <td> 8/10
      <tr> <td> Portal              <td> Valve            <td> 10/10
      <tr> <td> <ins>Portal 2</ins> <td> <ins>Valve</ins> <td> <ins>10/10</ins>
    </table>

Here, a column has been removed (the time at which it was removed is given also, as is a link to the page explaining why):

    <table>
     <thead>
      <tr> <th> Game name           <th> Game publisher   <th> <del cite="/edits/r192" datetime="2011-05-02 14:23Z">Verdict</del>
     <tbody>
      <tr> <td> Diablo 2            <td> Blizzard         <td> <del cite="/edits/r192" datetime="2011-05-02 14:23Z">8/10</del>
      <tr> <td> Portal              <td> Valve            <td> <del cite="/edits/r192" datetime="2011-05-02 14:23Z">10/10</del>
      <tr> <td> Portal 2            <td> Valve            <td> <del cite="/edits/r192" datetime="2011-05-02 14:23Z">10/10</del>
    </table>

Generally speaking, there is no good way to indicate more complicated edits (e.g. that a cell was removed, moving all subsequent cells up or to the left).

### 4.8 Embedded content

#### 4.8.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

To embed an image in HTML, when there is only a single image resource, use the `img` element and its `src` attribute.

    <h2>From today's featured article</h2>
    <img src="/uploads/100-marie-lloyd.jpg" alt="" width="100" height="150">
    <p><b><a href="/wiki/Marie_Lloyd">Marie Lloyd</a></b> (1870–1922)
    was an English <a href="/wiki/Music_hall">music hall</a> singer, ...

However, there are a number of situations for which the author might wish to use multiple image resources that the user agent can choose from:

- Different users might have different environmental characteristics:

  - The users' physical screen size might be different from one another.

    A mobile phone's screen might be 4 inches diagonally, while a laptop's screen might be 14 inches diagonally.

    This is only relevant when an image's rendered size depends on the viewport size.

  - The users' screen pixel density might be different from one another.

    A mobile phone's screen might have three times as many physical pixels per inch compared to another mobile phone's screen, regardless of their physical screen size.

  - The users' zoom level might be different from one another, or might change for a single user over time.

    A user might zoom in to a particular image to be able to get a more detailed look.

    The zoom level and the screen pixel density (the previous point) can both affect the number of physical screen pixels per CSS pixel. This ratio is usually referred to as device-pixel-ratio.

  - The users' screen orientation might be different from one another, or might change for a single user over time.

    A tablet can be held upright or rotated 90 degrees, so that the screen is either "portrait" or "landscape".

  - The users' network speed, network latency and bandwidth cost might be different from one another, or might change for a single user over time.

    A user might be on a fast, low-latency and constant-cost connection while at work, on a slow, low-latency and constant-cost connection while at home, and on a variable-speed, high-latency and variable-cost connection anywhere else.

- Authors might want to show different image content depending on the rendered size of the image. This is usually referred to as art direction.

  When a Web page is viewed on a screen with a large physical size (assuming a maximized browser window), the author might wish to include some less relevant parts surrounding the critical part of the image. When the same Web page is viewed on a screen with a small physical size, the author might wish to show only the critical part of the image.

- Authors might want to show the same image content but with different rendered size depending on, usually, the width of the viewport. This is usually referred to as viewport-based selection.

  A Web page might have a banner at the top that always spans the entire viewport width. In this case, the rendered size of the image depends on the physical size of the screen (assuming a maximized browser window).

  Another Web page might have images in columns, with a single column for screens with a small physical size, two columns for screens with medium physical size, and three columns for screens with big physical size, with the images varying in rendered size in each case to fill up the viewport. In this case, the rendered size of an image might be bigger in the one-column layout compared to the two-column layout, despite the screen being smaller.

- Authors might want to show the same image content but using different image formats, depending on which image formats the user agent supports. This is usually referred to as image format-based selection.

  A Web page might have some images in the JPEG, WebP and JPEG XR image formats, with the latter two having better compression abilities compared to JPEG. Since different user agents can support different image formats, with some formats offering better compression ratios, the author would like to serve the better formats to user agenst that support them, while providing JPEG fallback for user agents that don't.

The above situations are not mutually exclusive. For example, it is reasonable to combine different resources for different device-pixel-ratio with different resources for art direction.

While it is possible to solve these problems using scripting, doing so introduces some other problems:

- Some user agents agressively download images specified in the HTML markup, before scripts have had a chance to run, so that Web pages complete loading sooner. If a script changes which image to download, the user agent will potentially start two separate downloads, which can instead cause worse page loading performance.

- If the author avoids specifying any image in the HTML markup and instead instantiates a single download from script, that avoids the double download problem above but instead it makes no image be downloaded at all for users with scripting disabled and it disables the agressive image downloading optimization.

With this in mind, this specification introduces a number of features to address the above problems in a declarative manner.

Device-pixel-ratio-based selection when the rendered size of the image is fixed

  The `src` and `srcset` attributes on the `img` element can be used, using the `x` descriptor, to provide multiple images that only vary in their size (the smaller image is a scaled-down version of the bigger image).

  The `x` descriptor is not appropriate when the rendered size of the image depends on the viewport width (viewport-based selection), but can be used together with art direction.

      <h2>From today's featured article</h2>
      <img src="/uploads/100-marie-lloyd.jpg"
           srcset="/uploads/150-marie-lloyd.jpg 1.5x, /uploads/200-marie-lloyd.jpg 2x"
           alt="" width="100" height="150">
      <p><b><a href="/wiki/Marie_Lloyd">Marie Lloyd</a></b> (1870–1922)
      was an English <a href="/wiki/Music_hall">music hall</a> singer, ...

  The user agent can choose any of the given resources depending on the user's screen's pixel density, zoom level, and possibly other factors such as the user's network conditions.

  For backwards compatibility with older user agents that don't yet understand the `srcset` attribute, one of the URLs is specified in the `img` element's `src` attribute. This will result in something useful (though perhaps lower-resolution than the user would like) being displayed even in older user agents. For new user agents, the `src` attribute participates in the resource selection, as if it was specified in `srcset` with a `1x` descriptor.

  The image's rendered size is given in the `width` and `height` attributes, which allows the user agent to allocate space for the image before it is downloaded.

Art direction-based selection

  The `picture` element and the `source` element, together with the `media` attribute, can be used, to provide multiple images that vary the image content (for intance the smaller image might be a cropped version of the bigger image).

      <picture>
        <source media="(min-width: 45em)" srcset="large.jpg">
        <source media="(min-width: 32em)" srcset="med.jpg">
        <img src="small.jpg" alt="The president giving an award.">
      </picture>

  The user agent will choose the first `source` element for which the media query in the `media` attribute matches, and then choose an appropriate URL from its `srcset` attribute.

  The rendered size of the image varies depending on which resource is chosen. To specify dimensions that the user agent can use before having downloaded the image, CSS can be used.

      img { width: 300px; height: 300px }
      @media (min-width: 32em) { img { width: 500px; height:300px } }
      @media (min-width: 45em) { img { width: 700px; height:400px } }

  This example combines art direction- and device-pixel-ratio-based selection. A banner that takes half the viewport is provided in two versions, one for wide screens and one for narrow screens.

      <h1>
       <picture>
        <source media="(max-width: 500px)" srcset="banner-phone.jpeg, banner-phone-HD.jpeg 2x">
        <img src="banner.jpeg" srcset="banner-HD.jpeg 2x" alt="The Breakfast Combo">
       </picture>
      </h1>

Viewport-based selection

  The `srcset` and `sizes` attributes can be used, using the `w` descriptor, to provide multiple images that only vary in their size (the smaller image is a scaled-down version of the bigger image).

  In this example, a banner image takes up the entire viewport width (using appropriate CSS).

      <h1><img sizes="100vw" srcset="wolf-400.jpg 400w, wolf-800.jpg 800w, wolf-1600.jpg 1600w"
           src="wolf-400.jpg" alt="The rad wolf"></h1>

  The user agent will calculate the effective pixel density of each image from the specified `w` descriptors and the specified rendered size in the `sizes` attribute. It can then choose any of the given resources depending on the user's screen's pixel density, zoom level, and possibly other factors such as the user's network conditions.

  If the user's screen is 320 CSS pixels wide, this is equivalent to specifying `wolf-400.jpg 1.25x, wolf-800.jpg 2.5x, wolf-1600.jpg 5x`. On the other hand, if the user's screen is 1200 CSS pixels wide, this is equivalent to specifying `wolf-400.jpg 0.33x, wolf-800.jpg 0.67x, wolf-1600.jpg 1.33x`. By using the `w` descriptors and the `sizes` attribute, the user agent can choose the correct image source to download regardless of how large the user's device is.

  For backwards compatibility, one of the URLs is specified in the `img` element's `src` attribute. In new user agents, the `src` attribute is ignored when the `srcset` attribute uses `w` descriptors.

  In this example, the `sizes` attribute could be omitted because the default value is `100vw`.

  In this example, the Web page has three layouts depending on the width of the viewport. The narrow layout has one column of images (the width of each image is about 100%), the middle layout has two columns of images (the width of each image is about 50%), and the widest layout has three columns of images, and some page margin (the width of each image is about 33%). It breaks between these layouts when the viewport is `30em` wide and `50em` wide, respectively.

      <img sizes="(max-width: 30em) 100vw, (max-width: 50em) 50vw, calc(33vw - 100px)"
           srcset="swing-200.jpg 200w, swing-400.jpg 400w, swing-800.jpg 800w, swing-1600.jpg 1600w"
           src="swing-400.jpg" alt="Kettlebell Swing">

  The `sizes` attribute sets up the layout breakpoints at `30em` and `50em`, and declares the image sizes between these breakpoints to be `100vw`, `50vw`, or `calc(33vw - 100px)`. These sizes do not necessarily have to match up exactly with the actual image width as specified in the CSS.

  The user agent will pick a width from the `sizes` attribute, using the first item with a <media-condition> (the part in parentheses) that evaluates to true, or using the last item (`calc(33vw - 100px)`) if they all evaluate to false.

  For example, if the viewport width is `29em`, then `(max-width: 30em)` evaluates to true and `100vw` is used, so the image size, for the purpose of resource selection, is `29em`. If the viewport width is instead `32em`, then `(max-width: 30em)` evaluates to false, but `(max-width: 50em)` evaluates to true and `50vw` is used, so the image size, for the purpose of resource selection, is `16em` (half the viewport width). Notice that the slightly wider viewport results in a smaller image because of the different layout.

  The user agent can then calculate the effective pixel density and choose an appropriate resource similarly to the previous example.

Image format-based selection

  The `type` attribute on the `source` element can be used, to provide multiple images in different formats.

      <h2>From today's featured article</h2>
      <picture>
       <source srcset="/uploads/100-marie-lloyd.webp" type="image/webp">
       <source srcset="/uploads/100-marie-lloyd.jxr" type="image/vnd.ms-photo">
       <img src="/uploads/100-marie-lloyd.jpg" alt="" width="100" height="150">
      </picture>
      <p><b><a href="/wiki/Marie_Lloyd">Marie Lloyd</a></b> (1870–1922)
      was an English <a href="/wiki/Music_hall">music hall</a> singer, ...

  In this example, the user agent will choose the first source that has a `type` attribute with a supported MIME type. If the user agent supports WebP images, the first `source` element will be chosen. If not, but the user agent does support JPEG XR images, the second `source` element will be chosen. If neither of those formats are supported, the `img` element will be chosen.

##### 4.8.1.1 Adaptive images

This section is non-normative.

CSS and media queries can be used to construct graphical page layouts that adapt dynamically to the user's environment, in particular to different viewport dimensions and pixel densities. For content, however, CSS does not help; instead, we have the `img` element's `srcset` attribute and the `picture` element. This section walks through a sample case showing how to use these features.

Consider a situation where on wide screens (wider than 600 CSS pixels) a 300×150 image named `a-rectangle.png` is to be used, but on smaller screens (600 CSS pixels and less), a smaller 100×100 image called `a-square.png` is to be used. The markup for this would look like this:

    <figure>
     <picture>
      <source srcset="a-square.png" media="(max-width: 600px)">
      <img src="a-rectangle.png" alt="Barney Frank wears a suit and glasses.">
     </picture>
     <figcaption>Barney Frank, 2011</figcaption>
    </figure>

For details on what to put in the `alt` attribute, see the Requirements for providing text to act as an alternative for images section.

The problem with this is that the user agent does not necessarily know what dimensions to use for the image when the image is loading. To avoid the layout having to be reflowed multiple times as the page is loading, CSS and CSS media queries can be used to provide the dimensions:

    <figure>
     <style scoped>
      #a { width: 300px; height: 150px; }
      @media (max-width: 600px) { #a { width: 100px; height: 100px; } }
     </style>
     <picture>
      <source srcset="a-square.png" media="(max-width: 600px)">
      <img src="a-rectangle.png" alt="Barney Frank wears a suit and glasses." id="a">
     </picture>
     <figcaption>Barney Frank, 2011</figcaption>
    </figure>

Alternatively, the `width` and `height` attributes can be used to provide the width for legacy user agents, using CSS just for the user agents that support `picture`:

    <figure>
     <style scoped media="(max-width: 600px)">
      #a { width: 100px; height: 100px; }
     </style>
     <picture>
      <source srcset="a-square.png" media="(max-width: 600px)">
      <img src="a-rectangle.png" width="300" height="150"
      alt="Barney Frank wears a suit and glasses." id="a">
     </picture>
     <figcaption>Barney Frank, 2011</figcaption>
    </figure>

The `source` element is used with the `src` attribute, which gives the URL of the image to use for legacy user agents that do not support the `picture` element. This leads to a question of which image to provide in the `src` attribute.

If the author wants the biggest image in legacy user agents, the markup could be as follows:

    <picture>
     <source srcset="pear-mobile.jpeg" media="(max-width: 720px)">
     <source srcset="pear-tablet.jpeg" media="(max-width: 1280px)">
     <img src="pear-desktop.jpeg" alt="The pear is juicy.">
    </picture>

However, if legacy mobile user agents are more important, one can list all three images in the `source` elements, overriding the `src` attribute entirely.

    <picture>
     <source srcset="pear-mobile.jpeg" media="(max-width: 720px)">
     <source srcset="pear-tablet.jpeg" media="(max-width: 1280px)">
     <source srcset="pear-desktop.jpeg">
     <img src="pear-mobile.jpeg" alt="The pear is juicy.">
    </picture>

Since at this point the `src` attribute is actually being ignored entirely by `picture`-supporting user agents, the `src` attribute can default to any image, including one that is neither the smallest nor biggest:

    <picture>
     <source srcset="pear-mobile.jpeg" media="(max-width: 720px)">
     <source srcset="pear-tablet.jpeg" media="(max-width: 1280px)">
     <source srcset="pear-desktop.jpeg">
     <img src="pear-tablet.jpeg" alt="The pear is juicy.">
    </picture>

Above the `max-width` media feature is used, giving the maximum (viewport) dimensions that an image is intended for. It is also possible to use `min-width` instead.

    <picture>
     <source srcset="pear-desktop.jpeg" media="(min-width: 1281px)">
     <source srcset="pear-tablet.jpeg" media="(min-width: 721px)">
     <img src="pear-mobile.jpeg" alt="The pear is juicy.">
    </picture>

#### 4.8.2 Dependencies

Media Queries [MQ]
  <media-condition>
CSS Values and Units [CSSVALUES]
  <length>
CSS Syntax [CSSSYNTAX]
  Parse a comma-separated list of component values
  component value
  <whitespace-token>
Fetch [FETCH]
  context

#### 4.8.3 The `picture` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Embedded content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where embedded content is expected.
Content model:
  Zero or more `source` elements, followed by one `img` element, optionally intermixed with script-supporting elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLPictureElement : HTMLElement {};

The `picture` element is a container which provides multiples sources to its contained `img` element to allow authors to declaratively control or give hints to the user agent about which image resource to use, based on the screen pixel density, viewport size, image format, and other factors. It represents its children.

The `picture` element is somewhat different from the similar-looking `video` and `audio` elements. While all of them contain `source` elements, the `source` element's `src` attribute has no meaning when the element is nested within a `picture` element, and the resource selection algorithm is different. As well, the `picture` element itself does not display anything; it merely provides a context for its contained `img` element that enables it to choose from multiple URLs.

#### 4.8.4 The `source` element when used with the `picture` element

Categories:
  Same as for the `source` element.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `picture` element, before the `img` element.
Content model:
  Same as for the `source` element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `srcset`
  `sizes`
  `media`
  `type`
DOM interface:

      partial interface HTMLSourceElement {
                 attribute DOMString srcset;
                 attribute DOMString sizes;
                 attribute DOMString media;
      };

The authoring requirements in this section only apply if the `source` element has a parent that is a `picture` element.

The `source` element allows authors to specify multiple alternative source sets for `img` elements. It does not represent anything on its own.

The `srcset` attribute must be present, and must consist of one or more image candidate strings, each separated from the next by a U+002C COMMA character (,). If an image candidate string contains no descriptors and no space characters after the URL, the following image candidate string, if there is one, must begin with one or more space characters.

The `sizes` attribute may also be present. If present, the value must be a valid source size list.

The `media` attributes may also be present. If present, the value must contain a valid media query list.

The `type` attribute may also be present. If present, the value must be a valid MIME type. It gives the type of the images in the source set, to allow the user agent to skip to the next `source` element if it does not support the given type.

If the `type` attribute is not specified, the user agent will not select a different `source` element if it finds that it does not support the image format after fetching it.

When a `source` element has a following sibling `source` element or `img` element with a `srcset` attribute specified, it must have at least one of the following:

- A `media` attribute specified with a value that, after stripping leading and trailing whitespace, is not the empty string and is not an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`all`".

- A `type` attribute specified.

The `src` attribute must not be present.

The IDL attributes `srcset`, `sizes` and `media` must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

#### 4.8.5 The `img` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Embedded content.
  Form-associated element.
  If the element has a `usemap` attribute: Interactive content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where embedded content is expected.
Content model:
  Empty.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `alt` — Replacement text for use when images are not available
  `src` — Address of the resource
  `srcset` — Images to use in different situations (e.g. high-resolution displays, small monitors, etc)
  `sizes`
  `crossorigin` — How the element handles crossorigin requests
  `usemap` — Name of image map to use
  `ismap` — Whether the image is a server-side image map
  `width` — Horizontal dimension
  `height` — Vertical dimension
DOM interface:

      [NamedConstructor=Image(optional unsigned long width, optional unsigned long height)]
      interface HTMLImageElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString alt;
                 attribute DOMString src;
                 attribute DOMString srcset;
                 attribute DOMString sizes;
                 attribute DOMString? crossOrigin;
                 attribute DOMString useMap;
                 attribute boolean isMap;
                 attribute unsigned long width;
                 attribute unsigned long height;
        readonly attribute unsigned long naturalWidth;
        readonly attribute unsigned long naturalHeight;
        readonly attribute boolean complete;
        readonly attribute DOMString currentSrc;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

An `img` element represents an image.

The image given by the `src` and `srcset` attributes, and any previous sibling `source` elements' `srcset` attributes if the parent is a `picture` element, is the embedded content; the value of the `alt` attribute provides equivalent content for those who cannot process images or who have image loading disabled (i.e. it is the `img` element's fallback content).

The requirements on the `alt` attribute's value are described in the next section.

The `src` attribute must be present, and must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces referencing a non-interactive, optionally animated, image resource that is neither paged nor scripted.

The `srcset` attribute may also be present. If present, its value must consist of one or more image candidate strings, each separated from the next by a U+002C COMMA character (,). If an image candidate string contains no descriptors and no space characters after the URL, the following image candidate string, if there is one, must begin with one or more space characters.

An image candidate string consists of the following components, in order, with the further restrictions described below this list:

1. Zero or more space characters.

2. A valid non-empty URL that does not start or end with a U+002C COMMA character (,), referencing a non-interactive, optionally animated, image resource that is neither paged nor scripted.

3. Zero or more space characters.

4. Zero or one of the following:

   - A width descriptor, consisting of: a space character, a valid non-negative integer giving a number greater than zero representing the width descriptor value, and a U+0077 LATIN SMALL LETTER W character.

   - A pixel density descriptor, consisting of: a space character, a valid floating-point number giving a number greater than zero representing the pixel density descriptor value, and a U+0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X character.

5. Zero or more space characters.

There must not be an image candidate string for an element that has the same width descriptor value as another image candidate string's width descriptor value for the same element.

There must not be an image candidate string for an element that has the same pixel density descriptor value as another image candidate string's pixel density descriptor value for the same element. For the purpose of this requirement, an image candidate string with no descriptors is equivalent to an image candidate string with a `1x` descriptor.

If a `source` element has a `sizes` attribute present or an `img` element has a `sizes` attribute present, all image candidate strings for that element must have the width descriptor specified.

If an image candidate string for an `source` or `img` element has the width descriptor specified, all other image candidate strings for that element must also have the width descriptor specified.

The specified width in an image candidate string's width descriptor must match the intrinsic width in the resource given by the image candidate string's URL.

The requirements above imply that images can be static bitmaps (e.g. PNGs, GIFs, JPEGs), single-page vector documents (single-page PDFs, XML files with an SVG root element), animated bitmaps (APNGs, animated GIFs), animated vector graphics (XML files with an SVG root element that use declarative SMIL animation), and so forth. However, these definitions preclude SVG files with script, multipage PDF files, interactive MNG files, HTML documents, plain text documents, and so forth. [PNG] [GIF] [JPEG] [PDF] [XML] [APNG] [SVG] [MNG]

If the `srcset` attribute is present, the `sizes` attribute may also be present. If present, its value must be a valid source size list.

A valid source size list is a string that matches the following grammar: [CSSVALUES] [MQ]

    <source-size-list> = <source-size># [ , <source-size-value> ]? | <source-size-value>
    <source-size> = <media-condition> <source-size-value>
    <source-size-value> = <length>

A <source-size-value> must not be negative.

Percentages are not allowed in a <source-size-value>, to avoid confusion about what it would be relative to. The `vw` unit can be used for sizes relative to the viewport width.

The `img` element must not be used as a layout tool. In particular, `img` elements should not be used to display transparent images, as such images rarely convey meaning and rarely add anything useful to the document.

The `crossorigin` attribute is a CORS settings attribute. Its purpose is to allow images from third-party sites that allow cross-origin access to be used with `canvas`.

An `img` element has a current request and a pending request. The current request is initially set to a new image request. The pending request is initially set to null. The current request is usually referred to as the `img` element itself.

An image request has a state, current URL and image data.

An image request's state is one of the following:

Unavailable
  The user agent hasn't obtained any image data, or has obtained some or all of the image data but hasn't yet decoded enough of the image to get the image dimensions.
Partially available
  The user agent has obtained some of the image data and at least the image dimensions are available.
Completely available
  The user agent has obtained all of the image data and at least the image dimensions are available.
Broken
  The user agent has obtained all of the image data that it can, but it cannot even decode the image enough to get the image dimensions (e.g. the image is corrupted, or the format is not supported, or no data could be obtained).

An image request's current URL is initially the empty string.

An image request's image data is the decoded image data.

When an image request is either in the partially available state or in the completely available state, it is said to be available.

An image request is initially unavailable.

When an `img` element is available, it provides a paint source whose width is the image's intrinsic width, whose height is the image's intrinsic height, and whose appearance is the intrinsic appearance of the image.

In a browsing context where scripting is disabled, user agents may obtain images immediately or on demand. In a browsing context where scripting is enabled, user agents must obtain images immediately.

A user agent that obtains images immediately must synchronously update the image data of an `img` element, with the restart animation flag set if so stated, whenever that element is created, or has experienced relevant mutations, and whenever that element's adopting steps are run.

A user agent that obtains images on demand must update the image data of an `img` element whenever it needs the image data (i.e. on demand), but only if the `img` element is in the unavailable state. When an `img` element has experienced relevant mutations, and whenever that element's adopting steps are run, if the user agent only obtains images on demand, the `img` element must return to the unavailable state.

The relevant mutations for an `img` element are as follows:

- The element's `src`, `srcset` or `sizes` attributes are set, changed, or removed.

- The element's `src` attribute is set to the same value as the previous value. This must set the restart animation flag for the update the image data algorithm.

- The element's `crossorigin` attribute's state is changed.

- The element is inserted into or removed from a `picture` parent element.

- The element's parent is a `picture` element and a `source` element is inserted as a previous sibling.

- The element's parent is a `picture` element and a `source` element that was a previous sibling is removed.

- The element's parent is a `picture` element and a `source` element that is a previous sibling has its `srcset`, `sizes`, `media` or `type` attributes set, changed, or removed.

Each `img` element has a last selected source, which must initially be null.

Each image request has a current pixel density, which must initially be undefined.

When an `img` element has a current pixel density that is not 1.0, the element's image data must be treated as if its resolution, in device pixels per CSS pixels, was the current pixel density.

For example, if the current pixel density is 3.125, that means that there are 300 device pixels per CSS inch, and thus if the image data is 300x600, it has an intrinsic dimension of 96 CSS pixels by 192 CSS pixels.

Each `Document` object must have a list of available images. Each image in this list is identified by a tuple consisting of an absolute URL, a CORS settings attribute mode, and, if the mode is not No CORS, an origin. Each image furthermore has an ignore higher-layer caching flag. User agents may copy entries from one `Document` object's list of available images to another at any time (e.g. when the `Document` is created, user agents can add to it all the images that are loaded in other `Document`s), but must not change the keys of entries copied in this way when doing so, and must unset the ignore higher-layer caching flag for the copied entry. User agents may also remove images from such lists at any time (e.g. to save memory). User agents must remove entries in the list of available images as appropriate given higher-layer caching semantics for the resource (e.g. the HTTP `Cache-Control` response header) when the ignore higher-layer caching is unset.

The list of available images is intended to enable synchronous switching when changing the `src` attribute to a URL that has previously been loaded, and to avoid re-downloading images in the same document even when they don't allow caching per HTTP. It is not used to avoid re-downloading the same image while the previous image is still loading, but the fetch algorithm allows the download to be reused in that case.

The user agent can also store the image data in a separately from the list of available images.

For example, if a resource has the HTTP response header `Cache-Control: must-revalidate`, the user agent would remove it from the list of available images but could keep the image data separately, and use that if the server responds with a `304 Not Modified` status.

When the user agent is to update the image data of an `img` element, optionally with the restart animations flag set, it must run the following steps:

1. If the element's node document is not the active document, abort these steps.

2. If the user agent cannot support images, or its support for images has been disabled, then abort the image request for the current request and the pending request, set current request to the unavailable state, let pending request be null, and abort these steps.

3. If the element does not have a `srcset` attribute specified and it does not have a parent or it has a parent but it is not a `picture` element, and it has a `src` attribute specified and its value is not the empty string, let selected source be the value of the element's `src` attribute, and selected pixel density be 1.0. Otherwise, let selected source be null and selected pixel density be undefined.

4. Let the `img` element's last selected source be selected source.

5. If selected source is not null, run these substeps:

   1. Resolve selected source, relative to the element, and let the result be absolute URL. If that is not successful, then abort these inner set of steps.

   2. Let key be a tuple consisting of the resulting absolute URL, the `img` element's `crossorigin` attribute's mode, and, if that mode is not No CORS, the node document's origin.

   3. If the list of available images contains an entry for key, then set the ignore higher-layer caching flag for that entry, abort the image request for the current request and the pending request, let pending request be null, let current request be a new image request whose image data is that of the entry and whose state is set to the completely available state, update the presentation of the image appropriately, let the current request's current pixel density be selected pixel density, queue a task to restart the animation if restart animation is set, change current request's current URL to absolute URL, and then fire a simple event named `load` at the `img` element, and abort these steps.

6. Asynchronously await a stable state, allowing the task that invoked this algorithm to continue. The synchronous section consists of all the remaining steps of this algorithm until the algorithm says the synchronous section has ended. (Steps in synchronous sections are marked with ⌛.)

7. ⌛ If another instance of this algorithm for this `img` element was started after this instance (even if it aborted and is no longer running), then abort these steps.

   Only the last instance takes effect, to avoid multiple requests when, for example, the `src`, `srcset`, and `crossorigin` attributes are all set in succession.

8. ⌛ Let selected source and selected pixel density be the URL and pixel density that results from selecting an image source, respectively.

9. ⌛ If selected source is null, run these substeps:

   1. ⌛ Set the current request to the broken state, abort the image request for the current request and the pending request, and let pending request be null.

   2. ⌛ Queue a task to change the current request's current URL to the empty string, and then, if the element has a `src` attribute or a `srcset` attribute or a parent that is a `picture` element, fire a simple event named `error` at the `img` element.

   3. ⌛ Abort this algorithm.

10. ⌛ Queue a task to fire a progress event named `loadstart` at the `img` element.

11. ⌛ Resolve selected source, relative to the element, and let the result be absolute URL. If that is not successful, then abort the image request for the current request and the pending request, set the current request to the broken state, let pending request be null, queue a task to change the current request's current URL to absolute URL, fire a simple event named `error` at the `img` element and then fire a simple event named `loadend` at the `img` element, and abort these steps.

12. ⌛ If the pending request is not null, and absolute URL is the same as the pending request's current URL, then abort these steps.

    ⌛ If absolute URL is the same as the current request's current URL, and current request is in the partially available state, then abort the image request for the pending request, queue a task to restart the animation if restart animation is set, and abort these steps.

    ⌛ If the pending request is not null, abort the image request for the pending request.

    ⌛ Let image request be a new image request whose current URL is absolute URL.

    ⌛ Let the pending request be image request.

    ⌛ Do a potentially CORS-enabled fetch of absolute URL, with the mode being the current state of the element's `crossorigin` content attribute, the origin being the origin of the `img` element's node document, and the default origin behaviour set to taint. Let this instance of the fetching algorithm be associated with image request.

    If the element has a `srcset` attribute or a parent that is a `picture` element, the fetching request's context must be set to imageset. Otherwise it must be set to image. [FETCH]

    This specification does not yet use the "fetch" algorithm from the WHATWG Fetch specification. It will be updated to do so in due course.

    The resource obtained in this fashion, if any, is image request's image data. It can be either CORS-same-origin or CORS-cross-origin; this affects the origin of the image itself (e.g. when used on a `canvas`).

    Fetching the image must delay the load event of the element's node document until the task that is queued by the networking task source once the resource has been fetched (defined below) has been run.

    This, unfortunately, can be used to perform a rudimentary port scan of the user's local network (especially in conjunction with scripting, though scripting isn't actually necessary to carry out such an attack). User agents may implement cross-origin access control policies that are stricter than those described above to mitigate this attack, but unfortunately such policies are typically not compatible with existing Web content.

    If the resource is CORS-same-origin, each task that is queued by the networking task source while the image is being fetched, if image request is the current request, must fire a progress event named `progress` at the `img` element.

13. End the synchronous section, continuing the remaining steps asynchronously, but without missing any data from the fetch algorithm.

14. As soon as possible, jump to the first applicable entry from the following list:

    If the resource type is `multipart/x-mixed-replace`

      The next task that is queued by the networking task source while the image is being fetched must run the following steps:

      1. If image request is the pending request and the user agent is able to determine image request's image's width and height, abort the image request for the current request, upgrade the pending request to the current request and set the current request's state to partially available.

      2. Otherwise, if image request is the pending request and the user agent is able to determine that image request's image is corrupted in some fatal way such that the image dimensions cannot be obtained, abort the image request for the current request, upgrade the pending request to the current request and set the current request's state to broken.

      3. Otherwise, if image request is the current request, it is in the unavailable state, and the user agent is able to determine image request's image's width and height, set the current request's state to partially available.

      4. Otherwise, if image request is the current request, it is in the unavailable state, and the user agent is able to determine that image request's image is corrupted in some fatal way such that the image dimensions cannot be obtained, set the current request's state to broken.

      Each task that is queued by the networking task source while the image is being fetched must update the presentation of the image, but as each new body part comes in, it must replace the previous image. Once one body part has been completely decoded, the user agent must set the `img` element to the completely available state and queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the `img` element.

      The `progress` and `loadend` events are not fired for `multipart/x-mixed-replace` image streams.

    If the resource type and data corresponds to a supported image format, as described below

      The next task that is queued by the networking task source while the image is being fetched must run the following steps:

      1. If the user agent is able to determine image request's image's width and height, and image request is pending request, abort the image request for the current request, upgrade the pending request to the current request, update the `img` element's presentation appropriately, and set image request's state to partially available.

      2. Otherwise, if the user agent is able to determine image request's image's width and height, and image request is current request, update the `img` element's presentation appropriately and set image request's state to partially available.

      3. Otherwise, if the user agent is able to determine that image request's image is corrupted in some fatal way such that the image dimensions cannot be obtained, and image request is pending request, abort the image request for the current request and the pending request, upgrade the pending request to the current request, set current request to the broken state, fire a simple event named `error` at the `img` element, fire a simple event named `loadend` at the `img` element, and abort these steps.

      4. Otherwise, if the user agent is able to determine that image request's image is corrupted in some fatal way such that the image dimensions cannot be obtained, and image request is current request, abort the image request for image request, fire a simple event named `error` at the `img` element, fire a simple event named `loadend` at the `img` element, and abort these steps.

      That task, and each subsequent task, that is queued by the networking task source while the image is being fetched, if image request is the current request, must update the presentation of the image appropriately (e.g. if the image is a progressive JPEG, each packet can improve the resolution of the image).

      Furthermore, the last task that is queued by the networking task source once the resource has been fetched must additionally run these steps:

      1. Set image request to the completely available state.

      2. Add the image to the list of available images using the key key, with the ignore higher-layer caching flag set.

      3. Fire a progress event or simple event named `load` at the `img` element, depending on the resource in image request.

      4. Fire a progress event or simple event named `loadend` at the `img` element, depending on the resource in image request.

    Otherwise

      The image data is not in a supported file format; the user agent must set image request to the broken state, abort the image request for the current request and the pending request, upgrade the pending request to the current request, and then queue a task to first fire a simple event named `error` at the `img` element and then fire a simple event named `loadend` at the `img` element.

To abort the image request for an image request image request means to run the following steps:

1. Forget image request's image data, if any.

2. Abort any instance of the fetching algorithm for image request, discarding any pending tasks generated by that algorithm.

To upgrade the pending request to the current request for an `img` element means to run the following steps:

1. Let the `img` element's current request be the pending request.

2. Let the `img` element's pending request be null.

To fire a progress event or simple event named type at an element e, depending on resource r, means to fire a progress event named type at e if r is CORS-same-origin, and otherwise fire a simple event named type at e.

While a user agent is running the above algorithm for an element x, there must be a strong reference from the element's node document to the element x, even if that element is not in its `Document`.

When an `img` element is in the completely available state and the user agent can decode the media data without errors, then the `img` element is said to be fully decodable.

Whether the image is fetched successfully or not (e.g. whether the response code was a 2xx code or equivalent) must be ignored when determining the image's type and whether it is a valid image.

This allows servers to return images with error responses, and have them displayed.

The user agent should apply the image sniffing rules to determine the type of the image, with the image's associated Content-Type headers giving the official type. If these rules are not applied, then the type of the image must be the type given by the image's associated Content-Type headers.

User agents must not support non-image resources with the `img` element (e.g. XML files whose root element is an HTML element). User agents must not run executable code (e.g. scripts) embedded in the image resource. User agents must only display the first page of a multipage resource (e.g. a PDF file). User agents must not allow the resource to act in an interactive fashion, but should honor any animation in the resource.

This specification does not specify which image types are to be supported.

An `img` element is associated with a source set.

A source set is a set of zero or more image sources and a source size.

An image source is a URL, and optionally either a density descriptor, or a width descriptor.

A source size is a <source-size-value>. When a source size has a unit relative to the viewport, it must be interpreted relative to the `img` element's node document's viewport. Other units must be interpreted the same as in Media Queries. [MQ]

When asked to select an image source for a given `img` element el, user agents must do the following:

1. Update the source set for el.

2. If el's source set is empty, return null as the URL and undefined as the pixel density and abort these steps.

3. Otherwise, take el's source set and let it be source set.

4. If an entry b in source set has the same associated density descriptor as an earlier entry a in source set, then remove entry b. Repeat this step until none of the entries in source set have the same associated density descriptor as an earlier entry.

5. In a user agent-specific manner, choose one image source from source set. Let this be selected source.

6. Return selected source and its associated pixel density.

When asked to update the source set for a given `img` element el, user agents must do the following:

1. Set el's source set to an empty source set.

2. If el has a parent node and that is a `picture` element, let elements be an array containing el's parent node's child elements, retaining relative order. Otherwise, let elements be array containing only el.

3. Iterate through elements, doing the following for each item child:

   1. If child is el:

      1. If child has a `srcset` attribute, parse child's srcset attribute and let the returned source set be source set. Otherwise, let source set be an empty source set.

      2. Parse child's sizes attribute and let source set's source size be the returned value.

      3. If child has a `src` attribute whose value is not the empty string and source set does not contain an image source with a density descriptor value of 1, and no image source with a width descriptor, append child's `src` attribute value to source set.

      4. Normalize the source densities of source set.

      5. Let el's source set be source set.

      6. Abort this algorithm.

   2. If child is not a `source` element, continue to the next child. Otherwise, child is a `source` element.

   3. If child does not have a `srcset` attribute, continue to the next child.

   4. Parse child's srcset attribute and let the returned source set be source set.

   5. If source set has zero image sources, continue to the next child.

   6. If child has a `media` attribute, and its value is not a valid media query list, or is a valid media query list that evaluates to false, continue to the next child.

   7. Parse child's sizes attribute and let source set's source size be the returned value.

   8. If child has a `type` attribute, and its value is an unknown or unsupported MIME type, continue to the next child.

   9. Normalize the source densities of source set.

   10. Let el's source set be source set.

   11. Abort this algorithm.

Each `img` element independently considers its previous sibling `source` elements plus the `img` element itself for selecting an image source, ignoring any other (invalid) elements, including other `img` elements in the same `picture` element, or `source` elements that are following siblings of the relevant `img` element.

When asked to parse a srcset attribute from an element, parse the value of the element's `srcset` attribute as follows:

1. Let input be the value passed to this algorithm.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Let candidates be an initially empty source set. The order of entries in the list is the order in which entries are added to the list.

4. Splitting loop: Collect a sequence of characters that are space characters or U+002C COMMA characters. If any U+002C COMMA characters were collected, that is a parse error.

5. If position is past the end of input, return candidates and abort these steps.

6. Collect a sequence of characters that are not space characters, and let that be url.

7. Let descriptors be a new empty list.

8. If url ends with a U+002C COMMA character (,), remove all trailing U+002C COMMA characters from url; if this removed more than one character, that is a parse error. Otherwise, skip whitespace and then follow these substeps:

   1. Descriptor tokenizer: Let current descriptor be the empty string.

   2. Let state be in descriptor.

   3. Let c be the character at position. Do the following depending on the value of state. For the purpose of this step, "EOF" is a special character representing that position is past the end of input.

      In descriptor

        Do the following, depending on the value of c:

        Space character

          If current descriptor is not empty, append current descriptor to descriptors and let current descriptor be the empty string. Set state to after descriptor.

        U+002C COMMA (,)

          Advance position to the next character in input. If current descriptor is not empty, append current descriptor to descriptors. Jump to the step labeled descriptor parser.

        U+0028 LEFT PARANTHESIS (()

          Append c to current descriptor. Set state to in parens.

        EOF

          If current descriptor is not empty, append current descriptor to descriptors. Jump to the step labeled descriptor parser.

        Anything else

          Append c to current descriptor.

      In parens

        Do the following, depending on the value of c:

        U+0029 RIGHT PARENTHESIS ())

          Append c to current descriptor. Set state to in descriptor.

        EOF

          Append current descriptor to descriptors. Jump to the step labeled descriptor parser.

        Anything else

          Append c to current descriptor.

      After descriptor

        Do the following, depending on the value of c:

        Space character

          Stay in this state.

        EOF

          Jump to the step labeled descriptor parser.

        Anything else

          Set state to in descriptor. Set position to the previous character in input.

      Advance position to the next character in input. Repeat this step.

      In order to be compatible with future additions, this algorithm supports multiple descriptors and descriptors with parens.

9. Descriptor parser: Let error be no.

10. Let width be absent.

11. Let density be absent.

12. Let future-compat-h be absent.

13. For each descriptor in descriptors, run the appropriate set of steps from the following list:

    If the descriptor consists of a valid non-negative integer followed by a U+0077 LATIN SMALL LETTER W character

      1. If width and density are not both absent, then let error be yes.

      2. Apply the rules for parsing non-negative integers to the descriptor. If the result is zero, let error be yes. Otherwise, let width be the result.

    If the descriptor consists of a valid floating-point number followed by a U+0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X character

      1. If width, density and future-compat-h are not all absent, then let error be yes.

      2. Apply the rules for parsing floating-point number values to the descriptor. If the result is less than zero, let error be yes. Otherwise, let density be the result.

         If density is zero, the intrinsic dimensions will be infinite. User agents are expected to have limits in how big images can be rendered, which is allowed by the hardware limitations clause.

    If the descriptor consists of a valid non-negative integer followed by a U+0068 LATIN SMALL LETTER H character

      This is a parse error.

      1. If future-compat-h and density are not both absent, then let error be yes.

      2. Apply the rules for parsing non-negative integers to the descriptor. If the result is zero, let error be yes. Otherwise, let future-compat-h be the result.

    Anything else

      This is a parse error.

14. If future-compat-h is not absent and width is absent, let error be yes.

15. If error is still no, then add a new image source to candidates whose URL is url, associated with a width width if not absent and a pixel density density if not absent. Otherwise, there is a parse error.

16. Return to the step labeled splitting loop.

When asked to parse a sizes attribute from an element, parse a comma-separated list of component values from the value of the element's `sizes` attribute (or the empty string, if the attribute is absent), and let unparsed sizes list be the result. [CSSSYNTAX]

For each unparsed size in unparsed sizes list:

1. Remove all consecutive <whitespace-token>s from the end of unparsed size. If unparsed size is now empty, that is a parse error; continue to the next iteration of this algorithm.

2. If the last component value in unparsed size is a valid non-negative <source-size-value>, let size be its value and remove the component value from unparsed size. Otherwise, there is a parse error; continue to the next iteration of this algorithm.

3. Remove all consecutive <whitespace-token>s from the end of unparsed size. If unparsed size is now empty, return size and exit this algorithm. If this was not the last item in unparsed sizes list, that is a parse error.

4. Parse the remaining component values in unparsed size as a <media-condition>. If it does not parse correctly, or it does parse correctly but the <media-condition> evaluates to false, continue to the next iteration of this algorithm. [MQ]

5. Return size and exit this algorithm.

If the above algorithm exhausts unparsed sizes list without returning a size value, return `100vw`.

A parse error for the algorithms above indicates a non-fatal mismatch between input and requirements. User agents are encouraged to expose parse errors somehow.

While a valid source size list only contains a bare <source-size-value> (without an accompanying <media-condition>) as the last entry in the <source-size-list>, the parsing algorithm technically allows such at any point in the list, and will accept it immediately as the size if the preceding entries in the list weren't used. This is to enable future extensions, and protect against simple author errors such as a final trailing comma.

An image source can have a density descriptor, a width descriptor, or no descriptor at all accompanying its URL. Normalizing a source set gives every image source a density descriptor.

When asked to normalize the source densities of a source set source set, the user agent must do the following:

1. Let source size be source set's source size.

2. For each image source in source set:

   1. If the image source has a density descriptor, continue to the next image source.

   2. Otherwise, if the image source has a width descriptor, replace the width descriptor with a density descriptor with a value of the width descriptor divided by the source size and a unit of `x`.

      If the source size is zero, the density would be infinity, which results in the intrinsic dimensions being zero by zero.

   3. Otherwise, give the image source a density descriptor of `1x`.

The user agent may at any time run the following algorithm to update an `img` element's image in order to react to changes in the environment. (User agents are not required to ever run this algorithm; for example, if the user is not looking at the page any more, the user agent might want to wait until the user has returned to the page before determining which image to use, in case the environment changes again in the meantime.)

1. Asynchronously await a stable state. The synchronous section consists of all the remaining steps of this algorithm until the algorithm says the synchronous section has ended. (Steps in synchronous sections are marked with ⌛.)

2. ⌛ If the `img` element does not have a `srcset` attribute specified and it either has no parent or it is not a `picture` element, is not in the completely available state, has image data whose resource type is `multipart/x-mixed-replace`, or if its update the image data algorithm is running, then abort this algorithm.

3. ⌛ Let selected source and selected pixel density be the URL and pixel density that results from selecting an image source, respectively.

4. ⌛ If selected source is null, then abort these steps.

5. ⌛ If selected source and selected pixel density are the same as the element's last selected source and current pixel density, then abort these steps.

6. ⌛ Resolve selected source, relative to the element.

7. ⌛ Let CORS mode be the state of the element's `crossorigin` content attribute.

8. ⌛ If the resolve a URL algorithm is not successful, abort these steps.

9. End the synchronous section, continuing the remaining steps asynchronously.

10. Do a potentially CORS-enabled fetch of the resulting absolute URL, with the mode being CORS mode, the origin being the origin of the `img` element's node document, and the default origin behaviour set to taint.

    If this download fails in any way (other than the response code not being a 2xx code, as mentioned earlier), or if the image format is unsupported (as determined by applying the image sniffing rules, again as mentioned earlier), or if the resource type is `multipart/x-mixed-replace`, then abort these steps.

    Otherwise, wait for the fetch algorithm to queue its last task, and then continue with these steps. The data obtained in this way is used in the steps below.

11. Queue a task to run the following substeps:

    1. If the `img` element has experienced relevant mutations since this algorithm started, then abort these steps.

    2. Let the `img` element's last selected source be selected source and the `img` element's current pixel density be selected pixel density.

    3. Let the `img` element's current request's current URL be the resulting absolute URL from the earlier step.

    4. Replace the `img` element's image data with the resource obtained by the earlier step of this algorithm. It can be either CORS-same-origin or CORS-cross-origin; this affects the origin of the image itself (e.g. when used on a `canvas`).

    5. Fire a simple event named `load` at the `img` element.

The task source for the tasks queued by algorithms in this section is the DOM manipulation task source.

What an `img` element represents depends on the `src` attribute and the `alt` attribute.

If the `src` attribute is set and the `alt` attribute is set to the empty string

  The image is either decorative or supplemental to the rest of the content, redundant with some other information in the document.

  If the image is available and the user agent is configured to display that image, then the element represents the element's image data.

  Otherwise, the element represents nothing, and may be omitted completely from the rendering. User agents may provide the user with a notification that an image is present but has been omitted from the rendering.

If the `src` attribute is set and the `alt` attribute is set to a value that isn't empty

  The image is a key part of the content; the `alt` attribute gives a textual equivalent or replacement for the image.

  If the image is available and the user agent is configured to display that image, then the element represents the element's image data.

  Otherwise, the element represents the text given by the `alt` attribute. User agents may provide the user with a notification that an image is present but has been omitted from the rendering.

If the `src` attribute is set and the `alt` attribute is not

  The image might be a key part of the content, and there is no textual equivalent of the image available.

  In a conforming document, the absence of the `alt` attribute indicates that the image is a key part of the content but that a textual replacement for the image was not available when the image was generated.

  If the image is available and the user agent is configured to display that image, then the element represents the element's image data.

  Otherwise, the user agent should display some sort of indicator that there is an image that is not being rendered, and may, if requested by the user, or if so configured, or when required to provide contextual information in response to navigation, provide caption information for the image, derived as follows:

  1. If the image has a `title` attribute whose value is not the empty string, then the value of that attribute is the caption information; abort these steps.

  2. If the image is a descendant of a `figure` element that has a child `figcaption` element, and, ignoring the `figcaption` element and its descendants, the `figure` element has no flow content descendants other than inter-element whitespace and the `img` element, then the contents of the first such `figcaption` element are the caption information; abort these steps.

  3. There is no caption information.

If the `src` attribute is not set and either the `alt` attribute is set to the empty string or the `alt` attribute is not set at all

  The element represents nothing.

Otherwise

  The element represents the text given by the `alt` attribute.

The `alt` attribute does not represent advisory information. User agents must not present the contents of the `alt` attribute in the same way as content of the `title` attribute.

User agents may always provide the user with the option to display any image, or to prevent any image from being displayed. User agents may also apply heuristics to help the user make use of the image when the user is unable to see it, e.g. due to a visual disability or because they are using a text terminal with no graphics capabilities. Such heuristics could include, for instance, optical character recognition (OCR) of text found within the image.

While user agents are encouraged to repair cases of missing `alt` attributes, authors must not rely on such behavior. Requirements for providing text to act as an alternative for images are described in detail below.

The contents of `img` elements, if any, are ignored for the purposes of rendering.

The `usemap` attribute, if present, can indicate that the image has an associated image map.

The `ismap` attribute, when used on an element that is a descendant of an `a` element with an `href` attribute, indicates by its presence that the element provides access to a server-side image map. This affects how events are handled on the corresponding `a` element.

The `ismap` attribute is a boolean attribute. The attribute must not be specified on an element that does not have an ancestor `a` element with an `href` attribute.

The `usemap` and `ismap` attributes can result in confusing behavior when used together with `source` elements with the `media` attribute specified in a `picture` element.

The `img` element supports dimension attributes.

The `alt`, `src`, `srcset` and `sizes` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `crossOrigin` IDL attribute must reflect the `crossorigin` content attribute.

The `useMap` IDL attribute must reflect the `usemap` content attribute.

The `isMap` IDL attribute must reflect the `ismap` content attribute.

image . `width` [ = value ]
image . `height` [ = value ]

  These attributes return the actual rendered dimensions of the image, or zero if the dimensions are not known.

  They can be set, to change the corresponding content attributes.

image . `naturalWidth`
image . `naturalHeight`

  These attributes return the intrinsic dimensions of the image, or zero if the dimensions are not known.

image . `complete`

  Returns true if the image has been completely downloaded or if no image is specified; otherwise, returns false.

image . `currentSrc`

  Returns the image's absolute URL.

image = new `Image`( [ width [, height ] ] )

  Returns a new `img` element, with the `width` and `height` attributes set to the values passed in the relevant arguments, if applicable.

The IDL attributes `width` and `height` must return the rendered width and height of the image, in CSS pixels, if the image is being rendered, and is being rendered to a visual medium; or else the intrinsic width and height of the image, in CSS pixels, if the image is available but not being rendered to a visual medium; or else 0, if the image is not available. [CSS]

On setting, they must act as if they reflected the respective content attributes of the same name.

The IDL attributes `naturalWidth` and `naturalHeight` must return the intrinsic width and height of the image, in CSS pixels, if the image is available, or else 0. [CSS]

The IDL attribute `complete` must return true if any of the following conditions is true:

- Both the `src` attribute and the `srcset` attribute are omitted.
- The `srcset` attribute is omitted and the `src` attribute's value is the empty string.
- The final task that is queued by the networking task source once the resource has been fetched has been queued.
- The `img` element is completely available.
- The `img` element is broken.

Otherwise, the attribute must return false.

The value of `complete` can thus change while a script is executing.

The `currentSrc` IDL attribute must return the `img` element's current request's current URL.

A constructor is provided for creating `HTMLImageElement` objects (in addition to the factory methods from DOM such as `createElement()`): `Image(width, height)`. When invoked as a constructor, this must return a new `HTMLImageElement` object (a new `img` element). If the width argument is present, the new object's `width` content attribute must be set to width. If the height argument is also present, the new object's `height` content attribute must be set to height. The element's node document must be the active document of the browsing context of the `Window` object on which the interface object of the invoked constructor is found.

A single image can have different appropriate alternative text depending on the context.

In each of the following cases, the same image is used, yet the `alt` text is different each time. The image is the coat of arms of the Carouge municipality in the canton Geneva in Switzerland.

Here it is used as a supplementary icon:

    <p>I lived in <img src="carouge.svg" alt=""> Carouge.</p>

Here it is used as an icon representing the town:

    <p>Home town: <img src="carouge.svg" alt="Carouge"></p>

Here it is used as part of a text on the town:

    <p>Carouge has a coat of arms.</p>
    <p><img src="carouge.svg" alt="The coat of arms depicts a lion, sitting in front of a tree."></p>
    <p>It is used as decoration all over the town.</p>

Here it is used as a way to support a similar text where the description is given as well as, instead of as an alternative to, the image:

    <p>Carouge has a coat of arms.</p>
    <p><img src="carouge.svg" alt=""></p>
    <p>The coat of arms depicts a lion, sitting in front of a tree.
    It is used as decoration all over the town.</p>

Here it is used as part of a story:

    <p>He picked up the folder and a piece of paper fell out.</p>
    <p><img src="carouge.svg" alt="Shaped like a shield, the paper had a
    red background, a green tree, and a yellow lion with its tongue
    hanging out and whose tail was shaped like an S."></p>
    <p>He stared at the folder. S! The answer he had been looking for all
    this time was simply the letter S! How had he not seen that before? It all
    came together now. The phone call where Hector had referred to a lion's tail,
    the time Marco had stuck his tongue out...</p>

Here it is not known at the time of publication what the image will be, only that it will be a coat of arms of some kind, and thus no replacement text can be provided, and instead only a brief caption for the image is provided, in the `title` attribute:

    <p>The last user to have uploaded a coat of arms uploaded this one:</p>
    <p><img src="last-uploaded-coat-of-arms.cgi" title="User-uploaded coat of arms."></p>

Ideally, the author would find a way to provide real replacement text even in this case, e.g. by asking the previous user. Not providing replacement text makes the document more difficult to use for people who are unable to view images, e.g. blind users, or users or very low-bandwidth connections or who pay by the byte, or users who are forced to use a text-only Web browser.

Here are some more examples showing the same picture used in different contexts, with different appropriate alternate texts each time.

    <article>
     <h1>My cats</h1>
     <h2>Fluffy</h2>
     <p>Fluffy is my favorite.</p>
     <img src="fluffy.jpg" alt="She likes playing with a ball of yarn.">
     <p>She's just too cute.</p>
     <h2>Miles</h2>
     <p>My other cat, Miles just eats and sleeps.</p>
    </article>

    <article>
     <h1>Photography</h1>
     <h2>Shooting moving targets indoors</h2>
     <p>The trick here is to know how to anticipate; to know at what speed and
     what distance the subject will pass by.</p>
     <img src="fluffy.jpg" alt="A cat flying by, chasing a ball of yarn, can be
     photographed quite nicely using this technique.">
     <h2>Nature by night</h2>
     <p>To achieve this, you'll need either an extremely sensitive film, or
     immense flash lights.</p>
    </article>

    <article>
     <h1>About me</h1>
     <h2>My pets</h2>
     <p>I've got a cat named Fluffy and a dog named Miles.</p>
     <img src="fluffy.jpg" alt="Fluffy, my cat, tends to keep itself busy.">
     <p>My dog Miles and I like go on long walks together.</p>
     <h2>music</h2>
     <p>After our walks, having emptied my mind, I like listening to Bach.</p>
    </article>

    <article>
     <h1>Fluffy and the Yarn</h1>
     <p>Fluffy was a cat who liked to play with yarn. He also liked to jump.</p>
     <aside><img src="fluffy.jpg" alt="" title="Fluffy"></aside>
     <p>He would play in the morning, he would play in the evening.</p>
    </article>

##### 4.8.5.1 Requirements for providing text to act as an alternative for images

###### 4.8.5.1.1 General guidelines

Except where otherwise specified, the `alt` attribute must be specified and its value must not be empty; the value must be an appropriate replacement for the image. The specific requirements for the `alt` attribute depend on what the image is intended to represent, as described in the following sections.

The most general rule to consider when writing alternative text is the following: the intent is that replacing every image with the text of its `alt` attribute not change the meaning of the page.

So, in general, alternative text can be written by considering what one would have written had one not been able to include the image.

A corollary to this is that the `alt` attribute's value should never contain text that could be considered the image's caption, title, or legend. It is supposed to contain replacement text that could be used by users instead of the image; it is not meant to supplement the image. The `title` attribute can be used for supplemental information.

Another corollary is that the `alt` attribute's value should not repeat information that is already provided in the prose next to the image.

One way to think of alternative text is to think about how you would read the page containing the image to someone over the phone, without mentioning that there is an image present. Whatever you say instead of the image is typically a good start for writing the alternative text.

###### 4.8.5.1.2 A link or button containing nothing but the image

When an a element that creates a hyperlink, or a `button` element, has no textual content but contains one or more images, the `alt` attributes must contain text that together convey the purpose of the link or button.

In this example, a user is asked to pick his preferred colour from a list of three. Each colour is given by an image, but for users who have configured their user agent not to display images, the colour names are used instead:

    <h1>Pick your colour</h1>
    <ul>
     <li><a href="green.html"><img src="green.jpeg" alt="Green"></a></li>
     <li><a href="blue.html"><img src="blue.jpeg" alt="Blue"></a></li>
     <li><a href="red.html"><img src="red.jpeg" alt="Red"></a></li>
    </ul>

In this example, each button has a set of images to indicate the kind of colour output desired by the user. The first image is used in each case to give the alternative text.

    <button name="rgb"><img src="red" alt="RGB"><img src="green" alt=""><img src="blue" alt=""></button>
    <button name="cmyk"><img src="cyan" alt="CMYK"><img src="magenta" alt=""><img src="yellow" alt=""><img src="black" alt=""></button>

Since each image represents one part of the text, it could also be written like this:

    <button name="rgb"><img src="red" alt="R"><img src="green" alt="G"><img src="blue" alt="B"></button>
    <button name="cmyk"><img src="cyan" alt="C"><img src="magenta" alt="M"><img src="yellow" alt="Y"><img src="black" alt="K"></button>

However, with other alternative text, this might not work, and putting all the alternative text into one image in each case might make more sense:

    <button name="rgb"><img src="red" alt="sRGB profile"><img src="green" alt=""><img src="blue" alt=""></button>
    <button name="cmyk"><img src="cyan" alt="CMYK profile"><img src="magenta" alt=""><img src="yellow" alt=""><img src="black" alt=""></button>

###### 4.8.5.1.3 A phrase or paragraph with an alternative graphical representation: charts, diagrams, graphs, maps, illustrations

Sometimes something can be more clearly stated in graphical form, for example as a flowchart, a diagram, a graph, or a simple map showing directions. In such cases, an image can be given using the `img` element, but the lesser textual version must still be given, so that users who are unable to view the image (e.g. because they have a very slow connection, or because they are using a text-only browser, or because they are listening to the page being read out by a hands-free automobile voice Web browser, or simply because they are blind) are still able to understand the message being conveyed.

The text must be given in the `alt` attribute, and must convey the same message as the image specified in the `src` attribute.

It is important to realise that the alternative text is a replacement for the image, not a description of the image.

In the following example we have a flowchart in image form, with text in the `alt` attribute rephrasing the flowchart in prose form:

    <p>In the common case, the data handled by the tokenization stage
    comes from the network, but it can also come from script.</p>
    <p><img src="images/parsing-model-overview.png" alt="The Network
    passes data to the Input Stream Preprocessor, which passes it to the
    Tokenizer, which passes it to the Tree Construction stage. From there,
    data goes to both the DOM and to Script Execution. Script Execution is
    linked to the DOM, and, using document.write(), passes data to the
    Tokenizer."></p>

Here's another example, showing a good solution and a bad solution to the problem of including an image in a description.

First, here's the good solution. This sample shows how the alternative text should just be what you would have put in the prose if the image had never existed.

    <!-- This is the correct way to do things. -->
    <p>
     You are standing in an open field west of a house.
     <img src="house.jpeg" alt="The house is white, with a boarded front door.">
     There is a small mailbox here.
    </p>

Second, here's the bad solution. In this incorrect way of doing things, the alternative text is simply a description of the image, instead of a textual replacement for the image. It's bad because when the image isn't shown, the text doesn't flow as well as in the first example.

    <!-- This is the wrong way to do things. -->
    <p>
     You are standing in an open field west of a house.
     <img src="house.jpeg" alt="A white house, with a boarded front door.">
     There is a small mailbox here.
    </p>

Text such as "Photo of white house with boarded door" would be equally bad alternative text (though it could be suitable for the `title` attribute or in the `figcaption` element of a `figure` with this image).

###### 4.8.5.1.4 A short phrase or label with an alternative graphical representation: icons, logos

A document can contain information in iconic form. The icon is intended to help users of visual browsers to recognise features at a glance.

In some cases, the icon is supplemental to a text label conveying the same meaning. In those cases, the `alt` attribute must be present but must be empty.

Here the icons are next to text that conveys the same meaning, so they have an empty `alt` attribute:

    <nav>
     <p><a href="/help/"><img src="/icons/help.png" alt=""> Help</a></p>
     <p><a href="/configure/"><img src="/icons/configuration.png" alt="">
     Configuration Tools</a></p>
    </nav>

In other cases, the icon has no text next to it describing what it means; the icon is supposed to be self-explanatory. In those cases, an equivalent textual label must be given in the `alt` attribute.

Here, posts on a news site are labeled with an icon indicating their topic.

    <body>
     <article>
      <header>
       <h1>Ratatouille wins <i>Best Movie of the Year</i> award</h1>
       <p><img src="movies.png" alt="Movies"></p>
      </header>
      <p>Pixar has won yet another <i>Best Movie of the Year</i> award,
      making this its 8th win in the last 12 years.</p>
     </article>
     <article>
      <header>
       <h1>Latest TWiT episode is online</h1>
       <p><img src="podcasts.png" alt="Podcasts"></p>
      </header>
      <p>The latest TWiT episode has been posted, in which we hear
      several tech news stories as well as learning much more about the
      iPhone. This week, the panelists compare how reflective their
      iPhones' Apple logos are.</p>
     </article>
    </body>

Many pages include logos, insignia, flags, or emblems, which stand for a particular entity such as a company, organization, project, band, software package, country, or some such.

If the logo is being used to represent the entity, e.g. as a page heading, the `alt` attribute must contain the name of the entity being represented by the logo. The `alt` attribute must not contain text like the word "logo", as it is not the fact that it is a logo that is being conveyed, it's the entity itself.

If the logo is being used next to the name of the entity that it represents, then the logo is supplemental, and its `alt` attribute must instead be empty.

If the logo is merely used as decorative material (as branding, or, for example, as a side image in an article that mentions the entity to which the logo belongs), then the entry below on purely decorative images applies. If the logo is actually being discussed, then it is being used as a phrase or paragraph (the description of the logo) with an alternative graphical representation (the logo itself), and the first entry above applies.

In the following snippets, all four of the above cases are present. First, we see a logo used to represent a company:

    <h1><img src="XYZ.gif" alt="The XYZ company"></h1>

Next, we see a paragraph which uses a logo right next to the company name, and so doesn't have any alternative text:

    <article>
     <h2>News</h2>
     <p>We have recently been looking at buying the <img src="alpha.gif"
     alt=""> ΑΒΓ company, a small Greek company
     specializing in our type of product.</p>

In this third snippet, we have a logo being used in an aside, as part of the larger article discussing the acquisition:

     <aside><p><img src="alpha-large.gif" alt=""></p></aside>
     <p>The ΑΒΓ company has had a good quarter, and our
     pie chart studies of their accounts suggest a much bigger blue slice
     than its green and orange slices, which is always a good sign.</p>
    </article>

Finally, we have an opinion piece talking about a logo, and the logo is therefore described in detail in the alternative text.

    <p>Consider for a moment their logo:</p>

    <p><img src="/images/logo" alt="It consists of a green circle with a
    green question mark centered inside it."></p>

    <p>How unoriginal can you get? I mean, oooooh, a question mark, how
    <em>revolutionary</em>, how utterly <em>ground-breaking</em>, I'm
    sure everyone will rush to adopt those specifications now! They could
    at least have tried for some sort of, I don't know, sequence of
    rounded squares with varying shades of green and bold white outlines,
    at least that would look good on the cover of a blue book.</p>

This example shows how the alternative text should be written such that if the image isn't available, and the text is used instead, the text flows seamlessly into the surrounding text, as if the image had never been there in the first place.

###### 4.8.5.1.5 Text that has been rendered to a graphic for typographical effect

Sometimes, an image just consists of text, and the purpose of the image is not to highlight the actual typographic effects used to render the text, but just to convey the text itself.

In such cases, the `alt` attribute must be present but must consist of the same text as written in the image itself.

Consider a graphic containing the text "Earth Day", but with the letters all decorated with flowers and plants. If the text is merely being used as a heading, to spice up the page for graphical users, then the correct alternative text is just the same text "Earth Day", and no mention need be made of the decorations:

    <h1><img src="earthdayheading.png" alt="Earth Day"></h1>

An illuminated manuscript might use graphics for some of its images. The alternative text in such a situation is just the character that the image represents.

    <p><img src="initials/o.svg" alt="O">nce upon a time and a long long time ago, late at
    night, when it was dark, over the hills, through the woods, across a great ocean, in a land far
    away, in a small house, on a hill, under a full moon...

When an image is used to represent a character that cannot otherwise be represented in Unicode, for example gaiji, itaiji, or new characters such as novel currency symbols, the alternative text should be a more conventional way of writing the same thing, e.g. using the phonetic hiragana or katakana to give the character's pronunciation.

In this example from 1997, a new-fangled currency symbol that looks like a curly E with two bars in the middle instead of one is represented using an image. The alternative text gives the character's pronunication.

    <p>Only <img src="euro.png" alt="euro ">5.99!

An image should not be used if Unicode characters would serve an identical purpose. Only when the text cannot be directly represented using Unicode, e.g. because of decorations or because the character is not in the Unicode character set (as in the case of gaiji), would an image be appropriate.

If an author is tempted to use an image because their default system font does not support a given character, then Web Fonts are a better solution than images.

###### 4.8.5.1.6 A graphical representation of some of the surrounding text

In many cases, the image is actually just supplementary, and its presence merely reinforces the surrounding text. In these cases, the `alt` attribute must be present but its value must be the empty string.

In general, an image falls into this category if removing the image doesn't make the page any less useful, but including the image makes it a lot easier for users of visual browsers to understand the concept.

A flowchart that repeats the previous paragraph in graphical form:

    <p>The Network passes data to the Input Stream Preprocessor, which
    passes it to the Tokenizer, which passes it to the Tree Construction
    stage. From there, data goes to both the DOM and to Script Execution.
    Script Execution is linked to the DOM, and, using document.write(),
    passes data to the Tokenizer.</p>
    <p><img src="images/parsing-model-overview.png" alt=""></p>

In these cases, it would be wrong to include alternative text that consists of just a caption. If a caption is to be included, then either the `title` attribute can be used, or the `figure` and `figcaption` elements can be used. In the latter case, the image would in fact be a phrase or paragraph with an alternative graphical representation, and would thus require alternative text.

    <!-- Using the title="" attribute -->
    <p>The Network passes data to the Input Stream Preprocessor, which
    passes it to the Tokenizer, which passes it to the Tree Construction
    stage. From there, data goes to both the DOM and to Script Execution.
    Script Execution is linked to the DOM, and, using document.write(),
    passes data to the Tokenizer.</p>
    <p><img src="images/parsing-model-overview.png" alt=""
            title="Flowchart representation of the parsing model."></p>

    <!-- Using <figure> and <figcaption> -->
    <p>The Network passes data to the Input Stream Preprocessor, which
    passes it to the Tokenizer, which passes it to the Tree Construction
    stage. From there, data goes to both the DOM and to Script Execution.
    Script Execution is linked to the DOM, and, using document.write(),
    passes data to the Tokenizer.</p>
    <figure>
     <img src="images/parsing-model-overview.png" alt="The Network leads to
     the Input Stream Preprocessor, which leads to the Tokenizer, which
     leads to the Tree Construction stage. The Tree Construction stage
     leads to two items. The first is Script Execution, which leads via
     document.write() back to the Tokenizer. The second item from which
     Tree Construction leads is the DOM. The DOM is related to the Script
     Execution.">
     <figcaption>Flowchart representation of the parsing model.</figcaption>
    </figure>

    <!-- This is WRONG. Do not do this. Instead, do what the above examples do. -->
    <p>The Network passes data to the Input Stream Preprocessor, which
    passes it to the Tokenizer, which passes it to the Tree Construction
    stage. From there, data goes to both the DOM and to Script Execution.
    Script Execution is linked to the DOM, and, using document.write(),
    passes data to the Tokenizer.</p>
    <p><img src="images/parsing-model-overview.png"
            alt="Flowchart representation of the parsing model."></p>
    <!-- Never put the image's caption in the alt="" attribute! -->

A graph that repeats the previous paragraph in graphical form:

    <p>According to a study covering several billion pages,
    about 62% of documents on the Web in 2007 triggered the Quirks
    rendering mode of Web browsers, about 30% triggered the Almost
    Standards mode, and about 9% triggered the Standards mode.</p>
    <p><img src="rendering-mode-pie-chart.png" alt=""></p>

###### 4.8.5.1.7 A purely decorative image that doesn't add any information

If an image is decorative but isn't especially page-specific — for example an image that forms part of a site-wide design scheme — the image should be specified in the site's CSS, not in the markup of the document.

However, a decorative image that isn't discussed by the surrounding text but still has some relevance can be included in a page using the `img` element. Such images are decorative, but still form part of the content. In these cases, the `alt` attribute must be present but its value must be the empty string.

Examples where the image is purely decorative despite being relevant would include things like a photo of the Black Rock City landscape in a blog post about an event at Burning Man, or an image of a painting inspired by a poem, on a page reciting that poem. The following snippet shows an example of the latter case (only the first verse is included in this snippet):

    <h1>The Lady of Shalott</h1>
    <p><img src="shalott.jpeg" alt=""></p>
    <p>On either side the river lie<br>
    Long fields of barley and of rye,<br>
    That clothe the wold and meet the sky;<br>
    And through the field the road run by<br>
    To many-tower'd Camelot;<br>
    And up and down the people go,<br>
    Gazing where the lilies blow<br>
    Round an island there below,<br>
    The island of Shalott.</p>

###### 4.8.5.1.8 A group of images that form a single larger picture with no links

When a picture has been sliced into smaller image files that are then displayed together to form the complete picture again, one of the images must have its `alt` attribute set as per the relevant rules that would be appropriate for the picture as a whole, and then all the remaining images must have their `alt` attribute set to the empty string.

In the following example, a picture representing a company logo for XYZ Corp has been split into two pieces, the first containing the letters "XYZ" and the second with the word "Corp". The alternative text ("XYZ Corp") is all in the first image.

    <h1><img src="logo1.png" alt="XYZ Corp"><img src="logo2.png" alt=""></h1>

In the following example, a rating is shown as three filled stars and two empty stars. While the alternative text could have been "★★★☆☆", the author has instead decided to more helpfully give the rating in the form "3 out of 5". That is the alternative text of the first image, and the rest have blank alternative text.

    <p>Rating: <meter max=5 value=3><img src="1" alt="3 out of 5"
      ><img src="1" alt=""><img src="1" alt=""><img src="0" alt=""
      ><img src="0" alt=""></meter></p>

###### 4.8.5.1.9 A group of images that form a single larger picture with links

Generally, image maps should be used instead of slicing an image for links.

However, if an image is indeed sliced and any of the components of the sliced picture are the sole contents of links, then one image per link must have alternative text in its `alt` attribute representing the purpose of the link.

In the following example, a picture representing the flying spaghetti monster emblem, with each of the left noodly appendages and the right noodly appendages in different images, so that the user can pick the left side or the right side in an adventure.

    <h1>The Church</h1>
    <p>You come across a flying spaghetti monster. Which side of His
    Noodliness do you wish to reach out for?</p>
    <p><a href="?go=left" ><img src="fsm-left.png"  alt="Left side. "></a
      ><img src="fsm-middle.png" alt=""
      ><a href="?go=right"><img src="fsm-right.png" alt="Right side."></a></p>

###### 4.8.5.1.10 A key part of the content

In some cases, the image is a critical part of the content. This could be the case, for instance, on a page that is part of a photo gallery. The image is the whole point of the page containing it.

How to provide alternative text for an image that is a key part of the content depends on the image's provenance.

The general case

  When it is possible for detailed alternative text to be provided, for example if the image is part of a series of screenshots in a magazine review, or part of a comic strip, or is a photograph in a blog entry about that photograph, text that can serve as a substitute for the image must be given as the contents of the `alt` attribute.

  A screenshot in a gallery of screenshots for a new OS, with some alternative text:

      <figure>
       <img src="KDE%20Light%20desktop.png"
            alt="The desktop is blue, with icons along the left hand side in
                 two columns, reading System, Home, K-Mail, etc. A window is
                 open showing that menus wrap to a second line if they
                 cannot fit in the window. The window has a list of icons
                 along the top, with an address bar below it, a list of
                 icons for tabs along the left edge, a status bar on the
                 bottom, and two panes in the middle. The desktop has a bar
                 at the bottom of the screen with a few buttons, a pager, a
                 list of open applications, and a clock.">
       <figcaption>Screenshot of a KDE desktop.</figcaption>
      </figure>

  A graph in a financial report:

      <img src="sales.gif"
           title="Sales graph"
           alt="From 1998 to 2005, sales increased by the following percentages
           with each year: 624%, 75%, 138%, 40%, 35%, 9%, 21%">

  Note that "sales graph" would be inadequate alternative text for a sales graph. Text that would be a good caption is not generally suitable as replacement text.

Images that defy a complete description

  In certain cases, the nature of the image might be such that providing thorough alternative text is impractical. For example, the image could be indistinct, or could be a complex fractal, or could be a detailed topographical map.

  In these cases, the `alt` attribute must contain some suitable alternative text, but it may be somewhat brief.

  Sometimes there simply is no text that can do justice to an image. For example, there is little that can be said to usefully describe a Rorschach inkblot test. However, a description, even if brief, is still better than nothing:

      <figure>
       <img src="/commons/a/a7/Rorschach1.jpg" alt="A shape with left-right
       symmetry with indistinct edges, with a small gap in the center, two
       larger gaps offset slightly from the center, with two similar gaps
       under them. The outline is wider in the top half than the bottom
       half, with the sides extending upwards higher than the center, and
       the center extending below the sides.">
       <figcaption>A black outline of the first of the ten cards
       in the Rorschach inkblot test.</figcaption>
      </figure>

  Note that the following would be a very bad use of alternative text:

      <!-- This example is wrong. Do not copy it. -->
      <figure>
       <img src="/commons/a/a7/Rorschach1.jpg" alt="A black outline
       of the first of the ten cards in the Rorschach inkblot test.">
       <figcaption>A black outline of the first of the ten cards
       in the Rorschach inkblot test.</figcaption>
      </figure>

  Including the caption in the alternative text like this isn't useful because it effectively duplicates the caption for users who don't have images, taunting them twice yet not helping them any more than if they had only read or heard the caption once.

  Another example of an image that defies full description is a fractal, which, by definition, is infinite in detail.

  The following example shows one possible way of providing alternative text for the full view of an image of the Mandelbrot set.

      <img src="ms1.jpeg" alt="The Mandelbrot set appears as a cardioid with
      its cusp on the real axis in the positive direction, with a smaller
      bulb aligned along the same center line, touching it in the negative
      direction, and with these two shapes being surrounded by smaller bulbs
      of various sizes.">

  Similarly, a photograph of a person's face, for example in a biography, can be considered quite relevant and key to the content, but it can be hard to fully substitute text for

      <section class="bio">
       <h1>A Biography of Isaac Asimov</h1>
       <p>Born <b>Isaak Yudovich Ozimov</b> in 1920, Isaac was a prolific author.</p>
       <p><img src="headpics/asimov.jpeg" alt="Isaac Asimov had dark hair, a tall forehead, and wore glasses.
       Later in life, he wore long white sideburns.">
       <p>Asimov was born in Russia, and moved to the US when he was three years old.</p>
       <p>...
      </section>

  In such cases it is unnecessary (and indeed discouraged) to include a reference to the presence of the image itself in the alternative text, since such text would be redundant with the browser itself reporting the presence of the image. For example, if the alternative text was "A photo of Isaac Asimov", then a conforming user agent might read that out as "(Image) A photo of Isaac Asimov" rather than the more useful "(Image) Isaac Asimov had dark hair, a tall forehead, and wore glasses...".

Images whose contents are not known

  In some unfortunate cases, there might be no alternative text available at all, either because the image is obtained in some automated fashion without any associated alternative text (e.g. a Webcam), or because the page is being generated by a script using user-provided images where the user did not provide suitable or usable alternative text (e.g. photograph sharing sites), or because the author does not himself know what the images represent (e.g. a blind photographer sharing an image on his blog).

  In such cases, the `alt` attribute may be omitted, but one of the following conditions must be met as well:

  - The `img` element is in a `figure` element that contains a `figcaption` element that contains content other than inter-element whitespace, and, ignoring the `figcaption` element and its descendants, the `figure` element has no flow content descendants other than inter-element whitespace and the `img` element.

  - The `title` attribute is present and has a non-empty value.

    Relying on the `title` attribute is currently discouraged as many user agents do not expose the attribute in an accessible manner as required by this specification (e.g. requiring a pointing device such as a mouse to cause a tooltip to appear, which excludes keyboard-only users and touch-only users, such as anyone with a modern phone or tablet).

  Such cases are to be kept to an absolute minimum. If there is even the slightest possibility of the author having the ability to provide real alternative text, then it would not be acceptable to omit the `alt` attribute.

  A photo on a photo-sharing site, if the site received the image with no metadata other than the caption, could be marked up as follows:

      <figure>
       <img src="1100670787_6a7c664aef.jpg">
       <figcaption>Bubbles traveled everywhere with us.</figcaption>
      </figure>

  It would be better, however, if a detailed description of the important parts of the image obtained from the user and included on the page.

  A blind user's blog in which a photo taken by the user is shown. Initially, the user might not have any idea what the photo he took shows:

      <article>
       <h1>I took a photo</h1>
       <p>I went out today and took a photo!</p>
       <figure>
        <img src="photo2.jpeg">
        <figcaption>A photograph taken blindly from my front porch.</figcaption>
       </figure>
      </article>

  Eventually though, the user might obtain a description of the image from his friends and could then include alternative text:

      <article>
       <h1>I took a photo</h1>
       <p>I went out today and took a photo!</p>
       <figure>
        <img src="photo2.jpeg" alt="The photograph shows my squirrel
        feeder hanging from the edge of my roof. It is half full, but there
        are no squirrels around. In the background, out-of-focus trees fill the
        shot. The feeder is made of wood with a metal grate, and it contains
        peanuts. The edge of the roof is wooden too, and is painted white
        with light blue streaks.">
        <figcaption>A photograph taken blindly from my front porch.</figcaption>
       </figure>
      </article>

  Sometimes the entire point of the image is that a textual description is not available, and the user is to provide the description. For instance, the point of a CAPTCHA image is to see if the user can literally read the graphic. Here is one way to mark up a CAPTCHA (note the `title` attribute):

      <p><label>What does this image say?
      <img src="captcha.cgi?id=8934" title="CAPTCHA">
      <input type=text name=captcha></label>
      (If you cannot see the image, you can use an <a
      href="?audio">audio</a> test instead.)</p>

  Another example would be software that displays images and asks for alternative text precisely for the purpose of then writing a page with correct alternative text. Such a page could have a table of images, like this:

      <table>
       <thead>
        <tr> <th> Image <th> Description
       <tbody>
        <tr>
         <td> <img src="2421.png" title="Image 640 by 100, filename 'banner.gif'">
         <td> <input name="alt2421">
        <tr>
         <td> <img src="2422.png" title="Image 200 by 480, filename 'ad3.gif'">
         <td> <input name="alt2422">
      </table>

  Notice that even in this example, as much useful information as possible is still included in the `title` attribute.

  Since some users cannot use images at all (e.g. because they have a very slow connection, or because they are using a text-only browser, or because they are listening to the page being read out by a hands-free automobile voice Web browser, or simply because they are blind), the `alt` attribute is only allowed to be omitted rather than being provided with replacement text when no alternative text is available and none can be made available, as in the above examples. Lack of effort from the part of the author is not an acceptable reason for omitting the `alt` attribute.

###### 4.8.5.1.11 An image not intended for the user

Generally authors should avoid using `img` elements for purposes other than showing images.

If an `img` element is being used for purposes other than showing an image, e.g. as part of a service to count page views, then the `alt` attribute must be the empty string.

In such cases, the `width` and `height` attributes should both be set to zero.

###### 4.8.5.1.12 An image in an e-mail or private document intended for a specific person who is known to be able to view images

This section does not apply to documents that are publicly accessible, or whose target audience is not necessarily personally known to the author, such as documents on a Web site, e-mails sent to public mailing lists, or software documentation.

When an image is included in a private communication (such as an HTML e-mail) aimed at a specific person who is known to be able to view images, the `alt` attribute may be omitted. However, even in such cases authors are strongly urged to include alternative text (as appropriate according to the kind of image involved, as described in the above entries), so that the e-mail is still usable should the user use a mail client that does not support images, or should the document be forwarded on to other users whose abilities might not include easily seeing images.

###### 4.8.5.1.13 Guidance for markup generators

Markup generators (such as WYSIWYG authoring tools) should, wherever possible, obtain alternative text from their users. However, it is recognised that in many cases, this will not be possible.

For images that are the sole contents of links, markup generators should examine the link target to determine the title of the target, or the URL of the target, and use information obtained in this manner as the alternative text.

For images that have captions, markup generators should use the `figure` and `figcaption` elements, or the `title` attribute, to provide the image's caption.

As a last resort, implementors should either set the `alt` attribute to the empty string, under the assumption that the image is a purely decorative image that doesn't add any information but is still specific to the surrounding content, or omit the `alt` attribute altogether, under the assumption that the image is a key part of the content.

Markup generators may specify a `generator-unable-to-provide-required-alt` attribute on `img` elements for which they have been unable to obtain alternative text and for which they have therefore omitted the `alt` attribute. The value of this attribute must be the empty string. Documents containing such attributes are not conforming, but conformance checkers will silently ignore this error.

This is intended to avoid markup generators from being pressured into replacing the error of omitting the `alt` attribute with the even more egregious error of providing phony alternative text, because state-of-the-art automated conformance checkers cannot distinguish phony alternative text from correct alternative text.

Markup generators should generally avoid using the image's own file name as the alternative text. Similarly, markup generators should avoid generating alternative text from any content that will be equally available to presentation user agents (e.g. Web browsers).

This is because once a page is generated, it will typically not be updated, whereas the browsers that later read the page can be updated by the user, therefore the browser is likely to have more up-to-date and finely-tuned heuristics than the markup generator did when generating the page.

###### 4.8.5.1.14 Guidance for conformance checkers

A conformance checker must report the lack of an `alt` attribute as an error unless one of the conditions listed below applies:

- The `img` element is in a `figure` element that satisfies the conditions described above.

- The `img` element has a `title` attribute with a value that is not the empty string (also as described above).

- The conformance checker has been configured to assume that the document is an e-mail or document intended for a specific person who is known to be able to view images.

- The `img` element has a (non-conforming) `generator-unable-to-provide-required-alt` attribute whose value is the empty string. A conformance checker that is not reporting the lack of an `alt` attribute as an error must also not report the presence of the empty `generator-unable-to-provide-required-alt` attribute as an error. (This case does not represent a case where the document is conforming, only that the generator could not determine appropriate alternative text — validators are not required to show an error in this case, because such an error might encourage markup generators to include bogus alternative text purely in an attempt to silence validators. Naturally, conformance checkers may report the lack of an `alt` attribute as an error even in the presence of the `generator-unable-to-provide-required-alt` attribute; for example, there could be a user option to report all conformance errors even those that might be the more or less inevitable result of using a markup generator.)

#### 4.8.6 The `iframe` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Embedded content.
  Interactive content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where embedded content is expected.
Content model:
  Text that conforms to the requirements given in the prose.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `src` — Address of the resource
  `srcdoc` — A document to render in the `iframe`
  `name` — Name of nested browsing context
  `sandbox` — Security rules for nested content
  `seamless` — Whether to apply the document's styles to the nested content
  `allowfullscreen` — Whether to allow the `iframe`'s contents to use `requestFullscreen()`
  `width` — Horizontal dimension
  `height` — Vertical dimension
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLIFrameElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString src;
                 attribute DOMString srcdoc;
                 attribute DOMString name;
        [PutForwards=value] readonly attribute DOMSettableTokenList sandbox;
                 attribute boolean seamless;
                 attribute boolean allowFullscreen;
                 attribute DOMString width;
                 attribute DOMString height;
        readonly attribute Document? contentDocument;
        readonly attribute WindowProxy? contentWindow;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `iframe` element represents a nested browsing context.

The `src` attribute gives the address of a page that the nested browsing context is to contain. The attribute, if present, must be a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces. If the `itemprop` is specified on an `iframe` element, then the `src` attribute must also be specified.

The `srcdoc` attribute gives the content of the page that the nested browsing context is to contain. The value of the attribute is the source of an `iframe` `srcdoc` document.

For `iframe` elements in HTML documents, the `srcdoc` attribute, if present, must have a value using the HTML syntax that consists of the following syntactic components, in the given order:

1. Any number of comments and space characters.
2. Optionally, a DOCTYPE.
3. Any number of comments and space characters.
4. The root element, in the form of an `html` element.
5. Any number of comments and space characters.

For `iframe` elements in XML documents, the `srcdoc` attribute, if present, must have a value that matches the production labeled `document` in the XML specification. [XML]

Here a blog uses the `srcdoc` attribute in conjunction with the `sandbox` and `seamless` attributes described below to provide users of user agents that support this feature with an extra layer of protection from script injection in the blog post comments:

    <article>
     <h1>I got my own magazine!</h1>
     <p>After much effort, I've finally found a publisher, and so now I
     have my own magazine! Isn't that awesome?! The first issue will come
     out in September, and we have articles about getting food, and about
     getting in boxes, it's going to be great!</p>
     <footer>
      <p>Written by <a href="/users/cap">cap</a>, 1 hour ago.
     </footer>
     <article>
      <footer> Thirteen minutes ago, <a href="/users/ch">ch</a> wrote: </footer>
      <iframe seamless sandbox srcdoc="<p>did you get a cover picture yet?"></iframe>
     </article>
     <article>
      <footer> Nine minutes ago, <a href="/users/cap">cap</a> wrote: </footer>
      <iframe seamless sandbox srcdoc="<p>Yeah, you can see it <a href=&quot;/gallery?mode=cover&amp;amp;page=1&quot;>in my gallery</a>."></iframe>
     </article>
     <article>
      <footer> Five minutes ago, <a href="/users/ch">ch</a> wrote: </footer>
      <iframe seamless sandbox srcdoc="<p>hey that's earl's table.
    <p>you should get earl&amp;amp;me on the next cover."></iframe>
     </article>

Notice the way that quotes have to be escaped (otherwise the `srcdoc` attribute would end prematurely), and the way raw ampersands (e.g. in URLs or in prose) mentioned in the sandboxed content have to be doubly escaped — once so that the ampersand is preserved when originally parsing the `srcdoc` attribute, and once more to prevent the ampersand from being misinterpreted when parsing the sandboxed content.

Furthermore, notice that since the DOCTYPE is optional in `iframe` `srcdoc` documents, and the `html`, `head`, and `body` elements have optional start and end tags, and the `title` element is also optional in `iframe` `srcdoc` documents, the markup in a `srcdoc` attribute can be relatively succint despite representing an entire document, since only the contents of the `body` element need appear literally in the syntax. The other elements are still present, but only by implication.

In the HTML syntax, authors need only remember to use U+0022 QUOTATION MARK characters (") to wrap the attribute contents and then to escape all U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (") and U+0026 AMPERSAND (&) characters, and to specify the `sandbox` attribute, to ensure safe embedding of content.

Due to restrictions of the XHTML syntax, in XML the U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character (<) needs to be escaped as well. In order to prevent attribute-value normalization, some of XML's whitespace characters — specifically U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab), U+000A LINE FEED (LF), and U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) — also need to be escaped. [XML]

If the `src` attribute and the `srcdoc` attribute are both specified together, the `srcdoc` attribute takes priority. This allows authors to provide a fallback URL for legacy user agents that do not support the `srcdoc` attribute.

When an `iframe` element is inserted into a document that has a browsing context, the user agent must create a nested browsing context, and then process the `iframe` attributes for the "first time".

When an `iframe` element is removed from a document, the user agent must discard the nested browsing context, if any.

This happens without any `unload` events firing (the nested browsing context and its `Document` are discarded, not data-x="unload a document">unloaded).

Whenever an `iframe` element with a nested browsing context has its `srcdoc` attribute set, changed, or removed, the user agent must process the `iframe` attributes.

Similarly, whenever an `iframe` element with a nested browsing context but with no `srcdoc` attribute specified has its `src` attribute set, changed, or removed, the user agent must process the `iframe` attributes.

When the user agent is to process the `iframe` attributes, it must run the first appropriate steps from the following list:

If the `srcdoc` attribute is specified

  Navigate the element's child browsing context to a resource whose Content-Type is `text/html`, whose URL is `about:srcdoc`, and whose data consists of the value of the attribute. The resulting `Document` must be considered an `iframe` `srcdoc` document.

Otherwise, if the element has no `src` attribute specified, and the user agent is processing the `iframe`'s attributes for the "first time"

  Queue a task to run the iframe load event steps.

  The task source for this task is the DOM manipulation task source.

Otherwise

  1. If the value of the `src` attribute is missing, or its value is the empty string, let url be the string "`about:blank`".

     Otherwise, resolve the value of the `src` attribute, relative to the `iframe` element.

     If that is not successful, then let url be the string "`about:blank`". Otherwise, let url be the resulting absolute URL.

  2. If there exists an ancestor browsing context whose active document's address, ignoring fragment identifiers, is equal to url, then abort these steps.

  3. Navigate the element's child browsing context to url.

Any navigation required of the user agent in the process the `iframe` attributes algorithm must be completed as an explicit self-navigation override and with the `iframe` element's node document's browsing context as the source browsing context.

Furthermore, if the active document of the element's child browsing context before such a navigation was not completely loaded at the time of the new navigation, then the navigation must be completed with replacement enabled.

Similarly, if the child browsing context's session history contained only one `Document` when the process the `iframe` attributes algorithm was invoked, and that was the `about:blank` `Document` created when the child browsing context was created, then any navigation required of the user agent in that algorithm must be completed with replacement enabled.

When a `Document` in an `iframe` is marked as completely loaded, the user agent must synchronously run the iframe load event steps.

A `load` event is also fired at the `iframe` element when it is created if no other data is loaded in it.

Each `Document` has an iframe load in progress flag and a mute iframe load flag. When a `Document` is created, these flags must be unset for that `Document`.

The iframe load event steps are as follows:

1. Let child document be the active document of the `iframe` element's nested browsing context.

2. If child document has its mute iframe load flag set, abort these steps.

3. Set child document's iframe load in progress flag.

4. Fire a simple event named `load` at the `iframe` element.

5. Unset child document's iframe load in progress flag.

This, in conjunction with scripting, can be used to probe the URL space of the local network's HTTP servers. User agents may implement cross-origin access control policies that are stricter than those described above to mitigate this attack, but unfortunately such policies are typically not compatible with existing Web content.

When the `iframe`'s browsing context's active document is not ready for post-load tasks, and when anything in the `iframe` is delaying the load event of the `iframe`'s browsing context's active document, and when the `iframe`'s browsing context is in the delaying `load` events mode, the `iframe` must delay the load event of its document.

If, during the handling of the `load` event, the browsing context in the `iframe` is again navigated, that will further delay the load event.

If, when the element is created, the `srcdoc` attribute is not set, and the `src` attribute is either also not set or set but its value cannot be resolved, the browsing context will remain at the initial `about:blank` page.

If the user navigates away from this page, the `iframe`'s corresponding `WindowProxy` object will proxy new `Window` objects for new `Document` objects, but the `src` attribute will not change.

The `name` attribute, if present, must be a valid browsing context name. The given value is used to name the nested browsing context. When the browsing context is created, if the attribute is present, the browsing context name must be set to the value of this attribute; otherwise, the browsing context name must be set to the empty string.

Whenever the `name` attribute is set, the nested browsing context's name must be changed to the new value. If the attribute is removed, the browsing context name must be set to the empty string.

The `sandbox` attribute, when specified, enables a set of extra restrictions on any content hosted by the `iframe`. Its value must be an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are ASCII case-insensitive. The allowed values are `allow-forms`, `allow-pointer-lock`, `allow-popups`, `allow-same-origin`, `allow-scripts`, and `allow-top-navigation`.

When the attribute is set, the content is treated as being from a unique origin, forms, scripts, and various potentially annoying APIs are disabled, links are prevented from targeting other browsing contexts, and plugins are secured. The `allow-same-origin` keyword causes the content to be treated as being from its real origin instead of forcing it into a unique origin; the `allow-top-navigation` keyword allows the content to navigate its top-level browsing context; and the `allow-forms`, `allow-pointer-lock`, `allow-popups` and `allow-scripts` keywords re-enable forms, the pointer lock API, popups, and scripts respectively. [POINTERLOCK]

Setting both the `allow-scripts` and `allow-same-origin` keywords together when the embedded page has the same origin as the page containing the `iframe` allows the embedded page to simply remove the `sandbox` attribute and then reload itself, effectively breaking out of the sandbox altogether.

These flags only take effect when the nested browsing context of the `iframe` is navigated. Removing them, or removing the entire `sandbox` attribute, has no effect on an already-loaded page.

Potentially hostile files should not be served from the same server as the file containing the `iframe` element. Sandboxing hostile content is of minimal help if an attacker can convince the user to just visit the hostile content directly, rather than in the `iframe`. To limit the damage that can be caused by hostile HTML content, it should be served from a separate dedicated domain. Using a different domain ensures that scripts in the files are unable to attack the site, even if the user is tricked into visiting those pages directly, without the protection of the `sandbox` attribute.

When an `iframe` element with a `sandbox` attribute has its nested browsing context created (before the initial `about:blank` `Document` is created), and when an `iframe` element's `sandbox` attribute is set or changed while it has a nested browsing context, the user agent must parse the sandboxing directive using the attribute's value as the input, the `iframe` element's nested browsing context's `iframe` sandboxing flag set as the output, and, if the `iframe` has an `allowfullscreen` attribute, the allow fullscreen flag.

When an `iframe` element's `sandbox` attribute is removed while it has a nested browsing context, the user agent must empty the `iframe` element's nested browsing context's `iframe` sandboxing flag set as the output.

In this example, some completely-unknown, potentially hostile, user-provided HTML content is embedded in a page. Because it is served from a separate domain, it is affected by all the normal cross-site restrictions. In addition, the embedded page has scripting disabled, plugins disabled, forms disabled, and it cannot navigate any frames or windows other than itself (or any frames or windows it itself embeds).

    <p>We're not scared of you! Here is your content, unedited:</p>
    <iframe sandbox src="http://usercontent.example.net/getusercontent.cgi?id=12193"></iframe>

It is important to use a separate domain so that if the attacker convinces the user to visit that page directly, the page doesn't run in the context of the site's origin, which would make the user vulnerable to any attack found in the page.

In this example, a gadget from another site is embedded. The gadget has scripting and forms enabled, and the origin sandbox restrictions are lifted, allowing the gadget to communicate with its originating server. The sandbox is still useful, however, as it disables plugins and popups, thus reducing the risk of the user being exposed to malware and other annoyances.

    <iframe sandbox="allow-same-origin allow-forms allow-scripts"
            src="http://maps.example.com/embedded.html"></iframe>

Suppose a file A contained the following fragment:

    <iframe sandbox="allow-same-origin allow-forms" src=B></iframe>

Suppose that file B contained an iframe also:

    <iframe sandbox="allow-scripts" src=C></iframe>

Further, suppose that file C contained a link:

    <a href=D>Link</a>

For this example, suppose all the files were served as `text/html`.

Page C in this scenario has all the sandboxing flags set. Scripts are disabled, because the `iframe` in A has scripts disabled, and this overrides the `allow-scripts` keyword set on the `iframe` in B. Forms are also disabled, because the inner `iframe` (in B) does not have the `allow-forms` keyword set.

Suppose now that a script in A removes all the `sandbox` attributes in A and B. This would change nothing immediately. If the user clicked the link in C, loading page D into the `iframe` in B, page D would now act as if the `iframe` in B had the `allow-same-origin` and `allow-forms` keywords set, because that was the state of the nested browsing context in the `iframe` in A when page B was loaded.

Generally speaking, dynamically removing or changing the `sandbox` attribute is ill-advised, because it can make it quite hard to reason about what will be allowed and what will not.

The `seamless` attribute is a boolean attribute. When specified, it indicates that the `iframe` element's browsing context is to be rendered in a manner that makes it appear to be part of the containing document (seamlessly included in the parent document).

An HTML inclusion is effected using this attribute as in the following example. In this case, the inclusion is of a site-wide navigation bar. Any links in the `iframe` will, in new user agents, be automatically opened in the `iframe`'s parent browsing context; for legacy user agents, the site could also include a `base` element with a `target` attribute with the value `_parent`. Similarly, in new user agents the styles of the parent page will be automatically applied to the contents of the frame, but to support legacy user agents authors might wish to include the styles explicitly.

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Mirror Mirror — MovieInfo™</title>
    <header>
     <hgroup>
      <h1>Mirror Mirror</h1>
      <h2>Part of the MovieInfo™ Database</h2>
     </hgroup>
     <nav>
      <iframe seamless src="nav.inc"></iframe>
     </nav>
    </header>
    ...

An `iframe` element is said to be in seamless mode when all of the following conditions are met:

- The `seamless` attribute is set on the `iframe` element, and
- The `iframe` element's owner `Document`'s active sandboxing flag set does not have the sandboxed seamless iframes flag set, and
- Either:
  - The browsing context's active document has the same origin as the `iframe` element's node document, or
  - The browsing context's active document's address has the same origin as the `iframe` element's node document, or
  - The browsing context's active document is an `iframe` `srcdoc` document.

When an `iframe` element is in seamless mode, the following requirements apply:

- The user agent must set the seamless browsing context flag to true for that browsing context. This will cause links to open in the parent browsing context unless an explicit self-navigation override is used (`target="_self"`).

- Media queries in the context of the `iframe`'s browsing context (e.g. on `media` attributes of `style` elements in `Document`s in that `iframe`) must be evaluated with respect to the nearest ancestor browsing context that is not itself being nested through an `iframe` that is in seamless mode. [MQ]

- In a CSS-supporting user agent: the user agent must add all the style sheets that apply to the `iframe` element to the cascade of the active document of the `iframe` element's nested browsing context, at the appropriate cascade levels, before any style sheets specified by the document itself.

- In a CSS-supporting user agent: the user agent must, for the purpose of CSS property inheritance only, treat the root element of the active document of the `iframe` element's nested browsing context as being a child of the `iframe` element. (Thus inherited properties on the root element of the document in the `iframe` will inherit the computed values of those properties on the `iframe` element instead of taking their initial values.)

- In visual media, in a CSS-supporting user agent: the user agent should set the intrinsic width of the `iframe` to the width that the element would have if it was a non-replaced block-level element with 'width: auto', unless that width would be zero (e.g. if the element is floating or absolutely positioned), in which case the user agent should set the intrinsic width of the `iframe` to the shrink-to-fit width of the root element (if any) of the content rendered in the `iframe`.

- In visual media, in a CSS-supporting user agent: the user agent should set the intrinsic height of the `iframe` to the shortest height that would make the content rendered in the `iframe` at its current width (as given in the previous bullet point) have no scrollable overflow at its bottom edge. Scrollable overflow is any overflow that would increase the range to which a scrollbar or other scrolling mechanism can scroll.

- In visual media, in a CSS-supporting user agent: the user agent must force the height of the initial containing block of the active document of the nested browsing context of the `iframe` to zero.

  This is intended to get around the otherwise circular dependency of percentage dimensions that depend on the height of the containing block, thus affecting the height of the document's bounding box, thus affecting the height of the viewport, thus affecting the size of the initial containing block.

- In speech media, the user agent should render the nested browsing context without announcing that it is a separate document.

- User agents should, in general, act as if the active document of the `iframe`'s nested browsing context was part of the document that the `iframe` is in, if any.

  For example if the user agent supports listing all the links in a document, links in "seamlessly" nested documents would be included in that list without being significantly distinguished from links in the document itself.

- The nested browsing context's `Window` object's cross-boundary event parent is the browsing context container. [DOM]

If the attribute is not specified, or if the origin conditions listed above are not met, then the user agent should render the nested browsing context in a manner that is clearly distinguishable as a separate browsing context, and the seamless browsing context flag must be set to false for that browsing context.

It is important that user agents recheck the above conditions whenever the active document of the nested browsing context of the `iframe` changes, such that the seamless browsing context flag gets unset if the nested browsing context is navigated to another origin.

The attribute can be set or removed dynamically, with the rendering updating in tandem.

The `contenteditable` attribute does not propagate into `seamless` `iframe`s.

The `allowfullscreen` attribute is a boolean attribute. When specified, it indicates that `Document` objects in the `iframe` element's browsing context are to be allowed to use `requestFullscreen()` (if it's not blocked for other reasons, e.g. there is another ancestor `iframe` without this attribute set).

Here, an `iframe` is used to embed a player from a video site. The `allowfullscreen` attribute is needed to enable the player to show its video full-screen.

    <article>
     <header>
      <p><img src="/usericons/1627591962735"> <b>Fred Flintstone</b></p>
      <p><a href="/posts/3095182851" rel=bookmark>12:44</a> — <a href="#acl-3095182851">Private Post</a></p>
     </header>
     <main>
      <p>Check out my new ride!</p>
      <iframe src="https://video.example.com/embed?id=92469812" allowfullscreen></iframe>
     </main>
    </article>

The `iframe` element supports dimension attributes for cases where the embedded content has specific dimensions (e.g. ad units have well-defined dimensions).

An `iframe` element never has fallback content, as it will always create a nested browsing context, regardless of whether the specified initial contents are successfully used.

Descendants of `iframe` elements represent nothing. (In legacy user agents that do not support `iframe` elements, the contents would be parsed as markup that could act as fallback content.)

When used in HTML documents, the allowed content model of `iframe` elements is text, except that invoking the HTML fragment parsing algorithm with the `iframe` element as the context element and the text contents as the input must result in a list of nodes that are all phrasing content, with no parse errors having occurred, with no `script` elements being anywhere in the list or as descendants of elements in the list, and with all the elements in the list (including their descendants) being themselves conforming.

The `iframe` element must be empty in XML documents.

The HTML parser treats markup inside `iframe` elements as text.

The IDL attributes `src`, `srcdoc`, `name`, `sandbox`, and `seamless` must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `allowFullscreen` IDL attribute must reflect the `allowfullscreen` content attribute.

The `contentDocument` IDL attribute must return the `Document` object of the active document of the `iframe` element's nested browsing context, if any and if its effective script origin is the same origin as the effective script origin specified by the incumbent settings object, or null otherwise.

The `contentWindow` IDL attribute must return the `WindowProxy` object of the `iframe` element's nested browsing context, if any, or null otherwise.

Here is an example of a page using an `iframe` to include advertising from an advertising broker:

    <iframe src="http://ads.example.com/?customerid=923513721&amp;format=banner"
            width="468" height="60"></iframe>

#### 4.8.7 The `embed` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Embedded content.
  Interactive content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where embedded content is expected.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `src` — Address of the resource
  `type` — Type of embedded resource
  `width` — Horizontal dimension
  `height` — Vertical dimension
  Any other attribute that has no namespace (see prose).
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLEmbedElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString src;
                 attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute DOMString width;
                 attribute DOMString height;
        Document getSVGDocument();
        legacycaller any (any... arguments);

        // also has obsolete members
      };

  Depending on the type of content instantiated by the `embed` element, the node may also support other interfaces.

The `embed` element provides an integration point for an external (typically non-HTML) application or interactive content.

The `src` attribute gives the address of the resource being embedded. The attribute, if present, must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

If the `itemprop` attribute is specified on an `embed` element, then the `src` attribute must also be specified.

The `type` attribute, if present, gives the MIME type by which the plugin to instantiate is selected. The value must be a valid MIME type. If both the `type` attribute and the `src` attribute are present, then the `type` attribute must specify the same type as the explicit Content-Type metadata of the resource given by the `src` attribute.

While any of the following conditions are occurring, any plugin instantiated for the element must be removed, and the `embed` element represents nothing:

- The element has neither a `src` attribute nor a `type` attribute.

- The element has a media element ancestor.

- The element has an ancestor `object` element that is not showing its fallback content.

An `embed` element is said to be potentially active when the following conditions are all met simultaneously:

- The element is in a `Document` or was in a `Document` the last time the event loop reached step 1.
- The element's node document is fully active.
- The element has either a `src` attribute set or a `type` attribute set (or both).
- The element's `src` attribute is either absent or its value is not the empty string.
- The element is not a descendant of a media element.
- The element is not a descendant of an `object` element that is not showing its fallback content.
- The element is being rendered, or was being rendered the last time the event loop reached step 1.

Whenever an `embed` element that was not potentially active becomes potentially active, and whenever a potentially active `embed` element that is remaining potentially active and has its `src` attribute set, changed, or removed or its `type` attribute set, changed, or removed, the user agent must queue a task using the embed task source to run the `embed` element setup steps.

The `embed` element setup steps are as follows:

1. If another task has since been queued to run the `embed` element setup steps for this element, then abort these steps.

2. If the element has a `src` attribute set

     The user agent must resolve the value of the element's `src` attribute, relative to the element. If that is successful, the user agent should fetch the resulting absolute URL, from the element's browsing context scope origin if it has one. The task that is queued by the networking task source once the resource has been fetched must run the following steps:

     1. If another task has since been queued to run the `embed` element setup steps for this element, then abort these steps.

     2. Determine the type of the content being embedded, as follows (stopping at the first substep that determines the type):

        1. If the element has a `type` attribute, and that attribute's value is a type that a plugin supports, then the value of the `type` attribute is the content's type.

        2. Otherwise, if applying the URL parser algorithm to the URL of the specified resource (after any redirects) results in a parsed URL whose path component matches a pattern that a plugin supports, then the content's type is the type that that plugin can handle.

           For example, a plugin might say that it can handle resources with path components that end with the four character string "`.swf`".

        3. Otherwise, if the specified resource has explicit Content-Type metadata, then that is the content's type.

        4. Otherwise, the content has no type and there can be no appropriate plugin for it.

     3. If the previous step determined that the content's type is `image/svg+xml`, then run the following substeps:

        1. If the `embed` element is not associated with a nested browsing context, associate the element with a newly created nested browsing context, and, if the element has a `name` attribute, set the browsing context name of the element's nested browsing context to the value of this attribute.

        2. Navigate the nested browsing context to the fetched resource, with replacement enabled, and with the `embed` element's node document's browsing context as the source browsing context. (The `src` attribute of the `embed` element doesn't get updated if the browsing context gets further navigated to other locations.)

        3. The `embed` element now represents its associated nested browsing context.

     4. Otherwise, find and instantiate an appropriate plugin based on the content's type, and hand that plugin the content of the resource, replacing any previously instantiated plugin for the element. The `embed` element now represents this plugin instance.

     5. Once the resource or plugin has completely loaded, queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the element.

     Whether the resource is fetched successfully or not (e.g. whether the response code was a 2xx code or equivalent) must be ignored when determining the content's type and when handing the resource to the plugin.

     This allows servers to return data for plugins even with error responses (e.g. HTTP 500 Internal Server Error codes can still contain plugin data).

     Fetching the resource must delay the load event of the element's node document.

   If the element has no `src` attribute set

     The user agent should find and instantiate an appropriate plugin based on the value of the `type` attribute. The `embed` element now represents this plugin instance.

     Once the plugin is completely loaded, queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the element.

The `embed` element has no fallback content. If the user agent can't find a suitable plugin when attempting to find and instantiate one for the algorithm above, then the user agent must use a default plugin. This default could be as simple as saying "Unsupported Format".

Whenever an `embed` element that was potentially active stops being potentially active, any plugin that had been instantiated for that element must be unloaded.

When a plugin is to be instantiated but it cannot be secured and the sandboxed plugins browsing context flag is set on the `embed` element's node document's active sandboxing flag set, then the user agent must not instantiate the plugin, and must instead render the `embed` element in a manner that conveys that the plugin was disabled. The user agent may offer the user the option to override the sandbox and instantiate the plugin anyway; if the user invokes such an option, the user agent must act as if the conditions above did not apply for the purposes of this element.

Plugins that cannot be secured are disabled in sandboxed browsing contexts because they might not honor the restrictions imposed by the sandbox (e.g. they might allow scripting even when scripting in the sandbox is disabled). User agents should convey the danger of overriding the sandbox to the user if an option to do so is provided.

When an `embed` element represents a nested browsing context: if the `embed` element's nested browsing context's active document is not ready for post-load tasks, and when anything is delaying the load event of the `embed` element's browsing context's active document, and when the `embed` element's browsing context is in the delaying `load` events mode, the `embed` must delay the load event of its document.

The task source for the tasks mentioned in this section is the DOM manipulation task source.

Any namespace-less attribute other than `name`, `align`, `hspace`, and `vspace` may be specified on the `embed` element, so long as its name is XML-compatible and contains no uppercase ASCII letters. These attributes are then passed as parameters to the plugin.

All attributes in HTML documents get lowercased automatically, so the restriction on uppercase letters doesn't affect such documents.

The four exceptions are to exclude legacy attributes that have side-effects beyond just sending parameters to the plugin.

The user agent should pass the names and values of all the attributes of the `embed` element that have no namespace to the plugin used, when one is instantiated.

The `HTMLEmbedElement` object representing the element must expose the scriptable interface of the plugin instantiated for the `embed` element, if any. At a minimum, this interface must implement the legacy caller operation. (It is suggested that the default behavior of this legacy caller operation, e.g. the behavior of the default plugin's legacy caller operation, be to throw a `NotSupportedError` exception.)

The `embed` element supports dimension attributes.

doc = embed . `getSVGDocument`()

  Returns the `Document` object, in the case of `embed` being used to embed SVG images.

The `getSVGDocument()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the element has no nested browsing context, then return null and abort these steps.

2. If the active document of the nested browsing context does not have the same effective script origin as the `embed` element's node document, then return null and abort these steps.

3. If the nested browsing context's active document was created by the page load processing model for XML files section because the sniffed type of the resource in the navigate algorithm was `image/svg+xml`, then return that `Document` object and abort these steps.

4. Otherwise, return null.

The IDL attributes `src` and `type` each must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

Here's a way to embed a resource that requires a proprietary plugin, like Flash:

    <embed src="catgame.swf">

If the user does not have the plugin (for example if the plugin vendor doesn't support the user's platform), then the user will be unable to use the resource.

To pass the plugin a parameter "quality" with the value "high", an attribute can be specified:

    <embed src="catgame.swf" quality="high">

This would be equivalent to the following, when using an `object` element instead:

    <object data="catgame.swf">
     <param name="quality" value="high">
    </object>

#### 4.8.8 The `object` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Embedded content.
  If the element has a `usemap` attribute: Interactive content.
  Listed, submittable, and reassociateable form-associated element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where embedded content is expected.
Content model:
  Zero or more `param` elements, then, transparent.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `data` — Address of the resource
  `type` — Type of embedded resource
  `typemustmatch` — Whether the `type` attribute and the Content-Type value need to match for the resource to be used
  `name` — Name of nested browsing context
  `usemap` — Name of image map to use
  `form` — Associates the control with a `form` element
  `width` — Horizontal dimension
  `height` — Vertical dimension
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLObjectElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString data;
                 attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute boolean typeMustMatch;
                 attribute DOMString name;
                 attribute DOMString useMap;
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
                 attribute DOMString width;
                 attribute DOMString height;
        readonly attribute Document? contentDocument;
        readonly attribute WindowProxy? contentWindow;

        readonly attribute boolean willValidate;
        readonly attribute ValidityState validity;
        readonly attribute DOMString validationMessage;
        boolean checkValidity();
        boolean reportValidity();
        void setCustomValidity(DOMString error);

        legacycaller any (any... arguments);

        // also has obsolete members
      };

  Depending on the type of content instantiated by the `object` element, the node also supports other interfaces.

The `object` element can represent an external resource, which, depending on the type of the resource, will either be treated as an image, as a nested browsing context, or as an external resource to be processed by a plugin.

The `data` attribute, if present, specifies the address of the resource. If present, the attribute must be a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

Authors who reference resources from other origins that they do not trust are urged to use the `typemustmatch` attribute defined below. Without that attribute, it is possible in certain cases for an attacker on the remote host to use the plugin mechanism to run arbitrary scripts, even if the author has used features such as the Flash "allowScriptAccess" parameter.

The `type` attribute, if present, specifies the type of the resource. If present, the attribute must be a valid MIME type.

At least one of either the `data` attribute or the `type` attribute must be present.

If the `itemprop` attribute is specified on an `object` element, then the `data` attribute must also be specified.

The `typemustmatch` attribute is a boolean attribute whose presence indicates that the resource specified by the `data` attribute is only to be used if the value of the `type` attribute and the Content-Type of the aforementioned resource match.

The `typemustmatch` attribute must not be specified unless both the `data` attribute and the `type` attribute are present.

The `name` attribute, if present, must be a valid browsing context name. The given value is used to name the nested browsing context, if applicable.

Whenever one of the following conditions occur:

- the element is created,
- the element is popped off the stack of open elements of an HTML parser or XML parser,
- the element is not on the stack of open elements of an HTML parser or XML parser, and it is either inserted into a document or removed from a document,
- the element's node document changes whether it is fully active,
- one of the element's ancestor `object` elements changes to or from showing its fallback content,
- the element's `classid` attribute is set, changed, or removed,
- the element's `classid` attribute is not present, and its `data` attribute is set, changed, or removed,
- neither the element's `classid` attribute nor its `data` attribute are present, and its `type` attribute is set, changed, or removed,
- the element changes from being rendered to not being rendered, or vice versa,

...the user agent must queue a task to run the following steps to (re)determine what the `object` element represents. This task being queued or actively running must delay the load event of the element's node document.

1. If the user has indicated a preference that this `object` element's fallback content be shown instead of the element's usual behavior, then jump to the step below labeled fallback.

   For example, a user could ask for the element's fallback content to be shown because that content uses a format that the user finds more accessible.

2. If the element has an ancestor media element, or has an ancestor `object` element that is not showing its fallback content, or if the element is not in a `Document` with a browsing context, or if the element's node document is not fully active, or if the element is still in the stack of open elements of an HTML parser or XML parser, or if the element is not being rendered, then jump to the step below labeled fallback.

3. If the `classid` attribute is present, and has a value that isn't the empty string, then: if the user agent can find a plugin suitable according to the value of the `classid` attribute, and either plugins aren't being sandboxed or that plugin can be secured, then that plugin should be used, and the value of the `data` attribute, if any, should be passed to the plugin. If no suitable plugin can be found, or if the plugin reports an error, jump to the step below labeled fallback.

4. If the `data` attribute is present and its value is not the empty string, then:

   1. If the `type` attribute is present and its value is not a type that the user agent supports, and is not a type that the user agent can find a plugin for, then the user agent may jump to the step below labeled fallback without fetching the content to examine its real type.

   2. Resolve the URL specified by the `data` attribute, relative to the element.

   3. If that failed, fire a simple event named `error` at the element, then jump to the step below labeled fallback.

   4. Fetch the resulting absolute URL, from the element's browsing context scope origin if it has one.

      Fetching the resource must delay the load event of the element's node document until the task that is queued by the networking task source once the resource has been fetched (defined next) has been run.

      For the purposes of the application cache networking model, this fetch operation is not for a child browsing context (though it might end up being used for one after all, as defined below).

   5. If the resource is not yet available (e.g. because the resource was not available in the cache, so that loading the resource required making a request over the network), then jump to the step below labeled fallback. The task that is queued by the networking task source once the resource is available must restart this algorithm from this step. Resources can load incrementally; user agents may opt to consider a resource "available" whenever enough data has been obtained to begin processing the resource.

   6. If the load failed (e.g. there was an HTTP 404 error, there was a DNS error), fire a simple event named `error` at the element, then jump to the step below labeled fallback.

   7. Determine the resource type, as follows:

      1. Let the resource type be unknown.

      2. If the `object` element has a `type` attribute and a `typemustmatch` attribute, and the resource has associated Content-Type metadata, and the type specified in the resource's Content-Type metadata is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the value of the element's `type` attribute, then let resource type be that type and jump to the step below labeled handler.

      3. If the `object` element has a `typemustmatch` attribute, jump to the step below labeled handler.

      4. If the user agent is configured to strictly obey Content-Type headers for this resource, and the resource has associated Content-Type metadata, then let the resource type be the type specified in the resource's Content-Type metadata, and jump to the step below labeled handler.

         This can introduce a vulnerability, wherein a site is trying to embed a resource that uses a particular plugin, but the remote site overrides that and instead furnishes the user agent with a resource that triggers a different plugin with different security characteristics.

      5. If there is a `type` attribute present on the `object` element, and that attribute's value is not a type that the user agent supports, but it is a type that a plugin supports, then let the resource type be the type specified in that `type` attribute, and jump to the step below labeled handler.

      6. Run the appropriate set of steps from the following list:

         If the resource has associated Content-Type metadata

           1. Let binary be false.

           2. If the type specified in the resource's Content-Type metadata is "`text/plain`", and the result of applying the rules for distinguishing if a resource is text or binary to the resource is that the resource is not `text/plain`, then set binary to true.

           3. If the type specified in the resource's Content-Type metadata is "`application/octet-stream`", then set binary to true.

           4. If binary is false, then let the resource type be the type specified in the resource's Content-Type metadata, and jump to the step below labeled handler.

           5. If there is a `type` attribute present on the `object` element, and its value is not `application/octet-stream`, then run the following steps:

              1. If the attribute's value is a type that a plugin supports, or the attribute's value is a type that starts with "`image/`" that is not also an XML MIME type, then let the resource type be the type specified in that `type` attribute.

              2. Jump to the step below labeled handler.

         Otherwise, if the resource does not have associated Content-Type metadata

           1. If there is a `type` attribute present on the `object` element, then let the tentative type be the type specified in that `type` attribute.

              Otherwise, let tentative type be the sniffed type of the resource.

           2. If tentative type is not `application/octet-stream`, then let resource type be tentative type and jump to the step below labeled handler.

      7. If applying the URL parser algorithm to the URL of the specified resource (after any redirects) results in a parsed URL whose path component matches a pattern that a plugin supports, then let resource type be the type that that plugin can handle.

         For example, a plugin might say that it can handle resources with path components that end with the four character string "`.swf`".

      It is possible for this step to finish, or for one of the substeps above to jump straight to the next step, with resource type still being unknown. In both cases, the next step will trigger fallback.

   8. Handler: Handle the content as given by the first of the following cases that matches:

      If the resource type is not a type that the user agent supports, but it is a type that a plugin supports

        If plugins are being sandboxed and the plugin that supports resource type cannot be secured, jump to the step below labeled fallback.

        Otherwise, the user agent should use the plugin that supports resource type and pass the content of the resource to that plugin. If the plugin reports an error, then jump to the step below labeled fallback.

      If the resource type is an XML MIME type, or if the resource type does not start with "`image/`"

        The `object` element must be associated with a newly created nested browsing context, if it does not already have one.

        If the URL of the given resource is not `about:blank`, the element's nested browsing context must then be navigated to that resource, with replacement enabled, and with the `object` element's node document's browsing context as the source browsing context. (The `data` attribute of the `object` element doesn't get updated if the browsing context gets further navigated to other locations.)

        If the URL of the given resource is `about:blank`, then, instead, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the `object` element. No `load` event is fired at the `about:blank` document itself.

        The `object` element represents the nested browsing context.

        If the `name` attribute is present, the browsing context name must be set to the value of this attribute; otherwise, the browsing context name must be set to the empty string.

        In certain situations, e.g. if the resource was fetched from an application cache but it is an HTML file with a `manifest` attribute that points to a different application cache manifest, the navigation of the browsing context will be restarted so as to load the resource afresh from the network or a different application cache. Even if the resource is then found to have a different type, it is still used as part of a nested browsing context: only the navigate algorithm is restarted, not this `object` algorithm.

      If the resource type starts with "`image/`", and support for images has not been disabled

        Apply the image sniffing rules to determine the type of the image.

        The `object` element represents the specified image. The image is not a nested browsing context.

        If the image cannot be rendered, e.g. because it is malformed or in an unsupported format, jump to the step below labeled fallback.

      Otherwise

        The given resource type is not supported. Jump to the step below labeled fallback.

        If the previous step ended with the resource type being unknown, this is the case that is triggered.

   9. The element's contents are not part of what the `object` element represents.

   10. Abort these steps. Once the resource is completely loaded, queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the element.

5. If the `data` attribute is absent but the `type` attribute is present, and the user agent can find a plugin suitable according to the value of the `type` attribute, and either plugins aren't being sandboxed or the plugin can be secured, then that plugin should be used. If these conditions cannot be met, or if the plugin reports an error, jump to the step below labeled fallback. Otherwise abort these steps; once the plugin is completely loaded, queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the element.

6. Fallback: The `object` element represents the element's children, ignoring any leading `param` element children. This is the element's fallback content. If the element has an instantiated plugin, then unload it.

When the algorithm above instantiates a plugin, the user agent should pass to the plugin used the names and values of all the attributes on the element, in the order they were added to the element, with the attributes added by the parser being ordered in source order, followed by a parameter named "PARAM" whose value is null, followed by all the names and values of parameters given by `param` elements that are children of the `object` element, in tree order. If the plugin supports a scriptable interface, the `HTMLObjectElement` object representing the element should expose that interface. The `object` element represents the plugin. The plugin is not a nested browsing context.

Plugins are considered sandboxed for the purpose of an `object` element if the sandboxed plugins browsing context flag is set on the `object` element's node document's active sandboxing flag set.

Due to the algorithm above, the contents of `object` elements act as fallback content, used only when referenced resources can't be shown (e.g. because it returned a 404 error). This allows multiple `object` elements to be nested inside each other, targeting multiple user agents with different capabilities, with the user agent picking the first one it supports.

When an `object` element represents a nested browsing context: if the `object` element's nested browsing context's active document is not ready for post-load tasks, and when anything is delaying the load event of the `object` element's browsing context's active document, and when the `object` element's browsing context is in the delaying `load` events mode, the `object` must delay the load event of its document.

The task source for the tasks mentioned in this section is the DOM manipulation task source.

Whenever the `name` attribute is set, if the `object` element has a nested browsing context, its name must be changed to the new value. If the attribute is removed, if the `object` element has a browsing context, the browsing context name must be set to the empty string.

The `usemap` attribute, if present while the `object` element represents an image, can indicate that the object has an associated image map. The attribute must be ignored if the `object` element doesn't represent an image.

The `form` attribute is used to explicitly associate the `object` element with its form owner.

Constraint validation: `object` elements are always barred from constraint validation.

The `object` element supports dimension attributes.

The IDL attributes `data`, `type` and `name` each must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name. The `typeMustMatch` IDL attribute must reflect the `typemustmatch` content attribute. The `useMap` IDL attribute must reflect the `usemap` content attribute.

The `contentDocument` IDL attribute must return the `Document` object of the active document of the `object` element's nested browsing context, if any and if its effective script origin is the same origin as the effective script origin specified by the incumbent settings object, or null otherwise.

The `contentWindow` IDL attribute must return the `WindowProxy` object of the `object` element's nested browsing context, if it has one; otherwise, it must return null.

The `willValidate`, `validity`, and `validationMessage` attributes, and the `checkValidity()`, `reportValidity()`, and `setCustomValidity()` methods, are part of the constraint validation API. The `form` IDL attribute is part of the element's forms API.

All `object` elements have a legacy caller operation. If the `object` element has an instantiated plugin that supports a scriptable interface that defines a legacy caller operation, then that must be the behavior of the object's legacy caller operation. Otherwise, the object's legacy caller operation must be to throw a `NotSupportedError` exception.

In the following example, a Java applet is embedded in a page using the `object` element. (Generally speaking, it is better to avoid using applets like these and instead use native JavaScript and HTML to provide the functionality, since that way the application will work on all Web browsers without requiring a third-party plugin. Many devices, especially embedded devices, do not support third-party technologies like Java.)

    <figure>
     <object type="application/x-java-applet">
      <param name="code" value="MyJavaClass">
      <p>You do not have Java available, or it is disabled.</p>
     </object>
     <figcaption>My Java Clock</figcaption>
    </figure>

In this example, an HTML page is embedded in another using the `object` element.

    <figure>
     <object data="clock.html"></object>
     <figcaption>My HTML Clock</figcaption>
    </figure>

The following example shows how a plugin can be used in HTML (in this case the Flash plugin, to show a video file). Fallback is provided for users who do not have Flash enabled, in this case using the `video` element to show the video for those using user agents that support `video`, and finally providing a link to the video for those who have neither Flash nor a `video`-capable browser.

    <p>Look at my video:
     <object type="application/x-shockwave-flash">
      <param name=movie value="http://video.example.com/library/watch.swf">
      <param name=allowfullscreen value=true>
      <param name=flashvars value="http://video.example.com/vids/315981">
      <video controls src="http://video.example.com/vids/315981">
       <a href="http://video.example.com/vids/315981">View video</a>.
      </video>
     </object>
    </p>

#### 4.8.9 The `param` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of an `object` element, before any flow content.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `name` — Name of parameter
  `value` — Value of parameter
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLParamElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString name;
                 attribute DOMString value;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `param` element defines parameters for plugins invoked by `object` elements. It does not represent anything on its own.

The `name` attribute gives the name of the parameter.

The `value` attribute gives the value of the parameter.

Both attributes must be present. They may have any value.

If both attributes are present, and if the parent element of the `param` is an `object` element, then the element defines a parameter with the given name-value pair.

If either the name or value of a parameter defined by a `param` element that is the child of an `object` element that represents an instantiated plugin changes, and if that plugin is communicating with the user agent using an API that features the ability to update the plugin when the name or value of a parameter so changes, then the user agent must appropriately exercise that ability to notify the plugin of the change.

The IDL attributes `name` and `value` must both reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The following example shows how the `param` element can be used to pass a parameter to a plugin, in this case the O3D plugin.

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html lang="en">
      <head>
       <title>O3D Utah Teapot</title>
      </head>
      <body>
       <p>
        <object type="application/vnd.o3d.auto">
         <param name="o3d_features" value="FloatingPointTextures">
         <img src="o3d-teapot.png"
              title="3D Utah Teapot illustration rendered using O3D."
              alt="When O3D renders the Utah Teapot, it appears as a squat
              teapot with a shiny metallic finish on which the
              surroundings are reflected, with a faint shadow caused by
              the lighting.">
         <p>To see the teapot actually rendered by O3D on your
         computer, please download and install the <a
         href="http://code.google.com/apis/o3d/docs/gettingstarted.html#install">O3D plugin</a>.</p>
        </object>
        <script src="o3d-teapot.js"></script>
       </p>
      </body>
    </html>

#### 4.8.10 The `video` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Embedded content.
  If the element has a `controls` attribute: Interactive content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where embedded content is expected.
Content model:
  If the element has a `src` attribute: zero or more `track` elements, then transparent, but with no media element descendants.
  If the element does not have a `src` attribute: zero or more `source` elements, then zero or more `track` elements, then transparent, but with no media element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `src` — Address of the resource
  `crossorigin` — How the element handles crossorigin requests
  `poster` — Poster frame to show prior to video playback
  `preload` — Hints how much buffering the media resource will likely need
  `autoplay` — Hint that the media resource can be started automatically when the page is loaded
  `mediagroup` — Groups media elements together with an implicit `MediaController`
  `loop` — Whether to loop the media resource
  `muted` — Whether to mute the media resource by default
  `controls` — Show user agent controls
  `width` — Horizontal dimension
  `height` — Vertical dimension
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLVideoElement : HTMLMediaElement {
                 attribute unsigned long width;
                 attribute unsigned long height;
        readonly attribute unsigned long videoWidth;
        readonly attribute unsigned long videoHeight;
                 attribute DOMString poster;
      };

A `video` element is used for playing videos or movies, and audio files with captions.

Content may be provided inside the `video` element. User agents should not show this content to the user; it is intended for older Web browsers which do not support `video`, so that legacy video plugins can be tried, or to show text to the users of these older browsers informing them of how to access the video contents.

In particular, this content is not intended to address accessibility concerns. To make video content accessible to the partially sighted, the blind, the hard-of-hearing, the deaf, and those with other physical or cognitive disabilities, a variety of features are available. Captions can be provided, either embedded in the video stream or as external files using the `track` element. Sign-language tracks can be provided, again either embedded in the video stream or by synchronizing multiple `video` elements using the `mediagroup` attribute or a `MediaController` object. Audio descriptions can be provided, either as a separate track embedded in the video stream, or a separate audio track in an `audio` element slaved to the same controller as the `video` element(s), or in text form using a WebVTT file referenced using the `track` element and synthesized into speech by the user agent. WebVTT can also be used to provide chapter titles. For users who would rather not use a media element at all, transcripts or other textual alternatives can be provided by simply linking to them in the prose near the `video` element. [WEBVTT]

The `video` element is a media element whose media data is ostensibly video data, possibly with associated audio data.

The `src`, `preload`, `autoplay`, `mediagroup`, `loop`, `muted`, and `controls` attributes are the attributes common to all media elements.

The `poster` attribute gives the address of an image file that the user agent can show while no video data is available. The attribute, if present, must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

If the specified resource is to be used, then, when the element is created or when the `poster` attribute is set, changed, or removed, the user agent must run the following steps to determine the element's poster frame (regardless of the value of the element's show poster flag):

1. If there is an existing instance of this algorithm running for this `video` element, abort that instance of this algorithm without changing the poster frame.

2. If the `poster` attribute's value is the empty string or if the attribute is absent, then there is no poster frame; abort these steps.

3. Resolve the `poster` attribute's value relative to the element. If this fails, then there is no poster frame; abort these steps.

4. Fetch the resulting absolute URL, from the element's node document's origin. This must delay the load event of the element's node document.

5. If an image is thus obtained, the poster frame is that image. Otherwise, there is no poster frame.

The image given by the `poster` attribute, the poster frame, is intended to be a representative frame of the video (typically one of the first non-blank frames) that gives the user an idea of what the video is like.

A `video` element represents what is given for the first matching condition in the list below:

When no video data is available (the element's `readyState` attribute is either `HAVE_NOTHING`, or `HAVE_METADATA` but no video data has yet been obtained at all, or the element's `readyState` attribute is any subsequent value but the media resource does not have a video channel)
  The `video` element represents its poster frame, if any, or else transparent black with no intrinsic dimensions.
When the `video` element is paused, the current playback position is the first frame of video, and the element's show poster flag is set
  The `video` element represents its poster frame, if any, or else the first frame of the video.
When the `video` element is paused, and the frame of video corresponding to the current playback position is not available (e.g. because the video is seeking or buffering)
When the `video` element is neither potentially playing nor paused (e.g. when seeking or stalled)
  The `video` element represents the last frame of the video to have been rendered.
When the `video` element is paused
  The `video` element represents the frame of video corresponding to the current playback position.
Otherwise (the `video` element has a video channel and is potentially playing)
  The `video` element represents the frame of video at the continuously increasing "current" position. When the current playback position changes such that the last frame rendered is no longer the frame corresponding to the current playback position in the video, the new frame must be rendered.

Frames of video must be obtained from the video track that was selected when the event loop last reached step 1.

Which frame in a video stream corresponds to a particular playback position is defined by the video stream's format.

The `video` element also represents any text track cues whose text track cue active flag is set and whose text track is in the showing mode, and any audio from the media resource, at the current playback position.

Any audio associated with the media resource must, if played, be played synchronised with the current playback position, at the element's effective media volume. The user agent must play the audio from audio tracks that were enabled when the event loop last reached step 1.

In addition to the above, the user agent may provide messages to the user (such as "buffering", "no video loaded", "error", or more detailed information) by overlaying text or icons on the video or other areas of the element's playback area, or in another appropriate manner.

User agents that cannot render the video may instead make the element represent a link to an external video playback utility or to the video data itself.

When a `video` element's media resource has a video channel, the element provides a paint source whose width is the media resource's intrinsic width, whose height is the media resource's intrinsic height, and whose appearance is the frame of video corresponding to the current playback position, if that is available, or else (e.g. when the video is seeking or buffering) its previous appearance, if any, or else (e.g. because the video is still loading the first frame) blackness.

video . `videoWidth`
video . `videoHeight`

  These attributes return the intrinsic dimensions of the video, or zero if the dimensions are not known.

The intrinsic width and intrinsic height of the media resource are the dimensions of the resource in CSS pixels after taking into account the resource's dimensions, aspect ratio, clean aperture, resolution, and so forth, as defined for the format used by the resource. If an anamorphic format does not define how to apply the aspect ratio to the video data's dimensions to obtain the "correct" dimensions, then the user agent must apply the ratio by increasing one dimension and leaving the other unchanged.

The `videoWidth` IDL attribute must return the intrinsic width of the video in CSS pixels. The `videoHeight` IDL attribute must return the intrinsic height of the video in CSS pixels. If the element's `readyState` attribute is `HAVE_NOTHING`, then the attributes must return 0.

Whenever the intrinsic width or intrinsic height of the video changes (including, for example, because the selected video track was changed), if the element's `readyState` attribute is not `HAVE_NOTHING`, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `resize` at the media element.

The `video` element supports dimension attributes.

In the absence of style rules to the contrary, video content should be rendered inside the element's playback area such that the video content is shown centered in the playback area at the largest possible size that fits completely within it, with the video content's aspect ratio being preserved. Thus, if the aspect ratio of the playback area does not match the aspect ratio of the video, the video will be shown letterboxed or pillarboxed. Areas of the element's playback area that do not contain the video represent nothing.

In user agents that implement CSS, the above requirement can be implemented by using the style rule suggested in the rendering section.

The intrinsic width of a `video` element's playback area is the intrinsic width of the poster frame, if that is available and the element currently represents its poster frame; otherwise, it is the intrinsic width of the video resource, if that is available; otherwise the intrinsic width is missing.

The intrinsic height of a `video` element's playback area is the intrinsic height of the poster frame, if that is available and the element currently represents its poster frame; otherwise it is the intrinsic height of the video resource, if that is available; otherwise the intrinsic height is missing.

The default object size is a width of 300 CSS pixels and a height of 150 CSS pixels. [CSSIMAGES]

User agents should provide controls to enable or disable the display of closed captions, audio description tracks, and other additional data associated with the video stream, though such features should, again, not interfere with the page's normal rendering.

User agents may allow users to view the video content in manners more suitable to the user (e.g. full-screen or in an independent resizable window). As for the other user interface features, controls to enable this should not interfere with the page's normal rendering unless the user agent is exposing a user interface. In such an independent context, however, user agents may make full user interfaces visible, with, e.g., play, pause, seeking, and volume controls, even if the `controls` attribute is absent.

User agents may allow video playback to affect system features that could interfere with the user's experience; for example, user agents could disable screensavers while video playback is in progress.

The `poster` IDL attribute must reflect the `poster` content attribute.

This example shows how to detect when a video has failed to play correctly:

    <script>
     function failed(e) {
       // video playback failed - show a message saying why
       switch (e.target.error.code) {
         case e.target.error.MEDIA_ERR_ABORTED:
           alert('You aborted the video playback.');
           break;
         case e.target.error.MEDIA_ERR_NETWORK:
           alert('A network error caused the video download to fail part-way.');
           break;
         case e.target.error.MEDIA_ERR_DECODE:
           alert('The video playback was aborted due to a corruption problem or because the video used features your browser did not support.');
           break;
         case e.target.error.MEDIA_ERR_SRC_NOT_SUPPORTED:
           alert('The video could not be loaded, either because the server or network failed or because the format is not supported.');
           break;
         default:
           alert('An unknown error occurred.');
           break;
       }
     }
    </script>
    <p><video src="tgif.vid" autoplay controls onerror="failed(event)"></video></p>
    <p><a href="tgif.vid">Download the video file</a>.</p>

#### 4.8.11 The `audio` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Embedded content.
  If the element has a `controls` attribute: Interactive content.
  If the element has a `controls` attribute: Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where embedded content is expected.
Content model:
  If the element has a `src` attribute: zero or more `track` elements, then transparent, but with no media element descendants.
  If the element does not have a `src` attribute: zero or more `source` elements, then zero or more `track` elements, then transparent, but with no media element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `src` — Address of the resource
  `crossorigin` — How the element handles crossorigin requests
  `preload` — Hints how much buffering the media resource will likely need
  `autoplay` — Hint that the media resource can be started automatically when the page is loaded
  `mediagroup` — Groups media elements together with an implicit `MediaController`
  `loop` — Whether to loop the media resource
  `muted` — Whether to mute the media resource by default
  `controls` — Show user agent controls
DOM interface:

      [NamedConstructor=Audio(optional DOMString src)]
      interface HTMLAudioElement : HTMLMediaElement {};

An `audio` element represents a sound or audio stream.

Content may be provided inside the `audio` element. User agents should not show this content to the user; it is intended for older Web browsers which do not support `audio`, so that legacy audio plugins can be tried, or to show text to the users of these older browsers informing them of how to access the audio contents.

In particular, this content is not intended to address accessibility concerns. To make audio content accessible to the deaf or to those with other physical or cognitive disabilities, a variety of features are available. If captions or a sign language video are available, the `video` element can be used instead of the `audio` element to play the audio, allowing users to enable the visual alternatives. Chapter titles can be provided to aid navigation, using the `track` element and a WebVTT file. And, naturally, transcripts or other textual alternatives can be provided by simply linking to them in the prose near the `audio` element. [WEBVTT]

The `audio` element is a media element whose media data is ostensibly audio data.

The `src`, `preload`, `autoplay`, `mediagroup`, `loop`, `muted`, and `controls` attributes are the attributes common to all media elements.

When an `audio` element is potentially playing, it must have its audio data played synchronised with the current playback position, at the element's effective media volume. The user agent must play the audio from audio tracks that were enabled when the event loop last reached step 1.

When an `audio` element is not potentially playing, audio must not play for the element.

audio = new `Audio`( [ url ] )

  Returns a new `audio` element, with the `src` attribute set to the value passed in the argument, if applicable.

A constructor is provided for creating `HTMLAudioElement` objects (in addition to the factory methods from DOM such as `createElement()`): `Audio(src)`. When invoked as a constructor, it must return a new `HTMLAudioElement` object (a new `audio` element). The element must be created with its `preload` attribute set to the literal value "`auto`". If the src argument is present, the object created must be created with its `src` content attribute set to the provided value (this will cause the user agent to invoke the object's resource selection algorithm before returning). The element's node document must be the active document of the browsing context of the `Window` object on which the interface object of the invoked constructor is found.

#### 4.8.12 The `source` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a media element, before any flow content or `track` elements.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `src` — Address of the resource
  `type` — Type of embedded resource
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLSourceElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString src;
                 attribute DOMString type;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `source` element allows authors to specify multiple alternative media resources for media elements. It does not represent anything on its own.

The `src` attribute gives the address of the media resource. The value must be a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces. This attribute must be present.

Dynamically modifying a `source` element and its attribute when the element is already inserted in a `video` or `audio` element will have no effect. To change what is playing, just use the `src` attribute on the media element directly, possibly making use of the `canPlayType()` method to pick from amongst available resources. Generally, manipulating `source` elements manually after the document has been parsed is an unnecessarily complicated approach.

The `type` attribute gives the type of the media resource, to help the user agent determine if it can play this media resource before fetching it. If specified, its value must be a valid MIME type. The `codecs` parameter, which certain MIME types define, might be necessary to specify exactly how the resource is encoded. [RFC4281]

The following list shows some examples of how to use the `codecs=` MIME parameter in the `type` attribute.

H.264 Constrained baseline profile video (main and extended video compatible) level 3 and Low-Complexity AAC audio in MP4 container

      <source src='video.mp4' type='video/mp4; codecs="avc1.42E01E, mp4a.40.2"'>

H.264 Extended profile video (baseline-compatible) level 3 and Low-Complexity AAC audio in MP4 container

      <source src='video.mp4' type='video/mp4; codecs="avc1.58A01E, mp4a.40.2"'>

H.264 Main profile video level 3 and Low-Complexity AAC audio in MP4 container

      <source src='video.mp4' type='video/mp4; codecs="avc1.4D401E, mp4a.40.2"'>

H.264 'High' profile video (incompatible with main, baseline, or extended profiles) level 3 and Low-Complexity AAC audio in MP4 container

      <source src='video.mp4' type='video/mp4; codecs="avc1.64001E, mp4a.40.2"'>

MPEG-4 Visual Simple Profile Level 0 video and Low-Complexity AAC audio in MP4 container

      <source src='video.mp4' type='video/mp4; codecs="mp4v.20.8, mp4a.40.2"'>

MPEG-4 Advanced Simple Profile Level 0 video and Low-Complexity AAC audio in MP4 container

      <source src='video.mp4' type='video/mp4; codecs="mp4v.20.240, mp4a.40.2"'>

MPEG-4 Visual Simple Profile Level 0 video and AMR audio in 3GPP container

      <source src='video.3gp' type='video/3gpp; codecs="mp4v.20.8, samr"'>

Theora video and Vorbis audio in Ogg container

      <source src='video.ogv' type='video/ogg; codecs="theora, vorbis"'>

Theora video and Speex audio in Ogg container

      <source src='video.ogv' type='video/ogg; codecs="theora, speex"'>

Vorbis audio alone in Ogg container

      <source src='audio.ogg' type='audio/ogg; codecs=vorbis'>

Speex audio alone in Ogg container

      <source src='audio.spx' type='audio/ogg; codecs=speex'>

FLAC audio alone in Ogg container

      <source src='audio.oga' type='audio/ogg; codecs=flac'>

Dirac video and Vorbis audio in Ogg container

      <source src='video.ogv' type='video/ogg; codecs="dirac, vorbis"'>

If a `source` element is inserted as a child of a media element that has no `src` attribute and whose `networkState` has the value `NETWORK_EMPTY`, the user agent must invoke the media element's resource selection algorithm.

The IDL attributes `src` and `type` must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

If the author isn't sure if user agents will all be able to render the media resources provided, the author can listen to the `error` event on the last `source` element and trigger fallback behavior:

    <script>
     function fallback(video) {
       // replace <video> with its contents
       while (video.hasChildNodes()) {
         if (video.firstChild instanceof HTMLSourceElement)
           video.removeChild(video.firstChild);
         else
           video.parentNode.insertBefore(video.firstChild, video);
       }
       video.parentNode.removeChild(video);
     }
    </script>
    <video controls autoplay>
     <source src='video.mp4' type='video/mp4; codecs="avc1.42E01E, mp4a.40.2"'>
     <source src='video.ogv' type='video/ogg; codecs="theora, vorbis"'
             onerror="fallback(parentNode)">
     ...
    </video>

#### 4.8.13 The `track` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a media element, before any flow content.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `kind` — The type of text track
  `src` — Address of the resource
  `srclang` — Language of the text track
  `label` — User-visible label
  `default` — Enable the track if no other text track is more suitable
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTrackElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString kind;
                 attribute DOMString src;
                 attribute DOMString srclang;
                 attribute DOMString label;
                 attribute boolean default;

        const unsigned short NONE = 0;
        const unsigned short LOADING = 1;
        const unsigned short LOADED = 2;
        const unsigned short ERROR = 3;
        readonly attribute unsigned short readyState;

        readonly attribute TextTrack track;
      };

The `track` element allows authors to specify explicit external timed text tracks for media elements. It does not represent anything on its own.

The `kind` attribute is an enumerated attribute. The following table lists the keywords defined for this attribute. The keyword given in the first cell of each row maps to the state given in the second cell.

Keyword | State | Brief description
--- | --- | ---
`subtitles` | Subtitles | Transcription or translation of the dialogue, suitable for when the sound is available but not understood (e.g. because the user does not understand the language of the media resource's audio track). Overlaid on the video.
`captions` | Captions | Transcription or translation of the dialogue, sound effects, relevant musical cues, and other relevant audio information, suitable for when sound is unavailable or not clearly audible (e.g. because it is muted, drowned-out by ambient noise, or because the user is deaf). Overlaid on the video; labeled as appropriate for the hard-of-hearing.
`descriptions` | Descriptions | Textual descriptions of the video component of the media resource, intended for audio synthesis when the visual component is obscured, unavailable, or not usable (e.g. because the user is interacting with the application without a screen while driving, or because the user is blind). Synthesized as audio.
`chapters` | Chapters | Chapter titles, intended to be used for navigating the media resource. Displayed as an interactive (potentially nested) list in the user agent's interface.
`metadata` | Metadata | Tracks intended for use from script. Not displayed by the user agent.

The attribute may be omitted. The missing value default is the subtitles state.

The `src` attribute gives the address of the text track data. The value must be a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces. This attribute must be present.

If the element has a `src` attribute whose value is not the empty string and whose value, when the attribute was set, could be successfully resolved relative to the element, then the element's track URL is the resulting absolute URL. Otherwise, the element's track URL is the empty string.

If the element's track URL identifies a WebVTT resource, and the element's `kind` attribute is not in the metadata state, then the WebVTT file must be a WebVTT file using cue text. [WEBVTT]

Furthermore, if the element's track URL identifies a WebVTT resource, and the element's `kind` attribute is in the chapters state, then the WebVTT file must be both a WebVTT file using chapter title text and a WebVTT file using only nested cues. [WEBVTT]

The `srclang` attribute gives the language of the text track data. The value must be a valid BCP 47 language tag. This attribute must be present if the element's `kind` attribute is in the subtitles state. [BCP47]

If the element has a `srclang` attribute whose value is not the empty string, then the element's track language is the value of the attribute. Otherwise, the element has no track language.

The `label` attribute gives a user-readable title for the track. This title is used by user agents when listing subtitle, caption, and audio description tracks in their user interface.

The value of the `label` attribute, if the attribute is present, must not be the empty string. Furthermore, there must not be two `track` element children of the same media element whose `kind` attributes are in the same state, whose `srclang` attributes are both missing or have values that represent the same language, and whose `label` attributes are again both missing or both have the same value.

If the element has a `label` attribute whose value is not the empty string, then the element's track label is the value of the attribute. Otherwise, the element's track label is an empty string.

The `default` attribute is a boolean attribute, which, if specified, indicates that the track is to be enabled if the user's preferences do not indicate that another track would be more appropriate.

Each media element must have no more than one `track` element child whose `kind` attribute is in the subtitles or captions state and whose `default` attribute is specified.

Each media element must have no more than one `track` element child whose `kind` attribute is in the description state and whose `default` attribute is specified.

Each media element must have no more than one `track` element child whose `kind` attribute is in the chapters state and whose `default` attribute is specified.

There is no limit on the number of `track` elements whose `kind` attribute is in the metadata state and whose `default` attribute is specified.

track . `readyState`

  Returns the text track readiness state, represented by a number from the following list:

  track . `NONE` (0)

    The text track not loaded state.

  track . `LOADING` (1)

    The text track loading state.

  track . `LOADED` (2)

    The text track loaded state.

  track . `ERROR` (3)

    The text track failed to load state.

track . `track`

  Returns the `TextTrack` object corresponding to the text track of the `track` element.

The `readyState` attribute must return the numeric value corresponding to the text track readiness state of the `track` element's text track, as defined by the following list:

`NONE` (numeric value 0)
  The text track not loaded state.
`LOADING` (numeric value 1)
  The text track loading state.
`LOADED` (numeric value 2)
  The text track loaded state.
`ERROR` (numeric value 3)
  The text track failed to load state.

The `track` IDL attribute must, on getting, return the `track` element's text track's corresponding `TextTrack` object.

The `src`, `srclang`, `label`, and `default` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name. The `kind` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, limited to only known values.

This video has subtitles in several languages:

    <video src="brave.webm">
     <track kind=subtitles src=brave.en.vtt srclang=en label="English">
     <track kind=captions src=brave.en.hoh.vtt srclang=en label="English for the Hard of Hearing">
     <track kind=subtitles src=brave.fr.vtt srclang=fr lang=fr label="Français">
     <track kind=subtitles src=brave.de.vtt srclang=de lang=de label="Deutsch">
    </video>

(The `lang` attributes on the last two describe the language of the `label` attribute, not the language of the subtitles themselves. The language of the subtitles is given by the `srclang` attribute.)

#### 4.8.14 Media elements

Media elements (`audio` and `video`, in this specification) implement the following interface:

    enum CanPlayTypeResult { "" /* empty string */, "maybe", "probably" };
    typedef (MediaStream or MediaSource or Blob) MediaProvider;
    interface HTMLMediaElement : HTMLElement {

      // error state
      readonly attribute MediaError? error;

      // network state
               attribute DOMString src;
               attribute MediaProvider? srcObject;
      readonly attribute DOMString currentSrc;
               attribute DOMString? crossOrigin;
      const unsigned short NETWORK_EMPTY = 0;
      const unsigned short NETWORK_IDLE = 1;
      const unsigned short NETWORK_LOADING = 2;
      const unsigned short NETWORK_NO_SOURCE = 3;
      readonly attribute unsigned short networkState;
               attribute DOMString preload;
      readonly attribute TimeRanges buffered;
      void load();
      CanPlayTypeResult canPlayType(DOMString type);

      // ready state
      const unsigned short HAVE_NOTHING = 0;
      const unsigned short HAVE_METADATA = 1;
      const unsigned short HAVE_CURRENT_DATA = 2;
      const unsigned short HAVE_FUTURE_DATA = 3;
      const unsigned short HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA = 4;
      readonly attribute unsigned short readyState;
      readonly attribute boolean seeking;

      // playback state
               attribute double currentTime;
      void fastSeek(double time);
      readonly attribute unrestricted double duration;
      Date getStartDate();
      readonly attribute boolean paused;
               attribute double defaultPlaybackRate;
               attribute double playbackRate;
      readonly attribute TimeRanges played;
      readonly attribute TimeRanges seekable;
      readonly attribute boolean ended;
               attribute boolean autoplay;
               attribute boolean loop;
      void play();
      void pause();

      // media controller
               attribute DOMString mediaGroup;
               attribute MediaController? controller;

      // controls
               attribute boolean controls;
               attribute double volume;
               attribute boolean muted;
               attribute boolean defaultMuted;

      // tracks
      readonly attribute AudioTrackList audioTracks;
      readonly attribute VideoTrackList videoTracks;
      readonly attribute TextTrackList textTracks;
      TextTrack addTextTrack(TextTrackKind kind, optional DOMString label = "", optional DOMString language = "");
    };

The media element attributes, `src`, `crossorigin`, `preload`, `autoplay`, `mediagroup`, `loop`, `muted`, and `controls`, apply to all media elements. They are defined in this section.

Media elements are used to present audio data, or video and audio data, to the user. This is referred to as media data in this section, since this section applies equally to media elements for audio or for video. The term media resource is used to refer to the complete set of media data, e.g. the complete video file, or complete audio file.

A media resource can have multiple audio and video tracks. For the purposes of a media element, the video data of the media resource is only that of the currently selected track (if any) as given by the element's `videoTracks` attribute when the event loop last reached step 1, and the audio data of the media resource is the result of mixing all the currently enabled tracks (if any) given by the element's `audioTracks` attribute when the event loop last reached step 1.

Both `audio` and `video` elements can be used for both audio and video. The main difference between the two is simply that the `audio` element has no playback area for visual content (such as video or captions), whereas the `video` element does.

Except where otherwise explicitly specified, the task source for all the tasks queued in this section and its subsections is the media element event task source of the media element in question.

##### 4.8.14.1 Error codes

media . `error`

  Returns a `MediaError` object representing the current error state of the element.

  Returns null if there is no error.

All media elements have an associated error status, which records the last error the element encountered since its resource selection algorithm was last invoked. The `error` attribute, on getting, must return the `MediaError` object created for this last error, or null if there has not been an error.

    interface MediaError {
      const unsigned short MEDIA_ERR_ABORTED = 1;
      const unsigned short MEDIA_ERR_NETWORK = 2;
      const unsigned short MEDIA_ERR_DECODE = 3;
      const unsigned short MEDIA_ERR_SRC_NOT_SUPPORTED = 4;
      readonly attribute unsigned short code;
    };

media . `error` . `code`

  Returns the current error's error code, from the list below.

The `code` attribute of a `MediaError` object must return the code for the error, which must be one of the following:

`MEDIA_ERR_ABORTED` (numeric value 1)
  The fetching process for the media resource was aborted by the user agent at the user's request.
`MEDIA_ERR_NETWORK` (numeric value 2)
  A network error of some description caused the user agent to stop fetching the media resource, after the resource was established to be usable.
`MEDIA_ERR_DECODE` (numeric value 3)
  An error of some description occurred while decoding the media resource, after the resource was established to be usable.
`MEDIA_ERR_SRC_NOT_SUPPORTED` (numeric value 4)
  The media resource indicated by the `src` attribute or assigned media provider object was not suitable.

##### 4.8.14.2 Location of the media resource

The `src` content attribute on media elements gives the address of the media resource (video, audio) to show. The attribute, if present, must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

If the `itemprop` attribute is specified on the media element, then the `src` attribute must also be specified.

The `crossorigin` content attribute on media elements is a CORS settings attribute.

If a media element is created with a `src` attribute, the user agent must synchronously invoke the media element's resource selection algorithm.

If a `src` attribute of a media element is set or changed, the user agent must invoke the media element's media element load algorithm. (Removing the `src` attribute does not do this, even if there are `source` elements present.)

The `src` IDL attribute on media elements must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `crossOrigin` IDL attribute must reflect the `crossorigin` content attribute.

A media provider object is an object that can represent a media resource, separate from a URL. `MediaStream` objects, `MediaSource` objects, `Blob` objects, and `File` objects are all media provider objects.

Each media element can have an assigned media provider object, which is a media provider object. When a media element is created, it has no assigned media provider object.

media . `srcObject` [ = source ]

  Allows the media element to be assigned a media provider object.

media . `currentSrc`

  Returns the address of the current media resource, if any.

  Returns the empty string when there is no media resource, or it doesn't have an address.

The `currentSrc` IDL attribute must initially be set to the empty string. Its value is changed by the resource selection algorithm defined below.

The `srcObject` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the element's assigned media provider object, if any, or null otherwise. On setting, it must set the element's assigned media provider object to the new value, and then invoke the element's media element load algorithm.

There are three ways to specify a media resource: the `srcObject` IDL attribute, the `src` content attribute, and `source` elements. The IDL attribute takes priority, followed by the content attribute, followed by the elements.

##### 4.8.14.3 MIME types

A media resource can be described in terms of its type, specifically a MIME type, in some cases with a `codecs` parameter. (Whether the `codecs` parameter is allowed or not depends on the MIME type.) [RFC4281]

Types are usually somewhat incomplete descriptions; for example "`video/mpeg`" doesn't say anything except what the container type is, and even a type like "`video/mp4; codecs="avc1.42E01E, mp4a.40.2"`" doesn't include information like the actual bitrate (only the maximum bitrate). Thus, given a type, a user agent can often only know whether it might be able to play media of that type (with varying levels of confidence), or whether it definitely cannot play media of that type.

A type that the user agent knows it cannot render is one that describes a resource that the user agent definitely does not support, for example because it doesn't recognise the container type, or it doesn't support the listed codecs.

The MIME type "`application/octet-stream`" with no parameters is never a type that the user agent knows it cannot render. User agents must treat that type as equivalent to the lack of any explicit Content-Type metadata when it is used to label a potential media resource.

Only the MIME type "`application/octet-stream`" with no parameters is special-cased here; if any parameter appears with it, it will be treated just like any other MIME type. This is a deviation from the rule that unknown MIME type parameters should be ignored.

media . `canPlayType`(type)

  Returns the empty string (a negative response), "maybe", or "probably" based on how confident the user agent is that it can play media resources of the given type.

The `canPlayType(type)` method must return the empty string if type is a type that the user agent knows it cannot render or is the type "`application/octet-stream`"; it must return "`probably`" if the user agent is confident that the type represents a media resource that it can render if used in with this `audio` or `video` element; and it must return "`maybe`" otherwise. Implementors are encouraged to return "`maybe`" unless the type can be confidently established as being supported or not. Generally, a user agent should never return "`probably`" for a type that allows the `codecs` parameter if that parameter is not present.

This script tests to see if the user agent supports a (fictional) new format to dynamically decide whether to use a `video` element or a plugin:

    <section id="video">
     <p><a href="playing-cats.nfv">Download video</a></p>
    </section>
    <script>
     var videoSection = document.getElementById('video');
     var videoElement = document.createElement('video');
     var support = videoElement.canPlayType('video/x-new-fictional-format;codecs="kittens,bunnies"');
     if (support != "probably" && "New Fictional Video Plugin" in navigator.plugins) {
       // not confident of browser support
       // but we have a plugin
       // so use plugin instead
       videoElement = document.createElement("embed");
     } else if (support == "") {
       // no support from browser and no plugin
       // do nothing
       videoElement = null;
     }
     if (videoElement) {
       while (videoSection.hasChildNodes())
         videoSection.removeChild(videoSection.firstChild);
       videoElement.setAttribute("src", "playing-cats.nfv");
       videoSection.appendChild(videoElement);
     }
    </script>

The `type` attribute of the `source` element allows the user agent to avoid downloading resources that use formats it cannot render.

##### 4.8.14.4 Network states

media . `networkState`

  Returns the current state of network activity for the element, from the codes in the list below.

As media elements interact with the network, their current network activity is represented by the `networkState` attribute. On getting, it must return the current network state of the element, which must be one of the following values:

`NETWORK_EMPTY` (numeric value 0)
  The element has not yet been initialized. All attributes are in their initial states.
`NETWORK_IDLE` (numeric value 1)
  The element's resource selection algorithm is active and has selected a resource, but it is not actually using the network at this time.
`NETWORK_LOADING` (numeric value 2)
  The user agent is actively trying to download data.
`NETWORK_NO_SOURCE` (numeric value 3)
  The element's resource selection algorithm is active, but it has not yet found a resource to use.

The resource selection algorithm defined below describes exactly when the `networkState` attribute changes value and what events fire to indicate changes in this state.

##### 4.8.14.5 Loading the media resource

media . `load`()

  Causes the element to reset and start selecting and loading a new media resource from scratch.

All media elements have an autoplaying flag, which must begin in the true state, and a delaying-the-load-event flag, which must begin in the false state. While the delaying-the-load-event flag is true, the element must delay the load event of its document.

When the `load()` method on a media element is invoked, the user agent must run the media element load algorithm.

The media element load algorithm consists of the following steps.

1. Abort any already-running instance of the resource selection algorithm for this element.

2. If there are any tasks from the media element's media element event task source in one of the task queues, then remove those tasks.

   Basically, pending events and callbacks for the media element are discarded when the media element starts loading a new resource.

3. If the media element's `networkState` is set to `NETWORK_LOADING` or `NETWORK_IDLE`, queue a task to fire a simple event named `abort` at the media element.

4. If the media element's `networkState` is not set to `NETWORK_EMPTY`, then run these substeps:

   1. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `emptied` at the media element.

   2. If a fetching process is in progress for the media element, the user agent should stop it.

   3. Forget the media element's media-resource-specific tracks.

   4. If `readyState` is not set to `HAVE_NOTHING`, then set it to that state.

   5. If the `paused` attribute is false, then set it to true.

   6. If `seeking` is true, set it to false.

   7. Set the current playback position to 0.

      Set the official playback position to 0.

      If this changed the official playback position, then queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the media element.

   8. Set the initial playback position to 0.

   9. Set the timeline offset to Not-a-Number (NaN).

   10. Update the `duration` attribute to Not-a-Number (NaN).

       The user agent will not fire a `durationchange` event for this particular change of the duration.

5. Set the `playbackRate` attribute to the value of the `defaultPlaybackRate` attribute.

6. Set the `error` attribute to null and the autoplaying flag to true.

7. Invoke the media element's resource selection algorithm.

8. Playback of any previously playing media resource for this element stops.

The resource selection algorithm for a media element is as follows. This algorithm is always invoked synchronously, but one of the first steps in the algorithm is to return and continue running the remaining steps asynchronously, meaning that it runs in the background with scripts and other tasks running in parallel. In addition, this algorithm interacts closely with the event loop mechanism; in particular, it has synchronous sections (which are triggered as part of the event loop algorithm). Steps in such sections are marked with ⌛.

1. Set the element's `networkState` attribute to the `NETWORK_NO_SOURCE` value.

2. Set the element's show poster flag to true.

3. Set the media element's delaying-the-load-event flag to true (this delays the load event).

4. Asynchronously await a stable state, allowing the task that invoked this algorithm to continue. The synchronous section consists of all the remaining steps of this algorithm until the algorithm says the synchronous section has ended. (Steps in synchronous sections are marked with ⌛.)

5. ⌛ If the media element's blocked-on-parser flag is false, then populate the list of pending text tracks.

6. ⌛ If the media element has an assigned media provider object, then let mode be object.

   ⌛ Otherwise, if the media element has no assigned media provider object but has a `src` attribute, then let mode be attribute.

   ⌛ Otherwise, if the media element does not have an assigned media provider object and does not have a `src` attribute, but does have a `source` element child, then let mode be children and let candidate be the first such `source` element child in tree order.

   ⌛ Otherwise the media element has no assigned media provider object and has neither a `src` attribute nor a `source` element child: set the `networkState` to `NETWORK_EMPTY`, and abort these steps; the synchronous section ends.

7. ⌛ Set the media element's `networkState` to `NETWORK_LOADING`.

8. ⌛ Queue a task to fire a simple event named `loadstart` at the media element.

9. Run the appropriate steps from the following list:

   If mode is object

     1. ⌛ Set the `currentSrc` attribute to the empty string.

     2. End the synchronous section, continuing the remaining steps asynchronously.

     3. Run the resource fetch algorithm with the assigned media provider object. If that algorithm returns without aborting this one, then the load failed.

     4. Failed with media provider: Reaching this step indicates that the media resource failed to load. Queue a task to run the dedicated media source failure steps.

     5. Wait for the task queued by the previous step to have executed.

     6. Abort these steps. The element won't attempt to load another resource until this algorithm is triggered again.

   If mode is attribute

     1. ⌛ If the `src` attribute's value is the empty string, then end the synchronous section, and jump down to the failed with attribute step below.

     2. ⌛ Let absolute URL be the absolute URL that would have resulted from resolving the URL specified by the `src` attribute's value relative to the media element when the `src` attribute was last changed.

     3. ⌛ If absolute URL was obtained successfully, set the `currentSrc` attribute to absolute URL.

     4. End the synchronous section, continuing the remaining steps asynchronously.

     5. If absolute URL was obtained successfully, run the resource fetch algorithm with absolute URL. If that algorithm returns without aborting this one, then the load failed.

     6. Failed with attribute: Reaching this step indicates that the media resource failed to load or that the given URL could not be resolved. Queue a task to run the dedicated media source failure steps.

     7. Wait for the task queued by the previous step to have executed.

     8. Abort these steps. The element won't attempt to load another resource until this algorithm is triggered again.

   Otherwise (mode is children)

     1. ⌛ Let pointer be a position defined by two adjacent nodes in the media element's child list, treating the start of the list (before the first child in the list, if any) and end of the list (after the last child in the list, if any) as nodes in their own right. One node is the node before pointer, and the other node is the node after pointer. Initially, let pointer be the position between the candidate node and the next node, if there are any, or the end of the list, if it is the last node.

        As nodes are inserted and removed into the media element, pointer must be updated as follows:

        If a new node is inserted between the two nodes that define pointer
          Let pointer be the point between the node before pointer and the new node. In other words, insertions at pointer go after pointer.
        If the node before pointer is removed
          Let pointer be the point between the node after pointer and the node before the node after pointer. In other words, pointer doesn't move relative to the remaining nodes.
        If the node after pointer is removed
          Let pointer be the point between the node before pointer and the node after the node before pointer. Just as with the previous case, pointer doesn't move relative to the remaining nodes.

        Other changes don't affect pointer.

     2. ⌛ Process candidate: If candidate does not have a `src` attribute, or if its `src` attribute's value is the empty string, then end the synchronous section, and jump down to the failed with elements step below.

     3. ⌛ Let absolute URL be the absolute URL that would have resulted from resolving the URL specified by candidate's `src` attribute's value relative to the candidate when the `src` attribute was last changed.

     4. ⌛ If absolute URL was not obtained successfully, then end the synchronous section, and jump down to the failed with elements step below.

     5. ⌛ If candidate has a `type` attribute whose value, when parsed as a MIME type (including any codecs described by the `codecs` parameter, for types that define that parameter), represents a type that the user agent knows it cannot render, then end the synchronous section, and jump down to the failed with elements step below.

     6. ⌛ Set the `currentSrc` attribute to absolute URL.

     7. End the synchronous section, continuing the remaining steps asynchronously.

     8. Run the resource fetch algorithm with absolute URL. If that algorithm returns without aborting this one, then the load failed.

     9. Failed with elements: Queue a task to fire a simple event named `error` at the candidate element.

     10. Asynchronously await a stable state. The synchronous section consists of all the remaining steps of this algorithm until the algorithm says the synchronous section has ended. (Steps in synchronous sections are marked with ⌛.)

     11. ⌛ Forget the media element's media-resource-specific tracks.

     12. ⌛ Find next candidate: Let candidate be null.

     13. ⌛ Search loop: If the node after pointer is the end of the list, then jump to the waiting step below.

     14. ⌛ If the node after pointer is a `source` element, let candidate be that element.

     15. ⌛ Advance pointer so that the node before pointer is now the node that was after pointer, and the node after pointer is the node after the node that used to be after pointer, if any.

     16. ⌛ If candidate is null, jump back to the search loop step. Otherwise, jump back to the process candidate step.

     17. ⌛ Waiting: Set the element's `networkState` attribute to the `NETWORK_NO_SOURCE` value.

     18. ⌛ Set the element's show poster flag to true.

     19. ⌛ Queue a task to set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag to false. This stops delaying the load event.

     20. End the synchronous section, continuing the remaining steps asynchronously.

     21. Wait until the node after pointer is a node other than the end of the list. (This step might wait forever.)

     22. Asynchronously await a stable state. The synchronous section consists of all the remaining steps of this algorithm until the algorithm says the synchronous section has ended. (Steps in synchronous sections are marked with ⌛.)

     23. ⌛ Set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag back to true (this delays the load event again, in case it hasn't been fired yet).

     24. ⌛ Set the `networkState` back to `NETWORK_LOADING`.

     25. ⌛ Jump back to the find next candidate step above.

   The dedicated media source failure steps are the following steps:

   1. Set the `error` attribute to a new `MediaError` object whose `code` attribute is set to `MEDIA_ERR_SRC_NOT_SUPPORTED`.

   2. Forget the media element's media-resource-specific tracks.

   3. Set the element's `networkState` attribute to the `NETWORK_NO_SOURCE` value.

   4. Set the element's show poster flag to true.

   5. Fire a simple event named `error` at the media element.

   6. Set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag to false. This stops delaying the load event.

The resource fetch algorithm for a media element and a given absolute URL or media provider object is as follows:

1. If the algorithm was invoked with a URL, then let mode be remote, otherwise let mode be local.

2. If mode is local, then let the current media resource be the resource given by the absolute URL passed to this algorithm; otherwise, let the current media resource be the resource given by the media provider object. Either way, the current media resource is now the element's media resource.

3. Remove all media-resource-specific text tracks from the media element's list of pending text tracks, if any.

4. Run the appropriate steps from the following list:

   If mode is remote

     1. Optionally, run the following substeps. This is the expected behavior if the user agent intends to not attempt to fetch the resource until the user requests it explicitly (e.g. as a way to implement the `preload` attribute's `none` keyword).

        1. Set the `networkState` to `NETWORK_IDLE`.

        2. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `suspend` at the element.

        3. Queue a task to set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag to false. This stops delaying the load event.

        4. Wait for the task to be run.

        5. Wait for an implementation-defined event (e.g. the user requesting that the media element begin playback).

        6. Set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag back to true (this delays the load event again, in case it hasn't been fired yet).

        7. Set the `networkState` to `NETWORK_LOADING`.

     2. Perform a potentially CORS-enabled fetch of the current media resource's absolute URL, with the mode being the state of the media element's `crossorigin` content attribute, the origin being the origin of the media element's node document, and the default origin behaviour set to taint.

        The resource obtained in this fashion, if any, contains the media data. It can be CORS-same-origin or CORS-cross-origin; this affects whether subtitles referenced in the media data are exposed in the API and, for `video` elements, whether a `canvas` gets tainted when the video is drawn on it.

        The stall timeout is a user-agent defined length of time, which should be about three seconds. When a media element that is actively attempting to obtain media data has failed to receive any data for a duration equal to the stall timeout, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `stalled` at the element.

        User agents may allow users to selectively block or slow media data downloads. When a media element's download has been blocked altogether, the user agent must act as if it was stalled (as opposed to acting as if the connection was closed). The rate of the download may also be throttled automatically by the user agent, e.g. to balance the download with other connections sharing the same bandwidth.

        User agents may decide to not download more content at any time, e.g. after buffering five minutes of a one hour media resource, while waiting for the user to decide whether to play the resource or not, while waiting for user input in an interactive resource, or when the user navigates away from the page. When a media element's download has been suspended, the user agent must queue a task, to set the `networkState` to `NETWORK_IDLE` and fire a simple event named `suspend` at the element. If and when downloading of the resource resumes, the user agent must queue a task to set the `networkState` to `NETWORK_LOADING`. Between the queuing of these tasks, the load is suspended (so `progress` events don't fire, as described above).

        The `preload` attribute provides a hint regarding how much buffering the author thinks is advisable, even in the absence of the `autoplay` attribute.

        When a user agent decides to completely stall a download, e.g. if it is waiting until the user starts playback before downloading any further content, the user agent must queue a task to set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag to false. This stops delaying the load event.

        The user agent may use whatever means necessary to fetch the resource (within the constraints put forward by this and other specifications); for example, reconnecting to the server in the face of network errors, using HTTP range retrieval requests, or switching to a streaming protocol. The user agent must consider a resource erroneous only if it has given up trying to fetch it.

        To determine the format of the media resource, the user agent must use the rules for sniffing audio and video specifically.

        While the load is not suspended (see below), every 350ms (±200ms) or for every byte received, whichever is least frequent, queue a task to fire a simple event named `progress` at the element.

        The networking task source tasks to process the data as it is being fetched must each immediately queue a task to run the first appropriate steps from the media data processing steps list below. (A new task is used for this so that the work described below occurs relative to the media element event task source rather than the networking task source.)

        When the networking task source has queued the last task as part of fetching the media resource (i.e. once the download has completed), if the fetching process completes without errors, including decoding the media data, and if all of the data is available to the user agent without network access, then, the user agent must move on to the final step below. This might never happen, e.g. when streaming an infinite resource such as Web radio, or if the resource is longer than the user agent's ability to cache data.

        While the user agent might still need network access to obtain parts of the media resource, the user agent must remain on this step.

        For example, if the user agent has discarded the first half of a video, the user agent will remain at this step even once the playback has ended, because there is always the chance the user will seek back to the start. In fact, in this situation, once playback has ended, the user agent will end up firing a `suspend` event, as described earlier.

   Otherwise (mode is local)

     The resource described by the current media resource, if any, contains the media data. It is CORS-same-origin.

     If the current media resource is a raw data stream (e.g. from a `File` object), then to determine the format of the media resource, the user agent must use the rules for sniffing audio and video specifically. Otherwise, if the data stream is pre-decoded, then the format is the format given by the relevant specification.

     Whenever new data for the current media resource becomes available, queue a task to run the first appropriate steps from the media data processing steps list below.

     When the current media resource is permanently exhausted (e.g. all the bytes of a `Blob` have been processed), if there were no decoding errors, then the user agent must move on to the final step below. This might never happen, e.g. if the current media resource is a `MediaStream`.

   The media data processing steps list is as follows:

   If the media data cannot be fetched at all, due to network errors, causing the user agent to give up trying to fetch the resource
   If the media data can be fetched but is found by inspection to be in an unsupported format, or can otherwise not be rendered at all

     DNS errors, HTTP 4xx and 5xx errors (and equivalents in other protocols), and other fatal network errors that occur before the user agent has established whether the current media resource is usable, as well as the file using an unsupported container format, or using unsupported codecs for all the data, must cause the user agent to execute the following steps:

     1. The user agent should cancel the fetching process.

     2. Abort this subalgorithm, returning to the resource selection algorithm.

   If the media resource is found to have an audio track

     1. Create an `AudioTrack` object to represent the audio track.

     2. Update the media element's `audioTracks` attribute's `AudioTrackList` object with the new `AudioTrack` object.

     3. Let enable be unknown.

     4. If either the media resource or the address of the current media resource indicate a particular set of audio tracks to enable, or if the user agent has information that would facilitate the selection of specific audio tracks to improve the user's experience, then: if this audio track is one of the ones to enable, then set enable to true, otherwise, set enable to false.

        This could be triggered by Media Fragments URI fragment identifier syntax, but it could also be triggered e.g. by the user agent selecting a 5.1 surround sound audio track over a stereo audio track. [MEDIAFRAG]

     5. If enable is still unknown, then, if the media element does not yet have an enabled audio track, then set enable to true, otherwise, set enable to false.

     6. If enable is true, then enable this audio track, otherwise, do not enable this audio track.

     7. Fire a trusted event with the name `addtrack`, that does not bubble and is not cancelable, and that uses the `TrackEvent` interface, with the `track` attribute initialised to the new `AudioTrack` object, at this `AudioTrackList` object.

   If the media resource is found to have a video track

     1. Create a `VideoTrack` object to represent the video track.

     2. Update the media element's `videoTracks` attribute's `VideoTrackList` object with the new `VideoTrack` object.

     3. Let enable be unknown.

     4. If either the media resource or the address of the current media resource indicate a particular set of video tracks to enable, or if the user agent has information that would facilitate the selection of specific video tracks to improve the user's experience, then: if this video track is the first such video track, then set enable to true, otherwise, set enable to false.

        This could again be triggered by Media Fragments URI fragment identifier syntax.

     5. If enable is still unknown, then, if the media element does not yet have a selected video track, then set enable to true, otherwise, set enable to false.

     6. If enable is true, then select this track and unselect any previously selected video tracks, otherwise, do not select this video track. If other tracks are unselected, then a `change` event will be fired.

     7. Fire a trusted event with the name `addtrack`, that does not bubble and is not cancelable, and that uses the `TrackEvent` interface, with the `track` attribute initialised to the new `VideoTrack` object, at this `VideoTrackList` object.

   Once enough of the media data has been fetched to determine the duration of the media resource, its dimensions, and other metadata

     This indicates that the resource is usable. The user agent must follow these substeps:

     1. Establish the media timeline for the purposes of the current playback position, the earliest possible position, and the initial playback position, based on the media data.

     2. Update the timeline offset to the date and time that corresponds to the zero time in the media timeline established in the previous step, if any. If no explicit time and date is given by the media resource, the timeline offset must be set to Not-a-Number (NaN).

     3. Set the current playback position and the official playback position to the earliest possible position.

     4. Update the `duration` attribute with the time of the last frame of the resource, if known, on the media timeline established above. If it is not known (e.g. a stream that is in principle infinite), update the `duration` attribute to the value positive Infinity.

        The user agent will queue a task to fire a simple event named `durationchange` at the element at this point.

     5. For `video` elements, set the `videoWidth` and `videoHeight` attributes, and queue a task to fire a simple event named `resize` at the media element.

        Further `resize` events will be fired if the dimensions subsequently change.

     6. Set the `readyState` attribute to `HAVE_METADATA`.

        A `loadedmetadata` DOM event will be fired as part of setting the `readyState` attribute to a new value.

     7. Let jumped be false.

     8. If the media element's default playback start position is greater than zero, then seek to that time, and let jumped be true.

     9. Let the media element's default playback start position be zero.

     10. If either the media resource or the address of the current media resource indicate a particular start time, then set the initial playback position to that time and, if jumped is still false, seek to that time and let jumped be true.

         For example, with media formats that support the Media Fragments URI fragment identifier syntax, the fragment identifier can be used to indicate a start position. [MEDIAFRAG]

     11. If there is no enabled audio track, then enable an audio track. This will cause a `change` event to be fired.

     12. If there is no selected video track, then select a video track. This will cause a `change` event to be fired.

     13. If the media element has a current media controller, then: if jumped is true and the initial playback position, relative to the current media controller's timeline, is greater than the current media controller's media controller position, then seek the media controller to the media element's initial playback position, relative to the current media controller's timeline; otherwise, seek the media element to the media controller position, relative to the media element's timeline.

     Once the `readyState` attribute reaches `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA`, after the `loadeddata` event has been fired, set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag to false. This stops delaying the load event.

     A user agent that is attempting to reduce network usage while still fetching the metadata for each media resource would also stop buffering at this point, following the rules described previously, which involve the `networkState` attribute switching to the `NETWORK_IDLE` value and a `suspend` event firing.

     The user agent is required to determine the duration of the media resource and go through this step before playing.

   Once the entire media resource has been fetched (but potentially before any of it has been decoded)

     Fire a simple event named `progress` at the media element.

     Set the `networkState` to `NETWORK_IDLE` and fire a simple event named `suspend` at the media element.

     If the user agent ever discards any media data and then needs to resume the network activity to obtain it again, then it must queue a task to set the `networkState` to `NETWORK_LOADING`.

     If the user agent can keep the media resource loaded, then the algorithm will continue to its final step below, which aborts the algorithm.

   If the connection is interrupted after some media data has been received, causing the user agent to give up trying to fetch the resource

     Fatal network errors that occur after the user agent has established whether the current media resource is usable (i.e. once the media element's `readyState` attribute is no longer `HAVE_NOTHING`) must cause the user agent to execute the following steps:

     1. The user agent should cancel the fetching process.

     2. Set the `error` attribute to a new `MediaError` object whose `code` attribute is set to `MEDIA_ERR_NETWORK`.

     3. Set the element's `networkState` attribute to the `NETWORK_IDLE` value.

     4. Set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag to false. This stops delaying the load event.

     5. Fire a simple event named `error` at the media element.

     6. Abort the overall resource selection algorithm.

   If the media data is corrupted

     Fatal errors in decoding the media data that occur after the user agent has established whether the current media resource is usable (i.e. once the media element's `readyState` attribute is no longer `HAVE_NOTHING`) must cause the user agent to execute the following steps:

     1. The user agent should cancel the fetching process.

     2. Set the `error` attribute to a new `MediaError` object whose `code` attribute is set to `MEDIA_ERR_DECODE`.

     3. Set the element's `networkState` attribute to the `NETWORK_IDLE` value.

     4. Set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag to false. This stops delaying the load event.

     5. Fire a simple event named `error` at the media element.

     6. Abort the overall resource selection algorithm.

   If the media data fetching process is aborted by the user

     The fetching process is aborted by the user, e.g. because the user pressed a "stop" button, the user agent must execute the following steps. These steps are not followed if the `load()` method itself is invoked while these steps are running, as the steps above handle that particular kind of abort.

     1. The user agent should cancel the fetching process.

     2. Set the `error` attribute to a new `MediaError` object whose `code` attribute is set to `MEDIA_ERR_ABORTED`.

     3. Fire a simple event named `abort` at the media element.

     4. If the media element's `readyState` attribute has a value equal to `HAVE_NOTHING`, set the element's `networkState` attribute to the `NETWORK_EMPTY` value, set the element's show poster flag to true, and fire a simple event named `emptied` at the element.

        Otherwise, set the element's `networkState` attribute to the `NETWORK_IDLE` value.

     5. Set the element's delaying-the-load-event flag to false. This stops delaying the load event.

     6. Abort the overall resource selection algorithm.

   If the media data can be fetched but has non-fatal errors or uses, in part, codecs that are unsupported, preventing the user agent from rendering the content completely correctly but not preventing playback altogether

     The server returning data that is partially usable but cannot be optimally rendered must cause the user agent to render just the bits it can handle, and ignore the rest.

   If the media resource is found to declare a media-resource-specific text track that the user agent supports

     If the media data is CORS-same-origin, run the steps to expose a media-resource-specific text track with the relevant data.

     Cross-origin videos do not expose their subtitles, since that would allow attacks such as hostile sites reading subtitles from confidential videos on a user's intranet.

5. Final step: If the user agent ever reaches this step (which can only happen if the entire resource gets loaded and kept available): abort the overall resource selection algorithm.

When a media element is to forget the media element's media-resource-specific tracks, the user agent must remove from the media element's list of text tracks all the media-resource-specific text tracks, then empty the media element's `audioTracks` attribute's `AudioTrackList` object, then empty the media element's `videoTracks` attribute's `VideoTrackList` object. No events (in particular, no `removetrack` events) are fired as part of this; the `error` and `emptied` events, fired by the algorithms that invoke this one, can be used instead.

The `preload` attribute is an enumerated attribute. The following table lists the keywords and states for the attribute — the keywords in the left column map to the states in the cell in the second column on the same row as the keyword. The attribute can be changed even once the media resource is being buffered or played; the descriptions in the table below are to be interpreted with that in mind.

Keyword | State | Brief description
--- | --- | ---
`none` | None | Hints to the user agent that either the author does not expect the user to need the media resource, or that the server wants to minimise unnecessary traffic. This state does not provide a hint regarding how aggressively to actually download the media resource if buffering starts anyway (e.g. once the user hits "play").
`metadata` | Metadata | Hints to the user agent that the author does not expect the user to need the media resource, but that fetching the resource metadata (dimensions, track list, duration, etc), and maybe even the first few frames, is reasonable. If the user agent precisely fetches no more than the metadata, then the media element will end up with its `readyState` attribute set to `HAVE_METADATA`; typically though, some frames will be obtained as well and it will probably be `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` or `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA`. When the media resource is playing, hints to the user agent that bandwidth is to be considered scarce, e.g. suggesting throttling the download so that the media data is obtained at the slowest possible rate that still maintains consistent playback.
`auto` | Automatic | Hints to the user agent that the user agent can put the user's needs first without risk to the server, up to and including optimistically downloading the entire resource.

The empty string is also a valid keyword, and maps to the Automatic state. The attribute's missing value default is user-agent defined, though the Metadata state is suggested as a compromise between reducing server load and providing an optimal user experience.

Authors might switch the attribute from "`none`" or "`metadata`" to "`auto`" dynamically once the user begins playback. For example, on a page with many videos this might be used to indicate that the many videos are not to be downloaded unless requested, but that once one is requested it is to be downloaded aggressively.

The `preload` attribute is intended to provide a hint to the user agent about what the author thinks will lead to the best user experience. The attribute may be ignored altogether, for example based on explicit user preferences or based on the available connectivity.

The `preload` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, limited to only known values.

The `autoplay` attribute can override the `preload` attribute (since if the media plays, it naturally has to buffer first, regardless of the hint given by the `preload` attribute). Including both is not an error, however.

media . `buffered`

  Returns a `TimeRanges` object that represents the ranges of the media resource that the user agent has buffered.

The `buffered` attribute must return a new static normalised `TimeRanges` object that represents the ranges of the media resource, if any, that the user agent has buffered, at the time the attribute is evaluated. Users agents must accurately determine the ranges available, even for media streams where this can only be determined by tedious inspection.

Typically this will be a single range anchored at the zero point, but if, e.g. the user agent uses HTTP range requests in response to seeking, then there could be multiple ranges.

User agents may discard previously buffered data.

Thus, a time position included within a range of the objects return by the `buffered` attribute at one time can end up being not included in the range(s) of objects returned by the same attribute at later times.

##### 4.8.14.6 Offsets into the media resource

media . `duration`

  Returns the length of the media resource, in seconds, assuming that the start of the media resource is at time zero.

  Returns NaN if the duration isn't available.

  Returns Infinity for unbounded streams.

media . `currentTime` [ = value ]

  Returns the official playback position, in seconds.

  Can be set, to seek to the given time.

  Will throw an `InvalidStateError` exception if there is no selected media resource or if there is a current media controller.

A media resource has a media timeline that maps times (in seconds) to positions in the media resource. The origin of a timeline is its earliest defined position. The duration of a timeline is its last defined position.

Establishing the media timeline: If the media resource somehow specifies an explicit timeline whose origin is not negative (i.e. gives each frame a specific time offset and gives the first frame a zero or positive offset), then the media timeline should be that timeline. (Whether the media resource can specify a timeline or not depends on the media resource's format.) If the media resource specifies an explicit start time and date, then that time and date should be considered the zero point in the media timeline; the timeline offset will be the time and date, exposed using the `getStartDate()` method.

If the media resource has a discontinuous timeline, the user agent must extend the timeline used at the start of the resource across the entire resource, so that the media timeline of the media resource increases linearly starting from the earliest possible position (as defined below), even if the underlying media data has out-of-order or even overlapping time codes.

For example, if two clips have been concatenated into one video file, but the video format exposes the original times for the two clips, the video data might expose a timeline that goes, say, 00:15..00:29 and then 00:05..00:38. However, the user agent would not expose those times; it would instead expose the times as 00:15..00:29 and 00:29..01:02, as a single video.

In the rare case of a media resource that does not have an explicit timeline, the zero time on the media timeline should correspond to the first frame of the media resource. In the even rarer case of a media resource with no explicit timings of any kind, not even frame durations, the user agent must itself determine the time for each frame in a user-agent-defined manner.

An example of a file format with no explicit timeline but with explicit frame durations is the Animated GIF format. An example of a file format with no explicit timings at all is the JPEG-push format (`multipart/x-mixed-replace` with JPEG frames, often used as the format for MJPEG streams).

If, in the case of a resource with no timing information, the user agent will nonetheless be able to seek to an earlier point than the first frame originally provided by the server, then the zero time should correspond to the earliest seekable time of the media resource; otherwise, it should correspond to the first frame received from the server (the point in the media resource at which the user agent began receiving the stream).

At the time of writing, there is no known format that lacks explicit frame time offsets yet still supports seeking to a frame before the first frame sent by the server.

Consider a stream from a TV broadcaster, which begins streaming on a sunny Friday afternoon in October, and always sends connecting user agents the media data on the same media timeline, with its zero time set to the start of this stream. Months later, user agents connecting to this stream will find that the first frame they receive has a time with millions of seconds. The `getStartDate()` method would always return the date that the broadcast started; this would allow controllers to display real times in their scrubber (e.g. "2:30pm") rather than a time relative to when the broadcast began ("8 months, 4 hours, 12 minutes, and 23 seconds").

Consider a stream that carries a video with several concatenated fragments, broadcast by a server that does not allow user agents to request specific times but instead just streams the video data in a predetermined order, with the first frame delivered always being identified as the frame with time zero. If a user agent connects to this stream and receives fragments defined as covering timestamps 2010-03-20 23:15:00 UTC to 2010-03-21 00:05:00 UTC and 2010-02-12 14:25:00 UTC to 2010-02-12 14:35:00 UTC, it would expose this with a media timeline starting at 0s and extending to 3,600s (one hour). Assuming the streaming server disconnected at the end of the second clip, the `duration` attribute would then return 3,600. The `getStartDate()` method would return a `Date` object with a time corresponding to 2010-03-20 23:15:00 UTC. However, if a different user agent connected five minutes later, it would (presumably) receive fragments covering timestamps 2010-03-20 23:20:00 UTC to 2010-03-21 00:05:00 UTC and 2010-02-12 14:25:00 UTC to 2010-02-12 14:35:00 UTC, and would expose this with a media timeline starting at 0s and extending to 3,300s (fifty five minutes). In this case, the `getStartDate()` method would return a `Date` object with a time corresponding to 2010-03-20 23:20:00 UTC.

In both of these examples, the `seekable` attribute would give the ranges that the controller would want to actually display in its UI; typically, if the servers don't support seeking to arbitrary times, this would be the range of time from the moment the user agent connected to the stream up to the latest frame that the user agent has obtained; however, if the user agent starts discarding earlier information, the actual range might be shorter.

In any case, the user agent must ensure that the earliest possible position (as defined below) using the established media timeline, is greater than or equal to zero.

The media timeline also has an associated clock. Which clock is used is user-agent defined, and may be media resource-dependent, but it should approximate the user's wall clock.

All the media elements that share current media controller use the same clock for their media timeline.

Media elements have a current playback position, which must initially (i.e. in the absence of media data) be zero seconds. The current playback position is a time on the media timeline.

Media elements also have an official playback position, which must initially be set to zero seconds. The official playback position is an approximation of the current playback position that is kept stable while scripts are running.

Media elements also have a default playback start position, which must initially be set to zero seconds. This time is used to allow the element to be seeked even before the media is loaded.

Each media element has a show poster flag. When a media element is created, this flag must be set to true. This flag is used to control when the user agent is to show a poster frame for a `video` element instead of showing the video contents.

The `currentTime` attribute must, on getting, return the media element's default playback start position, unless that is zero, in which case it must return the element's official playback position. The returned value must be expressed in seconds. On setting, if the media element has a current media controller, then the user agent must throw an `InvalidStateError` exception; otherwise, if the media element's `readyState` is `HAVE_NOTHING`, then it must set the media element's default playback start position to the new value; otherwise, it must set the official playback position to the new value and then seek to the new value. The new value must be interpreted as being in seconds.

Media elements have an initial playback position, which must initially (i.e. in the absence of media data) be zero seconds. The initial playback position is updated when a media resource is loaded. The initial playback position is a time on the media timeline.

If the media resource is a streaming resource, then the user agent might be unable to obtain certain parts of the resource after it has expired from its buffer. Similarly, some media resources might have a media timeline that doesn't start at zero. The earliest possible position is the earliest position in the stream or resource that the user agent can ever obtain again. It is also a time on the media timeline.

The earliest possible position is not explicitly exposed in the API; it corresponds to the start time of the first range in the `seekable` attribute's `TimeRanges` object, if any, or the current playback position otherwise.

When the earliest possible position changes, then: if the current playback position is before the earliest possible position, the user agent must seek to the earliest possible position; otherwise, if the user agent has not fired a `timeupdate` event at the element in the past 15 to 250ms and is not still running event handlers for such an event, then the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the element.

Because of the above requirement and the requirement in the resource fetch algorithm that kicks in when the metadata of the clip becomes known, the current playback position can never be less than the earliest possible position.

If at any time the user agent learns that an audio or video track has ended and all media data relating to that track corresponds to parts of the media timeline that are before the earliest possible position, the user agent may queue a task to first remove the track from the `audioTracks` attribute's `AudioTrackList` object or the `videoTracks` attribute's `VideoTrackList` object as appropriate and then fire a trusted event with the name `removetrack`, that does not bubble and is not cancelable, and that uses the `TrackEvent` interface, with the `track` attribute initialised to the `AudioTrack` or `VideoTrack` object representing the track, at the media element's aforementioned `AudioTrackList` or `VideoTrackList` object.

The `duration` attribute must return the time of the end of the media resource, in seconds, on the media timeline. If no media data is available, then the attributes must return the Not-a-Number (NaN) value. If the media resource is not known to be bounded (e.g. streaming radio, or a live event with no announced end time), then the attribute must return the positive Infinity value.

The user agent must determine the duration of the media resource before playing any part of the media data and before setting `readyState` to a value equal to or greater than `HAVE_METADATA`, even if doing so requires fetching multiple parts of the resource.

When the length of the media resource changes to a known value (e.g. from being unknown to known, or from a previously established length to a new length) the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `durationchange` at the media element. (The event is not fired when the duration is reset as part of loading a new media resource.) If the duration is changed such that the current playback position ends up being greater than the time of the end of the media resource, then the user agent must also seek to the time of the end of the media resource.

If an "infinite" stream ends for some reason, then the duration would change from positive Infinity to the time of the last frame or sample in the stream, and the `durationchange` event would be fired. Similarly, if the user agent initially estimated the media resource's duration instead of determining it precisely, and later revises the estimate based on new information, then the duration would change and the `durationchange` event would be fired.

Some video files also have an explicit date and time corresponding to the zero time in the media timeline, known as the timeline offset. Initially, the timeline offset must be set to Not-a-Number (NaN).

The `getStartDate()` method must return a new `Date` object representing the current timeline offset.

The `loop` attribute is a boolean attribute that, if specified, indicates that the media element is to seek back to the start of the media resource upon reaching the end.

The `loop` attribute has no effect while the element has a current media controller.

The `loop` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

##### 4.8.14.7 Ready states

media . `readyState`

  Returns a value that expresses the current state of the element with respect to rendering the current playback position, from the codes in the list below.

Media elements have a ready state, which describes to what degree they are ready to be rendered at the current playback position. The possible values are as follows; the ready state of a media element at any particular time is the greatest value describing the state of the element:

`HAVE_NOTHING` (numeric value 0)

  No information regarding the media resource is available. No data for the current playback position is available. Media elements whose `networkState` attribute are set to `NETWORK_EMPTY` are always in the `HAVE_NOTHING` state.

`HAVE_METADATA` (numeric value 1)

  Enough of the resource has been obtained that the duration of the resource is available. In the case of a `video` element, the dimensions of the video are also available. The API will no longer throw an exception when seeking. No media data is available for the immediate current playback position.

`HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` (numeric value 2)

  Data for the immediate current playback position is available, but either not enough data is available that the user agent could successfully advance the current playback position in the direction of playback at all without immediately reverting to the `HAVE_METADATA` state, or there is no more data to obtain in the direction of playback. For example, in video this corresponds to the user agent having data from the current frame, but not the next frame, when the current playback position is at the end of the current frame; and to when playback has ended.

`HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` (numeric value 3)

  Data for the immediate current playback position is available, as well as enough data for the user agent to advance the current playback position in the direction of playback at least a little without immediately reverting to the `HAVE_METADATA` state, and the text tracks are ready. For example, in video this corresponds to the user agent having data for at least the current frame and the next frame when the current playback position is at the instant in time between the two frames, or to the user agent having the video data for the current frame and audio data to keep playing at least a little when the current playback position is in the middle of a frame. The user agent cannot be in this state if playback has ended, as the current playback position can never advance in this case.

`HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA` (numeric value 4)

  All the conditions described for the `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` state are met, and, in addition, either of the following conditions is also true:

  - The user agent estimates that data is being fetched at a rate where the current playback position, if it were to advance at the effective playback rate, would not overtake the available data before playback reaches the end of the media resource.
  - The user agent has entered a state where waiting longer will not result in further data being obtained, and therefore nothing would be gained by delaying playback any further. (For example, the buffer might be full.)

In practice, the difference between `HAVE_METADATA` and `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` is negligible. Really the only time the difference is relevant is when painting a `video` element onto a `canvas`, where it distinguishes the case where something will be drawn (`HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` or greater) from the case where nothing is drawn (`HAVE_METADATA` or less). Similarly, the difference between `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` (only the current frame) and `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` (at least this frame and the next) can be negligible (in the extreme, only one frame). The only time that distinction really matters is when a page provides an interface for "frame-by-frame" navigation.

When the ready state of a media element whose `networkState` is not `NETWORK_EMPTY` changes, the user agent must follow the steps given below:

1. Apply the first applicable set of substeps from the following list:

   If the previous ready state was `HAVE_NOTHING`, and the new ready state is `HAVE_METADATA`

     Queue a task to fire a simple event named `loadedmetadata` at the element.

     Before this task is run, as part of the event loop mechanism, the rendering will have been updated to resize the `video` element if appropriate.

   If the previous ready state was `HAVE_METADATA` and the new ready state is `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` or greater

     If this is the first time this occurs for this media element since the `load()` algorithm was last invoked, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `loadeddata` at the element.

     If the new ready state is `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` or `HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA`, then the relevant steps below must then be run also.

   If the previous ready state was `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` or more, and the new ready state is `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` or less

     If the media element was potentially playing before its `readyState` attribute changed to a value lower than `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA`, and the element has not ended playback, and playback has not stopped due to errors, paused for user interaction, or paused for in-band content, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the element, and queue a task to fire a simple event named `waiting` at the element.

   If the previous ready state was `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` or less, and the new ready state is `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA`

     The user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `canplay` at the element.

     If the element's `paused` attribute is false, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `playing` at the element.

   If the new ready state is `HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA`

     If the previous ready state was `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` or less, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `canplay` at the element, and, if the element's `paused` attribute is false, queue a task to fire a simple event named `playing` at the element.

     If the autoplaying flag is true, and the `paused` attribute is true, and the media element has an `autoplay` attribute specified, and the media element's node document's active sandboxing flag set does not have the sandboxed automatic features browsing context flag set, then the user agent may also run the following substeps:

     1. Set the `paused` attribute to false.
     2. If the element's show poster flag is true, set it to false and run the time marches on steps.
     3. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `play` at the element.
     4. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `playing` at the element.

     User agents do not need to support autoplay, and it is suggested that user agents honor user preferences on the matter. Authors are urged to use the `autoplay` attribute rather than using script to force the video to play, so as to allow the user to override the behavior if so desired.

     In any case, the user agent must finally queue a task to fire a simple event named `canplaythrough` at the element.

2. If the media element has a current media controller, then report the controller state for the media element's current media controller.

It is possible for the ready state of a media element to jump between these states discontinuously. For example, the state of a media element can jump straight from `HAVE_METADATA` to `HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA` without passing through the `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` and `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` states.

The `readyState` IDL attribute must, on getting, return the value described above that describes the current ready state of the media element.

The `autoplay` attribute is a boolean attribute. When present, the user agent (as described in the algorithm described herein) will automatically begin playback of the media resource as soon as it can do so without stopping.

Authors are urged to use the `autoplay` attribute rather than using script to trigger automatic playback, as this allows the user to override the automatic playback when it is not desired, e.g. when using a screen reader. Authors are also encouraged to consider not using the automatic playback behavior at all, and instead to let the user agent wait for the user to start playback explicitly.

The `autoplay` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

##### 4.8.14.8 Playing the media resource

media . `paused`

  Returns true if playback is paused; false otherwise.

media . `ended`

  Returns true if playback has reached the end of the media resource.

media . `defaultPlaybackRate` [ = value ]

  Returns the default rate of playback, for when the user is not fast-forwarding or reversing through the media resource.

  Can be set, to change the default rate of playback.

  The default rate has no direct effect on playback, but if the user switches to a fast-forward mode, when they return to the normal playback mode, it is expected that the rate of playback will be returned to the default rate of playback.

  When the element has a current media controller, the `defaultPlaybackRate` attribute is ignored and the current media controller's `defaultPlaybackRate` is used instead.

media . `playbackRate` [ = value ]

  Returns the current rate playback, where 1.0 is normal speed.

  Can be set, to change the rate of playback.

  When the element has a current media controller, the `playbackRate` attribute is ignored and the current media controller's `playbackRate` is used instead.

media . `played`

  Returns a `TimeRanges` object that represents the ranges of the media resource that the user agent has played.

media . `play`()

  Sets the `paused` attribute to false, loading the media resource and beginning playback if necessary. If the playback had ended, will restart it from the start.

media . `pause`()

  Sets the `paused` attribute to true, loading the media resource if necessary.

The `paused` attribute represents whether the media element is paused or not. The attribute must initially be true.

A media element is a blocked media element if its `readyState` attribute is in the `HAVE_NOTHING` state, the `HAVE_METADATA` state, or the `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` state, or if the element has paused for user interaction or paused for in-band content.

A media element is said to be potentially playing when its `paused` attribute is false, the element has not ended playback, playback has not stopped due to errors, the element either has no current media controller or has a current media controller but is not blocked on its media controller, and the element is not a blocked media element.

A `waiting` DOM event can be fired as a result of an element that is potentially playing stopping playback due to its `readyState` attribute changing to a value lower than `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA`.

A media element is said to have ended playback when:

- The element's `readyState` attribute is `HAVE_METADATA` or greater, and

- Either:

  - The current playback position is the end of the media resource, and
  - The direction of playback is forwards, and
  - Either the media element does not have a `loop` attribute specified, or the media element has a current media controller.

  Or:

  - The current playback position is the earliest possible position, and
  - The direction of playback is backwards.

The `ended` attribute must return true if, the last time the event loop reached step 1, the media element had ended playback and the direction of playback was forwards, and false otherwise.

A media element is said to have stopped due to errors when the element's `readyState` attribute is `HAVE_METADATA` or greater, and the user agent encounters a non-fatal error during the processing of the media data, and due to that error, is not able to play the content at the current playback position.

A media element is said to have paused for user interaction when its `paused` attribute is false, the `readyState` attribute is either `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` or `HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA` and the user agent has reached a point in the media resource where the user has to make a selection for the resource to continue. If the media element has a current media controller when this happens, then the user agent must report the controller state for the media element's current media controller. If the media element has a current media controller when the user makes a selection, allowing playback to resume, the user agent must similarly report the controller state for the media element's current media controller.

It is possible for a media element to have both ended playback and paused for user interaction at the same time.

When a media element that is potentially playing stops playing because it has paused for user interaction, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the element.

A media element is said to have paused for in-band content when its `paused` attribute is false, the `readyState` attribute is either `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` or `HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA` and the user agent has suspended playback of the media resource in order to play content that is temporally anchored to the media resource and has a non-zero length, or to play content that is temporally anchored to a segment of the media resource but has a length longer than that segment. If the media element has a current media controller when this happens, then the user agent must report the controller state for the media element's current media controller. If the media element has a current media controller when the user agent unsuspends playback, the user agent must similarly report the controller state for the media element's current media controller.

One example of when a media element would be paused for in-band content is when the user agent is playing audio descriptions from an external WebVTT file, and the synthesized speech generated for a cue is longer than the time between the text track cue start time and the text track cue end time.

When the current playback position reaches the end of the media resource when the direction of playback is forwards, then the user agent must follow these steps:

1. If the media element has a `loop` attribute specified and does not have a current media controller, then seek to the earliest possible position of the media resource and abort these steps.

2. As defined above, the `ended` IDL attribute starts returning true once the event loop returns to step 1.

3. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the media element.

4. Queue a task that, if the media element does not have a current media controller, and the media element has still ended playback, and the direction of playback is still forwards, and paused is false, changes paused to true and fires a simple event named `pause` at the media element.

5. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `ended` at the media element.

6. If the media element has a current media controller, then report the controller state for the media element's current media controller.

When the current playback position reaches the earliest possible position of the media resource when the direction of playback is backwards, then the user agent must only queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the element.

The word "reaches" here does not imply that the current playback position needs to have changed during normal playback; it could be via seeking, for instance.

The `defaultPlaybackRate` attribute gives the desired speed at which the media resource is to play, as a multiple of its intrinsic speed. The attribute is mutable: on getting it must return the last value it was set to, or 1.0 if it hasn't yet been set; on setting the attribute must be set to the new value.

The `defaultPlaybackRate` is used by the user agent when it exposes a user interface to the user.

The `playbackRate` attribute gives the effective playback rate (assuming there is no current media controller overriding it), which is the speed at which the media resource plays, as a multiple of its intrinsic speed. If it is not equal to the `defaultPlaybackRate`, then the implication is that the user is using a feature such as fast forward or slow motion playback. The attribute is mutable: on getting it must return the last value it was set to, or 1.0 if it hasn't yet been set; on setting the attribute must be set to the new value, and the playback will change speed (if the element is potentially playing and there is no current media controller).

When the `defaultPlaybackRate` or `playbackRate` attributes change value (either by being set by script or by being changed directly by the user agent, e.g. in response to user control) the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `ratechange` at the media element.

The `defaultPlaybackRate` and `playbackRate` attributes have no effect when the media element has a current media controller; the namesake attributes on the `MediaController` object are used instead in that situation.

The `played` attribute must return a new static normalised `TimeRanges` object that represents the ranges of points on the media timeline of the media resource reached through the usual monotonic increase of the current playback position during normal playback, if any, at the time the attribute is evaluated.

When the `play()` method on a media element is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps.

1. If the media element's `networkState` attribute has the value `NETWORK_EMPTY`, invoke the media element's resource selection algorithm.

2. If the playback has ended and the direction of playback is forwards, and the media element does not have a current media controller, seek to the earliest possible position of the media resource.

   This will cause the user agent to queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the media element.

3. If the media element has a current media controller, then bring the media element up to speed with its new media controller.

4. If the media element's `paused` attribute is true, run the following substeps:

   1. Change the value of `paused` to false.

   2. If the show poster flag is true, set the element's show poster flag to false and run the time marches on steps.

   3. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `play` at the element.

   4. If the media element's `readyState` attribute has the value `HAVE_NOTHING`, `HAVE_METADATA`, or `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA`, queue a task to fire a simple event named `waiting` at the element.

      Otherwise, the media element's `readyState` attribute has the value `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` or `HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA`: queue a task to fire a simple event named `playing` at the element.

5. Set the media element's autoplaying flag to false.

6. If the media element has a current media controller, then report the controller state for the media element's current media controller.

When the `pause()` method is invoked, and when the user agent is required to pause the media element, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If the media element's `networkState` attribute has the value `NETWORK_EMPTY`, invoke the media element's resource selection algorithm.

2. Run the internal pause steps for the media element.

The internal pause steps for a media element are as follows:

1. Set the media element's autoplaying flag to false.

2. If the media element's `paused` attribute is false, run the following steps:

   1. Change the value of `paused` to true.

   2. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the element.

   3. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `pause` at the element.

   4. Set the official playback position to the current playback position.

3. If the media element has a current media controller, then report the controller state for the media element's current media controller.

The effective playback rate is not necessarily the element's `playbackRate`. When a media element has a current media controller, its effective playback rate is the `MediaController`'s media controller playback rate. Otherwise, the effective playback rate is just the element's `playbackRate`. Thus, the current media controller overrides the media element.

If the effective playback rate is positive or zero, then the direction of playback is forwards. Otherwise, it is backwards.

When a media element is potentially playing and its `Document` is a fully active `Document`, its current playback position must increase monotonically at effective playback rate units of media time per unit time of the media timeline's clock. (This specification always refers to this as an increase, but that increase could actually be a decrease if the effective playback rate is negative.)

The effective playback rate can be 0.0, in which case the current playback position doesn't move, despite playback not being paused (`paused` doesn't become true, and the `pause` event doesn't fire).

This specification doesn't define how the user agent achieves the appropriate playback rate — depending on the protocol and media available, it is plausible that the user agent could negotiate with the server to have the server provide the media data at the appropriate rate, so that (except for the period between when the rate is changed and when the server updates the stream's playback rate) the client doesn't actually have to drop or interpolate any frames.

Any time the user agent provides a stable state, the official playback position must be set to the current playback position.

While the direction of playback is backwards, any corresponding audio must be muted. While the effective playback rate is so low or so high that the user agent cannot play audio usefully, the corresponding audio must also be muted. If the effective playback rate is not 1.0, the user agent may apply pitch adjustments to the audio as necessary to render it faithfully.

Media elements that are potentially playing while not in a `Document` must not play any video, but should play any audio component. Media elements must not stop playing just because all references to them have been removed; only once a media element is in a state where no further audio could ever be played by that element may the element be garbage collected.

It is possible for an element to which no explicit references exist to play audio, even if such an element is not still actively playing: for instance, it could have a current media controller that still has references and can still be unpaused, or it could be unpaused but stalled waiting for content to buffer.

Each media element has a list of newly introduced cues, which must be initially empty. Whenever a text track cue is added to the list of cues of a text track that is in the list of text tracks for a media element, that cue must be added to the media element's list of newly introduced cues. Whenever a text track is added to the list of text tracks for a media element, all of the cues in that text track's list of cues must be added to the media element's list of newly introduced cues. When a media element's list of newly introduced cues has new cues added while the media element's show poster flag is not set, then the user agent must run the time marches on steps.

When a text track cue is removed from the list of cues of a text track that is in the list of text tracks for a media element, and whenever a text track is removed from the list of text tracks of a media element, if the media element's show poster flag is not set, then the user agent must run the time marches on steps.

When the current playback position of a media element changes (e.g. due to playback or seeking), the user agent must run the time marches on steps. If the current playback position changes while the steps are running, then the user agent must wait for the steps to complete, and then must immediately rerun the steps. (These steps are thus run as often as possible or needed — if one iteration takes a long time, this can cause certain cues to be skipped over as the user agent rushes ahead to "catch up".)

The time marches on steps are as follows:

1. Let current cues be a list of cues, initialised to contain all the cues of all the hidden or showing text tracks of the media element (not the disabled ones) whose start times are less than or equal to the current playback position and whose end times are greater than the current playback position.

2. Let other cues be a list of cues, initialised to contain all the cues of hidden and showing text tracks of the media element that are not present in current cues.

3. Let last time be the current playback position at the time this algorithm was last run for this media element, if this is not the first time it has run.

4. If the current playback position has, since the last time this algorithm was run, only changed through its usual monotonic increase during normal playback, then let missed cues be the list of cues in other cues whose start times are greater than or equal to last time and whose end times are less than or equal to the current playback position. Otherwise, let missed cues be an empty list.

5. Remove all the cues in missed cues that are also in the media element's list of newly introduced cues, and then empty the element's list of newly introduced cues.

6. If the time was reached through the usual monotonic increase of the current playback position during normal playback, and if the user agent has not fired a `timeupdate` event at the element in the past 15 to 250ms and is not still running event handlers for such an event, then the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the element. (In the other cases, such as explicit seeks, relevant events get fired as part of the overall process of changing the current playback position.)

   The event thus is not to be fired faster than about 66Hz or slower than 4Hz (assuming the event handlers don't take longer than 250ms to run). User agents are encouraged to vary the frequency of the event based on the system load and the average cost of processing the event each time, so that the UI updates are not any more frequent than the user agent can comfortably handle while decoding the video.

7. If all of the cues in current cues have their text track cue active flag set, none of the cues in other cues have their text track cue active flag set, and missed cues is empty, then abort these steps.

8. If the time was reached through the usual monotonic increase of the current playback position during normal playback, and there are cues in other cues that have their text track cue pause-on-exit flag set and that either have their text track cue active flag set or are also in missed cues, then immediately pause the media element.

   In the other cases, such as explicit seeks, playback is not paused by going past the end time of a cue, even if that cue has its text track cue pause-on-exit flag set.

9. Let events be a list of tasks, initially empty. Each task in this list will be associated with a text track, a text track cue, and a time, which are used to sort the list before the tasks are queued.

   Let affected tracks be a list of text tracks, initially empty.

   When the steps below say to prepare an event named event for a text track cue target with a time time, the user agent must run these substeps:

   1. Let track be the text track with which the text track cue target is associated.

   2. Create a task to fire a simple event named event at target.

   3. Add the newly created task to events, associated with the time time, the text track track, and the text track cue target.

   4. Add track to affected tracks.

10. For each text track cue in missed cues, prepare an event named `enter` for the `TextTrackCue` object with the text track cue start time.

11. For each text track cue in other cues that either has its text track cue active flag set or is in missed cues, prepare an event named `exit` for the `TextTrackCue` object with the later of the text track cue end time and the text track cue start time.

12. For each text track cue in current cues that does not have its text track cue active flag set, prepare an event named `enter` for the `TextTrackCue` object with the text track cue start time.

13. Sort the tasks in events in ascending time order (tasks with earlier times first).

    Further sort tasks in events that have the same time by the relative text track cue order of the text track cues associated with these tasks.

    Finally, sort tasks in events that have the same time and same text track cue order by placing tasks that fire `enter` events before those that fire `exit` events.

14. Queue each task in events, in list order.

15. Sort affected tracks in the same order as the text tracks appear in the media element's list of text tracks, and remove duplicates.

16. For each text track in affected tracks, in the list order, queue a task to fire a simple event named `cuechange` at the `TextTrack` object, and, if the text track has a corresponding `track` element, to then fire a simple event named `cuechange` at the `track` element as well.

17. Set the text track cue active flag of all the cues in the current cues, and unset the text track cue active flag of all the cues in the other cues.

18. Run the rules for updating the text track rendering of each of the text tracks in affected tracks that are showing. For example, for text tracks based on WebVTT, the rules for updating the display of WebVTT text tracks. [WEBVTT]

For the purposes of the algorithm above, a text track cue is considered to be part of a text track only if it is listed in the text track list of cues, not merely if it is associated with the text track.

If the media element's node document stops being a fully active document, then the playback will stop until the document is active again.

When a media element is removed from a `Document`, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Asynchronously await a stable state, allowing the task that removed the media element from the `Document` to continue. The synchronous section consists of all the remaining steps of this algorithm. (Steps in the synchronous section are marked with ⌛.)

2. ⌛ If the media element is in a `Document`, abort these steps.

3. ⌛ Run the internal pause steps for the media element.

##### 4.8.14.9 Seeking

media . `seeking`

  Returns true if the user agent is currently seeking.

media . `seekable`

  Returns a `TimeRanges` object that represents the ranges of the media resource to which it is possible for the user agent to seek.

media . `fastSeek`( time )

  Seeks to near the given time as fast as possible, trading precision for speed. (To seek to a precise time, use the `currentTime` attribute.)

  This does nothing if the media resource has not been loaded.

The `seeking` attribute must initially have the value false.

The `fastSeek()` method must seek to the time given by the method's argument, with the approximate-for-speed flag set.

When the user agent is required to seek to a particular new playback position in the media resource, optionally with the approximate-for-speed flag set, it means that the user agent must run the following steps. This algorithm interacts closely with the event loop mechanism; in particular, it has a synchronous section (which is triggered as part of the event loop algorithm). Steps in that section are marked with ⌛.

1. Set the media element's show poster flag to false.

2. If the media element's `readyState` is `HAVE_NOTHING`, abort these steps.

3. If the element's `seeking` IDL attribute is true, then another instance of this algorithm is already running. Abort that other instance of the algorithm without waiting for the step that it is running to complete.

4. Set the `seeking` IDL attribute to true.

5. If the seek was in response to a DOM method call or setting of an IDL attribute, then continue the script. The remainder of these steps must be run asynchronously. With the exception of the steps marked with ⌛, they could be aborted at any time by another instance of this algorithm being invoked.

6. If the new playback position is later than the end of the media resource, then let it be the end of the media resource instead.

7. If the new playback position is less than the earliest possible position, let it be that position instead.

8. If the (possibly now changed) new playback position is not in one of the ranges given in the `seekable` attribute, then let it be the position in one of the ranges given in the `seekable` attribute that is the nearest to the new playback position. If two positions both satisfy that constraint (i.e. the new playback position is exactly in the middle between two ranges in the `seekable` attribute) then use the position that is closest to the current playback position. If there are no ranges given in the `seekable` attribute then set the `seeking` IDL attribute to false and abort these steps.

9. If the approximate-for-speed flag is set, adjust the new playback position to a value that will allow for playback to resume promptly. If new playback position before this step is before current playback position, then the adjusted new playback position must also be before the current playback position. Similarly, if the new playback position before this step is after current playback position, then the adjusted new playback position must also be after the current playback position.

   For example, the user agent could snap to a nearby key frame, so that it doesn't have to spend time decoding then discarding intermediate frames before resuming playback.

10. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `seeking` at the element.

11. Set the current playback position to the new playback position.

    If the media element was potentially playing immediately before it started seeking, but seeking caused its `readyState` attribute to change to a value lower than `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA`, then a `waiting` event will be fired at the element.

    This step sets the current playback position, and thus can immediately trigger other conditions, such as the rules regarding when playback "reaches the end of the media resource" (part of the logic that handles looping), even before the user agent is actually able to render the media data for that position (as determined in the next step).

    The `currentTime` attribute returns the official playback position, not the current playback position, and therefore gets updated before script execution, separate from this algorithm.

12. Wait until the user agent has established whether or not the media data for the new playback position is available, and, if it is, until it has decoded enough data to play back that position.

13. Await a stable state. The synchronous section consists of all the remaining steps of this algorithm. (Steps in the synchronous section are marked with ⌛.)

14. ⌛ Set the `seeking` IDL attribute to false.

15. ⌛ Run the time marches on steps.

16. ⌛ Queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the element.

17. ⌛ Queue a task to fire a simple event named `seeked` at the element.

The `seekable` attribute must return a new static normalised `TimeRanges` object that represents the ranges of the media resource, if any, that the user agent is able to seek to, at the time the attribute is evaluated.

If the user agent can seek to anywhere in the media resource, e.g. because it is a simple movie file and the user agent and the server support HTTP Range requests, then the attribute would return an object with one range, whose start is the time of the first frame (the earliest possible position, typically zero), and whose end is the same as the time of the first frame plus the `duration` attribute's value (which would equal the time of the last frame, and might be positive Infinity).

The range might be continuously changing, e.g. if the user agent is buffering a sliding window on an infinite stream. This is the behavior seen with DVRs viewing live TV, for instance.

Media resources might be internally scripted or interactive. Thus, a media element could play in a non-linear fashion. If this happens, the user agent must act as if the algorithm for seeking was used whenever the current playback position changes in a discontinuous fashion (so that the relevant events fire). If the media element has a current media controller, then the user agent must seek the media controller appropriately instead.

##### 4.8.14.10 Media resources with multiple media tracks

A media resource can have multiple embedded audio and video tracks. For example, in addition to the primary video and audio tracks, a media resource could have foreign-language dubbed dialogues, director's commentaries, audio descriptions, alternative angles, or sign-language overlays.

media . `audioTracks`

  Returns an `AudioTrackList` object representing the audio tracks available in the media resource.

media . `videoTracks`

  Returns a `VideoTrackList` object representing the video tracks available in the media resource.

The `audioTracks` attribute of a media element must return a live `AudioTrackList` object representing the audio tracks available in the media element's media resource. The same object must be returned each time.

The `videoTracks` attribute of a media element must return a live `VideoTrackList` object representing the video tracks available in the media element's media resource. The same object must be returned each time.

There are only ever one `AudioTrackList` object and one `VideoTrackList` object per media element, even if another media resource is loaded into the element: the objects are reused. (The `AudioTrack` and `VideoTrack` objects are not, though.)

In this example, a script defines a function that takes a URL to a video and a reference to an element where the video is to be placed. That function then tries to load the video, and, once it is loaded, checks to see if there is a sign-language track available. If there is, it also displays that track. Both tracks are just placed in the given container; it's assumed that styles have been applied to make this work in a pretty way!

    <script>
     function loadVideo(url, container) {
       var controller = new MediaController();
       var video = document.createElement('video');
       video.src = url;
       video.autoplay = true;
       video.controls = true;
       video.controller = controller;
       container.appendChild(video);
       video.onloadedmetadata = function (event) {
         for (var i = 0; i < video.videoTracks.length; i += 1) {
           if (video.videoTracks[i].kind == 'sign') {
             var sign = document.createElement('video');
             sign.src = url + '#track=' + video.videoTracks[i].id;
             sign.autoplay = true;
             sign.controller = controller;
             container.appendChild(sign);
             return;
           }
         }
       };
     }
    </script>

###### 4.8.14.10.1 `AudioTrackList` and `VideoTrackList` objects

The `AudioTrackList` and `VideoTrackList` interfaces are used by attributes defined in the previous section.

    interface AudioTrackList : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      getter AudioTrack (unsigned long index);
      AudioTrack? getTrackById(DOMString id);

               attribute EventHandler onchange;
               attribute EventHandler onaddtrack;
               attribute EventHandler onremovetrack;
    };

    interface AudioTrack {
      readonly attribute DOMString id;
      readonly attribute DOMString kind;
      readonly attribute DOMString label;
      readonly attribute DOMString language;
               attribute boolean enabled;
    };

    interface VideoTrackList : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      getter VideoTrack (unsigned long index);
      VideoTrack? getTrackById(DOMString id);
      readonly attribute long selectedIndex;

               attribute EventHandler onchange;
               attribute EventHandler onaddtrack;
               attribute EventHandler onremovetrack;
    };

    interface VideoTrack {
      readonly attribute DOMString id;
      readonly attribute DOMString kind;
      readonly attribute DOMString label;
      readonly attribute DOMString language;
               attribute boolean selected;
    };

media . `audioTracks` . `length`
media . `videoTracks` . `length`

  Returns the number of tracks in the list.

audioTrack = media . `audioTracks`[index]
videoTrack = media . `videoTracks`[index]

  Returns the specified `AudioTrack` or `VideoTrack` object.

audioTrack = media . `audioTracks` . `getTrackById`( id )
videoTrack = media . `videoTracks` . `getTrackById`( id )

  Returns the `AudioTrack` or `VideoTrack` object with the given identifier, or null if no track has that identifier.

audioTrack . `id`
videoTrack . `id`

  Returns the ID of the given track. This is the ID that can be used with a fragment identifier if the format supports the Media Fragments URI syntax, and that can be used with the `getTrackById()` method. [MEDIAFRAG]

audioTrack . `kind`
videoTrack . `kind`

  Returns the category the given track falls into. The possible track categories are given below.

audioTrack . `label`
videoTrack . `label`

  Returns the label of the given track, if known, or the empty string otherwise.

audioTrack . `language`
videoTrack . `language`

  Returns the language of the given track, if known, or the empty string otherwise.

audioTrack . `enabled` [ = value ]

  Returns true if the given track is active, and false otherwise.

  Can be set, to change whether the track is enabled or not. If multiple audio tracks are enabled simultaneously, they are mixed.

media . `videoTracks` . `selectedIndex`

  Returns the index of the currently selected track, if any, or −1 otherwise.

videoTrack . `selected` [ = value ]

  Returns true if the given track is active, and false otherwise.

  Can be set, to change whether the track is selected or not. Either zero or one video track is selected; selecting a new track while a previous one is selected will unselect the previous one.

An `AudioTrackList` object represents a dynamic list of zero or more audio tracks, of which zero or more can be enabled at a time. Each audio track is represented by an `AudioTrack` object.

A `VideoTrackList` object represents a dynamic list of zero or more video tracks, of which zero or one can be selected at a time. Each video track is represented by a `VideoTrack` object.

Tracks in `AudioTrackList` and `VideoTrackList` objects must be consistently ordered. If the media resource is in a format that defines an order, then that order must be used; otherwise, the order must be the relative order in which the tracks are declared in the media resource. The order used is called the natural order of the list.

Each track in one of these objects thus has an index; the first has the index 0, and each subsequent track is numbered one higher than the previous one. If a media resource dynamically adds or removes audio or video tracks, then the indices of the tracks will change dynamically. If the media resource changes entirely, then all the previous tracks will be removed and replaced with new tracks.

The `AudioTrackList.length` and `VideoTrackList.length` attributes must return the number of tracks represented by their objects at the time of getting.

The supported property indices of `AudioTrackList` and `VideoTrackList` objects at any instant are the numbers from zero to the number of tracks represented by the respective object minus one, if any tracks are represented. If an `AudioTrackList` or `VideoTrackList` object represents no tracks, it has no supported property indices.

To determine the value of an indexed property for a given index index in an `AudioTrackList` or `VideoTrackList` object list, the user agent must return the `AudioTrack` or `VideoTrack` object that represents the indexth track in list.

The `AudioTrackList.getTrackById(id)` and `VideoTrackList.getTrackById(id)` methods must return the first `AudioTrack` or `VideoTrack` object (respectively) in the `AudioTrackList` or `VideoTrackList` object (respectively) whose identifier is equal to the value of the id argument (in the natural order of the list, as defined above). When no tracks match the given argument, the methods must return null.

The `AudioTrack` and `VideoTrack` objects represent specific tracks of a media resource. Each track can have an identifier, category, label, and language. These aspects of a track are permanent for the lifetime of the track; even if a track is removed from a media resource's `AudioTrackList` or `VideoTrackList` objects, those aspects do not change.

In addition, `AudioTrack` objects can each be enabled or disabled; this is the audio track's enabled state. When an `AudioTrack` is created, its enabled state must be set to false (disabled). The resource fetch algorithm can override this.

Similarly, a single `VideoTrack` object per `VideoTrackList` object can be selected, this is the video track's selection state. When a `VideoTrack` is created, its selection state must be set to false (not selected). The resource fetch algorithm can override this.

The `AudioTrack.id` and `VideoTrack.id` attributes must return the identifier of the track, if it has one, or the empty string otherwise. If the media resource is in a format that supports the Media Fragments URI fragment identifier syntax, the identifier returned for a particular track must be the same identifier that would enable the track if used as the name of a track in the track dimension of such a fragment identifier. [MEDIAFRAG] [INBAND]

For example, in Ogg files, this would be the Name header field of the track. [OGGSKELETONHEADERS]

The `AudioTrack.kind` and `VideoTrack.kind` attributes must return the category of the track, if it has one, or the empty string otherwise.

The category of a track is the string given in the first column of the table below that is the most appropriate for the track based on the definitions in the table's second and third columns, as determined by the metadata included in the track in the media resource. The cell in the third column of a row says what the category given in the cell in the first column of that row applies to; a category is only appropriate for an audio track if it applies to audio tracks, and a category is only appropriate for video tracks if it applies to video tracks. Categories must only be returned for `AudioTrack` objects if they are appropriate for audio, and must only be returned for `VideoTrack` objects if they are appropriate for video.

For Ogg files, the Role header field of the track gives the relevant metadata. For DASH media resources, the `Role` element conveys the information. For WebM, only the `FlagDefault` element currently maps to a value. The Sourcing In-band Media Resource Tracks from Media Containers into HTML specification has further details. [OGGSKELETONHEADERS] [DASH] [WEBMCG] [INBAND]

Return values for `AudioTrack.kind` and `VideoTrack.kind`
Category | Definition | Applies to... | Examples
--- | --- | --- | ---
"`alternative`" | A possible alternative to the main track, e.g. a different take of a song (audio), or a different angle (video). | Audio and video. | Ogg: "audio/alternate" or "video/alternate"; DASH: "alternate" without "main" and "commentary" roles, and, for audio, without the "dub" role (other roles ignored).
"`captions`" | A version of the main video track with captions burnt in. (For legacy content; new content would use text tracks.) | Video only. | DASH: "caption" and "main" roles together (other roles ignored).
"`descriptions`" | An audio description of a video track. | Audio only. | Ogg: "audio/audiodesc".
"`main`" | The primary audio or video track. | Audio and video. | Ogg: "audio/main" or "video/main"; WebM: the "FlagDefault" element is set; DASH: "main" role without "caption", "subtitle", and "dub" roles (other roles ignored).
"`main-desc`" | The primary audio track, mixed with audio descriptions. | Audio only. | AC3 audio in MPEG-2 TS: bsmod=2 and full_svc=1.
"`sign`" | A sign-language interpretation of an audio track. | Video only. | Ogg: "video/sign".
"`subtitles`" | A version of the main video track with subtitles burnt in. (For legacy content; new content would use text tracks.) | Video only. | DASH: "subtitle" and "main" roles together (other roles ignored).
"`translation`" | A translated version of the main audio track. | Audio only. | Ogg: "audio/dub". DASH: "dub" and "main" roles together (other roles ignored).
"`commentary`" | Commentary on the primary audio or video track, e.g. a director's commentary. | Audio and video. | DASH: "commentary" role without "main" role (other roles ignored).
"``" (empty string) | No explicit kind, or the kind given by the track's metadata is not recognised by the user agent. | Audio and video. | Any other track type, track role, or combination of track roles not described above.

The `AudioTrack.label` and `VideoTrack.label` attributes must return the label of the track, if it has one, or the empty string otherwise. [INBAND]

The `AudioTrack.language` and `VideoTrack.language` attributes must return the BCP 47 language tag of the language of the track, if it has one, or the empty string otherwise. If the user agent is not able to express that language as a BCP 47 language tag (for example because the language information in the media resource's format is a free-form string without a defined interpretation), then the method must return the empty string, as if the track had no language. [INBAND]

The `AudioTrack.enabled` attribute, on getting, must return true if the track is currently enabled, and false otherwise. On setting, it must enable the track if the new value is true, and disable it otherwise. (If the track is no longer in an `AudioTrackList` object, then the track being enabled or disabled has no effect beyond changing the value of the attribute on the `AudioTrack` object.)

Whenever an audio track in an `AudioTrackList` that was disabled is enabled, and whenever one that was enabled is disabled, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `change` at the `AudioTrackList` object.

The `VideoTrackList.selectedIndex` attribute must return the index of the currently selected track, if any. If the `VideoTrackList` object does not currently represent any tracks, or if none of the tracks are selected, it must instead return −1.

The `VideoTrack.selected` attribute, on getting, must return true if the track is currently selected, and false otherwise. On setting, it must select the track if the new value is true, and unselect it otherwise. If the track is in a `VideoTrackList`, then all the other `VideoTrack` objects in that list must be unselected. (If the track is no longer in a `VideoTrackList` object, then the track being selected or unselected has no effect beyond changing the value of the attribute on the `VideoTrack` object.)

Whenever a track in a `VideoTrackList` that was previously not selected is selected, and whenever the selected track in a `VideoTrackList` is unselected without a new track being selected in its stead, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `change` at the `VideoTrackList` object. This task must be queued before the task that fires the `resize` event, if any.

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `AudioTrackList` and `VideoTrackList` interfaces:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onchange` | `change`
`onaddtrack` | `addtrack`
`onremovetrack` | `removetrack`

###### 4.8.14.10.2 Selecting specific audio and video tracks declaratively

The `audioTracks` and `videoTracks` attributes allow scripts to select which track should play, but it is also possible to select specific tracks declaratively, by specifying particular tracks in the fragment identifier of the URL of the media resource. The format of the fragment identifier depends on the MIME type of the media resource. [RFC2046] [URL]

In this example, a video that uses a format that supports the Media Fragments URI fragment identifier syntax is embedded in such a way that the alternative angles labeled "Alternative" are enabled instead of the default video track. [MEDIAFRAG]

    <video src="myvideo#track=Alternative"></video>

##### 4.8.14.11 Synchronising multiple media elements

###### 4.8.14.11.1 Introduction

Each media element can have a `MediaController`. A `MediaController` is an object that coordinates the playback of multiple media elements, for instance so that a sign-language interpreter track can be overlaid on a video track, with the two being kept in sync.

By default, a media element has no `MediaController`. An implicit `MediaController` can be assigned using the `mediagroup` content attribute. An explicit `MediaController` can be assigned directly using the `controller` IDL attribute.

Media elements with a `MediaController` are said to be slaved to their controller. The `MediaController` modifies the playback rate and the playback volume of each of the media elements slaved to it, and ensures that when any of its slaved media elements unexpectedly stall, the others are stopped at the same time.

When a media element is slaved to a `MediaController`, its playback rate is fixed to that of the other tracks in the same `MediaController`, and any looping is disabled.

###### 4.8.14.11.2 Media controllers

    enum MediaControllerPlaybackState { "waiting", "playing", "ended" };
    [Constructor]
    interface MediaController : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute unsigned short readyState; // uses HTMLMediaElement.readyState's values

      readonly attribute TimeRanges buffered;
      readonly attribute TimeRanges seekable;
      readonly attribute unrestricted double duration;
               attribute double currentTime;

      readonly attribute boolean paused;
      readonly attribute MediaControllerPlaybackState playbackState;
      readonly attribute TimeRanges played;
      void pause();
      void unpause();
      void play(); // calls play() on all media elements as well

               attribute double defaultPlaybackRate;
               attribute double playbackRate;

               attribute double volume;
               attribute boolean muted;

               attribute EventHandler onemptied;
               attribute EventHandler onloadedmetadata;
               attribute EventHandler onloadeddata;
               attribute EventHandler oncanplay;
               attribute EventHandler oncanplaythrough;
               attribute EventHandler onplaying;
               attribute EventHandler onended;
               attribute EventHandler onwaiting;

               attribute EventHandler ondurationchange;
               attribute EventHandler ontimeupdate;
               attribute EventHandler onplay;
               attribute EventHandler onpause;
               attribute EventHandler onratechange;
               attribute EventHandler onvolumechange;
    };

controller = new `MediaController`()

  Returns a new `MediaController` object.

media . `controller` [ = controller ]

  Returns the current `MediaController` for the media element, if any; returns null otherwise.

  Can be set, to set an explicit `MediaController`. Doing so removes the `mediagroup` attribute, if any.

controller . `readyState`

  Returns the state that the `MediaController` was in the last time it fired events as a result of reporting the controller state. The values of this attribute are the same as for the `readyState` attribute of media elements.

controller . `buffered`

  Returns a `TimeRanges` object that represents the intersection of the time ranges for which the user agent has all relevant media data for all the slaved media elements.

controller . `seekable`

  Returns a `TimeRanges` object that represents the intersection of the time ranges into which the user agent can seek for all the slaved media elements.

controller . `duration`

  Returns the difference between the earliest playable moment and the latest playable moment (not considering whether the data in question is actually buffered or directly seekable, but not including time in the future for infinite streams). Will return zero if there is no media.

controller . `currentTime` [ = value ]

  Returns the current playback position, in seconds, as a position between zero time and the current `duration`.

  Can be set, to seek to the given time.

controller . `paused`

  Returns true if playback is paused; false otherwise. When this attribute is true, any media element slaved to this controller will be stopped.

controller . `playbackState`

  Returns the state that the `MediaController` was in the last time it fired events as a result of reporting the controller state. The value of this attribute is either "`playing`", indicating that the media is actively playing, "`ended`", indicating that the media is not playing because playback has reached the end of all the slaved media elements, or "`waiting`", indicating that the media is not playing for some other reason (e.g. the `MediaController` is paused).

controller . `pause`()

  Sets the `paused` attribute to true.

controller . `unpause`()

  Sets the `paused` attribute to false.

controller . `play`()

  Sets the `paused` attribute to false and invokes the `play()` method of each slaved media element.

controller . `played`

  Returns a `TimeRanges` object that represents the union of the time ranges in all the slaved media elements that have been played.

controller . `defaultPlaybackRate` [ = value ]

  Returns the default rate of playback.

  Can be set, to change the default rate of playback.

  This default rate has no direct effect on playback, but if the user switches to a fast-forward mode, when they return to the normal playback mode, it is expected that rate of playback (`playbackRate`) will be returned to this default rate.

controller . `playbackRate` [ = value ]

  Returns the current rate of playback.

  Can be set, to change the rate of playback.

controller . `volume` [ = value ]

  Returns the current playback volume multiplier, as a number in the range 0.0 to 1.0, where 0.0 is the quietest and 1.0 the loudest.

  Can be set, to change the volume multiplier.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the new value is not in the range 0.0 .. 1.0.

controller . `muted` [ = value ]

  Returns true if all audio is muted (regardless of other attributes either on the controller or on any media elements slaved to this controller), and false otherwise.

  Can be set, to change whether the audio is muted or not.

A media element can have a current media controller, which is a `MediaController` object. When a media element is created without a `mediagroup` attribute, it does not have a current media controller. (If it is created with such an attribute, then that attribute initializes the current media controller, as defined below.)

The slaved media elements of a `MediaController` are the media elements whose current media controller is that `MediaController`. All the slaved media elements of a `MediaController` must use the same clock for their definition of their media timeline's unit time. When the user agent is required to act on each slaved media element in turn, they must be processed in the order that they were last associated with the `MediaController`.

The `controller` attribute on a media element, on getting, must return the element's current media controller, if any, or null otherwise. On setting, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let m be the media element in question.

2. Let old controller be m's current media controller, if it currently has one, and null otherwise.

3. Let new controller be null.

4. Let m have no current media controller, if it currently has one.

5. Remove the element's `mediagroup` content attribute, if any.

6. If the new value is null, then jump to the update controllers step below.

7. Let m's current media controller be the new value.

8. Let new controller be m's current media controller.

9. Bring the media element up to speed with its new media controller.

10. Update controllers: If old controller and new controller are the same (whether both null or both the same controller) then abort these steps.

11. If old controller is not null and still has one or more slaved media elements, then report the controller state for old controller.

12. If new controller is not null, then report the controller state for new controller.

The `MediaController()` constructor, when invoked, must return a newly created `MediaController` object.

The `readyState` attribute must return the value to which it was most recently set. When the `MediaController` object is created, the attribute must be set to the value 0 (`HAVE_NOTHING`). The value is updated by the report the controller state algorithm below.

The `seekable` attribute must return a new static normalised `TimeRanges` object that represents the intersection of the ranges of the media resources of the slaved media elements that the user agent is able to seek to, at the time the attribute is evaluated.

The `buffered` attribute must return a new static normalised `TimeRanges` object that represents the intersection of the ranges of the media resources of the slaved media elements that the user agent has buffered, at the time the attribute is evaluated. Users agents must accurately determine the ranges available, even for media streams where this can only be determined by tedious inspection.

The `duration` attribute must return the media controller duration.

Every 15 to 250ms, or whenever the `MediaController`'s media controller duration changes, whichever happens least often, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `durationchange` at the `MediaController`. If the `MediaController`'s media controller duration decreases such that the media controller position is greater than the media controller duration, the user agent must immediately seek the media controller to media controller duration.

The `currentTime` attribute must return the media controller position on getting, and on setting must seek the media controller to the new value.

Every 15 to 250ms, or whenever the `MediaController`'s media controller position changes, whichever happens least often, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `timeupdate` at the `MediaController`.

When a `MediaController` is created it is a playing media controller. It can be changed into a paused media controller and back either via the user agent's user interface (when the element is exposing a user interface to the user) or by script using the APIs defined in this section (see below).

The `paused` attribute must return true if the `MediaController` object is a paused media controller, and false otherwise.

When the `pause()` method is invoked, if the `MediaController` is a playing media controller then the user agent must change the `MediaController` into a paused media controller, queue a task to fire a simple event named `pause` at the `MediaController`, and then report the controller state of the `MediaController`.

When the `unpause()` method is invoked, if the `MediaController` is a paused media controller, the user agent must change the `MediaController` into a playing media controller, queue a task to fire a simple event named `play` at the `MediaController`, and then report the controller state of the `MediaController`.

When the `play()` method is invoked, the user agent must invoke the `play()` method of each slaved media element in turn, and then invoke the `unpause` method of the `MediaController`.

The `playbackState` attribute must return the value to which it was most recently set. When the `MediaController` object is created, the attribute must be set to the value "`waiting`". The value is updated by the report the controller state algorithm below.

The `played` attribute must return a new static normalised `TimeRanges` object that represents the union of the ranges of points on the media timelines of the media resources of the slaved media elements that the user agent has so far reached through the usual monotonic increase of their current playback positions during normal playback, at the time the attribute is evaluated.

A `MediaController` has a media controller default playback rate and a media controller playback rate, which must both be set to 1.0 when the `MediaController` object is created.

The `defaultPlaybackRate` attribute, on getting, must return the `MediaController`'s media controller default playback rate, and on setting, must set the `MediaController`'s media controller default playback rate to the new value, then queue a task to fire a simple event named `ratechange` at the `MediaController`.

The `playbackRate` attribute, on getting, must return the `MediaController`'s media controller playback rate, and on setting, must set the `MediaController`'s media controller playback rate to the new value, then queue a task to fire a simple event named `ratechange` at the `MediaController`.

A `MediaController` has a media controller volume multiplier, which must be set to 1.0 when the `MediaController` object is created, and a media controller mute override, much must initially be false.

The `volume` attribute, on getting, must return the `MediaController`'s media controller volume multiplier, and on setting, if the new value is in the range 0.0 to 1.0 inclusive, must set the `MediaController`'s media controller volume multiplier to the new value and queue a task to fire a simple event named `volumechange` at the `MediaController`. If the new value is outside the range 0.0 to 1.0 inclusive, then, on setting, an `IndexSizeError` exception must be thrown instead.

The `muted` attribute, on getting, must return the `MediaController`'s media controller mute override, and on setting, must set the `MediaController`'s media controller mute override to the new value and queue a task to fire a simple event named `volumechange` at the `MediaController`.

The media resources of all the slaved media elements of a `MediaController` have a defined temporal relationship which provides relative offsets between the zero time of each such media resource: for media resources with a timeline offset, their relative offsets are the difference between their timeline offset; the zero times of all the media resources without a timeline offset are not offset from each other (i.e. the origins of their timelines are cotemporal); and finally, the zero time of the media resource with the earliest timeline offset (if any) is not offset from the zero times of the media resources without a timeline offset (i.e. the origins of media resources without a timeline offset are further cotemporal with the earliest defined point on the timeline of the media resource with the earliest timeline offset).

The media resource end position of a media resource in a media element is defined as follows: if the media resource has a finite and known duration, the media resource end position is the duration of the media resource's timeline (the last defined position on that timeline); otherwise, the media resource's duration is infinite or unknown, and the media resource end position is the time of the last frame of media data currently available for that media resource.

Each `MediaController` also has its own defined timeline. On this timeline, all the media resources of all the slaved media elements of the `MediaController` are temporally aligned according to their defined offsets. The media controller duration of that `MediaController` is the time from the earliest earliest possible position, relative to this `MediaController` timeline, of any of the media resources of the slaved media elements of the `MediaController`, to the time of the latest media resource end position of the media resources of the slaved media elements of the `MediaController`, again relative to this `MediaController` timeline.

Each `MediaController` has a media controller position. This is the time on the `MediaController`'s timeline at which the user agent is trying to play the slaved media elements. When a `MediaController` is created, its media controller position is initially zero.

When the user agent is to bring a media element up to speed with its new media controller, it must seek that media element to the `MediaController`'s media controller position relative to the media element's timeline.

When the user agent is to seek the media controller to a particular new playback position, it must follow these steps:

1. If the new playback position is less than zero, then set it to zero.

2. If the new playback position is greater than the media controller duration, then set it to the media controller duration.

3. Set the media controller position to the new playback position.

4. Seek each slaved media element to the new playback position relative to the media element timeline.

A `MediaController` is a restrained media controller if the `MediaController` is a playing media controller, but either at least one of its slaved media elements whose autoplaying flag is true still has its `paused` attribute set to true, or, all of its slaved media elements have their `paused` attribute set to true.

A `MediaController` is a blocked media controller if the `MediaController` is a paused media controller, or if any of its slaved media elements are blocked media elements, or if any of its slaved media elements whose autoplaying flag is true still have their `paused` attribute set to true, or if all of its slaved media elements have their `paused` attribute set to true.

A media element is blocked on its media controller if the `MediaController` is a blocked media controller, or if its media controller position is either before the media resource's earliest possible position relative to the `MediaController`'s timeline or after the end of the media resource relative to the `MediaController`'s timeline.

When a `MediaController` is not a blocked media controller and it has at least one slaved media element whose `Document` is a fully active `Document`, the `MediaController`'s media controller position must increase monotonically at media controller playback rate units of time on the `MediaController`'s timeline per unit time of the clock used by its slaved media elements.

When the zero point on the timeline of a `MediaController` moves relative to the timelines of the slaved media elements by a time difference ΔT, the `MediaController`'s media controller position must be decremented by ΔT.

In some situations, e.g. when playing back a live stream without buffering anything, the media controller position would increase monotonically as described above at the same rate as the ΔT described in the previous paragraph decreases it, with the end result that for all intents and purposes, the media controller position would appear to remain constant (probably with the value 0).

A `MediaController` has a most recently reported readiness state, which is a number from 0 to 4 derived from the numbers used for the media element `readyState` attribute, and a most recently reported playback state, which is either playing, waiting, or ended.

When a `MediaController` is created, its most recently reported readiness state must be set to 0, and its most recently reported playback state must be set to waiting.

When a user agent is required to report the controller state for a `MediaController`, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If the `MediaController` has no slaved media elements, let new readiness state be 0.

   Otherwise, let it have the lowest value of the `readyState` IDL attributes of all of its slaved media elements.

2. If the `MediaController`'s most recently reported readiness state is less than the new readiness state, then run these substeps:

   1. Let next state be the `MediaController`'s most recently reported readiness state.

   2. Loop: Increment next state by one.

   3. Queue a task to run the following steps:

      1. Set the `MediaController`'s `readyState` attribute to the value next state.

      2. Fire a simple event at the `MediaController` object, whose name is the event name corresponding to the value of next state given in the table below.

   4. If next state is less than new readiness state, then return to the step labeled loop.

   Otherwise, if the `MediaController`'s most recently reported readiness state is greater than new readiness state then queue a task to fire a simple event at the `MediaController` object, whose name is the event name corresponding to the value of new readiness state given in the table below.

   Value of new readiness state | Event name
   --- | ---
   0 | `emptied`
   1 | `loadedmetadata`
   2 | `loadeddata`
   3 | `canplay`
   4 | `canplaythrough`

3. Let the `MediaController`'s most recently reported readiness state be new readiness state.

4. Initialise new playback state by setting it to the state given for the first matching condition from the following list:

   If the `MediaController` has no slaved media elements
     Let new playback state be waiting.
   If all of the `MediaController`'s slaved media elements have ended playback and the media controller playback rate is positive or zero
     Let new playback state be ended.
   If the `MediaController` is a blocked media controller
     Let new playback state be waiting.
   Otherwise
     Let new playback state be playing.

5. If the `MediaController`'s most recently reported playback state is not equal to new playback state and the new playback state is ended, then queue a task that, if the `MediaController` object is a playing media controller, and all of the `MediaController`'s slaved media elements have still ended playback, and the media controller playback rate is still positive or zero, changes the `MediaController` object to a paused media controller and then fires a simple event named `pause` at the `MediaController` object.

6. If the `MediaController`'s most recently reported playback state is not equal to new playback state then queue a task to run the following steps:

   1. Set the `MediaController`'s `playbackState` attribute to the value given in the second column of the row of the following table whose first column contains the new playback state.

   2. Fire a simple event at the `MediaController` object, whose name is the value given in the third column of the row of the following table whose first column contains the new playback state.

   New playback state | New value for `playbackState` | Event name
   --- | --- | ---
   playing | "`playing`" | `playing`
   waiting | "`waiting`" | `waiting`
   ended | "`ended`" | `ended`

7. Let the `MediaController`'s most recently reported playback state be new playback state.

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `MediaController` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onemptied` | `emptied`
`onloadedmetadata` | `loadedmetadata`
`onloadeddata` | `loadeddata`
`oncanplay` | `canplay`
`oncanplaythrough` | `canplaythrough`
`onplaying` | `playing`
`onended` | `ended`
`onwaiting` | `waiting`
`ondurationchange` | `durationchange`
`ontimeupdate` | `timeupdate`
`onplay` | `play`
`onpause` | `pause`
`onratechange` | `ratechange`
`onvolumechange` | `volumechange`

The task source for the tasks listed in this section is the DOM manipulation task source.

###### 4.8.14.11.3 Assigning a media controller declaratively

The `mediagroup` content attribute on media elements can be used to link multiple media elements together by implicitly creating a `MediaController`. The value is text; media elements with the same value are automatically linked by the user agent.

When a media element is created with a `mediagroup` attribute, and when a media element's `mediagroup` attribute is set, changed, or removed, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let m be the media element in question.

2. Let old controller be m's current media controller, if it currently has one, and null otherwise.

3. Let new controller be null.

4. Let m have no current media controller, if it currently has one.

5. If m's `mediagroup` attribute is being removed, then jump to the update controllers step below.

6. If there is another media element whose `Document` is the same as m's node document (even if one or both of these elements are not actually in the `Document`), and which also has a `mediagroup` attribute, and whose `mediagroup` attribute has the same value as the new value of m's `mediagroup` attribute, then let controller be that media element's current media controller.

   Otherwise, let controller be a newly created `MediaController`.

7. Let m's current media controller be controller.

8. Let new controller be m's current media controller.

9. Bring the media element up to speed with its new media controller.

10. Update controllers: If old controller and new controller are the same (whether both null or both the same controller) then abort these steps.

11. If old controller is not null and still has one or more slaved media elements, then report the controller state for old controller.

12. If new controller is not null, then report the controller state for new controller.

The `mediaGroup` IDL attribute on media elements must reflect the `mediagroup` content attribute.

Multiple media elements referencing the same media resource will share a single network request. This can be used to efficiently play two (video) tracks from the same media resource in two different places on the screen. Used with the `mediagroup` attribute, these elements can also be kept synchronised.

In this example, a sign-languge interpreter track from a movie file is overlaid on the primary video track of that same video file using two `video` elements, some CSS, and an implicit `MediaController`:

    <article>
     <style scoped>
      div { margin: 1em auto; position: relative; width: 400px; height: 300px; }
      video { position; absolute; bottom: 0; right: 0; }
      video:first-child { width: 100%; height: 100%; }
      video:last-child { width: 30%; }
     </style>
     <div>
      <video src="movie.vid#track=Video&amp;track=English" autoplay controls mediagroup=movie></video>
      <video src="movie.vid#track=sign" autoplay mediagroup=movie></video>
     </div>
    </article>

##### 4.8.14.12 Timed text tracks

###### 4.8.14.12.1 Text track model

A media element can have a group of associated text tracks, known as the media element's list of text tracks. The text tracks are sorted as follows:

1. The text tracks corresponding to `track` element children of the media element, in tree order.
2. Any text tracks added using the `addTextTrack()` method, in the order they were added, oldest first.
3. Any media-resource-specific text tracks (text tracks corresponding to data in the media resource), in the order defined by the media resource's format specification.

A text track consists of:

The kind of text track

  This decides how the track is handled by the user agent. The kind is represented by a string. The possible strings are:

  - `subtitles`
  - `captions`
  - `descriptions`
  - `chapters`
  - `metadata`

  The kind of track can change dynamically, in the case of a text track corresponding to a `track` element.

A label

  This is a human-readable string intended to identify the track for the user.

  The label of a track can change dynamically, in the case of a text track corresponding to a `track` element.

  When a text track label is the empty string, the user agent should automatically generate an appropriate label from the text track's other properties (e.g. the kind of text track and the text track's language) for use in its user interface. This automatically-generated label is not exposed in the API.

An in-band metadata track dispatch type

  This is a string extracted from the media resource specifically for in-band metadata tracks to enable such tracks to be dispatched to different scripts in the document.

  For example, a traditional TV station broadcast streamed on the Web and augmented with Web-specific interactive features could include text tracks with metadata for ad targeting, trivia game data during game shows, player states during sports games, recipe information during food programs, and so forth. As each program starts and ends, new tracks might be added or removed from the stream, and as each one is added, the user agent could bind them to dedicated script modules using the value of this attribute.

  Other than for in-band metadata text tracks, the in-band metadata track dispatch type is the empty string. How this value is populated for different media formats is described in steps to expose a media-resource-specific text track.

A language

  This is a string (a BCP 47 language tag) representing the language of the text track's cues. [BCP47]

  The language of a text track can change dynamically, in the case of a text track corresponding to a `track` element.

A readiness state

  One of the following:

  Not loaded

    Indicates that the text track's cues have not been obtained.

  Loading

    Indicates that the text track is loading and there have been no fatal errors encountered so far. Further cues might still be added to the track by the parser.

  Loaded

    Indicates that the text track has been loaded with no fatal errors.

  Failed to load

    Indicates that the text track was enabled, but when the user agent attempted to obtain it, this failed in some way (e.g. URL could not be resolved, network error, unknown text track format). Some or all of the cues are likely missing and will not be obtained.

  The readiness state of a text track changes dynamically as the track is obtained.

A mode

  One of the following:

  Disabled

    Indicates that the text track is not active. Other than for the purposes of exposing the track in the DOM, the user agent is ignoring the text track. No cues are active, no events are fired, and the user agent will not attempt to obtain the track's cues.

  Hidden

    Indicates that the text track is active, but that the user agent is not actively displaying the cues. If no attempt has yet been made to obtain the track's cues, the user agent will perform such an attempt momentarily. The user agent is maintaining a list of which cues are active, and events are being fired accordingly.

  Showing

    Indicates that the text track is active. If no attempt has yet been made to obtain the track's cues, the user agent will perform such an attempt momentarily. The user agent is maintaining a list of which cues are active, and events are being fired accordingly. In addition, for text tracks whose kind is `subtitles` or `captions`, the cues are being overlaid on the video as appropriate; for text tracks whose kind is `descriptions`, the user agent is making the cues available to the user in a non-visual fashion; and for text tracks whose kind is `chapters`, the user agent is making available to the user a mechanism by which the user can navigate to any point in the media resource by selecting a cue.

A list of zero or more cues

  A list of text track cues, along with rules for updating the text track rendering. For example, for WebVTT, the rules for updating the display of WebVTT text tracks. [WEBVTT]

  The list of cues of a text track can change dynamically, either because the text track has not yet been loaded or is still loading, or due to DOM manipulation.

Each text track has a corresponding `TextTrack` object.

Each media element has a list of pending text tracks, which must initially be empty, a blocked-on-parser flag, which must initially be false, and a did-perform-automatic-track-selection flag, which must also initially be false.

When the user agent is required to populate the list of pending text tracks of a media element, the user agent must add to the element's list of pending text tracks each text track in the element's list of text tracks whose text track mode is not disabled and whose text track readiness state is loading.

Whenever a `track` element's parent node changes, the user agent must remove the corresponding text track from any list of pending text tracks that it is in.

Whenever a text track's text track readiness state changes to either loaded or failed to load, the user agent must remove it from any list of pending text tracks that it is in.

When a media element is created by an HTML parser or XML parser, the user agent must set the element's blocked-on-parser flag to true. When a media element is popped off the stack of open elements of an HTML parser or XML parser, the user agent must honor user preferences for automatic text track selection, populate the list of pending text tracks, and set the element's blocked-on-parser flag to false.

The text tracks of a media element are ready when both the element's list of pending text tracks is empty and the element's blocked-on-parser flag is false.

Each media element has a pending text track change notification flag, which must initially be unset.

Whenever a text track that is in a media element's list of text tracks has its text track mode change value, the user agent must run the following steps for the media element:

1. If the media element's pending text track change notification flag is set, abort these steps.

2. Set the media element's pending text track change notification flag.

3. Queue a task that runs the following substeps:

   1. Unset the media element's pending text track change notification flag.

   2. Fire a simple event named `change` at the media element's `textTracks` attribute's `TextTrackList` object.

4. If the media element's show poster flag is not set, run the time marches on steps.

The task source for the tasks listed in this section is the DOM manipulation task source.

A text track cue is the unit of time-sensitive data in a text track, corresponding for instance for subtitles and captions to the text that appears at a particular time and disappears at another time.

Each text track cue consists of:

An identifier

  An arbitrary string.

A start time

  The time, in seconds and fractions of a second, that describes the beginning of the range of the media data to which the cue applies.

An end time

  The time, in seconds and fractions of a second, that describes the end of the range of the media data to which the cue applies.

A pause-on-exit flag

  A boolean indicating whether playback of the media resource is to pause when the end of the range to which the cue applies is reached.

Some additional format-specific data

  Additional fields, as needed for the format. For example, WebVTT has a text track cue writing direction and so forth. [WEBVTT]

The data of the cue

  The raw data of the cue, and rules for rendering the cue in isolation.

  The precise nature of this data is defined by the format. For example, WebVTT uses text.

The text track cue start time and text track cue end time can be negative. (The current playback position can never be negative, though, so cues entirely before time zero cannot be active.)

Each text track cue has a corresponding `TextTrackCue` object (or more specifically, an object that inherits from `TextTrackCue` — for example, WebVTT cues use the `VTTCue` interface). A text track cue's in-memory representation can be dynamically changed through this `TextTrackCue` API. [WEBVTT]

A text track cue is associated with rules for updating the text track rendering, as defined by the specification for the specific kind of text track cue. These rules are used specifically when the object representing the cue is added to a `TextTrack` object using the `addCue()` method.

In addition, each text track cue has two pieces of dynamic information:

The active flag

  This flag must be initially unset. The flag is used to ensure events are fired appropriately when the cue becomes active or inactive, and to make sure the right cues are rendered.

  The user agent must synchronously unset this flag whenever the text track cue is removed from its text track's text track list of cues; whenever the text track itself is removed from its media element's list of text tracks or has its text track mode changed to disabled; and whenever the media element's `readyState` is changed back to `HAVE_NOTHING`. When the flag is unset in this way for one or more cues in text tracks that were showing prior to the relevant incident, the user agent must, after having unset the flag for all the affected cues, apply the rules for updating the text track rendering of those text tracks. For example, for text tracks based on WebVTT, the rules for updating the display of WebVTT text tracks. [WEBVTT]

The display state

  This is used as part of the rendering model, to keep cues in a consistent position. It must initially be empty. Whenever the text track cue active flag is unset, the user agent must empty the text track cue display state.

The text track cues of a media element's text tracks are ordered relative to each other in the text track cue order, which is determined as follows: first group the cues by their text track, with the groups being sorted in the same order as their text tracks appear in the media element's list of text tracks; then, within each group, cues must be sorted by their start time, earliest first; then, any cues with the same start time must be sorted by their end time, latest first; and finally, any cues with identical end times must be sorted in the order they were last added to their respective text track list of cues, oldest first (so e.g. for cues from a WebVTT file, that would initially be the order in which the cues were listed in the file). [WEBVTT]

###### 4.8.14.12.2 Sourcing in-band text tracks

A media-resource-specific text track is a text track that corresponds to data found in the media resource.

Rules for processing and rendering such data are defined by the relevant specifications, e.g. the specification of the video format if the media resource is a video. Details for some legacy formats can be found in the Sourcing In-band Media Resource Tracks from Media Containers into HTML specification. [INBAND]

When a media resource contains data that the user agent recognises and supports as being equivalent to a text track, the user agent runs the steps to expose a media-resource-specific text track with the relevant data, as follows.

1. Associate the relevant data with a new text track and its corresponding new `TextTrack` object. The text track is a media-resource-specific text track.

2. Set the new text track's kind, label, and language based on the semantics of the relevant data, as defined by the relevant specification. If there is no label in that data, then the label must be set to the empty string.

3. Associate the text track list of cues with the rules for updating the text track rendering appropriate for the format in question.

4. If the new text track's kind is `metadata`, then set the text track in-band metadata track dispatch type as follows, based on the type of the media resource:

   If the media resource is an Ogg file
     The text track in-band metadata track dispatch type must be set to the value of the Name header field. [OGGSKELETONHEADERS]
   If the media resource is a WebM file
     The text track in-band metadata track dispatch type must be set to the value of the `CodecID` element. [WEBMCG]
   If the media resource is an MPEG-2 file
     Let stream type be the value of the "stream_type" field describing the text track's type in the file's program map section, interpreted as an 8-bit unsigned integer. Let length be the value of the "ES_info_length" field for the track in the same part of the program map section, interpreted as an integer as defined by the MPEG-2 specification. Let descriptor bytes be the length bytes following the "ES_info_length" field. The text track in-band metadata track dispatch type must be set to the concatenation of the stream type byte and the zero or more descriptor bytes bytes, expressed in hexadecimal using uppercase ASCII hex digits. [MPEG2]
   If the media resource is an MPEG-4 file
     Let the first `stsd` box of the first `stbl` box of the first `minf` box of the first `mdia` box of the text track's `trak` box in the first `moov` box of the file be the stsd box, if any. If the file has no stsd box, or if the stsd box has neither a `mett` box nor a `metx` box, then the text track in-band metadata track dispatch type must be set to the empty string. Otherwise, if the stsd box has a `mett` box then the text track in-band metadata track dispatch type must be set to the concatenation of the string "`mett`", a U+0020 SPACE character, and the value of the first `mime_format` field of the first `mett` box of the stsd box, or the empty string if that field is absent in that box. Otherwise, if the stsd box has no `mett` box but has a `metx` box then the text track in-band metadata track dispatch type must be set to the concatenation of the string "`metx`", a U+0020 SPACE character, and the value of the first `namespace` field of the first `metx` box of the stsd box, or the empty string if that field is absent in that box. [MPEG4]

5. Populate the new text track's list of cues with the cues parsed so far, following the guidelines for exposing cues, and begin updating it dynamically as necessary.

6. Set the new text track's readiness state to loaded.

7. Set the new text track's mode to the mode consistent with the user's preferences and the requirements of the relevant specification for the data.

   For instance, if there are no other active subtitles, and this is a forced subtitle track (a subtitle track giving subtitles in the audio track's primary language, but only for audio that is actually in another language), then those subtitles might be activated here.

8. Add the new text track to the media element's list of text tracks.

9. Fire a trusted event with the name `addtrack`, that does not bubble and is not cancelable, and that uses the `TrackEvent` interface, with the `track` attribute initialised to the text track's `TextTrack` object, at the media element's `textTracks` attribute's `TextTrackList` object.

###### 4.8.14.12.3 Sourcing out-of-band text tracks

When a `track` element is created, it must be associated with a new text track (with its value set as defined below) and its corresponding new `TextTrack` object.

The text track kind is determined from the state of the element's `kind` attribute according to the following table; for a state given in a cell of the first column, the kind is the string given in the second column:

State | String
--- | ---
Subtitles | `subtitles`
Captions | `captions`
Descriptions | `descriptions`
Chapters | `chapters`
Metadata | `metadata`

The text track label is the element's track label.

The text track language is the element's track language, if any, or the empty string otherwise.

As the `kind`, `label`, and `srclang` attributes are set, changed, or removed, the text track must update accordingly, as per the definitions above.

Changes to the track URL are handled in the algorithm below.

The text track readiness state is initially not loaded, and the text track mode is initially disabled.

The text track list of cues is initially empty. It is dynamically modified when the referenced file is parsed. Associated with the list are the rules for updating the text track rendering appropriate for the format in question; for WebVTT, this is the rules for updating the display of WebVTT text tracks. [WEBVTT]

When a `track` element's parent element changes and the new parent is a media element, then the user agent must add the `track` element's corresponding text track to the media element's list of text tracks, and then queue a task to fire a trusted event with the name `addtrack`, that does not bubble and is not cancelable, and that uses the `TrackEvent` interface, with the `track` attribute initialised to the text track's `TextTrack` object, at the media element's `textTracks` attribute's `TextTrackList` object.

When a `track` element's parent element changes and the old parent was a media element, then the user agent must remove the `track` element's corresponding text track from the media element's list of text tracks, and then queue a task to fire a trusted event with the name `removetrack`, that does not bubble and is not cancelable, and that uses the `TrackEvent` interface, with the `track` attribute initialised to the text track's `TextTrack` object, at the media element's `textTracks` attribute's `TextTrackList` object.

When a text track corresponding to a `track` element is added to a media element's list of text tracks, the user agent must queue a task to run the following steps for the media element:

1. If the element's blocked-on-parser flag is true, abort these steps.

2. If the element's did-perform-automatic-track-selection flag is true, abort these steps.

3. Honor user preferences for automatic text track selection for this element.

When the user agent is required to honor user preferences for automatic text track selection for a media element, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Perform automatic text track selection for `subtitles` and `captions`.

2. Perform automatic text track selection for `descriptions`.

3. Perform automatic text track selection for `chapters`.

4. If there are any text tracks in the media element's list of text tracks whose text track kind is `metadata` that correspond to `track` elements with a `default` attribute set whose text track mode is set to disabled, then set the text track mode of all such tracks to hidden

5. Set the element's did-perform-automatic-track-selection flag to true.

When the steps above say to perform automatic text track selection for one or more text track kinds, it means to run the following steps:

1. Let candidates be a list consisting of the text tracks in the media element's list of text tracks whose text track kind is one of the kinds that were passed to the algorithm, if any, in the order given in the list of text tracks.

2. If candidates is empty, then abort these steps.

3. If any of the text tracks in candidates have a text track mode set to showing, abort these steps.

4. If the user has expressed an interest in having a track from candidates enabled based on its text track kind, text track language, and text track label, then set its text track mode to showing.

   For example, the user could have set a browser preference to the effect of "I want French captions whenever possible", or "If there is a subtitle track with 'Commentary' in the title, enable it", or "If there are audio description tracks available, enable one, ideally in Swiss German, but failing that in Standard Swiss German or Standard German".

   Otherwise, if there are any text tracks in candidates that correspond to `track` elements with a `default` attribute set whose text track mode is set to disabled, then set the text track mode of the first such track to showing.

When a text track corresponding to a `track` element experiences any of the following circumstances, the user agent must start the `track` processing model for that text track and its `track` element:

- The `track` element is created.
- The text track has its text track mode changed.
- The `track` element's parent element changes and the new parent is a media element.

When a user agent is to start the `track` processing model for a text track and its `track` element, it must run the following algorithm. This algorithm interacts closely with the event loop mechanism; in particular, it has a synchronous section (which is triggered as part of the event loop algorithm). The steps in that section are marked with ⌛.

1. If another occurrence of this algorithm is already running for this text track and its `track` element, abort these steps, letting that other algorithm take care of this element.

2. If the text track's text track mode is not set to one of hidden or showing, abort these steps.

3. If the text track's `track` element does not have a media element as a parent, abort these steps.

4. Run the remainder of these steps asynchronously, allowing whatever caused these steps to run to continue.

5. Top: Await a stable state. The synchronous section consists of the following steps. (The steps in the synchronous section are marked with ⌛.)

6. ⌛ Set the text track readiness state to loading.

7. ⌛ Let URL be the track URL of the `track` element.

8. ⌛ If the `track` element's parent is a media element then let CORS mode be the state of the parent media element's `crossorigin` content attribute. Otherwise, let CORS mode be No CORS.

9. End the synchronous section, continuing the remaining steps asynchronously.

10. If URL is not the empty string, perform a potentially CORS-enabled fetch of URL, with the mode being CORS mode, the origin being the origin of the `track` element's node document, and the default origin behaviour set to fail.

    The resource obtained in this fashion, if any, contains the text track data. If any data is obtained, it is by definition CORS-same-origin (cross-origin resources that are not suitably CORS-enabled do not get this far).

    The tasks queued by the fetching algorithm on the networking task source to process the data as it is being fetched must determine the type of the resource. If the type of the resource is not a supported text track format, the load will fail, as described below. Otherwise, the resource's data must be passed to the appropriate parser (e.g. the WebVTT parser) as it is received, with the text track list of cues being used for that parser's output. [WEBVTT]

    The appropriate parser will synchronously (during these networking task source tasks) and incrementally (as each such task is run with whatever data has been received from the network) update the text track list of cues.

    This specification does not currently say whether or how to check the MIME types of text tracks, or whether or how to perform file type sniffing using the actual file data. Implementors differ in their intentions on this matter and it is therefore unclear what the right solution is. In the absence of any requirement here, the HTTP specification's strict requirement to follow the Content-Type header prevails ("Content-Type specifies the media type of the underlying data." ... "If and only if the media type is not given by a Content-Type field, the recipient MAY attempt to guess the media type via inspection of its content and/or the name extension(s) of the URI used to identify the resource.").

    If the fetching algorithm fails for any reason (network error, the server returns an error code, a cross-origin check fails, etc), or if URL is the empty string, then queue a task to first change the text track readiness state to failed to load and then fire a simple event named `error` at the `track` element. This task must use the DOM manipulation task source.

    If the fetching algorithm does not fail, but the type of the resource is not a supported text track format, or the file was not successfully processed (e.g. the format in question is an XML format and the file contained a well-formedness error that the XML specification requires be detected and reported to the application), then the task that is queued by the networking task source in which the aforementioned problem is found must change the text track readiness state to failed to load and fire a simple event named `error` at the `track` element.

    If the fetching algorithm does not fail, and the file was successfully processed, then the final task that is queued by the networking task source, after it has finished parsing the data, must change the text track readiness state to loaded, and fire a simple event named `load` at the `track` element.

    If, while the fetching algorithm is active, either:

    - the track URL changes so that it is no longer equal to URL, while the text track mode is set to hidden or showing; or
    - the text track mode changes to hidden or showing, while the track URL is not equal to URL

    ...then the user agent must abort the fetching algorithm, discarding any pending tasks generated by that algorithm (and in particular, not adding any cues to the text track list of cues after the moment the URL changed), and then queue a task that first changes the text track readiness state to failed to load and then fires a simple event named `error` at the `track` element. This task must use the DOM manipulation task source.

11. Wait until the text track readiness state is no longer set to loading.

12. Wait until the track URL is no longer equal to URL, at the same time as the text track mode is set to hidden or showing.

13. Jump to the step labeled top.

Whenever a `track` element has its `src` attribute set, changed, or removed, the user agent must synchronously empty the element's text track's text track list of cues. (This also causes the algorithm above to stop adding cues from the resource being obtained using the previously given URL, if any.)

###### 4.8.14.12.4 Guidelines for exposing cues in various formats as text track cues

How a specific format's text track cues are to be interpreted for the purposes of processing by an HTML user agent is defined by that format. In the absence of such a specification, this section provides some constraints within which implementations can attempt to consistently expose such formats.

To support the text track model of HTML, each unit of timed data is converted to a text track cue. Where the mapping of the format's features to the aspects of a text track cue as defined in this specification are not defined, implementations must ensure that the mapping is consistent with the definitions of the aspects of a text track cue as defined above, as well as with the following constraints:

The text track cue identifier

  Should be set to the empty string if the format has no obvious analogue to a per-cue identifier.

The text track cue pause-on-exit flag

  Should be set to false.

###### 4.8.14.12.5 Text track API

    interface TextTrackList : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      getter TextTrack (unsigned long index);
      TextTrack? getTrackById(DOMString id);

               attribute EventHandler onchange;
               attribute EventHandler onaddtrack;
               attribute EventHandler onremovetrack;
    };

media . `textTracks` . `length`

  Returns the number of text tracks associated with the media element (e.g. from `track` elements). This is the number of text tracks in the media element's list of text tracks.

media . `textTracks[` n `]`

  Returns the `TextTrack` object representing the nth text track in the media element's list of text tracks.

textTrack = media . `textTracks` . `getTrackById`( id )

  Returns the `TextTrack` object with the given identifier, or null if no track has that identifier.

A `TextTrackList` object represents a dynamically updating list of text tracks in a given order.

The `textTracks` attribute of media elements must return a `TextTrackList` object representing the `TextTrack` objects of the text tracks in the media element's list of text tracks, in the same order as in the list of text tracks. The same object must be returned each time the attribute is accessed. [WEBIDL]

The `length` attribute of a `TextTrackList` object must return the number of text tracks in the list represented by the `TextTrackList` object.

The supported property indices of a `TextTrackList` object at any instant are the numbers from zero to the number of text tracks in the list represented by the `TextTrackList` object minus one, if any. If there are no text tracks in the list, there are no supported property indices.

To determine the value of an indexed property of a `TextTrackList` object for a given index index, the user agent must return the indexth text track in the list represented by the `TextTrackList` object.

The `getTrackById(id)` method must return the first `TextTrack` in the `TextTrackList` object whose `id` IDL attribute would return a value equal to the value of the id argument. When no tracks match the given argument, the method must return null.

    enum TextTrackMode { "disabled",  "hidden",  "showing" };
    enum TextTrackKind { "subtitles",  "captions",  "descriptions",  "chapters",  "metadata" };
    interface TextTrack : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute TextTrackKind kind;
      readonly attribute DOMString label;
      readonly attribute DOMString language;

      readonly attribute DOMString id;
      readonly attribute DOMString inBandMetadataTrackDispatchType;

               attribute TextTrackMode mode;

      readonly attribute TextTrackCueList? cues;
      readonly attribute TextTrackCueList? activeCues;

      void addCue(TextTrackCue cue);
      void removeCue(TextTrackCue cue);

               attribute EventHandler oncuechange;
    };

textTrack = media . `addTextTrack`( kind [, label [, language ] ] )

  Creates and returns a new `TextTrack` object, which is also added to the media element's list of text tracks.

textTrack . `kind`

  Returns the text track kind string.

textTrack . `label`

  Returns the text track label, if there is one, or the empty string otherwise (indicating that a custom label probably needs to be generated from the other attributes of the object if the object is exposed to the user).

textTrack . `language`

  Returns the text track language string.

textTrack . `id`

  Returns the ID of the given track.

  For in-band tracks, this is the ID that can be used with a fragment identifier if the format supports the Media Fragments URI syntax, and that can be used with the `getTrackById()` method. [MEDIAFRAG]

  For `TextTrack` objects corresponding to `track` elements, this is the ID of the `track` element.

textTrack . `inBandMetadataTrackDispatchType`

  Returns the text track in-band metadata track dispatch type string.

textTrack . `mode` [ = value ]

  Returns the text track mode, represented by a string from the following list:

  "`disabled`"

    The text track disabled mode.

  "`hidden`"

    The text track hidden mode.

  "`showing`"

    The text track showing mode.

  Can be set, to change the mode.

textTrack . `cues`

  Returns the text track list of cues, as a `TextTrackCueList` object.

textTrack . `activeCues`

  Returns the text track cues from the text track list of cues that are currently active (i.e. that start before the current playback position and end after it), as a `TextTrackCueList` object.

textTrack . `addCue`( cue )

  Adds the given cue to textTrack's text track list of cues.

textTrack . `removeCue`( cue )

  Removes the given cue from textTrack's text track list of cues.

The `addTextTrack(kind, label, language)` method of media elements, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. Create a new `TextTrack` object.

2. Create a new text track corresponding to the new object, and set its text track kind to kind, its text track label to label, its text track language to language, its text track readiness state to the text track loaded state, its text track mode to the text track hidden mode, and its text track list of cues to an empty list.

   Initially, the text track list of cues is not associated with any rules for updating the text track rendering. When a text track cue is added to it, the text track list of cues has its rules permanently set accordingly.

3. Add the new text track to the media element's list of text tracks.

4. Queue a task to fire a trusted event with the name `addtrack`, that does not bubble and is not cancelable, and that uses the `TrackEvent` interface, with the `track` attribute initialised to the new text track's `TextTrack` object, at the media element's `textTracks` attribute's `TextTrackList` object.

5. Return the new `TextTrack` object.

The `kind` attribute must return the text track kind of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents.

The `label` attribute must return the text track label of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents.

The `language` attribute must return the text track language of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents.

The `id` attribute returns the track's identifier, if it has one, or the empty string otherwise. For tracks that correspond to `track` elements, the track's identifier is the value of the element's `id` attribute, if any. For in-band tracks, the track's identifier is specified by the media resource. If the media resource is in a format that supports the Media Fragments URI fragment identifier syntax, the identifier returned for a particular track must be the same identifier that would enable the track if used as the name of a track in the track dimension of such a fragment identifier. [MEDIAFRAG]

The `inBandMetadataTrackDispatchType` attribute must return the text track in-band metadata track dispatch type of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents.

The `mode` attribute, on getting, must return the string corresponding to the text track mode of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents, as defined by the following list:

"`disabled`"
  The text track disabled mode.
"`hidden`"
  The text track hidden mode.
"`showing`"
  The text track showing mode.

On setting, if the new value isn't equal to what the attribute would currently return, the new value must be processed as follows:

If the new value is "`disabled`"

  Set the text track mode of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents to the text track disabled mode.

If the new value is "`hidden`"

  Set the text track mode of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents to the text track hidden mode.

If the new value is "`showing`"

  Set the text track mode of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents to the text track showing mode.

If the text track mode of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents is not the text track disabled mode, then the `cues` attribute must return a live `TextTrackCueList` object that represents the subset of the text track list of cues of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents whose end times occur at or after the earliest possible position when the script started, in text track cue order. Otherwise, it must return null. When an object is returned, the same object must be returned each time.

The earliest possible position when the script started is whatever the earliest possible position was the last time the event loop reached step 1.

If the text track mode of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents is not the text track disabled mode, then the `activeCues` attribute must return a live `TextTrackCueList` object that represents the subset of the text track list of cues of the text track that the `TextTrack` object represents whose active flag was set when the script started, in text track cue order. Otherwise, it must return null. When an object is returned, the same object must be returned each time.

A text track cue's active flag was set when the script started if its text track cue active flag was set the last time the event loop reached step 1.

The `addCue(cue)` method of `TextTrack` objects, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the text track list of cues does not yet have any associated rules for updating the text track rendering, then associate the text track list of cues with the rules for updating the text track rendering appropriate to cue.

2. If text track list of cues' associated rules for updating the text track rendering are not the same rules for updating the text track rendering as appropriate for cue, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

3. If the given cue is in a text track list of cues, then remove cue from that text track list of cues.

4. Add cue to the method's `TextTrack` object's text track's text track list of cues.

The `removeCue(cue)` method of `TextTrack` objects, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the given cue is not currently listed in the method's `TextTrack` object's text track's text track list of cues, then throw a `NotFoundError` exception and abort these steps.

2. Remove cue from the method's `TextTrack` object's text track's text track list of cues.

In this example, an `audio` element is used to play a specific sound-effect from a sound file containing many sound effects. A cue is used to pause the audio, so that it ends exactly at the end of the clip, even if the browser is busy running some script. If the page had relied on script to pause the audio, then the start of the next clip might be heard if the browser was not able to run the script at the exact time specified.

    var sfx = new Audio('sfx.wav');
    var sounds = sfx.addTextTrack('metadata');

    // add sounds we care about
    function addFX(start, end, name) {
      var cue = new VTTCue(start, end, '');
      cue.id = name;
      cue.pauseOnExit = true;
      sounds.addCue(cue);
    }
    addFX(12.783, 13.612, 'dog bark');
    addFX(13.612, 15.091, 'kitten mew'))

    function playSound(id) {
      sfx.currentTime = sounds.getCueById(id).startTime;
      sfx.play();
    }

    // play a bark as soon as we can
    sfx.oncanplaythrough = function () {
      playSound('dog bark');
    }
    // meow when the user tries to leave
    window.onbeforeunload = function () {
      playSound('kitten mew');
      return 'Are you sure you want to leave this awesome page?';
    }

    interface TextTrackCueList {
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      getter TextTrackCue (unsigned long index);
      TextTrackCue? getCueById(DOMString id);
    };

cuelist . `length`

  Returns the number of cues in the list.

cuelist[index]

  Returns the text track cue with index index in the list. The cues are sorted in text track cue order.

cuelist . `getCueById`( id )

  Returns the first text track cue (in text track cue order) with text track cue identifier id.

  Returns null if none of the cues have the given identifier or if the argument is the empty string.

A `TextTrackCueList` object represents a dynamically updating list of text track cues in a given order.

The `length` attribute must return the number of cues in the list represented by the `TextTrackCueList` object.

The supported property indices of a `TextTrackCueList` object at any instant are the numbers from zero to the number of cues in the list represented by the `TextTrackCueList` object minus one, if any. If there are no cues in the list, there are no supported property indices.

To determine the value of an indexed property for a given index index, the user agent must return the indexth text track cue in the list represented by the `TextTrackCueList` object.

The `getCueById(id)` method, when called with an argument other than the empty string, must return the first text track cue in the list represented by the `TextTrackCueList` object whose text track cue identifier is id, if any, or null otherwise. If the argument is the empty string, then the method must return null.

    interface TextTrackCue : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute TextTrack? track;

               attribute DOMString id;
               attribute double startTime;
               attribute double endTime;
               attribute boolean pauseOnExit;

               attribute EventHandler onenter;
               attribute EventHandler onexit;
    };

cue . track

  Returns the `TextTrack` object to which this text track cue belongs, if any, or null otherwise.

cue . id [ = value ]

  Returns the text track cue identifier.

  Can be set.

cue . startTime [ = value ]

  Returns the text track cue start time, in seconds.

  Can be set.

cue . endTime [ = value ]

  Returns the text track cue end time, in seconds.

  Can be set.

cue . pauseOnExit [ = value ]

  Returns true if the text track cue pause-on-exit flag is set, false otherwise.

  Can be set.

The `track` attribute, on getting, must return the `TextTrack` object of the text track in whose list of cues the text track cue that the `TextTrackCue` object represents finds itself, if any; or null otherwise.

The `id` attribute, on getting, must return the text track cue identifier of the text track cue that the `TextTrackCue` object represents. On setting, the text track cue identifier must be set to the new value.

The `startTime` attribute, on getting, must return the text track cue start time of the text track cue that the `TextTrackCue` object represents, in seconds. On setting, the text track cue start time must be set to the new value, interpreted in seconds; then, if the `TextTrackCue` object's text track cue is in a text track's list of cues, and that text track is in a media element's list of text tracks, and the media element's show poster flag is not set, then run the time marches on steps for that media element.

The `endTime` attribute, on getting, must return the text track cue end time of the text track cue that the `TextTrackCue` object represents, in seconds. On setting, the text track cue end time must be set to the new value, interpreted in seconds; then, if the `TextTrackCue` object's text track cue is in a text track's list of cues, and that text track is in a media element's list of text tracks, and the media element's show poster flag is not set, then run the time marches on steps for that media element.

The `pauseOnExit` attribute, on getting, must return true if the text track cue pause-on-exit flag of the text track cue that the `TextTrackCue` object represents is set; or false otherwise. On setting, the text track cue pause-on-exit flag must be set if the new value is true, and must be unset otherwise.

###### 4.8.14.12.6 Text tracks describing chapters

Chapters are segments of a media resource with a given title. Chapters can be nested, in the same way that sections in a document outline can have subsections.

Each text track cue in a text track being used for describing chapters has three key features: the text track cue start time, giving the start time of the chapter, the text track cue end time, giving the end time of the chapter, and the text track cue data giving the chapter title.

The rules for constructing the chapter tree from a text track are as follows. They produce a potentially nested list of chapters, each of which have a start time, end time, title, and a list of nested chapters. This algorithm discards cues that do not correctly nest within each other, or that are out of order.

1. Let list be a copy of the list of cues of the text track being processed.

2. Remove from list any text track cue whose text track cue end time is before its text track cue start time.

3. Let output be an empty list of chapters, where a chapter is a record consisting of a start time, an end time, a title, and a (potentially empty) list of nested chapters. For the purpose of this algorithm, each chapter also has a parent chapter.

4. Let current chapter be a stand-in chapter whose start time is negative infinity, whose end time is positive infinity, and whose list of nested chapters is output. (This is just used to make the algorithm easier to describe.)

5. Loop: If list is empty, jump to the step labeled end.

6. Let current cue be the first cue in list, and then remove it from list.

7. If current cue's text track cue start time is less than the start time of current chapter, then return to the step labeled loop.

8. While current cue's text track cue start time is greater than or equal to current chapter's end time, let current chapter be current chapter's parent chapter.

9. If current cue's text track cue end time is greater than the end time of current chapter, then return to the step labeled loop.

10. Create a new chapter new chapter, whose start time is current cue's text track cue start time, whose end time is current cue's text track cue end time, whose title is current cue's text track cue data interpreted according to its rules for rendering the cue in isolation, and whose list of nested chapters is empty.

    For WebVTT, the rules for rendering the cue in isolation are the rules for interpreting WebVTT cue text. [WEBVTT]

11. Append new chapter to current chapter's list of nested chapters, and let current chapter be new chapter's parent.

12. Let current chapter be new chapter.

13. Return to the step labeled loop.

14. End: Return output.

The following snippet of a WebVTT file shows how nested chapters can be marked up. The file describes three 50-minute chapters, "Astrophysics", "Computational Physics", and "General Relativity". The first has three subchapters, the second has four, and the third has two. [WEBVTT]

    WEBVTT

    00:00:00.000 --> 00:50:00.000
    Astrophysics

    00:00:00.000 --> 00:10:00.000
    Introduction to Astrophysics

    00:10:00.000 --> 00:45:00.000
    The Solar System

    00:00:00.000 --> 00:10:00.000
    Coursework Description

    00:50:00.000 --> 01:40:00.000
    Computational Physics

    00:50:00.000 --> 00:55:00.000
    Introduction to Programming

    00:55:00.000 --> 01:30:00.000
    Data Structures

    01:30:00.000 --> 01:35:00.000
    Answers to Last Exam

    01:35:00.000 --> 01:40:00.000
    Coursework Description

    01:40:00.000 --> 02:30:00.000
    General Relativity

    01:40:00.000 --> 02:00:00.000
    Tensor Algebra

    02:00:00.000 --> 02:30:00.000
    The General Relativistic Field Equations

###### 4.8.14.12.7 Event handlers for objects of the text track APIs

The following are the event handlers that (and their corresponding event handler event types) must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `TextTrackList` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onchange` | `change`
`onaddtrack` | `addtrack`
`onremovetrack` | `removetrack`

The following are the event handlers that (and their corresponding event handler event types) must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `TextTrack` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`oncuechange` | `cuechange`

The following are the event handlers that (and their corresponding event handler event types) must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `TextTrackCue` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onenter` | `enter`
`onexit` | `exit`

###### 4.8.14.12.8 Best practices for metadata text tracks

This section is non-normative.

Text tracks can be used for storing data relating to the media data, for interactive or augmented views.

For example, a page showing a sports broadcast could include information about the current score. Suppose a robotics competition was being streamed live. The image could be overlayed with the scores, as follows:

In order to make the score display render correctly whenever the user seeks to an arbitrary point in the video, the metadata text track cues need to be as long as is appropriate for the score. For example, in the frame above, there would be maybe one cue that lasts the length of the match that gives the match number, one cue that lasts until the blue alliance's score changes, and one cue that lasts until the red alliance's score changes. If the video is just a stream of the live event, the time in the bottom right would presumably be automatically derived from the current video time, rather than based on a cue. However, if the video was just the highlights, then that might be given in cues also.

The following shows what fragments of this could look like in a WebVTT file:

    WEBVTT

    ...

    05:10:00.000 --> 05:12:15.000
    matchtype:qual
    matchnumber:37

    ...

    05:11:02.251 --> 05:11:17.198
    red:78

    05:11:03.672 --> 05:11:54.198
    blue:66

    05:11:17.198 --> 05:11:25.912
    red:80

    05:11:25.912 --> 05:11:26.522
    red:83

    05:11:26.522 --> 05:11:26.982
    red:86

    05:11:26.982 --> 05:11:27.499
    red:89

    ...

The key here is to notice that the information is given in cues that span the length of time to which the relevant event applies. If, instead, the scores were given as zero-length (or very brief, nearly zero-length) cues when the score changes, for example saying "red+2" at 05:11:17.198, "red+3" at 05:11:25.912, etc, problems arise: primarily, seeking is much harder to implement, as the script has to walk the entire list of cues to make sure that no notifications have been missed; but also, if the cues are short it's possible the script will never see that they are active unless it listens to them specifically.

When using cues in this manner, authors are encouraged to use the `cuechange` event to update the current annotations. (In particular, using the `timeupdate` event would be less appropriate as it would require doing work even when the cues haven't changed, and, more importantly, would introduce a higher latency between when the metatata cues become active and when the display is updated, since `timeupdate` events are rate-limited.)

##### 4.8.14.13 User interface

The `controls` attribute is a boolean attribute. If present, it indicates that the author has not provided a scripted controller and would like the user agent to provide its own set of controls.

If the attribute is present, or if scripting is disabled for the media element, then the user agent should expose a user interface to the user. This user interface should include features to begin playback, pause playback, seek to an arbitrary position in the content (if the content supports arbitrary seeking), change the volume, change the display of closed captions or embedded sign-language tracks, select different audio tracks or turn on audio descriptions, and show the media content in manners more suitable to the user (e.g. full-screen video or in an independent resizable window). Other controls may also be made available.

If the media element has a current media controller, then the user agent should expose audio tracks from all the slaved media elements (although avoiding duplicates if the same media resource is being used several times). If a media resource's audio track exposed in this way has no known name, and it is the only audio track for a particular media element, the user agent should use the element's `title` attribute, if any, as the name (or as part of the name) of that track.

Even when the attribute is absent, however, user agents may provide controls to affect playback of the media resource (e.g. play, pause, seeking, and volume controls), but such features should not interfere with the page's normal rendering. For example, such features could be exposed in the media element's context menu. The user agent may implement this simply by exposing a user interface to the user as described above (as if the `controls` attribute was present).

If the user agent exposes a user interface to the user by displaying controls over the media element, then the user agent should suppress any user interaction events while the user agent is interacting with this interface. (For example, if the user clicks on a video's playback control, `mousedown` events and so forth would not simultaneously be fired at elements on the page.)

Where possible (specifically, for starting, stopping, pausing, and unpausing playback, for seeking, for changing the rate of playback, for fast-forwarding or rewinding, for listing, enabling, and disabling text tracks, and for muting or changing the volume of the audio), user interface features exposed by the user agent must be implemented in terms of the DOM API described above, so that, e.g., all the same events fire.

When a media element has a current media controller, the user agent's user interface for pausing and unpausing playback, for seeking, for changing the rate of playback, for fast-forwarding or rewinding, and for muting or changing the volume of audio of the entire group must be implemented in terms of the `MediaController` API exposed on that current media controller. When a media element has a current media controller, and all the slaved media elements of that `MediaController` are paused, the user agent should also unpause all the slaved media elements when the user invokes a user agent interface control for beginning playback.

The "play" function in the user agent's interface must set the `playbackRate` attribute to the value of the `defaultPlaybackRate` attribute before invoking the `play()` method. When a media element has a current media controller, the attributes and method with those names on that `MediaController` object must be used. Otherwise, the attributes and method with those names on the media element itself must be used.

Features such as fast-forward or rewind must be implemented by only changing the `playbackRate` attribute (and not the `defaultPlaybackRate` attribute). Again, when a media element has a current media controller, the attributes with those names on that `MediaController` object must be used; otherwise, the attributes with those names on the media element itself must be used.

When a media element has a current media controller, seeking must be implemented in terms of the `currentTime` attribute on that `MediaController` object. Otherwise, the user agent must directly seek to the requested position in the media element's media timeline. For media resources where seeking to an arbitrary position would be slow, user agents are encouraged to use the approximate-for-speed flag when seeking in response to the user manipulating an approximate position interface such as a seek bar.

When a media element has a current media controller, user agents may additionally provide the user with controls that directly manipulate an individual media element without affecting the `MediaController`, but such features are considered relatively advanced and unlikely to be useful to most users.

The activation behavior of a media element that is exposing a user interface to the user must be to run the following steps:

1. If the media element has a current media controller, and that current media controller is a restrained media controller, then invoke the `play()` method of the `MediaController`.

2. Otherwise, if the media element has a current media controller, and that current media controller is a paused media controller, then invoke the `unpause()` method of the `MediaController`.

3. Otherwise, if the media element has a current media controller, then that current media controller is a playing media controller; invoke the `pause()` method of the `MediaController`.

4. Otherwise, the media element has no current media controller; if the media element's `paused` attribute is true, then invoke the `play()` method on the media element.

5. Otherwise, the media element has no current media controller, and the media element's `paused` attribute is false; invoke the `pause()` method on the media element.

For the purposes of listing chapters in the media resource, only text tracks in the media element's list of text tracks that are showing and whose text track kind is `chapters` should be used. Such tracks must be interpreted according to the rules for constructing the chapter tree from a text track. When seeking in response to a user maniplating a chapter selection interface, user agents should not use the approximate-for-speed flag.

The `controls` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

media . `volume` [ = value ]

  Returns the current playback volume, as a number in the range 0.0 to 1.0, where 0.0 is the quietest and 1.0 the loudest.

  Can be set, to change the volume.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the new value is not in the range 0.0 .. 1.0.

media . `muted` [ = value ]

  Returns true if audio is muted, overriding the `volume` attribute, and false if the `volume` attribute is being honored.

  Can be set, to change whether the audio is muted or not.

A media element has a playback volume, which is a fraction in the range 0.0 (silent) to 1.0 (loudest). Initially, the volume should be 1.0, but user agents may remember the last set value across sessions, on a per-site basis or otherwise, so the volume may start at other values.

The `volume` IDL attribute must return the playback volume of any audio portions of the media element. On setting, if the new value is in the range 0.0 to 1.0 inclusive, the media element's playback volume must be set to the new value. If the new value is outside the range 0.0 to 1.0 inclusive, then, on setting, an `IndexSizeError` exception must be thrown instead.

A media element can also be muted. If anything is muting the element, then it is muted. (For example, when the direction of playback is backwards, the element is muted.)

The `muted` IDL attribute must return the value to which it was last set. When a media element is created, if the element has a `muted` content attribute specified, then the `muted` IDL attribute should be set to true; otherwise, the user agents may set the value to the user's preferred value (e.g. remembering the last set value across sessions, on a per-site basis or otherwise). While the `muted` IDL attribute is set to true, the media element must be muted.

Whenever either of the values that would be returned by the `volume` and `muted` IDL attributes change, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `volumechange` at the media element.

An element's effective media volume is determined as follows:

1. If the user has indicated that the user agent is to override the volume of the element, then the element's effective media volume is the volume desired by the user. Abort these steps.

2. If the element's audio output is muted, the element's effective media volume is zero. Abort these steps.

3. If the element has a current media controller and that `MediaController` object's media controller mute override is true, the element's effective media volume is zero. Abort these steps.

4. Let volume be the playback volume of the audio portions of the media element, in range 0.0 (silent) to 1.0 (loudest).

5. If the element has a current media controller, multiply volume by that `MediaController` object's media controller volume multiplier. (The media controller volume multiplier is in the range 0.0 to 1.0, so this can only reduce the value.)

6. The element's effective media volume is volume, interpreted relative to the range 0.0 to 1.0, with 0.0 being silent, and 1.0 being the loudest setting, values in between increasing in loudness. The range need not be linear. The loudest setting may be lower than the system's loudest possible setting; for example the user could have set a maximum volume.

The `muted` content attribute on media elements is a boolean attribute that controls the default state of the audio output of the media resource, potentially overriding user preferences.

The `defaultMuted` IDL attribute must reflect the `muted` content attribute.

This attribute has no dynamic effect (it only controls the default state of the element).

This video (an advertisement) autoplays, but to avoid annoying users, it does so without sound, and allows the user to turn the sound on.

    <video src="adverts.cgi?kind=video" controls autoplay loop muted></video>

##### 4.8.14.14 Time ranges

Objects implementing the `TimeRanges` interface represent a list of ranges (periods) of time.

    interface TimeRanges {
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      double start(unsigned long index);
      double end(unsigned long index);
    };

media . `length`

  Returns the number of ranges in the object.

time = media . `start`(index)

  Returns the time for the start of the range with the given index.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the index is out of range.

time = media . `end`(index)

  Returns the time for the end of the range with the given index.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the index is out of range.

The `length` IDL attribute must return the number of ranges represented by the object.

The `start(index)` method must return the position of the start of the indexth range represented by the object, in seconds measured from the start of the timeline that the object covers.

The `end(index)` method must return the position of the end of the indexth range represented by the object, in seconds measured from the start of the timeline that the object covers.

These methods must throw `IndexSizeError` exceptions if called with an index argument greater than or equal to the number of ranges represented by the object.

When a `TimeRanges` object is said to be a normalised `TimeRanges` object, the ranges it represents must obey the following criteria:

- The start of a range must be greater than the end of all earlier ranges.
- The start of a range must be less than the end of that same range.

In other words, the ranges in such an object are ordered, don't overlap, aren't empty, and don't touch (adjacent ranges are folded into one bigger range).

Ranges in a `TimeRanges` object must be inclusive.

Thus, the end of a range would be equal to the start of a following adjacent (touching but not overlapping) range. Similarly, a range covering a whole timeline anchored at zero would have a start equal to zero and an end equal to the duration of the timeline.

The timelines used by the objects returned by the `buffered`, `seekable` and `played` IDL attributes of media elements must be that element's media timeline.

##### 4.8.14.15 The `TrackEvent` interface

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional TrackEventInit eventInitDict)]
    interface TrackEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute (VideoTrack or AudioTrack or TextTrack) track;
    };

    dictionary TrackEventInit : EventInit {
      (VideoTrack or AudioTrack or TextTrack) track;
    };

event . `track`

  Returns the track object (`TextTrack`, `AudioTrack`, or `VideoTrack`) to which the event relates.

The `track` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the context information for the event.

##### 4.8.14.16 Event summary

This section is non-normative.

The following events fire on media elements as part of the processing model described above:

Event name | Interface | Fired when... | Preconditions
--- | --- | --- | ---
`loadstart` | `Event` | The user agent begins looking for media data, as part of the resource selection algorithm. | `networkState` equals `NETWORK_LOADING`
`progress` | `Event` | The user agent is fetching media data. | `networkState` equals `NETWORK_LOADING`
`suspend` | `Event` | The user agent is intentionally not currently fetching media data. | `networkState` equals `NETWORK_IDLE`
`abort` | `Event` | The user agent stops fetching the media data before it is completely downloaded, but not due to an error. | `error` is an object with the code `MEDIA_ERR_ABORTED`. `networkState` equals either `NETWORK_EMPTY` or `NETWORK_IDLE`, depending on when the download was aborted.
`error` | `Event` | An error occurs while fetching the media data. | `error` is an object with the code `MEDIA_ERR_NETWORK` or higher. `networkState` equals either `NETWORK_EMPTY` or `NETWORK_IDLE`, depending on when the download was aborted.
`emptied` | `Event` | A media element whose `networkState` was previously not in the `NETWORK_EMPTY` state has just switched to that state (either because of a fatal error during load that's about to be reported, or because the `load()` method was invoked while the resource selection algorithm was already running). | `networkState` is `NETWORK_EMPTY`; all the IDL attributes are in their initial states.
`stalled` | `Event` | The user agent is trying to fetch media data, but data is unexpectedly not forthcoming. | `networkState` is `NETWORK_LOADING`.
`loadedmetadata` | `Event` | The user agent has just determined the duration and dimensions of the media resource and the text tracks are ready. | `readyState` is newly equal to `HAVE_METADATA` or greater for the first time.
`loadeddata` | `Event` | The user agent can render the media data at the current playback position for the first time. | `readyState` newly increased to `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` or greater for the first time.
`canplay` | `Event` | The user agent can resume playback of the media data, but estimates that if playback were to be started now, the media resource could not be rendered at the current playback rate up to its end without having to stop for further buffering of content. | `readyState` newly increased to `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` or greater.
`canplaythrough` | `Event` | The user agent estimates that if playback were to be started now, the media resource could be rendered at the current playback rate all the way to its end without having to stop for further buffering. | `readyState` is newly equal to `HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA`.
`playing` | `Event` | Playback is ready to start after having been paused or delayed due to lack of media data. | `readyState` is newly equal to or greater than `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` and `paused` is false, or `paused` is newly false and `readyState` is equal to or greater than `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA`. Even if this event fires, the element might still not be potentially playing, e.g. if the element is blocked on its media controller (e.g. because the current media controller is paused, or another slaved media element is stalled somehow, or because the media resource has no data corresponding to the media controller position), or the element is paused for user interaction or paused for in-band content.
`waiting` | `Event` | Playback has stopped because the next frame is not available, but the user agent expects that frame to become available in due course. | `readyState` is equal to or less than `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA`, and `paused` is false. Either `seeking` is true, or the current playback position is not contained in any of the ranges in `buffered`. It is possible for playback to stop for other reasons without `paused` being false, but those reasons do not fire this event (and when those situations resolve, a separate `playing` event is not fired either): e.g. the element is newly blocked on its media controller, or playback ended, or playback stopped due to errors, or the element has paused for user interaction or paused for in-band content.
`seeking` | `Event` | The `seeking` IDL attribute changed to true, and the user agent has started seeking to a new position. |
`seeked` | `Event` | The `seeking` IDL attribute changed to false after the current playback position was changed. |
`ended` | `Event` | Playback has stopped because the end of the media resource was reached. | `currentTime` equals the end of the media resource; `ended` is true.
`durationchange` | `Event` | The `duration` attribute has just been updated. |
`timeupdate` | `Event` | The current playback position changed as part of normal playback or in an especially interesting way, for example discontinuously. |
`play` | `Event` | The element is no longer paused. Fired after the `play()` method has returned, or when the `autoplay` attribute has caused playback to begin. | `paused` is newly false.
`pause` | `Event` | The element has been paused. Fired after the `pause()` method has returned. | `paused` is newly true.
`ratechange` | `Event` | Either the `defaultPlaybackRate` or the `playbackRate` attribute has just been updated. |
`resize` | `Event` | One or both of the `videoWidth` and `videoHeight` attributes have just been updated. | Media element is a `video` element; `readyState` is not `HAVE_NOTHING`
`volumechange` | `Event` | Either the `volume` attribute or the `muted` attribute has changed. Fired after the relevant attribute's setter has returned. |

The following events fire on `MediaController` objects:

Event name | Interface | Fired when...
--- | --- | ---
`emptied` | `Event` | All the slaved media elements newly have `readyState` set to `HAVE_NOTHING` or greater, or there are no longer any slaved media elements.
`loadedmetadata` | `Event` | All the slaved media elements newly have `readyState` set to `HAVE_METADATA` or greater.
`loadeddata` | `Event` | All the slaved media elements newly have `readyState` set to `HAVE_CURRENT_DATA` or greater.
`canplay` | `Event` | All the slaved media elements newly have `readyState` set to `HAVE_FUTURE_DATA` or greater.
`canplaythrough` | `Event` | All the slaved media elements newly have `readyState` set to `HAVE_ENOUGH_DATA`.
`playing` | `Event` | The `MediaController` is no longer a blocked media controller.
`waiting` | `Event` | The `MediaController` is now a blocked media controller.
`ended` | `Event` | All the slaved media elements have newly ended playback; the `MediaController` has reached the end of all the slaved media elements.
`durationchange` | `Event` | The `duration` attribute has just been updated.
`timeupdate` | `Event` | The media controller position changed.
`play` | `Event` | The `paused` attribute is newly false.
`pause` | `Event` | The `paused` attribute is newly true.
`ratechange` | `Event` | Either the `defaultPlaybackRate` attribute or the `playbackRate` attribute has just been updated.
`volumechange` | `Event` | Either the `volume` attribute or the `muted` attribute has just been updated.

The following events fire on `AudioTrackList`, `VideoTrackList`, and `TextTrackList` objects:

Event name | Interface | Fired when...
--- | --- | ---
`change` | `Event` | One or more tracks in the track list have been enabled or disabled.
`addtrack` | `TrackEvent` | A track has been added to the track list.
`removetrack` | `TrackEvent` | A track has been removed from the track list.

The following event fires on `TextTrack` objects and `track` elements:

Event name | Interface | Fired when...
--- | --- | ---
`cuechange` | `Event` | One or more cues in the track have become active or stopped being active.

The following events fire on `TextTrackCue` objects:

Event name | Interface | Fired when...
--- | --- | ---
`enter` | `Event` | The cue has become active.
`exit` | `Event` | The cue has stopped being active.

##### 4.8.14.17 Security and privacy considerations

The main security and privacy implications of the `video` and `audio` elements come from the ability to embed media cross-origin. There are two directions that threats can flow: from hostile content to a victim page, and from a hostile page to victim content.

If a victim page embeds hostile content, the threat is that the content might contain scripted code that attempts to interact with the `Document` that embeds the content. To avoid this, user agents must ensure that there is no access from the content to the embedding page. In the case of media content that uses DOM concepts, the embedded content must be treated as if it was in its own unrelated top-level browsing context.

For instance, if an SVG animation was embedded in a `video` element, the user agent would not give it access to the DOM of the outer page. From the perspective of scripts in the SVG resource, the SVG file would appear to be in a lone top-level browsing context with no parent.

If a hostile page embeds victim content, the threat is that the embedding page could obtain information from the content that it would not otherwise have access to. The API does expose some information: the existence of the media, its type, its duration, its size, and the performance characteristics of its host. Such information is already potentially problematic, but in practice the same information can more or less be obtained using the `img` element, and so it has been deemed acceptable.

However, significantly more sensitive information could be obtained if the user agent further exposes metadata within the content such as subtitles or chapter titles. Such information is therefore only exposed if the video resource passes a CORS resource sharing check. The `crossorigin` attribute allows authors to control how this check is performed. [FETCH]

Without this restriction, an attacker could trick a user running within a corporate network into visiting a site that attempts to load a video from a previously leaked location on the corporation's intranet. If such a video included confidential plans for a new product, then being able to read the subtitles would present a serious confidentiality breach.

##### 4.8.14.18 Best practices for authors using media elements

This section is non-normative.

Playing audio and video resources on small devices such as set-top boxes or mobile phones is often constrained by limited hardware resources in the device. For example, a device might only support three simultaneous videos. For this reason, it is a good practice to release resources held by media elements when they are done playing, either by being very careful about removing all references to the element and allowing it to be garbage collected, or, even better, by removing the element's `src` attribute and any `source` element descendants, and invoking the element's `load()` method.

Similarly, when the playback rate is not exactly 1.0, hardware, software, or format limitations can cause video frames to be dropped and audio to be choppy or muted.

##### 4.8.14.19 Best practices for implementors of media elements

This section is non-normative.

How accurately various aspects of the media element API are implemented is considered a quality-of-implementation issue.

For example, when implementing the `buffered` attribute, how precise an implementation reports the ranges that have been buffered depends on how carefully the user agent inspects the data. Since the API reports ranges as times, but the data is obtained in byte streams, a user agent receiving a variable-bit-rate stream might only be able to determine precise times by actually decoding all of the data. User agents aren't required to do this, however; they can instead return estimates (e.g. based on the average bit rate seen so far) which get revised as more information becomes available.

As a general rule, user agents are urged to be conservative rather than optimistic. For example, it would be bad to report that everything had been buffered when it had not.

Another quality-of-implementation issue would be playing a video backwards when the codec is designed only for forward playback (e.g. there aren't many key frames, and they are far apart, and the intervening frames only have deltas from the previous frame). User agents could do a poor job, e.g. only showing key frames; however, better implementations would do more work and thus do a better job, e.g. actually decoding parts of the video forwards, storing the complete frames, and then playing the frames backwards.

Similarly, while implementations are allowed to drop buffered data at any time (there is no requirement that a user agent keep all the media data obtained for the lifetime of the media element), it is again a quality of implementation issue: user agents with sufficient resources to keep all the data around are encouraged to do so, as this allows for a better user experience. For example, if the user is watching a live stream, a user agent could allow the user only to view the live video; however, a better user agent would buffer everything and allow the user to seek through the earlier material, pause it, play it forwards and backwards, etc.

When multiple tracks are synchronised with a `MediaController`, it is possible for scripts to add and remove media elements from the `MediaController`'s list of slaved media elements, even while these tracks are playing. How smoothly the media plays back in such situations is another quality-of-implementation issue.

When a media element that is paused is removed from a document and not reinserted before the next time the event loop reaches step 1, implementations that are resource constrained are encouraged to take that opportunity to release all hardware resources (like video planes, networking resources, and data buffers) used by the media element. (User agents still have to keep track of the playback position and so forth, though, in case playback is later restarted.)

#### 4.8.15 The `map` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Transparent.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `name` — Name of image map to reference from the `usemap` attribute
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLMapElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString name;
        readonly attribute HTMLCollection areas;
        readonly attribute HTMLCollection images;
      };

The `map` element, in conjunction with an `img` element and any `area` element descendants, defines an image map. The element represents its children.

The `name` attribute gives the map a name so that it can be referenced. The attribute must be present and must have a non-empty value with no space characters. The value of the `name` attribute must not be a compatibility-caseless match for the value of the `name` attribute of another `map` element in the same document. If the `id` attribute is also specified, both attributes must have the same value.

map . `areas`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the `area` elements in the `map`.

map . `images`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the `img` and `object` elements that use the `map`.

The `areas` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `map` element, whose filter matches only `area` elements.

The `images` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only `img` and `object` elements that are associated with this `map` element according to the image map processing model.

The IDL attribute `name` must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

Image maps can be defined in conjunction with other content on the page, to ease maintenance. This example is of a page with an image map at the top of the page and a corresponding set of text links at the bottom.

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <TITLE>Babies™: Toys</TITLE>
    <HEADER>
     <H1>Toys</H1>
     <IMG SRC="/images/menu.gif"
          ALT="Babies™ navigation menu. Select a department to go to its page."
          USEMAP="#NAV">
    </HEADER>
     ...
    <FOOTER>
     <MAP NAME="NAV">
      <P>
       <A HREF="/clothes/">Clothes</A>
       <AREA ALT="Clothes" COORDS="0,0,100,50" HREF="/clothes/"> |
       <A HREF="/toys/">Toys</A>
       <AREA ALT="Toys" COORDS="100,0,200,50" HREF="/toys/"> |
       <A HREF="/food/">Food</A>
       <AREA ALT="Food" COORDS="200,0,300,50" HREF="/food/"> |
       <A HREF="/books/">Books</A>
       <AREA ALT="Books" COORDS="300,0,400,50" HREF="/books/">
     </MAP>
    </FOOTER>

#### 4.8.16 The `area` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected, but only if there is a `map` element ancestor or a `template` element ancestor.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `alt` — Replacement text for use when images are not available
  `coords` — Coordinates for the shape to be created in an image map
  `shape` — The kind of shape to be created in an image map
  `href` — Address of the hyperlink
  `target` — Browsing context for hyperlink navigation
  `download` — Whether to download the resource instead of navigating to it, and its file name if so
  `ping` — URLs to ping
  `rel` — Relationship between the document containing the hyperlink and the destination resource
  `hreflang` — Language of the linked resource
  `type` — Hint for the type of the referenced resource
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLAreaElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString alt;
                 attribute DOMString coords;
                 attribute DOMString shape;
                 attribute DOMString target;
                 attribute DOMString download;
        [PutForwards=value] attribute DOMSettableTokenList ping;
                 attribute DOMString rel;
        readonly attribute DOMTokenList relList;
                 attribute DOMString hreflang;
                 attribute DOMString type;

        // also has obsolete members
      };
      HTMLAreaElement implements URLUtils;

The `area` element represents either a hyperlink with some text and a corresponding area on an image map, or a dead area on an image map.

An `area` element with a parent node must have a `map` element ancestor or a `template` element ancestor.

If the `area` element has an `href` attribute, then the `area` element represents a hyperlink. In this case, the `alt` attribute must be present. It specifies the text of the hyperlink. Its value must be text that, when presented with the texts specified for the other hyperlinks of the image map, and with the alternative text of the image, but without the image itself, provides the user with the same kind of choice as the hyperlink would when used without its text but with its shape applied to the image. The `alt` attribute may be left blank if there is another `area` element in the same image map that points to the same resource and has a non-blank `alt` attribute.

If the `area` element has no `href` attribute, then the area represented by the element cannot be selected, and the `alt` attribute must be omitted.

In both cases, the `shape` and `coords` attributes specify the area.

The `shape` attribute is an enumerated attribute. The following table lists the keywords defined for this attribute. The states given in the first cell of the rows with keywords give the states to which those keywords map. Some of the keywords are non-conforming, as noted in the last column.

State | Keywords | Notes
--- | --- | ---
Circle state | `circle` |
`circ` | Non-conforming
Default state | `default` |
Polygon state | `poly` |
`polygon` | Non-conforming
Rectangle state | `rect` |
`rectangle` | Non-conforming

The attribute may be omitted. The missing value default is the rectangle state.

The `coords` attribute must, if specified, contain a valid list of integers. This attribute gives the coordinates for the shape described by the `shape` attribute. The processing for this attribute is described as part of the image map processing model.

In the circle state, `area` elements must have a `coords` attribute present, with three integers, the last of which must be non-negative. The first integer must be the distance in CSS pixels from the left edge of the image to the center of the circle, the second integer must be the distance in CSS pixels from the top edge of the image to the center of the circle, and the third integer must be the radius of the circle, again in CSS pixels.

In the default state state, `area` elements must not have a `coords` attribute. (The area is the whole image.)

In the polygon state, `area` elements must have a `coords` attribute with at least six integers, and the number of integers must be even. Each pair of integers must represent a coordinate given as the distances from the left and the top of the image in CSS pixels respectively, and all the coordinates together must represent the points of the polygon, in order.

In the rectangle state, `area` elements must have a `coords` attribute with exactly four integers, the first of which must be less than the third, and the second of which must be less than the fourth. The four points must represent, respectively, the distance from the left edge of the image to the left side of the rectangle, the distance from the top edge to the top side, the distance from the left edge to the right side, and the distance from the top edge to the bottom side, all in CSS pixels.

When user agents allow users to follow hyperlinks or download hyperlinks created using the `area` element, as described in the next section, the `href`, `target`, `download`, and `ping` attributes decide how the link is followed. The `rel`, `hreflang`, and `type` attributes may be used to indicate to the user the likely nature of the target resource before the user follows the link.

The `target`, `download`, `ping`, `rel`, `hreflang`, and `type` attributes must be omitted if the `href` attribute is not present.

If the `itemprop` attribute is specified on an `area` element, then the `href` attribute must also be specified.

The activation behavior of `area` elements is to run the following steps:

1. If the `area` element's node document is not fully active, then abort these steps.

2. If the `area` element has a `download` attribute and the algorithm is not allowed to show a popup, or the element's `target` attribute is present and applying the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name, using the value of the `target` attribute as the browsing context name, would result in there not being a chosen browsing context, then run these substeps:

   1. If there is an entry settings object, throw an `InvalidAccessError` exception.

   2. Abort these steps without following the hyperlink.

3. Otherwise, the user agent must follow the hyperlink or download the hyperlink created by the `area` element, if any, and as determined by the `download` attribute and any expressed user preference.

The IDL attributes `alt`, `coords`, `target`, `download`, `ping`, `rel`, `hreflang`, and `type`, each must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The IDL attribute `shape` must reflect the `shape` content attribute.

The IDL attribute `relList` must reflect the `rel` content attribute.

The `area` element also supports the `URLUtils` interface. [URL]

When the element is created, and whenever the element's `href` content attribute is set, changed, or removed, the user agent must invoke the element's `URLUtils` interface's set the input algorithm with the value of the `href` content attribute, if any, or the empty string otherwise, as the given value.

The element's `URLUtils` interface's get the base algorithm must simply return the element's base URL.

The element's `URLUtils` interface's query encoding is the document's character encoding.

When the element's `URLUtils` interface invokes its update steps with a string value, the user agent must set the element's `href` content attribute to the string value.

#### 4.8.17 Image maps

##### 4.8.17.1 Authoring

An image map allows geometric areas on an image to be associated with hyperlinks.

An image, in the form of an `img` element or an `object` element representing an image, may be associated with an image map (in the form of a `map` element) by specifying a `usemap` attribute on the `img` or `object` element. The `usemap` attribute, if specified, must be a valid hash-name reference to a `map` element.

Consider an image that looks as follows:

If we wanted just the coloured areas to be clickable, we could do it as follows:

    <p>
     Please select a shape:
     <img src="shapes.png" usemap="#shapes"
          alt="Four shapes are available: a red hollow box, a green circle, a blue triangle, and a yellow four-pointed star.">
     <map name="shapes">
      <area shape=rect coords="50,50,100,100"> <!-- the hole in the red box -->
      <area shape=rect coords="25,25,125,125" href="red.html" alt="Red box.">
      <area shape=circle coords="200,75,50" href="green.html" alt="Green circle.">
      <area shape=poly coords="325,25,262,125,388,125" href="blue.html" alt="Blue triangle.">
      <area shape=poly coords="450,25,435,60,400,75,435,90,450,125,465,90,500,75,465,60"
            href="yellow.html" alt="Yellow star.">
     </map>
    </p>

##### 4.8.17.2 Processing model

If an `img` element or an `object` element representing an image has a `usemap` attribute specified, user agents must process it as follows:

1. Parse the attribute's value using the rules for parsing a hash-name reference to a `map` element, with the element's node document as the context node. This will return either an element (the map) or null.

2. If that returned null, then abort these steps. The image is not associated with an image map after all.

3. Otherwise, the user agent must collect all the `area` elements that are descendants of the map. Let those be the areas.

Having obtained the list of `area` elements that form the image map (the areas), interactive user agents must process the list in one of two ways.

If the user agent intends to show the text that the `img` element represents, then it must use the following steps.

In user agents that do not support images, or that have images disabled, `object` elements cannot represent images, and thus this section never applies (the fallback content is shown instead). The following steps therefore only apply to `img` elements.

1. Remove all the `area` elements in areas that have no `href` attribute.

2. Remove all the `area` elements in areas that have no `alt` attribute, or whose `alt` attribute's value is the empty string, if there is another `area` element in areas with the same value in the `href` attribute and with a non-empty `alt` attribute.

3. Each remaining `area` element in areas represents a hyperlink. Those hyperlinks should all be made available to the user in a manner associated with the text of the `img`.

   In this context, user agents may represent `area` and `img` elements with no specified `alt` attributes, or whose `alt` attributes are the empty string or some other non-visible text, in a user-agent-defined fashion intended to indicate the lack of suitable author-provided text.

If the user agent intends to show the image and allow interaction with the image to select hyperlinks, then the image must be associated with a set of layered shapes, taken from the `area` elements in areas, in reverse tree order (so the last specified `area` element in the map is the bottom-most shape, and the first element in the map, in tree order, is the top-most shape).

Each `area` element in areas must be processed as follows to obtain a shape to layer onto the image:

1. Find the state that the element's `shape` attribute represents.

2. Use the rules for parsing a list of integers to parse the element's `coords` attribute, if it is present, and let the result be the coords list. If the attribute is absent, let the coords list be the empty list.

3. If the number of items in the coords list is less than the minimum number given for the `area` element's current state, as per the following table, then the shape is empty; abort these steps.

   State | Minimum number of items
   --- | ---
   Circle state | 3
   Default state | 0
   Polygon state | 6
   Rectangle state | 4

4. Check for excess items in the coords list as per the entry in the following list corresponding to the `shape` attribute's state:

   Circle state
     Drop any items in the list beyond the third.
   Default state
     Drop all items in the list.
   Polygon state
     Drop the last item if there's an odd number of items.
   Rectangle state
     Drop any items in the list beyond the fourth.

5. If the `shape` attribute represents the rectangle state, and the first number in the list is numerically less than the third number in the list, then swap those two numbers around.

6. If the `shape` attribute represents the rectangle state, and the second number in the list is numerically greater than the fourth number in the list, then swap those two numbers around.

7. If the `shape` attribute represents the circle state, and the third number in the list is less than or equal to zero, then the shape is empty; abort these steps.

8. Now, the shape represented by the element is the one described for the entry in the list below corresponding to the state of the `shape` attribute:

   Circle state

     Let x be the first number in coords, y be the second number, and r be the third number.

     The shape is a circle whose center is x CSS pixels from the left edge of the image and y CSS pixels from the top edge of the image, and whose radius is r pixels.

   Default state

     The shape is a rectangle that exactly covers the entire image.

   Polygon state

     Let xi be the (2i)th entry in coords, and yi be the (2i+1)th entry in coords (the first entry in coords being the one with index 0).

     Let the coordinates be (xi, yi), interpreted in CSS pixels measured from the top left of the image, for all integer values of i from 0 to (N/2)-1, where N is the number of items in coords.

     The shape is a polygon whose vertices are given by the coordinates, and whose interior is established using the even-odd rule. [GRAPHICS]

   Rectangle state

     Let x1 be the first number in coords, y1 be the second number, x2 be the third number, and y2 be the fourth number.

     The shape is a rectangle whose top-left corner is given by the coordinate (x1, y1) and whose bottom right corner is given by the coordinate (x2, y2), those coordinates being interpreted as CSS pixels from the top left corner of the image.

   For historical reasons, the coordinates must be interpreted relative to the displayed image after any stretching caused by the CSS 'width' and 'height' properties (or, for non-CSS browsers, the image element's `width` and `height` attributes — CSS browsers map those attributes to the aforementioned CSS properties).

   Browser zoom features and transforms applied using CSS or SVG do not affect the coordinates.

Pointing device interaction with an image associated with a set of layered shapes per the above algorithm must result in the relevant user interaction events being first fired to the top-most shape covering the point that the pointing device indicated, if any, or to the image element itself, if there is no shape covering that point. User agents may also allow individual `area` elements representing hyperlinks to be selected and activated (e.g. using a keyboard).

Because a `map` element (and its `area` elements) can be associated with multiple `img` and `object` elements, it is possible for an `area` element to correspond to multiple focusable areas of the document.

Image maps are live; if the DOM is mutated, then the user agent must act as if it had rerun the algorithms for image maps.

#### 4.8.18 MathML

The `math` element from the MathML namespace falls into the embedded content, phrasing content, and flow content categories for the purposes of the content models in this specification.

This specification refers to several specific MathML elements, in particular: `annotation-xml`, `merror`, `mi`, `mn`, `mo`, `ms`, and `mtext`.

When the MathML `annotation-xml` element contains elements from the HTML namespace, such elements must all be flow content. [MATHML]

When the MathML token elements (`mi`, `mo`, `mn`, `ms`, and `mtext`) are descendants of HTML elements, they may contain phrasing content elements from the HTML namespace. [MATHML]

User agents must handle text other than inter-element whitespace found in MathML elements whose content models do not allow straight text by pretending for the purposes of MathML content models, layout, and rendering that that text is actually wrapped in an `mtext` element in the MathML namespace. (Such text is not, however, conforming.)

User agents must act as if any MathML element whose contents does not match the element's content model was replaced, for the purposes of MathML layout and rendering, by an `merror` element in the MathML namespace containing some appropriate error message.

To enable authors to use MathML tools that only accept MathML in its XML form, interactive HTML user agents are encouraged to provide a way to export any MathML fragment as an XML namespace-well-formed XML fragment.

The semantics of MathML elements are defined by the MathML specification and other applicable specifications. [MATHML]

Here is an example of the use of MathML in an HTML document:

    <!DOCTYPE html>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>The quadratic formula</title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <h1>The quadratic formula</h1>
      <p>
       <math>
        <mi>x</mi>
        <mo>=</mo>
        <mfrac>
         <mrow>
          <mo form="prefix">−</mo> <mi>b</mi>
          <mo>±</mo>
          <msqrt>
           <msup> <mi>b</mi> <mn>2</mn> </msup>
           <mo>−</mo>
           <mn>4</mn> <mo>⁢</mo> <mi>a</mi> <mo>⁢</mo> <mi>c</mi>
          </msqrt>
         </mrow>
         <mrow>
          <mn>2</mn> <mo>⁢</mo> <mi>a</mi>
         </mrow>
        </mfrac>
       </math>
      </p>
     </body>
    </html>

#### 4.8.19 SVG

The `svg` element from the SVG namespace falls into the embedded content, phrasing content, and flow content categories for the purposes of the content models in this specification.

To enable authors to use SVG tools that only accept SVG in its XML form, interactive HTML user agents are encouraged to provide a way to export any SVG fragment as an XML namespace-well-formed XML fragment.

When the SVG `foreignObject` element contains elements from the HTML namespace, such elements must all be flow content. [SVG]

The content model for `title` elements in the SVG namespace inside HTML documents is phrasing content. (This further constrains the requirements given in the SVG specification.)

The semantics of SVG elements are defined by the SVG specification and other applicable specifications. [SVG]

#### 4.8.20 Dimension attributes

Author requirements: The `width` and `height` attributes on `img`, `iframe`, `embed`, `object`, `video`, and, when their `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, `input` elements may be specified to give the dimensions of the visual content of the element (the width and height respectively, relative to the nominal direction of the output medium), in CSS pixels. The attributes, if specified, must have values that are valid non-negative integers.

The specified dimensions given may differ from the dimensions specified in the resource itself, since the resource may have a resolution that differs from the CSS pixel resolution. (On screens, CSS pixels have a resolution of 96ppi, but in general the CSS pixel resolution depends on the reading distance.) If both attributes are specified, then one of the following statements must be true:

- specified width - 0.5 ≤ specified height * target ratio ≤ specified width + 0.5
- specified height - 0.5 ≤ specified width / target ratio ≤ specified height + 0.5
- specified height = specified width = 0

The target ratio is the ratio of the intrinsic width to the intrinsic height in the resource. The specified width and specified height are the values of the `width` and `height` attributes respectively.

The two attributes must be omitted if the resource in question does not have both an intrinsic width and an intrinsic height.

If the two attributes are both zero, it indicates that the element is not intended for the user (e.g. it might be a part of a service to count page views).

The dimension attributes are not intended to be used to stretch the image.

User agent requirements: User agents are expected to use these attributes as hints for the rendering.

The `width` and `height` IDL attributes on the `iframe`, `embed`, `object`, and `video` elements must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

For `iframe`, `embed`, and `object` the IDL attributes are `DOMString`; for `video` the IDL attributes are `unsigned long`.

The corresponding IDL attributes for `img` and `input` elements are defined in those respective elements' sections, as they are slightly more specific to those elements' other behaviors.

### 4.9 Tabular data

#### 4.9.1 The `table` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  In this order: optionally a `caption` element, followed by zero or more `colgroup` elements, followed optionally by a `thead` element, followed optionally by a `tfoot` element, followed by either zero or more `tbody` elements or one or more `tr` elements, followed optionally by a `tfoot` element (but there can only be one `tfoot` element child in total), optionally intermixed with one or more script-supporting elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `sortable` — Enables a sorting interface for the table
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTableElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute HTMLTableCaptionElement? caption;
        HTMLElement createCaption();
        void deleteCaption();
                 attribute HTMLTableSectionElement? tHead;
        HTMLElement createTHead();
        void deleteTHead();
                 attribute HTMLTableSectionElement? tFoot;
        HTMLElement createTFoot();
        void deleteTFoot();
        readonly attribute HTMLCollection tBodies;
        HTMLElement createTBody();
        readonly attribute HTMLCollection rows;
        HTMLElement insertRow(optional long index = -1);
        void deleteRow(long index);
                 attribute boolean sortable;
        void stopSorting();

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `table` element represents data with more than one dimension, in the form of a table.

The `table` element takes part in the table model. Tables have rows, columns, and cells given by their descendants. The rows and columns form a grid; a table's cells must completely cover that grid without overlap.

Precise rules for determining whether this conformance requirement is met are described in the description of the table model.

Authors are encouraged to provide information describing how to interpret complex tables. Guidance on how to provide such information is given below.

Tables must not be used as layout aids. Historically, some Web authors have misused tables in HTML as a way to control their page layout. This usage is non-conforming, because tools attempting to extract tabular data from such documents would obtain very confusing results. In particular, users of accessibility tools like screen readers are likely to find it very difficult to navigate pages with tables used for layout.

There are a variety of alternatives to using HTML tables for layout, primarily using CSS positioning and the CSS table model. [CSS]

Tables can be complicated to understand and navigate. To help users with this, user agents should clearly delineate cells in a table from each other, unless the user agent has classified the table as a (non-conforming) layout table.

Authors and implementors are encouraged to consider using some of the table design techniques described below to make tables easier to navigate for users.

User agents, especially those that do table analysis on arbitrary content, are encouraged to find heuristics to determine which tables actually contain data and which are merely being used for layout. This specification does not define a precise heuristic, but the following are suggested as possible indicators:

Feature | Indication
--- | ---
The use of the `role` attribute with the value `presentation` | Probably a layout table
The use of the non-conforming `border` attribute with the non-conforming value 0 | Probably a layout table
The use of the non-conforming `cellspacing` and `cellpadding` attributes with the value 0 | Probably a layout table
The use of `caption`, `thead`, or `th` elements | Probably a non-layout table
The use of the `headers` and `scope` attributes | Probably a non-layout table
The use of the non-conforming `border` attribute with a value other than 0 | Probably a non-layout table
Explicit visible borders set using CSS | Probably a non-layout table
The use of the `summary` attribute | Not a good indicator (both layout and non-layout tables have historically been given this attribute)

It is quite possible that the above suggestions are wrong. Implementors are urged to provide feedback elaborating on their experiences with trying to create a layout table detection heuristic.

If a `table` element has a (non-conforming) `summary` attribute, and the user agent has not classified the table as a layout table, the user agent may report the contents of that attribute to the user.

The `sortable` attribute is used in the table sorting model.

table . `caption` [ = value ]

  Returns the table's `caption` element.

  Can be set, to replace the `caption` element.

caption = table . `createCaption`()

  Ensures the table has a `caption` element, and returns it.

table . `deleteCaption`()

  Ensures the table does not have a `caption` element.

table . `tHead` [ = value ]

  Returns the table's `thead` element.

  Can be set, to replace the `thead` element. If the new value is not a `thead` element, throws a `HierarchyRequestError` exception.

thead = table . `createTHead`()

  Ensures the table has a `thead` element, and returns it.

table . `deleteTHead`()

  Ensures the table does not have a `thead` element.

table . `tFoot` [ = value ]

  Returns the table's `tfoot` element.

  Can be set, to replace the `tfoot` element. If the new value is not a `tfoot` element, throws a `HierarchyRequestError` exception.

tfoot = table . `createTFoot`()

  Ensures the table has a `tfoot` element, and returns it.

table . `deleteTFoot`()

  Ensures the table does not have a `tfoot` element.

table . `tBodies`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the `tbody` elements of the table.

tbody = table . `createTBody`()

  Creates a `tbody` element, inserts it into the table, and returns it.

table . `rows`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the `tr` elements of the table.

tr = table . `insertRow`( [ index ] )

  Creates a `tr` element, along with a `tbody` if required, inserts them into the table at the position given by the argument, and returns the `tr`.

  The position is relative to the rows in the table. The index −1, which is the default if the argument is omitted, is equivalent to inserting at the end of the table.

  If the given position is less than −1 or greater than the number of rows, throws an `IndexSizeError` exception.

table . `deleteRow`(index)

  Removes the `tr` element with the given position in the table.

  The position is relative to the rows in the table. The index −1 is equivalent to deleting the last row of the table.

  If the given position is less than −1 or greater than the index of the last row, or if there are no rows, throws an `IndexSizeError` exception.

The `caption` IDL attribute must return, on getting, the first `caption` element child of the `table` element, if any, or null otherwise. On setting, the first `caption` element child of the `table` element, if any, must be removed, and the new value, if not null, must be inserted as the first node of the `table` element.

The `createCaption()` method must return the first `caption` element child of the `table` element, if any; otherwise a new `caption` element must be created, inserted as the first node of the `table` element, and then returned.

The `deleteCaption()` method must remove the first `caption` element child of the `table` element, if any.

The `tHead` IDL attribute must return, on getting, the first `thead` element child of the `table` element, if any, or null otherwise. On setting, if the new value is null or a `thead` element, the first `thead` element child of the `table` element, if any, must be removed, and the new value, if not null, must be inserted immediately before the first element in the `table` element that is neither a `caption` element nor a `colgroup` element, if any, or at the end of the table if there are no such elements. If the new value is neither null nor a `thead` element, then a `HierarchyRequestError` DOM exception must be thrown instead.

The `createTHead()` method must return the first `thead` element child of the `table` element, if any; otherwise a new `thead` element must be created and inserted immediately before the first element in the `table` element that is neither a `caption` element nor a `colgroup` element, if any, or at the end of the table if there are no such elements, and then that new element must be returned.

The `deleteTHead()` method must remove the first `thead` element child of the `table` element, if any.

The `tFoot` IDL attribute must return, on getting, the first `tfoot` element child of the `table` element, if any, or null otherwise. On setting, if the new value is null or a `tfoot` element, the first `tfoot` element child of the `table` element, if any, must be removed, and the new value, if not null, must be inserted immediately before the first element in the `table` element that is neither a `caption` element, a `colgroup` element, nor a `thead` element, if any, or at the end of the table if there are no such elements. If the new value is neither null nor a `tfoot` element, then a `HierarchyRequestError` DOM exception must be thrown instead.

The `createTFoot()` method must return the first `tfoot` element child of the `table` element, if any; otherwise a new `tfoot` element must be created and inserted immediately before the first element in the `table` element that is neither a `caption` element, a `colgroup` element, nor a `thead` element, if any, or at the end of the table if there are no such elements, and then that new element must be returned.

The `deleteTFoot()` method must remove the first `tfoot` element child of the `table` element, if any.

The `tBodies` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `table` node, whose filter matches only `tbody` elements that are children of the `table` element.

The `createTBody()` method must create a new `tbody` element, insert it immediately after the last `tbody` element child in the `table` element, if any, or at the end of the `table` element if the `table` element has no `tbody` element children, and then must return the new `tbody` element.

The `rows` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `table` node, whose filter matches only `tr` elements that are either children of the `table` element, or children of `thead`, `tbody`, or `tfoot` elements that are themselves children of the `table` element. The elements in the collection must be ordered such that those elements whose parent is a `thead` are included first, in tree order, followed by those elements whose parent is either a `table` or `tbody` element, again in tree order, followed finally by those elements whose parent is a `tfoot` element, still in tree order.

The behavior of the `insertRow(index)` method depends on the state of the table. When it is called, the method must act as required by the first item in the following list of conditions that describes the state of the table and the index argument:

If index is less than −1 or greater than the number of elements in `rows` collection:
  The method must throw an `IndexSizeError` exception.
If the `rows` collection has zero elements in it, and the `table` has no `tbody` elements in it:
  The method must create a `tbody` element, then create a `tr` element, then append the `tr` element to the `tbody` element, then append the `tbody` element to the `table` element, and finally return the `tr` element.
If the `rows` collection has zero elements in it:
  The method must create a `tr` element, append it to the last `tbody` element in the table, and return the `tr` element.
If index is −1 or equal to the number of items in `rows` collection:
  The method must create a `tr` element, and append it to the parent of the last `tr` element in the `rows` collection. Then, the newly created `tr` element must be returned.
Otherwise:
  The method must create a `tr` element, insert it immediately before the indexth `tr` element in the `rows` collection, in the same parent, and finally must return the newly created `tr` element.

When the `deleteRow(index)` method is called, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If index is equal to −1, then index must be set to the number of items in the `rows` collection, minus one.

2. Now, if index is less than zero, or greater than or equal to the number of elements in the `rows` collection, the method must instead throw an `IndexSizeError` exception, and these steps must be aborted.

3. Otherwise, the method must remove the indexth element in the `rows` collection from its parent.

The `stopSorting()` method is used in the table sorting model.

The IDL attribute `sortable` must reflect the `sortable` content attribute.

Here is an example of a table being used to mark up a Sudoku puzzle. Observe the lack of headers, which are not necessary in such a table.

    <section>
     <style scoped>
      table { border-collapse: collapse; border: solid thick; }
      colgroup, tbody { border: solid medium; }
      td { border: solid thin; height: 1.4em; width: 1.4em; text-align: center; padding: 0; }
     </style>
     <h1>Today's Sudoku</h1>
     <table>
      <colgroup><col><col><col>
      <colgroup><col><col><col>
      <colgroup><col><col><col>
      <tbody>
       <tr> <td> 1 <td>   <td> 3 <td> 6 <td>   <td> 4 <td> 7 <td>   <td> 9
       <tr> <td>   <td> 2 <td>   <td>   <td> 9 <td>   <td>   <td> 1 <td>
       <tr> <td> 7 <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td> 6
      <tbody>
       <tr> <td> 2 <td>   <td> 4 <td>   <td> 3 <td>   <td> 9 <td>   <td> 8
       <tr> <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>
       <tr> <td> 5 <td>   <td>   <td> 9 <td>   <td> 7 <td>   <td>   <td> 1
      <tbody>
       <tr> <td> 6 <td>   <td>   <td>   <td> 5 <td>   <td>   <td>   <td> 2
       <tr> <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>   <td> 7 <td>   <td>   <td>   <td>
       <tr> <td> 9 <td>   <td>   <td> 8 <td>   <td> 2 <td>   <td>   <td> 5
     </table>
    </section>

##### 4.9.1.1 Techniques for describing tables

For tables that consist of more than just a grid of cells with headers in the first row and headers in the first column, and for any table in general where the reader might have difficulty understanding the content, authors should include explanatory information introducing the table. This information is useful for all users, but is especially useful for users who cannot see the table, e.g. users of screen readers.

Such explanatory information should introduce the purpose of the table, outline its basic cell structure, highlight any trends or patterns, and generally teach the user how to use the table.

For instance, the following table:

Characteristics with positive and negative sides
Negative | Characteristic | Positive
--- | --- | ---
Sad | Mood | Happy
Failing | Grade | Passing

...might benefit from a description explaining the way the table is laid out, something like "Characteristics are given in the second column, with the negative side in the left column and the positive side in the right column".

There are a variety of ways to include this information, such as:

In prose, surrounding the table

      <p>In the following table, characteristics are given in the second
      column, with the negative side in the left column and the positive
      side in the right column.</p>
      <table>
       <caption>Characteristics with positive and negative sides</caption>
       <thead>
        <tr>
         <th id="n"> Negative
         <th> Characteristic
         <th> Positive
       <tbody>
        <tr>
         <td headers="n r1"> Sad
         <th id="r1"> Mood
         <td> Happy
        <tr>
         <td headers="n r2"> Failing
         <th id="r2"> Grade
         <td> Passing
      </table>

In the table's `caption`

      <table>
       <caption>
        <strong>Characteristics with positive and negative sides.</strong>
        <p>Characteristics are given in the second column, with the
        negative side in the left column and the positive side in the right
        column.</p>
       </caption>
       <thead>
        <tr>
         <th id="n"> Negative
         <th> Characteristic
         <th> Positive
       <tbody>
        <tr>
         <td headers="n r1"> Sad
         <th id="r1"> Mood
         <td> Happy
        <tr>
         <td headers="n r2"> Failing
         <th id="r2"> Grade
         <td> Passing
      </table>

In the table's `caption`, in a `details` element

      <table>
       <caption>
        <strong>Characteristics with positive and negative sides.</strong>
        <details>
         <summary>Help</summary>
         <p>Characteristics are given in the second column, with the
         negative side in the left column and the positive side in the right
         column.</p>
        </details>
       </caption>
       <thead>
        <tr>
         <th id="n"> Negative
         <th> Characteristic
         <th> Positive
       <tbody>
        <tr>
         <td headers="n r1"> Sad
         <th id="r1"> Mood
         <td> Happy
        <tr>
         <td headers="n r2"> Failing
         <th id="r2"> Grade
         <td> Passing
      </table>

Next to the table, in the same `figure`

      <figure>
       <figcaption>Characteristics with positive and negative sides</figcaption>
       <p>Characteristics are given in the second column, with the
       negative side in the left column and the positive side in the right
       column.</p>
       <table>
        <thead>
         <tr>
          <th id="n"> Negative
          <th> Characteristic
          <th> Positive
        <tbody>
         <tr>
          <td headers="n r1"> Sad
          <th id="r1"> Mood
          <td> Happy
         <tr>
          <td headers="n r2"> Failing
          <th id="r2"> Grade
          <td> Passing
       </table>
      </figure>

Next to the table, in a `figure`'s `figcaption`

      <figure>
       <figcaption>
        <strong>Characteristics with positive and negative sides</strong>
        <p>Characteristics are given in the second column, with the
        negative side in the left column and the positive side in the right
        column.</p>
       </figcaption>
       <table>
        <thead>
         <tr>
          <th id="n"> Negative
          <th> Characteristic
          <th> Positive
        <tbody>
         <tr>
          <td headers="n r1"> Sad
          <th id="r1"> Mood
          <td> Happy
         <tr>
          <td headers="n r2"> Failing
          <th id="r2"> Grade
          <td> Passing
       </table>
      </figure>

Authors may also use other techniques, or combinations of the above techniques, as appropriate.

The best option, of course, rather than writing a description explaining the way the table is laid out, is to adjust the table such that no explanation is needed.

In the case of the table used in the examples above, a simple rearrangement of the table so that the headers are on the top and left sides removes the need for an explanation as well as removing the need for the use of `headers` attributes:

    <table>
     <caption>Characteristics with positive and negative sides</caption>
     <thead>
      <tr>
       <th> Characteristic
       <th> Negative
       <th> Positive
     <tbody>
      <tr>
       <th> Mood
       <td> Sad
       <td> Happy
      <tr>
       <th> Grade
       <td> Failing
       <td> Passing
    </table>

##### 4.9.1.2 Techniques for table design

Good table design is key to making tables more readable and usable.

In visual media, providing column and row borders and alternating row backgrounds can be very effective to make complicated tables more readable.

For tables with large volumes of numeric content, using monospaced fonts can help users see patterns, especially in situations where a user agent does not render the borders. (Unfortunately, for historical reasons, not rendering borders on tables is a common default.)

In speech media, table cells can be distinguished by reporting the corresponding headers before reading the cell's contents, and by allowing users to navigate the table in a grid fashion, rather than serialising the entire contents of the table in source order.

Authors are encouraged to use CSS to achieve these effects.

User agents are encouraged to render tables using these techniques whenever the page does not use CSS and the table is not classified as a layout table.

#### 4.9.2 The `caption` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As the first element child of a `table` element.
Content model:
  Flow content, but with no descendant `table` elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `caption` element's end tag can be omitted if the `caption` element is not immediately followed by a space character or a comment.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTableCaptionElement : HTMLElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `caption` element represents the title of the `table` that is its parent, if it has a parent and that is a `table` element.

The `caption` element takes part in the table model.

When a `table` element is the only content in a `figure` element other than the `figcaption`, the `caption` element should be omitted in favor of the `figcaption`.

A caption can introduce context for a table, making it significantly easier to understand.

Consider, for instance, the following table:

| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6
--- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | ---
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9
4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10
5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11
6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12

In the abstract, this table is not clear. However, with a caption giving the table's number (for reference in the main prose) and explaining its use, it makes more sense:

    <caption>
    <p>Table 1.
    <p>This table shows the total score obtained from rolling two
    six-sided dice. The first row represents the value of the first die,
    the first column the value of the second die. The total is given in
    the cell that corresponds to the values of the two dice.
    </caption>

This provides the user with more context:

Table 1.

This table shows the total score obtained from rolling two six-sided dice. The first row represents the value of the first die, the first column the value of the second die. The total is given in the cell that corresponds to the values of the two dice.

| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6
--- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | ---
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9
4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10
5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11
6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12

#### 4.9.3 The `colgroup` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `table` element, after any `caption` elements and before any `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, and `tr` elements.
Content model:
  If the `span` attribute is present: Nothing.
  If the `span` attribute is absent: Zero or more `col` and `template` elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `colgroup` element's start tag can be omitted if the first thing inside the `colgroup` element is a `col` element, and if the element is not immediately preceded by another `colgroup` element whose end tag has been omitted. (It can't be omitted if the element is empty.)
  A `colgroup` element's end tag can be omitted if the `colgroup` element is not immediately followed by a space character or a comment.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `span` — Number of columns spanned by the element
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTableColElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute unsigned long span;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `colgroup` element represents a group of one or more columns in the `table` that is its parent, if it has a parent and that is a `table` element.

If the `colgroup` element contains no `col` elements, then the element may have a `span` content attribute specified, whose value must be a valid non-negative integer greater than zero.

The `colgroup` element and its `span` attribute take part in the table model.

The `span` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name. The value must be limited to only non-negative numbers greater than zero.

#### 4.9.4 The `col` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `colgroup` element that doesn't have a `span` attribute.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `span` — Number of columns spanned by the element
DOM interface:

  `HTMLTableColElement`, same as for `colgroup` elements. This interface defines one member, `span`.

If a `col` element has a parent and that is a `colgroup` element that itself has a parent that is a `table` element, then the `col` element represents one or more columns in the column group represented by that `colgroup`.

The element may have a `span` content attribute specified, whose value must be a valid non-negative integer greater than zero.

The `col` element and its `span` attribute take part in the table model.

The `span` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name. The value must be limited to only non-negative numbers greater than zero.

#### 4.9.5 The `tbody` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `table` element, after any `caption`, `colgroup`, and `thead` elements, but only if there are no `tr` elements that are children of the `table` element.
Content model:
  Zero or more `tr` and script-supporting elements
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `tbody` element's start tag can be omitted if the first thing inside the `tbody` element is a `tr` element, and if the element is not immediately preceded by a `tbody`, `thead`, or `tfoot` element whose end tag has been omitted. (It can't be omitted if the element is empty.)
  A `tbody` element's end tag can be omitted if the `tbody` element is immediately followed by a `tbody` or `tfoot` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTableSectionElement : HTMLElement {
        readonly attribute HTMLCollection rows;
        HTMLElement insertRow(optional long index = -1);
        void deleteRow(long index);

        // also has obsolete members
      };

  The `HTMLTableSectionElement` interface is also used for `thead` and `tfoot` elements.

The `tbody` element represents a block of rows that consist of a body of data for the parent `table` element, if the `tbody` element has a parent and it is a `table`.

The `tbody` element takes part in the table model.

tbody . `rows`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the `tr` elements of the table section.

tr = tbody . `insertRow`( [ index ] )

  Creates a `tr` element, inserts it into the table section at the position given by the argument, and returns the `tr`.

  The position is relative to the rows in the table section. The index −1, which is the default if the argument is omitted, is equivalent to inserting at the end of the table section.

  If the given position is less than −1 or greater than the number of rows, throws an `IndexSizeError` exception.

tbody . `deleteRow`(index)

  Removes the `tr` element with the given position in the table section.

  The position is relative to the rows in the table section. The index −1 is equivalent to deleting the last row of the table section.

  If the given position is less than −1 or greater than the index of the last row, or if there are no rows, throws an `IndexSizeError` exception.

The `rows` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the element, whose filter matches only `tr` elements that are children of the element.

The `insertRow(index)` method must, when invoked on an element table section, act as follows:

If index is less than −1 or greater than the number of elements in the `rows` collection, the method must throw an `IndexSizeError` exception.

If index is −1 or equal to the number of items in the `rows` collection, the method must create a `tr` element, append it to the element table section, and return the newly created `tr` element.

Otherwise, the method must create a `tr` element, insert it as a child of the table section element, immediately before the indexth `tr` element in the `rows` collection, and finally must return the newly created `tr` element.

The `deleteRow(index)` method must remove the indexth element in the `rows` collection from its parent. If index is less than zero or greater than or equal to the number of elements in the `rows` collection, the method must instead throw an `IndexSizeError` exception.

#### 4.9.6 The `thead` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `table` element, after any `caption`, and `colgroup` elements and before any `tbody`, `tfoot`, and `tr` elements, but only if there are no other `thead` elements that are children of the `table` element.
Content model:
  Zero or more `tr` and script-supporting elements
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `thead` element's end tag can be omitted if the `thead` element is immediately followed by a `tbody` or `tfoot` element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  `HTMLTableSectionElement`, as defined for `tbody` elements.

The `thead` element represents the block of rows that consist of the column labels (headers) for the parent `table` element, if the `thead` element has a parent and it is a `table`.

The `thead` element takes part in the table model.

This example shows a `thead` element being used. Notice the use of both `th` and `td` elements in the `thead` element: the first row is the headers, and the second row is an explanation of how to fill in the table.

    <table>
     <caption> School auction sign-up sheet </caption>
     <thead>
      <tr>
       <th><label for=e1>Name</label>
       <th><label for=e2>Product</label>
       <th><label for=e3>Picture</label>
       <th><label for=e4>Price</label>
      <tr>
       <td>Your name here
       <td>What are you selling?
       <td>Link to a picture
       <td>Your reserve price
     <tbody>
      <tr>
       <td>Ms Danus
       <td>Doughnuts
       <td><img src="http://example.com/mydoughnuts.png" title="Doughnuts from Ms Danus">
       <td>$45
      <tr>
       <td><input id=e1 type=text name=who required form=f>
       <td><input id=e2 type=text name=what required form=f>
       <td><input id=e3 type=url name=pic form=f>
       <td><input id=e4 type=number step=0.01 min=0 value=0 required form=f>
    </table>
    <form id=f action="/auction.cgi">
     <input type=button name=add value="Submit">
    </form>

#### 4.9.7 The `tfoot` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `table` element, after any `caption`, `colgroup`, and `thead` elements and before any `tbody` and `tr` elements, but only if there are no other `tfoot` elements that are children of the `table` element.
  As a child of a `table` element, after any `caption`, `colgroup`, `thead`, `tbody`, and `tr` elements, but only if there are no other `tfoot` elements that are children of the `table` element.
Content model:
  Zero or more `tr` and script-supporting elements
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `tfoot` element's end tag can be omitted if the `tfoot` element is immediately followed by a `tbody` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  `HTMLTableSectionElement`, as defined for `tbody` elements.

The `tfoot` element represents the block of rows that consist of the column summaries (footers) for the parent `table` element, if the `tfoot` element has a parent and it is a `table`.

The `tfoot` element takes part in the table model.

#### 4.9.8 The `tr` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `thead` element.
  As a child of a `tbody` element.
  As a child of a `tfoot` element.
  As a child of a `table` element, after any `caption`, `colgroup`, and `thead` elements, but only if there are no `tbody` elements that are children of the `table` element.
Content model:
  Zero or more `td`, `th`, and script-supporting elements
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `tr` element's end tag can be omitted if the `tr` element is immediately followed by another `tr` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTableRowElement : HTMLElement {
        readonly attribute long rowIndex;
        readonly attribute long sectionRowIndex;
        readonly attribute HTMLCollection cells;
        HTMLElement insertCell(optional long index = -1);
        void deleteCell(long index);

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `tr` element represents a row of cells in a table.

The `tr` element takes part in the table model.

tr . `rowIndex`

  Returns the position of the row in the table's `rows` list.

  Returns −1 if the element isn't in a table.

tr . `sectionRowIndex`

  Returns the position of the row in the table section's `rows` list.

  Returns −1 if the element isn't in a table section.

tr . `cells`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the `td` and `th` elements of the row.

cell = tr . `insertCell`( [ index ] )

  Creates a `td` element, inserts it into the table row at the position given by the argument, and returns the `td`.

  The position is relative to the cells in the row. The index −1, which is the default if the argument is omitted, is equivalent to inserting at the end of the row.

  If the given position is less than −1 or greater than the number of cells, throws an `IndexSizeError` exception.

tr . `deleteCell`(index)

  Removes the `td` or `th` element with the given position in the row.

  The position is relative to the cells in the row. The index −1 is equivalent to deleting the last cell of the row.

  If the given position is less than −1 or greater than the index of the last cell, or if there are no cells, throws an `IndexSizeError` exception.

The `rowIndex` attribute must, if the element has a parent `table` element, or a parent `tbody`, `thead`, or `tfoot` element and a grandparent `table` element, return the index of the `tr` element in that `table` element's `rows` collection. If there is no such `table` element, then the attribute must return −1.

The `sectionRowIndex` attribute must, if the element has a parent `table`, `tbody`, `thead`, or `tfoot` element, return the index of the `tr` element in the parent element's `rows` collection (for tables, that's the `HTMLTableElement.rows` collection; for table sections, that's the `HTMLTableRowElement.rows` collection). If there is no such parent element, then the attribute must return −1.

The `cells` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `tr` element, whose filter matches only `td` and `th` elements that are children of the `tr` element.

The `insertCell(index)` method must act as follows:

If index is less than −1 or greater than the number of elements in the `cells` collection, the method must throw an `IndexSizeError` exception.

If index is equal to −1 or equal to the number of items in `cells` collection, the method must create a `td` element, append it to the `tr` element, and return the newly created `td` element.

Otherwise, the method must create a `td` element, insert it as a child of the `tr` element, immediately before the indexth `td` or `th` element in the `cells` collection, and finally must return the newly created `td` element.

The `deleteCell(index)` method must remove the indexth element in the `cells` collection from its parent. If index is less than zero or greater than or equal to the number of elements in the `cells` collection, the method must instead throw an `IndexSizeError` exception.

#### 4.9.9 The `td` element

Categories:
  Sectioning root.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `tr` element.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `td` element's end tag can be omitted if the `td` element is immediately followed by a `td` or `th` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `colspan` — Number of columns that the cell is to span
  `rowspan` — Number of rows that the cell is to span
  `headers` — The header cells for this cell
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTableDataCellElement : HTMLTableCellElement {
        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `td` element represents a data cell in a table.

The `td` element and its `colspan`, `rowspan`, and `headers` attributes take part in the table model.

User agents, especially in non-visual environments or where displaying the table as a 2D grid is impractical, may give the user context for the cell when rendering the contents of a cell; for instance, giving its position in the table model, or listing the cell's header cells (as determined by the algorithm for assigning header cells). When a cell's header cells are being listed, user agents may use the value of `abbr` attributes on those header cells, if any, instead of the contents of the header cells themselves.

#### 4.9.10 The `th` element

Categories:
  If the `th` element is a sorting interface `th` element: Interactive content.
  Otherwise: None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `tr` element.
Content model:
  Flow content, but with no `header`, `footer`, sectioning content, or heading content descendants, and if the `th` element is a sorting interface `th` element, no interactive content descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  A `th` element's end tag can be omitted if the `th` element is immediately followed by a `td` or `th` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `colspan` — Number of columns that the cell is to span
  `rowspan` — Number of rows that the cell is to span
  `headers` — The header cells for this cell
  `scope` — Specifies which cells the header cell applies to
  `abbr` — Alternative label to use for the header cell when referencing the cell in other contexts
  `sorted` — Column sort direction and ordinality
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTableHeaderCellElement : HTMLTableCellElement {
                 attribute DOMString scope;
                 attribute DOMString abbr;
                 attribute DOMString sorted;
        void sort();
      };

The `th` element represents a header cell in a table.

The `th` element may have a `scope` content attribute specified. The `scope` attribute is an enumerated attribute with five states, four of which have explicit keywords:

The `row` keyword, which maps to the row state
  The row state means the header cell applies to some of the subsequent cells in the same row(s).
The `col` keyword, which maps to the column state
  The column state means the header cell applies to some of the subsequent cells in the same column(s).
The `rowgroup` keyword, which maps to the row group state
  The row group state means the header cell applies to all the remaining cells in the row group. A `th` element's `scope` attribute must not be in the row group state if the element is not anchored in a row group.
The `colgroup` keyword, which maps to the column group state
  The column group state means the header cell applies to all the remaining cells in the column group. A `th` element's `scope` attribute must not be in the column group state if the element is not anchored in a column group.
The auto state
  The auto state makes the header cell apply to a set of cells selected based on context.

The `scope` attribute's missing value default is the auto state.

The `th` element may have an `abbr` content attribute specified. Its value must be an alternative label for the header cell, to be used when referencing the cell in other contexts (e.g. when describing the header cells that apply to a data cell). It is typically an abbreviated form of the full header cell, but can also be an expansion, or merely a different phrasing.

The `sorted` attribute is used in the table sorting model.

The `th` element and its `colspan`, `rowspan`, `headers`, and `scope` attributes take part in the table model.

The `sort()` method is used in the table sorting model.

The `scope` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, limited to only known values.

The `abbr` and `sorted` IDL attributes must reflect the content attributes of the same name.

The following example shows how the `scope` attribute's `rowgroup` value affects which data cells a header cell applies to.

Here is a markup fragment showing a table:

    <table>
     <thead>
      <tr> <th> ID <th> Measurement <th> Average <th> Maximum
     <tbody>
      <tr> <td> <th scope=rowgroup> Cats <td> <td>
      <tr> <td> 93 <th scope=row> Legs <td> 3.5 <td> 4
      <tr> <td> 10 <th scope=row> Tails <td> 1 <td> 1
     <tbody>
      <tr> <td> <th scope=rowgroup> English speakers <td> <td>
      <tr> <td> 32 <th scope=row> Legs <td> 2.67 <td> 4
      <tr> <td> 35 <th scope=row> Tails <td> 0.33 <td> 1
    </table>

This would result in the following table:

ID | Measurement | Average | Maximum
--- | --- | --- | ---
| Cats |  |
93 | Legs | 3.5 | 4
10 | Tails | 1 | 1
| English speakers |  |
32 | Legs | 2.67 | 4
35 | Tails | 0.33 | 1

The headers in the first row all apply directly down to the rows in their column.

The headers with the explicit `scope` attributes apply to all the cells in their row group other than the cells in the first column.

The remaining headers apply just to the cells to the right of them.

#### 4.9.11 Attributes common to `td` and `th` elements

The `td` and `th` elements may have a `colspan` content attribute specified, whose value must be a valid non-negative integer greater than zero.

The `td` and `th` elements may also have a `rowspan` content attribute specified, whose value must be a valid non-negative integer. For this attribute, the value zero means that the cell is to span all the remaining rows in the row group.

These attributes give the number of columns and rows respectively that the cell is to span. These attributes must not be used to overlap cells, as described in the description of the table model.

The `td` and `th` element may have a `headers` content attribute specified. The `headers` attribute, if specified, must contain a string consisting of an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are case-sensitive, each of which must have the value of an ID of a `th` element taking part in the same table as the `td` or `th` element (as defined by the table model).

A `th` element with ID id is said to be directly targeted by all `td` and `th` elements in the same table that have `headers` attributes whose values include as one of their tokens the ID id. A `th` element A is said to be targeted by a `th` or `td` element B if either A is directly targeted by B or if there exists an element C that is itself targeted by the element B and A is directly targeted by C.

A `th` element must not be targeted by itself.

The `colspan`, `rowspan`, and `headers` attributes take part in the table model.

The `td` and `th` elements implement interfaces that inherit from the `HTMLTableCellElement` interface:

    interface HTMLTableCellElement : HTMLElement {
               attribute unsigned long colSpan;
               attribute unsigned long rowSpan;
      [PutForwards=value] readonly attribute DOMSettableTokenList headers;
      readonly attribute long cellIndex;

      // also has obsolete members
    };

cell . `cellIndex`

  Returns the position of the cell in the row's `cells` list. This does not necessarily correspond to the x-position of the cell in the table, since earlier cells might cover multiple rows or columns.

  Returns −1 if the element isn't in a row.

The `colSpan` IDL attribute must reflect the `colspan` content attribute. Its default value is 1.

The `rowSpan` IDL attribute must reflect the `rowspan` content attribute. Its default value is 1.

The `headers` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `cellIndex` IDL attribute must, if the element has a parent `tr` element, return the index of the cell's element in the parent element's `cells` collection. If there is no such parent element, then the attribute must return −1.

#### 4.9.12 Processing model

The various table elements and their content attributes together define the table model.

A table consists of cells aligned on a two-dimensional grid of slots with coordinates (x, y). The grid is finite, and is either empty or has one or more slots. If the grid has one or more slots, then the x coordinates are always in the range 0 ≤ x < xwidth, and the y coordinates are always in the range 0 ≤ y < yheight. If one or both of xwidth and yheight are zero, then the table is empty (has no slots). Tables correspond to `table` elements.

A cell is a set of slots anchored at a slot (cellx, celly), and with a particular width and height such that the cell covers all the slots with coordinates (x, y) where cellx ≤ x < cellx+width and celly ≤ y < celly+height. Cells can either be data cells or header cells. Data cells correspond to `td` elements, and header cells correspond to `th` elements. Cells of both types can have zero or more associated header cells.

It is possible, in certain error cases, for two cells to occupy the same slot.

A row is a complete set of slots from x=0 to x=xwidth-1, for a particular value of y. Rows usually correspond to `tr` elements, though a row group can have some implied rows at the end in some cases involving cells spanning multiple rows.

A column is a complete set of slots from y=0 to y=yheight-1, for a particular value of x. Columns can correspond to `col` elements. In the absence of `col` elements, columns are implied.

A row group is a set of rows anchored at a slot (0, groupy) with a particular height such that the row group covers all the slots with coordinates (x, y) where 0 ≤ x < xwidth and groupy ≤ y < groupy+height. Row groups correspond to `tbody`, `thead`, and `tfoot` elements. Not every row is necessarily in a row group.

A column group is a set of columns anchored at a slot (groupx, 0) with a particular width such that the column group covers all the slots with coordinates (x, y) where groupx ≤ x < groupx+width and 0 ≤ y < yheight. Column groups correspond to `colgroup` elements. Not every column is necessarily in a column group.

Row groups cannot overlap each other. Similarly, column groups cannot overlap each other.

A cell cannot cover slots that are from two or more row groups. It is, however, possible for a cell to be in multiple column groups. All the slots that form part of one cell are part of zero or one row groups and zero or more column groups.

In addition to cells, columns, rows, row groups, and column groups, tables can have a `caption` element associated with them. This gives the table a heading, or legend.

A table model error is an error with the data represented by `table` elements and their descendants. Documents must not have table model errors.

##### 4.9.12.1 Forming a table

To determine which elements correspond to which slots in a table associated with a `table` element, to determine the dimensions of the table (xwidth and yheight), and to determine if there are any table model errors, user agents must use the following algorithm:

1. Let xwidth be zero.

2. Let yheight be zero.

3. Let pending `tfoot` elements be a list of `tfoot` elements, initially empty.

4. Let the table be the table represented by the `table` element. The xwidth and yheight variables give the table's dimensions. The table is initially empty.

5. If the `table` element has no children elements, then return the table (which will be empty), and abort these steps.

6. Associate the first `caption` element child of the `table` element with the table. If there are no such children, then it has no associated `caption` element.

7. Let the current element be the first element child of the `table` element.

   If a step in this algorithm ever requires the current element to be advanced to the next child of the `table` when there is no such next child, then the user agent must jump to the step labeled end, near the end of this algorithm.

8. While the current element is not one of the following elements, advance the current element to the next child of the `table`:

   - `colgroup`
   - `thead`
   - `tbody`
   - `tfoot`
   - `tr`

9. If the current element is a `colgroup`, follow these substeps:

   1. Column groups: Process the current element according to the appropriate case below:

      If the current element has any `col` element children

        Follow these steps:

        1. Let xstart have the value of xwidth.

        2. Let the current column be the first `col` element child of the `colgroup` element.

        3. Columns: If the current column `col` element has a `span` attribute, then parse its value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers.

           If the result of parsing the value is not an error or zero, then let span be that value.

           Otherwise, if the `col` element has no `span` attribute, or if trying to parse the attribute's value resulted in an error or zero, then let span be 1.

        4. Increase xwidth by span.

        5. Let the last span columns in the table correspond to the current column `col` element.

        6. If current column is not the last `col` element child of the `colgroup` element, then let the current column be the next `col` element child of the `colgroup` element, and return to the step labeled columns.

        7. Let all the last columns in the table from x=xstart to x=xwidth-1 form a new column group, anchored at the slot (xstart, 0), with width xwidth-xstart, corresponding to the `colgroup` element.

      If the current element has no `col` element children

        1. If the `colgroup` element has a `span` attribute, then parse its value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers.

           If the result of parsing the value is not an error or zero, then let span be that value.

           Otherwise, if the `colgroup` element has no `span` attribute, or if trying to parse the attribute's value resulted in an error or zero, then let span be 1.

        2. Increase xwidth by span.

        3. Let the last span columns in the table form a new column group, anchored at the slot (xwidth-span, 0), with width span, corresponding to the `colgroup` element.

   2. Advance the current element to the next child of the `table`.

   3. While the current element is not one of the following elements, advance the current element to the next child of the `table`:

      - `colgroup`
      - `thead`
      - `tbody`
      - `tfoot`
      - `tr`

   4. If the current element is a `colgroup` element, jump to the step labeled column groups above.

10. Let ycurrent be zero.

11. Let the list of downward-growing cells be an empty list.

12. Rows: While the current element is not one of the following elements, advance the current element to the next child of the `table`:

    - `thead`
    - `tbody`
    - `tfoot`
    - `tr`

13. If the current element is a `tr`, then run the algorithm for processing rows, advance the current element to the next child of the `table`, and return to the step labeled rows.

14. Run the algorithm for ending a row group.

15. If the current element is a `tfoot`, then add that element to the list of pending `tfoot` elements, advance the current element to the next child of the `table`, and return to the step labeled rows.

16. The current element is either a `thead` or a `tbody`.

    Run the algorithm for processing row groups.

17. Advance the current element to the next child of the `table`.

18. Return to the step labeled rows.

19. End: For each `tfoot` element in the list of pending `tfoot` elements, in tree order, run the algorithm for processing row groups.

20. If there exists a row or column in the table containing only slots that do not have a cell anchored to them, then this is a table model error.

21. Return the table.

The algorithm for processing row groups, which is invoked by the set of steps above for processing `thead`, `tbody`, and `tfoot` elements, is:

1. Let ystart have the value of yheight.

2. For each `tr` element that is a child of the element being processed, in tree order, run the algorithm for processing rows.

3. If yheight > ystart, then let all the last rows in the table from y=ystart to y=yheight-1 form a new row group, anchored at the slot with coordinate (0, ystart), with height yheight-ystart, corresponding to the element being processed.

4. Run the algorithm for ending a row group.

The algorithm for ending a row group, which is invoked by the set of steps above when starting and ending a block of rows, is:

1. While ycurrent is less than yheight, follow these steps:

   1. Run the algorithm for growing downward-growing cells.

   2. Increase ycurrent by 1.

2. Empty the list of downward-growing cells.

The algorithm for processing rows, which is invoked by the set of steps above for processing `tr` elements, is:

1. If yheight is equal to ycurrent, then increase yheight by 1. (ycurrent is never greater than yheight.)

2. Let xcurrent be 0.

3. Run the algorithm for growing downward-growing cells.

4. If the `tr` element being processed has no `td` or `th` element children, then increase ycurrent by 1, abort this set of steps, and return to the algorithm above.

5. Let current cell be the first `td` or `th` element child in the `tr` element being processed.

6. Cells: While xcurrent is less than xwidth and the slot with coordinate (xcurrent, ycurrent) already has a cell assigned to it, increase xcurrent by 1.

7. If xcurrent is equal to xwidth, increase xwidth by 1. (xcurrent is never greater than xwidth.)

8. If the current cell has a `colspan` attribute, then parse that attribute's value, and let colspan be the result.

   If parsing that value failed, or returned zero, or if the attribute is absent, then let colspan be 1, instead.

9. If the current cell has a `rowspan` attribute, then parse that attribute's value, and let rowspan be the result.

   If parsing that value failed or if the attribute is absent, then let rowspan be 1, instead.

10. If rowspan is zero and the `table` element's node document is not set to quirks mode, then let cell grows downward be true, and set rowspan to 1. Otherwise, let cell grows downward be false.

11. If xwidth < xcurrent+colspan, then let xwidth be xcurrent+colspan.

12. If yheight < ycurrent+rowspan, then let yheight be ycurrent+rowspan.

13. Let the slots with coordinates (x, y) such that xcurrent ≤ x < xcurrent+colspan and ycurrent ≤ y < ycurrent+rowspan be covered by a new cell c, anchored at (xcurrent, ycurrent), which has width colspan and height rowspan, corresponding to the current cell element.

    If the current cell element is a `th` element, let this new cell c be a header cell; otherwise, let it be a data cell.

    To establish which header cells apply to the current cell element, use the algorithm for assigning header cells described in the next section.

    If any of the slots involved already had a cell covering them, then this is a table model error. Those slots now have two cells overlapping.

14. If cell grows downward is true, then add the tuple {c, xcurrent, colspan} to the list of downward-growing cells.

15. Increase xcurrent by colspan.

16. If current cell is the last `td` or `th` element child in the `tr` element being processed, then increase ycurrent by 1, abort this set of steps, and return to the algorithm above.

17. Let current cell be the next `td` or `th` element child in the `tr` element being processed.

18. Return to the step labeled cells.

When the algorithms above require the user agent to run the algorithm for growing downward-growing cells, the user agent must, for each {cell, cellx, width} tuple in the list of downward-growing cells, if any, extend the cell cell so that it also covers the slots with coordinates (x, ycurrent), where cellx ≤ x < cellx+width.

##### 4.9.12.2 Forming relationships between data cells and header cells

Each cell can be assigned zero or more header cells. The algorithm for assigning header cells to a cell principal cell is as follows.

1. Let header list be an empty list of cells.

2. Let (principalx, principaly) be the coordinate of the slot to which the principal cell is anchored.

3. If the principal cell has a `headers` attribute specified

     1. Take the value of the principal cell's `headers` attribute and split it on spaces, letting id list be the list of tokens obtained.

     2. For each token in the id list, if the first element in the `Document` with an ID equal to the token is a cell in the same table, and that cell is not the principal cell, then add that cell to header list.

   If principal cell does not have a `headers` attribute specified

     1. Let principalwidth be the width of the principal cell.

     2. Let principalheight be the height of the principal cell.

     3. For each value of y from principaly to principaly+principalheight-1, run the internal algorithm for scanning and assigning header cells, with the principal cell, the header list, the initial coordinate (principalx,y), and the increments Δx=−1 and Δy=0.

     4. For each value of x from principalx to principalx+principalwidth-1, run the internal algorithm for scanning and assigning header cells, with the principal cell, the header list, the initial coordinate (x,principaly), and the increments Δx=0 and Δy=−1.

     5. If the principal cell is anchored in a row group, then add all header cells that are row group headers and are anchored in the same row group with an x-coordinate less than or equal to principalx+principalwidth-1 and a y-coordinate less than or equal to principaly+principalheight-1 to header list.

     6. If the principal cell is anchored in a column group, then add all header cells that are column group headers and are anchored in the same column group with an x-coordinate less than or equal to principalx+principalwidth-1 and a y-coordinate less than or equal to principaly+principalheight-1 to header list.

4. Remove all the empty cells from the header list.

5. Remove any duplicates from the header list.

6. Remove principal cell from the header list if it is there.

7. Assign the headers in the header list to the principal cell.

The internal algorithm for scanning and assigning header cells, given a principal cell, a header list, an initial coordinate (initialx, initialy), and Δx and Δy increments, is as follows:

1. Let x equal initialx.

2. Let y equal initialy.

3. Let opaque headers be an empty list of cells.

4. If principal cell is a header cell

     Let in header block be true, and let headers from current header block be a list of cells containing just the principal cell.

   Otherwise

     Let in header block be false and let headers from current header block be an empty list of cells.

5. Loop: Increment x by Δx; increment y by Δy.

   For each invocation of this algorithm, one of Δx and Δy will be −1, and the other will be 0.

6. If either x or y is less than 0, then abort this internal algorithm.

7. If there is no cell covering slot (x, y), or if there is more than one cell covering slot (x, y), return to the substep labeled loop.

8. Let current cell be the cell covering slot (x, y).

9. If current cell is a header cell

     1. Set in header block to true.

     2. Add current cell to headers from current header block.

     3. Let blocked be false.

     4. If Δx is 0

          If there are any cells in the opaque headers list anchored with the same x-coordinate as the current cell, and with the same width as current cell, then let blocked be true.

          If the current cell is not a column header, then let blocked be true.

        If Δy is 0

          If there are any cells in the opaque headers list anchored with the same y-coordinate as the current cell, and with the same height as current cell, then let blocked be true.

          If the current cell is not a row header, then let blocked be true.

     5. If blocked is false, then add the current cell to the headers list.

   If current cell is a data cell and in header block is true

     Set in header block to false. Add all the cells in headers from current header block to the opaque headers list, and empty the headers from current header block list.

10. Return to the step labeled loop.

A header cell anchored at the slot with coordinate (x, y) with width width and height height is said to be a column header if any of the following conditions are true:

- The cell's `scope` attribute is in the column state, or
- The cell's `scope` attribute is in the auto state, and there are no data cells in any of the cells covering slots with y-coordinates y .. y+height-1.

A header cell anchored at the slot with coordinate (x, y) with width width and height height is said to be a row header if any of the following conditions are true:

- The cell's `scope` attribute is in the row state, or
- The cell's `scope` attribute is in the auto state, the cell is not a column header, and there are no data cells in any of the cells covering slots with x-coordinates x .. x+width-1.

A header cell is said to be a column group header if its `scope` attribute is in the column group state.

A header cell is said to be a row group header if its `scope` attribute is in the row group state.

A cell is said to be an empty cell if it contains no elements and its text content, if any, consists only of White_Space characters.

#### 4.9.13 Table sorting model

The `sortable` attribute on `table` elements is a boolean attribute. When present, it indicates that the user agent is to allow the user to sort the `table`.

To make a column sortable in a `table` with a `thead`, the column needs to have `th` element that does not span multiple columns in a `thead` above any rows that it is to sort.

To make a column sortable in a `table` without a `thead`, the column needs to have `th` element that does not span multiple columns in the first `tr` element of the `table`, where that `tr` element is not in a `tfoot`.

When the user selects a column by which to sort, the user agent sets the `th` element's `sorted` attribute. This attribute can also be set manually, to indicate that the table should be automatically sorted, even when scripts modify the page on when the page is loaded.

The `sorted` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a set of space-separated tokens consisting of optionally a token whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`reversed`", and optionally a token whose value is a valid non-negative integer greater than zero, in either order.

In other words, ignoring spaces and case, the `sorted` attribute's value can be empty, "`reversed`", "`1`", "`reversed 1`", or "`1 reversed`", where "1" is any number equal to or greater than 1.

While one or more `th` elements in the table have a `sorted` attribute, the user agent will keep the table's data rows sorted. The value of the attribute controls how the column is used in determining the sort order. The `reversed` keyword means that the column sort direction is reversed, rather than normal, which is the default if the keyword is omitted. The number, if present, indicates the column key ordinality; if the number is omitted, the column is the primary key, as if the value 1 had been specified.

Thus, `sorted="1"` indicates the table's primary key, `sorted="2"` its secondary key, and so forth.

A sorting-capable `th` element is a `th` element that matches all the following conditions simultaneously:

- It corresponds to a cell whose width is 1. (Specifically, a header cell, since this is a `th` element.)

- There is no cell that corresponds to another sorting-capable `th` element that covers slots in the same column but on a higher (earlier) row.

- If the cell's table has a row group corresponding to a `thead` element, the cell is in a row group that corresponds to the first `thead` element of the cell's table.

  Otherwise: the cell is not in a row group corresponding to a `tfoot` element, and the cell is in the first row of the table.

In other words, each column can have one sorting-capable `th` element; this will be the highest `th` in a `thead` that spans no other columns, or, if there is no `thead`, the `th` in the first row (that is not in a `tfoot`), assuming it spans no columns.

The sorting-capable `th` elements of the `table` element table are the sorting-capable `th` elements whose cell's table is table.

A `table` element table is a sorting-capable `table` element if there are one or more sorting-capable `th` elements of the `table` element table.

A `th` element is a sorting-enabled `th` element if it is a sorting-capable `th` element and it has a `sorted` attribute.

The sorting-enabled `th` elements of the `table` element table are the sorting-enabled `th` elements whose cell's table is table.

A `table` element table is a sorting-enabled `table` element if there are one or more sorting-capable `th` elements of the `table` element table, and at least one of them is a sorting-enabled `th` element (i.e. at least one has a `sorted` attribute).

A `table` element is a `table` element with a user-agent exposed sorting interface if it is a sorting-capable `table` element and has a `sortable` attribute specified.

A sorting interface `th` element is a sorting-capable `th` element whose cell's table is a `table` element with a user-agent exposed sorting interface.

Each `table` element has a currently-sorting flag, which must initially be false.

The `sorted` attribute must not be specified on `th` elements that are not sorting-capable `th` elements. The `sortable` attribute must not be specified on `table` elements that are not sorting-capable `table` elements.

To determine a `th` element's `sorted` attribute's column sort direction and column key ordinality, user agents must use the following algorithm:

1. Let direction be normal.

2. Let have explicit direction be false.

3. Let ordinality be 1.

4. Let have explicit ordinality be false.

5. Let tokens be the result of splitting the attribute's value on spaces.

6. For each token token in tokens, run the appropriate steps from the following list:

   If have explicit direction is false and token is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`reversed`"

     Let direction be reversed and have explicit direction be true.

   If have explicit ordinality is false

     Parse token as an integer. If this resulted in an error or the value zero, then ignore the token. Otherwise, set ordinality to the parsed value, and set have explicit ordinality to true.

   Otherwise

     Ignore the token.

7. The column sort direction is the value of direction, and the column key ordinality is the value of ordinality.

A `table` must not have two `th` elements whose `sorted` attribute have the same column key ordinality.

The table sorting algorithm, which is applied to a `table`, is as follows:

1. Let table be the `table` element being sorted.

2. If table's currently-sorting flag is true, then abort these steps.

3. Set table's currently-sorting flag to true.

4. Fire a simple event named `sort` that is cancelable at table.

5. If the event fired in the previous step was canceled, then jump to the step labeled end below.

6. If table is not now a sorting-enabled `table` element, then jump to the step labeled end below.

   Even if table was a sorting-enabled `table` element when the algorithm was invoked, the DOM might have been entirely changed by the event handlers for the `sort` event, so this has to be verified at this stage, not earlier.

7. Let key heading cells be the sorting-enabled `th` elements of the `table` element table.

8. Sort key heading cells in ascending order of the column key ordinality of their `sorted` attributes, with those having the same column key ordinality being sorted in tree order.

9. Let row collection cursor be a pointer to an element, initially pointing at the first child of table that is after table's first `thead`, if any, and that is either a `tbody` or a `tr` element, assuming there is one. If there is no such child, then jump to the step labeled end below.

10. If table has no row group corresponding to a `thead` element, then set ignore first group to true. Otherwise, set it to false.

11. Row loop: Let rows be an empty list of `tr` elements.

12. Run the appropriate steps from the following list:

    If row collection cursor points to a `tr` element

      1. Collect: Append the element pointed to by row collection cursor to rows.

      2. If there are no `tr` or `tbody` children of table that are later siblings of the element pointed to by row collection cursor, or if the next such child is a `tbody` element, then jump to the step labeled group below.

      3. Let row collection cursor point to the next `tr` child of table that is a later sibling of the element pointed to by row collection cursor.

      4. Return to the step labeled collect above.

    If row collection cursor points to a `tbody` element

      1. Place all the `tr` element children of the element pointed to by row collection cursor into rows, in tree order.

      2. If rows is empty, jump to the step labeled increment loop below.

13. Group: Let groups be an empty list of groups of `tr` elements.

14. Let group be an empty group of `tr` elements.

15. Let group cursor be a pointer to an element, initially pointing at the first `tr` element in rows.

16. Start group: Let pending rows in group be 1.

17. Group loop: Append the `tr` element pointed to by group cursor to group.

18. If there are any cells whose highest row's element is the one pointed to by group cursor, then let tallest height be the number of rows covered by the tallest such cell.

19. If tallest height is greater than pending rows in group then set pending rows in group to tallest height.

20. Decrement pending rows in group by one.

21. Let group cursor point to the next `tr` element in rows, if any; otherwise, let it be null.

22. If group cursor is not null and pending rows in group is not zero, return to the step labeled group loop.

23. Append a new group to groups consisting of the `tr` elements in group.

24. Empty group.

25. If group cursor is not null, then return to the step labeled start group.

26. If ignore first group is true, then drop the first group in groups and set ignore first group to false.

27. Drop leading header groups: If groups is now empty, jump to the step labeled increment loop below.

28. If the first group of groups consists of `tr` elements whose element children are all `th` elements, then drop the first group in groups and return to the previous step (labeled drop leading header groups).

29. Let insertion point be a placeholder in a DOM tree, which can be used to reinsert nodes at a specific point in the DOM. Insert insertion point into the parent of the first `tr` element of the first group in groups, immediately before that `tr` element.

30. Sort the groups in groups, using the following algorithm to decide the relative order of any two groups a and b (the algorithm either returns that a comes before b, or that b comes before a):

    1. Let key index be an index into key heading cells, initially denoting the first element in the list.

    2. Let direction be a sort direction, initially ascending. Its other possible value is descending. When direction is toggled, that means that if its value is ascending, it must be changed to descending, and when its value is descending, it must be changed to ascending.

    3. Column loop: Let th be the key indexth `th` in key heading cells.

    4. If th's `sorted` attribute's column sort direction is reversed, then toggle direction.

    5. Let tentative order be the result of comparing two row groups using the `th` element th, with a and b as the rows.

    6. If tentative order is not "equal", then jump to the step labeled return below.

    7. Increment key index.

    8. If key index still denotes a `th` element in key heading cells, then jump back to the step above labeled column loop.

    9. If a's `tr` elements precede b's in tree order, then let tentative order be "a before b". Otherwise, let tentative order be "b before a".

    10. Return: Return the relative order given by the matching option from the following list:

        If direction is ascending and tentative order is "a before b"
          Return that a comes before b.
        If direction is ascending and tentative order is "b before a"
          Return that b comes before a.
        If direction is descending and tentative order is "a before b"
          Return that b comes before a.
        If direction is descending and tentative order is "b before a"
          Return that a comes before b.

    When the user agent is required to compare two row groups using the `th` element th, with a and b being the two row groups respectively, the user agent must run the following steps:

    1. Let x be the x-coordinate of the slots that `th` covers in its table.

    2. Let cella be the element corresponding to the cell in the first row of group a that covers the slot in that row whose x-coordinate is x.

       Let cellb be the element corresponding to the cell in the first row of group b that covers the slot in that row whose x-coordinate is x.

       In either case, if there's no cell that actually covers the slot, then use the value null instead.

    3. Let typea and valuea be the type and value of the cell cella, as defined below.

       Let typeb and valueb be the type and value of the cell cellb, as defined below.

       The type and value of the cell cell are computed as follows.

       1. If cell is null, then the type is "string" and the value is the empty string; abort these steps.

       2. If, ignoring inter-element whitespace and nodes other than Element and Text nodes, cell has only one child and that child is a `data` element, then the value is the value of that `data` element's `value` attribute, if there is one, or the empty string otherwise; the type is "string".

       3. If, ignoring inter-element whitespace and nodes other than Element and Text nodes, cell has only one child and that child is a `progress` element, then the value is the value of that `progress` element's `value` attribute, if there is one, or the empty string otherwise; the type is "string".

       4. If, ignoring inter-element whitespace and nodes other than Element and Text nodes, cell has only one child and that child is a `meter` element, then the value is the value of that `meter` element's `value` attribute, if there is one, or the empty string otherwise; the type is "string".

       5. If, ignoring inter-element whitespace and nodes other than Element and Text nodes, cell has only one child and that child is a `time` element, then the value is the machine-readable equivalent of the element's contents, if any, and the type is the kind of value that is thus obtained (a month, a date, a yearless date, a time, a local date and time, a time-zone offset, a global date and time, a week, a year, or a duration); abort these steps after completing this one.

          If there is no machine-readable equivalent, then the type is "string" and the value is the empty string.

          If the type is a month, a date, a week, or a year, then change the value to be the instant in time (with no time zone) that describes the earliest moment that the value represents, and change the type to be a local date and time.

          For example, if the cell was `<td><time>2011-11</time>` then for sorting purposes the value is interpreted as "2011-11-01T00:00:00.000" and the type is treated as a local date and time rather than a month.

          Similarly, if the cell was `<td><time datetime="2014">MMXIV</time>` then for sorting purposes the value is interpreted as "2014-01-01T00:00:00.000" and the type is treated as a local date and time rather than a year.

       6. The value is the element's `textContent`. The type is "string".

    4. If typea and typeb are not equal, then: return "a before b" if typea is earlier in the following list than typeb, otherwise, return "b before a"; then, abort these steps.

       1. time
       2. yearless date
       3. local date and time
       4. global date and time
       5. time-zone offset
       6. duration
       7. "string"

    5. If valuea and valueb are equal, then return "equal" and abort these steps.

    6. If typea and typeb are not "string", then: if valuea is earlier than valueb then return "a before b" and abort these steps, otherwise, return "b before a" and abort these steps.

       Values sort in their natural order, with the following additional constraints:

       For time values, 00:00:00.000 is the earliest value and 23:59:59.999 is the latest value.

       For yearless date values, 01-01 is the earliest value and 12-31 is the latest value; 02-28 is earlier than 02-29 which is earlier than 03-01.

       Values that are local date and time compare as if they were in the same time zone.

       For time-zone offset values, -23:59 is the earliest value and +23:59 is the latest value.

    7. Let componentsa be the result of parsing the sort key valuea.

       Let componentsb be the result of parsing the sort key valueb.

       As described below, componentsa and componentsb are tuples consisting of a list of n numbers, a list of n number strings, a list of n+1 non-numeric strings, and a list of 2n+1 raw strings, for any non-negative integer value of n (zero or more).

    8. Let order be the result of a locale-specific string comparison of componentsa's first non-numeric string and componentsb's first non-numeric string, in the context of th.

       If order is not "equal" then return order and abort these steps.

    9. If componentsa and componentsb both have exactly one number, then run these substeps:

       1. If componentsa's number is less than componentsb's number, return "a before b".

          If componentsb's number is less than componentsa's number, return "b before a".

       2. Let order be the result of a locale-specific string comparison of componentsa's second non-numeric string and componentsb's second non-numeric string, in the context of th.

          If order is not "equal" then return order and abort these steps.

       3. Let order be the result of a locale-specific string comparison of componentsa's number string and componentsb's number string, in the context of th.

          If order is not "equal" then return order and abort these steps.

       Otherwise, run these substeps:

       1. If componentsa has zero numbers but componentsb has more than zero numbers, return "a before b".

          If componentsb has zero numbers but componentsa has more than zero numbers, return "b before a".

       2. If componentsa has one number, return "a before b".

          If componentsb has one number, return "b before a".

       3. If componentsa and componentsb have more than one number, run these substeps:

          1. Let count be the smaller of the number of numbers in componentsa and the number of numbers in componentsb.

          2. For each number in componentsa and componentsb from the first to the countth, in order: if componentsa's number is less than componentsb's number, then return "a before b" and abort these steps; otherwise, if componentsb's number is less than componentsa's number, return "b before a" and abort these steps.

          3. If componentsa has fewer numbers than componentsb, return "a before b" and abort these steps.

             If componentsb has fewer numbers than componentsa, return "b before a" and abort these steps.

          4. Let index be zero.

          5. String loop: Let order be the result of a locale-specific string comparison of componentsa's indexth number string and componentsb's indexth number string, in the context of th.

             If order is not "equal" then return order and abort these steps.

          6. Increment index.

          7. Let order be the result of a locale-specific string comparison of componentsa's indexth separator string and componentsb's indexth separator string, in the context of th.

             If order is not "equal" then return order and abort these steps.

          8. If index is less than the number of numbers in componentsa and componentsb, return to the step labeled string loop.

    10. Let index be zero.

    11. Final loop: Let order be the result of a raw string comparison of componentsa's nth raw string and componentsb's nth raw string.

        If order is not "equal" then return order and abort these steps.

    12. Increment index.

    13. If index is less than the number of raw strings in componentsa and componentsb, return to the step labeled final loop.

    14. Return "equal".

31. Let new order be a list of `tr` elements consisting of the `tr` elements of all the groups in the newly ordered groups, with the `tr` elements being in the same order as the groups to which they belong are in groups, and the `tr` elements within each such group themselves being ordered in tree order.

32. Remove all the `tr` elements in new order from their parents, in tree order.

33. Insert all the `tr` elements in new order into the DOM at the location of insertion point, in the order these elements are found in new order.

34. Remove insertion point from the DOM.

35. Increment loop: If there are no `tr` or `tbody` children of table that are later siblings of the element pointed to by row collection cursor, then jump to the step labeled end below.

36. Let row collection cursor point to the next `tr` or `tbody` child of table that is a later sibling of the element pointed to by row collection cursor.

37. Return to the step labeled row loop above.

38. End: Set table's currently-sorting flag to false.

When a user agent is to parse the sort key value, it must run the following steps. These return a tuple consisting of a list of n numbers, a list of n number strings, a list of n+1 non-numeric strings, and a list of 2n+1 raw strings, respectively, for any non-negative integer value of n (zero or more).

1. Let raw strings be a list of strings initially containing just one entry, an empty string.

2. Let negatives prejudiced be false.

   Let decimals prejudiced be false.

   Let exponents prejudiced be false.

3. Let buffer be the empty string.

   Let index be zero.

   Let mode be "separator".

   When a subsequent step in this algorithm says to push the buffer, the user agent must run the following substeps:

   1. Add an entry to raw strings that consists of the value of buffer.

   2. Add an entry to raw strings that is the empty string.

   3. Decrement index by one.

   4. Set mode to "separator".

4. Let checkpoint buffer be the empty string.

   Let checkpoint index be zero.

   When a subsequent step in this algorithm says to checkpoint, the user agent must run the following substeps:

   1. Set the checkpoint buffer to the value of buffer.

   2. Set the checkpoint index to the value of index.

   When a subsequent step in this algorithm says to push the checkpoint, the user agent must run the following substeps:

   1. Add an entry to raw strings that consists of the value of checkpoint buffer.

   2. Add an entry to raw strings that is the empty string.

   3. Decrement index by one.

   4. Set mode to "separator".

5. Run through the following steps repeatedly until the condition in the last step is met.

   1. Top of loop: If index is equal to or greater than the number of characters in value, let c be EOF. Otherwise, let c be the indexth character in value.

   2. Run the appropriate steps from the following list:

      If mode is "separator"

        Run the appropriate substeps from the following list:

        If c is a space character

          Set negatives prejudiced to false.

          Set decimals prejudiced to false.

          Set exponents prejudiced to false.

          Append c to the last entry in raw strings.

        If c is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) and negatives prejudiced is false

          Set buffer to the value of c.

          Set mode to "negative".

        If c is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) and decimals prejudiced is false

          Set buffer to the value of c.

          Set mode to "leading-decimal".

        If c is an ASCII digit

          Set buffer to the value of c.

          Set mode to "integral".

        If c is an uppercase ASCII letter or a lowercase ASCII letter

          Set exponents prejudiced to true.

          Append c to the last entry in raw strings.

        If c is EOF

          Do nothing.

        Otherwise

          Append c to the last entry in raw strings.

      If mode is "negative"

        Run the appropriate substeps from the following list:

        If c is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)

          Set negatives prejudiced to true.

          Append buffer to the last entry in raw strings.

          Append c to the last entry in raw strings.

          Set mode to "separator".

        If c is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) and decimals prejudiced is false

          Append c to buffer.

          Set mode to "leading-decimal".

        If c is an ASCII digit

          Append c to buffer.

          Set mode to "integral".

        Otherwise

          Append buffer to the last entry in raw strings.

          Decrement index by one.

          Set mode to "separator".

      If mode is "integral"

        Run the appropriate substeps from the following list:

        If c is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)

          Set negatives prejudiced to true.

          Push the buffer.

        If c is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) and decimals prejudiced is false

          Checkpoint.

          Append c to buffer.

          Set mode to "decimal".

        If c is an ASCII digit

          Append c to the last entry in raw strings.

        If c is a U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E character or a U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E character and exponents prejudiced is false

          Checkpoint.

          Append c to buffer.

          Set mode to "exponent".

        Otherwise

          Push the buffer.

      If mode is "leading-decimal"

        Run the appropriate substeps from the following list:

        If c is an ASCII digit

          Append c to buffer.

          Set mode to "decimal".

        Otherwise

          Append buffer to the last entry in raw strings.

          Decrement index by one.

          Set mode to "separator".

      If mode is "decimal"

        Run the appropriate substeps from the following list:

        If c is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)

          Set negatives prejudiced to true.

          Push the buffer.

        If c is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) and any of the characters in value past the indexth character are ASCII digits

          Set decimals prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        If c is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) and none of the characters in value past the indexth character are ASCII digits

          Push the buffer.

        If c is an ASCII digit

          Append c to buffer.

        If c is a U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E character or a U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E character and exponents prejudiced is false

          Checkpoint.

          Append c to buffer.

          Set mode to "exponent".

        Otherwise

          Push the buffer.

      If mode is "exponent"

        Run the appropriate substeps from the following list:

        If c is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) and negatives prejudiced is false

          Append c to buffer.

          Set mode to "exponent-negative".

        If c is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.)

          Set decimals prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        If c is an ASCII digit

          Append c to buffer.

          Set mode to "exponent-number".

        If c is a U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E character or a U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E character

          Set exponents prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        Otherwise

          Push the checkpoint.

      If mode is "exponent-negative"

        Run the appropriate substeps from the following list:

        If c is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)

          Set negatives prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        If c is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.)

          Set decimals prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        If c is an ASCII digit

          Append c to buffer.

          Set mode to "exponent-negative-number".

        If c is a U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E character or a U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E character

          Set exponents prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        Otherwise

          Push the checkpoint.

      If mode is "exponent-number"

        Run the appropriate substeps from the following list:

        If c is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)

          Set negatives prejudiced to true.

          Push the buffer.

        If c is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.)

          Set decimals prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        If c is an ASCII digit

          Append c to buffer.

        If c is a U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E character or a U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E character

          Set exponents prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        Otherwise

          Push the buffer.

      If mode is "exponent-negative-number"

        Run the appropriate substeps from the following list:

        If c is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-)

          Set negatives prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        If c is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.)

          Set decimals prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        If c is an ASCII digit

          Append c to buffer.

        If c is a U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E character or a U+0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E character

          Set exponents prejudiced to true.

          Push the checkpoint.

        Otherwise

          Push the buffer.

   3. Increment index by one.

   4. If index is greater than the number of characters in value, stop repeating these substeps and continue along the overall steps. Otherwise, return to the step labeled top of loop.

6. Let numbers be an empty list.

   Let number strings be an empty list.

   Let non-numeric strings be an empty list.

7. For each even-numbered entry in raw strings, in order, starting from the first entry (numbered 0), append an entry to non-numeric strings that consists of the result of trimming and collapsing the value of the entry.

8. If raw strings has more than one entry, then, for each odd-numbered entry in raw strings, in order, starting from the second entry (numbered 1), append an entry to number strings that consists of the value of the entry, and append an entry to number strings that consists of the result of parsing the value of the entry using the rules for parsing floating-point number values.

9. Return numbers, number strings, non-numeric strings, and raw strings respectively.

When the user agent is required by the step above to perform a locale-specific string comparison of two strings a and b in the context of an element e, the user agent must apply the Unicode Collation Algorithm, using the Default Unicode Collation Element Table as customised for the language of the element e in the Common Locale Data Repository, to the strings a and b, ignoring case. If the result of this algorithm places a first, then return "a before b"; if it places b first, then return "b before a"; otherwise, if they compare as equal, then return "equal". [UCA] [CLDR]

When the user agent is required by the step above to perform a raw string comparison of two strings a and b, the user agent must apply the Unicode Collation Algorithm, using the Default Unicode Collation Element Table without customizations, to the strings a and b. If the result of this algorithm places a first, then return "a before b"; if it places b first, then return "b before a"; otherwise, if they compare as equal, then return "equal". [UCA]

Where the steps above refer to trimming and collapsing a string value, it means running the following algorithm:

1. Strip leading and trailing whitespace from value.

2. Replace any sequence of one or more space characters in value with a single U+0020 SPACE character.

When any of the descendants of a sorting-enabled `table` element change in any way (including attributes changing), and when a `table` element becomes a sorting-enabled `table` element, the `table` element is said to become a table with a pending sort. When a `table` element becomes a table with a pending sort, the user agent must queue a microtask that applies the table sorting algorithm to that `table`, and then flags the `table` as no longer being a table with a pending sort.

When the user agent is to set the sort key to a `th` element target, it must run the following algorithm:

1. Let table be the `table` of the table of which target is a header cell.

2. If `th` is a sorting-enabled `th` element whose column key ordinality is 1, then: if its column sort direction is normal, set that element's `sorted` attribute to the string "`reversed`", otherwise, set it to the empty string; then, abort these steps.

3. Let current headers be the sorting-enabled `th` elements of the `table` element table, excluding target.

4. Sort current headers by their `sorted` attributes' column key ordinality, in ascending order, with elements that have the same column key ordinality being sorted in tree order.

5. Let level be 2.

6. For each `th` element th in current headers, in order, run the following substeps:

   1. If th's `sorted` attribute's column sort direction is normal, then set th's `sorted` attribute to a valid integer whose value is level. Otherwise, set it to the concatenation of the string "`reversed`", a U+0020 SPACE character, and a valid integer whose value is level.

   2. Increment level by 1.

7. Set target's `sorted` attribute to the empty string.

The activation behavior of a sorting interface `th` element is to set the sort key to the `th` element.

The `table` will be sorted the next time the user agent performs a microtask checkpoint.

th . `sort`()

  Act as if the user had indicated that this was to be the new primary sort column.

  The `table` won't actually be sorted until the script terminates.

table . `stopSorting`()

  Removes all the `sorted` attributes that are causing the table to automatically sort its contents, if any.

The `th` element's `sort()` method, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the `th` element is not a sorting-capable `th` element, then abort these steps.

2. Set the sort key to the `th` element.

   The `table` will be sorted the next time the user agent performs a microtask checkpoint.

The `table` element's `stopSorting()` method, when invoked, must remove the `sorted` attribute of all the sorting-enabled `th` elements of the table element on which the method was invoked.

#### 4.9.14 Examples

This section is non-normative.

The following shows how might one mark up the bottom part of table 45 of the Smithsonian physical tables, Volume 71:

    <table>
     <caption>Specification values: <b>Steel</b>, <b>Castings</b>,
     Ann. A.S.T.M. A27-16, Class B;* P max. 0.06; S max. 0.05.</caption>
     <thead>
      <tr>
       <th rowspan=2>Grade.</th>
       <th rowspan=2>Yield Point.</th>
       <th colspan=2>Ultimate tensile strength</th>
       <th rowspan=2>Per cent elong. 50.8mm or 2 in.</th>
       <th rowspan=2>Per cent reduct. area.</th>
      </tr>
      <tr>
       <th>kg/mm<sup>2</sup></th>
       <th>lb/in<sup>2</sup></th>
      </tr>
     </thead>
     <tbody>
      <tr>
       <td>Hard</td>
       <td>0.45 ultimate</td>
       <td>56.2</td>
       <td>80,000</td>
       <td>15</td>
       <td>20</td>
      </tr>
      <tr>
       <td>Medium</td>
       <td>0.45 ultimate</td>
       <td>49.2</td>
       <td>70,000</td>
       <td>18</td>
       <td>25</td>
      </tr>
      <tr>
       <td>Soft</td>
       <td>0.45 ultimate</td>
       <td>42.2</td>
       <td>60,000</td>
       <td>22</td>
       <td>30</td>
      </tr>
     </tbody>
    </table>

This table could look like this:

Specification values: Steel, Castings, Ann. A.S.T.M. A27-16, Class B;* P max. 0.06; S max. 0.05.
Grade. | Yield Point. | Ultimate tensile strength | Per cent elong. 50.8 mm or 2 in. | Per cent reduct. area.
--- | --- | --- | --- | ---
kg/mm2 | lb/in2
Hard | 0.45 ultimate | 56.2 | 80,000 | 15 | 20
Medium | 0.45 ultimate | 49.2 | 70,000 | 18 | 25
Soft | 0.45 ultimate | 42.2 | 60,000 | 22 | 30

The following shows how one might mark up the gross margin table on page 46 of Apple, Inc's 10-K filing for fiscal year 2008:

    <table>
     <thead>
      <tr>
       <th>
       <th>2008
       <th>2007
       <th>2006
     <tbody>
      <tr>
       <th>Net sales
       <td>$ 32,479
       <td>$ 24,006
       <td>$ 19,315
      <tr>
       <th>Cost of sales
       <td>  21,334
       <td>  15,852
       <td>  13,717
     <tbody>
      <tr>
       <th>Gross margin
       <td>$ 11,145
       <td>$  8,154
       <td>$  5,598
     <tfoot>
      <tr>
       <th>Gross margin percentage
       <td>34.3%
       <td>34.0%
       <td>29.0%
    </table>

This table could look like this:

| 2008 | 2007 | 2006
--- | --- | --- | ---
Net sales | $ 32,479 | $ 24,006 | $ 19,315
Cost of sales | 21,334 | 15,852 | 13,717
Gross margin | $ 11,145 | $ 8,154 | $ 5,598
Gross margin percentage | 34.3% | 34.0% | 29.0%

The following shows how one might mark up the operating expenses table from lower on the same page of that document:

    <table>
     <colgroup> <col>
     <colgroup> <col> <col> <col>
     <thead>
      <tr> <th> <th>2008 <th>2007 <th>2006
     <tbody>
      <tr> <th scope=rowgroup> Research and development
           <td> $ 1,109 <td> $ 782 <td> $ 712
      <tr> <th scope=row> Percentage of net sales
           <td> 3.4% <td> 3.3% <td> 3.7%
     <tbody>
      <tr> <th scope=rowgroup> Selling, general, and administrative
           <td> $ 3,761 <td> $ 2,963 <td> $ 2,433
      <tr> <th scope=row> Percentage of net sales
           <td> 11.6% <td> 12.3% <td> 12.6%
    </table>

This table could look like this:

| 2008 | 2007 | 2006
--- | --- | --- | ---
Research and development | $ 1,109 | $ 782 | $ 712
Percentage of net sales | 3.4% | 3.3% | 3.7%
Selling, general, and administrative | $ 3,761 | $ 2,963 | $ 2,433
Percentage of net sales | 11.6% | 12.3% | 12.6%

Sometimes, tables are used for dense data. For examples, here a table is used to show entries in an access log:

    <table sortable>
     <thead>
      <tr>
       <th sorted> Timestamp
       <th> IP
       <th> Message
     <tbody>
      <tr>
       <td> <time>21:01</time>
       <td> 128.30.52.199
       <td> Exceeded ingress limit
      <tr>
       <td> <time>21:04</time>
       <td> 128.30.52.3
       <td> Authentication failure
      <tr>
       <td> <time>22:35</time>
       <td> 128.30.52.29
       <td> Malware command request blocked
      <tr>
       <td> <time>22:36</time>
       <td> 128.30.52.3
       <td> Authentication failure
    </table>

Because the `table` element has a `sortable` attribute, the column headers can be selected to change the table's sort order.

This might render as follows:

If the user activates the second column, the table might change as follows:

If the user activates the second column again, reversing the sort order, it might change as follows:

### 4.10 Forms

#### 4.10.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

A form is a component of a Web page that has form controls, such as text fields, buttons, checkboxes, range controls, or colour pickers. A user can interact with such a form, providing data that can then be sent to the server for further processing (e.g. returning the results of a search or calculation). No client-side scripting is needed in many cases, though an API is available so that scripts can augment the user experience or use forms for purposes other than submitting data to a server.

Writing a form consists of several steps, which can be performed in any order: writing the user interface, implementing the server-side processing, and configuring the user interface to communicate with the server.

##### 4.10.1.1 Writing a form's user interface

This section is non-normative.

For the purposes of this brief introduction, we will create a pizza ordering form.

Any form starts with a `form` element, inside which are placed the controls. Most controls are represented by the `input` element, which by default provides a one-line text field. To label a control, the `label` element is used; the label text and the control itself go inside the `label` element. Each part of a form is considered a paragraph, and is typically separated from other parts using `p` elements. Putting this together, here is how one might ask for the customer's name:

    <form>
     <p><label>Customer name: <input></label></p>
    </form>

To let the user select the size of the pizza, we can use a set of radio buttons. Radio buttons also use the `input` element, this time with a `type` attribute with the value `radio`. To make the radio buttons work as a group, they are given a common name using the `name` attribute. To group a batch of controls together, such as, in this case, the radio buttons, one can use the `fieldset` element. The title of such a group of controls is given by the first element in the `fieldset`, which has to be a `legend` element.

    <form>
     <p><label>Customer name: <input></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
    </form>

Changes from the previous step are highlighted.

To pick toppings, we can use checkboxes. These use the `input` element with a `type` attribute with the value `checkbox`:

    <form>
     <p><label>Customer name: <input></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
    </form>

The pizzeria for which this form is being written is always making mistakes, so it needs a way to contact the customer. For this purpose, we can use form controls specifically for telephone numbers (`input` elements with their `type` attribute set to `tel`) and e-mail addresses (`input` elements with their `type` attribute set to `email`):

    <form>
     <p><label>Customer name: <input></label></p>
     <p><label>Telephone: <input type=tel></label></p>
     <p><label>E-mail address: <input type=email></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
    </form>

We can use an `input` element with its `type` attribute set to `time` to ask for a delivery time. Many of these form controls have attributes to control exactly what values can be specified; in this case, three attributes of particular interest are `min`, `max`, and `step`. These set the minimum time, the maximum time, and the interval between allowed values (in seconds). This pizzeria only delivers between 11am and 9pm, and doesn't promise anything better than 15 minute increments, which we can mark up as follows:

    <form>
     <p><label>Customer name: <input></label></p>
     <p><label>Telephone: <input type=tel></label></p>
     <p><label>E-mail address: <input type=email></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <p><label>Preferred delivery time: <input type=time min="11:00" max="21:00" step="900"></label></p>
    </form>

The `textarea` element can be used to provide a free-form text field. In this instance, we are going to use it to provide a space for the customer to give delivery instructions:

    <form>
     <p><label>Customer name: <input></label></p>
     <p><label>Telephone: <input type=tel></label></p>
     <p><label>E-mail address: <input type=email></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <p><label>Preferred delivery time: <input type=time min="11:00" max="21:00" step="900"></label></p>
     <p><label>Delivery instructions: <textarea></textarea></label></p>
    </form>

Finally, to make the form submittable we use the `button` element:

    <form>
     <p><label>Customer name: <input></label></p>
     <p><label>Telephone: <input type=tel></label></p>
     <p><label>E-mail address: <input type=email></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <p><label>Preferred delivery time: <input type=time min="11:00" max="21:00" step="900"></label></p>
     <p><label>Delivery instructions: <textarea></textarea></label></p>
     <p><button>Submit order</button></p>
    </form>

##### 4.10.1.2 Implementing the server-side processing for a form

This section is non-normative.

The exact details for writing a server-side processor are out of scope for this specification. For the purposes of this introduction, we will assume that the script at `https://pizza.example.com/order.cgi` is configured to accept submissions using the `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` format, expecting the following parameters sent in an HTTP POST body:

`custname`
  Customer's name
`custtel`
  Customer's telephone number
`custemail`
  Customer's e-mail address
`size`
  The pizza size, either `small`, `medium`, or `large`
`topping`
  A topping, specified once for each selected topping, with the allowed values being `bacon`, `cheese`, `onion`, and `mushroom`
`delivery`
  The requested delivery time
`comments`
  The delivery instructions

##### 4.10.1.3 Configuring a form to communicate with a server

This section is non-normative.

Form submissions are exposed to servers in a variety of ways, most commonly as HTTP GET or POST requests. To specify the exact method used, the `method` attribute is specified on the `form` element. This doesn't specify how the form data is encoded, though; to specify that, you use the `enctype` attribute. You also have to specify the URL of the service that will handle the submitted data, using the `action` attribute.

For each form control you want submitted, you then have to give a name that will be used to refer to the data in the submission. We already specified the name for the group of radio buttons; the same attribute (`name`) also specifies the submission name. Radio buttons can be distinguished from each other in the submission by giving them different values, using the `value` attribute.

Multiple controls can have the same name; for example, here we give all the checkboxes the same name, and the server distinguishes which checkbox was checked by seeing which values are submitted with that name — like the radio buttons, they are also given unique values with the `value` attribute.

Given the settings in the previous section, this all becomes:

    <form method="post"
          enctype="application/x-www-form-urlencoded"
          action="https://pizza.example.com/order.cgi">
     <p><label>Customer name: <input name="custname"></label></p>
     <p><label>Telephone: <input type=tel name="custtel"></label></p>
     <p><label>E-mail address: <input type=email name="custemail"></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size value="small"> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size value="medium"> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size value="large"> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="bacon"> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="cheese"> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="onion"> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="mushroom"> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <p><label>Preferred delivery time: <input type=time min="11:00" max="21:00" step="900" name="delivery"></label></p>
     <p><label>Delivery instructions: <textarea name="comments"></textarea></label></p>
     <p><button>Submit order</button></p>
    </form>

There is no particular significance to the way some of the attributes have their values quoted and others don't. The HTML syntax allows a variety of equally valid ways to specify attributes, as discussed in the syntax section.

For example, if the customer entered "Denise Lawrence" as their name, "555-321-8642" as their telephone number, did not specify an e-mail address, asked for a medium-sized pizza, selected the Extra Cheese and Mushroom toppings, entered a delivery time of 7pm, and left the delivery instructions text field blank, the user agent would submit the following to the online Web service:

    custname=Denise+Lawrence&custtel=555-321-8642&custemail=&size=medium&topping=cheese&topping=mushroom&delivery=19%3A00&comments=

##### 4.10.1.4 Client-side form validation

This section is non-normative.

Forms can be annotated in such a way that the user agent will check the user's input before the form is submitted. The server still has to verify the input is valid (since hostile users can easily bypass the form validation), but it allows the user to avoid the wait incurred by having the server be the sole checker of the user's input.

The simplest annotation is the `required` attribute, which can be specified on `input` elements to indicate that the form is not to be submitted until a value is given. By adding this attribute to the customer name, pizza size, and delivery time fields, we allow the user agent to notify the user when the user submits the form without filling in those fields:

    <form method="post"
          enctype="application/x-www-form-urlencoded"
          action="https://pizza.example.com/order.cgi">
     <p><label>Customer name: <input name="custname" required></label></p>
     <p><label>Telephone: <input type=tel name="custtel"></label></p>
     <p><label>E-mail address: <input type=email name="custemail"></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="small"> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="medium"> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="large"> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="bacon"> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="cheese"> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="onion"> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="mushroom"> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <p><label>Preferred delivery time: <input type=time min="11:00" max="21:00" step="900" name="delivery" required></label></p>
     <p><label>Delivery instructions: <textarea name="comments"></textarea></label></p>
     <p><button>Submit order</button></p>
    </form>

It is also possible to limit the length of the input, using the `maxlength` attribute. By adding this to the `textarea` element, we can limit users to 1000 characters, preventing them from writing huge essays to the busy delivery drivers instead of staying focused and to the point:

    <form method="post"
          enctype="application/x-www-form-urlencoded"
          action="https://pizza.example.com/order.cgi">
     <p><label>Customer name: <input name="custname" required></label></p>
     <p><label>Telephone: <input type=tel name="custtel"></label></p>
     <p><label>E-mail address: <input type=email name="custemail"></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="small"> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="medium"> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="large"> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="bacon"> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="cheese"> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="onion"> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="mushroom"> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <p><label>Preferred delivery time: <input type=time min="11:00" max="21:00" step="900" name="delivery" required></label></p>
     <p><label>Delivery instructions: <textarea name="comments" maxlength=1000></textarea></label></p>
     <p><button>Submit order</button></p>
    </form>

When a form is submitted, `invalid` events are fired at each form control that is invalid, and then at the `form` element itself. This can be useful for displaying a summary of the problems with the form, since typically the browser itself will only report one problem at a time.

##### 4.10.1.5 Enabling client-side automatic filling of form controls

This section is non-normative.

Some browsers attempt to aid the user by automatically filling form controls rather than having the user reenter their information each time. For example, a field asking for the user's telephone number can be automatically filled with the user's phone number.

To help the user agent with this, the `autocomplete` attribute can be used to describe the field's purpose. In the case of this form, we have three fields that can be usefully annotated in this way: the information about who the pizza is to be delivered to. Adding this information looks like this:

    <form method="post"
          enctype="application/x-www-form-urlencoded"
          action="https://pizza.example.com/order.cgi">
     <p><label>Customer name: <input name="custname" required autocomplete="shipping name"></label></p>
     <p><label>Telephone: <input type=tel name="custtel" autocomplete="shipping tel"></label></p>
     <p><label>E-mail address: <input type=email name="custemail" autocomplete="shipping email"></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="small"> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="medium"> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="large"> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="bacon"> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="cheese"> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="onion"> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="mushroom"> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <p><label>Preferred delivery time: <input type=time min="11:00" max="21:00" step="900" name="delivery" required></label></p>
     <p><label>Delivery instructions: <textarea name="comments" maxlength=1000></textarea></label></p>
     <p><button>Submit order</button></p>
    </form>

##### 4.10.1.6 Improving the user experience on mobile devices

This section is non-normative.

Some devices, in particular those with on-screen keyboards and those in locales with languages with many characters (e.g. Japanese), can provide the user with multiple input modalities. For example, when typing in a credit card number the user may wish to only see keys for digits 0-9, while when typing in their name they may wish to see a form field that by default capitalises each word.

Using the `inputmode` attribute we can select appropriate input modalities:

    <form method="post"
          enctype="application/x-www-form-urlencoded"
          action="https://pizza.example.com/order.cgi">
     <p><label>Customer name: <input name="custname" required autocomplete="shipping name" inputmode="latin-name"></label></p>
     <p><label>Telephone: <input type=tel name="custtel" autocomplete="shipping tel"></label></p>
     <p><label>E-mail address: <input type=email name="custemail" autocomplete="shipping email"></label></p>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Size </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="small"> Small </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="medium"> Medium </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=radio name=size required value="large"> Large </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset>
      <legend> Pizza Toppings </legend>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="bacon"> Bacon </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="cheese"> Extra Cheese </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="onion"> Onion </label></p>
      <p><label> <input type=checkbox name="topping" value="mushroom"> Mushroom </label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <p><label>Preferred delivery time: <input type=time min="11:00" max="21:00" step="900" name="delivery" required></label></p>
     <p><label>Delivery instructions: <textarea name="comments" maxlength=1000 inputmode="latin-prose"></textarea></label></p>
     <p><button>Submit order</button></p>
    </form>

##### 4.10.1.7 The difference between the field type, the autofill field name, and the input modality

This section is non-normative.

The `type`, `autocomplete`, and `inputmode` attributes can seem confusingly similar. For instance, in all three cases, the string "`email`" is a valid value. This section attempts to illustrate the difference between the three attributes and provides advice suggesting how to use them.

The `type` attribute on `input` elements decides what kind of control the user agent will use to expose the field. Choosing between different values of this attribute is the same choice as choosing whether to use an `input` element, a `textarea` element, a `select` element, a `keygen` element, etc.

The `autocomplete` attribute, in contrast, describes what the value that the user will enter actually represents. Choosing between different values of this attribute is the same choice as choosing what the label for the element will be.

First, consider telephone numbers. If a page is asking for a telephone number from the user, the right form control to use is `<input type=tel>`. However, which `autocomplete` value to use depends on which phone number the page is asking for, whether they expect a telephone number in the international format or just the local format, and so forth.

For example, a page that forms part of a checkout process on an e-commerce site for a customer buying a gift to be shipped to a friend might need both the buyer's telephone number (in case of payment issues) and the friend's telephone number (in case of delivery issues). If the site expects international phone numbers (with the country code prefix), this could thus look like this:

    <p><label>Your phone number: <input type=tel name=custtel autocomplete="billing tel"></label>
    <p><label>Recipient's phone number: <input type=tel name=shiptel autocomplete="shipping tel"></label>
    <p>Please enter complete phone numbers including the country code prefix, as in "+1 555 123 4567".

But if the site only supports British customers and recipients, it might instead look like this (notice the use of `tel-national` rather than `tel`):

    <p><label>Your phone number: <input type=tel name=custtel autocomplete="billing tel-national"></label>
    <p><label>Recipient's phone number: <input type=tel name=shiptel autocomplete="shipping tel-national"></label>
    <p>Please enter complete UK phone numbers, as in "(01632) 960 123".

Now, consider a person's preferred languages. The right `autocomplete` value is `language`. However, there could be a number of different form controls used for the purpose: a free text field (`<input type=text>`), a drop-down list (`<select>`), radio buttons (`<input type=radio>`), etc. It only depends on what kind of interface is desired.

The `inputmode` decides what kind of input modality (e.g. keyboard) to use, when the control is a free-form text field.

Consider names. If a page just wants one name from the user, then the relevant control is `<input type=text>`. If the page is asking for the user's full name, then the relevant `autocomplete` value is `name`. But if the user is Japanese, and the page is asking for the user's Japanese name and the user's romanised name, then it would be helpful to the user if the first field defaulted to a Japanese input modality, while the second defaulted to a Latin input modality (ideally with automatic capitalization of each word). This is where the `inputmode` attribute can help:

    <p><label>Japanese name: <input name="j" type="text" autocomplete="section-jp name" inputmode="kana"></label>
    <label>Romanised name: <input name="e" type="text" autocomplete="section-en name" inputmode="latin-name"></label>

In this example, the "`section-*`" keywords in the `autocomplete` attributes' values tell the user agent that the two fields expect different names. Without them, the user agent could automatically fill the second field with the value given in the first field when the user gave a value to the first field.

The "`-jp`" and "`-en`" parts of the keywords are opaque to the user agent; the user agent cannot guess, from those, that the two names are expected to be in Japanese and English respectively.

##### 4.10.1.8 Date, time, and number formats

This section is non-normative.

In this pizza delivery example, the times are specified in the format "HH:MM": two digits for the hour, in 24-hour format, and two digits for the time. (Seconds could also be specified, though they are not necessary in this example.)

In some locales, however, times are often expressed differently when presented to users. For example, in the United States, it is still common to use the 12-hour clock with an am/pm indicator, as in "2pm". In France, it is common to separate the hours from the minutes using an "h" character, as in "14h00".

Similar issues exist with dates, with the added complication that even the order of the components is not always consistent — for example, in Cyprus the first of February 2003 would typically be written "1/2/03", while that same date in Japan would typically be written as "2003年02月01日" — and even with numbers, where locales differ, for example, in what punctuation is used as the decimal separator and the thousands separator.

It is therefore important to distinguish the time, date, and number formats used in HTML and in form submissions, which are always the formats defined in this specification (and based on the well-established ISO 8601 standard for computer-readable date and time formats), from the time, date, and number formats presented to the user by the browser and accepted as input from the user by the browser.

The format used "on the wire", i.e. in HTML markup and in form submissions, is intended to be computer-readable and consistent irrespective of the user's locale. Dates, for instance, are always written in the format "YYYY-MM-DD", as in "2003-02-01". Users are not expected to ever see this format.

The time, date, or number given by the page in the wire format is then translated to the user's preferred presentation (based on user preferences or on the locale of the page itself), before being displayed to the user. Similarly, after the user inputs a time, date, or number using their preferred format, the user agent converts it back to the wire format before putting it in the DOM or submitting it.

This allows scripts in pages and on servers to process times, dates, and numbers in a consistent manner without needing to support dozens of different formats, while still supporting the users' needs.

See also the implementation notes regarding localization of form controls.

#### 4.10.2 Categories

Mostly for historical reasons, elements in this section fall into several overlapping (but subtly different) categories in addition to the usual ones like flow content, phrasing content, and interactive content.

A number of the elements are form-associated elements, which means they can have a form owner.

- `button`
- `fieldset`
- `input`
- `keygen`
- `label`
- `object`
- `output`
- `select`
- `textarea`
- `img`

The form-associated elements fall into several subcategories:

Listed elements

  Denotes elements that are listed in the `form.elements` and `fieldset.elements` APIs.

  - `button`
  - `fieldset`
  - `input`
  - `keygen`
  - `object`
  - `output`
  - `select`
  - `textarea`
Submittable elements

  Denotes elements that can be used for constructing the form data set when a `form` element is submitted.

  - `button`
  - `input`
  - `keygen`
  - `object`
  - `select`
  - `textarea`

  Some submittable elements can be, depending on their attributes, buttons. The prose below defines when an element is a button. Some buttons are specifically submit buttons.

Resettable elements

  Denotes elements that can be affected when a `form` element is reset.

  - `input`
  - `keygen`
  - `output`
  - `select`
  - `textarea`
Reassociateable elements

  Denotes elements that have a `form` content attribute, and a matching `form` IDL attribute, that allow authors to specify an explicit form owner.

  - `button`
  - `fieldset`
  - `input`
  - `keygen`
  - `label`
  - `object`
  - `output`
  - `select`
  - `textarea`

Some elements, not all of them form-associated, are categorised as labelable elements. These are elements that can be associated with a `label` element.

- `button`
- `input` (if the `type` attribute is not in the Hidden state)
- `keygen`
- `meter`
- `output`
- `progress`
- `select`
- `textarea`

#### 4.10.3 The `form` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content, but with no `form` element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `accept-charset` — Character encodings to use for form submission
  `action` — URL to use for form submission
  `autocomplete` — Default setting for autofill feature for controls in the form
  `enctype` — Form data set encoding type to use for form submission
  `method` — HTTP method to use for form submission
  `name` — Name of form to use in the `document.forms` API
  `novalidate` — Bypass form control validation for form submission
  `target` — Browsing context for form submission
DOM interface:

      [OverrideBuiltins]
      interface HTMLFormElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString acceptCharset;
                 attribute DOMString action;
                 attribute DOMString autocomplete;
                 attribute DOMString enctype;
                 attribute DOMString encoding;
                 attribute DOMString method;
                 attribute DOMString name;
                 attribute boolean noValidate;
                 attribute DOMString target;

        readonly attribute HTMLFormControlsCollection elements;
        readonly attribute long length;
        getter Element (unsigned long index);
        getter (RadioNodeList or Element) (DOMString name);

        void submit();
        void reset();
        boolean checkValidity();
        boolean reportValidity();

        void requestAutocomplete();
      };

The `form` element represents a collection of form-associated elements, some of which can represent editable values that can be submitted to a server for processing.

The `accept-charset` attribute gives the character encodings that are to be used for the submission. If specified, the value must be an ordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are ASCII case-insensitive, and each token must be an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the labels of an ASCII-compatible character encoding. [ENCODING]

The `name` attribute represents the `form`'s name within the `forms` collection. The value must not be the empty string, and the value must be unique amongst the `form` elements in the `forms` collection that it is in, if any.

The `autocomplete` attribute is an enumerated attribute. The attribute has two states. The `on` keyword maps to the on state, and the `off` keyword maps to the off state. The attribute may also be omitted. The missing value default is the on state. The off state indicates that by default, form controls in the form will have their autofill field name set to "`off`"; the on state indicates that by default, form controls in the form will have their autofill field name set to "`on`".

The `action`, `enctype`, `method`, `novalidate`, and `target` attributes are attributes for form submission.

form . `elements`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the form controls in the form (excluding image buttons for historical reasons).

form . `length`

  Returns the number of form controls in the form (excluding image buttons for historical reasons).

form[index]

  Returns the indexth element in the form (excluding image buttons for historical reasons).

form[name]

  Returns the form control (or, if there are several, a `RadioNodeList` of the form controls) in the form with the given ID or `name` (excluding image buttons for historical reasons); or, if there are none, returns the `img` element with the given ID.

  Once an element has been referenced using a particular name, that name will continue being available as a way to reference that element in this method, even if the element's actual ID or `name` changes, for as long as the element remains in the `Document`.

  If there are multiple matching items, then a `RadioNodeList` object containing all those elements is returned.

form . `submit`()

  Submits the form.

form . `reset`()

  Resets the form.

form . `checkValidity`()

  Returns true if the form's controls are all valid; otherwise, returns false.

form . `reportValidity`()

  Returns true if the form's controls are all valid; otherwise, returns false and informs the user.

form . `requestAutocomplete`()

  Triggers a user-agent-specific asynchronous user interface to help the user fill in any fields that have an autofill field name other than "`on`" or "`off`".

  The `form` element will subsequently receive an event, either `autocomplete`, indicating that the fields have been prefilled, or `autocompleteerror` (using the `AutocompleteErrorEvent` interface), indicating that there was some problem (the general class of problem is described by the `reason` IDL attribute on the event).

The `autocomplete` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, limited to only known values.

The `requestAutocomplete()` method is part of the autofill mechanism.

The `name` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `acceptCharset` IDL attribute must reflect the `accept-charset` content attribute.

The `elements` IDL attribute must return an `HTMLFormControlsCollection` rooted at the `form` element's home subtree's root element, whose filter matches listed elements whose form owner is the `form` element, with the exception of `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, which must, for historical reasons, be excluded from this particular collection.

The `length` IDL attribute must return the number of nodes represented by the `elements` collection.

The supported property indices at any instant are the indices supported by the object returned by the `elements` attribute at that instant.

When a `form` element is indexed for indexed property retrieval, the user agent must return the value returned by the `item` method on the `elements` collection, when invoked with the given index as its argument.

Each `form` element has a mapping of names to elements called the past names map. It is used to persist names of controls even when they change names.

The supported property names consist of the names obtained from the following algorithm, in the order obtained from this algorithm:

1. Let sourced names be an initially empty ordered list of tuples consisting of a string, an element, a source, where the source is either id, name, or past, and, if the source is past, an age.

2. For each listed element candidate whose form owner is the `form` element, with the exception of any `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, run these substeps:

   1. If candidate has an `id` attribute, add an entry to sourced names with that `id` attribute's value as the string, candidate as the element, and id as the source.

   2. If candidate has a `name` attribute, add an entry to sourced names with that `name` attribute's value as the string, candidate as the element, and name as the source.

3. For each `img` element candidate whose form owner is the `form` element, run these substeps:

   1. If candidate has an `id` attribute, add an entry to sourced names with that `id` attribute's value as the string, candidate as the element, and id as the source.

   2. If candidate has a `name` attribute, add an entry to sourced names with that `name` attribute's value as the string, candidate as the element, and name as the source.

4. For each entry past entry in the past names map add an entry to sourced names with the past entry's name as the string, past entry's element as the element, past as the source, and the length of time past entry has been in the past names map as the age.

5. Sort sourced names by tree order of the element entry of each tuple, sorting entries with the same element by putting entries whose source is id first, then entries whose source is name, and finally entries whose source is past, and sorting entries with the same element and source by their age, oldest first.

6. Remove any entries in sourced names that have the empty string as their name.

7. Remove any entries in sourced names that have the same name as an earlier entry in the map.

8. Return the list of names from sourced names, maintaining their relative order.

The properties exposed in this way must be unenumerable.

When a `form` element is indexed for named property retrieval, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let candidates be a live `RadioNodeList` object containing all the listed elements whose form owner is the `form` element that have either an `id` attribute or a `name` attribute equal to name, with the exception of `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, in tree order.

2. If candidates is empty, let candidates be a live `RadioNodeList` object containing all the `img` elements that are descendants of the `form` element and that have either an `id` attribute or a `name` attribute equal to name, in tree order.

3. If candidates is empty, name is the name of one of the entries in the `form` element's past names map: return the object associated with name in that map.

4. If candidates contains more than one node, return candidates and abort these steps.

5. Otherwise, candidates contains exactly one node. Add a mapping from name to the node in candidates in the `form` element's past names map, replacing the previous entry with the same name, if any.

6. Return the node in candidates.

If an element listed in a `form` element's past names map changes form owner, then its entries must be removed from that map.

The `submit()` method, when invoked, must submit the `form` element from the `form` element itself, with the submitted from `submit()` method flag set.

The `reset()` method, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the `form` element is marked as locked for reset, then abort these steps.

2. Mark the `form` element as locked for reset.

3. Reset the `form` element.

4. Unmark the `form` element as locked for reset.

If the `checkValidity()` method is invoked, the user agent must statically validate the constraints of the `form` element, and return true if the constraint validation return a positive result, and false if it returned a negative result.

If the `reportValidity()` method is invoked, the user agent must interactively validate the constraints of the `form` element, and return true if the constraint validation return a positive result, and false if it returned a negative result.

This example shows two search forms:

    <form action="http://www.google.com/search" method="get">
     <label>Google: <input type="search" name="q"></label> <input type="submit" value="Search...">
    </form>
    <form action="http://www.bing.com/search" method="get">
     <label>Bing: <input type="search" name="q"></label> <input type="submit" value="Search...">
    </form>

#### 4.10.4 The `label` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Interactive content.
  Reassociateable form-associated element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content, but with no descendant labelable elements unless it is the element's labeled control, and no descendant `label` elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `form` — Associates the control with a `form` element
  `for` — Associate the label with form control
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLLabelElement : HTMLElement {
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
                 attribute DOMString htmlFor;
        readonly attribute HTMLElement? control;
      };

The `label` element represents a caption in a user interface. The caption can be associated with a specific form control, known as the `label` element's labeled control, either using the `for` attribute, or by putting the form control inside the `label` element itself.

Except where otherwise specified by the following rules, a `label` element has no labeled control.

The `for` attribute may be specified to indicate a form control with which the caption is to be associated. If the attribute is specified, the attribute's value must be the ID of a labelable element in the same `Document` as the `label` element. If the attribute is specified and there is an element in the `Document` whose ID is equal to the value of the `for` attribute, and the first such element is a labelable element, then that element is the `label` element's labeled control.

If the `for` attribute is not specified, but the `label` element has a labelable element descendant, then the first such descendant in tree order is the `label` element's labeled control.

The `label` element's exact default presentation and behavior, in particular what its activation behavior might be, if anything, should match the platform's label behavior. The activation behavior of a `label` element for events targeted at interactive content descendants of a `label` element, and any descendants of those interactive content descendants, must be to do nothing.

For example, on platforms where clicking a checkbox label checks the checkbox, clicking the `label` in the following snippet could trigger the user agent to run synthetic click activation steps on the `input` element, as if the element itself had been triggered by the user:

    <label><input type=checkbox name=lost> Lost</label>

On other platforms, the behavior might be just to focus the control, or do nothing.

The `form` attribute is used to explicitly associate the `label` element with its form owner.

The following example shows three form controls each with a label, two of which have small text showing the right format for users to use.

    <p><label>Full name: <input name=fn> <small>Format: First Last</small></label></p>
    <p><label>Age: <input name=age type=number min=0></label></p>
    <p><label>Post code: <input name=pc> <small>Format: AB12 3CD</small></label></p>

label . `control`

  Returns the form control that is associated with this element.

The `htmlFor` IDL attribute must reflect the `for` content attribute.

The `control` IDL attribute must return the `label` element's labeled control, if any, or null if there isn't one.

The `form` IDL attribute is part of the element's forms API.

control . `labels`

  Returns a `NodeList` of all the `label` elements that the form control is associated with.

Labelable elements have a `NodeList` object associated with them that represents the list of `label` elements, in tree order, whose labeled control is the element in question. The `labels` IDL attribute of labelable elements, on getting, must return that `NodeList` object.

#### 4.10.5 The `input` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  If the `type` attribute is not in the Hidden state: Interactive content.
  If the `type` attribute is not in the Hidden state: Listed, labelable, submittable, resettable, and reassociateable form-associated element.
  If the `type` attribute is in the Hidden state: Listed, submittable, resettable, and reassociateable form-associated element.
  If the `type` attribute is not in the Hidden state: Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `accept` — Hint for expected file type in file upload controls
  `alt` — Replacement text for use when images are not available
  `autocomplete` — Hint for form autofill feature
  `autofocus` — Automatically focus the form control when the page is loaded
  `checked` — Whether the command or control is checked
  `dirname` — Name of form field to use for sending the element's directionality in form submission
  `disabled` — Whether the form control is disabled
  `form` — Associates the control with a `form` element
  `formaction` — URL to use for form submission
  `formenctype` — Form data set encoding type to use for form submission
  `formmethod` — HTTP method to use for form submission
  `formnovalidate` — Bypass form control validation for form submission
  `formtarget` — Browsing context for form submission
  `height` — Vertical dimension
  `inputmode` — Hint for selecting an input modality
  `list` — List of autocomplete options
  `max` — Maximum value
  `maxlength` — Maximum length of value
  `min` — Minimum value
  `minlength` — Minimum length of value
  `multiple` — Whether to allow multiple values
  `name` — Name of form control to use for form submission and in the `form.elements` API
  `pattern` — Pattern to be matched by the form control's value
  `placeholder` — User-visible label to be placed within the form control
  `readonly` — Whether to allow the value to be edited by the user
  `required` — Whether the control is required for form submission
  `size` — Size of the control
  `src` — Address of the resource
  `step` — Granularity to be matched by the form control's value
  `type` — Type of form control
  `value` — Value of the form control
  `width` — Horizontal dimension
  Also, the `title` attribute has special semantics on this element: Description of pattern (when used with `pattern` attribute).
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLInputElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString accept;
                 attribute DOMString alt;
                 attribute DOMString autocomplete;
                 attribute boolean autofocus;
                 attribute boolean defaultChecked;
                 attribute boolean checked;
                 attribute DOMString dirName;
                 attribute boolean disabled;
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
        readonly attribute FileList? files;
                 attribute DOMString formAction;
                 attribute DOMString formEnctype;
                 attribute DOMString formMethod;
                 attribute boolean formNoValidate;
                 attribute DOMString formTarget;
                 attribute unsigned long height;
                 attribute boolean indeterminate;
                 attribute DOMString inputMode;
        readonly attribute HTMLElement? list;
                 attribute DOMString max;
                 attribute long maxLength;
                 attribute DOMString min;
                 attribute long minLength;
                 attribute boolean multiple;
                 attribute DOMString name;
                 attribute DOMString pattern;
                 attribute DOMString placeholder;
                 attribute boolean readOnly;
                 attribute boolean required;
                 attribute unsigned long size;
                 attribute DOMString src;
                 attribute DOMString step;
                 attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute DOMString defaultValue;
        [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString value;
                 attribute Date? valueAsDate;
                 attribute unrestricted double valueAsNumber;
                 attribute double valueLow;
                 attribute double valueHigh;
                 attribute unsigned long width;

        void stepUp(optional long n = 1);
        void stepDown(optional long n = 1);

        readonly attribute boolean willValidate;
        readonly attribute ValidityState validity;
        readonly attribute DOMString validationMessage;
        boolean checkValidity();
        boolean reportValidity();
        void setCustomValidity(DOMString error);

        readonly attribute NodeList labels;

        void select();
                 attribute unsigned long selectionStart;
                 attribute unsigned long selectionEnd;
                 attribute DOMString selectionDirection;
        void setRangeText(DOMString replacement);
        void setRangeText(DOMString replacement, unsigned long start, unsigned long end, optional SelectionMode selectionMode = "preserve");
        void setSelectionRange(unsigned long start, unsigned long end, optional DOMString direction);

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `input` element represents a typed data field, usually with a form control to allow the user to edit the data.

The `type` attribute controls the data type (and associated control) of the element. It is an enumerated attribute. The following table lists the keywords and states for the attribute — the keywords in the left column map to the states in the cell in the second column on the same row as the keyword.

Keyword | State | Data type | Control type
--- | --- | --- | ---
`hidden` | Hidden | An arbitrary string | n/a
`text` | Text | Text with no line breaks | A text field
`search` | Search | Text with no line breaks | Search field
`tel` | Telephone | Text with no line breaks | A text field
`url` | URL | An absolute URL | A text field
`email` | E-mail | An e-mail address or list of e-mail addresses | A text field
`password` | Password | Text with no line breaks (sensitive information) | A text field that obscures data entry
`datetime` | Date and Time | A date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second, fraction of a second) with the time zone set to UTC | A date and time control
`date` | Date | A date (year, month, day) with no time zone | A date control
`month` | Month | A date consisting of a year and a month with no time zone | A month control
`week` | Week | A date consisting of a week-year number and a week number with no time zone | A week control
`time` | Time | A time (hour, minute, seconds, fractional seconds) with no time zone | A time control
`datetime-local` | Local Date and Time | A date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second, fraction of a second) with no time zone | A date and time control
`number` | Number | A numerical value | A text field or spinner control
`range` | Range | A numerical value, with the extra semantic that the exact value is not important | A slider control or similar
`color` | Colour | An sRGB colour with 8-bit red, green, and blue components | A colour well
`checkbox` | Checkbox | A set of zero or more values from a predefined list | A checkbox
`radio` | Radio Button | An enumerated value | A radio button
`file` | File Upload | Zero or more files each with a MIME type and optionally a file name | A label and a button
`submit` | Submit Button | An enumerated value, with the extra semantic that it must be the last value selected and initiates form submission | A button
`image` | Image Button | A coordinate, relative to a particular image's size, with the extra semantic that it must be the last value selected and initiates form submission | Either a clickable image, or a button
`reset` | Reset Button | n/a | A button
`button` | Button | n/a | A button

The missing value default is the Text state.

Which of the `accept`, `alt`, `autocomplete`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `list`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, `size`, `src`, `step`, and `width` content attributes, the `checked`, `files`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, `valueHigh`, and `list` IDL attributes, the `select()` method, the `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, and `selectionDirection`, IDL attributes, the `setRangeText()` and `setSelectionRange()` methods, the `stepUp()` and `stepDown()` methods, and the `input` and `change` events apply to an `input` element depends on the state of its `type` attribute. The subsections that define each type also clearly define in normative "bookkeeping" sections which of these feature apply, and which do not apply, to each type. The behavior of these features depends on whether they apply or not, as defined in their various sections (q.v. for content attributes, for APIs, for events).

The following table is non-normative and summarizes which of those content attributes, IDL attributes, methods, and events apply to each state:

| Hidden | Text, Search | URL, Telephone | E-mail | Password | Date and Time, Date, Month, Week, Time | Local Date and Time | Number | Range | Colour | Checkbox, Radio Button | File Upload | Submit Button | Image Button | Reset Button, Button
--- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | ---
Content attributes
`accept` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | · | · | ·
`alt` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | ·
`autocomplete` | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | ·
`checked` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | · | · | · | ·
`dirname` | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`formaction` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | ·
`formenctype` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | ·
`formmethod` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | ·
`formnovalidate` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | ·
`formtarget` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | ·
`height` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | ·
`inputmode` | · | Yes | · | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`list` | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | ·
`max` | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`maxlength` | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`min` | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`minlength` | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`multiple` | · | · | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | Yes | · | · | Yes | · | · | ·
`pattern` | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`placeholder` | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`readonly` | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`required` | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | Yes | Yes | · | · | ·
`size` | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`src` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | ·
`step` | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`width` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | ·
IDL attributes and methods
`checked` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | · | · | · | ·
`files` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | · | · | ·
`value` | default | value | value | value | value | value | value | value | value | value | default/on | filename | default | default | default
`valueAsDate` | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`valueAsNumber` | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes* | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`valueLow` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes** | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`valueHigh` | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | Yes** | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`list` | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | ·
`select()` | · | Yes | Yes | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`selectionStart` | · | Yes | Yes | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`selectionEnd` | · | Yes | Yes | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`selectionDirection` | · | Yes | Yes | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`setRangeText()` | · | Yes | Yes | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`setSelectionRange()` | · | Yes | Yes | · | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`stepDown()` | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | ·
`stepUp()` | · | · | · | · | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | · | · | · | ·
Events
`input` event | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | ·
`change` event | · | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | · | · | ·

* If the `multiple` attribute is not specified.

** If the `multiple` attribute is specified.

Some states of the `type` attribute define a value sanitization algorithm.

Each `input` element has a value, which is exposed by the `value` IDL attribute. Some states define an algorithm to convert a string to a number, an algorithm to convert a number to a string, an algorithm to convert a string to a `Date` object, and an algorithm to convert a `Date` object to a string, which are used by `max`, `min`, `step`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, `valueHigh`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()`.

Each `input` element has a boolean dirty value flag. The dirty value flag must be initially set to false when the element is created, and must be set to true whenever the user interacts with the control in a way that changes the value. (It is also set to true when the value is programmatically changed, as described in the definition of the `value` IDL attribute.)

The `value` content attribute gives the default value of the `input` element. When the `value` content attribute is added, set, or removed, if the control's dirty value flag is false, the user agent must set the value of the element to the value of the `value` content attribute, if there is one, or the empty string otherwise, and then run the current value sanitization algorithm, if one is defined.

Each `input` element has a checkedness, which is exposed by the `checked` IDL attribute.

Each `input` element has a boolean dirty checkedness flag. When it is true, the element is said to have a dirty checkedness. The dirty checkedness flag must be initially set to false when the element is created, and must be set to true whenever the user interacts with the control in a way that changes the checkedness.

The `checked` content attribute is a boolean attribute that gives the default checkedness of the `input` element. When the `checked` content attribute is added, if the control does not have dirty checkedness, the user agent must set the checkedness of the element to true; when the `checked` content attribute is removed, if the control does not have dirty checkedness, the user agent must set the checkedness of the element to false.

The reset algorithm for `input` elements is to set the dirty value flag and dirty checkedness flag back to false, set the value of the element to the value of the `value` content attribute, if there is one, or the empty string otherwise, set the checkedness of the element to true if the element has a `checked` content attribute and false if it does not, empty the list of selected files, and then invoke the value sanitization algorithm, if the `type` attribute's current state defines one.

Each `input` element can be mutable. Except where otherwise specified, an `input` element is always mutable. Similarly, except where otherwise specified, the user agent should not allow the user to modify the element's value or checkedness.

When an `input` element is disabled, it is not mutable.

The `readonly` attribute can also in some cases (e.g. for the Date state, but not the Checkbox state) stop an `input` element from being mutable.

The cloning steps for `input` elements must propagate the value, dirty value flag, checkedness, and dirty checkedness flag from the node being cloned to the copy.

When an `input` element is first created, the element's rendering and behavior must be set to the rendering and behavior defined for the `type` attribute's state, and the value sanitization algorithm, if one is defined for the `type` attribute's state, must be invoked.

When an `input` element's `type` attribute changes state, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If the previous state of the element's `type` attribute put the `value` IDL attribute in the value mode, and the element's value is not the empty string, and the new state of the element's `type` attribute puts the `value` IDL attribute in either the default mode or the default/on mode, then set the element's `value` content attribute to the element's value.

2. Otherwise, if the previous state of the element's `type` attribute put the `value` IDL attribute in any mode other than the value mode, and the new state of the element's `type` attribute puts the `value` IDL attribute in the value mode, then set the value of the element to the value of the `value` content attribute, if there is one, or the empty string otherwise, and then set the control's dirty value flag to false.

3. Update the element's rendering and behavior to the new state's.

4. Signal a type change for the element. (The Radio Button state uses this, in particular.)

5. Invoke the value sanitization algorithm, if one is defined for the `type` attribute's new state.

The `name` attribute represents the element's name. The `dirname` attribute controls how the element's directionality is submitted. The `disabled` attribute is used to make the control non-interactive and to prevent its value from being submitted. The `form` attribute is used to explicitly associate the `input` element with its form owner. The `autofocus` attribute controls focus. The `inputmode` attribute controls the user interface's input modality for the control. The `autocomplete` attribute controls how the user agent provides autofill behavior.

The `indeterminate` IDL attribute must initially be set to false. On getting, it must return the last value it was set to. On setting, it must be set to the new value. It has no effect except for changing the appearance of checkbox controls.

The `accept`, `alt`, `max`, `min`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `required`, `size`, `src`, and `step` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name. The `dirName` IDL attribute must reflect the `dirname` content attribute. The `readOnly` IDL attribute must reflect the `readonly` content attribute. The `defaultChecked` IDL attribute must reflect the `checked` content attribute. The `defaultValue` IDL attribute must reflect the `value` content attribute.

The `type` IDL attribute must reflect the respective content attribute of the same name, limited to only known values. The `inputMode` IDL attribute must reflect the `inputmode` content attribute, limited to only known values. The `maxLength` IDL attribute must reflect the `maxlength` content attribute, limited to only non-negative numbers. The `minLength` IDL attribute must reflect the `minlength` content attribute, limited to only non-negative numbers.

The IDL attributes `width` and `height` must return the rendered width and height of the image, in CSS pixels, if an image is being rendered, and is being rendered to a visual medium; or else the intrinsic width and height of the image, in CSS pixels, if an image is available but not being rendered to a visual medium; or else 0, if no image is available. When the `input` element's `type` attribute is not in the Image Button state, then no image is available. [CSS]

On setting, they must act as if they reflected the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `willValidate`, `validity`, and `validationMessage` IDL attributes, and the `checkValidity()`, `reportValidity()`, and `setCustomValidity()` methods, are part of the constraint validation API. The `labels` IDL attribute provides a list of the element's `label`s. The `select()`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods and IDL attributes expose the element's text selection. The `autofocus`, `disabled`, `form`, and `name` IDL attributes are part of the element's forms API.

##### 4.10.5.1 States of the `type` attribute

###### 4.10.5.1.1 Hidden state (`type=hidden`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Hidden state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a value that is not intended to be examined or manipulated by the user.

Constraint validation: If an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Hidden state, it is barred from constraint validation.

If the `name` attribute is present and has a value that is a case-sensitive match for the string "`_charset_`", then the element's `value` attribute must be omitted.

The `autocomplete` content attribute applies to this element.

The `value` IDL attribute applies to this element and is in mode default.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `list`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, `size`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()` methods.

The `input` and `change` events do not apply.

###### 4.10.5.1.2 Text (`type=text`) state and Search state (`type=search`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Text state or the Search state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a one line plain text edit control for the element's value.

The difference between the Text state and the Search state is primarily stylistic: on platforms where search fields are distinguished from regular text fields, the Search state might result in an appearance consistent with the platform's search fields rather than appearing like a regular text field.

If the element is mutable, its value should be editable by the user. User agents must not allow users to insert U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters into the element's value.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the writing direction of the element, setting it either to a left-to-right writing direction or a right-to-left writing direction. If the user does so, the user agent must then run the following steps:

1. Set the element's `dir` attribute to "`ltr`" if the user selected a left-to-right writing direction, and "`rtl`" if the user selected a right-to-left writing direction.

2. Queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `input` element.

The `value` attribute, if specified, must have a value that contains no U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: Strip line breaks from the value.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `dirname`, `inputmode`, `list`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, and `size` content attributes; `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, and `value` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `max`, `min`, `multiple`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.3 Telephone state (`type=tel`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Telephone state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control for editing a telephone number given in the element's value.

If the element is mutable, its value should be editable by the user. User agents may change the spacing and, with care, the punctuation of values that the user enters. User agents must not allow users to insert U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters into the element's value.

The `value` attribute, if specified, must have a value that contains no U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: Strip line breaks from the value.

Unlike the URL and E-mail types, the Telephone type does not enforce a particular syntax. This is intentional; in practice, telephone number fields tend to be free-form fields, because there are a wide variety of valid phone numbers. Systems that need to enforce a particular format are encouraged to use the `pattern` attribute or the `setCustomValidity()` method to hook into the client-side validation mechanism.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, and `size` content attributes; `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, and `value` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `max`, `min`, `multiple`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.4 URL state (`type=url`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the URL state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control for editing a single absolute URL given in the element's value.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the URL represented by its value. User agents may allow the user to set the value to a string that is not a valid absolute URL, but may also or instead automatically escape characters entered by the user so that the value is always a valid absolute URL (even if that isn't the actual value seen and edited by the user in the interface). User agents should allow the user to set the value to the empty string. User agents must not allow users to insert U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters into the value.

The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces that is also an absolute URL.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: Strip line breaks from the value, then strip leading and trailing whitespace from the value.

Constraint validation: While the value of the element is neither the empty string nor a valid absolute URL, the element is suffering from a type mismatch.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, and `size` content attributes; `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, and `value` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `max`, `min`, `multiple`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

If a document contained the following markup:

    <input type="url" name="location" list="urls">
    <datalist id="urls">
     <option label="MIME: Format of Internet Message Bodies" value="http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2045">
     <option label="HTML 4.01 Specification" value="http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/">
     <option label="Form Controls" value="http://www.w3.org/TR/xforms/slice8.html#ui-commonelems-hint">
     <option label="Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) 1.1 Specification" value="http://www.w3.org/TR/SVG/">
     <option label="Feature Sets - SVG 1.1 - 20030114" value="http://www.w3.org/TR/SVG/feature.html">
     <option label="The Single UNIX Specification, Version 3" value="http://www.unix-systems.org/version3/">
    </datalist>

...and the user had typed "`www.w3`", and the user agent had also found that the user had visited `http://www.w3.org/Consortium/#membership` and `http://www.w3.org/TR/XForms/` in the recent past, then the rendering might look like this:

The first four URLs in this sample consist of the four URLs in the author-specified list that match the text the user has entered, sorted in some UA-defined manner (maybe by how frequently the user refers to those URLs). Note how the UA is using the knowledge that the values are URLs to allow the user to omit the scheme part and perform intelligent matching on the domain name.

The last two URLs (and probably many more, given the scrollbar's indications of more values being available) are the matches from the user agent's session history data. This data is not made available to the page DOM. In this particular case, the UA has no titles to provide for those values.

###### 4.10.5.1.5 E-mail state (`type=email`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the E-mail state, the rules in this section apply.

How the E-mail state operates depends on whether the `multiple` attribute is specified or not.

When the `multiple` attribute is not specified on the element

  The `input` element represents a control for editing an e-mail address given in the element's value.

  If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the e-mail address represented by its value. User agents may allow the user to set the value to a string that is not a valid e-mail address. The user agent should act in a manner consistent with expecting the user to provide a single e-mail address. User agents should allow the user to set the value to the empty string. User agents must not allow users to insert U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters into the value. User agents may transform the value for display and editing; in particular, user agents should convert punycode in the value to IDN in the display and vice versa.

  Constraint validation: While the user interface is representing input that the user agent cannot convert to punycode, the control is suffering from bad input.

  The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a single valid e-mail address.

  The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: Strip line breaks from the value, then strip leading and trailing whitespace from the value.

  Constraint validation: While the value of the element is neither the empty string nor a single valid e-mail address, the element is suffering from a type mismatch.

When the `multiple` attribute is specified on the element

  The `input` element represents a control for adding, removing, and editing the e-mail addresses given in the element's values.

  If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to add, remove, and edit the e-mail addresses represented by its values. User agents may allow the user to set any individual value in the list of values to a string that is not a valid e-mail address, but must not allow users to set any individual value to a string containing U+002C COMMA (,), U+000A LINE FEED (LF), or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters. User agents should allow the user to remove all the addresses in the element's values. User agents may transform the values for display and editing; in particular, user agents should convert punycode in the value to IDN in the display and vice versa.

  Constraint validation: While the user interface describes a situation where an individual value contains a U+002C COMMA (,) or is representing input that the user agent cannot convert to punycode, the control is suffering from bad input.

  Whenever the user changes the element's values, the user agent must run the following steps:

  1. Let latest values be a copy of the element's values.

  2. Strip leading and trailing whitespace from each value in latest values.

  3. Let the element's value be the result of concatenating all the values in latest values, separating each value from the next by a single U+002C COMMA character (,), maintaining the list's order.

  The `value` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid e-mail address list.

  The value sanitization algorithm is as follows:

  1. Split on commas the element's value, strip leading and trailing whitespace from each resulting token, if any, and let the element's values be the (possibly empty) resulting list of (possibly empty) tokens, maintaining the original order.

  2. Let the element's value be the result of concatenating the element's values, separating each value from the next by a single U+002C COMMA character (,), maintaining the list's order.

  Constraint validation: While the value of the element is not a valid e-mail address list, the element is suffering from a type mismatch.

When the `multiple` attribute is set or removed, the user agent must run the value sanitization algorithm.

A valid e-mail address is a string that matches the `email` production of the following ABNF, the character set for which is Unicode. This ABNF implements the extensions described in RFC 1123. [ABNF] [RFC5322] [RFC1034] [RFC1123]

    email         = 1*( atext / "." ) "@" label *( "." label )
    label         = let-dig [ [ ldh-str ] let-dig ]  ; limited to a length of 63 characters by RFC 1034 section 3.5
    atext         = < as defined in RFC 5322 section 3.2.3 >
    let-dig       = < as defined in RFC 1034 section 3.5 >
    ldh-str       = < as defined in RFC 1034 section 3.5 >

This requirement is a willful violation of RFC 5322, which defines a syntax for e-mail addresses that is simultaneously too strict (before the "@" character), too vague (after the "@" character), and too lax (allowing comments, whitespace characters, and quoted strings in manners unfamiliar to most users) to be of practical use here.

The following JavaScript- and Perl-compatible regular expression is an implementation of the above definition.

    /^[a-zA-Z0-9.!#$%&'*+/=?^_`{|}~-]+@[a-zA-Z0-9](?:[a-zA-Z0-9-]{0,61}[a-zA-Z0-9])?(?:\.[a-zA-Z0-9](?:[a-zA-Z0-9-]{0,61}[a-zA-Z0-9])?)*$/

A valid e-mail address list is a set of comma-separated tokens, where each token is itself a valid e-mail address. To obtain the list of tokens from a valid e-mail address list, and implementation must split the string on commas.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, and `size` content attributes; `list` and `value` IDL attributes.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `max`, `min`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.6 Password state (`type=password`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Password state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a one line plain text edit control for the element's value. The user agent should obscure the value so that people other than the user cannot see it.

If the element is mutable, its value should be editable by the user. User agents must not allow users to insert U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters into the value.

The `value` attribute, if specified, must have a value that contains no U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: Strip line breaks from the value.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `inputmode`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, and `size` content attributes; `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, and `value` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `list`, `max`, `min`, `multiple`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `list`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.7 Date and Time state (`type=datetime`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Date and Time state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control for setting the element's value to a string representing a specific global date and time. User agents may display the date and time in whatever time zone is appropriate for the user.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the global date and time represented by its value, as obtained by parsing a global date and time from it. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to a non-empty string that is not a valid normalised forced-UTC global date and time string, though user agents may allow the user to set and view the time in another time zone and silently translate the time to and from the UTC time zone in the value. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a global date and time, then the value must be set to a valid normalised forced-UTC global date and time string representing the user's selection. User agents should allow the user to set the value to the empty string.

Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a valid normalised forced-UTC global date and time string, the control is suffering from bad input.

See the introduction section for a discussion of the difference between the input format and submission format for date, time, and number form controls, and the implementation notes regarding localization of form controls.

The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a valid global date and time string.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: If the value of the element is a valid global date and time string, then adjust the time so that the value represents the same point in time but expressed in the UTC time zone as a valid normalized forced-UTC global date and time string, otherwise, set it to the empty string instead.

The `min` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid global date and time string. The `max` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid global date and time string.

The `step` attribute is expressed in seconds. The step scale factor is 1000 (which converts the seconds to milliseconds, as used in the other algorithms). The default step is 60 seconds.

When the element is suffering from a step mismatch, the user agent may round the element's value to the nearest global date and time for which the element would not suffer from a step mismatch.

The algorithm to convert a string to a number, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a global date and time from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return the number of milliseconds elapsed from midnight UTC on the morning of 1970-01-01 (the time represented by the value "`1970-01-01T00:00:00.0Z`") to the parsed global date and time, ignoring leap seconds.

The algorithm to convert a number to a string, given a number input, is as follows: Return a valid normalised forced-UTC global date and time string that represents the global date and time that is input milliseconds after midnight UTC on the morning of 1970-01-01 (the time represented by the value "`1970-01-01T00:00:00.0Z`").

The algorithm to convert a string to a `Date` object, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a global date and time from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return a new `Date` object representing the parsed global date and time, expressed in UTC.

The algorithm to convert a `Date` object to a string, given a `Date` object input, is as follows: Return a valid normalised forced-UTC global date and time string that represents the global date and time that is represented by input.

The Date and Time state (and other date- and time-related states described in subsequent sections) is not intended for the entry of values for which a precise date and time relative to the contemporary calendar cannot be established. For example, it would be inappropriate for the entry of times like "one millisecond after the big bang", "the early part of the Jurassic period", or "a winter around 250 BCE".

For the input of dates before the introduction of the Gregorian calendar, authors are encouraged to not use the Date and Time state (and the other date- and time-related states described in subsequent sections), as user agents are not required to support converting dates and times from earlier periods to the Gregorian calendar, and asking users to do so manually puts an undue burden on users. (This is complicated by the manner in which the Gregorian calendar was phased in, which occurred at different times in different countries, ranging from partway through the 16th century all the way to early in the 20th.) Instead, authors are encouraged to provide fine-grained input controls using the `select` element and `input` elements with the Number state.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `max`, `min`, `readonly`, `required`, and `step` content attributes; `list`, `value`, `valueAsDate`, and `valueAsNumber` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `size`, `src`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

The following fragment shows part of a calendar application. A user can specify a date and time for a meeting (in his local time zone, probably, though the user agent can allow the user to change that), and since the submitted data includes the time-zone offset, the application can ensure that the meeting is shown at the correct time regardless of the time zones used by all the participants.

    <fieldset>
     <legend>Add Meeting</legend>
     <p><label>Meeting name: <input type=text name="meeting.label"></label>
     <p><label>Meeting time: <input type=datetime name="meeting.start"></label>
    </fieldset>

Had the application used the `datetime-local` type instead, the calendar application would have also had to explicitly determine which time zone the user intended.

For events where the precise time is to vary as the user travels (e.g. "celebrate the new year!"), and for recurring events that are to stay at the same time for a specific geographic location even though that location may go in and out of daylight savings time (e.g. "bring the kid to school"), the `datetime-local` type combined with a `select` element (or other similar control) to pick the specific geographic location to which to anchor the time would be more appropriate.

###### 4.10.5.1.8 Date state (`type=date`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Date state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control for setting the element's value to a string representing a specific date.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the date represented by its value, as obtained by parsing a date from it. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to a non-empty string that is not a valid date string. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a date, then the value must be set to a valid date string representing the user's selection. User agents should allow the user to set the value to the empty string.

Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a valid date string, the control is suffering from bad input.

See the introduction section for a discussion of the difference between the input format and submission format for date, time, and number form controls, and the implementation notes regarding localization of form controls.

The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a valid date string.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: If the value of the element is not a valid date string, then set it to the empty string instead.

The `min` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid date string. The `max` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid date string.

The `step` attribute is expressed in days. The step scale factor is 86,400,000 (which converts the days to milliseconds, as used in the other algorithms). The default step is 1 day.

When the element is suffering from a step mismatch, the user agent may round the element's value to the nearest date for which the element would not suffer from a step mismatch.

The algorithm to convert a string to a number, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a date from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return the number of milliseconds elapsed from midnight UTC on the morning of 1970-01-01 (the time represented by the value "`1970-01-01T00:00:00.0Z`") to midnight UTC on the morning of the parsed date, ignoring leap seconds.

The algorithm to convert a number to a string, given a number input, is as follows: Return a valid date string that represents the date that, in UTC, is current input milliseconds after midnight UTC on the morning of 1970-01-01 (the time represented by the value "`1970-01-01T00:00:00.0Z`").

The algorithm to convert a string to a `Date` object, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a date from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return a new `Date` object representing midnight UTC on the morning of the parsed date.

The algorithm to convert a `Date` object to a string, given a `Date` object input, is as follows: Return a valid date string that represents the date current at the time represented by input in the UTC time zone.

See the note on historical dates in the Date and Time state section.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `max`, `min`, `readonly`, `required`, and `step` content attributes; `list`, `value`, `valueAsDate`, and `valueAsNumber` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `size`, `src`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.9 Month state (`type=month`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Month state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control for setting the element's value to a string representing a specific month.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the month represented by its value, as obtained by parsing a month from it. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to a non-empty string that is not a valid month string. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a month, then the value must be set to a valid month string representing the user's selection. User agents should allow the user to set the value to the empty string.

Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a valid month string, the control is suffering from bad input.

See the introduction section for a discussion of the difference between the input format and submission format for date, time, and number form controls, and the implementation notes regarding localization of form controls.

The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a valid month string.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: If the value of the element is not a valid month string, then set it to the empty string instead.

The `min` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid month string. The `max` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid month string.

The `step` attribute is expressed in months. The step scale factor is 1 (there is no conversion needed as the algorithms use months). The default step is 1 month.

When the element is suffering from a step mismatch, the user agent may round the element's value to the nearest month for which the element would not suffer from a step mismatch.

The algorithm to convert a string to a number, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a month from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return the number of months between January 1970 and the parsed month.

The algorithm to convert a number to a string, given a number input, is as follows: Return a valid month string that represents the month that has input months between it and January 1970.

The algorithm to convert a string to a `Date` object, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a month from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return a new `Date` object representing midnight UTC on the morning of the first day of the parsed month.

The algorithm to convert a `Date` object to a string, given a `Date` object input, is as follows: Return a valid month string that represents the month current at the time represented by input in the UTC time zone.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `max`, `min`, `readonly`, `required`, and `step` content attributes; `list`, `value`, `valueAsDate`, and `valueAsNumber` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `size`, `src`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.10 Week state (`type=week`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Week state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control for setting the element's value to a string representing a specific week.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the week represented by its value, as obtained by parsing a week from it. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to a non-empty string that is not a valid week string. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a week, then the value must be set to a valid week string representing the user's selection. User agents should allow the user to set the value to the empty string.

Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a valid week string, the control is suffering from bad input.

See the introduction section for a discussion of the difference between the input format and submission format for date, time, and number form controls, and the implementation notes regarding localization of form controls.

The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a valid week string.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: If the value of the element is not a valid week string, then set it to the empty string instead.

The `min` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid week string. The `max` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid week string.

The `step` attribute is expressed in weeks. The step scale factor is 604,800,000 (which converts the weeks to milliseconds, as used in the other algorithms). The default step is 1 week. The default step base is −259,200,000 (the start of week 1970-W01).

When the element is suffering from a step mismatch, the user agent may round the element's value to the nearest week for which the element would not suffer from a step mismatch.

The algorithm to convert a string to a number, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a week string from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return the number of milliseconds elapsed from midnight UTC on the morning of 1970-01-01 (the time represented by the value "`1970-01-01T00:00:00.0Z`") to midnight UTC on the morning of the Monday of the parsed week, ignoring leap seconds.

The algorithm to convert a number to a string, given a number input, is as follows: Return a valid week string that represents the week that, in UTC, is current input milliseconds after midnight UTC on the morning of 1970-01-01 (the time represented by the value "`1970-01-01T00:00:00.0Z`").

The algorithm to convert a string to a `Date` object, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a week from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return a new `Date` object representing midnight UTC on the morning of the Monday of the parsed week.

The algorithm to convert a `Date` object to a string, given a `Date` object input, is as follows: Return a valid week string that represents the week current at the time represented by input in the UTC time zone.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `max`, `min`, `readonly`, `required`, and `step` content attributes; `list`, `value`, `valueAsDate`, and `valueAsNumber` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `size`, `src`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.11 Time state (`type=time`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Time state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control for setting the element's value to a string representing a specific time.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the time represented by its value, as obtained by parsing a time from it. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to a non-empty string that is not a valid time string. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a time, then the value must be set to a valid time string representing the user's selection. User agents should allow the user to set the value to the empty string.

Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a valid time string, the control is suffering from bad input.

See the introduction section for a discussion of the difference between the input format and submission format for date, time, and number form controls, and the implementation notes regarding localization of form controls.

The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a valid time string.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: If the value of the element is not a valid time string, then set it to the empty string instead.

The form control has a periodic domain.

The `min` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid time string. The `max` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid time string.

The `step` attribute is expressed in seconds. The step scale factor is 1000 (which converts the seconds to milliseconds, as used in the other algorithms). The default step is 60 seconds.

When the element is suffering from a step mismatch, the user agent may round the element's value to the nearest time for which the element would not suffer from a step mismatch.

The algorithm to convert a string to a number, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a time from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return the number of milliseconds elapsed from midnight to the parsed time on a day with no time changes.

The algorithm to convert a number to a string, given a number input, is as follows: Return a valid time string that represents the time that is input milliseconds after midnight on a day with no time changes.

The algorithm to convert a string to a `Date` object, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a time from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return a new `Date` object representing the parsed time in UTC on 1970-01-01.

The algorithm to convert a `Date` object to a string, given a `Date` object input, is as follows: Return a valid time string that represents the UTC time component that is represented by input.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `max`, `min`, `readonly`, `required`, and `step` content attributes; `list`, `value`, `valueAsDate`, and `valueAsNumber` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `size`, `src`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.12 Local Date and Time state (`type=datetime-local`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Local Date and Time state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control for setting the element's value to a string representing a local date and time, with no time-zone offset information.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the date and time represented by its value, as obtained by parsing a date and time from it. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to a non-empty string that is not a valid normalised local date and time string. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a local date and time, then the value must be set to a valid normalised local date and time string representing the user's selection. User agents should allow the user to set the value to the empty string.

Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a valid normalised local date and time string, the control is suffering from bad input.

See the introduction section for a discussion of the difference between the input format and submission format for date, time, and number form controls, and the implementation notes regarding localization of form controls.

The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a valid local date and time string.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: If the value of the element is a valid local date and time string, then set it to a valid normalised local date and time string representing the same date and time; otherwise, set it to the empty string instead.

The `min` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid local date and time string. The `max` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid local date and time string.

The `step` attribute is expressed in seconds. The step scale factor is 1000 (which converts the seconds to milliseconds, as used in the other algorithms). The default step is 60 seconds.

When the element is suffering from a step mismatch, the user agent may round the element's value to the nearest local date and time for which the element would not suffer from a step mismatch.

The algorithm to convert a string to a number, given a string input, is as follows: If parsing a date and time from input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return the number of milliseconds elapsed from midnight on the morning of 1970-01-01 (the time represented by the value "`1970-01-01T00:00:00.0`") to the parsed local date and time, ignoring leap seconds.

The algorithm to convert a number to a string, given a number input, is as follows: Return a valid normalised local date and time string that represents the date and time that is input milliseconds after midnight on the morning of 1970-01-01 (the time represented by the value "`1970-01-01T00:00:00.0`").

See the note on historical dates in the Date and Time state section.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `max`, `min`, `readonly`, `required`, and `step` content attributes; `list`, `value`, and `valueAsNumber` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `size`, `src`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

The following example shows part of a flight booking application. The application uses an `input` element with its `type` attribute set to `datetime-local`, and it then interprets the given date and time in the time zone of the selected airport.

    <fieldset>
     <legend>Destination</legend>
     <p><label>Airport: <input type=text name=to list=airports></label></p>
     <p><label>Departure time: <input type=datetime-local name=totime step=3600></label></p>
    </fieldset>
    <datalist id=airports>
     <option value=ATL label="Atlanta">
     <option value=MEM label="Memphis">
     <option value=LHR label="London Heathrow">
     <option value=LAX label="Los Angeles">
     <option value=FRA label="Frankfurt">
    </datalist>

If the application instead used the `datetime` type, then the user would have to work out the time-zone conversions himself, which is clearly not a good user experience!

###### 4.10.5.1.13 Number state (`type=number`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Number state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control for setting the element's value to a string representing a number.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the number represented by its value, as obtained from applying the rules for parsing floating-point number values to it. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to a non-empty string that is not a valid floating-point number. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a number, then the value must be set to the best representation of the number representing the user's selection as a floating-point number. User agents should allow the user to set the value to the empty string.

Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a valid floating-point number, the control is suffering from bad input.

This specification does not define what user interface user agents are to use; user agent vendors are encouraged to consider what would best serve their users' needs. For example, a user agent in Persian or Arabic markets might support Persian and Arabic numeric input (converting it to the format required for submission as described above). Similarly, a user agent designed for Romans might display the value in Roman numerals rather than in decimal; or (more realistically) a user agent designed for the French market might display the value with apostrophes between thousands and commas before the decimals, and allow the user to enter a value in that manner, internally converting it to the submission format described above.

The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a valid floating-point number.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: If the value of the element is not a valid floating-point number, then set it to the empty string instead.

The `min` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid floating-point number. The `max` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid floating-point number.

The step scale factor is 1. The default step is 1 (allowing only integers to be selected by the user, unless the step base has a non-integer value).

When the element is suffering from a step mismatch, the user agent may round the element's value to the nearest number for which the element would not suffer from a step mismatch. If there are two such numbers, user agents are encouraged to pick the one nearest positive infinity.

The algorithm to convert a string to a number, given a string input, is as follows: If applying the rules for parsing floating-point number values to input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return the resulting number.

The algorithm to convert a number to a string, given a number input, is as follows: Return a valid floating-point number that represents input.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `max`, `min`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, and `step` content attributes; `list`, `value`, and `valueAsNumber` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `size`, `src`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

Here is an example of using a numeric input control:

    <label>How much do you want to charge? $<input type=number min=0 step=0.01 name=price></label>

As described above, a user agent might support numeric input in the user's local format, converting it to the format required for submission as described above. This might include handling grouping separators (as in "872,000,000,000") and various decimal separators (such as "3,99" vs "3.99") or using local digits (such as those in Arabic, Devanagari, Persian, and Thai).

The `type=number` state is not appropriate for input that happens to only consist of numbers but isn't strictly speaking a number. For example, it would be inappropriate for credit card numbers or US postal codes. A simple way of determining whether to use `type=number` is to consider whether it would make sense for the input control to have a spinbox interface (e.g. with "up" and "down" arrows). Getting a credit card number wrong by 1 in the last digit isn't a minor mistake, it's as wrong as getting every digit incorrect. So it would not make sense for the user to select a credit card number using "up" and "down" buttons. When a spinbox interface is not appropriate, `type=text` is probably the right choice (possibly with a `pattern` attribute).

###### 4.10.5.1.14 Range state (`type=range`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Range state, the rules in this section apply.

How the Range state operates depends on whether the `multiple` attribute is specified or not.

When the `multiple` attribute is not specified on the element

  The `input` element represents a control for setting the element's value to a string representing a number, but with the caveat that the exact value is not important, letting UAs provide a simpler interface than they do for the Number state.

  If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the number represented by its value, as obtained from applying the rules for parsing floating-point number values to it. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to a string that is not a valid floating-point number. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a number, then the value must be set to a best representation of the number representing the user's selection as a floating-point number. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to the empty string.

  Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a valid floating-point number, the control is suffering from bad input.

  The `value` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid floating-point number.

  The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: If the value of the element is not a valid floating-point number, then set it to the best representation, as a floating-point number, of the default value.

  The default value is the minimum plus half the difference between the minimum and the maximum, unless the maximum is less than the minimum, in which case the default value is the minimum.

  When the element is suffering from an underflow, the user agent must set the element's value to the best representation, as a floating-point number, of the minimum.

  When the element is suffering from an overflow, if the maximum is not less than the minimum, the user agent must set the element's value to a valid floating-point number that represents the maximum.

  When the element is suffering from a step mismatch, the user agent must round the element's value to the nearest number for which the element would not suffer from a step mismatch, and which is greater than or equal to the minimum, and, if the maximum is not less than the minimum, which is less than or equal to the maximum, if there is a number that matches these constraints. If two numbers match these constraints, then user agents must use the one nearest to positive infinity.

  For example, the markup `<input type="range" min=0 max=100 step=20 value=50>` results in a range control whose initial value is 60.

  Here is an example of a range control using an autocomplete list with the `list` attribute. This could be useful if there are values along the full range of the control that are especially important, such as preconfigured light levels or typical speed limits in a range control used as a speed control. The following markup fragment:

      <input type="range" min="-100" max="100" value="0" step="10" name="power" list="powers">
      <datalist id="powers">
       <option value="0">
       <option value="-30">
       <option value="30">
       <option value="++50">
      </datalist>

  ...with the following style sheet applied:

      input { height: 75px; width: 49px; background: #D5CCBB; color: black; }

  ...might render as:

  Note how the UA determined the orientation of the control from the ratio of the style-sheet-specified height and width properties. The colours were similarly derived from the style sheet. The tick marks, however, were derived from the markup. In particular, the `step` attribute has not affected the placement of tick marks, the UA deciding to only use the author-specified completion values and then adding longer tick marks at the extremes.

  Note also how the invalid value `++50` was completely ignored.

  For another example, consider the following markup fragment:

      <input name=x type=range min=100 max=700 step=9.09090909 value=509.090909>

  A user agent could display in a variety of ways, for instance:

  Or, alternatively, for instance:

  The user agent could pick which one to display based on the dimensions given in the style sheet. This would allow it to maintain the same resolution for the tick marks, despite the differences in width.

  Finally, here is an example of a range control with two labeled values:

      <input type="range" name="a" list="a-values">
      <datalist id="a-values">
       <option value="10" label="Low">
       <option value="90" label="High">
      </datalist>

  With styles that make the control draw vertically, it might look as follows:

When the `multiple` attribute is specified on the element

  The `input` element represents a control for setting the element's values to two strings representing numbers, but with the caveat that the exact values are not important, enabling UAs provide a graphical interface rather than requiring the user to type the numbers directly.

  If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change either the first or second number represented by its values, as obtained from applying the rules for parsing floating-point number values to them, and ensuring that the first value is never larger than the second value. User agents must not allow the user to set either the first or second of the values to a string that is not a valid floating-point number. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a number, then these values must be set to the best representations of the numbers representing the user's selections as floating-point numbers. User agents must not allow the user to set the values to the empty string.

  Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a pair of valid floating-point numbers, the control is suffering from bad input.

  The `value` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a pair of valid floating-point numbers separated by a single U+002C COMMA character (,).

  The value sanitization algorithm is as follows:

  1. Split on commas the element's value.

  2. If there are not exactly two values, or if either value is not a valid floating-point number, then let the element's values be a pair of values consisting of a best representation, as a floating-point number, of the element's minimum and the element's maximum, with the smaller value first.

  3. Othwerwise, let the element's values be the two values, with the smaller value first.

  4. Let the element's value be the result of concatenating the element's values, separating them by a single U+002C COMMA character (,), with the lower value coming first.

  Whenever the user changes the element's values, the user agent must set the element's value to the result of concatenating the element's values, separating them by a single U+002C COMMA character (,), with the lower value coming first.

  When the element is suffering from an underflow, the user agent must set either of the element's values that represent values less than the minimum to the best representation, as a floating-point number, of the minimum.

  When the element is suffering from an overflow, if the maximum is not less than the minimum, the user agent must set either of the element's values that represent values greater than the maximum to a valid floating-point number that represents the maximum.

  When the element is suffering from a step mismatch, the user agent must round the values represented by the element's values to, in each case, the nearest number for which the element would not suffer from a step mismatch, and which is greater than or equal to the minimum, and, if the maximum is not less than the minimum, which is less than or equal to the maximum, if there is a number that matches these constraints. If two numbers match these constraints, then user agents must use the one nearest to positive infinity.

  Whenever the user agent changes the element's values according to the three previous paragraphs, the user agent must set the element's value to the result of concatenating the element's values, separating them by a single U+002C COMMA character (,), with the lower value coming first.

  Consider a user interface that filters possible flights by departure and arrival time:

      <form ...>
       <fieldset>
        <legend>Outbound flight time</legend>
        <select ...>
         <option>Departure
         <option>Arrival
        </select>
        <p><output name=o1>00:00</output> – <output name=o2>24:00</output></p>
        <input type=range multiple min=0 max=24 value=0,24 step=1.0 ...
               oninput="o1.value = valueLow + ':00'; o2.value = valueHigh + ':00'">
       </fieldset>
       ...
      </form>

  With appropriate styling, this might look like:

When the `multiple` attribute is set or removed, the user agent must run the value sanitization algorithm.

In this state, the range and step constraints are enforced even during user input, and there is no way to set the value to the empty string.

The `min` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid floating-point number. The default minimum is 0. The `max` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid floating-point number. The default maximum is 100.

The step scale factor is 1. The default step is 1 (allowing only integers, unless the `min` attribute has a non-integer value).

The algorithm to convert a string to a number, given a string input, is as follows: If applying the rules for parsing floating-point number values to input results in an error, then return an error; otherwise, return the resulting number.

The algorithm to convert a number to a string, given a number input, is as follows: Return the best representation, as a floating-point number, of input.

The following common `input` element content attributes, IDL attributes, and methods apply to the element: `autocomplete`, `list`, `max`, `min`, `multiple`, and `step` content attributes; `list`, `value`, and `valueAsNumber` IDL attributes; `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods.

The following common `input` IDL attribute applies to the element if the `multiple` content attribute is not specified: `valueAsNumber`.

The following common `input` IDL attributes apply to the element if the `multiple` content attribute is specified: `valueLow` and `valueHigh`.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `maxlength`, `minlength`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, `size`, `src`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods.

The following common `input` IDL attributes do not apply to the element if the `multiple` content attribute is not specified: `valueLow` and `valueHigh`.

The following common `input` IDL attribute does not apply to the element if the `multiple` content attribute is specified: `valueAsNumber`.

###### 4.10.5.1.15 Colour state (`type=color`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Colour state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a colour well control, for setting the element's value to a string representing a simple colour.

In this state, there is always a colour picked, and there is no way to set the value to the empty string.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the colour represented by its value, as obtained from applying the rules for parsing simple colour values to it. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to a string that is not a valid lowercase simple colour. If the user agent provides a user interface for selecting a colour, then the value must be set to the result of using the rules for serialising simple colour values to the user's selection. User agents must not allow the user to set the value to the empty string.

Constraint validation: While the user interface describes input that the user agent cannot convert to a valid lowercase simple colour, the control is suffering from bad input.

The `value` attribute, if specified and not empty, must have a value that is a valid simple colour.

The value sanitization algorithm is as follows: If the value of the element is a valid simple colour, then set it to the value of the element converted to ASCII lowercase; otherwise, set it to the string "`#000000`".

The following common `input` element content attributes and IDL attributes apply to the element: `autocomplete` and `list` content attributes; `list` and `value` IDL attributes.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode value.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, `size`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.16 Checkbox state (`type=checkbox`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Checkbox state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a two-state control that represents the element's checkedness state. If the element's checkedness state is true, the control represents a positive selection, and if it is false, a negative selection. If the element's `indeterminate` IDL attribute is set to true, then the control's selection should be obscured as if the control was in a third, indeterminate, state.

The control is never a true tri-state control, even if the element's `indeterminate` IDL attribute is set to true. The `indeterminate` IDL attribute only gives the appearance of a third state.

If the element is mutable, then: The pre-click activation steps consist of setting the element's checkedness to its opposite value (i.e. true if it is false, false if it is true), and of setting the element's `indeterminate` IDL attribute to false. The canceled activation steps consist of setting the checkedness and the element's `indeterminate` IDL attribute back to the values they had before the pre-click activation steps were run. The activation behavior is to fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the element and then fire a simple event that bubbles named `change` at the element.

If the element is not mutable, it has no activation behavior.

Constraint validation: If the element is required and its checkedness is false, then the element is suffering from being missing.

input . `indeterminate` [ = value ]

  When set, overrides the rendering of checkbox controls so that the current value is not visible.

The following common `input` element content attributes and IDL attributes apply to the element: `checked`, and `required` content attributes; `checked` and `value` IDL attributes.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode default/on.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `autocomplete`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `list`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `size`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `files`, `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.17 Radio Button state (`type=radio`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a control that, when used in conjunction with other `input` elements, forms a radio button group in which only one control can have its checkedness state set to true. If the element's checkedness state is true, the control represents the selected control in the group, and if it is false, it indicates a control in the group that is not selected.

The radio button group that contains an `input` element a also contains all the other `input` elements b that fulfill all of the following conditions:

- The `input` element b's `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state.
- Either a and b have the same form owner, or they both have no form owner.
- Both a and b are in the same home subtree.
- They both have a `name` attribute, their `name` attributes are not empty, and the value of a's `name` attribute is a compatibility caseless match for the value of b's `name` attribute.

A document must not contain an `input` element whose radio button group contains only that element.

When any of the following phenomena occur, if the element's checkedness state is true after the occurrence, the checkedness state of all the other elements in the same radio button group must be set to false:

- The element's checkedness state is set to true (for whatever reason).
- The element's `name` attribute is set, changed, or removed.
- The element's form owner changes.
- A type change is signalled for the element.

If the element R is mutable, then: The pre-click activation steps for R consist of getting a reference to the element in R's radio button group that has its checkedness set to true, if any, and then setting R's checkedness to true. The canceled activation steps for R consist of checking if the element to which a reference was obtained in the pre-click activation steps, if any, is still in what is now R's radio button group, if it still has one, and if so, setting that element's checkedness to true; or else, if there was no such element, or that element is no longer in R's radio button group, or if R no longer has a radio button group, setting R's checkedness to false. The activation behavior for R is to fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at R and then fire a simple event that bubbles named `change` at R.

If the element is not mutable, it has no activation behavior.

Constraint validation: If an element in the radio button group is required, and all of the `input` elements in the radio button group have a checkedness that is false, then the element is suffering from being missing.

If none of the radio buttons in a radio button group are checked when they are inserted into the document, then they will all be initially unchecked in the interface, until such time as one of them is checked (either by the user or by script).

The following common `input` element content attributes and IDL attributes apply to the element: `checked` and `required` content attributes; `checked` and `value` IDL attributes.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode default/on.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `autocomplete`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `list`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `size`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `files`, `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.18 File Upload state (`type=file`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the File Upload state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a list of selected files, each file consisting of a file name, a file type, and a file body (the contents of the file).

File names must not contain path components, even in the case that a user has selected an entire directory hierarchy or multiple files with the same name from different directories. Path components, for the purposes of the File Upload state, are those parts of file names that are separated by U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) characters.

Unless the `multiple` attribute is set, there must be no more than one file in the list of selected files.

If the element is mutable, then the element's activation behavior is to run the following steps:

1. If the algorithm is not allowed to show a popup, then abort these steps without doing anything else.

2. Return, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

3. Optionally, wait until any prior execution of this algorithm has terminated.

4. Display a prompt to the user requesting that the user specify some files. If the `multiple` attribute is not set, there must be no more than one file selected; otherwise, any number may be selected. Files can be from the filesystem or created on the fly, e.g. a picture taken from a camera connected to the user's device.

5. Wait for the user to have made their selection.

6. Queue a task to first update the element's selected files so that it represents the user's selection, then fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `input` element, and finally fire a simple event that bubbles named `change` at the `input` element.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the files on the list in other ways also, e.g. adding or removing files by drag-and-drop. When the user does so, the user agent must queue a task to first update the element's selected files so that it represents the user's new selection, then fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `input` element, and finally fire a simple event that bubbles named `change` at the `input` element.

If the element is not mutable, it has no activation behavior and the user agent must not allow the user to change the element's selection.

Constraint validation: If the element is required and the list of selected files is empty, then the element is suffering from being missing.

The `accept` attribute may be specified to provide user agents with a hint of what file types will be accepted.

If specified, the attribute must consist of a set of comma-separated tokens, each of which must be an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the following:

The string "`audio/*`"
  Indicates that sound files are accepted.
The string "`video/*`"
  Indicates that video files are accepted.
The string "`image/*`"
  Indicates that image files are accepted.
A valid MIME type with no parameters
  Indicates that files of the specified type are accepted.
A string whose first character is a U+002E FULL STOP character (.)
  Indicates that files with the specified file extension are accepted.

The tokens must not be ASCII case-insensitive matches for any of the other tokens (i.e. duplicates are not allowed). To obtain the list of tokens from the attribute, the user agent must split the attribute value on commas.

User agents may use the value of this attribute to display a more appropriate user interface than a generic file picker. For instance, given the value `image/*`, a user agent could offer the user the option of using a local camera or selecting a photograph from their photo collection; given the value `audio/*`, a user agent could offer the user the option of recording a clip using a headset microphone.

User agents should prevent the user from selecting files that are not accepted by one (or more) of these tokens.

Authors are encouraged to specify both any MIME types and any corresponding extensions when looking for data in a specific format.

For example, consider an application that converts Microsoft Word documents to Open Document Format files. Since Microsoft Word documents are described with a wide variety of MIME types and extensions, the site can list several, as follows:

    <input type="file" accept=".doc,.docx,.xml,application/msword,application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.wordprocessingml.document">

On platforms that only use file extensions to describe file types, the extensions listed here can be used to filter the allowed documents, while the MIME types can be used with the system's type registration table (mapping MIME types to extensions used by the system), if any, to determine any other extensions to allow. Similarly, on a system that does not have file names or extensions but labels documents with MIME types internally, the MIME types can be used to pick the allowed files, while the extensions can be used if the system has an extension registration table that maps known extensions to MIME types used by the system.

Extensions tend to be ambiguous (e.g. there are an untold number of formats that use the "`.dat`" extension, and users can typically quite easily rename their files to have a "`.doc`" extension even if they are not Microsoft Word documents), and MIME types tend to be unreliable (e.g. many formats have no formally registered types, and many formats are in practice labeled using a number of different MIME types). Authors are reminded that, as usual, data received from a client should be treated with caution, as it may not be in an expected format even if the user is not hostile and the user agent fully obeyed the `accept` attribute's requirements.

For historical reasons, the `value` IDL attribute prefixes the file name with the string "`C:\fakepath\`". Some legacy user agents actually included the full path (which was a security vulnerability). As a result of this, obtaining the file name from the `value` IDL attribute in a backwards-compatible way is non-trivial. The following function extracts the file name in a suitably compatible manner:

    function extractFilename(path) {
      if (path.substr(0, 12) == "C:\\fakepath\\")
        return path.substr(12); // modern browser
      var x;
      x = path.lastIndexOf('/');
      if (x >= 0) // Unix-based path
        return path.substr(x+1);
      x = path.lastIndexOf('\\');
      if (x >= 0) // Windows-based path
        return path.substr(x+1);
      return path; // just the file name
    }

This can be used as follows:

    <p><input type=file name=image onchange="updateFilename(this.value)"></p>
    <p>The name of the file you picked is: <span id="filename">(none)</span></p>
    <script>
     function updateFilename(path) {
       var name = extractFilename(path);
       document.getElementById('filename').textContent = name;
     }
    </script>

The following common `input` element content attributes and IDL attributes apply to the element: `accept`, `multiple`, and `required` content attributes; `files` and `value` IDL attributes.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode filename.

The `input` and `change` events apply.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `alt`, `autocomplete`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `list`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `size`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The element's `value` attribute must be omitted.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()` methods.

###### 4.10.5.1.19 Submit Button state (`type=submit`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Submit Button state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a button that, when activated, submits the form. If the element has a `value` attribute, the button's label must be the value of that attribute; otherwise, it must be an implementation-defined string that means "Submit" or some such. The element is a button, specifically a submit button.

Since the default label is implementation-defined, and the width of the button typically depends on the button's label, the button's width can leak a few bits of fingerprintable information. These bits are likely to be strongly correlated to the identity of the user agent and the user's locale.

If the element is mutable, then the element's activation behavior is as follows: if the element has a form owner, and the element's node document is fully active, submit the form owner from the `input` element; otherwise, do nothing.

If the element is not mutable, it has no activation behavior.

The `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, and `formtarget` attributes are attributes for form submission.

The `formnovalidate` attribute can be used to make submit buttons that do not trigger the constraint validation.

The following common `input` element content attributes and IDL attributes apply to the element: `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, and `formtarget` content attributes; `value` IDL attribute.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode default.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `autocomplete`, `checked`, `dirname`, `height`, `inputmode`, `list`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, `size`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()` methods.

The `input` and `change` events do not apply.

###### 4.10.5.1.20 Image Button state (`type=image`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents either an image from which a user can select a coordinate and submit the form, or alternatively a button from which the user can submit the form. The element is a button, specifically a submit button.

The coordinate is sent to the server during form submission by sending two entries for the element, derived from the name of the control but with "`.x`" and "`.y`" appended to the name with the x and y components of the coordinate respectively.

The image is given by the `src` attribute. The `src` attribute must be present, and must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces referencing a non-interactive, optionally animated, image resource that is neither paged nor scripted.

When any of the following events occur, unless the user agent cannot support images, or its support for images has been disabled, or the user agent only fetches elements on demand, or the `src` attribute's value is the empty string, the user agent must resolve the value of the `src` attribute, relative to the element, and if that is successful, must fetch the resulting absolute URL:

- The `input` element's `type` attribute is first set to the Image Button state (possibly when the element is first created), and the `src` attribute is present.
- The `input` element's `type` attribute is changed back to the Image Button state, and the `src` attribute is present, and its value has changed since the last time the `type` attribute was in the Image Button state.
- The `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, and the `src` attribute is set or changed.

Fetching the image must delay the load event of the element's node document until the task that is queued by the networking task source once the resource has been fetched (defined below) has been run.

If the image was successfully obtained, with no network errors, and the image's type is a supported image type, and the image is a valid image of that type, then the image is said to be available. If this is true before the image is completely downloaded, each task that is queued by the networking task source while the image is being fetched must update the presentation of the image appropriately.

The user agent should apply the image sniffing rules to determine the type of the image, with the image's associated Content-Type headers giving the official type. If these rules are not applied, then the type of the image must be the type given by the image's associated Content-Type headers.

User agents must not support non-image resources with the `input` element. User agents must not run executable code embedded in the image resource. User agents must only display the first page of a multipage resource. User agents must not allow the resource to act in an interactive fashion, but should honor any animation in the resource.

The task that is queued by the networking task source once the resource has been fetched, must, if the download was successful and the image is available, queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the `input` element; and otherwise, if the fetching process fails without a response from the remote server, or completes but the image is not a valid or supported image, queue a task to fire a simple event named `error` on the `input` element.

The `alt` attribute provides the textual label for the button for users and user agents who cannot use the image. The `alt` attribute must be present, and must contain a non-empty string giving the label that would be appropriate for an equivalent button if the image was unavailable.

The `input` element supports dimension attributes.

If the `src` attribute is set, and the image is available and the user agent is configured to display that image, then: The element represents a control for selecting a coordinate from the image specified by the `src` attribute; if the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to select this coordinate, and the element's activation behavior is as follows: if the element has a form owner, and the element's node document is fully active, take the user's selected coordinate, and submit the `input` element's form owner from the `input` element. If the user activates the control without explicitly selecting a coordinate, then the coordinate (0,0) must be assumed.

Otherwise, the element represents a submit button whose label is given by the value of the `alt` attribute; if the element is mutable, then the element's activation behavior is as follows: if the element has a form owner, and the element's node document is fully active, set the selected coordinate to (0,0), and submit the `input` element's form owner from the `input` element.

In either case, if the element is mutable but has no form owner or the element's node document is not fully active, then its activation behavior must be to do nothing. If the element is not mutable, it has no activation behavior.

The selected coordinate must consist of an x-component and a y-component. The coordinates represent the position relative to the edge of the image, with the coordinate space having the positive x direction to the right, and the positive y direction downwards.

The x-component must be a valid integer representing a number x in the range −(borderleft+paddingleft) ≤ x ≤ width+borderright+paddingright, where width is the rendered width of the image, borderleft is the width of the border on the left of the image, paddingleft is the width of the padding on the left of the image, borderright is the width of the border on the right of the image, and paddingright is the width of the padding on the right of the image, with all dimensions given in CSS pixels.

The y-component must be a valid integer representing a number y in the range −(bordertop+paddingtop) ≤ y ≤ height+borderbottom+paddingbottom, where height is the rendered height of the image, bordertop is the width of the border above the image, paddingtop is the width of the padding above the image, borderbottom is the width of the border below the image, and paddingbottom is the width of the padding below the image, with all dimensions given in CSS pixels.

Where a border or padding is missing, its width is zero CSS pixels.

The `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, and `formtarget` attributes are attributes for form submission.

image . `width` [ = value ]
image . `height` [ = value ]

  These attributes return the actual rendered dimensions of the image, or zero if the dimensions are not known.

  They can be set, to change the corresponding content attributes.

The following common `input` element content attributes and IDL attributes apply to the element: `alt`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `src`, and `width` content attributes; `value` IDL attribute.

The `value` IDL attribute is in mode default.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `autocomplete`, `checked`, `dirname`, `inputmode`, `list`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, `size`, and `step`.

The element's `value` attribute must be omitted.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()` methods.

The `input` and `change` events do not apply.

Many aspects of this state's behavior are similar to the behavior of the `img` element. Readers are encouraged to read that section, where many of the same requirements are described in more detail.

Take the following form:

    <form action="process.cgi">
     <input type=image src=map.png name=where alt="Show location list">
    </form>

If the user clicked on the image at coordinate (127,40) then the URL used to submit the form would be "`process.cgi?where.x=127&where.y=40`".

(In this example, it's assumed that for users who don't see the map, and who instead just see a button labeled "Show location list", clicking the button will cause the server to show a list of locations to pick from instead of the map.)

###### 4.10.5.1.21 Reset Button state (`type=reset`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Reset Button state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a button that, when activated, resets the form. If the element has a `value` attribute, the button's label must be the value of that attribute; otherwise, it must be an implementation-defined string that means "Reset" or some such. The element is a button.

Since the default label is implementation-defined, and the width of the button typically depends on the button's label, the button's width can leak a few bits of fingerprintable information. These bits are likely to be strongly correlated to the identity of the user agent and the user's locale.

If the element is mutable, then the element's activation behavior, if the element has a form owner and the element's node document is fully active, is to reset the form owner; otherwise, it is to do nothing.

If the element is not mutable, it has no activation behavior.

Constraint validation: The element is barred from constraint validation.

The `value` IDL attribute applies to this element and is in mode default.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `autocomplete`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `list`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, `size`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()` methods.

The `input` and `change` events do not apply.

###### 4.10.5.1.22 Button state (`type=button`)

When an `input` element's `type` attribute is in the Button state, the rules in this section apply.

The `input` element represents a button with no default behavior. A label for the button must be provided in the `value` attribute, though it may be the empty string. If the element has a `value` attribute, the button's label must be the value of that attribute; otherwise, it must be the empty string. The element is a button.

If the element is mutable, the element's activation behavior is to do nothing.

If the element is not mutable, it has no activation behavior.

Constraint validation: The element is barred from constraint validation.

The `value` IDL attribute applies to this element and is in mode default.

The following content attributes must not be specified and do not apply to the element: `accept`, `alt`, `autocomplete`, `checked`, `dirname`, `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, `formtarget`, `height`, `inputmode`, `list`, `max`, `maxlength`, `min`, `minlength`, `multiple`, `pattern`, `placeholder`, `readonly`, `required`, `size`, `src`, `step`, and `width`.

The following IDL attributes and methods do not apply to the element: `checked`, `files`, `list`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `valueAsDate`, `valueAsNumber`, `valueLow`, and `valueHigh` IDL attributes; `select()`, `setRangeText()`, `setSelectionRange()`, `stepDown()`, and `stepUp()` methods.

The `input` and `change` events do not apply.

##### 4.10.5.2 Implemention notes regarding localization of form controls

This section is non-normative.

The formats shown to the user in date, time, and number controls is independent of the format used for form submission.

Browsers are encouraged to use user interfaces that present dates, times, and numbers according to the conventions of either the locale implied by the `input` element's language or the user's preferred locale. Using the page's locale will ensure consistency with page-provided data.

For example, it would be confusing to users if an American English page claimed that a Cirque De Soleil show was going to be showing on 02/03, but their browser, configured to use the British English locale, only showed the date 03/02 in the ticket purchase date picker. Using the page's locale would at least ensure that the date was presented in the same format everywhere. (There's still a risk that the user would end up arriving a month late, of course, but there's only so much that can be done about such cultural differences...)

##### 4.10.5.3 Common `input` element attributes

These attributes only apply to an `input` element if its `type` attribute is in a state whose definition declares that the attribute applies. When an attribute doesn't apply to an `input` element, user agents must ignore the attribute, regardless of the requirements and definitions below.

###### 4.10.5.3.1 The `maxlength` and `minlength` attributes

The `maxlength` attribute, when it applies, is a form control `maxlength` attribute controlled by the `input` element's dirty value flag.

The `minlength` attribute, when it applies, is a form control `minlength` attribute controlled by the `input` element's dirty value flag.

If the `input` element has a maximum allowed value length, then the code-unit length of the value of the element's `value` attribute must be equal to or less than the element's maximum allowed value length.

The following extract shows how a messaging client's text entry could be arbitrarily restricted to a fixed number of characters, thus forcing any conversation through this medium to be terse and discouraging intelligent discourse.

    <label>What are you doing? <input name=status maxlength=140></label>

Here, a password is given a minimum length:

    <p><label>Username: <input name=u required></label>
    <p><label>Password: <input name=p required minlength=12></label>

###### 4.10.5.3.2 The `size` attribute

The `size` attribute gives the number of characters that, in a visual rendering, the user agent is to allow the user to see while editing the element's value.

The `size` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid non-negative integer greater than zero.

If the attribute is present, then its value must be parsed using the rules for parsing non-negative integers, and if the result is a number greater than zero, then the user agent should ensure that at least that many characters are visible.

The `size` IDL attribute is limited to only non-negative numbers greater than zero and has a default value of 20.

###### 4.10.5.3.3 The `readonly` attribute

The `readonly` attribute is a boolean attribute that controls whether or not the user can edit the form control. When specified, the element is not mutable.

Constraint validation: If the `readonly` attribute is specified on an `input` element, the element is barred from constraint validation.

The difference between `disabled` and `readonly` is that read-only controls are still focusable, so the user can still select the text and interact with it, whereas disabled controls are entirely non-interactive. (For this reason, only text controls can be made read-only: it wouldn't make sense for checkboxes or buttons, for instances.)

In the following example, the existing product identifiers cannot be modified, but they are still displayed as part of the form, for consistency with the row representing a new product (where the identifier is not yet filled in).

    <form action="products.cgi" method="post" enctype="multipart/form-data">
     <table>
      <tr> <th> Product ID <th> Product name <th> Price <th> Action
      <tr>
       <td> <input readonly="readonly" name="1.pid" value="H412">
       <td> <input required="required" name="1.pname" value="Floor lamp Ulke">
       <td> $<input required="required" type="number" min="0" step="0.01" name="1.pprice" value="49.99">
       <td> <button formnovalidate="formnovalidate" name="action" value="delete:1">Delete</button>
      <tr>
       <td> <input readonly="readonly" name="2.pid" value="FG28">
       <td> <input required="required" name="2.pname" value="Table lamp Ulke">
       <td> $<input required="required" type="number" min="0" step="0.01" name="2.pprice" value="24.99">
       <td> <button formnovalidate="formnovalidate" name="action" value="delete:2">Delete</button>
      <tr>
       <td> <input required="required" name="3.pid" value="" pattern="[A-Z0-9]+">
       <td> <input required="required" name="3.pname" value="">
       <td> $<input required="required" type="number" min="0" step="0.01" name="3.pprice" value="">
       <td> <button formnovalidate="formnovalidate" name="action" value="delete:3">Delete</button>
     </table>
     <p> <button formnovalidate="formnovalidate" name="action" value="add">Add</button> </p>
     <p> <button name="action" value="update">Save</button> </p>
    </form>

###### 4.10.5.3.4 The `required` attribute

The `required` attribute is a boolean attribute. When specified, the element is required.

Constraint validation: If the element is required, and its `value` IDL attribute applies and is in the mode value, and the element is mutable, and the element's value is the empty string, then the element is suffering from being missing.

The following form has two required fields, one for an e-mail address and one for a password. It also has a third field that is only considered valid if the user types the same password in the password field and this third field.

    <h1>Create new account</h1>
    <form action="/newaccount" method=post
          oninput="up2.setCustomValidity(up2.value != up.value ? 'Passwords do not match.' : '')">
     <p>
      <label for="username">E-mail address:</label>
      <input id="username" type=email required name=un>
     <p>
      <label for="password1">Password:</label>
      <input id="password1" type=password required name=up>
     <p>
      <label for="password2">Confirm password:</label>
      <input id="password2" type=password name=up2>
     <p>
      <input type=submit value="Create account">
    </form>

For radio buttons, the `required` attribute is satisfied if any of the radio buttons in the group is selected. Thus, in the following example, any of the radio buttons can be checked, not just the one marked as required:

    <fieldset>
     <legend>Did the movie pass the Bechdel test?</legend>
     <p><label><input type="radio" name="bechdel" value="no-characters"> No, there are not even two female characters in the movie. </label>
     <p><label><input type="radio" name="bechdel" value="no-names"> No, the female characters never talk to each other. </label>
     <p><label><input type="radio" name="bechdel" value="no-topic"> No, when female characters talk to each other it's always about a male character. </label>
     <p><label><input type="radio" name="bechdel" value="yes" required> Yes. </label>
     <p><label><input type="radio" name="bechdel" value="unknown"> I don't know. </label>
    </fieldset>

To avoid confusion as to whether a radio button group is required or not, authors are encouraged to specify the attribute on all the radio buttons in a group. Indeed, in general, authors are encouraged to avoid having radio button groups that do not have any initially checked controls in the first place, as this is a state that the user cannot return to, and is therefore generally considered a poor user interface.

###### 4.10.5.3.5 The `multiple` attribute

The `multiple` attribute is a boolean attribute that indicates whether the user is to be allowed to specify more than one value.

The following extract shows how an e-mail client's "Cc" field could accept multiple e-mail addresses.

    <label>Cc: <input type=email multiple name=cc></label>

If the user had, amongst many friends in his user contacts database, two friends "Arthur Dent" (with address "art@example.net") and "Adam Josh" (with address "adamjosh@example.net"), then, after the user has typed "a", the user agent might suggest these two e-mail addresses to the user.

The page could also link in the user's contacts database from the site:

    <label>Cc: <input type=email multiple name=cc list=contacts></label>
    ...
    <datalist id="contacts">
     <option value="hedral@damowmow.com">
     <option value="pillar@example.com">
     <option value="astrophy@cute.example">
     <option value="astronomy@science.example.org">
    </datalist>

Suppose the user had entered "bob@example.net" into this text field, and then started typing a second e-mail address starting with "a". The user agent might show both the two friends mentioned earlier, as well as the "astrophy" and "astronomy" values given in the `datalist` element.

The following extract shows how an e-mail client's "Attachments" field could accept multiple files for upload.

    <label>Attachments: <input type=file multiple name=att></label>

###### 4.10.5.3.6 The `pattern` attribute

The `pattern` attribute specifies a regular expression against which the control's value, or, when the `multiple` attribute applies and is set, the control's values, are to be checked.

If specified, the attribute's value must match the JavaScript Pattern production. [ECMA262]

If an `input` element has a `pattern` attribute specified, and the attribute's value, when compiled as a JavaScript regular expression with the `global`, `ignoreCase`, and `multiline` flags disabled (see ECMA262 Edition 5, sections 15.10.7.2 through 15.10.7.4), compiles successfully, then the resulting regular expression is the element's compiled pattern regular expression. If the element has no such attribute, or if the value doesn't compile successfully, then the element has no compiled pattern regular expression. [ECMA262]

Constraint validation: If the element's value is not the empty string, and either the element's `multiple` attribute is not specified or it does not apply to the `input` element given its `type` attribute's current state, and the element has a compiled pattern regular expression but that regular expression does not match the entirety of the element's value, then the element is suffering from a pattern mismatch.

Constraint validation: If the element's value is not the empty string, and the element's `multiple` attribute is specified and applies to the `input` element, and the element has a compiled pattern regular expression but that regular expression does not match the entirety of each of the element's values, then the element is suffering from a pattern mismatch.

The compiled pattern regular expression, when matched against a string, must have its start anchored to the start of the string and its end anchored to the end of the string.

This implies that the regular expression language used for this attribute is the same as that used in JavaScript, except that the `pattern` attribute is matched against the entire value, not just any subset (somewhat as if it implied a `^(?:` at the start of the pattern and a `)$` at the end).

When an `input` element has a `pattern` attribute specified, authors should include a `title` attribute to give a description of the pattern. User agents may use the contents of this attribute, if it is present, when informing the user that the pattern is not matched, or at any other suitable time, such as in a tooltip or read out by assistive technology when the control gains focus.

For example, the following snippet:

    <label> Part number:
     <input pattern="[0-9][A-Z]{3}" name="part"
            title="A part number is a digit followed by three uppercase letters."/>
    </label>

...could cause the UA to display an alert such as:

    A part number is a digit followed by three uppercase letters.
    You cannot submit this form when the field is incorrect.

When a control has a `pattern` attribute, the `title` attribute, if used, must describe the pattern. Additional information could also be included, so long as it assists the user in filling in the control. Otherwise, assistive technology would be impaired.

For instance, if the title attribute contained the caption of the control, assistive technology could end up saying something like `The text you have entered does not match the required pattern. Birthday`, which is not useful.

UAs may still show the `title` in non-error situations (for example, as a tooltip when hovering over the control), so authors should be careful not to word `title`s as if an error has necessarily occurred.

###### 4.10.5.3.7 The `min` and `max` attributes

Some form controls can have explicit constraints applied limiting the allowed range of values that the user can provide. Normally, such a range would be linear and continuous. A form control can have a periodic domain, however, in which case the form control's broadest possible range is finite, and authors can specify explicit ranges within it that span the boundaries.

Specifically, the broadest range of a `type=time` control is midnight to midnight (24 hours), and authors can set both continuous linear ranges (such as 9pm to 11pm) and discontinuous ranges spanning midnight (such as 11pm to 1am).

The `min` and `max` attributes indicate the allowed range of values for the element.

Their syntax is defined by the section that defines the `type` attribute's current state.

If the element has a `min` attribute, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to the value of the `min` attribute is a number, then that number is the element's minimum; otherwise, if the `type` attribute's current state defines a default minimum, then that is the minimum; otherwise, the element has no minimum.

The `min` attribute also defines the step base.

If the element has a `max` attribute, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to the value of the `max` attribute is a number, then that number is the element's maximum; otherwise, if the `type` attribute's current state defines a default maximum, then that is the maximum; otherwise, the element has no maximum.

If the element does not have a periodic domain, the `max` attribute's value (the maximum) must not be less than the `min` attribute's value (its minimum).

If an element that does not have a periodic domain has a maximum that is less than its minimum, then so long as the element has a value, it will either be suffering from an underflow or suffering from an overflow.

An element has a reversed range if it has a periodic domain and its maximum is less than its minimum.

An element has range limitations if it has a defined minimum or a defined maximum.

How these range limitations apply depends on whether the element has a `multiple` attribute.

If the element does not have a `multiple` attribute specified or if the `multiple` attribute does not apply

  Constraint validation: When the element has a minimum and does not have a reversed range, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to the string given by the element's value is a number, and the number obtained from that algorithm is less than the minimum, the element is suffering from an underflow.

  Constraint validation: When the element has a maximum and does not have a reversed range, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to the string given by the element's value is a number, and the number obtained from that algorithm is more than the maximum, the element is suffering from an overflow.

  Constraint validation: When an element has a reversed range, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to the string given by the element's value is a number, and the number obtained from that algorithm is more than the maximum and less than the minimum, the element is simultaneously suffering from an underflow and suffering from an overflow.

If the element does have a `multiple` attribute specified and the `multiple` attribute does apply

  Constraint validation: When the element has a minimum, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to any of the strings in the element's values is a number that is less than the minimum, the element is suffering from an underflow.

  Constraint validation: When the element has a maximum, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to any of the strings in the element's values is a number that is more than the maximum, the element is suffering from an overflow.

The following date control limits input to dates that are before the 1980s:

    <input name=bday type=date max="1979-12-31">

The following number control limits input to whole numbers greater than zero:

    <input name=quantity required="" type="number" min="1" value="1">

The following time control limits input to those minutes that occur between 9pm and 6am, defaulting to midnight:

    <input name="sleepStart" type=time min="21:00" max="06:00" step="60" value="00:00">

###### 4.10.5.3.8 The `step` attribute

The `step` attribute indicates the granularity that is expected (and required) of the value or values, by limiting the allowed values. The section that defines the `type` attribute's current state also defines the default step, the step scale factor, and in some cases the default step base, which are used in processing the attribute as described below.

The `step` attribute, if specified, must either have a value that is a valid floating-point number that parses to a number that is greater than zero, or must have a value that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`any`".

The attribute provides the allowed value step for the element, as follows:

1. If the attribute is absent, then the allowed value step is the default step multiplied by the step scale factor.
2. Otherwise, if the attribute's value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`any`", then there is no allowed value step.
3. Otherwise, if the rules for parsing floating-point number values, when they are applied to the attribute's value, return an error, zero, or a number less than zero, then the allowed value step is the default step multiplied by the step scale factor.
4. Otherwise, the allowed value step is the number returned by the rules for parsing floating-point number values when they are applied to the attribute's value, multiplied by the step scale factor.

The step base is the value returned by the following algorithm:

1. If the element has a `min` content attribute, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to the value of the `min` content attribute is not an error, then return that result and abort these steps.

2. If the element does not have a `multiple` attribute specified or if the `multiple` attribute does not apply, then: if the element has a `value` content attribute, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to the value of the `value` content attribute is not an error, then return that result and abort these steps.

   Otherwise, the element's `type` attribute is in the Range state and the element has a `multiple` attribute specified: run these substeps:

   1. If the element does not have a `value` content attribute, skip these substeps.

   2. Split on commas the value of the `value` content attribute.

   3. If the result of the previous step was not exactly two values, or if either gets an error when you apply the algorithm to convert a string to a number, then skip these substeps.

   4. Return the lower of the two numbers obtained in the previous step, and abort these steps.

3. If a default step base is defined for this element given its `type` attribute's state, then return it and abort these steps.

4. Return zero.

How these range limitations apply depends on whether the element has a `multiple` attribute.

If the element does not have a `multiple` attribute specified or if the `multiple` attribute does not apply

  Constraint validation: When the element has an allowed value step, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to the string given by the element's value is a number, and that number subtracted from the step base is not an integral multiple of the allowed value step, the element is suffering from a step mismatch.

If the element does have a `multiple` attribute specified and the `multiple` attribute does apply

  Constraint validation: When the element has an allowed value step, and the result of applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to any of the strings in the element's values is a number that, when subtracted from the step base, is not an integral multiple of the allowed value step, the element is suffering from a step mismatch.

The following range control only accepts values in the range 0..1, and allows 256 steps in that range:

    <input name=opacity type=range min=0 max=1 step=0.00392156863>

The following control allows any time in the day to be selected, with any accuracy (e.g. thousandth-of-a-second accuracy or more):

    <input name=favtime type=time step=any>

Normally, time controls are limited to an accuracy of one minute.

###### 4.10.5.3.9 The `list` attribute

The `list` attribute is used to identify an element that lists predefined options suggested to the user.

If present, its value must be the ID of a `datalist` element in the same document.

The suggestions source element is the first element in the document in tree order to have an ID equal to the value of the `list` attribute, if that element is a `datalist` element. If there is no `list` attribute, or if there is no element with that ID, or if the first element with that ID is not a `datalist` element, then there is no suggestions source element.

If there is a suggestions source element, then, when the user agent is allowing the user to edit the `input` element's value, the user agent should offer the suggestions represented by the suggestions source element to the user in a manner suitable for the type of control used. The user agent may use the suggestion's label to identify the suggestion if appropriate.

How user selections of suggestions are handled depends on whether the element is a control accepting a single value only, or whether it accepts multiple values:

If the element does not have a `multiple` attribute specified or if the `multiple` attribute does not apply

  When the user selects a suggestion, the `input` element's value must be set to the selected suggestion's value, as if the user had written that value himself.

If the element's `type` attribute is in the Range state and the element has a `multiple` attribute specified

  When the user selects a suggestion, the user agent must identify which value in the element's values the user intended to update, and must then update the element's values so that the relevant value is changed to the value given by the selected suggestion's value, as if the user had himself set it to that value.

If the element's `type` attribute is in the Email state and the element has a `multiple` attribute specified

  When the user selects a suggestion, the user agent must either add a new entry to the `input` element's values, whose value is the selected suggestion's value, or change an existing entry in the `input` element's values to have the value given by the selected suggestion's value, as if the user had himself added an entry with that value, or edited an existing entry to be that value. Which behavior is to be applied depends on the user interface in a user-agent-defined manner.

If the `list` attribute does not apply, there is no suggestions source element.

This URL field offers some suggestions.

    <label>Homepage: <input name=hp type=url list=hpurls></label>
    <datalist id=hpurls>
     <option value="http://www.google.com/" label="Google">
     <option value="http://www.reddit.com/" label="Reddit">
    </datalist>

Other URLs from the user's history might show also; this is up to the user agent.

This example demonstrates how to design a form that uses the autocompletion list feature while still degrading usefully in legacy user agents.

If the autocompletion list is merely an aid, and is not important to the content, then simply using a `datalist` element with children `option` elements is enough. To prevent the values from being rendered in legacy user agents, they need to be placed inside the `value` attribute instead of inline.

    <p>
     <label>
      Enter a breed:
      <input type="text" name="breed" list="breeds">
      <datalist id="breeds">
       <option value="Abyssinian">
       <option value="Alpaca">
       <!-- ... -->
      </datalist>
     </label>
    </p>

However, if the values need to be shown in legacy UAs, then fallback content can be placed inside the `datalist` element, as follows:

    <p>
     <label>
      Enter a breed:
      <input type="text" name="breed" list="breeds">
     </label>
     <datalist id="breeds">
      <label>
       or select one from the list:
       <select name="breed">
        <option value=""> (none selected)
        <option>Abyssinian
        <option>Alpaca
        <!-- ... -->
       </select>
      </label>
     </datalist>
    </p>

The fallback content will only be shown in UAs that don't support `datalist`. The options, on the other hand, will be detected by all UAs, even though they are not children of the `datalist` element.

Note that if an `option` element used in a `datalist` is `selected`, it will be selected by default by legacy UAs (because it affects the `select`), but it will not have any effect on the `input` element in UAs that support `datalist`.

###### 4.10.5.3.10 The `placeholder` attribute

The `placeholder` attribute represents a short hint (a word or short phrase) intended to aid the user with data entry when the control has no value. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. The attribute, if specified, must have a value that contains no U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters.

The `placeholder` attribute should not be used as an alternative to a `label`. For a longer hint or other advisory text, the `title` attribute is more appropriate.

These mechanisms are very similar but subtly different: the hint given by the control's `label` is shown at all times; the short hint given in the `placeholder` attribute is shown before the user enters a value; and the hint in the `title` attribute is shown when the user requests further help.

User agents should present this hint to the user, after having stripped line breaks from it, when the element's value is the empty string, especially if the control is not focused.

If a user agent normally doesn't show this hint to the user when the control is focused, then the user agent should nonetheless show the hint for the control if it was focused as a result of the `autofocus` attribute, since in that case the user will not have had an opportunity to examine the control before focusing it.

Here is an example of a mail configuration user interface that uses the `placeholder` attribute:

    <fieldset>
     <legend>Mail Account</legend>
     <p><label>Name: <input type="text" name="fullname" placeholder="John Ratzenberger"></label></p>
     <p><label>Address: <input type="email" name="address" placeholder="john@example.net"></label></p>
     <p><label>Password: <input type="password" name="password"></label></p>
     <p><label>Description: <input type="text" name="desc" placeholder="My Email Account"></label></p>
    </fieldset>

In situations where the control's content has one directionality but the placeholder needs to have a different directionality, Unicode's bidirectional-algorithm formatting characters can be used in the attribute value:

    <input name=t1 type=tel placeholder="&#x202B; رقم الهاتف 1 &#x202E;">
    <input name=t2 type=tel placeholder="&#x202B; رقم الهاتف 2 &#x202E;">

For slightly more clarity, here's the same example using numeric character references instead of inline Arabic:

    <input name=t1 type=tel placeholder="&#x202B;&#1585;&#1602;&#1605; &#1575;&#1604;&#1607;&#1575;&#1578;&#1601; 1&#x202E;">
    <input name=t2 type=tel placeholder="&#x202B;&#1585;&#1602;&#1605; &#1575;&#1604;&#1607;&#1575;&#1578;&#1601; 2&#x202E;">

##### 4.10.5.4 Common `input` element APIs

input . `value` [ = value ]

  Returns the current value of the form control.

  Can be set, to change the value.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if it is set to any value other than the empty string when the control is a file upload control.

input . `checked` [ = value ]

  Returns the current checkedness of the form control.

  Can be set, to change the checkedness.

input . `files`

  Returns a `FileList` object listing the selected files of the form control.

  Returns null if the control isn't a file control.

input . `valueAsDate` [ = value ]

  Returns a `Date` object representing the form control's value, if applicable; otherwise, returns null.

  Can be set, to change the value.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the control isn't date- or time-based.

input . `valueAsNumber` [ = value ]

  Returns a number representing the form control's value, if applicable; otherwise, returns NaN.

  Can be set, to change the value. Setting this to NaN will set the underlying value to the empty string.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the control is neither date- or time-based nor numeric.

input . `valueLow` [ = value ]
input . `valueHigh` [ = value ]

  Returns a number representing the low and high components of form control's value respectively, if applicable; otherwise, returns NaN.

  Can be set, to change the value.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the control is not a two-handle range control.

input . `stepUp`( [ n ] )
input . `stepDown`( [ n ] )

  Changes the form control's value by the value given in the `step` attribute, multiplied by n. The default value for n is 1.

  Throws `InvalidStateError` exception if the control is neither date- or time-based nor numeric, or if the `step` attribute's value is "`any`".

input . `list`

  Returns the `datalist` element indicated by the `list` attribute.

The `value` IDL attribute allows scripts to manipulate the value of an `input` element. The attribute is in one of the following modes, which define its behavior:

value

  On getting, it must return the current value of the element. On setting, it must set the element's value to the new value, set the element's dirty value flag to true, invoke the value sanitization algorithm, if the element's `type` attribute's current state defines one, and then, if the element has a text entry cursor position, should move the text entry cursor position to the end of the text field, unselecting any selected text and resetting the selection direction to none.

default

  On getting, if the element has a `value` attribute, it must return that attribute's value; otherwise, it must return the empty string. On setting, it must set the element's `value` attribute to the new value.

default/on

  On getting, if the element has a `value` attribute, it must return that attribute's value; otherwise, it must return the string "`on`". On setting, it must set the element's `value` attribute to the new value.

filename

  On getting, it must return the string "`C:\fakepath\`" followed by the name of the first file in the list of selected files, if any, or the empty string if the list is empty. On setting, if the new value is the empty string, it must empty the list of selected files; otherwise, it must throw an `InvalidStateError` exception.

  This "fakepath" requirement is a sad accident of history. See the example in the File Upload state section for more information.

  Since path components are not permitted in file names in the list of selected files, the "\fakepath\" cannot be mistaken for a path component.

The `checked` IDL attribute allows scripts to manipulate the checkedness of an `input` element. On getting, it must return the current checkedness of the element; and on setting, it must set the element's checkedness to the new value and set the element's dirty checkedness flag to true.

The `files` IDL attribute allows scripts to access the element's selected files. On getting, if the IDL attribute applies, it must return a `FileList` object that represents the current selected files. The same object must be returned until the list of selected files changes. If the IDL attribute does not apply, then it must instead return null. [FILEAPI]

The `valueAsDate` IDL attribute represents the value of the element, interpreted as a date.

On getting, if the `valueAsDate` attribute does not apply, as defined for the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state, then return null. Otherwise, run the algorithm to convert a string to a `Date` object defined for that state to the element's value; if the algorithm returned a `Date` object, then return it, otherwise, return null.

On setting, if the `valueAsDate` attribute does not apply, as defined for the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception; otherwise, if the new value is null or a `Date` object representing the NaN time value, then set the value of the element to the empty string; otherwise, run the algorithm to convert a `Date` object to a string, as defined for that state, on the new value, and set the value of the element to the resulting string.

The `valueAsNumber` IDL attribute represents the value of the element, interpreted as a number.

On getting, if the `valueAsNumber` attribute does not apply, as defined for the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state, then return a Not-a-Number (NaN) value. Otherwise, if the `valueAsDate` attribute applies, run the algorithm to convert a string to a `Date` object defined for that state to the element's value; if the algorithm returned a `Date` object, then return the time value of the object (the number of milliseconds from midnight UTC the morning of 1970-01-01 to the time represented by the `Date` object), otherwise, return a Not-a-Number (NaN) value. Otherwise, run the algorithm to convert a string to a number defined for that state to the element's value; if the algorithm returned a number, then return it, otherwise, return a Not-a-Number (NaN) value.

On setting, if the new value is infinite, then throw a `TypeError` exception. Otherwise, if the `valueAsNumber` attribute does not apply, as defined for the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception. Otherwise, if the new value is a Not-a-Number (NaN) value, then set the value of the element to the empty string. Otherwise, if the `valueAsDate` attribute applies, run the algorithm to convert a `Date` object to a string defined for that state, passing it a `Date` object whose time value is the new value, and set the value of the element to the resulting string. Otherwise, run the algorithm to convert a number to a string, as defined for that state, on the new value, and set the value of the element to the resulting string.

The `valueLow` and `valueHigh` IDL attributes represent the value of the element, interpreted as a comma-separated pair of numbers.

On getting, if the attributes do not apply, as defined for the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state, then return zero; otherwise, run the following steps:

1. Let values be the values of the element, interpreted according to the algorithm to convert a string to a number, as defined by the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state.

2. If the attribute in question is `valueLow`, return the lowest of the values in values; otherwise, return the highest of the values in values.

On setting, if the attributes do not apply, as defined for the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception. Otherwise, run the following steps:

1. Let values be the values of the element, interpreted according to the algorithm to convert a string to a number, as defined by the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state.

2. Let new value be the result of running the algorithm to convert a number to a string, as defined for that state, on the new value.

3. If the attribute in question is `valueLow`, replace the lower value in values with new value; otherwise, replace the higher value in values with new value.

4. Sort values in increasing numeric order.

5. Let values be the result of running the algorithm to convert a number to a string, as defined by the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state, to the values in values.

6. Set the element's value to the concatenation of the strings in in values, separating each value from the next by a U+002C COMMA character (,).

The `stepDown(n)` and `stepUp(n)` methods, when invoked, must run the following algorithm:

1. If the `stepDown()` and `stepUp()` methods do not apply, as defined for the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception, and abort these steps.

2. If the element has no allowed value step, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception, and abort these steps.

3. If the element has a minimum and a maximum and the minimum is greater than the maximum, then abort these steps.

4. If the element has a minimum and a maximum and there is no value greater than or equal to the element's minimum and less than or equal to the element's maximum that, when subtracted from the step base, is an integral multiple of the allowed value step, then abort these steps.

5. If applying the algorithm to convert a string to a number to the string given by the element's value does not result in an error, then let value be the result of that algorithm. Otherwise, let value be zero.

6. If value subtracted from the step base is not an integral multiple of the allowed value step, then set value to the nearest value that, when subtracted from the step base, is an integral multiple of the allowed value step, and that is less than value if the method invoked was the `stepDown()` and more than value otherwise.

   Otherwise (value subtracted from the step base is an integral multiple of the allowed value step), run the following substeps:

   1. Let n be the argument.

   2. Let delta be the allowed value step multiplied by n.

   3. If the method invoked was the `stepDown()` method, negate delta.

   4. Let value be the result of adding delta to value.

7. If the element has a minimum, and value is less than that minimum, then set value to the smallest value that, when subtracted from the step base, is an integral multiple of the allowed value step, and that is more than or equal to minimum.

8. If the element has a maximum, and value is greater than that maximum, then set value to the largest value that, when subtracted from the step base, is an integral multiple of the allowed value step, and that is less than or equal to maximum.

9. Let value as string be the result of running the algorithm to convert a number to a string, as defined for the `input` element's `type` attribute's current state, on value.

10. Set the value of the element to value as string.

The `list` IDL attribute must return the current suggestions source element, if any, or null otherwise.

##### 4.10.5.5 Common event behaviors

When the `input` and `change` events apply (which is the case for all `input` controls other than buttons and those with the `type` attribute in the Hidden state), the events are fired to indicate that the user has interacted with the control. The `input` event fires whenever the user has modified the data of the control. The `change` event fires when the value is committed, if that makes sense for the control, or else when the control loses focus. In all cases, the `input` event comes before the corresponding `change` event (if any).

When an `input` element has a defined activation behavior, the rules for dispatching these events, if they apply, are given in the section above that defines the `type` attribute's state. (This is the case for all `input` controls with the `type` attribute in the Checkbox state, the Radio Button state, or the File Upload state.)

For `input` elements without a defined activation behavior, but to which these events apply, and for which the user interface involves both interactive manipulation and an explicit commit action, then when the user changes the element's value, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `input` element, and any time the user commits the change, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `change` at the `input` element.

An example of a user interface involving both interactive manipulation and a commit action would be a Range controls that use a slider, when manipulated using a pointing device. While the user is dragging the control's knob, `input` events would fire whenever the position changed, whereas the `change` event would only fire when the user let go of the knob, committing to a specific value.

For `input` elements without a defined activation behavior, but to which these events apply, and for which the user interface involves an explicit commit action but no intermediate manipulation, then any time the user commits a change to the element's value, the user agent must queue a task to first fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `input` element, and then fire a simple event that bubbles named `change` at the `input` element.

An example of a user interface with a commit action would be a Colour control that consists of a single button that brings up a colour wheel: if the value only changes when the dialog is closed, then that would be the explicit commit action. On the other hand, if manipulating the control changes the colour interactively, then there might be no commit action.

Another example of a user interface with a commit action would be a Date control that allows both text-based user input and user selection from a drop-down calendar: while text input might not have an explicit commit step, selecting a date from the drop down calendar and then dismissing the drop down would be a commit action.

For `input` elements without a defined activation behavior, but to which these events apply, any time the user causes the element's value to change without an explicit commit action, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `input` element. The corresponding `change` event, if any, will be fired when the control loses focus.

Examples of a user changing the element's value would include the user typing into a text field, pasting a new value into the field, or undoing an edit in that field. Some user interactions do not cause changes to the value, e.g. hitting the "delete" key in an empty text field, or replacing some text in the field with text from the clipboard that happens to be exactly the same text.

A Range control in the form of a slider that the user has focused and is interacting with using a keyboard would be another example of the user changing the element's value without a commit step.

In the case of tasks that just fire an `input` event, user agents may wait for a suitable break in the user's interaction before queuing the tasks; for example, a user agent could wait for the user to have not hit a key for 100ms, so as to only fire the event when the user pauses, instead of continuously for each keystroke.

When the user agent is to change an `input` element's value on behalf of the user (e.g. as part of a form prefilling feature), the user agent must queue a task to first update the value accordingly, then fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `input` element, then fire a simple event that bubbles named `change` at the `input` element.

These events are not fired in response to changes made to the values of form controls by scripts. (This is to make it easier to update the values of form controls in response to the user manipulating the controls, without having to then filter out the script's own changes to avoid an infinite loop.)

The task source for these tasks is the user interaction task source.

#### 4.10.6 The `button` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Interactive content.
  Listed, labelable, submittable, and reassociateable form-associated element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content, but there must be no interactive content descendant.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `autofocus` — Automatically focus the form control when the page is loaded
  `disabled` — Whether the form control is disabled
  `form` — Associates the control with a `form` element
  `formaction` — URL to use for form submission
  `formenctype` — Form data set encoding type to use for form submission
  `formmethod` — HTTP method to use for form submission
  `formnovalidate` — Bypass form control validation for form submission
  `formtarget` — Browsing context for form submission
  `menu` — Specifies the element's designated pop-up menu
  `name` — Name of form control to use for form submission and in the `form.elements` API
  `type` — Type of button
  `value` — Value to be used for form submission
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLButtonElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute boolean autofocus;
                 attribute boolean disabled;
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
                 attribute DOMString formAction;
                 attribute DOMString formEnctype;
                 attribute DOMString formMethod;
                 attribute boolean formNoValidate;
                 attribute DOMString formTarget;
                 attribute DOMString name;
                 attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute DOMString value;
                 attribute HTMLMenuElement? menu;

        readonly attribute boolean willValidate;
        readonly attribute ValidityState validity;
        readonly attribute DOMString validationMessage;
        boolean checkValidity();
        boolean reportValidity();
        void setCustomValidity(DOMString error);

        readonly attribute NodeList labels;
      };

The `button` element represents a button labeled by its contents.

The element is a button.

The `type` attribute controls the behavior of the button when it is activated. It is an enumerated attribute. The following table lists the keywords and states for the attribute — the keywords in the left column map to the states in the cell in the second column on the same row as the keyword.

Keyword | State | Brief description
--- | --- | ---
`submit` | Submit Button | Submits the form.
`reset` | Reset Button | Resets the form.
`button` | Button | Does nothing.
`menu` | Menu | Shows a menu.

The missing value default is the Submit Button state.

If the `type` attribute is in the Submit Button state, the element is specifically a submit button.

Constraint validation: If the `type` attribute is in the Reset Button state, the Button state, or the Menu state, the element is barred from constraint validation.

When a `button` element is not disabled, its activation behavior element is to run the steps defined in the following list for the current state of the element's `type` attribute:

Submit Button

  If the element has a form owner and the element's node document is fully active, the element must submit the form owner from the `button` element.

Reset Button

  If the element has a form owner and the element's node document is fully active, the element must reset the form owner.

Button

  Do nothing.

Menu

  The element must follow these steps:

  1. If the `button` is not being rendered, abort these steps.

  2. If the `button` element's node document is not fully active, abort these steps.

  3. Let menu be the element's designated pop-up menu, if any. If there isn't one, then abort these steps.

  4. Fire a trusted event with the name `show` at menu, using the `RelatedEvent` interface, with the `relatedTarget` attribute initialised to the `button` element. The event must be cancelable.

  5. If the event is not canceled, then build and show the menu for menu, with the `button` element as the subject.

The `form` attribute is used to explicitly associate the `button` element with its form owner. The `name` attribute represents the element's name. The `disabled` attribute is used to make the control non-interactive and to prevent its value from being submitted. The `autofocus` attribute controls focus. The `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, and `formtarget` attributes are attributes for form submission.

The `formnovalidate` attribute can be used to make submit buttons that do not trigger the constraint validation.

The `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, and `formtarget` must not be specified if the element's `type` attribute is not in the Submit Button state.

The `value` attribute gives the element's value for the purposes of form submission. The element's value is the value of the element's `value` attribute, if there is one, or the empty string otherwise.

A button (and its value) is only included in the form submission if the button itself was used to initiate the form submission.

If the element's `type` attribute is in the Menu state, the `menu` attribute must be specified to give the element's menu. The value must be the ID of a `menu` element in the same home subtree whose `type` attribute is in the popup menu state. The attribute must not be specified if the element's `type` attribute is not in the Menu state.

A `button` element's designated pop-up menu is the first element in the `button`'s home subtree whose ID is that given by the `button` element's `menu` attribute, if there is such an element and its `type` attribute is in the popup menu state; otherwise, the element has no designated pop-up menu.

The `value` and `menu` IDL attributes must reflect the content attributes of the same name.

The `type` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, limited to only known values.

The `willValidate`, `validity`, and `validationMessage` IDL attributes, and the `checkValidity()`, `reportValidity()`, and `setCustomValidity()` methods, are part of the constraint validation API. The `labels` IDL attribute provides a list of the element's `label`s. The `autofocus`, `disabled`, `form`, and `name` IDL attributes are part of the element's forms API.

The following button is labeled "Show hint" and pops up a dialog box when activated:

    <button type=button
            onclick="alert('This 15-20 minute piece was composed by George Gershwin.')">
     Show hint
    </button>

#### 4.10.7 The `select` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Interactive content.
  Listed, labelable, submittable, resettable, and reassociateable form-associated element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Zero or more `option`, `optgroup`, and script-supporting elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `autocomplete` — Hint for form autofill feature
  `autofocus` — Automatically focus the form control when the page is loaded
  `disabled` — Whether the form control is disabled
  `form` — Associates the control with a `form` element
  `multiple` — Whether to allow multiple values
  `name` — Name of form control to use for form submission and in the `form.elements` API
  `required` — Whether the control is required for form submission
  `size` — Size of the control
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLSelectElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString autocomplete;
                 attribute boolean autofocus;
                 attribute boolean disabled;
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
                 attribute boolean multiple;
                 attribute DOMString name;
                 attribute boolean required;
                 attribute unsigned long size;

        readonly attribute DOMString type;

        readonly attribute HTMLOptionsCollection options;
                 attribute unsigned long length;
        getter Element? item(unsigned long index);
        HTMLOptionElement? namedItem(DOMString name);
        void add((HTMLOptionElement or HTMLOptGroupElement) element, optional (HTMLElement or long)? before = null);
        void remove(); // ChildNode overload
        void remove(long index);
        setter creator void (unsigned long index, HTMLOptionElement? option);

        readonly attribute HTMLCollection selectedOptions;
                 attribute long selectedIndex;
                 attribute DOMString value;

        readonly attribute boolean willValidate;
        readonly attribute ValidityState validity;
        readonly attribute DOMString validationMessage;
        boolean checkValidity();
        boolean reportValidity();
        void setCustomValidity(DOMString error);

        readonly attribute NodeList labels;
      };

The `select` element represents a control for selecting amongst a set of options.

The `multiple` attribute is a boolean attribute. If the attribute is present, then the `select` element represents a control for selecting zero or more options from the list of options. If the attribute is absent, then the `select` element represents a control for selecting a single option from the list of options.

The `size` attribute gives the number of options to show to the user. The `size` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid non-negative integer greater than zero.

The display size of a `select` element is the result of applying the rules for parsing non-negative integers to the value of element's `size` attribute, if it has one and parsing it is successful. If applying those rules to the attribute's value is not successful, or if the `size` attribute is absent, then the element's display size is 4 if the element's `multiple` content attribute is present, and 1 otherwise.

The list of options for a `select` element consists of all the `option` element children of the `select` element, and all the `option` element children of all the `optgroup` element children of the `select` element, in tree order.

The `required` attribute is a boolean attribute. When specified, the user will be required to select a value before submitting the form.

If a `select` element has a `required` attribute specified, does not have a `multiple` attribute specified, and has a display size of 1; and if the value of the first `option` element in the `select` element's list of options (if any) is the empty string, and that `option` element's parent node is the `select` element (and not an `optgroup` element), then that `option` is the `select` element's placeholder label option.

If a `select` element has a `required` attribute specified, does not have a `multiple` attribute specified, and has a display size of 1, then the `select` element must have a placeholder label option.

Constraint validation: If the element has its `required` attribute specified, and either none of the `option` elements in the `select` element's list of options have their selectedness set to true, or the only `option` element in the `select` element's list of options with its selectedness set to true is the placeholder label option, then the element is suffering from being missing.

If the `multiple` attribute is absent, and the element is not disabled, then the user agent should allow the user to pick an `option` element in its list of options that is itself not disabled. Upon this `option` element being picked (either through a click, or through unfocusing the element after changing its value, or through a menu command, or through any other mechanism), and before the relevant user interaction event is queued (e.g. before the `click` event), the user agent must set the selectedness of the picked `option` element to true, set its dirtiness to true, and then send `select` update notifications.

If the `multiple` attribute is absent, whenever an `option` element in the `select` element's list of options has its selectedness set to true, and whenever an `option` element with its selectedness set to true is added to the `select` element's list of options, the user agent must set the selectedness of all the other `option` elements in its list of options to false.

If the `multiple` attribute is absent and the element's display size is greater than 1, then the user agent should also allow the user to request that the `option` whose selectedness is true, if any, be unselected. Upon this request being conveyed to the user agent, and before the relevant user interaction event is queued (e.g. before the `click` event), the user agent must set the selectedness of that `option` element to false, set its dirtiness to true, and then send `select` update notifications.

If nodes are inserted or nodes are removed causing the list of options to gain or lose one or more `option` elements, or if an `option` element in the list of options asks for a reset, then, if the `select` element's `multiple` attribute is absent, the user agent must run the first applicable set of steps from the following list:

If the `select` element's display size is 1, and no `option` elements in the `select` element's list of options have their selectedness set to true

  Set the selectedness of the first `option` element in the list of options in tree order that is not disabled, if any, to true.

If two or more `option` elements in the `select` element's list of options have their selectedness set to true

  Set the selectedness of all but the last `option` element with its selectedness set to true in the list of options in tree order to false.

If the `multiple` attribute is present, and the element is not disabled, then the user agent should allow the user to toggle the selectedness of the `option` elements in its list of options that are themselves not disabled. Upon such an element being toggled (either through a click, or through a menu command, or any other mechanism), and before the relevant user interaction event is queued (e.g. before a related `click` event), the selectedness of the `option` element must be changed (from true to false or false to true), the dirtiness of the element must be set to true, and the user agent must send `select` update notifications.

When the user agent is to send `select` update notifications, queue a task to first fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `select` element, and then fire a simple event that bubbles named `change` at the `select` element, using the user interaction task source as the task source. If the stack of script settings objects was not empty when the user agent was to send `select` update notifications, then the resulting `input` and `change` events must not be trusted.

The reset algorithm for `select` elements is to go through all the `option` elements in the element's list of options, set their selectedness to true if the `option` element has a `selected` attribute, and false otherwise, set their dirtiness to false, and then have the `option` elements ask for a reset.

The `form` attribute is used to explicitly associate the `select` element with its form owner. The `name` attribute represents the element's name. The `disabled` attribute is used to make the control non-interactive and to prevent its value from being submitted. The `autofocus` attribute controls focus. The `autocomplete` attribute controls how the user agent provides autofill behavior.

A `select` element that is not disabled is mutable.

select . `type`

  Returns "`select-multiple`" if the element has a `multiple` attribute, and "`select-one`" otherwise.

select . `options`

  Returns an `HTMLOptionsCollection` of the list of options.

select . `length` [ = value ]

  Returns the number of elements in the list of options.

  When set to a smaller number, truncates the number of `option` elements in the `select`.

  When set to a greater number, adds new blank `option` elements to the `select`.

element = select . `item`(index)
select[index]

  Returns the item with index index from the list of options. The items are sorted in tree order.

element = select . `namedItem`(name)

  Returns the first item with ID or `name` name from the list of options.

  Returns null if no element with that ID could be found.

select . `add`(element [, before ] )

  Inserts element before the node given by before.

  The before argument can be a number, in which case element is inserted before the item with that number, or an element from the list of options, in which case element is inserted before that element.

  If before is omitted, null, or a number out of range, then element will be added at the end of the list.

  This method will throw a `HierarchyRequestError` exception if element is an ancestor of the element into which it is to be inserted.

select . `selectedOptions`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the list of options that are selected.

select . `selectedIndex` [ = value ]

  Returns the index of the first selected item, if any, or −1 if there is no selected item.

  Can be set, to change the selection.

select . `value` [ = value ]

  Returns the value of the first selected item, if any, or the empty string if there is no selected item.

  Can be set, to change the selection.

The `type` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the string "`select-one`" if the `multiple` attribute is absent, and the string "`select-multiple`" if the `multiple` attribute is present.

The `options` IDL attribute must return an `HTMLOptionsCollection` rooted at the `select` node, whose filter matches the elements in the list of options.

The `options` collection is also mirrored on the `HTMLSelectElement` object. The supported property indices at any instant are the indices supported by the object returned by the `options` attribute at that instant.

The `length` IDL attribute must return the number of nodes represented by the `options` collection. On setting, it must act like the attribute of the same name on the `options` collection.

The `item(index)` method must return the value returned by the method of the same name on the `options` collection, when invoked with the same argument.

The `namedItem(name)` method must return the value returned by the method of the same name on the `options` collection, when invoked with the same argument.

When the user agent is to set the value of a new indexed property for a given property index index to a new value value, it must instead set the value of a new indexed property with the given property index index to the new value value on the `options` collection.

Similarly, the `add()` method must act like its namesake method on that same `options` collection.

The `remove()` method must act like its namesake method on that same `options` collection when it has arguments, and like its namesake method on the `ChildNode` interface implemented by the `HTMLSelectElement` ancestor interface `Element` when it has no arguments.

The `selectedOptions` IDL attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `select` node, whose filter matches the elements in the list of options that have their selectedness set to true.

The `selectedIndex` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the index of the first `option` element in the list of options in tree order that has its selectedness set to true, if any. If there isn't one, then it must return −1.

On setting, the `selectedIndex` attribute must set the selectedness of all the `option` elements in the list of options to false, and then the `option` element in the list of options whose index is the given new value, if any, must have its selectedness set to true and its dirtiness set to true.

This can result in no element having a selectedness set to true even in the case of the `select` element having no `multiple` attribute and a display size of 1.

The `value` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the value of the first `option` element in the list of options in tree order that has its selectedness set to true, if any. If there isn't one, then it must return the empty string.

On setting, the `value` attribute must set the selectedness of all the `option` elements in the list of options to false, and then the first `option` element in the list of options, in tree order, whose value is equal to the given new value, if any, must have its selectedness set to true and its dirtiness set to true.

This can result in no element having a selectedness set to true even in the case of the `select` element having no `multiple` attribute and a display size of 1.

The `multiple`, `required`, and `size` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name. The `size` IDL attribute has a default value of zero.

For historical reasons, the default value of the `size` IDL attribute does not return the actual size used, which, in the absence of the `size` content attribute, is either 1 or 4 depending on the presence of the `multiple` attribute.

The `willValidate`, `validity`, and `validationMessage` IDL attributes, and the `checkValidity()`, `reportValidity()`, and `setCustomValidity()` methods, are part of the constraint validation API. The `labels` IDL attribute provides a list of the element's `label`s. The `autofocus`, `disabled`, `form`, and `name` IDL attributes are part of the element's forms API.

The following example shows how a `select` element can be used to offer the user with a set of options from which the user can select a single option. The default option is preselected.

    <p>
     <label for="unittype">Select unit type:</label>
     <select id="unittype" name="unittype">
      <option value="1"> Miner </option>
      <option value="2"> Puffer </option>
      <option value="3" selected> Snipey </option>
      <option value="4"> Max </option>
      <option value="5"> Firebot </option>
     </select>
    </p>

When there is no default option, a placeholder can be used instead:

    <select name="unittype" required>
     <option value=""> Select unit type </option>
     <option value="1"> Miner </option>
     <option value="2"> Puffer </option>
     <option value="3"> Snipey </option>
     <option value="4"> Max </option>
     <option value="5"> Firebot </option>
    </select>

Here, the user is offered a set of options from which he can select any number. By default, all five options are selected.

    <p>
     <label for="allowedunits">Select unit types to enable on this map:</label>
     <select id="allowedunits" name="allowedunits" multiple>
      <option value="1" selected> Miner </option>
      <option value="2" selected> Puffer </option>
      <option value="3" selected> Snipey </option>
      <option value="4" selected> Max </option>
      <option value="5" selected> Firebot </option>
     </select>
    </p>

Sometimes, a user has to select one or more items. This example shows such an interface.

    <p>Select the songs from that you would like on your Act II Mix Tape:</p>
    <select multiple required name="act2">
     <option value="s1">It Sucks to Be Me (Reprise)
     <option value="s2">There is Life Outside Your Apartment
     <option value="s3">The More You Ruv Someone
     <option value="s4">Schadenfreude
     <option value="s5">I Wish I Could Go Back to College
     <option value="s6">The Money Song
     <option value="s7">School for Monsters
     <option value="s8">The Money Song (Reprise)
     <option value="s9">There's a Fine, Fine Line (Reprise)
     <option value="s10">What Do You Do With a B.A. in English? (Reprise)
     <option value="s11">For Now
    </select>

#### 4.10.8 The `datalist` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Either: phrasing content.
  Or: Zero or more `option` and script-supporting elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLDataListElement : HTMLElement {
        readonly attribute HTMLCollection options;
      };

The `datalist` element represents a set of `option` elements that represent predefined options for other controls. In the rendering, the `datalist` element represents nothing and it, along with its children, should be hidden.

The `datalist` element can be used in two ways. In the simplest case, the `datalist` element has just `option` element children.

    <label>
     Sex:
     <input name=sex list=sexes>
     <datalist id=sexes>
      <option value="Female">
      <option value="Male">
     </datalist>
    </label>

In the more elaborate case, the `datalist` element can be given contents that are to be displayed for down-level clients that don't support `datalist`. In this case, the `option` elements are provided inside a `select` element inside the `datalist` element.

    <label>
     Sex:
     <input name=sex list=sexes>
    </label>
    <datalist id=sexes>
     <label>
      or select from the list:
      <select name=sex>
       <option value="">
       <option>Female
       <option>Male
      </select>
     </label>
    </datalist>

The `datalist` element is hooked up to an `input` element using the `list` attribute on the `input` element.

Each `option` element that is a descendant of the `datalist` element, that is not disabled, and whose value is a string that isn't the empty string, represents a suggestion. Each suggestion has a value and a label.

datalist . `options`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the `option` elements of the `datalist` element.

The `options` IDL attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `datalist` node, whose filter matches `option` elements.

Constraint validation: If an element has a `datalist` element ancestor, it is barred from constraint validation.

#### 4.10.9 The `optgroup` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `select` element.
Content model:
  Zero or more `option` and script-supporting elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  An `optgroup` element's end tag can be omitted if the `optgroup` element is immediately followed by another `optgroup` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `disabled` — Whether the form control is disabled
  `label` — User-visible label
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLOptGroupElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute boolean disabled;
                 attribute DOMString label;
      };

The `optgroup` element represents a group of `option` elements with a common label.

The element's group of `option` elements consists of the `option` elements that are children of the `optgroup` element.

When showing `option` elements in `select` elements, user agents should show the `option` elements of such groups as being related to each other and separate from other `option` elements.

The `disabled` attribute is a boolean attribute and can be used to disable a group of `option` elements together.

The `label` attribute must be specified. Its value gives the name of the group, for the purposes of the user interface. User agents should use this attribute's value when labeling the group of `option` elements in a `select` element.

The `disabled` and `label` attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

There is no way to select an `optgroup` element. Only `option` elements can be selected. An `optgroup` element merely provides a label for a group of `option` elements.

The following snippet shows how a set of lessons from three courses could be offered in a `select` drop-down widget:

    <form action="courseselector.dll" method="get">
     <p>Which course would you like to watch today?
     <p><label>Course:
      <select name="c">
       <optgroup label="8.01 Physics I: Classical Mechanics">
        <option value="8.01.1">Lecture 01: Powers of Ten
        <option value="8.01.2">Lecture 02: 1D Kinematics
        <option value="8.01.3">Lecture 03: Vectors
       <optgroup label="8.02 Electricity and Magnestism">
        <option value="8.02.1">Lecture 01: What holds our world together?
        <option value="8.02.2">Lecture 02: Electric Field
        <option value="8.02.3">Lecture 03: Electric Flux
       <optgroup label="8.03 Physics III: Vibrations and Waves">
        <option value="8.03.1">Lecture 01: Periodic Phenomenon
        <option value="8.03.2">Lecture 02: Beats
        <option value="8.03.3">Lecture 03: Forced Oscillations with Damping
      </select>
     </label>
     <p><input type=submit value="▶ Play">
    </form>

#### 4.10.10 The `option` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `select` element.
  As a child of a `datalist` element.
  As a child of an `optgroup` element.
Content model:
  If the element has a `label` attribute and a `value` attribute: Nothing.
  If the element has a `label` attribute but no `value` attribute: Text.
  If the element has no `label` attribute: Text that is not inter-element whitespace.
Tag omission in text/html:
  An `option` element's end tag can be omitted if the `option` element is immediately followed by another `option` element, or if it is immediately followed by an `optgroup` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `disabled` — Whether the form control is disabled
  `label` — User-visible label
  `selected` — Whether the option is selected by default
  `value` — Value to be used for form submission
DOM interface:

      [NamedConstructor=Option(optional DOMString text = "", optional DOMString value, optional boolean defaultSelected = false, optional boolean selected = false)]
      interface HTMLOptionElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute boolean disabled;
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
                 attribute DOMString label;
                 attribute boolean defaultSelected;
                 attribute boolean selected;
                 attribute DOMString value;

                 attribute DOMString text;
        readonly attribute long index;
      };

The `option` element represents an option in a `select` element or as part of a list of suggestions in a `datalist` element.

In certain circumstances described in the definition of the `select` element, an `option` element can be a `select` element's placeholder label option. A placeholder label option does not represent an actual option, but instead represents a label for the `select` control.

The `disabled` attribute is a boolean attribute. An `option` element is disabled if its `disabled` attribute is present or if it is a child of an `optgroup` element whose `disabled` attribute is present.

An `option` element that is disabled must prevent any `click` events that are queued on the user interaction task source from being dispatched on the element.

The `label` attribute provides a label for element. The label of an `option` element is the value of the `label` content attribute, if there is one, or, if there is not, the value of the element's `text` IDL attribute.

The `label` content attribute, if specified, must not be empty.

The `value` attribute provides a value for element. The value of an `option` element is the value of the `value` content attribute, if there is one, or, if there is not, the value of the element's `text` IDL attribute.

The `selected` attribute is a boolean attribute. It represents the default selectedness of the element.

The dirtiness of an `option` element is a boolean state, initially false. It controls whether adding or removing the `selected` content attribute has any effect.

The selectedness of an `option` element is a boolean state, initially false. Except where otherwise specified, when the element is created, its selectedness must be set to true if the element has a `selected` attribute. Whenever an `option` element's `selected` attribute is added, if its dirtiness is false, its selectedness must be set to true. Whenever an `option` element's `selected` attribute is removed, if its dirtiness is false, its selectedness must be set to false.

The `Option()` constructor, when called with three or fewer arguments, overrides the initial state of the selectedness state to always be false even if the third argument is true (implying that a `selected` attribute is to be set). The fourth argument can be used to explicitly set the initial selectedness state when using the constructor.

A `select` element whose `multiple` attribute is not specified must not have more than one descendant `option` element with its `selected` attribute set.

An `option` element's index is the number of `option` elements that are in the same list of options but that come before it in tree order. If the `option` element is not in a list of options, then the `option` element's index is zero.

option . `selected`

  Returns true if the element is selected, and false otherwise.

  Can be set, to override the current state of the element.

option . `index`

  Returns the index of the element in its `select` element's `options` list.

option . `form`

  Returns the element's `form` element, if any, or null otherwise.

option . `text`

  Same as `textContent`, except that spaces are collapsed and `script` elements are skipped.

option = new `Option`( [ text [, value [, defaultSelected [, selected ] ] ] ] )

  Returns a new `option` element.

  The text argument sets the contents of the element.

  The value argument sets the `value` attribute.

  The defaultSelected argument sets the `selected` attribute.

  The selected argument sets whether or not the element is selected. If it is omitted, even if the defaultSelected argument is true, the element is not selected.

The `disabled` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name. The `defaultSelected` IDL attribute must reflect the `selected` content attribute.

The `label` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the element's label. On setting, the element's `label` content attribute must be set to the new value.

The `value` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the element's value. On setting, the element's `value` content attribute must be set to the new value.

The `selected` IDL attribute, on getting, must return true if the element's selectedness is true, and false otherwise. On setting, it must set the element's selectedness to the new value, set its dirtiness to true, and then cause the element to ask for a reset.

The `index` IDL attribute must return the element's index.

The `text` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the result of stripping and collapsing whitespace from the concatenation of data of all the `Text` node descendants of the `option` element, in tree order, excluding any that are descendants of descendants of the `option` element that are themselves `script` elements in the HTML namespace or `script` elements in the SVG namespace.

On setting, the `text` attribute must act as if the `textContent` IDL attribute on the element had been set to the new value.

The `form` IDL attribute's behavior depends on whether the `option` element is in a `select` element or not. If the `option` has a `select` element as its parent, or has an `optgroup` element as its parent and that `optgroup` element has a `select` element as its parent, then the `form` IDL attribute must return the same value as the `form` IDL attribute on that `select` element. Otherwise, it must return null.

A constructor is provided for creating `HTMLOptionElement` objects (in addition to the factory methods from DOM such as `createElement()`): `Option(text, value, defaultSelected, selected)`. When invoked as a constructor, it must return a new `HTMLOptionElement` object (a new `option` element). If the first argument is not the empty string, the new object must have as its only child a `Text` node whose data is the value of that argument. Otherwise, it must have no children. If the value argument is present, the new object must have a `value` attribute set with the value of the argument as its value. If the defaultSelected argument is true, the new object must have a `selected` attribute set with no value. If the selected argument is true, the new object must have its selectedness set to true; otherwise the selectedness must be set to false, even if the defaultSelected argument is true. The element's node document must be the active document of the browsing context of the `Window` object on which the interface object of the invoked constructor is found.

#### 4.10.11 The `textarea` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Interactive content.
  Listed, labelable, submittable, resettable, and reassociateable form-associated element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Text.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `autocomplete` — Hint for form autofill feature
  `autofocus` — Automatically focus the form control when the page is loaded
  `cols` — Maximum number of characters per line
  `dirname` — Name of form field to use for sending the element's directionality in form submission
  `disabled` — Whether the form control is disabled
  `form` — Associates the control with a `form` element
  `inputmode` — Hint for selecting an input modality
  `maxlength` — Maximum length of value
  `minlength` — Minimum length of value
  `name` — Name of form control to use for form submission and in the `form.elements` API
  `placeholder` — User-visible label to be placed within the form control
  `readonly` — Whether to allow the value to be edited by the user
  `required` — Whether the control is required for form submission
  `rows` — Number of lines to show
  `wrap` — How the value of the form control is to be wrapped for form submission
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTextAreaElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString autocomplete;
                 attribute boolean autofocus;
                 attribute unsigned long cols;
                 attribute DOMString dirName;
                 attribute boolean disabled;
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
                 attribute DOMString inputMode;
                 attribute long maxLength;
                 attribute long minLength;
                 attribute DOMString name;
                 attribute DOMString placeholder;
                 attribute boolean readOnly;
                 attribute boolean required;
                 attribute unsigned long rows;
                 attribute DOMString wrap;

        readonly attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute DOMString defaultValue;
        [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString value;
        readonly attribute unsigned long textLength;

        readonly attribute boolean willValidate;
        readonly attribute ValidityState validity;
        readonly attribute DOMString validationMessage;
        boolean checkValidity();
        boolean reportValidity();
        void setCustomValidity(DOMString error);

        readonly attribute NodeList labels;

        void select();
                 attribute unsigned long selectionStart;
                 attribute unsigned long selectionEnd;
                 attribute DOMString selectionDirection;
        void setRangeText(DOMString replacement);
        void setRangeText(DOMString replacement, unsigned long start, unsigned long end, optional SelectionMode selectionMode = "preserve");
        void setSelectionRange(unsigned long start, unsigned long end, optional DOMString direction);
      };

The `textarea` element represents a multiline plain text edit control for the element's raw value. The contents of the control represent the control's default value.

The raw value of a `textarea` control must be initially the empty string.

This element has rendering requirements involving the bidirectional algorithm.

The `readonly` attribute is a boolean attribute used to control whether the text can be edited by the user or not.

In this example, a text field is marked read-only because it represents a read-only file:

    Filename: <code>/etc/bash.bashrc</code>
    <textarea name="buffer" readonly>
    # System-wide .bashrc file for interactive bash(1) shells.

    # To enable the settings / commands in this file for login shells as well,
    # this file has to be sourced in /etc/profile.

    # If not running interactively, don't do anything
    [ -z "$PS1" ] &amp;&amp; return

    ...</textarea>

Constraint validation: If the `readonly` attribute is specified on a `textarea` element, the element is barred from constraint validation.

A `textarea` element is mutable if it is neither disabled nor has a `readonly` attribute specified.

When a `textarea` is mutable, its raw value should be editable by the user: the user agent should allow the user to edit, insert, and remove text, and to insert and remove line breaks in the form of U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters. Any time the user causes the element's raw value to change, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `textarea` element. User agents may wait for a suitable break in the user's interaction before queuing the task; for example, a user agent could wait for the user to have not hit a key for 100ms, so as to only fire the event when the user pauses, instead of continuously for each keystroke.

A `textarea` element has a dirty value flag, which must be initially set to false, and must be set to true whenever the user interacts with the control in a way that changes the raw value.

When the `textarea` element's `textContent` IDL attribute changes value, if the element's dirty value flag is false, then the element's raw value must be set to the value of the element's `textContent` IDL attribute.

The reset algorithm for `textarea` elements is to set the element's raw value to the value of the element's `textContent` IDL attribute.

If the element is mutable, the user agent should allow the user to change the writing direction of the element, setting it either to a left-to-right writing direction or a right-to-left writing direction. If the user does so, the user agent must then run the following steps:

1. Set the element's `dir` attribute to "`ltr`" if the user selected a left-to-right writing direction, and "`rtl`" if the user selected a right-to-left writing direction.

2. Queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `input` at the `textarea` element.

The `cols` attribute specifies the expected maximum number of characters per line. If the `cols` attribute is specified, its value must be a valid non-negative integer greater than zero. If applying the rules for parsing non-negative integers to the attribute's value results in a number greater than zero, then the element's character width is that value; otherwise, it is 20.

The user agent may use the `textarea` element's character width as a hint to the user as to how many characters the server prefers per line (e.g. for visual user agents by making the width of the control be that many characters). In visual renderings, the user agent should wrap the user's input in the rendering so that each line is no wider than this number of characters.

The `rows` attribute specifies the number of lines to show. If the `rows` attribute is specified, its value must be a valid non-negative integer greater than zero. If applying the rules for parsing non-negative integers to the attribute's value results in a number greater than zero, then the element's character height is that value; otherwise, it is 2.

Visual user agents should set the height of the control to the number of lines given by character height.

The `wrap` attribute is an enumerated attribute with two keywords and states: the `soft` keyword which maps to the Soft state, and the `hard` keyword which maps to the Hard state. The missing value default is the Soft state.

The Soft state indicates that the text in the `textarea` is not to be wrapped when it is submitted (though it can still be wrapped in the rendering).

The Hard state indicates that the text in the `textarea` is to have newlines added by the user agent so that the text is wrapped when it is submitted.

If the element's `wrap` attribute is in the Hard state, the `cols` attribute must be specified.

For historical reasons, the element's value is normalised in three different ways for three different purposes. The raw value is the value as it was originally set. It is not normalized. The API value is the value used in the `value` IDL attribute. It is normalised so that line breaks use U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters. Finally, there is the value, as used in form submission and other processing models in this specification. It is normalised so that line breaks use U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED (CRLF) character pairs, and in addition, if necessary given the element's `wrap` attribute, additional line breaks are inserted to wrap the text at the given width.

The element's API value is defined to be the element's raw value with the following transformation applied:

1. Replace every U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED (CRLF) character pair from the raw value with a single U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character.

2. Replace every remaining U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN character from the raw value with a single U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character.

The element's value is defined to be the element's raw value with the textarea wrapping transformation applied. The textarea wrapping transformation is the following algorithm, as applied to a string:

1. Replace every occurrence of a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character not followed by a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, and every occurrence of a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character not preceded by a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character, by a two-character string consisting of a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED (CRLF) character pair.

2. If the element's `wrap` attribute is in the Hard state, insert U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED (CRLF) character pairs into the string using a UA-defined algorithm so that each line has no more than character width characters. For the purposes of this requirement, lines are delimited by the start of the string, the end of the string, and U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED (CRLF) character pairs.

The `maxlength` attribute is a form control `maxlength` attribute controlled by the `textarea` element's dirty value flag.

If the `textarea` element has a maximum allowed value length, then the element's children must be such that the code-unit length of the value of the element's `textContent` IDL attribute with the textarea wrapping transformation applied is equal to or less than the element's maximum allowed value length.

The `minlength` attribute is a form control `minlength` attribute controlled by the `textarea` element's dirty value flag.

The `required` attribute is a boolean attribute. When specified, the user will be required to enter a value before submitting the form.

Constraint validation: If the element has its `required` attribute specified, and the element is mutable, and the element's value is the empty string, then the element is suffering from being missing.

The `placeholder` attribute represents a short hint (a word or short phrase) intended to aid the user with data entry when the control has no value. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format.

The `placeholder` attribute should not be used as an alternative to a `label`. For a longer hint or other advisory text, the `title` attribute is more appropriate.

These mechanisms are very similar but subtly different: the hint given by the control's `label` is shown at all times; the short hint given in the `placeholder` attribute is shown before the user enters a value; and the hint in the `title` attribute is shown when the user requests further help.

User agents should present this hint to the user when the element's value is the empty string and the control is not focused (e.g. by displaying it inside a blank unfocused control). All U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED character pairs (CRLF) in the hint, as well as all other U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) and U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters in the hint, must be treated as line breaks when rendering the hint.

The `name` attribute represents the element's name. The `dirname` attribute controls how the element's directionality is submitted. The `disabled` attribute is used to make the control non-interactive and to prevent its value from being submitted. The `form` attribute is used to explicitly associate the `textarea` element with its form owner. The `autofocus` attribute controls focus. The `inputmode` attribute controls the user interface's input modality for the control. The `autocomplete` attribute controls how the user agent provides autofill behavior.

textarea . `type`

  Returns the string "`textarea`".

textarea . `value`

  Returns the current value of the element.

  Can be set, to change the value.

The `cols`, `placeholder`, `required`, `rows`, and `wrap` attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name. The `cols` and `rows` attributes are limited to only non-negative numbers greater than zero. The `cols` attribute's default value is 20. The `rows` attribute's default value is 2. The `dirName` IDL attribute must reflect the `dirname` content attribute. The `inputMode` IDL attribute must reflect the `inputmode` content attribute, limited to only known values. The `maxLength` IDL attribute must reflect the `maxlength` content attribute, limited to only non-negative numbers. The `minLength` IDL attribute must reflect the `minlength` content attribute, limited to only non-negative numbers. The `readOnly` IDL attribute must reflect the `readonly` content attribute.

The `type` IDL attribute must return the value "`textarea`".

The `defaultValue` IDL attribute must act like the element's `textContent` IDL attribute.

The `value` attribute must, on getting, return the element's API value; on setting, it must set the element's raw value to the new value, set the element's dirty value flag to true, and should then move the text entry cursor position to the end of the text field, unselecting any selected text and resetting the selection direction to none.

The `textLength` IDL attribute must return the code-unit length of the element's API value.

The `willValidate`, `validity`, and `validationMessage` IDL attributes, and the `checkValidity()`, `reportValidity()`, and `setCustomValidity()` methods, are part of the constraint validation API. The `labels` IDL attribute provides a list of the element's `label`s. The `select()`, `selectionStart`, `selectionEnd`, `selectionDirection`, `setRangeText()`, and `setSelectionRange()` methods and IDL attributes expose the element's text selection. The `autofocus`, `disabled`, `form`, and `name` IDL attributes are part of the element's forms API.

Here is an example of a `textarea` being used for unrestricted free-form text input in a form:

    <p>If you have any comments, please let us know: <textarea cols=80 name=comments></textarea></p>

To specify a maximum length for the comments, one can use the `maxlength` attribute:

    <p>If you have any short comments, please let us know: <textarea cols=80 name=comments maxlength=200></textarea></p>

To give a default value, text can be included inside the element:

    <p>If you have any comments, please let us know: <textarea cols=80 name=comments>You rock!</textarea></p>

You can also give a minimum length. Here, a letter needs to be filled out by the user; a template (which is shorter than the minimum length) is provided, but is insufficient to submit the form:

    <textarea required minlength="500">Dear Madam Speaker,

    Regarding your letter dated ...

    ...

    Yours Sincerely,

    ...</textarea>

A placeholder can be given as well, to suggest the basic form to the user, without providing an explicit template:

    <textarea placeholder="Dear Francine,

    They closed the parks this week, so we won't be able to
    meet your there. Should we just have dinner?

    Love,
    Daddy"></textarea>

To have the browser submit the directionality of the element along with the value, the `dirname` attribute can be specified:

    <p>If you have any comments, please let us know (you may use either English or Hebrew for your comments):
    <textarea cols=80 name=comments dirname=comments.dir></textarea></p>

#### 4.10.12 The `keygen` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Interactive content.
  Listed, labelable, submittable, resettable, and reassociateable form-associated element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `autofocus` — Automatically focus the form control when the page is loaded
  `challenge` — String to package with the generated and signed public key
  `disabled` — Whether the form control is disabled
  `form` — Associates the control with a `form` element
  `keytype` — The type of cryptographic key to generate
  `name` — Name of form control to use for form submission and in the `form.elements` API
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLKeygenElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute boolean autofocus;
                 attribute DOMString challenge;
                 attribute boolean disabled;
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
                 attribute DOMString keytype;
                 attribute DOMString name;

        readonly attribute DOMString type;

        readonly attribute boolean willValidate;
        readonly attribute ValidityState validity;
        readonly attribute DOMString validationMessage;
        boolean checkValidity();
        boolean reportValidity();
        void setCustomValidity(DOMString error);

        readonly attribute NodeList labels;
      };

The `keygen` element represents a key pair generator control. When the control's form is submitted, the private key is stored in the local keystore, and the public key is packaged and sent to the server.

The `challenge` attribute may be specified. Its value will be packaged with the submitted key.

The `keytype` attribute is an enumerated attribute. The following table lists the keywords and states for the attribute — the keywords in the left column map to the states listed in the cell in the second column on the same row as the keyword. User agents are not required to support these values, and must only recognise values whose corresponding algorithms they support.

Keyword | State
--- | ---
`rsa` | RSA

The invalid value default state is the unknown state. The missing value default state is the RSA state, if it is supported, or the unknown state otherwise.

This specification does not specify what key types user agents are to support — it is possible for a user agent to not support any key types at all.

The user agent may expose a user interface for each `keygen` element to allow the user to configure settings of the element's key pair generator, e.g. the key length.

The reset algorithm for `keygen` elements is to set these various configuration settings back to their defaults.

The element's value is the string returned from the following algorithm:

1. Use the appropriate step from the following list:

   If the `keytype` attribute is in the RSA state

     Generate an RSA key pair using the settings given by the user, if appropriate, using the `md5WithRSAEncryption` RSA signature algorithm (the signature algorithm with MD5 and the RSA encryption algorithm) referenced in section 2.2.1 ("RSA Signature Algorithm") of RFC 3279, and defined in RFC 2313. [RFC3279] [RFC2313]

   Otherwise, the `keytype` attribute is in the unknown state

     The given key type is not supported. Return the empty string and abort this algorithm.

   Let private key be the generated private key.

   Let public key be the generated public key.

   Let signature algorithm be the selected signature algorithm.

2. If the element has a `challenge` attribute, then let challenge be that attribute's value. Otherwise, let challenge be the empty string.

3. Let algorithm be an ASN.1 `AlgorithmIdentifier` structure as defined by RFC 5280, with the `algorithm` field giving the ASN.1 OID used to identify signature algorithm, using the OIDs defined in section 2.2 ("Signature Algorithms") of RFC 3279, and the `parameters` field set up as required by RFC 3279 for `AlgorithmIdentifier` structures for that algorithm. [X690] [RFC5280] [RFC3279]

4. Let spki be an ASN.1 `SubjectPublicKeyInfo` structure as defined by RFC 5280, with the `algorithm` field set to the algorithm structure from the previous step, and the `subjectPublicKey` field set to the BIT STRING value resulting from ASN.1 DER encoding the public key. [X690] [RFC5280]

5. Let publicKeyAndChallenge be an ASN.1 `PublicKeyAndChallenge` structure as defined below, with the `spki` field set to the spki structure from the previous step, and the `challenge` field set to the string challenge obtained earlier. [X690]

6. Let signature be the BIT STRING value resulting from ASN.1 DER encoding the signature generated by applying the signature algorithm to the byte string obtained by ASN.1 DER encoding the publicKeyAndChallenge structure, using private key as the signing key. [X690]

7. Let signedPublicKeyAndChallenge be an ASN.1 `SignedPublicKeyAndChallenge` structure as defined below, with the `publicKeyAndChallenge` field set to the publicKeyAndChallenge structure, the `signatureAlgorithm` field set to the algorithm structure, and the `signature` field set to the BIT STRING signature from the previous step. [X690]

8. Return the result of base64 encoding the result of ASN.1 DER encoding the signedPublicKeyAndChallenge structure. [RFC4648] [X690]

The data objects used by the above algorithm are defined as follows. These definitions use the same "ASN.1-like" syntax defined by RFC 5280. [RFC5280]

    PublicKeyAndChallenge ::= SEQUENCE {
        spki SubjectPublicKeyInfo,
        challenge IA5STRING
    }

    SignedPublicKeyAndChallenge ::= SEQUENCE {
        publicKeyAndChallenge PublicKeyAndChallenge,
        signatureAlgorithm AlgorithmIdentifier,
        signature BIT STRING
    }

Constraint validation: The `keygen` element is barred from constraint validation.

The `form` attribute is used to explicitly associate the `keygen` element with its form owner. The `name` attribute represents the element's name. The `disabled` attribute is used to make the control non-interactive and to prevent its value from being submitted. The `autofocus` attribute controls focus.

keygen . `type`

  Returns the string "`keygen`".

The `challenge` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `keytype` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, limited to only known values.

The `type` IDL attribute must return the value "`keygen`".

The `willValidate`, `validity`, and `validationMessage` IDL attributes, and the `checkValidity()`, `reportValidity()`, and `setCustomValidity()` methods, are part of the constraint validation API. The `labels` IDL attribute provides a list of the element's `label`s. The `autofocus`, `disabled`, `form`, and `name` IDL attributes are part of the element's forms API.

This specification does not specify how the private key generated is to be used. It is expected that after receiving the `SignedPublicKeyAndChallenge` (SPKAC) structure, the server will generate a client certificate and offer it back to the user for download; this certificate, once downloaded and stored in the key store along with the private key, can then be used to authenticate to services that use TLS and certificate authentication. For more information, see e.g. this MDN article.

To generate a key pair, add the private key to the user's key store, and submit the public key to the server, markup such as the following can be used:

    <form action="processkey.cgi" method="post" enctype="multipart/form-data">
     <p><keygen name="key"></p>
     <p><input type=submit value="Submit key..."></p>
    </form>

The server will then receive a form submission with a packaged RSA public key as the value of "`key`". This can then be used for various purposes, such as generating a client certificate, as mentioned above.

#### 4.10.13 The `output` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Listed, labelable, resettable, and reassociateable form-associated element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `for` — Specifies controls from which the output was calculated
  `form` — Associates the control with a `form` element
  `name` — Name of form control to use in the `form.elements` API
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLOutputElement : HTMLElement {
        [PutForwards=value] readonly attribute DOMSettableTokenList htmlFor;
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
                 attribute DOMString name;

        readonly attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute DOMString defaultValue;
                 attribute DOMString value;

        readonly attribute boolean willValidate;
        readonly attribute ValidityState validity;
        readonly attribute DOMString validationMessage;
        boolean checkValidity();
        boolean reportValidity();
        void setCustomValidity(DOMString error);

        readonly attribute NodeList labels;
      };

The `output` element represents the result of a calculation performed by the application, or the result of a user action.

This element can be contrasted with the `samp` element, which is the appropriate element for quoting the output of other programs run previously.

The `for` content attribute allows an explicit relationship to be made between the result of a calculation and the elements that represent the values that went into the calculation or that otherwise influenced the calculation. The `for` attribute, if specified, must contain a string consisting of an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are case-sensitive, each of which must have the value of an ID of an element in the same `Document`.

The `form` attribute is used to explicitly associate the `output` element with its form owner. The `name` attribute represents the element's name.

The element has a value mode flag which is either value or default. Initially, the value mode flag must be set to default.

The element also has a default value. Initially, the default value must be the empty string.

When the value mode flag is in mode default, the contents of the element represent both the value of the element and its default value. When the value mode flag is in mode value, the contents of the element represent the value of the element only, and the default value is only accessible using the `defaultValue` IDL attribute.

Whenever the element's descendants are changed in any way, if the value mode flag is in mode default, the element's default value must be set to the value of the element's `textContent` IDL attribute.

The reset algorithm for `output` elements is to set the element's value mode flag to default and then to set the element's `textContent` IDL attribute to the value of the element's default value (thus replacing the element's child nodes).

output . `value` [ = value ]

  Returns the element's current value.

  Can be set, to change the value.

output . `defaultValue` [ = value ]

  Returns the element's current default value.

  Can be set, to change the default value.

output . `type`

  Returns the string "`output`".

The `value` IDL attribute must act like the element's `textContent` IDL attribute, except that on setting, in addition, before the child nodes are changed, the element's value mode flag must be set to value.

The `defaultValue` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the element's default value. On setting, the attribute must set the element's default value, and, if the element's value mode flag is in the mode default, set the element's `textContent` IDL attribute as well.

The `type` attribute must return the string "`output`".

The `htmlFor` IDL attribute must reflect the `for` content attribute.

The `willValidate`, `validity`, and `validationMessage` IDL attributes, and the `checkValidity()`, `reportValidity()`, and `setCustomValidity()` methods, are part of the constraint validation API. The `labels` IDL attribute provides a list of the element's `label`s. The `form` and `name` IDL attributes are part of the element's forms API.

A simple calculator could use `output` for its display of calculated results:

    <form onsubmit="return false" oninput="o.value = a.valueAsNumber + b.valueAsNumber">
     <input name=a type=number step=any> +
     <input name=b type=number step=any> =
     <output name=o for="a b"></output>
    </form>

In this example, an `output` element is used to report the results from a remote server, as they come in:

    <output id="result"></output>
    <script>
     var primeSource = new WebSocket('ws://primes.example.net/');
     primeSource.onmessage = function (event) {
       document.getElementById('result').value = event.data;
     }
    </script>

#### 4.10.14 The `progress` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Labelable element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content, but there must be no `progress` element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `value` — Current value of the element
  `max` — Upper bound of range
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLProgressElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute double value;
                 attribute double max;
        readonly attribute double position;
        readonly attribute NodeList labels;
      };

The `progress` element represents the completion progress of a task. The progress is either indeterminate, indicating that progress is being made but that it is not clear how much more work remains to be done before the task is complete (e.g. because the task is waiting for a remote host to respond), or the progress is a number in the range zero to a maximum, giving the fraction of work that has so far been completed.

There are two attributes that determine the current task completion represented by the element. The `value` attribute specifies how much of the task has been completed, and the `max` attribute specifies how much work the task requires in total. The units are arbitrary and not specified.

To make a determinate progress bar, add a `value` attribute with the current progress (either a number from 0.0 to 1.0, or, if the `max` attribute is specified, a number from 0 to the value of the `max` attribute). To make an indeterminate progress bar, remove the `value` attribute.

Authors are encouraged to also include the current value and the maximum value inline as text inside the element, so that the progress is made available to users of legacy user agents.

Here is a snippet of a Web application that shows the progress of some automated task:

    <section>
     <h2>Task Progress</h2>
     <p>Progress: <progress id="p" max=100><span>0</span>%</progress></p>
     <script>
      var progressBar = document.getElementById('p');
      function updateProgress(newValue) {
        progressBar.value = newValue;
        progressBar.getElementsByTagName('span')[0].textContent = newValue;
      }
     </script>
    </section>

(The `updateProgress()` method in this example would be called by some other code on the page to update the actual progress bar as the task progressed.)

The `value` and `max` attributes, when present, must have values that are valid floating-point numbers. The `value` attribute, if present, must have a value equal to or greater than zero, and less than or equal to the value of the `max` attribute, if present, or 1.0, otherwise. The `max` attribute, if present, must have a value greater than zero.

The `progress` element is the wrong element to use for something that is just a gauge, as opposed to task progress. For instance, indicating disk space usage using `progress` would be inappropriate. Instead, the `meter` element is available for such use cases.

User agent requirements: If the `value` attribute is omitted, then the progress bar is an indeterminate progress bar. Otherwise, it is a determinate progress bar.

If the progress bar is a determinate progress bar and the element has a `max` attribute, the user agent must parse the `max` attribute's value according to the rules for parsing floating-point number values. If this does not result in an error, and if the parsed value is greater than zero, then the maximum value of the progress bar is that value. Otherwise, if the element has no `max` attribute, or if it has one but parsing it resulted in an error, or if the parsed value was less than or equal to zero, then the maximum value of the progress bar is 1.0.

If the progress bar is a determinate progress bar, user agents must parse the `value` attribute's value according to the rules for parsing floating-point number values. If this does not result in an error, and if the parsed value is less than the maximum value and greater than zero, then the current value of the progress bar is that parsed value. Otherwise, if the parsed value was greater than or equal to the maximum value, then the current value of the progress bar is the maximum value of the progress bar. Otherwise, if parsing the `value` attribute's value resulted in an error, or a number less than or equal to zero, then the current value of the progress bar is zero.

UA requirements for showing the progress bar: When representing a `progress` element to the user, the UA should indicate whether it is a determinate or indeterminate progress bar, and in the former case, should indicate the relative position of the current value relative to the maximum value.

progress . `position`

  For a determinate progress bar (one with known current and maximum values), returns the result of dividing the current value by the maximum value.

  For an indeterminate progress bar, returns −1.

If the progress bar is an indeterminate progress bar, then the `position` IDL attribute must return −1. Otherwise, it must return the result of dividing the current value by the maximum value.

If the progress bar is an indeterminate progress bar, then the `value` IDL attribute, on getting, must return 0. Otherwise, it must return the current value. On setting, the given value must be converted to the best representation of the number as a floating-point number and then the `value` content attribute must be set to that string.

Setting the `value` IDL attribute to itself when the corresponding content attribute is absent would change the progress bar from an indeterminate progress bar to a determinate progress bar with no progress.

The `max` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, limited to numbers greater than zero. The default value for `max` is 1.0.

The `labels` IDL attribute provides a list of the element's `label`s.

#### 4.10.15 The `meter` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Labelable element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where phrasing content is expected.
Content model:
  Phrasing content, but there must be no `meter` element descendants.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `value` — Current value of the element
  `min` — Lower bound of range
  `max` — Upper bound of range
  `low` — High limit of low range
  `high` — Low limit of high range
  `optimum` — Optimum value in gauge
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLMeterElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute double value;
                 attribute double min;
                 attribute double max;
                 attribute double low;
                 attribute double high;
                 attribute double optimum;
        readonly attribute NodeList labels;
      };

The `meter` element represents a scalar measurement within a known range, or a fractional value; for example disk usage, the relevance of a query result, or the fraction of a voting population to have selected a particular candidate.

This is also known as a gauge.

The `meter` element should not be used to indicate progress (as in a progress bar). For that role, HTML provides a separate `progress` element.

The `meter` element also does not represent a scalar value of arbitrary range — for example, it would be wrong to use this to report a weight, or height, unless there is a known maximum value.

There are six attributes that determine the semantics of the gauge represented by the element.

The `min` attribute specifies the lower bound of the range, and the `max` attribute specifies the upper bound. The `value` attribute specifies the value to have the gauge indicate as the "measured" value.

The other three attributes can be used to segment the gauge's range into "low", "medium", and "high" parts, and to indicate which part of the gauge is the "optimum" part. The `low` attribute specifies the range that is considered to be the "low" part, and the `high` attribute specifies the range that is considered to be the "high" part. The `optimum` attribute gives the position that is "optimum"; if that is higher than the "high" value then this indicates that the higher the value, the better; if it's lower than the "low" mark then it indicates that lower values are better, and naturally if it is in between then it indicates that neither high nor low values are good.

Authoring requirements: The `value` attribute must be specified. The `value`, `min`, `low`, `high`, `max`, and `optimum` attributes, when present, must have values that are valid floating-point numbers.

In addition, the attributes' values are further constrained:

Let value be the `value` attribute's number.

If the `min` attribute is specified, then let minimum be that attribute's value; otherwise, let it be zero.

If the `max` attribute is specified, then let maximum be that attribute's value; otherwise, let it be 1.0.

The following inequalities must hold, as applicable:

- minimum ≤ value ≤ maximum
- minimum ≤ `low` ≤ maximum (if `low` is specified)
- minimum ≤ `high` ≤ maximum (if `high` is specified)
- minimum ≤ `optimum` ≤ maximum (if `optimum` is specified)
- `low` ≤ `high` (if both `low` and `high` are specified)

If no minimum or maximum is specified, then the range is assumed to be 0..1, and the value thus has to be within that range.

Authors are encouraged to include a textual representation of the gauge's state in the element's contents, for users of user agents that do not support the `meter` element.

When used with microdata, the `meter` element's `value` attribute provides the element's machine-readable value.

The following examples show three gauges that would all be three-quarters full:

    Storage space usage: <meter value=6 max=8>6 blocks used (out of 8 total)</meter>
    Voter turnout: <meter value=0.75><img alt="75%" src="graph75.png"></meter>
    Tickets sold: <meter min="0" max="100" value="75"></meter>

The following example is incorrect use of the element, because it doesn't give a range (and since the default maximum is 1, both of the gauges would end up looking maxed out):

    <p>The grapefruit pie had a radius of <meter value=12>12cm</meter>
    and a height of <meter value=2>2cm</meter>.</p> <!-- BAD! -->

Instead, one would either not include the meter element, or use the meter element with a defined range to give the dimensions in context compared to other pies:

    <p>The grapefruit pie had a radius of 12cm and a height of
    2cm.</p>
    <dl>
     <dt>Radius: <dd> <meter min=0 max=20 value=12>12cm</meter>
     <dt>Height: <dd> <meter min=0 max=10 value=2>2cm</meter>
    </dl>

There is no explicit way to specify units in the `meter` element, but the units may be specified in the `title` attribute in free-form text.

The example above could be extended to mention the units:

    <dl>
     <dt>Radius: <dd> <meter min=0 max=20 value=12 title="centimeters">12cm</meter>
     <dt>Height: <dd> <meter min=0 max=10 value=2 title="centimeters">2cm</meter>
    </dl>

User agent requirements: User agents must parse the `min`, `max`, `value`, `low`, `high`, and `optimum` attributes using the rules for parsing floating-point number values.

User agents must then use all these numbers to obtain values for six points on the gauge, as follows. (The order in which these are evaluated is important, as some of the values refer to earlier ones.)

The minimum value

  If the `min` attribute is specified and a value could be parsed out of it, then the minimum value is that value. Otherwise, the minimum value is zero.

The maximum value

  If the `max` attribute is specified and a value could be parsed out of it, then the candidate maximum value is that value. Otherwise, the candidate maximum value is 1.0.

  If the candidate maximum value is greater than or equal to the minimum value, then the maximum value is the candidate maximum value. Otherwise, the maximum value is the same as the minimum value.

The actual value

  If the `value` attribute is specified and a value could be parsed out of it, then that value is the candidate actual value. Otherwise, the candidate actual value is zero.

  If the candidate actual value is less than the minimum value, then the actual value is the minimum value.

  Otherwise, if the candidate actual value is greater than the maximum value, then the actual value is the maximum value.

  Otherwise, the actual value is the candidate actual value.

The low boundary

  If the `low` attribute is specified and a value could be parsed out of it, then the candidate low boundary is that value. Otherwise, the candidate low boundary is the same as the minimum value.

  If the candidate low boundary is less than the minimum value, then the low boundary is the minimum value.

  Otherwise, if the candidate low boundary is greater than the maximum value, then the low boundary is the maximum value.

  Otherwise, the low boundary is the candidate low boundary.

The high boundary

  If the `high` attribute is specified and a value could be parsed out of it, then the candidate high boundary is that value. Otherwise, the candidate high boundary is the same as the maximum value.

  If the candidate high boundary is less than the low boundary, then the high boundary is the low boundary.

  Otherwise, if the candidate high boundary is greater than the maximum value, then the high boundary is the maximum value.

  Otherwise, the high boundary is the candidate high boundary.

The optimum point

  If the `optimum` attribute is specified and a value could be parsed out of it, then the candidate optimum point is that value. Otherwise, the candidate optimum point is the midpoint between the minimum value and the maximum value.

  If the candidate optimum point is less than the minimum value, then the optimum point is the minimum value.

  Otherwise, if the candidate optimum point is greater than the maximum value, then the optimum point is the maximum value.

  Otherwise, the optimum point is the candidate optimum point.

All of which will result in the following inequalities all being true:

- minimum value ≤ actual value ≤ maximum value
- minimum value ≤ low boundary ≤ high boundary ≤ maximum value
- minimum value ≤ optimum point ≤ maximum value

UA requirements for regions of the gauge: If the optimum point is equal to the low boundary or the high boundary, or anywhere in between them, then the region between the low and high boundaries of the gauge must be treated as the optimum region, and the low and high parts, if any, must be treated as suboptimal. Otherwise, if the optimum point is less than the low boundary, then the region between the minimum value and the low boundary must be treated as the optimum region, the region from the low boundary up to the high boundary must be treated as a suboptimal region, and the remaining region must be treated as an even less good region. Finally, if the optimum point is higher than the high boundary, then the situation is reversed; the region between the high boundary and the maximum value must be treated as the optimum region, the region from the high boundary down to the low boundary must be treated as a suboptimal region, and the remaining region must be treated as an even less good region.

UA requirements for showing the gauge: When representing a `meter` element to the user, the UA should indicate the relative position of the actual value to the minimum and maximum values, and the relationship between the actual value and the three regions of the gauge.

The following markup:

    <h3>Suggested groups</h3>
    <menu type="toolbar">
     <a href="?cmd=hsg" onclick="hideSuggestedGroups()">Hide suggested groups</a>
    </menu>
    <ul>
     <li>
      <p><a href="/group/comp.infosystems.www.authoring.stylesheets/view">comp.infosystems.www.authoring.stylesheets</a> -
         <a href="/group/comp.infosystems.www.authoring.stylesheets/subscribe">join</a></p>
      <p>Group description: <strong>Layout/presentation on the WWW.</strong></p>
      <p><meter value="0.5">Moderate activity,</meter> Usenet, 618 subscribers</p>
     </li>
     <li>
      <p><a href="/group/netscape.public.mozilla.xpinstall/view">netscape.public.mozilla.xpinstall</a> -
         <a href="/group/netscape.public.mozilla.xpinstall/subscribe">join</a></p>
      <p>Group description: <strong>Mozilla XPInstall discussion.</strong></p>
      <p><meter value="0.25">Low activity,</meter> Usenet, 22 subscribers</p>
     </li>
     <li>
      <p><a href="/group/mozilla.dev.general/view">mozilla.dev.general</a> -
         <a href="/group/mozilla.dev.general/subscribe">join</a></p>
      <p><meter value="0.25">Low activity,</meter> Usenet, 66 subscribers</p>
     </li>
    </ul>

Might be rendered as follows:

User agents may combine the value of the `title` attribute and the other attributes to provide context-sensitive help or inline text detailing the actual values.

For example, the following snippet:

    <meter min=0 max=60 value=23.2 title=seconds></meter>

...might cause the user agent to display a gauge with a tooltip saying "Value: 23.2 out of 60." on one line and "seconds" on a second line.

The `value` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the actual value. On setting, the given value must be converted to the best representation of the number as a floating-point number and then the `value` content attribute must be set to that string.

The `min` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the minimum value. On setting, the given value must be converted to the best representation of the number as a floating-point number and then the `min` content attribute must be set to that string.

The `max` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the maximum value. On setting, the given value must be converted to the best representation of the number as a floating-point number and then the `max` content attribute must be set to that string.

The `low` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the low boundary. On setting, the given value must be converted to the best representation of the number as a floating-point number and then the `low` content attribute must be set to that string.

The `high` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the high boundary. On setting, the given value must be converted to the best representation of the number as a floating-point number and then the `high` content attribute must be set to that string.

The `optimum` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the optimum value. On setting, the given value must be converted to the best representation of the number as a floating-point number and then the `optimum` content attribute must be set to that string.

The `labels` IDL attribute provides a list of the element's `label`s.

The following example shows how a gauge could fall back to localised or pretty-printed text.

    <p>Disk usage: <meter min=0 value=170261928 max=233257824>170 261 928 bytes used
    out of 233 257 824 bytes available</meter></p>

#### 4.10.16 The `fieldset` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Sectioning root.
  Listed and reassociateable form-associated element.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Optionally a `legend` element, followed by flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `disabled` — Whether the form control is disabled
  `form` — Associates the control with a `form` element
  `name` — Name of form control to use in the `form.elements` API
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLFieldSetElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute boolean disabled;
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;
                 attribute DOMString name;

        readonly attribute DOMString type;

        readonly attribute HTMLFormControlsCollection elements;

        readonly attribute boolean willValidate;
        readonly attribute ValidityState validity;
        readonly attribute DOMString validationMessage;
        boolean checkValidity();
        boolean reportValidity();
        void setCustomValidity(DOMString error);
      };

The `fieldset` element represents a set of form controls optionally grouped under a common name.

The name of the group is given by the first `legend` element that is a child of the `fieldset` element, if any. The remainder of the descendants form the group.

The `disabled` attribute, when specified, causes all the form control descendants of the `fieldset` element, excluding those that are descendants of the `fieldset` element's first `legend` element child, if any, to be disabled.

A `fieldset` element is a disabled fieldset if it matches any of the following conditions:

- Its `disabled` attribute is specified
- It is a descendant of another `fieldset` element whose `disabled` attribute is specified, and is not a descendant of that `fieldset` element's first `legend` element child, if any.

The `form` attribute is used to explicitly associate the `fieldset` element with its form owner. The `name` attribute represents the element's name.

fieldset . `type`

  Returns the string "fieldset".

fieldset . `elements`

  Returns an `HTMLFormControlsCollection` of the form controls in the element.

The `disabled` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `type` IDL attribute must return the string "`fieldset`".

The `elements` IDL attribute must return an `HTMLFormControlsCollection` rooted at the `fieldset` element, whose filter matches listed elements.

The `willValidate`, `validity`, and `validationMessage` attributes, and the `checkValidity()`, `reportValidity()`, and `setCustomValidity()` methods, are part of the constraint validation API. The `form` and `name` IDL attributes are part of the element's forms API.

This example shows a `fieldset` element being used to group a set of related controls:

    <fieldset>
     <legend>Display</legend>
     <p><label><input type=radio name=c value=0 checked> Black on White</label>
     <p><label><input type=radio name=c value=1> White on Black</label>
     <p><label><input type=checkbox name=g> Use grayscale</label>
     <p><label>Enhance contrast <input type=range name=e list=contrast min=0 max=100 value=0 step=1></label>
     <datalist id=contrast>
      <option label=Normal value=0>
      <option label=Maximum value=100>
     </datalist>
    </fieldset>

The following snippet shows a fieldset with a checkbox in the legend that controls whether or not the fieldset is enabled. The contents of the fieldset consist of two required text fields and an optional year/month control.

    <fieldset name="clubfields" disabled>
     <legend> <label>
      <input type=checkbox name=club onchange="form.clubfields.disabled = !checked">
      Use Club Card
     </label> </legend>
     <p><label>Name on card: <input name=clubname required></label></p>
     <p><label>Card number: <input name=clubnum required pattern="[-0-9]+"></label></p>
     <p><label>Expiry date: <input name=clubexp type=month></label></p>
    </fieldset>

You can also nest `fieldset` elements. Here is an example expanding on the previous one that does so:

    <fieldset name="clubfields" disabled>
     <legend> <label>
      <input type=checkbox name=club onchange="form.clubfields.disabled = !checked">
      Use Club Card
     </label> </legend>
     <p><label>Name on card: <input name=clubname required></label></p>
     <fieldset name="numfields">
      <legend> <label>
       <input type=radio checked name=clubtype onchange="form.numfields.disabled = !checked">
       My card has numbers on it
      </label> </legend>
      <p><label>Card number: <input name=clubnum required pattern="[-0-9]+"></label></p>
     </fieldset>
     <fieldset name="letfields" disabled>
      <legend> <label>
       <input type=radio name=clubtype onchange="form.letfields.disabled = !checked">
       My card has letters on it
      </label> </legend>
      <p><label>Card code: <input name=clublet required pattern="[A-Za-z]+"></label></p>
     </fieldset>
    </fieldset>

In this example, if the outer "Use Club Card" checkbox is not checked, everything inside the outer `fieldset`, including the two radio buttons in the legends of the two nested `fieldset`s, will be disabled. However, if the checkbox is checked, then the radio buttons will both be enabled and will let you select which of the two inner `fieldset`s is to be enabled.

#### 4.10.17 The `legend` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As the first child of a `fieldset` element.
Content model:
  Phrasing content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLLegendElement : HTMLElement {
        readonly attribute HTMLFormElement? form;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `legend` element represents a caption for the rest of the contents of the `legend` element's parent `fieldset` element, if any.

legend . `form`

  Returns the element's `form` element, if any, or null otherwise.

The `form` IDL attribute's behavior depends on whether the `legend` element is in a `fieldset` element or not. If the `legend` has a `fieldset` element as its parent, then the `form` IDL attribute must return the same value as the `form` IDL attribute on that `fieldset` element. Otherwise, it must return null.

#### 4.10.18 Form control infrastructure

##### 4.10.18.1 A form control's value

Most form controls have a value and a checkedness. (The latter is only used by `input` elements.) These are used to describe how the user interacts with the control.

A control's value is its internal state. As such, it might not match the user's current input.

For instance, if a user enters the word "`three`" into a numeric field that expects digits, the user's input would be the string "three" but the control's value would remain unchanged.

To define the behaviour of constraint validation in the face of the `input` element's `multiple` attribute, `input` elements can also have separately defined values.

The `select` element does not have a value; the selectedness of its `option` elements is what is used instead.

##### 4.10.18.2 Mutability

A form control can be designated as mutable.

This determines (by means of definitions and requirements in this specification that rely on whether an element is so designated) whether or not the user can modify the value or checkedness of a form control, or whether or not a control can be automatically prefilled.

##### 4.10.18.3 Association of controls and forms

A form-associated element can have a relationship with a `form` element, which is called the element's form owner. If a form-associated element is not associated with a `form` element, its form owner is said to be null.

A form-associated element is, by default, associated with its nearest ancestor `form` element (as described below), but, if it is reassociateable, may have a `form` attribute specified to override this.

This feature allows authors to work around the lack of support for nested `form` elements.

If a reassociateable form-associated element has a `form` attribute specified, then that attribute's value must be the ID of a `form` element in the element's owner `Document`.

The rules in this section are complicated by the fact that although conforming documents will never contain nested `form` elements, it is quite possible (e.g. using a script that performs DOM manipulation) to generate documents that have such nested elements. They are also complicated by rules in the HTML parser that, for historical reasons, can result in a form-associated element being associated with a `form` element that is not its ancestor.

When a form-associated element is created, its form owner must be initialised to null (no owner).

When a form-associated element is to be associated with a form, its form owner must be set to that form.

When a form-associated element or one of its ancestors is inserted into a `Document`, then the user agent must reset the form owner of that form-associated element. The HTML parser overrides this requirement when inserting form controls.

When an element changes its parent node resulting in a form-associated element and its form owner (if any) no longer being in the same home subtree, then the user agent must reset the form owner of that form-associated element.

When a reassociateable form-associated element's `form` attribute is set, changed, or removed, then the user agent must reset the form owner of that element.

When a reassociateable form-associated element has a `form` attribute and the ID of any of the elements in the `Document` changes, then the user agent must reset the form owner of that form-associated element.

When a reassociateable form-associated element has a `form` attribute and an element with an ID is inserted into or removed from the `Document`, then the user agent must reset the form owner of that form-associated element.

When the user agent is to reset the form owner of a form-associated element, it must run the following steps:

1. If the element's form owner is not null, and either the element is not reassociateable or its `form` content attribute is not present, and the element's form owner is its nearest `form` element ancestor after the change to the ancestor chain, then do nothing, and abort these steps.

2. Let the element's form owner be null.

3. If the element is reassociateable, has a `form` content attribute, and is itself in a `Document`, then run these substeps:

   1. If the first element in the `Document` to have an ID that is case-sensitively equal to the element's `form` content attribute's value is a `form` element, then associate the form-associated element with that `form` element.

   2. Abort the "reset the form owner" steps.

4. Otherwise, if the form-associated element in question has an ancestor `form` element, then associate the form-associated element with the nearest such ancestor `form` element.

5. Otherwise, the element is left unassociated.

In the following non-conforming snippet:

    ...
     <form id="a">
      <div id="b"></div>
     </form>
     <script>
      document.getElementById('b').innerHTML =
         '<table><tr><td><form id="c"><input id="d"></table>' +
         '<input id="e">';
     </script>
    ...

The form owner of "d" would be the inner nested form "c", while the form owner of "e" would be the outer form "a".

This happens as follows: First, the "e" node gets associated with "c" in the HTML parser. Then, the `innerHTML` algorithm moves the nodes from the temporary document to the "b" element. At this point, the nodes see their ancestor chain change, and thus all the "magic" associations done by the parser are reset to normal ancestor associations.

This example is a non-conforming document, though, as it is a violation of the content models to nest `form` elements.

element . `form`

  Returns the element's form owner.

  Returns null if there isn't one.

Reassociateable form-associated elements have a `form` IDL attribute, which, on getting, must return the element's form owner, or null if there isn't one.

#### 4.10.19 Attributes common to form controls

##### 4.10.19.1 Naming form controls: the `name` attribute

The `name` content attribute gives the name of the form control, as used in form submission and in the `form` element's `elements` object. If the attribute is specified, its value must not be the empty string.

Any non-empty value for `name` is allowed, but the names "`_charset_`" and "`isindex`" are special:

`isindex`

  This value, if used as the name of a Text control that is the first control in a form that is submitted using the `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` mechanism, causes the submission to only include the value of this control, with no name.

`_charset_`

  This value, if used as the name of a Hidden control with no `value` attribute, is automatically given a value during submission consisting of the submission character encoding.

The `name` IDL attribute must reflect the `name` content attribute.

##### 4.10.19.2 Submitting element directionality: the `dirname` attribute

The `dirname` attribute on a form control element enables the submission of the directionality of the element, and gives the name of the field that contains this value during form submission. If such an attribute is specified, its value must not be the empty string.

In this example, a form contains a text field and a submission button:

    <form action="addcomment.cgi" method=post>
     <p><label>Comment: <input type=text name="comment" dirname="comment.dir" required></label></p>
     <p><button name="mode" type=submit value="add">Post Comment</button></p>
    </form>

When the user submits the form, the user agent includes three fields, one called "comment", one called "comment.dir", and one called "mode"; so if the user types "Hello", the submission body might be something like:

    comment=Hello&comment.dir=ltr&mode=add

If the user manually switches to a right-to-left writing direction and enters "مرحبا", the submission body might be something like:

    comment=%D9%85%D8%B1%D8%AD%D8%A8%D8%A7&comment.dir=rtl&mode=add

##### 4.10.19.3 Limiting user input length: the `maxlength` attribute

A form control `maxlength` attribute, controlled by a dirty value flag, declares a limit on the number of characters a user can input.

If an element has its form control `maxlength` attribute specified, the attribute's value must be a valid non-negative integer. If the attribute is specified and applying the rules for parsing non-negative integers to its value results in a number, then that number is the element's maximum allowed value length. If the attribute is omitted or parsing its value results in an error, then there is no maximum allowed value length.

Constraint validation: If an element has a maximum allowed value length, its dirty value flag is true, its value was last changed by a user edit (as opposed to a change made by a script), and the code-unit length of the element's value is greater than the element's maximum allowed value length, then the element is suffering from being too long.

User agents may prevent the user from causing the element's value to be set to a value whose code-unit length is greater than the element's maximum allowed value length.

In the case of `textarea` elements, this is the value, not the raw value, so the textarea wrapping transformation is applied before the maximum allowed value length is checked.

##### 4.10.19.4 Setting minimum input length requirements: the `minlength` attribute

A form control `minlength` attribute, controlled by a dirty value flag, declares a lower bound on the number of characters a user can input.

The `minlength` attribute does not imply the `required` attribute. If the form control has no `minlength` attribute, then the value can still be omitted; the `minlength` attribute only kicks in once the user has entered a value at all. If the empty string is not allowed, then the `required` attribute also needs to be set.

If an element has its form control `minlength` attribute specified, the attribute's value must be a valid non-negative integer. If the attribute is specified and applying the rules for parsing non-negative integers to its value results in a number, then that number is the element's minimum allowed value length. If the attribute is omitted or parsing its value results in an error, then there is no minimum allowed value length.

If an element has both a maximum allowed value length and a minimum allowed value length, the minimum allowed value length must be smaller than or equal to the maximum allowed value length.

Constraint validation: If an element has a minimum allowed value length, its value is not the empty string, and the code-unit length of the element's value is less than the element's minimum allowed value length, then the element is suffering from being too short.

In this example, there are four text fields. The first is required, and has to be at least 5 characters long. The other three are optional, but if the user fills one in, the user has to enter at least 10 characters.

    <form action="/events/menu.cgi" method="post">
     <p><label>Name of Event: <input required minlength=5 maxlength=50 name=event></label></p>
     <p><label>Describe what you would like for breakfast, if anything:
        <textarea name="breakfast" minlength="10"></textarea></label></p>
     <p><label>Describe what you would like for lunch, if anything:
        <textarea name="lunch" minlength="10"></textarea></label></p>
     <p><label>Describe what you would like for dinner, if anything:
        <textarea name="dinner" minlength="10"></textarea></label></p>
     <p><input type=submit value="Submit Request"></p>
    </form>

##### 4.10.19.5 Enabling and disabling form controls: the `disabled` attribute

The `disabled` content attribute is a boolean attribute.

A form control is disabled if any of the following conditions are met:

1. The element is a `button`, `input`, `select`, or `textarea` element, and the `disabled` attribute is specified on this element (regardless of its value).
2. The element is a descendant of a `fieldset` element whose `disabled` attribute is specified, and is not a descendant of that `fieldset` element's first `legend` element child, if any.

A form control that is disabled must prevent any `click` events that are queued on the user interaction task source from being dispatched on the element.

Constraint validation: If an element is disabled, it is barred from constraint validation.

The `disabled` IDL attribute must reflect the `disabled` content attribute.

##### 4.10.19.6 Form submission

Attributes for form submission can be specified both on `form` elements and on submit buttons (elements that represent buttons that submit forms, e.g. an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Submit Button state).

The attributes for form submission that may be specified on `form` elements are `action`, `enctype`, `method`, `novalidate`, and `target`.

The corresponding attributes for form submission that may be specified on submit buttons are `formaction`, `formenctype`, `formmethod`, `formnovalidate`, and `formtarget`. When omitted, they default to the values given on the corresponding attributes on the `form` element.

The `action` and `formaction` content attributes, if specified, must have a value that is a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

The action of an element is the value of the element's `formaction` attribute, if the element is a submit button and has such an attribute, or the value of its form owner's `action` attribute, if it has one, or else the empty string.

The `method` and `formmethod` content attributes are enumerated attributes with the following keywords and states:

- The keyword `get`, mapping to the state GET, indicating the HTTP GET method.
- The keyword `post`, mapping to the state POST, indicating the HTTP POST method.
- The keyword `dialog`, mapping to the state dialog, indicating that submitting the `form` is intended to close the `dialog` box in which the form finds itself, if any, and otherwise not submit.

The invalid value default for these attributes is the GET state. The missing value default for the `method` attribute is also the GET state. (There is no missing value default for the `formmethod` attribute.)

The method of an element is one of those states. If the element is a submit button and has a `formmethod` attribute, then the element's method is that attribute's state; otherwise, it is the form owner's `method` attribute's state.

Here the `method` attribute is used to explicitly specify the default value, "`get`", so that the search query is submitted in the URL:

    <form method="get" action="/search.cgi">
     <p><label>Search terms: <input type=search name=q></label></p>
     <p><input type=submit></p>
    </form>

On the other hand, here the `method` attribute is used to specify the value "`post`", so that the user's message is submitted in the HTTP request's body:

    <form method="post" action="/post-message.cgi">
     <p><label>Message: <input type=text name=m></label></p>
     <p><input type=submit value="Submit message"></p>
    </form>

In this example, a `form` is used with a `dialog`. The `method` attribute's "`dialog`" keyword is used to have the dialog automatically close when the form is submitted.

    <dialog id="ship">
     <form method=dialog>
      <p>A ship has arrived in the harbour.</p>
      <button type=submit value="board">Board the ship</button>
      <button type=submit value="call">Call to the captain</button>
     </form>
    </dialog>
    <script>
     var ship = document.getElementById('ship');
     ship.showModal();
     ship.onclose = function (event) {
       if (ship.returnValue == 'board') {
         // ...
       } else {
         // ...
       }
     };
    </script>

The `enctype` and `formenctype` content attributes are enumerated attributes with the following keywords and states:

- The "`application/x-www-form-urlencoded`" keyword and corresponding state.
- The "`multipart/form-data`" keyword and corresponding state.
- The "`text/plain`" keyword and corresponding state.

The invalid value default for these attributes is the `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` state. The missing value default for the `enctype` attribute is also the `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` state. (There is no missing value default for the `formenctype` attribute.)

The enctype of an element is one of those three states. If the element is a submit button and has a `formenctype` attribute, then the element's enctype is that attribute's state; otherwise, it is the form owner's `enctype` attribute's state.

The `target` and `formtarget` content attributes, if specified, must have values that are valid browsing context names or keywords.

The target of an element is the value of the element's `formtarget` attribute, if the element is a submit button and has such an attribute; or the value of its form owner's `target` attribute, if it has such an attribute; or, if the `Document` contains a `base` element with a `target` attribute, then the value of the `target` attribute of the first such `base` element; or, if there is no such element, the empty string.

The `novalidate` and `formnovalidate` content attributes are boolean attributes. If present, they indicate that the form is not to be validated during submission.

The no-validate state of an element is true if the element is a submit button and the element's `formnovalidate` attribute is present, or if the element's form owner's `novalidate` attribute is present, and false otherwise.

This attribute is useful to include "save" buttons on forms that have validation constraints, to allow users to save their progress even though they haven't fully entered the data in the form. The following example shows a simple form that has two required fields. There are three buttons: one to submit the form, which requires both fields to be filled in; one to save the form so that the user can come back and fill it in later; and one to cancel the form altogether.

    <form action="editor.cgi" method="post">
     <p><label>Name: <input required name=fn></label></p>
     <p><label>Essay: <textarea required name=essay></textarea></label></p>
     <p><input type=submit name=submit value="Submit essay"></p>
     <p><input type=submit formnovalidate name=save value="Save essay"></p>
     <p><input type=submit formnovalidate name=cancel value="Cancel"></p>
    </form>

The `action` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, except that on getting, when the content attribute is missing or its value is the empty string, the document's address must be returned instead. The `target` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name. The `method` and `enctype` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name, limited to only known values. The `encoding` IDL attribute must reflect the `enctype` content attribute, limited to only known values. The `noValidate` IDL attribute must reflect the `novalidate` content attribute. The `formAction` IDL attribute must reflect the `formaction` content attribute, except that on getting, when the content attribute is missing or its value is the empty string, the document's address must be returned instead. The `formEnctype` IDL attribute must reflect the `formenctype` content attribute, limited to only known values. The `formMethod` IDL attribute must reflect the `formmethod` content attribute, limited to only known values. The `formNoValidate` IDL attribute must reflect the `formnovalidate` content attribute. The `formTarget` IDL attribute must reflect the `formtarget` content attribute.

###### 4.10.19.6.1 Autofocusing a form control: the `autofocus` attribute

The `autofocus` content attribute allows the author to indicate that a control is to be focused as soon as the page is loaded or as soon as the `dialog` within which it finds itself is shown, allowing the user to just start typing without having to manually focus the main control.

The `autofocus` attribute is a boolean attribute.

An element's nearest ancestor autofocus scoping root element is the element itself if the element is a `dialog` element, or else is the element's nearest ancestor `dialog` element, if any, or else is the element's root element.

There must not be two elements with the same nearest ancestor autofocus scoping root element that both have the `autofocus` attribute specified.

When an element with the `autofocus` attribute specified is inserted into a document, user agents should run the following steps:

1. Let target be the element's node document.

2. If target has no browsing context, abort these steps.

3. If target's browsing context has no top-level browsing context (e.g. it is a nested browsing context with no parent browsing context), abort these steps.

4. If target's active sandboxing flag set has the sandboxed automatic features browsing context flag, abort these steps.

5. If target's origin is not the same as the origin of the node document of the currently focused element in target's top-level browsing context, abort these steps.

6. If target's origin is not the same as the origin of the active document of target's top-level browsing context, abort these steps.

7. If the user agent has already reached the last step of this list of steps in response to an element being inserted into a `Document` whose top-level browsing context's active document is the same as target's top-level browsing context's active document, abort these steps.

8. If the user has indicated (for example, by starting to type in a form control) that he does not wish focus to be changed, then optionally abort these steps.

9. Queue a task that runs the focusing steps for the element. User agents may also change the scrolling position of the document, or perform some other action that brings the element to the user's attention. The task source for this task is the user interaction task source.

This handles the automatic focusing during document load. The `show()` and `showModal()` methods of `dialog` elements also processes the `autofocus` attribute.

Focusing the control does not imply that the user agent must focus the browser window if it has lost focus.

The `autofocus` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

In the following snippet, the text control would be focused when the document was loaded.

    <input maxlength="256" name="q" value="" autofocus>
    <input type="submit" value="Search">

##### 4.10.19.7 Input modalities: the `inputmode` attribute

The `inputmode` content attribute is an enumerated attribute that specifies what kind of input mechanism would be most helpful for users entering content into the form control.

User agents must recognise all the keywords and corresponding states given below, but need not support all of the corresponding states. If a keyword's state is not supported, the user agent must act as if the keyword instead mapped to the given state's fallback state, as defined below. This fallback behaviour is transitive.

For example, if a user agent with a QWERTY keyboard layout does not support text prediction and automatic capitalization, then it could treat the `latin-prose` keyword in the same way as the `verbatim` keyword, following the chain Latin Prose → Latin Text → Latin Verbatim.

The possible keywords and states for the attributes are listed in the following table. The keywords are listed in the first column. Each maps to the state given in the cell in the second column of that keyword's row, and that state has the fallback state given in the cell in the third column of that row.

Keyword | State | Fallback state | Description
--- | --- | --- | ---
`verbatim` | Latin Verbatim | Default | Alphanumeric Latin-script input of non-prose content, e.g. usernames, passwords, product codes.
`latin` | Latin Text | Latin Verbatim | Latin-script input in the user's preferred language(s), with some typing aids enabled (e.g. text prediction). Intended for human-to-computer communications, e.g. free-form text search fields.
`latin-name` | Latin Name | Latin Text | Latin-script input in the user's preferred language(s), with typing aids intended for entering human names enabled (e.g. text prediction from the user's contact list and automatic capitalisation at every word). Intended for situations such as customer name fields.
`latin-prose` | Latin Prose | Latin Text | Latin-script input in the user's preferred language(s), with aggressive typing aids intended for human-to-human communications enabled (e.g. text prediction and automatic capitalisation at the start of sentences). Intended for situations such as e-mails and instant messaging.
`full-width-latin` | Full-width Latin | Latin Prose | Latin-script input in the user's secondary language(s), using full-width characters, with aggressive typing aids intended for human-to-human communications enabled (e.g. text prediction and automatic capitalisation at the start of sentences). Intended for latin text embedded inside CJK text.
`kana` | Kana | Default | Kana or romaji input, typically hiragana input, using full-width characters, with support for converting to kanji. Intended for Japanese text input.
`kana-name` | Kana Name | Kana | Kana or romaji input, typically hiragana input, using full-width characters, with support for converting to kanji, and with typing aids intended for entering human names enabled (e.g. text prediction from the user's contact list). Intended for situations such as customer name fields.
`katakana` | Katakana | Kana | Katakana input, using full-width characters, with support for converting to kanji. Intended for Japanese text input.
`numeric` | Numeric | Default | Numeric input, including keys for the digits 0 to 9, the user's preferred thousands separator character, and the character for indicating negative numbers. Intended for numeric codes, e.g. credit card numbers. (For numbers, prefer "`<input type=number>`".)
`tel` | Telephone | Numeric | Telephone number input, including keys for the digits 0 to 9, the "#" character, and the "*" character. In some locales, this can also include alphabetic mnemonic labels (e.g. in the US, the key labeled "2" is historically also labeled with the letters A, B, and C). Rarely necessary; use "`<input type=tel>`" instead.
`email` | E-mail | Default | Text input in the user's locale, with keys for aiding in the input of e-mail addresses, such as that for the "@" character and the "." character. Rarely necessary; use "`<input type=email>`" instead.
`url` | URL | Default | Text input in the user's locale, with keys for aiding in the input of Web addresses, such as that for the "/" and "." characters and for quick input of strings commonly found in domain names such as "www." or ".co.uk". Rarely necessary; use "`<input type=url>`" instead.

The last three keywords listed above are only provided for completeness, and are rarely necessary, as dedicated input controls exist for their usual use cases (as described in the table above).

User agents must all support the Default input mode state, which corresponds to the user agent's default input modality. This specification does not define how the user agent's default modality is to operate. The missing value default is the default input mode state.

User agents should use the input modality corresponding to the state of the `inputmode` attribute when exposing a user interface for editing the value of a form control to which the attribute applies. An input modality corresponding to a state is one designed to fit the description of the state in the table above. This value can change dynamically; user agents should update their interface as the attribute changes state, unless that would go against the user's wishes.

##### 4.10.19.8 Autofill

###### 4.10.19.8.1 Autofilling form controls: the `autocomplete` attribute

User agents sometimes have features for helping users fill forms in, for example prefilling the user's address based on earlier user input. The `autocomplete` content attribute can be used to hint to the user agent how to, or indeed whether to, provide such a feature.

There are two ways this attribute is used. When wearing the autofill expectation mantle, the `autocomplete` attribute describes what input is expected from users. When wearing the autofill anchor mantle, the `autocomplete` attribute describes the meaning of the given value.

On an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state, the `autocomplete` attribute wears the autofill anchor mantle. In all other cases, it wears the autofill expectation mantle.

When wearing the autofill expectation mantle, the `autocomplete` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is an ordered set of space-separated tokens consisting of either a single token that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`off`", or a single token that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`on`", or autofill detail tokens.

When wearing the autofill anchor mantle, the `autocomplete` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is an ordered set of space-separated tokens consisting of just autofill detail tokens (i.e. the "`on`" and "`off`" keywords are not allowed).

Autofill detail tokens are the following, in the order given below:

1. Optionally, a token whose first eight characters are an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`section-`", meaning that the field belongs to the named group.

   For example, if there are two shipping addresses in the form, then they could be marked up as:

       <fieldset>
        <legend>Ship the blue gift to...</legend>
        <p> <label> Address:     <input name=ba autocomplete="section-blue shipping street-address"> </label>
        <p> <label> City:        <input name=bc autocomplete="section-blue shipping address-level1"> </label>
        <p> <label> Postal Code: <input name=bp autocomplete="section-blue shipping postal-code"> </label>
       </fieldset>
       <fieldset>
        <legend>Ship the red gift to...</legend>
        <p> <label> Address:     <input name=ra autocomplete="section-red shipping street-address"> </label>
        <p> <label> City:        <input name=rc autocomplete="section-red shipping address-level1"> </label>
        <p> <label> Postal Code: <input name=rp autocomplete="section-red shipping postal-code"> </label>
       </fieldset>

2. Optionally, a token that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the following strings:

   - "`shipping`", meaning the field is part of the shipping address or contact information
   - "`billing`", meaning the field is part of the billing address or contact information

3. Either of the following two options:

   - A token that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the following autofill field names, excluding those that are inappropriate for the control:

     - "`name`"
     - "`honorific-prefix`"
     - "`given-name`"
     - "`additional-name`"
     - "`family-name`"
     - "`honorific-suffix`"
     - "`nickname`"
     - "`username`"
     - "`new-password`"
     - "`current-password`"
     - "`organization-title`"
     - "`organization`"
     - "`street-address`"
     - "`address-line1`"
     - "`address-line2`"
     - "`address-line3`"
     - "`address-level4`"
     - "`address-level3`"
     - "`address-level2`"
     - "`address-level1`"
     - "`country`"
     - "`country-name`"
     - "`postal-code`"
     - "`cc-name`"
     - "`cc-given-name`"
     - "`cc-additional-name`"
     - "`cc-family-name`"
     - "`cc-number`"
     - "`cc-exp`"
     - "`cc-exp-month`"
     - "`cc-exp-year`"
     - "`cc-csc`"
     - "`cc-type`"
     - "`transaction-currency`"
     - "`transaction-amount`"
     - "`language`"
     - "`bday`"
     - "`bday-day`"
     - "`bday-month`"
     - "`bday-year`"
     - "`sex`"
     - "`url`"
     - "`photo`"

     (See the table below for descriptions of these values.)

   - The following, in the given order:

     1. Optionally, a token that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the following strings:

        - "`home`", meaning the field is for contacting someone at their residence
        - "`work`", meaning the field is for contacting someone at their workplace
        - "`mobile`", meaning the field is for contacting someone regardless of location
        - "`fax`", meaning the field describes a fax machine's contact details
        - "`pager`", meaning the field describes a pager's or beeper's contact details

     2. A token that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the following autofill field names, excluding those that are inappropriate for the control:

        - "`tel`"
        - "`tel-country-code`"
        - "`tel-national`"
        - "`tel-area-code`"
        - "`tel-local`"
        - "`tel-local-prefix`"
        - "`tel-local-suffix`"
        - "`tel-extension`"
        - "`email`"
        - "`impp`"

        (See the table below for descriptions of these values.)

As noted earlier, the meaning of the attribute and its keywords depends on the mantle that the attribute is wearing.

When wearing the autofill expectation mantle...

  The "`off`" keyword indicates either that the control's input data is particularly sensitive (for example the activation code for a nuclear weapon); or that it is a value that will never be reused (for example a one-time-key for a bank login) and the user will therefore have to explicitly enter the data each time, instead of being able to rely on the UA to prefill the value for him; or that the document provides its own autocomplete mechanism and does not want the user agent to provide autocompletion values.

  The "`on`" keyword indicates that the user agent is allowed to provide the user with autocompletion values, but does not provide any further information about what kind of data the user might be expected to enter. User agents would have to use heuristics to decide what autocompletion values to suggest.

  The autofill field listed above indicate that the user agent is allowed to provide the user with autocompletion values, and specifies what kind of value is expected. The meaning of each such keyword is described in the table below.

  If the `autocomplete` attribute is omitted, the default value corresponding to the state of the element's form owner's `autocomplete` attribute is used instead (either "`on`" or "`off`"). If there is no form owner, then the value "`on`" is used.

When wearing the autofill anchor mantle...

  The autofill field listed above indicate that the value of the particular kind of value specified is that value provided for this element. The meaning of each such keyword is described in the table below.

  In this example the page has explicitly specified the currency and amount of the transaction. The form requests a credit card and other billing details. The user agent could use this information to suggest a credit card that it knows has sufficient balance and that supports the relevant currency.

      <form method=post action="step2.cgi">
       <input type=hidden autocomplete=transaction-currency value="CHF">
       <input type=hidden autocomplete=transaction-amount value="15.00">
       <p><label>Credit card number: <input type=text inputmode=numeric autocomplete=cc-number></label>
       <p><label>Expiry Date: <input type=month autocomplete=cc-exp></label>
       <p><input type=submit value="Continue...">
      </form>

The autofill field keywords relate to each other as described in the table below. Each field name listed on a row of this table corresponds to the meaning given in the cell for that row in the column labeled "Meaning". Some fields correspond to subparts of other fields; for example, a credit card expiry date can be expressed as one field giving both the month and year of expiry ("`cc-exp`"), or as two fields, one giving the month ("`cc-exp-month`") and one the year ("`cc-exp-year`"). In such cases, the names of the broader fields cover multiple rows, in which the narrower fields are defined.

Generally, authors are encouraged to use the broader fields rather than the narrower fields, as the narrower fields tend to expose Western biases. For example, while it is common in some Western cultures to have a given name and a family name, in that order (and thus often referred to as a first name and a surname), many cultures put the family name first and the given name second, and many others simply have one name (a mononym). Having a single field is therefore more flexible.

Some fields are only appropriate for certain form controls. An autofill field name is inappropriate for a control if the control does not belong to the group listed for that autofill field in the fifth column of the first row describing that autofill field in the table below. What controls fall into each group is described below the table.

Field name | Meaning | Canonical Format | Canonical Format Example | Control group
--- | --- | --- | --- | ---
"`name`" | Full name | Free-form text, no newlines | Sir Timothy John Berners-Lee, OM, KBE, FRS, FREng, FRSA | Text
| "`honorific-prefix`" | Prefix or title (e.g. "Mr.", "Ms.", "Dr.", "Mlle") | Free-form text, no newlines | Sir | Text
"`given-name`" | Given name (in some Western cultures, also known as the first name) | Free-form text, no newlines | Timothy | Text
"`additional-name`" | Additional names (in some Western cultures, also known as middle names, forenames other than the first name) | Free-form text, no newlines | John | Text
"`family-name`" | Family name (in some Western cultures, also known as the last name or surname) | Free-form text, no newlines | Berners-Lee | Text
"`honorific-suffix`" | Suffix (e.g. "Jr.", "B.Sc.", "MBASW", "II") | Free-form text, no newlines | OM, KBE, FRS, FREng, FRSA | Text
"`nickname`" | Nickname, screen name, handle: a typically short name used instead of the full name | Free-form text, no newlines | Tim | Text
"`organization-title`" | Job title (e.g. "Software Engineer", "Senior Vice President", "Deputy Managing Director") | Free-form text, no newlines | Professor | Text
"`username`" | A username | Free-form text, no newlines | timbl | Text
"`new-password`" | A new password (e.g. when creating an account or changing a password) | Free-form text, no newlines | GUMFXbadyrS3 | Password
"`current-password`" | The current password for the account identified by the `username` field (e.g. when logging in) | Free-form text, no newlines | qwerty | Password
"`organization`" | Company name corresponding to the person, address, or contact information in the other fields associated with this field | Free-form text, no newlines | World Wide Web Consortium | Text
"`street-address`" | Street address (multiple lines, newlines preserved) | Free-form text | 32 Vassar Street MIT Room 32-G524 | Multiline
| "`address-line1`" | Street address (one line per field) | Free-form text, no newlines | 32 Vassar Street | Text
"`address-line2`" | Free-form text, no newlines | MIT Room 32-G524 | Text
"`address-line3`" | Free-form text, no newlines |  | Text
"`address-level4`" | The most fine-grained administrative level, in addresses with four administrative levels | Free-form text, no newlines |  | Text
"`address-level3`" | The third administrative level, in addresses with three or more administrative levels | Free-form text, no newlines |  | Text
"`address-level2`" | The second administrative level, in addresses with two or more administrative levels; in the countries with two administrative levels, this would typically be the city, town, village, or other locality within which the relevant street address is found | Free-form text, no newlines | Cambridge | Text
"`address-level1`" | The broadest administrative level in the address, i.e. the province within which the locality is found; for example, in the US, this would be the state; in Switzerland it would be the canton; in the UK, the post town | Free-form text, no newlines | MA | Text
"`country`" | Country code | Valid ISO 3166-1-alpha-2 country code [ISO3166] | US | Text
"`country-name`" | Country name | Free-form text, no newlines; derived from `country` in some cases | US | Text
"`postal-code`" | Postal code, post code, ZIP code, CEDEX code (if CEDEX, append "CEDEX", and the arrondissement, if relevant, to the `address-level2` field) | Free-form text, no newlines | 02139 | Text
"`cc-name`" | Full name as given on the payment instrument | Free-form text, no newlines | Tim Berners-Lee | Text
| "`cc-given-name`" | Given name as given on the payment instrument (in some Western cultures, also known as the first name) | Free-form text, no newlines | Tim | Text
"`cc-additional-name`" | Additional names given on the payment instrument (in some Western cultures, also known as middle names, forenames other than the first name) | Free-form text, no newlines |  | Text
"`cc-family-name`" | Family name given on the payment instrument (in some Western cultures, also known as the last name or surname) | Free-form text, no newlines | Berners-Lee | Text
"`cc-number`" | Code identifying the payment instrument (e.g. the credit card number, bank account number) | ASCII digits | 4114360123456785 | Text
"`cc-exp`" | Expiration date of the payment instrument | Valid month string | 2014-12 | Month
| "`cc-exp-month`" | Month component of the expiration date of the payment instrument | Valid integer in the range 1..12 | 12 | Numeric
"`cc-exp-year`" | Year component of the expiration date of the payment instrument | Valid integer greater than zero | 2014 | Numeric
"`cc-csc`" | Security code for the payment instrument (also known as the card security code (CSC), card validation code (CVC), card verification value (CVV), signature panel code (SPC), credit card ID (CCID), etc) | ASCII digits | 419 | Text
"`cc-type`" | Type of payment instrument | Free-form text, no newlines | Visa | Text
"`transaction-currency`" | The currency that the user would prefer the transaction to use | ISO 4217 currency code [ISO4217] | GBP | Text
"`transaction-amount`" | The amount that the user would like for the transaction (e.g. when entering a bid or sale price) | Valid floating-point number | 401.00 | Numeric
"`language`" | Preferred language | Valid BCP 47 language tag [BCP47] | en | Text
"`bday`" | Birthday | Valid date string | 1955-06-08 | Date
| "`bday-day`" | Day component of birthday | Valid integer in the range 1..31 | 8 | Numeric
"`bday-month`" | Month component of birthday | Valid integer in the range 1..12 | 6 | Numeric
"`bday-year`" | Year component of birthday | Valid integer greater than zero | 1955 | Numeric
"`sex`" | Gender identity (e.g. Female, Fa'afafine) | Free-form text, no newlines | Male | Text
"`url`" | Home page or other Web page corresponding to the company, person, address, or contact information in the other fields associated with this field | Valid URL | http://www.w3.org/People/Berners-Lee/ | URL
"`photo`" | Photograph, icon, or other image corresponding to the company, person, address, or contact information in the other fields associated with this field | Valid URL | http://www.w3.org/Press/Stock/Berners-Lee/2001-europaeum-eighth.jpg | URL
"`tel`" | Full telephone number, including country code | ASCII digits and U+0020 SPACE characters, prefixed by a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) | +1 617 253 5702 | Tel
| "`tel-country-code`" | Country code component of the telephone number | ASCII digits prefixed by a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) | +1 | Text
"`tel-national`" | Telephone number without the county code component, with a country-internal prefix applied if applicable | ASCII digits and U+0020 SPACE characters | 617 253 5702 | Text
| "`tel-area-code`" | Area code component of the telephone number, with a country-internal prefix applied if applicable | ASCII digits | 617 | Text
"`tel-local`" | Telephone number without the country code and area code components | ASCII digits | 2535702 | Text
| "`tel-local-prefix`" | First part of the component of the telephone number that follows the area code, when that component is split into two components | ASCII digits | 253 | Text
"`tel-local-suffix`" | Second part of the component of the telephone number that follows the area code, when that component is split into two components | ASCII digits | 5702 | Text
"`tel-extension`" | Telephone number internal extension code | ASCII digits | 1000 | Text
"`email`" | E-mail address | Valid e-mail address | timbl@w3.org | E-mail
"`impp`" | URL representing an instant messaging protocol endpoint (for example, "`aim:goim?screenname=example`" or "`xmpp:fred@example.net`") | Valid URL | irc://example.org/timbl,isuser | URL

The groups correspond to controls as follows:

Text
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Text state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Search state
  `textarea` elements
  `select` elements
Multiline
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state
  `textarea` elements
  `select` elements
Password
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Text state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Search state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Password state
  `textarea` elements
  `select` elements
URL
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Text state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Search state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the URL state
  `textarea` elements
  `select` elements
E-mail
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Text state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Search state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the E-mail state
  `textarea` elements
  `select` elements
Tel
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Text state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Search state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Telephone state
  `textarea` elements
  `select` elements
Numeric
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Text state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Search state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Number state
  `textarea` elements
  `select` elements
Month
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Text state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Search state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Month state
  `textarea` elements
  `select` elements
Date
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Text state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Search state
  `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Date state
  `textarea` elements
  `select` elements

Address levels: The "`address-level1`" – "`address-level4`" fields are used to describe the locality of the street address. Different locales have different numbers of levels. For example, the US uses two levels (state and town), the UK uses one or two depending on the address (the post town, and in some cases the locality), and China can use three (province, city, district). The "`address-level1`" field represents the widest administrative division. Different locales order the fields in different ways; for example, in the US the town (level 2) precedes the state (level 1); while in Japan the prefecture (level 1) precedes the city (level 2) which precedes the district (level 3). Authors are encouraged to provide forms that are presented in a way that matches the country's conventions (hiding, showing, and rearranging fields accordingly as the user changes the country).

###### 4.10.19.8.2 Processing model

Each `input` element to which the `autocomplete` attribute applies, each `select` element, and each `textarea` element, has an autofill hint set, an autofill scope, an autofill field name, and an IDL-exposed autofill value.

The autofill field name specifies the specific kind of data expected in the field, e.g. "`street-address`" or "`cc-exp`".

The autofill hint set identifies what address or contact information type the user agent is to look at, e.g. "`shipping` `fax`" or "`billing`".

The autofill scope identifies the group of fields whose information concerns the same subject, and consists of the autofill hint set with, if applicable, the "`section-*`" prefix, e.g. "`billing`", "`section-parent shipping`", or "`section-child shipping home`".

These values are defined as the result of running the following algorithm:

1. If the element has no `autocomplete` attribute, then jump to the step labeled default.

2. Let tokens be the result of splitting the attribute's value on spaces.

3. If tokens is empty, then jump to the step labeled default.

4. Let index be the index of the last token in tokens.

5. If the indexth token in tokens is not an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the tokens given in the first column of the following table, or if the number of tokens in tokens is greater than the maximum number given in the cell in the second column of that token's row, then jump to the step labeled default. Otherwise, let field be the string given in the cell of the first column of the matching row, and let category be the value of the cell in the third column of that same row.

   Token | Maximum number of tokens | Category
   --- | --- | ---
   "`off`" | 1 | Off
   "`on`" | 1 | Automatic
   "`name`" | 3 | Normal
   "`honorific-prefix`" | 3 | Normal
   "`given-name`" | 3 | Normal
   "`additional-name`" | 3 | Normal
   "`family-name`" | 3 | Normal
   "`honorific-suffix`" | 3 | Normal
   "`nickname`" | 3 | Normal
   "`organization-title`" | 3 | Normal
   "`username`" | 3 | Normal
   "`new-password`" | 3 | Normal
   "`current-password`" | 3 | Normal
   "`organization`" | 3 | Normal
   "`street-address`" | 3 | Normal
   "`address-line1`" | 3 | Normal
   "`address-line2`" | 3 | Normal
   "`address-line3`" | 3 | Normal
   "`address-level4`" | 3 | Normal
   "`address-level3`" | 3 | Normal
   "`address-level2`" | 3 | Normal
   "`address-level1`" | 3 | Normal
   "`country`" | 3 | Normal
   "`country-name`" | 3 | Normal
   "`postal-code`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-name`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-given-name`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-additional-name`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-family-name`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-number`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-exp`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-exp-month`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-exp-year`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-csc`" | 3 | Normal
   "`cc-type`" | 3 | Normal
   "`transaction-currency`" | 3 | Normal
   "`transaction-amount`" | 3 | Normal
   "`language`" | 3 | Normal
   "`bday`" | 3 | Normal
   "`bday-day`" | 3 | Normal
   "`bday-month`" | 3 | Normal
   "`bday-year`" | 3 | Normal
   "`sex`" | 3 | Normal
   "`url`" | 3 | Normal
   "`photo`" | 3 | Normal
   "`tel`" | 4 | Contact
   "`tel-country-code`" | 4 | Contact
   "`tel-national`" | 4 | Contact
   "`tel-area-code`" | 4 | Contact
   "`tel-local`" | 4 | Contact
   "`tel-local-prefix`" | 4 | Contact
   "`tel-local-suffix`" | 4 | Contact
   "`tel-extension`" | 4 | Contact
   "`email`" | 4 | Contact
   "`impp`" | 4 | Contact

6. If category is Off or Automatic but the element's `autocomplete` attribute is wearing the autofill anchor mantle, then jump to the step labeled default.

7. If category is Off, let the element's autofill field name be the string "`off`", let its autofill hint set be empty, and let its IDL-exposed autofill value be the string "`off`". Then, abort these steps.

8. If category is Automatic, let the element's autofill field name be the string "`on`", let its autofill hint set be empty, and let its IDL-exposed autofill value be the string "`on`". Then, abort these steps.

9. Let scope tokens be an empty list.

10. Let hint tokens be an empty set.

11. Let IDL value have the same value as field.

12. If the indexth token in tokens is the first entry, then skip to the step labeled done.

13. Decrement index by one.

14. If category is Contact and the indexth token in tokens is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the strings in the following list, then run the substeps that follow:

    - "`home`"
    - "`work`"
    - "`mobile`"
    - "`fax`"
    - "`pager`"

    The substeps are:

    1. Let contact be the matching string from the list above.

    2. Insert contact at the start of scope tokens.

    3. Add contact to hint tokens.

    4. Let IDL value be the concatenation of contact, a U+0020 SPACE character, and the previous value of IDL value (which at this point will always be field).

    5. If the indexth entry in tokens is the first entry, then skip to the step labeled done.

    6. Decrement index by one.

15. If the indexth token in tokens is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the strings in the following list, then run the substeps that follow:

    - "`shipping`"
    - "`billing`"

    The substeps are:

    1. Let mode be the matching string from the list above.

    2. Insert mode at the start of scope tokens.

    3. Add mode to hint tokens.

    4. Let IDL value be the concatenation of mode, a U+0020 SPACE character, and the previous value of IDL value (which at this point will either be field or the concatenation of contact, a space, and field).

    5. If the indexth entry in tokens is the first entry, then skip to the step labeled done.

    6. Decrement index by one.

16. If the indexth entry in tokens is not the first entry, then jump to the step labeled default.

17. If the first eight characters of the indexth token in tokens are not an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`section-`", then jump to the step labeled default.

18. Let section be the indexth token in tokens, converted to ASCII lowercase.

19. Insert section at the start of scope tokens.

20. Let IDL value be the concatenation of section, a U+0020 SPACE character, and the previous value of IDL value.

21. Done: Let the element's autofill hint set be hint tokens.

22. Let the element's autofill scope be scope tokens.

23. Let the element's autofill field name be field.

24. Let the element's IDL-exposed autofill value be IDL value.

25. Abort these steps.

26. Default: Let the element's IDL-exposed autofill value be the empty string, and its autofill hint set and autofill scope be empty.

27. If the element's `autocomplete` attribute is wearing the autofill anchor mantle, then let the element's autofill field name be the empty string and abort these steps.

28. Let form be the element's form owner, if any, or null otherwise.

29. If form is not null and form's `autocomplete` attribute is in the off state, then let the element's autofill field name be "`off`".

    Otherwise, let the element's autofill field name be "`on`".

For the purposes of autofill, a control's data depends on the kind of control:

An `input` element with its `type` attribute in the E-mail state and with the `multiple` attribute specified
  The element's values.
Any other `input` element
A `textarea` element
  The element's value.
A `select` element with its `multiple` attribute specified
  The `option` elements in the `select` element's list of options that have their selectedness set to true.
Any other `select` element
  The `option` element in the `select` element's list of options that has its selectedness set to true.

How to process the autofill hint set, autofill scope, and autofill field name depends on the mantle that the `autocomplete` attribute is wearing.

When wearing the autofill expectation mantle...

  When an element's autofill field name is "`off`", the user agent should not remember the control's data, and should not offer past values to the user.

  In addition, when an element's autofill field name is "`off`", values are reset when traversing the history.

  Banks frequently do not want UAs to prefill login information:

      <p><label>Account: <input type="text" name="ac" autocomplete="off"></label></p>
      <p><label>PIN: <input type="password" name="pin" autocomplete="off"></label></p>

  When an element's autofill field name is not "`off`", the user agent may store the control's data, and may offer previously stored values to the user.

  For example, suppose a user visits a page with this control:

      <select name="country">
       <option>Afghanistan
       <option>Albania
       <option>Algeria
       <option>Andorra
       <option>Angola
       <option>Antigua and Barbuda
       <option>Argentina
       <option>Armenia
       <!-- ... -->
       <option>Yemen
       <option>Zambia
       <option>Zimbabwe
      </select>

  This might render as follows:

  Suppose that on the first visit to this page, the user selects "Zambia". On the second visit, the user agent could duplicate the entry for Zambia at the top of the list, so that the interface instead looks like this:

  When the autofill field name is "`on`", the user agent should attempt to use heuristics to determine the most appropriate values to offer the user, e.g. based on the element's `name` value, the position of the element in the document's DOM, what other fields exist in the form, and so forth.

  When the autofill field name is one of the names of the autofill fields described above, the user agent should provide suggestions that match the meaning of the field name as given in the table earlier in this section. The autofill hint set should be used to select amongst multiple possible suggestions.

  For example, if a user once entered one address into fields that used the "`shipping`" keyword, and another address into fields that used the "`billing`" keyword, then in subsequent forms only the first address would be suggested for form controls whose autofill hint set contains the keyword "`shipping`". Both addresses might be suggested, however, for address-related form controls whose autofill hint set does not contain either keyword.

When wearing the autofill anchor mantle...

  When the autofill field name is not the empty string, then the user agent must act as if the user had specified the control's data for the given autofill hint set, autofill scope, and autofill field name combination.

When the user agent autofills form controls, elements with the same form owner and the same autofill scope must use data relating to the same person, address, payment instrument, and contact details. When a user agent autofills "`country`" and "`country-name`" fields with the same form owner and autofill scope, and the user agent has a value for the `country`" field(s), then the "`country-name`" field(s) must be filled using a human-readable name for the same country. When a user agent fills in multiple fields at once, all fields with the same autofill field name, form owner and autofill scope must be filled with the same value.

Suppose a user agent knows of two phone numbers, +1 555 123 1234 and +1 555 666 7777. It would not be conforming for the user agent to fill a field with `autocomplete="shipping tel-local-prefix"` with the value "123" and another field in the same form with `autocomplete="shipping tel-local-suffix"` with the value "7777". The only valid prefilled values given the aforementioned information would be "123" and "1234", or "666" and "7777", respectively.

Similarly, if a form for some reason contained both a "`cc-exp`" field and a "`cc-exp-month`" field, and the user agent prefilled the form, then the month component of the former would have to match the latter.

This requirement interacts with the autofill anchor mantle also. Consider the following markup snippet:

    <form>
     <input type=hidden autocomplete="nickname" value="TreePlate">
     <input type=text autocomplete="nickname">
    </form>

The only value that a conforming user agent could suggest in the text field is "TreePlate", the value given by the hidden `input` element.

The "`section-*`" tokens in the autofill scope are opaque; user agents must not attempt to derive meaning from the precise values of these tokens.

For example, it would not be conforming if the user agent decided that it should offer the address it knows to be the user's daughter's address for "`section-child`" and the addresses it knows to be the user's spouses' addresses for "`section-spouse`".

The autocompletion mechanism must be implemented by the user agent acting as if the user had modified the control's data, and must be done at a time where the element is mutable (e.g. just after the element has been inserted into the document, or when the user agent stops parsing). User agents must only prefill controls using values that the user could have entered.

For example, if a `select` element only has `option` elements with values "Steve" and "Rebecca", "Jay", and "Bob", and has an autofill field name "`given-name`", but the user agent's only idea for what to prefill the field with is "Evan", then the user agent cannot prefill the field. It would not be conforming to somehow set the `select` element to the value "Evan", since the user could not have done so themselves.

A user agent prefilling a form control's value must not cause that control to suffer from a type mismatch, suffer from being too long, suffer from being too short, suffer from an underflow, suffer from an overflow, or suffer from a step mismatch. Except when autofilling for `requestAutocomplete()`, a user agent prefilling a form control's value must not cause that control to suffer from a pattern mismatch either. Where possible given the control's constraints, user agents must use the format given as canonical in the aforementioned table. Where it's not possible for the canonical format to be used, user agents should use heuristics to attempt to convert values so that they can be used.

For example, if the user agent knows that the user's middle name is "Ines", and attempts to prefill a form control that looks like this:

    <input name=middle-initial maxlength=1 autocomplete="additional-name">

...then the user agent could convert "Ines" to "I" and prefill it that way.

A more elaborate example would be with month values. If the user agent knows that the user's birthday is the 27th of July 2012, then it might try to prefill all of the following controls with slightly different values, all driven from this information:

    <input name=b type=month autocomplete="bday">
| 2012-07 | The day is dropped since the Month state only accepts a month/year combination.
    <select name=c autocomplete="bday">
     <option>Jan
     <option>Feb
     ...
     <option>Jul
     <option>Aug
     ...
    </select>
| July | The user agent picks the month from the listed options, either by noticing there are twelve options and picking the 7th, or by recognising that one of the strings (three characters "Jul" followed by a newline and a space) is a close match for the name of the month (July) in one of the user agent's supported languages, or through some other similar mechanism.
    <input name=a type=number min=1 max=12 autocomplete="bday-month">
| 7 | User agent converts "July" to a month number in the range 1..12, like the field.
    <input name=a type=number min=0 max=11 autocomplete="bday-month">
| 6 | User agent converts "July" to a month number in the range 0..11, like the field.
    <input name=a type=number min=1 max=11 autocomplete="bday-month">
|  | User agent doesn't fill in the field, since it can't make a good guess as to what the form expects.

A user agent may allow the user to override an element's autofill field name, e.g. to change it from "`off`" to "`on`" to allow values to be remembered and prefilled despite the page author's objections, or to always "`off`", never remembering values. However, user agents should not allow users to trivially override the autofill field name from "`off`" to "`on`" or other values, as there are significant security implications for the user if all values are always remembered, regardless of the site's preferences.

The `autocomplete` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the element's IDL-exposed autofill value, and on setting, must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

###### 4.10.19.8.3 User interface for bulk autofill

When the `requestAutocomplete()` method on a `form` element is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let form be the element on which the method was invoked.

2. If any of the following conditions are met, then queue a task to fail the autofill request on form with the reason "`disabled`", and abort these steps:

   - the algorithm is not allowed to show a popup

   - form's node document is not fully active

   - form's `autocomplete` attribute is in the off state

   - the user has disabled this feature for this form's node document's origin

   - the user agent does not support this form's fields (e.g. the form has different fields whose autofill scope use different "`section-*`" tokens)

   - the form was obtained via unencrypted channels and the user agent does not support autofill in such situations

   - another instance of this algorithm is already being run for form

   User agents are encouraged to log the precise cause in a developer console, to aid debugging.

3. Let pending autofills be an initially empty list of submittable elements, each annotated with a string known as the original autocomplete value.

4. For each element that matches the following criteria, add the element to pending autofills, with the original autocomplete value annotation being the value of the element's `autocomplete` attribute:

   - the element's form owner is form

   - the element is mutable

   - the element is an `input` element to which the `autocomplete` attribute currently applies, or, the element is a `textarea` element, or, the element is a `select` element

   - the element's `autocomplete` attribute is wearing the autofill expectation mantle

   - the element's autofill field name is neither "`off`" nor "`on`"

5. Return, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

6. Provide an interface for the user to efficiently fill in some or all of the fields listed in pending autofills. Await the user's input. The user agent may include additional (immutable) information, e.g. data obtained from elements with an `autocomplete` attribute wearing the autofill anchor mantle.

7. Queue a task to run the following steps:

   1. If any of the following conditions are met, then fail the autofill request on form with the reason "`disabled`", and abort these steps:

      - form is no longer in a `Document`

      - form's node document is no longer fully active

      - form's `autocomplete` attribute is now in the off state

      Again, user agents are encouraged to log the precise cause in a developer console, to aid debugging.

   2. If the user canceled the operation, fail the autofill request on form with the reason "`cancel`", and abort these steps.

   3. For each element in pending autofills, run the following steps:

      1. Let candidate be the element in question.

      2. Let old autocomplete value be the original autocomplete value annotation associated with candidate in pending autofills.

      3. If all of the following conditions are met, then autofill candidate:

         - candidate's form owner is form

         - candidate is still mutable

         - candidate is an `input` element to which the `autocomplete` attribute still applies, or, candidate is a `textarea` element, or, candidate is a `select` element

         - the element's `autocomplete` attribute is still wearing the autofill expectation mantle

         - candidate's autofill field name is still equal to old autocomplete value

         - the user provided a value to autofill candidate

   4. Statically validate the constraints of form. If the result was negative, then fail the autofill request on form with the reason "`invalid`", and abort these steps.

      Statically validating the constraints of a `form` involves firing `invalid` events to each control that does not satisfy its contraints.

   5. Fire a simple event that bubbles named `autocomplete` at form.

When the user agent is required to fail the autofill request on a `form` element target with a reason reason, the user agent must dispatch an event that uses the `AutocompleteErrorEvent` interface, with the event type `autocompleteerror`, which bubbles, is not cancelable, has no default action, has its `reason` attribute set to reason, and which is trusted, at target.

The task source for the tasks mentioned in this section is the DOM manipulation task source.

###### 4.10.19.8.4 The `AutocompleteErrorEvent` interface

    enum AutocompleteErrorReason { "" /* empty string */, "cancel", "disabled", "invalid" };

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional AutocompleteErrorEventInit eventInitDict)]
    interface AutocompleteErrorEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute AutocompleteErrorReason reason;
    };

    dictionary AutocompleteErrorEventInit : EventInit {
      AutocompleteErrorReason reason;
    };

event . `reason`

  For the `autocompleteerror` event, returns the general reason for the failure of the `requestAutocomplete()` method, from the list below.

The defined reason codes are:

"``" (the empty string)

  Reason is unknown.

"`cancel`"

  The user canceled the autofill interface.

"`disabled`"

  The autofill interface is disabled for this form.

  There are many reasons why this might be the case; the precise reason is not given, to protect the user's privacy. Amongst these reasons are such factors as:

  - The page being delivered over an unencrypted connection (susceptible to man-in-the-middle attacks), when the user agent does not want to risk the user's information being provided to an attacker.

  - The form having a combination of fields for which the user agent does not have a dedicated autofill interface.

  - The form's `autocomplete` attribute being in the off state.

  - The user having disabled the feature.

"`invalid`"

  The fields have been prefilled, but at least one of the controls in the form does not satisfy its constraints.

The `reason` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to the empty string. It represents the context information for the event.

#### 4.10.20 APIs for the text field selections

The `input` and `textarea` elements define the following members in their DOM interfaces for handling their selection:

      void select();
               attribute unsigned long selectionStart;
               attribute unsigned long selectionEnd;
               attribute DOMString selectionDirection;
      void setRangeText(DOMString replacement);
      void setRangeText(DOMString replacement, unsigned long start, unsigned long end, optional SelectionMode selectionMode = "preserve");
      void setSelectionRange(unsigned long start, unsigned long end, optional DOMString direction = "preserve");

The `setRangeText` method uses the following enumeration:

    enum SelectionMode {
      "select",
      "start",
      "end",
      "preserve", // default
    };

These methods and attributes expose and control the selection of `input` and `textarea` text fields.

element . `select`()

  Selects everything in the text field.

element . `selectionStart` [ = value ]

  Returns the offset to the start of the selection.

  Can be set, to change the start of the selection.

element . `selectionEnd` [ = value ]

  Returns the offset to the end of the selection.

  Can be set, to change the end of the selection.

element . `selectionDirection` [ = value ]

  Returns the current direction of the selection.

  Can be set, to change the direction of the selection.

  The possible values are "`forward`", "`backward`", and "`none`".

element . `setSelectionRange`(start, end [, direction] )

  Changes the selection to cover the given substring in the given direction. If the direction is omitted, it will be reset to be the platform default (none or forward).

element . `setRangeText`(replacement [, start, end [, selectionMode ] ] )

  Replaces a range of text with the new text. If the start and end arguments are not provided, the range is assumed to be the selection.

  The final argument determines how the selection should be set after the text has been replaced. The possible values are:

  "`select`"
    Selects the newly inserted text.
  "`start`"
    Moves the selection to just before the inserted text.
  "`end`"
    Moves the selection to just after the selected text.
  "`preserve`"
    Attempts to preserve the selection. This is the default.

For `input` elements, calling these methods while they don't apply, and getting or setting these attributes while they don't apply, must throw an `InvalidStateError` exception. Otherwise, they must act as described below.

For `input` elements, these methods and attributes must operate on the element's value. For `textarea` elements, these methods and attributes must operate on the element's raw value.

Where possible, user interface features for changing the text selection in `input` and `textarea` elements must be implemented in terms of the DOM API described in this section, so that, e.g., all the same events fire.

The selections of `input` and `textarea` elements have a direction, which is either forward, backward, or none. This direction is set when the user manipulates the selection. The exact meaning of the selection direction depends on the platform.

On Windows, the direction indicates the position of the caret relative to the selection: a forward selection has the caret at the end of the selection and a backward selection has the caret at the start of the selection. Windows has no none direction. On Mac, the direction indicates which end of the selection is affected when the user adjusts the size of the selection using the arrow keys with the Shift modifier: the forward direction means the end of the selection is modified, and the backwards direction means the start of the selection is modified. The none direction is the default on Mac, it indicates that no particular direction has yet been selected. The user sets the direction implicitly when first adjusting the selection, based on which directional arrow key was used.

The `select()` method must cause the contents of the text field to be fully selected, with the selection direction being none, if the platform support selections with the direction none, or otherwise forward. The user agent must then queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `select` at the element, using the user interaction task source as the task source.

The `selectionStart` attribute must, on getting, return the offset (in logical order) to the character that immediately follows the start of the selection. If there is no selection, then it must return the offset (in logical order) to the character that immediately follows the text entry cursor.

On setting, it must act as if the `setSelectionRange()` method had been called, with the new value as the first argument; the current value of the `selectionEnd` attribute as the second argument, unless the current value of the `selectionEnd` is less than the new value, in which case the second argument must also be the new value; and the current value of the `selectionDirection` as the third argument.

The `selectionEnd` attribute must, on getting, return the offset (in logical order) to the character that immediately follows the end of the selection. If there is no selection, then it must return the offset (in logical order) to the character that immediately follows the text entry cursor.

On setting, it must act as if the `setSelectionRange()` method had been called, with the current value of the `selectionStart` attribute as the first argument, the new value as the second argument, and the current value of the `selectionDirection` as the third argument.

The `selectionDirection` attribute must, on getting, return the string corresponding to the current selection direction: if the direction is forward, "`forward`"; if the direction is backward, "`backward`"; and otherwise, "`none`".

On setting, it must act as if the `setSelectionRange()` method had been called, with the current value of the `selectionStart` attribute as the first argument, the current value of the `selectionEnd` attribute as the second argument, and the new value as the third argument.

The `setSelectionRange(start, end, direction)` method must set the selection of the text field to the sequence of characters starting with the character at the startth position (in logical order) and ending with the character at the (end-1)th position. Arguments greater than the length of the value of the text field must be treated as pointing at the end of the text field. If end is less than or equal to start then the start of the selection and the end of the selection must both be placed immediately before the character with offset end. In UAs where there is no concept of an empty selection, this must set the cursor to be just before the character with offset end. The direction of the selection must be set to backward if direction is a case-sensitive match for the string "`backward`", forward if direction is a case-sensitive match for the string "`forward`" or if the platform does not support selections with the direction none, and none otherwise (including if the argument is omitted). The user agent must then queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `select` at the element, using the user interaction task source as the task source.

The `setRangeText(replacement, start, end, selectMode)` method must run the following steps:

1. If the method has only one argument, then let start and end have the values of the `selectionStart` attribute and the `selectionEnd` attribute respectively.

   Otherwise, let start, end have the values of the second and third arguments respectively.

2. If start is greater than end, then throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

3. If start is greater than the length of the value of the text field, then set it to the length of the value of the text field.

4. If end is greater than the length of the value of the text field, then set it to the length of the value of the text field.

5. Let selection start be the current value of the `selectionStart` attribute.

6. Let selection end be the current value of the `selectionEnd` attribute.

7. If start is less than end, delete the sequence of characters starting with the character at the startth position (in logical order) and ending with the character at the (end-1)th position.

8. Insert the value of the first argument into the text of the value of the text field, immediately before the startth character.

9. Let new length be the length of the value of the first argument.

10. Let new end be the sum of start and new length.

11. Run the appropriate set of substeps from the following list:

    If the fourth argument's value is "`select`"

      Let selection start be start.

      Let selection end be new end.

    If the fourth argument's value is "`start`"

      Let selection start and selection end be start.

    If the fourth argument's value is "`end`"

      Let selection start and selection end be new end.

    If the fourth argument's value is "`preserve`" (the default)

      1. Let old length be end minus start.

      2. Let delta be new length minus old length.

      3. If selection start is greater than end, then increment it by delta. (If delta is negative, i.e. the new text is shorter than the old text, then this will decrease the value of selection start.)

         Otherwise: if selection start is greater than start, then set it to start. (This snaps the start of the selection to the start of the new text if it was in the middle of the text that it replaced.)

      4. If selection end is greater than end, then increment it by delta in the same way.

         Otherwise: if selection end is greater than start, then set it to new end. (This snaps the end of the selection to the end of the new text if it was in the middle of the text that it replaced.)

12. Set the selection of the text field to the sequence of characters starting with the character at the selection startth position (in logical order) and ending with the character at the (selection end-1)th position. In UAs where there is no concept of an empty selection, this must set the cursor to be just before the character with offset end. The direction of the selection must be set to forward if the platform does not support selections with the direction none, and none otherwise.

13. Queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `select` at the element, using the user interaction task source as the task source.

All elements to which this API applies have either a selection or a text entry cursor position at all times (even for elements that are not being rendered). User agents should follow platform conventions to determine their initial state.

Characters with no visible rendering, such as U+200D ZERO WIDTH JOINER, still count as characters. Thus, for instance, the selection can include just an invisible character, and the text insertion cursor can be placed to one side or another of such a character.

To obtain the currently selected text, the following JavaScript suffices:

    var selectionText = control.value.substring(control.selectionStart, control.selectionEnd);

...where control is the `input` or `textarea` element.

To add some text at the start of a text control, while maintaining the text selection, the three attributes must be preserved:

    var oldStart = control.selectionStart;
    var oldEnd = control.selectionEnd;
    var oldDirection = control.selectionDirection;
    var prefix = "http://";
    control.value = prefix + control.value;
    control.setSelectionRange(oldStart + prefix.length, oldEnd + prefix.length, oldDirection);

...where control is the `input` or `textarea` element.

#### 4.10.21 Constraints

##### 4.10.21.1 Definitions

A submittable element is a candidate for constraint validation except when a condition has barred the element from constraint validation. (For example, an element is barred from constraint validation if it is an `object` element.)

An element can have a custom validity error message defined. Initially, an element must have its custom validity error message set to the empty string. When its value is not the empty string, the element is suffering from a custom error. It can be set using the `setCustomValidity()` method. The user agent should use the custom validity error message when alerting the user to the problem with the control.

An element can be constrained in various ways. The following is the list of validity states that a form control can be in, making the control invalid for the purposes of constraint validation. (The definitions below are non-normative; other parts of this specification define more precisely when each state applies or does not.)

Suffering from being missing

  When a control has no value but has a `required` attribute (`input` `required`, `textarea` `required`); or, in the case of an element in a radio button group, any of the other elements in the group has a `required` attribute; or, for `select` elements, none of the `option` elements have their selectedness set (`select` `required`).

Suffering from a type mismatch

  When a control that allows arbitrary user input has a value that is not in the correct syntax (E-mail, URL).

Suffering from a pattern mismatch

  When a control has a value that doesn't satisfy the `pattern` attribute.

Suffering from being too long

  When a control has a value that is too long for the form control `maxlength` attribute (`input` `maxlength`, `textarea` `maxlength`).

Suffering from being too short

  When a control has a value that is too short for the form control `minlength` attribute (`input` `minlength`, `textarea` `minlength`).

Suffering from an underflow

  When a control has a value that is too low for the `min` attribute.

Suffering from an overflow

  When a control has a value that is too high for the `max` attribute.

Suffering from a step mismatch

  When a control has a value that doesn't fit the rules given by the `step` attribute.

Suffering from bad input

  When a control has incomplete input and the user agent does not think the user ought to be able to submit the form in its current state.

Suffering from a custom error

  When a control's custom validity error message (as set by the element's `setCustomValidity()` method) is not the empty string.

An element can still suffer from these states even when the element is disabled; thus these states can be represented in the DOM even if validating the form during submission wouldn't indicate a problem to the user.

An element satisfies its constraints if it is not suffering from any of the above validity states.

##### 4.10.21.2 Constraint validation

When the user agent is required to statically validate the constraints of `form` element form, it must run the following steps, which return either a positive result (all the controls in the form are valid) or a negative result (there are invalid controls) along with a (possibly empty) list of elements that are invalid and for which no script has claimed responsibility:

1. Let controls be a list of all the submittable elements whose form owner is form, in tree order.

2. Let invalid controls be an initially empty list of elements.

3. For each element field in controls, in tree order, run the following substeps:

   1. If field is not a candidate for constraint validation, then move on to the next element.

   2. Otherwise, if field satisfies its constraints, then move on to the next element.

   3. Otherwise, add field to invalid controls.

4. If invalid controls is empty, then return a positive result and abort these steps.

5. Let unhandled invalid controls be an initially empty list of elements.

6. For each element field in invalid controls, if any, in tree order, run the following substeps:

   1. Fire a simple event named `invalid` that is cancelable at field.

   2. If the event was not canceled, then add field to unhandled invalid controls.

7. Return a negative result with the list of elements in the unhandled invalid controls list.

If a user agent is to interactively validate the constraints of `form` element form, then the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Statically validate the constraints of form, and let unhandled invalid controls be the list of elements returned if the result was negative.

2. If the result was positive, then return that result and abort these steps.

3. Report the problems with the constraints of at least one of the elements given in unhandled invalid controls to the user. User agents may focus one of those elements in the process, by running the focusing steps for that element, and may change the scrolling position of the document, or perform some other action that brings the element to the user's attention. User agents may report more than one constraint violation. User agents may coalesce related constraint violation reports if appropriate (e.g. if multiple radio buttons in a group are marked as required, only one error need be reported). If one of the controls is not being rendered (e.g. it has the `hidden` attribute set) then user agents may report a script error.

4. Return a negative result.

##### 4.10.21.3 The constraint validation API

element . `willValidate`

  Returns true if the element will be validated when the form is submitted; false otherwise.

element . `setCustomValidity`(message)

  Sets a custom error, so that the element would fail to validate. The given message is the message to be shown to the user when reporting the problem to the user.

  If the argument is the empty string, clears the custom error.

element . `validity` . `valueMissing`

  Returns true if the element has no value but is a required field; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `typeMismatch`

  Returns true if the element's value is not in the correct syntax; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `patternMismatch`

  Returns true if the element's value doesn't match the provided pattern; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `tooLong`

  Returns true if the element's value is longer than the provided maximum length; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `tooShort`

  Returns true if the element's value, if it is not the empty string, is shorter than the provided minimum length; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `rangeUnderflow`

  Returns true if the element's value is lower than the provided minimum; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `rangeOverflow`

  Returns true if the element's value is higher than the provided maximum; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `stepMismatch`

  Returns true if the element's value doesn't fit the rules given by the `step` attribute; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `badInput`

  Returns true if the user has provided input in the user interface that the user agent is unable to convert to a value; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `customError`

  Returns true if the element has a custom error; false otherwise.

element . `validity` . `valid`

  Returns true if the element's value has no validity problems; false otherwise.

valid = element . `checkValidity`()

  Returns true if the element's value has no validity problems; false otherwise. Fires an `invalid` event at the element in the latter case.

valid = element . `reportValidity`()

  Returns true if the element's value has no validity problems; otherwise, returns false, fires an `invalid` event at the element, and (if the event isn't canceled) reports the problem to the user.

element . `validationMessage`

  Returns the error message that would be shown to the user if the element was to be checked for validity.

The `willValidate` attribute must return true if an element is a candidate for constraint validation, and false otherwise (i.e. false if any conditions are barring it from constraint validation).

The `setCustomValidity(message)`, when invoked, must set the custom validity error message to the value of the given message argument.

In the following example, a script checks the value of a form control each time it is edited, and whenever it is not a valid value, uses the `setCustomValidity()` method to set an appropriate message.

    <label>Feeling: <input name=f type="text" oninput="check(this)"></label>
    <script>
     function check(input) {
       if (input.value == "good" ||
           input.value == "fine" ||
           input.value == "tired") {
         input.setCustomValidity('"' + input.value + '" is not a feeling.');
       } else {
         // input is fine -- reset the error message
         input.setCustomValidity('');
       }
     }
    </script>

The `validity` attribute must return a `ValidityState` object that represents the validity states of the element. This object is live, and the same object must be returned each time the element's `validity` attribute is retrieved.

    interface ValidityState {
      readonly attribute boolean valueMissing;
      readonly attribute boolean typeMismatch;
      readonly attribute boolean patternMismatch;
      readonly attribute boolean tooLong;
      readonly attribute boolean tooShort;
      readonly attribute boolean rangeUnderflow;
      readonly attribute boolean rangeOverflow;
      readonly attribute boolean stepMismatch;
      readonly attribute boolean badInput;
      readonly attribute boolean customError;
      readonly attribute boolean valid;
    };

A `ValidityState` object has the following attributes. On getting, they must return true if the corresponding condition given in the following list is true, and false otherwise.

`valueMissing`

  The control is suffering from being missing.

`typeMismatch`

  The control is suffering from a type mismatch.

`patternMismatch`

  The control is suffering from a pattern mismatch.

`tooLong`

  The control is suffering from being too long.

`tooShort`

  The control is suffering from being too short.

`rangeUnderflow`

  The control is suffering from an underflow.

`rangeOverflow`

  The control is suffering from an overflow.

`stepMismatch`

  The control is suffering from a step mismatch.

`badInput`

  The control is suffering from bad input.

`customError`

  The control is suffering from a custom error.

`valid`

  None of the other conditions are true.

When the `checkValidity()` method is invoked, if the element is a candidate for constraint validation and does not satisfy its constraints, the user agent must fire a simple event named `invalid` that is cancelable (but in this case has no default action) at the element and return false. Otherwise, it must only return true without doing anything else.

When the `reportValidity()` method is invoked, if the element is a candidate for constraint validation and does not satisfy its constraints, the user agent must: fire a simple event named `invalid` that is cancelable at the element, and if that event is not canceled, report the problems with the constraints of that element to the user; then, return false. Otherwise, it must only return true without doing anything else. When reporting the problem with the constraints to the user, the user agent may run the focusing steps for that element, and may change the scrolling position of the document, or perform some other action that brings the element to the user's attention. User agents may report more than one constraint violation, if the element suffers from multiple problems at once. If the element is not being rendered, then the user agent may, instead of notifying the user, report a script error.

The `validationMessage` attribute must return the empty string if the element is not a candidate for constraint validation or if it is one but it satisfies its constraints; otherwise, it must return a suitably localised message that the user agent would show the user if this were the only form control with a validity constraint problem. If the user agent would not actually show a textual message in such a situation (e.g. it would show a graphical cue instead), then the attribute must return a suitably localised message that expresses (one or more of) the validity constraint(s) that the control does not satisfy. If the element is a candidate for constraint validation and is suffering from a custom error, then the custom validity error message should be present in the return value.

##### 4.10.21.4 Security

Servers should not rely on client-side validation. Client-side validation can be intentionally bypassed by hostile users, and unintentionally bypassed by users of older user agents or automated tools that do not implement these features. The constraint validation features are only intended to improve the user experience, not to provide any kind of security mechanism.

#### 4.10.22 Form submission

##### 4.10.22.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

When a form is submitted, the data in the form is converted into the structure specified by the enctype, and then sent to the destination specified by the action using the given method.

For example, take the following form:

    <form action="/find.cgi" method=get>
     <input type=text name=t>
     <input type=search name=q>
     <input type=submit>
    </form>

If the user types in "cats" in the first field and "fur" in the second, and then hits the submit button, then the user agent will load `/find.cgi?t=cats&q=fur`.

On the other hand, consider this form:

    <form action="/find.cgi" method=post enctype="multipart/form-data">
     <input type=text name=t>
     <input type=search name=q>
     <input type=submit>
    </form>

Given the same user input, the result on submission is quite different: the user agent instead does an HTTP POST to the given URL, with as the entity body something like the following text:

    ------kYFrd4jNJEgCervE
    Content-Disposition: form-data; name="t"

    cats
    ------kYFrd4jNJEgCervE
    Content-Disposition: form-data; name="q"

    fur
    ------kYFrd4jNJEgCervE--

##### 4.10.22.2 Implicit submission

A `form` element's default button is the first submit button in tree order whose form owner is that `form` element.

If the user agent supports letting the user submit a form implicitly (for example, on some platforms hitting the "enter" key while a text field is focused implicitly submits the form), then doing so for a form whose default button has a defined activation behavior must cause the user agent to run synthetic click activation steps on that default button.

Consequently, if the default button is disabled, the form is not submitted when such an implicit submission mechanism is used. (A button has no activation behavior when disabled.)

There are pages on the Web that are only usable if there is a way to implicitly submit forms, so user agents are strongly encouraged to support this.

If the form has no submit button, then the implicit submission mechanism must do nothing if the form has more than one field that blocks implicit submission, and must submit the `form` element from the `form` element itself otherwise.

For the purpose of the previous paragraph, an element is a field that blocks implicit submission of a `form` element if it is an `input` element whose form owner is that `form` element and whose `type` attribute is in one of the following states: Text, Search, URL, Telephone, E-mail, Password, Date and Time, Date, Month, Week, Time, Local Date and Time, Number

##### 4.10.22.3 Form submission algorithm

When a `form` element form is submitted from an element submitter (typically a button), optionally with a submitted from `submit()` method flag set, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let form document be the form's node document.

2. If form document has no associated browsing context or its active sandboxing flag set has its sandboxed forms browsing context flag set, then abort these steps without doing anything.

3. Let form browsing context be the browsing context of form document.

4. If the submitted from `submit()` method flag is not set, and the submitter element's no-validate state is false, then interactively validate the constraints of form and examine the result: if the result is negative (the constraint validation concluded that there were invalid fields and probably informed the user of this) then fire a simple event named `invalid` at the form element and then abort these steps.

5. If the submitted from `submit()` method flag is not set, then fire a simple event that bubbles and is cancelable named `submit`, at form. If the event's default action is prevented (i.e. if the event is canceled) then abort these steps. Otherwise, continue (effectively the default action is to perform the submission).

6. Let form data set be the result of constructing the form data set for form in the context of submitter.

7. Let action be the submitter element's action.

8. If action is the empty string, let action be the document's address of the form document.

9. Resolve the URL action, relative to the submitter element. If this fails, abort these steps.

10. Let action be the resulting absolute URL.

11. Let action components be the resulting parsed URL.

12. Let scheme be the scheme of the resulting parsed URL.

13. Let enctype be the submitter element's enctype.

14. Let method be the submitter element's method.

15. Let target be the submitter element's target.

16. If the user indicated a specific browsing context to use when submitting the form, then let target browsing context be that browsing context. Otherwise, apply the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name using target as the name and form browsing context as the context in which the algorithm is executed, and let target browsing context be the resulting browsing context.

17. If target browsing context was created in the previous step, or, alternatively, if the form document has not yet completely loaded and the submitted from `submit()` method flag is set, then let replace be true. Otherwise, let it be false.

18. If the value of method is dialog then jump to the submit dialog steps.

    Otherwise, select the appropriate row in the table below based on the value of scheme as given by the first cell of each row. Then, select the appropriate cell on that row based on the value of method as given in the first cell of each column. Then, jump to the steps named in that cell and defined below the table.

    | GET | POST
    `http` | Mutate action URL | Submit as entity body
    `https` | Mutate action URL | Submit as entity body
    `ftp` | Get action URL | Get action URL
    `javascript` | Get action URL | Get action URL
    `data` | Get action URL | Post to data:
    `mailto` | Mail with headers | Mail as body

    If scheme is not one of those listed in this table, then the behavior is not defined by this specification. User agents should, in the absence of another specification defining this, act in a manner analogous to that defined in this specification for similar schemes.

    Each `form` element has a planned navigation, which is either null or a task; when the `form` is first created, its planned navigation must be set to null. In the behaviours described below, when the user agent is required to plan to navigate to a particular resource destination, it must run the following steps:

    1. If the `form` has a non-null planned navigation, remove it from its task queue.

    2. Let the `form`'s planned navigation be a new task that consists of running the following steps:

       1. Let the `form`'s planned navigation be null.

       2. Navigate target browsing context to the particular resource destination. If replace is true, then target browsing context must be navigated with replacement enabled.

       For the purposes of this task, target browsing context and replace are the variables that were set up when the overall form submission algorithm was run, with their values as they stood when this planned navigation was queued.

    3. Queue the task that is the `form`'s new planned navigation.

       The task source for this task is the DOM manipulation task source.

    The behaviors are as follows:

    Mutate action URL

      Let query be the result of encoding the form data set using the `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` encoding algorithm, interpreted as a US-ASCII string.

      Set parsed action's query component to query.

      Let destination be a new URL formed by applying the URL serialiser algorithm to parsed action.

      Plan to navigate to destination.

    Submit as entity body

      Let entity body be the result of encoding the form data set using the appropriate form encoding algorithm.

      Let MIME type be determined as follows:

      If enctype is `application/x-www-form-urlencoded`
        Let MIME type be "`application/x-www-form-urlencoded`".
      If enctype is `multipart/form-data`
        Let MIME type be the concatenation of the string "`multipart/form-data;`", a U+0020 SPACE character, the string "`boundary=`", and the `multipart/form-data` boundary string generated by the `multipart/form-data` encoding algorithm.
      If enctype is `text/plain`
        Let MIME type be "`text/plain`".

      Otherwise, plan to navigate to action using the HTTP method given by method and with entity body as the entity body, of type MIME type.

    Get action URL

      Plan to navigate to action.

      The form data set is discarded.

    Post to data:

      Let data be the result of encoding the form data set using the appropriate form encoding algorithm.

      If action contains the string "`%%%%`" (four U+0025 PERCENT SIGN characters), then percent encode all bytes in data that, if interpreted as US-ASCII, are not characters in the URL default encode set, and then, treating the result as a US-ASCII string, UTF-8 percent encode all the U+0025 PERCENT SIGN characters in the resulting string and replace the first occurrence of "`%%%%`" in action with the resulting doubly-escaped string. [URL]

      Otherwise, if action contains the string "`%%`" (two U+0025 PERCENT SIGN characters in a row, but not four), then UTF-8 percent encode all characters in data that, if interpreted as US-ASCII, are not characters in the URL default encode set, and then, treating the result as a US-ASCII string, replace the first occurrence of "`%%`" in action with the resulting escaped string. [URL]

      Plan to navigate to the potentially modified action (which will be a `data:` URL).

    Mail with headers

      Let headers be the resulting encoding the form data set using the `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` encoding algorithm, interpreted as a US-ASCII string.

      Replace occurrences of U+002B PLUS SIGN characters (+) in headers with the string "`%20`".

      Let destination consist of all the characters from the first character in action to the character immediately before the first U+003F QUESTION MARK character (?), if any, or the end of the string if there are none.

      Append a single U+003F QUESTION MARK character (?) to destination.

      Append headers to destination.

      Plan to navigate to destination.

    Mail as body

      Let body be the resulting of encoding the form data set using the appropriate form encoding algorithm and then percent encoding all the bytes in the resulting byte string that, when interpreted as US-ASCII, are not characters in the URL default encode set. [URL]

      Let destination have the same value as action.

      If destination does not contain a U+003F QUESTION MARK character (?), append a single U+003F QUESTION MARK character (?) to destination. Otherwise, append a single U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&).

      Append the string "`body=`" to destination.

      Append body, interpreted as a US-ASCII string, to destination.

      Plan to navigate to destination.

    Submit dialog

      Let subject be the nearest ancestor `dialog` element of form, if any.

      If there isn't one, or if it does not have an `open` attribute, do nothing. Otherwise, proceed as follows:

      If submitter is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, then let result be the string formed by concatenating the selected coordinate's x-component, expressed as a base-ten number using ASCII digits, a U+002C COMMA character (,), and the selected coordinate's y-component, expressed in the same way as the x-component.

      Otherwise, if submitter has a value, then let result be that value.

      Otherwise, there is no result.

      Then, close the dialog subject. If there is a result, let that be the return value.

    The appropriate form encoding algorithm is determined as follows:

    If enctype is `application/x-www-form-urlencoded`
      Use the `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` encoding algorithm.
    If enctype is `multipart/form-data`
      Use the `multipart/form-data` encoding algorithm.
    If enctype is `text/plain`
      Use the `text/plain` encoding algorithm.

##### 4.10.22.4 Constructing the form data set

The algorithm to construct the form data set for a form form optionally in the context of a submitter submitter is as follows. If not specified otherwise, submitter is null.

1. Let controls be a list of all the submittable elements whose form owner is form, in tree order.

2. Let the form data set be a list of name-value-type tuples, initially empty.

3. Loop: For each element field in controls, in tree order, run the following substeps:

   1. If any of the following conditions are met, then skip these substeps for this element:

      - The field element has a `datalist` element ancestor.
      - The field element is disabled.
      - The field element is a button but it is not submitter.
      - The field element is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Checkbox state and whose checkedness is false.
      - The field element is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state and whose checkedness is false.
      - The field element is not an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, and either the field element does not have a `name` attribute specified, or its `name` attribute's value is the empty string.
      - The field element is an `object` element that is not using a plugin.

      Otherwise, process field as follows:

   2. Let type be the value of the `type` IDL attribute of field.

   3. If the field element is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, then run these further nested substeps:

      1. If the field element has a `name` attribute specified and its value is not the empty string, let name be that value followed by a single U+002E FULL STOP character (.). Otherwise, let name be the empty string.

      2. Let namex be the string consisting of the concatenation of name and a single U+0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X character (x).

      3. Let namey be the string consisting of the concatenation of name and a single U+0079 LATIN SMALL LETTER Y character (y).

      4. The field element is submitter, and before this algorithm was invoked the user indicated a coordinate. Let x be the x-component of the coordinate selected by the user, and let y be the y-component of the coordinate selected by the user.

      5. Append an entry to the form data set with the name namex, the value x, and the type type.

      6. Append an entry to the form data set with the name namey and the value y, and the type type.

      7. Skip the remaining substeps for this element: if there are any more elements in controls, return to the top of the loop step, otherwise, jump to the end step below.

   4. Let name be the value of the field element's `name` attribute.

   5. If the field element is a `select` element, then for each `option` element in the `select` element's list of options whose selectedness is true and that is not disabled, append an entry to the form data set with the name as the name, the value of the `option` element as the value, and type as the type.

   6. Otherwise, if the field element is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Checkbox state or the Radio Button state, then run these further nested substeps:

      1. If the field element has a `value` attribute specified, then let value be the value of that attribute; otherwise, let value be the string "`on`".

      2. Append an entry to the form data set with name as the name, value as the value, and type as the type.

   7. Otherwise, if the field element is an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the File Upload state, then for each file selected in the `input` element, append an entry to the form data set with the name as the name, the file (consisting of the name, the type, and the body) as the value, and type as the type. If there are no selected files, then append an entry to the form data set with the name as the name, the empty string as the value, and `application/octet-stream` as the type.

   8. Otherwise, if the field element is an `object` element: try to obtain a form submission value from the plugin, and if that is successful, append an entry to the form data set with name as the name, the returned form submission value as the value, and the string "`object`" as the type.

   9. Otherwise, append an entry to the form data set with name as the name, the value of the field element as the value, and type as the type.

   10. If the element has a `dirname` attribute, and that attribute's value is not the empty string, then run these substeps:

       1. Let dirname be the value of the element's `dirname` attribute.

       2. Let dir be the string "`ltr`" if the directionality of the element is 'ltr', and "`rtl`" otherwise (i.e. when the directionality of the element is 'rtl').

       3. Append an entry to the form data set with dirname as the name, dir as the value, and the string "`direction`" as the type.

       An element can only have a `dirname` attribute if it is a `textarea` element or an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in either the Text state or the Search state.

4. End: For the name of each entry in the form data set, and for the value of each entry in the form data set whose type is not "`file`" or "`textarea`", replace every occurrence of a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character not followed by a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, and every occurrence of a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character not preceded by a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character, by a two-character string consisting of a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED (CRLF) character pair.

   In the case of the value of `textarea` elements, this newline normalization is already performed during the conversion of the control's raw value into the control's value (which also performs any necessary line wrapping). In the case of `input` elements `type` attributes in the File Upload state, the value is not normalized.

5. Return the form data set.

##### 4.10.22.5 Selecting a form submission encoding

If the user agent is to pick an encoding for a form, optionally with an allow non-ASCII-compatible encodings flag set, it must run the following substeps:

1. Let input be the value of the `form` element's `accept-charset` attribute.

2. Let candidate encoding labels be the result of splitting input on spaces.

3. Let candidate encodings be an empty list of character encodings.

4. For each token in candidate encoding labels in turn (in the order in which they were found in input), get an encoding for the token and, if this does not result in failure, append the encoding to candidate encodings.

5. If the allow non-ASCII-compatible encodings flag is not set, remove any encodings that are not ASCII-compatible character encodings from candidate encodings.

6. If candidate encodings is empty, return UTF-8 and abort these steps.

7. Each character encoding in candidate encodings can represent a finite number of characters. (For example, UTF-8 can represent all 1.1 million or so Unicode code points, while Windows-1252 can only represent 256.)

   For each encoding in candidate encodings, determine how many of the characters in the names and values of the entries in the form data set the encoding can represent (without ignoring duplicates). Let max be the highest such count. (For UTF-8, max would equal the number of characters in the names and values of the entries in the form data set.)

   Return the first encoding in candidate encodings that can encode max characters in the names and values of the entries in the form data set.

##### 4.10.22.6 URL-encoded form data

This form data set encoding is in many ways an aberrant monstrosity, the result of many years of implementation accidents and compromises leading to a set of requirements necessary for interoperability, but in no way representing good design practices. In particular, readers are cautioned to pay close attention to the twisted details involving repeated (and in some cases nested) conversions between character encodings and byte sequences.

The `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` encoding algorithm is as follows:

1. Let result be the empty string.

2. If the `form` element has an `accept-charset` attribute, let the selected character encoding be the result of picking an encoding for the form.

   Otherwise, if the `form` element has no `accept-charset` attribute, but the document's character encoding is an ASCII-compatible character encoding, then that is the selected character encoding.

   Otherwise, let the selected character encoding be UTF-8.

3. Let charset be the name of the selected character encoding.

4. For each entry in the form data set, perform these substeps:

   1. If the entry's name is "`_charset_`" and its type is "`hidden`", replace its value with charset.

   2. If the entry's type is "`file`", replace its value with the file's name only.

   3. For each character in the entry's name and value that cannot be expressed using the selected character encoding, replace the character by a string consisting of a U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&), a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), one or more ASCII digits representing the Unicode code point of the character in base ten, and finally a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;).

   4. Encode the entry's name and value using the encoder for the selected character encoding. The entry's name and value are now byte strings.

   5. For each byte in the entry's name and value, apply the appropriate subsubsteps from the following list:

      If the byte is 0x20 (U+0020 SPACE if interpreted as ASCII)
        Replace the byte with a single 0x2B byte (U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) if interpreted as ASCII).
      If the byte is in the range 0x2A, 0x2D, 0x2E, 0x30 to 0x39, 0x41 to 0x5A, 0x5F, 0x61 to 0x7A

        Leave the byte as is.

      Otherwise

        1. Let s be a string consisting of a U+0025 PERCENT SIGN character (%) followed by uppercase ASCII hex digits representing the hexadecimal value of the byte in question (zero-padded if necessary).

        2. Encode the string s as US-ASCII, so that it is now a byte string.

        3. Replace the byte in question in the name or value being processed by the bytes in s, preserving their relative order.

   6. Interpret the entry's name and value as Unicode strings encoded in US-ASCII. (All of the bytes in the string will be in the range 0x00 to 0x7F; the high bit will be zero throughout.) The entry's name and value are now Unicode strings again.

   7. If the entry's name is "`isindex`", its type is "`text`", and this is the first entry in the form data set, then append the value to result and skip the rest of the substeps for this entry, moving on to the next entry, if any, or the next step in the overall algorithm otherwise.

   8. If this is not the first entry, append a single U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&) to result.

   9. Append the entry's name to result.

   10. Append a single U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=) to result.

   11. Append the entry's value to result.

5. Encode result as US-ASCII and return the resulting byte stream.

To decode `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` payloads, the following algorithm should be used. This algorithm uses as inputs the payload itself, payload, consisting of a Unicode string using only characters in the range U+0000 to U+007F; a default character encoding encoding; and optionally an isindex flag indicating that the payload is to be processed as if it had been generated for a form containing an `isindex` control. The output of this algorithm is a sorted list of name-value pairs. If the isindex flag is set and the first control really was an `isindex` control, then the first name-value pair will have as its name the empty string.

Which default character encoding to use can only be determined on a case-by-case basis, but generally the best character encoding to use as a default is the one that was used to encode the page on which the form used to create the payload was itself found. In the absence of a better default, UTF-8 is suggested.

The isindex flag is for legacy use only. Forms in conforming HTML documents will not generate payloads that need to be decoded with this flag set.

1. Let strings be the result of strictly splitting the string payload on U+0026 AMPERSAND characters (&).

2. If the isindex flag is set and the first string in strings does not contain a U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=), insert a U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=) at the start of the first string in strings.

3. Let pairs be an empty list of name-value pairs.

4. For each string string in strings, run these substeps:

   1. If string contains a U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=), then let name be the substring of string from the start of string up to but excluding its first U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=), and let value be the substring from the first character, if any, after the first U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=) up to the end of string. If the first U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=) is the first character, then name will be the empty string. If it is the last character, then value will be the empty string.

      Otherwise, string contains no U+003D EQUALS SIGN characters (=). Let name have the value of string and let value be the empty string.

   2. Replace any U+002B PLUS SIGN characters (+) in name and value with U+0020 SPACE characters.

   3. Replace any escape in name and value with the character represented by the escape. This replacement must not be recursive.

      An escape is a U+0025 PERCENT SIGN character (%) followed by two ASCII hex digits.

      The character represented by an escape is the Unicode character whose code point is equal to the value of the two characters after the U+0025 PERCENT SIGN character (%), interpreted as a hexadecimal number (in the range 0..255).

      So for instance the string "`A%2BC`" would become "`A+C`". Similarly, the string "`100%25AA%21`" becomes the string "`100%AA!`".

   4. Convert the name and value strings to their byte representation in ISO-8859-1 (i.e. convert the Unicode string to a byte string, mapping code points to byte values directly).

   5. Add a pair consisting of name and value to pairs.

5. If any of the name-value pairs in pairs have a name component consisting of the string "`_charset_`" encoded in US-ASCII, and the value component of the first such pair, when decoded as US-ASCII, is the name of a supported character encoding, then let encoding be that character encoding (replacing the default passed to the algorithm).

6. Convert the name and value components of each name-value pair in pairs to Unicode by interpreting the bytes according to the encoding encoding.

7. Return pairs.

Parameters on the `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` MIME type are ignored. In particular, this MIME type does not support the `charset` parameter.

##### 4.10.22.7 Multipart form data

The `multipart/form-data` encoding algorithm is as follows:

1. Let result be the empty string.

2. If the algorithm was invoked with an explicit character encoding, let the selected character encoding be that encoding. (This algorithm is used by other specifications, which provide an explicit character encoding to avoid the dependency on the `form` element described in the next paragraph.)

   Otherwise, if the `form` element has an `accept-charset` attribute, let the selected character encoding be the result of picking an encoding for the form.

   Otherwise, if the `form` element has no `accept-charset` attribute, but the document's character encoding is an ASCII-compatible character encoding, then that is the selected character encoding.

   Otherwise, let the selected character encoding be UTF-8.

3. Let charset be the name of the selected character encoding.

4. For each entry in the form data set, perform these substeps:

   1. If the entry's name is "`_charset_`" and its type is "`hidden`", replace its value with charset.

   2. For each character in the entry's name and value that cannot be expressed using the selected character encoding, replace the character by a string consisting of a U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&), a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), one or more ASCII digits representing the Unicode code point of the character in base ten, and finally a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;).

5. Encode the (now mutated) form data set using the rules described by RFC 2388, Returning Values from Forms: `multipart/form-data`, and return the resulting byte stream. [RFC2388]

   Each entry in the form data set is a field, the name of the entry is the field name and the value of the entry is the field value.

   The order of parts must be the same as the order of fields in the form data set. Multiple entries with the same name must be treated as distinct fields.

   In particular, this means that multiple files submitted as part of a single `<input type=file multiple>` element will result in each file having its own field; the "sets of files" feature ("`multipart/mixed`") of RFC 2388 is not used.

   The parts of the generated `multipart/form-data` resource that correspond to non-file fields must not have a `Content-Type` header specified. Their names and values must be encoded using the character encoding selected above (field names in particular do not get converted to a 7-bit safe encoding as suggested in RFC 2388).

   File names included in the generated `multipart/form-data` resource (as part of file fields) must use the character encoding selected above, though the precise name may be approximated if necessary (e.g. newlines could be removed from file names, quotes could be changed to "%22", and characters not expressible in the selected character encoding could be replaced by other characters). User agents must not use the RFC 2231 encoding suggested by RFC 2388.

   The boundary used by the user agent in generating the return value of this algorithm is the `multipart/form-data` boundary string. (This value is used to generate the MIME type of the form submission payload generated by this algorithm.)

For details on how to interpret `multipart/form-data` payloads, see RFC 2388. [RFC2388]

##### 4.10.22.8 Plain text form data

The `text/plain` encoding algorithm is as follows:

1. Let result be the empty string.

2. If the `form` element has an `accept-charset` attribute, let the selected character encoding be the result of picking an encoding for the form, with the allow non-ASCII-compatible encodings flag unset.

   Otherwise, if the `form` element has no `accept-charset` attribute, then that is the selected character encoding.

3. Let charset be the name of the selected character encoding.

4. If the entry's name is "`_charset_`" and its type is "`hidden`", replace its value with charset.

5. If the entry's type is "`file`", replace its value with the file's name only.

6. For each entry in the form data set, perform these substeps:

   1. Append the entry's name to result.

   2. Append a single U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=) to result.

   3. Append the entry's value to result.

   4. Append a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character pair to result.

7. Encode result using the encoder for the selected character encoding and return the resulting byte stream.

Payloads using the `text/plain` format are intended to be human readable. They are not reliably interpretable by computer, as the format is ambiguous (for example, there is no way to distinguish a literal newline in a value from the newline at the end of the value).

#### 4.10.23 Resetting a form

When a `form` element form is reset, the user agent must fire a simple event named `reset`, that bubbles and is cancelable, at form, and then, if that event is not canceled, must invoke the reset algorithm of each resettable element whose form owner is form.

When the reset algorithm is invoked by the `reset()` method, the `reset` event fired by the reset algorithm must not be trusted.

Each resettable element defines its own reset algorithm. Changes made to form controls as part of these algorithms do not count as changes caused by the user (and thus, e.g., do not cause `input` events to fire).

### 4.11 Interactive elements

#### 4.11.1 The `details` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Sectioning root.
  Interactive content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  One `summary` element followed by flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `open` — Whether the details are visible
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLDetailsElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute boolean open;
      };

The `details` element represents a disclosure widget from which the user can obtain additional information or controls.

The `details` element is not appropriate for footnotes. Please see the section on footnotes for details on how to mark up footnotes.

The first `summary` element child of the element, if any, represents the summary or legend of the details. If there is no child `summary` element, the user agent should provide its own legend (e.g. "Details").

The rest of the element's contents represents the additional information or controls.

The `open` content attribute is a boolean attribute. If present, it indicates that both the summary and the additional information is to be shown to the user. If the attribute is absent, only the summary is to be shown.

When the element is created, if the attribute is absent, the additional information should be hidden; if the attribute is present, that information should be shown. Subsequently, if the attribute is removed, then the information should be hidden; if the attribute is added, the information should be shown.

The user agent should allow the user to request that the additional information be shown or hidden. To honor a request for the details to be shown, the user agent must set the `open` attribute on the element to the value `open`. To honor a request for the information to be hidden, the user agent must remove the `open` attribute from the element.

Whenever the `open` attribute is added to or removed from a `details` element, the user agent must queue a task that runs the following steps, which are known as the details notification task steps, for this `details` element:

1. If another task has been queued to run the details notification task steps for this `details` element, then abort these steps.

   When the `open` attribute is toggled several times in succession, these steps essentially get coalesced so that only one event is fired.

2. Fire a simple event named `toggle` at the `details` element.

The task source for this task must be the DOM manipulation task source.

The `open` IDL attribute must reflect the `open` content attribute.

The following example shows the `details` element being used to hide technical details in a progress report.

    <section class="progress window">
     <h1>Copying "Really Achieving Your Childhood Dreams"</h1>
     <details>
      <summary>Copying... <progress max="375505392" value="97543282"></progress> 25%</summary>
      <dl>
       <dt>Transfer rate:</dt> <dd>452KB/s</dd>
       <dt>Local filename:</dt> <dd>/home/rpausch/raycd.m4v</dd>
       <dt>Remote filename:</dt> <dd>/var/www/lectures/raycd.m4v</dd>
       <dt>Duration:</dt> <dd>01:16:27</dd>
       <dt>Colour profile:</dt> <dd>SD (6-1-6)</dd>
       <dt>Dimensions:</dt> <dd>320×240</dd>
      </dl>
     </details>
    </section>

The following shows how a `details` element can be used to hide some controls by default:

    <details>
     <summary><label for=fn>Name & Extension:</label></summary>
     <p><input type=text id=fn name=fn value="Pillar Magazine.pdf">
     <p><label><input type=checkbox name=ext checked> Hide extension</label>
    </details>

One could use this in conjunction with other `details` in a list to allow the user to collapse a set of fields down to a small set of headings, with the ability to open each one.

In these examples, the summary really just summarises what the controls can change, and not the actual values, which is less than ideal.

Because the `open` attribute is added and removed automatically as the user interacts with the control, it can be used in CSS to style the element differently based on its state. Here, a stylesheet is used to animate the colour of the summary when the element is opened or closed:

    <style>
     details > summary { transition: color 1s; color: black; }
     details[open] > summary { color: red; }
    </style>
    <details>
     <summary>Automated Status: Operational</summary>
     <p>Velocity: 12m/s</p>
     <p>Direction: North</p>
    </details>

#### 4.11.2 The `summary` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As the first child of a `details` element.
Content model:
  Either: phrasing content.
  Or: one element of heading content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `summary` element represents a summary, caption, or legend for the rest of the contents of the `summary` element's parent `details` element, if any.

#### 4.11.3 The `menu` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  If the element's `type` attribute is in the toolbar state: Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
  If the element's `type` attribute is in the popup menu state: as the child of a `menu` element whose `type` attribute is in the popup menu state.
Content model:
  If the element's `type` attribute is in the toolbar state: either zero or more `li` and script-supporting elements, or, flow content.
  If the element's `type` attribute is in the popup menu state: in any order, zero or more `menuitem` elements, zero or more `hr` elements, zero or more `menu` elements whose `type` attributes are in the popup menu state, and zero or more script-supporting elements.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `type` — Type of menu
  `label` — User-visible label
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLMenuElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute DOMString label;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `menu` element represents a list of commands.

The `type` attribute is an enumerated attribute indicating the kind of menu being declared. The attribute has two states. The "`popup`" keyword maps to the popup menu state, in which the element is declaring a context menu or the menu for a menu button. The "`toolbar`" keyword maps to the toolbar state, in which the element is declaring a toolbar. The attribute may also be omitted. The missing value default is the popup menu state if the parent element is a `menu` element whose `type` attribute is in the popup menu state; otherwise, it is the toolbar state.

If a `menu` element's `type` attribute is in the popup menu state, then the element represents the commands of a popup menu, and the user can only examine and interact with the commands if that popup menu is activated through some other element, either via the `contextmenu` attribute or the `button` element's `menu` attribute.

If a `menu` element's `type` attribute is in the toolbar state, then the element represents a toolbar consisting of its contents, in the form of either an unordered list of items (represented by `li` elements), each of which represents a command that the user can perform or activate, or, if the element has no `li` element children, flow content describing available commands.

The `label` attribute gives the label of the menu. It is used by user agents to display nested menus in the UI: a context menu containing another menu would use the nested menu's `label` attribute for the submenu's menu label. The `label` attribute must only be specified on `menu` elements whose parent element is a `menu` element whose `type` attribute is in the popup menu state.

A `menu` is a currently relevant `menu` element if it is the child of a currently relevant `menu` element, or if it is the designated pop-up menu of a `button` element that is not inert, does not have a `hidden` attribute, and is not the descendant of an element with a `hidden` attribute.

A menu construct consists of an ordered list of zero or more menu item constructs, which can be any of:

- Commands, which can be marked as default commands (`menuitem`)
- Separators (`hr`)
- Other menu constructs, each with an associated submenu label, which allows the list to be nested (`menu`)

To build and show a menu for a particular `menu` element source and with a particular element subject as a subject, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let pop-up menu be the menu construct created by the build a menu construct algorithm when passed the source element.

2. Display pop-up menu to the user, and let the algorithm that invoked this one continue.

   If the user selects a menu item construct that corresponds to an element that still represents a command when the user selects it, then the UA must invoke that command's Action. If the command's Action is defined as firing a `click` event, either directly or via the run synthetic click activation steps algorithm, then the `relatedTarget` attribute of that `click` event must be initialised to subject.

   Pop-up menus must not, while being shown, reflect changes in the DOM. The menu is constructed from the DOM before being shown, and is then immutable.

To build a menu construct for an element source, the user agent must run the following steps, which return a menu construct:

1. Let generated menu be an empty menu construct.

2. Run the menu item generator steps for the `menu` element using generated menu as the output.

   The menu item generator steps for a `menu` element using a specific menu construct output as output are as follows: For each child node of the `menu` in tree order, run the appropriate steps from the following list:

   If the child is a `menuitem` element that defines a command
     Append the command to output, respecting the command's facets. If the `menuitem` element has a `default` attribute, mark the command as being a default command.
   If the child is an `hr` element
     Append a separator to output.
   If the child is a `menu` element with no `label` attribute
     Append a separator to output, then run the menu item generator steps for this child `menu` element, using output as the output, then append another separator to output.
   If the child is a `menu` element with a `label` attribute
     Let submenu be the result of running the build a menu construct steps for the child `menu` element. Then, append submenu to output, using the value of the child `menu` element's `label` attribute as the submenu label.
   Otherwise
     Ignore the child node.

3. Remove from output any menu construct whose submenu label is the empty string.

4. Remove from output any menu item construct representing a command whose Label is the empty string.

5. Collapse all sequences of two or more adjacent separators in output to a single separator.

6. If the first menu item construct in output is a separator, then remove it.

7. If the last menu item construct in output is a separator, then remove it.

8. Return output.

The `type` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, limited to only known values.

The `label` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

In this example, the `menu` element is used to describe a toolbar with three menu buttons on it, each of which has a dropdown menu with a series of options:

    <menu>
     <li>
      <button type=menu value="File" menu="filemenu">
      <menu id="filemenu" type="popup">
       <menuitem onclick="fnew()" label="New...">
       <menuitem onclick="fopen()" label="Open...">
       <menuitem onclick="fsave()" label="Save">
       <menuitem onclick="fsaveas()" label="Save as...">
      </menu>
     </li>
     <li>
      <button type=menu value="Edit" menu="editmenu">
      <menu id="editmenu" type="popup">
       <menuitem onclick="ecopy()" label="Copy">
       <menuitem onclick="ecut()" label="Cut">
       <menuitem onclick="epaste()" label="Paste">
      </menu>
     </li>
     <li>
      <button type=menu value="Help" menu="helpmenu">
      <menu id="helpmenu" type="popup">
       <menuitem onclick="location='help.html'" label="Help">
       <menuitem onclick="location='about.html'" label="About">
      </menu>
     </li>
    </menu>

In a supporting user agent, this might look like this (assuming the user has just activated the second button):

#### 4.11.4 The `menuitem` element

Categories:
  None.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  As a child of a `menu` element whose `type` attribute is in the popup menu state.
Content model:
  Nothing.
Tag omission in text/html:
  No end tag.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `type` — Type of command
  `label` — User-visible label
  `icon` — Icon for the command
  `disabled` — Whether the form control is disabled
  `checked` — Whether the command or control is checked
  `radiogroup` — Name of group of commands to treat as a radio button group
  `default` — Mark the command as being a default command
  `command` — Command definition
  Also, the `title` attribute has special semantics on this element: Hint describing the command.
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLMenuItemElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute DOMString label;
                 attribute DOMString icon;
                 attribute boolean disabled;
                 attribute boolean checked;
                 attribute DOMString radiogroup;
                 attribute boolean default;
        readonly attribute HTMLElement? command;
      };

The `menuitem` element represents a command that the user can invoke from a popup menu (either a context menu or the menu of a menu button).

A `menuitem` element that uses one or more of the `type`, `label`, `icon`, `disabled`, `checked`, and `radiogroup` attributes defines a new command.

A `menuitem` element that uses the `command` attribute defines a command by reference to another one. This allows authors to define a command once, and set its state (e.g. whether it is active or disabled) in one place, and have all references to that command in the user interface change at the same time.

If the `command` attribute is specified, the element is in the indirect command mode. If it is not specified, it is in the explicit command mode. When the element is in the indirect command mode, the element must not have any of the following attributes specified: `type`, `label`, `icon`, `disabled`, `checked`, `radiogroup`.

The `type` attribute indicates the kind of command: either a normal command with an associated action, or a state or option that can be toggled, or a selection of one item from a list of items.

The attribute is an enumerated attribute with three keywords and states. The "`command`" keyword maps to the Command state, the "`checkbox`" keyword maps to the Checkbox state, and the "`radio`" keyword maps to the Radio state. The missing value default is the Command state.

The Command state

  The element represents a normal command with an associated action.

The Checkbox state

  The element represents a state or option that can be toggled.

The Radio state

  The element represents a selection of one item from a list of items.

The `label` attribute gives the name of the command, as shown to the user. The `label` attribute must be specified if the element is in the explicit command mode. If the attribute is specified, it must have a value that is not the empty string.

The `icon` attribute gives a picture that represents the command. If the attribute is specified, the attribute's value must contain a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces. To obtain the absolute URL of the icon when the attribute's value is not the empty string, the attribute's value must be resolved relative to the element. When the attribute is absent, or its value is the empty string, or resolving its value fails, there is no icon.

The `disabled` attribute is a boolean attribute that, if present, indicates that the command is not available in the current state.

The distinction between `disabled` and `hidden` is subtle. A command would be disabled if, in the same context, it could be enabled if only certain aspects of the situation were changed. A command would be marked as hidden if, in that situation, the command will never be enabled. For example, in the context menu for a water faucet, the command "open" might be disabled if the faucet is already open, but the command "eat" would be marked hidden since the faucet could never be eaten.

The `checked` attribute is a boolean attribute that, if present, indicates that the command is selected. The attribute must be omitted unless the `type` attribute is in either the Checkbox state or the Radio state.

The `radiogroup` attribute gives the name of the group of commands that will be toggled when the command itself is toggled, for commands whose `type` attribute has the value "`radio`". The scope of the name is the child list of the parent element. The attribute must be omitted unless the `type` attribute is in the Radio state. When specified, the attribute's value must be a non-empty string.

If a `menuitem` element slave has a `command` attribute, and there is an element in slave's home subtree whose ID has a value equal to the value of slave's `command` attribute, and the first such element in tree order, hereafter master, itself defines a command and either is not a `menuitem` element or does not itself have a `command` attribute, then the master command of slave is master.

A `menuitem` element with a `command` attribute must have a master command.

This effectively defines the syntax of the attribute's value as being the ID of another element that defines a command.

The `title` attribute gives a hint describing the command, which might be shown to the user to help him.

The `default` attribute indicates, if present, that the command is the one that would have been invoked if the user had directly activated the menu's subject instead of using the menu. The `default` attribute is a boolean attribute.

In this trivial example, a submit button is given a context menu that has two options, one to reset the form, and one to submit the form. The submit command is marked as being the default.

    <form action="dosearch.pl">
     <p><label>Enter search terms: <input type="text" name="terms"></label></p>
     <p><input type=submit contextmenu=formmenu id="submitbutton"></p>
     <p hidden><input type=reset id="resetbutton"></p>
     <menu type=popup id=formmenu>
      <menuitem command="submitbutton" default>
      <menuitem command="resetbutton">
     </menu>
    </form>

The `type` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name, limited to only known values.

The `label`, `icon`, `disabled`, `checked`, and `radiogroup`, and `default` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `command` IDL attribute must return the master command, if any, or null otherwise.

If the element's Disabled State is false (enabled) then the element's activation behavior depends on the element's `type` and `command` attributes, as follows:

If the element has a master command set by its `command` attribute

  The user agent must run synthetic click activation steps on the element's master command.

If the `type` attribute is in the Checkbox state

  If the element has a `checked` attribute, the UA must remove that attribute. Otherwise, the UA must add a `checked` attribute, with the literal value "`checked`".

If the `type` attribute is in the Radio state

  If the element has a parent, then the UA must walk the list of child nodes of that parent element, and for each node that is a `menuitem` element, if that element has a `radiogroup` attribute whose value exactly matches the current element's (treating missing `radiogroup` attributes as if they were the empty string), and has a `checked` attribute, must remove that attribute.

  Then, the element's `checked` attribute must be set to the literal value "`checked`".

Otherwise

  The element's activation behavior is to do nothing.

Firing a synthetic `click` event at the element does not cause any of the actions described above to happen.

If the element's Disabled State is true (disabled) then the element has no activation behavior.

The `menuitem` element is not rendered except as part of a popup menu.

Here is an example of a pop-up menu button with three options that let the user toggle between left, center, and right alignment. One could imagine such a toolbar as part of a text editor. The menu also has a separator followed by another menu item labeled "Publish", though that menu item is disabled.

    <button type=menu menu=editmenu>Commands...</button>
    <menu type="popup" id="editmenu">
     <menuitem type="radio" radiogroup="alignment" checked="checked"
              label="Left" icon="icons/alL.png" onclick="setAlign('left')">
     <menuitem type="radio" radiogroup="alignment"
              label="Center" icon="icons/alC.png" onclick="setAlign('center')">
     <menuitem type="radio" radiogroup="alignment"
              label="Right" icon="icons/alR.png" onclick="setAlign('right')">
     <hr>
     <menuitem type="command" disabled
              label="Publish" icon="icons/pub.png" onclick="publish()">
    </menu>

#### 4.11.5 Context menus

##### 4.11.5.1 Declaring a context menu

The `contextmenu` attribute gives the element's context menu. The value must be the ID of a `menu` element in the same home subtree whose `type` attribute is in the popup menu state.

When a user right-clicks on an element with a `contextmenu` attribute, the user agent will first fire a `contextmenu` event at the element, and then, if that event is not canceled, a `show` event at the `menu` element.

Here is an example of a context menu for an input control:

    <form name="npc">
     <label>Character name: <input name=char type=text contextmenu=namemenu required></label>
     <menu type=popup id=namemenu>
      <menuitem label="Pick random name" onclick="document.forms.npc.elements.char.value = getRandomName()">
      <menuitem label="Prefill other fields based on name" onclick="prefillFields(document.forms.npc.elements.char.value)">
     </menu>
    </form>

This adds two items to the control's context menu, one called "Pick random name", and one called "Prefill other fields based on name". They invoke scripts that are not shown in the example above.

##### 4.11.5.2 Processing model

Each element has an assigned context menu, which can be null. If an element A has a `contextmenu` attribute, and there is an element with the ID given by A's `contextmenu` attribute's value in A's home subtree, and the first such element in tree order is a `menu` element whose `type` attribute is in the popup menu state, then A's assigned context menu is that element. Otherwise, if A has a parent element, then A's assigned context menu is the assigned context menu of its parent element. Otherwise, A's assigned context menu is null.

When an element's context menu is requested (e.g. by the user right-clicking the element, or pressing a context menu key), the user agent must apply the appropriate rules from the following list:

If the user requested a context menu using a pointing device

  The user agent must fire a trusted event with the name `contextmenu`, that bubbles and is cancelable, and that uses the `MouseEvent` interface, at the element for which the menu was requested. The context information of the event must be initialised to the same values as the last `MouseEvent` user interaction event that was fired as part of the gesture that was interpreted as a request for the context menu.

Otherwise

  The user agent must fire a synthetic mouse event named `contextmenu` that bubbles and is cancelable at the element for which the menu was requested.

Typically, therefore, the firing of the `contextmenu` event will be the default action of a `mouseup` or `keyup` event. The exact sequence of events is UA-dependent, as it will vary based on platform conventions.

The default action of the `contextmenu` event depends on whether or not the element for which the menu was requested has a non-null assigned context menu when the event dispatch has completed, as follows.

If the assigned context menu of the element for which the menu was requested is null, the default action must be for the user agent to show its default context menu, if it has one.

Otherwise, let subject be the element for which the menu was requested, and let menu be the assigned context menu of target immediately after the `contextmenu` event's dispatch has completed. The user agent must fire a trusted event with the name `show` at menu, using the `RelatedEvent` interface, with the `relatedTarget` attribute initialised to subject. The event must be cancelable.

If this event (the `show` event) is not canceled, then the user agent must build and show the menu for menu with subject as the subject.

The user agent may also provide access to its default context menu, if any, with the context menu shown. For example, it could merge the menu items from the two menus together, or provide the page's context menu as a submenu of the default menu. In general, user agents are encouraged to de-emphasise their own contextual menu items, so as to give the author's context menu the appearance of legitimacy — to allow documents to feel like "applications" rather than "mere Web pages".

User agents may provide means for bypassing the context menu processing model, ensuring that the user can always access the UA's default context menus. For example, the user agent could handle right-clicks that have the Shift key depressed in such a way that it does not fire the `contextmenu` event and instead always shows the default context menu.

The `contextMenu` IDL attribute must reflect the `contextmenu` content attribute.

In this example, an image of cats is given a context menu with four possible commands:

    <img src="cats.jpeg" alt="Cats" contextmenu=catsmenu>
    <menu type="popup" id="catsmenu">
     <menuitem label="Pet the kittens" onclick="kittens.pet()">
     <menuitem label="Cuddle with the kittens" onclick="kittens.cuddle()">
     <menu label="Feed the kittens">
      <menuitem label="Fish" onclick="kittens.feed(fish)">
      <menuitem label="Chicken" onclick="kittens.feed(chicken)">
     </menu>
    </menu>

When a user of a mouse-operated visual Web browser right-clicks on the image, the browser might pop up a context menu like this:

When the user clicks the disclosure triangle, such a user agent would expand the context menu in place, to show the browser's own commands:

##### 4.11.5.3 The `RelatedEvent` interfaces

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional RelatedEventInit eventInitDict)]
    interface RelatedEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute EventTarget? relatedTarget;
    };

    dictionary RelatedEventInit : EventInit {
      EventTarget? relatedTarget;
    };

event . `relatedTarget`

  Returns the other event target involved in this event. For example, when a `show` event fires on a `menu` element, the other event target involved in the event would be the element for which the menu is being shown.

The `relatedTarget` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the other event target that is related to the event.

#### 4.11.6 Commands

##### 4.11.6.1 Facets

A command is the abstraction behind menu items, buttons, and links. Once a command is defined, other parts of the interface can refer to the same command, allowing many access points to a single feature to share facets such as the Disabled State.

Commands are defined to have the following facets:

Type
  The kind of command: "command", meaning it is a normal command; "radio", meaning that triggering the command will, amongst other things, set the Checked State to true (and probably uncheck some other commands); or "checkbox", meaning that triggering the command will, amongst other things, toggle the value of the Checked State.
ID
  The name of the command, for referring to the command from the markup or from script. If a command has no ID, it is an anonymous command.
Label
  The name of the command as seen by the user.
Hint
  A helpful or descriptive string that can be shown to the user.
Icon
  An absolute URL identifying a graphical image that represents the action. A command might not have an Icon.
Access Key
  A key combination selected by the user agent that triggers the command. A command might not have an Access Key.
Hidden State
  Whether the command is hidden or not (basically, whether it should be shown in menus).
Disabled State
  Whether the command is relevant and can be triggered or not.
Checked State
  Whether the command is checked or not.
Action
  The actual effect that triggering the command will have. This could be a scripted event handler, a URL to which to navigate, or a form submission.

These facets are exposed on elements using the command API:

element . `commandType`

  Exposes the Type facet of the command.

element . `id`

  Exposes the ID facet of the command.

element . `commandLabel`

  Exposes the Label facet of the command.

element . `title`

  Exposes the Hint facet of the command.

element . `commandIcon`

  Exposes the Icon facet of the command.

element . `accessKeyLabel`

  Exposes the Access Key facet of the command.

element . `commandHidden`

  Exposes the Hidden State facet of the command.

element . `commandDisabled`

  Exposes the Disabled State facet of the command.

element . `commandChecked`

  Exposes the Checked State facet of the command.

element . `click`()

  Triggers the Action of the command.

The `commandType` attribute must return a string whose value is either "`command`", "`radio`", or "`checkbox`", depending on whether the Type of the command defined by the element is "command", "radio", or "checkbox" respectively. If the element does not define a command, it must return null.

The `commandLabel` attribute must return the command's Label, or null if the element does not define a command or does not specify a Label.

The `commandIcon` attribute must return the absolute URL of the command's Icon. If the element does not specify an icon, or if the element does not define a command, then the attribute must return null.

The `commandHidden` attribute must return true if the command's Hidden State is that the command is hidden, and false if the command is not hidden. If the element does not define a command, the attribute must return null.

The `commandDisabled` attribute must return true if the command's Disabled State is that the command is disabled, and false if the command is not disabled. This attribute is not affected by the command's Hidden State. If the element does not define a command, the attribute must return null.

The `commandChecked` attribute must return true if the command's Checked State is that the command is checked, and false if it is that the command is not checked. If the element does not define a command, the attribute must return null.

The ID facet is exposed by the `id` IDL attribute, the Hint facet is exposed by the `title` IDL attribute, and the AccessKey facet is exposed by the `accessKeyLabel` IDL attribute.

document . `commands`

  Returns an `HTMLCollection` of the elements in the `Document` that define commands and have IDs.

The `commands` attribute of the document's `Document` interface must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only elements that define commands and have IDs.

User agents may expose the commands that match the following criteria:

- The Hidden State facet is false (visible)
- The element is in a `Document` that has an associated browsing context.
- Neither the element nor any of its ancestors has a `hidden` attribute specified.
- The element is not a `menuitem` element, or it is a child of a currently relevant `menu` element, or it has an Access Key.

User agents are encouraged to do this especially for commands that have Access Keys, as a way to advertise those keys to the user.

For example, such commands could be listed in the user agent's menu bar.

##### 4.11.6.2 Using the `a` element to define a command

An `a` element with an `href` attribute defines a command.

The Type of the command is "command".

The ID of the command is the value of the `id` attribute of the element, if the attribute is present and not empty. Otherwise the command is an anonymous command.

The Label of the command is the string given by the element's `textContent` IDL attribute.

The Hint of the command is the value of the `title` attribute of the element. If the attribute is not present, the Hint is the empty string.

The Icon of the command is the absolute URL obtained from resolving the value of the `src` attribute of the first `img` element descendant of the element in tree order, relative to that element, if there is such an element and resolving its attribute is successful. Otherwise, there is no Icon for the command.

The AccessKey of the command is the element's assigned access key, if any.

The Hidden State of the command is true (hidden) if the element has a `hidden` attribute, and false otherwise.

The Disabled State facet of the command is true if the element or one of its ancestors is inert, and false otherwise.

The Checked State of the command is always false. (The command is never checked.)

The Action of the command, if the element has a defined activation behavior, is to run synthetic click activation steps on the element. Otherwise, it is just to fire a `click` event at the element.

##### 4.11.6.3 Using the `button` element to define a command

A `button` element always defines a command.

The Type, ID, Label, Hint, Icon, Access Key, Hidden State, Checked State, and Action facets of the command are determined as for `a` elements (see the previous section).

The Disabled State of the command is true if the element or one of its ancestors is inert, or if the element's disabled state is set, and false otherwise.

##### 4.11.6.4 Using the `input` element to define a command

An `input` element whose `type` attribute is in one of the Submit Button, Reset Button, Image Button, Button, Radio Button, or Checkbox states defines a command.

The Type of the command is "radio" if the `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state, "checkbox" if the `type` attribute is in the Checkbox state, and "command" otherwise.

The ID of the command is the value of the `id` attribute of the element, if the attribute is present and not empty. Otherwise the command is an anonymous command.

The Label of the command depends on the Type of the command:

If the Type is "command", then it is the string given by the `value` attribute, if any, and a UA-dependent, locale-dependent value that the UA uses to label the button itself if the attribute is absent.

Otherwise, the Type is "radio" or "checkbox". If the element is a labeled control, the `textContent` of the first `label` element in tree order whose labeled control is the element in question is the Label (in DOM terms, this is the string given by `element.labels[0].textContent`). Otherwise, the value of the `value` attribute, if present, is the Label. Otherwise, the Label is the empty string.

The Hint of the command is the value of the `title` attribute of the `input` element. If the attribute is not present, the Hint is the empty string.

If the element's `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, and the element has a `src` attribute, and that attribute's value can be successfully resolved relative to the element, then the Icon of the command is the absolute URL obtained from resolving that attribute that way. Otherwise, there is no Icon for the command.

The AccessKey of the command is the element's assigned access key, if any.

The Hidden State of the command is true (hidden) if the element has a `hidden` attribute, and false otherwise.

The Disabled State of the command is true if the element or one of its ancestors is inert, or if the element's disabled state is set, and false otherwise.

The Checked State of the command is true if the command is of Type "radio" or "checkbox" and the element is checked attribute, and false otherwise.

The Action of the command, if the element has a defined activation behavior, is to run synthetic click activation steps on the element. Otherwise, it is just to fire a `click` event at the element.

##### 4.11.6.5 Using the `option` element to define a command

An `option` element with an ancestor `select` element and either no `value` attribute or a `value` attribute that is not the empty string defines a command.

The Type of the command is "radio" if the `option`'s nearest ancestor `select` element has no `multiple` attribute, and "checkbox" if it does.

The ID of the command is the value of the `id` attribute of the element, if the attribute is present and not empty. Otherwise the command is an anonymous command.

The Label of the command is the value of the `option` element's `label` attribute, if there is one, or else the value of `option` element's `textContent` IDL attribute, with leading and trailing whitespace stripped, and with any sequences of two or more space characters replaced by a single U+0020 SPACE character.

The Hint of the command is the string given by the element's `title` attribute, if any, and the empty string if the attribute is absent.

There is no Icon for the command.

The AccessKey of the command is the element's assigned access key, if any.

The Hidden State of the command is true (hidden) if the element has a `hidden` attribute, and false otherwise.

The Disabled State of the command is true if the element is disabled, or if its nearest ancestor `select` element is disabled, or if it or one of its ancestors is inert, and false otherwise.

The Checked State of the command is true (checked) if the element's selectedness is true, and false otherwise.

The Action of the command depends on its Type. If the command is of Type "radio" then it must pick the `option` element. Otherwise, it must toggle the `option` element.

##### 4.11.6.6 Using the `menuitem` element to define a command

A `menuitem` element that does not have a `command` attribute defines a command.

The Type of the command is "radio" if the `menuitem`'s `type` attribute is "`radio`", "checkbox" if the attribute's value is "`checkbox`", and "command" otherwise.

The ID of the command is the value of the `id` attribute of the element, if the attribute is present and not empty. Otherwise the command is an anonymous command.

The Label of the command is the value of the element's `label` attribute, if there is one, or the empty string if it doesn't.

The Hint of the command is the string given by the element's `title` attribute, if any, and the empty string if the attribute is absent.

The Icon for the command is the absolute URL obtained from resolving the value of the element's `icon` attribute, relative to the element, if it has such an attribute and resolving it is successful. Otherwise, there is no Icon for the command.

The AccessKey of the command is the element's assigned access key, if any.

The Hidden State of the command is true (hidden) if the element has a `hidden` attribute, and false otherwise.

The Disabled State of the command is true if the element or one of its ancestors is inert, or if the element has a `disabled` attribute, and false otherwise.

The Checked State of the command is true (checked) if the element has a `checked` attribute, and false otherwise.

The Action of the command, if the element has a defined activation behavior, is to run synthetic click activation steps on the element. Otherwise, it is just to fire a `click` event at the element.

##### 4.11.6.7 Using the `command` attribute on `menuitem` elements to define a command indirectly

A `menuitem` element with a master command defines a command.

The Type of the command is the Type of the master command.

The ID of the command is the value of the `id` attribute of the element, if the attribute is present and not empty. Otherwise the command is an anonymous command.

The Label of the command is the Label of the master command.

If the element has a `title` attribute, then the Hint of the command is the value of that `title` attribute. Otherwise, the Hint of the command is the Hint of the master command.

The Icon of the command is the Icon of the master command.

The AccessKey of the command is the element's assigned access key, if any.

The Hidden State of the command is the Hidden State of the master command.

The Disabled State of the command is the Disabled State of the master command.

The Checked State of the command is the Checked State of the master command.

The Action of the command is to invoke the Action of the master command.

##### 4.11.6.8 Using the `accesskey` attribute on a `label` element to define a command

A `label` element that has an assigned access key and a labeled control and whose labeled control defines a command, itself defines a command.

The Type of the command is "command".

The ID of the command is the value of the `id` attribute of the element, if the attribute is present and not empty. Otherwise the command is an anonymous command.

The Label of the command is the string given by the element's `textContent` IDL attribute.

The Hint of the command is the value of the `title` attribute of the element.

There is no Icon for the command.

The AccessKey of the command is the element's assigned access key.

The Hidden State, Disabled State, and Action facets of the command are the same as the respective facets of the element's labeled control.

The Checked State of the command is always false. (The command is never checked.)

##### 4.11.6.9 Using the `accesskey` attribute on a `legend` element to define a command

A `legend` element that has an assigned access key and is a child of a `fieldset` element that has a descendant that is not a descendant of the `legend` element and is neither a `label` element nor a `legend` element but that defines a command, itself defines a command.

The Type of the command is "command".

The ID of the command is the value of the `id` attribute of the element, if the attribute is present and not empty. Otherwise the command is an anonymous command.

The Label of the command is the string given by the element's `textContent` IDL attribute.

The Hint of the command is the value of the `title` attribute of the element.

There is no Icon for the command.

The AccessKey of the command is the element's assigned access key.

The Hidden State, Disabled State, and Action facets of the command are the same as the respective facets of the first element in tree order that is a descendant of the parent of the `legend` element that defines a command but is not a descendant of the `legend` element and is neither a `label` nor a `legend` element.

The Checked State of the command is always false. (The command is never checked.)

##### 4.11.6.10 Using the `accesskey` attribute to define a command on other elements

An element that has an assigned access key defines a command.

If one of the earlier sections that define elements that define commands define that this element defines a command, then that section applies to this element, and this section does not. Otherwise, this section applies to that element.

The Type of the command is "command".

The ID of the command is the value of the `id` attribute of the element, if the attribute is present and not empty. Otherwise the command is an anonymous command.

The Label of the command depends on the element. If the element is a labeled control, the `textContent` of the first `label` element in tree order whose labeled control is the element in question is the Label (in DOM terms, this is the string given by `element.labels[0].textContent`). Otherwise, the Label is the `textContent` of the element itself.

The Hint of the command is the value of the `title` attribute of the element. If the attribute is not present, the Hint is the empty string.

There is no Icon for the command.

The AccessKey of the command is the element's assigned access key.

The Hidden State of the command is true (hidden) if the element has a `hidden` attribute, and false otherwise.

The Disabled State of the command is true if the element or one of its ancestors is inert, and false otherwise.

The Checked State of the command is always false. (The command is never checked.)

The Action of the command is to run the following steps:

1. Run the focusing steps for the element.
2. If the element has a defined activation behavior, run synthetic click activation steps on the element.
3. Otherwise, if the element does not have a defined activation behavior, fire a `click` event at the element.

#### 4.11.7 The `dialog` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Sectioning root.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where flow content is expected.
Content model:
  Flow content.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `open` — Whether the dialog box is showing
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLDialogElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute boolean open;
                 attribute DOMString returnValue;
        void show(optional (MouseEvent or Element) anchor);
        void showModal(optional (MouseEvent or Element) anchor);
        void close(optional DOMString returnValue);
      };

The `dialog` element represents a part of an application that a user interacts with to perform a task, for example a dialog box, inspector, or window.

The `open` attribute is a boolean attribute. When specified, it indicates that the `dialog` element is active and that the user can interact with it.

A `dialog` element without an `open` attribute specified should not be shown to the user. This requirement may be implemented indirectly through the style layer. For example, user agents that support the suggested default rendering implement this requirement using the CSS rules described in the rendering section.

The `tabindex` attribute must not be specified on `dialog` elements.

dialog . `show`( [ anchor ] )

  Displays the `dialog` element.

  The argument, if provided, provides an anchor point to which the element will be fixed.

dialog . `showModal`( [ anchor ] )

  Displays the `dialog` element and makes it the top-most modal dialog.

  The argument, if provided, provides an anchor point to which the element will be fixed.

  This method honors the `autofocus` attribute.

dialog . `close`( [ result ] )

  Closes the `dialog` element.

  The argument, if provided, provides a return value.

dialog . `returnValue` [ = result ]

  Returns the `dialog`'s return value.

  Can be set, to update the return value.

When the `show()` method is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If the element already has an `open` attribute, then abort these steps.

2. Add an `open` attribute to the `dialog` element, whose value is the empty string.

3. If the `show()` method was invoked with an argument, set up the position of the `dialog` element, using that argument as the anchor. Otherwise, set the `dialog` to the normal alignment mode.

4. Run the dialog focusing steps for the `dialog` element.

Each `Document` has a stack of `dialog` elements known as the pending dialog stack. When a `Document` is created, this stack must be initialised to be empty.

When an element is added to the pending dialog stack, it must also be added to the top layer layer. When an element is removed from the pending dialog stack, it must be removed from the top layer. [FULLSCREEN]

When the `showModal()` method is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let subject be the `dialog` element on which the method was invoked.

2. If subject already has an `open` attribute, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

3. If subject is not in a `Document`, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

4. Add an `open` attribute to subject, whose value is the empty string.

5. If the `showModal()` method was invoked with an argument, set up the position of subject, using that argument as the anchor. Otherwise, set the `dialog` to the centered alignment mode.

6. Let subject's node document be blocked by the modal dialog subject.

7. Push subject onto subject's node document's pending dialog stack.

8. Run the dialog focusing steps for subject.

The dialog focusing steps for a `dialog` element subject are as follows:

1. If for some reason subject is not a control group owner at this point, or if it is inert, abort these steps.

2. Let control be the first non-inert focusable area in subject's control group whose DOM anchor has an `autofocus` attribute specified.

   If there isn't one, then let control be the first non-inert focusable area in subject's control group.

   If there isn't one of those either, then let control be subject.

3. Run the focusing steps for control.

If at any time a `dialog` element is removed from a `Document`, then if that `dialog` is in that `Document`'s pending dialog stack, the following steps must be run:

1. Let subject be that `dialog` element and document be the `Document` from which it is being removed.

2. Remove subject from document's pending dialog stack.

3. If document's pending dialog stack is not empty, then let document be blocked by the modal dialog that is at the top of document's pending dialog stack. Otherwise, let document be no longer blocked by a modal dialog at all.

When the `close()` method is invoked, the user agent must close the dialog that the method was invoked on. If the method was invoked with an argument, that argument must be used as the return value; otherwise, there is no return value.

When a `dialog` element subject is to be closed, optionally with a return value result, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If subject does not have an `open` attribute, then abort these steps.

2. Remove subject's `open` attribute.

3. If the argument result was provided, then set the `returnValue` attribute to the value of result.

4. If subject is in its `Document`'s pending dialog stack, then run these substeps:

   1. Remove subject from that pending dialog stack.

   2. If that pending dialog stack is not empty, then let subject's node document be blocked by the modal dialog that is at the top of the pending dialog stack. Otherwise, let document be no longer blocked by a modal dialog at all.

5. Queue a task to fire a simple event named `close` at subject.

The `returnValue` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the last value to which it was set. On setting, it must be set to the new value. When the element is created, it must be set to the empty string.

Canceling dialogs: When a `Document`'s pending dialog stack is not empty, user agents may provide a user interface that, upon activation, queues a task to fire a simple event named `cancel` that is cancelable at the top `dialog` element on the `Document`'s pending dialog stack. The default action of this event must be to check if that element has an `open` attribute, and if it does, close the dialog with no return value.

An example of such a UI mechanism would be the user pressing the "Escape" key.

All `dialog` elements are always in one of three modes: normal alignment, centered alignment, and magic alignment. When a `dialog` element is created, it must be placed in the normal alignment mode. In this mode, normal CSS requirements apply to the element. The centered alignment mode is only used for `dialog` elements that are in the top layer. [FULLSCREEN] [CSS]

When an element subject is placed in centered alignment mode, and when it is in that mode and has new rendering boxes created, the user agent must set up the element such that its top static position, for the purposes of calculating the used value of the 'top' property, is the value that would place the element's top margin edge as far from the top of the viewport as the element's bottom margin edge from the bottom of the viewport, if the element's height is less than the height of the viewport, and otherwise is the value that would place the element's top margin edge at the top of the viewport.

If there is a `dialog` element with centered alignment and that is being rendered when its browsing context changes viewport width (as measured in CSS pixels), then the user agent must recreate the element's boxes, recalculating its top static position as in the previous paragraph.

This top static position of a `dialog` element with centered alignment must remain the element's top static position until its boxes are recreated. (The element's static position is only used in calculating the used value of the 'top' property in certain situations; it's not used, for instance, to position the element if its 'position' property is set to 'static'.)

When a user agent is to set up the position of an element subject using an anchor anchor, it must run the following steps:

1. If anchor is a `MouseEvent` object, then run these substeps:

   1. If anchor's target element does not have a rendered box, or is in a different document than subject, then let subject be in the centered alignment mode, and abort the set up the position steps.

   2. Let anchor element be an anonymous element rendered as a box with zero height and width (so its margin and border boxes both just form a point), positioned so that its top and left are at the coordinate identified by the event, and whose properties all compute to their initial values.

   Otherwise, let anchor element be anchor.

2. Put subject in the magic alignment mode, aligned to anchor element.

While an element A has magic alignment, aligned to an element B, the following requirements apply:

- If at any time either A or B cease having rendered boxes, A and B cease being in the same `Document`, or B ceases being earlier than A in tree order, then, if subject is in the pending dialog stack, let subject's mode become centered alignment, otherwise, let subject's mode become normal alignment.

- A's 'position' property must compute to the keyword 'absolute-anchored' rather than whatever it would otherwise compute to (i.e. the 'position' property's specified value is ignored).

  The 'absolute-anchored' keyword's requirements are described below.

- The anchor points for A and B are defined as per the appropriate entry in the following list:

  If the computed value of 'anchor-point' is 'none' on both A and B

    The anchor points of A and B are the center points of their respective first boxes' border boxes.

  If the computed value of 'anchor-point' is 'none' on A and a specific point on B

    The anchor point of B is the point given by its 'anchor-point' property.

    If the anchor point of B is the center point of B's first box's border box, then A's anchor point is the center point of its first box's margin box.

    Otherwise, A's anchor point is on one of its margin edges. Consider four hypothetical half-infinite lines L1, L2, L3, and L4 that each start in the center of B's first box's border box, and that extend respectively through the top left corner, top right corner, bottom right corner, and bottom left corner of B's first box's border box. A's anchor point is determined by the location of B's anchor point relative to these four hypothetical lines, as follows:

    If the anchor point of B lies on L1 or L2, or inside the area bounded by L1 and L2 that also contains the points above B's first box's border box, then let A's anchor point be the horizontal center of A's bottom margin edge.

    Otherwise, if the anchor point of B lies on L3 or L4, or inside the area bounded by L4 and L4 that also contains the points below B's first box's border box, then let A's anchor point be the horizontal center of A's top margin edge.

    Otherwise, if the anchor point of B lies inside the area bounded by L4 and L1 that also contains the points to the left of B's first box's border box, then let A's anchor point be the vertical center of A's right margin edge.

    Otherwise, the anchor point of B lies inside the area bounded by L2 and L3 that also contains the points to the right of B's first box's border box; let A's anchor point be the vertical center of A's left margin edge.

  If the computed value of 'anchor-point' is a specific point on A and 'none' on B

    The anchor point of A is the point given by its 'anchor-point' property.

    If the anchor point of A is the center point of A's first box's margin box, then B's anchor point is the center point of its first box's border box.

    Otherwise, B's anchor point is on one of its border edges. Consider four hypothetical half-infinite lines L1, L2, L3, and L4 that each start in the center of A's first box's margin box, and that extend respectively through the top left corner, top right corner, bottom right corner, and bottom left corner of A's first box's margin box. B's anchor point is determined by the location of A's anchor point relative to these four hypothetical lines, as follows:

    If the anchor point of A lies on L1 or L2, or inside the area bounded by L1 and L2 that also contains the points above A's first box's margin box, then let B's anchor point be the horizontal center of B's bottom border edge.

    Otherwise, if the anchor point of A lies on L3 or L4, or inside the area bounded by L4 and L4 that also contains the points below A's first box's margin box, then let B's anchor point be the horizontal center of B's top border edge.

    Otherwise, if the anchor point of A lies inside the area bounded by L4 and L1 that also contains the points to the left of A's first box's margin box, then let B's anchor point be the vertical center of B's right border edge.

    Otherwise, the anchor point of A lies inside the area bounded by L2 and L3 that also contains the points to the right of A's first box's margin box; let B's anchor point be the vertical center of B's left border edge.

  If the computed value of 'anchor-point' is a specific point on both A and B

    The anchor points of A and B are the points given by their respective 'anchor-point' properties.

  The rules above generally use A's margin box, but B's border box. This is because while A always has a margin box, and using the margin box allows for the dialog to be positioned offset from the box it is annotating, B sometimes does not have a margin box (e.g. if it is a table-cell), or has a margin box whose position may be not entirely clear (e.g. in the face of margin collapsing and 'clear' handling of in-flow blocks).

  In cases where B does not have a border box but its border box is used by the algorithm above, user agents must use its first box's content area instead. (This is in particular an issue with boxes in tables that have 'border-collapse' set to 'collapse'.)

- When an element's 'position' property computes to 'absolute-anchored', the 'float' property does not apply and must compute to 'none', the 'display' property must compute to a value as described by the table in the section of CSS 2.1 describing the relationships between 'display', 'position', and 'float', and the element's box must be positioned using the rules for absolute positioning but with its static position set such that if the box is positioned in its static position, its anchor point is exactly aligned over the anchor point of the element to which it is magically aligned. Elements aligned in this way are absolutely positioned. For the purposes of determining the containing block of other elements, the 'absolute-anchored' keyword must be treated like the 'absolute' keyword.

The trivial example of an element that does not have a rendered box is one whose 'display' property computes to 'none'. However, there are many other cases; e.g. table columns do not have boxes (their properties merely affect other boxes).

If an element to which another element is anchored changes rendering, the anchored element will be be repositioned accordingly. (In other words, the requirements above are live, they are not just calculated once per anchored element.)

The 'absolute-anchored' keyword is not a keyword that can be specified in CSS; the 'position' property can only compute to this value if the `dialog` element is positioned via the APIs described above.

User agents in visual interactive media should allow the user to pan the viewport to access all parts of a `dialog` element's border box, even if the element is larger than the viewport and the viewport would otherwise not have a scroll mechanism (e.g. because the viewport's 'overflow' property is set to 'hidden').

The `open` IDL attribute must reflect the `open` content attribute.

##### 4.11.7.1 Anchor points

This section will eventually be moved to a CSS specification; it is specified here only on an interim basis until an editor can be found to own this.

'anchor-point'
Value: | none | <position>
Initial: | none
Applies to: | all elements
Inherited: | no
Percentages: | refer to width or height of box; see prose
Media: | visual
Computed value: | The specified value, but with any lengths replaced by their corresponding absolute length
Animatable: | no
Canonical order: | per grammar

The 'anchor-point' property specifies a point to which dialog boxes are to be aligned.

If the value is a <position>, the anchor point is the point given by the value, which must be interpreted relative to the element's first rendered box's margin box. Percentages must be calculated relative to the element's first rendered box's margin box (specifically, its width for the horizontal position and its height for the vertical position). [CSSVALUES] [CSS]

If the value is the keyword 'none', then no explicit anchor point is defined. The user agent will pick an anchor point automatically if necessary (as described in the definition of the `open()` method above).

### 4.12 Scripting

Scripts allow authors to add interactivity to their documents.

Authors are encouraged to use declarative alternatives to scripting where possible, as declarative mechanisms are often more maintainable, and many users disable scripting.

For example, instead of using script to show or hide a section to show more details, the `details` element could be used.

Authors are also encouraged to make their applications degrade gracefully in the absence of scripting support.

For example, if an author provides a link in a table header to dynamically resort the table, the link could also be made to function without scripts by requesting the sorted table from the server.

#### 4.12.1 The `script` element

Categories:
  Metadata content.
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Script-supporting element.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where metadata content is expected.
  Where phrasing content is expected.
  Where script-supporting elements are expected.
Content model:
  If there is no `src` attribute, depends on the value of the `type` attribute, but must match script content restrictions.
  If there is a `src` attribute, the element must be either empty or contain only script documentation that also matches script content restrictions.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `src` — Address of the resource
  `type` — Type of embedded resource
  `charset` — Character encoding of the external script resource
  `async` — Execute script asynchronously
  `defer` — Defer script execution
  `crossorigin` — How the element handles crossorigin requests
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLScriptElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute DOMString src;
                 attribute DOMString type;
                 attribute DOMString charset;
                 attribute boolean async;
                 attribute boolean defer;
                 attribute DOMString? crossOrigin;
                 attribute DOMString text;

        // also has obsolete members
      };

The `script` element allows authors to include dynamic script and data blocks in their documents. The element does not represent content for the user.

When used to include dynamic scripts, the scripts may either be embedded inline or may be imported from an external file using the `src` attribute. If the language is not that described by "`text/javascript`", then the `type` attribute must be present, as described below. Whatever language is used, the contents of the `script` element must conform with the requirements of that language's specification.

When used to include data blocks (as opposed to scripts), the data must be embedded inline, the format of the data must be given using the `type` attribute, the `src` attribute must not be specified, and the contents of the `script` element must conform to the requirements defined for the format used.

The `type` attribute gives the language of the script or format of the data. If the attribute is present, its value must be a valid MIME type. The `charset` parameter must not be specified. The default, which is used if the attribute is absent, is "`text/javascript`".

The `src` attribute, if specified, gives the address of the external script resource to use. The value of the attribute must be a valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces identifying a script resource of the type given by the `type` attribute, if the attribute is present, or of the type "`text/javascript`", if the attribute is absent. A resource is a script resource of a given type if that type identifies a scripting language and the resource conforms with the requirements of that language's specification.

The `charset` attribute gives the character encoding of the external script resource. The attribute must not be specified if the `src` attribute is not present. If the attribute is set, its value must be an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the labels of an encoding, and must specify the same encoding as the `charset` parameter of the Content-Type metadata of the external file, if any. [ENCODING]

The `async` and `defer` attributes are boolean attributes that indicate how the script should be executed. The `defer` and `async` attributes must not be specified if the `src` attribute is not present.

There are three possible modes that can be selected using these attributes. If the `async` attribute is present, then the script will be executed asynchronously, as soon as it is available. If the `async` attribute is not present but the `defer` attribute is present, then the script is executed when the page has finished parsing. If neither attribute is present, then the script is fetched and executed immediately, before the user agent continues parsing the page.

The exact processing details for these attributes are, for mostly historical reasons, somewhat non-trivial, involving a number of aspects of HTML. The implementation requirements are therefore by necessity scattered throughout the specification. The algorithms below (in this section) describe the core of this processing, but these algorithms reference and are referenced by the parsing rules for `script` start and end tags in HTML, in foreign content, and in XML, the rules for the `document.write()` method, the handling of scripting, etc.

The `defer` attribute may be specified even if the `async` attribute is specified, to cause legacy Web browsers that only support `defer` (and not `async`) to fall back to the `defer` behavior instead of the synchronous blocking behavior that is the default.

The `crossorigin` attribute is a CORS settings attribute. It controls, for scripts that are obtained from other origins, whether error information will be exposed.

Changing the `src`, `type`, `charset`, `async`, `defer`, and `crossorigin` attributes dynamically has no direct effect; these attribute are only used at specific times described below.

A `script` element has several associated pieces of state.

The first is a flag indicating whether or not the script block has been "already started". Initially, `script` elements must have this flag unset (script blocks, when created, are not "already started"). The cloning steps for `script` elements must set the "already started" flag on the copy if it is set on the element being cloned.

The second is a flag indicating whether the element was "parser-inserted". Initially, `script` elements must have this flag unset. It is set by the HTML parser and the XML parser on `script` elements they insert and affects the processing of those elements.

The third is a flag indicating whether the element will "force-async". Initially, `script` elements must have this flag set. It is unset by the HTML parser and the XML parser on `script` elements they insert. In addition, whenever a `script` element whose "force-async" flag is set has a `async` content attribute added, the element's "force-async" flag must be unset.

The fourth is a flag indicating whether or not the script block is "ready to be parser-executed". Initially, `script` elements must have this flag unset (script blocks, when created, are not "ready to be parser-executed"). This flag is used only for elements that are also "parser-inserted", to let the parser know when to execute the script.

The last few pieces of state are the script block's type, the script block's character encoding, and the script block's fallback character encoding. They are determined when the script is prepared, based on the attributes on the element at that time, and the `script` element's node document.

When a `script` element that is not marked as being "parser-inserted" experiences one of the events listed in the following list, the user agent must synchronously prepare the `script` element:

- The `script` element gets inserted into a document, at the time the node is inserted according to the DOM, after any other `script` elements inserted at the same time that are earlier in the `Document` in tree order.
- The `script` element is in a `Document` and a node or document fragment is inserted into the `script` element, after any `script` elements inserted at that time.
- The `script` element is in a `Document` and has a `src` attribute set where previously the element had no such attribute.

To prepare a script, the user agent must act as follows:

1. If the `script` element is marked as having "already started", then the user agent must abort these steps at this point. The script is not executed.

2. If the element has its "parser-inserted" flag set, then set was-parser-inserted to true and unset the element's "parser-inserted" flag. Otherwise, set was-parser-inserted to false.

   This is done so that if parser-inserted `script` elements fail to run when the parser tries to run them, e.g. because they are empty or specify an unsupported scripting language, another script can later mutate them and cause them to run again.

3. If was-parser-inserted is true and the element does not have an `async` attribute, then set the element's "force-async" flag to true.

   This is done so that if a parser-inserted `script` element fails to run when the parser tries to run it, but it is later executed after a script dynamically updates it, it will execute asynchronously even if the `async` attribute isn't set.

4. If the element has no `src` attribute, and its child nodes, if any, consist only of comment nodes and empty `Text` nodes, then the user agent must abort these steps at this point. The script is not executed.

5. If the element is not in a `Document`, then the user agent must abort these steps at this point. The script is not executed.

6. If either:

   - the `script` element has a `type` attribute and its value is the empty string, or
   - the `script` element has no `type` attribute but it has a `language` attribute and that attribute's value is the empty string, or
   - the `script` element has neither a `type` attribute nor a `language` attribute, then

   ...let the script block's type for this `script` element be "`text/javascript`".

   Otherwise, if the `script` element has a `type` attribute, let the script block's type for this `script` element be the value of that attribute with any leading or trailing sequences of space characters removed.

   Otherwise, the element has a non-empty `language` attribute; let the script block's type for this `script` element be the concatenation of the string "`text/`" followed by the value of the `language` attribute.

   The `language` attribute is never conforming, and is always ignored if there is a `type` attribute present.

7. If the user agent does not support the scripting language given by the script block's type for this `script` element, then the user agent must abort these steps at this point. The script is not executed.

8. If was-parser-inserted is true, then flag the element as "parser-inserted" again, and set the element's "force-async" flag to false.

9. The user agent must set the element's "already started" flag.

   The state of the element at this moment is later used to determine the script source.

10. If the element is flagged as "parser-inserted", but the element's node document is not the `Document` of the parser that created the element, then abort these steps.

11. If scripting is disabled for the `script` element, then the user agent must abort these steps at this point. The script is not executed.

    The definition of scripting is disabled means that, amongst others, the following scripts will not execute: scripts in `XMLHttpRequest`'s `responseXML` documents, scripts in `DOMParser`-created documents, scripts in documents created by `XSLTProcessor`'s `transformToDocument` feature, and scripts that are first inserted by a script into a `Document` that was created using the `createDocument()` API. [XHR] [DOMPARSING] [DOM]

12. If the `script` element has an `event` attribute and a `for` attribute, then run these substeps:

    1. Let for be the value of the `for` attribute.

    2. Let event be the value of the `event` attribute.

    3. Strip leading and trailing whitespace from event and for.

    4. If for is not an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`window`", then the user agent must abort these steps at this point. The script is not executed.

    5. If event is not an ASCII case-insensitive match for either the string "`onload`" or the string "`onload()`", then the user agent must abort these steps at this point. The script is not executed.

13. If the `script` element has a `charset` attribute, then let the script block's character encoding for this `script` element be the result of getting an encoding from the value of the `charset` attribute.

    Otherwise, let the script block's fallback character encoding for this `script` element be the same as the encoding of the document itself.

    Only one of these two pieces of state is set.

14. If the element has a `src` content attribute, run these substeps:

    1. Let src be the value of the element's `src` attribute.

    2. If src is the empty string, queue a task to fire a simple event named `error` at the element, and abort these steps.

    3. Resolve src relative to the element.

    4. If the previous step failed, queue a task to fire a simple event named `error` at the element, and abort these steps.

    5. Do a potentially CORS-enabled fetch of the resulting absolute URL, with the mode being the current state of the element's `crossorigin` content attribute, the origin being the origin of the `script` element's node document, and the default origin behaviour set to taint.

       The resource obtained in this fashion can be either CORS-same-origin or CORS-cross-origin. This only affects how error reporting happens.

       For performance reasons, user agents may start fetching the script (as defined above) as soon as the `src` attribute is set, instead, in the hope that the element will be inserted into the document (and that the `crossorigin` attribute won't change value in the meantime). Either way, once the element is inserted into the document, the load must have started as described in this step. If the UA performs such prefetching, but the element is never inserted in the document, or the `src` attribute is dynamically changed, or the `crossorigin` attribute is dynamically changed, then the user agent will not execute the script so obtained, and the fetching process will have been effectively wasted.

15. Then, the first of the following options that describes the situation must be followed:

    If the element has a `src` attribute, and the element has a `defer` attribute, and the element has been flagged as "parser-inserted", and the element does not have an `async` attribute

      The element must be added to the end of the list of scripts that will execute when the document has finished parsing associated with the `Document` of the parser that created the element.

      The task that the networking task source places on the task queue once the fetching algorithm has completed must set the element's "ready to be parser-executed" flag. The parser will handle executing the script.

    If the element has a `src` attribute, and the element has been flagged as "parser-inserted", and the element does not have an `async` attribute

      The element is the pending parsing-blocking script of the `Document` of the parser that created the element. (There can only be one such script per `Document` at a time.)

      The task that the networking task source places on the task queue once the fetching algorithm has completed must set the element's "ready to be parser-executed" flag. The parser will handle executing the script.

    If the element does not have a `src` attribute, and the element has been flagged as "parser-inserted", and either the parser that created the `script` is an XML parser or it's an HTML parser whose script nesting level is not greater than one, and the `Document` of the HTML parser or XML parser that created the `script` element has a style sheet that is blocking scripts

      The element is the pending parsing-blocking script of the `Document` of the parser that created the element. (There can only be one such script per `Document` at a time.)

      Set the element's "ready to be parser-executed" flag. The parser will handle executing the script.

    If the element has a `src` attribute, does not have an `async` attribute, and does not have the "force-async" flag set

      The element must be added to the end of the list of scripts that will execute in order as soon as possible associated with the node document of the `script` element at the time the prepare a script algorithm started.

      The task that the networking task source places on the task queue once the fetching algorithm has completed must run the following steps:

      1. If the element is not now the first element in the list of scripts that will execute in order as soon as possible to which it was added above, then mark the element as ready but abort these steps without executing the script yet.

      2. Execution: Execute the script block corresponding to the first script element in this list of scripts that will execute in order as soon as possible.

      3. Remove the first element from this list of scripts that will execute in order as soon as possible.

      4. If this list of scripts that will execute in order as soon as possible is still not empty and the first entry has already been marked as ready, then jump back to the step labeled execution.

    If the element has a `src` attribute

      The element must be added to the set of scripts that will execute as soon as possible of the node document of the `script` element at the time the prepare a script algorithm started.

      The task that the networking task source places on the task queue once the fetching algorithm has completed must execute the script block and then remove the element from the set of scripts that will execute as soon as possible.

    Otherwise
      The user agent must immediately execute the script block, even if other scripts are already executing.

Fetching an external script must delay the load event of the element's node document until the task that is queued by the networking task source once the resource has been fetched (defined above) has been run.

The pending parsing-blocking script of a `Document` is used by the `Document`'s parser(s).

If a `script` element that blocks a parser gets moved to another `Document` before it would normally have stopped blocking that parser, it nonetheless continues blocking that parser until the condition that causes it to be blocking the parser no longer applies (e.g. if the script is a pending parsing-blocking script because there was a style sheet that is blocking scripts when it was parsed, but then the script is moved to another `Document` before the style sheet loads, the script still blocks the parser until the style sheets are all loaded, at which time the script executes and the parser is unblocked).

When the user agent is required to execute a script block, it must run the following steps:

1. If the element is flagged as "parser-inserted", but the element's node document is not the `Document` of the parser that created the element, then abort these steps.

2. Jump to the appropriate set of steps from the list below:

   If the load resulted in an error (for example a DNS error, or an HTTP 404 error)

     Executing the script block must just consist of firing a simple event named `error` at the element.

   If the load was successful

     Executing the script block must consist of running the following steps. For the purposes of these steps, the script is considered to be from an external file if, while the prepare a script algorithm above was running for this script, the `script` element had a `src` attribute specified.

     1. Initialise the script block's source as follows:

        If the script is from an external file and the script block's type is a text-based language

          The contents of that file, interpreted as a Unicode string, are the script source.

          To obtain the Unicode string, the user agent run the following steps:

          1. If the resource's Content Type metadata, if any, specifies a character encoding, and the user agent supports that encoding, then let character encoding be that encoding, and jump to the bottom step in this series of steps.

          2. If the algorithm above set the script block's character encoding, then let character encoding be that encoding, and jump to the bottom step in this series of steps.

          3. Let character encoding be the script block's fallback character encoding.

          4. If the specification for the script block's type gives specific rules for decoding files in that format to Unicode, follow them, using character encoding as the character encoding specified by higher-level protocols, if necessary.

             Otherwise, decode the file to Unicode, using character encoding as the fallback encoding.

             The decode algorithm overrides character encoding if the file contains a BOM.

        If the script is from an external file and the script block's type is an XML-based language

          The external file is the script source. When it is later executed, it must be interpreted in a manner consistent with the specification defining the language given by the script block's type.

        If the script is inline and the script block's type is a text-based language

          The value of the `text` IDL attribute at the time the element's "already started" flag was last set is the script source.

        If the script is inline and the script block's type is an XML-based language

          The child nodes of the `script` element at the time the element's "already started" flag was last set are the script source.

     2. Fire a simple event named `beforescriptexecute` that bubbles and is cancelable at the `script` element.

        If the event is canceled, then abort these steps.

     3. If the script is from an external file, then increment the ignore-destructive-writes counter of the `script` element's node document. Let neutralised doc be that `Document`.

     4. Let old script element be the value to which the `script` element's node document's `currentScript` object was most recently initialized.

     5. Initialise the `script` element's node document's `currentScript` object to the `script` element.

     6. Create a script, using the script block's source, the URL from which the script was obtained, the script block's type as the scripting language, and the script settings object of the `script` element's node document's `Window` object.

        If the script came from a resource that was fetched in the steps above, and the resource was CORS-cross-origin, then pass the muted errors flag to the create a script algorithm as well.

        This is where the script is compiled and actually executed.

     7. Initialise the `script` element's node document's `currentScript` object to old script element.

     8. Decrement the ignore-destructive-writes counter of neutralised doc, if it was incremented in the earlier step.

     9. Fire a simple event named `afterscriptexecute` that bubbles (but is not cancelable) at the `script` element.

     10. If the script is from an external file, fire a simple event named `load` at the `script` element.

         Otherwise, the script is internal; queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the `script` element.

The IDL attributes `src`, `type`, `charset`, `defer`, each must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `crossOrigin` IDL attribute must reflect the `crossorigin` content attribute.

The `async` IDL attribute controls whether the element will execute asynchronously or not. If the element's "force-async" flag is set, then, on getting, the `async` IDL attribute must return true, and on setting, the "force-async" flag must first be unset, and then the content attribute must be removed if the IDL attribute's new value is false, and must be set to the empty string if the IDL attribute's new value is true. If the element's "force-async" flag is not set, the IDL attribute must reflect the `async` content attribute.

script . `text` [ = value ]

  Returns the contents of the element, ignoring child nodes that aren't `Text` nodes.

  Can be set, to replace the element's children with the given value.

The IDL attribute `text` must return a concatenation of the contents of all the `Text` nodes that are children of the `script` element (ignoring any other nodes such as comments or elements), in tree order. On setting, it must act the same way as the `textContent` IDL attribute.

When inserted using the `document.write()` method, `script` elements execute (typically synchronously), but when inserted using `innerHTML` and `outerHTML` attributes, they do not execute at all.

In this example, two `script` elements are used. One embeds an external script, and the other includes some data.

    <script src="game-engine.js"></script>
    <script type="text/x-game-map">
    ........U.........e
    o............A....e
    .....A.....AAA....e
    .A..AAA...AAAAA...e
    </script>

The data in this case might be used by the script to generate the map of a video game. The data doesn't have to be used that way, though; maybe the map data is actually embedded in other parts of the page's markup, and the data block here is just used by the site's search engine to help users who are looking for particular features in their game maps.

The following sample shows how a script element can be used to define a function that is then used by other parts of the document. It also shows how a `script` element can be used to invoke script while the document is being parsed, in this case to initialise the form's output.

    <script>
     function calculate(form) {
       var price = 52000;
       if (form.elements.brakes.checked)
         price += 1000;
       if (form.elements.radio.checked)
         price += 2500;
       if (form.elements.turbo.checked)
         price += 5000;
       if (form.elements.sticker.checked)
         price += 250;
       form.elements.result.value = price;
     }
    </script>
    <form name="pricecalc" onsubmit="return false" onchange="calculate(this)">
     <fieldset>
      <legend>Work out the price of your car</legend>
      <p>Base cost: £52000.</p>
      <p>Select additional options:</p>
      <ul>
       <li><label><input type=checkbox name=brakes> Ceramic brakes (£1000)</label></li>
       <li><label><input type=checkbox name=radio> Satellite radio (£2500)</label></li>
       <li><label><input type=checkbox name=turbo> Turbo charger (£5000)</label></li>
       <li><label><input type=checkbox name=sticker> "XZ" sticker (£250)</label></li>
      </ul>
      <p>Total: £<output name=result></output></p>
     </fieldset>
     <script>
      calculate(document.forms.pricecalc);
     </script>
    </form>

##### 4.12.1.1 Scripting languages

A user agent is said to support the scripting language if each component of the script block's type is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the corresponding component in the MIME type string of a scripting language that the user agent implements.

The following lists the MIME type strings that user agents must recognize, and the languages to which they refer:

`application/ecmascript`
`application/javascript`
`application/x-ecmascript`
`application/x-javascript`
`text/ecmascript`
`text/javascript`
`text/javascript1.0`
`text/javascript1.1`
`text/javascript1.2`
`text/javascript1.3`
`text/javascript1.4`
`text/javascript1.5`
`text/jscript`
`text/livescript`
`text/x-ecmascript`
`text/x-javascript`
  JavaScript. [ECMA262]

User agents may support other MIME types for other languages, but must not support other MIME types for the languages in the list above. User agents are not required to support the languages listed above.

The following MIME types (with or without parameters) must not be interpreted as scripting languages:

- `text/plain`
- `text/xml`
- `application/octet-stream`
- `application/xml`

These types are explicitly listed here because they are poorly-defined types that are nonetheless likely to be used as formats for data blocks, and it would be problematic if they were suddenly to be interpreted as script by a user agent.

When examining types to determine if they represent supported languages, user agents must not ignore MIME parameters. Types are to be compared including all parameters.

For example, types that include the `charset` parameter will not be recognised as referencing any of the scripting languages listed above.

##### 4.12.1.2 Restrictions for contents of `script` elements

The easiest and safest way to avoid the rather strange restrictions described in this section is to always escape "`<!--`" as "`<\!--`", "`<script`" as "`<\script`", and "`</script`" as "`<\/script`" when these sequences appear in literals in scripts (e.g. in strings, regular expressions, or comments), and to avoid writing code that uses such constructs in expressions. Doing so avoids the pitfalls that the restrictions in this section are prone to triggering: namely, that, for historical reasons, parsing of `script` blocks in HTML is a strange and exotic practice that acts unintuitively in the face of these sequences.

The `textContent` of a `script` element must match the `script` production in the following ABNF, the character set for which is Unicode. [ABNF]

    script        = outer *( comment-open inner comment-close outer )

    outer         = < any string that doesn't contain a substring that matches not-in-outer >
    not-in-outer  = comment-open
    inner         = < any string that doesn't contain a substring that matches not-in-inner >
    not-in-inner  = comment-close / script-open

    comment-open  = "<!--"
    comment-close = "-->"
    script-open   = "<" s c r i p t tag-end

    s             =  %x0053 ; U+0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S
    s             =/ %x0073 ; U+0073 LATIN SMALL LETTER S
    c             =  %x0043 ; U+0043 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C
    c             =/ %x0063 ; U+0063 LATIN SMALL LETTER C
    r             =  %x0052 ; U+0052 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R
    r             =/ %x0072 ; U+0072 LATIN SMALL LETTER R
    i             =  %x0049 ; U+0049 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I
    i             =/ %x0069 ; U+0069 LATIN SMALL LETTER I
    p             =  %x0050 ; U+0050 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P
    p             =/ %x0070 ; U+0070 LATIN SMALL LETTER P
    t             =  %x0054 ; U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T
    t             =/ %x0074 ; U+0074 LATIN SMALL LETTER T

    tag-end       =  %x0009 ; U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
    tag-end       =/ %x000A ; U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
    tag-end       =/ %x000C ; U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
    tag-end       =/ %x0020 ; U+0020 SPACE
    tag-end       =/ %x002F ; U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
    tag-end       =/ %x003E ; U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)

When a `script` element contains script documentation, there are further restrictions on the contents of the element, as described in the section below.

The following script illustrates this issue. Suppose you have a script that contains a string, as in:

    var example = 'Consider this string: <!-- <script>';
    console.log(example);

If one were to put this string directly in a `script` block, it would violate the restrictions above:

    <script>
      var example = 'Consider this string: <!-- <script>';
      console.log(example);
    </script>

The bigger problem, though, and the reason why it would violate those restrictions, is that actually the script would get parsed weirdly: the script block above is not terminated. That is, what looks like a "`</script>`" end tag in this snippet is actually still part of the `script` block. The script doesn't execute (since it's not terminated); if it somehow were to execute, as it might if the markup looked as follows, it would fail because the script (highlighted here) is not valid JavaScript:

    <script>
      var example = 'Consider this string: <!-- <script>';
      console.log(example);
    </script>
    <!-- despite appearances, this is actually part of the script still! -->
    <script>
     ... // this is the same script block still...
    </script>

What is going on here is that for legacy reasons, "`<!--`" and "`<script`" strings in `script` elements in HTML need to be balanced in order for the parser to consider closing the block.

By escaping the problematic strings as mentioned at the top of this section, the problem is avoided entirely:

    <script>
      var example = 'Consider this string: <\!-- <\script>';
      console.log(example);
    </script>
    <!-- this is just a comment between script blocks -->
    <script>
     ... // this is a new script block
    </script>

It is possible for these sequences to naturally occur in script expressions, as in the following examples:

    if (x<!--y) { ... }
    if ( player<script ) { ... }

In such cases the characters cannot be escaped, but the expressions can be rewritten so that the sequences don't occur, as in:

    if (x < !--y) { ... }
    if (!--y > x) { ... }
    if (!(--y) > x) { ... }
    if (player < script) { ... }
    if (script > player) { ... }

Doing this also avoids a different pitfall as well: for related historical reasons, the string "<!--" in JavaScript is actually treated as a line comment start, just like "//".

##### 4.12.1.3 Inline documentation for external scripts

If a `script` element's `src` attribute is specified, then the contents of the `script` element, if any, must be such that the value of the `text` IDL attribute, which is derived from the element's contents, matches the `documentation` production in the following ABNF, the character set for which is Unicode. [ABNF]

    documentation = *( *( space / tab / comment ) [ line-comment ] newline )
    comment       = slash star *( not-star / star not-slash ) 1*star slash
    line-comment  = slash slash *not-newline

    ; characters
    tab           = %x0009 ; U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
    newline       = %x000A ; U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
    space         = %x0020 ; U+0020 SPACE
    star          = %x002A ; U+002A ASTERISK (*)
    slash         = %x002F ; U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
    not-newline   = %x0000-0009 / %x000B-10FFFF
                    ; a Unicode character other than U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
    not-star      = %x0000-0029 / %x002B-10FFFF
                    ; a Unicode character other than U+002A ASTERISK (*)
    not-slash     = %x0000-002E / %x0030-10FFFF
                    ; a Unicode character other than U+002F SOLIDUS (/)

This corresponds to putting the contents of the element in JavaScript comments.

This requirement is in addition to the earlier restrictions on the syntax of contents of `script` elements.

This allows authors to include documentation, such as license information or API information, inside their documents while still referring to external script files. The syntax is constrained so that authors don't accidentally include what looks like valid script while also providing a `src` attribute.

    <script src="cool-effects.js">
     // create new instances using:
     //    var e = new Effect();
     // start the effect using .play, stop using .stop:
     //    e.play();
     //    e.stop();
    </script>

##### 4.12.1.4 Interaction of `script` elements and XSLT

This section is non-normative.

This specification does not define how XSLT interacts with the `script` element. However, in the absence of another specification actually defining this, here are some guidelines for implementors, based on existing implementations:

- When an XSLT transformation program is triggered by an `<?xml-stylesheet?>` processing instruction and the browser implements a direct-to-DOM transformation, `script` elements created by the XSLT processor need to be marked "parser-inserted" and run in document order (modulo scripts marked `defer` or `async`), asynchronously while the transformation is occurring.

- The `XSLTProcessor.transformToDocument()` method adds elements to a `Document` that is not in a browsing context, and, accordingly, any `script` elements they create need to have their "already started" flag set in the prepare a script algorithm and never get executed (scripting is disabled). Such `script` elements still need to be marked "parser-inserted", though, such that their `async` IDL attribute will return false in the absence of an `async` content attribute.

- The `XSLTProcessor.transformToFragment()` method needs to create a fragment that is equivalent to one built manually by creating the elements using `document.createElementNS()`. For instance, it needs to create `script` elements that aren't "parser-inserted" and that don't have their "already started" flag set, so that they will execute when the fragment is inserted into a document.

The main distinction between the first two cases and the last case is that the first two operate on `Document`s and the last operates on a fragment.

#### 4.12.2 The `noscript` element

Categories:
  Metadata content.
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  In a `head` element of an HTML document, if there are no ancestor `noscript` elements.
  Where phrasing content is expected in HTML documents, if there are no ancestor `noscript` elements.
Content model:
  When scripting is disabled, in a `head` element: in any order, zero or more `link` elements, zero or more `style` elements, and zero or more `meta` elements.
  When scripting is disabled, not in a `head` element: transparent, but there must be no `noscript` element descendants.
  Otherwise: text that conforms to the requirements given in the prose.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:
  Uses `HTMLElement`.

The `noscript` element represents nothing if scripting is enabled, and represents its children if scripting is disabled. It is used to present different markup to user agents that support scripting and those that don't support scripting, by affecting how the document is parsed.

When used in HTML documents, the allowed content model is as follows:

In a `head` element, if scripting is disabled for the `noscript` element

  The `noscript` element must contain only `link`, `style`, and `meta` elements.

In a `head` element, if scripting is enabled for the `noscript` element

  The `noscript` element must contain only text, except that invoking the HTML fragment parsing algorithm with the `noscript` element as the context element and the text contents as the input must result in a list of nodes that consists only of `link`, `style`, and `meta` elements that would be conforming if they were children of the `noscript` element, and no parse errors.

Outside of `head` elements, if scripting is disabled for the `noscript` element

  The `noscript` element's content model is transparent, with the additional restriction that a `noscript` element must not have a `noscript` element as an ancestor (that is, `noscript` can't be nested).

Outside of `head` elements, if scripting is enabled for the `noscript` element

  The `noscript` element must contain only text, except that the text must be such that running the following algorithm results in a conforming document with no `noscript` elements and no `script` elements, and such that no step in the algorithm throws an exception or causes an HTML parser to flag a parse error:

  1. Remove every `script` element from the document.
  2. Make a list of every `noscript` element in the document. For every `noscript` element in that list, perform the following steps:
     1. Let s be the concatenation of all the `Text` node children of the `noscript` element.
     2. Set the `outerHTML` attribute of the `noscript` element to the value of s. (This, as a side-effect, causes the `noscript` element to be removed from the document.) [DOMPARSING]

All these contortions are required because, for historical reasons, the `noscript` element is handled differently by the HTML parser based on whether scripting was enabled or not when the parser was invoked.

The `noscript` element must not be used in XML documents.

The `noscript` element is only effective in the HTML syntax, it has no effect in the XHTML syntax. This is because the way it works is by essentially "turning off" the parser when scripts are enabled, so that the contents of the element are treated as pure text and not as real elements. XML does not define a mechanism by which to do this.

The `noscript` element has no other requirements. In particular, children of the `noscript` element are not exempt from form submission, scripting, and so forth, even when scripting is enabled for the element.

In the following example, a `noscript` element is used to provide fallback for a script.

    <form action="calcSquare.php">
     <p>
      <label for=x>Number</label>:
      <input id="x" name="x" type="number">
     </p>
     <script>
      var x = document.getElementById('x');
      var output = document.createElement('p');
      output.textContent = 'Type a number; it will be squared right then!';
      x.form.appendChild(output);
      x.form.onsubmit = function () { return false; }
      x.oninput = function () {
        var v = x.valueAsNumber;
        output.textContent = v + ' squared is ' + v * v;
      };
     </script>
     <noscript>
      <input type=submit value="Calculate Square">
     </noscript>
    </form>

When script is disabled, a button appears to do the calculation on the server side. When script is enabled, the value is computed on-the-fly instead.

The `noscript` element is a blunt instrument. Sometimes, scripts might be enabled, but for some reason the page's script might fail. For this reason, it's generally better to avoid using `noscript`, and to instead design the script to change the page from being a scriptless page to a scripted page on the fly, as in the next example:

    <form action="calcSquare.php">
     <p>
      <label for=x>Number</label>:
      <input id="x" name="x" type="number">
     </p>
     <input id="submit" type=submit value="Calculate Square">
     <script>
      var x = document.getElementById('x');
      var output = document.createElement('p');
      output.textContent = 'Type a number; it will be squared right then!';
      x.form.appendChild(output);
      x.form.onsubmit = function () { return false; }
      x.oninput = function () {
        var v = x.valueAsNumber;
        output.textContent = v + ' squared is ' + v * v;
      };
      var submit = document.getElementById('submit');
      submit.parentNode.removeChild(submit);
     </script>
    </form>

The above technique is also useful in XHTML, since `noscript` is not supported in the XHTML syntax.

#### 4.12.3 The `template` element

Categories:
  Metadata content.
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Script-supporting element.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where metadata content is expected.
  Where phrasing content is expected.
  Where script-supporting elements are expected.
  As a child of a `colgroup` element that doesn't have a `span` attribute.
Content model:
  Either: Metadata content.
  Or: Flow content.
  Or: The content model of `ol` and `ul` elements.
  Or: The content model of `dl` elements.
  Or: The content model of `figure` elements.
  Or: The content model of `ruby` elements.
  Or: The content model of `object` elements.
  Or: The content model of `video` and `audio` elements.
  Or: The content model of `table` elements.
  Or: The content model of `colgroup` elements.
  Or: The content model of `thead`, `tbody`, and `tfoot` elements.
  Or: The content model of `tr` elements.
  Or: The content model of `fieldset` elements.
  Or: The content model of `select` elements.
  Or: The content model of `details` elements.
  Or: The content model of `menu` elements whose `type` attribute is in the popup menu state.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
DOM interface:

      interface HTMLTemplateElement : HTMLElement {
        readonly attribute DocumentFragment content;
      };

The `template` element is used to declare fragments of HTML that can be cloned and inserted in the document by script.

In a rendering, the `template` element represents nothing.

template . `content`

  Returns the contents of the `template`, which are stored in a `DocumentFragment` associated with a different `Document` so as to avoid the `template` contents interfering with the main `Document`. (For example, this avoids form controls from being submitted, scripts from executing, and so forth.)

Each `template` element has an associated `DocumentFragment` object that is its template contents. When a `template` element is created, the user agent must run the following steps to establish the template contents:

1. Let doc be the `template` element's node document's appropriate template contents owner document.

2. Create a `DocumentFragment` object whose node document is doc.

3. Set the `template` element's template contents to the newly created `DocumentFragment` object.

A `Document` doc's appropriate template contents owner document is the `Document` returned by the following algorithm:

1. If doc is not a `Document` created by this algorithm, run these substeps:

   1. If doc does not yet have an associated inert template document then run these substeps:

      1. Let new doc be a new `Document` (that does not have a browsing context). This is "a `Document` created by this algorithm" for the purposes of the step above.

      2. If doc is an HTML document, mark new doc as an HTML document also.

      3. Let doc's associated inert template document be new doc.

   2. Set doc to doc's associated inert template document.

   Each `Document` not created by this algorithm thus gets a single `Document` to act as its proxy for owning the template contents of all its `template` elements, so that they aren't in a browsing context and thus remain inert (e.g. scripts do not run). Meanwhile, `template` elements inside `Document` objects that are created by this algorithm just reuse the same `Document` owner for their contents.

2. Return doc.

When a `template` element's node document changes, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let doc be the `template` element's new node document's appropriate template contents owner document.

2. Adopt the `template` element's template contents (a `DocumentFragment` object) into doc.

The `content` IDL attribute must return the `template` element's template contents.

The cloning steps for a `template` element node being cloned to a copy copy must run the following steps:

1. If the clone children flag is not set in the calling clone algorithm, abort these steps.

2. Let copied contents be the result of cloning all the children of node's template contents, with document set to copy's template contents's node document, and with the clone children flag set.

3. Append copied contents to copy's template contents.

In this example, a script populates a table four-column with data from a data structure, using a `template` to provide the element structure instead of manually generating the structure from markup.

    <!DOCTYPE html>
    <title>Cat data</title>
    <script>
     // Data is hard-coded here, but could come from the server
     var data = [
       { name: 'Pillar', color: 'Ticked Tabby', sex: 'Female (neutered)', legs: 3 },
       { name: 'Hedral', color: 'Tuxedo', sex: 'Male (neutered)', legs: 4 },
     ];
    </script>
    <table>
     <thead>
      <tr>
       <th>Name <th>Colour <th>Sex <th>Legs
     <tbody>
      <template id="row">
       <tr><td><td><td><td>
      </template>
    </table>
    <script>
     var template = document.querySelector('#row');
     for (var i = 0; i < data.length; i += 1) {
       var cat = data[i];
       var clone = template.content.cloneNode(true);
       var cells = clone.querySelectorAll('td');
       cells[0].textContent = cat.name;
       cells[1].textContent = cat.color;
       cells[2].textContent = cat.sex;
       cells[3].textContent = cat.legs;
       template.parentNode.appendChild(clone);
     }
    </script>

##### 4.12.3.1 Interaction of `template` elements with XSLT and XPath

This section is non-normative.

This specification does not define how XSLT and XPath interact with the `template` element. However, in the absence of another specification actually defining this, here are some guidelines for implementors, which are intended to be consistent with other processing described in this specification:

- An XSLT processor based on an XML parser that acts as described in this specification needs to act as if `template` elements contain as descendants their template contents for the purposes of the transform.

- An XSLT processor that outputs a DOM needs to ensure that nodes that would go into a `template` element are instead placed into the element's template contents.

- XPath evaluation using the XPath DOM API when applied to a `Document` parsed using the HTML parser or the XML parser described in this specification needs to ignore template contents.

#### 4.12.4 The `canvas` element

Categories:
  Flow content.
  Phrasing content.
  Embedded content.
  Palpable content.
Contexts in which this element can be used:
  Where embedded content is expected.
Content model:
  Transparent, but with no interactive content descendants except for `a` elements, `img` elements with `usemap` attributes, `button` elements, `input` elements whose `type` attribute are in the Checkbox or Radio Button states, `input` elements that are buttons, `select` elements with a `multiple` attribute or a display size greater than 1, sorting interface `th` elements, and elements that would not be interactive content except for having the `tabindex` attribute specified.
Tag omission in text/html:
  Neither tag is omissible.
Content attributes:
  Global attributes
  `width` — Horizontal dimension
  `height` — Vertical dimension
DOM interface:

      typedef (CanvasRenderingContext2D or WebGLRenderingContext) RenderingContext;

      interface HTMLCanvasElement : HTMLElement {
                 attribute unsigned long width;
                 attribute unsigned long height;

        RenderingContext? getContext(DOMString contextId, any... arguments);
        boolean probablySupportsContext(DOMString contextId, any... arguments);

        void setContext(RenderingContext context);
        CanvasProxy transferControlToProxy();

        DOMString toDataURL(optional DOMString type, any... arguments);
        void toBlob(FileCallback? _callback, optional DOMString type, any... arguments);
      };

The `canvas` element provides scripts with a resolution-dependent bitmap canvas, which can be used for rendering graphs, game graphics, art, or other visual images on the fly.

Authors should not use the `canvas` element in a document when a more suitable element is available. For example, it is inappropriate to use a `canvas` element to render a page heading: if the desired presentation of the heading is graphically intense, it should be marked up using appropriate elements (typically `h1`) and then styled using CSS and supporting technologies such as Web Components.

When authors use the `canvas` element, they must also provide content that, when presented to the user, conveys essentially the same function or purpose as the `canvas`' bitmap. This content may be placed as content of the `canvas` element. The contents of the `canvas` element, if any, are the element's fallback content.

In interactive visual media, if scripting is enabled for the `canvas` element, and if support for `canvas` elements has been enabled, the `canvas` element represents embedded content consisting of a dynamically created image, the element's bitmap.

In non-interactive, static, visual media, if the `canvas` element has been previously associated with a rendering context (e.g. if the page was viewed in an interactive visual medium and is now being printed, or if some script that ran during the page layout process painted on the element), then the `canvas` element represents embedded content with the element's current bitmap and size. Otherwise, the element represents its fallback content instead.

In non-visual media, and in visual media if scripting is disabled for the `canvas` element or if support for `canvas` elements has been disabled, the `canvas` element represents its fallback content instead.

When a `canvas` element represents embedded content, the user can still focus descendants of the `canvas` element (in the fallback content). When an element is focused, it is the target of keyboard interaction events (even though the element itself is not visible). This allows authors to make an interactive canvas keyboard-accessible: authors should have a one-to-one mapping of interactive regions to focusable areas in the fallback content. (Focus has no effect on mouse interaction events.) [DOMEVENTS]

An element whose nearest `canvas` element ancestor is being rendered and represents embedded content is an element that is being used as relevant canvas fallback content.

The `canvas` element has two attributes to control the size of the element's bitmap: `width` and `height`. These attributes, when specified, must have values that are valid non-negative integers. The rules for parsing non-negative integers must be used to obtain their numeric values. If an attribute is missing, or if parsing its value returns an error, then the default value must be used instead. The `width` attribute defaults to 300, and the `height` attribute defaults to 150.

The intrinsic dimensions of the `canvas` element when it represents embedded content are equal to the dimensions of the element's bitmap.

The user agent must use a square pixel density consisting of one pixel of image data per coordinate space unit for the bitmaps of a `canvas` and its rendering contexts.

A `canvas` element can be sized arbitrarily by a style sheet, its bitmap is then subject to the 'object-fit' CSS property. [CSSIMAGES]

The bitmaps of `canvas` elements, as well as some of the bitmaps of rendering contexts, such as those described in the section on the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object below, have an origin-clean flag, which can be set to true or false. Initially, when the `canvas` element is created, its bitmap's origin-clean flag must be set to true.

A `canvas` bitmap can also have a hit region list, as described in the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` section below.

A `canvas` element can have a rendering context bound to it. Initially, it does not have a bound rendering context. To keep track of whether it has a rendering context or not, and what kind of rendering context it is, a `canvas` also has a canvas context mode, which is initially none but can be changed to either direct-2d, direct-webgl, indirect, or proxied by algorithms defined in this specification.

When its canvas context mode is none, a `canvas` element has no rendering context, and its bitmap must be fully transparent black with an intrinsic width equal to the numeric value of the element's `width` attribute and an intrinsic height equal to the numeric value of the element's `height` attribute, those values being interpreted in CSS pixels, and being updated as the attributes are set, changed, or removed.

When a `canvas` element represents embedded content, it provides a paint source whose width is the element's intrinsic width, whose height is the element's intrinsic height, and whose appearance is the element's bitmap.

Whenever the `width` and `height` content attributes are set, removed, changed, or redundantly set to the value they already have, if the canvas context mode is direct-2d, the user agent must set bitmap dimensions to the numeric values of the `width` and `height` content attributes.

The `width` and `height` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name, with the same defaults.

context = canvas . `getContext`(contextId [, ... ] )

  Returns an object that exposes an API for drawing on the canvas. The first argument specifies the desired API, either "`2d`" or "`webgl`". Subsequent arguments are handled by that API.

  This specification defines the "`2d`" context below. There is also a specification that defines a "`webgl`" context. [WEBGL]

  Returns null if the given context ID is not supported, if the canvas has already been initialised with the other context type (e.g. trying to get a "`2d`" context after getting a "`webgl`" context).

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the `setContext()` or `transferControlToProxy()` methods have been used.

supported = canvas . `probablySupportsContext`(contextId [, ... ] )

  Returns false if calling `getContext()` with the same arguments would definitely return null, and true otherwise.

  This return value is not a guarantee that `getContext()` will or will not return an object, as conditions (e.g. availability of system resources) can vary over time.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the `setContext()` or `transferControlToProxy()` methods have been used.

canvas . `setContext`(context)

  Sets the `canvas`' rendering context to the given object.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the `getContext()` or `transferControlToProxy()` methods have been used.

There are two ways for a `canvas` element to acquire a rendering context: the `canvas` element can provide one via the `getContext()` method, and one can be assigned to it via the `setContext()` method. In addition, the whole issue of a rendering context can be taken out of the `canvas` element's hands and passed to a `CanvasProxy` object, which itself can then be assigned a rendering context using its `setContext()` method.

These three methods are mutually exclusive; calling any of the three makes the other two start throwing `InvalidStateError` exceptions when called.

Each rendering context has a context bitmap mode, which is one of fixed, unbound, or bound. Initially, rendering contexts must be in the unbound mode.

The `getContext(contextId, arguments...)` method of the `canvas` element, when invoked, must run the steps in the cell of the following table whose column header describes the `canvas` element's canvas context mode and whose row header describes the method's first argument.

| none | direct-2d | direct-webgl | indirect | proxied
"`2d`" | Set the `canvas` element's context mode to direct-2d; follow the 2D context creation algorithm defined in the section below, passing it the `canvas` element, to obtain a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object; set that object's context bitmap mode to fixed, and return the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object | Return the same object as was return the last time the method was invoked with this same argument. | Return null. | Throw an `InvalidStateError` exception. | Throw an `InvalidStateError` exception.
"`webgl`", if the user agent supports the WebGL feature in its current configuration | Follow the instructions given in the WebGL specification's Context Creation section to obtain either a `WebGLRenderingContext` or null; if the returned value is null, then return null and abort these steps, otherwise, set the `canvas` element's context mode to direct-webgl, set the new `WebGLRenderingContext` object's context bitmap mode to fixed, and return the `WebGLRenderingContext` object‡ [WEBGL] | Return null. | Return the same object as was return the last time the method was invoked with this same argument. | Throw an `InvalidStateError` exception. | Throw an `InvalidStateError` exception.
A vendor-specific extension* | Behave as defined for the extension. | Behave as defined for the extension. | Behave as defined for the extension. | Throw an `InvalidStateError` exception. | Throw an `InvalidStateError` exception.
An unsupported value† | Return null. | Return null. | Return null. | Throw an `InvalidStateError` exception. | Throw an `InvalidStateError` exception.

* Vendors may define experimental contexts using the syntax `vendorname-context`, for example, `moz-3d`.

† For example, the "`webgl`" value in the case of a user agent having exhausted the graphics hardware's abilities and having no software fallback implementation.

‡ The second (and subsequent) argument(s) to the method, if any, are ignored in all cases except this one. See the WebGL specification for details.

The `probablySupportsContext(contextId, arguments...)` method of the `canvas` element, when invoked, must return false if calling `getContext()` on the same object and with the same arguments would definitely return null at this time, and true otherwise.

The `setContext(context)` method of the `canvas` element, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the `canvas` element's canvas context mode is neither none nor indirect, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If context's context bitmap mode is fixed, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

3. If context's context bitmap mode is bound, then run context's unbinding steps and set its context's context bitmap mode to unbound.

4. Run context's binding steps to bind it to this `canvas` element.

5. Set the `canvas` element's context mode to indirect and the context's context bitmap mode to bound.

url = canvas . `toDataURL`( [ type, ... ] )

  Returns a `data:` URL for the image in the canvas.

  The first argument, if provided, controls the type of the image to be returned (e.g. PNG or JPEG). The default is `image/png`; that type is also used if the given type isn't supported. The other arguments are specific to the type, and control the way that the image is generated, as given in the table below.

  When trying to use types other than "`image/png`", authors can check if the image was really returned in the requested format by checking to see if the returned string starts with one of the exact strings "`data:image/png,`" or "`data:image/png;`". If it does, the image is PNG, and thus the requested type was not supported. (The one exception to this is if the canvas has either no height or no width, in which case the result might simply be "`data:,`".)

canvas . `toBlob`(callback [, type, ... ] )

  Creates a `Blob` object representing a file containing the image in the canvas, and invokes a callback with a handle to that object.

  The second argument, if provided, controls the type of the image to be returned (e.g. PNG or JPEG). The default is `image/png`; that type is also used if the given type isn't supported. The other arguments are specific to the type, and control the way that the image is generated, as given in the table below.

The `toDataURL()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the `canvas` element's bitmap's origin-clean flag is set to false, throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If the `canvas` element's bitmap has no pixels (i.e. either its horizontal dimension or its vertical dimension is zero) then return the string "`data:,`" and abort these steps. (This is the shortest `data:` URL; it represents the empty string in a `text/plain` resource.)

3. Let file be a serialisation of the `canvas` element's bitmap as a file, using the method's arguments (if any) as the arguments.

4. Return a `data:` URL representing file. [RFC2397]

The `toBlob()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the `canvas` element's bitmap's origin-clean flag is set to false, throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

2. Let callback be the first argument.

3. Let arguments be the second and subsequent arguments to the method, if any.

4. If the `canvas` element's bitmap has no pixels (i.e. either its horizontal dimension or its vertical dimension is zero) then let result be null.

   Otherwise, let result be a `Blob` object representing a serialisation of the `canvas` element's bitmap as a file, using arguments. [FILEAPI]

5. Return, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

6. If callback is null, abort these steps.

7. Queue a task to invoke the `FileCallback` callback with result as its argument. The task source for this task is the canvas blob serialisation task source.

##### 4.12.4.1 Proxying canvases to workers

Since DOM nodes cannot be accessed across worker boundaries, a proxy object is needed to enable workers to render to `canvas` elements in `Document`s.

    [Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface CanvasProxy {
      void setContext(RenderingContext context);
    };
    // CanvasProxy implements Transferable;

canvasProxy = canvas . `transferControlToProxy`()

  Returns a `CanvasProxy` object that can be used to transfer control for this canvas over to another document (e.g. an `iframe` from another origin) or to a worker.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the `getContext()` or `setContext()` methods have been used.

canvasProxy . `setContext`(context)

  Sets the `CanvasProxy` object's `canvas` element's rendering context to the given object.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the `CanvasProxy` has been transfered.

The `transferControlToProxy()` method of the `canvas` element, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the `canvas` element's canvas context mode is not none, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. Set the `canvas` element's context mode to proxied.

3. Return a `CanvasProxy` object bound to this `canvas` element.

A `CanvasProxy` object can be neutered (like any `Transferable` object), meaning it can no longer be transferred, and can be disabled, meaning it can no longer be bound to rendering contexts. When first created, a `CanvasProxy` object must be neither.

A `CanvasProxy` is created with a link to a `canvas` element. A `CanvasProxy` object that has not been disabled must have a strong reference to its canvas element.

The `setContext(context)` method of `CanvasProxy` objects, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the `CanvasProxy` object has been disabled, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If the `CanvasProxy` object has not been neutered, then neuter it.

3. If context's context bitmap mode is fixed, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

4. If context's context bitmap mode is bound, then run context's unbinding steps and set its context's context bitmap mode to unbound.

5. Run context's binding steps to bind it to this `CanvasProxy` object's `canvas` element.

6. Set the context's context bitmap mode to bound.

To transfer a `CanvasProxy` object old to a new owner owner, a user agent must create a new `CanvasProxy` object linked to the same `canvas` element as old, thus obtaining new, must neuter and disable the old object, and must finally return new.

Here is a clock implemented on a worker. First, the main page:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Clock</title>
    <canvas></canvas>
    <script>
      var canvas = document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0];
      var proxy = canvas.transferControlToProxy();
      var worker = new Worker('clock.js');
      worker.postMessage(proxy, [proxy]);
    </script>

Second, the worker:

    onmessage = function (event) {
      var context = new CanvasRenderingContext2D();
      event.data.setContext(context); // event.data is the CanvasProxy object
      setInterval(function () {
        context.clearRect(0, 0, context.width, context.height);
        context.fillText(new Date(), 0, 100);
        context.commit();
      }, 1000);
    };

##### 4.12.4.2 The 2D rendering context

    typedef (HTMLImageElement or
             HTMLVideoElement or
             HTMLCanvasElement or
             CanvasRenderingContext2D or
             ImageBitmap) CanvasImageSource;

    enum CanvasFillRule { "nonzero", "evenodd" };

    [Constructor(optional unsigned long width, unsigned long height), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface CanvasRenderingContext2D {

      // back-reference to the canvas
      readonly attribute HTMLCanvasElement canvas;

      // canvas dimensions
               attribute unsigned long width;
               attribute unsigned long height;

      // for contexts that aren't directly fixed to a specific canvas
      void commit(); // push the image to the output bitmap

      // state
      void save(); // push state on state stack
      void restore(); // pop state stack and restore state

      // transformations (default transform is the identity matrix)
               attribute SVGMatrix currentTransform;
      void scale(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y);
      void rotate(unrestricted double angle);
      void translate(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y);
      void transform(unrestricted double a, unrestricted double b, unrestricted double c, unrestricted double d, unrestricted double e, unrestricted double f);
      void setTransform(unrestricted double a, unrestricted double b, unrestricted double c, unrestricted double d, unrestricted double e, unrestricted double f);
      void resetTransform();

      // compositing
               attribute unrestricted double globalAlpha; // (default 1.0)
               attribute DOMString globalCompositeOperation; // (default source-over)

      // image smoothing
               attribute boolean imageSmoothingEnabled; // (default true)

      // colours and styles (see also the CanvasDrawingStyles interface)
               attribute (DOMString or CanvasGradient or CanvasPattern) strokeStyle; // (default black)
               attribute (DOMString or CanvasGradient or CanvasPattern) fillStyle; // (default black)
      CanvasGradient createLinearGradient(double x0, double y0, double x1, double y1);
      CanvasGradient createRadialGradient(double x0, double y0, double r0, double x1, double y1, double r1);
      CanvasPattern createPattern(CanvasImageSource image, [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] DOMString repetition);

      // shadows
               attribute unrestricted double shadowOffsetX; // (default 0)
               attribute unrestricted double shadowOffsetY; // (default 0)
               attribute unrestricted double shadowBlur; // (default 0)
               attribute DOMString shadowColor; // (default transparent black)

      // rects
      void clearRect(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, unrestricted double w, unrestricted double h);
      void fillRect(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, unrestricted double w, unrestricted double h);
      void strokeRect(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, unrestricted double w, unrestricted double h);

      // path API (see also CanvasPathMethods)
      void beginPath();
      void fill(optional CanvasFillRule fillRule = "nonzero");
      void fill(Path2D path, optional CanvasFillRule fillRule = "nonzero");
      void stroke();
      void stroke(Path2D path);
      void drawSystemFocusRing(Element element);
      void drawSystemFocusRing(Path2D path, Element element);
      boolean drawCustomFocusRing(Element element);
      boolean drawCustomFocusRing(Path2D path, Element element);
      void scrollPathIntoView();
      void scrollPathIntoView(Path2D path);
      void clip(optional CanvasFillRule fillRule = "nonzero");
      void clip(Path2D path, optional CanvasFillRule fillRule = "nonzero");
      void resetClip();
      boolean isPointInPath(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, optional CanvasFillRule fillRule = "nonzero");
      boolean isPointInPath(Path2D path, unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, optional CanvasFillRule fillRule = "nonzero");
      boolean isPointInStroke(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y);
      boolean isPointInStroke(Path2D path, unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y);

      // text (see also the CanvasDrawingStyles interface)
      void fillText(DOMString text, unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, optional unrestricted double maxWidth);
      void strokeText(DOMString text, unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, optional unrestricted double maxWidth);
      TextMetrics measureText(DOMString text);

      // drawing images
      void drawImage(CanvasImageSource image, unrestricted double dx, unrestricted double dy);
      void drawImage(CanvasImageSource image, unrestricted double dx, unrestricted double dy, unrestricted double dw, unrestricted double dh);
      void drawImage(CanvasImageSource image, unrestricted double sx, unrestricted double sy, unrestricted double sw, unrestricted double sh, unrestricted double dx, unrestricted double dy, unrestricted double dw, unrestricted double dh);

      // hit regions
      void addHitRegion(optional HitRegionOptions options);
      void removeHitRegion(DOMString id);
      void clearHitRegions();

      // pixel manipulation
      ImageData createImageData(double sw, double sh);
      ImageData createImageData(ImageData imagedata);
      ImageData getImageData(double sx, double sy, double sw, double sh);
      void putImageData(ImageData imagedata, double dx, double dy);
      void putImageData(ImageData imagedata, double dx, double dy, double dirtyX, double dirtyY, double dirtyWidth, double dirtyHeight);
    };
    CanvasRenderingContext2D implements CanvasDrawingStyles;
    CanvasRenderingContext2D implements CanvasPathMethods;

    [NoInterfaceObject, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface CanvasDrawingStyles {
      // line caps/joins
               attribute unrestricted double lineWidth; // (default 1)
               attribute DOMString lineCap; // "butt", "round", "square" (default "butt")
               attribute DOMString lineJoin; // "round", "bevel", "miter" (default "miter")
               attribute unrestricted double miterLimit; // (default 10)

      // dashed lines
      void setLineDash(sequence<unrestricted double> segments); // default empty
      sequence<unrestricted double> getLineDash();
               attribute unrestricted double lineDashOffset;

      // text
               attribute DOMString font; // (default 10px sans-serif)
               attribute DOMString textAlign; // "start", "end", "left", "right", "center" (default: "start")
               attribute DOMString textBaseline; // "top", "hanging", "middle", "alphabetic", "ideographic", "bottom" (default: "alphabetic")
               attribute DOMString direction; // "ltr", "rtl", "inherit" (default: "inherit")
    };

    [NoInterfaceObject, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface CanvasPathMethods {
      // shared path API methods
      void closePath();
      void moveTo(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y);
      void lineTo(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y);
      void quadraticCurveTo(unrestricted double cpx, unrestricted double cpy, unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y);
      void bezierCurveTo(unrestricted double cp1x, unrestricted double cp1y, unrestricted double cp2x, unrestricted double cp2y, unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y);
      void arcTo(unrestricted double x1, unrestricted double y1, unrestricted double x2, unrestricted double y2, unrestricted double radius);
      void arcTo(unrestricted double x1, unrestricted double y1, unrestricted double x2, unrestricted double y2, unrestricted double radiusX, unrestricted double radiusY, unrestricted double rotation);
      void rect(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, unrestricted double w, unrestricted double h);
      void arc(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, unrestricted double radius, unrestricted double startAngle, unrestricted double endAngle, optional boolean anticlockwise = false);
      void ellipse(unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, unrestricted double radiusX, unrestricted double radiusY, unrestricted double rotation, unrestricted double startAngle, unrestricted double endAngle, optional boolean anticlockwise = false);
    };

    [Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface CanvasGradient {
      // opaque object
      void addColorStop(double offset, DOMString color);
    };

    [Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface CanvasPattern {
      // opaque object
      void setTransform(SVGMatrix transform);
    };

    [Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface TextMetrics {
      // x-direction
      readonly attribute double width; // advance width
      readonly attribute double actualBoundingBoxLeft;
      readonly attribute double actualBoundingBoxRight;

      // y-direction
      readonly attribute double fontBoundingBoxAscent;
      readonly attribute double fontBoundingBoxDescent;
      readonly attribute double actualBoundingBoxAscent;
      readonly attribute double actualBoundingBoxDescent;
      readonly attribute double emHeightAscent;
      readonly attribute double emHeightDescent;
      readonly attribute double hangingBaseline;
      readonly attribute double alphabeticBaseline;
      readonly attribute double ideographicBaseline;
    };

    dictionary HitRegionOptions {
      Path2D? path = null;
      CanvasFillRule fillRule = "nonzero";
      DOMString id = "";
      DOMString? parentID = null;
      DOMString cursor = "inherit";
      // for control-backed regions:
      Element? control = null;
      // for unbacked regions:
      DOMString? label = null;
      DOMString? role = null;
    };

    [Constructor(unsigned long sw, unsigned long sh),
     Constructor(Uint8ClampedArray data, unsigned long sw, optional unsigned long sh),
     Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface ImageData {
      readonly attribute unsigned long width;
      readonly attribute unsigned long height;
      readonly attribute Uint8ClampedArray data;
    };

    [Constructor(optional Element scope), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface DrawingStyle { };
    DrawingStyle implements CanvasDrawingStyles;

    [Constructor,
     Constructor(Path2D path),
     Constructor(Path2D[] paths, optional CanvasFillRule fillRule = "nonzero"),
     Constructor(DOMString d), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface Path2D {
      void addPath(Path2D path, optional SVGMatrix? transformation = null);
      void addPathByStrokingPath(Path2D path, CanvasDrawingStyles styles, optional SVGMatrix? transformation = null);
      void addText(DOMString text, CanvasDrawingStyles styles, SVGMatrix? transformation, unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, optional unrestricted double maxWidth);
      void addPathByStrokingText(DOMString text, CanvasDrawingStyles styles, SVGMatrix? transformation, unrestricted double x, unrestricted double y, optional unrestricted double maxWidth);
      void addText(DOMString text, CanvasDrawingStyles styles, SVGMatrix? transformation, Path2D path, optional unrestricted double maxWidth);
      void addPathByStrokingText(DOMString text, CanvasDrawingStyles styles, SVGMatrix? transformation, Path2D path, optional unrestricted double maxWidth);
    };
    Path2D implements CanvasPathMethods;

context = canvas . `getContext`('2d')

  Returns a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object that is permanently bound to a particular `canvas` element.

context = new `CanvasRenderingContext2D`( [ width, height ] )

  Returns an unbound `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object with an implied bitmap with the given dimensions in CSS pixels (300x150, if the arguments are omitted).

context . `canvas`

  Returns the `canvas` element, if the rendering context was obtained using the `getContext()` method.

context . `width`
context . `height`

  Return the dimensions of the bitmap, in CSS pixels.

  Can be set, to update the bitmap's dimensions. If the rendering context is bound to a canvas, this will also update the canvas' intrinsic dimensions.

context . `commit`()

  If the rendering context is bound to a `canvas`, display the current frame.

A `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object can be obtained in two ways: the `getContext()` method on a `canvas` element (which invokes the 2D context creation algorithm), and the `CanvasRenderingContext2D()` constructor.

A `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object has a scratch bitmap and can be bound to an output bitmap. These are initialised when the object is created, and can be subsequently adjusted when the rendering context is bound or unbound. In some cases, these bitmaps are the same underlying bitmap. In general, the scratch bitmap is what scripts interact with, and the output bitmap is what is being displayed. These bitmaps always have the same dimensions.

Each such bitmap has an origin-clean flag, which can be set to true or false. Initially, when one of these bitmaps is created, its origin-clean flag must be set to true.

These bitmaps also have a hit region list, which is described in a later section. Initially, this list is empty. Scratch bitmaps also have a list of pending interface actions, which can contain instructions to draw the user's attention to a location on the bitmap, and instructions to scroll to a location on the bitmap. Initially, this list is also empty.

The `CanvasRenderingContext2D` 2D rendering context represents a flat linear Cartesian surface whose origin (0,0) is at the top left corner, with the coordinate space having x values increasing when going right, and y values increasing when going down. The x-coordinate of the right-most edge is equal to the width of the rendering context's scratch bitmap in CSS pixels; similarly, the y-coordinate of the bottom-most edge is equal to the height of the rendering context's scratch bitmap in CSS pixels.

The size of the coordinate space does not necessarily represent the size of the actual bitmaps that the user agent will use internally or during rendering. On high-definition displays, for instance, the user agent may internally use bitmaps with two device pixels per unit in the coordinate space, so that the rendering remains at high quality throughout. Anti-aliasing can similarly be implemented using over-sampling with bitmaps of a higher resolution than the final image on the display.

The 2D context creation algorithm, which is passed a target (a `canvas` element), consists of running the following steps:

1. Create a new `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object.

2. Initialise its `canvas` attribute to point to target.

3. Let the new `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's output bitmap and scratch bitmap both be the same bitmap as target's bitmap (so that they are shared).

4. Set bitmap dimensions to the numeric values of target's `width` and `height` content attributes.

5. Return the new `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object.

The `CanvasRenderingContext2D()` constructor, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. Create a new `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object.

2. Initialise its `canvas` attribute to null.

3. Let the new `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's scratch bitmap be a new bitmap.

4. If the constructor was called with arguments, let width and height be the first and second arguments, respectively. Otherwise, let width and height be 300 and 150, respectively.

5. Set bitmap dimensions to width and height.

6. Let the new `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object have no output bitmap.

7. Return the new `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object.

When the user agent is required to commit the scratch bitmap for a rendering context, it must run the following steps:

1. Let bitmap copy be a copy of the rendering context's scratch bitmap.

2. Let origin-clean flag copy be a copy of the rendering context's scratch bitmap's origin-clean flag.

3. Let hit region list copy be a copy of the rendering context's scratch bitmap's hit region list.

4. Let list of pending interface actions copy be a copy of the rendering context's scratch bitmap's list of pending interface actions.

5. Empty the scratch bitmap's list of pending interface actions.

6. If the rendering context has no output bitmap, abort these steps.

7. Let output bitmap be the rendering context's output bitmap.

8. Let canvas be the `canvas` element to which the rendering context was most recently bound.

9. Queue a task associated with canvas' `Document` to perform the following substeps:

   1. Overwrite output bitmap with bitmap copy.

   2. Overwrite output bitmap's origin-clean flag with origin-clean flag copy.

   3. Overwrite output bitmap's hit region list with hit region list copy.

   4. Follow the directions in the list of pending interface actions copy.

The algorithm above must use the canvas updating task source (which is just used by this algorithm).

The `commit()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the rendering context's context bitmap mode is fixed, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. Commit the scratch bitmap for the rendering context.

The scratch bitmap is only committed when the `commit()` method is called. (This doesn't matter for `canvas` elements in direct-2d mode, since there the scratch bitmap is also the `canvas` element's bitmap so every drawing operation is immediately drawn.)

When the user agent is to set bitmap dimensions to width and height, it must run the following steps:

1. Reset the rendering context to its default state.

2. Clear the scratch bitmap's hit region list and its list of pending interface actions.

3. Resize the scratch bitmap to the new width and height and clear it to fully transparent black.

4. If the rendering context has an output bitmap, and the scratch bitmap is a different bitmap than the output bitmap, then resize the output bitmap to the new width and height and clear it to fully transparent black.

5. If the rendering context's context bitmap mode is fixed, then run these substeps:

   1. Let canvas be the `canvas` element to which the rendering context's `canvas` attribute was initialized.

   2. If the rendering context's context bitmap mode is fixed and the numeric value of the canvas' `width` content attribute differs from width, then set canvas' `width` content attribute to the shortest possible string representing width as a valid non-negative integer.

   3. If the rendering context's context bitmap mode is fixed and the numeric value of the canvas' `height` content attribute differs from height, then set canvas' `height` content attribute to the shortest possible string representing height as a valid non-negative integer.

Only one square appears to be drawn in the following example:

    // canvas is a reference to a <canvas> element
    var context = canvas.getContext('2d');
    context.fillRect(0,0,50,50);
    canvas.setAttribute('width', '300'); // clears the canvas
    context.fillRect(0,100,50,50);
    canvas.width = canvas.width; // clears the canvas
    context.fillRect(100,0,50,50); // only this square remains

When the user agent is to run the unbinding steps for a rendering context, it must run the following steps:

1. Reset the rendering context to its default state.

2. Clear the scratch bitmap's hit region list and its list of pending interface actions.

3. Clear the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's scratch bitmap to a transparent black.

4. Set the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's scratch bitmap's origin-clean flag to true.

5. Let the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object have no output bitmap.

When the user agent is to run the binding steps to bind the rendering context to the `canvas` element target, it must run the following steps:

1. Reset the rendering context to its default state.

2. Clear the scratch bitmap's hit region list and its list of pending interface actions.

3. Resize the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's scratch bitmap to the dimensions of target's bitmap and clear it to fully transparent black.

4. Set the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's scratch bitmap's origin-clean flag to true.

5. Let the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's output bitmap be target's bitmap.

The `canvas` attribute must return the value it was initialised to when the object was created.

The `width` attribute, on getting, must return the width of the rendering context's scratch bitmap, in CSS pixels. On setting, it must set bitmap dimensions to the new value and the current height of the rendering context's scratch bitmap in CSS pixels, respectively.

The `height` attribute, on getting, must return the height of the rendering context's scratch bitmap, in CSS pixels. On setting, it must set bitmap dimensions to the current width of the rendering context's scratch bitmap in CSS pixels and the new value, respectively.

Except where otherwise specified, for the 2D context interface, any method call with a numeric argument whose value is infinite or a NaN value must be ignored.

Whenever the CSS value `currentColor` is used as a colour in the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` API, the "computed value of the 'color' property" for the purposes of determining the computed value of the `currentColor` keyword is the value described by the appropriate entry in the following list:

If the rendering context's context bitmap mode is fixed and the `canvas` element is being rendered

  The "computed value of the 'color' property" for the purposes of determining the computed value of the `currentColor` keyword is the computed value of the 'color' property on the `canvas` element at the time that the colour is specified (e.g. when the appropriate attribute is set, or when the method is called; not when the colour is rendered or otherwise used). [CSSCOLOR]

In all other cases

  The "computed value of the 'color' property" for the purposes of determining the computed value of the `currentColor` keyword is fully opaque black. [CSSCOLOR]

In the case of `addColorStop()` on `CanvasGradient`, the "computed value of the 'color' property" for the purposes of determining the computed value of the `currentColor` keyword is always fully opaque black (there is no associated element). [CSSCOLOR]

This is because `CanvasGradient` objects are `canvas`-neutral — a `CanvasGradient` object created by one `canvas` can be used by another, and there is therefore no way to know which is the "element in question" at the time that the colour is specified.

Similar concerns exist with font-related properties; the rules for those are described in detail in the relevant section below.

The `CanvasFillRule` enumeration is used to select the fill rule algorithm by which to determine if a point is inside or outside a path.

The value "`nonzero`" value indicates the non-zero winding rule, wherein a point is considered to be outside a shape if the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses the shape's path going in one direction is equal to the number of times it crosses the path going in the other direction.

The "`evenodd`" value indicates the even-odd rule, wherein a point is considered to be outside a shape if the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses the shape's path is even.

If a point is not outside a shape, it is inside the shape.

###### 4.12.4.2.1 Implementation notes

This section is non-normative.

Although the way the specification is written it might sound like an implementation needs to track up to four bitmaps per canvas or rendering context — one scratch bitmap, one output bitmap for the rendering context, one bitmap for the `canvas`, and one bitmap for the actually currently rendered image — user agents can in fact generally optimise this to only one or two.

The scratch bitmap, when it isn't the same bitmap as the output bitmap, is only directly observable if it is read, and therefore implementations can, instead of updating this bitmap, merely remember the sequence of drawing operations that have been applied to it until such time as the bitmap's actual data is needed (for example because of a call to `commit()`, `drawImage()`, or the `createImageBitmap()` factory method). In many cases, this will be more memory efficient.

The bitmap of a `canvas` element is the one bitmap that's pretty much always going to be needed in practice. The output bitmap of a rendering context, when it has one, is always just an alias to a `canvas` element's bitmap.

Additional bitmaps are sometimes needed, e.g. to enable fast drawing when the canvas is being painted at a different size than its intrinsic size, or to enable double buffering so that the rendering commands from the scratch bitmap can be applied without the rendering being updated midway.

###### 4.12.4.2.2 The canvas state

Each `CanvasRenderingContext2D` rendering context maintains a stack of drawing states. Drawing states consist of:

- The current transformation matrix.
- The current clipping region.
- The current values of the following attributes: `strokeStyle`, `fillStyle`, `globalAlpha`, `lineWidth`, `lineCap`, `lineJoin`, `miterLimit`, `lineDashOffset`, `shadowOffsetX`, `shadowOffsetY`, `shadowBlur`, `shadowColor`, `globalCompositeOperation`, `font`, `textAlign`, `textBaseline`, `direction`, `imageSmoothingEnabled`.
- The current dash list.

The current default path and the rendering context's bitmaps are not part of the drawing state. The current default path is persistent, and can only be reset using the `beginPath()` method. The bitmaps depend on whether and how the rendering context is bound to a `canvas` element.

context . `save`()

  Pushes the current state onto the stack.

context . `restore`()

  Pops the top state on the stack, restoring the context to that state.

The `save()` method must push a copy of the current drawing state onto the drawing state stack.

The `restore()` method must pop the top entry in the drawing state stack, and reset the drawing state it describes. If there is no saved state, the method must do nothing.

When the user agent is to reset the rendering context to its default state, it must clear the drawing state stack and everything that drawing state consists of to initial values.

###### 4.12.4.2.3 `DrawingStyle` objects

All the line styles (line width, caps, joins, and dash patterns) and text styles (fonts) described in the next two sections apply to `CanvasRenderingContext2D` objects and to `DrawingStyle` objects. This section defines the constructor used to obtain a `DrawingStyle` object. This object is then used by methods on `Path2D` objects to control how text and paths are rasterised and stroked.

styles = new `DrawingStyle`( [ element ] )

  Creates a new `DrawingStyle` object, optionally using a specific element for resolving relative keywords and sizes in font specifications.

Each `DrawingStyle` object can have a styles scope object.

The `DrawingStyle()` constructor, when invoked, must return a newly created `DrawingStyle` object. If the constructor was passed an argument, then the `DrawingStyle` object's styles scope object is that element. Otherwise, if the JavaScript global environment is a document environment, the object's styles scope object is the `Document` object of the active document of the browsing context of the `Window` object on which the interface object of the invoked constructor is found. Otherwise, the JavaScript global environment is a worker environment, and the styles scope object is the worker.

###### 4.12.4.2.4 Line styles

context . `lineWidth` [ = value ]
styles . `lineWidth` [ = value ]

  Returns the current line width.

  Can be set, to change the line width. Values that are not finite values greater than zero are ignored.

context . `lineCap` [ = value ]
styles . `lineCap` [ = value ]

  Returns the current line cap style.

  Can be set, to change the line cap style.

  The possible line cap styles are "`butt"`", "`round"`", and "`square"`". Other values are ignored.

context . `lineJoin` [ = value ]
styles . `lineJoin` [ = value ]

  Returns the current line join style.

  Can be set, to change the line join style.

  The possible line join styles are "`bevel"`", "`round"`", and "`miter"`". Other values are ignored.

context . `miterLimit` [ = value ]
styles . `miterLimit` [ = value ]

  Returns the current miter limit ratio.

  Can be set, to change the miter limit ratio. Values that are not finite values greater than zero are ignored.

context . `setLineDash`(segments)
styles . `setLineDash`(segments)

  Sets the current line dash pattern (as used when stroking). The argument is a list of distances for which to alternately have the line on and the line off.

segments = context . `getLineDash`()
segments = styles . `getLineDash`()

  Returns a copy of the current line dash pattern. The array returned will always have an even number of entries (i.e. the pattern is normalized).

context . `lineDashOffset`
styles . `lineDashOffset`

  Returns the phase offset (in the same units as the line dash pattern).

  Can be set, to change the phase offset. Values that are not finite values are ignored.

Objects that implement the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface have attributes and methods (defined in this section) that control how lines are treated by the object.

The `lineWidth` attribute gives the width of lines, in coordinate space units. On getting, it must return the current value. On setting, zero, negative, infinite, and NaN values must be ignored, leaving the value unchanged; other values must change the current value to the new value.

When the object implementing the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface is created, the `lineWidth` attribute must initially have the value 1.0.

The `lineCap` attribute defines the type of endings that UAs will place on the end of lines. The three valid values are "`butt"`", "`round"`", and "`square"`".

On getting, it must return the current value. On setting, if the new value is one of the literal strings "`butt"`", "`round"`", and "`square"`", then the current value must be changed to the new value; other values must ignored, leaving the value unchanged.

When the object implementing the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface is created, the `lineCap` attribute must initially have the value "`butt"`".

The `lineJoin` attribute defines the type of corners that UAs will place where two lines meet. The three valid values are "`bevel"`", "`round"`", and "`miter"`".

On getting, it must return the current value. On setting, if the new value is one of the literal strings "`bevel"`", "`round"`", and "`miter"`", then the current value must be changed to the new value; other values must be ignored, leaving the value unchanged.

When the object implementing the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface is created, the `lineJoin` attribute must initially have the value "`miter"`".

When the `lineJoin` attribute has the value "`miter"`", strokes use the miter limit ratio to decide how to render joins. The miter limit ratio can be explicitly set using the `miterLimit` attribute. On getting, it must return the current value. On setting, zero, negative, infinite, and NaN values must be ignored, leaving the value unchanged; other values must change the current value to the new value.

When the object implementing the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface is created, the `miterLimit` attribute must initially have the value 10.0.

Each `CanvasDrawingStyles` object has a dash list, which is either empty or consists of an even number of non-negative numbers. Initially, the dash list must be empty.

When the `setLineDash()` method is invoked, it must run the following steps:

1. Let a be the argument.

2. If any value in a is not finite (e.g. an Infinity or a NaN value), or if any value is negative (less than zero), then abort these steps (without throwing an exception; user agents could show a message on a developer console, though, as that would be helpful for debugging).

3. If the number of elements in a is odd, then let a be the concatentation of two copies of a.

4. Let the object's dash list be a.

When the `getLineDash()` method is invoked, it must return a sequence whose values are the values of the object's dash list, in the same order.

It is sometimes useful to change the "phase" of the dash pattern, e.g. to achieve a "marching ants" effect. The phase can be set using the `lineDashOffset` attribute. On getting, it must return the current value. On setting, infinite and NaN values must be ignored, leaving the value unchanged; other values must change the current value to the new value.

When the object implementing the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface is created, the `lineDashOffset` attribute must initially have the value 0.0.

When a user agent is to trace a path, given an object style that implements the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface, it must run the following algorithm. This algorithm returns a new path.

1. Let path be a copy of the path being traced.

2. Prune all zero-length line segments from path.

3. Remove from path any subpaths containing no lines (i.e. subpaths with just one point).

4. Replace each point in each subpath of path other than the first point and the last point of each subpath by a join that joins the line leading to that point to the line leading out of that point, such that the subpaths all consist of two points (a starting point with a line leading out of it, and an ending point with a line leading into it), one or more lines (connecting the points and the joins), and zero or more joins (each connecting one line to another), connected together such that each subpath is a series of one or more lines with a join between each one and a point on each end.

5. Add a straight closing line to each closed subpath in path connecting the last point and the first point of that subpath; change the last point to a join (from the previously last line to the newly added closing line), and change the first point to a join (from the newly added closing line to the first line).

6. If the styles dash list is empty, jump to the step labeled convert.

7. Let pattern width be the concatenation of all the entries of the styles dash list, in coordinate space units.

8. For each subpath subpath in path, run the following substeps. These substeps mutate the subpaths in path in vivo.

   1. Let subpath width be the length of all the lines of subpath, in coordinate space units.

   2. Let offset be the value of the styles `lineDashOffset`, in coordinate space units.

   3. While offset is greater than pattern width, decrement it by pattern width.

      While offset is less than zero, increment it by pattern width.

   4. Define L to be a linear coordinate line defined along all lines in subpath, such that the start of the first line in the subpath is defined as coordinate 0, and the end of the last line in the subpath is defined as coordinate subpath width.

   5. Let position be zero minus offset.

   6. Let index be 0.

   7. Let current state be off (the other states being on and zero-on).

   8. Dash on: Let segment length be the value of the styles dash list's indexth entry.

   9. Increment position by segment length.

   10. If position is greater than subpath width, then end these substeps for this subpath and start them again for the next subpath; if there are no more subpaths, then jump to the step labeled convert instead.

   11. If segment length is non-zero, let current state be on.

   12. Increment index by one.

   13. Dash off: Let segment length be the value of the styles dash list's indexth entry.

   14. Let start be the offset position on L.

   15. Increment position by segment length.

   16. If position is less than zero, then jump to the step labeled post-cut.

   17. If start is less than zero, then let start be zero.

   18. If position is greater than subpath width, then let end be the offset subpath width on L. Otherwise, let end be the offset position on L.

   19. Jump to the first appropriate step:

       If segment length is zero and current state is off

         Do nothing, just continue to the next step.

       If current state is off

         Cut the line on which end finds itself short at end and place a point there, cutting the subpath that it was in in two; remove all line segments, joins, points, and subpaths that are between start and end; and finally place a single point at start with no lines connecting to it.

         The point has a directionality for the purposes of drawing line caps (see below). The directionality is the direction that the original line had at that point (i.e. when L was defined above).

       Otherwise

         Cut the line on which start finds itself into two at start and place a point there, cutting the subpath that it was in in two, and similarly cut the line on which end finds itself short at end and place a point there, cutting the subpath that it was in in two, and then remove all line segments, joins, points, and subpaths that are between start and end.

         If start and end are the same point, then this results in just the line being cut in two and two points being inserted there, with nothing being removed, unless a join also happens to be at that point, in which case the join must be removed.

   20. Post-cut: If position is greater than subpath width, then jump to the step labeled convert.

   21. If segment length is greater than zero, let positioned-at-on-dash be false.

   22. Increment index by one. If it is equal to the number of entries in the styles dash list, then let index be 0.

   23. Return to the step labeled dash on.

9. Convert: This is the step that converts the path to a new path that represents its stroke.

   Create a new path that describes the edge of the areas that would be covered if a straight line of length equal to the styles `lineWidth` was swept along each subpath in path while being kept at an angle such that the line is orthogonal to the path being swept, replacing each point with the end cap necessary to satisfy the styles `lineCap` attribute as described previously and elaborated below, and replacing each join with the join necessary to satisfy the styles `lineJoin` type, as defined below.

   Caps: Each point has a flat edge perpendicular to the direction of the line coming out of it. This is them augmented according to the value of the styles `lineCap`. The "`butt"`" value means that no additional line cap is added. The "`round"`" value means that a semi-circle with the diameter equal to the styles `lineWidth` width must additionally be placed on to the line coming out of each point. The "`square"`" value means that a rectangle with the length of the styles `lineWidth` width and the width of half the styles `lineWidth` width, placed flat against the edge perpendicular to the direction of the line coming out of the point, must be added at each point.

   Points with no lines coming out of them must have two caps placed back-to-back as if it was really two points connected to each other by an infinitesimally short straight line in the direction of the point's directionality (as defined above).

   Joins: In addition to the point where a join occurs, two additional points are relevant to each join, one for each line: the two corners found half the line width away from the join point, one perpendicular to each line, each on the side furthest from the other line.

   A triangle connecting these two opposite corners with a straight line, with the third point of the triangle being the join point, must be added at all joins. The `lineJoin` attribute controls whether anything else is rendered. The three aforementioned values have the following meanings:

   The "`bevel"`" value means that this is all that is rendered at joins.

   The "`round"`" value means that an arc connecting the two aforementioned corners of the join, abutting (and not overlapping) the aforementioned triangle, with the diameter equal to the line width and the origin at the point of the join, must be added at joins.

   The "`miter"`" value means that a second triangle must (if it can given the miter length) be added at the join, with one line being the line between the two aforementioned corners, abutting the first triangle, and the other two being continuations of the outside edges of the two joining lines, as long as required to intersect without going over the miter length.

   The miter length is the distance from the point where the join occurs to the intersection of the line edges on the outside of the join. The miter limit ratio is the maximum allowed ratio of the miter length to half the line width. If the miter length would cause the miter limit ratio (as set by the style `miterLimit` attribute) to be exceeded, this second triangle must not be added.

   The subpaths in the newly created path must be oriented such that for any point, the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses a subpath is even if and only if the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that same point crosses a subpath going in one direction is equal to the number of times it crosses a subpath going in the other direction.

10. Return the newly created path.

###### 4.12.4.2.5 Text styles

context . `font` [ = value ]
styles . `font` [ = value ]

  Returns the current font settings.

  Can be set, to change the font. The syntax is the same as for the CSS 'font' property; values that cannot be parsed as CSS font values are ignored.

  Relative keywords and lengths are computed relative to the font of the `canvas` element.

context . `textAlign` [ = value ]
styles . `textAlign` [ = value ]

  Returns the current text alignment settings.

  Can be set, to change the alignment. The possible values are and their meanings are given below. Other values are ignored. The default is "`start`".

context . `textBaseline` [ = value ]
styles . `textBaseline` [ = value ]

  Returns the current baseline alignment settings.

  Can be set, to change the baseline alignment. The possible values and their meanings are given below. Other values are ignored. The default is "`alphabetic`".

context . `direction` [ = value ]
styles . `direction` [ = value ]

  Returns the current directionality.

  Can be set, to change the directionality. The possible values and their meanings are given below. Other values are ignored. The default is "`inherit`".

Objects that implement the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface have attributes (defined in this section) that control how text is laid out (rasterised or outlined) by the object. Such objects can also have a font style source object. For `CanvasRenderingContext2D` objects whose context bitmap mode is fixed, this is their `canvas` element; for other `CanvasRenderingContext2D` objects, if the JavaScript global environment is a document environment, the object's font style source object is the `Document` object of the active document of the browsing context of the `Window` object on which the interface object of the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object is found; otherwise the JavaScript global environment is a worker environment and the font style source object is the worker. For `DrawingStyle` objects, it's the styles scope object.

The `font` IDL attribute, on setting, must be parsed the same way as the 'font' property of CSS (but without supporting property-independent style sheet syntax like 'inherit'), and the resulting font must be assigned to the context, with the 'line-height' component forced to 'normal', with the 'font-size' component converted to CSS pixels, and with system fonts being computed to explicit values. If the new value is syntactically incorrect (including using property-independent style sheet syntax like 'inherit' or 'initial'), then it must be ignored, without assigning a new font value. [CSS]

Font family names must be interpreted in the context of the font style source object when the font is to be used; any fonts embedded using `@font-face` or loaded using `FontFace` objects that are visible to the font style source object must therefore be available once they are loaded. (Each font style source object has a font source, which determines what fonts are available.) If a font is used before it is fully loaded, or if the font style source object does not have that font in scope at the time the font is to be used, then it must be treated as if it was an unknown font, falling back to another as described by the relevant CSS specifications. [CSSFONTS] [CSSFONTLOAD]

On getting, the `font` attribute must return the serialised form of the current font of the context (with no 'line-height' component). [CSSOM]

For example, after the following statement:

    context.font = 'italic 400 12px/2 Unknown Font, sans-serif';

...the expression `context.font` would evaluate to the string "`italic 12px "Unknown Font", sans-serif`". The "400" font-weight doesn't appear because that is the default value. The line-height doesn't appear because it is forced to "normal", the default value.

When the object implementing the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface is created, the font of the context must be set to 10px sans-serif. When the 'font-size' component is set to lengths using percentages, 'em' or 'ex' units, or the 'larger' or 'smaller' keywords, these must be interpreted relative to the computed value of the 'font-size' property of the font style source object at the time that the attribute is set, if it is an element. When the 'font-weight' component is set to the relative values 'bolder' and 'lighter', these must be interpreted relative to the computed value of the 'font-weight' property of the font style source object at the time that the attribute is set, if it is an element. If the computed values are undefined for a particular case (e.g. because the font style source object is not an element or is not being rendered), then the relative keywords must be interpreted relative to the normal-weight 10px sans-serif default.

The `textAlign` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the current value. On setting, if the value is one of `start`, `end`, `left`, `right`, or `center`, then the value must be changed to the new value. Otherwise, the new value must be ignored. When the object implementing the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface is created, the `textAlign` attribute must initially have the value `start`.

The `textBaseline` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the current value. On setting, if the value is one of `top`, `hanging`, `middle`, `alphabetic`, `ideographic`, or `bottom`, then the value must be changed to the new value. Otherwise, the new value must be ignored. When the object implementing the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface is created, the `textBaseline` attribute must initially have the value `alphabetic`.

The `direction` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the current value. On setting, if the value is one of "`ltr`", "`rtl`", or "`inherit`", then the value must be changed to the new value. Otherwise, the new value must be ignored. When the object implementing the `CanvasDrawingStyles` interface is created, the `direction` attribute must initially have the value "`inherit`".

The `textAlign` attribute's allowed keywords are as follows:

`start`

  Align to the start edge of the text (left side in left-to-right text, right side in right-to-left text).

`end`

  Align to the end edge of the text (right side in left-to-right text, left side in right-to-left text).

`left`

  Align to the left.

`right`

  Align to the right.

`center`

  Align to the center.

The `textBaseline` attribute's allowed keywords correspond to alignment points in the font:

The keywords map to these alignment points as follows:

`top`
  The top of the em square
`hanging`
  The hanging baseline
`middle`
  The middle of the em square
`alphabetic`
  The alphabetic baseline
`ideographic`
  The ideographic baseline
`bottom`
  The bottom of the em square

The `direction` attribute's allowed keywords are as follows:

`ltr`

  Treat input to the text preparation algorithm as left-to-right text.

`rtl`

  Treat input to the text preparation algorithm as right-to-left text.

`inherit`

  Default to the directionality of the `canvas` element or `Document` as appropriate.

The text preparation algorithm is as follows. It takes as input a string text, a `CanvasDrawingStyles` object target, and an optional length maxWidth. It returns an array of glyph shapes, each positioned on a common coordinate space, a physical alignment whose value is one of left, right, and center, and an inline box. (Most callers of this algorithm ignore the physical alignment and the inline box.)

1. If maxWidth was provided but is less than or equal to zero, return an empty array.

2. Replace all the space characters in text with U+0020 SPACE characters.

3. Let font be the current font of target, as given by that object's `font` attribute.

4. Apply the appropriate step from the following list to determine the value of direction:

   If the target object's `direction` attribute has the value "`ltr`"
     Let direction be 'ltr'.
   If the target object's `direction` attribute has the value "`rtl`"
     Let direction be 'rtl'.
   If the target object's font style source object is an element
     Let direction be the directionality of the target object's font style source object.
   If the target object's font style source object is a `Document` and that `Document` has a root element child
     Let direction be the directionality of the target object's font style source object's root element child.
   Otherwise
     Let direction be 'ltr'.

5. Form a hypothetical infinitely-wide CSS line box containing a single inline box containing the text text, with all the properties at their initial values except the 'font' property of the inline box set to font, the 'direction' property of the inline box set to direction, and the 'white-space' property set to 'pre'. [CSS]

6. If maxWidth was provided and the hypothetical width of the inline box in the hypothetical line box is greater than maxWidth CSS pixels, then change font to have a more condensed font (if one is available or if a reasonably readable one can be synthesized by applying a horizontal scale factor to the font) or a smaller font, and return to the previous step.

7. The anchor point is a point on the inline box, and the physical alignment is one of the values left, right, and center. These variables are determined by the `textAlign` and `textBaseline` values as follows:

   Horizontal position:

   If `textAlign` is `left`
   If `textAlign` is `start` and direction is 'ltr'
   If `textAlign` is `end` and direction is 'rtl'
     Let the anchor point's horizontal position be the left edge of the inline box, and let physical alignment be left.
   If `textAlign` is `right`
   If `textAlign` is `end` and direction is 'ltr'
   If `textAlign` is `start` and direction is 'rtl'
     Let the anchor point's horizontal position be the right edge of the inline box, and let physical alignment be right.
   If `textAlign` is `center`
     Let the anchor point's horizontal position be half way between the left and right edges of the inline box, and let physical alignment be center.

   Vertical position:

   If `textBaseline` is `top`
     Let the anchor point's vertical position be the top of the em box of the first available font of the inline box.
   If `textBaseline` is `hanging`
     Let the anchor point's vertical position be the hanging baseline of the first available font of the inline box.
   If `textBaseline` is `middle`
     Let the anchor point's vertical position be half way between the bottom and the top of the em box of the first available font of the inline box.
   If `textBaseline` is `alphabetic`
     Let the anchor point's vertical position be the alphabetic baseline of the first available font of the inline box.
   If `textBaseline` is `ideographic`
     Let the anchor point's vertical position be the ideographic baseline of the first available font of the inline box.
   If `textBaseline` is `bottom`
     Let the anchor point's vertical position be the bottom of the em box of the first available font of the inline box.

8. Let result be an array constructed by iterating over each glyph in the inline box from left to right (if any), adding to the array, for each glyph, the shape of the glyph as it is in the inline box, positioned on a coordinate space using CSS pixels with its origin is at the anchor point.

9. Return result, physical alignment, and the inline box.

###### 4.12.4.2.6 Building paths

Each object implementing the `CanvasPathMethods` interface has a path. A path has a list of zero or more subpaths. Each subpath consists of a list of one or more points, connected by straight or curved line segments, and a flag indicating whether the subpath is closed or not. A closed subpath is one where the last point of the subpath is connected to the first point of the subpath by a straight line. Subpaths with only one point are ignored when painting the path.

Paths have a need new subpath flag. When this flag is set, certain APIs create a new subpath rather than extending the previous one. When a path is created, its need new subpath flag must be set.

When an object implementing the `CanvasPathMethods` interface is created, its path must be initialised to zero subpaths.

context . `moveTo`(x, y)
path . `moveTo`(x, y)

  Creates a new subpath with the given point.

context . `closePath`()
path . `closePath`()

  Marks the current subpath as closed, and starts a new subpath with a point the same as the start and end of the newly closed subpath.

context . `lineTo`(x, y)
path . `lineTo`(x, y)

  Adds the given point to the current subpath, connected to the previous one by a straight line.

context . `quadraticCurveTo`(cpx, cpy, x, y)
path . `quadraticCurveTo`(cpx, cpy, x, y)

  Adds the given point to the current subpath, connected to the previous one by a quadratic Bézier curve with the given control point.

context . `bezierCurveTo`(cp1x, cp1y, cp2x, cp2y, x, y)
path . `bezierCurveTo`(cp1x, cp1y, cp2x, cp2y, x, y)

  Adds the given point to the current subpath, connected to the previous one by a cubic Bézier curve with the given control points.

context . `arcTo`(x1, y1, x2, y2, radiusX [, radiusY, rotation ] )
path . `arcTo`(x1, y1, x2, y2, radiusX [, radiusY, rotation ] )

  Adds an arc with the given control points and radius to the current subpath, connected to the previous point by a straight line.

  If two radii are provided, the first controls the width of the arc's ellipse, and the second controls the height. If only one is provided, or if they are the same, the arc is from a circle. In the case of an ellipse, the rotation argument controls the clockwise inclination of the ellipse relative to the x-axis.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the given radius is negative.

context . `arc`(x, y, radius, startAngle, endAngle [, anticlockwise ] )
path . `arc`(x, y, radius, startAngle, endAngle [, anticlockwise ] )

  Adds points to the subpath such that the arc described by the circumference of the circle described by the arguments, starting at the given start angle and ending at the given end angle, going in the given direction (defaulting to clockwise), is added to the path, connected to the previous point by a straight line.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the given radius is negative.

context . `ellipse`(x, y, radiusX, radiusY, rotation, startAngle, endAngle [, anticlockwise] )
path . `ellipse`(x, y, radiusX, radiusY, rotation, startAngle, endAngle [, anticlockwise] )

  Adds points to the subpath such that the arc described by the circumference of the ellipse described by the arguments, starting at the given start angle and ending at the given end angle, going in the given direction (defaulting to clockwise), is added to the path, connected to the previous point by a straight line.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the given radius is negative.

context . `rect`(x, y, w, h)
path . `rect`(x, y, w, h)

  Adds a new closed subpath to the path, representing the given rectangle.

The following methods allow authors to manipulate the paths of objects implementing the `CanvasPathMethods` interface.

For `CanvasRenderingContext2D` objects, the points passed to the methods, and the resulting lines added to current default path by these methods, must be transformed according to the current transformation matrix before being added to the path.

The `moveTo(x, y)` method must create a new subpath with the specified point as its first (and only) point.

When the user agent is to ensure there is a subpath for a coordinate (x, y) on a path, the user agent must check to see if the path has its need new subpath flag set. If it does, the user agent must create a new subpath with the point (x, y) as its first (and only) point, as if the `moveTo()` method had been called, and must then unset the path's need new subpath flag.

The `closePath()` method must do nothing if the object's path has no subpaths. Otherwise, it must mark the last subpath as closed, create a new subpath whose first point is the same as the previous subpath's first point, and finally add this new subpath to the path.

If the last subpath had more than one point in its list of points, then this is equivalent to adding a straight line connecting the last point back to the first point, thus "closing" the shape, and then repeating the last (possibly implied) `moveTo()` call.

New points and the lines connecting them are added to subpaths using the methods described below. In all cases, the methods only modify the last subpath in the object's path.

The `lineTo(x, y)` method must ensure there is a subpath for (x, y) if the object's path has no subpaths. Otherwise, it must connect the last point in the subpath to the given point (x, y) using a straight line, and must then add the given point (x, y) to the subpath.

The `quadraticCurveTo(cpx, cpy, x, y)` method must ensure there is a subpath for (cpx, cpy), and then must connect the last point in the subpath to the given point (x, y) using a quadratic Bézier curve with control point (cpx, cpy), and must then add the given point (x, y) to the subpath. [BEZIER]

The `bezierCurveTo(cp1x, cp1y, cp2x, cp2y, x, y)` method must ensure there is a subpath for (cp1x, cp1y), and then must connect the last point in the subpath to the given point (x, y) using a cubic Bézier curve with control points (cp1x, cp1y) and (cp2x, cp2y). Then, it must add the point (x, y) to the subpath. [BEZIER]

The `arcTo(x1, y1, x2, y2, radiusX, radiusY, rotation)` method must first ensure there is a subpath for (x1, y1). Then, the behavior depends on the arguments and the last point in the subpath, as described below.

Negative values for radiusX or radiusY must cause the implementation to throw an `IndexSizeError` exception. If radiusY is omitted, user agents must act as if it had the same value as radiusX.

Let the point (x0, y0) be the last point in the subpath, transformed by the inverse of the current transformation matrix (so that it is in the same coordinate system as the points passed to the method).

If the point (x0, y0) is equal to the point (x1, y1), or if the point (x1, y1) is equal to the point (x2, y2), or if both radiusX and radiusY are zero, then the method must add the point (x1, y1) to the subpath, and connect that point to the previous point (x0, y0) by a straight line.

Otherwise, if the points (x0, y0), (x1, y1), and (x2, y2) all lie on a single straight line, then the method must add the point (x1, y1) to the subpath, and connect that point to the previous point (x0, y0) by a straight line.

Otherwise, let The Arc be the shortest arc given by circumference of the ellipse that has radius radiusX on the major axis and radius radiusY on the minor axis, and whose semi-major axis is rotated rotation radians clockwise from the positive x-axis, and that has one point tangent to the half-infinite line that crosses the point (x0, y0) and ends at the point (x1, y1), and that has a different point tangent to the half-infinite line that ends at the point (x1, y1) and crosses the point (x2, y2). The points at which this ellipse touches these two lines are called the start and end tangent points respectively. The method must connect the point (x0, y0) to the start tangent point by a straight line, adding the start tangent point to the subpath, and then must connect the start tangent point to the end tangent point by The Arc, adding the end tangent point to the subpath.

The `arc(x, y, radius, startAngle, endAngle, anticlockwise)` and `ellipse(x, y, radiusX, radiusY, rotation, startAngle, endAngle, anticlockwise)` methods draw arcs.

The `arc()` method is equivalent to the `ellipse()` method in the case where the two radii are equal. When the `arc()` method is invoked, it must act as if the `ellipse()` method had been invoked with the radiusX and radiusY arguments set to the value of the radius argument, the rotation argument set to zero, and the other arguments set to the same values as their identically named arguments on the `arc()` method.

When the `ellipse()` method is invoked, it must proceed as follows. First, if the object's path has any subpaths, then the method must add a straight line from the last point in the subpath to the start point of the arc. Then, it must add the start and end points of the arc to the subpath, and connect them with an arc. The arc and its start and end points are defined as follows:

Consider an ellipse that has its origin at (x, y), that has a major-axis radius radiusX and a minor-axis radius radiusY, and that is rotated about its origin such that its semi-major axis is inclined rotation radians clockwise from the x-axis.

If the anticlockwise argument is false and endAngle-startAngle is equal to or greater than 2π, or, if the anticlockwise argument is true and startAngle-endAngle is equal to or greater than 2π, then the arc is the whole circumference of this ellipse, and the point at startAngle along this circle's circumference, measured in radians clockwise from the ellipse's semi-major axis, acts as both the start point and the end point.

Otherwise, the points at startAngle and endAngle along this circle's circumference, measured in radians clockwise from the ellipse's semi-major axis, are the start and end points respectively, and the arc is the path along the circumference of this ellipse from the start point to the end point, going anti-clockwise if the anticlockwise argument is true, and clockwise otherwise. Since the points are on the ellipse, as opposed to being simply angles from zero, the arc can never cover an angle greater than 2π radians.

Even if the arc covers the entire circumference of the ellipse and there are no other points in the subpath, the path is not closed unless the `closePath()` method is appropriately invoked.

Negative values for radiusX or radiusY must cause the implementation to throw an `IndexSizeError` exception.

The `rect(x, y, w, h)` method must create a new subpath containing just the four points (x, y), (x+w, y), (x+w, y+h), (x, y+h), in that order, with those four points connected by straight lines, and must then mark the subpath as closed. It must then create a new subpath with the point (x, y) as the only point in the subpath.

###### 4.12.4.2.7 `Path2D` objects

`Path2D` objects can be used to declare paths that are then later used on `CanvasRenderingContext2D` objects. In addition to many of the APIs described in earlier sections, `Path2D` objects have methods to combine paths, and to add text to paths.

path = new `Path2D`()

  Creates a new empty `Path2D` object.

path = new `Path2D`(path)

  Creates a new `Path2D` object that is a copy of the argument.

path = new `Path2D`(paths [, fillRule ] )

  Creates a new `Path2D` object that describes a path that outlines the given paths, using the given fill rule.

path = new `Path2D`(d)

  Creates a new path with the path described by the argument, interpreted as SVG path data. [SVG]

path . `addPath`(path [, transform ] )
path . `addPathByStrokingPath`(path, styles [, transform ] )

  Adds to the path the path given by the argument.

  In the case of the stroking variants, the line styles are taken from the styles argument, which can be either a `DrawingStyle` object or a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object.

path . `addText`(text, styles, transform, x, y [, maxWidth ] )
path . `addText`(text, styles, transform, path [, maxWidth ] )
path . `addPathByStrokingText`(text, styles, transform, x, y [, maxWidth ] )
path . `addPathByStrokingText`(text, styles, transform, path [, maxWidth ] )

  Adds to the path a series of subpaths corresponding to the given text. If the arguments give a coordinate, the text is drawn horizontally at the given coordinates. If the arguments give a path, the text is drawn along the path. If a maximum width is provided, the text will be scaled to fit that width if necessary.

  The font, and in the case of the stroking variants, the line styles, are taken from the styles argument, which can be either a `DrawingStyle` object or a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object.

The `Path2D()` constructor, when invoked, must return a newly created `Path2D` object.

The `Path2D(path)` constructor, when invoked, must return a newly created `Path2D` object, to which the subpaths of the argument are added. (In other words, it returns a copy of the argument.)

The `Path2D(paths, fillRule)` constructor, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. Run the appropriate step from the following list, based on the constructor's sectond argument:

   If it is "nonzero"

     Let merged path be a path that consists of a set of non-overlapping subpaths that exactly outline the points from which, in any of the paths provided in the constructor's first argument, the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses a subpath going in one direction is not equal to the number of times it crosses a subpath going in the other direction.

   If it is "evenodd"

     Let merged path be a path that consists of a set of non-overlapping subpaths that exactly outline the points from which, in any of the paths provided in the constructor's first argument, the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses that path is odd.

   The subpaths in merged path must be oriented such that for any point, the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses a subpath is even if and only if the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that same point crosses a subpath going in one direction is equal to the number of times it crosses a subpath going in the other direction.

2. Add all the subpaths in merged path to the `Path2D` object.

3. Set the `Path2D` object's need new subpath flag.

The `Path2D(d)` constructor must run the following steps:

1. Parse and interpret the d argument according to the SVG specification's rules for path data, thus obtaining an SVG path. [SVG]

   The resulting path could be empty. SVG defines error handling rules for parsing and applying path data.

2. Let (x, y) be the last point in the SVG path.

3. Create a new `Path2D` object and add all the subpaths in the SVG path, if any, to that `Path2D` object.

4. Create a new subpath in the `Path2D` object with (x, y) as the only point in the subpath.

5. Return the `Path2D` object as the constructed object.

The `addPath(b, transform)` method, when invoked on a `Path2D` object a, must run the following steps:

1. If the `Path2D` object b has no subpaths, abort these steps.

2. Create a copy of all the subpaths in b. Let this copy be known as c.

3. Transform all the coordinates and lines in c by the transform matrix transform, if it is not null.

4. Let (x, y) be the last point in the last subpath of c.

5. Add all the subpaths in c to a.

6. Create a new subpath in a with (x, y) as the only point in the subpath.

The `addPathByStrokingPath(b, styles, transform)` method, when invoked on a `Path2D` object a, must run the following steps:

1. If the `Path2D` object b has no subpaths, abort these steps.

2. Create a copy of all the subpaths in b. Let this copy be known as c.

3. Transform all the coordinates and lines in c by transformation matrix transform, if it is not null.

4. Let a new list of subpaths d be the result of tracing c, using the styles argument for the line styles.

5. Let (x, y) be the last point in the last subpath of d.

6. Add all the subpaths in d to a.

7. Create a new subpath in a with (x, y) as the only point in the subpath.

The `addText()` and `addPathByStrokingText()` methods each come in two variants: one rendering text at a given coordinate, and one rendering text along a given path. In both cases, the methods take a `CanvasDrawingStyles` object argument for the text and (if appropriate) line styles to use, an `SVGMatrix` object transform (which can be null), and a maximum width can optionally be provided.

When one of the `addText()` and `addPathByStrokingText()` variants that take as argument an (x, y) coordinate is invoked, the method must run the following algorithm:

1. Run the text preparation algorithm, passing it text, the `CanvasDrawingStyles` object argument, and, if the maxWidth argument was provided, that argument. Let glyphs be the result.

2. Move all the shapes in glyphs to the right by x CSS pixels and down by y CSS pixels.

3. Let glyph paths be a list of paths describing the shapes given in glyphs, with each CSS pixel in the coordinate space of glyphs mapped to one coordinate space unit in glyph paths. Subpaths in glyph paths must wind clockwise, regardless of how the user agent's font subsystem renders fonts and regardless of how the fonts themselves are defined.

4. Transform all the coordinates and lines in glyph paths by the transformation matrix transform, if it is not null.

5. If the method is `addPathByStrokingText()`, replace glyph paths by the result of tracing each path in glyph paths, using the `CanvasDrawingStyles` object argument for the line styles.

6. Let merged path be a path that consists of a set of non-overlapping subpaths that exactly outline the points from which, in any of the paths in glyph paths, the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses that path is odd.

   The subpaths in merged path must be oriented such that for any point, the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses a subpath is even if and only if the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that same point crosses a subpath going in one direction is equal to the number of times it crosses a subpath going in the other direction.

   For example, suppose text consists of two overlapping glyphs "Q" and "p" (maybe the "Q" has a flourish that crosses into the tail of the "p"). The glyph paths therefore consist of two paths, each with two subpaths: one for the outside of the letter shape, and one for the inside of the letter shape. There are points that, according to the even-odd fill rule, are filled in both shapes simultaneously: where they overlap. As such, the subpaths from the two glyphs actually cross each other.

   The resulting merged path in such a situation would have just one path for these two letters, with a total of just three subpaths (one big outer outline, one for the inside of the "Q", and one for inside of the "p"). This single path would have no subpaths that cross each other.

7. Add all the subpaths in merged path to the `Path2D` object.

8. Set the `Path2D` object's need new subpath flag.

When one of the `addText()` and `addPathByStrokingText()` variants that take as argument a `Path2D` object is invoked, the method must run the following algorithm:

1. Let target be the `Path2D` object on which the method was invoked.

2. Let path be the `Path2D` object that was provided in the method's arguments.

3. Run the text preparation algorithm, passing it text, the `CanvasDrawingStyles` object argument, and, if the maxWidth argument was provided, that argument. Let glyphs be the resulting array, and physical alignment be the resulting alignment value.

4. Let width be the aggregate length of all the subpaths in path, including the distances from the last point of each closed subpath to the first point of that subpath.

5. Define L to be a linear coordinate line for of all the subpaths in path, with additional lines drawn between the last point and the first point of each closed subpath, such that the first point of the first subpath is defined as point 0, and the last point of the last subpath, if the last subpath is not closed, or the second occurrence first point of that subpath, if it is closed, is defined as point width.

6. Let offset be determined according to the appropriate step below:

   If physical alignment is left
     Let offset be zero.
   If physical alignment is right
     Let offset be width.
   If physical alignment is center
     Let offset be half of width.

7. Move all the shapes in glyphs to the right by offset CSS pixels.

8. Let transformed path list be an empty list of paths.

9. For each glyph glyph in the glyphs array, run these substeps:

   1. Let dx be the x-coordinate of the horizontal center of the bounding box of the shape described by glyph, in CSS pixels.

   2. If dx is negative or greater than width, skip the remainder of these substeps for this glyph.

   3. Recast dx to coordinate spaces units in path. (This just changes the dimensionality of dx, not its numeric value.)

   4. Find the point p on path (or implied closing lines in path) that corresponds to the position dx on the coordinate line L.

   5. Let θ be the clockwise angle from the positive x-axis to the side of the line that is tangential to path at the point p that is going in the same direction as the line at point p.

   6. Rotate the shape described by glyph clockwise by θ about the point that is at the dx coordinate horizontally and the zero coordinate vertically.

   7. Let (x, y) be the coordinate of the point p.

   8. Move the shape described by glyph to the right by x and down by y.

   9. Let glyph subpaths be a list of subpaths describing the shape given in glyph, with each CSS pixel in the coordinate space of glyph mapped to one coordinate space unit in glyph subpaths. Subpaths in glyph subpaths must wind clockwise, regardless of how the user agent's font subsystem renders fonts and regardless of how the fonts themselves are defined.

   10. Transform all the coordinates and lines in glyph subpaths by the transformation matrix transform, if it is not null.

   11. If the method is `addPathByStrokingText()`, replace glyph subpaths by the result of tracing glyph subpaths, using the `CanvasDrawingStyles` object argument for the line styles.

   12. Add all the subpaths in glyph subpaths to transformed path list.

10. Let merged path be a path that consists of a set of non-overlapping subpaths that exactly outline the points from which, in any of the paths in transformed path list, the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses that path is odd.

    The subpaths in merged path must be oriented such that for any point, the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that point crosses a subpath is even if and only if the number of times a half-infinite straight line drawn from that same point crosses a subpath going in one direction is equal to the number of times it crosses a subpath going in the other direction.

    See the equivalent step in the earlier algorithm for an example of this step. It's even more likely that there will be overlap with this method, since neighboring glyphs are likely to be rotated relative to each other.

11. Add all the subpaths in merged path to target.

12. Set the `Path2D` object's need new subpath flag.

###### 4.12.4.2.8 Transformations

Each `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object has a current transformation matrix, as well as methods (described in this section) to manipulate it. When a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object is created, its transformation matrix must be initialised to the identity transform.

The transformation matrix is applied to coordinates when creating the current default path, and when painting text, shapes, and `Path2D` objects, on `CanvasRenderingContext2D` objects.

Most of the API uses `SVGMatrix` objects rather than this API. This API remains mostly for historical reasons.

The transformations must be performed in reverse order.

For instance, if a scale transformation that doubles the width is applied to the canvas, followed by a rotation transformation that rotates drawing operations by a quarter turn, and a rectangle twice as wide as it is tall is then drawn on the canvas, the actual result will be a square.

context . `currentTransform` [ = value ]

  Returns the transformation matrix, as an `SVGMatrix` object.

  Can be set, to change the transformation matrix.

context . `scale`(x, y)

  Changes the transformation matrix to apply a scaling transformation with the given characteristics.

context . `rotate`(angle)

  Changes the transformation matrix to apply a rotation transformation with the given characteristics. The angle is in radians.

context . `translate`(x, y)

  Changes the transformation matrix to apply a translation transformation with the given characteristics.

context . `transform`(a, b, c, d, e, f)

  Changes the transformation matrix to apply the matrix given by the arguments as described below.

context . `setTransform`(a, b, c, d, e, f)

  Changes the transformation matrix to the matrix given by the arguments as described below.

context . `resetTransform`()

  Changes the transformation matrix to the identity transform.

The `currentTransform`, on getting, must return the last object that it was set to. On setting, its value must be changed to the new value, and the transformation matrix must be updated to match the matrix described by the new value. When the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object is created, the `currentTransform` attribute must be set a newly created `SVGMatrix` object. When the transformation matrix is mutated by the methods described in this section, the last `SVGMatrix` object to which the attribute has been set must be mutated in a corresponding fashion.

The `scale(x, y)` method must add the scaling transformation described by the arguments to the transformation matrix. The x argument represents the scale factor in the horizontal direction and the y argument represents the scale factor in the vertical direction. The factors are multiples.

The `rotate(angle)` method must add the rotation transformation described by the argument to the transformation matrix. The angle argument represents a clockwise rotation angle expressed in radians.

The `translate(x, y)` method must add the translation transformation described by the arguments to the transformation matrix. The x argument represents the translation distance in the horizontal direction and the y argument represents the translation distance in the vertical direction. The arguments are in coordinate space units.

The `transform(a, b, c, d, e, f)` method must replace the current transformation matrix with the result of multiplying the current transformation matrix with the matrix described by:

a | c | e
b | d | f
0 | 0 | 1

The arguments a, b, c, d, e, and f are sometimes called m11, m12, m21, m22, dx, and dy or m11, m21, m12, m22, dx, and dy. Care should be taken in particular with the order of the second and third arguments (b and c) as their order varies from API to API and APIs sometimes use the notation m12/m21 and sometimes m21/m12 for those positions.

The `setTransform(a, b, c, d, e, f)` method must reset the current transform to the identity matrix, and then invoke the `transform(a, b, c, d, e, f)` method with the same arguments.

The `resetTransform()` method must reset the current transform to the identity matrix.

###### 4.12.4.2.9 Image sources for 2D rendering contexts

Several methods in the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` API take the union type `CanvasImageSource` as an argument.

This union type allows objects implementing any of the following interfaces to be used as image sources:

- `HTMLImageElement` (`img` elements)
- `HTMLVideoElement` (`video` elements)
- `HTMLCanvasElement` (`canvas` elements)
- `CanvasRenderingContext2D`
- `ImageBitmap`

The `ImageBitmap` interface can be created from a number of other image-representing types, including `ImageData`.

When a user agent is required to check the usability of the image argument, where image is a `CanvasImageSource` object, the user agent must run these steps, which return either good, bad, or aborted:

1. If the image argument is an `HTMLImageElement` object that is in the broken state, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception, return aborted, and abort these steps.

2. If the image argument is an `HTMLImageElement` object that is not fully decodable, or if the image argument is an `HTMLVideoElement` object whose `readyState` attribute is either `HAVE_NOTHING` or `HAVE_METADATA`, then return bad and abort these steps.

3. If the image argument is an `HTMLImageElement` object with an intrinsic width or intrinsic height (or both) equal to zero, then return bad and abort these steps.

4. If the image argument is an `HTMLCanvasElement` object with either a horizontal dimension or a vertical dimension equal to zero, then return bad and abort these steps.

5. Return good.

When a `CanvasImageSource` object represents an `HTMLImageElement`, the element's image must be used as the source image.

Specifically, when a `CanvasImageSource` object represents an animated image in an `HTMLImageElement`, the user agent must use the default image of the animation (the one that the format defines is to be used when animation is not supported or is disabled), or, if there is no such image, the first frame of the animation, when rendering the image for `CanvasRenderingContext2D` APIs.

When a `CanvasImageSource` object represents an `HTMLVideoElement`, then the frame at the current playback position when the method with the argument is invoked must be used as the source image when rendering the image for `CanvasRenderingContext2D` APIs, and the source image's dimensions must be the intrinsic width and intrinsic height of the media resource (i.e. after any aspect-ratio correction has been applied).

When a `CanvasImageSource` object represents an `HTMLCanvasElement`, the element's bitmap must be used as the source image.

When a `CanvasImageSource` object represents a `CanvasRenderingContext2D`, the object's scratch bitmap must be used as the source image.

When a `CanvasImageSource` object represents an element that is being rendered and that element has been resized, the original image data of the source image must be used, not the image as it is rendered (e.g. `width` and `height` attributes on the source element have no effect on how the object is interpreted when rendering the image for `CanvasRenderingContext2D` APIs).

When a `CanvasImageSource` object represents an `ImageBitmap`, the object's bitmap image data must be used as the source image.

The image argument is not origin-clean if it is an `HTMLImageElement` or `HTMLVideoElement` whose origin is not the same as the origin specified by the entry settings object, or if it is an `HTMLCanvasElement` whose bitmap's origin-clean flag is false, or if it is a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object whose scratch bitmap's origin-clean flag is false.

###### 4.12.4.2.10 Fill and stroke styles

context . `fillStyle` [ = value ]

  Returns the current style used for filling shapes.

  Can be set, to change the fill style.

  The style can be either a string containing a CSS colour, or a `CanvasGradient` or `CanvasPattern` object. Invalid values are ignored.

context . `strokeStyle` [ = value ]

  Returns the current style used for stroking shapes.

  Can be set, to change the stroke style.

  The style can be either a string containing a CSS colour, or a `CanvasGradient` or `CanvasPattern` object. Invalid values are ignored.

The `fillStyle` attribute represents the colour or style to use inside shapes, and the `strokeStyle` attribute represents the colour or style to use for the lines around the shapes.

Both attributes can be either strings, `CanvasGradient`s, or `CanvasPattern`s. On setting, strings must be parsed as CSS <color> values and the colour assigned, and `CanvasGradient` and `CanvasPattern` objects must be assigned themselves. [CSSCOLOR] If the value is a string but cannot be parsed as a CSS <color> value, then it must be ignored, and the attribute must retain its previous value. If the new value is a `CanvasPattern` object that is marked as not origin-clean, then the scratch bitmap's origin-clean flag must be set to false.

When set to a `CanvasPattern` or `CanvasGradient` object, the assignment is live, meaning that changes made to the object after the assignment do affect subsequent stroking or filling of shapes.

On getting, if the value is a colour, then the serialisation of the colour must be returned. Otherwise, if it is not a colour but a `CanvasGradient` or `CanvasPattern`, then the respective object must be returned. (Such objects are opaque and therefore only useful for assigning to other attributes or for comparison to other gradients or patterns.)

The serialisation of a colour for a colour value is a string, computed as follows: if it has alpha equal to 1.0, then the string is a lowercase six-digit hex value, prefixed with a "#" character (U+0023 NUMBER SIGN), with the first two digits representing the red component, the next two digits representing the green component, and the last two digits representing the blue component, the digits being lowercase ASCII hex digits. Otherwise, the colour value has alpha less than 1.0, and the string is the colour value in the CSS `rgba()` functional-notation format: the literal string "`rgba`" (U+0072 U+0067 U+0062 U+0061) followed by a U+0028 LEFT PARENTHESIS, a base-ten integer in the range 0-255 representing the red component (using ASCII digits in the shortest form possible), a literal U+002C COMMA and U+0020 SPACE, an integer for the green component, a comma and a space, an integer for the blue component, another comma and space, a U+0030 DIGIT ZERO, if the alpha value is greater than zero then a U+002E FULL STOP (representing the decimal point), if the alpha value is greater than zero then one or more ASCII digits representing the fractional part of the alpha, and finally a U+0029 RIGHT PARENTHESIS. User agents must express the fractional part of the alpha value, if any, with the level of precision necessary for the alpha value, when reparsed, to be interpreted as the same alpha value.

When the context is created, the `fillStyle` and `strokeStyle` attributes must initially have the string value `#000000`.

When the value is a colour, it must not be affected by the transformation matrix when used to draw on bitmaps.

There are two types of gradients, linear gradients and radial gradients, both represented by objects implementing the opaque `CanvasGradient` interface.

Once a gradient has been created (see below), stops are placed along it to define how the colours are distributed along the gradient. The colour of the gradient at each stop is the colour specified for that stop. Between each such stop, the colours and the alpha component must be linearly interpolated over the RGBA space without premultiplying the alpha value to find the colour to use at that offset. Before the first stop, the colour must be the colour of the first stop. After the last stop, the colour must be the colour of the last stop. When there are no stops, the gradient is transparent black.

gradient . `addColorStop`(offset, color)

  Adds a colour stop with the given colour to the gradient at the given offset. 0.0 is the offset at one end of the gradient, 1.0 is the offset at the other end.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the offset is out of range. Throws a `SyntaxError` exception if the colour cannot be parsed.

gradient = context . `createLinearGradient`(x0, y0, x1, y1)

  Returns a `CanvasGradient` object that represents a linear gradient that paints along the line given by the coordinates represented by the arguments.

gradient = context . `createRadialGradient`(x0, y0, r0, x1, y1, r1)

  Returns a `CanvasGradient` object that represents a radial gradient that paints along the cone given by the circles represented by the arguments.

  If either of the radii are negative, throws an `IndexSizeError` exception.

The `addColorStop(offset, color)` method on the `CanvasGradient` interface adds a new stop to a gradient. If the offset is less than 0 or greater than 1 then an `IndexSizeError` exception must be thrown. If the color cannot be parsed as a CSS <color> value, then a `SyntaxError` exception must be thrown. Otherwise, the gradient must have a new stop placed, at offset offset relative to the whole gradient, and with the colour obtained by parsing color as a CSS <color> value. If multiple stops are added at the same offset on a gradient, they must be placed in the order added, with the first one closest to the start of the gradient, and each subsequent one infinitesimally further along towards the end point (in effect causing all but the first and last stop added at each point to be ignored).

The `createLinearGradient(x0, y0, x1, y1)` method takes four arguments that represent the start point (x0, y0) and end point (x1, y1) of the gradient. The method must return a linear `CanvasGradient` initialised with the specified line.

Linear gradients must be rendered such that all points on a line perpendicular to the line that crosses the start and end points have the colour at the point where those two lines cross (with the colours coming from the interpolation and extrapolation described above). The points in the linear gradient must be transformed as described by the current transformation matrix when rendering.

If x0 = x1 and y0 = y1, then the linear gradient must paint nothing.

The `createRadialGradient(x0, y0, r0, x1, y1, r1)` method takes six arguments, the first three representing the start circle with origin (x0, y0) and radius r0, and the last three representing the end circle with origin (x1, y1) and radius r1. The values are in coordinate space units. If either of r0 or r1 are negative, an `IndexSizeError` exception must be thrown. Otherwise, the method must return a radial `CanvasGradient` initialised with the two specified circles.

Radial gradients must be rendered by following these steps:

1. If x0 = x1 and y0 = y1 and r0 = r1, then the radial gradient must paint nothing. Abort these steps.

2. Let x(ω) = (x1-x0)ω + x0

   Let y(ω) = (y1-y0)ω + y0

   Let r(ω) = (r1-r0)ω + r0

   Let the colour at ω be the colour at that position on the gradient (with the colours coming from the interpolation and extrapolation described above).

3. For all values of ω where r(ω) > 0, starting with the value of ω nearest to positive infinity and ending with the value of ω nearest to negative infinity, draw the circumference of the circle with radius r(ω) at position (x(ω), y(ω)), with the colour at ω, but only painting on the parts of the bitmap that have not yet been painted on by earlier circles in this step for this rendering of the gradient.

This effectively creates a cone, touched by the two circles defined in the creation of the gradient, with the part of the cone before the start circle (0.0) using the colour of the first offset, the part of the cone after the end circle (1.0) using the colour of the last offset, and areas outside the cone untouched by the gradient (transparent black).

The resulting radial gradient must then be transformed as described by the current transformation matrix when rendering.

Gradients must be painted only where the relevant stroking or filling effects requires that they be drawn.

Patterns are represented by objects implementing the opaque `CanvasPattern` interface.

pattern = context . `createPattern`(image, repetition)

  Returns a `CanvasPattern` object that uses the given image and repeats in the direction(s) given by the repetition argument.

  The allowed values for repetition are `repeat` (both directions), `repeat-x` (horizontal only), `repeat-y` (vertical only), and `no-repeat` (neither). If the repetition argument is empty, the value `repeat` is used.

  If the image isn't yet fully decoded, then nothing is drawn. If the image is a canvas with no data, throws an `InvalidStateError` exception.

pattern . `setTransform`(transform)

  Sets the transformation matrix that will be used when rendering the pattern during a fill or stroke painting operation.

To create objects of this type, the `createPattern(image, repetition)` method is used. When the method is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let image be the first argument and repetition be the second argument.

2. Check the usability of the image argument. If this returns aborted, then an exception has been thrown and the method doesn't return anything; abort these steps. If it returns bad, then return null and abort these steps. Otherwise it returns good; continue with these steps.

3. If repetition is the empty string, let it be "`repeat`".

4. If repetition is not a case-sensitive match for one of "`repeat`", "`repeat-x`", "`repeat-y`", or "`no-repeat`", throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.

5. Create a new `CanvasPattern` object with the image image and the repetition behavior given by repetition.

6. If the image argument is not origin-clean, then mark the `CanvasPattern` object as not origin-clean.

7. Return the `CanvasPattern` object.

Modifying the image used when creating a `CanvasPattern` object after calling the `createPattern()` method must not affect the pattern(s) rendered by the `CanvasPattern` object.

Patterns have a transformation matrix, which controls how the pattern is used when it is painted. Initially, a pattern's transformation matrix must be the identity transform.

When the `setTransform()` method is invoked on the pattern, the user agent must replace the pattern's transformation matrix with the one described by the `SVGMatrix` object provided as an argument to the method.

When a pattern is to be rendered within an area, the user agent must run the following steps to determine what is rendered:

1. Create an infinite transparent black bitmap.

2. Place a copy of the image on the bitmap, anchored such that its top left corner is at the origin of the coordinate space, with one coordinate space unit per CSS pixel of the image, then place repeated copies of this image horizontally to the left and right, if the repetition behavior is "`repeat-x`", or vertically up and down, if the repetition behavior is "`repeat-y`", or in all four directions all over the bitmap, if the repetition behavior is "`repeat`".

   If the original image data is a bitmap image, the value painted at a point in the area of the repetitions is computed by filtering the original image data. When scaling up, if the `imageSmoothingEnabled` attribute is set to false, the image must be rendered using nearest-neighbor interpolation. Otherwise, the user agent may use any filtering algorithm (for example bilinear interpolation or nearest-neighbor). When such a filtering algorithm requires a pixel value from outside the original image data, it must instead use the value from wrapping the pixel's coordinates to the original image's dimensions. (That is, the filter uses 'repeat' behavior, regardless of the value of the pattern's repetition behavior.)

3. Transform the resulting bitmap according to the pattern's transformation matrix.

4. Transform the resulting bitmap again, this time according to the current transformation matrix.

5. Replace any part of the image outside the area in which the pattern is to be rendered with transparent black.

6. The resulting bitmap is what is to be rendered, with the same origin and same scale.

If a radial gradient or repeated pattern is used when the transformation matrix is singular, the resulting style must be transparent black (otherwise the gradient or pattern would be collapsed to a point or line, leaving the other pixels undefined). Linear gradients and solid colours always define all points even with singular tranformation matrices.

###### 4.12.4.2.11 Drawing rectangles to the bitmap

There are three methods that immediately draw rectangles to the bitmap. They each take four arguments; the first two give the x and y coordinates of the top left of the rectangle, and the second two give the width w and height h of the rectangle, respectively.

The current transformation matrix must be applied to the following four coordinates, which form the path that must then be closed to get the specified rectangle: (x, y), (x+w, y), (x+w, y+h), (x, y+h).

Shapes are painted without affecting the current default path, and are subject to the clipping region, and, with the exception of `clearRect()`, also shadow effects, global alpha, and global composition operators.

context . `clearRect`(x, y, w, h)

  Clears all pixels on the bitmap in the given rectangle to transparent black.

context . `fillRect`(x, y, w, h)

  Paints the given rectangle onto the bitmap, using the current fill style.

context . `strokeRect`(x, y, w, h)

  Paints the box that outlines the given rectangle onto the bitmap, using the current stroke style.

The `clearRect(x, y, w, h)` method must run the following steps:

1. Let pixels be the set of pixels in the specified rectangle that also intersect the current clipping region.

2. Clear the pixels in pixels to a fully transparent black, erasing any previous image.

3. Clear regions that cover the pixels in pixels on the scratch bitmap.

If either height or width are zero, this method has no effect, since the set of pixels would be empty.

The `fillRect(x, y, w, h)` method must paint the specified rectangular area using the `fillStyle`. If either height or width are zero, this method has no effect.

The `strokeRect(x, y, w, h)` method must take the result of tracing the path described below, using the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's line styles, and fill it with the `strokeStyle`.

If both w and h are zero, the path has a single subpath with just one point (x, y), and no lines, and this method thus has no effect (the trace a path algorithm returns an empty path in that case).

If just one of either w or h is zero, then the path has a single subpath consisting of two points, with coordinates (x, y) and (x+w, y+h), in that order, connected by a single straight line.

Otherwise, the path has a single subpath consisting of four points, with coordinates (x, y), (x+w, y), (x+w, y+h), and (x, y+h), connected to each other in that order by straight lines.

###### 4.12.4.2.12 Drawing text to the bitmap

context . `fillText`(text, x, y [, maxWidth ] )
context . `strokeText`(text, x, y [, maxWidth ] )

  Fills or strokes (respectively) the given text at the given position. If a maximum width is provided, the text will be scaled to fit that width if necessary.

metrics = context . `measureText`(text)

  Returns a `TextMetrics` object with the metrics of the given text in the current font.

metrics . `width`
metrics . `actualBoundingBoxLeft`
metrics . `actualBoundingBoxRight`
metrics . `fontBoundingBoxAscent`
metrics . `fontBoundingBoxDescent`
metrics . `actualBoundingBoxAscent`
metrics . `actualBoundingBoxDescent`
metrics . `emHeightAscent`
metrics . `emHeightDescent`
metrics . `hangingBaseline`
metrics . `alphabeticBaseline`
metrics . `ideographicBaseline`

  Returns the measurement described below.

The `CanvasRenderingContext2D` interface provides the following methods for rendering text.

The `fillText()` and `strokeText()` methods take three or four arguments, text, x, y, and optionally maxWidth, and render the given text at the given (x, y) coordinates ensuring that the text isn't wider than maxWidth if specified, using the current `font`, `textAlign`, and `textBaseline` values. Specifically, when the methods are called, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Run the text preparation algorithm, passing it text, the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object, and, if the maxWidth argument was provided, that argument. Let glyphs be the result.

2. Move all the shapes in glyphs to the right by x CSS pixels and down by y CSS pixels.

3. Paint the shapes given in glyphs, as transformed by the current transformation matrix, with each CSS pixel in the coordinate space of glyphs mapped to one coordinate space unit.

   For `fillText()`, `fillStyle` must be applied to the shapes and `strokeStyle` must be ignored. For `strokeText()`, the reverse holds: `strokeStyle` must be applied to the result of tracing the shapes using the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object for the line styles, and `fillStyle` must be ignored.

   These shapes are painted without affecting the current path, and are subject to shadow effects, global alpha, the clipping region, and global composition operators.

4. If the text preparation algorithm used a font that has an origin that is not the same as the origin specified by the entry settings object (even if "using a font" means just checking if that font has a particular glyph in it before falling back to another font), then set the scratch bitmap's origin-clean flag to false.

The `measureText()` method takes one argument, text. When the method is invoked, the user agent must run the text preparation algorithm, passing it text and the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object, and then using the returned inline box must create a new `TextMetrics` object with its attributes set as described in the following list. If doing these measurements requires using a font that has an origin that is not the same as that of the `Document` object that owns the `canvas` element (even if "using a font" means just checking if that font has a particular glyph in it before falling back to another font), then the method must throw a `SecurityError` exception. Otherwise, it must return the new `TextMetrics` object. [CSS]

`width` attribute

  The width of that inline box, in CSS pixels. (The text's advance width.)

`actualBoundingBoxLeft` attribute

  The distance parallel to the baseline from the alignment point given by the `textAlign` attribute to the left side of the bounding rectangle of the given text, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating a distance going left from the given alignment point.

  The sum of this value and the next (`actualBoundingBoxRight`) can be wider than the width of the inline box (`width`), in particular with slanted fonts where characters overhang their advance width.

`actualBoundingBoxRight` attribute

  The distance parallel to the baseline from the alignment point given by the `textAlign` attribute to the right side of the bounding rectangle of the given text, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating a distance going right from the given alignment point.

`fontBoundingBoxAscent` attribute

  The distance from the horizontal line indicated by the `textBaseline` attribute to the top of the highest bounding rectangle of all the fonts used to render the text, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating a distance going up from the given baseline.

  This value and the next are useful when rendering a background that must have a consistent height even if the exact text being rendered changes. The `actualBoundingBoxAscent` attribute (and its corresponding attribute for the descent) are useful when drawing a bounding box around specific text.

`fontBoundingBoxDescent` attribute

  The distance from the horizontal line indicated by the `textBaseline` attribute to the bottom of the lowest bounding rectangle of all the fonts used to render the text, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating a distance going down from the given baseline.

`actualBoundingBoxAscent` attribute

  The distance from the horizontal line indicated by the `textBaseline` attribute to the top of the bounding rectangle of the given text, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating a distance going up from the given baseline.

  This number can vary greatly based on the input text, even if the first font specified covers all the characters in the input. For example, the `actualBoundingBoxAscent` of a lowercase "o" from an alphabetic baseline would be less than that of an uppercase "F". The value can easily be negative; for example, the distance from the top of the em box (`textBaseline` value "`top`") to the top of the bounding rectangle when the given text is just a single comma "`,`" would likely (unless the font is quite unusual) be negative.

`actualBoundingBoxDescent` attribute

  The distance from the horizontal line indicated by the `textBaseline` attribute to the bottom of the bounding rectangle of the given text, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating a distance going down from the given baseline.

`emHeightAscent` attribute

  The distance from the horizontal line indicated by the `textBaseline` attribute to the highest top of the em squares in the line box, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating that the given baseline is below the top of that em square (so this value will usually be positive). Zero if the given baseline is the top of that em square; half the font size if the given baseline is the middle of that em square.

`emHeightDescent` attribute

  The distance from the horizontal line indicated by the `textBaseline` attribute to the lowest bottom of the em squares in the line box, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating that the given baseline is below the bottom of that em square (so this value will usually be negative). (Zero if the given baseline is the top of that em square.)

`hangingBaseline` attribute

  The distance from the horizontal line indicated by the `textBaseline` attribute to the hanging baseline of the line box, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating that the given baseline is below the hanging baseline. (Zero if the given baseline is the hanging baseline.)

`alphabeticBaseline` attribute

  The distance from the horizontal line indicated by the `textBaseline` attribute to the alphabetic baseline of the line box, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating that the given baseline is below the alphabetic baseline. (Zero if the given baseline is the alphabetic baseline.)

`ideographicBaseline` attribute

  The distance from the horizontal line indicated by the `textBaseline` attribute to the ideographic baseline of the line box, in CSS pixels; positive numbers indicating that the given baseline is below the ideographic baseline. (Zero if the given baseline is the ideographic baseline.)

Glyphs rendered using `fillText()` and `strokeText()` can spill out of the box given by the font size (the em square size) and the width returned by `measureText()` (the text width). Authors are encouraged to use the bounding box values described above if this is an issue.

A future version of the 2D context API may provide a way to render fragments of documents, rendered using CSS, straight to the canvas. This would be provided in preference to a dedicated way of doing multiline layout.

###### 4.12.4.2.13 Drawing paths to the canvas

The context always has a current default path. There is only one current default path, it is not part of the drawing state. The current default path is a path, as described above.

context . `beginPath`()

  Resets the current default path.

context . `fill`( [ fillRule ] )
context . `fill`(path [, fillRule ] )

  Fills the subpaths of the current default path or the given path with the current fill style, obeying the given fill rule.

context . `stroke`()
context . `stroke`(path)

  Strokes the subpaths of the current default path or the given path with the current stroke style.

context . `drawSystemFocusRing`(element)
context . `drawSystemFocusRing`(path, element)

  If the given element is focused, draws a focus ring around the current default path or the given path, following the platform conventions for focus rings.

shouldDraw = context . `drawCustomFocusRing`(element)
shouldDraw = context . `drawCustomFocusRing`(path, element)

  If the given element is focused, and the user has configured his system to draw focus rings in a particular manner (for example, high contrast focus rings), draws a focus ring around the current default path or the given path and returns false.

  Otherwise, returns true if the given element is focused, and false otherwise. This can thus be used to determine when to draw a focus ring (see the example below).

context . `scrollPathIntoView`()
context . `scrollPathIntoView`(path)

  Scrolls the current default path or the given path into view. This is especially useful on devices with small screens, where the whole canvas might not be visible at once.

context . `clip`( [ fillRule ] )
context . `clip`(path [, fillRule ] )

  Further constrains the clipping region to the current default path or the given path, using the given fill rule to determine what points are in the path.

context . `resetClip`()

  Unconstrains the clipping region.

context . `isPointInPath`(x, y [, fillRule ] )
context . `isPointInPath`(path, x, y [, fillRule ] )

  Returns true if the given point is in the current default path or the given path, using the given fill rule to determine what points are in the path.

context . `isPointInStroke`(x, y)
context . `isPointInStroke`(path, x, y)

  Returns true if the given point would be in the region covered by the stroke of the current default path or the given path, given the current stroke style.

The `beginPath()` method must empty the list of subpaths in the context's current default path so that the it once again has zero subpaths.

Where the following method definitions use the term intended path, it means the `Path2D` argument, if one was provided, or the current default path otherwise.

When the intended path is a `Path2D` object, the coordinates and lines of its subpaths must be transformed according to the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's current transformation matrix when used by these methods (without affecting the `Path2D` object itself). When the intended path is the current default path, it is not affected by the transform. (This is because transformations already affect the current default path when it is constructed, so applying it when it is painted as well would result in a double transformation.)

The `fill()` method must fill all the subpaths of the intended path, using `fillStyle`, and using the fill rule indicated by the fillRule argument. Open subpaths must be implicitly closed when being filled (without affecting the actual subpaths).

The `stroke()` method must trace the intended path, using the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object for the line styles, and then fill the resulting path using the `strokeStyle` attribute, using the non-zero winding rule.

As a result of how the algorithm to trace a path is defined, overlapping parts of the paths in one stroke operation are treated as if their union was what was painted.

The stroke style is affected by the transformation during painting, even if the intended path is the current default path.

Paths, when filled or stroked, must be painted without affecting the current default path or any `Path2D` objects, and must be subject to shadow effects, global alpha, the clipping region, and global composition operators. (The effect of transformations is described above and varies based on which path is being used.)

The `drawSystemFocusRing(element)` method, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If element is not focused or is not a descendant of the element with whose context the method is associated, then abort these steps.

2. If the user has requested the use of particular focus rings (e.g. high-contrast focus rings), or if the element would have a focus ring drawn around it, then draw a focus ring of the appropriate style along the intended path, following platform conventions.

   Some platforms only draw focus rings around elements that have been focused from the keyboard, and not those focused from the mouse. Other platforms simply don't draw focus rings around some elements at all unless relevant accessibility features are enabled. This API is intended to follow these conventions. User agents that implement distinctions based on the manner in which the element was focused are encouraged to classify focus driven by the `focus()` method based on the kind of user interaction event from which the call was triggered (if any).

   The focus ring should not be subject to the shadow effects, the global alpha, the global composition operators, the `fillStyle` attribute, the `strokeStyle` attribute, or any of the `CanvasDrawingStyles` members, but should be subject to the clipping region. (The effect of transformations is described above and varies based on which path is being used.)

3. Optionally, run the appropriate step from the following list:

   If the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's context bitmap mode is fixed

     Inform the user that the focus is at the location given by the intended path. User agents may wait until the next time the event loop reaches its update the rendering step to optionally inform the user.

   Otherwise

     Add instructions to the scratch bitmap's list of pending interface actions that inform the user that the focus is at the location of the bitmap given by the intended path.

The `drawCustomFocusRing(element)` method, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If element is not focused or is not a descendant of the element with whose context the method is associated, then return false and abort these steps.

2. Let result be true.

3. If the user has requested the use of particular focus rings (e.g. high-contrast focus rings), then draw a focus ring of the appropriate style along the intended path, and set result to false.

   The focus ring should not be subject to the shadow effects, the global alpha, the global composition operators, the `fillStyle` attribute, the `strokeStyle` attribute, or any of the `CanvasDrawingStyles` members, but should be subject to the clipping region. (The effect of transformations is described above and varies based on which path is being used.)

4. Optionally, run the appropriate step from the following list:

   If the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's context bitmap mode is fixed

     Inform the user that the focus is at the location given by the intended path. The user agent may wait until the next time the event loop reaches its update the rendering step to optionally inform the user.

   Otherwise

     Add instructions to the scratch bitmap's list of pending interface actions that inform the user that the focus is at the location of the bitmap given by the intended path.

5. Return result.

User agents should not implicitly close open subpaths in the intended path when drawing the focus ring.

This might be a moot point, however. For example, if the focus ring is drawn as an axis-aligned bounding rectangle around the points in the intended path, then whether the subpaths are closed or not has no effect. This specification intentionally does not specify precisely how focus rings are to be drawn: user agents are expected to honor their platform's native conventions.

The `scrollPathIntoView()` method, when invoked, if the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's context bitmap mode is fixed, must run the following steps; and otherwise, must add instructions to the scratch bitmap's list of pending interface actions that run the following steps:

1. Let the specified rectangle be the rectangle of the bounding box of the intended path.

2. Let notional child be a hypothetical element that is a rendered child of the `canvas` element whose dimensions are those of the specified rectangle.

3. Scroll notional child into view with the align to top flag set.

4. Optionally, inform the user that the caret or selection (or both) cover the specified rectangle of the canvas. If the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's context bitmap mode was fixed when the method was invoked, the user agent may wait until the next time the event loop reaches its update the rendering step to optionally inform the user.

"Inform the user", as used in this section, does not imply any persistent state change. It could mean, for instance, calling a system accessibility API to notify assistive technologies such as magnification tools so that the user's magnifier moves to the given area of the canvas. However, it does not associate the path with the element, or provide a region for tactile feedback, etc. To persistently associate a region with information provided to accessibility tools, use the `addHitRegion()` API.

The `clip()` method must create a new clipping region by calculating the intersection of the current clipping region and the area described by the intended path, using the fill rule indicated by the fillRule argument. Open subpaths must be implicitly closed when computing the clipping region, without affecting the actual subpaths. The new clipping region replaces the current clipping region.

When the context is initialized, the clipping region must be set to the largest infinite surface (i.e. by default, no clipping occurs).

The `resetClip()` method must create a new clipping region that is the largest infinite surface. The new clipping region replaces the current clipping region.

The `isPointInPath()` method must return true if the point given by the x and y coordinates passed to the method, when treated as coordinates in the canvas coordinate space unaffected by the current transformation, is inside the intended path as determined by the fill rule indicated by the fillRule argument; and must return false otherwise. Open subpaths must be implicitly closed when computing the area inside the path, without affecting the actual subpaths. Points on the path itself must be considered to be inside the path. If either of the arguments is infinite or NaN, then the method must return false.

The `isPointInStroke()` method must return true if the point given by the x and y coordinates passed to the method, when treated as coordinates in the canvas coordinate space unaffected by the current transformation, is inside the path that results from tracing the intended path, using the non-zero winding rule, and using the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object for the line styles; and must return false otherwise. Points on the resulting path must be considered to be inside the path. If either of the arguments is infinite or NaN, then the method must return false.

This `canvas` element has a couple of checkboxes. The path-related commands are highlighted:

    <canvas height=400 width=750>
     <label><input type=checkbox id=showA> Show As</label>
     <label><input type=checkbox id=showB> Show Bs</label>
     <!-- ... -->
    </canvas>
    <script>
     function drawCheckbox(context, element, x, y, paint) {
       context.save();
       context.font = '10px sans-serif';
       context.textAlign = 'left';
       context.textBaseline = 'middle';
       var metrics = context.measureText(element.labels[0].textContent);
       if (paint) {
         context.beginPath();
         context.strokeStyle = 'black';
         context.rect(x-5, y-5, 10, 10);
         context.stroke();
         context.addHitRegion({ control: element });
         if (element.checked) {
           context.fillStyle = 'black';
           context.fill();
         }
         context.fillText(element.labels[0].textContent, x+5, y);
       }
       context.beginPath();
       context.rect(x-7, y-7, 12 + metrics.width+2, 14);
       if (paint && context.drawCustomFocusRing(element)) {
         context.strokeStyle = 'silver';
         context.stroke();
       }
       context.restore();
     }
     function drawBase() { /* ... */ }
     function drawAs() { /* ... */ }
     function drawBs() { /* ... */ }
     function redraw() {
       var canvas = document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0];
       var context = canvas.getContext('2d');
       context.clearRect(0, 0, canvas.width, canvas.height);
       drawCheckbox(context, document.getElementById('showA'), 20, 40, true);
       drawCheckbox(context, document.getElementById('showB'), 20, 60, true);
       drawBase();
       if (document.getElementById('showA').checked)
         drawAs();
       if (document.getElementById('showB').checked)
         drawBs();
     }
     function processClick(event) {
       var canvas = document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0];
       var context = canvas.getContext('2d');
       var x = event.clientX;
       var y = event.clientY;
       var node = event.target;
       while (node) {
         x -= node.offsetLeft - node.scrollLeft;
         y -= node.offsetTop - node.scrollTop;
         node = node.offsetParent;
       }
       drawCheckbox(context, document.getElementById('showA'), 20, 40, false);
       if (context.isPointInPath(x, y))
         document.getElementById('showA').checked = !(document.getElementById('showA').checked);
       drawCheckbox(context, document.getElementById('showB'), 20, 60, false);
       if (context.isPointInPath(x, y))
         document.getElementById('showB').checked = !(document.getElementById('showB').checked);
       redraw();
     }
     document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0].addEventListener('focus', redraw, true);
     document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0].addEventListener('blur', redraw, true);
     document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0].addEventListener('change', redraw, true);
     document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0].addEventListener('click', processClick, false);
     redraw();
    </script>

###### 4.12.4.2.14 Drawing images

To draw images, the `drawImage` method can be used.

This method can be invoked with three different sets of arguments:

- `drawImage(image, dx, dy)`
- `drawImage(image, dx, dy, dw, dh)`
- `drawImage(image, sx, sy, sw, sh, dx, dy, dw, dh)`

context . `drawImage`(image, dx, dy)
context . `drawImage`(image, dx, dy, dw, dh)
context . `drawImage`(image, sx, sy, sw, sh, dx, dy, dw, dh)

  Draws the given image onto the canvas. The arguments are interpreted as follows:

  If the image isn't yet fully decoded, then nothing is drawn. If the image is a canvas with no data, throws an `InvalidStateError` exception.

When the `drawImage()` method is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Check the usability of the image argument. If this returns aborted, then an exception has been thrown and the method doesn't return anything; abort these steps. If it returns bad, then abort these steps without drawing anything. Otherwise it returns good; continue with these steps.

2. Establish the source and destination rectangles as follows:

   If not specified, the dw and dh arguments must default to the values of sw and sh, interpreted such that one CSS pixel in the image is treated as one unit in the scratch bitmap's coordinate space. If the sx, sy, sw, and sh arguments are omitted, they must default to 0, 0, the image's intrinsic width in image pixels, and the image's intrinsic height in image pixels, respectively. If the image has no intrinsic dimensions, the concrete object size must be used instead, as determined using the CSS "Concrete Object Size Resolution" algorithm, with the specified size having neither a definite width nor height, nor any additional contraints, the object's intrinsic properties being those of the image argument, and the default object size being the size of the scratch bitmap. [CSSIMAGES]

   The source rectangle is the rectangle whose corners are the four points (sx, sy), (sx+sw, sy), (sx+sw, sy+sh), (sx, sy+sh).

   The destination rectangle is the rectangle whose corners are the four points (dx, dy), (dx+dw, dy), (dx+dw, dy+dh), (dx, dy+dh).

   When the source rectangle is outside the source image, the source rectangle must be clipped to the source image and the destination rectangle must be clipped in the same proportion.

   When the destination rectangle is outside the destination image (the scratch bitmap), the pixels that land outside the scratch bitmap are discarded, as if the destination was an infinite canvas whose rendering was clipped to the dimensions of the scratch bitmap.

3. If one of the sw or sh arguments is zero, abort these steps. Nothing is painted.

4. Paint the region of the image argument specified by the source rectangle on the region of the rendering context's scratch bitmap specified by the destination rectangle, after applying the current transformation matrix to the destination rectangle.

   The image data must be processed in the original direction, even if the dimensions given are negative.

   When scaling up, if the `imageSmoothingEnabled` attribute is set to true, the user agent should attempt to apply a smoothing algorithm to the image data when it is scaled. Otherwise, the image must be rendered using nearest-neighbor interpolation.

   This specification does not define the precise algorithm to use when scaling an image down, or when scaling an image up when the `imageSmoothingEnabled` attribute is set to true.

   When a `canvas` or `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object is drawn onto itself, the drawing model requires the source to be copied before the image is drawn, so it is possible to copy parts of a `canvas` or scratch bitmap onto overlapping parts of itself.

   If the original image data is a bitmap image, the value painted at a point in the destination rectangle is computed by filtering the original image data. The user agent may use any filtering algorithm (for example bilinear interpolation or nearest-neighbor). When the filtering algorithm requires a pixel value from outside the original image data, it must instead use the value from the nearest edge pixel. (That is, the filter uses 'clamp-to-edge' behavior.) When the filtering algorithm requires a pixel value from outside the source rectangle but inside the original image data, then the value from the original image data must be used.

   Thus, scaling an image in parts or in whole will have the same effect. This does mean that when sprites coming from a single sprite sheet are to be scaled, adjacent images in the sprite sheet can interfere. This can be avoided by ensuring each sprite in the sheet is surrounded by a border of transparent black, or by copying sprites to be scaled into temporary `canvas` elements and drawing the scaled sprites from there.

   Images are painted without affecting the current path, and are subject to shadow effects, global alpha, the clipping region, and global composition operators.

5. If the image argument is not origin-clean, set the scratch bitmap's origin-clean flag to false.

###### 4.12.4.2.15 Hit regions

A hit region list is a list of hit regions for a bitmap.

Each hit region consists of the following information:

- A set of pixels on the bitmap for which this region is responsible.

- A bounding circumference on the bitmap that surrounds the hit region's set of pixels as they stood when it was created.

- Optionally, a non-empty string representing an ID for distinguishing the region from others.

- Optionally, a reference to another region that acts as the parent for this one.

- A count of regions that have this one as their parent, known as the hit region's child count.

- A cursor specification, in the form of either a CSS cursor value, or the string "`inherit`" meaning that the cursor of the hit region's parent, if any, or of the `canvas` element, if not, is to be used instead.

- Optionally, either a control, or an unbacked region description.

  A control is a reference to an `Element` node, to which, in certain conditions, the user agent will route events, and from which the user agent will determine the state of the hit region for the purposes of accessibility tools. (The control is ignored when it is not a descendant of the `canvas` element.)

  An unbacked region description consists of the following:

  - Optionally, a label.

  - An ARIA role, which, if the unbacked region description also has a label, could be the empty string.

context . `addHitRegion`(options)

  Adds a hit region to the bitmap. The argument is an object with the following members:

  `path` (default null)
    A `Path2D` object that describes the pixels that form part of the region. If this member is not provided or is set to null, the current default path is used instead.
  `fillRule` (default "`nonzero`")
    The fill rule to use when determining which pixels are inside the path.
  `id` (default empty string)
    The ID to use for this region. This is used in `MouseEvent` events on the `canvas` (`event.region`) and as a way to reference this region in later calls to `addHitRegion()`.
  `parentID` (default null)
    The ID of the parent region, for purposes of navigation by accessibility tools and for cursor fallback.
  `cursor` (default "`inherit`")
    The cursor to use when the mouse is over this region. The value "`inherit`" means to use the cursor for the parent region (as specified by the `parentID` member), if any, or to use the `canvas` element's cursor if the region has no parent.
  `control` (default null)
    An element (that is a descendant of the `canvas`) to which events are to be routed, and which accessibility tools are to use as a surrogate for describing and interacting with this region.
  `label` (default null)
    A text label for accessibility tools to use as a description of this region, if there is no control.
  `role` (default null)
    An ARIA role for accessibility tools to use to determine how to represent this region, if there is no control.

  Hit regions can be used for a variety of purposes:

  - With an ID, they can make hit detection easier by having the user agent check which region the mouse is over and include the ID in the mouse events.
  - With a control, they can make routing events to DOM elements automatic, allowing e.g. clicks on a `canvas` to automatically submit a form via a `button` element.
  - With a label, they can make it easier for users to explore a `canvas` without seeing it, e.g. by touch on a mobile device.
  - With a cursor, they can make it easier for different regions of the `canvas` to have different cursors, with the user agent automatically switching between them.
context . `removeHitRegion`(id)

  Removes a hit region (and all its descendants) from the canvas bitmap. The argument is the ID of a region added using `addHitRegion()`.

  The pixels that were covered by this region and its descendants are effectively cleared by this operation, leaving the regions non-interactive. In particular, regions that occupied the same pixels before the removed regions were added, overlapping them, do not resume their previous role.

context . `clearHitRegions`()

  Removes all hit regions from the canvas bitmap.

A hit region A is an ancestor region of a hit region B if B has a parent and its parent is either A or another hit region for which A is an ancestor region.

The region identified by the ID ID in a bitmap bitmap is the value returned by the following algorithm (which can return a hit region or nothing):

1. If ID is null, return nothing and abort these steps.

2. Let list be the hit region list associated with bitmap.

3. If there is a hit region in list whose ID is a case-sensitive match for ID, then return that hit region and abort these steps.

4. Otherwise, return nothing.

The region representing the control control for a bitmap bitmap is the value returned by the following algorithm (which can return a hit region or nothing):

1. Let list be the hit region list associated with bitmap.

2. If there is a hit region in list whose control is control, then return that hit region and abort these steps.

3. Otherwise, return nothing.

The control represented by a region region for a `canvas` element ancestor is the value returned by the following algorithm (which can return an element or nothing):

1. If region has no control, return nothing and abort these steps.

2. Let control be region's control.

3. If control is not a descendant of ancestor, then return nothing and abort these steps.

4. If control is no longer a supported interactive canvas fallback element, then return nothing and abort these steps.

5. Otherwise, return control.

The cursor for a hit region region of a `canvas` element ancestor is the value returned by the following algorithm:

1. Loop: If region has a cursor specification other than "`inherit`", then return that hit region's cursor specification and abort these steps.

2. If region has a parent, then let region be that hit region's parent, and return to the step labeled loop.

3. Otherwise, return the used value of the 'cursor' property for the `canvas` element, if any; if there isn't one, return 'auto'. [CSSUI]

The region for a pixel pixel on a bitmap bitmap is the value returned by the following algorithm (which can return a hit region or nothing):

1. Let list be the hit region list associated with bitmap.

2. If there is a hit region in list whose set of pixels contains pixel, then return that hit region and abort these steps.

3. Otherwise, return nothing.

To clear regions that cover the pixels pixels on a bitmap bitmap, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let list be the hit region list associated with bitmap.

2. Remove all pixels in pixels from the set of pixels of each hit region in list.

3. Garbage-collect the regions of bitmap.

To garbage-collect the regions of a bitmap bitmap, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let list be the hit region list associated with bitmap.

2. Loop: Let victim be the first hit region in list to have an empty set of pixels and a zero child count, if any. If there is no such hit region, abort these steps.

3. If victim has a parent, then decrement that hit region's child count by one.

4. Remove victim from list.

5. Jump back to the step labeled loop.

Adding a new region and calling `clearRect()` are the two ways this clearing algorithm can be invoked. The hit region list itself is also reset when the rendering context is reset, e.g. when a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object is bound to or unbound from a `canvas`, or when the dimensions of the bitmap are changed.

An element is a supported interactive canvas fallback element if it is one of the following:

- an `a` element that represents a hyperlink and that does not have any `img` descendants

- a `button` element

- an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in one of the Checkbox or Radio Button states

- an `input` element that is a button but its `type` attribute is not in the Image Button state

- a `select` element with a `multiple` attribute or a display size greater than 1

- an `option` element that is in a list of options of a `select` element with a `multiple` attribute or a display size greater than 1

- a sorting interface `th` element

- an element that would not be interactive content except for having the `tabindex` attribute specified

- a non-interactive `table`, `caption`, `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `tr`, `td`, or `th` element

When the `addHitRegion()` method is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let arguments be the dictionary object provided as the method's argument.

2. If the arguments object's `path` member is not null, let source path be the `path` member's value. Otherwise, let it be the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's current default path.

3. Transform all the coordinates and lines in source path by the current transform matrix, if the arguments object's `path` member is not null.

4. Let specified pixels be the pixels contained in source path, using the fill rule indicated by the `fillRule` member.

5. Remove from specified pixels any pixels not contained within the clipping region.

6. If the arguments object's `id` member is the empty string, let it be null instead.

7. If the arguments object's `id` member is not null, then let previous region for this ID be the region identified by the ID given by the `id` member's value in this scratch bitmap, if any. If the `id` member is null or no such region currently exists, let previous region for this ID be null.

8. If the arguments object's `parentID` member is the empty string, let it be null instead.

9. If the arguments object's `parentID` member is not null, then let parent region be the region identified by the ID given by the `parentID` member's value in the scratch bitmap, if any. If the `parentID` member is null or no such region currently exists, let parent region be null.

10. If the arguments object's `label` member is the empty string, let it be null instead.

11. If any of the following conditions are met, throw a `NotSupportedError` exception and abort these steps.

    - The arguments object's `control` and `label` members are both non-null.

    - The arguments object's `control` and `role` members are both non-null.

    - The arguments object's `role` member's value is the empty string, and the `label` member's value is either null or the empty string.

    - The specified pixels has no pixels.

    - The arguments object's `control` member is neither null nor a supported interactive canvas fallback element.

    - The parent region is not null but has a control.

    - The previous region for this ID is the same hit region as the parent region.

    - The previous region for this ID is an ancestor region of the parent region.

12. If the `parentID` member is not null but parent region is null, then throw a `NotFoundError` exception and abort these steps.

13. If any of the following conditions are met, throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.

    - The arguments object's `cursor` member is not null but is neither an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`inherit`", nor a valid CSS 'cursor' property value. [CSSUI]
    - The arguments object's `role` member is not null but its value is not an ordered set of unique space-separated tokens whose tokens are all case-sensitive matches for names of non-abstract WAI-ARIA roles. [ARIA]

14. Let region be a newly created hit region, with its information configured as follows:

    Hit region's set of pixels

      The specified pixels

    Hit region's bounding circumference

      A user-agent-defined shape that wraps the pixels contained in source path. (In the simplest case, this can just be the bounding rectangle; this specification allows it to be any shape in order to allow other interfaces.)

    Hit region's ID

      If the arguments object's `id` member is not null: the value of the `id` member. Otherwise, region has no id.

    Hit region's parent

      If parent region is not null: parent region. Otherwise, region has no parent.

    Hit region's child count

      Initially zero.

    Hit region's cursor specification

      If the arguments object's `cursor` member is not null: the value of the `cursor` member. Otherwise, the string "`inherit`".

    Hit region's control

      If the arguments object's `control` member is not null: the value of the `control` member. Otherwise, region has no control.

    Hit region's label

      If the arguments object's `label` member is not null: the value of the `label` member. Otherwise, region has no label.

    Hit region's ARIA role

      If the arguments object's `role` member is not null: the value of the `role` member (which might be the empty string). Otherwise, if the arguments object's `label` member is not null: the empty string. Otherwise, region has no ARIA role.

15. If the arguments object's `cursor` member is not null, then act as if a CSS rule for the `canvas` element setting its 'cursor' property had been seen, whose value was the hit region's cursor specification.

    For example, if the user agent prefetches cursor values, this would cause that to happen in response to an appropriately-formed `addHitRegion()` call.

16. If there is a previous region with this ID, remove it, and all hit regions for which it is an ancestor region, from the scratch bitmap's hit region list; then, if it had a parent region, decrement that hit region's child count by one.

17. If there is a parent region, increment its hit region's child count by one.

18. Clear regions that cover the pixels in region's set of pixels on this scratch bitmap.

19. Add region to the scratch bitmap's element's hit region list.

When the `removeHitRegion()` method is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let region be the region identified by the ID given by the method's argument in the rendering context's scratch bitmap. If no such region currently exists, abort these steps.

   If the method's argument is the empty string, then no region will match.

2. Remove region, and all hit regions for which it is an ancestor region, from the rendering context's scratch bitmap's hit region list; then, if it had a parent region, decrement that hit region's child count by one.

3. Garbage-collect the regions of the rendering context's scratch bitmap.

When the `clearHitRegions()` method is invoked, the user agent must remove all the hit regions from the rendering context's scratch bitmap's hit region list.

The `MouseEvent` interface is extended to support hit regions:

    partial interface MouseEvent {
      readonly attribute DOMString? region;
    };

    partial dictionary MouseEventInit {
      DOMString? region;
    };

event . `region`

  If the mouse was over a hit region, then this returns the hit region's ID, if it has one.

  Otherwise, returns null.

The `region` attribute on `MouseEvent` objects must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the hit region's ID if the mouse was over a hit region when the event was fired.

When a `MouseEvent` is to be fired at a `canvas` element by the user agent in response to a pointing device action other than a click (e.g. a `mousedown` event or a `mousemove` event), the user agent must run the canvas `MouseEvent` rerouting steps immediately prior to dispatching the event. This does not affect default actions (so for instance, if the event gets rerouted to an element that has a default action for `mousemove` events, this default action doesn't trigger).

Actual clicks are handled by the run authentic click activation steps, which also invoke these steps.

The canvas `MouseEvent` rerouting steps are as follows. If these steps say to act as normal, that means that the event must be fired as it would have had these requirements not been applied.

1. If the pointing device is not indicating a pixel on the `canvas`, then act as normal and abort these steps.

2. If the `canvas` element has no hit region list, then act as normal and abort these steps.

3. Let pixel be the pixel indicated by the pointing device.

4. Let region be the hit region that is the region for the pixel pixel on this `canvas` element's bitmap, if any.

5. If there is no region, then act as normal and abort these steps.

6. Let id be the region's ID, if any.

7. If there is an id, then initialise the event object's `region` attribute to id.

8. Let control be the control represented by region for this `canvas` element, if any.

9. If there is a control, then target the event object at control instead of the `canvas` element.

10. Continue dispatching the event, but with the updated event object and target as given in the above steps.

The `Touch` interface is extended to support hit regions also: [TOUCH]

    partial interface Touch {
      readonly attribute DOMString? region;
    };

touch . `region`

  If the touch point was over a hit region when it was first placed on the surface, then this returns the hit region's ID, if it has one.

  Otherwise, returns null.

The `region` attribute on a `Touch` object representing a touch point T must return the value obtained by running the following algorithm when T was first placed on the surface: [TOUCH]

1. If the touch point is not on a pixel on the `canvas`, then return null and abort these steps.

2. If the `canvas` element has no hit region list, then return null and abort these steps.

3. Let pixel be the pixel that the touch point is on.

4. Let region be the hit region that is the region for the pixel pixel on this `canvas` element's bitmap, if any.

5. If there is no region, then return null and abort these steps.

6. Let id be the region's ID, if any, or else null.

7. Return id.

When a user's pointing device cursor is positioned over a `canvas` element, user agents should render the pointing device cursor according to the cursor specification described by the cursor for the hit region that is the region for the pixel that the pointing device designates on the `canvas` element's bitmap.

User agents are encouraged to make use of the information present in a `canvas` element's hit region list to improve the accessibility of `canvas` elements.

Each hit region should be handled in a fashion equivalent to a node in a virtual DOM tree rooted at the `canvas` element. The hierarchy of this virtual DOM tree must match the hierarchy of the hit regions, as described by the parent of each region. Regions without a parent must be treated as children of the `canvas` element for the purpose of this virtual DOM tree. For each node in such a DOM tree, the hit region's bounding circumference gives the region of the screen to use when representing the node (if appropriate).

The semantics of a hit region for the purposes of this virtual DOM tree are those of the the control represented by the region, if it has one, or else of a non-interactive element whose ARIA role, if any, is that given by the hit region's ARIA role, and whose textual representation, if any, is given by the hit region's label.

For the purposes of accessibility tools, when an element C is a descendant of a `canvas` element and there is a region representing the control C for that `canvas` element's bitmap, then the element's position relative to the document should be presented as if it was that region in the `canvas` element's virtual DOM tree.

The semantics of a hit region for the purposes of this virtual DOM tree are those of the the control represented by the region, if it has one, or else of a non-interactive element whose ARIA role, if any, is that given by the hit region's ARIA role, and whose textual representation, if any, is given by the hit region's label.

Thus, for instance, a user agent on a touch-screen device could provide haptic feedback when the user croses over a hit region's bounding circumference, and then read the hit region's label to the user. Similarly, a desktop user agent with a virtual accessibility focus separate from the keyboard input focus could allow the user to navigate through the hit regions, using the virtual DOM tree described above to enable hierarchical navigation. When an interactive control inside the `canvas` element gains focus, if the control has a corresponding region, then that hit region's bounding circumference could be used to determine what area of the display to magnify.

###### 4.12.4.2.16 Pixel manipulation

imagedata = new `ImageData`(sw, sh)
imagedata = context . `createImageData`(sw, sh)

  Returns an `ImageData` object with the given dimensions. All the pixels in the returned object are transparent black.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if either of the width or height arguments are zero.

imagedata = context . `createImageData`(imagedata)

  Returns an `ImageData` object with the same dimensions as the argument. All the pixels in the returned object are transparent black.

imagedata = new `ImageData`(data, sw [, sh ] )

  Returns an `ImageData` object using the data provided in the `Uint8ClampedArray` argument, interpreted using the given dimensions.

  As each pixel in the data is represented by four numbers, the length of the data needs to be a multiple of four times the given width. If the height is provided as well, then the length needs to be exactly the width times the height times 4.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the given data and dimensions can't be interpreted consistently, or if either dimension is zero.

imagedata = context . `getImageData`(sx, sy, sw, sh)

  Returns an `ImageData` object containing the image data for the given rectangle of the bitmap.

  Throws an `IndexSizeError` exception if the either of the width or height arguments are zero.

imagedata . `width`
imagedata . `height`

  Returns the actual dimensions of the data in the `ImageData` object, in pixels.

imagedata . `data`

  Returns the one-dimensional array containing the data in RGBA order, as integers in the range 0 to 255.

context . `putImageData`(imagedata, dx, dy [, dirtyX, dirtyY, dirtyWidth, dirtyHeight ] )

  Paints the data from the given `ImageData` object onto the bitmap. If a dirty rectangle is provided, only the pixels from that rectangle are painted.

  The `globalAlpha` and `globalCompositeOperation` attributes, as well as the shadow attributes, are ignored for the purposes of this method call; pixels in the canvas are replaced wholesale, with no composition, alpha blending, no shadows, etc.

  Throws a `NotSupportedError` exception if any of the arguments are not finite.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the imagedata object's data has been neutered.

The `ImageData()` constructors and the `createImageData()` methods are used to instantiate new `ImageData` objects.

When the `ImageData()` constructor is invoked with two numeric arguments sw and sh, it must return a new `ImageData` object representing a transparent black rectangle with a width equal to sw and a height equal to sh, if both sw and sh are non-zero. If one or both of sw and sh are zero, then the constructor must throw an `IndexSizeError` exception instead.

When the `ImageData()` constructor is invoked with its first argument being an `Uint8ClampedArray` source and its second and (optionally) third argument(s) being numeric arguments sw and sh, it must run the following steps:

1. Let length be the number of bytes in source.

2. If length is not a non-zero integral multiple of four, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

3. Let length be length divided by four.

4. If length is not an integral multiple of sw, throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

   At this step, the length is guaranteed to be greater than zero (otherwise the second step above would have aborted the steps), so if sw is zero, this step will throw the exception and abort these steps.

5. Let height be length divided by sw.

6. If the sh argument was not omitted, and its value is not equal to height, then throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

7. Return a new `ImageData` object whose width is sw, whose height is height, and whose data is source.

   The resulting object's data is not a copy of source, it's the actual `Uint8ClampedArray` object passed as the first argument to the constructor.

When the `createImageData()` method is invoked with two numeric arguments sw and sh, it must return a new `ImageData` object representing a transparent black rectangle with a width equal to the absolute magnitude of sw and a height equal to the absolute magnitude of sh, if both sw and sh are non-zero. If one or both of sw and sh are zero, then the constructor must throw an `IndexSizeError` exception instead.

When the `createImageData()` method is invoked with a single imagedata argument, it must return a new `ImageData` object representing a transparent black rectangle with the same dimensions as the `ImageData` object passed as the argument.

The `getImageData(sx, sy, sw, sh)` method must, if either the sw or sh arguments are zero, throw an `IndexSizeError` exception; otherwise, if the scratch bitmap's origin-clean flag is set to false, it must throw a `SecurityError` exception; otherwise, it must return an `ImageData` object with width sw and height sh representing the scratch bitmap for the area of that bitmap denoted by the rectangle whose corners are the four points (sx, sy), (sx+sw, sy), (sx+sw, sy+sh), (sx, sy+sh), in the bitmap's coordinate space units. Pixels outside the scratch bitmap must be returned as transparent black. Pixels must be returned as non-premultiplied alpha values.

New `ImageData` objects must be initialised so that their `width` attribute is set to the number of pixels per row in the image data, their `height` attribute is set to the number of rows in the image data, and their `data` attribute, except where an existing array is provided, is initialised to a new `Uint8ClampedArray` object. The `Uint8ClampedArray` object must use a new Canvas Pixel `ArrayBuffer` for its storage, and must have a zero start offset and a length equal to the length of its storage, in bytes. The Canvas Pixel `ArrayBuffer` must contain the image data. At least one pixel's worth of image data must be returned. [ECMA262]

A Canvas Pixel `ArrayBuffer` is an `ArrayBuffer` whose data is represented in left-to-right order, row by row top to bottom, starting with the top left, with each pixel's red, green, blue, and alpha components being given in that order for each pixel. Each component of each pixel represented in this array must be in the range 0..255, representing the 8 bit value for that component. The components must be assigned consecutive indices starting with 0 for the top left pixel's red component. [ECMA262]

The `putImageData()` method writes data from `ImageData` structures back to the rendering context's scratch bitmap. Its arguments are: imagedata, dx, dy, dirtyX, dirtyY, dirtyWidth, and dirtyHeight.

When the last four arguments to this method are omitted, they must be assumed to have the values 0, 0, the `width` member of the imagedata structure, and the `height` member of the imagedata structure, respectively.

When invoked, the method must act as follows:

1. If the imagedata argument's `data` attribute has been neutered, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If dirtyWidth is negative, let dirtyX be dirtyX+dirtyWidth, and let dirtyWidth be equal to the absolute magnitude of dirtyWidth.

   If dirtyHeight is negative, let dirtyY be dirtyY+dirtyHeight, and let dirtyHeight be equal to the absolute magnitude of dirtyHeight.

3. If dirtyX is negative, let dirtyWidth be dirtyWidth+dirtyX, and let dirtyX be zero.

   If dirtyY is negative, let dirtyHeight be dirtyHeight+dirtyY, and let dirtyY be zero.

4. If dirtyX+dirtyWidth is greater than the `width` attribute of the imagedata argument, let dirtyWidth be the value of that `width` attribute, minus the value of dirtyX.

   If dirtyY+dirtyHeight is greater than the `height` attribute of the imagedata argument, let dirtyHeight be the value of that `height` attribute, minus the value of dirtyY.

5. If, after those changes, either dirtyWidth or dirtyHeight is negative or zero, stop these steps without affecting any bitmaps.

6. For all integer values of x and y where dirtyX ≤ x < dirtyX+dirtyWidth and dirtyY ≤ y < dirtyY+dirtyHeight, copy the four channels of the pixel with coordinate (x, y) in the imagedata data structure's Canvas Pixel `ArrayBuffer` to the pixel with coordinate (dx+x, dy+y) in the rendering context's scratch bitmap.

The handling of pixel rounding when the specified coordinates are not integers is not defined by this specification, except that the following must result in no visible changes to the rendering:

    context.putImageData(context.getImageData(x, y, w, h), p, q);

...for any value of x, y, w, and h and where p is the smaller of x and the sum of x and w, and q is the smaller of y and the sum of y and h; and except that the following two calls:

    context.createImageData(w, h);
    context.getImageData(0, 0, w, h);

...must return `ImageData` objects with the same dimensions as each other, for any value of w and h. In other words, while user agents may round the arguments of these methods, any rounding performed must be performed consistently for all of the methods described in this section. (The constructors only work with integer values.)

Due to the lossy nature of converting to and from premultiplied alpha colour values, pixels that have just been set using `putImageData()` might be returned to an equivalent `getImageData()` as different values.

The current path, transformation matrix, shadow attributes, global alpha, the clipping region, and global composition operator must not affect the methods described in this section.

In the following example, the script generates an `ImageData` object so that it can draw onto it.

    // canvas is a reference to a <canvas> element
    var context = canvas.getContext('2d');

    // create a blank slate
    var data = context.createImageData(canvas.width, canvas.height);

    // create some plasma
    FillPlasma(data, 'green'); // green plasma

    // add a cloud to the plasma
    AddCloud(data, data.width/2, data.height/2); // put a cloud in the middle

    // paint the plasma+cloud on the canvas
    context.putImageData(data, 0, 0);

    // support methods
    function FillPlasma(data, color) { ... }
    function AddCloud(data, x, y) { ... }

Here is an example of using `getImageData()` and `putImageData()` to implement an edge detection filter.

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Edge detection demo</title>
      <script>
       var image = new Image();
       function init() {
         image.onload = demo;
         image.src = "image.jpeg";
       }
       function demo() {
         var canvas = document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0];
         var context = canvas.getContext('2d');

         // draw the image onto the canvas
         context.drawImage(image, 0, 0);

         // get the image data to manipulate
         var input = context.getImageData(0, 0, canvas.width, canvas.height);

         // get an empty slate to put the data into
         var output = context.createImageData(canvas.width, canvas.height);

         // alias some variables for convenience
         // notice that we are using input.width and input.height here
         // as they might not be the same as canvas.width and canvas.height
         // (in particular, they might be different on high-res displays)
         var w = input.width, h = input.height;
         var inputData = input.data;
         var outputData = output.data;

         // edge detection
         for (var y = 1; y < h-1; y += 1) {
           for (var x = 1; x < w-1; x += 1) {
             for (var c = 0; c < 3; c += 1) {
               var i = (y*w + x)*4 + c;
               outputData[i] = 127 + -inputData[i - w*4 - 4] -   inputData[i - w*4] - inputData[i - w*4 + 4] +
                                     -inputData[i - 4]       + 8*inputData[i]       - inputData[i + 4] +
                                     -inputData[i + w*4 - 4] -   inputData[i + w*4] - inputData[i + w*4 + 4];
             }
             outputData[(y*w + x)*4 + 3] = 255; // alpha
           }
         }

         // put the image data back after manipulation
         context.putImageData(output, 0, 0);
       }
      </script>
     </head>
     <body onload="init()">
      <canvas></canvas>
     </body>
    </html>

###### 4.12.4.2.17 Compositing

context . `globalAlpha` [ = value ]

  Returns the current alpha value applied to rendering operations.

  Can be set, to change the alpha value. Values outside of the range 0.0 .. 1.0 are ignored.

context . `globalCompositeOperation` [ = value ]

  Returns the current composition operation, from the values defined in the Compositing and Blending specification. [COMPOSITE].

  Can be set, to change the composition operation. Unknown values are ignored.

All drawing operations are affected by the global compositing attributes, `globalAlpha` and `globalCompositeOperation`.

The `globalAlpha` attribute gives an alpha value that is applied to shapes and images before they are composited onto the scratch bitmap. The value must be in the range from 0.0 (fully transparent) to 1.0 (no additional transparency). If an attempt is made to set the attribute to a value outside this range, including Infinity and Not-a-Number (NaN) values, the attribute must retain its previous value. When the context is created, the `globalAlpha` attribute must initially have the value 1.0.

The `globalCompositeOperation` attribute sets the current composition operator, which controls how shapes and images are drawn onto the scratch bitmap, once they have had `globalAlpha` and the current transformation matrix applied. The possible values are those defined in the Compositing and Blending specification, and include the values `source-over` and `copy`. [COMPOSITE]

These values are all case-sensitive — they must be used exactly as defined. User agents must not recognise values that are not a case-sensitive match for one of the values given in the Compositing and Blending specification. [COMPOSITE]

On setting, if the user agent does not recognise the specified value, it must be ignored, leaving the value of `globalCompositeOperation` unaffected. Otherwise, the attribute must be set to the given new value.

When the context is created, the `globalCompositeOperation` attribute must initially have the value `source-over`.

###### 4.12.4.2.18 Image smoothing

context . `imageSmoothingEnabled` [ = value ]

  Returns whether pattern fills and the `drawImage()` method will attempt to smooth images if their pixels don't line up exactly with the display, when scaling images up.

  Can be set, to change whether images are smoothed (true) or not (false).

The `imageSmoothingEnabled` attribute, on getting, must return the last value it was set to. On setting, it must be set to the new value. When the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object is created, the attribute must be set to true.

###### 4.12.4.2.19 Shadows

All drawing operations are affected by the four global shadow attributes.

context . `shadowColor` [ = value ]

  Returns the current shadow colour.

  Can be set, to change the shadow colour. Values that cannot be parsed as CSS colours are ignored.

context . `shadowOffsetX` [ = value ]
context . `shadowOffsetY` [ = value ]

  Returns the current shadow offset.

  Can be set, to change the shadow offset. Values that are not finite numbers are ignored.

context . `shadowBlur` [ = value ]

  Returns the current level of blur applied to shadows.

  Can be set, to change the blur level. Values that are not finite numbers greater than or equal to zero are ignored.

The `shadowColor` attribute sets the colour of the shadow.

When the context is created, the `shadowColor` attribute initially must be fully-transparent black.

On getting, the serialisation of the colour must be returned.

On setting, the new value must be parsed as a CSS <color> value and the colour assigned. If the value cannot be parsed as a CSS <color> value then it must be ignored, and the attribute must retain its previous value. [CSSCOLOR]

The `shadowOffsetX` and `shadowOffsetY` attributes specify the distance that the shadow will be offset in the positive horizontal and positive vertical distance respectively. Their values are in coordinate space units. They are not affected by the current transformation matrix.

When the context is created, the shadow offset attributes must initially have the value 0.

On getting, they must return their current value. On setting, the attribute being set must be set to the new value, except if the value is infinite or NaN, in which case the new value must be ignored.

The `shadowBlur` attribute specifies the level of the blurring effect. (The units do not map to coordinate space units, and are not affected by the current transformation matrix.)

When the context is created, the `shadowBlur` attribute must initially have the value 0.

On getting, the attribute must return its current value. On setting the attribute must be set to the new value, except if the value is negative, infinite or NaN, in which case the new value must be ignored.

Shadows are only drawn if the opacity component of the alpha component of the colour of `shadowColor` is non-zero and either the `shadowBlur` is non-zero, or the `shadowOffsetX` is non-zero, or the `shadowOffsetY` is non-zero.

It is likely that this will change: browser vendors have indicated an interest in changing the processing model for shadows such that they only draw when the composition operator is "source-over" (the default). Read more...

When shadows are drawn, they must be rendered as follows:

1. Let A be an infinite transparent black bitmap on which the source image for which a shadow is being created has been rendered.

2. Let B be an infinite transparent black bitmap, with a coordinate space and an origin identical to A.

3. Copy the alpha channel of A to B, offset by `shadowOffsetX` in the positive x direction, and `shadowOffsetY` in the positive y direction.

4. If `shadowBlur` is greater than 0:

   1. Let σ be half the value of `shadowBlur`.

   2. Perform a 2D Gaussian Blur on B, using σ as the standard deviation.

   User agents may limit values of σ to an implementation-specific maximum value to avoid exceeding hardware limitations during the Gaussian blur operation.

5. Set the red, green, and blue components of every pixel in B to the red, green, and blue components (respectively) of the colour of `shadowColor`.

6. Multiply the alpha component of every pixel in B by the alpha component of the colour of `shadowColor`.

7. The shadow is in the bitmap B, and is rendered as part of the drawing model described below.

If the current composition operation is `copy`, shadows effectively won't render (since the shape will overwrite the shadow).

###### 4.12.4.2.20 Drawing model

When a shape or image is painted, user agents must follow these steps, in the order given (or act as if they do):

1. Render the shape or image onto an infinite transparent black bitmap, creating image A, as described in the previous sections. For shapes, the current fill, stroke, and line styles must be honored, and the stroke must itself also be subjected to the current transformation matrix.

2. When shadows are drawn, render the shadow from image A, using the current shadow styles, creating image B.

3. When shadows are drawn, multiply the alpha component of every pixel in B by `globalAlpha`.

4. When shadows are drawn, composite B within the clipping region over the current scratch bitmap using the current composition operator.

5. Multiply the alpha component of every pixel in A by `globalAlpha`.

6. Composite A within the clipping region over the current scratch bitmap using the current composition operator.

When compositing onto the scratch bitmap, pixels that would fall outside of the scratch bitmap must be discarded.

###### 4.12.4.2.21 Best practices

This section is non-normative.

When a canvas is interactive, authors should include focusable elements in the element's fallback content corresponding to each focusable part of the canvas, as in the example above.

To expose text and interactive content on a `canvas` to users of accessibility tools, authors should use the `addHitRegion()` API. When rendering focus rings, to ensure that focus rings have the appearance of native focus rings, authors should use the `drawSystemFocusRing()` method, passing it the element for which a ring is being drawn. This method only draws the focus ring if the element is focused, so that it can simply be called whenever drawing the element, without checking whether the element is focused or not first.

Authors should avoid implementing text editing controls using the `canvas` element. Doing so has a large number of disadvantages:

- Mouse placement of the caret has to be reimplemented.
- Keyboard movement of the caret has to be reimplemented (possibly across lines, for multiline text input).
- Scrolling of the text field has to be implemented (horizontally for long lines, vertically for multiline input).
- Native features such as copy-and-paste have to be reimplemented.
- Native features such as spell-checking have to be reimplemented.
- Native features such as drag-and-drop have to be reimplemented.
- Native features such as page-wide text search have to be reimplemented.
- Native features specific to the user, for example custom text services, have to be reimplemented. This is close to impossible since each user might have different services installed, and there is an unbounded set of possible such services.
- Bidirectional text editing has to be reimplemented.
- For multiline text editing, line wrapping has to be implemented for all relevant languages.
- Text selection has to be reimplemented.
- Dragging of bidirectional text selections has to be reimplemented.
- Platform-native keyboard shortcuts have to be reimplemented.
- Platform-native input method editors (IMEs) have to be reimplemented.
- Undo and redo functionality has to be reimplemented.
- Accessibility features such as magnification following the caret or selection have to be reimplemented.

This is a huge amount of work, and authors are most strongly encouraged to avoid doing any of it by instead using the `input` element, the `textarea` element, or the `contenteditable` attribute.

###### 4.12.4.2.22 Examples

This section is non-normative.

Here is an example of a script that uses canvas to draw pretty glowing lines.

    <canvas width="800" height="450"></canvas>
    <script>

     var context = document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0].getContext('2d');

     var lastX = context.canvas.width * Math.random();
     var lastY = context.canvas.height * Math.random();
     var hue = 0;
     function line() {
       context.save();
       context.translate(context.canvas.width/2, context.canvas.height/2);
       context.scale(0.9, 0.9);
       context.translate(-context.canvas.width/2, -context.canvas.height/2);
       context.beginPath();
       context.lineWidth = 5 + Math.random() * 10;
       context.moveTo(lastX, lastY);
       lastX = context.canvas.width * Math.random();
       lastY = context.canvas.height * Math.random();
       context.bezierCurveTo(context.canvas.width * Math.random(),
                             context.canvas.height * Math.random(),
                             context.canvas.width * Math.random(),
                             context.canvas.height * Math.random(),
                             lastX, lastY);

       hue = hue + 10 * Math.random();
       context.strokeStyle = 'hsl(' + hue + ', 50%, 50%)';
       context.shadowColor = 'white';
       context.shadowBlur = 10;
       context.stroke();
       context.restore();
     }
     setInterval(line, 50);

     function blank() {
       context.fillStyle = 'rgba(0,0,0,0.1)';
       context.fillRect(0, 0, context.canvas.width, context.canvas.height);
     }
     setInterval(blank, 40);

    </script>

The 2D rendering context for `canvas` is often used for sprite-based games. The following example demonstrates this:

Here is the source for this example:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Blue Robot Demo</title>
    <base href="http://www.whatwg.org/demos/canvas/blue-robot/">
    <style>
      html { overflow: hidden; min-height: 200px; min-width: 380px; }
      body { height: 200px; position: relative; margin: 8px; }
      .buttons { position: absolute; bottom: 0px; left: 0px; margin: 4px; }
    </style>
    <canvas width="380" height="200"></canvas>
    <script>
     var Landscape = function (context, width, height) {
       this.offset = 0;
       this.width = width;
       this.advance = function (dx) {
         this.offset += dx;
       };
       this.horizon = height * 0.7;
       // This creates the sky gradient (from a darker blue to white at the bottom)
       this.sky = context.createLinearGradient(0, 0, 0, this.horizon);
       this.sky.addColorStop(0.0, 'rgb(55,121,179)');
       this.sky.addColorStop(0.7, 'rgb(121,194,245)');
       this.sky.addColorStop(1.0, 'rgb(164,200,214)');
       // this creates the grass gradient (from a darker green to a lighter green)
       this.earth = context.createLinearGradient(0, this.horizon, 0, height);
       this.earth.addColorStop(0.0, 'rgb(81,140,20)');
       this.earth.addColorStop(1.0, 'rgb(123,177,57)');
       this.paintBackground = function (context, width, height) {
         // first, paint the sky and grass rectangles
         context.fillStyle = this.sky;
         context.fillRect(0, 0, width, this.horizon);
         context.fillStyle = this.earth;
         context.fillRect(0, this.horizon, width, height-this.horizon);
         // then, draw the cloudy banner
         // we make it cloudy by having the draw text off the top of the
         // canvas, and just having the blurred shadow shown on the canvas
         context.save();
         context.translate(width-((this.offset+(this.width*3.2)) % (this.width*4.0))+0, 0);
         context.shadowColor = 'white';
         context.shadowOffsetY = 30+this.horizon/3; // offset down on canvas
         context.shadowBlur = '5';
         context.fillStyle = 'white';
         context.textAlign = 'left';
         context.textBaseline = 'top';
         context.font = '20px sans-serif';
         context.fillText('WHATWG ROCKS', 10, -30); // text up above canvas
         context.restore();
         // then, draw the background tree
         context.save();
         context.translate(width-((this.offset+(this.width*0.2)) % (this.width*1.5))+30, 0);
         context.beginPath();
         context.fillStyle = 'rgb(143,89,2)';
         context.lineStyle = 'rgb(10,10,10)';
         context.lineWidth = 2;
         context.rect(0, this.horizon+5, 10, -50); // trunk
         context.fill();
         context.stroke();
         context.beginPath();
         context.fillStyle = 'rgb(78,154,6)';
         context.arc(5, this.horizon-60, 30, 0, Math.PI*2); // leaves
         context.fill();
         context.stroke();
         context.restore();
       };
       this.paintForeground = function (context, width, height) {
         // draw the box that goes in front
         context.save();
         context.translate(width-((this.offset+(this.width*0.7)) % (this.width*1.1))+0, 0);
         context.beginPath();
         context.rect(0, this.horizon - 5, 25, 25);
         context.fillStyle = 'rgb(220,154,94)';
         context.lineStyle = 'rgb(10,10,10)';
         context.lineWidth = 2;
         context.fill();
         context.stroke();
         context.restore();
       };
     };
    </script>
    <script>
     var BlueRobot = function () {
       this.sprites = new Image();
       this.sprites.src = 'blue-robot.png'; // this sprite sheet has 8 cells
       this.targetMode = 'idle';
       this.walk = function () {
         this.targetMode = 'walk';
       };
       this.stop = function () {
         this.targetMode = 'idle';
       };
       this.frameIndex = {
         'idle': [0], // first cell is the idle frame
         'walk': [1,2,3,4,5,6], // the walking animation is cells 1-6
         'stop': [7], // last cell is the stopping animation
       };
       this.mode = 'idle';
       this.frame = 0; // index into frameIndex
       this.tick = function () {
         // this advances the frame and the robot
         // the return value is how many pixels the robot has moved
         this.frame += 1;
         if (this.frame >= this.frameIndex[this.mode].length) {
           // we've reached the end of this animation cycle
           this.frame = 0;
           if (this.mode != this.targetMode) {
             // switch to next cycle
             if (this.mode == 'walk') {
               // we need to stop walking before we decide what to do next
               this.mode = 'stop';
             } else if (this.mode == 'stop') {
               if (this.targetMode == 'walk')
                 this.mode = 'walk';
               else
                 this.mode = 'idle';
             } else if (this.mode == 'idle') {
               if (this.targetMode == 'walk')
                 this.mode = 'walk';
             }
           }
         }
         if (this.mode == 'walk')
           return 8;
         return 0;
       },
       this.paint = function (context, x, y) {
         if (!this.sprites.complete) return;
         // draw the right frame out of the sprite sheet onto the canvas
         // we assume each frame is as high as the sprite sheet
         // the x,y coordinates give the position of the bottom center of the sprite
         context.drawImage(this.sprites,
                           this.frameIndex[this.mode][this.frame] * this.sprites.height, 0, this.sprites.height, this.sprites.height,
                           x-this.sprites.height/2, y-this.sprites.height, this.sprites.height, this.sprites.height);
       };
     };
    </script>
    <script>
     var canvas = document.getElementsByTagName('canvas')[0];
     var context = canvas.getContext('2d');
     var landscape = new Landscape(context, canvas.width, canvas.height);
     var blueRobot = new BlueRobot();
     // paint when the browser wants us to, using requestAnimationFrame()
     function paint() {
       context.clearRect(0, 0, canvas.width, canvas.height);
       landscape.paintBackground(context, canvas.width, canvas.height);
       blueRobot.paint(context, canvas.width/2, landscape.horizon*1.1);
       landscape.paintForeground(context, canvas.width, canvas.height);
       requestAnimationFrame(paint);
     }
     paint();
     // but tick every 150ms, so that we don't slow down when we don't paint
     setInterval(function () {
       var dx = blueRobot.tick();
       landscape.advance(dx);
     }, 100);
    </script>
    <p class="buttons">
     <input type=button value="Walk" onclick="blueRobot.walk()">
     <input type=button value="Stop" onclick="blueRobot.stop()">
    <footer>
     <small> Blue Robot Player Sprite by <a href="http://johncolburn.deviantart.com/">JohnColburn</a>.
     Licensed under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution Share-Alike 3.0 Unported license.</small>
     <small> This work is itself licensed under a <a rel="license" href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">Creative
     Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License</a>.</small>
    </footer>

##### 4.12.4.3 Colour spaces and colour correction

The `canvas` APIs must perform colour correction at only two points: when rendering images with their own gamma correction and colour space information onto a bitmap, to convert the image to the colour space used by the bitmaps (e.g. using the 2D Context's `drawImage()` method with an `HTMLImageElement` object), and when rendering the actual canvas bitmap to the output device.

Thus, in the 2D context, colours used to draw shapes onto the canvas will exactly match colours obtained through the `getImageData()` method.

The `toDataURL()` method must not include colour space information in the resources they return. Where the output format allows it, the colour of pixels in resources created by `toDataURL()` must match those returned by the `getImageData()` method.

In user agents that support CSS, the colour space used by a `canvas` element must match the colour space used for processing any colours for that element in CSS.

The gamma correction and colour space information of images must be handled in such a way that an image rendered directly using an `img` element would use the same colours as one painted on a `canvas` element that is then itself rendered. Furthermore, the rendering of images that have no colour correction information (such as those returned by the `toDataURL()` method) must be rendered with no colour correction.

Thus, in the 2D context, calling the `drawImage()` method to render the output of the `toDataURL()` method to the canvas, given the appropriate dimensions, has no visible effect.

##### 4.12.4.4 Serialising bitmaps to a file

When a user agent is to create a serialisation of the bitmap as a file, optionally with some given arguments, and optionally with a native flag set, it must create an image file in the format given by the first value of arguments, or, if there are no arguments, in the PNG format. [PNG]

If the native flag is set, or if the bitmap has one pixel per coordinate space unit, then the image file must have the same pixel data (before compression, if applicable) as the bitmap, and if the file format used supports encoding resolution metadata, the resolution of that bitmap (device pixels per coordinate space units being interpreted as image pixels per CSS pixel) must be given as well.

Otherwise, the image file's pixel data must be the bitmap's pixel data scaled to one image pixel per coordinate space unit, and if the file format used supports encoding resolution metadata, the resolution must be given as 96dpi (one image pixel per CSS pixel).

If arguments is not empty, the first value must be interpreted as a MIME type giving the format to use. If the type has any parameters, it must be treated as not supported.

For example, the value "`image/png`" would mean to generate a PNG image, the value "`image/jpeg`" would mean to generate a JPEG image, and the value "`image/svg+xml`" would mean to generate an SVG image (which would require that the user agent track how the bitmap was generated, an unlikely, though potentially awesome, feature).

User agents must support PNG ("`image/png`"). User agents may support other types. If the user agent does not support the requested type, it must create the file using the PNG format. [PNG]

User agents must convert the provided type to ASCII lowercase before establishing if they support that type.

For image types that do not support an alpha channel, the serialised image must be the bitmap image composited onto a solid black background using the source-over operator.

If the first argument in arguments gives a type corresponding to one of the types given in the first column of the following table, and the user agent supports that type, then the subsequent arguments, if any, must be treated as described in the second cell of that row.

Arguments for serialisation methods
Type | Other arguments | Reference
--- | --- | ---
`image/jpeg` | The second argument, if it is a number in the range 0.0 to 1.0 inclusive, must be treated as the desired quality level. If it is not a number or is outside that range, the user agent must use its default value, as if the argument had been omitted. | [JPEG]

For the purposes of these rules, an argument is considered to be a number if it is converted to an IDL double value by the rules for handling arguments of type `any` in the Web IDL specification. [WEBIDL]

Other arguments must be ignored and must not cause the user agent to throw an exception. A future version of this specification will probably define other parameters to be passed to these methods to allow authors to more carefully control compression settings, image metadata, etc.

##### 4.12.4.5 Security with `canvas` elements

This section is non-normative.

Information leakage can occur if scripts from one origin can access information (e.g. read pixels) from images from another origin (one that isn't the same).

To mitigate this, bitmaps used with `canvas` elements are defined to have a flag indicating whether they are origin-clean. All bitmaps start with their origin-clean set to true. The flag is set to false when cross-origin images or fonts are used.

The `toDataURL()`, `toBlob()`, and `getImageData()` methods check the flag and will throw a `SecurityError` exception rather than leak cross-origin data.

The flag can be reset in certain situations; for example, when a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` is bound to a new `canvas`, the bitmap is cleared and its flag reset.

### 4.13 Common idioms without dedicated elements

#### 4.13.1 The main part of the content

The main content of a page — not including headers and footers, navigation links, sidebars, advertisements, and so forth — can be marked up in a variety of ways, depending on the needs of the author.

The simplest solution is to not mark up the main content at all, and just leave it as implicit. Another way to think of this is that the `body` elements marks up the main content of the page, and the bits that aren't main content are excluded through the use of more appropriate elements like `aside` and `nav`.

Here is a short Web page marked up along this minimalistic school of thought. The main content is highlighted. Notice how all the other content in the `body` is marked up with elements to indicate that it's not part of the main content, in this case `header`, `nav`, and `footer`.

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title> My Toys </title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <header>
       <h1>My toys</h1>
      </header>
      <nav>
       <p><a href="/">Home</a></p>
       <p><a href="/contact">Contact</a></p>
      </nav>
      <p>I really like my chained book and my telephone. I'm not such a
      fan of my big ball.</p>
      <p>Another toy I like is my mirror.</p>
      <footer>
       <p>© copyright 2010 by the boy</p>
      </footer>
     </body>
    </html>

If the main content is an independent unit of content that one could imagine syndicating independently, then the `article` element would be appropriate to mark up the main content of the document.

The document in the previous example is here recast as a blog post:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title> The Boy Blog: My Toys </title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <header>
       <h1>The Boy Blog</h1>
      </header>
      <nav>
       <p><a href="/">Home</a></p>
       <p><a href="/contact">Contact</a></p>
      </nav>
      <article>
       <header>
        <h1>My toys</h1>
        <p>Published August 4th</p>
       </header>
       <p>I really like my chained book and my telephone. I'm not such a
       fan of my big ball.</p>
       <p>Another toy I like is my mirror.</p>
      </article>
      <footer>
       <p>© copyright 2010 by the boy</p>
      </footer>
     </body>
    </html>

If the main content is not an independent unit of content so much as a section of a larger work, for instance a chapter, then the `section` element would be appropriate to mark up the main content of the document.

Here is the same document, but as a chapter in an online book:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title> Chapter 2: My Toys — The Book of the Boy </title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <header>
       <hgroup>
        <h1>The Book of the Boy</h1>
        <h2>A book about boy stuff</h2>
       </hgroup>
      </header>
      <nav>
       <p><a href="/">Front Page</a></p>
       <p><a href="/toc">Table of Contents</a></p>
       <p><a href="/c1">Chapter 1</a> — <a href="/c3">Chapter 3</a></p>
      </nav>
      <section>
       <h1>Chapter 2: My Toys</h1>
       <p>I really like my chained book and my telephone. I'm not such a
       fan of my big ball.</p>
       <p>Another toy I like is my mirror.</p>
      </section>
     </body>
    </html>

If neither `article` nor `section` would be appropriate, but the main content still needs an explicit element, for example for styling purposes, then the `main` element can be used.

This is the same as the original example, but using `main` for the main content instead of leaving it implied:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title> My Toys </title>
      <style>
       body > main { background: navy; color: yellow; }
      </style>
     </head>
     <body>
      <header>
       <h1>My toys</h1>
      </header>
      <nav>
       <p><a href="/">Home</a></p>
       <p><a href="/contact">Contact</a></p>
      </nav>
      <main>
       <p>I really like my chained book and my telephone. I'm not such a
       fan of my big ball.</p>
       <p>Another toy I like is my mirror.</p>
      </main>
      <footer>
       <p>© copyright 2010 by the boy</p>
      </footer>
     </body>
    </html>

#### 4.13.2 Bread crumb navigation

This specification does not provide a machine-readable way of describing bread-crumb navigation menus. Authors are encouraged to just use a series of links in a paragraph. The `nav` element can be used to mark the section containing these paragraphs as being navigation blocks.

In the following example, the current page can be reached via two paths.

    <nav>
     <p>
      <a href="/">Main</a> ▸
      <a href="/products/">Products</a> ▸
      <a href="/products/dishwashers/">Dishwashers</a> ▸
      <a>Second hand</a>
     </p>
     <p>
      <a href="/">Main</a> ▸
      <a href="/second-hand/">Second hand</a> ▸
      <a>Dishwashers</a>
     </p>
    </nav>

#### 4.13.3 Tag clouds

This specification does not define any markup specifically for marking up lists of keywords that apply to a group of pages (also known as tag clouds). In general, authors are encouraged to either mark up such lists using `ul` elements with explicit inline counts that are then hidden and turned into a presentational effect using a style sheet, or to use SVG.

Here, three tags are included in a short tag cloud:

    <style>
    @media screen, print, handheld, tv {
      /* should be ignored by non-visual browsers */
      .tag-cloud > li > span { display: none; }
      .tag-cloud > li { display: inline; }
      .tag-cloud-1 { font-size: 0.7em; }
      .tag-cloud-2 { font-size: 0.9em; }
      .tag-cloud-3 { font-size: 1.1em; }
      .tag-cloud-4 { font-size: 1.3em; }
      .tag-cloud-5 { font-size: 1.5em; }
    }
    </style>
    ...
    <ul class="tag-cloud">
     <li class="tag-cloud-4"><a title="28 instances" href="/t/apple">apple</a> <span>(popular)</span>
     <li class="tag-cloud-2"><a title="6 instances"  href="/t/kiwi">kiwi</a> <span>(rare)</span>
     <li class="tag-cloud-5"><a title="41 instances" href="/t/pear">pear</a> <span>(very popular)</span>
    </ul>

The actual frequency of each tag is given using the `title` attribute. A CSS style sheet is provided to convert the markup into a cloud of differently-sized words, but for user agents that do not support CSS or are not visual, the markup contains annotations like "(popular)" or "(rare)" to categorise the various tags by frequency, thus enabling all users to benefit from the information.

The `ul` element is used (rather than `ol`) because the order is not particularly important: while the list is in fact ordered alphabetically, it would convey the same information if ordered by, say, the length of the tag.

The `tag` `rel`-keyword is not used on these `a` elements because they do not represent tags that apply to the page itself; they are just part of an index listing the tags themselves.

#### 4.13.4 Conversations

This specification does not define a specific element for marking up conversations, meeting minutes, chat transcripts, dialogues in screenplays, instant message logs, and other situations where different players take turns in discourse.

Instead, authors are encouraged to mark up conversations using `p` elements and punctuation. Authors who need to mark the speaker for styling purposes are encouraged to use `span` or `b`. Paragraphs with their text wrapped in the `i` element can be used for marking up stage directions.

This example demonstrates this using an extract from Abbot and Costello's famous sketch, Who's on first:

    <p> Costello: Look, you gotta first baseman?
    <p> Abbott: Certainly.
    <p> Costello: Who's playing first?
    <p> Abbott: That's right.
    <p> Costello becomes exasperated.
    <p> Costello: When you pay off the first baseman every month, who gets the money?
    <p> Abbott: Every dollar of it.

The following extract shows how an IM conversation log could be marked up, using the `data` element to provide Unix timestamps for each line. Note that the timestamps are provided in a format that the `time` element does not support, so the `data` element is used instead (namely, Unix `time_t` timestamps). Had the author wished to mark up the data using one of the date and time formats supported by the `time` element, that element could have been used instead of `data`. This could be advantageous as it would allow data analysis tools to detect the timestamps unambiguously, without coordination with the page author.

    <p> <data value="1319898155">14:22</data> <b>egof</b> I'm not that nerdy, I've only seen 30% of the star trek episodes
    <p> <data value="1319898192">14:23</data> <b>kaj</b> if you know what percentage of the star trek episodes you have seen, you are inarguably nerdy
    <p> <data value="1319898200">14:23</data> <b>egof</b> it's unarguably
    <p> <data value="1319898228">14:23</data> <i>* kaj blinks</i>
    <p> <data value="1319898260">14:24</data> <b>kaj</b> you are not helping your case

HTML does not have a good way to mark up graphs, so descriptions of interactive conversations from games are more difficult to mark up. This example shows one possible convention using `dl` elements to list the possible responses at each point in the conversation. Another option to consider is describing the conversation in the form of a DOT file, and outputting the result as an SVG image to place in the document. [DOT]

    <p> Next, you meet a fisherman. You can say one of several greetings:
    <dl>
     <dt> "Hello there!"
     <dd>
      <p> He responds with "Hello, how may I help you?"; you can respond with:
      <dl>
       <dt> "I would like to buy a fish."
       <dd> <p> He sells you a fish and the conversation finishes.
       <dt> "Can I borrow your boat?"
       <dd>
        <p> He is surprised and asks "What are you offering in return?".
        <dl>
         <dt> "Five gold." (if you have enough)
         <dt> "Ten gold." (if you have enough)
         <dt> "Fifteen gold." (if you have enough)
         <dd> <p> He lends you his boat. The conversation ends.
         <dt> "A fish." (if you have one)
         <dt> "A newspaper." (if you have one)
         <dt> "A pebble." (if you have one)
         <dd> <p> "No thanks", he replies. Your conversation options
         at this point are the same as they were after asking to borrow
         his boat, minus any options you've suggested before.
        </dl>
       </dd>
      </dl>
     </dd>
     <dt> "Vote for me in the next election!"
     <dd> <p> He turns away. The conversation finishes.
     <dt> "Sir, are you aware that your fish are running away?"
     <dd>
      <p> He looks at you skeptically and says "Fish cannot run, sir".
      <dl>
       <dt> "You got me!"
       <dd> <p> The fisherman sighs and the conversation ends.
       <dt> "Only kidding."
       <dd> <p> "Good one!" he retorts. Your conversation options at this
       point are the same as those following "Hello there!" above.
       <dt> "Oh, then what are they doing?"
       <dd> <p> He looks at his fish, giving you an opportunity to steal
       his boat, which you do. The conversation ends.
      </dl>
     </dd>
    </dl>

In some games, conversations are simpler: each character merely has a fixed set of lines that they say. In this example, a game FAQ/walkthrough lists some of the known possible responses for each character:

    <section>
     <h1>Dialogue</h1>
     <p><small>Some characters repeat their lines in order each time you interact
     with them, others randomly pick from amongst their lines. Those who respond in
     order have numbered entries in the lists below.</small>
     <h2>The Shopkeeper</h2>
     <ul>
      <li>How may I help you?
      <li>Fresh apples!
      <li>A loaf of bread for madam?
     </ul>
     <h2>The pilot</h2>
     <p>Before the accident:
     <ul>
      </li>I'm about to fly out, sorry!
      </li>Sorry, I'm just waiting for flight clearance and then I'll be off!
     </ul>
     <p>After the accident:
     <ol>
      <li>I'm about to fly out, sorry!
      <li>Ok, I'm not leaving right now, my plane is being cleaned.
      <li>Ok, it's not being cleaned, it needs a minor repair first.
      <li>Ok, ok, stop bothering me! Truth is, I had a crash.
     </ol>
     <h2>Clan Leader</h2>
     <p>During the first clan meeting:
     <ul>
      <li>Hey, have you seen my daughter? I bet she's up to something nefarious again...
      <li>Nice weather we're having today, eh?
      <li>The name is Bailey, Jeff Bailey. How can I help you today?
      <li>A glass of water? Fresh from the well!
     </ul>
     <p>After the earthquake:
     <ol>
      <li>Everyone is safe in the shelter, we just have to put out the fire!
      <li>I'll go and tell the fire brigade, you keep hosing it down!
     </ol>
    </section>

#### 4.13.5 Footnotes

HTML does not have a dedicated mechanism for marking up footnotes. Here are the suggested alternatives.

For short inline annotations, the `title` attribute could be used.

In this example, two parts of a dialogue are annotated with footnote-like content using the `title` attribute.

    <p> <b>Customer</b>: Hello! I wish to register a complaint. Hello. Miss?
    <p> <b>Shopkeeper</b>: <span title="Colloquial pronunciation of 'What do you'"
    >Watcha</span> mean, miss?
    <p> <b>Customer</b>: Uh, I'm sorry, I have a cold. I wish to make a complaint.
    <p> <b>Shopkeeper</b>: Sorry, <span title="This is, of course, a lie.">we're
    closing for lunch</span>.

Unfortunately, relying on the `title` attribute is currently discouraged as many user agents do not expose the attribute in an accessible manner as required by this specification (e.g. requiring a pointing device such as a mouse to cause a tooltip to appear, which excludes keyboard-only users and touch-only users, such as anyone with a modern phone or tablet).

If the `title` attribute is used, CSS can used to draw the reader's attention to the elements with the attribute.

For example, the following CSS places a dashed line below elements that have a `title` attribute.

    [title] { border-bottom: thin dashed; }

For longer annotations, the `a` element should be used, pointing to an element later in the document. The convention is that the contents of the link be a number in square brackets.

In this example, a footnote in the dialogue links to a paragraph below the dialogue. The paragraph then reciprocally links back to the dialogue, allowing the user to return to the location of the footnote.

    <p> Announcer: Number 16: The <i>hand</i>.
    <p> Interviewer: Good evening. I have with me in the studio tonight
    Mr Norman St John Polevaulter, who for the past few years has been
    contradicting people. Mr Polevaulter, why <em>do</em> you
    contradict people?
    <p> Norman: I don't. <sup><a href="#fn1" id="r1">[1]</a></sup>
    <p> Interviewer: You told me you did!
    ...
    <section>
     <p id="fn1"><a href="#r1">[1]</a> This is, naturally, a lie,
     but paradoxically if it were true he could not say so without
     contradicting the interviewer and thus making it false.</p>
    </section>

For side notes, longer annotations that apply to entire sections of the text rather than just specific words or sentences, the `aside` element should be used.

In this example, a sidebar is given after a dialogue, giving it some context.

    <p> <span class="speaker">Customer</span>: I will not buy this record, it is scratched.
    <p> <span class="speaker">Shopkeeper</span>: I'm sorry?
    <p> <span class="speaker">Customer</span>: I will not buy this record, it is scratched.
    <p> <span class="speaker">Shopkeeper</span>: No no no, this's'a tobacconist's.
    <aside>
     <p>In 1970, the British Empire lay in ruins, and foreign
     nationalists frequented the streets — many of them Hungarians
     (not the streets — the foreign nationals). Sadly, Alexander
     Yalt has been publishing incompetently-written phrase books.
    </aside>

For figures or tables, footnotes can be included in the relevant `figcaption` or `caption` element, or in surrounding prose.

In this example, a table has cells with footnotes that are given in prose. A `figure` element is used to give a single legend to the combination of the table and its footnotes.

    <figure>
     <figcaption>Table 1. Alternative activities for knights.</figcaption>
     <table>
      <tr>
       <th> Activity
       <th> Location
       <th> Cost
      <tr>
       <td> Dance
       <td> Wherever possible
       <td> £0<sup><a href="#fn1">1</a></sup>
      <tr>
       <td> Routines, chorus scenes<sup><a href="#fn2">2</a></sup>
       <td> Undisclosed
       <td> Undisclosed
      <tr>
       <td> Dining<sup><a href="#fn3">3</a></sup>
       <td> Camelot
       <td> Cost of ham, jam, and spam<sup><a href="#fn4">4</a></sup>
     </table>
     <p id="fn1">1. Assumed.</p>
     <p id="fn2">2. Footwork impeccable.</p>
     <p id="fn3">3. Quality described as "well".</p>
     <p id="fn4">4. A lot.</p>
    </figure>

### 4.14 Disabled elements

An element is said to be actually disabled if it one of the following:

- a `button` element that is disabled
- an `input` element that is disabled
- a `select` element that is disabled
- a `textarea` element that is disabled
- an `optgroup` element that has a `disabled` attribute
- an `option` element that is disabled
- a `menuitem` element that has a `disabled` attribute
- a `fieldset` element that is a disabled fieldset

This definition is used to determine what elements can be focused and which elements match the `:disabled` pseudo-class.

### 4.15 Matching HTML elements using selectors

#### 4.15.1 Case-sensitivity

The Selectors specification leaves the case-sensitivity of element names, attribute names, and attribute values to be defined by the host language. [SELECTORS]

The Selectors specification defines that ID and class selectors, when matched against elements in documents that are in quirks mode, will be work in an ASCII case-insensitive.

When comparing a CSS element type selector to the names of HTML elements in HTML documents, the CSS element type selector must first be converted to ASCII lowercase. The same selector when compared to other elements must be compared according to its original case. In both cases, the comparison is case-sensitive.

When comparing the name part of a CSS attribute selector to the names of namespace-less attributes on HTML elements in HTML documents, the name part of the CSS attribute selector must first be converted to ASCII lowercase. The same selector when compared to other attributes must be compared according to its original case. In both cases, the comparison is case-sensitive.

Everything else (attribute values on HTML elements, IDs and classes in no-quirks mode and limited-quirks mode, and element names, attribute names, and attribute values in XML documents) must be treated as case-sensitive for the purposes of selector matching.

#### 4.15.2 Pseudo-classes

There are a number of dynamic selectors that can be used with HTML. This section defines when these selectors match HTML elements. [SELECTORS] [CSSUI]

`:link`
`:visited`

  All `a` elements that have an `href` attribute, all `area` elements that have an `href` attribute, and all `link` elements that have an `href` attribute, must match one of `:link` and `:visited`.

  Other specifications might apply more specific rules regarding how these elements are to match these pseudo-classes, to mitigate some privacy concerns that apply with straightforward implementations of this requirement.

`:active`

  The `:active` pseudo-class is defined to match an element while an element is being activated by the user. For the purposes of defining the `:active` pseudo-class only, an HTML user agent must consider an element as being activated if it is:

  - An element falling into one of the following categories between the time the user begins to indicate an intent to trigger the element's activation behavior and either the time the user stops indicating an intent to trigger the element's activation behavior, or the time the element's activation behavior has finished running, which ever comes first:

    - `a` elements that have an `href` attribute
    - `area` elements that have an `href` attribute
    - `link` elements that have an `href` attribute
    - `button` elements that are not disabled
    - `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Submit Button, Image Button, Reset Button, or Button state
    - `menuitem` elements that do not have a `disabled` attribute
    - elements that have their tabindex focus flag set

    For example, if the user is using a keyboard to push a `button` element by pressing the space bar, the element would match this pseudo-class in between the time that the element received the `keydown` event and the time the element received the `keyup` event.

  - An element that the user indicates using a pointing device while that pointing device is in the "down" state (e.g. for a mouse, between the time the mouse button is pressed and the time it is depressed).

  - An element that has a descendant that is currently matching the `:active` pseudo-class.

`:hover`

  The `:hover` pseudo-class is defined to match an element while the user designates an element with a pointing device. For the purposes of defining the `:hover` pseudo-class only, an HTML user agent must consider an element as being one that the user designates if it is:

  - An element that the user indicates using a pointing device.

  - An element that has a descendant that the user indicates using a pointing device.

  - An element that is the labeled control of a `label` element that is currently matching :hover.

  Consider in particular a fragment such as:

      <p> <label for=c> <input id=a> </label> <span id=b> <input id=c> </span> </p>

  If the user designates the element with ID "`a`" with their pointing device, then the `p` element (and all its ancestors not shown in the snippet above), the `label` element, the element with ID "`a`", and the element with ID "`c`" will match the :hover pseudo-class. The element with ID "`a`" matches it from condition 1, the `label` and `p` elements match it because of condition 2 (one of their descendants is designated), and the element with ID "`c`" matches it through condition 3 (its `label` element matches :hover). However, the element with ID "`b`" does not match :hover: its descendant is not designated, even though it matches :hover.

`:focus`

  For the purposes of the CSS ':focus' pseudo-class, an element has the focus when its top-level browsing context has the system focus, it is not itself a browsing context container, and it is one of the elements listed in the focus chain of the currently focused area of the top-level browsing context.

`:enabled`

  The `:enabled` pseudo-class must match any element that is one of the following:

  - an `a` element that has an `href` attribute
  - an `area` element that has an `href` attribute
  - a `link` element that has an `href` attribute
  - a `button` element that is not disabled
  - an `input` element that is not disabled
  - a `select` element that is not disabled
  - a `textarea` element that is not disabled
  - an `optgroup` element that does not have a `disabled` attribute
  - an `option` element that is not disabled
  - a `menuitem` element that does not have a `disabled` attribute
  - a `fieldset` element that is not a disabled fieldset
`:disabled`

  The `:disabled` pseudo-class must match any element that is actually disabled.

`:checked`

  The `:checked` pseudo-class must match any element falling into one of the following categories:

  - `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Checkbox state and whose checkedness state is true
  - `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state and whose checkedness state is true
  - `option` elements whose selectedness is true
  - `menuitem` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Checkbox state and that have a `checked` attribute
  - `menuitem` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Radio state and that have a `checked` attribute
`:indeterminate`

  The `:indeterminate` pseudo-class must match any element falling into one of the following categories:

  - `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Checkbox state and whose `indeterminate` IDL attribute is set to true
  - `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state and whose radio button group contains no `input` elements whose checkedness state is true.
  - `progress` elements with no `value` content attribute
`:default`

  The `:default` pseudo-class must match any element falling into one of the following categories:

  - `button` elements that are their form's default button
  - `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Submit Button or Image Button state, and that are their form's default button
  - `input` elements to which the `checked` attribute applies and that have a `checked` attribute
  - `option` elements that have a `selected` attribute
`:valid`

  The `:valid` pseudo-class must match any element falling into one of the following categories:

  - elements that are candidates for constraint validation and that satisfy their constraints
  - `form` elements that are not the form owner of any elements that themselves are candidates for constraint validation but do not satisfy their constraints
  - `fieldset` elements that have no descendant elements that themselves are candidates for constraint validation but do not satisfy their constraints
`:invalid`

  The `:invalid` pseudo-class must match any element falling into one of the following categories:

  - elements that are candidates for constraint validation but that do not satisfy their constraints
  - `form` elements that are the form owner of one or more elements that themselves are candidates for constraint validation but do not satisfy their constraints
  - `fieldset` elements that have of one or more descendant elements that themselves are candidates for constraint validation but do not satisfy their constraints
`:in-range`

  The `:in-range` pseudo-class must match all elements that are candidates for constraint validation, have range limitations, and that are neither suffering from an underflow nor suffering from an overflow.

`:out-of-range`

  The `:out-of-range` pseudo-class must match all elements that are candidates for constraint validation, have range limitations, and that are either suffering from an underflow or suffering from an overflow.

`:required`

  The `:required` pseudo-class must match any element falling into one of the following categories:

  - `input` elements that are required
  - `select` elements that have a `required` attribute
  - `textarea` elements that have a `required` attribute
`:optional`

  The `:optional` pseudo-class must match any element falling into one of the following categories:

  - `input` elements to which the `required` attribute applies that are not required
  - `select` elements that do not have a `required` attribute
  - `textarea` elements that do not have a `required` attribute
`:read-only`
`:read-write`

  The `:read-write` pseudo-class must match any element falling into one of the following categories, which for the purposes of Selectors are thus considered user-alterable: [SELECTORS]

  - `input` elements to which the `readonly` attribute applies, and that are mutable (i.e. that do not have the `readonly` attribute specified and that are not disabled)
  - `textarea` elements that do not have a `readonly` attribute, and that are not disabled
  - elements that are editing hosts or editable and are neither `input` elements nor `textarea` elements

  The `:read-only` pseudo-class must match all other HTML elements.

`:dir(ltr)`

  The `:dir(ltr)` pseudo-class must match all elements whose directionality is 'ltr'.

`:dir(rtl)`

  The `:dir(rtl)` pseudo-class must match all elements whose directionality is 'rtl'.

Another section of this specification defines the target element used with the `:target` pseudo-class.

This specification does not define when an element matches the `:lang()` dynamic pseudo-class, as it is defined in sufficient detail in a language-agnostic fashion in the Selectors specification. [SELECTORS]

## 5 Microdata

### 5.1 Introduction

#### 5.1.1 Overview

This section is non-normative.

Sometimes, it is desirable to annotate content with specific machine-readable labels, e.g. to allow generic scripts to provide services that are customised to the page, or to enable content from a variety of cooperating authors to be processed by a single script in a consistent manner.

For this purpose, authors can use the microdata features described in this section. Microdata allows nested groups of name-value pairs to be added to documents, in parallel with the existing content.

#### 5.1.2 The basic syntax

This section is non-normative.

At a high level, microdata consists of a group of name-value pairs. The groups are called items, and each name-value pair is a property. Items and properties are represented by regular elements.

To create an item, the `itemscope` attribute is used.

To add a property to an item, the `itemprop` attribute is used on one of the item's descendants.

Here there are two items, each of which has the property "name":

    <div itemscope>
     <p>My name is <span itemprop="name">Elizabeth</span>.</p>
    </div>

    <div itemscope>
     <p>My name is <span itemprop="name">Daniel</span>.</p>
    </div>

Markup without the microdata-related attributes does not have any effect on the microdata model.

These two examples are exactly equivalent, at a microdata level, as the previous two examples respectively:

    <div itemscope>
     <p>My <em>name</em> is <span itemprop="name">E<strong>liz</strong>abeth</span>.</p>
    </div>

    <section>
     <div itemscope>
      <aside>
       <p>My name is <span itemprop="name"><a href="/?user=daniel">Daniel</a></span>.</p>
      </aside>
     </div>
    </section>

Properties generally have values that are strings.

Here the item has three properties:

    <div itemscope>
     <p>My name is <span itemprop="name">Neil</span>.</p>
     <p>My band is called <span itemprop="band">Four Parts Water</span>.</p>
     <p>I am <span itemprop="nationality">British</span>.</p>
    </div>

When a string value is a URL, it is expressed using the `a` element and its `href` attribute, the `img` element and its `src` attribute, or other elements that link to or embed external resources.

In this example, the item has one property, "image", whose value is a URL:

    <div itemscope>
     <img itemprop="image" src="google-logo.png" alt="Google">
    </div>

When a string value is in some machine-readable format unsuitable for human consumption, it is expressed using the `value` attribute of the `data` element, with the human-readable version given in the element's contents.

Here, there is an item with a property whose value is a product ID. The ID is not human-friendly, so the product's name is used the human-visible text instead of the ID.

    <h1 itemscope>
     <data itemprop="product-id" value="9678AOU879">The Instigator 2000</data>
    </h1>

For numeric data, the `meter` element and its `value` attribute can be used instead.

Here a rating is given using a `meter` element.

    <div itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/Product">
     <span itemprop="name">Panasonic White 60L Refrigerator</span>
     <img src="panasonic-fridge-60l-white.jpg" alt="">
      <div itemprop="aggregateRating"
           itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/AggregateRating">
       <meter itemprop="ratingValue" min=0 value=3.5 max=5>Rated 3.5/5</meter>
       (based on <span itemprop="reviewCount">11</span> customer reviews)
      </div>
    </div>

Similarly, for date- and time-related data, the `time` element and its `datetime` attribute can be used instead.

In this example, the item has one property, "birthday", whose value is a date:

    <div itemscope>
     I was born on <time itemprop="birthday" datetime="2009-05-10">May 10th 2009</time>.
    </div>

Properties can also themselves be groups of name-value pairs, by putting the `itemscope` attribute on the element that declares the property.

Items that are not part of others are called top-level microdata items.

In this example, the outer item represents a person, and the inner one represents a band:

    <div itemscope>
     <p>Name: <span itemprop="name">Amanda</span></p>
     <p>Band: <span itemprop="band" itemscope> <span itemprop="name">Jazz Band</span> (<span itemprop="size">12</span> players)</span></p>
    </div>

The outer item here has two properties, "name" and "band". The "name" is "Amanda", and the "band" is an item in its own right, with two properties, "name" and "size". The "name" of the band is "Jazz Band", and the "size" is "12".

The outer item in this example is a top-level microdata item.

Properties that are not descendants of the element with the `itemscope` attribute can be associated with the item using the `itemref` attribute. This attribute takes a list of IDs of elements to crawl in addition to crawling the children of the element with the `itemscope` attribute.

This example is the same as the previous one, but all the properties are separated from their items:

    <div itemscope id="amanda" itemref="a b"></div>
    <p id="a">Name: <span itemprop="name">Amanda</span></p>
    <div id="b" itemprop="band" itemscope itemref="c"></div>
    <div id="c">
     <p>Band: <span itemprop="name">Jazz Band</span></p>
     <p>Size: <span itemprop="size">12</span> players</p>
    </div>

This gives the same result as the previous example. The first item has two properties, "name", set to "Amanda", and "band", set to another item. That second item has two further properties, "name", set to "Jazz Band", and "size", set to "12".

An item can have multiple properties with the same name and different values.

This example describes an ice cream, with two flavors:

    <div itemscope>
     <p>Flavors in my favorite ice cream:</p>
     <ul>
      <li itemprop="flavor">Lemon sorbet</li>
      <li itemprop="flavor">Apricot sorbet</li>
     </ul>
    </div>

This thus results in an item with two properties, both "flavor", having the values "Lemon sorbet" and "Apricot sorbet".

An element introducing a property can also introduce multiple properties at once, to avoid duplication when some of the properties have the same value.

Here we see an item with two properties, "favorite-color" and "favorite-fruit", both set to the value "orange":

    <div itemscope>
     <span itemprop="favorite-color favorite-fruit">orange</span>
    </div>

It's important to note that there is no relationship between the microdata and the content of the document where the microdata is marked up.

There is no semantic difference, for instance, between the following two examples:

    <figure>
     <img src="castle.jpeg">
     <figcaption><span itemscope><span itemprop="name">The Castle</span></span> (1986)</figcaption>
    </figure>

    <span itemscope><meta itemprop="name" content="The Castle"></span>
    <figure>
     <img src="castle.jpeg">
     <figcaption>The Castle (1986)</figcaption>
    </figure>

Both have a figure with a caption, and both, completely unrelated to the figure, have an item with a name-value pair with the name "name" and the value "The Castle". The only difference is that if the user drags the caption out of the document, in the former case, the item will be included in the drag-and-drop data. In neither case is the image in any way associated with the item.

#### 5.1.3 Typed items

This section is non-normative.

The examples in the previous section show how information could be marked up on a page that doesn't expect its microdata to be re-used. Microdata is most useful, though, when it is used in contexts where other authors and readers are able to cooperate to make new uses of the markup.

For this purpose, it is necessary to give each item a type, such as "http://example.com/person", or "http://example.org/cat", or "http://band.example.net/". Types are identified as URLs.

The type for an item is given as the value of an `itemtype` attribute on the same element as the `itemscope` attribute.

Here, the item's type is "http://example.org/animals#cat":

    <section itemscope itemtype="http://example.org/animals#cat">
     <h1 itemprop="name">Hedral</h1>
     <p itemprop="desc">Hedral is a male american domestic
     shorthair, with a fluffy black fur with white paws and belly.</p>
     <img itemprop="img" src="hedral.jpeg" alt="" title="Hedral, age 18 months">
    </section>

In this example the "http://example.org/animals#cat" item has three properties, a "name" ("Hedral"), a "desc" ("Hedral is..."), and an "img" ("hedral.jpeg").

The type gives the context for the properties, thus selecting a vocabulary: a property named "class" given for an item with the type "http://census.example/person" might refer to the economic class of an individual, while a property named "class" given for an item with the type "http://example.com/school/teacher" might refer to the classroom a teacher has been assigned. Several types can share a vocabulary. For example, the types "`http://example.org/people/teacher`" and "`http://example.org/people/engineer`" could be defined to use the same vocabulary (though maybe some properties would not be especially useful in both cases, e.g. maybe the "`http://example.org/people/engineer`" type might not typically be used with the "`classroom`" property). Multiple types defined to use the same vocabulary can be given for a single item by listing the URLs as a space-separated list in the attribute' value. An item cannot be given two types if they do not use the same vocabulary, however.

#### 5.1.4 Global identifiers for items

This section is non-normative.

Sometimes, an item gives information about a topic that has a global identifier. For example, books can be identified by their ISBN number.

Vocabularies (as identified by the `itemtype` attribute) can be designed such that items get associated with their global identifier in an unambiguous way by expressing the global identifiers as URLs given in an `itemid` attribute.

The exact meaning of the URLs given in `itemid` attributes depends on the vocabulary used.

Here, an item is talking about a particular book:

    <dl itemscope
        itemtype="http://vocab.example.net/book"
        itemid="urn:isbn:0-330-34032-8">
     <dt>Title
     <dd itemprop="title">The Reality Dysfunction
     <dt>Author
     <dd itemprop="author">Peter F. Hamilton
     <dt>Publication date
     <dd><time itemprop="pubdate" datetime="1996-01-26">26 January 1996</time>
    </dl>

The "`http://vocab.example.net/book`" vocabulary in this example would define that the `itemid` attribute takes a `urn:` URL pointing to the ISBN of the book.

#### 5.1.5 Selecting names when defining vocabularies

This section is non-normative.

Using microdata means using a vocabulary. For some purposes, an ad-hoc vocabulary is adequate. For others, a vocabulary will need to be designed. Where possible, authors are encouraged to re-use existing vocabularies, as this makes content re-use easier.

When designing new vocabularies, identifiers can be created either using URLs, or, for properties, as plain words (with no dots or colons). For URLs, conflicts with other vocabularies can be avoided by only using identifiers that correspond to pages that the author has control over.

For instance, if Jon and Adam both write content at `example.com`, at `http://example.com/~jon/...` and `http://example.com/~adam/...` respectively, then they could select identifiers of the form "http://example.com/~jon/name" and "http://example.com/~adam/name" respectively.

Properties whose names are just plain words can only be used within the context of the types for which they are intended; properties named using URLs can be reused in items of any type. If an item has no type, and is not part of another item, then if its properties have names that are just plain words, they are not intended to be globally unique, and are instead only intended for limited use. Generally speaking, authors are encouraged to use either properties with globally unique names (URLs) or ensure that their items are typed.

Here, an item is an "http://example.org/animals#cat", and most of the properties have names that are words defined in the context of that type. There are also a few additional properties whose names come from other vocabularies.

    <section itemscope itemtype="http://example.org/animals#cat">
     <h1 itemprop="name http://example.com/fn">Hedral</h1>
     <p itemprop="desc">Hedral is a male american domestic
     shorthair, with a fluffy <span
     itemprop="http://example.com/color">black</span> fur with <span
     itemprop="http://example.com/color">white</span> paws and belly.</p>
     <img itemprop="img" src="hedral.jpeg" alt="" title="Hedral, age 18 months">
    </section>

This example has one item with the type "http://example.org/animals#cat" and the following properties:

Property | Value
name | Hedral
http://example.com/fn | Hedral
desc | Hedral is a male american domestic shorthair, with a fluffy black fur with white paws and belly.
http://example.com/color | black
http://example.com/color | white
img | .../hedral.jpeg

#### 5.1.6 Using the microdata DOM API

This section is non-normative.

The microdata becomes even more useful when scripts can use it to expose information to the user, for example offering it in a form that can be used by other applications.

The `document.getItems(typeNames)` method provides access to the top-level microdata items. It returns a `NodeList` containing the items with the specified types, or all types if no argument is specified.

Each item is represented in the DOM by the element on which the relevant `itemscope` attribute is found. These elements have their `element.itemScope` IDL attribute set to true.

The type(s) of items can be obtained using the `element.itemType` IDL attribute on the element with the `itemscope` attribute.

This sample shows how the `getItems()` method can be used to obtain a list of all the top-level microdata items of a particular type given in the document:

    var cats = document.getItems("http://example.com/feline");

Once an element representing an item has been obtained, its properties can be extracted using the `properties` IDL attribute. This attribute returns an `HTMLPropertiesCollection`, which can be enumerated to go through each element that adds one or more properties to the item. It can also be indexed by name, which will return an object with a list of the elements that add properties with that name.

Each element that adds a property also has an `itemValue` IDL attribute that returns its value.

This sample gets the first item of type "http://example.net/user" and then pops up an alert using the "name" property from that item.

    var user = document.getItems('http://example.net/user')[0];
    alert('Hello ' + user.properties['name'][0].itemValue + '!');

The `HTMLPropertiesCollection` object, when indexed by name in this way, actually returns a `PropertyNodeList` object with all the matching properties. The `PropertyNodeList` object can be used to obtain all the values at once using its `getValues` method, which returns an array of all the values.

In an earlier example, a "http://example.org/animals#cat" item had two "http://example.com/color" values. This script looks up the first such item and then lists all its values.

    var cat = document.getItems('http://example.org/animals#cat')[0];
    var colors = cat.properties['http://example.com/color'].getValues();
    var result;
    if (colors.length == 0) {
      result = 'Colour unknown.';
    } else if (colors.length == 1) {
      result = 'Colour: ' + colors[0];
    } else {
      result = 'Colours:';
      for (var i = 0; i < colors.length; i += 1)
        result += ' ' + colors[i];
    }

It's also possible to get a list of all the property names using the object's `names` IDL attribute.

This example creates a big list with a nested list for each item on the page, each with all of the property names used in that item.

    var outer = document.createElement('ul');
    var items = document.getItems();
    for (var item = 0; item < items.length; item += 1) {
      var itemLi = document.createElement('li');
      var inner = document.createElement('ul');
      for (var name = 0; name < items[item].properties.names.length; name += 1) {
        var propLi = document.createElement('li');
        propLi.appendChild(document.createTextNode(items[item].properties.names[name]));
        inner.appendChild(propLi);
      }
      itemLi.appendChild(inner);
      outer.appendChild(itemLi);
    }
    document.body.appendChild(outer);

If faced with the following from an earlier example:

    <section itemscope itemtype="http://example.org/animals#cat">
     <h1 itemprop="name http://example.com/fn">Hedral</h1>
     <p itemprop="desc">Hedral is a male american domestic
     shorthair, with a fluffy <span
     itemprop="http://example.com/color">black</span> fur with <span
     itemprop="http://example.com/color">white</span> paws and belly.</p>
     <img itemprop="img" src="hedral.jpeg" alt="" title="Hedral, age 18 months">
    </section>

...it would result in the following output:

- - name
  - http://example.com/fn
  - desc
  - http://example.com/color
  - img

(The duplicate occurrence of "http://example.com/color" is not included in the list.)

### 5.2 Encoding microdata

#### 5.2.1 The microdata model

The microdata model consists of groups of name-value pairs known as items.

Each group is known as an item. Each item can have item types, a global identifier (if the vocabulary specified by the item types support global identifiers for items), and a list of name-value pairs. Each name in the name-value pair is known as a property, and each property has one or more values. Each value is either a string or itself a group of name-value pairs (an item). The names are unordered relative to each other, but if a particular name has multiple values, they do have a relative order.

#### 5.2.2 Items

Every HTML element may have an `itemscope` attribute specified. The `itemscope` attribute is a boolean attribute.

An element with the `itemscope` attribute specified creates a new item, a group of name-value pairs.

Elements with an `itemscope` attribute may have an `itemtype` attribute specified, to give the item types of the item.

The `itemtype` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are case-sensitive, each of which is a valid URL that is an absolute URL, and all of which are defined to use the same vocabulary. The attribute's value must have at least one token.

The item types of an item are the tokens obtained by splitting the element's `itemtype` attribute's value on spaces. If the `itemtype` attribute is missing or parsing it in this way finds no tokens, the item is said to have no item types.

The item types must all be types defined in applicable specifications and must all be defined to use the same vocabulary.

Except if otherwise specified by that specification, the URLs given as the item types should not be automatically dereferenced.

A specification could define that its item type can be derefenced to provide the user with help information, for example. In fact, vocabulary authors are encouraged to provide useful information at the given URL.

Item types are opaque identifiers, and user agents must not dereference unknown item types, or otherwise deconstruct them, in order to determine how to process items that use them.

The `itemtype` attribute must not be specified on elements that do not have an `itemscope` attribute specified.

An item is said to be a typed item when either it has an item type, or it is the value of a property of a typed item. The relevant types for a typed item is the item's item types, if it has any, or else is the relevant types of the item for which it is a property's value.

Elements with an `itemscope` attribute and an `itemtype` attribute that references a vocabulary that is defined to support global identifiers for items may also have an `itemid` attribute specified, to give a global identifier for the item, so that it can be related to other items on pages elsewhere on the Web.

The `itemid` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces.

The global identifier of an item is the value of its element's `itemid` attribute, if it has one, resolved relative to the element on which the attribute is specified. If the `itemid` attribute is missing or if resolving it fails, it is said to have no global identifier.

The `itemid` attribute must not be specified on elements that do not have both an `itemscope` attribute and an `itemtype` attribute specified, and must not be specified on elements with an `itemscope` attribute whose `itemtype` attribute specifies a vocabulary that does not support global identifiers for items, as defined by that vocabulary's specification.

The exact meaning of a global identifier is determined by the vocabulary's specification. It is up to such specifications to define whether multiple items with the same global identifier (whether on the same page or on different pages) are allowed to exist, and what the processing rules for that vocabulary are with respect to handling the case of multiple items with the same ID.

Elements with an `itemscope` attribute may have an `itemref` attribute specified, to give a list of additional elements to crawl to find the name-value pairs of the item.

The `itemref` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are case-sensitive, consisting of IDs of elements in the same home subtree.

The `itemref` attribute must not be specified on elements that do not have an `itemscope` attribute specified.

The `itemref` attribute is not part of the microdata data model. It is merely a syntactic construct to aid authors in adding annotations to pages where the data to be annotated does not follow a convenient tree structure. For example, it allows authors to mark up data in a table so that each column defines a separate item, while keeping the properties in the cells.

This example shows a simple vocabulary used to describe the products of a model railway manufacturer. The vocabulary has just five property names:

product-code
  An integer that names the product in the manufacturer's catalog.
name
  A brief description of the product.
scale
  One of "HO", "1", or "Z" (potentially with leading or trailing whitespace), indicating the scale of the product.
digital
  If present, one of "Digital", "Delta", or "Systems" (potentially with leading or trailing whitespace) indicating that the product has a digital decoder of the given type.
track-type
  For track-specific products, one of "K", "M", "C" (potentially with leading or trailing whitespace) indicating the type of track for which the product is intended.

This vocabulary has four defined item types:

http://md.example.com/loco
  Rolling stock with an engine
http://md.example.com/passengers
  Passenger rolling stock
http://md.example.com/track
  Track pieces
http://md.example.com/lighting
  Equipment with lighting

Each item that uses this vocabulary can be given one or more of these types, depending on what the product is.

Thus, a locomotive might be marked up as:

    <dl itemscope itemtype="http://md.example.com/loco
                            http://md.example.com/lighting">
     <dt>Name:
     <dd itemprop="name">Tank Locomotive (DB 80)
     <dt>Product code:
     <dd itemprop="product-code">33041
     <dt>Scale:
     <dd itemprop="scale">HO
     <dt>Digital:
     <dd itemprop="digital">Delta
    </dl>

A turnout lantern retrofit kit might be marked up as:

    <dl itemscope itemtype="http://md.example.com/track
                           http://md.example.com/lighting">
     <dt>Name:
     <dd itemprop="name">Turnout Lantern Kit
     <dt>Product code:
     <dd itemprop="product-code">74470
     <dt>Purpose:
     <dd>For retrofitting 2 <span itemprop="track-type">C</span> Track
     turnouts. <meta itemprop="scale" content="HO">
    </dl>

A passenger car with no lighting might be marked up as:

    <dl itemscope itemtype="http://md.example.com/passengers">
     <dt>Name:
     <dd itemprop="name">Express Train Passenger Car (DB Am 203)
     <dt>Product code:
     <dd itemprop="product-code">8710
     <dt>Scale:
     <dd itemprop="scale">Z
    </dl>

Great care is necessary when creating new vocabularies. Often, a hierarchical approach to types can be taken that results in a vocabulary where each item only ever has a single type, which is generally much simpler to manage.

#### 5.2.3 Names: the `itemprop` attribute

Every HTML element may have an `itemprop` attribute specified, if doing so adds one or more properties to one or more items (as defined below).

The `itemprop` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are case-sensitive, representing the names of the name-value pairs that it adds. The attribute's value must have at least one token.

Each token must be either:

- If the item is a typed item: a defined property name allowed in this situation according to the specification that defines the relevant types for the item, or
- A valid URL that is an absolute URL defined as an item property name allowed in this situation by a vocabulary specification, or
- A valid URL that is an absolute URL, used as a proprietary item property name (i.e. one used by the author for private purposes, not defined in a public specification), or
- If the item is not a typed item: a string that contains no U+002E FULL STOP characters (.) and no U+003A COLON characters (:), used as a proprietary item property name (i.e. one used by the author for private purposes, not defined in a public specification).

Specifications that introduce defined property names must ensure all such property names contain no U+002E FULL STOP characters (.), no U+003A COLON characters (:), and no space characters.

The rules above disallow U+003A COLON characters (:) in non-URL values because otherwise they could not be distinguished from URLs. Values with U+002E FULL STOP characters (.) are reserved for future extensions. Space characters are disallowed because otherwise the values would would be parsed as multiple tokens.

When an element with an `itemprop` attribute adds a property to multiple items, the requirement above regarding the tokens applies for each item individually.

The property names of an element are the tokens that the element's `itemprop` attribute is found to contain when its value is split on spaces, with the order preserved but with duplicates removed (leaving only the first occurrence of each name).

Within an item, the properties are unordered with respect to each other, except for properties with the same name, which are ordered in the order they are given by the algorithm that defines the properties of an item.

In the following example, the "a" property has the values "1" and "2", in that order, but whether the "a" property comes before the "b" property or not is not important:

    <div itemscope>
     <p itemprop="a">1</p>
     <p itemprop="a">2</p>
     <p itemprop="b">test</p>
    </div>

Thus, the following is equivalent:

    <div itemscope>
     <p itemprop="b">test</p>
     <p itemprop="a">1</p>
     <p itemprop="a">2</p>
    </div>

As is the following:

    <div itemscope>
     <p itemprop="a">1</p>
     <p itemprop="b">test</p>
     <p itemprop="a">2</p>
    </div>

And the following:

    <div id="x">
     <p itemprop="a">1</p>
    </div>
    <div itemscope itemref="x">
     <p itemprop="b">test</p>
     <p itemprop="a">2</p>
    </div>

#### 5.2.4 Values

The property value of a name-value pair added by an element with an `itemprop` attribute is as given for the first matching case in the following list:

If the element also has an `itemscope` attribute

  The value is the item created by the element.

If the element is a `meta` element

  The value is the value of the element's `content` attribute, if any, or the empty string if there is no such attribute.

If the element is an `audio`, `embed`, `iframe`, `img`, `source`, `track`, or `video` element

  The value is the absolute URL that results from resolving the value of the element's `src` attribute relative to the element at the time the attribute is set, or the empty string if there is no such attribute or if resolving it results in an error.

If the element is an `a`, `area`, or `link` element

  The value is the absolute URL that results from resolving the value of the element's `href` attribute relative to the element at the time the attribute is set, or the empty string if there is no such attribute or if resolving it results in an error.

If the element is an `object` element

  The value is the absolute URL that results from resolving the value of the element's `data` attribute relative to the element at the time the attribute is set, or the empty string if there is no such attribute or if resolving it results in an error.

If the element is a `data` element

  The value is the value of the element's `value` attribute, if it has one, or the empty string otherwise.

If the element is a `meter` element

  The value is the value of the element's `value` attribute, if it has one, or the empty string otherwise.

If the element is a `time` element

  The value is the element's datetime value.

Otherwise

  The value is the element's `textContent`.

The URL property elements are the `a`, `area`, `audio`, `embed`, `iframe`, `img`, `link`, `object`, `source`, `track`, and `video` elements.

If a property's value, as defined by the property's definition, is an absolute URL, the property must be specified using a URL property element.

These requirements do not apply just because a property value happens to match the syntax for a URL. They only apply if the property is explicitly defined as taking such a value.

For example, a book about the first moon landing could be called "mission:moon". A "title" property from a vocabulary that defines a title as being a string would not expect the title to be given in an `a` element, even though it looks like a URL. On the other hand, if there was a (rather narrowly scoped!) vocabulary for "books whose titles look like URLs" which had a "title" property defined to take a URL, then the property would expect the title to be given in an `a` element (or one of the other URL property elements), because of the requirement above.

#### 5.2.5 Associating names with items

To find the properties of an item defined by the element root, the user agent must run the following steps. These steps are also used to flag microdata errors.

1. Let results, memory, and pending be empty lists of elements.

2. Add the element root to memory.

3. Add the child elements of root, if any, to pending.

4. If root has an `itemref` attribute, split the value of that `itemref` attribute on spaces. For each resulting token ID, if there is an element in the home subtree of root with the ID ID, then add the first such element to pending.

5. Loop: If pending is empty, jump to the step labeled end of loop.

6. Remove an element from pending and let current be that element.

7. If current is already in memory, there is a microdata error; return to the step labeled loop.

8. Add current to memory.

9. If current does not have an `itemscope` attribute, then: add all the child elements of current to pending.

10. If current has an `itemprop` attribute specified and has one or more property names, then add current to results.

11. Return to the step labeled loop.

12. End of loop: Sort results in tree order.

13. Return results.

A document must not contain any items for which the algorithm to find the properties of an item finds any microdata errors.

An item is a top-level microdata item if its element does not have an `itemprop` attribute.

All `itemref` attributes in a `Document` must be such that there are no cycles in the graph formed from representing each item in the `Document` as a node in the graph and each property of an item whose value is another item as an edge in the graph connecting those two items.

A document must not contain any elements that have an `itemprop` attribute that would not be found to be a property of any of the items in that document were their properties all to be determined.

In this example, a single license statement is applied to two works, using `itemref` from the items representing the works:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Photo gallery</title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <h1>My photos</h1>
      <figure itemscope itemtype="http://n.whatwg.org/work" itemref="licenses">
       <img itemprop="work" src="images/house.jpeg" alt="A white house, boarded up, sits in a forest.">
       <figcaption itemprop="title">The house I found.</figcaption>
      </figure>
      <figure itemscope itemtype="http://n.whatwg.org/work" itemref="licenses">
       <img itemprop="work" src="images/mailbox.jpeg" alt="Outside the house is a mailbox. It has a leaflet inside.">
       <figcaption itemprop="title">The mailbox.</figcaption>
      </figure>
      <footer>
       <p id="licenses">All images licensed under the <a itemprop="license"
       href="http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php">MIT
       license</a>.</p>
      </footer>
     </body>
    </html>

The above results in two items with the type "`http://n.whatwg.org/work`", one with:

work
  `images/house.jpeg`
title
  The house I found.
license
  `http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php`

...and one with:

work
  `images/mailbox.jpeg`
title
  The mailbox.
license
  `http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php`

#### 5.2.6 Microdata and other namespaces

Currently, the `itemscope`, `itemprop`, and other microdata attributes are only defined for HTML elements. This means that attributes with the literal names "`itemscope`", "`itemprop`", etc, do not cause microdata processing to occur on elements in other namespaces, such as SVG.

Thus, in the following example there is only one item, not two.

    <p itemscope></p> <!-- this is an item (with no properties and no type) -->
    <svg itemscope></svg> <!-- this is not, it's just an svg element with an invalid unknown attribute -->

### 5.3 Microdata DOM API

document . `getItems`( [ types ] )

  Returns a `NodeList` of the elements in the `Document` that create items, that are not part of other items, and that are of the types given in the argument, if any are listed.

  The types argument is interpreted as a space-separated list of types.

element . `properties`

  If the element has an `itemscope` attribute, returns an `HTMLPropertiesCollection` object with all the element's properties. Otherwise, an empty `HTMLPropertiesCollection` object.

element . `itemValue` [ = value ]

  Returns the element's value.

  Can be set, to change the element's value. Setting the value when the element has no `itemprop` attribute or when the element's value is an item throws an `InvalidAccessError` exception.

The `document.getItems(typeNames)` method takes a string that contains an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are case-sensitive, representing types. When called, the method must return a live `NodeList` object containing all the elements in the document, in tree order, that are each top-level microdata items whose types include all the types specified in the method's argument, having obtained the types by splitting the string on spaces. If there are no tokens specified in the argument, then the method must return a `NodeList` containing all the top-level microdata items in the document. When the method is invoked on a `Document` object again with the same argument, the user agent may return the same object as the object returned by the earlier call. In other cases, a new `NodeList` object must be returned.

The `itemScope` IDL attribute on HTML elements must reflect the `itemscope` content attribute. The `itemType` IDL attribute on HTML elements must reflect the `itemtype` content attribute. The `itemId` IDL attribute on HTML elements must reflect the `itemid` content attribute. The `itemProp` IDL attribute on HTML elements must reflect the `itemprop` content attribute. The `itemRef` IDL attribute on HTML elements must reflect the `itemref` content attribute.

The `properties` IDL attribute on HTML elements must return an `HTMLPropertiesCollection` rooted at the element's root element (which element this is might change during the collection's lifetime, as the element moves between different subtrees), whose filter matches only elements that are the properties of the item created by the element on which the attribute was invoked, while that element is an item, and matches nothing the rest of the time.

The `itemValue` IDL attribute's behavior depends on the element, as follows:

If the element has no `itemprop` attribute

  The attribute must return null on getting and must throw an `InvalidAccessError` exception on setting.

If the element has an `itemscope` attribute

  The attribute must return the element itself on getting and must throw an `InvalidAccessError` exception on setting.

If the element is a `meta` element

  The attribute must act as it would if it was reflecting the element's `content` content attribute.

If the element is an `audio`, `embed`, `iframe`, `img`, `source`, `track`, or `video` element

  The attribute must act as it would if it was reflecting the element's `src` content attribute.

If the element is an `a`, `area`, or `link` element

  The attribute must act as it would if it was reflecting the element's `href` content attribute.

If the element is an `object` element

  The attribute must act as it would if it was reflecting the element's `data` content attribute.

If the element is a `data` element

  The attribute must act as it would if it was reflecting the element's `value` content attribute.

If the element is a `meter` element

  The attribute must act as it would if it was reflecting the element's `value` content attribute.

If the element is a `time` element

  On getting, if the element has a `datetime` content attribute, the IDL attribute must return that content attribute's value; otherwise, it must return the element's `textContent`. On setting, the IDL attribute must act as it would if it was reflecting the element's `datetime` content attribute.

Otherwise

  The attribute must act the same as the element's `textContent` attribute.

When the `itemValue` IDL attribute is reflecting a content attribute or acting like the element's `textContent` attribute, the user agent must, on setting, convert the new value to the IDL `DOMString` value before using it according to the mappings described above.

In this example, a script checks to see if a particular element element is declaring a particular property, and if it is, it increments a counter:

    if (element.itemProp.contains('color'))
      count += 1;

This script iterates over each of the values of an element's `itemref` attribute, calling a function for each referenced element:

    for (var index = 0; index < element.itemRef.length; index += 1)
      process(document.getElementById(element.itemRef[index]));

### 5.4 Sample microdata vocabularies

The vocabularies in this section are primarily intended to demonstrate how a vocabulary is specified, though they are also usable in their own right.

#### 5.4.1 vCard

An item with the item type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard` represents a person's or organization's contact information.

This vocabulary does not support global identifiers for items.

The following are the type's defined property names. They are based on the vocabulary defined in the vCard 4.0 specification and its extensions, where more information on how to interpret the values can be found. [RFC6350]

`kind`

  Describes what kind of contact the item represents.

  The value must be text that, when compared in a case-sensitive manner, is equal to one of the kind strings.

  A single property with the name `kind` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`fn`

  Gives the formatted text corresponding to the name of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  Exactly one property with the name `fn` must be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`n`

  Gives the structured name of the person or organization.

  The value must be an item with zero or more of each of the `family-name`, `given-name`, `additional-name`, `honorific-prefix`, and `honorific-suffix` properties.

  Exactly one property with the name `n` must be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`family-name` (inside `n`)

  Gives the family name of the person, or the full name of the organization.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `family-name` may be present within the item that forms the value of the `n` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`given-name` (inside `n`)

  Gives the given-name of the person.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `given-name` may be present within the item that forms the value of the `n` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`additional-name` (inside `n`)

  Gives the any additional names of the person.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `additional-name` may be present within the item that forms the value of the `n` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`honorific-prefix` (inside `n`)

  Gives the honorific prefix of the person.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `honorific-prefix` may be present within the item that forms the value of the `n` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`honorific-suffix` (inside `n`)

  Gives the honorific suffix of the person.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `honorific-suffix` may be present within the item that forms the value of the `n` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`nickname`

  Gives the nickname of the person or organization.

  The nickname is the descriptive name given instead of or in addition to the one belonging to a person, place, or thing. It can also be used to specify a familiar form of a proper name specified by the `fn` or `n` properties.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `nickname` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`photo`

  Gives a photograph of the person or organization.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Any number of properties with the name `photo` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`bday`

  Gives the birth date of the person or organization.

  The value must be a valid date string.

  A single property with the name `bday` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`anniversary`

  Gives the birth date of the person or organization.

  The value must be a valid date string.

  A single property with the name `anniversary` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`sex`

  Gives the biological sex of the person.

  The value must be one of `F`, meaning "female", `M`, meaning "male", `N`, meaning "none or not applicable", `O`, meaning "other", or `U`, meaning "unknown".

  A single property with the name `sex` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`gender-identity`

  Gives the gender identity of the person.

  The value must be text.

  A single property with the name `gender-identity` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`adr`

  Gives the delivery address of the person or organization.

  The value must be an item with zero or more `type`, `post-office-box`, `extended-address`, and `street-address` properties, and optionally a `locality` property, optionally a `region` property, optionally a `postal-code` property, and optionally a `country-name` property.

  If no `type` properties are present within an item that forms the value of an `adr` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`, then the address type string `work` is implied.

  Any number of properties with the name `adr` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`type` (inside `adr`)

  Gives the type of delivery address.

  The value must be text that, when compared in a case-sensitive manner, is equal to one of the address type strings.

  Any number of properties with the name `type` may be present within the item that forms the value of an `adr` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`, but within each such `adr` property item there must only be one `type` property per distinct value.

`post-office-box` (inside `adr`)

  Gives the post office box component of the delivery address of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `post-office-box` may be present within the item that forms the value of an `adr` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

  The vCard specification urges authors not to use this field.

`extended-address` (inside `adr`)

  Gives an additional component of the delivery address of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `extended-address` may be present within the item that forms the value of an `adr` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

  The vCard specification urges authors not to use this field.

`street-address` (inside `adr`)

  Gives the street address component of the delivery address of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `street-address` may be present within the item that forms the value of an `adr` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`locality` (inside `adr`)

  Gives the locality component (e.g. city) of the delivery address of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  A single property with the name `locality` may be present within the item that forms the value of an `adr` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`region` (inside `adr`)

  Gives the region component (e.g. state or province) of the delivery address of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  A single property with the name `region` may be present within the item that forms the value of an `adr` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`postal-code` (inside `adr`)

  Gives the postal code component of the delivery address of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  A single property with the name `postal-code` may be present within the item that forms the value of an `adr` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`country-name` (inside `adr`)

  Gives the country name component of the delivery address of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  A single property with the name `country-name` may be present within the item that forms the value of an `adr` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`tel`

  Gives the telephone number of the person or organization.

  The value must be either text that can be interpreted as a telephone number as defined in the CCITT specifications E.163 and X.121, or an item with zero or more `type` properties and exactly one `value` property. [E163] [X121]

  If no `type` properties are present within an item that forms the value of a `tel` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`, or if the value of such a `tel` property is text, then the telephone type string `voice` is implied.

  Any number of properties with the name `tel` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`type` (inside `tel`)

  Gives the type of telephone number.

  The value must be text that, when compared in a case-sensitive manner, is equal to one of the telephone type strings.

  Any number of properties with the name `type` may be present within the item that forms the value of a `tel` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`, but within each such `tel` property item there must only be one `type` property per distinct value.

`value` (inside `tel`)

  Gives the actual telephone number of the person or organization.

  The value must be text that can be interpreted as a telephone number as defined in the CCITT specifications E.163 and X.121. [E163] [X121]

  Exactly one property with the name `value` must be present within the item that forms the value of a `tel` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`email`

  Gives the e-mail address of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `email` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`impp`

  Gives a URL for instant messaging and presence protocol communications with the person or organization.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Any number of properties with the name `impp` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`lang`

  Gives a language understood by the person or organization.

  The value must be a valid BCP 47 language tag. [BCP47].

  Any number of properties with the name `lang` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`tz`

  Gives the time zone of the person or organization.

  The value must be text and must match the following syntax:

  1. Either a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) or a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-).
  2. A valid non-negative integer that is exactly two digits long and that represents a number in the range 00..23.
  3. A U+003A COLON character (:).
  4. A valid non-negative integer that is exactly two digits long and that represents a number in the range 00..59.

  Any number of properties with the name `tz` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`geo`

  Gives the geographical position of the person or organization.

  The value must be text and must match the following syntax:

  1. Optionally, either a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) or a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-).
  2. One or more ASCII digits.
  3. Optionally*, a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) followed by one or more ASCII digits.
  4. A U+003B SEMICOLON character (;).
  5. Optionally, either a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) or a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-).
  6. One or more ASCII digits.
  7. Optionally*, a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) followed by one or more ASCII digits.

  The optional components marked with an asterisk (*) should be included, and should have six digits each.

  The value specifies latitude and longitude, in that order (i.e., "LAT LON" ordering), in decimal degrees. The longitude represents the location east and west of the prime meridian as a positive or negative real number, respectively. The latitude represents the location north and south of the equator as a positive or negative real number, respectively.

  Any number of properties with the name `geo` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`title`

  Gives the job title, functional position or function of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `title` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`role`

  Gives the role, occupation, or business category of the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `role` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`logo`

  Gives the logo of the person or organization.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Any number of properties with the name `logo` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`agent`

  Gives the contact information of another person who will act on behalf of the person or organization.

  The value must be either an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`, or an absolute URL, or text.

  Any number of properties with the name `agent` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`org`

  Gives the name and units of the organization.

  The value must be either text or an item with one `organization-name` property and zero or more `organization-unit` properties.

  Any number of properties with the name `org` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`organization-name` (inside `org`)

  Gives the name of the organization.

  The value must be text.

  Exactly one property with the name `organization-name` must be present within the item that forms the value of an `org` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`organization-unit` (inside `org`)

  Gives the name of the organization unit.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `organization-unit` may be present within the item that forms the value of the `org` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`member`

  Gives a URL that represents a member of the group.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Any number of properties with the name `member` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard` if the item also has a property with the name `kind` whose value is "`group`".

`related`

  Gives a relationship to another entity.

  The value must an item with one `url` property and one `rel` properties.

  Any number of properties with the name `orrelated` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`url` (inside `related`)

  Gives the URL for the related entity.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Exactly one property with the name `url` must be present within the item that forms the value of a `related` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`rel` (inside `related`)

  Gives the relationship between the entity and the related entity.

  The value must be text that, when compared in a case-sensitive manner, is equal to one of the relationship strings.

  Exactly one property with the name `rel` must be present within the item that forms the value of a `related` property of an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`categories`

  Gives the name of a category or tag that the person or organization could be classified as.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `categories` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`note`

  Gives supplemental information or a comment about the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `note` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`rev`

  Gives the revision date and time of the contact information.

  The value must be text that is a valid global date and time string.

  The value distinguishes the current revision of the information for other renditions of the information.

  Any number of properties with the name `rev` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`sound`

  Gives a sound file relating to the person or organization.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Any number of properties with the name `sound` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`uid`

  Gives a globally unique identifier corresponding to the person or organization.

  The value must be text.

  A single property with the name `uid` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

`url`

  Gives a URL relating to the person or organization.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Any number of properties with the name `url` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

The kind strings are:

`individual`

  Indicates a single entity (e.g. a person).

`group`

  Indicates multiple entities (e.g. a mailing list).

`org`

  Indicates a single entity that is not a person (e.g. a company).

`location`

  Indicates a geographical place (e.g. an office building).

The address type strings are:

`home`

  Indicates a delivery address for a residence.

`work`

  Indicates a delivery address for a place of work.

The telephone type strings are:

`home`

  Indicates a residential number.

`work`

  Indicates a telephone number for a place of work.

`text`

  Indicates that the telephone number supports text messages (SMS).

`voice`

  Indicates a voice telephone number.

`fax`

  Indicates a facsimile telephone number.

`cell`

  Indicates a cellular telephone number.

`video`

  Indicates a video conferencing telephone number.

`pager`

  Indicates a paging device telephone number.

`textphone`

  Indicates a telecommunication device for people with hearing or speech difficulties.

The relationship strings are:

`emergency`

  An emergency contact.

`agent`

  Another entity that acts on behalf of this entity.

contact
acquaintance
friend
met
worker
colleague
resident
neighbor
child
parent
sibling
spouse
kin
muse
crush
date
sweetheart
me

  Has the meaning defined in XFN. [XFN]

##### 5.4.1.1 Conversion to vCard

Given a list of nodes nodes in a `Document`, a user agent must run the following algorithm to extract any vCard data represented by those nodes (only the first vCard is returned):

1. If none of the nodes in nodes are items with the item type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`, then there is no vCard. Abort the algorithm, returning nothing.

2. Let node be the first node in nodes that is an item with the item type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`.

3. Let output be an empty string.

4. Add a vCard line with the type "`BEGIN`" and the value "`VCARD`" to output.

5. Add a vCard line with the type "`PROFILE`" and the value "`VCARD`" to output.

6. Add a vCard line with the type "`VERSION`" and the value "`4.0`" to output.

7. Add a vCard line with the type "`SOURCE`" and the result of escaping the vCard text string that is the document's address as the value to output.

8. If the `title` element is not null, add a vCard line with the type "`NAME`" and with the result of escaping the vCard text string obtained from the `textContent` of the `title` element as the value to output.

9. Let sex be the empty string.

10. Let gender-identity be the empty string.

11. For each element element that is a property of the item node: for each name name in element's property names, run the following substeps:

    1. Let parameters be an empty set of name-value pairs.

    2. Run the appropriate set of substeps from the following list. The steps will set a variable value, which is used in the next step.

       If the property's value is an item subitem and name is `n`

         1. Let value be the empty string.

         2. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `family-name` in subitem.

         3. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         4. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `given-name` in subitem.

         5. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         6. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `additional-name` in subitem.

         7. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         8. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `honorific-prefix` in subitem.

         9. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         10. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `honorific-suffix` in subitem.

       If the property's value is an item subitem and name is `adr`

         1. Let value be the empty string.

         2. Append to value the result of collecting vCard subproperties named `post-office-box` in subitem.

         3. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         4. Append to value the result of collecting vCard subproperties named `extended-address` in subitem.

         5. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         6. Append to value the result of collecting vCard subproperties named `street-address` in subitem.

         7. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         8. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `locality` in subitem.

         9. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         10. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `region` in subitem.

         11. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         12. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `postal-code` in subitem.

         13. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

         14. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `country-name` in subitem.

         15. If there is a property named `type` in subitem, and the first such property has a value that is not an item and whose value consists only of alphanumeric ASCII characters, then add a parameter named "`TYPE`" whose value is the value of that property to parameters.

       If the property's value is an item subitem and name is `org`

         1. Let value be the empty string.

         2. Append to value the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `organization-name` in subitem.

         3. For each property named `organization-unit` in subitem, run the following steps:

            1. If the value of the property is an item, then skip this property.

            2. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to value.

            3. Append the result of escaping the vCard text string given by the value of the property to value.

       If the property's value is an item subitem with the item type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard` and name is `related`

         1. Let value be the empty string.

         2. If there is a property named `url` in subitem, and its element is a URL property element, then append the result of escaping the vCard text string given by the value of the first such property to value, and add a parameter with the name "`VALUE`" and the value "`URI`" to parameters.

         3. If there is a property named `rel` in subitem, and the first such property has a value that is not an item and whose value consists only of alphanumeric ASCII characters, then add a parameter named "`RELATION`" whose value is the value of that property to parameters.

       If the property's value is an item and name is none of the above

         1. Let value be the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named `value` in subitem.

         2. If there is a property named `type` in subitem, and the first such property has a value that is not an item and whose value consists only of alphanumeric ASCII characters, then add a parameter named "`TYPE`" whose value is the value of that property to parameters.

       If the property's value is not an item and its name is `sex`

         If this is the first such property to be found, set sex to the property's value.

       If the property's value is not an item and its name is `gender-identity`

         If this is the first such property to be found, set gender-identity to the property's value.

       Otherwise (the property's value is not an item)

         1. Let value be the property's value.

         2. If element is one of the URL property elements, add a parameter with the name "`VALUE`" and the value "`URI`" to parameters.

         3. Otherwise, if name is `bday` or `anniversary` and the value is a valid date string, add a parameter with the name "`VALUE`" and the value "`DATE`" to parameters.

         4. Otherwise, if name is `rev` and the value is a valid global date and time string, add a parameter with the name "`VALUE`" and the value "`DATE-TIME`" to parameters.

         5. Prefix every U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) in value with another U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\).

         6. Prefix every U+002C COMMA character (,) in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\).

         7. Unless name is `geo`, prefix every U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\).

         8. Replace every U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED character pair (CRLF) in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) followed by a U+006E LATIN SMALL LETTER N character (n).

         9. Replace every remaining U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) or U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) followed by a U+006E LATIN SMALL LETTER N character (n).

    3. Add a vCard line with the type name, the parameters parameters, and the value value to output.

12. If either sex or gender-identity has a value that is not the empty string, add a vCard line with the type "`GENDER`" and the value consisting of the concatenation of sex, a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;), and gender-identity to output.

13. Add a vCard line with the type "`END`" and the value "`VCARD`" to output.

When the above algorithm says that the user agent is to add a vCard line consisting of a type type, optionally some parameters, and a value value to a string output, it must run the following steps:

1. Let line be an empty string.

2. Append type, converted to ASCII uppercase, to line.

3. If there are any parameters, then for each parameter, in the order that they were added, run these substeps:

   1. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to line.

   2. Append the parameter's name to line.

   3. Append a U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=) to line.

   4. Append the parameter's value to line.

4. Append a U+003A COLON character (:) to line.

5. Append value to line.

6. Let maximum length be 75.

7. If and while line is longer than maximum length Unicode code points long, run the following substeps:

   1. Append the first maximum length Unicode code points of line to output.

   2. Remove the first maximum length Unicode code points from line.

   3. Append a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN character (CR) to output.

   4. Append a U+000A LINE FEED character (LF) to output.

   5. Append a U+0020 SPACE character to output.

   6. Let maximum length be 74.

8. Append (what remains of) line to output.

9. Append a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN character (CR) to output.

10. Append a U+000A LINE FEED character (LF) to output.

When the steps above require the user agent to obtain the result of collecting vCard subproperties named subname in subitem, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let value be the empty string.

2. For each property named subname in the item subitem, run the following substeps:

   1. If the value of the property is itself an item, then skip this property.

   2. If this is not the first property named subname in subitem (ignoring any that were skipped by the previous step), then append a U+002C COMMA character (,) to value.

   3. Append the result of escaping the vCard text string given by the value of the property to value.

3. Return value.

When the steps above require the user agent to obtain the result of collecting the first vCard subproperty named subname in subitem, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If there are no properties named subname in subitem, then abort these substeps, returning the empty string.

2. If the value of the first property named subname in subitem is an item, then abort these substeps, returning the empty string.

3. Return the result of escaping the vCard text string given by the value of the first property named subname in subitem.

When the above algorithms say the user agent is to escape the vCard text string value, the user agent must use the following steps:

1. Prefix every U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) in value with another U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\).

2. Prefix every U+002C COMMA character (,) in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\).

3. Prefix every U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\).

4. Replace every U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED character pair (CRLF) in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) followed by a U+006E LATIN SMALL LETTER N character (n).

5. Replace every remaining U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) or U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) followed by a U+006E LATIN SMALL LETTER N character (n).

6. Return the mutated value.

This algorithm can generate invalid vCard output, if the input does not conform to the rules described for the `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard` item type and defined property names.

##### 5.4.1.2 Examples

This section is non-normative.

Here is a long example vCard for a fictional character called "Jack Bauer":

    <section id="jack" itemscope itemtype="http://microformats.org/profile/hcard">
     <h1 itemprop="fn">
      <span itemprop="n" itemscope>
       <span itemprop="given-name">Jack</span>
       <span itemprop="family-name">Bauer</span>
      </span>
     </h1>
     <img itemprop="photo" alt="" src="jack-bauer.jpg">
     <p itemprop="org" itemscope>
      <span itemprop="organization-name">Counter-Terrorist Unit</span>
      (<span itemprop="organization-unit">Los Angeles Division</span>)
     </p>
     <p>
      <span itemprop="adr" itemscope>
       <span itemprop="street-address">10201 W. Pico Blvd.</span><br>
       <span itemprop="locality">Los Angeles</span>,
       <span itemprop="region">CA</span>
       <span itemprop="postal-code">90064</span><br>
       <span itemprop="country-name">United States</span><br>
      </span>
      <span itemprop="geo">34.052339;-118.410623</span>
     </p>
     <h2>Assorted Contact Methods</h2>
     <ul>
      <li itemprop="tel" itemscope>
       <span itemprop="value">+1 (310) 597 3781</span> <span itemprop="type">work</span>
       <meta itemprop="type" content="voice">
      </li>
      <li><a itemprop="url" href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jack_Bauer">I'm on Wikipedia</a>
      so you can leave a message on my user talk page.</li>
      <li><a itemprop="url" href="http://www.jackbauerfacts.com/">Jack Bauer Facts</a></li>
      <li itemprop="email"><a href="mailto:j.bauer@la.ctu.gov.invalid">j.bauer@la.ctu.gov.invalid</a></li>
      <li itemprop="tel" itemscope>
       <span itemprop="value">+1 (310) 555 3781</span> <span>
       <meta itemprop="type" content="cell">mobile phone</span>
      </li>
     </ul>
     <ins datetime="2008-07-20 21:00:00+01:00">
      <meta itemprop="rev" content="2008-07-20 21:00:00+01:00">
      <p itemprop="tel" itemscope><strong>Update!</strong>
      My new <span itemprop="type">home</span> phone number is
      <span itemprop="value">01632 960 123</span>.</p>
     </ins>
    </section>

The odd line wrapping is needed because newlines are meaningful in microdata: newlines would be preserved in a conversion to, for example, the vCard format.

This example shows a site's contact details (using the `address` element) containing an address with two street components:

    <address itemscope itemtype="http://microformats.org/profile/hcard">
     <strong itemprop="fn"><span itemprop="n" itemscope><span itemprop="given-name">Alfred</span>
     <span itemprop="family-name">Person</span></span></strong> <br>
     <span itemprop="adr" itemscope>
      <span itemprop="street-address">1600 Amphitheatre Parkway</span> <br>
      <span itemprop="street-address">Building 43, Second Floor</span> <br>
      <span itemprop="locality">Mountain View</span>,
       <span itemprop="region">CA</span> <span itemprop="postal-code">94043</span>
     </span>
    </address>

The vCard vocabulary can be used to just mark up people's names:

    <span itemscope itemtype="http://microformats.org/profile/hcard"
    ><span itemprop=fn><span itemprop="n" itemscope><span itemprop="given-name"
    >George</span> <span itemprop="family-name">Washington</span></span
    ></span></span>

This creates a single item with a two name-value pairs, one with the name "fn" and the value "George Washington", and the other with the name "n" and a second item as its value, the second item having the two name-value pairs "given-name" and "family-name" with the values "George" and "Washington" respectively. This is defined to map to the following vCard:

    BEGIN:VCARD
    PROFILE:VCARD
    VERSION:4.0
    SOURCE:document's address
    FN:George Washington
    N:Washington;George;;;
    END:VCARD

#### 5.4.2 vEvent

An item with the item type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent` represents an event.

This vocabulary does not support global identifiers for items.

The following are the type's defined property names. They are based on the vocabulary defined in the iCalendar specification, where more information on how to interpret the values can be found. [RFC2445]

Only the parts of the iCalendar vocabulary relating to events are used here; this vocabulary cannot express a complete iCalendar instance.

`attach`

  Gives the address of an associated document for the event.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Any number of properties with the name `attach` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`categories`

  Gives the name of a category or tag that the event could be classified as.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `categories` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`class`

  Gives the access classification of the information regarding the event.

  The value must be text with one of the following values:

  - `public`
  - `private`
  - `confidential`

  This is merely advisory and cannot be considered a confidentiality measure.

  A single property with the name `class` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`comment`

  Gives a comment regarding the event.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `comment` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`description`

  Gives a detailed description of the event.

  The value must be text.

  A single property with the name `description` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`geo`

  Gives the geographical position of the event.

  The value must be text and must match the following syntax:

  1. Optionally, either a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) or a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-).
  2. One or more ASCII digits.
  3. Optionally*, a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) followed by one or more ASCII digits.
  4. A U+003B SEMICOLON character (;).
  5. Optionally, either a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+) or a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-).
  6. One or more ASCII digits.
  7. Optionally*, a U+002E FULL STOP character (.) followed by one or more ASCII digits.

  The optional components marked with an asterisk (*) should be included, and should have six digits each.

  The value specifies latitude and longitude, in that order (i.e., "LAT LON" ordering), in decimal degrees. The longitude represents the location east and west of the prime meridian as a positive or negative real number, respectively. The latitude represents the location north and south of the equator as a positive or negative real number, respectively.

  A single property with the name `geo` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`location`

  Gives the location of the event.

  The value must be text.

  A single property with the name `location` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`resources`

  Gives a resource that will be needed for the event.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `resources` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`status`

  Gives the confirmation status of the event.

  The value must be text with one of the following values:

  - `tentative`
  - `confirmed`
  - `cancelled`

  A single property with the name `status` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`summary`

  Gives a short summary of the event.

  The value must be text.

  User agents should replace U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters in the value by U+0020 SPACE characters when using the value.

  A single property with the name `summary` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`dtend`

  Gives the date and time by which the event ends.

  If the property with the name `dtend` is present within an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent` that has a property with the name `dtstart` whose value is a valid date string, then the value of the property with the name `dtend` must be text that is a valid date string also. Otherwise, the value of the property must be text that is a valid global date and time string.

  In either case, the value be later in time than the value of the `dtstart` property of the same item.

  The time given by the `dtend` property is not inclusive. For day-long events, therefore, the `dtend` property's value will be the day after the end of the event.

  A single property with the name `dtend` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`, so long as that `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent` does not have a property with the name `duration`.

`dtstart`

  Gives the date and time at which the event starts.

  The value must be text that is either a valid date string or a valid global date and time string.

  Exactly one property with the name `dtstart` must be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`duration`

  Gives the duration of the event.

  The value must be text that is a valid vevent duration string.

  The duration represented is the sum of all the durations represented by integers in the value.

  A single property with the name `duration` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`, so long as that `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent` does not have a property with the name `dtend`.

`transp`

  Gives whether the event is to be considered as consuming time on a calendar, for the purpose of free-busy time searches.

  The value must be text with one of the following values:

  - `opaque`
  - `transparent`

  A single property with the name `transp` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`contact`

  Gives the contact information for the event.

  The value must be text.

  Any number of properties with the name `contact` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`url`

  Gives a URL for the event.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  A single property with the name `url` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`uid`

  Gives a globally unique identifier corresponding to the event.

  The value must be text.

  A single property with the name `uid` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`exdate`

  Gives a date and time at which the event does not occur despite the recurrence rules.

  The value must be text that is either a valid date string or a valid global date and time string.

  Any number of properties with the name `exdate` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`exrule`

  Gives a rule for finding dates and times at which the event does not occur despite the recurrence rules.

  The value must be text that matches the RECUR value type defined in the iCalendar specification. [RFC2445]

  Any number of properties with the name `exrule` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`rdate`

  Gives a date and time at which the event recurs.

  The value must be text that is one of the following:

  - A valid date string.
  - A valid global date and time string.
  - A valid global date and time string followed by a U+002F SOLIDUS character (/) followed by a second valid global date and time string representing a later time.
  - A valid global date and time string followed by a U+002F SOLIDUS character (/) followed by a valid vevent duration string.

  Any number of properties with the name `rdate` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`rrule`

  Gives a rule for finding dates and times at which the event occurs.

  The value must be text that matches the RECUR value type defined in the iCalendar specification. [RFC2445]

  Any number of properties with the name `rrule` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`created`

  Gives the date and time at which the event information was first created in a calendaring system.

  The value must be text that is a valid global date and time string.

  A single property with the name `created` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`last-modified`

  Gives the date and time at which the event information was last modified in a calendaring system.

  The value must be text that is a valid global date and time string.

  A single property with the name `last-modified` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

`sequence`

  Gives a revision number for the event information.

  The value must be text that is a valid non-negative integer.

  A single property with the name `sequence` may be present within each item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`.

A string is a valid vevent duration string if it matches the following pattern:

1. A U+0050 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P character (P).
2. One of the following:
   - A valid non-negative integer followed by a U+0057 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W character (W). The integer represents a duration of that number of weeks.
   - At least one, and possible both in this order, of the following:
     1. A valid non-negative integer followed by a U+0044 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D character (D). The integer represents a duration of that number of days.
     2. A U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T character (T) followed by any one of the following, or the first and second of the following in that order, or the second and third of the following in that order, or all three of the following in this order:
        1. A valid non-negative integer followed by a U+0048 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H character (H). The integer represents a duration of that number of hours.
        2. A valid non-negative integer followed by a U+004D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M character (M). The integer represents a duration of that number of minutes.
        3. A valid non-negative integer followed by a U+0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S character (S). The integer represents a duration of that number of seconds.

##### 5.4.2.1 Conversion to iCalendar

Given a list of nodes nodes in a `Document`, a user agent must run the following algorithm to extract any vEvent data represented by those nodes:

1. If none of the nodes in nodes are items with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`, then there is no vEvent data. Abort the algorithm, returning nothing.

2. Let output be an empty string.

3. Add an iCalendar line with the type "`BEGIN`" and the value "`VCALENDAR`" to output.

4. Add an iCalendar line with the type "`PRODID`" and the value equal to a user-agent-specific string representing the user agent to output.

5. Add an iCalendar line with the type "`VERSION`" and the value "`2.0`" to output.

6. For each node node in nodes that is an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent`, run the following steps:

   1. Add an iCalendar line with the type "`BEGIN`" and the value "`VEVENT`" to output.

   2. Add an iCalendar line with the type "`DTSTAMP`" and a value consisting of an iCalendar DATE-TIME string representing the current date and time, with the annotation "`VALUE=DATE-TIME`", to output. [RFC2445]

   3. For each element element that is a property of the item node: for each name name in element's property names, run the appropriate set of substeps from the following list:

      If the property's value is an item

        Skip the property.

      If the property is `dtend`
      If the property is `dtstart`
      If the property is `exdate`
      If the property is `rdate`
      If the property is `created`
      If the property is `last-modified`

        Let value be the result of stripping all U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-) and U+003A COLON (:) characters from the property's value.

        If the property's value is a valid date string then add an iCalendar line with the type name and the value value to output, with the annotation "`VALUE=DATE`".

        Otherwise, if the property's value is a valid global date and time string then add an iCalendar line with the type name and the value value to output, with the annotation "`VALUE=DATE-TIME`".

        Otherwise skip the property.

      Otherwise

        Add an iCalendar line with the type name and the property's value to output.

   4. Add an iCalendar line with the type "`END`" and the value "`VEVENT`" to output.

7. Add an iCalendar line with the type "`END`" and the value "`VCALENDAR`" to output.

When the above algorithm says that the user agent is to add an iCalendar line consisting of a type type, a value value, and optionally an annotation, to a string output, it must run the following steps:

1. Let line be an empty string.

2. Append type, converted to ASCII uppercase, to line.

3. If there is an annotation:

   1. Append a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) to line.

   2. Append the annotation to line.

4. Append a U+003A COLON character (:) to line.

5. Prefix every U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) in value with another U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\).

6. Prefix every U+002C COMMA character (,) in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\).

7. Prefix every U+003B SEMICOLON character (;) in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\).

8. Replace every U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED character pair (CRLF) in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) followed by a U+006E LATIN SMALL LETTER N character (n).

9. Replace every remaining U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) or U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character in value with a U+005C REVERSE SOLIDUS character (\) followed by a U+006E LATIN SMALL LETTER N character (n).

10. Append value to line.

11. Let maximum length be 75.

12. If and while line is longer than maximum length Unicode code points long, run the following substeps:

    1. Append the first maximum length Unicode code points of line to output.

    2. Remove the first maximum length Unicode code points from line.

    3. Append a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN character (CR) to output.

    4. Append a U+000A LINE FEED character (LF) to output.

    5. Append a U+0020 SPACE character to output.

    6. Let maximum length be 74.

13. Append (what remains of) line to output.

14. Append a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN character (CR) to output.

15. Append a U+000A LINE FEED character (LF) to output.

This algorithm can generate invalid iCalendar output, if the input does not conform to the rules described for the `http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent` item type and defined property names.

##### 5.4.2.2 Examples

This section is non-normative.

Here is an example of a page that uses the vEvent vocabulary to mark up an event:

    <body itemscope itemtype="http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent">
     ...
     <h1 itemprop="summary">Bluesday Tuesday: Money Road</h1>
     ...
     <time itemprop="dtstart" datetime="2009-05-05T19:00:00Z">May 5th @ 7pm</time>
     (until <time itemprop="dtend" datetime="2009-05-05T21:00:00Z">9pm</time>)
     ...
     <a href="http://livebrum.co.uk/2009/05/05/bluesday-tuesday-money-road"
        rel="bookmark" itemprop="url">Link to this page</a>
     ...
     <p>Location: <span itemprop="location">The RoadHouse</span></p>
     ...
     <p><input type=button value="Add to Calendar"
               onclick="location = getCalendar(this)"></p>
     ...
     <meta itemprop="description" content="via livebrum.co.uk">
    </body>

The "`getCalendar()`" method could look like this:

    function getCalendar(node) {
      // This function assumes the content is valid.
      // It is not a compliant implementation of the algorithm for extracting vEvent data.
      while (node && (!node.itemScope || !node.itemType.contains('http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent')))
        node = node.parentNode;
      if (!node) {
        alert('No event data found.');
        return;
      }
      var stamp = new Date();
      var stampString = '' + stamp.getUTCFullYear() + (stamp.getUTCMonth() + 1) + stamp.getUTCDate() + 'T' +
                             stamp.getUTCHours() + stamp.getUTCMinutes() + stamp.getUTCSeconds() + 'Z';
      var calendar = 'BEGIN:VCALENDAR\r\nPRODID:HTML\r\nVERSION:2.0\r\nBEGIN:VEVENT\r\nDTSTAMP:' + stampString + '\r\n';
      for (var propIndex = 0; propIndex < node.properties.length; propIndex += 1) {
        var prop = node.properties[propIndex];
        var value = prop.itemValue;
        var parameters = '';
        if (prop.localName == 'time') {
          value = value.replace(/[:-]/g, '');
          if (value.match(/T/))
            parameters = ';VALUE=DATE';
          else
            parameters = ';VALUE=DATE-TIME';
        } else {
          value = value.replace(/\\/g, '\\n');
          value = value.replace(/;/g, '\\;');
          value = value.replace(/,/g, '\\,');
          value = value.replace(/\n/g, '\\n');
        }
        for (var nameIndex = 0; nameIndex < prop.itemProp.length; nameIndex += 1) {
          var name = prop.itemProp[nameIndex];
          if (!name.match(/:/) && !name.match(/\./))
            calendar += name.toUpperCase() + parameters + ':' + value + '\r\n';
        }
      }
      calendar += 'END:VEVENT\r\nEND:VCALENDAR\r\n';
      return 'data:text/calendar;component=vevent,' + encodeURI(calendar);
    }

The same page could offer some markup, such as the following, for copy-and-pasting into blogs:

    <div itemscope itemtype="http://microformats.org/profile/hcalendar#vevent">
     <p>I'm going to
     <strong itemprop="summary">Bluesday Tuesday: Money Road</strong>,
     <time itemprop="dtstart" datetime="2009-05-05T19:00:00Z">May 5th at 7pm</time>
     to <time itemprop="dtend" datetime="2009-05-05T21:00:00Z">9pm</time>,
     at <span itemprop="location">The RoadHouse</span>!</p>
     <p><a href="http://livebrum.co.uk/2009/05/05/bluesday-tuesday-money-road"
           itemprop="url">See this event on livebrum.co.uk</a>.</p>
     <meta itemprop="description" content="via livebrum.co.uk">
    </div>

#### 5.4.3 Licensing works

An item with the item type `http://n.whatwg.org/work` represents a work (e.g. an article, an image, a video, a song, etc). This type is primarily intended to allow authors to include licensing information for works.

The following are the type's defined property names.

`work`

  Identifies the work being described.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Exactly one property with the name `work` must be present within each item with the type `http://n.whatwg.org/work`.

`title`

  Gives the name of the work.

  A single property with the name `title` may be present within each item with the type `http://n.whatwg.org/work`.

`author`

  Gives the name or contact information of one of the authors or creators of the work.

  The value must be either an item with the type `http://microformats.org/profile/hcard`, or text.

  Any number of properties with the name `author` may be present within each item with the type `http://n.whatwg.org/work`.

`license`

  Identifies one of the licenses under which the work is available.

  The value must be an absolute URL.

  Any number of properties with the name `license` may be present within each item with the type `http://n.whatwg.org/work`.

##### 5.4.3.1 Examples

This section is non-normative.

This example shows an embedded image entitled My Pond, licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 United States License and the MIT license simultaneously.

    <figure itemscope itemtype="http://n.whatwg.org/work">
     <img itemprop="work" src="mypond.jpeg">
     <figcaption>
      <p><cite itemprop="title">My Pond</cite></p>
      <p><small>Licensed under the <a itemprop="license"
      href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/us/">Creative
      Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 United States License</a>
      and the <a itemprop="license"
      href="http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php">MIT
      license</a>.</small>
     </figcaption>
    </figure>

### 5.5 Converting HTML to other formats

#### 5.5.1 JSON

Given a list of nodes nodes in a `Document`, a user agent must run the following algorithm to extract the microdata from those nodes into a JSON form:

1. Let result be an empty object.

2. Let items be an empty array.

3. For each node in nodes, check if the element is a top-level microdata item, and if it is then get the object for that element and add it to items.

4. Add an entry to result called "`items`" whose value is the array items.

5. Return the result of serialising result to JSON in the shortest possible way (meaning no whitespace between tokens, no unnecessary zero digits in numbers, and only using Unicode escapes in strings for characters that do not have a dedicated escape sequence), and with a lowercase "`e`" used, when appropriate, in the representation of any numbers. [JSON]

This algorithm returns an object with a single property that is an array, instead of just returning an array, so that it is possible to extend the algorithm in the future if necessary.

When the user agent is to get the object for an item item, optionally with a list of elements memory, it must run the following substeps:

1. Let result be an empty object.

2. If no memory was passed to the algorithm, let memory be an empty list.

3. Add item to memory.

4. If the item has any item types, add an entry to result called "`type`" whose value is an array listing the item types of item, in the order they were specified on the `itemtype` attribute.

5. If the item has a global identifier, add an entry to result called "`id`" whose value is the global identifier of item.

6. Let properties be an empty object.

7. For each element element that has one or more property names and is one of the properties of the item item, in the order those elements are given by the algorithm that returns the properties of an item, run the following substeps:

   1. Let value be the property value of element.

   2. If value is an item, then: If value is in memory, then let value be the string "`ERROR`". Otherwise, get the object for value, passing a copy of memory, and then replace value with the object returned from those steps.

   3. For each name name in element's property names, run the following substeps:

      1. If there is no entry named name in properties, then add an entry named name to properties whose value is an empty array.

      2. Append value to the entry named name in properties.

8. Add an entry to result called "`properties`" whose value is the object properties.

9. Return result.

For example, take this markup:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>My Blog</title>
    <article itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/BlogPosting">
     <header>
      <h1 itemprop="headline">Progress report</h1>
      <p><time itemprop="datePublished" datetime="2013-08-29">today</time></p>
      <link itemprop="url" href="?comments=0">
     </header>
     <p>All in all, he's doing well with his swim lessons. The biggest thing was he had trouble
     putting his head in, but we got it down.</p>
     <section>
      <h1>Comments</h1>
      <article itemprop="comment" itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/UserComments" id="c1">
       <link itemprop="url" href="#c1">
       <footer>
        <p>Posted by: <span itemprop="creator" itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/Person">
         <span itemprop="name">Greg</span>
        </span></p>
        <p><time itemprop="commentTime" datetime="2013-08-29">15 minutes ago</time></p>
       </footer>
       <p>Ha!</p>
      </article>
      <article itemprop="comment" itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/UserComments" id="c2">
       <link itemprop="url" href="#c2">
       <footer>
        <p>Posted by: <span itemprop="creator" itemscope itemtype="http://schema.org/Person">
         <span itemprop="name">Charlotte</span>
        </span></p>
        <p><time itemprop="commentTime" datetime="2013-08-29">5 minutes ago</time></p>
       </footer>
       <p>When you say "we got it down"...</p>
      </article>
     </section>
    </article>

It would be turned into the following JSON by the algorithm above (supposing that the page's URL was `http://blog.example.com/progress-report`):

    {
      "items": [
        {
          "type": [ "http://schema.org/BlogPosting" ],
          "properties": {
            "headline": [ "Progress report" ],
            "datePublished": [ "2013-08-29" ],
            "url": [ "http://blog.example.com/progress-report?comments=0" ],
            "comment": [
              {
                "type": [ "http://schema.org/UserComments" ],
                "properties": {
                  "url": [ "http://blog.example.com/progress-report#c1" ],
                  "creator": [
                    {
                      "type": [ "http://schema.org/Person" ],
                      "properties": {
                        "name": [ "Greg" ]
                      }
                    }
                  ],
                  "commentTime": [ "2013-08-29" ]
                }
              },
              {
                "type": [ "http://schema.org/UserComments" ],
                "properties": {
                  "url": [ "http://blog.example.com/progress-report#c2" ],
                  "creator": [
                    {
                      "type": [ "http://schema.org/Person" ],
                      "properties": {
                        "name": [ "Charlotte" ]
                      }
                    }
                  ],
                  "commentTime": [ "2013-08-29" ]
                }
              }
            ]
          }
        }
      ]
    }

## 6 User interaction

### 6.1 The `hidden` attribute

All HTML elements may have the `hidden` content attribute set. The `hidden` attribute is a boolean attribute. When specified on an element, it indicates that the element is not yet, or is no longer, directly relevant to the page's current state, or that it is being used to declare content to be reused by other parts of the page as opposed to being directly accessed by the user. User agents should not render elements that have the `hidden` attribute specified. This requirement may be implemented indirectly through the style layer. For example, an HTML+CSS user agent could implement these requirements using the rules suggested in the Rendering section.

Because this attribute is typically implemented using CSS, it's also possible to override it using CSS. For instance, a rule that applies 'display: block' to all elements will cancel the effects of the `hidden` attribute. Authors therefore have to take care when writing their style sheets to make sure that the attribute is still styled as expected.

In the following skeletal example, the attribute is used to hide the Web game's main screen until the user logs in:

      <h1>The Example Game</h1>
      <section id="login">
       <h2>Login</h2>
       <form>
        ...
        <!-- calls login() once the user's credentials have been checked -->
       </form>
       <script>
        function login() {
          // switch screens
          document.getElementById('login').hidden = true;
          document.getElementById('game').hidden = false;
        }
       </script>
      </section>
      <section id="game" hidden>
       ...
      </section>

The `hidden` attribute must not be used to hide content that could legitimately be shown in another presentation. For example, it is incorrect to use `hidden` to hide panels in a tabbed dialog, because the tabbed interface is merely a kind of overflow presentation — one could equally well just show all the form controls in one big page with a scrollbar. It is similarly incorrect to use this attribute to hide content just from one presentation — if something is marked `hidden`, it is hidden from all presentations, including, for instance, screen readers.

Elements that are not themselves `hidden` must not hyperlink to elements that are `hidden`. The `for` attributes of `label` and `output` elements that are not themselves `hidden` must similarly not refer to elements that are `hidden`. In both cases, such references would cause user confusion.

Elements and scripts may, however, refer to elements that are `hidden` in other contexts.

For example, it would be incorrect to use the `href` attribute to link to a section marked with the `hidden` attribute. If the content is not applicable or relevant, then there is no reason to link to it.

It would be fine, however, to use the ARIA `aria-describedby` attribute to refer to descriptions that are themselves `hidden`. While hiding the descriptions implies that they are not useful alone, they could be written in such a way that they are useful in the specific context of being referenced from the images that they describe.

Similarly, a `canvas` element with the `hidden` attribute could be used by a scripted graphics engine as an off-screen buffer, and a form control could refer to a hidden `form` element using its `form` attribute.

Elements in a section hidden by the `hidden` attribute are still active, e.g. scripts and form controls in such sections still execute and submit respectively. Only their presentation to the user changes.

The `hidden` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

### 6.2 Inert subtrees

A node (in particular elements and text nodes) can be marked as inert. When a node is inert, then the user agent must act as if the node was absent for the purposes of targeting user interaction events, may ignore the node for the purposes of text search user interfaces (commonly known as "find in page"), and may prevent the user from selecting text in that node. User agents should allow the user to override the restrictions on search and text selection, however.

For example, consider a page that consists of just a single inert paragraph positioned in the middle of a `body`. If a user moves their pointing device from the `body` over to the inert paragraph and clicks on the paragraph, no `mouseover` event would be fired, and the `mousemove` and `click` events would be fired on the `body` element rather than the paragraph.

When a node is inert, it generally cannot be focused. Inert nodes that are commands will also get disabled.

While a browsing context container is marked as inert, its nested browsing context's active document, and all nodes in that `Document`, must be marked as inert.

An entire `Document` can be marked as blocked by a modal dialog subject. While a `Document` is so marked, every node that is in the `Document`, with the exception of the subject element and its descendants, must be marked inert. (The elements excepted by this paragraph can additionally be marked inert through other means; being part of a modal dialog does not "protect" a node from being marked inert.)

Only one element at a time can mark a `Document` as being blocked by a modal dialog. When a new `dialog` is made to block a `Document`, the previous element, if any, stops blocking the `Document`.

The `dialog` element's `showModal()` method makes use of this mechanism.

### 6.3 Activation

Certain elements in HTML have an activation behavior, which means that the user can activate them. This triggers a sequence of events dependent on the activation mechanism, and normally culminating in a `click` event, as described below.

The user agent should allow the user to manually trigger elements that have an activation behavior, for instance using keyboard or voice input, or through mouse clicks. When the user triggers an element with a defined activation behavior in a manner other than clicking it, the default action of the interaction event must be to run synthetic click activation steps on the element.

Each element has a click in progress flag, initially set to false.

When a user agent is to run synthetic click activation steps on an element, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If the element's click in progress flag is set to true, then abort these steps.

2. Set the click in progress flag on the element to true.

3. Run pre-click activation steps on the element.

4. Fire a `click` event at the element. If the run synthetic click activation steps algorithm was invoked because the `click()` method was invoked, then the `isTrusted` attribute must be initialised to false.

5. If this `click` event is not canceled, run post-click activation steps on the element.

   If the event is canceled, the user agent must run canceled activation steps on the element instead.

6. Set the click in progress flag on the element to false.

When a pointing device is clicked, the user agent must run authentic click activation steps instead of firing the click event. When a user agent is to run authentic click activation steps for a given event event, it must follow these steps:

1. Let target be the element designated by the user (the target of event).

2. If target is a `canvas` element, run the canvas `MouseEvent` rerouting steps. If this changes event's target, then let target be the new target.

3. Set the click in progress flag on target to true.

4. Let e be the nearest activatable element of target (defined below), if any.

5. If there is an element e, run pre-click activation steps on it.

6. Dispatch event (the required `click` event) at target.

   If there is an element e and the `click` event is not canceled, run post-click activation steps on element e.

   If there is an element e and the event is canceled, run canceled activation steps on element e.

7. Set the click in progress flag on target to false.

The algorithms above don't run for arbitrary synthetic events dispatched by author script. The `click()` method can be used to make the run synthetic click activation steps algorithm happen programmatically.

Click-focusing behavior (e.g. the focusing of a text field when user clicks in one) typically happens before the click, when the mouse button is first depressed, and is therefore not discussed here.

Given an element target, the nearest activatable element is the element returned by the following algorithm:

1. If target has a defined activation behavior, then return target and abort these steps.

2. If target has a parent element, then set target to that parent element and return to the first step.

3. Otherwise, there is no nearest activatable element.

When a user agent is to run pre-click activation steps on an element, it must run the pre-click activation steps defined for that element, if any.

When a user agent is to run canceled activation steps on an element, it must run the canceled activation steps defined for that element, if any.

When a user agent is to run post-click activation steps on an element, it must run the activation behavior defined for that element, if any. Activation behaviors can refer to the `click` event that was fired by the steps above leading up to this point.

element . `click`()

  Acts as if the element was clicked.

The `click()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the element is a form control that is disabled, abort these steps.

2. Run synthetic click activation steps on the element.

### 6.4 Focus

#### 6.4.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

An HTML user interface typically consists of multiple interactive widgets, such as form controls, scrollable regions, links, dialog boxes, browser tabs, and so forth. These widgets form a hierarchy, with some (e.g. browser tabs, dialog boxes) containing others (e.g. links, form controls).

When interacting with an interface using a keyboard, key input is channeled from the system, through the hierarchy of interactive widgets, to an active widget, which is said to be focused.

Consider an HTML application running in a browser tab running in a graphical environment. Suppose this application had a page with some text fields and links, and was currently showing a modal dialog, which itself had a text field and a button.

The hierarchy of focusable widgets, in this scenario, would include the browser window, which would have, amongst its children, the browser tab containing the HTML application. The tab itself would have as its children the various links and text fields, as well as the dialog. The dialog itself would have as its children the text field and the button.

If the widget with focus in this example was the text field in the dialog box, then key input would be channeled from the graphical system to ① the Web browser, then to ② the tab, then to ③ the dialog, and finally to ④ the text field.

Keyboard events are always targetted at this focused element.

#### 6.4.2 Data model

The term focusable area is used to refer to regions of the interface that can become the target of keyboard input. Focusable areas can be elements, parts of elements, or other regions managed by the user agent.

Each focusable area has a DOM anchor, which is a `Node` object that represents the position of the focusable area in the DOM. (When the focusable area is itself a `Node`, it is its own DOM anchor.) The DOM anchor is used in some APIs as a substitute for the focusable area when there is no other DOM object to represent the focusable area.

The following table describes what objects can be focusable areas. The cells in the left column describe objects that can be focusable areas; the cells in the right column describe the DOM anchors for those elements. (The cells that span both columns are non-normative examples.)

Focusable area | DOM anchor
--- | ---
Examples
Elements that have their tabindex focus flag set, that are not actually disabled, that are not expressly inert, and that are either being rendered or being used as relevant canvas fallback content. | The element itself.
`iframe`, `<input type=text>`, sometimes `<a href="">` (depending on platform conventions).
The shapes of `area` elements in an image map associated with an `img` element that is being rendered and is not expressly inert. | The `img` element.
In the following example, the `area` element creates two shapes, one on each image. The DOM anchor of the first shape is the first `img` element, and the DOM anchor of the second shape is the second `img` element.
    <map id=wallmap><area alt="Enter Door" coords="10,10,100,200" href="door.html"></map>
    ...
    <img src="images/innerwall.jpeg" alt="There is a white wall here, with a door." usemap="#wallmap">
    ...
    <img src="images/outerwall.jpeg" alt="There is a red wall here, with a door." usemap="#wallmap">
The user-agent provided subwidgets of elements that are being rendered and are not actually disabled or expressly inert. | The element for which the focusable area is a subwidget.
The controls in the user interface that is exposed to the user for a `video` element, the up and down buttons in a spin-control version of `<input type=number>`, the two range control widgets in a `<input type=range multiple>`, the part of a `details` element's rendering that enabled the element to be opened or closed using keyboard input.
The scrollable regions of elements that are being rendered are not expressly inert. | The element for which the box that the scrollable region scrolls was created.
The CSS 'overflow' property's 'scroll' value typically creates a scrollable region.
The viewport of a `Document` that is in a browsing context and is not inert. | The `Document` for which the viewport was created.
The contents of an `iframe`.
Any other element or part of an element, especially to aid with accessibility or to better match platform conventions. | The element.
A user agent could make all list item bullets focusable, so that a user can more easily navigate lists. Similarly, a user agent could make all elements with `title` attributes focusable, so that their advisory information can be accessed.

A browsing context container (e.g. an `iframe`) is a focusable area, but key events routed to a browsing context container get immediately routed to the nested browsing context's active document. Similarly, in sequential focus navigation a browsing context container essentially acts merely as a placeholder for its nested browsing context's active document.

Each focusable area belongs to a control group. Each control group has an owner. Control group owners are control group owner objects. The following are control group owner objects:

- `Document` object in browsing contexts.
- `dialog` elements that have an `open` attribute specified and that are being rendered.

Each control group owner object owns one control group (though that group might be empty).

If the DOM anchor of a focusable area is a control group owner object, then that focusable area belongs to that control group owner object's control group. Otherwise, the focusable area belongs to its DOM anchor's nearest ancestor control group owner object.

Thus, a viewport always belongs to the control group of the `Document` for which the viewport was created, an `input` control belongs to the control group of its nearest ancestor `dialog` or `Document`, and an image map's shapes belong to the nearest ancestor `dialog` or `Document` of the `img` elements (not the `area` elements — this means one `area` element might create multiple shapes in different control groups).

An element is expressly inert if it is inert but it is not a control group owner object and its nearest ancestor control group owner object is not inert.

One focusable area in each non-empty control group is designated the focused area of the control group. Which control is so designated changes over time, based on algorithms in this specification. If a control group is empty, it has no focused area.

Each control group owner object can also act as the manager of a dialog group.

Each `dialog` element that has an `open` attribute specified and that is being rendered (i.e. that is a control group owner object) and is not expressly inert belongs to the dialog group whose manager is the `dialog` element's nearest ancestor control group owner object.

A `dialog` is expressly inert if it is inert but its nearest ancestor control group owner object is not.

If no `dialog` element has a particular control group owner object as its nearest ancestor control group owner object, then that control group owner object has no dialog group.

Each dialog group can have a `dialog` designated as the focused dialog of the dialog group. Which `dialog` is so designated changes over time, based on algorithms in this specification.

Focusable areas in control groups are ordered relative to the tree order of their DOM anchors. Focusable areas with the same DOM anchor in a control group are ordered relative to their CSS box's relative positions in a pre-order, depth-first traversal of the box tree. [CSS]

Elements in dialog groups are ordered in tree order.

The currently focused area of a top-level browsing context at any particular time is the focusable area or `dialog` returned by this algorithm:

1. Let candidate be the `Document` of the top-level browsing context.

2. If candidate has a dialog group with a designated focused dialog of the dialog group, then let candidate be the designated focused dialog of the dialog group, and redo this step.

   Otherwise, if candidate has a non-empty control group, and the designated focused area of the control group is a browsing context container, then let candidate be the active document of that browsing context container's nested browsing context, and redo this step.

   Otherwise, if candidate has a non-empty control group, let candidate be the designated focused area of the control group.

3. Return candidate.

An element that is the DOM anchor of a focusable area is said to gain focus when that focusable area becomes the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context. When an element is the DOM anchor of a focusable area of the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context, it is focused.

The focus chain of a focusable area or control group owner object subject is the ordered list constructed as follows:

1. Let current object be subject.

2. Let output be an empty list.

3. Loop: Append current object to output.

4. If current object is an `area` element's shape, append that `area` element to output.

   Otherwise, if current object is a focusable area whose DOM anchor is an element that is not current object itself, append that DOM anchor element to output.

5. If current object is a `dialog` object in a dialog group, let current object be that dialog group's manager, and return to the step labeled loop.

   Otherwise, if current object is a focusable area, let current object be that focusable area's control group's owner, and return to the step labeled loop.

   Otherwise, if current object is a `Document` in a nested browsing context, let current object be its browsing context container, and return to the step labeled loop.

6. Return output.

   The chain starts with subject and (if subject is or can be the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context) continues up the focus hierarchy up to the `Document` of the top-level browsing context.

#### 6.4.3 The `tabindex` attribute

The `tabindex` content attribute allows authors to indicate that an element is supposed to be focusable, and whether it is supposed to be reachable using sequential focus navigation and, if so, what is to be the relative order of the element for the purposes of sequential focus navigation. The name "tab index" comes from the common use of the "tab" key to navigate through the focusable elements. The term "tabbing" refers to moving forward through the focusable elements that can be reached using sequential focus navigation.

When the attribute is omitted, the user agent applies defaults. (There is no way to make an element that is being rendered be not focusable at all without disabling it or making it inert.)

The `tabindex` attribute, if specified, must have a value that is a valid integer. Positive numbers specify the relative position of the element's focusable areas in the sequential focus navigation order, and negative numbers indicate that the control is to be unreachable by sequential focus navigation.

Each element can have a tabindex focus flag set, as defined below. This flag is a factor that contributes towards determining whether an element is a focusable area, as described in the previous section.

If the `tabindex` attribute is specified on an element, it must be parsed using the rules for parsing integers. The attribute's values, or lack thereof, must be interpreted as follows:

If the attribute is omitted or parsing the value returns an error

  The user agent should follow platform conventions to determine if the element's tabindex focus flag is set and, if so, whether the element and any focusable areas that have the element as their DOM anchor can be reached using sequential focus navigation, and if so, what their relative position in the sequential focus navigation order is to be.

  Modulo platform conventions, it is suggested that for the following elements, the tabindex focus flag be set:

  - `a` elements that have an `href` attribute
  - `link` elements that have an `href` attribute
  - `button` elements
  - `input` elements whose `type` attribute are not in the Hidden state
  - `select` elements
  - `textarea` elements
  - `menuitem` elements
  - Elements with a `draggable` attribute set, if that would enable the user agent to allow the user to begin a drag operations for those elements without the use of a pointing device
  - Editing hosts
  - Browsing context containers
  - Sorting interface `th` elements

  One valid reason to ignore the platform conventions and always allow an element to be focused (by setting its tabindex focus flag) would be if the user's only mechanism for activating an element is through a keyboard action that triggers the focused element.

If the value is a negative integer

  The user agent must set the element's tabindex focus flag, but should omit the element from the sequential focus navigation order.

  One valid reason to ignore the requirement that sequential focus navigation not allow the author to lead to the element would be if the user's only mechanism for moving the focus is sequential focus navigation. For instance, a keyboard-only user would be unable to click on a text field with a negative `tabindex`, so that user's user agent would be well justified in allowing the user to tab to the control regardless.

If the value is a zero

  The user agent must set the element's tabindex focus flag, should allow the element and any focusable areas that have the element as their DOM anchor to be reached using sequential focus navigation, following platform conventions to determine the element's relative position in the sequential focus navigation order.

If the value is greater than zero

  The user agent must set the element's tabindex focus flag, should allow the element and any focusable areas that have the element as their DOM anchor to be reached using sequential focus navigation, and should place the element — referenced as candidate below — and the aforementioned focusable areas in the sequential focus navigation order so that, relative to other focusable areas in the sequential focus navigation order, they are:

  - before any focusable area whose DOM anchor is an element whose `tabindex` attribute has been omitted or whose value, when parsed, returns an error,
  - before any focusable area whose DOM anchor is an element whose `tabindex` attribute has a value equal to or less than zero,
  - after any focusable area whose DOM anchor is an element whose `tabindex` attribute has a value greater than zero but less than the value of the `tabindex` attribute on candidate,
  - after any focusable area whose DOM anchor is an element whose `tabindex` attribute has a value equal to the value of the `tabindex` attribute on candidate but that is earlier in the document in tree order than candidate,
  - before any focusable area whose DOM anchor is an element whose `tabindex` attribute has a value equal to the value of the `tabindex` attribute on candidate but that is later in the document in tree order than candidate, and
  - before any focusable area whose DOM anchor is an element whose `tabindex` attribute has a value greater than the value of the `tabindex` attribute on candidate.

An element that has its tabindex focus flag set but does not otherwise have an activation behavior defined has an activation behavior that does nothing.

This means that an element that is only focusable because of its `tabindex` attribute will fire a `click` event in response to a non-mouse activation (e.g. hitting the "enter" key while the element is focused).

An element with the `tabindex` attribute specified is interactive content.

The `tabIndex` IDL attribute must reflect the value of the `tabindex` content attribute. Its default value is 0 for elements that are focusable and −1 for elements that are not focusable.

#### 6.4.4 Processing model

The focusing steps for an object new focus target that is either a focusable area, or an element that is not a focusable area, or a browsing context, are as follows:

1. If new focus target is neither a `dialog` element that has an `open` attribute specified and that is being rendered (i.e. that is a control group owner object), nor a focusable area, then run the first matching set of steps from the following list:

   If new focus target is an `area` element with one or more shapes that are focusable areas

     Let new focus target be the shape corresponding to the first `img` element in tree order that uses the image map to which the `area` element belongs.

   If new focus target is an element with one or more scrollable regions that are focusable areas

     Let new focus target be the element's first scrollable region, according to a pre-order, depth-first traversal of the box tree. [CSS]

   If new focus target is the body element of its `Document`
   If new focus target is the root element of its `Document` and that `Document` has no body element

     Let new focus target be the `Document`'s viewport.

   If new focus target is a browsing context

     Let new focus target be the browsing context's active document.

   Otherwise

     Abort the focusing steps.

2. If new focus target is a control group owner object that is not a focusable area, but does have a dialog group, and that dialog group has a designated focused dialog, then let new focus target be the focused dialog of the dialog group, and redo this step.

   Otherwise, if new focus target is a control group owner object that is not a focusable area, and its control group is not empty, then designate new focus target as the focused area of the control group, and redo this step.

   Otherwise, if new focus target is a browsing context container, then let new focus target be the nested browsing context's active document, and redo this step.

   A `dialog` element can be both a control group owner object and a focusable area, if it has both an `open` attribute specified and a `tabindex` attribute specified and is being rendered.

3. If new focus target is a focusable area and its DOM anchor is inert, then abort these steps.

4. If new focus target is the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context, then abort these steps.

5. Let old chain be the focus chain of the currently focused area of the top-level browsing context in which new focus target finds itself.

6. Let new chain be the focus chain of new focus target.

7. Run the focus update steps with old chain, new chain, and new focus target respectively.

User agents must synchronously run the focusing steps for a focusable area, `dialog`, or browsing context candidate whenever the user attempts to move the focus to candidate.

The unfocusing steps for an object old focus target that is either a focusable area or an element that is not a focusable area are as follows:

1. If old focus target is inert, then abort these steps.

2. If old focus target is an `area` element and one of its shapes is the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context, or, if old focus target is an element with one or more scrollable regions, and one of them is the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context, then let old focus target be that currently focused area of a top-level browsing context.

3. Let old chain be the focus chain of the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context.

4. If old focus target is not one of the entries in old chain, then abort these steps.

5. If old focus target is a `dialog` in a dialog group, and the dialog group manager has a non-empty control group, then let new focus target be the designated focused area of that focus group.

   Otherwise, if old focus target is a focusable area, then let new focus target be the first focusable area of its control group (if the control group owner is a `Document`, this will always be a viewport).

   Otherwise, let new focus target be null.

6. If new focus target is not null, then run the focusing steps for new focus target.

When the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context is somehow unfocused without another element being explicitly focused in its stead, the user agent must synchronously run the unfocusing steps for that object.

The unfocusing steps do not always result in the focus changing, even when applied to the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context. For example, if the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context is a viewport, then it will usually keep its focus regardless until another focusable area is explicitly focused with the focusing steps.

When a focusable area is added to an empty control group, it must be designated the focused area of the control group.

When a dialog group is formed, if the dialog group manager has an empty control group, the first non-inert `dialog` in the dialog group, if any, or else the first `dialog` in the dialog group regardless of inertness, must be designated the focused dialog of the dialog group.

Focus fixup rule one: When the designated focused area of a control group is removed from that control group in some way (e.g. it stops being a focusable area, it is removed from the DOM, it becomes expressly inert, etc), and the control group is still not empty: designate the first non-inert focused area in that control group to be the new focused area of the control group, if any; if they are all inert, then designate the first focused area in that control group to be the new focused area of the control group regardless of inertness. If such a removal instead results in the control group being empty, then there is simply no longer a focused area of the control group.

For example, this might happen because an element is removed from its `Document`, or has a `hidden` attribute added. It might also happen to an `input` element when the element gets disabled.

Focus fixup rule two: When a dialog group has no designed focused dialog of the dialog group, and its dialog group manager's control group changes from being non-empty to being empty, the first non-inert `dialog` in the dialog group, if any, or else the first `dialog` in the dialog group regardless of inertness, must be designated the focused dialog of the dialog group.

Focus fixup rule three: When the designated focused dialog of a dialog group is removed from that dialog group in some way (e.g. it stops being rendered, it loses its `open` attribute, it becomes expressly inert, etc), and there is still a dialog group (because the `dialog` in question was not the last `dialog` in that dialog group): if the dialog group's manager's control group is non-empty, let there be no designated focused dialog of the dialog group any more; otherwise (in the case that the control group is empty), designate the first non-inert `dialog` in the dialog group to be the focused dialog of the dialog group, or, if they are all inert, designate the first `dialog` in the dialog group to be the focused dialog of the dialog group regardless of inertness.

When the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context was a focusable area but stops being a focusable area, or when it was a `dialog` in a dialog group and stops being part of that dialog group, or when it starts being inert, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let old focus target be whatever the currently focused area of the top-level browsing context was immediately before this algorithm became applicable (e.g. before the element was disabled, or the dialog was closed, or whatever caused this algorithm to run).

2. Let old chain be the focus chain of the currently focused area of the top-level browsing context at the same time.

3. Make sure that the changes implied by the focus fixup rules one, two, and three above are applied.

4. Let new focus target be the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context.

5. If old focus target and new focus target are the same, abort these steps.

6. Let new chain be the focus chain of new focus target.

7. Run the focus update steps with old chain, new chain, and new focus target respectively.

The focus update steps, given an old chain, a new chain, and a new focus target respectively, are as follows:

1. If the last entry in old chain and the last entry in new chain are the same, pop the last entry from old chain and the last entry from new chain and redo this step.

2. For each entry entry in old chain, in order, run these substeps:

   1. If entry is an `input` element, and the `change` event applies to the element, and the element does not have a defined activation behavior, and the user has changed the element's value or its list of selected files while the control was focused without committing that change, then fire a simple event that bubbles named `change` at the element.

   2. If entry is an element, let blur event target be entry.

      If entry is a `Document` object, let blur event target be that `Document` object's `Window` object.

      Otherwise, let blur event target be null.

   3. If entry is the last entry in old chain, and entry is an `Element`, and the last entry in new chain is also an `Element`, then let related blur target be the last entry in new chain. Otherwise, let related blur target be null.

   4. If blur event target is not null, fire a focus event named `blur` at blur event target, with related blur target as the related target.

      In some cases, e.g. if entry is an `area` element's shape, a scrollable region, or a viewport, no event is fired.

3. Apply any relevant platform-specific conventions for focusing new focus target. (For example, some platforms select the contents of a text field when that field is focused.)

4. For each entry entry in new chain, in reverse order, run these substeps:

   1. If entry is a `dialog` element: Let entry be the designated focused dialog of its dialog group.

   2. If entry is a focusable area: Designate entry as the focused area of the control group. If its control group's owner is also a dialog group manager, then let there be no designated focused dialog in that dialog group.

      It is possible for entry to be both a `dialog` element and a focusable area, in which case it is its own control group owner.

   3. If entry is an element, let focus event target be entry.

      If entry is a `Document` object, let focus event target be that `Document` object's `Window` object.

      Otherwise, let focus event target be null.

   4. If entry is the last entry in new chain, and entry is an `Element`, and the last entry in old chain is also an `Element`, then let related focus target be the last entry in old chain. Otherwise, let related focus target be null.

   5. If focus event target is not null, fire a focus event named `focus` at focus event target, with related focus target as the related target.

      In some cases, e.g. if entry is an `area` element's shape, a scrollable region, or a viewport, no event is fired.

When a user agent is required to fire a focus event named e at an element t and with a given related target r, the user agent must create a trusted `FocusEvent` object, initialise it to have the given name e, to not bubble, to not be cancelable, and to have the `relatedTarget` attribute initialised to r, the `view` attribute initialised to the `Window` object of the `Document` object of t, and the `detail` attribute initialised to 0, and must then dispatch the newly created `FocusEvent` object at the specified target element t.

When a key event is to be routed in a top-level browsing context, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let target area be the currently focused area of the top-level browsing context.

2. If target area is a focusable area, let target node be target area's DOM anchor. Otherwise, target area is a `dialog`; let target node be target area.

3. If target node is a `Document` that has a body element, then let target node be the body element of that `Document`.

   Otherwise, if target node is a `Document` that has a root element, then let target node be the root element of that `Document`.

4. If target node is not inert, fire the event at target node.

   It is possible for the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context to be inert, for example if a modal dialog is shown, and then that `dialog` element is made inert. It is likely to be the result of a logic error in the application, though.

5. If the event was not canceled, then let target area handle the key event. This might include running synthetic click activation steps for target node.

#### 6.4.5 Sequential focus navigation

Each control group has a sequential focus navigation order, which orders some or all of the focusable areas in the control group relative to each other. The order in the sequential focus navigation order does not have to be related to the order in the control group itself. If a focusable area is omitted from the sequential focus navigation order of its control group, then it is unreachable via sequential focus navigation.

When the user requests that focus move from the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context to the next or previous focusable area (e.g. as the default action of pressing the `tab` key), or when the user requests that focus sequentially move to a top-level browsing context in the first place (e.g. from the browser's location bar), the user agent must use the following algorithm:

1. Let starting point be the currently focused area of a top-level browsing context, if the user requested to move focus sequentially from there, or else the top-level browsing context itself, if the user instead requested to move focus from outside the top-level browsing context.

2. Let direction be forward if the user requested the next control, and backward if the user requested the previous control.

   Typically, pressing `tab` requests the next control, and pressing ``shift`+`tab`` requests the previous control.

3. Loop: Let selection mechanism be sequential if the starting point is a browsing context or if starting point is in its control group's sequential focus navigation order.

   Otherwise, starting point is not in its control group's sequential focus navigation order; let selection mechanism be DOM.

4. Let candidate be the result of running the sequential navigation search algorithm with starting point, direction, and selection mechanism as the arguments.

5. If candidate is not null, then run the focusing steps for candidate and abort these steps.

6. Otherwise, if starting point is the top-level browsing context, or a focusable area in the top-level browsing context, the user agent should transfer focus to its own controls appropriately (if any), honouring direction, and then abort these steps.

   For example, if direction is backward, then the last focusable control before the browser's rendering area would be the control to focus.

   If the user agent has no focusable controls — a kiosk-mode browser, for instance — then the user agent may instead restart these steps with the starting point being the top-level browsing context itself.

7. Otherwise, starting point is a focusable area in a nested browsing context. Let starting point be that nested browsing context's browsing context container, and return to the step labeled loop.

The sequential navigation search algorithm consists of the following steps. This algorithm takes three arguments: starting point, direction, and selection mechanism.

1. Pick the appropriate cell from the following table, and follow the instructions in that cell.

   The appropriate cell is the one that is from the column whose header describes direction and from the first row whose header describes starting point and selection mechanism.

   | direction is forward | direction is backward
   --- | --- | ---
   starting point is a browsing context | Let candidate be the first suitable sequentially focusable area in starting point's active document's primary control group, if any; or else null | Let candidate be the last suitable sequentially focusable area in starting point's active document's primary control group, if any; or else null
   selection mechanism is DOM | Let candidate be the first suitable sequentially focusable area in the home control group following starting point, if any; or else null | Let candidate be the last suitable sequentially focusable area in the home control group preceding starting point, if any; or else null
   selection mechanism is sequential | Let candidate be the first suitable sequentially focusable area in the home sequential focus navigation order following starting point, if any; or else null | Let candidate be the last suitable sequentially focusable area in the home sequential focus navigation order preceding starting point, if any; or else null

   A suitable sequentially focusable area is a focusable area whose DOM anchor is not inert and that is in its control group's sequential focus navigation order.

   The primary control group of a control group owner object X is the control group of X if X has no dialog group or if its dialog group has no designated focused dialog of the dialog group, otherwise, it is the primary control group of X's dialog group's designated focused dialog of the dialog group.

   The home control group is the control group to which starting point belongs.

   The home sequential focus navigation order is the sequential focus navigation order to which starting point belongs.

   The home sequential focus navigation order is the home control group's sequential focus navigation order, but is only used when the starting point is in that sequential focus navigation order (when it's not, selection mechanism will be DOM).

2. If candidate is a browsing context container, then let new candidate be the result of running the sequential navigation search algorithm with candidate's nested browsing context as the first argument, direction as the second, and sequential as the third.

   If new candidate is null, then let starting point be candidate, and return to the top of this algorithm. Otherwise, let candidate be new candidate.

3. Return candidate.

#### 6.4.6 Focus management APIs

document . `activeElement`

  Returns the deepest element in the document through which or to which key events are being routed. This is, roughly speaking, the focused element in the document.

  For the purposes of this API, when a child browsing context is focused, its browsing context container is focused in the parent browsing context. For example, if the user moves the focus to a text field in an `iframe`, the `iframe` is the element returned by the `activeElement` API in the `iframe`'s node document.

document . `hasFocus`()

  Returns true if key events are being routed through or to the document; otherwise, returns false. Roughly speaking, this corresponds to the document, or a documented nested inside this one, being focused.

window . `focus`()

  Moves the focus to the window's browsing context container, if any.

element . `focus`()

  Moves the focus to the element.

  If the element is the body element, moves the focus to the viewport instead.

element . `blur`()

  Moves the focus to the viewport. Use of this method is discouraged; if you want to focus the viewport, call the `focus()` method on the body element.

  Do not use this method to hide the focus ring if you find the focus ring unsightly. Instead, use a CSS rule to override the 'outline' property, and provide a different way to show what element is focused. Be aware that if an alternative focusing style isn't made available, the page will be significantly less usable for people who primarily navigate pages using a keyboard, or those with reduced vision who use focus outlines to help them navigate the page.

  For example, to hide the outline from links and instead use a yellow background to indicate focus, you could use:

      :link:focus, :visited:focus { outline: none; background: yellow; color: black; }

The `activeElement` attribute on `Document` objects must return the value returned by the following steps:

1. Let candidate be the `Document` on which the method was invoked.

2. If candidate has a dialog group with a designated focused dialog of the dialog group, then let candidate be the designated focused dialog of the dialog group, and redo this step.

3. If candidate has a non-empty control group, let candidate be the designated focused area of the control group.

4. If candidate is a focusable area, let candidate be candidate's DOM anchor.

5. If candidate is a `Document` that has a body element, then let candidate be the body element of that `Document`.

   Otherwise, if candidate is a `Document` that has a root element, then let candidate be the root element of that `Document`.

   Otherwise, if candidate is a `Document`, then let candidate be null.

6. Return candidate.

The `hasFocus()` method on `Document` objects must return the value returned by the following steps:

1. Let target be the `Document` on which the method was invoked.

2. Let candidate be the `Document` of the top-level browsing context.

3. If candidate is target, return true and abort these steps.

4. If candidate has a dialog group with a designated focused dialog of the dialog group, then let candidate be the designated focused dialog of the dialog group, and redo this step.

   Otherwise, if candidate has a non-empty control group, and the designated focused area of the control group is a browsing context container, and the active document of that browsing context container's nested browsing context is target, then return true and abort these steps.

   Otherwise, if candidate has a non-empty control group, and the designated focused area of the control group is a browsing context container, then let candidate be the active document of that browsing context container's nested browsing context, and redo this step.

   Otherwise, return false and abort these steps.

The `focus()` method on the `Window` object, when invoked, must run the focusing steps with the `Window` object's browsing context. Additionally, if this browsing context is a top-level browsing context, user agents are encouraged to trigger some sort of notification to indicate to the user that the page is attempting to gain focus.

The `blur()` method on the `Window` object, when invoked, provides a hint to the user agent that the script believes the user probably is not currently interested in the contents of the browsing context of the `Window` object on which the method was invoked, but that the contents might become interesting again in the future.

User agents are encouraged to ignore calls to this `blur()` method entirely.

Historically, the `focus()` and `blur()` methods actually affected the system-level focus of the system widget (e.g. tab or window) that contained the browsing context, but hostile sites widely abuse this behavior to the user's detriment.

The `focus()` method on elements, when invoked, must run the following algorithm:

1. If the element is marked as locked for focus, then abort these steps.

2. Mark the element as locked for focus.

3. Run the focusing steps for the element.

4. Unmark the element as locked for focus.

The `blur()` method, when invoked, should run the unfocusing steps for the element on which the method was called. User agents may selectively or uniformly ignore calls to this method for usability reasons.

For example, if the `blur()` method is unwisely being used to remove the focus ring for aesthetics reasons, the page would become unusable by keyboard users. Ignoring calls to this method would thus allow keyboard users to interact with the page.

### 6.5 Assigning keyboard shortcuts

#### 6.5.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

Each element that can be activated or focused can be assigned a single key combination to activate it, using the `accesskey` attribute.

The exact shortcut is determined by the user agent, based on information about the user's keyboard, what keyboard shortcuts already exist on the platform, and what other shortcuts have been specified on the page, using the information provided in the `accesskey` attribute as a guide.

In order to ensure that a relevant keyboard shortcut is available on a wide variety of input devices, the author can provide a number of alternatives in the `accesskey` attribute.

Each alternative consists of a single character, such as a letter or digit.

User agents can provide users with a list of the keyboard shortcuts, but authors are encouraged to do so also. The `accessKeyLabel` IDL attribute returns a string representing the actual key combination assigned by the user agent.

In this example, an author has provided a button that can be invoked using a shortcut key. To support full keyboards, the author has provided "C" as a possible key. To support devices equipped only with numeric keypads, the author has provided "1" as another possibly key.

    <input type=button value=Collect onclick="collect()"
           accesskey="C 1" id=c>

To tell the user what the shortcut key is, the author has this script here opted to explicitly add the key combination to the button's label:

    function addShortcutKeyLabel(button) {
      if (button.accessKeyLabel != '')
        button.value += ' (' + button.accessKeyLabel + ')';
    }
    addShortcutKeyLabel(document.getElementById('c'));

Browsers on different platforms will show different labels, even for the same key combination, based on the convention prevalent on that platform. For example, if the key combination is the Control key, the Shift key, and the letter C, a Windows browser might display "`Ctrl+Shift+C`", whereas a Mac browser might display "`^⇧C`", while an Emacs browser might just display "`C-C`". Similarly, if the key combination is the Alt key and the Escape key, Windows might use "`Alt+Esc`", Mac might use "`⌥⎋`", and an Emacs browser might use "`M-ESC`" or "`ESC ESC`".

In general, therefore, it is unwise to attempt to parse the value returned from the `accessKeyLabel` IDL attribute.

#### 6.5.2 The `accesskey` attribute

All HTML elements may have the `accesskey` content attribute set. The `accesskey` attribute's value is used by the user agent as a guide for creating a keyboard shortcut that activates or focuses the element.

If specified, the value must be an ordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are case-sensitive, each of which must be exactly one Unicode code point in length.

In the following example, a variety of links are given with access keys so that keyboard users familiar with the site can more quickly navigate to the relevant pages:

    <nav>
     <p>
      <a title="Consortium Activities" accesskey="A" href="/Consortium/activities">Activities</a> |
      <a title="Technical Reports and Recommendations" accesskey="T" href="/TR/">Technical Reports</a> |
      <a title="Alphabetical Site Index" accesskey="S" href="/Consortium/siteindex">Site Index</a> |
      <a title="About This Site" accesskey="B" href="/Consortium/">About Consortium</a> |
      <a title="Contact Consortium" accesskey="C" href="/Consortium/contact">Contact</a>
     </p>
    </nav>

In the following example, the search field is given two possible access keys, "s" and "0" (in that order). A user agent on a device with a full keyboard might pick ``Ctrl`+`Alt`+`S`` as the shortcut key, while a user agent on a small device with just a numeric keypad might pick just the plain unadorned key ``0``:

    <form action="/search">
     <label>Search: <input type="search" name="q" accesskey="s 0"></label>
     <input type="submit">
    </form>

In the following example, a button has possible access keys described. A script then tries to update the button's label to advertise the key combination the user agent selected.

    <input type=submit accesskey="N @ 1" value="Compose">
    ...
    <script>
     function labelButton(button) {
       if (button.accessKeyLabel)
         button.value += ' (' + button.accessKeyLabel + ')';
     }
     var inputs = document.getElementsByTagName('input');
     for (var i = 0; i < inputs.length; i += 1) {
       if (inputs[i].type == "submit")
         labelButton(inputs[i]);
     }
    </script>

On one user agent, the button's label might become "`Compose (⌘N)`". On another, it might become "`Compose (Alt+⇧+1)`". If the user agent doesn't assign a key, it will be just "`Compose`". The exact string depends on what the assigned access key is, and on how the user agent represents that key combination.

#### 6.5.3 Processing model

An element's assigned access key is a key combination derived from the element's `accesskey` content attribute. Initially, an element must not have an assigned access key.

Whenever an element's `accesskey` attribute is set, changed, or removed, the user agent must update the element's assigned access key by running the following steps:

1. If the element has no `accesskey` attribute, then skip to the fallback step below.

2. Otherwise, split the attribute's value on spaces, and let keys be the resulting tokens.

3. For each value in keys in turn, in the order the tokens appeared in the attribute's value, run the following substeps:

   1. If the value is not a string exactly one Unicode code point in length, then skip the remainder of these steps for this value.

   2. If the value does not correspond to a key on the system's keyboard, then skip the remainder of these steps for this value.

   3. If the user agent can find a mix of zero or more modifier keys that, combined with the key that corresponds to the value given in the attribute, can be used as the access key, then the user agent may assign that combination of keys as the element's assigned access key and abort these steps.

4. Fallback: Optionally, the user agent may assign a key combination of its choosing as the element's assigned access key and then abort these steps.

5. If this step is reached, the element has no assigned access key.

Once a user agent has selected and assigned an access key for an element, the user agent should not change the element's assigned access key unless the `accesskey` content attribute is changed or the element is moved to another `Document`.

When the user presses the key combination corresponding to the assigned access key for an element, if the element defines a command, the command's Hidden State facet is false (visible), the command's Disabled State facet is also false (enabled), the element is in a `Document` that has an associated browsing context, and neither the element nor any of its ancestors has a `hidden` attribute specified, then the user agent must trigger the Action of the command.

User agents might expose elements that have an `accesskey` attribute in other ways as well, e.g. in a menu displayed in response to a specific key combination.

The `accessKey` IDL attribute must reflect the `accesskey` content attribute.

The `accessKeyLabel` IDL attribute must return a string that represents the element's assigned access key, if any. If the element does not have one, then the IDL attribute must return the empty string.

### 6.6 Editing

#### 6.6.1 Making document regions editable: The `contenteditable` content attribute

The `contenteditable` attribute is an enumerated attribute whose keywords are the empty string, `true`, and `false`. The empty string and the `true` keyword map to the true state. The `false` keyword maps to the false state. In addition, there is a third state, the inherit state, which is the missing value default (and the invalid value default).

The true state indicates that the element is editable. The inherit state indicates that the element is editable if its parent is. The false state indicates that the element is not editable.

element . `contentEditable` [ = value ]

  Returns "`true`", "`false`", or "`inherit`", based on the state of the `contenteditable` attribute.

  Can be set, to change that state.

  Throws a `SyntaxError` exception if the new value isn't one of those strings.

element . `isContentEditable`

  Returns true if the element is editable; otherwise, returns false.

The `contentEditable` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the string "`true`" if the content attribute is set to the true state, "`false`" if the content attribute is set to the false state, and "`inherit`" otherwise. On setting, if the new value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`inherit`" then the content attribute must be removed, if the new value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`true`" then the content attribute must be set to the string "`true`", if the new value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`false`" then the content attribute must be set to the string "`false`", and otherwise the attribute setter must throw a `SyntaxError` exception.

The `isContentEditable` IDL attribute, on getting, must return true if the element is either an editing host or editable, and false otherwise.

#### 6.6.2 Making entire documents editable: The `designMode` IDL attribute

Documents have a `designMode`, which can be either enabled or disabled.

document . `designMode` [ = value ]

  Returns "`on`" if the document is editable, and "`off`" if it isn't.

  Can be set, to change the document's current state. This focuses the document and resets the selection in that document.

The `designMode` IDL attribute on the `Document` object takes two values, "`on`" and "`off`". On setting, the new value must be compared in an ASCII case-insensitive manner to these two values; if it matches the "`on`" value, then `designMode` must be enabled, and if it matches the "`off`" value, then `designMode` must be disabled. Other values must be ignored.

On getting, if `designMode` is enabled, the IDL attribute must return the value "`on`"; otherwise it is disabled, and the attribute must return the value "`off`".

The last state set must persist until the document is destroyed or the state is changed. Initially, documents must have their `designMode` disabled.

When the `designMode` changes from being disabled to being enabled, the user agent must synchronously reset the document's active range's start and end boundary points to be at the start of the `Document` and then run the focusing steps for the root element of the `Document`, if any.

#### 6.6.3 Best practices for in-page editors

Authors are encouraged to set the 'white-space' property on editing hosts and on markup that was originally created through these editing mechanisms to the value 'pre-wrap'. Default HTML whitespace handling is not well suited to WYSIWYG editing, and line wrapping will not work correctly in some corner cases if 'white-space' is left at its default value.

As an example of problems that occur if the default 'normal' value is used instead, consider the case of the user typing "`yellow␣␣ball`", with two spaces (here represented by "␣") between the words. With the editing rules in place for the default value of 'white-space' ('normal'), the resulting markup will either consist of "`yellow&nbsp; ball`" or "`yellow &nbsp;ball`"; i.e., there will be a non-breaking space between the two words in addition to the regular space. This is necessary because the 'normal' value for 'white-space' requires adjacent regular spaces to be collapsed together.

In the former case, "`yellow⍽`" might wrap to the next line ("⍽" being used here to represent a non-breaking space) even though "`yellow`" alone might fit at the end of the line; in the latter case, "`⍽ball`", if wrapped to the start of the line, would have visible indentation from the non-breaking space.

When 'white-space' is set to 'pre-wrap', however, the editing rules will instead simply put two regular spaces between the words, and should the two words be split at the end of a line, the spaces would be neatly removed from the rendering.

#### 6.6.4 Editing APIs

The definition of the terms active range, editing host, and editable, the user interface requirements of elements that are editing hosts or editable, the `execCommand()`, `queryCommandEnabled()`, `queryCommandIndeterm()`, `queryCommandState()`, `queryCommandSupported()`, and `queryCommandValue()` methods, text selections, and the delete the selection algorithm are defined in the HTML Editing APIs specification. [EDITING]

#### 6.6.5 Spelling and grammar checking

User agents can support the checking of spelling and grammar of editable text, either in form controls (such as the value of `textarea` elements), or in elements in an editing host (e.g. using `contenteditable`).

For each element, user agents must establish a default behavior, either through defaults or through preferences expressed by the user. There are three possible default behaviors for each element:

true-by-default
  The element will be checked for spelling and grammar if its contents are editable.
false-by-default
  The element will never be checked for spelling and grammar.
inherit-by-default
  The element's default behavior is the same as its parent element's. Elements that have no parent element cannot have this as their default behavior.

The `spellcheck` attribute is an enumerated attribute whose keywords are the empty string, `true` and `false`. The empty string and the `true` keyword map to the true state. The `false` keyword maps to the false state. In addition, there is a third state, the default state, which is the missing value default (and the invalid value default).

The true state indicates that the element is to have its spelling and grammar checked. The default state indicates that the element is to act according to a default behavior, possibly based on the parent element's own `spellcheck` state, as defined below. The false state indicates that the element is not to be checked.

element . `spellcheck` [ = value ]

  Returns true if the element is to have its spelling and grammar checked; otherwise, returns false.

  Can be set, to override the default and set the `spellcheck` content attribute.

element . `forceSpellCheck`()

  Forces the user agent to report spelling and grammar errors on the element (if checking is enabled), even if the user has never focused the element. (If the method is not invoked, user agents can hide errors in text that wasn't just entered by the user.)

The `spellcheck` IDL attribute, on getting, must return true if the element's `spellcheck` content attribute is in the true state, or if the element's `spellcheck` content attribute is in the default state and the element's default behavior is true-by-default, or if the element's `spellcheck` content attribute is in the default state and the element's default behavior is inherit-by-default and the element's parent element's `spellcheck` IDL attribute would return true; otherwise, if none of those conditions applies, then the attribute must instead return false.

The `spellcheck` IDL attribute is not affected by user preferences that override the `spellcheck` content attribute, and therefore might not reflect the actual spellchecking state.

On setting, if the new value is true, then the element's `spellcheck` content attribute must be set to the literal string "`true`", otherwise it must be set to the literal string "`false`".

User agents must only consider the following pieces of text as checkable for the purposes of this feature:

- The value of `input` elements whose `type` attributes are in the Text, Search, URL, or E-mail states and that are mutable (i.e. that do not have the `readonly` attribute specified and that are not disabled).
- The value of `textarea` elements that do not have a `readonly` attribute and that are not disabled.
- Text in `Text` nodes that are children of editing hosts or editable elements.
- Text in attributes of editable elements.

For text that is part of a `Text` node, the element with which the text is associated is the element that is the immediate parent of the first character of the word, sentence, or other piece of text. For text in attributes, it is the attribute's element. For the values of `input` and `textarea` elements, it is the element itself.

To determine if a word, sentence, or other piece of text in an applicable element (as defined above) is to have spelling- and grammar-checking enabled, the UA must use the following algorithm:

1. If the user has disabled the checking for this text, then the checking is disabled.
2. Otherwise, if the user has forced the checking for this text to always be enabled, then the checking is enabled.
3. Otherwise, if the element with which the text is associated has a `spellcheck` content attribute, then: if that attribute is in the true state, then checking is enabled; otherwise, if that attribute is in the false state, then checking is disabled.
4. Otherwise, if there is an ancestor element with a `spellcheck` content attribute that is not in the default state, then: if the nearest such ancestor's `spellcheck` content attribute is in the true state, then checking is enabled; otherwise, checking is disabled.
5. Otherwise, if the element's default behavior is true-by-default, then checking is enabled.
6. Otherwise, if the element's default behavior is false-by-default, then checking is disabled.
7. Otherwise, if the element's parent element has its checking enabled, then checking is enabled.
8. Otherwise, checking is disabled.

If the checking is enabled for a word/sentence/text, the user agent should indicate spelling and grammar errors in that text. User agents should take into account the other semantics given in the document when suggesting spelling and grammar corrections. User agents may use the language of the element to determine what spelling and grammar rules to use, or may use the user's preferred language settings. UAs should use `input` element attributes such as `pattern` to ensure that the resulting value is valid, where possible.

If checking is disabled, the user agent should not indicate spelling or grammar errors for that text.

Even when checking is enabled, user agents may opt to not report spelling or grammar errors in text that the user agent deems the user has no interest in having checked (e.g. text that was already present when the page was loaded, or that the user did not type, or text in controls that the user has not focused, or in parts of e-mail addresses that the user agent is not confident were misspelt). The `forceSpellCheck()` method, when invoked on an element, must override this behavior, forcing the user agent to consider all spelling and grammar errors in text in that element for which checking is enabled to be of interest to the user.

The element with ID "a" in the following example would be the one used to determine if the word "Hello" is checked for spelling errors. In this example, it would not be.

    <div contenteditable="true">
     <span spellcheck="false" id="a">Hell</span><em>o!</em>
    </div>

The element with ID "b" in the following example would have checking enabled (the leading space character in the attribute's value on the `input` element causes the attribute to be ignored, so the ancestor's value is used instead, regardless of the default).

    <p spellcheck="true">
     <label>Name: <input spellcheck=" false" id="b"></label>
    </p>

This specification does not define the user interface for spelling and grammar checkers. A user agent could offer on-demand checking, could perform continuous checking while the checking is enabled, or could use other interfaces.

### 6.7 Drag and drop

This section defines an event-based drag-and-drop mechanism.

This specification does not define exactly what a drag-and-drop operation actually is.

On a visual medium with a pointing device, a drag operation could be the default action of a `mousedown` event that is followed by a series of `mousemove` events, and the drop could be triggered by the mouse being released.

When using an input modality other than a pointing device, users would probably have to explicitly indicate their intention to perform a drag-and-drop operation, stating what they wish to drag and where they wish to drop it, respectively.

However it is implemented, drag-and-drop operations must have a starting point (e.g. where the mouse was clicked, or the start of the selection or element that was selected for the drag), may have any number of intermediate steps (elements that the mouse moves over during a drag, or elements that the user picks as possible drop points as he cycles through possibilities), and must either have an end point (the element above which the mouse button was released, or the element that was finally selected), or be canceled. The end point must be the last element selected as a possible drop point before the drop occurs (so if the operation is not canceled, there must be at least one element in the middle step).

#### 6.7.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

To make an element draggable is simple: give the element a `draggable` attribute, and set an event listener for `dragstart` that stores the data being dragged.

The event handler typically needs to check that it's not a text selection that is being dragged, and then needs to store data into the `DataTransfer` object and set the allowed effects (copy, move, link, or some combination).

For example:

    <p>What fruits do you like?</p>
    <ol ondragstart="dragStartHandler(event)">
     <li draggable="true" data-value="fruit-apple">Apples</li>
     <li draggable="true" data-value="fruit-orange">Oranges</li>
     <li draggable="true" data-value="fruit-pear">Pears</li>
    </ol>
    <script>
      var internalDNDType = 'text/x-example'; // set this to something specific to your site
      function dragStartHandler(event) {
        if (event.target instanceof HTMLLIElement) {
          // use the element's data-value="" attribute as the value to be moving:
          event.dataTransfer.setData(internalDNDType, event.target.dataset.value);
          event.dataTransfer.effectAllowed = 'move'; // only allow moves
        } else {
          event.preventDefault(); // don't allow selection to be dragged
        }
      }
    </script>

To accept a drop, the drop target has to have a `dropzone` attribute and listen to the `drop` event.

The value of the `dropzone` attribute specifies what kind of data to accept (e.g. "`string:text/plain`" to accept any text strings, or "`file:image/png`" to accept a PNG image file) and what kind of feedback to give (e.g. "`move`" to indicate that the data will be moved).

Instead of using the `dropzone` attribute, a drop target can handle the `dragenter` event (to report whether or not the drop target is to accept the drop) and the `dragover` event (to specify what feedback is to be shown to the user).

The `drop` event allows the actual drop to be performed. This event needs to be canceled, so that the `dropEffect` attribute's value can be used by the source (otherwise it's reset).

For example:

    <p>Drop your favorite fruits below:</p>
    <ol dropzone="move string:text/x-example" ondrop="dropHandler(event)">
     <!-- don't forget to change the "text/x-example" type to something
     specific to your site -->
    </ol>
    <script>
      var internalDNDType = 'text/x-example'; // set this to something specific to your site
      function dropHandler(event) {
        var li = document.createElement('li');
        var data = event.dataTransfer.getData(internalDNDType);
        if (data == 'fruit-apple') {
          li.textContent = 'Apples';
        } else if (data == 'fruit-orange') {
          li.textContent = 'Oranges';
        } else if (data == 'fruit-pear') {
          li.textContent = 'Pears';
        } else {
          li.textContent = 'Unknown Fruit';
        }
        event.target.appendChild(li);
      }
    </script>

To remove the original element (the one that was dragged) from the display, the `dragend` event can be used.

For our example here, that means updating the original markup to handle that event:

    <p>What fruits do you like?</p>
    <ol ondragstart="dragStartHandler(event)" ondragend="dragEndHandler(event)">
     ...as before...
    </ol>
    <script>
      function dragStartHandler(event) {
        // ...as before...
      }
      function dragEndHandler(event) {
        if (event.dataTransfer.dropEffect == 'move') {
          // remove the dragged element
          event.target.parentNode.removeChild(event.target);
        }
      }
    </script>

#### 6.7.2 The drag data store

The data that underlies a drag-and-drop operation, known as the drag data store, consists of the following information:

- A drag data store item list, which is a list of items representing the dragged data, each consisting of the following information:

  The drag data item kind

    The kind of data:

    Plain Unicode string

      Text.

    File

      Binary data with a file name.

  The drag data item type string

    A Unicode string giving the type or format of the data, generally given by a MIME type. Some values that are not MIME types are special-cased for legacy reasons. The API does not enforce the use of MIME types; other values can be used as well. In all cases, however, the values are all converted to ASCII lowercase by the API.

    Strings that contain space characters cannot be used with the `dropzone` attribute, so authors are encouraged to use only MIME types or custom strings (without spaces).

    There is a limit of one Plain Unicode string item per item type string.

  The actual data

    A Unicode or binary string, in some cases with a file name (itself a Unicode string), as per the drag data item kind.

  The drag data store item list is ordered in the order that the items were added to the list; most recently added last.

- The following information, used to generate the UI feedback during the drag:

  - User-agent-defined default feedback information, known as the drag data store default feedback.
  - Optionally, a bitmap image and the coordinate of a point within that image, known as the drag data store bitmap and drag data store hot spot coordinate.

- A drag data store mode, which is one of the following:

  Read/write mode

    For the `dragstart` event. New data can be added to the drag data store.

  Read-only mode

    For the `drop` event. The list of items representing dragged data can be read, including the data. No new data can be added.

  Protected mode

    For all other events. The formats and kinds in the drag data store list of items representing dragged data can be enumerated, but the data itself is unavailable and no new data can be added.

- A drag data store allowed effects state, which is a string.

When a drag data store is created, it must be initialised such that its drag data store item list is empty, it has no drag data store default feedback, it has no drag data store bitmap and drag data store hot spot coordinate, its drag data store mode is protected mode, and its drag data store allowed effects state is the string "`uninitialized`".

#### 6.7.3 The `DataTransfer` interface

`DataTransfer` objects are used to expose the drag data store that underlies a drag-and-drop operation.

    interface DataTransfer {
               attribute DOMString dropEffect;
               attribute DOMString effectAllowed;

      readonly attribute DataTransferItemList items;

      void setDragImage(Element image, long x, long y);

      /* old interface */
      readonly attribute DOMString[] types;
      DOMString getData(DOMString format);
      void setData(DOMString format, DOMString data);
      void clearData(optional DOMString format);
      readonly attribute FileList files;
    };

dataTransfer . `dropEffect` [ = value ]

  Returns the kind of operation that is currently selected. If the kind of operation isn't one of those that is allowed by the `effectAllowed` attribute, then the operation will fail.

  Can be set, to change the selected operation.

  The possible values are "`none`", "`copy`", "`link`", and "`move`".

dataTransfer . `effectAllowed` [ = value ]

  Returns the kinds of operations that are to be allowed.

  Can be set (during the `dragstart` event), to change the allowed operations.

  The possible values are "`none`", "`copy`", "`copyLink`", "`copyMove`", "`link`", "`linkMove`", "`move`", "`all`", and "`uninitialized`",

dataTransfer . `items`

  Returns a `DataTransferItemList` object, with the drag data.

dataTransfer . `setDragImage`(element, x, y)

  Uses the given element to update the drag feedback, replacing any previously specified feedback.

dataTransfer . `types`

  Returns an array listing the formats that were set in the `dragstart` event. In addition, if any files are being dragged, then one of the types will be the string "`Files`".

data = dataTransfer . `getData`(format)

  Returns the specified data. If there is no such data, returns the empty string.

dataTransfer . `setData`(format, data)

  Adds the specified data.

dataTransfer . `clearData`( [ format ] )

  Removes the data of the specified formats. Removes all data if the argument is omitted.

dataTransfer . `files`

  Returns a `FileList` of the files being dragged, if any.

`DataTransfer` objects are used during the drag-and-drop events, and are only valid while those events are being fired.

A `DataTransfer` object is associated with a drag data store while it is valid.

The `dropEffect` attribute controls the drag-and-drop feedback that the user is given during a drag-and-drop operation. When the `DataTransfer` object is created, the `dropEffect` attribute is set to a string value. On getting, it must return its current value. On setting, if the new value is one of "`none`", "`copy`", "`link`", or "`move`", then the attribute's current value must be set to the new value. Other values must be ignored.

The `effectAllowed` attribute is used in the drag-and-drop processing model to initialise the `dropEffect` attribute during the `dragenter` and `dragover` events. When the `DataTransfer` object is created, the `effectAllowed` attribute is set to a string value. On getting, it must return its current value. On setting, if drag data store's mode is the read/write mode and the new value is one of "`none`", "`copy`", "`copyLink`", "`copyMove`", "`link`", "`linkMove`", "`move`", "`all`", or "`uninitialized`", then the attribute's current value must be set to the new value. Otherwise it must be left unchanged.

The `items` attribute must return a `DataTransferItemList` object associated with the `DataTransfer` object. The same object must be returned each time.

The `setDragImage(element, x, y)` method must run the following steps:

1. If the `DataTransfer` object is no longer associated with a drag data store, abort these steps. Nothing happens.

2. If the drag data store's mode is not the read/write mode, abort these steps. Nothing happens.

3. If the element argument is an `img` element, then set the drag data store bitmap to the element's image (at its intrinsic size); otherwise, set the drag data store bitmap to an image generated from the given element (the exact mechanism for doing so is not currently specified).

4. Set the drag data store hot spot coordinate to the given x, y coordinate.

The `types` attribute must return a live read only array giving the strings that the following steps would produce. The same object must be returned each time.

1. Start with an empty list L.

2. If the `DataTransfer` object is no longer associated with a drag data store, the array is empty. Abort these steps; return the empty list L.

3. For each item in the drag data store item list whose kind is Plain Unicode string, add an entry to the list L consisting of the item's type string.

4. If there are any items in the drag data store item list whose kind is File, then add an entry to the list L consisting of the string "`Files`". (This value can be distinguished from the other values because it is not lowercase.)

5. The strings produced by these steps are those in the list L.

The `getData(format)` method must run the following steps:

1. If the `DataTransfer` object is no longer associated with a drag data store, return the empty string and abort these steps.

2. If the drag data store's mode is the protected mode, return the empty string and abort these steps.

3. Let format be the first argument, converted to ASCII lowercase.

4. Let convert-to-URL be false.

5. If format equals "`text`", change it to "`text/plain`".

6. If format equals "`url`", change it to "`text/uri-list`" and set convert-to-URL to true.

7. If there is no item in the drag data store item list whose kind is Plain Unicode string and whose type string is equal to format, return the empty string and abort these steps.

8. Let result be the data of the item in the drag data store item list whose kind is Plain Unicode string and whose type string is equal to format.

9. If convert-to-URL is true, then parse result as appropriate for `text/uri-list` data, and then set result to the first URL from the list, if any, or the empty string otherwise. [RFC2483]

10. Return result.

The `setData(format, data)` method must run the following steps:

1. If the `DataTransfer` object is no longer associated with a drag data store, abort these steps. Nothing happens.

2. If the drag data store's mode is not the read/write mode, abort these steps. Nothing happens.

3. Let format be the first argument, converted to ASCII lowercase.

4. If format equals "`text`", change it to "`text/plain`".

   If format equals "`url`", change it to "`text/uri-list`".

5. Remove the item in the drag data store item list whose kind is Plain Unicode string and whose type string is equal to format, if there is one.

6. Add an item to the drag data store item list whose kind is Plain Unicode string, whose type string is equal to format, and whose data is the string given by the method's second argument.

The `clearData()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the `DataTransfer` object is no longer associated with a drag data store, abort these steps. Nothing happens.

2. If the drag data store's mode is not the read/write mode, abort these steps. Nothing happens.

3. If the method was called with no arguments, remove each item in the drag data store item list whose kind is Plain Unicode string, and abort these steps.

4. Let format be the first argument, converted to ASCII lowercase.

5. If format equals "`text`", change it to "`text/plain`".

   If format equals "`url`", change it to "`text/uri-list`".

6. Remove the item in the drag data store item list whose kind is Plain Unicode string and whose type string is equal to format, if there is one.

The `clearData()` method does not affect whether any files were included in the drag, so the `types` attribute's list might still not be empty after calling `clearData()` (it would still contain the "`Files`" string if any files were included in the drag).

The `files` attribute must return a live `FileList` sequence consisting of `File` objects representing the files found by the following steps. The same object must be returned each time. Furthermore, for a given `FileList` object and a given underlying file, the same `File` object must be used each time.

1. Start with an empty list L.

2. If the `DataTransfer` object is no longer associated with a drag data store, the `FileList` is empty. Abort these steps; return the empty list L.

3. If the drag data store's mode is the protected mode, abort these steps; return the empty list L.

4. For each item in the drag data store item list whose kind is File , add the item's data (the file, in particular its name and contents, as well as its type) to the list L.

5. The files found by these steps are those in the list L.

This version of the API does not expose the types of the files during the drag.

##### 6.7.3.1 The `DataTransferItemList` interface

Each `DataTransfer` object is associated with a `DataTransferItemList` object.

    interface DataTransferItemList {
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      getter DataTransferItem (unsigned long index);
      DataTransferItem? add(DOMString data, DOMString type);
      DataTransferItem? add(File data);
      void remove(unsigned long index);
      void clear();
    };

items . `length`

  Returns the number of items in the drag data store.

items[index]

  Returns the `DataTransferItem` object representing the indexth entry in the drag data store.

items . `remove`(index)

  Removes the indexth entry in the drag data store.

items . `clear`()

  Removes all the entries in the drag data store.

items . `add`(data)
items . `add`(data, type)

  Adds a new entry for the given data to the drag data store. If the data is plain text then a type string has to be provided also.

While the `DataTransferItemList` object's `DataTransfer` object is associated with a drag data store, the `DataTransferItemList` object's mode is the same as the drag data store mode. When the `DataTransferItemList` object's `DataTransfer` object is not associated with a drag data store, the `DataTransferItemList` object's mode is the disabled mode. The drag data store referenced in this section (which is used only when the `DataTransferItemList` object is not in the disabled mode) is the drag data store with which the `DataTransferItemList` object's `DataTransfer` object is associated.

The `length` attribute must return zero if the object is in the disabled mode; otherwise it must return the number of items in the drag data store item list.

When a `DataTransferItemList` object is not in the disabled mode, its supported property indices are the numbers in the range 0 .. n-1, where n is the number of items in the drag data store item list.

To determine the value of an indexed property i of a `DataTransferItemList` object, the user agent must return a `DataTransferItem` object representing the ith item in the drag data store. The same object must be returned each time a particular item is obtained from this `DataTransferItemList` object. The `DataTransferItem` object must be associated with the same `DataTransfer` object as the `DataTransferItemList` object when it is first created.

The `add()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the `DataTransferItemList` object is not in the read/write mode, return null and abort these steps.

2. Jump to the appropriate set of steps from the following list:

   If the first argument to the method is a string

     If there is already an item in the drag data store item list whose kind is Plain Unicode string and whose type string is equal to the value of the method's second argument, converted to ASCII lowercase, then throw a `NotSupportedError` exception and abort these steps.

     Otherwise, add an item to the drag data store item list whose kind is Plain Unicode string, whose type string is equal to the value of the method's second argument, converted to ASCII lowercase, and whose data is the string given by the method's first argument.

   If the first argument to the method is a `File`

     Add an item to the drag data store item list whose kind is File, whose type string is the `type` of the `File`, converted to ASCII lowercase, and whose data is the same as the `File`'s data.

3. Determine the value of the indexed property corresponding to the newly added item, and return that value (a newly created `DataTransferItem` object).

The `remove()` method, when invoked with the argument i, must run these steps:

1. If the `DataTransferItemList` object is not in the read/write mode, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. Remove the ith item from the drag data store.

The `clear` method, if the `DataTransferItemList` object is in the read/write mode, must remove all the items from the drag data store. Otherwise, it must do nothing.

##### 6.7.3.2 The `DataTransferItem` interface

Each `DataTransferItem` object is associated with a `DataTransfer` object.

    interface DataTransferItem {
      readonly attribute DOMString kind;
      readonly attribute DOMString type;
      void getAsString(FunctionStringCallback? _callback);
      File? getAsFile();
    };

    callback FunctionStringCallback = void (DOMString data);

item . `kind`

  Returns the drag data item kind, one of: "string", "file".

item . `type`

  Returns the drag data item type string.

item . `getAsString`(callback)

  Invokes the callback with the string data as the argument, if the drag data item kind is Plain Unicode string.

file = item . `getAsFile`()

  Returns a `File` object, if the drag data item kind is File.

While the `DataTransferItem` object's `DataTransfer` object is associated with a drag data store and that drag data store's drag data store item list still contains the item that the `DataTransferItem` object represents, the `DataTransferItem` object's mode is the same as the drag data store mode. When the `DataTransferItem` object's `DataTransfer` object is not associated with a drag data store, or if the item that the `DataTransferItem` object represents has been removed from the relevant drag data store item list, the `DataTransferItem` object's mode is the disabled mode. The drag data store referenced in this section (which is used only when the `DataTransferItem` object is not in the disabled mode) is the drag data store with which the `DataTransferItem` object's `DataTransfer` object is associated.

The `kind` attribute must return the empty string if the `DataTransferItem` object is in the disabled mode; otherwise it must return the string given in the cell from the second column of the following table from the row whose cell in the first column contains the drag data item kind of the item represented by the `DataTransferItem` object:

Kind | String
--- | ---
Plain Unicode string | "`string`"
File | "`file`"

The `type` attribute must return the empty string if the `DataTransferItem` object is in the disabled mode; otherwise it must return the drag data item type string of the item represented by the `DataTransferItem` object.

The `getAsString(callback)` method must run the following steps:

1. If the callback is null, abort these steps.

2. If the `DataTransferItem` object is not in the read/write mode or the read-only mode, abort these steps. The callback is never invoked.

3. If the drag data item kind is not Plain Unicode string, abort these steps. The callback is never invoked.

4. Otherwise, queue a task to invoke callback, passing the actual data of the item represented by the `DataTransferItem` object as the argument.

The `getAsFile()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the `DataTransferItem` object is not in the read/write mode or the read-only mode, return null and abort these steps.

2. If the drag data item kind is not File, then return null and abort these steps.

3. Return a new `File` object representing the actual data of the item represented by the `DataTransferItem` object.

#### 6.7.4 The `DragEvent` interface

The drag-and-drop processing model involves several events. They all use the `DragEvent` interface.

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional DragEventInit eventInitDict)]
    interface DragEvent : MouseEvent {
      readonly attribute DataTransfer? dataTransfer;
    };

    dictionary DragEventInit : MouseEventInit {
      DataTransfer? dataTransfer;
    };

event . `dataTransfer`

  Returns the `DataTransfer` object for the event.

Although, for consistency with other event interfaces, the `DragEvent` interface has a constructor, it is not particularly useful. In particular, there's no way to create a useful `DataTransfer` object from script, as `DataTransfer` objects have a processing and security model that is coordinated by the browser during drag-and-drops.

The `dataTransfer` attribute of the `DragEvent` interface must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the context information for the event.

When a user agent is required to fire a DND event named e at an element, using a particular drag data store, and optionally with a specific related target, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If no specific related target was provided, set related target to null.

2. Let window be the `Window` object of the `Document` object of the specified target element.

3. If e is `dragstart`, set the drag data store mode to the read/write mode.

   If e is `drop`, set the drag data store mode to the read-only mode.

4. Let dataTransfer be a newly created `DataTransfer` object associated with the given drag data store.

5. Set the `effectAllowed` attribute to the drag data store's drag data store allowed effects state.

6. Set the `dropEffect` attribute to "`none`" if e is `dragstart`, `drag`, `dragexit`, or `dragleave`; to the value corresponding to the current drag operation if e is `drop` or `dragend`; and to a value based on the `effectAllowed` attribute's value and the drag-and-drop source, as given by the following table, otherwise (i.e. if e is `dragenter` or `dragover`):

   `effectAllowed` | `dropEffect`
   --- | ---
   "`none`" | "`none`"
   "`copy`" | "`copy`"
   "`copyLink`" | "`copy`", or, if appropriate, "`link`"
   "`copyMove`" | "`copy`", or, if appropriate, "`move`"
   "`all`" | "`copy`", or, if appropriate, either "`link`" or "`move`"
   "`link`" | "`link`"
   "`linkMove`" | "`link`", or, if appropriate, "`move`"
   "`move`" | "`move`"
   "`uninitialized`" when what is being dragged is a selection from a text field | "`move`", or, if appropriate, either "`copy`" or "`link`"
   "`uninitialized`" when what is being dragged is a selection | "`copy`", or, if appropriate, either "`link`" or "`move`"
   "`uninitialized`" when what is being dragged is an `a` element with an `href` attribute | "`link`", or, if appropriate, either "`copy`" or "`move`"
   Any other case | "`copy`", or, if appropriate, either "`link`" or "`move`"

   Where the table above provides possibly appropriate alternatives, user agents may instead use the listed alternative values if platform conventions dictate that the user has requested those alternate effects.

   For example, Windows platform conventions are such that dragging while holding the "alt" key indicates a preference for linking the data, rather than moving or copying it. Therefore, on a Windows system, if "`link`" is an option according to the table above while the "alt" key is depressed, the user agent could select that instead of "`copy`" or "`move`".

7. Create a trusted `DragEvent` object and initialise it to have the given name e, to bubble, to be cancelable unless e is `dragexit`, `dragleave`, or `dragend`, and to have the `view` attribute initialised to window, the `detail` attribute initialised to zero, the mouse and key attributes initialised according to the state of the input devices as they would be for user interaction events, the `relatedTarget` attribute initialised to related target, and the `dataTransfer` attribute initialised to dataTransfer, the `DataTransfer` object created above.

   If there is no relevant pointing device, the object must have its `screenX`, `screenY`, `clientX`, `clientY`, and `button` attributes set to 0.

8. Dispatch the newly created `DragEvent` object at the specified target element.

9. Set the drag data store allowed effects state to the current value of dataTransfer's `effectAllowed` attribute. (It can only have changed value if e is `dragstart`.)

10. Set the drag data store mode back to the protected mode if it was changed in the first step.

11. Break the association between dataTransfer and the drag data store.

#### 6.7.5 Drag-and-drop processing model

When the user attempts to begin a drag operation, the user agent must run the following steps. User agents must act as if these steps were run even if the drag actually started in another document or application and the user agent was not aware that the drag was occurring until it intersected with a document under the user agent's purview.

1. Determine what is being dragged, as follows:

   If the drag operation was invoked on a selection, then it is the selection that is being dragged.

   Otherwise, if the drag operation was invoked on a `Document`, it is the first element, going up the ancestor chain, starting at the node that the user tried to drag, that has the IDL attribute `draggable` set to true. If there is no such element, then nothing is being dragged; abort these steps, the drag-and-drop operation is never started.

   Otherwise, the drag operation was invoked outside the user agent's purview. What is being dragged is defined by the document or application where the drag was started.

   `img` elements and `a` elements with an `href` attribute have their `draggable` attribute set to true by default.

2. Create a drag data store. All the DND events fired subsequently by the steps in this section must use this drag data store.

3. Establish which DOM node is the source node, as follows:

   If it is a selection that is being dragged, then the source node is the `Text` node that the user started the drag on (typically the `Text` node that the user originally clicked). If the user did not specify a particular node, for example if the user just told the user agent to begin a drag of "the selection", then the source node is the first `Text` node containing a part of the selection.

   Otherwise, if it is an element that is being dragged, then the source node is the element that is being dragged.

   Otherwise, the source node is part of another document or application. When this specification requires that an event be dispatched at the source node in this case, the user agent must instead follow the platform-specific conventions relevant to that situation.

   Multiple events are fired on the source node during the course of the drag-and-drop operation.

4. Determine the list of dragged nodes, as follows:

   If it is a selection that is being dragged, then the list of dragged nodes contains, in tree order, every node that is partially or completely included in the selection (including all their ancestors).

   Otherwise, the list of dragged nodes contains only the source node, if any.

5. If it is a selection that is being dragged, then add an item to the drag data store item list, with its properties set as follows:

   The drag data item type string
     "`text/plain`"
   The drag data item kind
     Plain Unicode string
   The actual data
     The text of the selection

   Otherwise, if any files are being dragged, then add one item per file to the drag data store item list, with their properties set as follows:

   The drag data item type string
     The MIME type of the file, if known, or "`application/octet-stream`" otherwise.
   The drag data item kind
     File
   The actual data
     The file's contents and name.

   Dragging files can currently only happen from outside a browsing context, for example from a file system manager application.

   If the drag initiated outside of the application, the user agent must add items to the drag data store item list as appropriate for the data being dragged, honoring platform conventions where appropriate; however, if the platform conventions do not use MIME types to label dragged data, the user agent must make a best-effort attempt to map the types to MIME types, and, in any case, all the drag data item type strings must be converted to ASCII lowercase.

   User agents may also add one or more items representing the selection or dragged element(s) in other forms, e.g. as HTML.

6. If the list of dragged nodes is not empty, then extract the microdata from those nodes into a JSON form, and add one item to the drag data store item list, with its properties set as follows:

   The drag data item type string
     `application/microdata+json`
   The drag data item kind
     Plain Unicode string
   The actual data
     The resulting JSON string.

7. Run the following substeps:

   1. Let urls be an empty list of absolute URLs.

   2. For each node in the list of dragged nodes:

      If the node is an `a` element with an `href` attribute
        Add to urls the result of resolving the element's `href` content attribute relative to the element.
      If the node is an `img` element with a `src` attribute
        Add to urls the result of resolving the element's `src` content attribute relative to the element.

   3. If urls is still empty, abort these substeps.

   4. Let url string be the result of concatenating the strings in urls, in the order they were added, separated by a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED character pair (CRLF).

   5. Add one item to the drag data store item list, with its properties set as follows:

      The drag data item type string
        `text/uri-list`
      The drag data item kind
        Plain Unicode string
      The actual data
        url string

8. Update the drag data store default feedback as appropriate for the user agent (if the user is dragging the selection, then the selection would likely be the basis for this feedback; if the user is dragging an element, then that element's rendering would be used; if the drag began outside the user agent, then the platform conventions for determining the drag feedback should be used).

9. Fire a DND event named `dragstart` at the source node.

   If the event is canceled, then the drag-and-drop operation should not occur; abort these steps.

   Since events with no event listeners registered are, almost by definition, never canceled, drag-and-drop is always available to the user if the author does not specifically prevent it.

10. Initiate the drag-and-drop operation in a manner consistent with platform conventions, and as described below.

    The drag-and-drop feedback must be generated from the first of the following sources that is available:

    1. The drag data store bitmap, if any. In this case, the drag data store hot spot coordinate should be used as hints for where to put the cursor relative to the resulting image. The values are expressed as distances in CSS pixels from the left side and from the top side of the image respectively. [CSS]
    2. The drag data store default feedback.

From the moment that the user agent is to initiate the drag-and-drop operation, until the end of the drag-and-drop operation, device input events (e.g. mouse and keyboard events) must be suppressed.

During the drag operation, the element directly indicated by the user as the drop target is called the immediate user selection. (Only elements can be selected by the user; other nodes must not be made available as drop targets.) However, the immediate user selection is not necessarily the current target element, which is the element currently selected for the drop part of the drag-and-drop operation.

The immediate user selection changes as the user selects different elements (either by pointing at them with a pointing device, or by selecting them in some other way). The current target element changes when the immediate user selection changes, based on the results of event listeners in the document, as described below.

Both the current target element and the immediate user selection can be null, which means no target element is selected. They can also both be elements in other (DOM-based) documents, or other (non-Web) programs altogether. (For example, a user could drag text to a word-processor.) The current target element is initially null.

In addition, there is also a current drag operation, which can take on the values "`none`", "`copy`", "`link`", and "`move`". Initially, it has the value "`none`". It is updated by the user agent as described in the steps below.

User agents must, as soon as the drag operation is initiated and every 350ms (±200ms) thereafter for as long as the drag operation is ongoing, queue a task to perform the following steps in sequence:

1. If the user agent is still performing the previous iteration of the sequence (if any) when the next iteration becomes due, abort these steps for this iteration (effectively "skipping missed frames" of the drag-and-drop operation).

2. Fire a DND event named `drag` at the source node. If this event is canceled, the user agent must set the current drag operation to "`none`" (no drag operation).

3. If the `drag` event was not canceled and the user has not ended the drag-and-drop operation, check the state of the drag-and-drop operation, as follows:

   1. If the user is indicating a different immediate user selection than during the last iteration (or if this is the first iteration), and if this immediate user selection is not the same as the current target element, then fire a DND event named `dragexit` at the current target element, and then update the current target element as follows:

      If the new immediate user selection is null

        Set the current target element to null also.

      If the new immediate user selection is in a non-DOM document or application

        Set the current target element to the immediate user selection.

      Otherwise

        Fire a DND event named `dragenter` at the immediate user selection.

        If the event is canceled, then set the current target element to the immediate user selection.

        Otherwise, run the appropriate step from the following list:

        If the immediate user selection is a text field (e.g. `textarea`, or an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Text state) or an editing host or editable element, and the drag data store item list has an item with the drag data item type string "`text/plain`" and the drag data item kind Plain Unicode string

          Set the current target element to the immediate user selection anyway.

        If the immediate user selection is an element with a `dropzone` attribute that matches the drag data store

          Set the current target element to the immediate user selection anyway.

        If the immediate user selection is an element that itself has an ancestor element with a `dropzone` attribute that matches the drag data store

          Let new target be the nearest (deepest) such ancestor element.

          If the immediate user selection is new target, then leave the current target element unchanged.

          Otherwise, fire a DND event named `dragenter` at new target, with the current current target element as the specific related target. Then, set the current target element to new target, regardless of whether that event was canceled or not.

        If the immediate user selection is the body element

          Leave the current target element unchanged.

        Otherwise

          Fire a DND event named `dragenter` at the body element, if there is one, or at the `Document` object, if not. Then, set the current target element to the body element, regardless of whether that event was canceled or not.

   2. If the previous step caused the current target element to change, and if the previous target element was not null or a part of a non-DOM document, then fire a DND event named `dragleave` at the previous target element, with the new current target element as the specific related target.

   3. If the current target element is a DOM element, then fire a DND event named `dragover` at this current target element.

      If the `dragover` event is not canceled, run the appropriate step from the following list:

      If the current target element is a text field (e.g. `textarea`, or an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Text state) or an editing host or editable element, and the drag data store item list has an item with the drag data item type string "`text/plain`" and the drag data item kind Plain Unicode string

        Set the current drag operation to either "`copy`" or "`move`", as appropriate given the platform conventions.

      If the current target element is an element with a `dropzone` attribute that matches the drag data store and specifies an operation

        Set the current drag operation to the operation specified by the `dropzone` attribute of the current target element.

      If the current target element is an element with a `dropzone` attribute that matches the drag data store and does not specify an operation

        Set the current drag operation to "`copy`".

      Otherwise

        Reset the current drag operation to "`none`".

      Otherwise (if the `dragover` event is canceled), set the current drag operation based on the values of the `effectAllowed` and `dropEffect` attributes of the `DragEvent` object's `dataTransfer` object as they stood after the event dispatch finished, as per the following table:

      `effectAllowed` | `dropEffect` | Drag operation
      --- | --- | ---
      "`uninitialized`", "`copy`", "`copyLink`", "`copyMove`", or "`all`" | "`copy`" | "`copy`"
      "`uninitialized`", "`link`", "`copyLink`", "`linkMove`", or "`all`" | "`link`" | "`link`"
      "`uninitialized`", "`move`", "`copyMove`", "`linkMove`", or "`all`" | "`move`" | "`move`"
      Any other case | "`none`"

   4. Otherwise, if the current target element is not a DOM element, use platform-specific mechanisms to determine what drag operation is being performed (none, copy, link, or move), and set the current drag operation accordingly.

   5. Update the drag feedback (e.g. the mouse cursor) to match the current drag operation, as follows:

      Drag operation | Feedback
      --- | ---
      "`copy`" | Data will be copied if dropped here.
      "`link`" | Data will be linked if dropped here.
      "`move`" | Data will be moved if dropped here.
      "`none`" | No operation allowed, dropping here will cancel the drag-and-drop operation.

4. Otherwise, if the user ended the drag-and-drop operation (e.g. by releasing the mouse button in a mouse-driven drag-and-drop interface), or if the `drag` event was canceled, then this will be the last iteration. Run the following steps, then stop the drag-and-drop operation:

   1. If the current drag operation is "`none`" (no drag operation), or, if the user ended the drag-and-drop operation by canceling it (e.g. by hitting the `Escape` key), or if the current target element is null, then the drag operation failed. Run these substeps:

      1. Let dropped be false.

      2. If the current target element is a DOM element, fire a DND event named `dragleave` at it; otherwise, if it is not null, use platform-specific conventions for drag cancellation.

      3. Set the current drag operation to "`none`".

      Otherwise, the drag operation might be a success; run these substeps:

      1. Let dropped be true.

      2. If the current target element is a DOM element, fire a DND event named `drop` at it; otherwise, use platform-specific conventions for indicating a drop.

      3. If the event is canceled, set the current drag operation to the value of the `dropEffect` attribute of the `DragEvent` object's `dataTransfer` object as it stood after the event dispatch finished.

         Otherwise, the event is not canceled; perform the event's default action, which depends on the exact target as follows:

         If the current target element is a text field (e.g. `textarea`, or an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Text state) or an editing host or editable element, and the drag data store item list has an item with the drag data item type string "`text/plain`" and the drag data item kind Plain Unicode string

           Insert the actual data of the first item in the drag data store item list to have a drag data item type string of "`text/plain`" and a drag data item kind that is Plain Unicode string into the text field or editing host or editable element in a manner consistent with platform-specific conventions (e.g. inserting it at the current mouse cursor position, or inserting it at the end of the field).

         Otherwise

           Reset the current drag operation to "`none`".

   2. Fire a DND event named `dragend` at the source node.

   3. Run the appropriate steps from the following list as the default action of the `dragend` event:

      If dropped is true, the current target element is a text field (see below), the current drag operation is "`move`", and the source of the drag-and-drop operation is a selection in the DOM that is entirely contained within an editing host

        Delete the selection.

      If dropped is true, the current target element is a text field (see below), the current drag operation is "`move`", and the source of the drag-and-drop operation is a selection in a text field

        The user agent should delete the dragged selection from the relevant text field.

      If dropped is false or if the current drag operation is "`none`"

        The drag was canceled. If the platform conventions dictate that this be represented to the user (e.g. by animating the dragged selection going back to the source of the drag-and-drop operation), then do so.

      Otherwise

        The event has no default action.

      For the purposes of this step, a text field is a `textarea` element or an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in one of the Text, Search, Tel, URL, E-mail, Password, or Number states.

User agents are encouraged to consider how to react to drags near the edge of scrollable regions. For example, if a user drags a link to the bottom of the viewport on a long page, it might make sense to scroll the page so that the user can drop the link lower on the page.

This model is independent of which `Document` object the nodes involved are from; the events are fired as described above and the rest of the processing model runs as described above, irrespective of how many documents are involved in the operation.

#### 6.7.6 Events summary

This section is non-normative.

The following events are involved in the drag-and-drop model.

Event Name | Target | Cancelable? | Drag data store mode | `dropEffect` | Default Action
--- | --- | --- | --- | --- | ---
`dragstart` | Source node | ✓ Cancelable | Read/write mode | "`none`" | Initiate the drag-and-drop operation
`drag` | Source node | ✓ Cancelable | Protected mode | "`none`" | Continue the drag-and-drop operation
`dragenter` | Immediate user selection or the body element | ✓ Cancelable | Protected mode | Based on `effectAllowed` value | Reject immediate user selection as potential target element
`dragexit` | Previous target element | — | Protected mode | "`none`" | None
`dragleave` | Previous target element | — | Protected mode | "`none`" | None
`dragover` | Current target element | ✓ Cancelable | Protected mode | Based on `effectAllowed` value | Reset the current drag operation to "none"
`drop` | Current target element | ✓ Cancelable | Read-only mode | Current drag operation | Varies
`dragend` | Source node | — | Protected mode | Current drag operation | Varies

Not shown in the above table: all these events bubble, and the `effectAllowed` attribute always has the value it had after the `dragstart` event, defaulting to "`uninitialized`" in the `dragstart` event.

#### 6.7.7 The `draggable` attribute

All HTML elements may have the `draggable` content attribute set. The `draggable` attribute is an enumerated attribute. It has three states. The first state is true and it has the keyword `true`. The second state is false and it has the keyword `false`. The third state is auto; it has no keywords but it is the missing value default.

The true state means the element is draggable; the false state means that it is not. The auto state uses the default behavior of the user agent.

An element with a `draggable` attribute should also have a `title` attribute that names the element for the purpose of non-visual interactions.

element . `draggable` [ = value ]

  Returns true if the element is draggable; otherwise, returns false.

  Can be set, to override the default and set the `draggable` content attribute.

The `draggable` IDL attribute, whose value depends on the content attribute's in the way described below, controls whether or not the element is draggable. Generally, only text selections are draggable, but elements whose `draggable` IDL attribute is true become draggable as well.

If an element's `draggable` content attribute has the state true, the `draggable` IDL attribute must return true.

Otherwise, if the element's `draggable` content attribute has the state false, the `draggable` IDL attribute must return false.

Otherwise, the element's `draggable` content attribute has the state auto. If the element is an `img` element, an `object` element that represents an image, or an `a` element with an `href` content attribute, the `draggable` IDL attribute must return true; otherwise, the `draggable` IDL attribute must return false.

If the `draggable` IDL attribute is set to the value false, the `draggable` content attribute must be set to the literal value "`false`". If the `draggable` IDL attribute is set to the value true, the `draggable` content attribute must be set to the literal value "`true`".

#### 6.7.8 The `dropzone` attribute

All HTML elements may have the `dropzone` content attribute set. When specified, its value must be an unordered set of unique space-separated tokens that are ASCII case-insensitive. The allowed values are the following:

`copy`

  Indicates that dropping an accepted item on the element will result in a copy of the dragged data.

`move`

  Indicates that dropping an accepted item on the element will result in the dragged data being moved to the new location.

`link`

  Indicates that dropping an accepted item on the element will result in a link to the original data.

Any keyword with eight characters or more, beginning with the an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`string:`"

  Indicates that items with the drag data item kind Plain Unicode string and the drag data item type string set to a value that matches the remainder of the keyword are accepted.

Any keyword with six characters or more, beginning with an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`file:`"

  Indicates that items with the drag data item kind File and the drag data item type string set to a value that matches the remainder of the keyword are accepted.

The `dropzone` content attribute's values must not have more than one of the three feedback values (`copy`, `move`, and `link`) specified. If none are specified, the `copy` value is implied.

An element with a `dropzone` attribute should also have a `title` attribute that names the element for the purpose of non-visual interactions.

A `dropzone` attribute matches a drag data store if the `dropzone` processing steps result in a match.

A `dropzone` attribute specifies an operation if the `dropzone` processing steps result in a specified operation. The specified operation is as given by those steps.

The `dropzone` processing steps are as follows. They either result in a match or not, and separate from this result either in a specified operation or not, as defined below.

1. Let value be the value of the `dropzone` attribute.

2. Let keywords be the result of splitting value on spaces.

3. Let matched be false.

4. Let operation be unspecified.

5. For each value in keywords, if any, in the order that they were found in value, run the following steps.

   1. Let keyword be the keyword.

   2. If keyword is one of "`copy`", "`move`", or "`link`", then: run the following substeps:

      1. If operation is still unspecified, then let operation be the string given by keyword.

      2. Skip to the step labeled end of keyword below.

   3. If keyword does not contain a U+003A COLON character (:), or if the first such character in keyword is either the first character or the last character in the string, then skip to the step labeled end of keyword below.

   4. Let kind code be the substring of keyword from the first character in the string to the last character in the string that is before the first U+003A COLON character (:) in the string, converted to ASCII lowercase.

   5. Jump to the appropriate step from the list below, based on the value of kind code:

      If kind code is the string "`string`"

        Let kind be Plain Unicode string.

      If kind code is the string "`file`"

        Let kind be File.

      Otherwise

        Skip to the step labeled end of keyword below.

   6. Let type be the substring of keyword from the first character after the first U+003A COLON character (:) in the string, to the last character in the string, converted to ASCII lowercase.

   7. If there exist any items in the drag data store item list whose drag data item kind is the kind given in kind and whose drag data item type string is type, then let matched be true.

   8. End of keyword: Go on to the next keyword, if any, or the next step in the overall algorithm, if there are no more.

6. The algorithm results in a match if matched is true, and does not otherwise.

   The algorithm results in a specified operation if operation is not unspecified. The specified operation, if one is specified, is the one given by operation.

The `dropzone` IDL attribute must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

In this example, a `div` element is made into a drop target for image files using the `dropzone` attribute. Images dropped into the target are then displayed.

    <div dropzone="copy file:image/png file:image/gif file:image/jpeg" ondrop="receive(event, this)">
     <p>Drop an image here to have it displayed.</p>
    </div>
    <script>
     function receive(event, element) {
       var data = event.dataTransfer.items;
       for (var i = 0; i < data.length; i += 1) {
         if ((data[i].kind == 'file') && (data[i].type.match('^image/'))) {
           var img = new Image();
           img.src = window.createObjectURL(data[i].getAsFile());
           element.appendChild(img);
         }
       }
     }
    </script>

#### 6.7.9 Security risks in the drag-and-drop model

User agents must not make the data added to the `DataTransfer` object during the `dragstart` event available to scripts until the `drop` event, because otherwise, if a user were to drag sensitive information from one document to a second document, crossing a hostile third document in the process, the hostile document could intercept the data.

For the same reason, user agents must consider a drop to be successful only if the user specifically ended the drag operation — if any scripts end the drag operation, it must be considered unsuccessful (canceled) and the `drop` event must not be fired.

User agents should take care to not start drag-and-drop operations in response to script actions. For example, in a mouse-and-window environment, if a script moves a window while the user has his mouse button depressed, the UA would not consider that to start a drag. This is important because otherwise UAs could cause data to be dragged from sensitive sources and dropped into hostile documents without the user's consent.

User agents should filter potentially active (scripted) content (e.g. HTML) when it is dragged and when it is dropped, using a whitelist of known-safe features. Similarly, relative URLs should be turned into absolute URLs to avoid references changing in unexpected ways. This specification does not specify how this is performed.

Consider a hostile page providing some content and getting the user to select and drag and drop (or indeed, copy and paste) that content to a victim page's `contenteditable` region. If the browser does not ensure that only safe content is dragged, potentially unsafe content such as scripts and event handlers in the selection, once dropped (or pasted) into the victim site, get the privileges of the victim site. This would thus enable a cross-site scripting attack.

## 7 Loading Web pages

This section describes features that apply most directly to Web browsers. Having said that, except where specified otherwise, the requirements defined in this section do apply to all user agents, whether they are Web browsers or not.

### 7.1 Browsing contexts

A browsing context is an environment in which `Document` objects are presented to the user.

A tab or window in a Web browser typically contains a browsing context, as does an `iframe` or `frame`s in a `frameset`.

Each browsing context has a corresponding `WindowProxy` object.

A browsing context has a session history, which lists the `Document` objects that that browsing context has presented, is presenting, or will present. At any time, one `Document` in each browsing context is designated the active document. A `Document`'s browsing context is that browsing context whose session history contains the `Document`, if any. (A `Document` created using an API such as `createDocument()` has no browsing context.)

Each `Document` in a browsing context is associated with a `Window` object. A browsing context's `WindowProxy` object forwards everything to the browsing context's active document's `Window` object.

In general, there is a 1-to-1 mapping from the `Window` object to the `Document` object. There are two exceptions. First, a `Window` can be reused for the presentation of a second `Document` in the same browsing context, such that the mapping is then 1-to-2. This occurs when a browsing context is navigated from the initial `about:blank` `Document` to another, with replacement enabled. Second, a `Document` can end up being reused for several `Window` objects when the `document.open()` method is used, such that the mapping is then many-to-1.

A `Document` does not necessarily have a browsing context associated with it. In particular, data mining tools are likely to never instantiate browsing contexts.

A browsing context can have a creator browsing context, the browsing context that was responsible for its creation. If a browsing context has a parent browsing context, then that is its creator browsing context. Otherwise, if the browsing context has an opener browsing context, then that is its creator browsing context. Otherwise, the browsing context has no creator browsing context.

If a browsing context A has a creator browsing context, then the `Document` that was the active document of that creator browsing context at the time A was created is the creator `Document`.

When a browsing context is first created, it must be created with a single `Document` in its session history, whose address is `about:blank`, which is marked as being an HTML document, whose character encoding is UTF-8, and which is both ready for post-load tasks and completely loaded immediately, along with a new `Window` object that the `Document` is associated with. The `Document` must have a single child `html` node, which itself has two empty child nodes: a `head` element, and a `body` element. As soon as this `Document` is created, the user agent must implement the sandboxing for it. If the browsing context has a creator `Document`, then the browsing context's `Document`'s referrer must be set to the address of that creator `Document` at the time of the browsing context's creation.

If the browsing context is created specifically to be immediately navigated, then that initial navigation will have replacement enabled.

The origin and effective script origin of the `about:blank` `Document` are set when the `Document` is created. If the new browsing context has a creator browsing context, then the origin of the `about:blank` `Document` is an alias to the origin of the creator `Document` and the effective script origin of the `about:blank` `Document` is initially an alias to the effective script origin of the creator `Document`. Otherwise, the origin of the `about:blank` `Document` is a globally unique identifier assigned when the new browsing context is created and the effective script origin of the `about:blank` `Document` is initially an alias to its origin.

#### 7.1.1 Nested browsing contexts

Certain elements (for example, `iframe` elements) can instantiate further browsing contexts. These are called nested browsing contexts. If a browsing context P has a `Document` D with an element E that nests another browsing context C inside it, then C is said to be nested through D, and E is said to be the browsing context container of C. If the browsing context container element E is in the `Document` D, then P is said to be the parent browsing context of C and C is said to be a child browsing context of P. Otherwise, the nested browsing context C has no parent browsing context.

A browsing context A is said to be an ancestor of a browsing context B if there exists a browsing context A' that is a child browsing context of A and that is itself an ancestor of B, or if the browsing context A is the parent browsing context of B.

A browsing context that is not a nested browsing context has no parent browsing context, and is the top-level browsing context of all the browsing contexts for which it is an ancestor browsing context.

The transitive closure of parent browsing contexts for a nested browsing context gives the list of ancestor browsing contexts.

The list of the descendant browsing contexts of a `Document` d is the (ordered) list returned by the following algorithm:

1. Let list be an empty list.

2. For each child browsing context of d that is nested through an element that is in the `Document` d, in the tree order of the elements nesting those browsing contexts, run these substeps:

   1. Append that child browsing context to the list list.

   2. Append the list of the descendant browsing contexts of the active document of that child browsing context to the list list.

3. Return the constructed list.

A `Document` is said to be fully active when it is the active document of its browsing context, and either its browsing context is a top-level browsing context, or it has a parent browsing context and the `Document` through which it is nested is itself fully active.

Because they are nested through an element, child browsing contexts are always tied to a specific `Document` in their parent browsing context. User agents must not allow the user to interact with child browsing contexts of elements that are in `Document`s that are not themselves fully active.

A nested browsing context can have a seamless browsing context flag set, if it is embedded through an `iframe` element with a `seamless` attribute.

A nested browsing context can be put into a delaying `load` events mode. This is used when it is navigated, to delay the load event of the browsing context container before the new `Document` is created.

The document family of a browsing context consists of the union of all the `Document` objects in that browsing context's session history and the document families of all those `Document` objects. The document family of a `Document` object consists of the union of all the document families of the browsing contexts that are nested through the `Document` object.

##### 7.1.1.1 Navigating nested browsing contexts in the DOM

window . `top`

  Returns the `WindowProxy` for the top-level browsing context.

window . `parent`

  Returns the `WindowProxy` for the parent browsing context.

window . `frameElement`

  Returns the `Element` for the browsing context container.

  Returns null if there isn't one.

  Throws a `SecurityError` exception in cross-origin situations.

The `top` IDL attribute on the `Window` object of a `Document` in a browsing context b must return the `WindowProxy` object of its top-level browsing context (which would be its own `WindowProxy` object if it was a top-level browsing context itself), if it has one, or its own `WindowProxy` object otherwise (e.g. if it was a detached nested browsing context).

The `parent` IDL attribute on the `Window` object of a `Document` in a browsing context b must return the `WindowProxy` object of the parent browsing context, if there is one (i.e. if b is a child browsing context), or the `WindowProxy` object of the browsing context b itself, otherwise (i.e. if it is a top-level browsing context or a detached nested browsing context).

The `frameElement` IDL attribute on the `Window` object of a `Document` d, on getting, must run the following algorithm:

1. If d is not a `Document` in a nested browsing context, return null and abort these steps.

2. If the browsing context container's node document does not have the same effective script origin as the effective script origin specified by the entry settings object, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

3. Return the browsing context container for b.

#### 7.1.2 Auxiliary browsing contexts

It is possible to create new browsing contexts that are related to a top-level browsing context without being nested through an element. Such browsing contexts are called auxiliary browsing contexts. Auxiliary browsing contexts are always top-level browsing contexts.

An auxiliary browsing context has an opener browsing context, which is the browsing context from which the auxiliary browsing context was created.

##### 7.1.2.1 Navigating auxiliary browsing contexts in the DOM

The `opener` IDL attribute on the `Window` object, on getting, must return the `WindowProxy` object of the browsing context from which the current browsing context was created (its opener browsing context), if there is one, if it is still available, and if the current browsing context has not disowned its opener; otherwise, it must return null. On setting, if the new value is null then the current browsing context must disown its opener; if the new value is anything else then the user agent must call the [[DefineOwnProperty]] internal method of the `Window` object, passing the property name "`opener`" as the property key, and the Property Descriptor { [[Value]]: value, [[Writable]]: true, [[Enumerable]]: true, [[Configurable]]: true } as the property descriptor, where value is the new value.

#### 7.1.3 Secondary browsing contexts

User agents may support secondary browsing contexts, which are browsing contexts that form part of the user agent's interface, apart from the main content area.

The `sidebar` link type uses secondary browsing contexts.

#### 7.1.4 Security

A browsing context A is familiar with a second browsing context B if one of the following conditions is true:

- Either the origin of the active document of A is the same as the origin of the active document of B, or
- The browsing context A is a nested browsing context with a top-level browsing context, and its top-level browsing context is B, or
- The browsing context B is an auxiliary browsing context and A is familiar with B's opener browsing context, or
- The browsing context B is not a top-level browsing context, but there exists an ancestor browsing context of B whose active document has the same origin as the active document of A (possibly in fact being A itself).

A browsing context A is allowed to navigate a second browsing context B if the following algorithm terminates positively:

1. If A is not the same browsing context as B, and A is not one of the ancestor browsing contexts of B, and B is not a top-level browsing context, and A's active document's active sandboxing flag set has its sandboxed navigation browsing context flag set, then abort these steps negatively.

2. Otherwise, if B is a top-level browsing context, and is one of the ancestor browsing contexts of A, and A's node document's active sandboxing flag set has its sandboxed top-level navigation browsing context flag set, then abort these steps negatively.

3. Otherwise, if B is a top-level browsing context, and is neither A nor one of the ancestor browsing contexts of A, and A's `Document`'s active sandboxing flag set has its sandboxed navigation browsing context flag set, and A is not the one permitted sandboxed navigator of B, then abort these steps negatively.

4. Otherwise, terminate positively!

An element has a browsing context scope origin if its `Document`'s browsing context is a top-level browsing context or if all of its `Document`'s ancestor browsing contexts all have active documents whose origin are the same origin as the element's node document's origin. If an element has a browsing context scope origin, then its value is the origin of the element's node document.

#### 7.1.5 Groupings of browsing contexts

Each browsing context is defined as having a list of one or more directly reachable browsing contexts. These are:

- The browsing context itself.
- All the browsing context's child browsing contexts.
- The browsing context's parent browsing context.
- All the browsing contexts that have the browsing context as their opener browsing context.
- The browsing context's opener browsing context.

The transitive closure of all the browsing contexts that are directly reachable browsing contexts forms a unit of related browsing contexts.

Each unit of related browsing contexts is then further divided into the smallest number of groups such that every member of each group has an active document with an effective script origin that, through appropriate manipulation of the `document.domain` attribute, could be made to be the same as other members of the group, but could not be made the same as members of any other group. Each such group is a unit of related similar-origin browsing contexts.

There is also at most one event loop per unit of related similar-origin browsing contexts (though several units of related similar-origin browsing contexts can have a shared event loop).

#### 7.1.6 Browsing context names

Browsing contexts can have a browsing context name. By default, a browsing context has no name (its name is not set).

A valid browsing context name is any string with at least one character that does not start with a U+005F LOW LINE character. (Names starting with an underscore are reserved for special keywords.)

A valid browsing context name or keyword is any string that is either a valid browsing context name or that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of: `_blank`, `_self`, `_parent`, or `_top`.

These values have different meanings based on whether the page is sandboxed or not, as summarised in the following (non-normative) table. In this table, "current" means the browsing context that the link or script is in, "parent" means the parent browsing context of the one the link or script is in, "master" means the nearest ancestor browsing context of the one the link or script is in that is not itself in a seamless iframe, "top" means the top-level browsing context of the one the link or script is in, "new" means a new top-level browsing context or auxiliary browsing context is to be created, subject to various user preferences and user agent policies, "none" means that nothing will happen, and "maybe new" means the same as "new" if the "`allow-popups`" keyword is also specified on the `sandbox` attribute (or if the user overrode the sandboxing), and the same as "none" otherwise.

Keyword | Ordinary effect | Effect in an `iframe` with...
--- | --- | ---
`seamless=""` | `sandbox=""` | `sandbox="" seamless=""` | `sandbox="allow-top-navigation"` | `sandbox="allow-top-navigation" seamless=""`
none specified, for links and form submissions | current | master | current | master | current | master
empty string | current | master | current | master | current | master
`_blank` | new | new | maybe new | maybe new | maybe new | maybe new
`_self` | current | current | current | current | current | current
`_parent` if there isn't a parent | current | current | current | current | current | current
`_parent` if parent is also top | parent/top | parent/top | none | none | parent/top | parent/top
`_parent` if there is one and it's not top | parent | parent | none | none | none | none
`_top` if top is current | current | current | current | current | current | current
`_top` if top is not current | top | top | none | none | top | top
name that doesn't exist | new | new | maybe new | maybe new | maybe new | maybe new
name that exists and is a descendant | specified descendant | specified descendant | specified descendant | specified descendant | specified descendant | specified descendant
name that exists and is current | current | current | current | current | current | current
name that exists and is an ancestor that is top | specified ancestor | specified ancestor | none | none | specified ancestor/top | specified ancestor/top
name that exists and is an ancestor that is not top | specified ancestor | specified ancestor | none | none | none | none
other name that exists with common top | specified | specified | none | none | none | none
name that exists with different top, if familiar and one permitted sandboxed navigator | specified | specified | specified | specified | specified | specified
name that exists with different top, if familiar but not one permitted sandboxed navigator | specified | specified | none | none | none | none
name that exists with different top, not familiar | new | new | maybe new | maybe new | maybe new | maybe new

Most of the restrictions on sandboxed browsing contexts are applied by other algorithms, e.g. the navigation algorithm, not the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name given below.

An algorithm is allowed to show a popup if any of the following conditions is true:

- The task in which the algorithm is running is currently processing an activation behavior whose `click` event was trusted.

- The task in which the algorithm is running is currently running the event listener for a trusted event whose type is in the following list:

  - `change`
  - `click`
  - `dblclick`
  - `mouseup`
  - `reset`
  - `submit`

- The task in which the algorithm is running was queued by an algorithm that was allowed to show a popup, and the chain of such algorithms started within a user-agent defined timeframe.

  For example, if a user clicked a button, it might be acceptable for a popup to result from that after 4 seconds, but it would likely not be acceptable for a popup to result from that after 4 hours.

The rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name are as follows. The rules assume that they are being applied in the context of a browsing context, as part of the execution of a task.

1. If the given browsing context name is the empty string or `_self`, then the chosen browsing context must be the current one.

   If the given browsing context name is `_self`, then this is an explicit self-navigation override, which overrides the behavior of the seamless browsing context flag set by the `seamless` attribute on `iframe` elements.

2. If the given browsing context name is `_parent`, then the chosen browsing context must be the parent browsing context of the current one, unless there isn't one, in which case the chosen browsing context must be the current browsing context.

3. If the given browsing context name is `_top`, then the chosen browsing context must be the top-level browsing context of the current one, if there is one, or else the current browsing context.

4. If the given browsing context name is not `_blank` and there exists a browsing context whose name is the same as the given browsing context name, and the current browsing context is familiar with that browsing context, and the user agent determines that the two browsing contexts are related enough that it is ok if they reach each other, then that browsing context must be the chosen one. If there are multiple matching browsing contexts, the user agent should select one in some arbitrary consistent manner, such as the most recently opened, most recently focused, or more closely related.

   If the browsing context is chosen by this step to be the current browsing context, then this is also an explicit self-navigation override.

5. Otherwise, a new browsing context is being requested, and what happens depends on the user agent's configuration and abilities — it is determined by the rules given for the first applicable option from the following list:

   If the algorithm is not allowed to show a popup and the user agent has been configured to not show popups (i.e. the user agent has a "popup blocker" enabled)

     There is no chosen browsing context. The user agent may inform the user that a popup has been blocked.

   If the current browsing context's active document's active sandboxing flag set has the sandboxed auxiliary navigation browsing context flag set.

     Typically, there is no chosen browsing context.

     The user agent may offer to create a new top-level browsing context or reuse an existing top-level browsing context. If the user picks one of those options, then the designated browsing context must be the chosen one (the browsing context's name isn't set to the given browsing context name). The default behaviour (if the user agent doesn't offer the option to the user, or if the user declines to allow a browsing context to be used) must be that there must not be a chosen browsing context.

     If this case occurs, it means that an author has explicitly sandboxed the document that is trying to open a link.

   If the user agent has been configured such that in this instance it will create a new browsing context, and the browsing context is being requested as part of following a hyperlink whose link types include the `noreferrer` keyword

     A new top-level browsing context must be created. If the given browsing context name is not `_blank`, then the new top-level browsing context's name must be the given browsing context name (otherwise, it has no name). The chosen browsing context must be this new browsing context. The creation of such a browsing context is a new start for session storage.

     If it is immediately navigated, then the navigation will be done with replacement enabled.

   If the user agent has been configured such that in this instance it will create a new browsing context, and the `noreferrer` keyword doesn't apply

     A new auxiliary browsing context must be created, with the opener browsing context being the current one. If the given browsing context name is not `_blank`, then the new auxiliary browsing context's name must be the given browsing context name (otherwise, it has no name). The chosen browsing context must be this new browsing context.

     If it is immediately navigated, then the navigation will be done with replacement enabled.

   If the user agent has been configured such that in this instance it will reuse the current browsing context

     The chosen browsing context is the current browsing context.

   If the user agent has been configured such that in this instance it will not find a browsing context

     There must not be a chosen browsing context.

   User agent implementors are encouraged to provide a way for users to configure the user agent to always reuse the current browsing context.

   If the current browsing context's active document's active sandboxing flag set has the sandboxed navigation browsing context flag set and the chosen browsing context picked above, if any, is a new browsing context (whether top-level or auxiliary), then all the flags that are set in the current browsing context's active document's active sandboxing flag set when the new browsing context is created must be set in the new browsing context's popup sandboxing flag set, and the current browsing context must be set as the new browsing context's one permitted sandboxed navigator.

### 7.2 The `Window` object

    [PrimaryGlobal]
    /*sealed*/ interface Window : EventTarget {
      // the current browsing context
      [Unforgeable] readonly attribute WindowProxy window;
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute WindowProxy self;
      [Unforgeable] readonly attribute Document document;
               attribute DOMString name;
      [PutForwards=href, Unforgeable] readonly attribute Location location;
      readonly attribute History history;
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute BarProp locationbar;
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute BarProp menubar;
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute BarProp personalbar;
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute BarProp scrollbars;
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute BarProp statusbar;
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute BarProp toolbar;
               attribute DOMString status;
      void close();
      readonly attribute boolean closed;
      void stop();
      void focus();
      void blur();

      // other browsing contexts
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute WindowProxy frames;
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      [Unforgeable] readonly attribute WindowProxy top;
               attribute any opener;
      readonly attribute WindowProxy parent;
      readonly attribute Element? frameElement;
      WindowProxy open(optional DOMString url = "about:blank", optional DOMString target = "_blank", [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] optional DOMString features = "", optional boolean replace = false);
      getter WindowProxy (unsigned long index);
      getter object (DOMString name);

      // the user agent
      readonly attribute Navigator navigator;
      [Replaceable] readonly attribute External external;
      readonly attribute ApplicationCache applicationCache;

      // user prompts
      void alert();
      void alert(DOMString message);
      boolean confirm(optional DOMString message = "");
      DOMString? prompt(optional DOMString message = "", optional DOMString default = "");
      void print();
      any showModalDialog(DOMString url, optional any argument);

      void postMessage(any message, DOMString targetOrigin, optional sequence<Transferable> transfer);

      // also has obsolete members
    };
    Window implements GlobalEventHandlers;
    Window implements WindowEventHandlers;

window . `window`
window . `frames`
window . `self`

  These attributes all return window.

window . `document`

  Returns the `Document` associated with window.

document . `defaultView`

  Returns the `Window` object of the active document.

The `window`, `frames`, and `self` IDL attributes must all return the `Window` object's browsing context's `WindowProxy` object.

The `document` IDL attribute must return the `Window` object's newest `Document` object.

The `defaultView` IDL attribute of the `Document` interface must return the `Document`'s browsing context's `WindowProxy` object, if there is one, or null otherwise.

For historical reasons, `Window` objects must also have a writable, configurable, non-enumerable property named `HTMLDocument` whose value is the `Document` interface object.

#### 7.2.1 Security

This section describes a security model that is underdefined, imperfect, and does not match implementations. Work is ongoing to attempt to resolve this, but in the meantime, please do not rely on this section for precision. Implementors are urged to send their feedback on how cross-origin cross-global access to `Window` and `Location` objects should work. See bug 20701.

User agents must throw a `SecurityError` exception whenever any properties of a `Window` object are accessed when the incumbent settings object specifies an effective script origin that is not the same as the `Window` object's `Document`'s effective script origin, with the following exceptions:

- The `location` attribute
- The `postMessage()` method
- The `window` attribute
- The `frames` attribute
- The `self` attribute
- The `top` attribute
- The `parent` attribute
- The `opener` attribute
- The `closed` attribute
- The `close()` method
- The `blur()` method
- The `focus()` method
- The dynamic nested browsing context properties

When the incumbent settings object specifies an effective script origin that is different than a `Window` object's `Document`'s effective script origin, the user agent must act as if any changes to that `Window` object's properties, getters, setters, etc, were not present, and as if all the properties of that `Window` object had their [[Enumerable]] attribute set to false.

For members that return objects (including function objects), each distinct effective script origin that is not the same as the `Window` object's `Document`'s effective script origin must be provided with a separate set of objects. These objects must have the prototype chain appropriate for the script for which the objects are created (not those that would be appropriate for scripts whose global object, as specified by their settings object, is the `Window` object in question).

For instance, if two frames containing `Document`s from different origins access the same `Window` object's `postMessage()` method, they will get distinct objects that are not equal.

#### 7.2.2 APIs for creating and navigating browsing contexts by name

window = window . `open`( [ url [, target [, features [, replace ] ] ] ] )

  Opens a window to show url (defaults to `about:blank`), and returns it. The target argument gives the name of the new window. If a window exists with that name already, it is reused. The replace attribute, if true, means that whatever page is currently open in that window will be removed from the window's session history. The features argument can be used to influence the rendering of the new window.

window . `name` [ = value ]

  Returns the name of the window.

  Can be set, to change the name.

window . `close`()

  Closes the window.

window . `closed`

  Returns true if the window has been closed, false otherwise.

window . `stop`()

  Cancels the document load.

The `open()` method on `Window` objects provides a mechanism for navigating an existing browsing context or opening and navigating an auxiliary browsing context.

The method has four arguments, though they are all optional.

The first argument, url, must be a valid non-empty URL for a page to load in the browsing context. If the first argument is the empty string, then the url argument must be interpreted as "`about:blank`". Otherwise, the argument must be resolved to an absolute URL (or an error), relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object when the method was invoked.

The second argument, target, specifies the name of the browsing context that is to be navigated. It must be a valid browsing context name or keyword.

The third argument, features, must be interpreted as defined in the CSSOM View specification. [CSSOMVIEW]

The fourth argument, replace, specifies whether or not the new page will replace the page currently loaded in the browsing context, when target identifies an existing browsing context (as opposed to leaving the current page in the browsing context's session history).

When the method is invoked, the user agent must first select a browsing context to navigate by applying the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name using the target argument as the name and the browsing context of the script as the context in which the algorithm is executed, unless the user has indicated a preference, in which case the browsing context to navigate may instead be the one indicated by the user.

For example, suppose there is a user agent that supports control-clicking a link to open it in a new tab. If a user clicks in that user agent on an element whose `onclick` handler uses the `window.open()` API to open a page in an iframe, but, while doing so, holds the control key down, the user agent could override the selection of the target browsing context to instead target a new tab.

If applying the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name using the target argument would result in there not being a chosen browsing context, then throw an `InvalidAccessError` exception and abort these steps.

Otherwise, if url is not "`about:blank`", the user agent must navigate the selected browsing context to the absolute URL obtained from resolving url earlier, with exceptions enabled. If the replace is true or if the browsing context was just created as part of the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name, then replacement must be enabled also. The navigation must be done with the responsible browsing context specified by the incumbent settings object as the source browsing context. If the resolve a URL algorithm failed, then the user agent may either instead navigate to an inline error page, with exceptions enabled and using the same replacement behavior and source browsing context behavior as described earlier in this paragraph; or treat the url as "`about:blank`", acting as described in the next paragraph.

If url is "`about:blank`", and the browsing context was just created as part of the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name, then the user agent must instead queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the selected browsing context's `Window` object, with target override set to the selected browsing context's `Window` object's `Document` object.

The method must return the `WindowProxy` object of the browsing context that was navigated, or null if no browsing context was navigated.

The `name` attribute of the `Window` object must, on getting, return the current name of the browsing context, if one is set, or the empty string otherwise; and, on setting, set the name of the browsing context to the new value.

The name gets reset when the browsing context is navigated to another domain.

The `close()` method on `Window` objects should, if all the following conditions are met, close the browsing context A:

- The corresponding browsing context A is script-closable.
- The responsible browsing context specified by the incumbent settings object is familiar with the browsing context A.
- The responsible browsing context specified by the incumbent settings object is allowed to navigate the browsing context A.

A browsing context is script-closable if it is an auxiliary browsing context that was created by a script (as opposed to by an action of the user), or if it is a top-level browsing context whose session history contains only one `Document`.

The `closed` attribute on `Window` objects must return true if the `Window` object's browsing context has been discarded, and false otherwise.

The `stop()` method on `Window` objects should, if there is an existing attempt to navigate the browsing context and that attempt is not currently running the unload a document algorithm, cancel that navigation; then, it must abort the active document of the browsing context of the `Window` object on which it was invoked.

#### 7.2.3 Accessing other browsing contexts

window . `length`

  Returns the number of child browsing contexts.

window[index]

  Returns the indicated child browsing context.

The `length` IDL attribute on the `Window` interface must return the number of child browsing contexts that are nested through elements that are in the `Document` that is the active document of that `Window` object, if that `Window`'s browsing context shares the same event loop as the responsible document specified by the entry settings object accessing the IDL attribute; otherwise, it must return zero.

The supported property indices on the `Window` object at any instant are the numbers in the range 0 .. n-1, where n is the number returned by the `length` IDL attribute. If n is zero then there are no supported property indices.

To determine the value of an indexed property index of a `Window` object, the user agent must return the `WindowProxy` object of the indexth child browsing context of the `Document` that is nested through an element that is in the `Document`, sorted in the order that the elements nesting those browsing contexts were most recently inserted into the `Document`, the `WindowProxy` object of the most recently inserted browsing context container's nested browsing context being last.

These properties are the dynamic nested browsing context properties.

#### 7.2.4 Named access on the `Window` object

window[name]

  Returns the indicated element or collection of elements.

  As a general rule, relying on this will lead to brittle code. Which IDs end up mapping to this API can vary over time, as new features are added to the Web platform, for example. Instead of this, use `document.getElementById()` or `document.querySelector()`.

The `Window` interface supports named properties. The supported property names at any moment consist of the following, in tree order, ignoring later duplicates:

- the browsing context name of any child browsing context of the active document whose name is not the empty string,
- the value of the `name` content attribute for all `a`, `applet`, `area`, `embed`, `form`, `frameset`, `img`, and `object` elements in the active document that have a non-empty `name` content attribute, and
- the value of the `id` content attribute of any HTML element in the active document with a non-empty `id` content attribute.

To determine the value of a named property name when the `Window` object is indexed for property retrieval, the user agent must return the value obtained using the following steps:

1. Let objects be the list of named objects with the name name in the active document.

   There will be at least one such object, by definition.

2. If objects contains a nested browsing context, then return the `WindowProxy` object of the nested browsing context corresponding to the first browsing context container in tree order whose browsing context is in objects, and abort these steps.

3. Otherwise, if objects has only one element, return that element and abort these steps.

4. Otherwise return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only named objects with the name name. (By definition, these will all be elements.)

Named objects with the name name, for the purposes of the above algorithm, are those that are either:

- child browsing contexts of the active document whose name is name,
- `a`, `applet`, `area`, `embed`, `form`, `frameset`, `img`, or `object` elements that have a `name` content attribute whose value is name, or
- HTML elements that have an `id` content attribute whose value is name.

#### 7.2.5 Garbage collection and browsing contexts

A browsing context has a strong reference to each of its `Document`s and its `WindowProxy` object, and the user agent itself has a strong reference to its top-level browsing contexts.

A `Document` has a strong reference to its `Window` object.

A `Window` object has a strong reference to its `Document` object through its `document` attribute. Thus, references from other scripts to either of those objects will keep both alive. Similarly, both `Document` and `Window` objects have implied strong references to the `WindowProxy` object.

Each script has a strong reference to its settings object, and each script settings object has strong references to its global object, responsible browsing context, and responsible document.

When a browsing context is to discard a `Document`, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Set the `Document`'s salvageable state to false.

2. Run any unloading document cleanup steps for the `Document` that are defined by this specification and other applicable specifications.

3. Abort the `Document`.

4. Remove any tasks associated with the `Document` in any task source, without running those tasks.

5. Discard all the child browsing contexts of the `Document`.

6. Lose the strong reference from the `Document`'s browsing context to the `Document`.

Whenever a `Document` object is discarded, it is also removed from the list of the worker's `Document`s of each worker whose list contains that `Document`.

When a browsing context is discarded, the strong reference from the user agent itself to the browsing context must be severed, and all the `Document` objects for all the entries in the browsing context's session history must be discarded as well.

User agents may discard top-level browsing contexts at any time (typically, in response to user requests, e.g. when a user force-closes a window containing one or more top-level browsing contexts). Other browsing contexts must be discarded once their `WindowProxy` object is eligible for garbage collection.

#### 7.2.6 Closing browsing contexts

When the user agent is required to close a browsing context, it must run the following steps:

1. Let specified browsing context be the browsing context being closed.

2. Prompt to unload the active document of the specified browsing context. If the user refused to allow the document to be unloaded, then abort these steps.

3. Unload the active document of the specified browsing context with the recycle parameter set to false.

4. Remove the specified browsing context from the user interface (e.g. close or hide its tab in a tabbed browser).

5. Discard the specified browsing context.

User agents should offer users the ability to arbitrarily close any top-level browsing context.

#### 7.2.7 Browser interface elements

To allow Web pages to integrate with Web browsers, certain Web browser interface elements are exposed in a limited way to scripts in Web pages.

Each interface element is represented by a `BarProp` object:

    interface BarProp {
               attribute boolean visible;
    };

window . `locationbar` . `visible`

  Returns true if the location bar is visible; otherwise, returns false.

window . `menubar` . `visible`

  Returns true if the menu bar is visible; otherwise, returns false.

window . `personalbar` . `visible`

  Returns true if the personal bar is visible; otherwise, returns false.

window . `scrollbars` . `visible`

  Returns true if the scroll bars are visible; otherwise, returns false.

window . `statusbar` . `visible`

  Returns true if the status bar is visible; otherwise, returns false.

window . `toolbar` . `visible`

  Returns true if the toolbar is visible; otherwise, returns false.

The visible attribute, on getting, must return either true or a value determined by the user agent to most accurately represent the visibility state of the user interface element that the object represents, as described below. On setting, the new value must be discarded.

The following `BarProp` objects exist for each `Document` object in a browsing context. Some of the user interface elements represented by these objects might have no equivalent in some user agents; for those user agents, except when otherwise specified, the object must act as if it was present and visible (i.e. its `visible` attribute must return true).

The location bar `BarProp` object
  Represents the user interface element that contains a control that displays the URL of the active document, or some similar interface concept.
The menu bar `BarProp` object
  Represents the user interface element that contains a list of commands in menu form, or some similar interface concept.
The personal bar `BarProp` object
  Represents the user interface element that contains links to the user's favorite pages, or some similar interface concept.
The scrollbar `BarProp` object
  Represents the user interface element that contains a scrolling mechanism, or some similar interface concept.
The status bar `BarProp` object
  Represents a user interface element found immediately below or after the document, as appropriate for the user's media, which typically provides information about ongoing network activity or information about elements that the user's pointing device is current indicating. If the user agent has no such user interface element, then the object may act as if the corresponding user interface element was absent (i.e. its `visible` attribute may return false).
The toolbar `BarProp` object
  Represents the user interface element found immediately above or before the document, as appropriate for the user's media, which typically provides session history traversal controls (back and forward buttons, reload buttons, etc). If the user agent has no such user interface element, then the object may act as if the corresponding user interface element was absent (i.e. its `visible` attribute may return false).

The `locationbar` attribute must return the location bar `BarProp` object.

The `menubar` attribute must return the menu bar `BarProp` object.

The `personalbar` attribute must return the personal bar `BarProp` object.

The `scrollbars` attribute must return the scrollbar `BarProp` object.

The `statusbar` attribute must return the status bar `BarProp` object.

The `toolbar` attribute must return the toolbar `BarProp` object.

For historical reasons, the `status` attribute on the `Window` object must, on getting, return the last string it was set to, and on setting, must set itself to the new value. When the `Window` object is created, the attribute must be set to the empty string. It does not do anything else.

#### 7.2.8 The `WindowProxy` object

As mentioned earlier, each browsing context has a `WindowProxy` object. This object is unusual in that all operations that would be performed on it must be performed on the `Window` object of the browsing context's active document instead. It is thus indistinguishable from that `Window` object in every way until the browsing context is navigated.

There is no `WindowProxy` interface object.

The `WindowProxy` object allows scripts to act as if each browsing context had a single `Window` object, while still keeping separate `Window` objects for each `Document`.

In the following example, the variable x is set to the `WindowProxy` object returned by the `window` accessor on the global object. All of the expressions following the assignment return true, because in every respect, the `WindowProxy` object acts like the underlying `Window` object.

    var x = window;
    x instanceof Window; // true
    x === this; // true

### 7.3 Origin

Origins are the fundamental currency of the Web's security model. Two actors in the Web platform that share an origin are assumed to trust each other and to have the same authority. Actors with differing origins are considered potentially hostile versus each other, and are isolated from each other to varying degrees.

For example, if Example Bank's Web site, hosted at `bank.example.com`, tries to examine the DOM of Example Charity's Web site, hosted at `charity.example.org`, a `SecurityError` exception will be raised.

The origin of a resource and the effective script origin of a resource are both either opaque identifiers or tuples consisting of a scheme component, a host component, a port component, and optionally extra data.

The extra data could include the certificate of the site when using encrypted connections, to ensure that if the site's secure certificate changes, the origin is considered to change as well.

An origin or effective script origin can be defined as an alias to another origin or effective script origin. The value of the origin or effective script origin is then the value of the origin or effective script origin to which it is an alias.

These characteristics are defined as follows:

For URLs

  The origin and effective script origin of the URL are the origin defined in The Web Origin Concept. [ORIGIN]

For `Document` objects
  If a `Document`'s active sandboxing flag set has its sandboxed origin browsing context flag set

    The origin is a globally unique identifier assigned when the `Document` is created.

    The effective script origin is initially an alias to the origin of the `Document`.

  If a `Document` was served over the network and has an address that uses a URL scheme with a server-based naming authority

    The origin is an alias to the origin of the `Document`'s address.

    The effective script origin is initially an alias to the origin of the `Document`.

  If a `Document` was generated from a `data:` URL found in another `Document` or in a script

    The origin is an alias to the origin specified by the incumbent settings object when the navigate algorithm was invoked, or, if no script was involved, of the node document of the element that initiated the navigation to that URL.

    The effective script origin is initially an alias to the effective script origin of that same script settings object or `Document`.

  If a `Document` is the initial "`about:blank`" document

    The origin and effective script origin of the `Document` are those it was assigned when its browsing context was created.

  If a `Document` was created as part of the processing for `javascript:` URLs

    The origin is an alias to the origin of the active document of the browsing context being navigated when the navigate algorithm was invoked.

    The effective script origin is initially an alias to the effective script origin of that same `Document`.

  If a `Document` is an `iframe` `srcdoc` document

    The origin of the `Document` is an alias to the origin of the `Document`'s browsing context's browsing context container's node document.

    The effective script origin is initially an alias to the effective script origin of the `Document`'s browsing context's browsing context container's node document.

  If a `Document` was obtained in some other manner (e.g. a `data:` URL typed in by the user or that was returned as the location of an HTTP redirect (or equivalent in other protocols), a `Document` created using the `createDocument()` API, etc)

    The default behavior as defined in the DOM standard applies. [DOM].

    The origin is a globally unique identifier assigned when the `Document` is created, and the effective script origin is initially an alias to the origin of the `Document`.

  The effective script origin of a `Document` can be manipulated using the `document.domain` IDL attribute.

For images of `img` elements
  If the image data is CORS-cross-origin
    The origin is a globally unique identifier assigned when the image is created.
  If the image data is CORS-same-origin
    The origin is an alias to the origin of the `img` element's node document.

  Images do not have an effective script origin.

For `audio` and `video` elements
  If the media data is CORS-cross-origin
    The origin is a globally unique identifier assigned when the media data is fetched.
  If the media data is CORS-same-origin
    The origin is an alias to the origin of the media element's node document.

  Media elements do not have an effective script origin.

For fonts

  The origin of a downloadable Web font is an alias to the origin of the absolute URL used to obtain the font (after any redirects). [CSSFONTS] [CSSFONTLOAD]

  The origin of a locally installed system font is an alias to the origin of the `Document` in which that font is being used.

  Fonts do not have an effective script origin.

Other specifications can override the above definitions by themselves specifying the origin of a particular URL, `Document`, image, media element, or font.

The Unicode serialisation of an origin is the string obtained by applying the following algorithm to the given origin:

1. If the origin in question is not a scheme/host/port tuple, then return the literal string "`null`" and abort these steps.

2. Otherwise, let result be the scheme part of the origin tuple.

3. Append the string "`://`" to result.

4. Apply the domain to Unicode algorithm to each component of the host part of the origin tuple, and append the results — each component, in the same order, separated by U+002E FULL STOP characters (.) — to result. [URL]

5. If the port part of the origin tuple gives a port that is different from the default port for the protocol given by the scheme part of the origin tuple, then append a U+003A COLON character (:) and the given port, in base ten, to result.

6. Return result.

The ASCII serialisation of an origin is the string obtained by applying the following algorithm to the given origin:

1. If the origin in question is not a scheme/host/port tuple, then return the literal string "`null`" and abort these steps.

2. Otherwise, let result be the scheme part of the origin tuple.

3. Append the string "`://`" to result.

4. Apply the domain to ASCII algorithm to each component of the host part of the origin tuple, and append the results — each component, in the same order, separated by U+002E FULL STOP characters (.) — to result. [URL]

   If the ToASCII algorithm used by the domain to ASCII algorithm fails to convert one of the components of the string, e.g. because it is too long or because it contains invalid characters, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps. [RFC3490]

5. If the port part of the origin tuple gives a port that is different from the default port for the protocol given by the scheme part of the origin tuple, then append a U+003A COLON character (:) and the given port, in base ten, to result.

6. Return result.

Two origins are said to be the same origin if the following algorithm returns true:

1. Let A be the first origin being compared, and B be the second origin being compared.

2. If A and B are both opaque identifiers, and their value is equal, then return true.

3. Otherwise, if either A or B or both are opaque identifiers, return false.

4. If A and B have scheme components that are not identical, return false.

5. If A and B have host components that are not identical, return false.

6. If A and B have port components that are not identical, return false.

7. If either A or B have additional data, but that data is not identical for both, return false.

8. Return true.

#### 7.3.1 Relaxing the same-origin restriction

document . `domain` [ = domain ]

  Returns the current domain used for security checks.

  Can be set to a value that removes subdomains, to change the effective script origin to allow pages on other subdomains of the same domain (if they do the same thing) to access each other. (Can't be set in sandboxed `iframe`s.)

The `domain` attribute on `Document` objects must be initialised to the document's domain, if it has one, and the empty string otherwise. If the document's domain starts with a U+005B LEFT SQUARE BRACKET character ([) and ends with a U+005D RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET character (]), it is an IPv6 address; these square brackets must be omitted when initializing the attribute's value.

On getting, the attribute must return its current value, unless the `Document` has no browsing context, in which case it must return the empty string.

On setting, the user agent must run the following algorithm:

1. If the `Document` has no browsing context, throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If the `Document`'s active sandboxing flag set has its sandboxed `document.domain` browsing context flag set, throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

3. If the new value is an IPv4 or IPv6 address, let new value be the new value.

   Otherwise, strictly split the new value on U+002E FULL STOP characters (.), apply the domain to ASCII algorithm to each returned token, and let new value be the result of concatenating the results of applying that algorithm to each token, in the same order, separated by U+002E FULL STOP characters (.). [URL]

   If the ToASCII algorithm used by the domain to ASCII algorithm fails to convert one of the components of the string, e.g. because it is too long or because it contains invalid characters, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps. [RFC3490]

4. If new value is not exactly equal to the current value of the `document.domain` attribute, then run these substeps:

   1. If the current value is an IPv4 or IPv6 address, throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

   2. If new value, prefixed by a U+002E FULL STOP (.), does not exactly match the end of the current value, throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

      If the new value is an IPv4 or IPv6 address, it cannot match the new value in this way and thus an exception will be thrown here.

   3. If new value matches a suffix in the Public Suffix List, or, if new value, prefixed by a U+002E FULL STOP (.), matches the end of a suffix in the Public Suffix List, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps. [PSL]

      Suffixes must be compared in an ASCII case-insensitive manner, after applying the domain to ASCII algorithm to their individual components, . [URL]

5. Release the storage mutex.

6. Set the attribute's value to new value.

7. If the effective script origin of the `Document` is an alias, set it to the value of the effective script origin (essentially de-aliasing the effective script origin).

8. If new value is not the empty string, then run these substeps:

   1. Set the host part of the effective script origin tuple of the `Document` to new value.

   2. Set the port part of the effective script origin tuple of the `Document` to "manual override" (a value that, for the purposes of comparing origins, is identical to "manual override" but not identical to any other value).

The domain of a `Document` is the host part of the document's origin, if the value of that origin is a scheme/host/port tuple. If it isn't, then the document does not have a domain.

The `domain` attribute is used to enable pages on different hosts of a domain to access each others' DOMs.

Do not use the `document.domain` attribute when using shared hosting. If an untrusted third party is able to host an HTTP server at the same IP address but on a different port, then the same-origin protection that normally protects two different sites on the same host will fail, as the ports are ignored when comparing origins after the `document.domain` attribute has been used.

### 7.4 Sandboxing

A sandboxing flag set is a set of zero or more of the following flags, which are used to restrict the abilities that potentially untrusted resources have:

The sandboxed navigation browsing context flag

  This flag prevents content from navigating browsing contexts other than the sandboxed browsing context itself (or browsing contexts further nested inside it), auxiliary browsing contexts (which are protected by the sandboxed auxiliary navigation browsing context flag defined next), and the top-level browsing context (which is protected by the sandboxed top-level navigation browsing context flag defined below).

  If the sandboxed auxiliary navigation browsing context flag is not set, then in certain cases the restrictions nonetheless allow popups (new top-level browsing contexts) to be opened. These browsing contexts always have one permitted sandboxed navigator, set when the browsing context is created, which allows the browsing context that created them to actually navigate them. (Otherwise, the sandboxed navigation browsing context flag would prevent them from being navigated even if they were opened.)

The sandboxed auxiliary navigation browsing context flag

  This flag prevents content from creating new auxiliary browsing contexts, e.g. using the `target` attribute, the `window.open()` method, or the `showModalDialog()` method.

The sandboxed top-level navigation browsing context flag

  This flag prevents content from navigating their top-level browsing context and prevents content from closing their top-level browsing context.

  When the sandboxed top-level navigation browsing context flag is not set, content can navigate its top-level browsing context, but other browsing contexts are still protected by the sandboxed navigation browsing context flag and possibly the sandboxed auxiliary navigation browsing context flag.

The sandboxed plugins browsing context flag

  This flag prevents content from instantiating plugins, whether using the `embed` element, the `object` element, the `applet` element, or through navigation of a nested browsing context, unless those plugins can be secured.

The sandboxed seamless iframes flag

  This flag prevents content from using the `seamless` attribute on descendant `iframe` elements.

  This prevents a page inserted using the `allow-same-origin` keyword from using a CSS-selector-based method of probing the DOM of other pages on the same site (in particular, pages that contain user-sensitive information).

The sandboxed origin browsing context flag

  This flag forces content into a unique origin, thus preventing it from accessing other content from the same origin.

  This flag also prevents script from reading from or writing to the `document.cookie` IDL attribute, and blocks access to `localStorage`.

The sandboxed forms browsing context flag

  This flag blocks form submission.

The sandboxed pointer lock browsing context flag

  This flag disables the Pointer Lock API. [POINTERLOCK]

The sandboxed scripts browsing context flag

  This flag blocks script execution.

The sandboxed automatic features browsing context flag

  This flag blocks features that trigger automatically, such as automatically playing a video or automatically focusing a form control.

The sandboxed storage area URLs flag

  This flag prevents URL schemes that use storage areas from being able to access the origin's data.

The sandboxed fullscreen browsing context flag

  This flag prevents content from using the `requestFullscreen()` method.

The sandboxed `document.domain` browsing context flag

  This flag prevents content from using the `document.domain` feature to change the effective script origin.

When the user agent is to parse a sandboxing directive, given a string input, a sandboxing flag set output, and optionally an allow fullscreen flag, it must run the following steps:

1. Split input on spaces, to obtain tokens.

2. Let output be empty.

3. Add the following flags to output:

   - The sandboxed navigation browsing context flag.

   - The sandboxed auxiliary navigation browsing context flag, unless tokens contains the `allow-popups` keyword.

   - The sandboxed top-level navigation browsing context flag, unless tokens contains the `allow-top-navigation` keyword.

   - The sandboxed plugins browsing context flag.

   - The sandboxed seamless iframes flag.

   - The sandboxed origin browsing context flag, unless the tokens contains the `allow-same-origin` keyword.

     The `allow-same-origin` keyword is intended for two cases.

     First, it can be used to allow content from the same site to be sandboxed to disable scripting, while still allowing access to the DOM of the sandboxed content.

     Second, it can be used to embed content from a third-party site, sandboxed to prevent that site from opening pop-up windows, etc, without preventing the embedded page from communicating back to its originating site, using the database APIs to store data, etc.

   - The sandboxed forms browsing context flag, unless tokens contains the `allow-forms` keyword.

   - The sandboxed pointer lock browsing context flag, unless tokens contains the `allow-pointer-lock` keyword.

   - The sandboxed scripts browsing context flag, unless tokens contains the `allow-scripts` keyword.

   - The sandboxed automatic features browsing context flag, unless tokens contains the `allow-scripts` keyword (defined above).

     This flag is relaxed by the same keyword as scripts, because when scripts are enabled these features are trivially possible anyway, and it would be unfortunate to force authors to use script to do them when sandboxed rather than allowing them to use the declarative features.

   - The sandboxed storage area URLs flag.

   - The sandboxed fullscreen browsing context flag, unless the allow fullscreen flag was passed to the parse a sandboxing directive flag.

   - The sandboxed `document.domain` browsing context flag.

Every top-level browsing context has a popup sandboxing flag set, which is a sandboxing flag set. When a browsing context is created, its popup sandboxing flag set must be empty. It is populated by the rules for choosing a browsing context given a browsing context name.

Every nested browsing context has an `iframe` sandboxing flag set, which is a sandboxing flag set. Which flags in a nested browsing context's `iframe` sandboxing flag set are set at any particular time is determined by the `iframe` element's `sandbox` attribute.

Every `Document` has an active sandboxing flag set, which is a sandboxing flag set. When the `Document` is created, its active sandboxing flag set must be empty. It is populated by the navigation algorithm.

Every resource that is obtained by the navigation algorithm has a forced sandboxing flag set, which is a sandboxing flag set. A resource by default has no flags set in its forced sandboxing flag set, but other specifications can define that certain flags are set.

In particular, the forced sandboxing flag set is used by the Content Security Policy specification. [CSP]

When a user agent is to implement the sandboxing for a `Document`, it must populate `Document`'s active sandboxing flag set with the union of the flags that are present in the following sandboxing flag sets at the time the `Document` object is created:

- If the `Document`'s browsing context is a top-level browsing context, then: the flags set on the browsing context's popup sandboxing flag set.

- If the `Document`'s browsing context is a nested browsing context, then: the flags set on the browsing context's `iframe` sandboxing flag set.

- If the `Document`'s browsing context is a nested browsing context, then: the flags set on the browsing context's parent browsing context's active document's active sandboxing flag set.

- The flags set on the `Document`'s resource's forced sandboxing flag set, if it has one.

### 7.5 Session history and navigation

#### 7.5.1 The session history of browsing contexts

The sequence of `Document`s in a browsing context is its session history. Each browsing context, including nested browsing contexts, has a distinct session history. A browsing context's session history consists of a flat list of session history entries. Each session history entry consists, at a minimum, of a URL, and each entry may in addition have a state object, a title, a `Document` object, form data, a scroll position, and other information associated with it.

Each entry, when first created, has a `Document`. However, when a `Document` is not active, it's possible for it to be discarded to free resources. The URL and other data in a session history entry is then used to bring a new `Document` into being to take the place of the original, should the user agent find itself having to reactivate that `Document`.

Titles associated with session history entries need not have any relation with the current `title` of the `Document`. The title of a session history entry is intended to explain the state of the document at that point, so that the user can navigate the document's history.

URLs without associated state objects are added to the session history as the user (or script) navigates from page to page.

Each `Document` object in a browsing context's session history is associated with a unique `History` object which must all model the same underlying session history.

The `history` attribute of the `Window` interface must return the object implementing the `History` interface for that `Window` object's newest `Document`.

A state object is an object representing a user interface state.

Pages can add state objects to the session history. These are then returned to the script when the user (or script) goes back in the history, thus enabling authors to use the "navigation" metaphor even in one-page applications.

State objects are intended to be used for two main purposes: first, storing a preparsed description of the state in the URL so that in the simple case an author doesn't have to do the parsing (though one would still need the parsing for handling URLs passed around by users, so it's only a minor optimization), and second, so that the author can store state that one wouldn't store in the URL because it only applies to the current `Document` instance and it would have to be reconstructed if a new `Document` were opened.

An example of the latter would be something like keeping track of the precise coordinate from which a pop-up `div` was made to animate, so that if the user goes back, it can be made to animate to the same location. Or alternatively, it could be used to keep a pointer into a cache of data that would be fetched from the server based on the information in the URL, so that when going back and forward, the information doesn't have to be fetched again.

At any point, one of the entries in the session history is the current entry. This is the entry representing the active document of the browsing context. Which entry is the current entry is changed by the algorithms defined in this specification, e.g. during session history traversal.

The current entry is usually an entry for the address of the `Document`. However, it can also be one of the entries for state objects added to the history by that document.

An entry with persisted user state is one that also has user-agent defined state. This specification does not specify what kind of state can be stored.

For example, some user agents might want to persist the scroll position, or the values of form controls.

User agents that persist the value of form controls are encouraged to also persist their directionality (the value of the element's `dir` attribute). This prevents values from being displayed incorrectly after a history traversal when the user had originally entered the values with an explicit, non-default directionality.

Entries that consist of state objects share the same `Document` as the entry for the page that was active when they were added.

Contiguous entries that differ just by fragment identifier also share the same `Document`.

All entries that share the same `Document` (and that are therefore merely different states of one particular document) are contiguous by definition.

Each `Document` in a browsing context can also have a latest entry. This is the entry or that `Document` that was most the recently traversed to. When a `Document` is created, it initially has no latest entry.

User agents may discard the `Document` objects of entries other than the current entry that are not referenced from any script, reloading the pages afresh when the user or script navigates back to such pages. This specification does not specify when user agents should discard `Document` objects and when they should cache them.

Entries that have had their `Document` objects discarded must, for the purposes of the algorithms given below, act as if they had not. When the user or script navigates back or forwards to a page which has no in-memory DOM objects, any other entries that shared the same `Document` object with it must share the new object as well.

#### 7.5.2 The `History` interface

    interface History {
      readonly attribute long length;
      readonly attribute any state;
      void go(optional long delta);
      void back();
      void forward();
      void pushState(any data, DOMString title, optional DOMString? url = null);
      void replaceState(any data, DOMString title, optional DOMString? url = null);
    };

window . `history` . `length`

  Returns the number of entries in the joint session history.

window . `history` . `state`

  Returns the current state object.

window . `history` . `go`( [ delta ] )

  Goes back or forward the specified number of steps in the joint session history.

  A zero delta will reload the current page.

  If the delta is out of range, does nothing.

window . `history` . `back`()

  Goes back one step in the joint session history.

  If there is no previous page, does nothing.

window . `history` . `forward`()

  Goes forward one step in the joint session history.

  If there is no next page, does nothing.

window . `history` . `pushState`(data, title [, url ] )

  Pushes the given data onto the session history, with the given title, and, if provided and not null, the given URL.

window . `history` . `replaceState`(data, title [, url ] )

  Updates the current entry in the session history to have the given data, title, and, if provided and not null, URL.

The joint session history of a top-level browsing context is the union of all the session histories of all browsing contexts of all the fully active `Document` objects that share that top-level browsing context, with all the entries that are current entries in their respective session histories removed except for the current entry of the joint session history.

The current entry of the joint session history is the entry that most recently became a current entry in its session history.

Entries in the joint session history are ordered chronologically by the time they were added to their respective session histories. Each entry has an index; the earliest entry has index 0, and the subsequent entries are numbered with consecutively increasing integers (1, 2, 3, etc).

Since each `Document` in a browsing context might have a different event loop, the actual state of the joint session history can be somewhat nebulous. For example, two sibling `iframe` elements could both traverse from one unique origin to another at the same time, so their precise order might not be well-defined; similarly, since they might only find out about each other later, they might disagree about the length of the joint session history.

All the getters and setters for attributes, and all the methods, defined on the `History` interface, when invoked on a `History` object associated with a `Document` that is not fully active, must throw a `SecurityError` exception instead of operating as described below.

The `length` attribute of the `History` interface must return the number of entries in the top-level browsing context's joint session history.

The actual entries are not accessible from script.

The `state` attribute of the `History` interface must return the last value it was set to by the user agent. Initially, its value must be null.

When the `go(delta)` method is invoked, if the argument to the method was omitted or has the value zero, the user agent must act as if the `location.reload()` method was called instead. Otherwise, the user agent must traverse the history by a delta whose value is the value of the method's argument.

When the `back()` method is invoked, the user agent must traverse the history by a delta −1.

When the `forward()`method is invoked, the user agent must traverse the history by a delta +1.

Each top-level browsing context has a session history traversal queue, initially empty, to which tasks can be added.

Each top-level browsing context, when created, must asynchronously begin running the following algorithm, known as the session history event loop for that top-level browsing context:

1. Wait until this top-level browsing context's session history traversal queue is not empty.

2. Pull the first task from this top-level browsing context's session history traversal queue, and execute it.

3. Return to the first step of this algorithm.

The session history event loop helps coordinate cross-browsing-context transitions of the joint session history: since each browsing context might, at any particular time, have a different event loop (this can happen if the user agent has more than one event loop per unit of related browsing contexts), transitions would otherwise have to involve cross-event-loop synchronisation.

To traverse the history by a delta delta, the user agent must append a task to this top-level browsing context's session history traversal queue, the task consisting of running the following steps:

1. Let delta be the argument to the method.

2. If the index of the current entry of the joint session history plus delta is less than zero or greater than or equal to the number of items in the joint session history, then abort these steps.

3. Let specified entry be the entry in the joint session history whose index is the sum of delta and the index of the current entry of the joint session history.

4. Let specified browsing context be the browsing context of the specified entry.

5. If the specified browsing context's active document's unload a document algorithm is currently running, abort these steps.

6. Queue a task that consists of running the following substeps. The relevant event loop is that of the specified browsing context's active document. The task source for the queued task is the history traversal task source.

   1. If there is an ongoing attempt to navigate specified browsing context that has not yet matured (i.e. it has not passed the point of making its `Document` the active document), then cancel that attempt to navigate the browsing context.

   2. If the specified browsing context's active document is not the same `Document` as the `Document` of the specified entry, then run these substeps:

      1. Fully exit fullscreen.

      2. Prompt to unload the active document of the specified browsing context. If the user refused to allow the document to be unloaded, then abort these steps.

      3. Unload the active document of the specified browsing context with the recycle parameter set to false.

   3. Traverse the history of the specified browsing context to the specified entry.

When the user navigates through a browsing context, e.g. using a browser's back and forward buttons, the user agent must traverse the history by a delta equivalent to the action specified by the user.

The `pushState(data, title, url)` method adds a state object entry to the history.

The `replaceState(data, title, url)` method updates the state object, title, and optionally the URL of the current entry in the history.

When either of these methods is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let cloned data be a structured clone of the specified data. If this throws an exception, then rethrow that exception and abort these steps.

2. If the third argument is not null, run these substeps:

   1. Resolve the value of the third argument, relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object.
   2. If that fails, throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.
   3. Compare the resulting parsed URL to the result of applying the URL parser algorithm to the document's address. If any component of these two URLs differ other than the path, query, and fragment components, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.
   4. If the origin of the resulting absolute URL is not the same as the origin of the responsible document specified by the entry settings object, and either the path or query components of the two parsed URLs compared in the previous step differ, throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps. (This prevents sandboxed content from spoofing other pages on the same origin.)

   5. Let new URL be the resulting absolute URL.

   For the purposes of the comparisons in the above substeps, the path and query components can only be the same if the scheme component of both parsed URLs are relative schemes.

3. If the third argument is null, then let new URL be the URL of the current entry.

4. If the method invoked was the `pushState()` method:

   1. Remove all the entries in the browsing context's session history after the current entry. If the current entry is the last entry in the session history, then no entries are removed.

      This doesn't necessarily have to affect the user agent's user interface.

   2. Remove any tasks queued by the history traversal task source that are associated with any `Document` objects in the top-level browsing context's document family.

   3. If appropriate, update the current entry to reflect any state that the user agent wishes to persist. The entry is then said to be an entry with persisted user state.

   4. Add a state object entry to the session history, after the current entry, with cloned data as the state object, the given title as the title, and new URL as the URL of the entry.

   5. Update the current entry to be this newly added entry.

   Otherwise, if the method invoked was the `replaceState()` method:

   1. Update the current entry in the session history so that cloned data is the entry's new state object, the given title is the new title, and new URL is the entry's new URL.

5. If the current entry in the session history represents a non-GET request (e.g. it was the result of a POST submission) then update it to instead represent a GET request (or equivalent).

6. Set the document's address to new URL.

   Since this is neither a navigation of the browsing context nor a history traversal, it does not cause a `hashchange` event to be fired.

7. Set `history.state` to a structured clone of cloned data.

8. Let the latest entry of the `Document` of the current entry be the current entry.

The title is purely advisory. User agents might use the title in the user interface.

User agents may limit the number of state objects added to the session history per page. If a page hits the UA-defined limit, user agents must remove the entry immediately after the first entry for that `Document` object in the session history after having added the new entry. (Thus the state history acts as a FIFO buffer for eviction, but as a LIFO buffer for navigation.)

Consider a game where the user can navigate along a line, such that the user is always at some coordinate, and such that the user can bookmark the page corresponding to a particular coordinate, to return to it later.

A static page implementing the x=5 position in such a game could look like the following:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <!-- this is http://example.com/line?x=5 -->
    <title>Line Game - 5</title>
    <p>You are at coordinate 5 on the line.</p>
    <p>
     <a href="?x=6">Advance to 6</a> or
     <a href="?x=4">retreat to 4</a>?
    </p>

The problem with such a system is that each time the user clicks, the whole page has to be reloaded. Here instead is another way of doing it, using script:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <!-- this starts off as http://example.com/line?x=5 -->
    <title>Line Game - 5</title>
    <p>You are at coordinate <span id="coord">5</span> on the line.</p>
    <p>
     <a href="?x=6" onclick="go(1); return false;">Advance to 6</a> or
     <a href="?x=4" onclick="go(-1); return false;">retreat to 4</a>?
    </p>
    <script>
     var currentPage = 5; // prefilled by server
     function go(d) {
       setupPage(currentPage + d);
       history.pushState(currentPage, document.title, '?x=' + currentPage);
     }
     onpopstate = function(event) {
       setupPage(event.state);
     }
     function setupPage(page) {
       currentPage = page;
       document.title = 'Line Game - ' + currentPage;
       document.getElementById('coord').textContent = currentPage;
       document.links[0].href = '?x=' + (currentPage+1);
       document.links[0].textContent = 'Advance to ' + (currentPage+1);
       document.links[1].href = '?x=' + (currentPage-1);
       document.links[1].textContent = 'retreat to ' + (currentPage-1);
     }
    </script>

In systems without script, this still works like the previous example. However, users that do have script support can now navigate much faster, since there is no network access for the same experience. Furthermore, contrary to the experience the user would have with just a naïve script-based approach, bookmarking and navigating the session history still work.

In the example above, the data argument to the `pushState()` method is the same information as would be sent to the server, but in a more convenient form, so that the script doesn't have to parse the URL each time the user navigates.

Applications might not use the same title for a session history entry as the value of the document's `title` element at that time. For example, here is a simple page that shows a block in the `title` element. Clearly, when navigating backwards to a previous state the user does not go back in time, and therefore it would be inappropriate to put the time in the session history title.

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <TITLE>Line</TITLE>
    <SCRIPT>
     setInterval(function () { document.title = 'Line - ' + new Date(); }, 1000);
     var i = 1;
     function inc() {
       set(i+1);
       history.pushState(i, 'Line - ' + i);
     }
     function set(newI) {
       i = newI;
       document.forms.F.I.value = newI;
     }
    </SCRIPT>
    <BODY ONPOPSTATE="set(event.state)">
    <FORM NAME=F>
    State: <OUTPUT NAME=I>1</OUTPUT> <INPUT VALUE="Increment" TYPE=BUTTON ONCLICK="inc()">
    </FORM>

#### 7.5.3 The `Location` interface

Each `Document` object in a browsing context's session history is associated with a unique instance of a `Location` object.

document . `location` [ = value ]
window . `location` [ = value ]

  Returns a `Location` object with the current page's location.

  Can be set, to navigate to another page.

The `location` attribute of the `Document` interface must return the `Location` object for that `Document` object, if it is in a browsing context, and null otherwise.

The `location` attribute of the `Window` interface must return the `Location` object for that `Window` object's `Document`.

`Location` objects provide a representation of the address of the active document of their `Document`'s browsing context, and allow the current entry of the browsing context's session history to be changed, by adding or replacing entries in the `history` object.

    [Unforgeable] interface Location {
      void assign(DOMString url);
      void replace(DOMString url);
      void reload();
    };
    Location implements URLUtils;

location . `assign`(url)

  Navigates to the given page.

location . `replace`(url)

  Removes the current page from the session history and navigates to the given page.

location . `reload`()

  Reloads the current page.

The relevant `Document` is the `Location` object's associated `Document` object's browsing context's active document.

When the `assign(url)` method is invoked, the UA must resolve the argument, relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object, and if that is successful, must navigate the browsing context to the specified url, with exceptions enabled. If the browsing context's session history contains only one `Document`, and that was the `about:blank` `Document` created when the browsing context was created, then the navigation must be done with replacement enabled.

When the `replace(url)` method is invoked, the UA must resolve the argument, relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object, and if that is successful, navigate the browsing context to the specified url with replacement enabled and exceptions enabled.

Navigation for the `assign()` and `replace()` methods must be done with the responsible browsing context specified by the incumbent settings object as the source browsing context.

If the resolving step of the `assign()` and `replace()` methods is not successful, then the user agent must instead throw a `SyntaxError` exception.

When the `reload()` method is invoked, the user agent must run the appropriate steps from the following list:

If the currently executing task is the dispatch of a `resize` event in response to the user resizing the browsing context

  Repaint the browsing context and abort these steps.

If the browsing context's active document is an `iframe` `srcdoc` document

  Reprocess the `iframe` attributes of the browsing context's browsing context container.

If the browsing context's active document has its reload override flag set

  Perform an overridden reload, with the browsing context being navigated as the responsible browsing context.

Otherwise

  Navigate the browsing context to the document's address with replacement enabled and exceptions enabled. The source browsing context must be the browsing context being navigated. This is a reload-triggered navigation.

When a user requests that the active document of a browsing context be reloaded through a user interface element, the user agent should navigate the browsing context to the same resource as that `Document`, with replacement enabled. In the case of non-idempotent methods (e.g. HTTP POST), the user agent should prompt the user to confirm the operation first, since otherwise transactions (e.g. purchases or database modifications) could be repeated. User agents may allow the user to explicitly override any caches when reloading. If browsing context's active document's reload override flag is set, then the user agent may instead perform an overridden reload rather than the navigation described in this paragraph (with the browsing context being reloaded as the source browsing context).

The `Location` interface also supports the `URLUtils` interface. [URL]

When the object is created, and whenever the the address of the relevant `Document` changes, the user agent must invoke the object's `URLUtils` interface's set the input algorithm with the address of the relevant `Document` as the given value.

The object's `URLUtils` interface's get the base algorithm must return the API base URL specified by the entry settings object, if there is one, or null otherwise.

The object's `URLUtils` interface's query encoding is the document's character encoding.

When the object's `URLUtils` interface invokes its update steps with the string value, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If any of the following conditions are met, let mode be normal navigation; otherwise, let it be replace navigation:

   - The `Location` object's relevant `Document` has completely loaded, or
   - In the task in which the algorithm is running, an activation behavior is currently being processed whose `click` event was trusted, or
   - In the task in which the algorithm is running, the event listener for a trusted `click` event is being handled.

2. If mode is normal navigation, then act as if the `assign()` method had been called with value as its argument. Otherwise, act as if the `replace()` method had been called with value as its argument.

##### 7.5.3.1 Security

This section describes a security model that is underdefined, imperfect, and does not match implementations. Work is ongoing to attempt to resolve this, but in the meantime, please do not rely on this section for precision. Implementors are urged to send their feedback on how cross-origin cross-global access to `Window` and `Location` objects should work. See bug 20701.

User agents must throw a `SecurityError` exception whenever any properties of a `Location` object are accessed when the entry settings object specifies an effective script origin that is not the same as the `Location` object's associated `Document`'s browsing context's active document's effective script origin, with the following exceptions:

- The `href` setter, if the responsible browsing context specified by the entry settings object is familiar with the browsing context with which the `Location` object is associated
- The `replace()` method, if the responsible browsing context specified by the entry settings object is familiar with the browsing context with which the `Location` object is associated
- Any properties not defined in the IDL for the `Location` object or indirectly via one of those properties (e.g. `toString()`, which is defined via the `stringifier` keyword), if the effective script origin specified by the entry settings object is the same origin as the `Location` object's associated `Document`'s effective script origin

When the effective script origin specified by the entry settings object is different than a `Location` object's associated `Document`'s effective script origin, the user agent must act as if any changes to that `Location` object's properties, getters, setters, etc, were not present, and as if all the properties of that `Location` object had their [[Enumerable]] attribute set to false.

For members that return objects (including function objects), each distinct effective script origin that is not the same origin as the `Location` object's `Document`'s effective script origin must be provided with a separate set of objects. These objects must have the prototype chain appropriate for the script for which the objects are created (not those that would be appropriate for scripts whose settings object specifies a global object that is the `Location` object's `Document`'s `Window` object).

#### 7.5.4 Implementation notes for session history

This section is non-normative.

The `History` interface is not meant to place restrictions on how implementations represent the session history to the user.

For example, session history could be implemented in a tree-like manner, with each page having multiple "forward" pages. This specification doesn't define how the linear list of pages in the `history` object are derived from the actual session history as seen from the user's perspective.

Similarly, a page containing two `iframe`s has a `history` object distinct from the `iframe`s' `history` objects, despite the fact that typical Web browsers present the user with just one "Back" button, with a session history that interleaves the navigation of the two inner frames and the outer page.

Security: It is suggested that to avoid letting a page "hijack" the history navigation facilities of a UA by abusing `pushState()`, the UA provide the user with a way to jump back to the previous page (rather than just going back to the previous state). For example, the back button could have a drop down showing just the pages in the session history, and not showing any of the states. Similarly, an aural browser could have two "back" commands, one that goes back to the previous state, and one that jumps straight back to the previous page.

In addition, a user agent could ignore calls to `pushState()` that are invoked on a timer, or from event listeners that are not triggered in response to a clear user action, or that are invoked in rapid succession.

### 7.6 Browsing the Web

#### 7.6.1 Navigating across documents

Certain actions cause the browsing context to navigate to a new resource. A user agent may provide various ways for the user to explicitly cause a browsing context to navigate, in addition to those defined in this specification.

For example, following a hyperlink, form submission, and the `window.open()` and `location.assign()` methods can all cause a browsing context to navigate.

A resource has a URL, but that might not be the only information necessary to identify it. For example, a form submission that uses HTTP POST would also have the HTTP method and payload. Similarly, an `iframe` `srcdoc` document needs to know the data it is to use.

Navigation always involves source browsing context, which is the browsing context which was responsible for starting the navigation.

When a browsing context is navigated to a new resource, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Release the storage mutex.

2. If the source browsing context is not allowed to navigate the browsing context being navigated, then abort these steps.

   If these steps are aborted here, the user agent may instead offer to open the new resource in a new top-level browsing context or in the top-level browsing context of the source browsing context, at the user's option, in which case the user agent must navigate that designated top-level browsing context to the new resource as if the user had requested it independently.

   Doing so, however, can be dangerous, as it means that the user is overriding the author's explicit request to sandbox the content.

   If the navigate algorithm was invoked with exceptions enabled, and it is aborted on this step, then in addition to aborting this algorithm, the user agent must also throw a `SecurityError` exception.

3. If the source browsing context is the same as the browsing context being navigated, and this browsing context has its seamless browsing context flag set, and the browsing context being navigated was not chosen using an explicit self-navigation override, then find the nearest ancestor browsing context that does not have its seamless browsing context flag set, and continue these steps as if that browsing context was the one that was going to be navigated instead.

4. If there is a preexisting attempt to navigate the browsing context, and the source browsing context is the same as the browsing context being navigated, and that attempt is currently running the unload a document algorithm, and the origin of the URL of the resource being loaded in that navigation is not the same origin as the origin of the URL of the resource being loaded in this navigation, then abort these steps without affecting the preexisting attempt to navigate the browsing context.

5. If a task queued by the traverse the history by a delta algorithm is running the unload a document algorithm for the active document of the browsing context being navigated, then abort these steps without affecting the unload a document algorithm or the aforementioned history traversal task.

6. If the prompt to unload a document algorithm is being run for the active document of the browsing context being navigated, then abort these steps without affecting the prompt to unload a document algorithm.

7. Let gone async be false.

   The handle redirects step later in this algorithm can in certain cases jump back to the step labeled fragment identifiers. Since, between those two steps, this algorithm goes from operating synchronously in the context of the calling task to operating asynchronously independent of the event loop, some of the intervening steps need to be able to handle both being synchronous and being asynchronous. The gone async flag is thus used to make these steps aware of which mode they are operating in.

8. Fragment identifiers: If this is not a reload-triggered navigation: apply the URL parser algorithm to the absolute URL of the new resource and the address of the active document of the browsing context being navigated; if all the components of the resulting parsed URLs, ignoring any fragment components, are identical, and the new resource is to be fetched using HTTP GET or equivalent, and the parsed URL of the new resource has a fragment component that is not null (even if it is empty), then navigate to that fragment identifier and abort these steps.

9. If gone async is false, cancel any preexisting but not yet mature attempt to navigate the browsing context, including canceling any instances of the fetch algorithm started by those attempts. If one of those attempts has already created and initialised a new `Document` object, abort that `Document` also. (Navigation attempts that have matured already have session history entries, and are therefore handled during the update the session history with the new page algorithm, later.)

10. If the new resource is to be handled using a mechanism that does not affect the browsing context, e.g. ignoring the navigation request altogether because the specified scheme is not one of the supported protocols, then abort these steps and proceed with that mechanism instead.

11. If gone async is false, prompt to unload the `Document` object. If the user refused to allow the document to be unloaded, then abort these steps.

    If this instance of the navigation algorithm gets canceled while this step is running, the prompt to unload a document algorithm must nonetheless be run to completion.

12. If gone async is false, abort the active document of the browsing context.

13. If the new resource is to be handled by displaying some sort of inline content, e.g. an error message because the specified scheme is not one of the supported protocols, or an inline prompt to allow the user to select a registered handler for the given scheme, then display the inline content and abort these steps.

    In the case of a registered handler being used, the algorithm will be reinvoked with a new URL to handle the request.

14. If the browsing context being navigated is a nested browsing context, then put it in the delaying `load` events mode.

    The user agent must take this nested browsing context out of the delaying `load` events mode when this navigation algorithm later matures, or when it terminates (whether due to having run all the steps, or being canceled, or being aborted), whichever happens first.

15. This is the step that attempts to obtain the resource, if necessary. Jump to the first appropriate substep:

    If the resource has already been obtained (e.g. because it is being used to populate an `object` element's new child browsing context)

      Skip this step. The data is already available.

    If the new resource is a URL whose scheme is `javascript`

      Queue a task to run these "`javascript:` URL" steps, associated with the active document of the browsing context being navigated:

      1. If the origin of the source browsing context is not the same origin as the origin of the active document of the browsing context being navigated, then act as if the result of evaluating the script was the void value, and jump to the step labeled process results below.

      2. Apply the URL parser to the URL being navigated.

      3. Let parsed URL be the result of the URL parser.

      4. Let script source be the empty string.

      5. Append parsed URL's scheme data component to script source.

      6. If parsed URL's query component is not null, then first append a U+003F QUESTION MARK character (?) to script source, and then append parsed URL's query component to script source.

      7. If parsed URL's fragment component is not null, then first append a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#) to script source, and then append parsed URL's fragment component to script source.

      8. Replace script source with the result of applying the percent decode algorithm to script source.

      9. Replace script source with the result of applying the UTF-8 decode algorithm to script source.

      10. Let address be the address of the active document of the browsing context being navigated.

      11. Create a script, using script source as the script source, address as the script source URL, JavaScript as the scripting language, and the script settings object of the `Window` object of the active document of the browsing context being navigated.

          Let result be the return value of the code entry-point of this script. If an exception was thrown, let result be void instead. (The result will be void also if scripting is disabled.)

      12. Process results: If the result of executing the script is void (there is no return value), then the result of obtaining the resource for the URL is equivalent to an HTTP resource with an HTTP 204 No Content response.

          Otherwise, the result of obtaining the resource for the URL is equivalent to an HTTP resource with a 200 OK response whose Content-Type metadata is `text/html` and whose response body is the return value converted to a string value.

          When it comes time to set the document's address in the navigation algorithm, use address as the override URL.

      The task source for this task is the DOM manipulation task source.

      So for example a `javascript:` URL in an `href` attribute of an `a` element would only be evaluated when the link was followed, while such a URL in the `src` attribute of an `iframe` element would be evaluated in the context of the `iframe`'s own nested browsing context when the `iframe` is being set up; once evaluated, its return value (if it was not void) would replace that browsing context's `Document`, thus also changing the `Window` object of that browsing context.

    If the new resource is to be fetched using HTTP GET or equivalent, and there are relevant application caches that are identified by a URL with the same origin as the URL in question, and that have this URL as one of their entries, excluding entries marked as foreign, and whose mode is fast, and the user agent is not in a mode where it will avoid using application caches

      Fetch the resource from the most appropriate application cache of those that match.

      For example, imagine an HTML page with an associated application cache displaying an image and a form, where the image is also used by several other application caches. If the user right-clicks on the image and chooses "View Image", then the user agent could decide to show the image from any of those caches, but it is likely that the most useful cache for the user would be the one that was used for the aforementioned HTML page. On the other hand, if the user submits the form, and the form does a POST submission, then the user agent will not use an application cache at all; the submission will be made to the network.

    Otherwise

      Fetch the new resource, with the manual redirect flag set.

    If the steps above invoked the fetch algorithm, the following requirements also apply:

    If the resource is being fetched using a method other than one equivalent to HTTP's GET, or, if the navigation algorithm was invoked as a result of the form submission algorithm, then the fetching algorithm must be invoked from the origin of the active document of the source browsing context, if any.

    Otherwise, if the browsing context being navigated is a child browsing context, then the fetching algorithm must be invoked from the browsing context scope origin of the browsing context container of the browsing context being navigated, if it has one.

16. If gone async is false, return to whatever algorithm invoked the navigation steps and continue running these steps asynchronously.

17. Let gone async be true.

18. Wait for one or more bytes to be available or for the user agent to establish that the resource in question is empty. During this time, the user agent may allow the user to cancel this navigation attempt or start other navigation attempts.

19. Handle redirects: If fetching the resource results in a redirect, and either the URL of the target of the redirect has the same origin as the original resource, or the resource is being obtained using the POST method or a safe method (in HTTP terms), return to the step labeled fragment identifiers with the new resource, except that if the URL of the target of the redirect does not have a fragment identifier and the URL of the resource that led to the redirect does, then the fragment identifier of the resource that led to the redirect must be propagated to the URL of the target of the redirect.

    So for instance, if the original URL was "`http://example.com/#!sample`" and "`http://example.com/`" is found to redirect to "`https://example.com/`", the URL of the new resource will be "`https://example.com/#!sample`".

    Otherwise, if fetching the resource results in a redirect but the URL of the target of the redirect does not have the same origin as the original resource and the resource is being obtained using a method that is neither the POST method nor a safe method (in HTTP terms), then abort these steps. The user agent may indicate to the user that the navigation has been aborted for security reasons.

20. Fallback in prefer-online mode: If the resource was not fetched from an application cache, and was to be fetched using HTTP GET or equivalent, and there are relevant application caches that are identified by a URL with the same origin as the URL in question, and that have this URL as one of their entries, excluding entries marked as foreign, and whose mode is prefer-online, and the user didn't cancel the navigation attempt during the earlier step, and the navigation attempt failed (e.g. the server returned a 4xx or 5xx status code or equivalent, or there was a DNS error), then:

    Let candidate be the resource identified by the URL in question from the most appropriate application cache of those that match.

    If candidate is not marked as foreign, then the user agent must discard the failed load and instead continue along these steps using candidate as the resource. The user agent may indicate to the user that the original page load failed, and that the page used was a previously cached resource.

    This does not affect the address of the resource from which Request-URIs are obtained, as used to set the document's referrer in the initialise the `Document` object steps below; they still use the value as computed by the original fetch algorithm.

21. Fallback for fallback entries: If the resource was not fetched from an application cache, and was to be fetched using HTTP GET or equivalent, and its URL matches the fallback namespace of one or more relevant application caches, and the most appropriate application cache of those that match does not have an entry in its online whitelist that has the same origin as the resource's URL and that is a prefix match for the resource's URL, and the user didn't cancel the navigation attempt during the earlier step, and the navigation attempt failed (e.g. the server returned a 4xx or 5xx status code or equivalent, or there was a DNS error), then:

    Let candidate be the fallback resource specified for the fallback namespace in question. If multiple application caches match, the user agent must use the fallback of the most appropriate application cache of those that match.

    If candidate is not marked as foreign, then the user agent must discard the failed load and instead continue along these steps using candidate as the resource. The document's address, if appropriate, will still be the originally requested URL, not the fallback URL, but the user agent may indicate to the user that the original page load failed, that the page used was a fallback resource, and what the URL of the fallback resource actually is.

    This does not affect the address of the resource from which Request-URIs are obtained, as used to set the document's referrer in the initialise the `Document` object steps below; they still use the value as computed by the original fetch algorithm.

22. Resource handling: If the resource's out-of-band metadata (e.g. HTTP headers), not counting any type information (such as the Content-Type HTTP header), requires some sort of processing that will not affect the browsing context, then perform that processing and abort these steps.

    Such processing might be triggered by, amongst other things, the following:

    - HTTP status codes (e.g. 204 No Content or 205 Reset Content)
    - Network errors (e.g. the network interface being unavailable)
    - Cryptographic protocol failures (e.g. an incorrect TLS certificate)

    Responses with HTTP `Content-Disposition` headers specifying the `attachment` disposition type must be handled as a download.

    HTTP 401 responses that do not include a challenge recognised by the user agent must be processed as if they had no challenge, e.g. rendering the entity body as if the response had been 200 OK.

    User agents may show the entity body of an HTTP 401 response even when the response does include a recognised challenge, with the option to login being included in a non-modal fashion, to enable the information provided by the server to be used by the user before authenticating. Similarly, user agents should allow the user to authenticate (in a non-modal fashion) against authentication challenges included in other responses such as HTTP 200 OK responses, effectively allowing resources to present HTTP login forms without requiring their use.

23. Let type be the sniffed type of the resource.

24. If the user agent has been configured to process resources of the given type using some mechanism other than rendering the content in a browsing context, then skip this step. Otherwise, if the type is one of the following types, jump to the appropriate entry in the following list, and process the resource as described there:

    "`text/html`"
      Follow the steps given in the HTML document section, and then, once they have completed, abort this navigate algorithm.
    "`application/xml`"
    "`text/xml`"
    "`image/svg+xml`"
    "`application/xhtml+xml`"
    Any other type ending in "`+xml`" that is not an explicitly supported XML type
      Follow the steps given in the XML document section. If that section determines that the content is not to be displayed as a generic XML document, then proceed to the next step in this overall set of steps. Otherwise, once the steps given in the XML document section have completed, abort this navigate algorithm.
    "`text/plain`"
      Follow the steps given in the plain text file section, and then, once they have completed, abort this navigate algorithm.
    "`multipart/x-mixed-replace`"
      Follow the steps given in the multipart/x-mixed-replace section, and then, once they have completed, abort this navigate algorithm.
    A supported image, video, or audio type
      Follow the steps given in the media section, and then, once they have completed, abort this navigate algorithm.
    A type that will use an external application to render the content in the browsing context
      Follow the steps given in the plugin section, and then, once they have completed, abort this navigate algorithm.

    An explicitly supported XML type is one for which the user agent is configured to use an external application to render the content (either a plugin rendering directly in the browsing context, or a separate application), or one for which the user agent has dedicated processing rules (e.g. a Web browser with a built-in Atom feed viewer would be said to explicitly support the `application/atom+xml` MIME type), or one for which the user agent has a dedicated handler (e.g. one registered using `registerContentHandler()`).

    Setting the document's address: If there is no override URL, then any `Document` created by these steps must have its address set to the URL that was originally to be fetched, ignoring any other data that was used to obtain the resource (e.g. the entity body in the case of a POST submission is not part of the document's address, nor is the URL of the fallback resource in the case of the original load having failed and that URL having been found to match a fallback namespace). However, if there is an override URL, then any `Document` created by these steps must have its address set to that URL instead.

    An override URL is set when dereferencing a `javascript:` URL and when performing an overridden reload.

    Initializing a new `Document` object: when a `Document` is created as part of the above steps, the user agent will be required to additionally run the following algorithm after creating the new object:

    1. Create a new `Window` object, and associate it with the `Document`, with one exception: if the browsing context's only entry in its session history is the `about:blank` `Document` that was added when the browsing context was created, and navigation is occurring with replacement enabled, and that `Document` has the same origin as the new `Document`, then use the `Window` object of that `Document` instead, and change the `document` attribute of the `Window` object to point to the new `Document`.

    2. Set the document's referrer to the address of the resource from which Request-URIs are obtained as determined when the fetch algorithm obtained the resource, if that algorithm was used and determined such a value; otherwise, set it to the empty string.

    3. Implement the sandboxing for the `Document`.

    4. If the active sandboxing flag set of the `Document`'s browsing context or any of its ancestor browsing contexts (if any) have the sandboxed fullscreen browsing context flag set, then skip this step.

       If the `Document`'s browsing context has a browsing context container and either it is not an `iframe` element, or it does not have the `allowfullscreen` attribute specified, or its `Document` does not have the fullscreen enabled flag set, then also skip this step.

       Otherwise, set the `Document`'s fullscreen enabled flag.

25. Non-document content: If, given type, the new resource is to be handled by displaying some sort of inline content, e.g. a native rendering of the content, an error message because the specified type is not supported, or an inline prompt to allow the user to select a registered handler for the given type, then display the inline content, and then abort these steps.

    In the case of a registered handler being used, the algorithm will be reinvoked with a new URL to handle the request.

26. Otherwise, the document's type is such that the resource will not affect the browsing context, e.g. because the resource is to be handed to an external application or because it is an unknown type that will be processed as a download. Process the resource appropriately.

When a resource is handled by passing its URL or data to an external software package separate from the user agent (e.g. handing a `mailto:` URL to a mail client, or a Word document to a word processor), user agents should attempt to mitigate the risk that this is an attempt to exploit the target software, e.g. by prompting the user to confirm that the source browsing context's active document's origin is to be allowed to invoke the specified software. In particular, if the navigate algorithm, when it was invoked, was not allowed to show a popup, the user agent should not invoke the external software package without prior user confirmation.

For example, there could be a vulnerability in the target software's URL handler which a hostile page would attempt to exploit by tricking a user into clicking a link.

Some of the sections below, to which the above algorithm defers in certain cases, require the user agent to update the session history with the new page. When a user agent is required to do this, it must queue a task (associated with the `Document` object of the current entry, not the new one) to run the following steps:

1. Unload the `Document` object of the current entry, with the recycle parameter set to false.

   If this instance of the navigation algorithm is canceled while this step is running the unload a document algorithm, then the unload a document algorithm must be allowed to run to completion, but this instance of the navigation algorithm must not run beyond this step. (In particular, for instance, the cancelation of this algorithm does not abort any event dispatch or script execution occurring as part of unloading the document or its descendants.)

2. If the navigation was initiated for entry update of an entry

     1. Replace the `Document` of the entry being updated, and any other entries that referenced the same document as that entry, with the new `Document`.

     2. Traverse the history to the new entry.

     This can only happen if the entry being updated is not the current entry, and can never happen with replacement enabled. (It happens when the user tried to traverse to a session history entry that no longer had a `Document` object.)

   Otherwise

     1. Remove all the entries in the browsing context's session history after the current entry. If the current entry is the last entry in the session history, then no entries are removed.

        This doesn't necessarily have to affect the user agent's user interface.

     2. Append a new entry at the end of the `History` object representing the new resource and its `Document` object and related state.

     3. Traverse the history to the new entry. If the navigation was initiated with replacement enabled, then the traversal must itself be initiated with replacement enabled.

3. The navigation algorithm has now matured.

4. Fragment identifier loop: Spin the event loop for a user-agent-defined amount of time, as desired by the user agent implementor. (This is intended to allow the user agent to optimise the user experience in the face of performance concerns.)

5. If the `Document` object has no parser, or its parser has stopped parsing, or the user agent has reason to believe the user is no longer interested in scrolling to the fragment identifier, then abort these steps.

6. Scroll to the fragment identifier given in the document's address. If this fails to find an indicated part of the document, then return to the fragment identifier loop step.

The task source for this task is the networking task source.

#### 7.6.2 Page load processing model for HTML files

When an HTML document is to be loaded in a browsing context, the user agent must queue a task to create a `Document` object, mark it as being an HTML document, set its content type to "`text/html`", initialise the `Document` object, and finally create an HTML parser and associate it with the `Document`. Each task that the networking task source places on the task queue while the fetching algorithm runs must then fill the parser's input byte stream with the fetched bytes and cause the HTML parser to perform the appropriate processing of the input stream.

The input byte stream converts bytes into characters for use in the tokenizer. This process relies, in part, on character encoding information found in the real Content-Type metadata of the resource; the "sniffed type" is not used for this purpose.

When no more bytes are available, the user agent must queue a task for the parser to process the implied EOF character, which eventually causes a `load` event to be fired.

After creating the `Document` object, but before any script execution, certainly before the parser stops, the user agent must update the session history with the new page.

Application cache selection happens in the HTML parser.

The task source for the two tasks mentioned in this section must be the networking task source.

#### 7.6.3 Page load processing model for XML files

When faced with displaying an XML file inline, user agents must follow the requirements defined in the XML and Namespaces in XML recommendations, RFC 3023, DOM, and other relevant specifications to create a `Document` object and a corresponding XML parser. [XML] [XMLNS] [RFC3023] [DOM]

At the time of writing, the XML specification community had not actually yet specified how XML and the DOM interact.

After the `Document` is created, the user agent must initialise the `Document` object.

The actual HTTP headers and other metadata, not the headers as mutated or implied by the algorithms given in this specification, are the ones that must be used when determining the character encoding according to the rules given in the above specifications. Once the character encoding is established, the document's character encoding must be set to that character encoding.

If the root element, as parsed according to the XML specifications cited above, is found to be an `html` element with an attribute `manifest` whose value is not the empty string, then, as soon as the element is inserted into the document, the user agent must resolve the value of that attribute relative to that element, and if that is successful, must apply the URL serialiser algorithm to the resulting parsed URL with the exclude fragment flag set to obtain manifest URL, and then run the application cache selection algorithm with manifest URL as the manifest URL, passing in the newly-created `Document`. Otherwise, if the attribute is absent, its value is the empty string, or resolving its value fails, then as soon as the root element is inserted into the document, the user agent must run the application cache selection algorithm with no manifest, and passing in the `Document`.

Because the processing of the `manifest` attribute happens only once the root element is parsed, any URLs referenced by processing instructions before the root element (such as `<?xml-stylesheet?>` PIs) will be fetched from the network and cannot be cached.

User agents may examine the namespace of the root `Element` node of this `Document` object to perform namespace-based dispatch to alternative processing tools, e.g. determining that the content is actually a syndication feed and passing it to a feed handler. If such processing is to take place, abort the steps in this section, and jump to the next step (labeled non-document content) in the navigate steps above.

Otherwise, then, with the newly created `Document`, the user agent must update the session history with the new page. User agents may do this before the complete document has been parsed (thus achieving incremental rendering), and must do this before any scripts are to be executed.

Error messages from the parse process (e.g. XML namespace well-formedness errors) may be reported inline by mutating the `Document`.

#### 7.6.4 Page load processing model for text files

When a plain text document is to be loaded in a browsing context, the user agent must queue a task to create a `Document` object, mark it as being an HTML document, set its content type to "`text/plain`", initialise the `Document` object, create an HTML parser, associate it with the `Document`, act as if the tokenizer had emitted a start tag token with the tag name "pre" followed by a single U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, and switch the HTML parser's tokenizer to the PLAINTEXT state. Each task that the networking task source places on the task queue while the fetching algorithm runs must then fill the parser's input byte stream with the fetched bytes and cause the HTML parser to perform the appropriate processing of the input stream.

The rules for how to convert the bytes of the plain text document into actual characters, and the rules for actually rendering the text to the user, are defined in RFC 2046, RFC 3676, and subsequent versions thereof. [RFC2046] [RFC3676]

The document's character encoding must be set to the character encoding used to decode the document.

Upon creation of the `Document` object, the user agent must run the application cache selection algorithm with no manifest, and passing in the newly-created `Document`.

When no more bytes are available, the user agent must queue a task for the parser to process the implied EOF character, which eventually causes a `load` event to be fired.

After creating the `Document` object, but potentially before the page has finished parsing, the user agent must update the session history with the new page.

User agents may add content to the `head` element of the `Document`, e.g. linking to a style sheet or a binding, providing script, giving the document a `title`, etc.

In particular, if the user agent supports the `Format=Flowed` feature of RFC 3676 then the user agent would need to apply extra styling to cause the text to wrap correctly and to handle the quoting feature. This could be performed using, e.g., a binding or a CSS extension.

The task source for the two tasks mentioned in this section must be the networking task source.

#### 7.6.5 Page load processing model for `multipart/x-mixed-replace` resources

When a resource with the type `multipart/x-mixed-replace` is to be loaded in a browsing context, the user agent must parse the resource using the rules for multipart types. [RFC2046]

For each body part obtained from the resource, the user agent must run a new instance of the navigate algorithm, starting from the resource handling step, using the new body part as the resource being navigated, with replacement enabled if a previous body part from the same resource resulted in a `Document` object being created and initialized, and otherwise using the same setup as the navigate attempt that caused this section to be invoked in the first place.

For the purposes of algorithms processing these body parts as if they were complete stand-alone resources, the user agent must act as if there were no more bytes for those resources whenever the boundary following the body part is reached.

Thus, `load` events (and for that matter `unload` events) do fire for each body part loaded.

#### 7.6.6 Page load processing model for media

When an image, video, or audio resource is to be loaded in a browsing context, the user agent should create a `Document` object, mark it as being an HTML document, set its content type to the sniffed MIME type of the resource (type in the navigate algorithm), initialise the `Document` object, append an `html` element to the `Document`, append a `head` element and a `body` element to the `html` element, append an element host element for the media, as described below, to the `body` element, and set the appropriate attribute of the element host element, as described below, to the address of the image, video, or audio resource.

The element host element to create for the media is the element given in the table below in the second cell of the row whose first cell describes the media. The appropriate attribute to set is the one given by the third cell in that same row.

Type of media | Element for the media | Appropriate attribute
--- | --- | ---
Image | `img` | `src`
Video | `video` | `src`
Audio | `audio` | `src`

Then, the user agent must act as if it had stopped parsing.

Upon creation of the `Document` object, the user agent must run the application cache selection algorithm with no manifest, and passing in the newly-created `Document`.

After creating the `Document` object, but potentially before the page has finished fully loading, the user agent must update the session history with the new page.

User agents may add content to the `head` element of the `Document`, or attributes to the element host element, e.g. to link to a style sheet or a binding, to provide a script, to give the document a `title`, to make the media autoplay, etc.

#### 7.6.7 Page load processing model for content that uses plugins

When a resource that requires an external resource to be rendered is to be loaded in a browsing context, the user agent should create a `Document` object, mark it as being an HTML document and mark it as being a plugin document, set its content type to the sniffed MIME type of the resource (type in the navigate algorithm), initialise the `Document` object, append an `html` element to the `Document`, append a `head` element and a `body` element to the `html` element, append an `embed` to the `body` element, and set the `src` attribute of the `embed` element to the address of the resource.

The term plugin document is used by the Content Security Policy specification as part of the mechanism that ensures `iframe`s can't be used to evade `plugin-types` directives. [CSP]

Then, the user agent must act as if it had stopped parsing.

Upon creation of the `Document` object, the user agent must run the application cache selection algorithm with no manifest, and passing in the newly-created `Document`.

After creating the `Document` object, but potentially before the page has finished fully loading, the user agent must update the session history with the new page.

User agents may add content to the `head` element of the `Document`, or attributes to the `embed` element, e.g. to link to a style sheet or a binding, or to give the document a `title`.

If the `Document`'s active sandboxing flag set has its sandboxed plugins browsing context flag set, the synthesized `embed` element will fail to render the content if the relevant plugin cannot be secured.

#### 7.6.8 Page load processing model for inline content that doesn't have a DOM

When the user agent is to display a user agent page inline in a browsing context, the user agent should create a `Document` object, mark it as being an HTML document, set its content type to "`text/html`", initialise the `Document` object, and then either associate that `Document` with a custom rendering that is not rendered using the normal `Document` rendering rules, or mutate that `Document` until it represents the content the user agent wants to render.

Once the page has been set up, the user agent must act as if it had stopped parsing.

Upon creation of the `Document` object, the user agent must run the application cache selection algorithm with no manifest, passing in the newly-created `Document`.

After creating the `Document` object, but potentially before the page has been completely set up, the user agent must update the session history with the new page.

#### 7.6.9 Navigating to a fragment identifier

When a user agent is supposed to navigate to a fragment identifier, then the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Remove all the entries in the browsing context's session history after the current entry. If the current entry is the last entry in the session history, then no entries are removed.

   This doesn't necessarily have to affect the user agent's user interface.

2. Remove any tasks queued by the history traversal task source that are associated with any `Document` objects in the top-level browsing context's document family.

3. Append a new entry at the end of the `History` object representing the new resource and its `Document` object and related state. Its URL must be set to the address to which the user agent was navigating. The title must be left unset.

4. Traverse the history to the new entry, with the asynchronous events flag set. This will scroll to the fragment identifier given in what is now the document's address.

If the scrolling fails because the relevant ID has not yet been parsed, then the original navigation algorithm will take care of the scrolling instead, as the last few steps of its update the session history with the new page algorithm.

When the user agent is required to scroll to the fragment identifier and the indicated part of the document, if any, is being rendered, the user agent must either change the scrolling position of the document using the following algorithm, or perform some other action such that the indicated part of the document is brought to the user's attention. If there is no indicated part, or if the indicated part is not being rendered, then the user agent must do nothing. The aforementioned algorithm is as follows:

1. Let target be the indicated part of the document, as defined below.

2. If target is the top of the document, then scroll to the beginning of the document for the `Document`, and abort these steps. [CSSOMVIEW]

3. Use the scroll an element into view algorithm to scroll target into view, with the align to top flag set. [CSSOMVIEW]

4. Run the focusing steps for that element.

The indicated part of the document is the one that the fragment identifier, if any, identifies. The semantics of the fragment identifier in terms of mapping it to a specific DOM Node is defined by the specification that defines the MIME type used by the `Document` (for example, the processing of fragment identifiers for XML MIME types is the responsibility of RFC3023). [RFC3023]

For HTML documents (and HTML MIME types), the following processing model must be followed to determine what the indicated part of the document is.

1. Apply the URL parser algorithm to the URL, and let fragid be the fragment component of the resulting parsed URL.

2. If fragid is the empty string, then the indicated part of the document is the top of the document; stop the algorithm here.

3. Let fragid bytes be the result of percent-decoding fragid.

4. Let decoded fragid be the result of applying the UTF-8 decoder algorithm to fragid bytes. If the UTF-8 decoder emits a decoder error, abort the decoder and instead jump to the step labeled no decoded fragid.

5. If there is an element in the DOM that has an ID exactly equal to decoded fragid, then the first such element in tree order is the indicated part of the document; stop the algorithm here.

6. No decoded fragid: If there is an `a` element in the DOM that has a `name` attribute whose value is exactly equal to fragid (not decoded fragid), then the first such element in tree order is the indicated part of the document; stop the algorithm here.

7. If fragid is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string `top`, then the indicated part of the document is the top of the document; stop the algorithm here.

8. Otherwise, there is no indicated part of the document.

For the purposes of the interaction of HTML with Selectors' `:target` pseudo-class, the target element is the indicated part of the document, if that is an element; otherwise there is no target element. [SELECTORS]

The task source for the task mentioned in this section must be the DOM manipulation task source.

#### 7.6.10 History traversal

When a user agent is required to traverse the history to a specified entry, optionally with replacement enabled, and optionally with the asynchronous events flag set, the user agent must act as follows.

This algorithm is not just invoked when explicitly going back or forwards in the session history — it is also invoked in other situations, for example when navigating a browsing context, as part of updating the session history with the new page.

1. If there is no longer a `Document` object for the entry in question, navigate the browsing context to the resource for that entry to perform an entry update of that entry, and abort these steps. The "navigate" algorithm reinvokes this "traverse" algorithm to complete the traversal, at which point there is a `Document` object and so this step gets skipped. The navigation must be done using the same source browsing context as was used the first time this entry was created. (This can never happen with replacement enabled.)

   If the resource was obtained usign a non-idempotent action, for example a POST form submission, or if the resource is no longer available, for example because the computer is now offline and the page wasn't cached, navigating to it again might not be possible. In this case, the navigation will result in a different page than previously; for example, it might be an error message explaining the problem or offering to resubmit the form.

2. If the current entry's title was not set by the `pushState()` or `replaceState()` methods, then set its title to the value returned by the `document.title` IDL attribute.

3. If appropriate, update the current entry in the browsing context's `Document` object's `History` object to reflect any state that the user agent wishes to persist. The entry is then said to be an entry with persisted user state.

4. If the specified entry has a different `Document` object than the current entry, then run the following substeps:

   1. Remove any tasks queued by the history traversal task source that are associated with any `Document` objects in the top-level browsing context's document family.

   2. If the origin of the `Document` of the specified entry is not the same as the origin of the `Document` of the current entry, then run the following sub-sub-steps:

      1. The current browsing context name must be stored with all the entries in the history that are associated with `Document` objects with the same origin as the active document and that are contiguous with the current entry.

      2. If the browsing context is a top-level browsing context, but not an auxiliary browsing context, then the browsing context's browsing context name must be unset.

   3. Make the specified entry's `Document` object the active document of the browsing context.

   4. If the specified entry has a browsing context name stored with it, then run the following sub-sub-steps:

      1. Set the browsing context's browsing context name to the name stored with the specified entry.

      2. Clear any browsing context names stored with all entries in the history that are associated with `Document` objects with the same origin as the new active document and that are contiguous with the specified entry.

   5. If the specified entry's `Document` has any form controls whose autofill field name is "`off`", invoke the reset algorithm of each of those elements.

   6. If the current document readiness of the specified entry's `Document` is "`complete`", queue a task to run the following sub-sub-steps:

      1. If the `Document`'s page showing flag is true, then abort this task (i.e. don't fire the event below).

      2. Set the `Document`'s page showing flag to true.

      3. Run any session history document visibility change steps for `Document` that are defined by other applicable specifications.

         This is specifically intended for use by the Page Visibility specification. [PAGEVIS]

      4. Fire a trusted event with the name `pageshow` at the `Window` object of that `Document`, with target override set to the `Document` object, using the `PageTransitionEvent` interface, with the `persisted` attribute initialised to true. This event must not bubble, must not be cancelable, and has no default action.

5. Set the document's address to the URL of the specified entry.

6. If the specified entry has a URL whose fragment identifier differs from that of the current entry's when compared in a case-sensitive manner, and the two share the same `Document` object, then let hash changed be true, and let old URL be the URL of the current entry and new URL be the URL of the specified entry. Otherwise, let hash changed be false.

7. If the traversal was initiated with replacement enabled, remove the entry immediately before the specified entry in the session history.

8. If the specified entry is not an entry with persisted user state, but its URL has a fragment identifier, scroll to the fragment identifier.

9. If the entry is an entry with persisted user state, the user agent may update aspects of the document and its rendering, for instance the scroll position or values of form fields, that it had previously recorded.

   This can even include updating the `dir` attribute of `textarea` elements or `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in either the Text state or the Search state, if the persisted state includes the directionality of user input in such controls.

10. If the entry is a state object entry, let state be a structured clone of that state object. Otherwise, let state be null.

11. Set `history.state` to state.

12. Let state changed be true if the `Document` of the specified entry has a latest entry, and that entry is not the specified entry; otherwise let it be false.

13. Let the latest entry of the `Document` of the specified entry be the specified entry.

14. If the asynchronous events flag is not set, then run the following steps synchronously. Otherwise, the asynchronous events flag is set; queue a task to run the following substeps.

    1. If state changed is true, fire a trusted event with the name `popstate` at the `Window` object of the `Document`, using the `PopStateEvent` interface, with the `state` attribute initialised to the value of state. This event must bubble but not be cancelable and has no default action.

    2. If hash changed is true, then fire a trusted event with the name `hashchange` at the browsing context's `Window` object, using the `HashChangeEvent` interface, with the `oldURL` attribute initialised to old URL and the `newURL` attribute initialised to new URL. This event must bubble but not be cancelable and has no default action.

15. The current entry is now the specified entry.

The task source for the tasks mentioned above is the DOM manipulation task source.

##### 7.6.10.1 The `PopStateEvent` interface

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional PopStateEventInit eventInitDict), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface PopStateEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute any state;
    };

    dictionary PopStateEventInit : EventInit {
      any state;
    };

event . `state`

  Returns a copy of the information that was provided to `pushState()` or `replaceState()`.

The `state` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the context information for the event, or null, if the state represented is the initial state of the `Document`.

##### 7.6.10.2 The `HashChangeEvent` interface

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional HashChangeEventInit eventInitDict), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface HashChangeEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute DOMString oldURL;
      readonly attribute DOMString newURL;
    };

    dictionary HashChangeEventInit : EventInit {
      DOMString oldURL;
      DOMString newURL;
    };

event . `oldURL`

  Returns the URL of the session history entry that was previously current.

event . `newURL`

  Returns the URL of the session history entry that is now current.

The `oldURL` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents context information for the event, specifically the URL of the session history entry that was traversed from.

The `newURL` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents context information for the event, specifically the URL of the session history entry that was traversed to.

##### 7.6.10.3 The `PageTransitionEvent` interface

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional PageTransitionEventInit eventInitDict), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface PageTransitionEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute boolean persisted;
    };

    dictionary PageTransitionEventInit : EventInit {
      boolean persisted;
    };

event . `persisted`

  For the `pageshow` event, returns false if the page is newly being loaded (and the `load` event will fire). Otherwise, returns true.

  For the `pagehide` event, returns false if the page is going away for the last time. Otherwise, returns true, meaning that (if nothing conspires to make the page unsalvageable) the page might be reused if the user navigates back to this page.

  Things that can cause the page to be unsalvageable include:

  - `document.open()`
  - Listening for `beforeunload` events
  - Listening for `unload` events
  - Having `iframe`s that are not salvageable
  - Active `WebSocket` objects
  - Aborting a `Document`

The `persisted` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to false. It represents the context information for the event.

#### 7.6.11 Unloading documents

A `Document` has a salvageable state, which must initially be true, a fired unload flag, which must initially be false, and a page showing flag, which must initially be false. The page showing flag is used to ensure that scripts receive `pageshow` and `pagehide` events in a consistent manner (e.g. that they never receive two `pagehide` events in a row without an intervening `pageshow`, or vice versa).

Event loops have a termination nesting level counter, which must initially be zero.

When a user agent is to prompt to unload a document, it must run the following steps.

1. Increase the event loop's termination nesting level by one.

2. Increase the `Document`'s ignore-opens-during-unload counter by one.

3. Let event be a new trusted `BeforeUnloadEvent` event object with the name `beforeunload`, which does not bubble but is cancelable.

4. Dispatch: Dispatch event at the `Document`'s `Window` object.

5. Decrease the event loop's termination nesting level by one.

6. Release the storage mutex.

7. If any event listeners were triggered by the earlier dispatch step, then set the `Document`'s salvageable state to false.

8. If the `returnValue` attribute of the event object is not the empty string, or if the event was canceled, then the user agent should ask the user to confirm that they wish to unload the document.

   The prompt shown by the user agent may include the string of the `returnValue` attribute, or some leading subset thereof. (A user agent may want to truncate the string to 1024 characters for display, for instance.)

   The user agent must pause while waiting for the user's response.

   If the user did not confirm the page navigation, then the user agent refused to allow the document to be unloaded.

9. If this algorithm was invoked by another instance of the "prompt to unload a document" algorithm (i.e. through the steps below that invoke this algorithm for all descendant browsing contexts), then jump to the step labeled end.

10. Let descendants be the list of the descendant browsing contexts of the `Document`.

11. If descendants is not an empty list, then for each browsing context b in descendants run the following substeps:

    1. Prompt to unload the active document of the browsing context b. If the user refused to allow the document to be unloaded, then the user implicitly also refused to allow this document to be unloaded; jump to the step labeled end.

    2. If the salvageable state of the active document of the browsing context b is false, then set the salvageable state of this document to false also.

12. End: Decrease the `Document`'s ignore-opens-during-unload counter by one.

When a user agent is to unload a document, it must run the following steps. These steps are passed an argument, recycle, which is either true or false, indicating whether the `Document` object is going to be re-used. (This is set by the `document.open()` method.)

1. Increase the event loop's termination nesting level by one.

2. Increase the `Document`'s ignore-opens-during-unload counter by one.

3. If the `Document`'s page showing flag is false, then jump to the step labeled unload event below (i.e. skip firing the `pagehide` event and don't rerun the unloading document visibility change steps).

4. Set the `Document`'s page showing flag to false.

5. Fire a trusted event with the name `pagehide` at the `Window` object of the `Document`, with target override set to the `Document` object, using the `PageTransitionEvent` interface, with the `persisted` attribute initialized to true if the `Document` object's salvageable state is true, and false otherwise. This event must not bubble, must not be cancelable, and has no default action.

6. Run any unloading document visibility change steps for `Document` that are defined by other applicable specifications.

   This is specifically intended for use by the Page Visibility specification. [PAGEVIS]

7. Unload event: If the `Document`'s fired unload flag is false, fire a simple event named `unload` at the `Document`'s `Window` object, with target override set to the `Document` object.

8. Decrease the event loop's termination nesting level by one.

9. Release the storage mutex.

10. If any event listeners were triggered by the earlier unload event step, then set the `Document` object's salvageable state to false and set the `Document`'s fired unload flag to true.

11. Run any unloading document cleanup steps for `Document` that are defined by this specification and other applicable specifications.

12. If this algorithm was invoked by another instance of the "unload a document" algorithm (i.e. by the steps below that invoke this algorithm for all descendant browsing contexts), then jump to the step labeled end.

13. Let descendants be the list of the descendant browsing contexts of the `Document`.

14. If descendants is not an empty list, then for each browsing context b in descendants run the following substeps:

    1. Unload the active document of the browsing context b with the recycle parameter set to false.

    2. If the salvageable state of the active document of the browsing context b is false, then set the salvageable state of this document to false also.

15. If both the `Document`'s salvageable state and recycle are false, then the `Document`'s browsing context must discard the `Document`.

16. End: Decrease the `Document`'s ignore-opens-during-unload counter by one.

This specification defines the following unloading document cleanup steps. Other specifications can define more.

1. Make disappear any `WebSocket` objects that were created by the `WebSocket()` constructor from the `Document`'s `Window` object.

   If this affected any `WebSocket` objects, then set `Document`'s salvageable state to false.

2. If the `Document`'s salvageable state is false, forcibly close any `EventSource` objects that whose constructor was invoked from the `Document`'s `Window` object.

3. If the `Document`'s salvageable state is false, empty the `Document`'s `Window`'s list of active timers.

##### 7.6.11.1 The `BeforeUnloadEvent` interface

    interface BeforeUnloadEvent : Event {
               attribute DOMString returnValue;
    };

event . `returnValue` [ = value ]

  Returns the current return value of the event (the message to show the user).

  Can be set, to update the message.

There are no `BeforeUnloadEvent`-specific initialization methods.

The `returnValue` attribute represents the message to show the user. When the event is created, the attribute must be set to the empty string. On getting, it must return the last value it was set to. On setting, the attribute must be set to the new value.

#### 7.6.12 Aborting a document load

If a `Document` is aborted, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Abort the active documents of every child browsing context. If this results in any of those `Document` objects having their salvageable state set to false, then set this `Document`'s salvageable state to false also.

2. Cancel any instances of the fetch algorithm in the context of this `Document`, discarding any tasks queued for them, and discarding any further data received from the network for them. If this resulted in any instances of the fetch algorithm being canceled or any queued tasks or any network data getting discarded, then set the `Document`'s salvageable state to false.

3. If the `Document` has an active parser, then abort that parser and set the `Document`'s salvageable state to false.

User agents may allow users to explicitly invoke the abort a document algorithm for a `Document`. If the user does so, then, if that `Document` is an active document, the user agent should queue a task to fire a simple event named `abort` at that `Document`'s `Window` object before invoking the abort algorithm.

### 7.7 Offline Web applications

#### 7.7.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

In order to enable users to continue interacting with Web applications and documents even when their network connection is unavailable — for instance, because they are traveling outside of their ISP's coverage area — authors can provide a manifest which lists the files that are needed for the Web application to work offline and which causes the user's browser to keep a copy of the files for use offline.

To illustrate this, consider a simple clock applet consisting of an HTML page "`clock.html`", a CSS style sheet "`clock.css`", and a JavaScript script "`clock.js`".

Before adding the manifest, these three files might look like this:

    <!-- clock.html -->
    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Clock</title>
      <script src="clock.js"></script>
      <link rel="stylesheet" href="clock.css">
     </head>
     <body>
      <p>The time is: <output id="clock"></output></p>
     </body>
    </html>

    /* clock.css */
    output { font: 2em sans-serif; }

    /* clock.js */
    setInterval(function () {
        document.getElementById('clock').value = new Date();
    }, 1000);

If the user tries to open the "`clock.html`" page while offline, though, the user agent (unless it happens to have it still in the local cache) will fail with an error.

The author can instead provide a manifest of the three files, say "`clock.appcache`":

    CACHE MANIFEST
    clock.html
    clock.css
    clock.js

With a small change to the HTML file, the manifest (served as `text/cache-manifest`) is linked to the application:

    <!-- clock.html -->
    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html manifest="clock.appcache">
     <head>
      <title>Clock</title>
      <script src="clock.js"></script>
      <link rel="stylesheet" href="clock.css">
     </head>
     <body>
      <p>The time is: <output id="clock"></output></p>
     </body>
    </html>

Now, if the user goes to the page, the browser will cache the files and make them available even when the user is offline.

Authors are encouraged to include the main page in the manifest also, but in practice the page that referenced the manifest is automatically cached even if it isn't explicitly mentioned.

With the exception of "no-store" directive, HTTP cache headers and restrictions on caching pages served over TLS (encrypted, using `https:`) are overridden by manifests. Thus, pages will not expire from an application cache before the user agent has updated it, and even applications served over TLS can be made to work offline.

View this example online.

##### 7.7.1.1 Supporting offline caching for legacy applications

This section is non-normative.

The application cache feature works best if the application logic is separate from the application and user data, with the logic (markup, scripts, style sheets, images, etc) listed in the manifest and stored in the application cache, with a finite number of static HTML pages for the application, and with the application and user data stored in Web Storage or a client-side Indexed Database, updated dynamically using Web Sockets, `XMLHttpRequest`, server-sent events, or some other similar mechanism.

This model results in a fast experience for the user: the application immediately loads, and fresh data is obtained as fast as the network will allow it (possibly while stale data shows).

Legacy applications, however, tend to be designed so that the user data and the logic are mixed together in the HTML, with each operation resulting in a new HTML page from the server.

For example, consider a news application. The typical architecture of such an application, when not using the application cache feature, is that the user fetches the main page, and the server returns a dynamically-generated page with the current headlines and the user interface logic mixed together.

A news application designed for the application cache feature, however, would instead have the main page just consist of the logic, and would then have the main page fetch the data separately from the server, e.g. using `XMLHttpRequest`.

The mixed-content model does not work well with the application cache feature: since the content is cached, it would result in the user always seeing the stale data from the previous time the cache was updated.

While there is no way to make the legacy model work as fast as the separated model, it can at least be retrofitted for offline use using the prefer-online application cache mode. To do so, list all the static resources used by the HTML page you want to have work offline in an application cache manifest, use the `manifest` attribute to select that manifest from the HTML file, and then add the following line at the bottom of the manifest:

    SETTINGS:
    prefer-online
    NETWORK:
    *

This causes the application cache to only be used for master entries when the user is offline, and causes the application cache to be used as an atomic HTTP cache (essentially pinning resources listed in the manifest), while allowing all resources not listed in the manifest to be accessed normally when the user is online.

##### 7.7.1.2 Event summary

This section is non-normative.

When the user visits a page that declares a manifest, the browser will try to update the cache. It does this by fetching a copy of the manifest and, if the manifest has changed since the user agent last saw it, redownloading all the resources it mentions and caching them anew.

As this is going on, a number of events get fired on the `ApplicationCache` object to keep the script updated as to the state of the cache update, so that the user can be notified appropriately. The events are as follows:

Event name | Interface | Fired when... | Next events
--- | --- | --- | ---
`checking` | `Event` | The user agent is checking for an update, or attempting to download the manifest for the first time. This is always the first event in the sequence. | `noupdate`, `downloading`, `obsolete`, `error`
`noupdate` | `Event` | The manifest hadn't changed. | Last event in sequence.
`downloading` | `Event` | The user agent has found an update and is fetching it, or is downloading the resources listed by the manifest for the first time. | `progress`, `error`, `cached`, `updateready`
`progress` | `ProgressEvent` | The user agent is downloading resources listed by the manifest. The event object's `total` attribute returns the total number of files to be downloaded. The event object's `loaded` attribute returns the number of files processed so far. | `progress`, `error`, `cached`, `updateready`
`cached` | `Event` | The resources listed in the manifest have been downloaded, and the application is now cached. | Last event in sequence.
`updateready` | `Event` | The resources listed in the manifest have been newly redownloaded, and the script can use `swapCache()` to switch to the new cache. | Last event in sequence.
`obsolete` | `Event` | The manifest was found to have become a 404 or 410 page, so the application cache is being deleted. | Last event in sequence.
`error` | `Event` | The manifest was a 404 or 410 page, so the attempt to cache the application has been aborted. | Last event in sequence.
The manifest hadn't changed, but the page referencing the manifest failed to download properly.
A fatal error occurred while fetching the resources listed in the manifest.
The manifest changed while the update was being run. | The user agent will try fetching the files again momentarily.

These events are cancelable; their default action is for the user agent to show download progress information. If the page shows its own update UI, canceling the events will prevent the user agent from showing redundant progress information.

#### 7.7.2 Application caches

An application cache is a set of cached resources consisting of:

- One or more resources (including their out-of-band metadata, such as HTTP headers, if any), identified by URLs, each falling into one (or more) of the following categories:

  Master entries

    These are documents that were added to the cache because a browsing context was navigated to that document and the document indicated that this was its cache, using the `manifest` attribute.

  The manifest

    This is the resource corresponding to the URL that was given in a master entry's `html` element's `manifest` attribute. The manifest is fetched and processed during the application cache download process. All the master entries have the same origin as the manifest.

  Explicit entries

    These are the resources that were listed in the cache's manifest in an explicit section.

  Fallback entries

    These are the resources that were listed in the cache's manifest in a fallback section.

  Explicit entries and Fallback entries can be marked as foreign, which means that they have a `manifest` attribute but that it doesn't point at this cache's manifest.

  A URL in the list can be flagged with multiple different types, and thus an entry can end up being categorised as multiple entries. For example, an entry can be a manifest entry and an explicit entry at the same time, if the manifest is listed within the manifest.

- Zero or more fallback namespaces, each of which is mapped to a fallback entry.

  These are URLs used as prefix match patterns for resources that are to be fetched from the network if possible, or to be replaced by the corresponding fallback entry if not. Each namespace URL has the same origin as the manifest.

- Zero or more URLs that form the online whitelist namespaces.

  These are used as prefix match patterns, and declare URLs for which the user agent will ignore the application cache, instead fetching them normally (i.e. from the network or local HTTP cache as appropriate).

- An online whitelist wildcard flag, which is either open or blocking.

  The open state indicates that any URL not listed as cached is to be implicitly treated as being in the online whitelist namespaces; the blocking state indicates that URLs not listed explicitly in the manifest are to be treated as unavailable.

- A cache mode flag, which is either in the fast state or the prefer-online state.

Each application cache has a completeness flag, which is either complete or incomplete.

An application cache group is a group of application caches, identified by the absolute URL of a resource manifest which is used to populate the caches in the group.

An application cache is newer than another if it was created after the other (in other words, application caches in an application cache group have a chronological order).

Only the newest application cache in an application cache group can have its completeness flag set to incomplete; the others are always all complete.

Each application cache group has an update status, which is one of the following: idle, checking, downloading.

A relevant application cache is an application cache that is the newest in its group to be complete.

Each application cache group has a list of pending master entries. Each entry in this list consists of a resource and a corresponding `Document` object. It is used during the application cache download process to ensure that new master entries are cached even if the application cache download process was already running for their application cache group when they were loaded.

An application cache group can be marked as obsolete, meaning that it must be ignored when looking at what application cache groups exist.

A cache host is a `Document` or a `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object. A cache host can be associated with an application cache.

A `Document` initially is not associated with an application cache, but can become associated with one early during the page load process, when steps in the parser and in the navigation sections cause cache selection to occur.

A `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` can be associated with an application cache when it is created.

Each cache host has an associated `ApplicationCache` object.

Multiple application caches in different application cache groups can contain the same resource, e.g. if the manifests all reference that resource. If the user agent is to select an application cache from a list of relevant application caches that contain a resource, the user agent must use the application cache that the user most likely wants to see the resource from, taking into account the following:

- which application cache was most recently updated,
- which application cache was being used to display the resource from which the user decided to look at the new resource, and
- which application cache the user prefers.

A URL matches a fallback namespace if there exists a relevant application cache whose manifest's URL has the same origin as the URL in question, and that has a fallback namespace that is a prefix match for the URL being examined. If multiple fallback namespaces match the same URL, the longest one is the one that matches. A URL looking for a fallback namespace can match more than one application cache at a time, but only matches one namespace in each cache.

If a manifest `http://example.com/app1/manifest` declares that `http://example.com/resources/images` is a fallback namespace, and the user navigates to `HTTP://EXAMPLE.COM:80/resources/images/cat.png`, then the user agent will decide that the application cache identified by `http://example.com/app1/manifest` contains a namespace with a match for that URL.

#### 7.7.3 The cache manifest syntax

##### 7.7.3.1 Some sample manifests

This section is non-normative.

This example manifest requires two images and a style sheet to be cached and whitelists a CGI script.

    CACHE MANIFEST
    # the above line is required

    # this is a comment
    # there can be as many of these anywhere in the file
    # they are all ignored
      # comments can have spaces before them
      # but must be alone on the line

    # blank lines are ignored too

    # these are files that need to be cached they can either be listed
    # first, or a "CACHE:" header could be put before them, as is done
    # lower down.
    images/sound-icon.png
    images/background.png
    # note that each file has to be put on its own line

    # here is a file for the online whitelist -- it isn't cached, and
    # references to this file will bypass the cache, always hitting the
    # network (or trying to, if the user is offline).
    NETWORK:
    comm.cgi

    # here is another set of files to cache, this time just the CSS file.
    CACHE:
    style/default.css

It could equally well be written as follows:

    CACHE MANIFEST
    NETWORK:
    comm.cgi
    CACHE:
    style/default.css
    images/sound-icon.png
    images/background.png

Offline application cache manifests can use absolute paths or even absolute URLs:

    CACHE MANIFEST

    /main/home
    /main/app.js
    /settings/home
    /settings/app.js
    http://img.example.com/logo.png
    http://img.example.com/check.png
    http://img.example.com/cross.png

The following manifest defines a catch-all error page that is displayed for any page on the site while the user is offline. It also specifies that the online whitelist wildcard flag is open, meaning that accesses to resources on other sites will not be blocked. (Resources on the same site are already not blocked because of the catch-all fallback namespace.)

So long as all pages on the site reference this manifest, they will get cached locally as they are fetched, so that subsequent hits to the same page will load the page immediately from the cache. Until the manifest is changed, those pages will not be fetched from the server again. When the manifest changes, then all the files will be redownloaded.

Subresources, such as style sheets, images, etc, would only be cached using the regular HTTP caching semantics, however.

    CACHE MANIFEST
    FALLBACK:
    / /offline.html
    NETWORK:
    *

##### 7.7.3.2 Writing cache manifests

Manifests must be served using the `text/cache-manifest` MIME type. All resources served using the `text/cache-manifest` MIME type must follow the syntax of application cache manifests, as described in this section.

An application cache manifest is a text file, whose text is encoded using UTF-8. Data in application cache manifests is line-based. Newlines must be represented by U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters, U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters, or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) U+000A LINE FEED (LF) pairs. [ENCODING]

This is a willful violation of RFC 2046, which requires all `text/*` types to only allow CRLF line breaks. This requirement, however, is outdated; the use of CR, LF, and CRLF line breaks is commonly supported and indeed sometimes CRLF is not supported by text editors. [RFC2046]

The first line of an application cache manifest must consist of the string "CACHE", a single U+0020 SPACE character, the string "MANIFEST", and either a U+0020 SPACE character, a U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) character, a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, or a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character. The first line may optionally be preceded by a U+FEFF BYTE ORDER MARK (BOM) character. If any other text is found on the first line, it is ignored.

Subsequent lines, if any, must all be one of the following:

A blank line

  Blank lines must consist of zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters only.

A comment

  Comment lines must consist of zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters, followed by a single U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), followed by zero or more characters other than U+000A LINE FEED (LF) and U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters.

  Comments must be on a line on their own. If they were to be included on a line with a URL, the "#" would be mistaken for part of a fragment identifier.

A section header

  Section headers change the current section. There are four possible section headers:

  `CACHE:`
    Switches to the explicit section.
  `FALLBACK:`
    Switches to the fallback section.
  `NETWORK:`
    Switches to the online whitelist section.
  `SETTINGS:`
    Switches to the settings section.

  Section header lines must consist of zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters, followed by one of the names above (including the U+003A COLON character (:)) followed by zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters.

  Ironically, by default, the current section is the explicit section.

Data for the current section

  The format that data lines must take depends on the current section.

  When the current section is the explicit section, data lines must consist of zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters, a valid URL identifying a resource other than the manifest itself, and then zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters.

  When the current section is the fallback section, data lines must consist of zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters, a valid URL identifying a resource other than the manifest itself, one or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters, another valid URL identifying a resource other than the manifest itself, and then zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters.

  When the current section is the online whitelist section, data lines must consist of zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters, either a single U+002A ASTERISK character (*) or a valid URL identifying a resource other than the manifest itself, and then zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters.

  When the current section is the settings section, data lines must consist of zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters, a setting, and then zero or more U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters.

  Currently only one setting is defined:

  The cache mode setting
    This consists of the string "`prefer-online`". It sets the cache mode to prefer-online. (The cache mode defaults to fast.)

  Within a settings section, each setting must occur no more than once.

Manifests may contain sections more than once. Sections may be empty.

URLs that are to be fallback pages associated with fallback namespaces, and those namespaces themselves, must be given in fallback sections, with the namespace being the first URL of the data line, and the corresponding fallback page being the second URL. All the other pages to be cached must be listed in explicit sections.

Fallback namespaces and fallback entries must have the same origin as the manifest itself. Fallback namespaces must also be in the same path as the manifest's URL.

A fallback namespace must not be listed more than once.

Namespaces that the user agent is to put into the online whitelist must all be specified in online whitelist sections. (This is needed for any URL that the page is intending to use to communicate back to the server.) To specify that all URLs are automatically whitelisted in this way, a U+002A ASTERISK character (*) may be specified as one of the URLs.

Authors should not include namespaces in the online whitelist for which another namespace in the online whitelist is a prefix match.

Relative URLs must be given relative to the manifest's own URL. All URLs in the manifest must have the same scheme as the manifest itself (either explicitly or implicitly, through the use of relative URLs). [URL]

URLs in manifests must not have fragment identifiers (i.e. the U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character isn't allowed in URLs in manifests).

Fallback namespaces and namespaces in the online whitelist are matched by prefix match.

##### 7.7.3.3 Parsing cache manifests

When a user agent is to parse a manifest, it means that the user agent must run the following steps:

1. UTF-8 decode the byte stream corresponding with the manifest to be parsed.

   The UTF-8 decode algorithm strips a leading BOM, if any.

2. Let base URL be the absolute URL representing the manifest.

3. Apply the URL parser to base URL, and let manifest path be the path component thus obtained.

4. Remove all the characters in manifest path after the last U+002F SOLIDUS character (/), if any. (The first character and the last character in manifest path after this step will both be slashes, the URL path separator character.)

5. Apply the URL parser steps to the base URL, so that the components from its parsed URL can be used by the subseqent steps of this algorithm.

6. Let explicit URLs be an initially empty list of absolute URLs for explicit entries.

7. Let fallback URLs be an initially empty mapping of fallback namespaces to absolute URLs for fallback entries.

8. Let online whitelist namespaces be an initially empty list of absolute URLs for an online whitelist.

9. Let online whitelist wildcard flag be blocking.

10. Let cache mode flag be fast.

11. Let input be the decoded text of the manifest's byte stream.

12. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the first character.

13. If the characters starting from position are "CACHE", followed by a U+0020 SPACE character, followed by "MANIFEST", then advance position to the next character after those. Otherwise, this isn't a cache manifest; abort this algorithm with a failure while checking for the magic signature.

14. If the character at position is neither a U+0020 SPACE character, a U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) character, U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, nor a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character, then this isn't a cache manifest; abort this algorithm with a failure while checking for the magic signature.

15. This is a cache manifest. The algorithm cannot fail beyond this point (though bogus lines can get ignored).

16. Collect a sequence of characters that are not U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters, and ignore those characters. (Extra text on the first line, after the signature, is ignored.)

17. Let mode be "explicit".

18. Start of line: If position is past the end of input, then jump to the last step. Otherwise, collect a sequence of characters that are U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), U+0020 SPACE, or U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters.

19. Now, collect a sequence of characters that are not U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters, and let the result be line.

20. Drop any trailing U+0020 SPACE and U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters at the end of line.

21. If line is the empty string, then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

22. If the first character in line is a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

23. If line equals "CACHE:" (the word "CACHE" followed by a U+003A COLON character (:)), then set mode to "explicit" and jump back to the step labeled start of line.

24. If line equals "FALLBACK:" (the word "FALLBACK" followed by a U+003A COLON character (:)), then set mode to "fallback" and jump back to the step labeled start of line.

25. If line equals "NETWORK:" (the word "NETWORK" followed by a U+003A COLON character (:)), then set mode to "online whitelist" and jump back to the step labeled start of line.

26. If line equals "SETTINGS:" (the word "SETTINGS" followed by a U+003A COLON character (:)), then set mode to "settings" and jump back to the step labeled start of line.

27. If line ends with a U+003A COLON character (:), then set mode to "unknown" and jump back to the step labeled start of line.

28. This is either a data line or it is syntactically incorrect.

29. Let position be a pointer into line, initially pointing at the start of the string.

30. Let tokens be a list of strings, initially empty.

31. While position doesn't point past the end of line:

    1. Let current token be an empty string.

    2. While position doesn't point past the end of line and the character at position is neither a U+0020 SPACE nor a U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) character, add the character at position to current token and advance position to the next character in input.

    3. Add current token to the tokens list.

    4. While position doesn't point past the end of line and the character at position is either a U+0020 SPACE or a U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) character, advance position to the next character in input.

32. Process tokens as follows:

    If mode is "explicit"

      Resolve the first item in tokens, relative to base URL, with the URL character encoding set to UTF-8; ignore the rest.

      If this fails, then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      If the resulting parsed URL has a different scheme component than base URL (the manifest's URL), then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      Let new URL be the result of applying the URL serialiser algorithm to the resulting parsed URL, with the exclude fragment flag set.

      Add new URL to the explicit URLs.

    If mode is "fallback"

      Let part one be the first token in tokens, and let part two be the second token in tokens.

      Resolve part one and part two, relative to base URL, with the URL character encoding set to UTF-8.

      If either fails, then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      If the absolute URL corresponding to either part one or part two does not have the same origin as the manifest's URL, then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      Let part one path be the path component of the resulting parsed URL for part one.

      If manifest path is not a prefix match for part one path, then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      Let part one be the result of applying the URL serialiser algorithm to the first resulting parsed URL, with the exclude fragment flag set.

      Let part two be the result of applying the URL serialiser algorithm to the second resulting parsed URL, with the exclude fragment flag set.

      If part one is already in the fallback URLs mapping as a fallback namespace, then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      Otherwise, add part one to the fallback URLs mapping as a fallback namespace, mapped to part two as the fallback entry.

    If mode is "online whitelist"

      If the first item in tokens is a U+002A ASTERISK character (*), then set online whitelist wildcard flag to open and jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      Otherwise, resolve the first item in tokens, relative to base URL, with the URL character encoding set to UTF-8; ignore the rest.

      If this fails, then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      If the resulting parsed URL has a different scheme component than base URL (the manifest's URL), then jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      Let new URL be the result of applying the URL serialiser algorithm to the resulting parsed URL, with the exclude fragment flag set.

      Add new URL to the online whitelist namespaces.

    If mode is "settings"

      If tokens contains a single token, and that token is a case-sensitive match for the string "`prefer-online`", then set cache mode flag to prefer-online and jump back to the step labeled start of line.

      Otherwise, the line is an unsupported setting: do nothing; the line is ignored.

    If mode is "unknown"

      Do nothing. The line is ignored.

33. Jump back to the step labeled start of line. (That step jumps to the next, and last, step when the end of the file is reached.)

34. Return the explicit URLs list, the fallback URLs mapping, the online whitelist namespaces, the online whitelist wildcard flag, and the cache mode flag.

The resource that declares the manifest (with the `manifest` attribute) will always get taken from the cache, whether it is listed in the cache or not, even if it is listed in an online whitelist namespace.

If a resource is listed in the explicit section or as a fallback entry in the fallback section, the resource will always be taken from the cache, regardless of any other matching entries in the fallback namespaces or online whitelist namespaces.

When a fallback namespace and an online whitelist namespace overlap, the online whitelist namespace has priority.

The online whitelist wildcard flag is applied last, only for URLs that match neither the online whitelist namespace nor the fallback namespace and that are not listed in the explicit section.

#### 7.7.4 Downloading or updating an application cache

When the user agent is required (by other parts of this specification) to start the application cache download process for an absolute URL purported to identify a manifest, or for an application cache group, potentially given a particular cache host, and potentially given a master resource, the user agent must run the steps below. These steps are always run asynchronously, in parallel with the event loop tasks.

Some of these steps have requirements that only apply if the user agent shows caching progress. Support for this is optional. Caching progress UI could consist of a progress bar or message panel in the user agent's interface, or an overlay, or something else. Certain events fired during the application cache download process allow the script to override the display of such an interface. (Such events are delayed until after the `load` event has fired.) The goal of this is to allow Web applications to provide more seamless update mechanisms, hiding from the user the mechanics of the application cache mechanism. User agents may display user interfaces independent of this, but are encouraged to not show prominent update progress notifications for applications that cancel the relevant events.

The application cache download process steps are as follows:

1. Optionally, wait until the permission to start the application cache download process has been obtained from the user and until the user agent is confident that the network is available. This could include doing nothing until the user explicitly opts-in to caching the site, or could involve prompting the user for permission. The algorithm might never get past this point. (This step is particularly intended to be used by user agents running on severely space-constrained devices or in highly privacy-sensitive environments).

2. Atomically, so as to avoid race conditions, perform the following substeps:

   1. Pick the appropriate substeps:

      If these steps were invoked with an absolute URL purported to identify a manifest

        Let manifest URL be that absolute URL.

        If there is no application cache group identified by manifest URL, then create a new application cache group identified by manifest URL. Initially, it has no application caches. One will be created later in this algorithm.

      If these steps were invoked with an application cache group

        Let manifest URL be the absolute URL of the manifest used to identify the application cache group to be updated.

        If that application cache group is obsolete, then abort this instance of the application cache download process. This can happen if another instance of this algorithm found the manifest to be 404 or 410 while this algorithm was waiting in the first step above.

   2. Let cache group be the application cache group identified by manifest URL.

   3. If these steps were invoked with a master resource, then add the resource, along with the resource's `Document`, to cache group's list of pending master entries.

   4. If these steps were invoked with a cache host, and the status of cache group is checking or downloading, then queue a post-load task to fire a simple event named `checking` that is cancelable at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of that cache host. The default action of this event must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the user agent is checking to see if it can download the application.

   5. If these steps were invoked with a cache host, and the status of cache group is downloading, then also queue a post-load task to fire a simple event named `downloading` that is cancelable at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of that cache host. The default action of this event must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user the application is being downloaded.

   6. If the status of the cache group is either checking or downloading, then abort this instance of the application cache download process, as an update is already in progress.

   7. Set the status of cache group to checking.

   8. For each cache host associated with an application cache in cache group, queue a post-load task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `checking` at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the cache host. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the user agent is checking for the availability of updates.

   The remainder of the steps run asynchronously.

   If cache group already has an application cache in it, then this is an upgrade attempt. Otherwise, this is a cache attempt.

3. If this is a cache attempt, then this algorithm was invoked with a cache host; queue a post-load task to fire a simple event named `checking` that is cancelable at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of that cache host. The default action of this event must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the user agent is checking for the availability of updates.

4. Fetching the manifest: Fetch the resource from manifest URL with the synchronous flag set, and let manifest be that resource. HTTP caching semantics should be honored for this request.

   Parse manifest according to the rules for parsing manifests, obtaining a list of explicit entries, fallback entries and the fallback namespaces that map to them, entries for the online whitelist, and values for the online whitelist wildcard flag and the cache mode flag.

   The MIME type of the resource is ignored — it is assumed to be `text/cache-manifest`. In the future, if new manifest formats are supported, the different types will probably be distinguished on the basis of the file signatures (for the current format, that is the "`CACHE MANIFEST`" string at the top of the file).

5. If fetching the manifest fails due to a 404 or 410 response or equivalent, then run these substeps:

   1. Mark cache group as obsolete. This cache group no longer exists for any purpose other than the processing of `Document` objects already associated with an application cache in the cache group.

   2. Let task list be an empty list of tasks.

   3. For each cache host associated with an application cache in cache group, create a task to fire a simple event named `obsolete` that is cancelable at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the cache host, and append it to task list. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the application is no longer available for offline use.

   4. For each entry in cache group's list of pending master entries, create a task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `error` (not `obsolete`!) at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the `Document` for this entry, if there still is one, and append it to task list. The default action of this event must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the user agent failed to save the application for offline use.

   5. If cache group has an application cache whose completeness flag is incomplete, then discard that application cache.

   6. If appropriate, remove any user interface indicating that an update for this cache is in progress.

   7. Let the status of cache group be idle.

   8. For each task in task list, queue that task as a post-load task.

   9. Abort the application cache download process.

6. Otherwise, if fetching the manifest fails in some other way (e.g. the server returns another 4xx or 5xx response or equivalent, or there is a DNS error, or the connection times out, or the user cancels the download, or the parser for manifests fails when checking the magic signature), or if the server returned a redirect, then run the cache failure steps. [HTTP]

7. If this is an upgrade attempt and the newly downloaded manifest is byte-for-byte identical to the manifest found in the newest application cache in cache group, or the server reported it as "304 Not Modified" or equivalent, then run these substeps:

   1. Let cache be the newest application cache in cache group.

   2. Let task list be an empty list of tasks.

   3. For each entry in cache group's list of pending master entries, wait for the resource for this entry to have either completely downloaded or failed.

      If the download failed (e.g. the server returns a 4xx or 5xx response or equivalent, or there is a DNS error, the connection times out, or the user cancels the download), or if the resource is labeled with the "no-store" cache directive, then create a task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `error` at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the `Document` for this entry, if there still is one, and append it to task list. The default action of this event must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the user agent failed to save the application for offline use.

      Otherwise, associate the `Document` for this entry with cache; store the resource for this entry in cache, if it isn't already there, and categorise its entry as a master entry. If applying the URL parser algorithm to the resource's URL results in a parsed URL that has a non-null fragment component, the URL used for the entry in cache must instead be the absolute URL obtained from applying the URL serialiser algorithm to the parsed URL with the exclude fragment flag set (application caches never include fragment identifiers).

   4. For each cache host associated with an application cache in cache group, create a task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `noupdate` at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the cache host, and append it to task list. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the application is up to date.

   5. Empty cache group's list of pending master entries.

   6. If appropriate, remove any user interface indicating that an update for this cache is in progress.

   7. Let the status of cache group be idle.

   8. For each task in task list, queue that task as a post-load task.

   9. Abort the application cache download process.

8. Let new cache be a newly created application cache in cache group. Set its completeness flag to incomplete.

9. For each entry in cache group's list of pending master entries, associate the `Document` for this entry with new cache.

10. Set the status of cache group to downloading.

11. For each cache host associated with an application cache in cache group, queue a post-load task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `downloading` at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the cache host. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that a new version is being downloaded.

12. Let file list be an empty list of URLs with flags.

13. Add all the URLs in the list of explicit entries obtained by parsing manifest to file list, each flagged with "explicit entry".

14. Add all the URLs in the list of fallback entries obtained by parsing manifest to file list, each flagged with "fallback entry".

15. If this is an upgrade attempt, then add all the URLs of master entries in the newest application cache in cache group whose completeness flag is complete to file list, each flagged with "master entry".

16. If any URL is in file list more than once, then merge the entries into one entry for that URL, that entry having all the flags that the original entries had.

17. For each URL in file list, run the following steps. These steps may be run in parallel for two or more of the URLs at a time. If, while running these steps, the `ApplicationCache` object's `abort()` method sends a signal to this instance of the application cache download process algorithm, then run the cache failure steps instead.

    1. If the resource URL being processed was flagged as neither an "explicit entry" nor or a "fallback entry", then the user agent may skip this URL.

       This is intended to allow user agents to expire resources not listed in the manifest from the cache. Generally, implementors are urged to use an approach that expires lesser-used resources first.

    2. For each cache host associated with an application cache in cache group, queue a progress post-load task to fire a trusted event with the name `progress`, which does not bubble, which is cancelable, and which uses the `ProgressEvent` interface, at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the cache host. The `lengthComputable` attribute must be set to true, the `total` attribute must be set to the number of files in file list, and the `loaded` attribute must be set to the number of files in file list that have been either downloaded or skipped so far. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that a file is being downloaded in preparation for updating the application. [XHR]

    3. Fetch the resource, from the origin of the URL manifest URL, with the synchronous flag set and the manual redirect flag set. If this is an upgrade attempt, then use the newest application cache in cache group as an HTTP cache, and honor HTTP caching semantics (such as expiration, ETags, and so forth) with respect to that cache. User agents may also have other caches in place that are also honored.

       If the resource in question is already being downloaded for other reasons then the existing download process can sometimes be used for the purposes of this step, as defined by the fetching algorithm.

       An example of a resource that might already be being downloaded is a large image on a Web page that is being seen for the first time. The image would get downloaded to satisfy the `img` element on the page, as well as being listed in the cache manifest. According to the rules for fetching that image only need be downloaded once, and it can be used both for the cache and for the rendered Web page.

    4. If the previous step fails (e.g. the server returns a 4xx or 5xx response or equivalent, or there is a DNS error, or the connection times out, or the user cancels the download), or if the server returned a redirect, or if the resource is labeled with the "no-store" cache directive, then run the first appropriate step from the following list: [HTTP]

       If the URL being processed was flagged as an "explicit entry" or a "fallback entry"

         If these steps are being run in parallel for any other URLs in file list, then abort these steps for those other URLs. Run the cache failure steps.

         Redirects are fatal because they are either indicative of a network problem (e.g. a captive portal); or would allow resources to be added to the cache under URLs that differ from any URL that the networking model will allow access to, leaving orphan entries; or would allow resources to be stored under URLs different than their true URLs. All of these situations are bad.

       If the error was a 404 or 410 HTTP response or equivalent
       If the resource was labeled with the "no-store" cache directive

         Skip this resource. It is dropped from the cache.

       Otherwise

         Copy the resource and its metadata from the newest application cache in cache group whose completeness flag is complete, and act as if that was the fetched resource, ignoring the resource obtained from the network.

       User agents may warn the user of these errors as an aid to development.

       These rules make errors for resources listed in the manifest fatal, while making it possible for other resources to be removed from caches when they are removed from the server, without errors, and making non-manifest resources survive server-side errors.

       Except for the "no-store" directive, HTTP caching rules that would cause a file to be expired or otherwise not cached are ignored for the purposes of the application cache download process.

    5. Otherwise, the fetching succeeded. Store the resource in the new cache.

       If the user agent is not able to store the resource (e.g. because of quota restrictions), the user agent may prompt the user or try to resolve the problem in some other manner (e.g. automatically pruning content in other caches). If the problem cannot be resolved, the user agent must run the cache failure steps.

    6. If the URL being processed was flagged as an "explicit entry" in file list, then categorise the entry as an explicit entry.

    7. If the URL being processed was flagged as a "fallback entry" in file list, then categorise the entry as a fallback entry.

    8. If the URL being processed was flagged as an "master entry" in file list, then categorise the entry as a master entry.

    9. As an optimization, if the resource is an HTML or XML file whose root element is an `html` element with a `manifest` attribute whose value doesn't match the manifest URL of the application cache being processed, then the user agent should mark the entry as being foreign.

18. For each cache host associated with an application cache in cache group, queue a progress post-load task to fire a trusted event with the name `progress`, which does not bubble, which is cancelable, and which uses the `ProgressEvent` interface, at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the cache host. The `lengthComputable` attribute must be set to true, the `total` and the `loaded` attributes must be set to the number of files in file list. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that all the files have been downloaded. [XHR]

19. Store the list of fallback namespaces, and the URLs of the fallback entries that they map to, in new cache.

20. Store the URLs that form the new online whitelist in new cache.

21. Store the value of the new online whitelist wildcard flag in new cache.

22. Store the value of the new cache mode flag in new cache.

23. For each entry in cache group's list of pending master entries, wait for the resource for this entry to have either completely downloaded or failed.

    If the download failed (e.g. the server returns a 4xx or 5xx response or equivalent, or there is a DNS error, the connection times out, or the user cancels the download), or if the resource is labeled with the "no-store" cache directive, then run these substeps:

    1. Unassociate the `Document` for this entry from new cache.

    2. Queue a post-load task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `error` at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the `Document` for this entry, if there still is one. The default action of this event must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the user agent failed to save the application for offline use.

    3. If this is a cache attempt and this entry is the last entry in cache group's list of pending master entries, then run these further substeps:

       1. Discard cache group and its only application cache, new cache.

       2. If appropriate, remove any user interface indicating that an update for this cache is in progress.

       3. Abort the application cache download process.

    4. Otherwise, remove this entry from cache group's list of pending master entries.

    Otherwise, store the resource for this entry in new cache, if it isn't already there, and categorise its entry as a master entry.

24. Fetch the resource from manifest URL again, with the synchronous flag set, and let second manifest be that resource. HTTP caching semantics should again be honored for this request.

    Since caching can be honored, authors are encouraged to avoid setting the cache headers on the manifest in such a way that the user agent would simply not contact the network for this second request; otherwise, the user agent would not notice if the cache had changed during the cache update process.

25. If the previous step failed for any reason, or if the fetching attempt involved a redirect, or if second manifest and manifest are not byte-for-byte identical, then schedule a rerun of the entire algorithm with the same parameters after a short delay, and run the cache failure steps.

26. Otherwise, store manifest in new cache, if it's not there already, and categorise its entry as the manifest.

27. Set the completeness flag of new cache to complete.

28. Let task list be an empty list of tasks.

29. If this is a cache attempt, then for each cache host associated with an application cache in cache group, create a task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `cached` at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the cache host, and append it to task list. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the application has been cached and that they can now use it offline.

    Otherwise, it is an upgrade attempt. For each cache host associated with an application cache in cache group, create a task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `updateready` at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the cache host, and append it to task list. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that a new version is available and that they can activate it by reloading the page.

30. If appropriate, remove any user interface indicating that an update for this cache is in progress.

31. Set the update status of cache group to idle.

32. For each task in task list, queue that task as a post-load task.

The cache failure steps are as follows:

1. Let task list be an empty list of tasks.

2. For each entry in cache group's list of pending master entries, run the following further substeps. These steps may be run in parallel for two or more entries at a time.

   1. Wait for the resource for this entry to have either completely downloaded or failed.

   2. Unassociate the `Document` for this entry from its application cache, if it has one.

   3. Create a task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `error` at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the `Document` for this entry, if there still is one, and append it to task list. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the user agent failed to save the application for offline use.

3. For each cache host still associated with an application cache in cache group, create a task to fire a simple event that is cancelable named `error` at the `ApplicationCache` singleton of the cache host, and append it to task list. The default action of these events must be, if the user agent shows caching progress, the display of some sort of user interface indicating to the user that the user agent failed to save the application for offline use.

4. Empty cache group's list of pending master entries.

5. If cache group has an application cache whose completeness flag is incomplete, then discard that application cache.

6. If appropriate, remove any user interface indicating that an update for this cache is in progress.

7. Let the status of cache group be idle.

8. If this was a cache attempt, discard cache group altogether.

9. For each task in task list, queue that task as a post-load task.

10. Abort the application cache download process.

Attempts to fetch resources as part of the application cache download process may be done with cache-defeating semantics, to avoid problems with stale or inconsistent intermediary caches.

User agents may invoke the application cache download process, in the background, for any application cache group, at any time (with no cache host). This allows user agents to keep caches primed and to update caches even before the user visits a site.

Each `Document` has a list of pending application cache download process tasks that is used to delay events fired by the algorithm above until the document's `load` event has fired. When the `Document` is created, the list must be empty.

When the steps above say to queue a post-load task task, where task is a task that dispatches an event on a target `ApplicationCache` object target, the user agent must run the appropriate steps from the following list:

If target's node document is ready for post-load tasks

  Queue the task task.

Otherwise

  Add task to target's node document's list of pending application cache download process tasks.

When the steps above say to queue a progress post-load task task, where task is a task that dispatches an event on a target `ApplicationCache` object target, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If there is a task in target's node document's list of pending application cache download process tasks that is labeled as a progress task, then remove that task from the list.

2. Label task as a progress task.

3. Queue a post-load task task.

The task source for these tasks is the networking task source.

#### 7.7.5 The application cache selection algorithm

When the application cache selection algorithm algorithm is invoked with a `Document` document and optionally a manifest URL manifest URL, the user agent must run the first applicable set of steps from the following list:

If there is a manifest URL, and document was loaded from an application cache, and the URL of the manifest of that cache's application cache group is not the same as manifest URL

  Mark the entry for the resource from which document was taken in the application cache from which it was loaded as foreign.

  Restart the current navigation from the top of the navigation algorithm, undoing any changes that were made as part of the initial load (changes can be avoided by ensuring that the step to update the session history with the new page is only ever completed after this application cache selection algorithm is run, though this is not required).

  The navigation will not result in the same resource being loaded, because "foreign" entries are never picked during navigation.

  User agents may notify the user of the inconsistency between the cache manifest and the document's own metadata, to aid in application development.

If document was loaded from an application cache, and that application cache still exists (it is not now obsolete)

  Associate document with the application cache from which it was loaded. Invoke, in the background, the application cache download process for that application cache's application cache group, with document as the cache host.

If document was loaded using HTTP GET or equivalent, and, there is a manifest URL, and manifest URL has the same origin as document

  Invoke, in the background, the application cache download process for manifest URL, with document as the cache host and with the resource from which document was parsed as the master resource.

  If there are relevant application caches that are identified by a URL with the same origin as the URL of document, and that have this URL as one of their entries, excluding entries marked as foreign, then the user agent should use the most appropriate application cache of those that match as an HTTP cache for any subresource loads. User agents may also have other caches in place that are also honored.

Otherwise

  The `Document` is not associated with any application cache.

  If there was a manifest URL, the user agent may report to the user that it was ignored, to aid in application development.

#### 7.7.6 Changes to the networking model

When a cache host is associated with an application cache whose completeness flag is complete, any and all loads for resources related to that cache host other than those for child browsing contexts must go through the following steps instead of immediately invoking the mechanisms appropriate to that resource's scheme:

1. If the resource is not to be fetched using the HTTP GET mechanism or equivalent, or if applying the URL parser algorithm to both its URL and the application cache's manifest's URL results in two parsed URLs with different scheme components, then fetch the resource normally and abort these steps.

2. If the resource's URL is a master entry, the manifest, an explicit entry, or a fallback entry in the application cache, then get the resource from the cache (instead of fetching it), and abort these steps.

3. If there is an entry in the application cache's online whitelist that has the same origin as the resource's URL and that is a prefix match for the resource's URL, then fetch the resource normally and abort these steps.

4. If the resource's URL has the same origin as the manifest's URL, and there is a fallback namespace f in the application cache that is a prefix match for the resource's URL, then:

   Fetch the resource normally. If this results in a redirect to a resource with another origin (indicative of a captive portal), or a 4xx or 5xx status code or equivalent, or if there were network errors (but not if the user canceled the download), then instead get, from the cache, the resource of the fallback entry corresponding to the fallback namespace f. Abort these steps.

5. If the application cache's online whitelist wildcard flag is open, then fetch the resource normally and abort these steps.

6. Fail the resource load as if there had been a generic network error.

The above algorithm ensures that so long as the online whitelist wildcard flag is blocking, resources that are not present in the manifest will always fail to load (at least, after the application cache has been primed the first time), making the testing of offline applications simpler.

#### 7.7.7 Expiring application caches

As a general rule, user agents should not expire application caches, except on request from the user, or after having been left unused for an extended period of time.

Application caches and cookies have similar implications with respect to privacy (e.g. if the site can identify the user when providing the cache, it can store data in the cache that can be used for cookie resurrection). Implementors are therefore encouraged to expose application caches in a manner related to HTTP cookies, allowing caches to be expunged together with cookies and other origin-specific data.

For example, a user agent could have a "delete site-specific data" feature that clears all cookies, application caches, local storage, databases, etc, from an origin all at once.

#### 7.7.8 Disk space

User agents should consider applying constraints on disk usage of application caches, and care should be taken to ensure that the restrictions cannot be easily worked around using subdomains.

User agents should allow users to see how much space each domain is using, and may offer the user the ability to delete specific application caches.

For predictability, quotas should be based on the uncompressed size of data stored.

How quotas are presented to the user is not defined by this specification. User agents are encouraged to provide features such as allowing a user to indicate that certain sites are trusted to use more than the default quota, e.g. by asynchronously presenting a user interface while a cache is being updated, or by having an explicit whitelist in the user agent's configuration interface.

#### 7.7.9 Security concerns with offline applications caches

This section is non-normative.

The main risk introduced by offline application caches is that an injection attack can be elevated into persistent site-wide page replacement. This attack involves using an injection vulnerability to upload two files to the victim site. The first file is an application cache manifest consisting of just a fallback entry pointing to the second file, which is an HTML page whose manifest is declared as that first file. Once the user has been directed to that second file, all subsequent accesses to any file covered by the given fallback namespace while either the user or the site is offline will instead show that second file. Targetted denial-of-service attacks can be used to ensure that the site appears offline.

To mitigate this, manifests can only specify fallbacks that are in the same path as the manifest itself. This means that a content injection upload vulnerability in a particular directory on a server can only be escalated to a take-over of that directory and its subdirectories. If there is no way to inject a file into the root directory, the entire site cannot be taken over.

If a site has been attacked in this way, simply removing the offending manifest will eventually clear the problem, since the next time the manifest is updated, a 404 error will be seen, and the user agent will clear the cache. "Eventually" is the key word here, however; while the attack on the user or server is ongoing, such that connections from an affected user to the affected site are blocked, the user agent will simply assume that the user is offline and will continue to use the hostile manifest.

TLS does not inherently protect a site from this attack, since the attack relies on content being served from the server itself. Not using application caches also does not prevent this attack, since the attack relies on an attacker-provided manifest.

#### 7.7.10 Application cache API

    [Exposed=(Window,SharedWorker)]
    interface ApplicationCache : EventTarget {

      // update status
      const unsigned short UNCACHED = 0;
      const unsigned short IDLE = 1;
      const unsigned short CHECKING = 2;
      const unsigned short DOWNLOADING = 3;
      const unsigned short UPDATEREADY = 4;
      const unsigned short OBSOLETE = 5;
      readonly attribute unsigned short status;

      // updates
      void update();
      void abort();
      void swapCache();

      // events
               attribute EventHandler onchecking;
               attribute EventHandler onerror;
               attribute EventHandler onnoupdate;
               attribute EventHandler ondownloading;
               attribute EventHandler onprogress;
               attribute EventHandler onupdateready;
               attribute EventHandler oncached;
               attribute EventHandler onobsolete;
    };

cache = window . `applicationCache`

  (In a window.) Returns the `ApplicationCache` object that applies to the active document of that `Window`.

cache = self . `applicationCache`

  (In a shared worker.) Returns the `ApplicationCache` object that applies to the current shared worker.

cache . `status`

  Returns the current status of the application cache, as given by the constants defined below.

cache . `update`()

  Invokes the application cache download process.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if there is no application cache to update.

  Calling this method is not usually necessary, as user agents will generally take care of updating application caches automatically.

  The method can be useful in situations such as long-lived applications. For example, a Web mail application might stay open in a browser tab for weeks at a time. Such an application could want to test for updates each day.

cache . `abort`()

  Cancels the application cache download process.

  This method is intended to be used by Web application showing their own caching progress UI, in case the user wants to stop the update (e.g. because bandwidth is limited).

cache . `swapCache`()

  Switches to the most recent application cache, if there is a newer one. If there isn't, throws an `InvalidStateError` exception.

  This does not cause previously-loaded resources to be reloaded; for example, images do not suddenly get reloaded and style sheets and scripts do not get reparsed or reevaluated. The only change is that subsequent requests for cached resources will obtain the newer copies.

  The `updateready` event will fire before this method can be called. Once it fires, the Web application can, at its leisure, call this method to switch the underlying cache to the one with the more recent updates. To make proper use of this, applications have to be able to bring the new features into play; for example, reloading scripts to enable new features.

  An easier alternative to `swapCache()` is just to reload the entire page at a time suitable for the user, using `location.reload()`.

There is a one-to-one mapping from cache hosts to `ApplicationCache` objects. The `applicationCache` attribute on `Window` objects must return the `ApplicationCache` object associated with the `Window` object's active document. The `applicationCache` attribute on `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` objects must return the `ApplicationCache` object associated with the worker.

A `Window` or `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object has an associated `ApplicationCache` object even if that cache host has no actual application cache.

The `status` attribute, on getting, must return the current state of the application cache that the `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated with, if any. This must be the appropriate value from the following list:

`UNCACHED` (numeric value 0)

  The `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is not associated with an application cache at this time.

`IDLE` (numeric value 1)

  The `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated with an application cache whose application cache group's update status is idle, and that application cache is the newest cache in its application cache group, and the application cache group is not marked as obsolete.

`CHECKING` (numeric value 2)

  The `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated with an application cache whose application cache group's update status is checking.

`DOWNLOADING` (numeric value 3)

  The `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated with an application cache whose application cache group's update status is downloading.

`UPDATEREADY` (numeric value 4)

  The `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated with an application cache whose application cache group's update status is idle, and whose application cache group is not marked as obsolete, but that application cache is not the newest cache in its group.

`OBSOLETE` (numeric value 5)

  The `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated with an application cache whose application cache group is marked as obsolete.

If the `update()` method is invoked, the user agent must invoke the application cache download process, in the background, for the application cache group of the application cache with which the `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated, but without giving that cache host to the algorithm. If there is no such application cache, or if its application cache group is marked as obsolete, then the method must throw an `InvalidStateError` exception instead.

If the `abort()` method is invoked, the user agent must send a signal to the current application cache download process for the application cache group of the application cache with which the `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated, if any. If there is no such application cache, or it does not have a current application cache download process, then do nothing.

If the `swapCache()` method is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Check that `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated with an application cache. If it is not, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. Let cache be the application cache with which the `ApplicationCache` object's cache host is associated. (By definition, this is the same as the one that was found in the previous step.)

3. If cache's application cache group is marked as obsolete, then unassociate the `ApplicationCache` object's cache host from cache and abort these steps. (Resources will now load from the network instead of the cache.)

4. Check that there is an application cache in the same application cache group as cache whose completeness flag is complete and that is newer than cache. If there is not, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

5. Let new cache be the newest application cache in the same application cache group as cache whose completeness flag is complete.

6. Unassociate the `ApplicationCache` object's cache host from cache and instead associate it with new cache.

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `ApplicationCache` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onchecking` | `checking`
`onerror` | `error`
`onnoupdate` | `noupdate`
`ondownloading` | `downloading`
`onprogress` | `progress`
`onupdateready` | `updateready`
`oncached` | `cached`
`onobsolete` | `obsolete`

#### 7.7.11 Browser state

    [NoInterfaceObject, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface NavigatorOnLine {
      readonly attribute boolean onLine;
    };

window . `navigator` . `onLine`

  Returns false if the user agent is definitely offline (disconnected from the network). Returns true if the user agent might be online.

  The events `online` and `offline` are fired when the value of this attribute changes.

The `navigator.onLine` attribute must return false if the user agent will not contact the network when the user follows links or when a script requests a remote page (or knows that such an attempt would fail), and must return true otherwise.

When the value that would be returned by the `navigator.onLine` attribute of a `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` changes from true to false, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `offline` at the `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object.

On the other hand, when the value that would be returned by the `navigator.onLine` attribute of a `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` changes from false to true, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `online` at the `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object.

The task source for these tasks is the networking task source.

This attribute is inherently unreliable. A computer can be connected to a network without having Internet access.

In this example, an indicator is updated as the browser goes online and offline.

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Online status</title>
      <script>
       function updateIndicator() {
         document.getElementById('indicator').textContent = navigator.onLine ? 'online' : 'offline';
       }
      </script>
     </head>
     <body onload="updateIndicator()" ononline="updateIndicator()" onoffline="updateIndicator()">
      <p>The network is: <span id="indicator">(state unknown)</span>
     </body>
    </html>

## 8 Web application APIs

### 8.1 Scripting

#### 8.1.1 Introduction

Various mechanisms can cause author-provided executable code to run in the context of a document. These mechanisms include, but are probably not limited to:

- Processing of `script` elements.
- Navigating to `javascript:` URLs.
- Event handlers, whether registered through the DOM using `addEventListener()`, by explicit event handler content attributes, by event handler IDL attributes, or otherwise.
- Processing of technologies like SVG that have their own scripting features.

#### 8.1.2 Enabling and disabling scripting

Scripting is enabled in a browsing context when all of the following conditions are true:

- The user agent supports scripting.
- The user has not disabled scripting for this browsing context at this time. (User agents may provide users with the option to disable scripting globally, or in a finer-grained manner, e.g. on a per-origin basis.)
- The browsing context's active document's active sandboxing flag set does not have its sandboxed scripts browsing context flag set.

Scripting is disabled in a browsing context when any of the above conditions are false (i.e. when scripting is not enabled).

Scripting is enabled for a node if the `Document` object of the node (the node itself, if it is itself a `Document` object) has an associated browsing context, and scripting is enabled in that browsing context.

Scripting is disabled for a node if there is no such browsing context, or if scripting is disabled in that browsing context.

#### 8.1.3 Processing model

##### 8.1.3.1 Definitions

This specification describes three kinds of JavaScript global environments: the document environment, the dedicated worker environment, and the shared worker environment. The dedicated worker environment and the shared worker environment are both types of worker environments.

Except where otherwise specified, a JavaScript global environment is a document environment.

A script has:

A code entry-point

  A code entry-point represents a block of executable code that the script exposes to other scripts and to the user agent. Typically, the code corresponding to the code entry-point is executed immediately after the script is parsed, but for event handlers, it is called each time the handler is invoked.

  In JavaScript `script` blocks, this corresponds to the execution context of the global code.

Optionally, a muted errors flag

  A flag which, if set, means that error information will not be provided for errors in this script (used to mute errors for cross-origin scripts, since that can leak private information).

A settings object

  A script settings object, various settings that are shared with other scripts in the same context.

A script settings object specifies algorithms for obtaining the following:

A script execution environment for each language supported by the user agent

  The characteristics of the script execution environment depend on the language, and are not defined by this specification.

  In JavaScript, the script execution environment consists of the interpreter, the stack of execution contexts, the global code and function code and the `Function` objects resulting, and so forth.

A global object

  An object that provides the APIs that can be called by the code in scripts that use this settings object.

  This is typically a `Window` object or a `WorkerGlobalScope` object. When a global object is an empty object, it can't do anything that interacts with the environment.

  If the global object is a `Window` object, then, in JavaScript, the ThisBinding of the global execution context for this script must be the `Window` object's `WindowProxy` object, rather than the global object. [ECMA262]

  This is a willful violation of the JavaScript specification current at the time of writing (ECMAScript edition 5, as defined in section 10.4.1.1 Initial Global Execution Context, step 3). The JavaScript specification requires that the `this` keyword in the global scope return the global object, but this is not compatible with the security design prevalent in implementations as specified herein. [ECMA262]

A responsible browsing context

  A browsing context that is assigned responsibility for actions taken by the scripts that use this script settings object.

  When a script creates and navigates a new top-level browsing context, the `opener` attribute of the new browsing context's `Window` object will be set to the responsible browsing context's `WindowProxy` object.

A responsible document

  A `Document` that is assigned responsibility for actions taken by the scripts that use this script settings object.

  For example, the address of the responsible document is used to set the address of the `Document` after it has been reset using `document.open()`.

A responsible event loop

  An event loop that is used when it would not be immediately clear what event loop to use.

An API referrer source

  Either a `Document` (specifically, the responsible document), or a URL, which is used by some APIs to determine what value to use for the `Referer` (sic) header in calls to the fetching algorithm.

An API URL character encoding

  A character encoding used to encode URLs by APIs called by scripts that use this script settings object.

An API base URL

  An absolute URL used by APIs called by scripts that use this script settings object to resolve relative URLs.

An origin and an effective script origin

  An instrument used in security checks.

The relevant settings object for a global object o is the script settings object whose global object is o. (There is always a 1:1 mapping of global objects to script settings objects.)

The relevant settings object for a script s is the settings object of s.

##### 8.1.3.2 Script settings for browsing contexts

Whenever a new `Window` object is created, it must also create a script settings object whose algorithms are defined as follows:

The script execution environments

  When the script settings object is created, for each language supported by the user agent, create an appropriate execution environment as defined by the relevant specification.

  When a script execution environment is needed, return the appropriate one from those created when the script settings object was created.

The global object

  Return the `Window` object itself.

The responsible browsing context

  Return the browsing context with which the `Window` object is associated.

The responsible document

  Return the `Document` with which the `Window` is currently associated.

The responsible event loop

  Return the event loop that is associated with the unit of related similar-origin browsing contexts to which the `Window` object's browsing context belongs.

The API referrer source

  Return the `Document` with which the `Window` is currently associated.

The API URL character encoding

  Return the current character encoding of the `Document` with which the `Window` is currently associated.

The API base URL

  Return the current base URL of the `Document` with which the `Window` is currently associated.

The origin

  Return the origin of the `Document` with which the `Window` is currently associated.

The effective script origin

  Return the effective script origin of the `Document` with which the `Window` is currently associated.

##### 8.1.3.3 Calling scripts

Each unit of related similar-origin browsing contexts has a stack of script settings objects, which must be initially empty. When a new script settings object is pushed onto this stack, the specified script settings object is to be added to the stack; when the script settings object on this stack that was most recently pushed onto it is to be popped from the stack, it must be removed. Entries on this stack can be labeled as candidate entry settings objects.

When a user agent is to jump to a code entry-point for a script s, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let context be the settings object of s.

2. Prepare to run a callback with context as the script settings object. If this returns "do not run" then abort these steps.

3. Make the appropriate script execution environment specified by context execute the s's code entry-point.

4. Clean up after running a callback.

The steps to prepare to run a callback with a script settings object o are as follows. They return either "run" or "do not run".

1. If the global object specified by o is a `Window` object whose `Document` object is not fully active, then return "do not run" and abort these steps.

2. If scripting is disabled for the responsible browsing context specified by o, then return "do not run" and abort these steps.

3. Push o onto the stack of script settings objects, and label it as a candidate entry settings object.

4. Return "run".

The steps to clean up after running a callback are as follows:

1. Pop the current incumbent settings object from the stack of script settings objects.

2. If the stack of script settings objects is now empty, run the global script clean-up jobs. (These cannot run scripts.)

3. If the stack of script settings objects is now empty, perform a microtask checkpoint. (If this runs scripts, these algorithms will be invoked reentrantly.)

These algorithms are not invoked by one script directly calling another, but they can be invoked reentrantly in an indirect manner, e.g. if a script dispatches an event which has event listeners registered.

When a JavaScript SourceElements production is to be evaluated, the settings object of the script corresponding to that SourceElements must be pushed onto the stack of script settings objects before the evaluation begins, and popped when the evaluation ends (regardless of whether it's an abrupt completion or not).

The entry settings object is the most-recently added script settings object in the stack of script settings objects that is labeled as a candidate entry settings object. If the stack is empty, or has no entries labeled as such, then there is no entry settings object. It is used to obtain, amongst other things, the API base URL to resolve relative URLs used in scripts running in that unit of related similar-origin browsing contexts.

The incumbent settings object is the script settings object in the stack of script settings objects that was most-recently added (i.e. the last one on the stack). If the stack is empty, then there is no incumbent settings object. It is used in some security checks.

The Web IDL specification also uses these algorithms. [WEBIDL]

Each unit of related similar-origin browsing contexts has a global script clean-up jobs list, which must initially be empty. A global script clean-up job cannot run scripts, and cannot be sensitive to the order in which other clean-up jobs are executed. The File API uses this to release `blob:` URLs. [FILEAPI]

When the user agent is to run the global script clean-up jobs, the user agent must perform each of the jobs in the global script clean-up jobs list and then empty the list.

##### 8.1.3.4 Creating scripts

When the specification says that a script is to be created, given some script source, a script source URL, its scripting language, a script settings object, and optionally a muted errors flag, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let script be a new script that this algorithm will subsequently initialize.

2. If scripting is disabled for browsing context passed to this algorithm, then abort these steps, as if the script source described a program that did nothing but return void.

3. Obtain the appropriate script execution environment for the given scripting language from the script settings object provided.

4. Parse/compile/initialise the source of the script using the script execution environment, as appropriate for the scripting language, and thus obtain script's code entry-point.

5. Let script's settings object be the script settings object provided.

6. If the muted errors flag was set, then set script's muted errors flag.

7. If all the steps above succeeded (in particular, if the script was compiled successfully), Jump to script's code entry-point.

   Otherwise, report the error for script, with the problematic position (line number and column number), using the global object specified by the script settings object as the target. If the error is still not handled after this, then the error may be reported to the user.

##### 8.1.3.5 Killing scripts

User agents may impose resource limitations on scripts, for example CPU quotas, memory limits, total execution time limits, or bandwidth limitations. When a script exceeds a limit, the user agent may either throw a `QuotaExceededError` exception, abort the script without an exception, prompt the user, or throttle script execution.

For example, the following script never terminates. A user agent could, after waiting for a few seconds, prompt the user to either terminate the script or let it continue.

    <script>
     while (true) { /* loop */ }
    </script>

User agents are encouraged to allow users to disable scripting whenever the user is prompted either by a script (e.g. using the `window.alert()` API) or because of a script's actions (e.g. because it has exceeded a time limit).

If scripting is disabled while a script is executing, the script should be terminated immediately.

User agents may allow users to specifically disable scripts just for the purposes of closing a browsing context.

For example, the prompt mentioned in the example above could also offer the user with a mechanism to just close the page entirely, without running any `unload` event handlers.

##### 8.1.3.6 Runtime script errors

When the user agent is required to report an error for a particular script script with a particular position line:col, using a particular target target, it must run these steps, after which the error is either handled or not handled:

1. If target is in error reporting mode, then abort these steps; the error is not handled.

2. Let target be in error reporting mode.

3. Let message be a user-agent-defined string describing the error in a helpful manner.

4. Let error object be the object that represents the error: in the case of an uncaught exception, that would be the object that was thrown; in the case of a JavaScript error that would be an `Error` object. If there is no corresponding object, then the null value must be used instead.

5. Let location be an absolute URL that corresponds to the resource from which script was obtained.

   The resource containing the script will typically be the file from which the `Document` was parsed, e.g. for inline `script` elements or event handler content attributes; or the JavaScript file that the script was in, for external scripts. Even for dynamically-generated scripts, user agents are strongly encouraged to attempt to keep track of the original source of a script. For example, if an external script uses the `document.write()` API to insert an inline `script` element during parsing, the URL of the resource containing the script would ideally be reported as being the external script, and the line number might ideally be reported as the line with the `document.write()` call or where the string passed to that call was first constructed. Naturally, implementing this can be somewhat non-trivial.

   User agents are similarly encouraged to keep careful track of the original line numbers, even in the face of `document.write()` calls mutating the document as it is parsed, or event handler content attributes spanning multiple lines.

6. If script has muted errors, then set message to "`Script error.`", set location to the empty string, set line and col to 0, and set error object to null.

7. Let event be a new trusted `ErrorEvent` object that does not bubble but is cancelable, and which has the event name `error`.

8. Initialise event's `message` attribute to message.

9. Initialise event's `filename` attribute to location.

10. Initialise event's `lineno` attribute to line.

11. Initialise event's `colno` attribute to col.

12. Initialise event's `error` attribute to error object.

13. Dispatch event at target.

14. Let target no longer be in error reporting mode.

15. If event was canceled, then the error is handled. Otherwise, the error is not handled.

###### 8.1.3.6.1 Runtime script errors in documents

Whenever an uncaught runtime script error occurs in one of the scripts associated with a `Document`, the user agent must report the error for the relevant script, with the problematic position (line number and column number) in the resource containing the script, using the global object specified by the script's settings object as the target. If the error is still not handled after this, then the error may be reported to the user.

###### 8.1.3.6.2 The `ErrorEvent` interface

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional ErrorEventInit eventInitDict), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface ErrorEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute DOMString message;
      readonly attribute DOMString filename;
      readonly attribute unsigned long lineno;
      readonly attribute unsigned long colno;
      readonly attribute any error;
    };

    dictionary ErrorEventInit : EventInit {
      DOMString message;
      DOMString filename;
      unsigned long lineno;
      unsigned long colno;
      any error;
    };

The `message` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to the empty string. It represents the error message.

The `filename` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to the empty string. It represents the absolute URL of the script in which the error originally occurred.

The `lineno` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to zero. It represents the line number where the error occurred in the script.

The `colno` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to zero. It represents the column number where the error occurred in the script.

The `error` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. Where appropriate, it is set to the object representing the error (e.g. the exception object in the case of an uncaught DOM exception).

#### 8.1.4 Event loops

##### 8.1.4.1 Definitions

To coordinate events, user interaction, scripts, rendering, networking, and so forth, user agents must use event loops as described in this section. There are two kinds of event loops: those for browsing contexts, and those for workers.

There must be at least one browsing context event loop per user agent, and at most one per unit of related similar-origin browsing contexts.

When there is more than one event loop for a unit of related browsing contexts, complications arise when a browsing context in that group is navigated such that it switches from one unit of related similar-origin browsing contexts to another. This specification does not currently describe how to handle these complications.

A browsing context event loop always has at least one browsing context. If such an event loop's browsing contexts all go away, then the event loop goes away as well. A browsing context always has an event loop coordinating its activities.

Worker event loops are simpler: each worker has one event loop, and the worker processing model manages the event loop's lifetime.

An event loop has one or more task queues. A task queue is an ordered list of tasks, which are algorithms that are responsible for such work as:

Events

  Asynchronously dispatching an `Event` object at a particular `EventTarget` object is often done by a dedicated task.

  Not all events are dispatched using the task queue, many are dispatched synchronously during other tasks.

Parsing

  The HTML parser tokenizing one or more bytes, and then processing any resulting tokens, is typically a task.

Callbacks

  Calling a callback asynchronously is often done by a dedicated task.

Using a resource

  When an algorithm fetches a resource, if the fetching occurs asynchronously then the processing of the resource once some or all of the resource is available is performed by a task.

Reacting to DOM manipulation

  Some elements have tasks that trigger in response to DOM manipulation, e.g. when that element is inserted into the document.

Each task in a browsing context event loop is associated with a `Document`; if the task was queued in the context of an element, then it is the element's node document; if the task was queued in the context of a browsing context, then it is the browsing context's active document at the time the task was queued; if the task was queued by or for a script then the document is the responsible document specified by the script's settings object.

A task is intended for a specific event loop: the event loop that is handling tasks for the task's associated `Document` or worker.

When a user agent is to queue a task, it must add the given task to one of the task queues of the relevant event loop.

Each task is defined as coming from a specific task source. All the tasks from one particular task source and destined to a particular event loop (e.g. the callbacks generated by timers of a `Document`, the events fired for mouse movements over that `Document`, the tasks queued for the parser of that `Document`) must always be added to the same task queue, but tasks from different task sources may be placed in different task queues.

For example, a user agent could have one task queue for mouse and key events (the user interaction task source), and another for everything else. The user agent could then give keyboard and mouse events preference over other tasks three quarters of the time, keeping the interface responsive but not starving other task queues, and never processing events from any one task source out of order.

Each event loop has a currently running task. Initially, this is null. It is used to handle reentrancy. Each event loop also has a performing a microtask checkpoint flag, which must initially be false. It is used to prevent reentrant invocation of the perform a microtask checkpoint algorithm.

A user agent may have one storage mutex. This mutex is used to control access to shared state like cookies. At any one point, the storage mutex is either free, or owned by a particular event loop or instance of the fetching algorithm.

If a user agent does not implement a storage mutex, it is exempt from implementing the requirements that require it to acquire or release it.

User agent implementors have to make a choice between two evils. On the one hand, not implementing the storage mutex means that there is a risk of data corruption: a site could, for instance, try to read a cookie, increment its value, then write it back out, using the new value of the cookie as a unique identifier for the session; if the site does this twice in two different browser windows at the same time, it might end up using the same "unique" identifier for both sessions, with potentially disastrous effects. On the other hand, implementing the storage mutex has potentially serious performance implications: whenever a site uses Web Storage or cookies, all other sites that try to use Web Storage or cookies are blocked until the first site finishes.

So far, all browsers faced with this decision have opted to not implement the storage mutex.

Whenever a script calls into a plugin, and whenever a plugin calls into a script, the user agent must release the storage mutex.

##### 8.1.4.2 Processing model

An event loop must continually run through the following steps for as long as it exists:

1. Select the oldest task on one of the event loop's task queues, if any, ignoring, in the case of a browsing context event loop, tasks whose associated `Document`s are not fully active. The user agent may pick any task queue.

2. Set the event loop's currently running task to the task selected in the previous step.

3. Run: Run the selected task.

4. Set the event loop's currently running task back to null.

5. If the storage mutex is now owned by the event loop, release it so that it is once again free.

6. If a task was run in the run step above, remove that task from its task queue.

7. Perform a microtask checkpoint.

8. Update the rendering: If this event loop is a browsing context event loop (as opposed to a worker event loop), then, if necessary, update the rendering or user interface of any `Document` or browsing context to reflect the current state.

9. If this is a worker event loop (i.e. one running for a `WorkerGlobalScope`), but there are no tasks in the event loop's task queues and the `WorkerGlobalScope` object's closing flag is true, then destroy the event loop, aborting these steps, resuming the run a worker steps described in the Web Workers section below.

10. Return to the first step of the event loop.

Each event loop has a microtask queue. A microtask is a task that is originally to be queued on the microtask queue rather than a task queue. There are two kinds of microtasks: solitary callback microtasks, and compound microtasks.

This specification only has solitary callback microtasks. Specifications that use compound microtasks have to take extra care to wrap callbacks to handle spinning the event loop.

When an algorithm requires a microtask to be queued, it must be appended to the relevant event loop's microtask queue; the task source of such a microtask is the microtask task source.

It is possible for a microtask to be moved to a regular task queue, if, during its initial execution, it spins the event loop. In that case, the microtask task source is the task source used. Normally, the task source of a microtask is irrelevant.

When a user agent is to perform a microtask checkpoint, if the performing a microtask checkpoint flag is false, then the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let the performing a microtask checkpoint flag be true.

2. Microtask queue handling: If the event loop's microtask queue is empty, jump to the done step below.

3. Select the oldest microtask on the event loop's microtask queue.

4. Set the event loop's currently running task to the task selected in the previous step.

5. Run: Run the selected task.

   This might involve invoking scripted callbacks, which eventually calls the clean up after running a callback steps, which call this perform a microtask checkpoint algorithm again, which is why we use the performing a microtask checkpoint flag to avoid reentrancy.

6. Set the event loop's currently running task back to null.

7. If the storage mutex is now owned by the event loop, release it so that it is once again free.

8. Remove the microtask run in the step above from the microtask queue, and return to the microtask queue handling step.

9. Done: Let the performing a microtask checkpoint flag be false.

If, while a compound microtask is running, the user agent is required to execute a compound microtask subtask to run a series of steps, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let parent be the event loop's currently running task (the currently running compound microtask).

2. Let subtask be a new task that consists of running the given series of steps. The task source of such a microtask is the microtask task source. This is a compound microtask subtask.

3. Set the event loop's currently running task to subtask.

4. Run subtask.

5. Set the event loop's currently running task back to parent.

When an asynchronously-running algorithm is to await a stable state, the user agent must queue a microtask that first runs the algorithm's synchronous section, and then resumes running the asynchronous algorithm (if appropriate), as described in the algorithm's steps.

Steps in synchronous sections are marked with ⌛.

When an algorithm says to spin the event loop until a condition goal is met, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let task be the event loop's currently running task.

   This might be a microtask, in which case it is a solitary callback microtask. It could also be a compound microtask subtask, or a regular task that is not a microtask. It will not be a compound microtask.

2. Let task source be task's task source.

3. Let old stack of script settings objects be a copy of the stack of script settings objects.

4. Empty the stack of script settings objects.

5. Run the global script clean-up jobs.

6. Perform a microtask checkpoint.

7. Stop task, allowing whatever algorithm that invoked it to resume, but continue these steps asynchronously.

   This causes one of the following algorithms to continue: the event loop's main set of steps, the perform a microtask checkpoint algorithm, or the execute a compound microtask subtask algorithm to continue.

8. Wait until the condition goal is met.

9. Queue a task to continue running these steps, using the task source task source. Wait until this new task runs before continuing these steps.

10. Replace the stack of script settings objects with the old stack of script settings objects.

11. Return to the caller.

Some of the algorithms in this specification, for historical reasons, require the user agent to pause while running a task until a condition goal is met. This means running the following steps:

1. If necessary, update the rendering or user interface of any `Document` or browsing context to reflect the current state.

2. Wait until the condition goal is met. While a user agent has a paused task, the corresponding event loop must not run further tasks, and any script in the currently running task must block. User agents should remain responsive to user input while paused, however, albeit in a reduced capacity since the event loop will not be doing anything.

When a user agent is to obtain the storage mutex as part of running a task, it must run through the following steps:

1. If the storage mutex is already owned by this task's event loop, then abort these steps.

2. Otherwise, pause until the storage mutex can be taken by the event loop.

3. Take ownership of the storage mutex.

##### 8.1.4.3 Generic task sources

The following task sources are used by a number of mostly unrelated features in this and other specifications.

The DOM manipulation task source

  This task source is used for features that react to DOM manipulations, such as things that happen asynchronously when an element is inserted into the document.

The user interaction task source

  This task source is used for features that react to user interaction, for example keyboard or mouse input.

  Asynchronous events sent in response to user input (e.g. `click` events) must be fired using tasks queued with the user interaction task source. [DOMEVENTS]

The networking task source

  This task source is used for features that trigger in response to network activity.

The history traversal task source

  This task source is used to queue calls to `history.back()` and similar APIs.

#### 8.1.5 Events

##### 8.1.5.1 Event handlers

Many objects can have event handlers specified. These act as non-capture event listeners for the object on which they are specified. [DOM]

An event handler has a name, which always starts with "`on`" and is followed by the name of the event for which it is intended.

An event handler can either have the value null, or be set to a callback object, or be set to an internal raw uncompiled handler. The `EventHandler` callback function type describes how this is exposed to scripts. Initially, event handlers must be set to null.

Event handlers are exposed in one of two ways.

The first way, common to all event handlers, is as an event handler IDL attribute.

The second way is as an event handler content attribute. Event handlers on HTML elements and some of the event handlers on `Window` objects are exposed in this way.

An event handler IDL attribute is an IDL attribute for a specific event handler. The name of the IDL attribute is the same as the name of the event handler.

Event handler IDL attributes, on setting, must set the corresponding event handler to their new value, and on getting, must return the result of getting the current value of the event handler in question (this can throw an exception, in which case the getting propagates it to the caller, it does not catch it).

If an event handler IDL attribute exposes an event handler of an object that doesn't exist, it must always return null on getting and must do nothing on setting.

This can happen in particular for event handler IDL attribute on `body` elements that do not have corresponding `Window` objects.

Certain event handler IDL attributes have additional requirements, in particular the `onmessage` attribute of `MessagePort` objects.

An event handler content attribute is a content attribute for a specific event handler. The name of the content attribute is the same as the name of the event handler.

Event handler content attributes, when specified, must contain valid JavaScript code which, when parsed, would match the `FunctionBody` production after automatic semicolon insertion. [ECMA262]

When an event handler content attribute is set, the user agent must set the corresponding event handler to an internal raw uncompiled handler consisting of the attribute's new value and the script location where the attribute was set to this value

When an event handler content attribute is removed, the user agent must set the corresponding event handler to null.

When an event handler H of an element or object T implementing the `EventTarget` interface is first set to a non-null value, the user agent must append an event listener to the list of event listeners associated with T with type set to the event handler event type corresponding to H, capture set to false, and listener set to the event handler processing algorithm defined below. [DOM]

The listener is emphatically not the event handler itself. Every event handler ends up registering the same listener, the algorithm defined below, which takes care of invoking the right callback, and processing the callback's return value.

This only happens the first time the event handler's value is set. Since listeners are called in the order they were registered, the order of event listeners for a particular event type will always be first the event listeners registered with `addEventListener()` before the first time the event handler was set to a non-null value, then the callback to which it is currently set, if any, and finally the event listeners registered with `addEventListener()` after the first time the event handler was set to a non-null value.

This example demonstrates the order in which event listeners are invoked. If the button in this example is clicked by the user, the page will show four alerts, with the text "ONE", "TWO", "THREE", and "FOUR" respectively.

    <button id="test">Start Demo</button>
    <script>
     var button = document.getElementById('test');
     button.addEventListener('click', function () { alert('ONE') }, false);
     button.setAttribute('onclick', "alert('NOT CALLED')"); // event handler listener is registered here
     button.addEventListener('click', function () { alert('THREE') }, false);
     button.onclick = function () { alert('TWO'); };
     button.addEventListener('click', function () { alert('FOUR') }, false);
    </script>

The interfaces implemented by the event object do not influence whether an event handler is triggered or not.

The event handler processing algorithm for an event handler H and an `Event` object E is as follows:

1. Let callback be the result of getting the current value of the event handler H.

2. If callback is null, then abort these steps.

3. Process the `Event` object E as follows:

   If E is an `ErrorEvent` object and the event handler IDL attribute's type is `OnErrorEventHandler`

     Invoke callback with five arguments, the first one having the value of E's `message` attribute, the second having the value of E's `filename` attribute, the third having the value of E's `lineno` attribute, the fourth having the value of E's `colno` attribute, the fifth having the value of E's `error` attribute, and with the callback this value set to E's `currentTarget`. Let return value be the callback's return value. [WEBIDL]

   Otherwise

     Invoke callback with one argument, the value of which is the `Event` object E, with the callback this value set to E's `currentTarget`. Let return value be the callback's return value. [WEBIDL]

   In this step, invoke means to run the jump to a code entry-point algorithm.

4. Process return value as follows:

   If the event type is `mouseover`
   If the event type is `error` and E is an `ErrorEvent` object

     If return value is a Web IDL boolean true value, then cancel the event.

   If the event type is `beforeunload`

     The event handler IDL attribute's type is `OnBeforeUnloadEventHandler`, and the return value will therefore have been coerced into either the value null or a DOMString.

     If the return value is null, then cancel the event.

     Otherwise, If the `Event` object E is a `BeforeUnloadEvent` object, and the `Event` object E's `returnValue` attribute's value is the empty string, then set the `returnValue` attribute's value to return value.

   Otherwise

     If return value is a Web IDL boolean false value, then cancel the event.

The `EventHandler` callback function type represents a callback used for event handlers. It is represented in Web IDL as follows:

    [TreatNonCallableAsNull]
    callback EventHandlerNonNull = any (Event event);
    typedef EventHandlerNonNull? EventHandler;

In JavaScript, any `Function` object implements this interface.

For example, the following document fragment:

    <body onload="alert(this)" onclick="alert(this)">

...leads to an alert saying "`[object Window]`" when the document is loaded, and an alert saying "`[object HTMLBodyElement]`" whenever the user clicks something in the page.

The return value of the function affects whether the event is canceled or not: as described above, if the return value is false, the event is canceled (except for `mouseover` events, where the return value has to be true to cancel the event). With `beforeunload` events, the value is instead used to determine the message to show the user.

For historical reasons, the `onerror` handler has different arguments:

    [TreatNonCallableAsNull]
    callback OnErrorEventHandlerNonNull = any ((Event or DOMString) event, optional DOMString source, optional unsigned long lineno, optional unsigned long column, optional any error);
    typedef OnErrorEventHandlerNonNull? OnErrorEventHandler;

Similarly, the `onbeforeunload` handler has a different return value:

    [TreatNonCallableAsNull]
    callback OnBeforeUnloadEventHandlerNonNull = DOMString? (Event event);
    typedef OnBeforeUnloadEventHandlerNonNull? OnBeforeUnloadEventHandler;

An internal raw uncompiled handler is a tuple with the following information:

- An uncompiled script body
- A location where the script body originated, in case an error needs to be reported

When the user agent is to get the current value of the event handler H, it must run these steps:

1. If H's value is an internal raw uncompiled handler, run these substeps:

   1. If H is an element's event handler, then let element be the element, and document be the element's node document.

      Otherwise, H is a `Window` object's event handler: let element be null, and let document be the `Document` most recently associated with that `Window` object.

   2. If document is not in a browsing context, or if scripting is enabled for document's browsing context, then return null and abort the algorithm for getting the current value of the event handler.

   3. Let body be the uncompiled script body in the internal raw uncompiled handler.

   4. Let location be the location where the script body originated, as given by the internal raw uncompiled handler.

   5. If element is not null and element has a form owner, let form owner be that form owner. Otherwise, let form owner be null.

   6. Let script settings be the script settings object created for the `Window` object with which document is currently associated.

   7. Obtain the script execution environment for JavaScript from script settings.

   8. If body is not parsable as FunctionBody or if parsing detects an early error, then follow these substeps:

      1. Set H's value to null.

      2. Report the error for the appropriate script and with the appropriate position (line number and column number) given by location, using the global object specified by script settings as the target. If the error is still not handled after this, then the error may be reported to the user.

      3. Jump to the step labeled end below.

      FunctionBody is defined in ECMAScript edition 5 section 13 Function Definition. Early error is defined in ECMAScript edition 5 section 16 Errors. [ECMA262]

   9. If body begins with a Directive Prologue that contains a Use Strict Directive then let strict be true, otherwise let strict be false.

      The terms "Directive Prologue" and "Use Strict Directive" are defined in ECMAScript edition 5 section 14.1 Directive Prologues and the Use Strict Directive. [ECMA262]

   10. Using the script execution environment obtained above, create a function object (as defined in ECMAScript edition 5 section 13.2 Creating Function Objects), with:

       Parameter list FormalParameterList
         If H is an `onerror` event handler of a `Window` object
           Let the function have five arguments, named `event`, `source`, `lineno`, `colno`, and `error`.
         Otherwise
           Let the function have a single argument called `event`.
       Function body FunctionBody
         The result of parsing body above.
       Lexical Environment Scope

         1. If H is an element's event handler, then let Scope be the result of NewObjectEnvironment(document, the global environment).

            Otherwise, H is a `Window` object's event handler: let Scope be the global environment.

         2. If form owner is not null, let Scope be the result of NewObjectEnvironment(form owner, Scope).

         3. If element is not null, let Scope be the result of NewObjectEnvironment(element, Scope).

         NewObjectEnvironment() is defined in ECMAScript edition 5 section 10.2.2.3 NewObjectEnvironment (O, E). [ECMA262]

       Boolean flag Strict
         The value of strict.

       Let function be this new function.

   11. Let script be a new script.

   12. Let script's code entry-point be function.

   13. Let script's settings object be script settings.

   14. Set H to function.

2. End: Return H's value.

##### 8.1.5.2 Event handlers on elements, `Document` objects, and `Window` objects

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported by all HTML elements, as both event handler content attributes and event handler IDL attributes; and that must be supported by all `Document` and `Window` objects, as event handler IDL attributes:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onabort` | `abort`
`onautocomplete` | `autocomplete`
`onautocompleteerror` | `autocompleteerror`
`oncancel` | `cancel`
`oncanplay` | `canplay`
`oncanplaythrough` | `canplaythrough`
`onchange` | `change`
`onclick` | `click`
`onclose` | `close`
`oncontextmenu` | `contextmenu`
`oncuechange` | `cuechange`
`ondblclick` | `dblclick`
`ondrag` | `drag`
`ondragend` | `dragend`
`ondragenter` | `dragenter`
`ondragexit` | `dragexit`
`ondragleave` | `dragleave`
`ondragover` | `dragover`
`ondragstart` | `dragstart`
`ondrop` | `drop`
`ondurationchange` | `durationchange`
`onemptied` | `emptied`
`onended` | `ended`
`oninput` | `input`
`oninvalid` | `invalid`
`onkeydown` | `keydown`
`onkeypress` | `keypress`
`onkeyup` | `keyup`
`onloadeddata` | `loadeddata`
`onloadedmetadata` | `loadedmetadata`
`onloadstart` | `loadstart`
`onmousedown` | `mousedown`
`onmouseenter` | `mouseenter`
`onmouseleave` | `mouseleave`
`onmousemove` | `mousemove`
`onmouseout` | `mouseout`
`onmouseover` | `mouseover`
`onmouseup` | `mouseup`
`onmousewheel` | `mousewheel`
`onpause` | `pause`
`onplay` | `play`
`onplaying` | `playing`
`onprogress` | `progress`
`onratechange` | `ratechange`
`onreset` | `reset`
`onseeked` | `seeked`
`onseeking` | `seeking`
`onselect` | `select`
`onshow` | `show`
`onsort` | `sort`
`onstalled` | `stalled`
`onsubmit` | `submit`
`onsuspend` | `suspend`
`ontimeupdate` | `timeupdate`
`ontoggle` | `toggle`
`onvolumechange` | `volumechange`
`onwaiting` | `waiting`

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported by all HTML elements other than `body` and `frameset` elements, as both event handler content attributes and event handler IDL attributes; that must be supported by all `Document` objects, as event handler IDL attributes; and that must be supported by all `Window` objects, as event handler IDL attributes on the `Window` objects themselves, and with corresponding event handler content attributes and event handler IDL attributes exposed on all `body` and `frameset` elements that are owned by that `Window` object's `Document`s:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onblur` | `blur`
`onerror` | `error`
`onfocus` | `focus`
`onload` | `load`
`onresize` | `resize`
`onscroll` | `scroll`

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported by `Window` objects, as event handler IDL attributes on the `Window` objects themselves, and with corresponding event handler content attributes and event handler IDL attributes exposed on all `body` and `frameset` elements that are owned by that `Window` object's `Document`s:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onafterprint` | `afterprint`
`onbeforeprint` | `beforeprint`
`onbeforeunload` | `beforeunload`
`onhashchange` | `hashchange`
`onlanguagechange` | `languagechange`
`onmessage` | `message`
`onoffline` | `offline`
`ononline` | `online`
`onpagehide` | `pagehide`
`onpageshow` | `pageshow`
`onpopstate` | `popstate`
`onstorage` | `storage`
`onunload` | `unload`

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported on `Document` objects as event handler IDL attributes:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onreadystatechange` | `readystatechange`

###### 8.1.5.2.1 IDL definitions

    [NoInterfaceObject]
    interface GlobalEventHandlers {
               attribute EventHandler onabort;
               attribute EventHandler onautocomplete;
               attribute EventHandler onautocompleteerror;
               attribute EventHandler onblur;
               attribute EventHandler oncancel;
               attribute EventHandler oncanplay;
               attribute EventHandler oncanplaythrough;
               attribute EventHandler onchange;
               attribute EventHandler onclick;
               attribute EventHandler onclose;
               attribute EventHandler oncontextmenu;
               attribute EventHandler oncuechange;
               attribute EventHandler ondblclick;
               attribute EventHandler ondrag;
               attribute EventHandler ondragend;
               attribute EventHandler ondragenter;
               attribute EventHandler ondragexit;
               attribute EventHandler ondragleave;
               attribute EventHandler ondragover;
               attribute EventHandler ondragstart;
               attribute EventHandler ondrop;
               attribute EventHandler ondurationchange;
               attribute EventHandler onemptied;
               attribute EventHandler onended;
               attribute OnErrorEventHandler onerror;
               attribute EventHandler onfocus;
               attribute EventHandler oninput;
               attribute EventHandler oninvalid;
               attribute EventHandler onkeydown;
               attribute EventHandler onkeypress;
               attribute EventHandler onkeyup;
               attribute EventHandler onload;
               attribute EventHandler onloadeddata;
               attribute EventHandler onloadedmetadata;
               attribute EventHandler onloadstart;
               attribute EventHandler onmousedown;
      [LenientThis] attribute EventHandler onmouseenter;
      [LenientThis] attribute EventHandler onmouseleave;
               attribute EventHandler onmousemove;
               attribute EventHandler onmouseout;
               attribute EventHandler onmouseover;
               attribute EventHandler onmouseup;
               attribute EventHandler onmousewheel;
               attribute EventHandler onpause;
               attribute EventHandler onplay;
               attribute EventHandler onplaying;
               attribute EventHandler onprogress;
               attribute EventHandler onratechange;
               attribute EventHandler onreset;
               attribute EventHandler onresize;
               attribute EventHandler onscroll;
               attribute EventHandler onseeked;
               attribute EventHandler onseeking;
               attribute EventHandler onselect;
               attribute EventHandler onshow;
               attribute EventHandler onsort;
               attribute EventHandler onstalled;
               attribute EventHandler onsubmit;
               attribute EventHandler onsuspend;
               attribute EventHandler ontimeupdate;
               attribute EventHandler ontoggle;
               attribute EventHandler onvolumechange;
               attribute EventHandler onwaiting;
    };

    [NoInterfaceObject]
    interface WindowEventHandlers {
               attribute EventHandler onafterprint;
               attribute EventHandler onbeforeprint;
               attribute OnBeforeUnloadEventHandler onbeforeunload;
               attribute EventHandler onhashchange;
               attribute EventHandler onlanguagechange;
               attribute EventHandler onmessage;
               attribute EventHandler onoffline;
               attribute EventHandler ononline;
               attribute EventHandler onpagehide;
               attribute EventHandler onpageshow;
               attribute EventHandler onpopstate;
               attribute EventHandler onstorage;
               attribute EventHandler onunload;
    };

##### 8.1.5.3 Event firing

Certain operations and methods are defined as firing events on elements. For example, the `click()` method on the `HTMLElement` interface is defined as firing a `click` event on the element. [DOMEVENTS]

Firing a simple event named e means that a trusted event with the name e, which does not bubble (except where otherwise stated) and is not cancelable (except where otherwise stated), and which uses the `Event` interface, must be created and dispatched at the given target.

Firing a synthetic mouse event named e means that an event with the name e, which is trusted (except where otherwise stated), does not bubble (except where otherwise stated), is not cancelable (except where otherwise stated), and which uses the `MouseEvent` interface, must be created and dispatched at the given target. The event object must have its `screenX`, `screenY`, `clientX`, `clientY`, and `button` attributes initialised to 0, its `ctrlKey`, `shiftKey`, `altKey`, and `metaKey` attributes initialised according to the current state of the key input device, if any (false for any keys that are not available), its `detail` attribute initialised to 1, its `relatedTarget` attribute initialised to null (except where otherwise stated), and its `view` attribute initialised to the `Window` object of the `Document` object of the given target node, if any, or else null. The `getModifierState()` method on the object must return values appropriately describing the state of the key input device at the time the event is created.

Firing a `click` event means firing a synthetic mouse event named `click`, which bubbles and is cancelable.

The default action of these events is to do nothing except where otherwise stated.

##### 8.1.5.4 Events and the `Window` object

When an event is dispatched at a DOM node in a `Document` in a browsing context, if the event is not a `load` event, the user agent must act as if, for the purposes of event dispatching, the `Window` object is the parent of the `Document` object. [DOM]

### 8.2 Base64 utility methods

The `atob()` and `btoa()` methods allow authors to transform content to and from the base64 encoding.

    [NoInterfaceObject, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface WindowBase64 {
      DOMString btoa(DOMString btoa);
      DOMString atob(DOMString atob);
    };
    Window implements WindowBase64;

In these APIs, for mnemonic purposes, the "b" can be considered to stand for "binary", and the "a" for "ASCII". In practice, though, for primarily historical reasons, both the input and output of these functions are Unicode strings.

result = window . `btoa`( data )

  Takes the input data, in the form of a Unicode string containing only characters in the range U+0000 to U+00FF, each representing a binary byte with values 0x00 to 0xFF respectively, and converts it to its base64 representation, which it returns.

  Throws an `InvalidCharacterError` exception if the input string contains any out-of-range characters.

result = window . `atob`( data )

  Takes the input data, in the form of a Unicode string containing base64-encoded binary data, decodes it, and returns a string consisting of characters in the range U+0000 to U+00FF, each representing a binary byte with values 0x00 to 0xFF respectively, corresponding to that binary data.

  Throws an `InvalidCharacterError` exception if the input string is not valid base64 data.

The `WindowBase64` interface adds to the `Window` interface and the `WorkerGlobalScope` interface (part of Web workers).

The `btoa()` method must throw an `InvalidCharacterError` exception if the method's first argument contains any character whose code point is greater than U+00FF. Otherwise, the user agent must convert that argument to a sequence of octets whose nth octet is the eight-bit representation of the code point of the nth character of the argument, and then must apply the base64 algorithm to that sequence of octets, and return the result. [RFC4648]

The `atob()` method must run the following steps to parse the string passed in the method's first argument:

1. Let input be the string being parsed.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Remove all space characters from input.

4. If the length of input divides by 4 leaving no remainder, then: if input ends with one or two U+003D EQUALS SIGN (=) characters, remove them from input.

5. If the length of input divides by 4 leaving a remainder of 1, throw an `InvalidCharacterError` exception and abort these steps.

6. If input contains a character that is not in the following list of characters and character ranges, throw an `InvalidCharacterError` exception and abort these steps:

   - U+002B PLUS SIGN (+)
   - U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
   - Alphanumeric ASCII characters

7. Let output be a string, initially empty.

8. Let buffer be a buffer that can have bits appended to it, initially empty.

9. While position does not point past the end of input, run these substeps:

   1. Find the character pointed to by position in the first column of the following table. Let n be the number given in the second cell of the same row.

      Character | Number
      --- | ---
      A | 0
      B | 1
      C | 2
      D | 3
      E | 4
      F | 5
      G | 6
      H | 7
      I | 8
      J | 9
      K | 10
      L | 11
      M | 12
      N | 13
      O | 14
      P | 15
      Q | 16
      R | 17
      S | 18
      T | 19
      U | 20
      V | 21
      W | 22
      X | 23
      Y | 24
      Z | 25
      a | 26
      b | 27
      c | 28
      d | 29
      e | 30
      f | 31
      g | 32
      h | 33
      i | 34
      j | 35
      k | 36
      l | 37
      m | 38
      n | 39
      o | 40
      p | 41
      q | 42
      r | 43
      s | 44
      t | 45
      u | 46
      v | 47
      w | 48
      x | 49
      y | 50
      z | 51
      0 | 52
      1 | 53
      2 | 54
      3 | 55
      4 | 56
      5 | 57
      6 | 58
      7 | 59
      8 | 60
      9 | 61
      + | 62
      / | 63

   2. Append to buffer the six bits corresponding to number, most significant bit first.

   3. If buffer has accumulated 24 bits, interpret them as three 8-bit big-endian numbers. Append the three characters with code points equal to those numbers to output, in the same order, and then empty buffer.

   4. Advance position by one character.

10. If buffer is not empty, it contains either 12 or 18 bits. If it contains 12 bits, discard the last four and interpret the remaining eight as an 8-bit big-endian number. If it contains 18 bits, discard the last two and interpret the remaining 16 as two 8-bit big-endian numbers. Append the one or two characters with code points equal to those one or two numbers to output, in the same order.

    The discarded bits mean that, for instance, `atob("YQ")` and `atob("YR")` both return "`a`".

11. Return output.

### 8.3 Dynamic markup insertion

APIs for dynamically inserting markup into the document interact with the parser, and thus their behavior varies depending on whether they are used with HTML documents (and the HTML parser) or XHTML in XML documents (and the XML parser).

#### 8.3.1 Opening the input stream

The `open()` method comes in several variants with different numbers of arguments.

document = document . `open`( [ type [, replace ] ] )

  Causes the `Document` to be replaced in-place, as if it was a new `Document` object, but reusing the previous object, which is then returned.

  If the type argument is omitted or has the value "`text/html`", then the resulting `Document` has an HTML parser associated with it, which can be given data to parse using `document.write()`. Otherwise, all content passed to `document.write()` will be parsed as plain text.

  If the replace argument is present and has the value "`replace`", the existing entries in the session history for the `Document` object are removed.

  The method has no effect if the `Document` is still being parsed.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the `Document` is an XML document.

window = document . `open`( url, name, features [, replace ] )

  Works like the `window.open()` method.

`Document` objects have an ignore-opens-during-unload counter, which is used to prevent scripts from invoking the `document.open()` method (directly or indirectly) while the document is being unloaded. Initially, the counter must be set to zero.

When called with two arguments, the `document.open()` method must act as follows:

1. If the `Document` object is not flagged as an HTML document, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If the `Document` object is not an active document, then abort these steps.

3. Let type be the value of the first argument.

4. If the second argument is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the value "replace", then let replace be true.

   Otherwise, if the browsing context's session history contains only one `Document`, and that was the `about:blank` `Document` created when the browsing context was created, and that `Document` has never had the unload a document algorithm invoked on it (e.g. by a previous call to `document.open()`), then let replace be true.

   Otherwise, let replace be false.

5. If the `Document` has an active parser whose script nesting level is greater than zero, then the method does nothing. Abort these steps and return the `Document` object on which the method was invoked.

   This basically causes `document.open()` to be ignored when it's called in an inline script found during parsing, while still letting it have an effect when called asynchronously.

6. Similarly, if the `Document`'s ignore-opens-during-unload counter is greater than zero, then the method does nothing. Abort these steps and return the `Document` object on which the method was invoked.

   This basically causes `document.open()` to be ignored when it's called from a `beforeunload` `pagehide`, or `unload` event handler while the `Document` is being unloaded.

7. Release the storage mutex.

8. Set the `Document`'s salvageable state to false.

9. Prompt to unload the `Document` object. If the user refused to allow the document to be unloaded, then abort these steps and return the `Document` object on which the method was invoked.

10. Unload the `Document` object, with the recycle parameter set to true.

11. Abort the `Document`.

12. Unregister all event listeners registered on the `Document` node and its descendants.

13. Remove any tasks associated with the `Document` in any task source.

14. Remove all child nodes of the document, without firing any mutation events.

15. Replace the `Document`'s singleton objects with new instances of those objects. (This includes in particular the `Window`, `Location`, `History`, `ApplicationCache`, and `Navigator`, objects, the various `BarProp` objects, the two `Storage` objects, the various `HTMLCollection` objects, and objects defined by other specifications, like `Selection`. It also includes all the Web IDL prototypes in the JavaScript binding, including the `Document` object's prototype.)

    The new `Window` object has a new script settings object.

16. Change the document's character encoding to UTF-8.

17. If the `Document` is ready for post-load tasks, then set the `Document` object's reload override flag and set the `Document`'s reload override buffer to the empty string.

18. Set the `Document`'s salvageable state back to true.

19. Change the document's address to the address of the responsible document specified by the entry settings object.

20. If the `Document`'s iframe load in progress flag is set, set the `Document`'s mute iframe load flag.

21. Create a new HTML parser and associate it with the document. This is a script-created parser (meaning that it can be closed by the `document.open()` and `document.close()` methods, and that the tokenizer will wait for an explicit call to `document.close()` before emitting an end-of-file token). The encoding confidence is irrelevant.

22. Set the current document readiness of the document to "`loading`".

23. If type is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`replace`", then, for historical reasons, set it to the string "`text/html`".

    Otherwise:

    If the type string contains a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;), remove the first such character and all characters from it up to the end of the string.

    Strip leading and trailing whitespace from type.

24. If type is not now an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`text/html`", then act as if the tokenizer had emitted a start tag token with the tag name "pre" followed by a single U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, then switch the HTML parser's tokenizer to the PLAINTEXT state.

25. Remove all the entries in the browsing context's session history after the current entry. If the current entry is the last entry in the session history, then no entries are removed.

    This doesn't necessarily have to affect the user agent's user interface.

26. Remove any tasks queued by the history traversal task source that are associated with any `Document` objects in the top-level browsing context's document family.

27. Remove any earlier entries that share the same `Document`.

28. If replace is false, then add a new entry, just before the last entry, and associate with the new entry the text that was parsed by the previous parser associated with the `Document` object, as well as the state of the document at the start of these steps. This allows the user to step backwards in the session history to see the page before it was blown away by the `document.open()` call. This new entry does not have a `Document` object, so a new one will be created if the session history is traversed to that entry.

29. Finally, set the insertion point to point at just before the end of the input stream (which at this point will be empty).

30. Return the `Document` on which the method was invoked.

The `document.open()` method does not affect whether a `Document` is ready for post-load tasks or completely loaded.

When called with four arguments, the `open()` method on the `Document` object must call the `open()` method on the `Window` object of the `Document` object, with the same arguments as the original call to the `open()` method, and return whatever that method returned. If the `Document` object has no `Window` object, then the method must throw an `InvalidAccessError` exception.

#### 8.3.2 Closing the input stream

document . `close`()

  Closes the input stream that was opened by the `document.open()` method.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the `Document` is an XML document.

The `close()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the `Document` object is not flagged as an HTML document, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If there is no script-created parser associated with the document, then abort these steps.

3. Insert an explicit "EOF" character at the end of the parser's input stream.

4. If there is a pending parsing-blocking script, then abort these steps.

5. Run the tokenizer, processing resulting tokens as they are emitted, and stopping when the tokenizer reaches the explicit "EOF" character or spins the event loop.

#### 8.3.3 `document.write()`

document . `write`(text...)

  In general, adds the given string(s) to the `Document`'s input stream.

  This method has very idiosyncratic behavior. In some cases, this method can affect the state of the HTML parser while the parser is running, resulting in a DOM that does not correspond to the source of the document (e.g. if the string written is the string "`<plaintext>`" or "`<!--`"). In other cases, the call can clear the current page first, as if `document.open()` had been called. In yet more cases, the method is simply ignored, or throws an exception. To make matters worse, the exact behavior of this method can in some cases be dependent on network latency, which can lead to failures that are very hard to debug. For all these reasons, use of this method is strongly discouraged.

  This method throws an `InvalidStateError` exception when invoked on XML documents.

`Document` objects have an ignore-destructive-writes counter, which is used in conjunction with the processing of `script` elements to prevent external scripts from being able to use `document.write()` to blow away the document by implicitly calling `document.open()`. Initially, the counter must be set to zero.

The `document.write(...)` method must act as follows:

1. If the method was invoked on an XML document, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If the `Document` object is not an active document, then abort these steps.

3. If the insertion point is undefined and either the `Document`'s ignore-opens-during-unload counter is greater than zero or the `Document`'s ignore-destructive-writes counter is greater than zero, abort these steps.

4. If the insertion point is undefined, call the `open()` method on the `document` object (with no arguments). If the user refused to allow the document to be unloaded, then abort these steps. Otherwise, the insertion point will point at just before the end of the (empty) input stream.

5. Insert the string consisting of the concatenation of all the arguments to the method into the input stream just before the insertion point.

6. If the `Document` object's reload override flag is set, then append the string consisting of the concatenation of all the arguments to the method to the `Document`'s reload override buffer.

7. If there is no pending parsing-blocking script, have the HTML parser process the characters that were inserted, one at a time, processing resulting tokens as they are emitted, and stopping when the tokenizer reaches the insertion point or when the processing of the tokenizer is aborted by the tree construction stage (this can happen if a `script` end tag token is emitted by the tokenizer).

   If the `document.write()` method was called from script executing inline (i.e. executing because the parser parsed a set of `script` tags), then this is a reentrant invocation of the parser.

8. Finally, return from the method.

#### 8.3.4 `document.writeln()`

document . `writeln`(text...)

  Adds the given string(s) to the `Document`'s input stream, followed by a newline character. If necessary, calls the `open()` method implicitly first.

  This method throws an `InvalidStateError` exception when invoked on XML documents.

The `document.writeln(...)` method, when invoked, must act as if the `document.write()` method had been invoked with the same argument(s), plus an extra argument consisting of a string containing a single line feed character (U+000A).

### 8.4 Timers

The `setTimeout()` and `setInterval()` methods allow authors to schedule timer-based callbacks.

    [NoInterfaceObject, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface WindowTimers {
      long setTimeout(Function handler, optional long timeout = 0, any... arguments);
      long setTimeout(DOMString handler, optional long timeout = 0, any... arguments);
      void clearTimeout(optional long handle = 0);
      long setInterval(Function handler, optional long timeout = 0, any... arguments);
      long setInterval(DOMString handler, optional long timeout = 0, any... arguments);
      void clearInterval(optional long handle = 0);
    };
    Window implements WindowTimers;

handle = window . `setTimeout`( handler [, timeout [, arguments... ] ] )

  Schedules a timeout to run handler after timeout milliseconds. Any arguments are passed straight through to the handler.

handle = window . `setTimeout`( code [, timeout ] )

  Schedules a timeout to compile and run code after timeout milliseconds.

window . `clearTimeout`( handle )

  Cancels the timeout set with `setTimeout()` identified by handle.

handle = window . `setInterval`( handler [, timeout [, arguments... ] ] )

  Schedules a timeout to run handler every timeout milliseconds. Any arguments are passed straight through to the handler.

handle = window . `setInterval`( code [, timeout ] )

  Schedules a timeout to compile and run code every timeout milliseconds.

window . `clearInterval`( handle )

  Cancels the timeout set with `setInterval()` identified by handle.

Timers can be nested; after five such nested timers, however, the interval is forced to be at least four milliseconds.

This API does not guarantee that timers will run exactly on schedule. Delays due to CPU load, other tasks, etc, are to be expected.

The `WindowTimers` interface adds to the `Window` interface and the `WorkerGlobalScope` interface (part of Web workers).

Each object that implements the `WindowTimers` interface has a list of active timers. Each entry in this lists is identified by a number, which must be unique within the list for the lifetime of the object that implements the `WindowTimers` interface.

The `setTimeout()` method must return the value returned by the timer initialization steps, passing them the method's arguments, the object on which the method for which the algorithm is running is implemented (a `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object) as the method context, and the repeat flag set to false.

The `setInterval()` method must return the value returned by the timer initialization steps, passing them the method's arguments, the object on which the method for which the algorithm is running is implemented (a `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object) as the method context, and the repeat flag set to true.

The `clearTimeout()` and `clearInterval()` methods must clear the entry identified as handle from the list of active timers of the `WindowTimers` object on which the method was invoked, if any, where handle is the argument passed to the method. (If handle does not identify an entry in the list of active timers of the `WindowTimers` object on which the method was invoked, the method does nothing.)

The timer initialization steps, which are invoked with some method arguments, a method context, a repeat flag which can be true or false, and optionally (and only if the repeat flag is true) a previous handle, are as follows:

1. Let method context proxy be method context if that is a `WorkerGlobalScope` object, or else the `WindowProxy` that corresponds to method context.

2. If previous handle was provided, let handle be previous handle; otherwise, let handle be a user-agent-defined integer that is greater than zero that will identify the timeout to be set by this call in the list of active timers.

3. If previous handle was not provided, add an entry to the list of active timers for handle.

4. Let task be a task that runs the following substeps:

   1. If the entry for handle in the list of active timers has been cleared, then abort this task's substeps.

   2. Run the appropriate set of steps from the following list:

      If the first method argument is a `Function`

        Call the `Function`. Use the third and subsequent method arguments (if any) as the arguments for invoking the `Function`. Use method context proxy as the thisArg for invoking the `Function`. [ECMA262]

      Otherwise

        1. Let script source be the first method argument.

        2. Let script language be JavaScript.

        3. Let settings object be method context's script settings object.

        4. Create a script using script source as the script source, the URL where script source can be found, scripting language as the scripting language, and settings object as the script settings object.

   3. If the repeat flag is true, then call timer initialization steps again, passing them the same method arguments, the same method context, with the repeat flag still set to true, and with the previous handle set to handler.

5. Let timeout be the second method argument.

6. If the currently running task is a task that was created by this algorithm, then let nesting level be the task's timer nesting level. Otherwise, let nesting level be zero.

7. If nesting level is greater than 5, and timeout is less than 4, then increase timeout to 4.

8. Increment nesting level by one.

9. Let task's timer nesting level be nesting level.

10. Return handle, and then continue running this algorithm asynchronously.

11. If method context is a `Window` object, wait until the `Document` associated with method context has been fully active for a further timeout milliseconds (not necessarily consecutively).

    Otherwise, method context is a `WorkerGlobalScope` object; wait until timeout milliseconds have passed with the worker not suspended (not necessarily consecutively).

12. Wait until any invocations of this algorithm that had the same method context, that started before this one, and whose timeout is equal to or less than this one's, have completed.

    Argument conversion as defined by Web IDL (for example, invoking `toString()` methods on objects passed as the first argument) happens in the algorithms defined in Web IDL, before this algorithm is invoked.

    So for example, the following rather silly code will result in the log containing "`ONE TWO` ":

        var log = '';
        function logger(s) { log += s + ' '; }

        setTimeout({ toString: function () {
          setTimeout("logger('ONE')", 100);
          return "logger('TWO')";
        } }, 100);

13. Optionally, wait a further user-agent defined length of time.

    This is intended to allow user agents to pad timeouts as needed to optimise the power usage of the device. For example, some processors have a low-power mode where the granularity of timers is reduced; on such platforms, user agents can slow timers down to fit this schedule instead of requiring the processor to use the more accurate mode with its associated higher power usage.

14. Queue the task task.

    Once the task has been processed, if the repeat flag is false, it is safe to remove the entry for handle from the list of active timers (there is no way for the entry's existence to be detected past this point, so it does not technically matter one way or the other).

The task source for these tasks is the timer task source.

To run tasks of several milliseconds back to back without any delay, while still yielding back to the browser to avoid starving the user interface (and to avoid the browser killing the script for hogging the CPU), simply queue the next timer before performing work:

    function doExpensiveWork() {
      var done = false;
      // ...
      // this part of the function takes up to five milliseconds
      // set done to true if we're done
      // ...
      return done;
    }

    function rescheduleWork() {
      var handle = setTimeout(rescheduleWork, 0); // preschedule next iteration
      if (doExpensiveWork())
        clearTimeout(handle); // clear the timeout if we don't need it
    }

    function scheduleWork() {
      setTimeout(rescheduleWork, 0);
    }

    scheduleWork(); // queues a task to do lots of work

### 8.5 User prompts

#### 8.5.1 Simple dialogs

window . `alert`(message)

  Displays a modal alert with the given message, and waits for the user to dismiss it.

  A call to the `navigator.yieldForStorageUpdates()` method is implied when this method is invoked.

result = window . `confirm`(message)

  Displays a modal OK/Cancel prompt with the given message, waits for the user to dismiss it, and returns true if the user clicks OK and false if the user clicks Cancel.

  A call to the `navigator.yieldForStorageUpdates()` method is implied when this method is invoked.

result = window . `prompt`(message [, default] )

  Displays a modal text field prompt with the given message, waits for the user to dismiss it, and returns the value that the user entered. If the user cancels the prompt, then returns null instead. If the second argument is present, then the given value is used as a default.

  A call to the `navigator.yieldForStorageUpdates()` method is implied when this method is invoked.

Logic that depends on tasks or microtasks, such as media elements loading their media data, are stalled when these methods are invoked.

The `alert(message)` method, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the event loop's termination nesting level is non-zero, optionally abort these steps.

2. Release the storage mutex.

3. Optionally, abort these steps. (For example, the user agent might give the user the option to ignore all alerts, and would thus abort at this step whenever the method was invoked.)

4. If the method was invoked with no arguments, then let message be the empty string; otherwise, let message be the method's first argument.

5. Show the given message to the user.

6. Optionally, pause while waiting for the user to acknowledge the message.

The `confirm(message)` method, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the event loop's termination nesting level is non-zero, optionally abort these steps, returning false.

2. Release the storage mutex.

3. Optionally, return false and abort these steps. (For example, the user agent might give the user the option to ignore all prompts, and would thus abort at this step whenever the method was invoked.)

4. Show the given message to the user, and ask the user to respond with a positive or negative response.

5. Pause until the user responds either positively or negatively.

6. If the user responded positively, return true; otherwise, the user responded negatively: return false.

The `prompt(message, default)` method, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. If the event loop's termination nesting level is non-zero, optionally abort these steps, returning null.

2. Release the storage mutex.

3. Optionally, return null and abort these steps. (For example, the user agent might give the user the option to ignore all prompts, and would thus abort at this step whenever the method was invoked.)

4. Show the given message to the user, and ask the user to either respond with a string value or abort. The response must be defaulted to the value given by default.

5. Pause while waiting for the user's response.

6. If the user aborts, then return null; otherwise, return the string that the user responded with.

#### 8.5.2 Printing

window . `print`()

  Prompts the user to print the page.

  A call to the `navigator.yieldForStorageUpdates()` method is implied when this method is invoked.

When the `print()` method is invoked, if the `Document` is ready for post-load tasks, then the user agent must synchronously run the printing steps. Otherwise, the user agent must only set the print when loaded flag on the `Document`.

User agents should also run the printing steps whenever the user asks for the opportunity to obtain a physical form (e.g. printed copy), or the representation of a physical form (e.g. PDF copy), of a document.

The printing steps are as follows:

1. The user agent may display a message to the user or abort these steps (or both).

   For instance, a kiosk browser could silently ignore any invocations of the `print()` method.

   For instance, a browser on a mobile device could detect that there are no printers in the vicinity and display a message saying so before continuing to offer a "save to PDF" option.

2. The user agent must fire a simple event named `beforeprint` at the `Window` object of the `Document` that is being printed, as well as any nested browsing contexts in it.

   The `beforeprint` event can be used to annotate the printed copy, for instance adding the time at which the document was printed.

3. The user agent must release the storage mutex.

4. The user agent should offer the user the opportunity to obtain a physical form (or the representation of a physical form) of the document. The user agent may wait for the user to either accept or decline before returning; if so, the user agent must pause while the method is waiting. Even if the user agent doesn't wait at this point, the user agent must use the state of the relevant documents as they are at this point in the algorithm if and when it eventually creates the alternate form.

5. The user agent must fire a simple event named `afterprint` at the `Window` object of the `Document` that is being printed, as well as any nested browsing contexts in it.

   The `afterprint` event can be used to revert annotations added in the earlier event, as well as showing post-printing UI. For instance, if a page is walking the user through the steps of applying for a home loan, the script could automatically advance to the next step after having printed a form or other.

#### 8.5.3 Dialogs implemented using separate documents

result = window . `showModalDialog`(url [, argument] )

  Prompts the user with the given page, waits for that page to close, and returns the return value.

  A call to the `navigator.yieldForStorageUpdates()` method is implied when this method is invoked.

The `showModalDialog(url, argument)` method, when invoked, must cause the user agent to run the following steps:

1. Resolve url relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object.

   If this fails, then throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If the event loop's termination nesting level is non-zero, optionally abort these steps, returning the empty string.

3. Release the storage mutex.

4. If the user agent is configured such that this invocation of `showModalDialog()` is somehow disabled, then return the empty string and abort these steps.

   User agents are expected to disable this method in certain cases to avoid user annoyance (e.g. as part of their popup blocker feature). For instance, a user agent could require that a site be white-listed before enabling this method, or the user agent could be configured to only allow one modal dialog at a time.

5. If the active sandboxing flag set of the active document of the responsible browsing context specified by the incumbent settings object has its sandboxed auxiliary navigation browsing context flag set, then return the empty string and abort these steps.

6. Let incumbent origin be the effective script origin specified by the incumbent settings object at the time the `showModalDialog()` method was called.

7. Let the list of background browsing contexts be a list of all the browsing contexts that:

   - are part of the same unit of related browsing contexts as the browsing context of the `Window` object on which the `showModalDialog()` method was called, and that
   - have an active document whose origin is the same as incumbent origin,

   ...as well as any browsing contexts that are nested inside any of the browsing contexts matching those conditions.

8. Disable the user interface for all the browsing contexts in the list of background browsing contexts. This should prevent the user from navigating those browsing contexts, causing events to be sent to those browsing context, or editing any content in those browsing contexts. However, it does not prevent those browsing contexts from receiving events from sources other than the user, from running scripts, from running animations, and so forth.

9. Create a new auxiliary browsing context, with the opener browsing context being the browsing context of the `Window` object on which the `showModalDialog()` method was called. The new auxiliary browsing context has no name.

   This browsing context's `Document`s' `Window` objects all implement the `WindowModal` interface.

10. Set all the flags in the new browsing context's popup sandboxing flag set that are set in the active sandboxing flag set of the active document of the responsible browsing context specified by the incumbent settings object. The responsible browsing context specified by the incumbent settings object must be set as the new browsing context's one permitted sandboxed navigator.

11. Let the dialog arguments of the new browsing context be set to the value of argument, or the undefined value if the argument was omitted.

12. Let the dialog arguments' origin be incumbent origin.

13. Let the return value of the new browsing context be the undefined value.

14. Let the return value origin be incumbent origin.

15. Navigate the new browsing context to the absolute URL that resulted from resolving url earlier, with replacement enabled, and with the responsible browsing context specified by the incumbent settings object as the source browsing context.

16. Spin the event loop until the new browsing context is closed. The user agent must allow the user to indicate that the browsing context is to be closed.

17. Reenable the user interface for all the browsing contexts in the list of background browsing contexts.

18. If the auxiliary browsing context's return value origin at the time the browsing context was closed was the same as incumbent origin, then let return value be the auxiliary browsing context's return value as it stood when the browsing context was closed.

    Otherwise, let return value be undefined.

19. Return return value.

The `Window` objects of `Document`s hosted by browsing contexts created by the above algorithm must also implement the `WindowModal` interface.

When this happens, the members of the `WindowModal` interface, in JavaScript environments, appear to actually be part of the `Window` interface (e.g. they are on the same prototype chain as the `window.alert()` method).

    [NoInterfaceObject]
    interface WindowModal {
      readonly attribute any dialogArguments;
               attribute any returnValue;
    };

window . `dialogArguments`

  Returns the argument argument that was passed to the `showModalDialog()` method.

window . `returnValue` [ = value ]

  Returns the current return value for the window.

  Can be set, to change the value that will be returned by the `showModalDialog()` method.

Such browsing contexts have associated dialog arguments, which are stored along with the dialog arguments' origin. These values are set by the `showModalDialog()` method in the algorithm above, when the browsing context is created, based on the arguments provided to the method.

The `dialogArguments` IDL attribute, on getting, must check whether its browsing context's active document's effective script origin is the same as the dialog arguments' origin. If it is, then the browsing context's dialog arguments must be returned unchanged. Otherwise, the IDL attribute must return undefined.

These browsing contexts also have an associated return value and return value origin. As with the previous two values, these values are set by the `showModalDialog()` method in the algorithm above, when the browsing context is created.

The `returnValue` IDL attribute, on getting, must check whether its browsing context's active document's effective script origin is the same as the current return value origin. If it is, then the browsing context's return value must be returned unchanged. Otherwise, the IDL attribute must return undefined. On setting, the attribute must set the return value to the given new value, and the return value origin to the browsing context's active document's effective script origin.

The `window.close()` method can be used to close the browsing context.

### 8.6 System state and capabilities

#### 8.6.1 The `Navigator` object

The `navigator` attribute of the `Window` interface must return an instance of the `Navigator` interface, which represents the identity and state of the user agent (the client), and allows Web pages to register themselves as potential protocol and content handlers:

    interface Navigator {
      // objects implementing this interface also implement the interfaces given below
    };
    Navigator implements NavigatorID;
    Navigator implements NavigatorLanguage;
    Navigator implements NavigatorOnLine;
    Navigator implements NavigatorContentUtils;
    Navigator implements NavigatorStorageUtils;
    Navigator implements NavigatorPlugins;

These interfaces are defined separately so that other specifications can re-use parts of the `Navigator` interface.

##### 8.6.1.1 Client identification

    [NoInterfaceObject, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface NavigatorID {
      readonly attribute DOMString appCodeName; // constant "Mozilla"
      readonly attribute DOMString appName;
      readonly attribute DOMString appVersion;
      readonly attribute DOMString platform;
      readonly attribute DOMString product; // constant "Gecko"
      boolean taintEnabled(); // constant false
      readonly attribute DOMString userAgent;
    };

In certain cases, despite the best efforts of the entire industry, Web browsers have bugs and limitations that Web authors are forced to work around.

This section defines a collection of attributes that can be used to determine, from script, the kind of user agent in use, in order to work around these issues.

Client detection should always be limited to detecting known current versions; future versions and unknown versions should always be assumed to be fully compliant.

window . `navigator` . `appCodeName`

  Returns the string "`Mozilla`".

window . `navigator` . `appName`

  Returns the name of the browser.

window . `navigator` . `appVersion`

  Returns the version of the browser.

window . `navigator` . `platform`

  Returns the name of the platform.

window . `navigator` . `product`

  Returns the string "`Gecko`".

window . `navigator` . `taintEnabled`()

  Returns false.

window . `navigator` . `userAgent`

  Returns the complete User-Agent header.

`appCodeName`

  Must return the string "`Mozilla`".

`appName`

  Must return either the string "`Netscape`" or the full name of the browser, e.g. "`Mellblom Browsernator`".

`appVersion`

  Must return either the string "`4.0`" or a string representing the version of the browser in detail, e.g. "`1.0 (VMS; en-US) Mellblomenator/9000`".

`platform`

  Must return either the empty string or a string representing the platform on which the browser is executing, e.g. "`MacIntel`", "`Win32`", "`FreeBSD i386`", "`WebTV OS`".

`product`

  Must return the string "`Gecko`".

`taintEnabled()`

  Must return false.

`userAgent`

  Must return the string used for the value of the "`User-Agent`" header in HTTP requests, or the empty string if no such header is ever sent.

Any information in this API that varies from user to user can be used to profile the user. In fact, if enough such information is available, a user can actually be uniquely identified. For this reason, user agent implementors are strongly urged to include as little information in this API as possible.

##### 8.6.1.2 Language preferences

    [NoInterfaceObject, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface NavigatorLanguage {
      readonly attribute DOMString? language;
      readonly attribute DOMString[] languages;
    };

window . `navigator` . `language`

  Returns a language tag representing the user's preferred language.

window . `navigator` . `languages`

  Returns an array of language tags representing the user's preferred languages, with the most preferred language first.

  The most preferred language is the one returned by `navigator.language`.

A `languagechange` event is fired at the `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object when the user agent's understanding of what the user's preferred languages are changes.

`language`

  Must return a valid BCP 47 language tag representing either a plausible language or the user's most preferred language. [BCP47]

`languages`

  Must return a read only array of valid BCP 47 language tags representing either one or more plausible languages, or the user's preferred languages, ordered by preference with the most preferred language first. The same object must be returned until the user agent needs to return different values, or values in a different order. [BCP47]

  Whenever the user agent needs to make the `navigator.languages` attribute of a `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object return a new set of language tags, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `languagechange` at the `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object and wait until that task begins to be executed before actually returning a new value.

  The task source for this task is the DOM manipulation task source.

To determine a plausible language, the user agent should bear in mind the following:

- Any information in this API that varies from user to user can be used to profile or identify the user.
- If the user is not using a service that obfuscates the user's point of origin (e.g. the Tor anonymity network), then the value that is least likely to distinguish the user from other users with similar origins (e.g. from the same IP address block) is the language used by the majority of such users. [TOR]
- If the user is using an anonymizing service, then the value "`en-US`" is suggested; if all users of the service use that same value, that reduces the possibility of distinguishing the users from each other.

To avoid introducing any more fingerprinting vectors, user agents should use the same list for the APIs defined in this function as for the HTTP `Accept-Language` header.

##### 8.6.1.3 Custom scheme and content handlers

    [NoInterfaceObject]
    interface NavigatorContentUtils {
      // content handler registration
      void registerProtocolHandler(DOMString scheme, DOMString url, DOMString title);
      void registerContentHandler(DOMString mimeType, DOMString url, DOMString title);
      DOMString isProtocolHandlerRegistered(DOMString scheme, DOMString url);
      DOMString isContentHandlerRegistered(DOMString mimeType, DOMString url);
      void unregisterProtocolHandler(DOMString scheme, DOMString url);
      void unregisterContentHandler(DOMString mimeType, DOMString url);
    };

The `registerProtocolHandler()` method allows Web sites to register themselves as possible handlers for particular schemes. For example, an online telephone messaging service could register itself as a handler of the `sms:` scheme, so that if the user clicks on such a link, he is given the opportunity to use that Web site. Analogously, the `registerContentHandler()` method allows Web sites to register themselves as possible handlers for content in a particular MIME type. For example, the same online telephone messaging service could register itself as a handler for `text/vcard` files, so that if the user has no native application capable of handling vCards, his Web browser can instead suggest he use that site to view contact information stored on vCards that he opens. [SMS] [RFC6350]

window . `navigator` . `registerProtocolHandler`(scheme, url, title)
window . `navigator` . `registerContentHandler`(mimeType, url, title)

  Registers a handler for the given scheme or content type, at the given URL, with the given title.

  The string "`%s`" in the URL is used as a placeholder for where to put the URL of the content to be handled.

  Throws a `SecurityError` exception if the user agent blocks the registration (this might happen if trying to register as a handler for "http", for instance).

  Throws a `SyntaxError` exception if the "`%s`" string is missing in the URL.

User agents may, within the constraints described in this section, do whatever they like when the methods are called. A UA could, for instance, prompt the user and offer the user the opportunity to add the site to a shortlist of handlers, or make the handlers his default, or cancel the request. UAs could provide such a UI through modal UI or through a non-modal transient notification interface. UAs could also simply silently collect the information, providing it only when relevant to the user.

User agents should keep track of which sites have registered handlers (even if the user has declined such registrations) so that the user is not repeatedly prompted with the same request.

The arguments to the methods have the following meanings and corresponding implementation requirements. The requirements that involve throwing exceptions must be processed in the order given below, stopping at the first exception thrown. (So the exceptions for the first argument take precedence over the exceptions for the second argument.)

scheme (`registerProtocolHandler()` only)

  A scheme, such as "`mailto`" or "`web+auth`". The scheme must be compared in an ASCII case-insensitive manner by user agents for the purposes of comparing with the scheme part of URLs that they consider against the list of registered handlers.

  The scheme value, if it contains a colon (as in "`mailto:`"), will never match anything, since schemes don't contain colons.

  If the `registerProtocolHandler()` method is invoked with a scheme that is neither a whitelisted scheme nor a scheme whose value starts with the substring "`web+`" and otherwise contains only lowercase ASCII letters, and whose length is at least five characters (including the "`web+`" prefix), the user agent must throw a `SecurityError` exception.

  The following schemes are the whitelisted schemes:

  - `bitcoin`
  - `geo`
  - `im`
  - `irc`
  - `ircs`
  - `magnet`
  - `mailto`
  - `mms`
  - `news`
  - `nntp`
  - `sip`
  - `sms`
  - `smsto`
  - `ssh`
  - `tel`
  - `urn`
  - `webcal`
  - `wtai`
  - `xmpp`

  This list can be changed. If there are schemes that should be added, please send feedback.

  This list excludes any schemes that could reasonably be expected to be supported inline, e.g. in an `iframe`, such as `http` or (more theoretically) `gopher`. If those were supported, they could potentially be used in man-in-the-middle attacks, by replacing pages that have frames with such content with content under the control of the protocol handler. If the user agent has native support for the schemes, this could further be used for cookie-theft attacks.

mimeType (`registerContentHandler()` only)

  A MIME type, such as `model/vnd.flatland.3dml` or `application/vnd.google-earth.kml+xml`. The MIME type must be compared in an ASCII case-insensitive manner by user agents for the purposes of comparing with MIME types of documents that they consider against the list of registered handlers.

  User agents must compare the given values only to the MIME type/subtype parts of content types, not to the complete type including parameters. Thus, if mimeType values passed to this method include characters such as commas or whitespace, or include MIME parameters, then the handler being registered will never be used.

  The type is compared to the MIME type used by the user agent after the sniffing algorithms have been applied.

  If the `registerContentHandler()` method is invoked with a MIME type that is in the type blacklist or that the user agent has deemed a privileged type, the user agent must throw a `SecurityError` exception.

  The following MIME types are in the type blacklist:

  - `application/x-www-form-urlencoded`
  - `application/xhtml+xml`
  - `application/xml`
  - `image/gif`
  - `image/jpeg`
  - `image/png`
  - `image/svg+xml`
  - `multipart/x-mixed-replace`
  - `text/cache-manifest`
  - `text/css`
  - `text/html`
  - `text/ping`
  - `text/plain`
  - `text/xml`
  - All types that the user agent supports displaying natively in a browsing context during navigation, except for `application/rss+xml` and `application/atom+xml`

  This list can be changed. If there are MIME types that should be added, please send feedback.

url

  A string used to build the URL of the page that will handle the requests.

  User agents must throw a `SyntaxError` exception if the url argument passed to one of these methods does not contain the exact literal string "`%s`".

  User agents must throw a `SyntaxError` exception if resolving the url argument relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object is not successful.

  The resulting absolute URL would by definition not be a valid URL as it would include the string "`%s`" which is not a valid component in a URL.

  User agents must throw a `SecurityError` exception if the resulting absolute URL has an origin that differs from the origin specified by the entry settings object.

  This is forcibly the case if the `%s` placeholder is in the scheme, host, or port parts of the URL.

  The resulting absolute URL is the proto-URL. It identifies the handler for the purposes of the methods described below.

  When the user agent uses this handler, it must replace the first occurrence of the exact literal string "`%s`" in the url argument with an escaped version of the absolute URL of the content in question (as defined below), then resolve the resulting URL, relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object at the time the `registerContentHandler()` or `registerProtocolHandler()` methods were invoked, and then navigate an appropriate browsing context to the resulting URL using the GET method (or equivalent for non-HTTP URLs).

  To get the escaped version of the absolute URL of the content in question, the user agent must replace every character in that absolute URL that is not a character in the URL default encode set with the result of UTF-8 percent encoding that character.

  If the user had visited a site at `http://example.com/` that made the following call:

      navigator.registerContentHandler('application/x-soup', 'soup?url=%s', 'SoupWeb™')

  ...and then, much later, while visiting `http://www.example.net/`, clicked on a link such as:

      <a href="chickenkïwi.soup">Download our Chicken Kïwi soup!</a>

  ...then, assuming this `chickenkïwi.soup` file was served with the MIME type `application/x-soup`, the UA might navigate to the following URL:

      http://example.com/soup?url=http://www.example.net/chickenk%C3%AFwi.soup

  This site could then fetch the `chickenkïwi.soup` file and do whatever it is that it does with soup (synthesise it and ship it to the user, or whatever).

title

  A descriptive title of the handler, which the UA might use to remind the user what the site in question is.

This section does not define how the pages registered by these methods are used, beyond the requirements on how to process the url value (see above). To some extent, the processing model for navigating across documents defines some cases where these methods are relevant, but in general UAs may use this information wherever they would otherwise consider handing content to native plugins or helper applications.

UAs must not use registered content handlers to handle content that was returned as part of a non-GET transaction (or rather, as part of any non-idempotent transaction), as the remote site would not be able to fetch the same data.

In addition to the registration methods, there are also methods for determining if particular handlers have been registered, and for unregistering handlers.

state = window . `navigator` . `isProtocolHandlerRegistered`(scheme, url)
state = window . `navigator` . `isContentHandlerRegistered`(mimeType, url)

  Returns one of the following strings describing the state of the handler given by the arguments:

  `new`
    Indicates that no attempt has been made to register the given handler (or that the handler has been unregistered). It would be appropriate to promote the availability of the handler or to just automatically register the handler.
  `registered`
    Indicates that the given handler has been registered or that the site is blocked from registering the handler. Trying to register the handler again would have no effect.
  `declined`
    Indicates that the given handler has been offered but was rejected. Trying to register the handler again may prompt the user again.
window . `navigator` . `unregisterProtocolHandler`(scheme, url)
window . `navigator` . `unregisterContentHandler`(mimeType, url)

  Unregisters the handler given by the arguments.

The `isProtocolHandlerRegistered()` method must return the handler state string that most closely describes the current state of the handler described by the two arguments to the method, where the first argument gives the scheme and the second gives the string used to build the URL of the page that will handle the requests.

The first argument must be compared to the schemes for which custom protocol handlers are registered in an ASCII case-insensitive manner to find the relevant handlers.

The second argument must be preprocessed as described below, and if that is successful, must then be matched against the proto-URLs of the relevant handlers to find the described handler.

The `isContentHandlerRegistered()` method must return the handler state string that most closely describes the current state of the handler described by the two arguments to the method, where the first argument gives the MIME type and the second gives the string used to build the URL of the page that will handle the requests.

The first argument must be compared to the MIME types for which custom content handlers are registered in an ASCII case-insensitive manner to find the relevant handlers.

The second argument must be preprocessed as described below, and if that is successful, must then be matched against the proto-URLs of the relevant handlers to find the described handler.

The handler state strings are the following strings. Each string describes several situations, as given by the following list.

`new`
  The described handler has never been registered for the given scheme or type.
  The described handler was once registered for the given scheme or type, but the site has since unregistered it. If the handler were to be reregistered, the user would be notified accordingly.
  The described handler was once registered for the given scheme or type, but the site has since unregistered it, but the user has indicated that the site is to be blocked from registering the type again, so the user agent would ignore further registration attempts.
`registered`
  An attempt was made to register the described handler for the given scheme or type, but the user has not yet been notified, and the user agent would ignore further registration attempts. (Maybe the user agent batches registration requests to display them when the user requests to be notified about them, and the user has not yet requested that the user agent notify it of the previous registration attempt.)
  The described handler is registered for the given scheme or type (maybe, or maybe not, as the default handler).
  The described handler is permanently blocked from being (re)registered. (Maybe the user marked the registration attempt as spam, or blocked the site for other reasons.)
`declined`
  An attempt was made to register the described handler for the given scheme or type, but the user has not yet been notified; however, the user might be notified if another registration attempt were to be made. (Maybe the last registration attempt was made while the page was in the background and the user closed the page without looking at it, and the user agent requires confirmation for this registration attempt.)
  An attempt was made to register the described handler for the given scheme or type, but the user has not yet responded.
  An attempt was made to register the described handler for the given scheme or type, but the user declined the offer. The user has not indicated that the handler is to be permanently blocked, however, so another attempt to register the described handler might result in the user being prompted again.
  The described handler was once registered for the given scheme or type, but the user has since removed it. The user has not indicated that the handler is to be permanently blocked, however, so another attempt to register the described handler might result in the user being prompted again.

The `unregisterProtocolHandler()` method must unregister the handler described by the two arguments to the method, where the first argument gives the scheme and the second gives the string used to build the URL of the page that will handle the requests.

The first argument must be compared to the schemes for which custom protocol handlers are registered in an ASCII case-insensitive manner to find the relevant handlers.

The second argument must be preprocessed as described below, and if that is successful, must then be matched against the proto-URLs of the relevant handlers to find the described handler.

The `unregisterContentHandler()` method must unregister the handler described by the two arguments to the method, where the first argument gives the MIME type and the second gives the string used to build the URL of the page that will handle the requests.

The first argument must be compared to the MIME types for which custom content handlers are registered in an ASCII case-insensitive manner to find the relevant handlers.

The second argument must be preprocessed as described below, and if that is successful, must then be matched against the proto-URLs of the relevant handlers to find the described handler.

The second argument of the four methods described above must be preprocessed as follows:

1. If the string does not contain the substring "`%s`", abort these steps. There's no matching handler.

2. Resolve the string relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object.

3. If this fails, then throw a `SyntaxError` exception, aborting the method.

4. If the resulting absolute URL's origin is not the same origin as the origin specified by the entry settings object, throw a `SecurityError` exception, aborting the method.

5. Return the resulting absolute URL as the result of preprocessing the argument.

###### 8.6.1.3.1 Security and privacy

These mechanisms can introduce a number of concerns, in particular privacy concerns.

Hijacking all Web usage. User agents should not allow schemes that are key to its normal operation, such as `http` or `https`, to be rerouted through third-party sites. This would allow a user's activities to be trivially tracked, and would allow user information, even in secure connections, to be collected.

Hijacking defaults. User agents are strongly urged to not automatically change any defaults, as this could lead the user to send data to remote hosts that the user is not expecting. New handlers registering themselves should never automatically cause those sites to be used.

Registration spamming. User agents should consider the possibility that a site will attempt to register a large number of handlers, possibly from multiple domains (e.g. by redirecting through a series of pages each on a different domain, and each registering a handler for `video/mpeg` — analogous practices abusing other Web browser features have been used by pornography Web sites for many years). User agents should gracefully handle such hostile attempts, protecting the user.

Misleading titles. User agents should not rely wholly on the title argument to the methods when presenting the registered handlers to the user, since sites could easily lie. For example, a site `hostile.example.net` could claim that it was registering the "Cuddly Bear Happy Content Handler". User agents should therefore use the handler's domain in any UI along with any title.

Hostile handler metadata. User agents should protect against typical attacks against strings embedded in their interface, for example ensuring that markup or escape characters in such strings are not executed, that null bytes are properly handled, that over-long strings do not cause crashes or buffer overruns, and so forth.

Leaking Intranet URLs. The mechanism described in this section can result in secret Intranet URLs being leaked, in the following manner:

1. The user registers a third-party content handler as the default handler for a content type.
2. The user then browses his corporate Intranet site and accesses a document that uses that content type.
3. The user agent contacts the third party and hands the third party the URL to the Intranet content.

No actual confidential file data is leaked in this manner, but the URLs themselves could contain confidential information. For example, the URL could be `http://www.corp.example.com/upcoming-aquisitions/the-sample-company.egf`, which might tell the third party that Example Corporation is intending to merge with The Sample Company. Implementors might wish to consider allowing administrators to disable this feature for certain subdomains, content types, or schemes.

Leaking secure URLs. User agents should not send HTTPS URLs to third-party sites registered as content handlers without the user's informed consent, for the same reason that user agents sometimes avoid sending `Referer` (sic) HTTP headers from secure sites to third-party sites.

Leaking credentials. User agents must never send username or password information in the URLs that are escaped and included sent to the handler sites. User agents may even avoid attempting to pass to Web-based handlers the URLs of resources that are known to require authentication to access, as such sites would be unable to access the resources in question without prompting the user for credentials themselves (a practice that would require the user to know whether to trust the third-party handler, a decision many users are unable to make or even understand).

Interface interference. User agents should be prepared to handle intentionally long arguments to the methods. For example, if the user interface exposed consists of an "accept" button and a "deny" button, with the "accept" binding containing the name of the handler, it's important that a long name not cause the "deny" button to be pushed off the screen.

Fingerprinting users. Since a site can detect if it has attempted to register a particular handler or not, whether or not the user responds, the mechanism can be used to store data. User agents are therefore strongly urged to treat registrations in the same manner as cookies: clearing cookies for a site should also clear all registrations for that site, and disabling cookies for a site should also disable registrations.

###### 8.6.1.3.2 Sample user interface

This section is non-normative.

A simple implementation of this feature for a desktop Web browser might work as follows.

The `registerContentHandler()` method could display a modal dialog box:

In this dialog box, "Kittens at work" is the title of the page that invoked the method, "http://kittens.example.org/" is the URL of that page, "application/x-meowmeow" is the string that was passed to the `registerContentHandler()` method as its first argument (mimeType), "http://kittens.example.org/?show=%s" was the second argument (url), and "Kittens-at-work displayer" was the third argument (title).

If the user clicks the Cancel button, then nothing further happens. If the user clicks the "Trust" button, then the handler is remembered.

When the user then attempts to fetch a URL that uses the "application/x-meowmeow" MIME type, then it might display a dialog as follows:

In this dialog, the third option is the one that was primed by the site registering itself earlier.

If the user does select that option, then the browser, in accordance with the requirements described in the previous two sections, will redirect the user to "http://kittens.example.org/?show=data%3Aapplication/x-meowmeow;base64,S2l0dGVucyBhcmUgdGhlIGN1dGVzdCE%253D".

The `registerProtocolHandler()` method would work equivalently, but for schemes instead of unknown content types.

##### 8.6.1.4 Manually releasing the storage mutex

    [NoInterfaceObject]
    interface NavigatorStorageUtils {
      readonly attribute boolean cookieEnabled;
      void yieldForStorageUpdates();
    };

window . `navigator` . `cookieEnabled`

  Returns false if setting a cookie will be ignored, and true otherwise.

window . `navigator` . `yieldForStorageUpdates`()

  If a script uses the `document.cookie` API, or the `localStorage` API, the browser will block other scripts from accessing cookies or storage until the first script finishes.

  Calling the `navigator.yieldForStorageUpdates()` method tells the user agent to unblock any other scripts that may be blocked, even though the script hasn't returned.

  Values of cookies and items in the `Storage` objects of `localStorage` attributes can change after calling this method, whence its name.

The `cookieEnabled` attribute must return true if the user agent attempts to handle cookies according to the cookie specification, and false if it ignores cookie change requests. [COOKIES]

The `yieldForStorageUpdates()` method, when invoked, must, if the storage mutex is owned by the event loop of the task that resulted in the method being called, release the storage mutex so that it is once again free. Otherwise, it must do nothing.

##### 8.6.1.5 Plugins

    [NoInterfaceObject]
    interface NavigatorPlugins {
      readonly attribute PluginArray plugins;
      readonly attribute MimeTypeArray mimeTypes;
      readonly attribute boolean javaEnabled;
    };

    interface PluginArray {
      void refresh(optional boolean reload = false);
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      getter Plugin? item(unsigned long index);
      getter Plugin? namedItem(DOMString name);
    };

    interface MimeTypeArray {
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      getter MimeType? item(unsigned long index);
      getter MimeType? namedItem(DOMString name);
    };

    interface Plugin {
      readonly attribute DOMString name;
      readonly attribute DOMString description;
      readonly attribute DOMString filename;
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      getter MimeType? item(unsigned long index);
      getter MimeType? namedItem(DOMString name);
    };

    interface MimeType {
      readonly attribute DOMString type;
      readonly attribute DOMString description;
      readonly attribute DOMString suffixes; // comma-separated
      readonly attribute Plugin enabledPlugin;
    };

window . `navigator` . `plugins` . `refresh`( [ refresh ] )

  Updates the lists of supported plugins and MIME types for this page, and reloads the page if the lists have changed.

window . `navigator` . `plugins` . `length`

  Returns the number of plugins, represented by `Plugin` objects, that the user agent reports.

plugin = window . `navigator` . `plugins` . `item`(index)
window . `navigator` . `plugins`[index]

  Returns the specified `Plugin` object.

plugin = window . `navigator` . `plugins` . `item`(name)
window . `navigator` . `plugins`[name]

  Returns the `Plugin` object for the plugin with the given name.

window . `navigator` . `mimeTypes` . `length`

  Returns the number of MIME types, represented by `MimeType` objects, supported by the plugins that the user agent reports.

mimeType = window . `navigator` . `mimeTypes` . `item`(index)
window . `navigator` . `mimeTypes`[index]

  Returns the specified `MimeType` object.

mimeType = window . `navigator` . `mimeTypes` . `item`(name)
window . `navigator` . `mimeTypes`[name]

  Returns the `MimeType` object for the given MIME type.

plugin . `name`

  Returns the plugin's name.

plugin . `description`

  Returns the plugin's description.

plugin . `filename`

  Returns the plugin library's filename, if applicable on the current platform.

plugin . `length`

  Returns the number of MIME types, represented by `MimeType` objects, supported by the plugin.

mimeType = plugin . `item`(index)
plugin[index]

  Returns the specified `MimeType` object.

mimeType = plugin . `item`(name)
plugin[name]

  Returns the `MimeType` object for the given MIME type.

mimeType . `type`

  Returns the MIME type.

mimeType . `description`

  Returns the MIME type's description.

mimeType . `suffixes`

  Returns the MIME type's typical file extensions, in a comma-separated list.

mimeType . `enabledPlugin`

  Returns the `Plugin` object that implements this MIME type.

window . `navigator` . `javaEnabled`

  Returns true if there's a plugin that supports the MIME type "`application/x-java-vm`".

The `navigator.plugins` attribute must return a `PluginArray` object. The same object must be returned each time.

The `navigator.mimeTypes` attribute must return a `MimeTypeArray` object. The same object must be returned each time.

A `PluginArray` object represents none, some, or all of the plugins supported by the user agent, each of which is represented by a `Plugin` object. Each of these `Plugin` objects may be hidden plugins. A hidden plugin can't be enumerated, but can still be inspected by using its name.

The fewer plugins are represented by the `PluginArray` object, and of those, the more that are hidden, the more the user's privacy will be protected. Each exposed plugin increases the number of bits that can be derived for fingerprinting. Hiding a plugin helps, but unless it is an extremely rare plugin, it is likely that a site attempting to derive the list of plugins can still determine whether the plugin is supported or not by probing for it by name (the names of popular plugins are widely known). Therefore not exposing a plugin at all is preferred. Unfortunately, many legacy sites use this feature to determine, for example, which plugin to use to play video. Not exposing any plugins at all might therefore not be entirely plausible.

The `PluginArray` objects created by a user agent must not be live. The set of plugins represented by the objects must not change once an object is created, except when it is updated by the `refresh()` method.

Each plugin represented by a `PluginArray` can support a number of MIME types. For each such plugin, the user agent must pick one or more of these MIME types to be those that are explicitly supported.

The explicitly supported MIME types of a plugin are those that are exposed through the `Plugin` and `MimeTypeArray` interfaces. As with plugins themselves, any variation between users regarding what is exposed allows sites to fingerprint users. User agents are therefore encouraged to expose the same MIME types for all users of a plugin, regardless of the actual types supported... at least, within the constraints imposed by compatibility with legacy content.

The supported property indices of a `PluginArray` object are the numbers from zero to the number of non-hidden plugins represented by the object, if any.

The `length` attribute must return the number of non-hidden plugins represented by the object.

The `item()` method of a `PluginArray` object must return null if the argument is not one of the object's supported property indices, and otherwise must return the result of running the following steps, using the method's argument as index:

1. Let list be the `Plugin` objects representing the non-hidden plugins represented by the `PluginArray` object.

2. Sort list alphabetically by the `name` of each `Plugin`.

3. Return the indexth entry in list.

It is important for privacy that the order of plugins not leak additional information, e.g. the order in which plugins were installed.

The supported property names of a `PluginArray` object are the values of the `name` attributes of all the `Plugin` objects represented by the `PluginArray` object. The properties exposed in this way must be unenumerable.

The `namedItem()` method of a `PluginArray` object must return null if the argument is not one of the object's supported property names, and otherwise must return the `Plugin` object, of those represented by the `PluginArray` object, that has a `name` equal to the method's argument.

The `refresh()` method of the `PluginArray` object of a `Navigator` object, when invoked, must check to see if any plugins have been installed or reconfigured since the user agent created the `PluginArray` object. If so, and the method's argument is true, then the user agent must act as if the `location.reload()` method was called instead. Otherwise, the user agent must update the `PluginArray` object and `MimeTypeArray` object created for attributes of that `Navigator` object, and the `Plugin` and `MimeType` objects created for those `PluginArray` and `MimeTypeArray` objects, using the same `Plugin` objects for cases where the `name` is the same, and the same `MimeType` objects for cases where the `type` is the same, and creating new objects for cases where there were no matching objects immediately prior to the `refresh()` call. Old `Plugin` and `MimeType` objects must continue to return the same values that they had prior to the update, though naturally now the data is stale and may appear inconsistent (for example, an old `MimeType` entry might list as its `enabledPlugin` a `Plugin` object that no longer lists that `MimeType` as a supported `MimeType`).

A `MimeTypeArray` object represents the MIME types explicitly supported by plugins supported by the user agent, each of which is represented by a `MimeType` object.

The `MimeTypeArray` objects created by a user agent must not be live. The set of MIME types represented by the objects must not change once an object is created, except when it is updated by the `PluginArray` object's `refresh()` method.

The supported property indices of a `MimeTypeArray` object are the numbers from zero to the number of MIME types explicitly supported by non-hidden plugins represented by the corresponding `PluginArray` object, if any.

The `length` attribute must return the number of MIME types explicitly supported by non-hidden plugins represented by the corresponding `PluginArray` object, if any.

The `item()` method of a `MimeTypeArray` object must return null if the argument is not one of the object's supported property indices, and otherwise must return the result of running the following steps, using the method's argument as index:

1. Let list be the `MimeType` objects representing the MIME types explicitly supported by non-hidden plugins represented by the corresponding `PluginArray` object, if any.

2. Sort list alphabetically by the `type` of each `MimeType`.

3. Return the indexth entry in list.

It is important for privacy that the order of MIME types not leak additional information, e.g. the order in which plugins were installed.

The supported property names of a `MimeTypeArray` object are the values of the `type` attributes of all the `MimeType` objects represented by the `MimeTypeArray` object. The properties exposed in this way must be unenumerable.

The `namedItem()` method of a `MimeTypeArray` object must return null if the argument is not one of the object's supported property names, and otherwise must return the `MimeType` object that has a `type` equal to the method's argument.

A `Plugin` object represents a plugin. It has several attributes to provide details about the plugin, and can be enumerated to obtain the list of MIME types that it explicitly supports.

The `Plugin` objects created by a user agent must not be live. The set of MIME types represented by the objects, and the values of the objects' attributes, must not change once an object is created, except when updated by the `PluginArray` object's `refresh()` method.

The reported MIME types for a `Plugin` object are the MIME types explicitly supported by the corresponding plugin when this object was last created or updated by `PluginArray.refresh()`, whichever happened most recently.

The supported property indices of a `Plugin` object are the numbers from zero to the number of reported MIME types.

The `length` attribute must return the number of reported MIME types.

The `item()` method of a `Plugin` object must return null if the argument is not one of the object's supported property indices, and otherwise must return the result of running the following steps, using the method's argument as index:

1. Let list be the `MimeType` objects representing the reported MIME types.

2. Sort list alphabetically by the `type` of each `MimeType`.

3. Return the indexth entry in list.

It is important for privacy that the order of MIME types not leak additional information, e.g. the order in which plugins were installed.

The supported property names of a `Plugin` object are the values of the `type` attributes of the `MimeType` objects representing the reported MIME types. The properties exposed in this way must be unenumerable.

The `namedItem()` method of a `Plugin` object must return null if the argument is not one of the object's supported property names, and otherwise must return the `MimeType` object that has a `type` equal to the method's argument.

The `name` attribute must return the plugin's name.

The `description` and `filename` attributes must return user-agent-defined (or, in all likelihood, plugin-defined) strings. In each case, the same string must be returned each time, except that the strings returned may change when the `PluginArray.refresh()` method updates the object.

If the values returned by the `description` or `filename` attributes vary between versions of a plugin, they can be used both as a fingerprinting vector and, even more importantly, as a trivial way to determine what security vulnerabilities a plugin (and thus a browser) may have. It is thus highly recommended that the `description` attribute just return the same value as the `name` attribute, and that the `filename` attribute return the empty string.

A `MimeType` object represents a MIME type that is, or was, explicitly supported by a plugin.

The `MimeType` objects created by a user agent must not be live. The values of the objects' attributes must not change once an object is created, except when updated by the `PluginArray` object's `refresh()` method.

The `type` attribute must return the valid MIME type with no parameters describing the MIME type.

The `description` and `suffixes` attributes must return user-agent-defined (or, in all likelihood, plugin-defined) strings. In each case, the same string must be returned each time, except that the strings returned may change when the `PluginArray.refresh()` method updates the object.

If the values returned by the `description` or `suffxies` attributes vary between versions of a plugin, they can be used both as a fingerprinting vector and, even more importantly, as a trivial way to determine what security vulnerabilities a plugin (and thus a browser) may have. It is thus highly recommended that the `description` attribute just return the same value as the `type` attribute, and that the `suffixes` attribute return the empty string.

Commas in the `suffixes` attribute are interpreted as separating subsequent filename extensions, as in "`htm,html`".

The `enabledPlugin` attribute must return the `Plugin` object that represents the plugin that explicitly supported the MIME type that this `MimeType` object represents when this object was last created or updated by `PluginArray.refresh()`, whichever happened most recently.

The `navigator.javaEnabled` attribute must return true if the user agent supports a plugin that supports the MIME type "`application/x-java-vm`"; otherwise it must return false.

#### 8.6.2 The `External` interface

The `external` attribute of the `Window` interface must return an instance of the `External` interface. The same object must be returned each time.

    interface External {
      void AddSearchProvider(DOMString engineURL);
      unsigned long IsSearchProviderInstalled(DOMString engineURL);
    };

For historical reasons, members on this interface are capitalized.

window . `external` . `AddSearchProvider`( url )

  Adds the search engine described by the OpenSearch description document at url. [OPENSEARCH]

  The OpenSearch description document has to be on the same server as the script that calls this method.

installed = window . `external` . `IsSearchProviderInstalled`( url )

  Returns a value based on comparing url to the URLs of the results pages of the installed search engines.

  0
    None of the installed search engines match url.
  1
    One or more installed search engines match url, but none are the user's default search engine.
  2
    The user's default search engine matches url.

  The url is compared to the URLs of the results pages of the installed search engines using a prefix match. Only results pages on the same domain as the script that calls this method are checked.

Another way of exposing search engines using OpenSearch description documents is using a `link` element with the `search` link type.

The `AddSearchProvider()` method, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. Optionally, abort these steps. User agents may implement the method as a stub method that never does anything, or may arbitrarily ignore invocations with particular arguments for security, privacy, or usability reasons.

2. Resolve the value of the method's first argument relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object.

3. If this fails, abort these steps.

4. Process the resulting absolute URL as the URL to an OpenSearch description document. [OPENSEARCH]

The `IsSearchProviderInstalled()` method, when invoked, must run the following steps:

1. Optionally, return 0 and abort these steps. User agents may implement the method as a stub method that never returns a non-zero value, or may arbitrarily ignore invocations with particular arguments for security, privacy, or usability reasons.

2. If the origin specified by the entry settings object is an opaque identifier (i.e. it has no host component), then return 0 and abort these steps.

3. Let host1 be the host component of the origin specified by the entry settings object.

4. Resolve the scriptURL argument relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object.

5. If this fails, return 0 and abort these steps.

6. Let host2 be the host component of the resulting parsed URL.

7. If the longest suffix in the Public Suffix List that matches the end of host1 is different than the longest suffix in the Public Suffix List that matches the end of host2, then return 0 and abort these steps. [PSL]

   If the next domain component of host1 and host2 after their common suffix are not the same, then return 0 and abort these steps.

8. Let search engines be the list of search engines known by the user agent and made available to the user by the user agent for which the resulting absolute URL is a prefix match of the search engine's URL, if any. For search engines registered using OpenSearch description documents, the URL of the search engine corresponds to the URL given in a `Url` element whose `rel` attribute is "`results`" (the default). [OPENSEARCH]

9. If search engines is empty, return 0 and abort these steps.

10. If the user's default search engine (as determined by the user agent) is one of the search engines in search engines, then return 2 and abort these steps.

11. Return 1.

### 8.7 Images

    [Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface ImageBitmap {
      readonly attribute unsigned long width;
      readonly attribute unsigned long height;
    };

    typedef (HTMLImageElement or
             HTMLVideoElement or
             HTMLCanvasElement or
             Blob or
             ImageData or
             CanvasRenderingContext2D or
             ImageBitmap) ImageBitmapSource;

    [NoInterfaceObject, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface ImageBitmapFactories {
      Promise createImageBitmap(ImageBitmapSource image, optional long sx, long sy, long sw, long sh);
    };
    Window implements ImageBitmapFactories;
    WorkerGlobalScope implements ImageBitmapFactories;

An `ImageBitmap` object represents a bitmap image that can be painted to a canvas without undue latency.

The exact judgement of what is undue latency of this is left up to the implementer, but in general if making use of the bitmap requires network I/O, or even local disk I/O, then the latency is probably undue; whereas if it only requires a blocking read from a GPU or system RAM, the latency is probably acceptable.

promise = Window . `createImageBitmap`(image [, sx, sy, sw, sh ] )

  Takes image, which can be an `img` element, `video`, or `canvas` element, a `Blob` object, an `ImageData` object, a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object, or another `ImageBitmap` object, and returns a `Promise` that is resolved when a new `ImageBitmap` is created.

  If no `ImageBitmap` object can be constructed, for example because the provided image data is not actually an image, then the promise is rejected instead.

  If sx, sy, sw, and sh arguments are provided, the source image is cropped to the given pixels, with any pixels missing in the original replaced by transparent black. These coordinates are in the source image's pixel coordinate space, not in CSS pixels.

  Throws an `InvalidStateError` exception if the source image is not in a valid state (e.g. an `img` element that hasn't finished loading, or a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object whose bitmap data has zero length along one or both dimensions, or an `ImageData` object whose data is `data` attribute has been neutered). Throws a `SecurityError` exception if the script is not allowed to access the image data of the source image (e.g. a `video` that is CORS-cross-origin, or a `canvas` being drawn on by a script in a worker from another origin).

imageBitmap . `width`

  Returns the intrinsic width of the image, in CSS pixels.

imageBitmap . `height`

  Returns the intrinsic height of the image, in CSS pixels.

An `ImageBitmap` object always has associated bitmap data, with a width and a height. However, it is possible for this data to be corrupted. If an `ImageBitmap` object's media data can be decoded without errors, it is said to be fully decodable.

An `ImageBitmap` object can be obtained from a variety of different objects, using the `createImageBitmap()` method. When invoked, the method must act as follows:

If image is an `img` element

  1. If either the sw or sh arguments are specified but zero, throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

  2. If the `img` element is not completely available, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  3. If the origin of the `img` element's image is not the same origin as the origin specified by the entry settings object, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

  4. If the `img` element's media data is not a bitmap (e.g. it's a vector graphic), then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  5. Create a new `ImageBitmap` object.

  6. Let the `ImageBitmap` object's bitmap data be a copy of the `img` element's media data, cropped to the source rectangle. If this is an animated image, the `ImageBitmap` object's bitmap data must only be taken from the default image of the animation (the one that the format defines is to be used when animation is not supported or is disabled), or, if there is no such image, the first frame of the animation.

  7. Return a new `Promise`, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

  8. Fulfill the `Promise`'s associated resolver, with the new `ImageBitmap` object as the value.

If image is a `video` element

  1. If either the sw or sh arguments are specified but zero, throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

  2. If the `video` element's `networkState` attribute is `NETWORK_EMPTY`, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  3. If the origin of the `video` element is not the same origin as the origin specified by the entry settings object, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

  4. If the `video` element's `readyState` attribute is either `HAVE_NOTHING` or `HAVE_METADATA`, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  5. Create a new `ImageBitmap` object.

  6. Let the `ImageBitmap` object's bitmap data be a copy of the frame at the current playback position, at the media resource's intrinsic width and intrinsic height (i.e. after any aspect-ratio correction has been applied), cropped to the source rectangle.

  7. Return a new `Promise`, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

  8. Fulfill the `Promise`'s associated resolver, with the new `ImageBitmap` object as the value.

If image is a `canvas` element

  1. If either the sw or sh arguments are specified but zero, throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

  2. If the `canvas` element's bitmap data does not have its origin-clean flag set, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  3. If the `canvas` element's bitmap has either a horizontal dimension or a vertical dimension equal to zero, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  4. Create a new `ImageBitmap` object.

  5. Let the `ImageBitmap` object's bitmap data be a copy of the `canvas` element's bitmap data, cropped to the source rectangle.

  6. Return a new `Promise`, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

  7. Fulfill the `Promise`'s associated resolver, with the new `ImageBitmap` object as the value.

If image is a `Blob` object

  1. If either the sw or sh arguments are specified but zero, throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

  2. If the `Blob` object has been disabled through the `close()` method, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  3. Return a new `Promise`, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

  4. Read the `Blob` object's data. If an error occurs during reading of the object, then reject the `Promise`'s associated resolver, with null as the value, and abort these steps.

  5. Apply the image sniffing rules to determine the file format of the image data, with MIME type of the `Blob` (as given by the `Blob` object's `type` attribute) giving the official type.

  6. If the image data is not in a supported file format (e.g. it's not actually an image at all), or if the image data is corrupted in some fatal way such that the image dimensions cannot be obtained, then reject the `Promise`'s associated resolver, with null as the value, and abort these steps.

  7. Create a new `ImageBitmap` object.

  8. Let the `ImageBitmap` object's bitmap data be the image data read from the `Blob` object, cropped to the source rectangle. If this is an animated image, the `ImageBitmap` object's bitmap data must only be taken from the default image of the animation (the one that the format defines is to be used when animation is not supported or is disabled), or, if there is no such image, the first frame of the animation.

  9. Fulfill the `Promise`'s associated resolver, with the new `ImageBitmap` object as the value.

If image is an `ImageData` object

  1. If either the sw or sh arguments are specified but zero, throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

  2. If the image object's `data` attribute has been neutered, throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  3. Create a new `ImageBitmap` object.

  4. Let the `ImageBitmap` object's bitmap data be the image data given by the `ImageData` object, cropped to the source rectangle.

  5. Return a new `Promise`, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

  6. Fulfill the `Promise`'s associated resolver, with the new `ImageBitmap` object as the value.

If image is a `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object

  1. If either the sw or sh arguments are specified but zero, throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

  2. If the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's scratch bitmap does not have its origin-clean flag set, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  3. If the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's scratch bitmap has either a horizontal dimension or a vertical dimension equal to zero, then throw an `InvalidStateError` exception and abort these steps.

  4. Create a new `ImageBitmap` object.

  5. Let the `ImageBitmap` object's bitmap data be a copy of the `CanvasRenderingContext2D` object's scratch bitmap, cropped to the source rectangle.

  6. Return a new `Promise`, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

  7. Fulfill the `Promise`'s associated resolver, with the new `ImageBitmap` object as the value.

If image is an `ImageBitmap` object

  1. If either the sw or sh arguments are specified but zero, throw an `IndexSizeError` exception and abort these steps.

  2. Create a new `ImageBitmap` object.

  3. Let the `ImageBitmap` object's bitmap data be a copy of the image argument's bitmap data, cropped to the source rectangle.

  4. Return a new `Promise`, but continue running these steps asynchronously.

  5. Fulfill the `Promise`'s associated resolver, with the new `ImageBitmap` object as the value.

When the steps above require that the user agent crop bitmap data to the source rectangle, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let input be the image data being cropped.

2. If the sx, sy, sw, and sh arguments are omitted, return input.

3. Place input on an infinite transparent black grid plane, positioned so that it's top left corner is at the origin of the plane, with the x-coordinate increasing to the right, and the y-coordinate increasing down, and with each pixel in the input image data occupying a cell on the plane's grid.

4. Let output be the rectangle on the plane denoted by the rectangle whose corners are the four points (sx, sy), (sx+sw, sy), (sx+sw, sy+sh), (sx, sy+sh).

   If either sw or sh are negative, then the top-left corner of this rectangle will be to the left or above the (sx, sy) point. If any of the pixels on this rectangle are outside the area where the input bitmap was placed, then they will be transparent black in output.

5. Return output.

The `width` attribute must return the `ImageBitmap` object's width, in CSS pixels.

The `height` attribute must return the `ImageBitmap` object's height, in CSS pixels.

Using this API, a sprite sheet can be precut and prepared:

    var sprites = {};
    function loadMySprites() {
      var image = new Image();
      image.src = 'mysprites.png';
      var resolver;
      var promise = new Promise(function (arg) { resolver = arg });
      image.onload = function () {
        resolver.resolve(Promise.every(
          createImageBitmap(image,  0,  0, 40, 40).then(function (image) { sprites.woman = image }),
          createImageBitmap(image, 40,  0, 40, 40).then(function (image) { sprites.man   = image }),
          createImageBitmap(image, 80,  0, 40, 40).then(function (image) { sprites.tree  = image }),
          createImageBitmap(image,  0, 40, 40, 40).then(function (image) { sprites.hut   = image }),
          createImageBitmap(image, 40, 40, 40, 40).then(function (image) { sprites.apple = image }),
          createImageBitmap(image, 80, 40, 40, 40).then(function (image) { sprites.snake = image }),
        ));
      };
      return promise;
    }

    function runDemo() {
      var canvas = document.querySelector('canvas#demo');
      var context = canvas.getContext('2d');
      context.drawImage(sprites.tree, 30, 10);
      context.drawImage(sprites.snake, 70, 10);
    }

    loadMySprites().then(runDemo);

## 9 Communication

### 9.1 The `MessageEvent` interfaces

Messages in server-sent events, Web sockets, cross-document messaging, channel messaging, and broadcast channels use the `MessageEvent` interface for their `message` events:

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional MessageEventInit eventInitDict), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface MessageEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute any data;
      readonly attribute DOMString origin;
      readonly attribute DOMString lastEventId;
      readonly attribute (WindowProxy or MessagePort)? source;
      readonly attribute MessagePort[]? ports;

      void initMessageEvent(in DOMString typeArg, in boolean canBubbleArg, in boolean cancelableArg, in any dataArg, in DOMString originArg, in DOMString lastEventIdArg, in (WindowProxy or MessagePort) sourceArg, in MessagePort[]? portsArg);
    };

    dictionary MessageEventInit : EventInit {
      any data;
      DOMString origin;
      DOMString lastEventId;
      (WindowProxy or MessagePort)? source;
      sequence<MessagePort> ports;
    };

event . `data`

  Returns the data of the message.

event . `origin`

  Returns the origin of the message, for server-sent events and cross-document messaging.

event . `lastEventId`

  Returns the last event ID string, for server-sent events.

event . `source`

  Returns the `WindowProxy` of the source window, for cross-document messaging, and the `MessagePort` being attached, in the `connect` event fired at `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` objects.

event . `ports`

  Returns the `MessagePort` array sent with the message, for cross-document messaging and channel messaging.

The `data` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the message being sent.

The `origin` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to the empty string. It represents, in server-sent events and cross-document messaging, the origin of the document that sent the message (typically the scheme, hostname, and port of the document, but not its path or fragment identifier).

The `lastEventId` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to the empty string. It represents, in server-sent events, the last event ID string of the event source.

The `source` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents, in cross-document messaging, the `WindowProxy` of the browsing context of the `Window` object from which the message came; and in the `connect` events used by shared workers, the newly connecting `MessagePort`.

The `ports` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents, in cross-document messaging and channel messaging, the `MessagePort` array being sent, if any.

The `initMessageEvent()` method must initialise the event in a manner analogous to the similarly-named `initEvent()` method. [DOM]

### 9.2 Server-sent events

#### 9.2.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

To enable servers to push data to Web pages over HTTP or using dedicated server-push protocols, this specification introduces the `EventSource` interface.

Using this API consists of creating an `EventSource` object and registering an event listener.

    var source = new EventSource('updates.cgi');
    source.onmessage = function (event) {
      alert(event.data);
    };

On the server-side, the script ("`updates.cgi`" in this case) sends messages in the following form, with the `text/event-stream` MIME type:

    data: This is the first message.

    data: This is the second message, it
    data: has two lines.

    data: This is the third message.

Authors can separate events by using different event types. Here is a stream that has two event types, "add" and "remove":

    event: add
    data: 73857293

    event: remove
    data: 2153

    event: add
    data: 113411

The script to handle such a stream would look like this (where `addHandler` and `removeHandler` are functions that take one argument, the event):

    var source = new EventSource('updates.cgi');
    source.addEventListener('add', addHandler, false);
    source.addEventListener('remove', removeHandler, false);

The default event type is "message".

Event streams are always decoded as UTF-8. There is no way to specify another character encoding.

Event stream requests can be redirected using HTTP 301 and 307 redirects as with normal HTTP requests. Clients will reconnect if the connection is closed; a client can be told to stop reconnecting using the HTTP 204 No Content response code.

Using this API rather than emulating it using `XMLHttpRequest` or an `iframe` allows the user agent to make better use of network resources in cases where the user agent implementor and the network operator are able to coordinate in advance. Amongst other benefits, this can result in significant savings in battery life on portable devices. This is discussed further in the section below on connectionless push.

#### 9.2.2 The `EventSource` interface

    [Constructor(DOMString url, optional EventSourceInit eventSourceInitDict), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface EventSource : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute DOMString url;
      readonly attribute boolean withCredentials;

      // ready state
      const unsigned short CONNECTING = 0;
      const unsigned short OPEN = 1;
      const unsigned short CLOSED = 2;
      readonly attribute unsigned short readyState;

      // networking
               attribute EventHandler onopen;
               attribute EventHandler onmessage;
               attribute EventHandler onerror;
      void close();
    };

    dictionary EventSourceInit {
      boolean withCredentials = false;
    };

The `EventSource()` constructor takes one or two arguments. The first specifies the URL to which to connect. The second specifies the settings, if any, in the form of an `EventSourceInit` dictionary. When the `EventSource()` constructor is invoked, the UA must run these steps:

1. Resolve the URL specified in the first argument, relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object.

2. If the previous step failed, then throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.

3. Create a new `EventSource` object.

4. Let CORS mode be Anonymous.

5. If the second argument is present, and the `withCredentials` dictionary member has the value true, then set CORS mode to Use Credentials and initialise the new `EventSource` object's `withCredentials` attribute to true.

6. Return the new `EventSource` object, but continue these steps asynchronously.

7. Do a potentially CORS-enabled fetch of the resulting absolute URL using the API referrer source specified by the entry settings object, with the mode being CORS mode, and the origin being the origin specified by the entry settings object, and process the resource obtained in this fashion, if any, as described below.

   The definition of the fetching algorithm (which is used by CORS) is such that if the browser is already fetching the resource identified by the given absolute URL, that connection can be reused, instead of a new connection being established. All messages received up to this point are dispatched immediately, in this case.

The `url` attribute must return the absolute URL that resulted from resolving the value that was passed to the constructor.

The `withCredentials` attribute must return the value to which it was last initialized. When the object is created, it must be initialised to false.

The `readyState` attribute represents the state of the connection. It can have the following values:

`CONNECTING` (numeric value 0)
  The connection has not yet been established, or it was closed and the user agent is reconnecting.
`OPEN` (numeric value 1)
  The user agent has an open connection and is dispatching events as it receives them.
`CLOSED` (numeric value 2)
  The connection is not open, and the user agent is not trying to reconnect. Either there was a fatal error or the `close()` method was invoked.

When the object is created its `readyState` must be set to `CONNECTING` (0). The rules given below for handling the connection define when the value changes.

The `close()` method must abort any instances of the fetch algorithm started for this `EventSource` object, and must set the `readyState` attribute to `CLOSED`.

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `EventSource` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onopen` | `open`
`onmessage` | `message`
`onerror` | `error`

In addition to the above, each `EventSource` object has the following associated with it:

- A reconnection time, in milliseconds. This must initially be a user-agent-defined value, probably in the region of a few seconds.
- A last event ID string. This must initially be the empty string.

These values are not currently exposed on the interface.

#### 9.2.3 Processing model

The resource indicated in the argument to the `EventSource` constructor is fetched when the constructor is run.

For HTTP connections, the `Accept` header may be included; if included, it must contain only formats of event framing that are supported by the user agent (one of which must be `text/event-stream`, as described below).

If the event source's last event ID string is not the empty string, then a `Last-Event-ID` HTTP header must be included with the request, whose value is the value of the event source's last event ID string, encoded as UTF-8.

User agents should use the `Cache-Control: no-cache` header in requests to bypass any caches for requests of event sources. (This header is not a custom request header, so the user agent will still use the CORS simple cross-origin request mechanism.) User agents should ignore HTTP cache headers in the response, never caching event sources.

As data is received, the tasks queued by the networking task source to handle the data must act as follows.

HTTP 200 OK responses with a Content-Type header specifying the type `text/event-stream`, ignoring any MIME type parameters, must be processed line by line as described below.

When a successful response with a supported MIME type is received, such that the user agent begins parsing the contents of the stream, the user agent must announce the connection.

The task that the networking task source places on the task queue once the fetching algorithm for such a resource (with the correct MIME type) has completed must cause the user agent to asynchronously reestablish the connection. This applies whether the connection is closed gracefully or unexpectedly (but does not apply when the fetch algorithm is canceled by the user agent, e.g. in response to `window.stop()`, since in those cases the final task is actually discarded). It doesn't apply for the error conditions listed below except where explicitly specified.

HTTP 200 OK responses that have a Content-Type specifying an unsupported type, or that have no Content-Type at all, must cause the user agent to fail the connection.

HTTP 305 Use Proxy, 401 Unauthorized, and 407 Proxy Authentication Required should be treated transparently as for any other subresource.

HTTP 301 Moved Permanently, 302 Found, 303 See Other, and 307 Temporary Redirect responses are handled by the fetching and CORS algorithms. In the case of 301 redirects, the user agent must also remember the new URL so that subsequent requests for this resource for this `EventSource` object start with the URL given for the last 301 seen for requests for this object.

Network errors that prevents the connection from being established in the first place (e.g. DNS errors), must cause the user agent to asynchronously reestablish the connection.

Any other HTTP response code not listed here, as well as the cancelation of the fetch algorithm by the user agent (e.g. in response to `window.stop()` or the user canceling the network connection manually) must cause the user agent to fail the connection.

For non-HTTP protocols, UAs should act in equivalent ways.

When a user agent is to announce the connection, the user agent must queue a task which, if the `readyState` attribute is set to a value other than `CLOSED`, sets the `readyState` attribute to `OPEN` and fires a simple event named `open` at the `EventSource` object.

When a user agent is to reestablish the connection, the user agent must run the following steps. These steps are run asynchronously, not as part of a task. (The tasks that it queues, of course, are run like normal tasks and not asynchronously.)

1. Queue a task to run the following steps:

   1. If the `readyState` attribute is set to `CLOSED`, abort the task.

   2. Set the `readyState` attribute to `CONNECTING`.

   3. Fire a simple event named `error` at the `EventSource` object.

2. Wait a delay equal to the reconnection time of the event source.

3. Optionally, wait some more. In particular, if the previous attempt failed, then user agents might introduce an exponential backoff delay to avoid overloading a potentially already overloaded server. Alternatively, if the operating system has reported that there is no network connectivity, user agents might wait for the operating system to announce that the network connection has returned before retrying.

4. Wait until the aforementioned task has run, if it has not yet run.

5. Queue a task to run the following steps:

   1. If the `readyState` attribute is not set to `CONNECTING`, abort these steps.

   2. Perform a potentially CORS-enabled fetch of the absolute URL of the event source resource, using the same referrer source, and with the same mode and origin, as those used in the original request triggered by the `EventSource()` constructor, and process the resource obtained in this fashion, if any, as described earlier in this section.

When a user agent is to fail the connection, the user agent must queue a task which, if the `readyState` attribute is set to a value other than `CLOSED`, sets the `readyState` attribute to `CLOSED` and fires a simple event named `error` at the `EventSource` object. Once the user agent has failed the connection, it does not attempt to reconnect!

The task source for any tasks that are queued by `EventSource` objects is the remote event task source.

#### 9.2.4 Parsing an event stream

This event stream format's MIME type is `text/event-stream`.

The event stream format is as described by the `stream` production of the following ABNF, the character set for which is Unicode. [ABNF]

    stream        = [ bom ] *event
    event         = *( comment / field ) end-of-line
    comment       = colon *any-char end-of-line
    field         = 1*name-char [ colon [ space ] *any-char ] end-of-line
    end-of-line   = ( cr lf / cr / lf )

    ; characters
    lf            = %x000A ; U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
    cr            = %x000D ; U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR)
    space         = %x0020 ; U+0020 SPACE
    colon         = %x003A ; U+003A COLON (:)
    bom           = %xFEFF ; U+FEFF BYTE ORDER MARK
    name-char     = %x0000-0009 / %x000B-000C / %x000E-0039 / %x003B-10FFFF
                    ; a Unicode character other than U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+003A COLON (:)
    any-char      = %x0000-0009 / %x000B-000C / %x000E-10FFFF
                    ; a Unicode character other than U+000A LINE FEED (LF) or U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR)

Event streams in this format must always be encoded as UTF-8. [ENCODING]

Lines must be separated by either a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED (CRLF) character pair, a single U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, or a single U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character.

Since connections established to remote servers for such resources are expected to be long-lived, UAs should ensure that appropriate buffering is used. In particular, while line buffering with lines are defined to end with a single U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character is safe, block buffering or line buffering with different expected line endings can cause delays in event dispatch.

#### 9.2.5 Interpreting an event stream

Streams must be decoded using the UTF-8 decode algorithm.

The UTF-8 decode algorithm strips one leading UTF-8 Byte Order Mark (BOM), if any.

The stream must then be parsed by reading everything line by line, with a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN U+000A LINE FEED (CRLF) character pair, a single U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character not preceded by a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character, and a single U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character not followed by a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character being the ways in which a line can end.

When a stream is parsed, a data buffer, an event type buffer, and a last event ID buffer must be associated with it. They must be initialised to the empty string

Lines must be processed, in the order they are received, as follows:

If the line is empty (a blank line)

  Dispatch the event, as defined below.

If the line starts with a U+003A COLON character (:)

  Ignore the line.

If the line contains a U+003A COLON character (:)

  Collect the characters on the line before the first U+003A COLON character (:), and let field be that string.

  Collect the characters on the line after the first U+003A COLON character (:), and let value be that string. If value starts with a U+0020 SPACE character, remove it from value.

  Process the field using the steps described below, using field as the field name and value as the field value.

Otherwise, the string is not empty but does not contain a U+003A COLON character (:)

  Process the field using the steps described below, using the whole line as the field name, and the empty string as the field value.

Once the end of the file is reached, any pending data must be discarded. (If the file ends in the middle of an event, before the final empty line, the incomplete event is not dispatched.)

The steps to process the field given a field name and a field value depend on the field name, as given in the following list. Field names must be compared literally, with no case folding performed.

If the field name is "event"

  Set the event type buffer to field value.

If the field name is "data"

  Append the field value to the data buffer, then append a single U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character to the data buffer.

If the field name is "id"

  Set the last event ID buffer to the field value.

If the field name is "retry"

  If the field value consists of only ASCII digits, then interpret the field value as an integer in base ten, and set the event stream's reconnection time to that integer. Otherwise, ignore the field.

Otherwise

  The field is ignored.

When the user agent is required to dispatch the event, the user agent must process the data buffer, the event type buffer, and the last event ID buffer using steps appropriate for the user agent.

For Web browsers, the appropriate steps to dispatch the event are as follows:

1. Set the last event ID string of the event source to the value of the last event ID buffer. The buffer does not get reset, so the last event ID string of the event source remains set to this value until the next time it is set by the server.

2. If the data buffer is an empty string, set the data buffer and the event type buffer to the empty string and abort these steps.

3. If the data buffer's last character is a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, then remove the last character from the data buffer.

4. Create an event that uses the `MessageEvent` interface, with the event type `message`, which does not bubble, is not cancelable, and has no default action. The `data` attribute must be initialized to the value of the data buffer, the `origin` attribute must be initialised to the Unicode serialisation of the origin of the event stream's final URL (i.e. the URL after redirects), and the `lastEventId` attribute must be initialised to the last event ID string of the event source. This event is not trusted.

5. If the event type buffer has a value other than the empty string, change the type of the newly created event to equal the value of the event type buffer.

6. Set the data buffer and the event type buffer to the empty string.

7. Queue a task which, if the `readyState` attribute is set to a value other than `CLOSED`, dispatches the newly created event at the `EventSource` object.

If an event doesn't have an "id" field, but an earlier event did set the event source's last event ID string, then the event's `lastEventId` field will be set to the value of whatever the last seen "id" field was.

For other user agents, the appropriate steps to dispatch the event are implementation dependent, but at a minimum they must set the data and event type buffers to the empty string before returning.

The following event stream, once followed by a blank line:

    data: YHOO
    data: +2
    data: 10

...would cause an event `message` with the interface `MessageEvent` to be dispatched on the `EventSource` object. The event's `data` attribute would contain the string "`YHOO\n+2\n10`" (where "`\n`" represents a newline).

This could be used as follows:

    var stocks = new EventSource("http://stocks.example.com/ticker.php");
    stocks.onmessage = function (event) {
      var data = event.data.split('\n');
      updateStocks(data[0], data[1], data[2]);
    };

...where `updateStocks()` is a function defined as:

    function updateStocks(symbol, delta, value) { ... }

...or some such.

The following stream contains four blocks. The first block has just a comment, and will fire nothing. The second block has two fields with names "data" and "id" respectively; an event will be fired for this block, with the data "first event", and will then set the last event ID to "1" so that if the connection died between this block and the next, the server would be sent a `Last-Event-ID` header with the value "1". The third block fires an event with data "second event", and also has an "id" field, this time with no value, which resets the last event ID to the empty string (meaning no `Last-Event-ID` header will now be sent in the event of a reconnection being attempted). Finally, the last block just fires an event with the data " third event" (with a single leading space character). Note that the last still has to end with a blank line, the end of the stream is not enough to trigger the dispatch of the last event.

    : test stream

    data: first event
    id: 1

    data:second event
    id

    data:  third event

The following stream fires two events:

    data

    data
    data

    data:

The first block fires events with the data set to the empty string, as would the last block if it was followed by a blank line. The middle block fires an event with the data set to a single newline character. The last block is discarded because it is not followed by a blank line.

The following stream fires two identical events:

    data:test

    data: test

This is because the space after the colon is ignored if present.

#### 9.2.6 Authoring notes

Legacy proxy servers are known to, in certain cases, drop HTTP connections after a short timeout. To protect against such proxy servers, authors can include a comment line (one starting with a ':' character) every 15 seconds or so.

Authors wishing to relate event source connections to each other or to specific documents previously served might find that relying on IP addresses doesn't work, as individual clients can have multiple IP addresses (due to having multiple proxy servers) and individual IP addresses can have multiple clients (due to sharing a proxy server). It is better to include a unique identifier in the document when it is served and then pass that identifier as part of the URL when the connection is established.

Authors are also cautioned that HTTP chunking can have unexpected negative effects on the reliability of this protocol. Where possible, chunking should be disabled for serving event streams unless the rate of messages is high enough for this not to matter.

Clients that support HTTP's per-server connection limitation might run into trouble when opening multiple pages from a site if each page has an `EventSource` to the same domain. Authors can avoid this using the relatively complex mechanism of using unique domain names per connection, or by allowing the user to enable or disable the `EventSource` functionality on a per-page basis, or by sharing a single `EventSource` object using a shared worker.

#### 9.2.7 Connectionless push and other features

User agents running in controlled environments, e.g. browsers on mobile handsets tied to specific carriers, may offload the management of the connection to a proxy on the network. In such a situation, the user agent for the purposes of conformance is considered to include both the handset software and the network proxy.

For example, a browser on a mobile device, after having established a connection, might detect that it is on a supporting network and request that a proxy server on the network take over the management of the connection. The timeline for such a situation might be as follows:

1. Browser connects to a remote HTTP server and requests the resource specified by the author in the `EventSource` constructor.
2. The server sends occasional messages.
3. In between two messages, the browser detects that it is idle except for the network activity involved in keeping the TCP connection alive, and decides to switch to sleep mode to save power.
4. The browser disconnects from the server.
5. The browser contacts a service on the network, and requests that that service, a "push proxy", maintain the connection instead.
6. The "push proxy" service contacts the remote HTTP server and requests the resource specified by the author in the `EventSource` constructor (possibly including a `Last-Event-ID` HTTP header, etc).
7. The browser allows the mobile device to go to sleep.
8. The server sends another message.
9. The "push proxy" service uses a technology such as OMA push to convey the event to the mobile device, which wakes only enough to process the event and then returns to sleep.

This can reduce the total data usage, and can therefore result in considerable power savings.

As well as implementing the existing API and `text/event-stream` wire format as defined by this specification and in more distributed ways as described above, formats of event framing defined by other applicable specifications may be supported. This specification does not define how they are to be parsed or processed.

#### 9.2.8 Garbage collection

While an `EventSource` object's `readyState` is `CONNECTING`, and the object has one or more event listeners registered for `open`, `message` or `error` events, there must be a strong reference from the `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object that the `EventSource` object's constructor was invoked from to the `EventSource` object itself.

While an `EventSource` object's `readyState` is `OPEN`, and the object has one or more event listeners registered for `message` or `error` events, there must be a strong reference from the `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object that the `EventSource` object's constructor was invoked from to the `EventSource` object itself.

While there is a task queued by an `EventSource` object on the remote event task source, there must be a strong reference from the `Window` or `WorkerGlobalScope` object that the `EventSource` object's constructor was invoked from to that `EventSource` object.

If a user agent is to forcibly close an `EventSource` object (this happens when a `Document` object goes away permanently), the user agent must abort any instances of the fetch algorithm started for this `EventSource` object, and must set the `readyState` attribute to `CLOSED`.

If an `EventSource` object is garbage collected while its connection is still open, the user agent must abort any instance of the fetch algorithm opened by this `EventSource`.

It's possible for one active network connection to be shared by multiple `EventSource` objects and their fetch algorithms, which is why the above is phrased in terms of aborting the fetch algorithm and not the actual underlying download.

#### 9.2.9 Implementation advice

This section is non-normative.

User agents are strongly urged to provide detailed diagnostic information about `EventSource` objects and their related network connections in their development consoles, to aid authors in debugging code using this API.

For example, a user agent could have a panel displaying all the `EventSource` objects a page has created, each listing the constructor's arguments, whether there was a network error, what the CORS status of the connection is and what headers were sent by the client and received from the server to lead to that status, the messages that were received and how they were parsed, and so forth.

Implementations are especially encouraged to report detailed information to their development consoles whenever an `error` event is fired, since little to no information can be made available in the events themselves.

#### 9.2.10 IANA considerations

##### 9.2.10.1 `text/event-stream`

This registration is for community review and will be submitted to the IESG for review, approval, and registration with IANA.

Type name:
  text
Subtype name:
  event-stream
Required parameters:
  No parameters
Optional parameters:
  `charset`

    The `charset` parameter may be provided. The parameter's value must be "`utf-8`". This parameter serves no purpose; it is only allowed for compatibility with legacy servers.

Encoding considerations:
  8bit (always UTF-8)
Security considerations:

  An event stream from an origin distinct from the origin of the content consuming the event stream can result in information leakage. To avoid this, user agents are required to apply CORS semantics. [FETCH]

  Event streams can overwhelm a user agent; a user agent is expected to apply suitable restrictions to avoid depleting local resources because of an overabundance of information from an event stream.

  Servers can be overwhelmed if a situation develops in which the server is causing clients to reconnect rapidly. Servers should use a 5xx status code to indicate capacity problems, as this will prevent conforming clients from reconnecting automatically.

Interoperability considerations:
  Rules for processing both conforming and non-conforming content are defined in this specification.
Published specification:
  This document is the relevant specification.
Applications that use this media type:
  Web browsers and tools using Web services.
Additional information:
  Magic number(s):
    No sequence of bytes can uniquely identify an event stream.
  File extension(s):
    No specific file extensions are recommended for this type.
  Macintosh file type code(s):
    No specific Macintosh file type codes are recommended for this type.
Person & email address to contact for further information:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Intended usage:
  Common
Restrictions on usage:
  This format is only expected to be used by dynamic open-ended streams served using HTTP or a similar protocol. Finite resources are not expected to be labeled with this type.
Author:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Change controller:
  W3C

Fragment identifiers have no meaning with `text/event-stream` resources.

##### 9.2.10.2 `Last-Event-ID`

This section describes a header for registration in the Permanent Message Header Field Registry. [RFC3864]

Header field name:
  Last-Event-ID
Applicable protocol:
  http
Status:
  standard
Author/Change controller:
  W3C
Specification document(s):
  This document is the relevant specification.
Related information:
  None.

### 9.3 Web sockets

#### 9.3.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

To enable Web applications to maintain bidirectional communications with server-side processes, this specification introduces the `WebSocket` interface.

This interface does not allow for raw access to the underlying network. For example, this interface could not be used to implement an IRC client without proxying messages through a custom server.

#### 9.3.2 The `WebSocket` interface

    enum BinaryType { "blob", "arraybuffer" };
    [Constructor(DOMString url, optional (DOMString or DOMString[]) protocols), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface WebSocket : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute DOMString url;

      // ready state
      const unsigned short CONNECTING = 0;
      const unsigned short OPEN = 1;
      const unsigned short CLOSING = 2;
      const unsigned short CLOSED = 3;
      readonly attribute unsigned short readyState;
      readonly attribute unsigned long bufferedAmount;

      // networking
               attribute EventHandler onopen;
               attribute EventHandler onerror;
               attribute EventHandler onclose;
      readonly attribute DOMString extensions;
      readonly attribute DOMString protocol;
      void close([Clamp] optional unsigned short code, optional DOMString reason);

      // messaging
               attribute EventHandler onmessage;
               attribute BinaryType binaryType;
      void send(DOMString data);
      void send(Blob data);
      void send(ArrayBuffer data);
      void send(ArrayBufferView data);
    };

The `WebSocket(url, protocols)` constructor takes one or two arguments. The first argument, url, specifies the URL to which to connect. The second, protocols, if present, is either a string or an array of strings. If it is a string, it is equivalent to an array consisting of just that string; if it is omitted, it is equivalent to the empty array. Each string in the array is a subprotocol name. The connection will only be established if the server reports that it has selected one of these subprotocols. The subprotocol names must all be strings that match the requirements for elements that comprise the value of `Sec-WebSocket-Protocol` fields as defined by the WebSocket protocol specification. [WSP]

When the `WebSocket()` constructor is invoked, the UA must run these steps:

1. Parse a WebSocket URL's components from the url argument, to obtain host, port, resource name, and secure. If this fails, throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps. [WSP]

2. If secure is false but the origin specified by the entry settings object has a scheme component that is itself a secure protocol, e.g. HTTPS, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

3. If port is a port to which the user agent is configured to block access, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps. (User agents typically block access to well-known ports like SMTP.)

   Access to ports 80 and 443 should not be blocked, including the unlikely cases when secure is false but port is 443 or secure is true but port is 80.

4. If protocols is absent, let protocols be an empty array.

   Otherwise, if protocols is present and a string, let protocols instead be an array consisting of just that string.

5. If any of the values in protocols occur more than once or otherwise fail to match the requirements for elements that comprise the value of `Sec-WebSocket-Protocol` fields as defined by the WebSocket protocol specification, then throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps. [WSP]

6. Let origin be the ASCII serialisation of the origin specified by the entry settings object, converted to ASCII lowercase.

7. Return a new `WebSocket` object, but continue these steps asynchronously.

8. Let the new object's client-specified protocols be the values (if any) given in protocols.

9. Establish a WebSocket connection given the set (host, port, resource name, secure), along with the protocols list, an empty list for the extensions, and origin. The headers to send appropriate cookies must be a `Cookie` header whose value is the cookie-string computed from the user's cookie store and the URL url; for these purposes this is not a "non-HTTP" API. [WSP] [COOKIES]

   When the user agent validates the server's response during the "establish a WebSocket connection" algorithm, if the status code received from the server is not 101 (e.g. it is a redirect), the user agent must fail the WebSocket connection.

   Following HTTP procedures here could introduce serious security problems in a Web browser context. For example, consider a host with a WebSocket server at one path and an open HTTP redirector at another. Suddenly, any script that can be given a particular WebSocket URL can be tricked into communicating to (and potentially sharing secrets with) any host on the Internet, even if the script checks that the URL has the right hostname.

   If the establish a WebSocket connection algorithm fails, it triggers the fail the WebSocket connection algorithm, which then invokes the close the WebSocket connection algorithm, which then establishes that the WebSocket connection is closed, which fires the `close` event as described below.

The `url` attribute must return the result of resolving the URL that was passed to the constructor, with the URL character encoding set to UTF-8. (It doesn't matter what it is resolved relative to, since we already know it is an absolute URL.)

The `readyState` attribute represents the state of the connection. It can have the following values:

`CONNECTING` (numeric value 0)
  The connection has not yet been established.
`OPEN` (numeric value 1)
  The WebSocket connection is established and communication is possible.
`CLOSING` (numeric value 2)
  The connection is going through the closing handshake, or the `close()` method has been invoked.
`CLOSED` (numeric value 3)
  The connection has been closed or could not be opened.

When the object is created its `readyState` must be set to `CONNECTING` (0).

The `extensions` attribute must initially return the empty string. After the WebSocket connection is established, its value might change, as defined below.

The `extensions` attribute returns the extensions selected by the server, if any. (Currently this will only ever be the empty string.)

The `protocol` attribute must initially return the empty string. After the WebSocket connection is established, its value might change, as defined below.

The `protocol` attribute returns the subprotocol selected by the server, if any. It can be used in conjunction with the array form of the constructor's second argument to perform subprotocol negotiation.

The `close()` method must run the following steps:

1. If the method's first argument is present but is neither an integer equal to 1000 nor an integer in the range 3000 to 4999, throw an `InvalidAccessError` exception and abort these steps.

2. If the method's second argument is present, then run these substeps:

   1. Let raw reason be the method's second argument.

   2. Let Unicode reason be the result of converting raw reason to a sequence of Unicode characters.

   3. Let reason be the result of encoding Unicode reason as UTF-8.

   4. If reason is longer than 123 bytes, then throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps. [ENCODING]

3. Run the first matching steps from the following list:

   If the `readyState` attribute is in the `CLOSING` (2) or `CLOSED` (3) state

     Do nothing.

     The connection is already closing or is already closed. If it has not already, a `close` event will eventually fire as described below.

   If the WebSocket connection is not yet established [WSP]

     Fail the WebSocket connection and set the `readyState` attribute's value to `CLOSING` (2). [WSP]

     The fail the WebSocket connection algorithm invokes the close the WebSocket connection algorithm, which then establishes that the WebSocket connection is closed, which fires the `close` event as described below.

   If the WebSocket closing handshake has not yet been started [WSP]

     Start the WebSocket closing handshake and set the `readyState` attribute's value to `CLOSING` (2). [WSP]

     If the first argument is present, then the status code to use in the WebSocket Close message must be the integer given by the first argument. [WSP]

     If the second argument is also present, then reason must be provided in the Close message after the status code. [ENCODING] [WSP]

     The start the WebSocket closing handshake algorithm eventually invokes the close the WebSocket connection algorithm, which then establishes that the WebSocket connection is closed, which fires the `close` event as described below.

   Otherwise

     Set the `readyState` attribute's value to `CLOSING` (2).

     The WebSocket closing handshake is started, and will eventually invoke the close the WebSocket connection algorithm, which will establish that the WebSocket connection is closed, and thus the `close` event will fire, as described below.

The `close()` method does not discard previously sent messages before starting the WebSocket closing handshake — even if, in practice, the user agent is still busy sending those messages, the handshake will only start after the messages are sent.

The `bufferedAmount` attribute must return the number of bytes of application data (UTF-8 text and binary data) that have been queued using `send()` but that, as of the last time the event loop reached step 1, had not yet been transmitted to the network. (This thus includes any text sent during the execution of the current task, regardless of whether the user agent is able to transmit text asynchronously with script execution.) This does not include framing overhead incurred by the protocol, or buffering done by the operating system or network hardware. If the connection is closed, this attribute's value will only increase with each call to the `send()` method (the number does not reset to zero once the connection closes).

In this simple example, the `bufferedAmount` attribute is used to ensure that updates are sent either at the rate of one update every 50ms, if the network can handle that rate, or at whatever rate the network can handle, if that is too fast.

    var socket = new WebSocket('ws://game.example.com:12010/updates');
    socket.onopen = function () {
      setInterval(function() {
        if (socket.bufferedAmount == 0)
          socket.send(getUpdateData());
      }, 50);
    };

The `bufferedAmount` attribute can also be used to saturate the network without sending the data at a higher rate than the network can handle, though this requires more careful monitoring of the value of the attribute over time.

When a `WebSocket` object is created, its `binaryType` IDL attribute must be set to the string "`blob`". On getting, it must return the last value it was set to. On setting, the user agent must set the IDL attribute to the new value.

This attribute allows authors to control how binary data is exposed to scripts. By setting the attribute to "`blob`", binary data is returned in `Blob` form; by setting it to "`arraybuffer`", it is returned in `ArrayBuffer` form. User agents can use this as a hint for how to handle incoming binary data: if the attribute is set to "`blob`", it is safe to spool it to disk, and if it is set to "`arraybuffer`", it is likely more efficient to keep the data in memory. Naturally, user agents are encouraged to use more subtle heuristics to decide whether to keep incoming data in memory or not, e.g. based on how big the data is or how common it is for a script to change the attribute at the last minute. This latter aspect is important in particular because it is quite possible for the attribute to be changed after the user agent has received the data but before the user agent has fired the event for it.

The `send(data)` method transmits data using the connection. If the `readyState` attribute is `CONNECTING`, it must throw an `InvalidStateError` exception. Otherwise, the user agent must run the appropriate set of steps from the following list:

If the argument is a string

  Let data be the result of converting the data argument to a sequence of Unicode characters. If the WebSocket connection is established and the WebSocket closing handshake has not yet started, then the user agent must send a WebSocket Message comprised of data using a text frame opcode; if the data cannot be sent, e.g. because it would need to be buffered but the buffer is full, the user agent must flag the WebSocket as full and then close the WebSocket connection. Any invocation of this method with a string argument that does not throw an exception must increase the `bufferedAmount` attribute by the number of bytes needed to express the argument as UTF-8. [UNICODE] [ENCODING] [WSP]

If the argument is a `Blob` object

  If the WebSocket connection is established, and the WebSocket closing handshake has not yet started, then the user agent must send a WebSocket Message comprised of data using a binary frame opcode; if the data cannot be sent, e.g. because it would need to be buffered but the buffer is full, the user agent must flag the WebSocket as full and then close the WebSocket connection. The data to be sent is the raw data represented by the `Blob` object. Any invocation of this method with a `Blob` argument that does not throw an exception must increase the `bufferedAmount` attribute by the size of the `Blob` object's raw data, in bytes. [WSP] [FILEAPI]

If the argument is an `ArrayBuffer` object

  If the WebSocket connection is established, and the WebSocket closing handshake has not yet started, then the user agent must send a WebSocket Message comprised of data using a binary frame opcode; if the data cannot be sent, e.g. because it would need to be buffered but the buffer is full, the user agent must flag the WebSocket as full and then close the WebSocket connection. The data to be sent is the data stored in the buffer described by the `ArrayBuffer` object. Any invocation of this method with an `ArrayBuffer` argument that does not throw an exception must increase the `bufferedAmount` attribute by the length of the `ArrayBuffer` in bytes. [WSP] [ECMA262]

If the argument is an object that matches the `ArrayBufferView` type definition

  If the WebSocket connection is established, and the WebSocket closing handshake has not yet started, then the user agent must send a WebSocket Message comprised of data using a binary frame opcode; if the data cannot be sent, e.g. because it would need to be buffered but the buffer is full, the user agent must flag the WebSocket as full and then close the WebSocket connection. The data to be sent is the data stored in the section of the buffer described by the `ArrayBuffer` object that data references. Any invocation of this method with this kind of argument that does not throw an exception must increase the `bufferedAmount` attribute by the length of data's buffer in bytes. [WSP] [ECMA262]

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `WebSocket` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onopen` | `open`
`onmessage` | `message`
`onerror` | `error`
`onclose` | `close`

#### 9.3.3 Feedback from the protocol

When the WebSocket connection is established, the user agent must queue a task to run these steps:

1. If the `WebSocket` object's client-specified protocols was not an empty list, but the subprotocol in use is the null value, then fail the WebSocket connection, set the `readyState` attribute's value to `CLOSING` (2), and abort these steps. [WSP]

2. Change the `readyState` attribute's value to `OPEN` (1).

3. Change the `extensions` attribute's value to the extensions in use, if is not the null value. [WSP]

4. Change the `protocol` attribute's value to the subprotocol in use, if is not the null value. [WSP]

5. Act as if the user agent had received a set-cookie-string consisting of the cookies set during the server's opening handshake, for the URL url given to the `WebSocket()` constructor. [COOKIES] [ENCODING] [WSP]

6. Fire a simple event named `open` at the `WebSocket` object.

When a WebSocket message has been received with type type and data data, the user agent must queue a task to follow these steps: [WSP]

1. If the `readyState` attribute's value is not `OPEN` (1), then abort these steps.

2. Let event be a newly created trusted event that uses the `MessageEvent` interface, with the event type `message`, which does not bubble, is not cancelable, and has no default action.

3. Initialise event's `origin` attribute to the Unicode serialisation of the origin of the URL that was passed to the `WebSocket` object's constructor.

4. If type indicates that the data is Text, then initialise event's `data` attribute to data.

   If type indicates that the data is Binary, and `binaryType` is set to "`blob`", then initialise event's `data` attribute to a new `Blob` object that represents data as its raw data. [FILEAPI]

   If type indicates that the data is Binary, and `binaryType` is set to "`arraybuffer`", then initialise event's `data` attribute to a new `ArrayBuffer` object whose contents are data. [ECMA262]

5. Dispatch event at the `WebSocket` object.

User agents are encouraged to check if they can perform the above steps efficiently before they run the task, picking tasks from other task queues while they prepare the buffers if not. For example, if the `binaryType` attribute was set to "`blob`" when the data arrived, and the user agent spooled all the data to disk, but just before running the above task for this particular message the script switched `binaryType` to "`arraybuffer`", the user agent would want to page the data back to RAM before running this task so as to avoid stalling the main thread while it created the `ArrayBuffer` object.

Here is an example of how to define a handler for the `message` event in the case of text frames:

    mysocket.onmessage = function (event) {
      if (event.data == 'on') {
        turnLampOn();
      } else if (event.data == 'off') {
        turnLampOff();
      }
    };

The protocol here is a trivial one, with the server just sending "on" or "off" messages.

When the WebSocket closing handshake is started, the user agent must queue a task to change the `readyState` attribute's value to `CLOSING` (2). (If the `close()` method was called, the `readyState` attribute's value will already be set to `CLOSING` (2) when this task runs.) [WSP]

When the WebSocket connection is closed, possibly cleanly, the user agent must queue a task to run the following substeps:

1. Change the `readyState` attribute's value to `CLOSED` (3).

2. If the user agent was required to fail the WebSocket connection, or if the the WebSocket connection was closed after being flagged as full, fire a simple event named `error` at the `WebSocket` object. [WSP]

3. Create a trusted event that uses the `CloseEvent` interface, with the event type `close`, which does not bubble, is not cancelable, has no default action, whose `wasClean` attribute is initialised to true if the connection closed cleanly and false otherwise, whose `code` attribute is initialised to the WebSocket connection close code, and whose `reason` attribute is initialised to the result of applying the UTF-8 decoder to the WebSocket connection close reason, and dispatch the event at the `WebSocket` object. [WSP]

User agents must not convey any failure information to scripts in a way that would allow a script to distinguish the following situations:

- A server whose host name could not be resolved.
- A server to which packets could not successfully be routed.
- A server that refused the connection on the specified port.
- A server that failed to correctly perform a TLS handshake (e.g., the server certificate can't be verified).
- A server that did not complete the opening handshake (e.g. because it was not a WebSocket server).
- A WebSocket server that sent a correct opening handshake, but that specified options that caused the client to drop the connection (e.g. the server specified a subprotocol that the client did not offer).
- A WebSocket server that abruptly closed the connection after successfully completing the opening handshake.

In all of these cases, the the WebSocket connection close code would be 1006, as required by the WebSocket Protocol specification. [WSP]

Allowing a script to distinguish these cases would allow a script to probe the user's local network in preparation for an attack.

In particular, this means the code 1015 is not used by the user agent (unless the server erroneously uses it in its close frame, of course).

The task source for all tasks queued in this section is the WebSocket task source.

#### 9.3.4 Ping and Pong frames

The WebSocket protocol specification defines Ping and Pong frames that can be used for keep-alive, heart-beats, network status probing, latency instrumentation, and so forth. These are not currently exposed in the API.

User agents may send ping and unsolicited pong frames as desired, for example in an attempt to maintain local network NAT mappings, to detect failed connections, or to display latency metrics to the user. User agents must not use pings or unsolicited pongs to aid the server; it is assumed that servers will solicit pongs whenever appropriate for the server's needs.

#### 9.3.5 Parsing WebSocket URLs

The steps to parse a WebSocket URL's components from a string url are as follows. These steps return either a host, a port, a resource name, and a secure flag, or they fail.

1. If the url string is not an absolute URL, then fail this algorithm.

2. Resolve the url string, with the URL character encoding set to UTF-8. [ENCODING]

   It doesn't matter what it is resolved relative to, since we already know it is an absolute URL at this point.

3. If the resulting parsed URL does not have a scheme component whose value is either "`ws`" or "`wss`", then fail this algorithm.

4. If the resulting parsed URL has a non-null fragment component, then fail this algorithm.

5. If the scheme component of the resulting parsed URL is "`ws`", set secure to false; otherwise, the scheme component is "`wss`", set secure to true.

6. Let host be the value of the resulting parsed URL's host component.

7. If the resulting parsed URL has a port component that is not the empty string, then let port be that component's value; otherwise, there is no explicit port.

8. If there is no explicit port, then: if secure is false, let port be 80, otherwise let port be 443.

9. Let resource name be the value of the resulting parsed URL's path component (which might be empty).

10. If resource name is the empty string, set it to a single character U+002F SOLIDUS (/).

11. If the resulting parsed URL has a non-null query component, then append a single U+003F QUESTION MARK character (?) to resource name, followed by the value of the query component.

12. Return host, port, resource name, and secure.

#### 9.3.6 The `CloseEvent` interfaces

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional CloseEventInit eventInitDict), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface CloseEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute boolean wasClean;
      readonly attribute unsigned short code;
      readonly attribute DOMString reason;
    };

    dictionary CloseEventInit : EventInit {
      boolean wasClean;
      unsigned short code;
      DOMString reason;
    };

The `wasClean` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to false. It represents whether the connection closed cleanly or not.

The `code` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to zero. It represents the WebSocket connection close code provided by the server.

The `reason` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to empty string. It represents the WebSocket connection close reason provided by the server.

#### 9.3.7 Garbage collection

A `WebSocket` object whose `readyState` attribute's value was set to `CONNECTING` (0) as of the last time the event loop reached step 1 must not be garbage collected if there are any event listeners registered for `open` events, `message` events, `error` events, or `close` events.

A `WebSocket` object whose `readyState` attribute's value was set to `OPEN` (1) as of the last time the event loop reached step 1 must not be garbage collected if there are any event listeners registered for `message` events, `error`, or `close` events.

A `WebSocket` object whose `readyState` attribute's value was set to `CLOSING` (2) as of the last time the event loop reached step 1 must not be garbage collected if there are any event listeners registered for `error` or `close` events.

A `WebSocket` object with an established connection that has data queued to be transmitted to the network must not be garbage collected. [WSP]

If a `WebSocket` object is garbage collected while its connection is still open, the user agent must start the WebSocket closing handshake, with no status code for the Close message. [WSP]

If a user agent is to make disappear a `WebSocket` object (this happens when a `Document` object goes away), the user agent must follow the first appropriate set of steps from the following list:

If the WebSocket connection is not yet established [WSP]

  Fail the WebSocket connection. [WSP]

If the WebSocket closing handshake has not yet been started [WSP]

  Start the WebSocket closing handshake, with the status code to use in the WebSocket Close message being 1001. [WSP]

Otherwise

  Do nothing.

### 9.4 Cross-document messaging

Web browsers, for security and privacy reasons, prevent documents in different domains from affecting each other; that is, cross-site scripting is disallowed.

While this is an important security feature, it prevents pages from different domains from communicating even when those pages are not hostile. This section introduces a messaging system that allows documents to communicate with each other regardless of their source domain, in a way designed to not enable cross-site scripting attacks.

This API has some privacy implications that may not be immediately obvious.

The task source for the tasks in cross-document messaging is the posted message task source.

#### 9.4.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

For example, if document A contains an `iframe` element that contains document B, and script in document A calls `postMessage()` on the `Window` object of document B, then a message event will be fired on that object, marked as originating from the `Window` of document A. The script in document A might look like:

    var o = document.getElementsByTagName('iframe')[0];
    o.contentWindow.postMessage('Hello world', 'http://b.example.org/');

To register an event handler for incoming events, the script would use `addEventListener()` (or similar mechanisms). For example, the script in document B might look like:

    window.addEventListener('message', receiver, false);
    function receiver(e) {
      if (e.origin == 'http://example.com') {
        if (e.data == 'Hello world') {
          e.source.postMessage('Hello', e.origin);
        } else {
          alert(e.data);
        }
      }
    }

This script first checks the domain is the expected domain, and then looks at the message, which it either displays to the user, or responds to by sending a message back to the document which sent the message in the first place.

#### 9.4.2 Security

##### 9.4.2.1 Authors

Use of this API requires extra care to protect users from hostile entities abusing a site for their own purposes.

Authors should check the `origin` attribute to ensure that messages are only accepted from domains that they expect to receive messages from. Otherwise, bugs in the author's message handling code could be exploited by hostile sites.

Furthermore, even after checking the `origin` attribute, authors should also check that the data in question is of the expected format. Otherwise, if the source of the event has been attacked using a cross-site scripting flaw, further unchecked processing of information sent using the `postMessage()` method could result in the attack being propagated into the receiver.

Authors should not use the wildcard keyword (*) in the targetOrigin argument in messages that contain any confidential information, as otherwise there is no way to guarantee that the message is only delivered to the recipient to which it was intended.

Authors who accept messages from any origin are encouraged to consider the risks of a denial-of-service attack. An attacker could send a high volume of messages; if the receiving page performs expensive computation or causes network traffic to be sent for each such message, the attacker's message could be multplied into a denial-of-service attack. Authors are encouraged to employ rate limiting (only accepting a certain number of messages per minute) to make such attacks impractical.

##### 9.4.2.2 User agents

The integrity of this API is based on the inability for scripts of one origin to post arbitrary events (using `dispatchEvent()` or otherwise) to objects in other origins (those that are not the same).

Implementors are urged to take extra care in the implementation of this feature. It allows authors to transmit information from one domain to another domain, which is normally disallowed for security reasons. It also requires that UAs be careful to allow access to certain properties but not others.

User agents are also encouraged to consider rate-limiting message traffic between different origins, to protect naïve sites from denial-of-service attacks.

#### 9.4.3 Posting messages

window . `postMessage`(message, targetOrigin [, transfer ] )

  Posts a message to the given window. Messages can be structured objects, e.g. nested objects and arrays, can contain JavaScript values (strings, numbers, `Date` objects, etc), and can contain certain data objects such as `File` `Blob`, `FileList`, and `ArrayBuffer` objects.

  Objects listed in transfer are transferred, not just cloned, meaning that they are no longer usable on the sending side.

  If the origin of the target window doesn't match the given origin, the message is discarded, to avoid information leakage. To send the message to the target regardless of origin, set the target origin to "`*`". To restrict the message to same-origin targets only, without needing to explicitly state the origin, set the target origin to "`/`".

  Throws a `DataCloneError` exception if transfer array contains duplicate objects or if message could not be cloned.

When posting a message to a `Window` of a browsing context that has just been navigated to a new `Document` is likely to result in the message not receiving its intended recipient: the scripts in the target browsing context have to have had time to set up listeners for the messages. Thus, for instance, in situations where a message is to be sent to the `Window` of newly created child `iframe`, authors are advised to have the child `Document` post a message to their parent announcing their readiness to receive messages, and for the parent to wait for this message before beginning posting messages.

When a script invokes the `postMessage(message, targetOrigin, transfer)` method (with two or three arguments) on a `Window` object, the user agent must follow these steps:

1. If the value of the targetOrigin argument is neither a single U+002A ASTERISK character (*), a single U+002F SOLIDUS character (/), nor an absolute URL, then throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort the overall set of steps.

2. Let new ports be an empty array.

3. Let transfer map be an empty association list of `Transferable` objects to placeholder objects.

4. If the method was invoked with a third argument transfer, run these substeps:

   1. If any object is listed in transfer more than once, or any of the `Transferable` objects listed in transfer are marked as neutered, then throw a `DataCloneError` exception and abort these steps.

   2. For each object x in transfer in turn, add a mapping from x to a new unique placeholder object created for x to transfer map, and if x is a `MessagePort` object, also append the placeholder object to the new ports array.

5. Let message clone be the result of obtaining a structured clone of the message argument, with transfer map as the transfer map. If this throws an exception, then throw that exception and abort these steps.

6. If the method was invoked with a third argument transfer, run these substeps:

   1. Let new owner be the script settings object of the `Window` object on which the method was invoked.

   2. For each object x in transfer in turn, obtain a new object y by transferring the object x to new owner, and replace the placeholder object that was created for the object x by the new object y wherever the placeholder exists (i.e. in message clone and in new ports).

7. Make new ports into a read only array.

8. Return from the `postMessage()` method, but asynchronously continue running these steps.

9. If the targetOrigin argument is a single literal U+002F SOLIDUS character (/), and the `Document` of the `Window` object on which the method was invoked does not have the same origin as the responsible document specified by the entry settings object, then abort these steps silently.

   Otherwise, if the targetOrigin argument is an absolute URL, and the `Document` of the `Window` object on which the method was invoked does not have the same origin as targetOrigin, then abort these steps silently.

   Otherwise, the targetOrigin argument is a single literal U+002A ASTERISK character (*), and no origin check is made.

10. Create a trusted event that uses the `MessageEvent` interface, with the event type `message`, which does not bubble, is not cancelable, and has no default action. The `data` attribute must be initialised to the value of message clone, the `origin` attribute must be initialised to the Unicode serialisation of the origin specified by the incumbent settings object, the `source` attribute must be initialised to the `WindowProxy` object corresponding to the global object (a `Window` object) specified by the incumbent settings object, and the `ports` attribute must be initialised to the new ports array.

11. Queue a task to dispatch the event created in the previous step at the `Window` object on which the method was invoked. The task source for this task is the posted message task source.

### 9.5 Channel messaging

#### 9.5.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

To enable independent pieces of code (e.g. running in different browsing contexts) to communicate directly, authors can use channel messaging.

Communication channels in this mechanism are implemented as two-ways pipes, with a port at each end. Messages sent in one port are delivered at the other port, and vice-versa. Messages are asynchronous, and delivered as DOM events.

To create a connection (two "entangled" ports), the `MessageChannel()` constructor is called:

    var channel = new MessageChannel();

One of the ports is kept as the local port, and the other port is sent to the remote code, e.g. using `postMessage()`:

    otherWindow.postMessage('hello', 'http://example.com', [channel.port2]);

To send messages, the `postMessage()` method on the port is used:

    channel.port1.postMessage('hello');

To receive messages, one listens to `message` events:

    channel.port1.onmessage = handleMessage;
    function handleMessage(event) {
      // message is in event.data
      // ...
    }

Data sent on a port can be structured data; for example here an array of strings is passed on a `MessagePort`:

    port1.postMessage(['hello', 'world']);

##### 9.5.1.1 Examples

This section is non-normative.

In this example, two JavaScript libraries are connected to each other using `MessagePort`s. This allows the libraries to later be hosted in different frames, or in `Worker` objects, without any change to the APIs.

    <script src="contacts.js"></script> <!-- exposes a contacts object -->
    <script src="compose-mail.js"></script> <!-- exposes a composer object -->
    <script>
     var channel = new MessageChannel();
     composer.addContactsProvider(channel.port1);
     contacts.registerConsumer(channel.port2);
    </script>

Here's what the "addContactsProvider()" function's implementation could look like:

    function addContactsProvider(port) {
      port.onmessage = function (event) {
        switch (event.data.messageType) {
          'search-result': handleSearchResult(event.data.results); break;
          'search-done': handleSearchDone(); break;
          'search-error': handleSearchError(event.data.message); break;
          // ...
        }
      };
    };

Alternatively, it could be implemented as follows:

    function addContactsProvider(port) {
      port.addEventListener('message', function (event) {
        if (event.data.messageType == 'search-result')
          handleSearchResult(event.data.results);
      });
      port.addEventListener('message', function (event) {
        if (event.data.messageType == 'search-done')
          handleSearchDone();
      });
      port.addEventListener('message', function (event) {
        if (event.data.messageType == 'search-error')
          handleSearchError(event.data.message);
      });
      // ...
      port.start();
    };

The key difference is that when using `addEventListener()`, the `start()` method must also be invoked. When using `onmessage`, the call to `start()` is implied.

The `start()` method, whether called explicitly or implicitly (by setting `onmessage`), starts the flow of messages: messages posted on message ports are initially paused, so that they don't get dropped on the floor before the script has had a chance to set up its handlers.

##### 9.5.1.2 Ports as the basis of an object-capability model on the Web

This section is non-normative.

Ports can be viewed as a way to expose limited capabilities (in the object-capability model sense) to other actors in the system. This can either be a weak capability system, where the ports are merely used as a convenient model within a particular origin, or as a strong capability model, where they are provided by one origin provider as the only mechanism by which another origin consumer can effect change in or obtain information from provider.

For example, consider a situation in which a social Web site embeds in one `iframe` the user's e-mail contacts provider (an address book site, from a second origin), and in a second `iframe` a game (from a third origin). The outer social site and the game in the second `iframe` cannot access anything inside the first `iframe`; together they can only:

- Navigate the `iframe` to a new URL, such as the same URL but with a different fragment identifier, causing the `Window` in the `iframe` to receive a `hashchange` event.
- Resize the `iframe`, causing the `Window` in the `iframe` to receive a `resize` event.
- Send a `message` event to the `Window` in the `iframe` using the `window.postMessage()` API.

The contacts provider can use these methods, most particularly the third one, to provide an API that can be accessed by other origins to manipulate the user's address book. For example, it could respond to a message "`add-contact Guillaume Tell <tell@pomme.example.net>`" by adding the given person and e-mail address to the user's address book.

To avoid any site on the Web being able to manipulate the user's contacts, the contacts provider might only allow certain trusted sites, such as the social site, to do this.

Now suppose the game wanted to add a contact to the user's address book, and that the social site was willing to allow it to do so on its behalf, essentially "sharing" the trust that the contacts provider had with the social site. There are several ways it could do this; most simply, it could just proxy messages between the game site and the contacts site. However, this solution has a number of difficulties: it requires the social site to either completely trust the game site not to abuse the privilege, or it requires that the social site verify each request to make sure it's not a request that it doesn't want to allow (such as adding multiple contacts, reading the contacts, or deleting them); it also requires some additional complexity if there's ever the possibility of multiple games simultaneously trying to interact with the contacts provider.

Using message channels and `MessagePort` objects, however, all of these problems can go away. When the game tells the social site that it wants to add a contact, the social site can ask the contacts provider not for it to add a contact, but for the capability to add a single contact. The contacts provider then creates a pair of `MessagePort` objects, and sends one of them back to the social site, who forwards it on to the game. The game and the contacts provider then have a direct connection, and the contacts provider knows to only honor a single "add contact" request, nothing else. In other words, the game has been granted the capability to add a single contact.

##### 9.5.1.3 Ports as the basis of abstracting out service implementations

This section is non-normative.

Continuing the example from the previous section, consider the contacts provider in particular. While an initial implementation might have simply used `XMLHttpRequest` objects in the service's `iframe`, an evolution of the service might instead want to use a shared worker with a single `WebSocket` connection.

If the initial design used `MessagePort` objects to grant capabilities, or even just to allow multiple simultaneous independent sessions, the service implementation can switch from the `XMLHttpRequest`s-in-each-`iframe` model to the shared-`WebSocket` model without changing the API at all: the ports on the service provider side can all be forwarded to the shared worker without it affecting the users of the API in the slightest.

#### 9.5.2 Message channels

    [Constructor, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface MessageChannel {
      readonly attribute MessagePort port1;
      readonly attribute MessagePort port2;
    };

channel = new `MessageChannel`()

  Returns a new `MessageChannel` object with two new `MessagePort` objects.

channel . `port1`

  Returns the first `MessagePort` object.

channel . `port2`

  Returns the second `MessagePort` object.

When the `MessageChannel()` constructor is called, it must run the following algorithm:

1. Create a new `MessagePort` object whose owner is the incumbent settings object, and let port1 be that object.

2. Create a new `MessagePort` object whose owner is the incumbent settings object, and let port2 be that object.

3. Entangle the port1 and port2 objects.

4. Instantiate a new `MessageChannel` object, and let channel be that object.

5. Let the `port1` attribute of the channel object be port1.

6. Let the `port2` attribute of the channel object be port2.

7. Return channel.

The `port1` and `port2` attributes must return the values they were assigned when the `MessageChannel` object was created.

#### 9.5.3 Message ports

Each channel has two message ports. Data sent through one port is received by the other port, and vice versa.

    [Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface MessagePort : EventTarget {
      void postMessage(any message, optional sequence<Transferable> transfer);
      void start();
      void close();

      // event handlers
               attribute EventHandler onmessage;
    };
    // MessagePort implements Transferable;

port . `postMessage`(message [, transfer] )

  Posts a message through the channel. Objects listed in transfer are transferred, not just cloned, meaning that they are no longer usable on the sending side.

  Throws a `DataCloneError` exception if transfer array contains duplicate objects or the source or target ports, or if message could not be cloned.

port . `start`()

  Begins dispatching messages received on the port.

port . `close`()

  Disconnects the port, so that it is no longer active.

Each `MessagePort` object can be entangled with another (a symmetric relationship). Each `MessagePort` object also has a task source called the port message queue, initially empty. A port message queue can be enabled or disabled, and is initially disabled. Once enabled, a port can never be disabled again (though messages in the queue can get moved to another queue or removed altogether, which has much the same effect). A `MessagePort` also has a has been shipped flag, which must initially be false, and an owner, which is a settings object set when the object is created, as described below.

When a port's port message queue is enabled, the event loop must use it as one of its task sources. When a port's owner specifies a responsible event loop that is a browsing context event loop, all tasks queued on its port message queue must be associated with the responsible document specified by the port's owner.

If the port's owner specifies a responsible document that is fully active, but the event listeners all have scripts whose settings objects specify responsible documents that are not fully active, then the messages will be lost.

Each event loop has a task source called the unshipped port message queue. This is a virtual task source: it must act as if it contained the tasks of each port message queue of each `MessagePort` whose has been shipped flag is false, whose port message queue is enabled, and whose owner specifies that event loop as the responsible event loop, in the order in which they were added to their respective task source. When a task would be removed from the unshipped port message queue, it must instead be removed from its port message queue.

When a `MessagePort`'s has been shipped flag is false, its port message queue must be ignored for the purposes of the event loop. (The unshipped port message queue is used instead.)

The has been shipped flag is set to true when a port, its twin, or the object it was cloned from, is or has been transferred. When a `MessagePort`'s has been shipped flag is true, its port message queue acts as a first-class task source, unaffected to any unshipped port message queue.

When the user agent is to create a new `MessagePort` object with a particular settings object as its owner, it must instantiate a new `MessagePort` object, and let its owner be owner.

When the user agent is to entangle two `MessagePort` objects, it must run the following steps:

1. If one of the ports is already entangled, then disentangle it and the port that it was entangled with.

   If those two previously entangled ports were the two ports of a `MessageChannel` object, then that `MessageChannel` object no longer represents an actual channel: the two ports in that object are no longer entangled.

2. Associate the two ports to be entangled, so that they form the two parts of a new channel. (There is no `MessageChannel` object that represents this channel.)

   Two ports A and B that have gone through this step are now said to be entangled; one is entangled to the other, and vice versa.

   While this specification describes this process as instantaneous, implementations are more likely to implement it via message passing. As with all algorithms, the key is "merely" that the end result be indistinguishable, in a black-box sense, from the specification.

When the user agent is to clone a port original port, with the clone being owned by owner, it must run the following steps, which return a new `MessagePort` object. These steps must be run atomically.

1. Set original port's has been shipped flag to true.

2. Create a new `MessagePort` object whose owner is owner, and let new port be that object.

3. Set new port's has been shipped flag to true.

4. Move all the tasks that are to fire `message` events in the port message queue of original port to the port message queue of new port, if any, leaving the new port's port message queue in its initial disabled state, and, if the new port's owner specifies a responsible event loop that is a browsing context event loop, associating the moved tasks with the responsible document specified by new port's owner.

5. If the original port is entangled with another port, then run these substeps:

   1. Let the remote port be the port with which the original port is entangled.

   2. Set remote port's has been shipped flag to true.

   3. Entangle the remote port and new port objects. The original port object will be disentangled by this process.

6. Return new port. It is the clone.

To transfer a `MessagePort` object old to a new owner owner, a user agent must clone the old object with the clone being owned by owner, thus obtaining new, must neuter the old port, and must finally return new.

The `postMessage()` method, when called on a port source port, must cause the user agent to run the following steps:

1. Let target port be the port with which source port is entangled, if any.

2. Let doomed be false. It is set to true if a condition is detected that will make this message cause the port to be unusable; specifically, if the message contains target port as one of the objects being transferred. (This condition cannot necessarily be detected synchronously.)

3. Let new ports be an empty array.

4. Let transfer map be an empty association list of `Transferable` objects to placeholder objects.

5. If the method was invoked with a second argument transfer, run these substeps:

   1. If any object is listed in transfer more than once, or any of the `Transferable` objects listed in transfer are marked as neutered, then throw a `DataCloneError` exception and abort these steps.

   2. If any of the objects in transfer are the source port, then throw a `DataCloneError` exception and abort these steps.

   3. If any of the objects in transfer are the target port, if any, then let doomed be true, and optionally report to a developer console that the target port was posted to itself, causing the communication channel to be lost.

   4. For each object x in transfer in turn, add a mapping from x to a new unique placeholder object created for x to transfer map, and if x is a `MessagePort` object, also append the placeholder object to the new ports array.

6. Let message clone be the result of obtaining a structured clone of the message argument, with transfer map as the transfer map. If this throws an exception, then throw that exception and abort these steps.

7. If the method was invoked with a second argument transfer, run these substeps:

   1. Let new owner be the owner of target port, if there is a target port and doomed is false, or else some arbitrary owner. (This new owner is used when transferring objects below. If there is no target port, or if the target port is one of the objects being transferred, the `Transferable` objects given in the second argument, if any, are still transferred, but since they are then discarded, it doesn't matter where they are transferred to.)

   2. For each object x in transfer in turn, obtain a new object y by transferring the object x to new owner, and replace the placeholder object that was created for the object x by the new object y wherever the placeholder exists (i.e. in message clone and in new ports).

8. Make new ports into a read only array.

9. If there is no target port (i.e. if source port is not entangled), or if doomed is true, then abort these steps.

10. Create an event that uses the `MessageEvent` interface, with the name `message`, which does not bubble, is not cancelable, and has no default action.

11. Let the `data` attribute of the event be initialised to the value of message clone.

12. Let the `ports` attribute of the event be initialised to the new ports array.

13. Add the event to the port message queue of target port.

The `start()` method must enable its port's port message queue, if it is not already enabled.

The `close()` method, when called on a port local port that is entangled with another port, must cause the user agent to disentangle the two ports. If the method is called on a port that is not entangled, then the method must do nothing.

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `MessagePort` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onmessage` | `message`

The first time a `MessagePort` object's `onmessage` IDL attribute is set, the port's port message queue must be enabled, as if the `start()` method had been called.

#### 9.5.4 Broadcasting to many ports

The API described in this section is controversial, as, in an attempt to solve an architectural memory leak, it instead exposes the details of Garbage Collection. This is a lose-lose scenario. A better solution is really needed here.

Broadcasting to many ports is in principle relatively simple: keep an array of `MessagePort` objects to send messages to, and iterate through the array to send a message. However, this has one rather unfortunate effect: it prevents the ports from being garbage collected, even if the other side has gone away.

To avoid this problem, the `PortCollection` object can be used. It acts as an opaque array of `MessagePort` objects, thus allowing the objects to be garbage collected when they stop being relevant, while still allowing scripts to iterate over the `MessagePort` objects.

    [Constructor, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface PortCollection {
      void add(MessagePort port);
      void remove(MessagePort port);
      void clear();
      void iterate(PortCollectionCallback callback);
    };

    callback PortCollectionCallback = void (MessagePort port);

portCollection = new `PortCollection`()

  Returns a new empty `PortCollection` object.

portCollection . `add`(port)

  Adds port to the collection, if it isn't already present.

portCollection . `remove`(port)

  Removes port from the collection, if it is present.

portCollection . `clear`()

  Removes all ports from the collection.

portCollection . `iterate`(callback)

  Calls callback for each port in the collection.

A `PortCollection` object has an initially empty list of ports. When a `MessagePort` object in a list of ports is garbage collected, it must be silently removed from that list of ports. Objects in a list of ports are ordered chronologically by the time at which they were most recently added; the least-recently added `MessagePort` object is the first in the list, and the most-recently added `MessagePort` is the last in the list.

The `PortCollection()` constructor must return a new `PortCollection` object (with an empty list of ports).

The `add()` method must add the `MessagePort` given by the argument to the `PortCollection` object's list of ports, unless the `MessagePort` is already in the list of ports, in which case the method does nothing. (Calling this method with a port already in the list does not move the port to the end of the list.)

The `remove()` method must remove the `MessagePort` given by the argument from the `PortCollection` object's list of ports, unless the `MessagePort` is not in the list of ports, in which case the method does nothing.

The `clear()` method must remove all `MessagePort` objects from the `PortCollection` object's list of ports, returning it to the initial empty state. If the list of ports is already empty, the method does nothing.

The `iterate()` method must invoke its `PortCollectionCallback` argument once for each `MessagePort` object in the object's list of ports, in the order defined above, with each invocation being passed the corresponding `MessagePort` object as the callback's sole argument.

#### 9.5.5 Ports and garbage collection

When a `MessagePort` object o is entangled, user agents must either act as if o's entangled `MessagePort` object has a strong reference to o, or as if the global object specified by o's owner has a strong reference to o.

Thus, a message port can be received, given an event listener, and then forgotten, and so long as that event listener could receive a message, the channel will be maintained.

Of course, if this was to occur on both sides of the channel, then both ports could be garbage collected, since they would not be reachable from live code, despite having a strong reference to each other.

Furthermore, a `MessagePort` object must not be garbage collected while there exists an event in a task queue that is to be dispatched on that `MessagePort` object, or while the `MessagePort` object's port message queue is enabled and there exists a `message` event in that queue.

There are no strong references from a `PortCollection` object to its `MessagePort` objects. (That is in fact the whole point of `PortCollection` objects: they allow for `MessagePort` objects to be referenced without preventing them from being garbage collected.)

Authors are strongly encouraged to explicitly close `MessagePort` objects to disentangle them, so that their resources can be recollected. Creating many `MessagePort` objects and discarding them without closing them can lead to high transient memory usage since garbage collection is not necessarily performed promptly, especially for `MessagePort`s where garbage collection can involve cross-process coordination.

### 9.6 Broadcasting to other browsing contexts

Pages on a single origin opened by the same user in the same user agent but in different unrelated browsing contexts sometimes need to send notifications to each other, for example "hey, the user logged in over here, check your credentials again".

For elaborate cases, e.g. to manage locking of shared state, to manage synchronisation of resources between a server and multiple local clients, to share a `WebSocket` connection with a remote host, and so forth, shared workers are the most appropriate solution.

For simple cases, though, where a shared worker would be an unreasonable overhead, authors can use the simple channel-based broadcast mechanism described in this section.

    [Constructor(DOMString channel), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface BroadcastChannel : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute DOMString name;
      void postMessage(any message);
      void close();
               attribute EventHandler onmessage;
    };

broadcastChannel = new `BroadcastChannel`(channel)

  Returns a new `BroadcastChannel` object via which messages for the given channel can be sent and received.

broadcastChannel . `name`

  Returns the channel ID (as passed to the constructor).

broadcastChannel . `postMessage`(message)

  Sends the given message to other `BroadcastChannel` objects set up for this channel. Messages can be structured objects, e.g. nested objects and arrays.

broadcastChannel . `close`()

  Closes the `BroadcastChannel` object, opening it up to garbage collection.

A `BroadcastChannel` object has a channel name, a `BroadcastChannel` settings object, and a closed flag.

The `BroadcastChannel()` constructor, when invoked, must create and return a `BroadcastChannel` object whose channel name is the constructor's first argument, whose `BroadcastChannel` settings object is the incumbent settings object, and whose closed flag is false.

The `name` attribute must return the channel name.

The `postMessage()` method, when invoked on a `BroadcastChannel` object source with an argument message, must run the following steps:

1. Let source settings be source's `BroadcastChannel` settings object.

2. Let source channel be source's channel name.

3. Let cloned message be a structured clone of the message argument. If this throws an exception, then rethrow that exception and abort these steps.

4. Let destinations be a list of `BroadcastChannel` objects that match the following criteria:

   - Their `BroadcastChannel` settings object specifies either:

     - a global object that is a `Window` object and a responsible document that is fully active, or

     - a global object that is a `WorkerGlobalScope` object whose `closing` flag is false and whose worker is a suspendable worker.

   - Their `BroadcastChannel` settings object specifies an origin that is the same origin as the origin specified by source settings.

   - Their channel name is a case-sensitive match for source channel.

   - Their closed flag is false.

5. Remove source from destinations.

6. Sort destinations such that all `BroadcastChannel` objects whose `BroadcastChannel` settings objects specify the same responsible event loop are sorted in creation order, oldest first. (This does not define a complete ordering. Within this constraint, user agents may sort the list in any user-agent defined manner.)

7. For each `BroadcastChannel` object in destinations, queue a task that runs the following steps:

   1. Create an event that uses the `MessageEvent` interface, with the event type `message`, which does not bubble, is not cancelable, and has no default action. The `data` attribute must be initialised to a structured clone of cloned message, and the `origin` attribute must be initialised to the Unicode serialisation of the origin specified by source settings. This event is not trusted.

   2. Dispatch the event at the `BroadcastChannel` object.

   The tasks must be associated with the responsible document specified by the target `BroadcastChannel` object's `BroadcastChannel` settings object, and must use the DOM manipulation task source.

While a `BroadcastChannel` object whose closed flag is false has an event listener registered for `message` events, there must be a strong reference from global object specified by the `BroadcastChannel` object's `BroadcastChannel` settings object to the `BroadcastChannel` object itself.

The `close()` method must set the closed flag of the `BroadcastChannel` object on which it was invoked to true.

Authors are strongly encouraged to explicitly close `BroadcastChannel` objects when they are no longer needed, so that they can be garbage collected. Creating many `BroadcastChannel` objects and discarding them while leaving them with an event listener and without closing them can lead to an apparent memory leak, since the objects will continue to live for as long as they have an event listener (or until their page or worker is closed).

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by all objects implementing the `BroadcastChannel` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onmessage` | `message`

Suppose a page wants to know when the user logs out, even when the user does so from another tab at the same site:

    var authChannel = new BroadcastChannel('auth');
    authChannel.onmessage = function (event) {
      if (event.data == 'logout')
        showLogout();
    }

    function logoutRequested() {
      // called when the user asks us to log them out
      doLogout();
      showLogout();
      authChannel.postMessage('logout');
    }

    function doLogout() {
      // actually log the user out (e.g. clearing cookies)
      // ...
    }

    function showLogout() {
      // update the UI to indicate we're logged out
      // ...
    }

## 10 Web workers

### 10.1 Introduction

#### 10.1.1 Scope

This section is non-normative.

This specification defines an API for running scripts in the background independently of any user interface scripts.

This allows for long-running scripts that are not interrupted by scripts that respond to clicks or other user interactions, and allows long tasks to be executed without yielding to keep the page responsive.

Workers (as these background scripts are called herein) are relatively heavy-weight, and are not intended to be used in large numbers. For example, it would be inappropriate to launch one worker for each pixel of a four megapixel image. The examples below show some appropriate uses of workers.

Generally, workers are expected to be long-lived, have a high start-up performance cost, and a high per-instance memory cost.

#### 10.1.2 Examples

This section is non-normative.

There are a variety of uses that workers can be put to. The following subsections show various examples of this use.

##### 10.1.2.1 A background number-crunching worker

This section is non-normative.

The simplest use of workers is for performing a computationally expensive task without interrupting the user interface.

In this example, the main document spawns a worker to (naïvely) compute prime numbers, and progressively displays the most recently found prime number.

The main page is as follows:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Worker example: One-core computation</title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <p>The highest prime number discovered so far is: <output id="result"></output></p>
      <script>
       var worker = new Worker('worker.js');
       worker.onmessage = function (event) {
         document.getElementById('result').textContent = event.data;
       };
      </script>
     </body>
    </html>

The `Worker()` constructor call creates a worker and returns a `Worker` object representing that worker, which is used to communicate with the worker. That object's `onmessage` event handler allows the code to receive messages from the worker.

The worker itself is as follows:

    var n = 1;
    search: while (true) {
      n += 1;
      for (var i = 2; i <= Math.sqrt(n); i += 1)
        if (n % i == 0)
         continue search;
      // found a prime!
      postMessage(n);
    }

The bulk of this code is simply an unoptimised search for a prime number. The `postMessage()` method is used to send a message back to the page when a prime is found.

View this example online.

##### 10.1.2.2 Worker used for background I/O

This section is non-normative.

In this example, the main document uses two workers, one for fetching stock updates at regular intervals, and one for performing search queries that the user requests.

The main page is as follows:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Worker example: Stock ticker</title>
      <script>
       // TICKER
       var symbol = 'GOOG'; // default symbol to watch
       var ticker = new Worker('ticker.js');

       // SEARCHER
       var searcher = new Worker('searcher.js');
       function search(query) {
         searcher.postMessage(query);
       }

       // SYMBOL SELECTION UI
       function select(newSymbol) {
         symbol = newSymbol;
         ticker.postMessage(symbol);
       }
      </script>
      <meta http-equiv="Refresh" content="120; URL=../">
     </head>
     <body onload="search('')">
      <p><output id="symbol"></output> <output id="value"></output></p>
      <script>
       ticker.onmessage = function (event) {
         var data = event.data.split(' ');
         document.getElementById('symbol').textContent = data[0];
         document.getElementById('value').textContent = data[1];
       };
       ticker.postMessage(symbol);
      </script>
      <p><label>Search: <input type="text" autofocus oninput="search(this.value)"></label></p>
      <ul id="results"></ul>
      <script>
       searcher.onmessage = function (event) {
         var data = event.data.split(' ');
         var results = document.getElementById('results');
         while (results.hasChildNodes()) // clear previous results
           results.removeChild(results.firstChild);
         for (var i = 0; i < data.length; i += 1) {
           // add a list item with a button for each result
           var li = document.createElement('li');
           var button = document.createElement('button');
           button.value = data[i];
           button.type = 'button';
           button.onclick = function () { select(this.value); };
           button.textContent = data[i];
           li.appendChild(button);
           results.appendChild(li);
         }
       };
      </script>
      <p>(The data in this example is not real. Try searching for "Google" or "Apple".)</p>
     </body>
    </html>

The two workers use a common library for performing the actual network calls. This library is as follows:

    function get(url) {
      try {
        var xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
        xhr.open('GET', url, false);
        xhr.send();
        return xhr.responseText;
      } catch (e) {
        return ''; // turn all errors into empty results
      }
    }

The stock updater worker is as follows:

    importScripts('io.js');
    var timer;
    var symbol;
    function update() {
      postMessage(symbol + ' ' + get('stock.cgi?' + symbol));
      timer = setTimeout(update, 10000);
    }
    onmessage = function (event) {
      if (timer)
        clearTimeout(timer);
      symbol = event.data;
      update();
    };

The search query worker is as follows:

    importScripts('io.js');
    onmessage = function (event) {
      postMessage(get('search.cgi?' + event.data));
    };

View this example online.

##### 10.1.2.3 Shared workers introduction

This section is non-normative.

This section introduces shared workers using a Hello World example. Shared workers use slightly different APIs, since each worker can have multiple connections.

This first example shows how you connect to a worker and how a worker can send a message back to the page when it connects to it. Received messages are displayed in a log.

Here is the HTML page:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Shared workers: demo 1</title>
    <pre id="log">Log:</pre>
    <script>
      var worker = new SharedWorker('test.js');
      var log = document.getElementById('log');
      worker.port.onmessage = function(e) { // note: not worker.onmessage!
        log.textContent += '\n' + e.data;
      }
    </script>

Here is the JavaScript worker:

    onconnect = function(e) {
      var port = e.ports[0];
      port.postMessage('Hello World!');
    }

View this example online.

This second example extends the first one by changing two things: first, messages are received using `addEventListener()` instead of an event handler IDL attribute, and second, a message is sent to the worker, causing the worker to send another message in return. Received messages are again displayed in a log.

Here is the HTML page:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Shared workers: demo 2</title>
    <pre id="log">Log:</pre>
    <script>
      var worker = new SharedWorker('test.js');
      var log = document.getElementById('log');
      worker.port.addEventListener('message', function(e) {
        log.textContent += '\n' + e.data;
      }, false);
      worker.port.start(); // note: need this when using addEventListener
      worker.port.postMessage('ping');
    </script>

Here is the JavaScript worker:

    onconnect = function(e) {
      var port = e.ports[0];
      port.postMessage('Hello World!');
      port.onmessage = function(e) {
        port.postMessage('pong'); // not e.ports[0].postMessage!
        // e.target.postMessage('pong'); would work also
      }
    }

View this example online.

Finally, the example is extended to show how two pages can connect to the same worker; in this case, the second page is merely in an `iframe` on the first page, but the same principle would apply to an entirely separate page in a separate top-level browsing context.

Here is the outer HTML page:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Shared workers: demo 3</title>
    <pre id="log">Log:</pre>
    <script>
      var worker = new SharedWorker('test.js');
      var log = document.getElementById('log');
      worker.port.addEventListener('message', function(e) {
        log.textContent += '\n' + e.data;
      }, false);
      worker.port.start();
      worker.port.postMessage('ping');
    </script>
    <iframe src="inner.html"></iframe>

Here is the inner HTML page:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Shared workers: demo 3 inner frame</title>
    <pre id=log>Inner log:</pre>
    <script>
      var worker = new SharedWorker('test.js');
      var log = document.getElementById('log');
      worker.port.onmessage = function(e) {
       log.textContent += '\n' + e.data;
      }
    </script>

Here is the JavaScript worker:

    var count = 0;
    onconnect = function(e) {
      count += 1;
      var port = e.ports[0];
      port.postMessage('Hello World! You are connection #' + count);
      port.onmessage = function(e) {
        port.postMessage('pong');
      }
    }

View this example online.

##### 10.1.2.4 Shared state using a shared worker

This section is non-normative.

In this example, multiple windows (viewers) can be opened that are all viewing the same map. All the windows share the same map information, with a single worker coordinating all the viewers. Each viewer can move around independently, but if they set any data on the map, all the viewers are updated.

The main page isn't interesting, it merely provides a way to open the viewers:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Workers example: Multiviewer</title>
      <script>
       function openViewer() {
         window.open('viewer.html');
       }
      </script>
     </head>
     <body>
      <p><button type=button onclick="openViewer()">Open a new
      viewer</button></p>
      <p>Each viewer opens in a new window. You can have as many viewers
      as you like, they all view the same data.</p>
     </body>
    </html>

The viewer is more involved:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Workers example: Multiviewer viewer</title>
      <script>
       var worker = new SharedWorker('worker.js', 'core');

       // CONFIGURATION
       function configure(event) {
         if (event.data.substr(0, 4) != 'cfg ') return;
         var name = event.data.substr(4).split(' ', 1)[0];
         // update display to mention our name is name
         document.getElementsByTagName('h1')[0].textContent += ' ' + name;
         // no longer need this listener
         worker.port.removeEventListener('message', configure, false);
       }
       worker.port.addEventListener('message', configure, false);

       // MAP
       function paintMap(event) {
         if (event.data.substr(0, 4) != 'map ') return;
         var data = event.data.substr(4).split(',');
         // display tiles data[0] .. data[8]
         var canvas = document.getElementById('map');
         var context = canvas.getContext('2d');
         for (var y = 0; y < 3; y += 1) {
           for (var x = 0; x < 3; x += 1) {
             var tile = data[y * 3 + x];
             if (tile == '0')
               context.fillStyle = 'green';
             else
               context.fillStyle = 'maroon';
             context.fillRect(x * 50, y * 50, 50, 50);
           }
         }
       }
       worker.port.addEventListener('message', paintMap, false);

       // PUBLIC CHAT
       function updatePublicChat(event) {
         if (event.data.substr(0, 4) != 'txt ') return;
         var name = event.data.substr(4).split(' ', 1)[0];
         var message = event.data.substr(4 + name.length + 1);
         // display "<name> message" in public chat
         var public = document.getElementById('public');
         var p = document.createElement('p');
         var n = document.createElement('button');
         n.textContent = '<' + name + '> ';
         n.onclick = function () { worker.port.postMessage('msg ' + name); };
         p.appendChild(n);
         var m = document.createElement('span');
         m.textContent = message;
         p.appendChild(m);
         public.appendChild(p);
       }
       worker.port.addEventListener('message', updatePublicChat, false);

       // PRIVATE CHAT
       function startPrivateChat(event) {
         if (event.data.substr(0, 4) != 'msg ') return;
         var name = event.data.substr(4).split(' ', 1)[0];
         var port = event.ports[0];
         // display a private chat UI
         var ul = document.getElementById('private');
         var li = document.createElement('li');
         var h3 = document.createElement('h3');
         h3.textContent = 'Private chat with ' + name;
         li.appendChild(h3);
         var div = document.createElement('div');
         var addMessage = function(name, message) {
           var p = document.createElement('p');
           var n = document.createElement('strong');
           n.textContent = '<' + name + '> ';
           p.appendChild(n);
           var t = document.createElement('span');
           t.textContent = message;
           p.appendChild(t);
           div.appendChild(p);
         };
         port.onmessage = function (event) {
           addMessage(name, event.data);
         };
         li.appendChild(div);
         var form = document.createElement('form');
         var p = document.createElement('p');
         var input = document.createElement('input');
         input.size = 50;
         p.appendChild(input);
         p.appendChild(document.createTextNode(' '));
         var button = document.createElement('button');
         button.textContent = 'Post';
         p.appendChild(button);
         form.onsubmit = function () {
           port.postMessage(input.value);
           addMessage('me', input.value);
           input.value = '';
           return false;
         };
         form.appendChild(p);
         li.appendChild(form);
         ul.appendChild(li);
       }
       worker.port.addEventListener('message', startPrivateChat, false);

       worker.port.start();
      </script>
     </head>
     <body>
      <h1>Viewer</h1>
      <h2>Map</h2>
      <p><canvas id="map" height=150 width=150></canvas></p>
      <p>
       <button type=button onclick="worker.port.postMessage('mov left')">Left</button>
       <button type=button onclick="worker.port.postMessage('mov up')">Up</button>
       <button type=button onclick="worker.port.postMessage('mov down')">Down</button>
       <button type=button onclick="worker.port.postMessage('mov right')">Right</button>
       <button type=button onclick="worker.port.postMessage('set 0')">Set 0</button>
       <button type=button onclick="worker.port.postMessage('set 1')">Set 1</button>
      </p>
      <h2>Public Chat</h2>
      <div id="public"></div>
      <form onsubmit="worker.port.postMessage('txt ' + message.value); message.value = ''; return false;">
       <p>
        <input type="text" name="message" size="50">
        <button>Post</button>
       </p>
      </form>
      <h2>Private Chat</h2>
      <ul id="private"></ul>
     </body>
    </html>

There are several key things worth noting about the way the viewer is written.

Multiple listeners. Instead of a single message processing function, the code here attaches multiple event listeners, each one performing a quick check to see if it is relevant for the message. In this example it doesn't make much difference, but if multiple authors wanted to collaborate using a single port to communicate with a worker, it would allow for independent code instead of changes having to all be made to a single event handling function.

Registering event listeners in this way also allows you to unregister specific listeners when you are done with them, as is done with the `configure()` method in this example.

Finally, the worker:

    var nextName = 0;
    function getNextName() {
      // this could use more friendly names
      // but for now just return a number
      return nextName++;
    }

    var map = [
     [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0],
     [1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1],
     [0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0],
     [0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1],
     [0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0],
     [1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1],
     [1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1],
    ];

    function wrapX(x) {
      if (x < 0) return wrapX(x + map[0].length);
      if (x >= map[0].length) return wrapX(x - map[0].length);
      return x;
    }

    function wrapY(y) {
      if (y < 0) return wrapY(y + map.length);
      if (y >= map[0].length) return wrapY(y - map.length);
      return y;
    }

    function wrap(val, min, max) {
      if (val < min)
        return val + (max-min)+1;
      if (val > max)
        return val - (max-min)-1;
      return val;
    }

    function sendMapData(viewer) {
      var data = '';
      for (var y = viewer.y-1; y <= viewer.y+1; y += 1) {
        for (var x = viewer.x-1; x <= viewer.x+1; x += 1) {
          if (data != '')
            data += ',';
          data += map[wrap(y, 0, map[0].length-1)][wrap(x, 0, map.length-1)];
        }
      }
      viewer.port.postMessage('map ' + data);
    }

    var viewers = {};
    onconnect = function (event) {
      var name = getNextName();
      event.ports[0]._data = { port: event.ports[0], name: name, x: 0, y: 0, };
      viewers[name] = event.ports[0]._data;
      event.ports[0].postMessage('cfg ' + name);
      event.ports[0].onmessage = getMessage;
      sendMapData(event.ports[0]._data);
    };

    function getMessage(event) {
      switch (event.data.substr(0, 4)) {
        case 'mov ':
          var direction = event.data.substr(4);
          var dx = 0;
          var dy = 0;
          switch (direction) {
            case 'up': dy = -1; break;
            case 'down': dy = 1; break;
            case 'left': dx = -1; break;
            case 'right': dx = 1; break;
          }
          event.target._data.x = wrapX(event.target._data.x + dx);
          event.target._data.y = wrapY(event.target._data.y + dy);
          sendMapData(event.target._data);
          break;
        case 'set ':
          var value = event.data.substr(4);
          map[event.target._data.y][event.target._data.x] = value;
          for (var viewer in viewers)
            sendMapData(viewers[viewer]);
          break;
        case 'txt ':
          var name = event.target._data.name;
          var message = event.data.substr(4);
          for (var viewer in viewers)
            viewers[viewer].port.postMessage('txt ' + name + ' ' + message);
          break;
        case 'msg ':
          var party1 = event.target._data;
          var party2 = viewers[event.data.substr(4).split(' ', 1)[0]];
          if (party2) {
            var channel = new MessageChannel();
            party1.port.postMessage('msg ' + party2.name, [channel.port1]);
            party2.port.postMessage('msg ' + party1.name, [channel.port2]);
          }
          break;
      }
    }

Connecting to multiple pages. The script uses the `onconnect` event listener to listen for multiple connections.

Direct channels. When the worker receives a "msg" message from one viewer naming another viewer, it sets up a direct connection between the two, so that the two viewers can communicate directly without the worker having to proxy all the messages.

View this example online.

##### 10.1.2.5 Delegation

This section is non-normative.

With multicore CPUs becoming prevalent, one way to obtain better performance is to split computationally expensive tasks amongst multiple workers. In this example, a computationally expensive task that is to be performed for every number from 1 to 10,000,000 is farmed out to ten subworkers.

The main page is as follows, it just reports the result:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
     <head>
      <title>Worker example: Multicore computation</title>
     </head>
     <body>
      <p>Result: <output id="result"></output></p>
      <script>
       var worker = new Worker('worker.js');
       worker.onmessage = function (event) {
         document.getElementById('result').textContent = event.data;
       };
      </script>
     </body>
    </html>

The worker itself is as follows:

    // settings
    var num_workers = 10;
    var items_per_worker = 1000000;

    // start the workers
    var result = 0;
    var pending_workers = num_workers;
    for (var i = 0; i < num_workers; i += 1) {
      var worker = new Worker('core.js');
      worker.postMessage(i * items_per_worker);
      worker.postMessage((i+1) * items_per_worker);
      worker.onmessage = storeResult;
    }

    // handle the results
    function storeResult(event) {
      result += 1*event.data;
      pending_workers -= 1;
      if (pending_workers <= 0)
        postMessage(result); // finished!
    }

It consists of a loop to start the subworkers, and then a handler that waits for all the subworkers to respond.

The subworkers are implemented as follows:

    var start;
    onmessage = getStart;
    function getStart(event) {
      start = 1*event.data;
      onmessage = getEnd;
    }

    var end;
    function getEnd(event) {
      end = 1*event.data;
      onmessage = null;
      work();
    }

    function work() {
      var result = 0;
      for (var i = start; i < end; i += 1) {
        // perform some complex calculation here
        result += 1;
      }
      postMessage(result);
      close();
    }

They receive two numbers in two events, perform the computation for the range of numbers thus specified, and then report the result back to the parent.

View this example online.

#### 10.1.3 Tutorials

##### 10.1.3.1 Creating a dedicated worker

This section is non-normative.

Creating a worker requires a URL to a JavaScript file. The `Worker()` constructor is invoked with the URL to that file as its only argument; a worker is then created and returned:

    var worker = new Worker('helper.js');

##### 10.1.3.2 Communicating with a dedicated worker

This section is non-normative.

Dedicated workers use `MessagePort` objects behind the scenes, and thus support all the same features, such as sending structured data, transferring binary data, and transferring other ports.

To receive messages from a dedicated worker, use the `onmessage` event handler IDL attribute on the `Worker` object:

    worker.onmessage = function (event) { ... };

You can also use the `addEventListener()` method.

The implicit `MessagePort` used by dedicated workers has its port message queue implicitly enabled when it is created, so there is no equivalent to the `MessagePort` interface's `start()` method on the `Worker` interface.

To send data to a worker, use the `postMessage()` method. Structured data can be sent over this communication channel. To send `ArrayBuffer` objects efficiently (by transferring them rather than cloning them), list them in an array in the second argument.

    worker.postMessage({
      operation: 'find-edges',
      input: buffer, // an ArrayBuffer object
      threshold: 0.6,
    }, [buffer]);

To receive a message inside the worker, the `onmessage` event handler IDL attribute is used.

    onmessage = function (event) { ... };

You can again also use the `addEventListener()` method.

In either case, the data is provided in the event object's `data` attribute.

To send messages back, you again use `postMessage()`. It supports the structured data in the same manner.

    postMessage(event.data.input, [event.data.input]); // transfer the buffer back

##### 10.1.3.3 Shared workers

This section is non-normative.

Shared workers are identified by the URL of the script used to create it, optionally with an explicit name. The name allows multiple instances of a particular shared worker to be started.

Shared workers are scoped by origin. Two different sites using the same names will not collide. However, if a page tries to use the same shared worker name as another page on the same site, but with a different script URL, it will fail.

Creating shared workers is done using the `SharedWorker()` constructor. This constructor takes the URL to the script to use for its first argument, and the name of the worker, if any, as the second argument.

    var worker = new SharedWorker('service.js');

Communicating with shared workers is done with explicit `MessagePort` objects. The object returned by the `SharedWorker()` constructor holds a reference to the port on its `port` attribute.

    worker.port.onmessage = function (event) { ... };
    worker.port.postMessage('some message');
    worker.port.postMessage({ foo: 'structured', bar: ['data', 'also', 'possible']});

Inside the shared worker, new clients of the worker are announced using the `connect` event. The port for the new client is given by the event object's `source` attribute.

    onconnect = function (event) {
      var newPort = event.source;
      // set up a listener
      newPort.onmessage = function (event) { ... };
      // send a message back to the port
      newPort.postMessage('ready!'); // can also send structured data, of course
    };

### 10.2 Infrastructure

There are two kinds of workers; dedicated workers, and shared workers. Dedicated workers, once created, are linked to their creator; but message ports can be used to communicate from a dedicated worker to multiple other browsing contexts or workers. Shared workers, on the other hand, are named, and once created any script running in the same origin can obtain a reference to that worker and communicate with it.

#### 10.2.1 The global scope

The global scope is the "inside" of a worker.

##### 10.2.1.1 The `WorkerGlobalScope` common interface

    [Exposed=Worker]
    interface WorkerGlobalScope : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute WorkerGlobalScope self;
      readonly attribute WorkerLocation location;

      void close();
               attribute OnErrorEventHandler onerror;
               attribute EventHandler onlanguagechange;
               attribute EventHandler onoffline;
               attribute EventHandler ononline;

      // also has additional members in a partial interface
    };

The `self` attribute must return the `WorkerGlobalScope` object itself.

The `location` attribute must return the `WorkerLocation` object created for the `WorkerGlobalScope` object when the worker was created. It represents the absolute URL of the script that was used to initialise the worker, after any redirects.

When a script invokes the `close()` method on a `WorkerGlobalScope` object, the user agent must run the following steps (atomically):

1. Discard any tasks that have been added to the `WorkerGlobalScope` object's event loop's task queues.

2. Set the worker's `WorkerGlobalScope` object's closing flag to true. (This prevents any further tasks from being queued.)

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by objects implementing the `WorkerGlobalScope` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onerror` | `error`
`onlanguagechange` | `languagechange`
`onoffline` | `offline`
`ononline` | `online`

For `data:` URLs, this is the origin specified by the entry settings object when the constructor was called. For other URLs, this is the origin of the value of the absolute URL given in the worker's `location` attribute.

##### 10.2.1.2 Dedicated workers and the `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` interface

    [Global=(Worker,DedicatedWorker),Exposed=DedicatedWorker]
    /*sealed*/ interface DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope : WorkerGlobalScope {
      void postMessage(any message, optional sequence<Transferable> transfer);
               attribute EventHandler onmessage;
    };

`DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` objects act as if they had an implicit `MessagePort` associated with them. This port is part of a channel that is set up when the worker is created, but it is not exposed. This object must never be garbage collected before the `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` object.

All messages received by that port must immediately be retargeted at the `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` object.

The `postMessage()` method on `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` objects must act as if, when invoked, it immediately invoked the method of the same name on the port, with the same arguments, and returned the same return value.

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by objects implementing the `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onmessage` | `message`

For the purposes of the application cache networking model, a dedicated worker is an extension of the cache host from which it was created.

##### 10.2.1.3 Shared workers and the `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` interface

    [Global=(Worker,SharedWorker),Exposed=SharedWorker]
    /*sealed*/ interface SharedWorkerGlobalScope : WorkerGlobalScope {
      readonly attribute DOMString name;
      readonly attribute ApplicationCache applicationCache;
               attribute EventHandler onconnect;
    };

Shared workers receive message ports through `connect` events on their `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object for each connection.

The `name` attribute must return the value it was assigned when the `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object was created by the "run a worker" algorithm. Its value represents the name that can be used to obtain a reference to the worker using the `SharedWorker` constructor.

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by objects implementing the `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onconnect` | `connect`

For the purposes of the application cache networking model, a shared worker is its own cache host. The run a worker algorithm takes care of associating the worker with an application cache.

The `applicationCache` attribute returns the `ApplicationCache` object for the worker.

#### 10.2.2 The event loop

Each `WorkerGlobalScope` object has a distinct event loop, separate from those used by units of related similar-origin browsing contexts. This event loop has no associated browsing context, and its task queues only have events, callbacks, and networking activity as tasks. These event loops are created by the run a worker algorithm.

Each `WorkerGlobalScope` object also has a closing flag, which must initially be false, but which can get set to true by the algorithms in the processing model section below.

Once the `WorkerGlobalScope`'s closing flag is set to true, the event loop's task queues must discard any further tasks that would be added to them (tasks already on the queue are unaffected except where otherwise specified). Effectively, once the closing flag is true, timers stop firing, notifications for all pending asynchronous operations are dropped, etc.

#### 10.2.3 The worker's lifetime

Workers communicate with other workers and with browsing contexts through message channels and their `MessagePort` objects.

Each `WorkerGlobalScope` worker global scope has a list of the worker's ports, which consists of all the `MessagePort` objects that are entangled with another port and that have one (but only one) port owned by worker global scope. This list includes the implicit `MessagePort` in the case of dedicated workers.

Each `WorkerGlobalScope` also has a list of the worker's workers. Initially this list is empty; it is populated when the worker creates or obtains further workers.

Finally, each `WorkerGlobalScope` also has a list of the worker's `Document`s. Initially this list is empty; it is populated when the worker is created.

Whenever a `Document` d is added to the worker's `Document`s, the user agent must, for each worker q in the list of the worker's workers whose list of the worker's `Document`s does not contain d, add d to q's `WorkerGlobalScope` owner's list of the worker's `Document`s.

Whenever a `Document` object is discarded, it must be removed from the list of the worker's `Document`s of each worker whose list contains that `Document`.

Given a settings object o when creating or obtaining a worker, the list of relevant `Document` objects to add depends on the type of global object specified by o's. If o specifies a global object that is a `WorkerGlobalScope` object (i.e. if we are creating a nested worker), then the relevant `Document`s are the the worker's `Document`s of the global object specified by o. Otherwise, o specifies a global object that is a `Window` object, and the relevant `Document` is just the responsible document specified by o.

A worker is said to be a permissible worker if its list of the worker's `Document`s is not empty.

A worker is said to be an active needed worker if any of the `Document` objects in the worker's `Document`s are fully active.

A worker is said to be a protected worker if it is an active needed worker and either it has outstanding timers, database transactions, or network connections, or its list of the worker's ports is not empty, or its `WorkerGlobalScope` is actually a `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object (i.e. the worker is a shared worker).

A worker is said to be a suspendable worker if it is not an active needed worker but it is a permissible worker.

#### 10.2.4 Processing model

When a user agent is to run a worker for a script with URL url and a script settings object settings object, it must run the following steps:

1. Create a separate parallel execution environment (i.e. a separate thread or process or equivalent construct), and run the rest of these steps asynchronously in that context.

   For the purposes of timing APIs, this is the official moment of creation of the worker.

2. Let worker global scope be the global object specified by settings object.

3. If worker global scope is actually a `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object (i.e. the worker is a shared worker), and there are any relevant application caches that are identified by a manifest URL with the same origin as url and that have url as one of their entries, not excluding entries marked as foreign, then associate the worker global scope with the most appropriate application cache of those that match.

4. Attempt to fetch the resource identified by url, from the origin specified by settings object, using the responsible document specified by settings object as the referrer source (not the specified API referrer source!), and with the synchronous flag set and the force same-origin flag set.

   If the attempt fails, then for each `Worker` or `SharedWorker` object associated with worker global scope, queue a task to fire a simple event named `error` at that object. Abort these steps.

   If the attempt succeeds, then let source be the result of running the UTF-8 decode algorithm on the script resource.

   Let language be JavaScript.

   As with `script` elements, the MIME type of the script is ignored. Unlike with `script` elements, there is no way to override the type. It's always assumed to be JavaScript.

5. In the newly created execution environment, create a JavaScript global environment whose global object is worker global scope. If worker global scope is a `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` object, then this is a dedicated worker environment. Otherwise, worker global scope is a `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object, and this is a shared worker environment. (In either case, by definition, it is a worker environment.)

6. Let script be a new script.

   Obtain the appropriate script execution environment for the scripting language language from settings object.

   Parse/compile/initialise source using that script execution environment, as appropriate for language, and thus obtain a code entry-point. If the script was not compiled successfully, let the code entry-point be a no-op script, and act as if a corresponding uncaught script error had occurred.

   Let script's settings object be settings object.

7. Closing orphan workers: Start monitoring the worker such that no sooner than it stops being a protected worker, and no later than it stops being a permissible worker, worker global scope's closing flag is set to true.

8. Suspending workers: Start monitoring the worker, such that whenever worker global scope's closing flag is false and the worker is a suspendable worker, the user agent suspends execution of script in that worker until such time as either the closing flag switches to true or the worker stops being a suspendable worker.

9. Jump to the script's code entry-point, and let that run until it either returns, fails to catch an exception, or gets prematurely aborted by the "kill a worker" or "terminate a worker" algorithms defined below.

10. If worker global scope is actually a `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` object (i.e. the worker is a dedicated worker), then enable the port message queue of the worker's implicit port.

11. Event loop: Run the responsible event loop specified by settings object until it is destroyed.

    The handling of events or the execution of callbacks by tasks run by the event loop might get prematurely aborted by the "kill a worker" or "terminate a worker" algorithms defined below.

    The worker processing model remains on this step until the event loop is destroyed, which happens after the closing flag is set to true, as described in the event loop processing model.

12. Empty the worker global scope's list of active timers.

13. Disentangle all the ports in the list of the worker's ports.

14. Empty the worker's list of the worker's `Document`s.

When a user agent is to kill a worker it must run the following steps in parallel with the worker's main loop (the "run a worker" processing model defined above):

1. Set the worker's `WorkerGlobalScope` object's closing flag to true.

2. If there are any tasks queued in the `WorkerGlobalScope` object's event loop's task queues, discard them without processing them.

3. Wait a user-agent-defined amount of time.

4. Abort the script currently running in the worker.

User agents may invoke the "kill a worker" processing model on a worker at any time, e.g. in response to user requests, in response to CPU quota management, or when a worker stops being an active needed worker if the worker continues executing even after its closing flag was set to true.

When a user agent is to terminate a worker it must run the following steps in parallel with the worker's main loop (the "run a worker" processing model defined above):

1. Set the worker's `WorkerGlobalScope` object's closing flag to true.

2. If there are any tasks queued in the `WorkerGlobalScope` object's event loop's task queues, discard them without processing them.

3. Abort the script currently running in the worker.

4. If the worker's `WorkerGlobalScope` object is actually a `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` object (i.e. the worker is a dedicated worker), then empty the port message queue of the port that the worker's implicit port is entangled with.

The task source for the tasks mentioned above is the DOM manipulation task source.

#### 10.2.5 Runtime script errors

Whenever an uncaught runtime script error occurs in one of the worker's scripts, if the error did not occur while handling a previous script error, the user agent must report the error for that script, with the position (line number and column number) where the error occurred, using the `WorkerGlobalScope` object as the target.

For shared workers, if the error is still not handled afterwards, the error may be reported to the user.

For dedicated workers, if the error is still not handled afterwards, the user agent must queue a task to fire a trusted event that uses the `ErrorEvent` interface, with the name `error`, that doesn't bubble and is cancelable, with its `message`, `filename`, `lineno`, `colno`, attributes initialised appropriately, and with the `error` attribute initialised to null, at the `Worker` object associated with the worker. If the event is not canceled, the user agent must act as if the uncaught runtime script error had occurred in the global scope that the `Worker` object is in, thus repeating the entire runtime script error reporting process one level up.

If the implicit port connecting the worker to its `Worker` object has been disentangled (i.e. if the parent worker has been terminated), then the user agent must act as if the `Worker` object had no `error` event handler and as if that worker's `onerror` attribute was null, but must otherwise act as described above.

Thus, error reports propagate up to the chain of dedicated workers up to the original `Document`, even if some of the workers along this chain have been terminated and garbage collected.

The task source for the task mentioned above is the DOM manipulation task source.

#### 10.2.6 Creating workers

##### 10.2.6.1 The `AbstractWorker` abstract interface

    [NoInterfaceObject, Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface AbstractWorker {
               attribute EventHandler onerror;
    };

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by objects implementing the `AbstractWorker` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onerror` | `error`

##### 10.2.6.2 Script settings for workers

When the user agent is required to set up a worker script settings object, given a worker global scope and a URL script address, it must run the following steps:

1. Let inherited responsible browsing context be the responsible browsing context specified by the incumbent settings object.

2. Let inherited responsible document be the responsible document specified by the incumbent settings object.

3. Let inherited origin be the origin specified by the incumbent settings object.

4. Let worker event loop be a newly created event loop.

5. Let settings object be a new script settings object whose algorithms are defined as follows:

   The script execution environments

     When the script settings object is created, for each language supported by the user agent, create an appropriate execution environment as defined by the relevant specification.

     When a script execution environment is needed, return the appropriate one from those created when the script settings object was created.

     Currently, workers only support JavaScript, so only a JavaScript execution environment is actually needed here.

   The global object

     Return worker global scope.

   The responsible browsing context

     Return inherited responsible browsing context.

   The responsible document

     Return inherited responsible document.

   The responsible event loop

     Return worker event loop.

   The API referrer source

     Return script address.

   The API URL character encoding

     Return UTF-8.

   The API base URL

     Return worker URL.

   The origin and effective script origin

     Return inherited origin.

6. Return settings object.

##### 10.2.6.3 Dedicated workers and the `Worker` interface

    [Constructor(DOMString scriptURL), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface Worker : EventTarget {
      void terminate();

      void postMessage(any message, optional sequence<Transferable> transfer);
               attribute EventHandler onmessage;
    };
    Worker implements AbstractWorker;

The `terminate()` method, when invoked, must cause the "terminate a worker" algorithm to be run on the worker with which the object is associated.

`Worker` objects act as if they had an implicit `MessagePort` associated with them. This port is part of a channel that is set up when the worker is created, but it is not exposed. This object must never be garbage collected before the `Worker` object.

All messages received by that port must immediately be retargeted at the `Worker` object.

The `postMessage()` method on `Worker` objects must act as if, when invoked, it immediately invoked the method of the same name on the port, with the same arguments, and returned the same return value.

The `postMessage()` method's first argument can be structured data:

    worker.postMessage({opcode: 'activate', device: 1938, parameters: [23, 102]});

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler IDL attributes, by objects implementing the `Worker` interface:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onmessage` | `message`

When the `Worker(scriptURL)` constructor is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. The user agent may throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps if the request violates a policy decision (e.g. if the user agent is configured to not allow the page to start dedicated workers).

2. Resolve the scriptURL argument relative to the API base URL specified by the entry settings object when the method was invoked.

3. If this fails, throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.

4. Let worker URL be the resulting absolute URL.

5. If the scheme component of worker URL is not "`data`", and the origin of worker URL is not the same as the origin specified by the incumbent settings object, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

   For example, scripts can be external files with the same scheme, host, and port as the original page, or `data:` URLs, or same-origin `blob:` URLs. Thus, an `https:` page couldn't start workers using scripts with `http:` URLs. [FILEAPI].

6. Create a new `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope` object. Let worker global scope be this new object.

7. Set up a worker script settings object with worker global scope and worker URL, and let settings object be the result.

8. Create a new `Worker` object, associated with worker global scope. Let worker be this new object.

9. Create a new `MessagePort` object whose owner is the incumbent settings object. Let this be the outside port.

10. Associate the outside port with worker.

11. Create a new `MessagePort` object whose owner is settings object. Let inside port be this new object.

12. Associate inside port with worker global scope.

13. Entangle outside port and inside port.

14. Return worker, and run the following steps asynchronously.

15. Enable outside port's port message queue.

16. Let docs be the list of relevant `Document` objects to add given the incumbent settings object.

17. Add to worker global scope's list of the worker's `Document`s the `Document` objects in docs.

18. If the global object specified by the incumbent settings object is a `WorkerGlobalScope` object (i.e. we are creating a nested worker), add worker global scope to the list of the worker's workers of the `WorkerGlobalScope` object that is the global object specified by the incumbent settings object.

19. Run a worker for the script with URL worker URL and the script settings object settings object.

##### 10.2.6.4 Shared workers and the `SharedWorker` interface

    [Constructor(DOMString scriptURL, optional DOMString name), Exposed=(Window,Worker)]
    interface SharedWorker : EventTarget {
      readonly attribute MessagePort port;
    };
    SharedWorker implements AbstractWorker;

The `port` attribute must return the value it was assigned by the object's constructor. It represents the `MessagePort` for communicating with the shared worker.

When the `SharedWorker(scriptURL, name)` constructor is invoked, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. The user agent may throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps if the request violates a policy decision (e.g. if the user agent is configured to not allow the page to start shared workers).

2. Resolve the scriptURL argument.

3. If this fails, throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.

4. Let scriptURL be the resulting absolute URL and parsed scriptURL be the resulting parsed URL.

5. Let name be the value of the second argument, or the empty string if the second argument was omitted.

6. If the scheme component of parsed scriptURL is not "`data`", and the origin of scriptURL is not the same as the origin specified by the incumbent settings object, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

   Thus, scripts must either be external files with the same scheme, host, and port as the original page, or `data:` URLs. For example, an `https:` page couldn't start workers using scripts with `http:` URLs.

7. Let docs be the list of relevant `Document` objects to add given the incumbent settings object.

8. Execute the following substeps atomically:

   1. Create a new `SharedWorker` object, which will shortly be associated with a `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object. Let this `SharedWorker` object be worker.

   2. Create a new `MessagePort` object whose owner is the incumbent settings object. Let this be the outside port.

   3. Assign outside port to the `port` attribute of worker.

   4. Let worker global scope be null.

   5. If name is not the empty string and there exists a `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object whose closing flag is false, whose `name` attribute is exactly equal to name, and that is the global object specified by a script settings object that specifies as its origin the same origin as the origin of scriptURL, then let worker global scope be that `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object.

      Otherwise, if name is the empty string and there exists a `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object whose closing flag is false, whose `name` attribute is the empty string, and whose `location` attribute represents an absolute URL that is exactly equal to scriptURL, then let worker global scope be that `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object.

   6. If worker global scope is not null, but the user agent has been configured to disallow communication between the worker represented by the worker global scope and the scripts whose settings objects are the incumbent settings object, then set worker global scope to null.

      For example, a user agent could have a development mode that isolates a particular top-level browsing context from all other pages, and scripts in that development mode could be blocked from connecting to shared workers running in the normal browser mode.

   7. If worker global scope is not null, then run these steps:

      1. If worker global scope's `location` attribute represents an absolute URL that is not exactly equal to scriptURL, then throw a `URLMismatchError` exception and abort all these steps.

      2. Associate worker with worker global scope.

      3. Let settings object be the script settings object whose global object is worker global scope.

      4. Create a new `MessagePort` object whose owner is settings object. Let this be the inside port.

      5. Entangle outside port and inside port.

      6. Create a trusted event that uses the `MessageEvent` interface, with the name `connect`, which does not bubble, is not cancelable, has no default action, has a `data` attribute whose value is initialised to the empty string, has a `ports` attribute whose value is initialised to a read only array containing only the newly created port, and has a `source` attribute whose value is initialised to the newly created port, and queue a task to dispatch the event at worker global scope.

      7. Add to worker global scope's list of the worker's `Document`s the `Document` objects in docs.

      8. If the global object specified by the incumbent settings object is a `WorkerGlobalScope` object, add worker global scope to the list of the worker's workers of the `WorkerGlobalScope` object that is the global object specified by the incumbent settings object.

      9. Return worker and abort all these steps.

   8. Create a new `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` object. Let worker global scope be this new object.

   9. Set up a worker script settings object with worker global scope and scriptURL, and let settings object be the result.

   10. Associate worker with worker global scope.

   11. Set the `name` attribute of worker global scope to name.

   12. Create a new `MessagePort` object whose owner is settings object. Let inside port be this new object.

   13. Entangle outside port and inside port.

9. Return worker and perform the remaining steps asynchronously.

10. Create a trusted event that uses the `MessageEvent` interface, with the name `connect`, which does not bubble, is not cancelable, has no default action, has a `data` attribute whose value is initialised to the empty string, has a `ports` attribute whose value is initialised to a read only array containing only the newly created port, and has a `source` attribute whose value is initialized to the newly created port, and queue a task to dispatch the event at worker global scope.

11. Add to worker global scope's list of the worker's `Document`s the `Document` objects in docs.

12. If the global object specified by the incumbent settings object is a `WorkerGlobalScope` object, add worker global scope to the list of the worker's workers of the `WorkerGlobalScope` object that is the global object specified by the incumbent settings object.

13. Run a worker for the script with URL scriptURL and the script settings object settings object.

The task source for the tasks mentioned above is the DOM manipulation task source.

### 10.3 APIs available to workers

    [Exposed=Worker]
    partial interface WorkerGlobalScope { // not obsolete
      void importScripts(DOMString... urls);
      readonly attribute WorkerNavigator navigator;
    };
    WorkerGlobalScope implements WindowTimers;
    WorkerGlobalScope implements WindowBase64;

#### 10.3.1 Importing scripts and libraries

When a script invokes the `importScripts(urls)` method on a `WorkerGlobalScope` object, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. If there are no arguments, return without doing anything. Abort these steps.

2. Let settings object be the incumbent settings object.

3. Resolve each argument.

4. If any fail, throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.

5. Attempt to fetch each resource identified by the resulting absolute URLs, from the origin specified by settings object, using the API referrer source specified by settings object, and with the synchronous flag set.

6. For each argument in turn, in the order given, starting with the first one, run these substeps:

   1. Wait for the fetching attempt for the corresponding resource to complete.

      If the fetching attempt failed, throw a `NetworkError` exception and abort all these steps.

      If the attempt succeeds, then let source be the result of running the UTF-8 decode algorithm on the script resource.

      Let language be JavaScript.

      As with the worker's script, the script here is always assumed to be JavaScript, regardless of the MIME type.

   2. Create a script using source as the script source, the URL from which source was obtained, language as the scripting language, and settings object as the script settings object.

      If the script came from a resource whose URL does not have the same origin as the origin specified by the incumbent settings object, then pass the muted errors flag to the create a script algorithm as well.

      Let the newly created script run until it either returns, fails to parse, fails to catch an exception, or gets prematurely aborted by the "kill a worker" or "terminate a worker" algorithms defined above.

      If it failed to parse, then throw an ECMAScript `SyntaxError` exception and abort all these steps. [ECMA262]

      If an exception was thrown or if the script was prematurely aborted, then abort all these steps, letting the exception or aborting continue to be processed by the calling script.

      If the "kill a worker" or "terminate a worker" algorithms abort the script then abort all these steps.

#### 10.3.2 The `WorkerNavigator` object

The `navigator` attribute of the `WorkerGlobalScope` interface must return an instance of the `WorkerNavigator` interface, which represents the identity and state of the user agent (the client):

    [Exposed=Worker]
    interface WorkerNavigator {};
    WorkerNavigator implements NavigatorID;
    WorkerNavigator implements NavigatorLanguage;
    WorkerNavigator implements NavigatorOnLine;

#### 10.3.3 Worker locations

    [Exposed=Worker]
    interface WorkerLocation { };
    WorkerLocation implements URLUtilsReadOnly;

A `WorkerLocation` object represents an absolute URL set at its creation.

The `WorkerLocation` interface supports the `URLUtilsReadOnly` interface. [URL]

When the object is created, the user agent must invoke the element's `URLUtilsReadOnly` interface's set the input algorithm with the absolute URL that the `WorkerLocation` object represents as the given value.

The element's `URLUtilsReadOnly` interface's get the base algorithm must return null.

## 11 Web storage

### 11.1 Introduction

This section is non-normative.

This specification introduces two related mechanisms, similar to HTTP session cookies, for storing name-value pairs on the client side. [COOKIES]

The first is designed for scenarios where the user is carrying out a single transaction, but could be carrying out multiple transactions in different windows at the same time.

Cookies don't really handle this case well. For example, a user could be buying plane tickets in two different windows, using the same site. If the site used cookies to keep track of which ticket the user was buying, then as the user clicked from page to page in both windows, the ticket currently being purchased would "leak" from one window to the other, potentially causing the user to buy two tickets for the same flight without really noticing.

To address this, this specification introduces the `sessionStorage` IDL attribute. Sites can add data to the session storage, and it will be accessible to any page from the same site opened in that window.

For example, a page could have a checkbox that the user ticks to indicate that he wants insurance:

    <label>
     <input type="checkbox" onchange="sessionStorage.insurance = checked ? 'true' : ''">
      I want insurance on this trip.
    </label>

A later page could then check, from script, whether the user had checked the checkbox or not:

    if (sessionStorage.insurance) { ... }

If the user had multiple windows opened on the site, each one would have its own individual copy of the session storage object.

The second storage mechanism is designed for storage that spans multiple windows, and lasts beyond the current session. In particular, Web applications may wish to store megabytes of user data, such as entire user-authored documents or a user's mailbox, on the client side for performance reasons.

Again, cookies do not handle this case well, because they are transmitted with every request.

The `localStorage` IDL attribute is used to access a page's local storage area.

The site at example.com can display a count of how many times the user has loaded its page by putting the following at the bottom of its page:

    <p>
      You have viewed this page
      <span id="count">an untold number of</span>
      time(s).
    </p>
    <script>
      if (!localStorage.pageLoadCount)
        localStorage.pageLoadCount = 0;
      localStorage.pageLoadCount = parseInt(localStorage.pageLoadCount) + 1;
      document.getElementById('count').textContent = localStorage.pageLoadCount;
    </script>

Each site has its own separate storage area.

### 11.2 The API

#### 11.2.1 The `Storage` interface

    interface Storage {
      readonly attribute unsigned long length;
      DOMString? key(unsigned long index);
      getter DOMString? getItem(DOMString key);
      setter creator void setItem(DOMString key, DOMString value);
      deleter void removeItem(DOMString key);
      void clear();
    };

Each `Storage` object provides access to a list of key/value pairs, which are sometimes called items. Keys are strings. Any string (including the empty string) is a valid key. Values are similarly strings.

Each `Storage` object is associated with a list of key/value pairs when it is created, as defined in the sections on the `sessionStorage` and `localStorage` attributes. Multiple separate objects implementing the `Storage` interface can all be associated with the same list of key/value pairs simultaneously.

The `length` attribute must return the number of key/value pairs currently present in the list associated with the object.

The `key(n)` method must return the name of the nth key in the list. The order of keys is user-agent defined, but must be consistent within an object so long as the number of keys doesn't change. (Thus, adding or removing a key may change the order of the keys, but merely changing the value of an existing key must not.) If n is greater than or equal to the number of key/value pairs in the object, then this method must return null.

The supported property names on a `Storage` object are the keys of each key/value pair currently present in the list associated with the object, in the order that the keys were last added to the storage area.

The `getItem(key)` method must return the current value associated with the given key. If the given key does not exist in the list associated with the object then this method must return null.

The `setItem(key, value)` method must first check if a key/value pair with the given key already exists in the list associated with the object.

If it does not, then a new key/value pair must be added to the list, with the given key and with its value set to value.

If the given key does exist in the list, and its value is not equal to value, then it must have its value updated to value. If its previous value is equal to value, then the method must do nothing.

If it couldn't set the new value, the method must throw a `QuotaExceededError` exception. (Setting could fail if, e.g., the user has disabled storage for the site, or if the quota has been exceeded.)

The `removeItem(key)` method must cause the key/value pair with the given key to be removed from the list associated with the object, if it exists. If no item with that key exists, the method must do nothing.

The `setItem()` and `removeItem()` methods must be atomic with respect to failure. In the case of failure, the method does nothing. That is, changes to the data storage area must either be successful, or the data storage area must not be changed at all.

The `clear()` method must atomically cause the list associated with the object to be emptied of all key/value pairs, if there are any. If there are none, then the method must do nothing.

When the `setItem()`, `removeItem()`, and `clear()` methods are invoked, events are fired on the `Window` objects of other `Document`s that can access the newly stored or removed data, as defined in the sections on the `sessionStorage` and `localStorage` attributes.

This specification does not require that the above methods wait until the data has been physically written to disk. Only consistency in what different scripts accessing the same underlying list of key/value pairs see is required.

#### 11.2.2 The `sessionStorage` attribute

    [NoInterfaceObject]
    interface WindowSessionStorage {
      readonly attribute Storage sessionStorage;
    };
    Window implements WindowSessionStorage;

The `sessionStorage` attribute represents the set of storage areas specific to the current top-level browsing context.

Each top-level browsing context has a unique set of session storage areas, one for each origin.

User agents should not expire data from a browsing context's session storage areas, but may do so when the user requests that such data be deleted, or when the UA detects that it has limited storage space, or for security reasons. User agents should always avoid deleting data while a script that could access that data is running. When a top-level browsing context is destroyed (and therefore permanently inaccessible to the user) the data stored in its session storage areas can be discarded with it, as the API described in this specification provides no way for that data to ever be subsequently retrieved.

The lifetime of a browsing context can be unrelated to the lifetime of the actual user agent process itself, as the user agent may support resuming sessions after a restart.

When a new `Document` is created in a browsing context which has a top-level browsing context, the user agent must check to see if that top-level browsing context has a session storage area for that document's origin. If it does, then that is the `Document`'s assigned session storage area. If it does not, a new storage area for that document's origin must be created, and then that is the `Document`'s assigned session storage area. A `Document`'s assigned storage area does not change during the lifetime of a `Document`.

In the case of an `iframe` being moved to another `Document`, the nested browsing context is destroyed and a new one created.

The `sessionStorage` attribute must return a `Storage` object associated with the `Document`'s assigned session storage area, if any, or null if there isn't one. Each `Document` object must have a separate object for its `Window`'s `sessionStorage` attribute.

When a new top-level browsing context is created by cloning an existing browsing context, the new browsing context must start with the same session storage areas as the original, but the two sets must from that point on be considered separate, not affecting each other in any way.

When a new top-level browsing context is created by a script in an existing browsing context, or by the user following a link in an existing browsing context, or in some other way related to a specific `Document`, and the creation is not a new start for session storage, then the session storage area of the origin of that `Document` must be copied into the new browsing context when it is created. From that point on, however, the two session storage areas must be considered separate, not affecting each other in any way.

When the `setItem()`, `removeItem()`, and `clear()` methods are called on a `Storage` object x that is associated with a session storage area, if the methods did not throw an exception or "do nothing" as defined above, then for every `Document` object whose `Window` object's `sessionStorage` attribute's `Storage` object is associated with the same storage area, other than x, send a storage notification.

#### 11.2.3 The `localStorage` attribute

    [NoInterfaceObject]
    interface WindowLocalStorage {
      readonly attribute Storage localStorage;
    };
    Window implements WindowLocalStorage;

The `localStorage` object provides a `Storage` object for an origin.

User agents must have a set of local storage areas, one for each origin.

User agents should expire data from the local storage areas only for security reasons or when requested to do so by the user. User agents should always avoid deleting data while a script that could access that data is running.

When the `localStorage` attribute is accessed, the user agent must run the following steps, which are known as the `Storage` object initialization steps:

1. The user agent may throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps instead of returning a `Storage` object if the request violates a policy decision (e.g. if the user agent is configured to not allow the page to persist data).

2. If the `Document`'s origin is not a scheme/host/port tuple, then throw a `SecurityError` exception and abort these steps.

3. Check to see if the user agent has allocated a local storage area for the origin of the `Document` of the `Window` object on which the attribute was accessed. If it has not, create a new storage area for that origin.

4. Return the `Storage` object associated with that origin's local storage area. Each `Document` object must have a separate object for its `Window`'s `localStorage` attribute.

When the `setItem()`, `removeItem()`, and `clear()` methods are called on a `Storage` object x that is associated with a local storage area, if the methods did not throw an exception or "do nothing" as defined above, then for every `Document` object whose `Window` object's `localStorage` attribute's `Storage` object is associated with the same storage area, other than x, send a storage notification.

Whenever the properties of a `localStorage` attribute's `Storage` object are to be examined, returned, set, or deleted, whether as part of a direct property access, when checking for the presence of a property, during property enumeration, when determining the number of properties present, or as part of the execution of any of the methods or attributes defined on the `Storage` interface, the user agent must first obtain the storage mutex.

#### 11.2.4 The `storage` event

The `storage` event is fired on a `Document`'s `Window` object when a storage area changes, as described in the previous two sections (for session storage, for local storage).

When a user agent is to send a storage notification for a `Document`, the user agent must queue a task to fire a trusted event with the name `storage`, which does not bubble and is not cancelable, and which uses the `StorageEvent` interface, at the `Document` object's `Window` object.

Such a `Document` object is not necessarily fully active, but events fired on such objects are ignored by the event loop until the `Document` becomes fully active again.

The task source for these tasks is the DOM manipulation task source.

If the event is being fired due to an invocation of the `setItem()` or `removeItem()` methods, the event must have its `key` attribute initialised to the name of the key in question, its `oldValue` attribute initialised to the old value of the key in question, or null if the key is newly added, and its `newValue` attribute initialised to the new value of the key in question, or null if the key was removed.

Otherwise, if the event is being fired due to an invocation of the `clear()` method, the event must have its `key`, `oldValue`, and `newValue` attributes initialised to null.

In addition, the event must have its `url` attribute initialised to the address of the document whose `Storage` object was affected; and its `storageArea` attribute initialised to the `Storage` object from the `Window` object of the target `Document` that represents the same kind of `Storage` area as was affected (i.e. session or local).

##### 11.2.4.1 The `StorageEvent` interface

    [Constructor(DOMString type, optional StorageEventInit eventInitDict)]
    interface StorageEvent : Event {
      readonly attribute DOMString? key;
      readonly attribute DOMString? oldValue;
      readonly attribute DOMString? newValue;
      readonly attribute DOMString url;
      readonly attribute Storage? storageArea;
    };

    dictionary StorageEventInit : EventInit {
      DOMString? key;
      DOMString? oldValue;
      DOMString? newValue;
      DOMString url;
      Storage? storageArea;
    };

The `key` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the key being changed.

The `oldValue` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the old value of the key being changed.

The `newValue` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the new value of the key being changed.

The `url` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to the empty string. It represents the address of the document whose key changed.

The `storageArea` attribute must return the value it was initialised to. When the object is created, this attribute must be initialised to null. It represents the `Storage` object that was affected.

#### 11.2.5 Threads

Because of the use of the storage mutex, multiple browsing contexts will be able to access the local storage areas simultaneously in such a manner that scripts cannot detect any concurrent script execution.

Thus, the `length` attribute of a `Storage` object, and the value of the various properties of that object, cannot change while a script is executing, other than in a way that is predictable by the script itself.

### 11.3 Disk space

User agents should limit the total amount of space allowed for storage areas, because hostile authors could otherwise use this feature to exhaust the user's available disk space.

User agents should guard against sites storing data under their origin's other affiliated sites, e.g. storing up to the limit in a1.example.com, a2.example.com, a3.example.com, etc, circumventing the main example.com storage limit.

User agents may prompt the user when quotas are reached, allowing the user to grant a site more space. This enables sites to store many user-created documents on the user's computer, for instance.

User agents should allow users to see how much space each domain is using.

A mostly arbitrary limit of five megabytes per origin is suggested. Implementation feedback is welcome and will be used to update this suggestion in the future.

For predictability, quotas should be based on the uncompressed size of data stored.

### 11.4 Privacy

#### 11.4.1 User tracking

A third-party advertiser (or any entity capable of getting content distributed to multiple sites) could use a unique identifier stored in its local storage area to track a user across multiple sessions, building a profile of the user's interests to allow for highly targeted advertising. In conjunction with a site that is aware of the user's real identity (for example an e-commerce site that requires authenticated credentials), this could allow oppressive groups to target individuals with greater accuracy than in a world with purely anonymous Web usage.

There are a number of techniques that can be used to mitigate the risk of user tracking:

Blocking third-party storage

  User agents may restrict access to the `localStorage` objects to scripts originating at the domain of the active document of the top-level browsing context, for instance denying access to the API for pages from other domains running in `iframe`s.

Expiring stored data

  User agents may, possibly in a manner configured by the user, automatically delete stored data after a period of time.

  For example, a user agent could be configured to treat third-party local storage areas as session-only storage, deleting the data once the user had closed all the browsing contexts that could access it.

  This can restrict the ability of a site to track a user, as the site would then only be able to track the user across multiple sessions when he authenticates with the site itself (e.g. by making a purchase or logging in to a service).

  However, this also reduces the usefulness of the API as a long-term storage mechanism. It can also put the user's data at risk, if the user does not fully understand the implications of data expiration.

Treating persistent storage as cookies

  If users attempt to protect their privacy by clearing cookies without also clearing data stored in the local storage area, sites can defeat those attempts by using the two features as redundant backup for each other. User agents should present the interfaces for clearing these in a way that helps users to understand this possibility and enables them to delete data in all persistent storage features simultaneously. [COOKIES]

Site-specific white-listing of access to local storage areas

  User agents may allow sites to access session storage areas in an unrestricted manner, but require the user to authorise access to local storage areas.

Origin-tracking of stored data

  User agents may record the origins of sites that contained content from third-party origins that caused data to be stored.

  If this information is then used to present the view of data currently in persistent storage, it would allow the user to make informed decisions about which parts of the persistent storage to prune. Combined with a blacklist ("delete this data and prevent this domain from ever storing data again"), the user can restrict the use of persistent storage to sites that he trusts.

Shared blacklists

  User agents may allow users to share their persistent storage domain blacklists.

  This would allow communities to act together to protect their privacy.

While these suggestions prevent trivial use of this API for user tracking, they do not block it altogether. Within a single domain, a site can continue to track the user during a session, and can then pass all this information to the third party along with any identifying information (names, credit card numbers, addresses) obtained by the site. If a third party cooperates with multiple sites to obtain such information, a profile can still be created.

However, user tracking is to some extent possible even with no cooperation from the user agent whatsoever, for instance by using session identifiers in URLs, a technique already commonly used for innocuous purposes but easily repurposed for user tracking (even retroactively). This information can then be shared with other sites, using visitors' IP addresses and other user-specific data (e.g. user-agent headers and configuration settings) to combine separate sessions into coherent user profiles.

#### 11.4.2 Sensitivity of data

User agents should treat persistently stored data as potentially sensitive; it's quite possible for e-mails, calendar appointments, health records, or other confidential documents to be stored in this mechanism.

To this end, user agents should ensure that when deleting data, it is promptly deleted from the underlying storage.

### 11.5 Security

#### 11.5.1 DNS spoofing attacks

Because of the potential for DNS spoofing attacks, one cannot guarantee that a host claiming to be in a certain domain really is from that domain. To mitigate this, pages can use TLS. Pages using TLS can be sure that only the user, software working on behalf of the user, and other pages using TLS that have certificates identifying them as being from the same domain, can access their storage areas.

#### 11.5.2 Cross-directory attacks

Different authors sharing one host name, for example users hosting content on the now defunct `geocities.com`, all share one local storage object. There is no feature to restrict the access by pathname. Authors on shared hosts are therefore urged to avoid using these features, as it would be trivial for other authors to read the data and overwrite it.

Even if a path-restriction feature was made available, the usual DOM scripting security model would make it trivial to bypass this protection and access the data from any path.

#### 11.5.3 Implementation risks

The two primary risks when implementing these persistent storage features are letting hostile sites read information from other domains, and letting hostile sites write information that is then read from other domains.

Letting third-party sites read data that is not supposed to be read from their domain causes information leakage, For example, a user's shopping wishlist on one domain could be used by another domain for targeted advertising; or a user's work-in-progress confidential documents stored by a word-processing site could be examined by the site of a competing company.

Letting third-party sites write data to the persistent storage of other domains can result in information spoofing, which is equally dangerous. For example, a hostile site could add items to a user's wishlist; or a hostile site could set a user's session identifier to a known ID that the hostile site can then use to track the user's actions on the victim site.

Thus, strictly following the origin model described in this specification is important for user security.

## 12 The HTML syntax

This section only describes the rules for resources labeled with an HTML MIME type. Rules for XML resources are discussed in the section below entitled "The XHTML syntax".

### 12.1 Writing HTML documents

This section only applies to documents, authoring tools, and markup generators. In particular, it does not apply to conformance checkers; conformance checkers must use the requirements given in the next section ("parsing HTML documents").

Documents must consist of the following parts, in the given order:

1. Optionally, a single U+FEFF BYTE ORDER MARK (BOM) character.
2. Any number of comments and space characters.
3. A DOCTYPE.
4. Any number of comments and space characters.
5. The root element, in the form of an `html` element.
6. Any number of comments and space characters.

The various types of content mentioned above are described in the next few sections.

In addition, there are some restrictions on how character encoding declarations are to be serialised, as discussed in the section on that topic.

Space characters before the root `html` element, and space characters at the start of the `html` element and before the `head` element, will be dropped when the document is parsed; space characters after the root `html` element will be parsed as if they were at the end of the `body` element. Thus, space characters around the root element do not round-trip.

It is suggested that newlines be inserted after the DOCTYPE, after any comments that are before the root element, after the `html` element's start tag (if it is not omitted), and after any comments that are inside the `html` element but before the `head` element.

Many strings in the HTML syntax (e.g. the names of elements and their attributes) are case-insensitive, but only for uppercase ASCII letters and lowercase ASCII letters. For convenience, in this section this is just referred to as "case-insensitive".

#### 12.1.1 The DOCTYPE

A DOCTYPE is a required preamble.

DOCTYPEs are required for legacy reasons. When omitted, browsers tend to use a different rendering mode that is incompatible with some specifications. Including the DOCTYPE in a document ensures that the browser makes a best-effort attempt at following the relevant specifications.

A DOCTYPE must consist of the following components, in this order:

1. A string that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`<!DOCTYPE`".
2. One or more space characters.
3. A string that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`html`".
4. Optionally, a DOCTYPE legacy string or an obsolete permitted DOCTYPE string (defined below).
5. Zero or more space characters.
6. A U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character (>).

In other words, `<!DOCTYPE html>`, case-insensitively.

For the purposes of HTML generators that cannot output HTML markup with the short DOCTYPE "`<!DOCTYPE html>`", a DOCTYPE legacy string may be inserted into the DOCTYPE (in the position defined above). This string must consist of:

1. One or more space characters.
2. A string that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`SYSTEM`".
3. One or more space characters.
4. A U+0022 QUOTATION MARK or U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (the quote mark).
5. The literal string "`about:legacy-compat`".
6. A matching U+0022 QUOTATION MARK or U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (i.e. the same character as in the earlier step labeled quote mark).

In other words, `<!DOCTYPE html SYSTEM "about:legacy-compat">` or `<!DOCTYPE html SYSTEM 'about:legacy-compat'>`, case-insensitively except for the part in single or double quotes.

The DOCTYPE legacy string should not be used unless the document is generated from a system that cannot output the shorter string.

To help authors transition from HTML4 and XHTML1, an obsolete permitted DOCTYPE string can be inserted into the DOCTYPE (in the position defined above). This string must consist of:

1. One or more space characters.
2. A string that is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`PUBLIC`".
3. One or more space characters.
4. A U+0022 QUOTATION MARK or U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (the first quote mark).
5. The string from one of the cells in the first column of the table below. The row to which this cell belongs is the selected row.
6. A matching U+0022 QUOTATION MARK or U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (i.e. the same character as in the earlier step labeled first quote mark).
7. If the cell in the second column of the selected row is not blank, one or more space characters.
8. If the cell in the second column of the selected row is not blank, a U+0022 QUOTATION MARK or U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (the third quote mark).
9. If the cell in the second column of the selected row is not blank, the string from the cell in the second column of the selected row.
10. If the cell in the second column of the selected row is not blank, a matching U+0022 QUOTATION MARK or U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (i.e. the same character as in the earlier step labeled third quote mark).

Allowed values for public and system identifiers in an obsolete permitted DOCTYPE string.
Public identifier | System identifier
--- | ---
`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0//EN` |
`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0//EN` | `http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/strict.dtd`
`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN` |
`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN` | `http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd`
`-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN` | `http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd`
`-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN` | `http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd`

A DOCTYPE containing an obsolete permitted DOCTYPE string is an obsolete permitted DOCTYPE. Authors should not use obsolete permitted DOCTYPEs, as they are unnecessarily long.

#### 12.1.2 Elements

There are five different kinds of elements: void elements, raw text elements, escapable raw text elements, foreign elements, and normal elements.

Void elements
  `area`, `base`, `br`, `col`, `embed`, `hr`, `img`, `input`, `keygen`, `link`, `menuitem`, `meta`, `param`, `source`, `track`, `wbr`
Raw text elements
  `script`, `style`
escapable raw text elements
  `textarea`, `title`
Foreign elements
  Elements from the MathML namespace and the SVG namespace.
Normal elements
  All other allowed HTML elements are normal elements.

Tags are used to delimit the start and end of elements in the markup. Raw text, escapable raw text, and normal elements have a start tag to indicate where they begin, and an end tag to indicate where they end. The start and end tags of certain normal elements can be omitted, as described below in the section on optional tags. Those that cannot be omitted must not be omitted. Void elements only have a start tag; end tags must not be specified for void elements. Foreign elements must either have a start tag and an end tag, or a start tag that is marked as self-closing, in which case they must not have an end tag.

The contents of the element must be placed between just after the start tag (which might be implied, in certain cases) and just before the end tag (which again, might be implied in certain cases). The exact allowed contents of each individual element depend on the content model of that element, as described earlier in this specification. Elements must not contain content that their content model disallows. In addition to the restrictions placed on the contents by those content models, however, the five types of elements have additional syntactic requirements.

Void elements can't have any contents (since there's no end tag, no content can be put between the start tag and the end tag).

Raw text elements can have text, though it has restrictions described below.

Escapable raw text elements can have text and character references, but the text must not contain an ambiguous ampersand. There are also further restrictions described below.

Foreign elements whose start tag is marked as self-closing can't have any contents (since, again, as there's no end tag, no content can be put between the start tag and the end tag). Foreign elements whose start tag is not marked as self-closing can have text, character references, CDATA sections, other elements, and comments, but the text must not contain the character U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<) or an ambiguous ampersand.

The HTML syntax does not support namespace declarations, even in foreign elements.

For instance, consider the following HTML fragment:

    <p>
     <svg>
      <metadata>
       <!-- this is invalid -->
       <cdr:license xmlns:cdr="http://www.example.com/cdr/metadata" name="MIT"/>
      </metadata>
     </svg>
    </p>

The innermost element, `cdr:license`, is actually in the SVG namespace, as the "`xmlns:cdr`" attribute has no effect (unlike in XML). In fact, as the comment in the fragment above says, the fragment is actually non-conforming. This is because the SVG specification does not define any elements called "`cdr:license`" in the SVG namespace.

Normal elements can have text, character references, other elements, and comments, but the text must not contain the character U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<) or an ambiguous ampersand. Some normal elements also have yet more restrictions on what content they are allowed to hold, beyond the restrictions imposed by the content model and those described in this paragraph. Those restrictions are described below.

Tags contain a tag name, giving the element's name. HTML elements all have names that only use alphanumeric ASCII characters. In the HTML syntax, tag names, even those for foreign elements, may be written with any mix of lower- and uppercase letters that, when converted to all-lowercase, matches the element's tag name; tag names are case-insensitive.

##### 12.1.2.1 Start tags

Start tags must have the following format:

1. The first character of a start tag must be a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character (<).
2. The next few characters of a start tag must be the element's tag name.
3. If there are to be any attributes in the next step, there must first be one or more space characters.
4. Then, the start tag may have a number of attributes, the syntax for which is described below. Attributes must be separated from each other by one or more space characters.
5. After the attributes, or after the tag name if there are no attributes, there may be one or more space characters. (Some attributes are required to be followed by a space. See the attributes section below.)
6. Then, if the element is one of the void elements, or if the element is a foreign element, then there may be a single U+002F SOLIDUS character (/). This character has no effect on void elements, but on foreign elements it marks the start tag as self-closing.
7. Finally, start tags must be closed by a U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character (>).

##### 12.1.2.2 End tags

End tags must have the following format:

1. The first character of an end tag must be a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character (<).
2. The second character of an end tag must be a U+002F SOLIDUS character (/).
3. The next few characters of an end tag must be the element's tag name.
4. After the tag name, there may be one or more space characters.
5. Finally, end tags must be closed by a U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character (>).

##### 12.1.2.3 Attributes

Attributes for an element are expressed inside the element's start tag.

Attributes have a name and a value. Attribute names must consist of one or more characters other than the space characters, U+0000 NULL, U+0022 QUOTATION MARK ("), U+0027 APOSTROPHE ('), U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>), U+002F SOLIDUS (/), and U+003D EQUALS SIGN (=) characters, the control characters, and any characters that are not defined by Unicode. In the HTML syntax, attribute names, even those for foreign elements, may be written with any mix of lower- and uppercase letters that are an ASCII case-insensitive match for the attribute's name.

Attribute values are a mixture of text and character references, except with the additional restriction that the text cannot contain an ambiguous ampersand.

Attributes can be specified in four different ways:

Empty attribute syntax

  Just the attribute name. The value is implicitly the empty string.

  In the following example, the `disabled` attribute is given with the empty attribute syntax:

      <input disabled>

  If an attribute using the empty attribute syntax is to be followed by another attribute, then there must be a space character separating the two.

Unquoted attribute value syntax

  The attribute name, followed by zero or more space characters, followed by a single U+003D EQUALS SIGN character, followed by zero or more space characters, followed by the attribute value, which, in addition to the requirements given above for attribute values, must not contain any literal space characters, any U+0022 QUOTATION MARK characters ("), U+0027 APOSTROPHE characters ('), U+003D EQUALS SIGN characters (=), U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN characters (<), U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN characters (>), or U+0060 GRAVE ACCENT characters (`), and must not be the empty string.

  In the following example, the `value` attribute is given with the unquoted attribute value syntax:

      <input value=yes>

  If an attribute using the unquoted attribute syntax is to be followed by another attribute or by the optional U+002F SOLIDUS character (/) allowed in step 6 of the start tag syntax above, then there must be a space character separating the two.

Single-quoted attribute value syntax

  The attribute name, followed by zero or more space characters, followed by a single U+003D EQUALS SIGN character, followed by zero or more space characters, followed by a single U+0027 APOSTROPHE character ('), followed by the attribute value, which, in addition to the requirements given above for attribute values, must not contain any literal U+0027 APOSTROPHE characters ('), and finally followed by a second single U+0027 APOSTROPHE character (').

  In the following example, the `type` attribute is given with the single-quoted attribute value syntax:

      <input type='checkbox'>

  If an attribute using the single-quoted attribute syntax is to be followed by another attribute, then there must be a space character separating the two.

Double-quoted attribute value syntax

  The attribute name, followed by zero or more space characters, followed by a single U+003D EQUALS SIGN character, followed by zero or more space characters, followed by a single U+0022 QUOTATION MARK character ("), followed by the attribute value, which, in addition to the requirements given above for attribute values, must not contain any literal U+0022 QUOTATION MARK characters ("), and finally followed by a second single U+0022 QUOTATION MARK character (").

  In the following example, the `name` attribute is given with the double-quoted attribute value syntax:

      <input name="be evil">

  If an attribute using the double-quoted attribute syntax is to be followed by another attribute, then there must be a space character separating the two.

There must never be two or more attributes on the same start tag whose names are an ASCII case-insensitive match for each other.

When a foreign element has one of the namespaced attributes given by the local name and namespace of the first and second cells of a row from the following table, it must be written using the name given by the third cell from the same row.

Local name | Namespace | Attribute name
--- | --- | ---
`actuate` | XLink namespace | `xlink:actuate`
`arcrole` | XLink namespace | `xlink:arcrole`
`href` | XLink namespace | `xlink:href`
`role` | XLink namespace | `xlink:role`
`show` | XLink namespace | `xlink:show`
`title` | XLink namespace | `xlink:title`
`type` | XLink namespace | `xlink:type`
`base` | XML namespace | `xml:base`
`lang` | XML namespace | `xml:lang`
`space` | XML namespace | `xml:space`
`xmlns` | XMLNS namespace | `xmlns`
`xlink` | XMLNS namespace | `xmlns:xlink`

No other namespaced attribute can be expressed in the HTML syntax.

Whether the attributes in the table above are conforming or not is defined by other specifications (e.g. the SVG and MathML specifications); this section only describes the syntax rules if the attributes are serialised using the HTML syntax.

##### 12.1.2.4 Optional tags

Certain tags can be omitted.

Omitting an element's start tag in the situations described below does not mean the element is not present; it is implied, but it is still there. For example, an HTML document always has a root `html` element, even if the string `<html>` doesn't appear anywhere in the markup.

An `html` element's start tag may be omitted if the first thing inside the `html` element is not a comment.

For example, in the following case it's ok to remove the "`<html>`" tag:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
      <head>
        <title>Hello</title>
      </head>
      <body>
        <p>Welcome to this example.</p>
      </body>
    </html>

Doing so would make the document look like this:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>

      <head>
        <title>Hello</title>
      </head>
      <body>
        <p>Welcome to this example.</p>
      </body>
    </html>

This has the exact same DOM. In particular, note that white space around the root element is ignored by the parser. The following example would also have the exact same DOM:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML><head>
        <title>Hello</title>
      </head>
      <body>
        <p>Welcome to this example.</p>
      </body>
    </html>

However, in the following example, removing the start tag moves the comment to before the `html` element:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
      <!-- where is this comment in the DOM? -->
      <head>
        <title>Hello</title>
      </head>
      <body>
        <p>Welcome to this example.</p>
      </body>
    </html>

With the tag removed, the document actually turns into the same as this:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <!-- where is this comment in the DOM? -->
    <html>
      <head>
        <title>Hello</title>
      </head>
      <body>
        <p>Welcome to this example.</p>
      </body>
    </html>

This is why the tag can only be removed if it is not followed by a comment: removing the tag when there is a comment there changes the document's resulting parse tree. Of course, if the position of the comment does not matter, then the tag can be omitted, as if the comment had been moved to before the start tag in the first place.

An `html` element's end tag may be omitted if the `html` element is not immediately followed by a comment.

A `head` element's start tag may be omitted if the element is empty, or if the first thing inside the `head` element is an element.

A `head` element's end tag may be omitted if the `head` element is not immediately followed by a space character or a comment.

A `body` element's start tag may be omitted if the element is empty, or if the first thing inside the `body` element is not a space character or a comment, except if the first thing inside the `body` element is a `meta`, `link`, `script`, `style`, or `template` element.

A `body` element's end tag may be omitted if the `body` element is not immediately followed by a comment.

Note that in the example above, the `head` element start and end tags, and the `body` element start tag, can't be omitted, because they are surrounded by white space:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html>
      <head>
        <title>Hello</title>
      </head>
      <body>
        <p>Welcome to this example.</p>
      </body>
    </html>

(The `body` and `html` element end tags could be omitted without trouble; any spaces after those get parsed into the `body` element anyway.)

Usually, however, white space isn't an issue. If we first remove the white space we don't care about:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML><html><head><title>Hello</title></head><body><p>Welcome to this example.</p></body></html>

Then we can omit a number of tags without affecting the DOM:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML><title>Hello</title><p>Welcome to this example.</p>

At that point, we can also add some white space back:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <title>Hello</title>
    <p>Welcome to this example.</p>

This would be equivalent to this document, with the omitted tags shown in their parser-implied positions; the only white space text node that results from this is the newline at the end of the `head` element:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML>
    <html><head><title>Hello</title>
    </head><body><p>Welcome to this example.</p></body></html>

An `li` element's end tag may be omitted if the `li` element is immediately followed by another `li` element or if there is no more content in the parent element.

A `dt` element's end tag may be omitted if the `dt` element is immediately followed by another `dt` element or a `dd` element.

A `dd` element's end tag may be omitted if the `dd` element is immediately followed by another `dd` element or a `dt` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

A `p` element's end tag may be omitted if the `p` element is immediately followed by an `address`, `article`, `aside`, `blockquote`, `div`, `dl`, `fieldset`, `footer`, `form`, `h1`, `h2`, `h3`, `h4`, `h5`, `h6`, `header`, `hgroup`, `hr`, `main`, `menu`, `nav`, `ol`, `p`, `pre`, `section`, `table`, or `ul`, element, or if there is no more content in the parent element and the parent element is not an `a` element.

We can thus simplify the earlier example further:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML><title>Hello</title><p>Welcome to this example.</p>

An `rt` element's end tag may be omitted if the `rt` element is immediately followed by an `rt` or `rp` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

An `rp` element's end tag may be omitted if the `rp` element is immediately followed by an `rt` or `rp` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

An `optgroup` element's end tag may be omitted if the `optgroup` element is immediately followed by another `optgroup` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

An `option` element's end tag may be omitted if the `option` element is immediately followed by another `option` element, or if it is immediately followed by an `optgroup` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

A `colgroup` element's start tag may be omitted if the first thing inside the `colgroup` element is a `col` element, and if the element is not immediately preceded by another `colgroup` element whose end tag has been omitted. (It can't be omitted if the element is empty.)

A `colgroup` element's end tag may be omitted if the `colgroup` element is not immediately followed by a space character or a comment.

A `caption` element's end tag may be omitted if the `caption` element is not immediately followed by a space character or a comment.

A `thead` element's end tag may be omitted if the `thead` element is immediately followed by a `tbody` or `tfoot` element.

A `tbody` element's start tag may be omitted if the first thing inside the `tbody` element is a `tr` element, and if the element is not immediately preceded by a `tbody`, `thead`, or `tfoot` element whose end tag has been omitted. (It can't be omitted if the element is empty.)

A `tbody` element's end tag may be omitted if the `tbody` element is immediately followed by a `tbody` or `tfoot` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

A `tfoot` element's end tag may be omitted if the `tfoot` element is immediately followed by a `tbody` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

A `tr` element's end tag may be omitted if the `tr` element is immediately followed by another `tr` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

A `td` element's end tag may be omitted if the `td` element is immediately followed by a `td` or `th` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

A `th` element's end tag may be omitted if the `th` element is immediately followed by a `td` or `th` element, or if there is no more content in the parent element.

The ability to omit all these table-related tags makes table markup much terser.

Take this example:

    <table>
     <caption>37547 TEE Electric Powered Rail Car Train Functions (Abbreviated)</caption>
     <colgroup><col><col><col></colgroup>
     <thead>
      <tr>
       <th>Function</th>
       <th>Control Unit</th>
       <th>Central Station</th>
      </tr>
     </thead>
     <tbody>
      <tr>
       <td>Headlights</td>
       <td>✔</td>
       <td>✔</td>
      </tr>
      <tr>
       <td>Interior Lights</td>
       <td>✔</td>
       <td>✔</td>
      </tr>
      <tr>
       <td>Electric locomotive operating sounds</td>
       <td>✔</td>
       <td>✔</td>
      </tr>
      <tr>
       <td>Engineer's cab lighting</td>
       <td></td>
       <td>✔</td>
      </tr>
      <tr>
       <td>Station Announcements - Swiss</td>
       <td></td>
       <td>✔</td>
      </tr>
     </tbody>
    </table>

The exact same table, modulo some white space differences, could be marked up as follows:

    <table>
     <caption>37547 TEE Electric Powered Rail Car Train Functions (Abbreviated)
     <colgroup><col><col><col>
     <thead>
      <tr>
       <th>Function
       <th>Control Unit
       <th>Central Station
     <tbody>
      <tr>
       <td>Headlights
       <td>✔
       <td>✔
      <tr>
       <td>Interior Lights
       <td>✔
       <td>✔
      <tr>
       <td>Electric locomotive operating sounds
       <td>✔
       <td>✔
      <tr>
       <td>Engineer's cab lighting
       <td>
       <td>✔
      <tr>
       <td>Station Announcements - Swiss
       <td>
       <td>✔
    </table>

Since the cells take up much less room this way, this can be made even terser by having each row on one line:

    <table>
     <caption>37547 TEE Electric Powered Rail Car Train Functions (Abbreviated)
     <colgroup><col><col><col>
     <thead>
      <tr> <th>Function                              <th>Control Unit     <th>Central Station
     <tbody>
      <tr> <td>Headlights                            <td>✔                <td>✔
      <tr> <td>Interior Lights                       <td>✔                <td>✔
      <tr> <td>Electric locomotive operating sounds  <td>✔                <td>✔
      <tr> <td>Engineer's cab lighting               <td>                 <td>✔
      <tr> <td>Station Announcements - Swiss         <td>                 <td>✔
    </table>

The only differences between these tables, at the DOM level, is with the precise position of the (in any case semantically-neutral) white space.

However, a start tag must never be omitted if it has any attributes.

Returning to the earlier example with all the white space removed and then all the optional tags removed:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML><title>Hello</title><p>Welcome to this example.

If the `body` element in this example had to have a `class` attribute and the `html` element had to have a `lang` attribute, the markup would have to become:

    <!DOCTYPE HTML><html lang="en"><title>Hello</title><body class="demo"><p>Welcome to this example.

This section assumes that the document is conforming, in particular, that there are no content model violations. Omitting tags in the fashion described in this section in a document that does not conform to the content models described in this specification is likely to result in unexpected DOM differences (this is, in part, what the content models are designed to avoid).

##### 12.1.2.5 Restrictions on content models

For historical reasons, certain elements have extra restrictions beyond even the restrictions given by their content model.

A `table` element must not contain `tr` elements, even though these elements are technically allowed inside `table` elements according to the content models described in this specification. (If a `tr` element is put inside a `table` in the markup, it will in fact imply a `tbody` start tag before it.)

A single newline may be placed immediately after the start tag of `pre` and `textarea` elements. This does not affect the processing of the element. The otherwise optional newline must be included if the element's contents themselves start with a newline (because otherwise the leading newline in the contents would be treated like the optional newline, and ignored).

The following two `pre` blocks are equivalent:

    <pre>Hello</pre>

    <pre>
    Hello</pre>

##### 12.1.2.6 Restrictions on the contents of raw text and escapable raw text elements

The text in raw text and escapable raw text elements must not contain any occurrences of the string "`</`" (U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN, U+002F SOLIDUS) followed by characters that case-insensitively match the tag name of the element followed by one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab), U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), U+0020 SPACE, U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>), or U+002F SOLIDUS (/).

#### 12.1.3 Text

Text is allowed inside elements, attribute values, and comments. Extra constraints are placed on what is and what is not allowed in text based on where the text is to be put, as described in the other sections.

##### 12.1.3.1 Newlines

Newlines in HTML may be represented either as U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters, U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters, or pairs of U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters in that order.

Where character references are allowed, a character reference of a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character (but not a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character) also represents a newline.

#### 12.1.4 Character references

In certain cases described in other sections, text may be mixed with character references. These can be used to escape characters that couldn't otherwise legally be included in text.

Character references must start with a U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&). Following this, there are three possible kinds of character references:

Named character references
  The ampersand must be followed by one of the names given in the named character references section, using the same case. The name must be one that is terminated by a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;).
Decimal numeric character reference
  The ampersand must be followed by a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), followed by one or more ASCII digits, representing a base-ten integer that corresponds to a Unicode code point that is allowed according to the definition below. The digits must then be followed by a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;).
Hexadecimal numeric character reference
  The ampersand must be followed by a U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character (#), which must be followed by either a U+0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X character (x) or a U+0058 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X character (X), which must then be followed by one or more ASCII hex digits, representing a hexadecimal integer that corresponds to a Unicode code point that is allowed according to the definition below. The digits must then be followed by a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;).

The numeric character reference forms described above are allowed to reference any Unicode code point other than U+0000, U+000D, permanently undefined Unicode characters (noncharacters), surrogates (U+D800–U+DFFF), and control characters other than space characters.

An ambiguous ampersand is a U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&) that is followed by one or more alphanumeric ASCII characters, followed by a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;), where these characters do not match any of the names given in the named character references section.

#### 12.1.5 CDATA sections

CDATA sections must consist of the following components, in this order:

1. The string "`<![CDATA[`".
2. Optionally, text, with the additional restriction that the text must not contain the string "`]]>`".
3. The string "`]]>`".

CDATA sections can only be used in foreign content (MathML or SVG). In this example, a CDATA section is used to escape the contents of an `ms` element:

    <p>You can add a string to a number, but this stringifies the number:</p>
    <math>
     <ms><![CDATA[x<y]]></ms>
     <mo>+</mo>
     <mn>3</mn>
     <mo>=</mo>
     <ms><![CDATA[x<y3]]></ms>
    </math>

#### 12.1.6 Comments

Comments must start with the four character sequence U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN, U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK, U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS, U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (`<!--`). Following this sequence, the comment may have text, with the additional restriction that the text must not start with a single U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character (>), nor start with a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) followed by a U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>) character, nor contain two consecutive U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (`--`), nor end with a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-). Finally, the comment must be ended by the three character sequence U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS, U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS, U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (`-->`).

### 12.2 Parsing HTML documents

This section only applies to user agents, data mining tools, and conformance checkers.

The rules for parsing XML documents into DOM trees are covered by the next section, entitled "The XHTML syntax".

User agents must use the parsing rules described in this section to generate the DOM trees from `text/html` resources. Together, these rules define what is referred to as the HTML parser.

While the HTML syntax described in this specification bears a close resemblance to SGML and XML, it is a separate language with its own parsing rules.

Some earlier versions of HTML (in particular from HTML2 to HTML4) were based on SGML and used SGML parsing rules. However, few (if any) web browsers ever implemented true SGML parsing for HTML documents; the only user agents to strictly handle HTML as an SGML application have historically been validators. The resulting confusion — with validators claiming documents to have one representation while widely deployed Web browsers interoperably implemented a different representation — has wasted decades of productivity. This version of HTML thus returns to a non-SGML basis.

Authors interested in using SGML tools in their authoring pipeline are encouraged to use XML tools and the XML serialisation of HTML.

This specification defines the parsing rules for HTML documents, whether they are syntactically correct or not. Certain points in the parsing algorithm are said to be parse errors. The error handling for parse errors is well-defined (that's the processing rules described throughout this specification), but user agents, while parsing an HTML document, may abort the parser at the first parse error that they encounter for which they do not wish to apply the rules described in this specification.

Conformance checkers must report at least one parse error condition to the user if one or more parse error conditions exist in the document and must not report parse error conditions if none exist in the document. Conformance checkers may report more than one parse error condition if more than one parse error condition exists in the document.

Parse errors are only errors with the syntax of HTML. In addition to checking for parse errors, conformance checkers will also verify that the document obeys all the other conformance requirements described in this specification.

For the purposes of conformance checkers, if a resource is determined to be in the HTML syntax, then it is an HTML document.

As stated in the terminology section, references to element types that do not explicitly specify a namespace always refer to elements in the HTML namespace. For example, if the spec talks about "a `menuitem` element", then that is an element with the local name "`menuitem`", the namespace "`http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml`", and the interface `HTMLMenuItemElement`. Where possible, references to such elements are hyperlinked to their definition.

#### 12.2.1 Overview of the parsing model

The input to the HTML parsing process consists of a stream of Unicode code points, which is passed through a tokenization stage followed by a tree construction stage. The output is a `Document` object.

Implementations that do not support scripting do not have to actually create a DOM `Document` object, but the DOM tree in such cases is still used as the model for the rest of the specification.

In the common case, the data handled by the tokenization stage comes from the network, but it can also come from script running in the user agent, e.g. using the `document.write()` API.

There is only one set of states for the tokenizer stage and the tree construction stage, but the tree construction stage is reentrant, meaning that while the tree construction stage is handling one token, the tokenizer might be resumed, causing further tokens to be emitted and processed before the first token's processing is complete.

In the following example, the tree construction stage will be called upon to handle a "p" start tag token while handling the "script" end tag token:

    ...
    <script>
     document.write('<p>');
    </script>
    ...

To handle these cases, parsers have a script nesting level, which must be initially set to zero, and a parser pause flag, which must be initially set to false.

#### 12.2.2 The input byte stream

The stream of Unicode code points that comprises the input to the tokenization stage will be initially seen by the user agent as a stream of bytes (typically coming over the network or from the local file system). The bytes encode the actual characters according to a particular character encoding, which the user agent uses to decode the bytes into characters.

For XML documents, the algorithm user agents are required to use to determine the character encoding is given by the XML specification. This section does not apply to XML documents. [XML]

Usually, the encoding sniffing algorithm defined below is used to determine the character encoding.

Given a character encoding, the bytes in the input byte stream must be converted to Unicode code points for the tokenizer's input stream, as described by the rules for that encoding's decoder.

Bytes or sequences of bytes in the original byte stream that did not conform to the Encoding standard (e.g. invalid UTF-8 byte sequences in a UTF-8 input byte stream) are errors that conformance checkers are expected to report. [ENCODING]

Leading Byte Order Marks (BOMs) are not stripped by the decoder algorithms, they are stripped by the algorithm below.

The decoder algorithms describe how to handle invalid input; for security reasons, it is imperative that those rules be followed precisely. Differences in how invalid byte sequences are handled can result in, amongst other problems, script injection vulnerabilities ("XSS").

When the HTML parser is decoding an input byte stream, it uses a character encoding and a confidence. The confidence is either tentative, certain, or irrelevant. The encoding used, and whether the confidence in that encoding is tentative or certain, is used during the parsing to determine whether to change the encoding. If no encoding is necessary, e.g. because the parser is operating on a Unicode stream and doesn't have to use a character encoding at all, then the confidence is irrelevant.

Some algorithms feed the parser by directly adding characters to the input stream rather than adding bytes to the input byte stream.

##### 12.2.2.1 Parsing with a known character encoding

When the HTML parser is to operate on an input byte stream that has a known definite encoding, then the character encoding is that encoding and the confidence is certain.

##### 12.2.2.2 Determining the character encoding

In some cases, it might be impractical to unambiguously determine the encoding before parsing the document. Because of this, this specification provides for a two-pass mechanism with an optional pre-scan. Implementations are allowed, as described below, to apply a simplified parsing algorithm to whatever bytes they have available before beginning to parse the document. Then, the real parser is started, using a tentative encoding derived from this pre-parse and other out-of-band metadata. If, while the document is being loaded, the user agent discovers a character encoding declaration that conflicts with this information, then the parser can get reinvoked to perform a parse of the document with the real encoding.

User agents must use the following algorithm, called the encoding sniffing algorithm, to determine the character encoding to use when decoding a document in the first pass. This algorithm takes as input any out-of-band metadata available to the user agent (e.g. the Content-Type metadata of the document) and all the bytes available so far, and returns a character encoding and a confidence that is either tentative or certain.

1. If the user has explicitly instructed the user agent to override the document's character encoding with a specific encoding, optionally return that encoding with the confidence certain and abort these steps.

   Typically, user agents remember such user requests across sessions, and in some cases apply them to documents in `iframe`s as well.

2. The user agent may wait for more bytes of the resource to be available, either in this step or at any later step in this algorithm. For instance, a user agent might wait 500ms or 1024 bytes, whichever came first. In general preparsing the source to find the encoding improves performance, as it reduces the need to throw away the data structures used when parsing upon finding the encoding information. However, if the user agent delays too long to obtain data to determine the encoding, then the cost of the delay could outweigh any performance improvements from the preparse.

   The authoring conformance requirements for character encoding declarations limit them to only appearing in the first 1024 bytes. User agents are therefore encouraged to use the prescan algorithm below (as invoked by these steps) on the first 1024 bytes, but not to stall beyond that.

3. For each of the rows in the following table, starting with the first one and going down, if there are as many or more bytes available than the number of bytes in the first column, and the first bytes of the file match the bytes given in the first column, then return the encoding given in the cell in the second column of that row, with the confidence certain, and abort these steps:

   Bytes in Hexadecimal | Encoding
   --- | ---
   FE FF | Big-endian UTF-16
   FF FE | Little-endian UTF-16
   EF BB BF | UTF-8

   This step looks for Unicode Byte Order Marks (BOMs).

   That this step happens before the next one honoring the HTTP `Content-Type` header is a willful violation of the HTTP specification, motivated by a desire to be maximally compatible with legacy content. [HTTP]

4. If the transport layer specifies a character encoding, and it is supported, return that encoding with the confidence certain, and abort these steps.

5. Optionally prescan the byte stream to determine its encoding. The end condition is that the user agent decides that scanning further bytes would not be efficient. User agents are encouraged to only prescan the first 1024 bytes. User agents may decide that scanning any bytes is not efficient, in which case these substeps are entirely skipped.

   The aforementioned algorithm either aborts unsuccessfully or returns a character encoding. If it returns a character encoding, then this algorithm must be aborted, returning the same encoding, with confidence tentative.

6. If the HTML parser for which this algorithm is being run is associated with a `Document` that is itself in a nested browsing context, run these substeps:

   1. Let new document be the `Document` with which the HTML parser is associated.

   2. Let parent document be the `Document` through which new document is nested (the active document of the parent browsing context of new document).

   3. If parent document's origin is not the same origin as new document's origin, then abort these substeps.

   4. If parent document's character encoding is not an ASCII-compatible character encoding, then abort these substeps.

   5. Return parent document's character encoding, with the confidence tentative, and abort the encoding sniffing algorithm's steps.

7. Otherwise, if the user agent has information on the likely encoding for this page, e.g. based on the encoding of the page when it was last visited, then return that encoding, with the confidence tentative, and abort these steps.

8. The user agent may attempt to autodetect the character encoding from applying frequency analysis or other algorithms to the data stream. Such algorithms may use information about the resource other than the resource's contents, including the address of the resource. If autodetection succeeds in determining a character encoding, and that encoding is a supported encoding, then return that encoding, with the confidence tentative, and abort these steps. [UNIVCHARDET]

   User agents are generally discouraged from attempting to autodetect encodings for resources obtained over the network, since doing so involves inherently non-interoperable heuristics. Attempting to detect encodings based on an HTML document's preamble is especially tricky since HTML markup typically uses only ASCII characters, and HTML documents tend to begin with a lot of markup rather than with text content.

   The UTF-8 encoding has a highly detectable bit pattern. Files from the local file system that contain bytes with values greater than 0x7F which match the UTF-8 pattern are very likely to be UTF-8, while documents with byte sequences that do not match it are very likely not. When a user agent can examine the whole file, rather than just the preamble, detecting for UTF-8 specifically can be especially effective. [PPUTF8] [UTF8DET]

9. Otherwise, return an implementation-defined or user-specified default character encoding, with the confidence tentative.

   In controlled environments or in environments where the encoding of documents can be prescribed (for example, for user agents intended for dedicated use in new networks), the comprehensive `UTF-8` encoding is suggested.

   In other environments, the default encoding is typically dependent on the user's locale (an approximation of the languages, and thus often encodings, of the pages that the user is likely to frequent). The following table gives suggested defaults based on the user's locale, for compatibility with legacy content. Locales are identified by BCP 47 language tags. [BCP47] [ENCODING]

   Locale language | Suggested default encoding
   --- | ---
   ar | Arabic | windows-1256
   ba | Bashkir | windows-1251
   be | Belarusian | windows-1251
   bg | Bulgarian | windows-1251
   cs | Czech | windows-1250
   el | Greek | ISO-8859-7
   et | Estonian | windows-1257
   fa | Persian | windows-1256
   he | Hebrew | windows-1255
   hr | Croatian | windows-1250
   hu | Hungarian | ISO-8859-2
   ja | Japanese | Shift_JIS
   kk | Kazakh | windows-1251
   ko | Korean | euc-kr
   ku | Kurdish | windows-1254
   ky | Kyrgyz | windows-1251
   lt | Lithuanian | windows-1257
   lv | Latvian | windows-1257
   mk | Macedonian | windows-1251
   pl | Polish | ISO-8859-2
   ru | Russian | windows-1251
   sah | Yakut | windows-1251
   sk | Slovak | windows-1250
   sl | Slovenian | ISO-8859-2
   sr | Serbian | windows-1251
   tg | Tajik | windows-1251
   th | Thai | windows-874
   tr | Turkish | windows-1254
   tt | Tatar | windows-1251
   uk | Ukrainian | windows-1251
   vi | Vietnamese | windows-1258
   zh-CN | Chinese (People's Republic of China) | GB18030
   zh-TW | Chinese (Taiwan) | Big5
   All other locales | windows-1252

   The contents of this table are derived from the intersection of Windows, Chrome, and Firefox defaults.

The document's character encoding must immediately be set to the value returned from this algorithm, at the same time as the user agent uses the returned value to select the decoder to use for the input byte stream.

When an algorithm requires a user agent to prescan a byte stream to determine its encoding, given some defined end condition, then it must run the following steps. These steps either abort unsuccessfully or return a character encoding. If at any point during these steps (including during instances of the get an attribute algorithm invoked by this one) the user agent either runs out of bytes (meaning the position pointer created in the first step below goes beyond the end of the byte stream obtained so far) or reaches its end condition, then abort the prescan a byte stream to determine its encoding algorithm unsuccessfully.

1. Let position be a pointer to a byte in the input byte stream, initially pointing at the first byte.

2. Loop: If position points to:

   A sequence of bytes starting with: 0x3C 0x21 0x2D 0x2D (ASCII '<!--')

     Advance the position pointer so that it points at the first 0x3E byte which is preceded by two 0x2D bytes (i.e. at the end of an ASCII '-->' sequence) and comes after the 0x3C byte that was found. (The two 0x2D bytes can be the same as the those in the '<!--' sequence.)

   A sequence of bytes starting with: 0x3C, 0x4D or 0x6D, 0x45 or 0x65, 0x54 or 0x74, 0x41 or 0x61, and one of 0x09, 0x0A, 0x0C, 0x0D, 0x20, 0x2F (case-insensitive ASCII '<meta' followed by a space or slash)

     1. Advance the position pointer so that it points at the next 0x09, 0x0A, 0x0C, 0x0D, 0x20, or 0x2F byte (the one in sequence of characters matched above).

     2. Let attribute list be an empty list of strings.

     3. Let got pragma be false.

     4. Let need pragma be null.

     5. Let charset be the null value (which, for the purposes of this algorithm, is distinct from an unrecognised encoding or the empty string).

     6. Attributes: Get an attribute and its value. If no attribute was sniffed, then jump to the processing step below.

     7. If the attribute's name is already in attribute list, then return to the step labeled attributes.

     8. Add the attribute's name to attribute list.

     9. Run the appropriate step from the following list, if one applies:

        If the attribute's name is "`http-equiv`"

          If the attribute's value is "`content-type`", then set got pragma to true.

        If the attribute's name is "`content`"

          Apply the algorithm for extracting a character encoding from a `meta` element, giving the attribute's value as the string to parse. If a character encoding is returned, and if charset is still set to null, let charset be the encoding returned, and set need pragma to true.

        If the attribute's name is "`charset`"

          Let charset be the result of getting an encoding from the attribute's value, and set need pragma to false.

     10. Return to the step labeled attributes.

     11. Processing: If need pragma is null, then jump to the step below labeled next byte.

     12. If need pragma is true but got pragma is false, then jump to the step below labeled next byte.

     13. If charset is a UTF-16 encoding, change the value of charset to UTF-8.

     14. If charset is the x-user-defined encoding, change the value of charset to Windows-1252. [ENCODING]

     15. If charset is not a supported character encoding, then jump to the step below labeled next byte.

     16. Abort the prescan a byte stream to determine its encoding algorithm, returning the encoding given by charset.

   A sequence of bytes starting with a 0x3C byte (ASCII <), optionally a 0x2F byte (ASCII /), and finally a byte in the range 0x41-0x5A or 0x61-0x7A (an ASCII letter)

     1. Advance the position pointer so that it points at the next 0x09 (ASCII TAB), 0x0A (ASCII LF), 0x0C (ASCII FF), 0x0D (ASCII CR), 0x20 (ASCII space), or 0x3E (ASCII >) byte.

     2. Repeatedly get an attribute until no further attributes can be found, then jump to the step below labeled next byte.

   A sequence of bytes starting with: 0x3C 0x21 (ASCII '<!')
   A sequence of bytes starting with: 0x3C 0x2F (ASCII '</')
   A sequence of bytes starting with: 0x3C 0x3F (ASCII '<?')

     Advance the position pointer so that it points at the first 0x3E byte (ASCII >) that comes after the 0x3C byte that was found.

   Any other byte

     Do nothing with that byte.

3. Next byte: Move position so it points at the next byte in the input byte stream, and return to the step above labeled loop.

When the prescan a byte stream to determine its encoding algorithm says to get an attribute, it means doing this:

1. If the byte at position is one of 0x09 (ASCII TAB), 0x0A (ASCII LF), 0x0C (ASCII FF), 0x0D (ASCII CR), 0x20 (ASCII space), or 0x2F (ASCII /) then advance position to the next byte and redo this step.

2. If the byte at position is 0x3E (ASCII >), then abort the get an attribute algorithm. There isn't one.

3. Otherwise, the byte at position is the start of the attribute name. Let attribute name and attribute value be the empty string.

4. Process the byte at position as follows:

   If it is 0x3D (ASCII =), and the attribute name is longer than the empty string
     Advance position to the next byte and jump to the step below labeled value.
   If it is 0x09 (ASCII TAB), 0x0A (ASCII LF), 0x0C (ASCII FF), 0x0D (ASCII CR), or 0x20 (ASCII space)
     Jump to the step below labeled spaces.
   If it is 0x2F (ASCII /) or 0x3E (ASCII >)
     Abort the get an attribute algorithm. The attribute's name is the value of attribute name, its value is the empty string.
   If it is in the range 0x41 (ASCII A) to 0x5A (ASCII Z)
     Append the Unicode character with code point b+0x20 to attribute name (where b is the value of the byte at position). (This converts the input to lowercase.)
   Anything else
     Append the Unicode character with the same code point as the value of the byte at position to attribute name. (It doesn't actually matter how bytes outside the ASCII range are handled here, since only ASCII characters can contribute to the detection of a character encoding.)

5. Advance position to the next byte and return to the previous step.

6. Spaces: If the byte at position is one of 0x09 (ASCII TAB), 0x0A (ASCII LF), 0x0C (ASCII FF), 0x0D (ASCII CR), or 0x20 (ASCII space) then advance position to the next byte, then, repeat this step.

7. If the byte at position is not 0x3D (ASCII =), abort the get an attribute algorithm. The attribute's name is the value of attribute name, its value is the empty string.

8. Advance position past the 0x3D (ASCII =) byte.

9. Value: If the byte at position is one of 0x09 (ASCII TAB), 0x0A (ASCII LF), 0x0C (ASCII FF), 0x0D (ASCII CR), or 0x20 (ASCII space) then advance position to the next byte, then, repeat this step.

10. Process the byte at position as follows:

    If it is 0x22 (ASCII ") or 0x27 (ASCII ')
      1. Let b be the value of the byte at position.
      2. Quote loop: Advance position to the next byte.
      3. If the value of the byte at position is the value of b, then advance position to the next byte and abort the "get an attribute" algorithm. The attribute's name is the value of attribute name, and its value is the value of attribute value.
      4. Otherwise, if the value of the byte at position is in the range 0x41 (ASCII A) to 0x5A (ASCII Z), then append a Unicode character to attribute value whose code point is 0x20 more than the value of the byte at position.
      5. Otherwise, append a Unicode character to attribute value whose code point is the same as the value of the byte at position.
      6. Return to the step above labeled quote loop.
    If it is 0x3E (ASCII >)
      Abort the get an attribute algorithm. The attribute's name is the value of attribute name, its value is the empty string.
    If it is in the range 0x41 (ASCII A) to 0x5A (ASCII Z)
      Append the Unicode character with code point b+0x20 to attribute value (where b is the value of the byte at position). Advance position to the next byte.
    Anything else
      Append the Unicode character with the same code point as the value of the byte at position to attribute value. Advance position to the next byte.

11. Process the byte at position as follows:

    If it is 0x09 (ASCII TAB), 0x0A (ASCII LF), 0x0C (ASCII FF), 0x0D (ASCII CR), 0x20 (ASCII space), or 0x3E (ASCII >)
      Abort the get an attribute algorithm. The attribute's name is the value of attribute name and its value is the value of attribute value.
    If it is in the range 0x41 (ASCII A) to 0x5A (ASCII Z)
      Append the Unicode character with code point b+0x20 to attribute value (where b is the value of the byte at position).
    Anything else
      Append the Unicode character with the same code point as the value of the byte at position to attribute value.

12. Advance position to the next byte and return to the previous step.

For the sake of interoperability, user agents should not use a pre-scan algorithm that returns different results than the one described above. (But, if you do, please at least let us know, so that we can improve this algorithm and benefit everyone...)

##### 12.2.2.3 Character encodings

User agents must support the encodings defined in the WHATWG Encoding standard. User agents should not support other encodings.

User agents must not support the CESU-8, UTF-7, BOCU-1 and SCSU encodings. [CESU8] [UTF7] [BOCU1] [SCSU]

Support for encodings based on EBCDIC is especially discouraged. This encoding is rarely used for publicly-facing Web content. Support for UTF-32 is also especially discouraged. This encoding is rarely used, and frequently implemented incorrectly.

This specification does not make any attempt to support EBCDIC-based encodings and UTF-32 in its algorithms; support and use of these encodings can thus lead to unexpected behavior in implementations of this specification.

##### 12.2.2.4 Changing the encoding while parsing

When the parser requires the user agent to change the encoding, it must run the following steps. This might happen if the encoding sniffing algorithm described above failed to find a character encoding, or if it found a character encoding that was not the actual encoding of the file.

1. If the encoding that is already being used to interpret the input stream is a UTF-16 encoding, then set the confidence to certain and abort these steps. The new encoding is ignored; if it was anything but the same encoding, then it would be clearly incorrect.

2. If the new encoding is a UTF-16 encoding, change it to UTF-8.

3. If the new encoding is the x-user-defined encoding, change it to Windows-1252. [ENCODING]

4. If the new encoding is identical or equivalent to the encoding that is already being used to interpret the input stream, then set the confidence to certain and abort these steps. This happens when the encoding information found in the file matches what the encoding sniffing algorithm determined to be the encoding, and in the second pass through the parser if the first pass found that the encoding sniffing algorithm described in the earlier section failed to find the right encoding.

5. If all the bytes up to the last byte converted by the current decoder have the same Unicode interpretations in both the current encoding and the new encoding, and if the user agent supports changing the converter on the fly, then the user agent may change to the new converter for the encoding on the fly. Set the document's character encoding and the encoding used to convert the input stream to the new encoding, set the confidence to certain, and abort these steps.

6. Otherwise, navigate to the document again, with replacement enabled, and using the same source browsing context, but this time skip the encoding sniffing algorithm and instead just set the encoding to the new encoding and the confidence to certain. Whenever possible, this should be done without actually contacting the network layer (the bytes should be re-parsed from memory), even if, e.g., the document is marked as not being cacheable. If this is not possible and contacting the network layer would involve repeating a request that uses a method other than HTTP GET (or equivalent for non-HTTP URLs), then instead set the confidence to certain and ignore the new encoding. The resource will be misinterpreted. User agents may notify the user of the situation, to aid in application development.

This algorithm is only invoked when a new encoding is found declared on a `meta` element.

##### 12.2.2.5 Preprocessing the input stream

The input stream consists of the characters pushed into it as the input byte stream is decoded or from the various APIs that directly manipulate the input stream.

One leading U+FEFF BYTE ORDER MARK character must be ignored if any are present in the input stream.

The requirement to strip a U+FEFF BYTE ORDER MARK character regardless of whether that character was used to determine the byte order is a willful violation of Unicode, motivated by a desire to increase the resilience of user agents in the face of naïve transcoders.

Any occurrences of any characters in the ranges U+0001 to U+0008, U+000E to U+001F, U+007F to U+009F, U+FDD0 to U+FDEF, and characters U+000B, U+FFFE, U+FFFF, U+1FFFE, U+1FFFF, U+2FFFE, U+2FFFF, U+3FFFE, U+3FFFF, U+4FFFE, U+4FFFF, U+5FFFE, U+5FFFF, U+6FFFE, U+6FFFF, U+7FFFE, U+7FFFF, U+8FFFE, U+8FFFF, U+9FFFE, U+9FFFF, U+AFFFE, U+AFFFF, U+BFFFE, U+BFFFF, U+CFFFE, U+CFFFF, U+DFFFE, U+DFFFF, U+EFFFE, U+EFFFF, U+FFFFE, U+FFFFF, U+10FFFE, and U+10FFFF are parse errors. These are all control characters or permanently undefined Unicode characters (noncharacters).

Any character that is a not a Unicode character, i.e. any isolated surrogate, is a parse error. (These can only find their way into the input stream via script APIs such as `document.write()`.)

U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) characters and U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters are treated specially. All CR characters must be converted to LF characters, and any LF characters that immediately follow a CR character must be ignored. Thus, newlines in HTML DOMs are represented by LF characters, and there are never any CR characters in the input to the tokenization stage.

The next input character is the first character in the input stream that has not yet been consumed or explicitly ignored by the requirements in this section. Initially, the next input character is the first character in the input. The current input character is the last character to have been consumed.

The insertion point is the position (just before a character or just before the end of the input stream) where content inserted using `document.write()` is actually inserted. The insertion point is relative to the position of the character immediately after it, it is not an absolute offset into the input stream. Initially, the insertion point is undefined.

The "EOF" character in the tables below is a conceptual character representing the end of the input stream. If the parser is a script-created parser, then the end of the input stream is reached when an explicit "EOF" character (inserted by the `document.close()` method) is consumed. Otherwise, the "EOF" character is not a real character in the stream, but rather the lack of any further characters.

The handling of U+0000 NULL characters varies based on where the characters are found. In general, they are ignored except where doing so could plausibly introduce an attack vector. This handling is, by necessity, spread across both the tokenization stage and the tree construction stage.

#### 12.2.3 Parse state

##### 12.2.3.1 The insertion mode

The insertion mode is a state variable that controls the primary operation of the tree construction stage.

Initially, the insertion mode is "initial". It can change to "before html", "before head", "in head", "in head noscript", "after head", "in body", "text", "in table", "in table text", "in caption", "in column group", "in table body", "in row", "in cell", "in select", "in select in table", "in template", "after body", "in frameset", "after frameset", "after after body", and "after after frameset" during the course of the parsing, as described in the tree construction stage. The insertion mode affects how tokens are processed and whether CDATA sections are supported.

Several of these modes, namely "in head", "in body", "in table", and "in select", are special, in that the other modes defer to them at various times. When the algorithm below says that the user agent is to do something "using the rules for the m insertion mode", where m is one of these modes, the user agent must use the rules described under the m insertion mode's section, but must leave the insertion mode unchanged unless the rules in m themselves switch the insertion mode to a new value.

When the insertion mode is switched to "text" or "in table text", the original insertion mode is also set. This is the insertion mode to which the tree construction stage will return.

Similarly, to parse nested `template` elements, a stack of template insertion modes is used. It is initially empty. The current template insertion mode is the insertion mode that was most recently added to the stack of template insertion modes. The algorithms in the sections below will push insertion modes onto this stack, meaning that the specified insertion mode is to be added to the stack, and pop insertion modes from the stack, which means that the most recently added insertion mode must be removed from the stack.

When the steps below require the UA to reset the insertion mode appropriately, it means the UA must follow these steps:

1. Let last be false.

2. Let node be the last node in the stack of open elements.

3. Loop: If node is the first node in the stack of open elements, then set last to true, and, if the parser was originally created as part of the HTML fragment parsing algorithm (fragment case), set node to the context element.

4. If node is a `select` element, run these substeps:

   1. If last is true, jump to the step below labeled done.

   2. Let ancestor be node.

   3. Loop: If ancestor is the first node in the stack of open elements, jump to the step below labeled done.

   4. Let ancestor be the node before ancestor in the stack of open elements.

   5. If ancestor is a `template` node, jump to the step below labeled done.

   6. If ancestor is a `table` node, switch the insertion mode to "in select in table" and abort these steps.

   7. Jump back to the step labeled loop.

   8. Done: Switch the insertion mode to "in select" and abort these steps.

5. If node is a `td` or `th` element and last is false, then switch the insertion mode to "in cell" and abort these steps.

6. If node is a `tr` element, then switch the insertion mode to "in row" and abort these steps.

7. If node is a `tbody`, `thead`, or `tfoot` element, then switch the insertion mode to "in table body" and abort these steps.

8. If node is a `caption` element, then switch the insertion mode to "in caption" and abort these steps.

9. If node is a `colgroup` element, then switch the insertion mode to "in column group" and abort these steps.

10. If node is a `table` element, then switch the insertion mode to "in table" and abort these steps.

11. If node is a `template` element, then switch the insertion mode to the current template insertion mode and abort these steps.

12. If node is a `head` element and last is false, then switch the insertion mode to "in head" and abort these steps.

13. If node is a `body` element, then switch the insertion mode to "in body" and abort these steps.

14. If node is a `frameset` element, then switch the insertion mode to "in frameset" and abort these steps. (fragment case)

15. If node is an `html` element, run these substeps:

    1. If the `head` element pointer is null, switch the insertion mode to "before head" and abort these steps. (fragment case)

    2. Otherwise, the `head` element pointer is not null, switch the insertion mode to "after head" and abort these steps.

16. If last is true, then switch the insertion mode to "in body" and abort these steps. (fragment case)

17. Let node now be the node before node in the stack of open elements.

18. Return to the step labeled loop.

##### 12.2.3.2 The stack of open elements

Initially, the stack of open elements is empty. The stack grows downwards; the topmost node on the stack is the first one added to the stack, and the bottommost node of the stack is the most recently added node in the stack (notwithstanding when the stack is manipulated in a random access fashion as part of the handling for misnested tags).

The "before html" insertion mode creates the `html` root element node, which is then added to the stack.

In the fragment case, the stack of open elements is initialised to contain an `html` element that is created as part of that algorithm. (The fragment case skips the "before html" insertion mode.)

The `html` node, however it is created, is the topmost node of the stack. It only gets popped off the stack when the parser finishes.

The current node is the bottommost node in this stack of open elements.

The adjusted current node is the context element if the stack of open elements has only one element in it and the parser was created by the HTML fragment parsing algorithm; otherwise, the adjusted current node is the current node.

Elements in the stack of open elements fall into the following categories:

Special

  The following elements have varying levels of special parsing rules: HTML's `address`, `applet`, `area`, `article`, `aside`, `base`, `basefont`, `bgsound`, `blockquote`, `body`, `br`, `button`, `caption`, `center`, `col`, `colgroup`, `dd`, `details`, `dir`, `div`, `dl`, `dt`, `embed`, `fieldset`, `figcaption`, `figure`, `footer`, `form`, `frame`, `frameset`, `h1`, `h2`, `h3`, `h4`, `h5`, `h6`, `head`, `header`, `hgroup`, `hr`, `html`, `iframe`, `img`, `input`, `isindex`, `li`, `link`, `listing`, `main`, `marquee`, `menu`, `menuitem`, `meta`, `nav`, `noembed`, `noframes`, `noscript`, `object`, `ol`, `p`, `param`, `plaintext`, `pre`, `script`, `section`, `select`, `source`, `style`, `summary`, `table`, `tbody`, `td`, `template`, `textarea`, `tfoot`, `th`, `thead`, `title`, `tr`, `track`, `ul`, `wbr`, and `xmp`; MathML's `mi`, `mo`, `mn`, `ms`, `mtext`, and `annotation-xml`; and SVG's `foreignObject`, `desc`, and `title`.

Formatting

  The following HTML elements are those that end up in the list of active formatting elements: `a`, `b`, `big`, `code`, `em`, `font`, `i`, `nobr`, `s`, `small`, `strike`, `strong`, `tt`, and `u`.

Ordinary

  All other elements found while parsing an HTML document.

The stack of open elements is said to have an element target node in a specific scope consisting of a list of element types list when the following algorithm terminates in a match state:

1. Initialise node to be the current node (the bottommost node of the stack).

2. If node is the target node, terminate in a match state.

3. Otherwise, if node is one of the element types in list, terminate in a failure state.

4. Otherwise, set node to the previous entry in the stack of open elements and return to step 2. (This will never fail, since the loop will always terminate in the previous step if the top of the stack — an `html` element — is reached.)

The stack of open elements is said to have a particular element in scope when it has that element in the specific scope consisting of the following element types:

- `applet` in the HTML namespace
- `caption` in the HTML namespace
- `html` in the HTML namespace
- `table` in the HTML namespace
- `td` in the HTML namespace
- `th` in the HTML namespace
- `marquee` in the HTML namespace
- `object` in the HTML namespace
- `template` in the HTML namespace
- `mi` in the MathML namespace
- `mo` in the MathML namespace
- `mn` in the MathML namespace
- `ms` in the MathML namespace
- `mtext` in the MathML namespace
- `annotation-xml` in the MathML namespace
- `foreignObject` in the SVG namespace
- `desc` in the SVG namespace
- `title` in the SVG namespace

The stack of open elements is said to have a particular element in list item scope when it has that element in the specific scope consisting of the following element types:

- All the element types listed above for the has an element in scope algorithm.
- `ol` in the HTML namespace
- `ul` in the HTML namespace

The stack of open elements is said to have a particular element in button scope when it has that element in the specific scope consisting of the following element types:

- All the element types listed above for the has an element in scope algorithm.
- `button` in the HTML namespace

The stack of open elements is said to have a particular element in table scope when it has that element in the specific scope consisting of the following element types:

- `html` in the HTML namespace
- `table` in the HTML namespace
- `template` in the HTML namespace

The stack of open elements is said to have a particular element in select scope when it has that element in the specific scope consisting of all element types except the following:

- `optgroup` in the HTML namespace
- `option` in the HTML namespace

Nothing happens if at any time any of the elements in the stack of open elements are moved to a new location in, or removed from, the `Document` tree. In particular, the stack is not changed in this situation. This can cause, amongst other strange effects, content to be appended to nodes that are no longer in the DOM.

In some cases (namely, when closing misnested formatting elements), the stack is manipulated in a random-access fashion.

##### 12.2.3.3 The list of active formatting elements

Initially, the list of active formatting elements is empty. It is used to handle mis-nested formatting element tags.

The list contains elements in the formatting category, and markers. The markers are inserted when entering `applet` elements, buttons, `object` elements, marquees, table cells, and table captions, and are used to prevent formatting from "leaking" into `applet` elements, buttons, `object` elements, marquees, and tables.

In addition, each element in the list of active formatting elements is associated with the token for which it was created, so that further elements can be created for that token if necessary.

When the steps below require the UA to push onto the list of active formatting elements an element element, the UA must perform the following steps:

1. If there are already three elements in the list of active formatting elements after the last marker, if any, or anywhere in the list if there are no markers, that have the same tag name, namespace, and attributes as element, then remove the earliest such element from the list of active formatting elements. For these purposes, the attributes must be compared as they were when the elements were created by the parser; two elements have the same attributes if all their parsed attributes can be paired such that the two attributes in each pair have identical names, namespaces, and values (the order of the attributes does not matter).

   This is the Noah's Ark clause. But with three per family instead of two.

2. Add element to the list of active formatting elements.

When the steps below require the UA to reconstruct the active formatting elements, the UA must perform the following steps:

1. If there are no entries in the list of active formatting elements, then there is nothing to reconstruct; stop this algorithm.

2. If the last (most recently added) entry in the list of active formatting elements is a marker, or if it is an element that is in the stack of open elements, then there is nothing to reconstruct; stop this algorithm.

3. Let entry be the last (most recently added) element in the list of active formatting elements.

4. Rewind: If there are no entries before entry in the list of active formatting elements, then jump to the step labeled create.

5. Let entry be the entry one earlier than entry in the list of active formatting elements.

6. If entry is neither a marker nor an element that is also in the stack of open elements, go to the step labeled rewind.

7. Advance: Let entry be the element one later than entry in the list of active formatting elements.

8. Create: Insert an HTML element for the token for which the element entry was created, to obtain new element.

9. Replace the entry for entry in the list with an entry for new element.

10. If the entry for new element in the list of active formatting elements is not the last entry in the list, return to the step labeled advance.

This has the effect of reopening all the formatting elements that were opened in the current body, cell, or caption (whichever is youngest) that haven't been explicitly closed.

The way this specification is written, the list of active formatting elements always consists of elements in chronological order with the least recently added element first and the most recently added element last (except for while steps 8 to 11 of the above algorithm are being executed, of course).

When the steps below require the UA to clear the list of active formatting elements up to the last marker, the UA must perform the following steps:

1. Let entry be the last (most recently added) entry in the list of active formatting elements.

2. Remove entry from the list of active formatting elements.

3. If entry was a marker, then stop the algorithm at this point. The list has been cleared up to the last marker.

4. Go to step 1.

##### 12.2.3.4 The element pointers

Initially, the `head` element pointer and the `form` element pointer are both null.

Once a `head` element has been parsed (whether implicitly or explicitly) the `head` element pointer gets set to point to this node.

The `form` element pointer points to the last `form` element that was opened and whose end tag has not yet been seen. It is used to make form controls associate with forms in the face of dramatically bad markup, for historical reasons. It is ignored inside `template` elements.

##### 12.2.3.5 Other parsing state flags

The scripting flag is set to "enabled" if scripting was enabled for the `Document` with which the parser is associated when the parser was created, and "disabled" otherwise.

The scripting flag can be enabled even when the parser was originally created for the HTML fragment parsing algorithm, even though `script` elements don't execute in that case.

The frameset-ok flag is set to "ok" when the parser is created. It is set to "not ok" after certain tokens are seen.

#### 12.2.4 Tokenization

Implementations must act as if they used the following state machine to tokenise HTML. The state machine must start in the data state. Most states consume a single character, which may have various side-effects, and either switches the state machine to a new state to reconsume the same character, or switches it to a new state to consume the next character, or stays in the same state to consume the next character. Some states have more complicated behavior and can consume several characters before switching to another state. In some cases, the tokenizer state is also changed by the tree construction stage.

The exact behavior of certain states depends on the insertion mode and the stack of open elements. Certain states also use a temporary buffer to track progress.

The output of the tokenization step is a series of zero or more of the following tokens: DOCTYPE, start tag, end tag, comment, character, end-of-file. DOCTYPE tokens have a name, a public identifier, a system identifier, and a force-quirks flag. When a DOCTYPE token is created, its name, public identifier, and system identifier must be marked as missing (which is a distinct state from the empty string), and the force-quirks flag must be set to off (its other state is on). Start and end tag tokens have a tag name, a self-closing flag, and a list of attributes, each of which has a name and a value. When a start or end tag token is created, its self-closing flag must be unset (its other state is that it be set), and its attributes list must be empty. Comment and character tokens have data.

When a token is emitted, it must immediately be handled by the tree construction stage. The tree construction stage can affect the state of the tokenization stage, and can insert additional characters into the stream. (For example, the `script` element can result in scripts executing and using the dynamic markup insertion APIs to insert characters into the stream being tokenized.)

Creating a token and emitting it are distinct actions. It is possible for a token to be created but implicitly abandoned (never emitted), e.g. if the file ends unexpectedly while processing the characters that are being parsed into a start tag token.

When a start tag token is emitted with its self-closing flag set, if the flag is not acknowledged when it is processed by the tree construction stage, that is a parse error.

When an end tag token is emitted with attributes, that is a parse error.

When an end tag token is emitted with its self-closing flag set, that is a parse error.

An appropriate end tag token is an end tag token whose tag name matches the tag name of the last start tag to have been emitted from this tokenizer, if any. If no start tag has been emitted from this tokenizer, then no end tag token is appropriate.

Before each step of the tokenizer, the user agent must first check the parser pause flag. If it is true, then the tokenizer must abort the processing of any nested invocations of the tokenizer, yielding control back to the caller.

The tokenizer state machine consists of the states defined in the following subsections.

##### 12.2.4.1 Data state

Consume the next input character:

U+0026 AMPERSAND (&)
  Switch to the character reference in data state.
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the tag open state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Emit the current input character as a character token.
EOF
  Emit an end-of-file token.
Anything else
  Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.2 Character reference in data state

Switch to the data state.

Attempt to consume a character reference, with no additional allowed character.

If nothing is returned, emit a U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&) token.

Otherwise, emit the character tokens that were returned.

##### 12.2.4.3 RCDATA state

Consume the next input character:

U+0026 AMPERSAND (&)
  Switch to the character reference in RCDATA state.
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the RCDATA less-than sign state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Emit an end-of-file token.
Anything else
  Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.4 Character reference in RCDATA state

Switch to the RCDATA state.

Attempt to consume a character reference, with no additional allowed character.

If nothing is returned, emit a U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&) token.

Otherwise, emit the character tokens that were returned.

##### 12.2.4.5 RAWTEXT state

Consume the next input character:

U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the RAWTEXT less-than sign state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Emit an end-of-file token.
Anything else
  Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.6 Script data state

Consume the next input character:

U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the script data less-than sign state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Emit an end-of-file token.
Anything else
  Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.7 PLAINTEXT state

Consume the next input character:

U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Emit an end-of-file token.
Anything else
  Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.8 Tag open state

Consume the next input character:

U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK (!)
  Switch to the markup declaration open state.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Switch to the end tag open state.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Create a new start tag token, set its tag name to the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point), then switch to the tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Create a new start tag token, set its tag name to the current input character, then switch to the tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
U+003F QUESTION MARK (?)
  Parse error. Switch to the bogus comment state.
Anything else
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.9 End tag open state

Consume the next input character:

Uppercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, set its tag name to the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point), then switch to the tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, set its tag name to the current input character, then switch to the tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Switch to the data state.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token and a U+002F SOLIDUS character token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Switch to the bogus comment state.

##### 12.2.4.10 Tag name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Switch to the before attribute name state.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Switch to the self-closing start tag state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current tag token.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the current tag token's tag name.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current tag token's tag name.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current tag token's tag name.

##### 12.2.4.11 RCDATA less-than sign state

Consume the next input character:

U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Set the temporary buffer to the empty string. Switch to the RCDATA end tag open state.
Anything else
  Switch to the RCDATA state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.12 RCDATA end tag open state

Consume the next input character:

Uppercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, and set its tag name to the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point). Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Finally, switch to the RCDATA end tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, and set its tag name to the current input character. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Finally, switch to the RCDATA end tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Anything else
  Switch to the RCDATA state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token and a U+002F SOLIDUS character token. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.13 RCDATA end tag name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the before attribute name state. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the self-closing start tag state. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the data state and emit the current tag token. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the current tag token's tag name. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer.
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Append the current input character to the current tag token's tag name. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer.
Anything else
  Switch to the RCDATA state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token, a U+002F SOLIDUS character token, and a character token for each of the characters in the temporary buffer (in the order they were added to the buffer). Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.14 RAWTEXT less-than sign state

Consume the next input character:

U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Set the temporary buffer to the empty string. Switch to the RAWTEXT end tag open state.
Anything else
  Switch to the RAWTEXT state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.15 RAWTEXT end tag open state

Consume the next input character:

Uppercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, and set its tag name to the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point). Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Finally, switch to the RAWTEXT end tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, and set its tag name to the current input character. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Finally, switch to the RAWTEXT end tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Anything else
  Switch to the RAWTEXT state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token and a U+002F SOLIDUS character token. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.16 RAWTEXT end tag name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the before attribute name state. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the self-closing start tag state. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the data state and emit the current tag token. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the current tag token's tag name. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer.
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Append the current input character to the current tag token's tag name. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer.
Anything else
  Switch to the RAWTEXT state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token, a U+002F SOLIDUS character token, and a character token for each of the characters in the temporary buffer (in the order they were added to the buffer). Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.17 Script data less-than sign state

Consume the next input character:

U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Set the temporary buffer to the empty string. Switch to the script data end tag open state.
U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK (!)
  Switch to the script data escape start state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token and a U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK character token.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.18 Script data end tag open state

Consume the next input character:

Uppercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, and set its tag name to the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point). Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Finally, switch to the script data end tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, and set its tag name to the current input character. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Finally, switch to the script data end tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Anything else
  Switch to the script data state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token and a U+002F SOLIDUS character token. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.19 Script data end tag name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the before attribute name state. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the self-closing start tag state. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the data state and emit the current tag token. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the current tag token's tag name. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer.
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Append the current input character to the current tag token's tag name. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token, a U+002F SOLIDUS character token, and a character token for each of the characters in the temporary buffer (in the order they were added to the buffer). Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.20 Script data escape start state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the script data escape start dash state. Emit a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character token.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data state. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.21 Script data escape start dash state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the script data escaped dash dash state. Emit a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character token.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data state. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.22 Script data escaped state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the script data escaped dash state. Emit a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character token.
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the script data escaped less-than sign state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Switch to the data state. Parse error. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.23 Script data escaped dash state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the script data escaped dash dash state. Emit a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character token.
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the script data escaped less-than sign state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Switch to the script data escaped state. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data escaped state. Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.24 Script data escaped dash dash state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Emit a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character token.
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the script data escaped less-than sign state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the script data state. Emit a U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character token.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Switch to the script data escaped state. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data escaped state. Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.25 Script data escaped less-than sign state

Consume the next input character:

U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Set the temporary buffer to the empty string. Switch to the script data escaped end tag open state.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Set the temporary buffer to the empty string. Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the temporary buffer. Switch to the script data double escape start state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token and the current input character as a character token.
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Set the temporary buffer to the empty string. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Switch to the script data double escape start state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token and the current input character as a character token.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data escaped state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.26 Script data escaped end tag open state

Consume the next input character:

Uppercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, and set its tag name to the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point). Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Finally, switch to the script data escaped end tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Create a new end tag token, and set its tag name to the current input character. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Finally, switch to the script data escaped end tag name state. (Don't emit the token yet; further details will be filled in before it is emitted.)
Anything else
  Switch to the script data escaped state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token and a U+002F SOLIDUS character token. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.27 Script data escaped end tag name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the before attribute name state. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the self-closing start tag state. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  If the current end tag token is an appropriate end tag token, then switch to the data state and emit the current tag token. Otherwise, treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the current tag token's tag name. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer.
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Append the current input character to the current tag token's tag name. Append the current input character to the temporary buffer.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data escaped state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token, a U+002F SOLIDUS character token, and a character token for each of the characters in the temporary buffer (in the order they were added to the buffer). Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.28 Script data double escape start state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  If the temporary buffer is the string "`script`", then switch to the script data double escaped state. Otherwise, switch to the script data escaped state. Emit the current input character as a character token.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the temporary buffer. Emit the current input character as a character token.
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Emit the current input character as a character token.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data escaped state. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.29 Script data double escaped state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the script data double escaped dash state. Emit a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character token.
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the script data double escaped less-than sign state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.30 Script data double escaped dash state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the script data double escaped dash dash state. Emit a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character token.
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the script data double escaped less-than sign state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Switch to the script data double escaped state. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data double escaped state. Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.31 Script data double escaped dash dash state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Emit a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character token.
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Switch to the script data double escaped less-than sign state. Emit a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character token.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the script data state. Emit a U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character token.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Switch to the script data double escaped state. Emit a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data double escaped state. Emit the current input character as a character token.

##### 12.2.4.32 Script data double escaped less-than sign state

Consume the next input character:

U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Set the temporary buffer to the empty string. Switch to the script data double escape end state. Emit a U+002F SOLIDUS character token.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data double escaped state. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.33 Script data double escape end state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  If the temporary buffer is the string "`script`", then switch to the script data escaped state. Otherwise, switch to the script data double escaped state. Emit the current input character as a character token.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the temporary buffer. Emit the current input character as a character token.
Lowercase ASCII letter
  Append the current input character to the temporary buffer. Emit the current input character as a character token.
Anything else
  Switch to the script data double escaped state. Reconsume the current input character.

##### 12.2.4.34 Before attribute name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Ignore the character.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Switch to the self-closing start tag state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current tag token.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Start a new attribute in the current tag token. Set that attribute's name to the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point), and its value to the empty string. Switch to the attribute name state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Start a new attribute in the current tag token. Set that attribute's name to a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character, and its value to the empty string. Switch to the attribute name state.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
U+003D EQUALS SIGN (=)
  Parse error. Treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Start a new attribute in the current tag token. Set that attribute's name to the current input character, and its value to the empty string. Switch to the attribute name state.

##### 12.2.4.35 Attribute name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Switch to the after attribute name state.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Switch to the self-closing start tag state.
U+003D EQUALS SIGN (=)
  Switch to the before attribute value state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current tag token.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the current attribute's name.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current attribute's name.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Parse error. Treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current attribute's name.

When the user agent leaves the attribute name state (and before emitting the tag token, if appropriate), the complete attribute's name must be compared to the other attributes on the same token; if there is already an attribute on the token with the exact same name, then this is a parse error and the new attribute must be removed from the token.

If an attribute is so removed from a token, it, and the value that gets associated with it, if any, are never subsequently used by the parser, and are therefore effectively discarded. Removing the attribute in this way does not change its status as the "current attribute" for the purposes of the tokenizer, however.

##### 12.2.4.36 After attribute name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Ignore the character.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Switch to the self-closing start tag state.
U+003D EQUALS SIGN (=)
  Switch to the before attribute value state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current tag token.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Start a new attribute in the current tag token. Set that attribute's name to the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point), and its value to the empty string. Switch to the attribute name state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Start a new attribute in the current tag token. Set that attribute's name to a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character, and its value to the empty string. Switch to the attribute name state.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
  Parse error. Treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Start a new attribute in the current tag token. Set that attribute's name to the current input character, and its value to the empty string. Switch to the attribute name state.

##### 12.2.4.37 Before attribute value state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Ignore the character.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Switch to the attribute value (double-quoted) state.
U+0026 AMPERSAND (&)
  Switch to the attribute value (unquoted) state. Reconsume the current input character.
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Switch to the attribute value (single-quoted) state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current attribute's value. Switch to the attribute value (unquoted) state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit the current tag token.
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
U+003D EQUALS SIGN (=)
U+0060 GRAVE ACCENT (`)
  Parse error. Treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current attribute's value. Switch to the attribute value (unquoted) state.

##### 12.2.4.38 Attribute value (double-quoted) state

Consume the next input character:

U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Switch to the after attribute value (quoted) state.
U+0026 AMPERSAND (&)
  Switch to the character reference in attribute value state, with the additional allowed character being U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (").
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current attribute's value.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current attribute's value.

##### 12.2.4.39 Attribute value (single-quoted) state

Consume the next input character:

U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Switch to the after attribute value (quoted) state.
U+0026 AMPERSAND (&)
  Switch to the character reference in attribute value state, with the additional allowed character being U+0027 APOSTROPHE (').
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current attribute's value.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current attribute's value.

##### 12.2.4.40 Attribute value (unquoted) state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Switch to the before attribute name state.
U+0026 AMPERSAND (&)
  Switch to the character reference in attribute value state, with the additional allowed character being U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>).
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current tag token.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current attribute's value.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN (<)
U+003D EQUALS SIGN (=)
U+0060 GRAVE ACCENT (`)
  Parse error. Treat it as per the "anything else" entry below.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current attribute's value.

##### 12.2.4.41 Character reference in attribute value state

Attempt to consume a character reference.

If nothing is returned, append a U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&) to the current attribute's value.

Otherwise, append the returned character tokens to the current attribute's value.

Finally, switch back to the attribute value state that switched into this state.

##### 12.2.4.42 After attribute value (quoted) state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Switch to the before attribute name state.
U+002F SOLIDUS (/)
  Switch to the self-closing start tag state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current tag token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Switch to the before attribute name state. Reconsume the character.

##### 12.2.4.43 Self-closing start tag state

Consume the next input character:

U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Set the self-closing flag of the current tag token. Switch to the data state. Emit the current tag token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Switch to the before attribute name state. Reconsume the character.

##### 12.2.4.44 Bogus comment state

Consume every character up to and including the first U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character (>) or the end of the file (EOF), whichever comes first. If more than one character was consumed, then emit a comment token whose data is the concatenation of all the characters starting from and including the character that caused the state machine to switch into the bogus comment state, up to and including the character immediately before the last consumed character (i.e. up to the character just before the U+003E or EOF character), but with any U+0000 NULL characters replaced by U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER characters. (If the comment was started by the end of the file (EOF), the token is empty. Similarly, the token is empty if it was generated by the string "`<!>`".)

Switch to the data state.

If the end of the file was reached, reconsume the EOF character.

##### 12.2.4.45 Markup declaration open state

If the next two characters are both U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (-), consume those two characters, create a comment token whose data is the empty string, and switch to the comment start state.

Otherwise, if the next seven characters are an ASCII case-insensitive match for the word "DOCTYPE", then consume those characters and switch to the DOCTYPE state.

Otherwise, if there is an adjusted current node and it is not an element in the HTML namespace and the next seven characters are a case-sensitive match for the string "[CDATA[" (the five uppercase letters "CDATA" with a U+005B LEFT SQUARE BRACKET character before and after), then consume those characters and switch to the CDATA section state.

Otherwise, this is a parse error. Switch to the bogus comment state. The next character that is consumed, if any, is the first character that will be in the comment.

##### 12.2.4.46 Comment start state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the comment start dash state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.

##### 12.2.4.47 Comment start dash state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the comment end state
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) and a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) and the current input character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.

##### 12.2.4.48 Comment state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the comment end dash state
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the comment token's data.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the comment token's data.

##### 12.2.4.49 Comment end dash state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Switch to the comment end state
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) and a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) and the current input character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.

##### 12.2.4.50 Comment end state

Consume the next input character:

U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append two U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (-) and a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.
U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK (!)
  Parse error. Switch to the comment end bang state.
U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Parse error. Append a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-) to the comment token's data.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Append two U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (-) and the current input character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.

##### 12.2.4.51 Comment end bang state

Consume the next input character:

U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS (-)
  Append two U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (-) and a U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK character (!) to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment end dash state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append two U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (-), a U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK character (!), and a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Emit the comment token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append two U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (-), a U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK character (!), and the current input character to the comment token's data. Switch to the comment state.

##### 12.2.4.52 DOCTYPE state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Switch to the before DOCTYPE name state.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Create a new DOCTYPE token. Set its force-quirks flag to on. Emit the token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Switch to the before DOCTYPE name state. Reconsume the character.

##### 12.2.4.53 Before DOCTYPE name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Ignore the character.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Create a new DOCTYPE token. Set the token's name to the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point). Switch to the DOCTYPE name state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Create a new DOCTYPE token. Set the token's name to a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character. Switch to the DOCTYPE name state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Create a new DOCTYPE token. Set its force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the data state. Emit the token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Create a new DOCTYPE token. Set its force-quirks flag to on. Emit the token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Create a new DOCTYPE token. Set the token's name to the current input character. Switch to the DOCTYPE name state.

##### 12.2.4.54 DOCTYPE name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Switch to the after DOCTYPE name state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current DOCTYPE token.
Uppercase ASCII letter
  Append the lowercase version of the current input character (add 0x0020 to the character's code point) to the current DOCTYPE token's name.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current DOCTYPE token's name.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current DOCTYPE token's name.

##### 12.2.4.55 After DOCTYPE name state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Ignore the character.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else

  If the six characters starting from the current input character are an ASCII case-insensitive match for the word "PUBLIC", then consume those characters and switch to the after DOCTYPE public keyword state.

  Otherwise, if the six characters starting from the current input character are an ASCII case-insensitive match for the word "SYSTEM", then consume those characters and switch to the after DOCTYPE system keyword state.

  Otherwise, this is a parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the bogus DOCTYPE state.

##### 12.2.4.56 After DOCTYPE public keyword state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Switch to the before DOCTYPE public identifier state.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's public identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE public identifier (double-quoted) state.
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's public identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE public identifier (single-quoted) state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the data state. Emit that DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the bogus DOCTYPE state.

##### 12.2.4.57 Before DOCTYPE public identifier state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Ignore the character.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Set the DOCTYPE token's public identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE public identifier (double-quoted) state.
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Set the DOCTYPE token's public identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE public identifier (single-quoted) state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the data state. Emit that DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the bogus DOCTYPE state.

##### 12.2.4.58 DOCTYPE public identifier (double-quoted) state

Consume the next input character:

U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Switch to the after DOCTYPE public identifier state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current DOCTYPE token's public identifier.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the data state. Emit that DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current DOCTYPE token's public identifier.

##### 12.2.4.59 DOCTYPE public identifier (single-quoted) state

Consume the next input character:

U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Switch to the after DOCTYPE public identifier state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current DOCTYPE token's public identifier.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the data state. Emit that DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current DOCTYPE token's public identifier.

##### 12.2.4.60 After DOCTYPE public identifier state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Switch to the between DOCTYPE public and system identifiers state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current DOCTYPE token.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's system identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE system identifier (double-quoted) state.
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's system identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE system identifier (single-quoted) state.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the bogus DOCTYPE state.

##### 12.2.4.61 Between DOCTYPE public and system identifiers state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Ignore the character.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current DOCTYPE token.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Set the DOCTYPE token's system identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE system identifier (double-quoted) state.
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Set the DOCTYPE token's system identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE system identifier (single-quoted) state.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the bogus DOCTYPE state.

##### 12.2.4.62 After DOCTYPE system keyword state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Switch to the before DOCTYPE system identifier state.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's system identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE system identifier (double-quoted) state.
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's system identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE system identifier (single-quoted) state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the data state. Emit that DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the bogus DOCTYPE state.

##### 12.2.4.63 Before DOCTYPE system identifier state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Ignore the character.
U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Set the DOCTYPE token's system identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE system identifier (double-quoted) state.
U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Set the DOCTYPE token's system identifier to the empty string (not missing), then switch to the DOCTYPE system identifier (single-quoted) state.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the data state. Emit that DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the bogus DOCTYPE state.

##### 12.2.4.64 DOCTYPE system identifier (double-quoted) state

Consume the next input character:

U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (")
  Switch to the after DOCTYPE system identifier state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current DOCTYPE token's system identifier.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the data state. Emit that DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current DOCTYPE token's system identifier.

##### 12.2.4.65 DOCTYPE system identifier (single-quoted) state

Consume the next input character:

U+0027 APOSTROPHE (')
  Switch to the after DOCTYPE system identifier state.
U+0000 NULL
  Parse error. Append a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character to the current DOCTYPE token's system identifier.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Parse error. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Switch to the data state. Emit that DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Append the current input character to the current DOCTYPE token's system identifier.

##### 12.2.4.66 After DOCTYPE system identifier state

Consume the next input character:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
  Ignore the character.
U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the current DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Parse error. Switch to the data state. Set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on. Emit that DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Parse error. Switch to the bogus DOCTYPE state. (This does not set the DOCTYPE token's force-quirks flag to on.)

##### 12.2.4.67 Bogus DOCTYPE state

Consume the next input character:

U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (>)
  Switch to the data state. Emit the DOCTYPE token.
EOF
  Switch to the data state. Emit the DOCTYPE token. Reconsume the EOF character.
Anything else
  Ignore the character.

##### 12.2.4.68 CDATA section state

Switch to the data state.

Consume every character up to the next occurrence of the three character sequence U+005D RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET U+005D RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN (`]]>`), or the end of the file (EOF), whichever comes first. Emit a series of character tokens consisting of all the characters consumed except the matching three character sequence at the end (if one was found before the end of the file).

If the end of the file was reached, reconsume the EOF character.

##### 12.2.4.69 Tokenizing character references

This section defines how to consume a character reference, optionally with an additional allowed character, which, if specified where the algorithm is invoked, adds a character to the list of characters that cause there to not be a character reference.

This definition is used when parsing character references in text and in attributes.

The behavior depends on the identity of the next character (the one immediately after the U+0026 AMPERSAND character), as follows:

U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab)
U+000A LINE FEED (LF)
U+000C FORM FEED (FF)
U+0020 SPACE
U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN
U+0026 AMPERSAND
EOF
The additional allowed character, if there is one
  Not a character reference. No characters are consumed, and nothing is returned. (This is not an error, either.)
U+0023 NUMBER SIGN (#)

  Consume the U+0023 NUMBER SIGN.

  The behavior further depends on the character after the U+0023 NUMBER SIGN:

  U+0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X
  U+0058 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X

    Consume the X.

    Follow the steps below, but using ASCII hex digits.

    When it comes to interpreting the number, interpret it as a hexadecimal number.

  Anything else

    Follow the steps below, but using ASCII digits.

    When it comes to interpreting the number, interpret it as a decimal number.

  Consume as many characters as match the range of characters given above (ASCII hex digits or ASCII digits).

  If no characters match the range, then don't consume any characters (and unconsume the U+0023 NUMBER SIGN character and, if appropriate, the X character). This is a parse error; nothing is returned.

  Otherwise, if the next character is a U+003B SEMICOLON, consume that too. If it isn't, there is a parse error.

  If one or more characters match the range, then take them all and interpret the string of characters as a number (either hexadecimal or decimal as appropriate).

  If that number is one of the numbers in the first column of the following table, then this is a parse error. Find the row with that number in the first column, and return a character token for the Unicode character given in the second column of that row.

  Number | Unicode character
  --- | ---
  0x00 | U+FFFD | REPLACEMENT CHARACTER
  0x80 | U+20AC | EURO SIGN (€)
  0x82 | U+201A | SINGLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK (‚)
  0x83 | U+0192 | LATIN SMALL LETTER F WITH HOOK (ƒ)
  0x84 | U+201E | DOUBLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK („)
  0x85 | U+2026 | HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS (…)
  0x86 | U+2020 | DAGGER (†)
  0x87 | U+2021 | DOUBLE DAGGER (‡)
  0x88 | U+02C6 | MODIFIER LETTER CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT (ˆ)
  0x89 | U+2030 | PER MILLE SIGN (‰)
  0x8A | U+0160 | LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON (Š)
  0x8B | U+2039 | SINGLE LEFT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK (‹)
  0x8C | U+0152 | LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE (Œ)
  0x8E | U+017D | LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON (Ž)
  0x91 | U+2018 | LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK (‘)
  0x92 | U+2019 | RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK (’)
  0x93 | U+201C | LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK (“)
  0x94 | U+201D | RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK (”)
  0x95 | U+2022 | BULLET (•)
  0x96 | U+2013 | EN DASH (–)
  0x97 | U+2014 | EM DASH (—)
  0x98 | U+02DC | SMALL TILDE (˜)
  0x99 | U+2122 | TRADE MARK SIGN (™)
  0x9A | U+0161 | LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON (š)
  0x9B | U+203A | SINGLE RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK (›)
  0x9C | U+0153 | LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE (œ)
  0x9E | U+017E | LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON (ž)
  0x9F | U+0178 | LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS (Ÿ)

  Otherwise, if the number is in the range 0xD800 to 0xDFFF or is greater than 0x10FFFF, then this is a parse error. Return a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character token.

  Otherwise, return a character token for the Unicode character whose code point is that number. Additionally, if the number is in the range 0x0001 to 0x0008, 0x000D to 0x001F, 0x007F to 0x009F, 0xFDD0 to 0xFDEF, or is one of 0x000B, 0xFFFE, 0xFFFF, 0x1FFFE, 0x1FFFF, 0x2FFFE, 0x2FFFF, 0x3FFFE, 0x3FFFF, 0x4FFFE, 0x4FFFF, 0x5FFFE, 0x5FFFF, 0x6FFFE, 0x6FFFF, 0x7FFFE, 0x7FFFF, 0x8FFFE, 0x8FFFF, 0x9FFFE, 0x9FFFF, 0xAFFFE, 0xAFFFF, 0xBFFFE, 0xBFFFF, 0xCFFFE, 0xCFFFF, 0xDFFFE, 0xDFFFF, 0xEFFFE, 0xEFFFF, 0xFFFFE, 0xFFFFF, 0x10FFFE, or 0x10FFFF, then this is a parse error.

Anything else

  Consume the maximum number of characters possible, with the consumed characters matching one of the identifiers in the first column of the named character references table (in a case-sensitive manner).

  If no match can be made, then no characters are consumed, and nothing is returned. In this case, if the characters after the U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&) consist of a sequence of one or more alphanumeric ASCII characters followed by a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;), then this is a parse error.

  If the character reference is being consumed as part of an attribute, and the last character matched is not a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;), and the next character is either a U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=) or an alphanumeric ASCII character, then, for historical reasons, all the characters that were matched after the U+0026 AMPERSAND character (&) must be unconsumed, and nothing is returned. However, if this next character is in fact a U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=), then this is a parse error, because some legacy user agents will misinterpret the markup in those cases.

  Otherwise, a character reference is parsed. If the last character matched is not a U+003B SEMICOLON character (;), there is a parse error.

  Return one or two character tokens for the character(s) corresponding to the character reference name (as given by the second column of the named character references table).

  If the markup contains (not in an attribute) the string `I'm &notit; I tell you`, the character reference is parsed as "not", as in, `I'm ¬it; I tell you` (and this is a parse error). But if the markup was `I'm &notin; I tell you`, the character reference would be parsed as "notin;", resulting in `I'm ∉ I tell you` (and no parse error).

#### 12.2.5 Tree construction

The input to the tree construction stage is a sequence of tokens from the tokenization stage. The tree construction stage is associated with a DOM `Document` object when a parser is created. The "output" of this stage consists of dynamically modifying or extending that document's DOM tree.

This specification does not define when an interactive user agent has to render the `Document` so that it is available to the user, or when it has to begin accepting user input.

As each token is emitted from the tokenizer, the user agent must follow the appropriate steps from the following list, known as the tree construction dispatcher:

If the stack of open elements is empty
If the adjusted current node is an element in the HTML namespace
If the adjusted current node is a MathML text integration point and the token is a start tag whose tag name is neither "mglyph" nor "malignmark"
If the adjusted current node is a MathML text integration point and the token is a character token
If the adjusted current node is an `annotation-xml` element in the MathML namespace and the token is a start tag whose tag name is "svg"
If the adjusted current node is an HTML integration point and the token is a start tag
If the adjusted current node is an HTML integration point and the token is a character token
If the token is an end-of-file token
  Process the token according to the rules given in the section corresponding to the current insertion mode in HTML content.
Otherwise
  Process the token according to the rules given in the section for parsing tokens in foreign content.

The next token is the token that is about to be processed by the tree construction dispatcher (even if the token is subsequently just ignored).

A node is a MathML text integration point if it is one of the following elements:

- An `mi` element in the MathML namespace
- An `mo` element in the MathML namespace
- An `mn` element in the MathML namespace
- An `ms` element in the MathML namespace
- An `mtext` element in the MathML namespace

A node is an HTML integration point if it is one of the following elements:

- An `annotation-xml` element in the MathML namespace whose start tag token had an attribute with the name "encoding" whose value was an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`text/html`"
- An `annotation-xml` element in the MathML namespace whose start tag token had an attribute with the name "encoding" whose value was an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`application/xhtml+xml`"
- A `foreignObject` element in the SVG namespace
- A `desc` element in the SVG namespace
- A `title` element in the SVG namespace

Not all of the tag names mentioned below are conformant tag names in this specification; many are included to handle legacy content. They still form part of the algorithm that implementations are required to implement to claim conformance.

The algorithm described below places no limit on the depth of the DOM tree generated, or on the length of tag names, attribute names, attribute values, `Text` nodes, etc. While implementors are encouraged to avoid arbitrary limits, it is recognised that practical concerns will likely force user agents to impose nesting depth constraints.

##### 12.2.5.1 Creating and inserting nodes

While the parser is processing a token, it can enable or disable foster parenting. This affects the following algorithm.

The appropriate place for inserting a node, optionally using a particular override target, is the position in an element returned by running the following steps:

1. If there was an override target specified, then let target be the override target.

   Otherwise, let target be the current node.

2. Determine the adjusted insertion location using the first matching steps from the following list:

   If foster parenting is enabled and target is a `table`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `thead`, or `tr` element

     Foster parenting happens when content is misnested in tables.

     Run these substeps:

     1. Let last template be the last `template` element in the stack of open elements, if any.

     2. Let last table be the last `table` element in the stack of open elements, if any.

     3. If there is a last template and either there is no last table, or there is one, but last template is lower (more recently added) than last table in the stack of open elements, then: let adjusted insertion location be inside last template's template contents, after its last child (if any), and abort these substeps.

     4. If there is no last table, then let adjusted insertion location be inside the first element in the stack of open elements (the `html` element), after its last child (if any), and abort these substeps. (fragment case)

     5. If last table has a parent node, then let adjusted insertion location be inside last table's parent node, immediately before last table, and abort these substeps.

     6. Let previous element be the element immediately above last table in the stack of open elements.

     7. Let adjusted insertion location be inside previous element, after its last child (if any).

     These steps are involved in part because it's possible for elements, the `table` element in this case in particular, to have been moved by a script around in the DOM, or indeed removed from the DOM entirely, after the element was inserted by the parser.

   Otherwise

     Let adjusted insertion location be inside target, after its last child (if any).

3. If the adjusted insertion location is inside a `template` element, let it instead be inside the `template` element's template contents, after its last child (if any).

4. Return the adjusted insertion location.

When the steps below require the UA to create an element for a token in a particular given namespace and with a particular intended parent, the UA must run the following steps:

1. Create a node implementing the interface appropriate for the element type corresponding to the tag name of the token in given namespace (as given in the specification that defines that element, e.g. for an `a` element in the HTML namespace, this specification defines it to be the `HTMLAnchorElement` interface), with the tag name being the name of that element, with the node being in the given namespace, and with the attributes on the node being those given in the given token.

   The interface appropriate for an element in the HTML namespace that is not defined in this specification (or other applicable specifications) is `HTMLUnknownElement`. Elements in other namespaces whose interface is not defined by that namespace's specification must use the interface `Element`.

   The node document of the newly created element must be the node document of the intended parent.

2. If the newly created element has an `xmlns` attribute in the XMLNS namespace whose value is not exactly the same as the element's namespace, that is a parse error. Similarly, if the newly created element has an `xmlns:xlink` attribute in the XMLNS namespace whose value is not the XLink Namespace, that is a parse error.

3. If the newly created element is a resettable element, invoke its reset algorithm. (This initializes the element's value and checkedness based on the element's attributes.)

4. If the element is a form-associated element, and the `form` element pointer is not null, and there is no `template` element on the stack of open elements, and the newly created element is either not reassociateable or doesn't have a `form` attribute, and the intended parent is in the same home subtree as the element pointed to by the `form` element pointer, associate the newly created element with the `form` element pointed to by the `form` element pointer, and suppress the running of the reset the form owner algorithm when the parser subsequently attempts to insert the element.

5. Return the newly created element.

When the steps below require the user agent to insert a foreign element for a token in a given namespace, the user agent must run these steps:

1. Let the adjusted insertion location be the appropriate place for inserting a node.

2. Create an element for the token in the given namespace, with the intended parent being the element in which the adjusted insertion location finds itself.

3. If it is possible to insert an element at the adjusted insertion location, then insert the newly created element at the adjusted insertion location.

   If the adjusted insertion location cannot accept more elements, e.g. because it's a `Document` that already has an element child, then the newly created element is dropped on the floor.

4. Push the element onto the stack of open elements so that it is the new current node.

5. Return the newly created element.

When the steps below require the user agent to insert an HTML element for a token, the user agent must insert a foreign element for the token, in the HTML namespace.

When the steps below require the user agent to adjust MathML attributes for a token, then, if the token has an attribute named `definitionurl`, change its name to `definitionURL` (note the case difference).

When the steps below require the user agent to adjust SVG attributes for a token, then, for each attribute on the token whose attribute name is one of the ones in the first column of the following table, change the attribute's name to the name given in the corresponding cell in the second column. (This fixes the case of SVG attributes that are not all lowercase.)

Attribute name on token | Attribute name on element
--- | ---
`attributename` | `attributeName`
`attributetype` | `attributeType`
`basefrequency` | `baseFrequency`
`baseprofile` | `baseProfile`
`calcmode` | `calcMode`
`clippathunits` | `clipPathUnits`
`diffuseconstant` | `diffuseConstant`
`edgemode` | `edgeMode`
`filterunits` | `filterUnits`
`glyphref` | `glyphRef`
`gradienttransform` | `gradientTransform`
`gradientunits` | `gradientUnits`
`kernelmatrix` | `kernelMatrix`
`kernelunitlength` | `kernelUnitLength`
`keypoints` | `keyPoints`
`keysplines` | `keySplines`
`keytimes` | `keyTimes`
`lengthadjust` | `lengthAdjust`
`limitingconeangle` | `limitingConeAngle`
`markerheight` | `markerHeight`
`markerunits` | `markerUnits`
`markerwidth` | `markerWidth`
`maskcontentunits` | `maskContentUnits`
`maskunits` | `maskUnits`
`numoctaves` | `numOctaves`
`pathlength` | `pathLength`
`patterncontentunits` | `patternContentUnits`
`patterntransform` | `patternTransform`
`patternunits` | `patternUnits`
`pointsatx` | `pointsAtX`
`pointsaty` | `pointsAtY`
`pointsatz` | `pointsAtZ`
`preservealpha` | `preserveAlpha`
`preserveaspectratio` | `preserveAspectRatio`
`primitiveunits` | `primitiveUnits`
`refx` | `refX`
`refy` | `refY`
`repeatcount` | `repeatCount`
`repeatdur` | `repeatDur`
`requiredextensions` | `requiredExtensions`
`requiredfeatures` | `requiredFeatures`
`specularconstant` | `specularConstant`
`specularexponent` | `specularExponent`
`spreadmethod` | `spreadMethod`
`startoffset` | `startOffset`
`stddeviation` | `stdDeviation`
`stitchtiles` | `stitchTiles`
`surfacescale` | `surfaceScale`
`systemlanguage` | `systemLanguage`
`tablevalues` | `tableValues`
`targetx` | `targetX`
`targety` | `targetY`
`textlength` | `textLength`
`viewbox` | `viewBox`
`viewtarget` | `viewTarget`
`xchannelselector` | `xChannelSelector`
`ychannelselector` | `yChannelSelector`
`zoomandpan` | `zoomAndPan`

When the steps below require the user agent to adjust foreign attributes for a token, then, if any of the attributes on the token match the strings given in the first column of the following table, let the attribute be a namespaced attribute, with the prefix being the string given in the corresponding cell in the second column, the local name being the string given in the corresponding cell in the third column, and the namespace being the namespace given in the corresponding cell in the fourth column. (This fixes the use of namespaced attributes, in particular `lang` attributes in the XML namespace.)

Attribute name | Prefix | Local name | Namespace
--- | --- | --- | ---
`xlink:actuate` | `xlink` | `actuate` | XLink namespace
`xlink:arcrole` | `xlink` | `arcrole` | XLink namespace
`xlink:href` | `xlink` | `href` | XLink namespace
`xlink:role` | `xlink` | `role` | XLink namespace
`xlink:show` | `xlink` | `show` | XLink namespace
`xlink:title` | `xlink` | `title` | XLink namespace
`xlink:type` | `xlink` | `type` | XLink namespace
`xml:base` | `xml` | `base` | XML namespace
`xml:lang` | `xml` | `lang` | XML namespace
`xml:space` | `xml` | `space` | XML namespace
`xmlns` | (none) | `xmlns` | XMLNS namespace
`xmlns:xlink` | `xmlns` | `xlink` | XMLNS namespace

When the steps below require the user agent to insert a character while processing a token, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let data be the characters passed to the algorithm, or, if no characters were explicitly specified, the character of the character token being processed.

2. Let the adjusted insertion location be the appropriate place for inserting a node.

3. If the adjusted insertion location is in a `Document` node, then abort these steps.

   The DOM will not let `Document` nodes have `Text` node children, so they are dropped on the floor.

4. If there is a `Text` node immediately before the adjusted insertion location, then append data to that `Text` node's data.

   Otherwise, create a new `Text` node whose data is data and whose node document is the same as that of the element in which the adjusted insertion location finds itself, and insert the newly created node at the adjusted insertion location.

Here are some sample inputs to the parser and the corresponding number of `Text` nodes that they result in, assuming a user agent that executes scripts.

Input | Number of `Text` nodes
--- | ---
    A<script>
    var script = document.getElementsByTagName('script')[0];
    document.body.removeChild(script);
    </script>B
| One `Text` node in the document, containing "AB".
    A<script>
    var text = document.createTextNode('B');
    document.body.appendChild(text);
    </script>C
| Three `Text` nodes; "A" before the script, the script's contents, and "BC" after the script (the parser appends to the `Text` node created by the script).
    A<script>
    var text = document.getElementsByTagName('script')[0].firstChild;
    text.data = 'B';
    document.body.appendChild(text);
    </script>C
| Two adjacent `Text` nodes in the document, containing "A" and "BC".
    A<table>B<tr>C</tr>D</table>
| One `Text` node before the table, containing "ABCD". (This is caused by foster parenting.)
    A<table><tr> B</tr> C</table>
| One `Text` node before the table, containing "A B C" (A-space-B-space-C). (This is caused by foster parenting.)
    A<table><tr> B</tr> </em>C</table>
| One `Text` node before the table, containing "A BC" (A-space-B-C), and one `Text` node inside the table (as a child of a `tbody`) with a single space character. (Space characters separated from non-space characters by non-character tokens are not affected by foster parenting, even if those other tokens then get ignored.)

When the steps below require the user agent to insert a comment while processing a comment token, optionally with an explicitly insertion position position, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Let data be the data given in the comment token being processed.

2. If position was specified, then let the adjusted insertion location be position. Otherwise, let adjusted insertion location be the appropriate place for inserting a node.

3. Create a `Comment` node whose `data` attribute is set to data and whose node document is the same as that of the node in which the adjusted insertion location finds itself.

4. Insert the newly created node at the adjusted insertion location.

DOM mutation events must not fire for changes caused by the UA parsing the document. This includes the parsing of any content inserted using `document.write()` and `document.writeln()` calls. [DOMEVENTS]

However, mutation observers do fire, as required by the DOM specification.

##### 12.2.5.2 Parsing elements that contain only text

The generic raw text element parsing algorithm and the generic RCDATA element parsing algorithm consist of the following steps. These algorithms are always invoked in response to a start tag token.

1. Insert an HTML element for the token.

2. If the algorithm that was invoked is the generic raw text element parsing algorithm, switch the tokenizer to the RAWTEXT state; otherwise the algorithm invoked was the generic RCDATA element parsing algorithm, switch the tokenizer to the RCDATA state.

3. Let the original insertion mode be the current insertion mode.

4. Then, switch the insertion mode to "text".

##### 12.2.5.3 Closing elements that have implied end tags

When the steps below require the UA to generate implied end tags, then, while the current node is a `dd` element, a `dt` element, an `li` element, an `option` element, an `optgroup` element, a `p` element, an `rp` element, or an `rt` element, the UA must pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

If a step requires the UA to generate implied end tags but lists an element to exclude from the process, then the UA must perform the above steps as if that element was not in the above list.

When the steps below require the UA to generate all implied end tags thoroughly, then, while the current node is a `caption` element, a `colgroup` element, a `dd` element, a `dt` element, an `li` element, an `option` element, an `optgroup` element, a `p` element, an `rp` element, an `rt` element, a `tbody` element, a `td` element, a `tfoot` element, a `th` element, a `thead` element, or a `tr` element, the UA must pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

##### 12.2.5.4 The rules for parsing tokens in HTML content

###### 12.2.5.4.1 The "initial" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "initial" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Ignore the token.

A comment token

  Insert a comment as the last child of the `Document` object.

A DOCTYPE token

  If the DOCTYPE token's name is not a case-sensitive match for the string "`html`", or the token's public identifier is not missing, or the token's system identifier is neither missing nor a case-sensitive match for the string "`about:legacy-compat`", and none of the sets of conditions in the following list are matched, then there is a parse error.

  - The DOCTYPE token's name is a case-sensitive match for the string "`html`", the token's public identifier is the case-sensitive string "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0//EN`", and the token's system identifier is either missing or the case-sensitive string "`http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/strict.dtd`".
  - The DOCTYPE token's name is a case-sensitive match for the string "`html`", the token's public identifier is the case-sensitive string "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN`", and the token's system identifier is either missing or the case-sensitive string "`http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd`".
  - The DOCTYPE token's name is a case-sensitive match for the string "`html`", the token's public identifier is the case-sensitive string "`-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN`", and the token's system identifier is the case-sensitive string "`http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd`".
  - The DOCTYPE token's name is a case-sensitive match for the string "`html`", the token's public identifier is the case-sensitive string "`-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN`", and the token's system identifier is the case-sensitive string "`http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd`".

  Conformance checkers may, based on the values (including presence or lack thereof) of the DOCTYPE token's name, public identifier, or system identifier, switch to a conformance checking mode for another language (e.g. based on the DOCTYPE token a conformance checker could recognise that the document is an HTML4-era document, and defer to an HTML4 conformance checker.)

  Append a `DocumentType` node to the `Document` node, with the `name` attribute set to the name given in the DOCTYPE token, or the empty string if the name was missing; the `publicId` attribute set to the public identifier given in the DOCTYPE token, or the empty string if the public identifier was missing; the `systemId` attribute set to the system identifier given in the DOCTYPE token, or the empty string if the system identifier was missing; and the other attributes specific to `DocumentType` objects set to null and empty lists as appropriate. Associate the `DocumentType` node with the `Document` object so that it is returned as the value of the `doctype` attribute of the `Document` object.

  Then, if the document is not an `iframe` `srcdoc` document, and the DOCTYPE token matches one of the conditions in the following list, then set the `Document` to quirks mode:

  - The force-quirks flag is set to on.
  - The name is set to anything other than "`html`" (compared case-sensitively).
  - The public identifier is set to: "`-//W3O//DTD W3 HTML Strict 3.0//EN//`"
  - The public identifier is set to: "`-/W3C/DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional/EN`"
  - The public identifier is set to: "`HTML`"
  - The system identifier is set to: "`http://www.ibm.com/data/dtd/v11/ibmxhtml1-transitional.dtd`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`+//Silmaril//dtd html Pro v0r11 19970101//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//AS//DTD HTML 3.0 asWedit + extensions//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//AdvaSoft Ltd//DTD HTML 3.0 asWedit + extensions//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.1E//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 3.0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 3.2 Final//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 3.2//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML 3//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 1//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 2//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML Level 3//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 1//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 2//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict Level 3//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML Strict//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//IETF//DTD HTML//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Metrius//DTD Metrius Presentational//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Microsoft//DTD Internet Explorer 2.0 HTML Strict//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Microsoft//DTD Internet Explorer 2.0 HTML//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Microsoft//DTD Internet Explorer 2.0 Tables//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Microsoft//DTD Internet Explorer 3.0 HTML Strict//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Microsoft//DTD Internet Explorer 3.0 HTML//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Microsoft//DTD Internet Explorer 3.0 Tables//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Netscape Comm. Corp.//DTD HTML//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Netscape Comm. Corp.//DTD Strict HTML//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//O'Reilly and Associates//DTD HTML 2.0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//O'Reilly and Associates//DTD HTML Extended 1.0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//O'Reilly and Associates//DTD HTML Extended Relaxed 1.0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//SQ//DTD HTML 2.0 HoTMetaL + extensions//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//SoftQuad Software//DTD HoTMetaL PRO 6.0::19990601::extensions to HTML 4.0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//SoftQuad//DTD HoTMetaL PRO 4.0::19971010::extensions to HTML 4.0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Spyglass//DTD HTML 2.0 Extended//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Sun Microsystems Corp.//DTD HotJava HTML//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//Sun Microsystems Corp.//DTD HotJava Strict HTML//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 3 1995-03-24//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2 Draft//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2 Final//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2S Draft//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Frameset//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML Experimental 19960712//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML Experimental 970421//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD W3 HTML//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3O//DTD W3 HTML 3.0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//WebTechs//DTD Mozilla HTML 2.0//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//WebTechs//DTD Mozilla HTML//`"
  - The system identifier is missing and the public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Frameset//`"
  - The system identifier is missing and the public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//`"

  Otherwise, if the document is not an `iframe` `srcdoc` document, and the DOCTYPE token matches one of the conditions in the following list, then set the `Document` to limited-quirks mode:

  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Frameset//`"
  - The public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//`"
  - The system identifier is not missing and the public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Frameset//`"
  - The system identifier is not missing and the public identifier starts with: "`-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//`"

  The system identifier and public identifier strings must be compared to the values given in the lists above in an ASCII case-insensitive manner. A system identifier whose value is the empty string is not considered missing for the purposes of the conditions above.

  Then, switch the insertion mode to "before html".

Anything else

  If the document is not an `iframe` `srcdoc` document, then this is a parse error; set the `Document` to quirks mode.

  In any case, switch the insertion mode to "before html", then reprocess the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.2 The "before html" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "before html" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A comment token

  Insert a comment as the last child of the `Document` object.

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Create an element for the token in the HTML namespace, with the `Document` as the intended parent. Append it to the `Document` object. Put this element in the stack of open elements.

  If the `Document` is being loaded as part of navigation of a browsing context, then: if the newly created element has a `manifest` attribute whose value is not the empty string, then resolve the value of that attribute to an absolute URL, relative to the newly created element, and if that is successful, run the application cache selection algorithm with the result of applying the URL serialiser algorithm to the resulting parsed URL with the exclude fragment flag set; otherwise, if there is no such attribute, or its value is the empty string, or resolving its value fails, run the application cache selection algorithm with no manifest. The algorithm must be passed the `Document` object.

  Switch the insertion mode to "before head".

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "head", "body", "html", "br"

  Act as described in the "anything else" entry below.

Any other end tag

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Anything else

  Create an `html` element whose node document is the `Document` object. Append it to the `Document` object. Put this element in the stack of open elements.

  If the `Document` is being loaded as part of navigation of a browsing context, then: run the application cache selection algorithm with no manifest, passing it the `Document` object.

  Switch the insertion mode to "before head", then reprocess the token.

The root element can end up being removed from the `Document` object, e.g. by scripts; nothing in particular happens in such cases, content continues being appended to the nodes as described in the next section.

###### 12.2.5.4.3 The "before head" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "before head" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Ignore the token.

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is "head"

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Set the `head` element pointer to the newly created `head` element.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in head".

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "head", "body", "html", "br"

  Act as described in the "anything else" entry below.

Any other end tag

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Anything else

  Insert an HTML element for a "head" start tag token with no attributes.

  Set the `head` element pointer to the newly created `head` element.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in head".

  Reprocess the current token.

###### 12.2.5.4.4 The "in head" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in head" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Insert the character.

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "base", "basefont", "bgsound", "link"

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

A start tag whose tag name is "meta"

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

  If the element has a `charset` attribute, and getting an encoding from its value results in a supported ASCII-compatible character encoding or a UTF-16 encoding, and the confidence is currently tentative, then change the encoding to the resulting encoding.

  Otherwise, if the element has an `http-equiv` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`Content-Type`", and the element has a `content` attribute, and applying the algorithm for extracting a character encoding from a `meta` element to that attribute's value returns a supported ASCII-compatible character encoding or a UTF-16 encoding, and the confidence is currently tentative, then change the encoding to the extracted encoding.

A start tag whose tag name is "title"

  Follow the generic RCDATA element parsing algorithm.

A start tag whose tag name is "noscript", if the scripting flag is enabled
A start tag whose tag name is one of: "noframes", "style"

  Follow the generic raw text element parsing algorithm.

A start tag whose tag name is "noscript", if the scripting flag is disabled

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in head noscript".

A start tag whose tag name is "script"

  Run these steps:

  1. Let the adjusted insertion location be the appropriate place for inserting a node.

  2. Create an element for the token in the HTML namespace, with the intended parent being the element in which the adjusted insertion location finds itself.

  3. Mark the element as being "parser-inserted" and unset the element's "force-async" flag.

     This ensures that, if the script is external, any `document.write()` calls in the script will execute in-line, instead of blowing the document away, as would happen in most other cases. It also prevents the script from executing until the end tag is seen.

  4. If the parser was originally created for the HTML fragment parsing algorithm, then mark the `script` element as "already started". (fragment case)

  5. Insert the newly created element at the adjusted insertion location.

  6. Push the element onto the stack of open elements so that it is the new current node.

  7. Switch the tokenizer to the script data state.

  8. Let the original insertion mode be the current insertion mode.

  9. Switch the insertion mode to "text".

An end tag whose tag name is "head"

  Pop the current node (which will be the `head` element) off the stack of open elements.

  Switch the insertion mode to "after head".

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "body", "html", "br"

  Act as described in the "anything else" entry below.

A start tag whose tag name is "template"

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Insert a marker at the end of the list of active formatting elements.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  Switch the insertion mode to "in template".

  Push "in template" onto the stack of template insertion modes so that it is the new current template insertion mode.

An end tag whose tag name is "template"

  If there is no `template` element on the stack of open elements, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, run these steps:

  1. Generate all implied end tags thoroughly.

  2. If the current node is not a `template` element, then this is a parse error.

  3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `template` element has been popped from the stack.

  4. Clear the list of active formatting elements up to the last marker.

  5. Pop the current template insertion mode off the stack of template insertion modes.

  6. Reset the insertion mode appropriately.

A start tag whose tag name is "head"
Any other end tag

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Anything else

  Pop the current node (which will be the `head` element) off the stack of open elements.

  Switch the insertion mode to "after head".

  Reprocess the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.5 The "in head noscript" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in head noscript" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

An end tag whose tag name is "noscript"

  Pop the current node (which will be a `noscript` element) from the stack of open elements; the new current node will be a `head` element.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in head".

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE
A comment token
A start tag whose tag name is one of: "basefont", "bgsound", "link", "meta", "noframes", "style"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

An end tag whose tag name is "br"

  Act as described in the "anything else" entry below.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "head", "noscript"
Any other end tag

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Anything else

  Parse error.

  Pop the current node (which will be a `noscript` element) from the stack of open elements; the new current node will be a `head` element.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in head".

  Reprocess the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.6 The "after head" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "after head" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Insert the character.

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is "body"

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  Switch the insertion mode to "in body".

A start tag whose tag name is "frameset"

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in frameset".

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "base", "basefont", "bgsound", "link", "meta", "noframes", "script", "style", "template", "title"

  Parse error.

  Push the node pointed to by the `head` element pointer onto the stack of open elements.

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

  Remove the node pointed to by the `head` element pointer from the stack of open elements. (It might not be the current node at this point.)

  The `head` element pointer cannot be null at this point.

An end tag whose tag name is "template"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "body", "html", "br"

  Act as described in the "anything else" entry below.

A start tag whose tag name is "head"
Any other end tag

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Anything else

  Insert an HTML element for a "body" start tag token with no attributes.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in body".

  Reprocess the current token.

###### 12.2.5.4.7 The "in body" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in body" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is U+0000 NULL

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert the token's character.

Any other character token

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert the token's character.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Parse error.

  If there is a `template` element on the stack of open elements, then ignore the token.

  Otherwise, for each attribute on the token, check to see if the attribute is already present on the top element of the stack of open elements. If it is not, add the attribute and its corresponding value to that element.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "base", "basefont", "bgsound", "link", "meta", "noframes", "script", "style", "template", "title"
An end tag whose tag name is "template"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is "body"

  Parse error.

  If the second element on the stack of open elements is not a `body` element, if the stack of open elements has only one node on it, or if there is a `template` element on the stack of open elements, then ignore the token. (fragment case)

  Otherwise, set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok"; then, for each attribute on the token, check to see if the attribute is already present on the `body` element (the second element) on the stack of open elements, and if it is not, add the attribute and its corresponding value to that element.

A start tag whose tag name is "frameset"

  Parse error.

  If the stack of open elements has only one node on it, or if the second element on the stack of open elements is not a `body` element, then ignore the token. (fragment case)

  If the frameset-ok flag is set to "not ok", ignore the token.

  Otherwise, run the following steps:

  1. Remove the second element on the stack of open elements from its parent node, if it has one.

  2. Pop all the nodes from the bottom of the stack of open elements, from the current node up to, but not including, the root `html` element.

  3. Insert an HTML element for the token.

  4. Switch the insertion mode to "in frameset".

An end-of-file token

  If the stack of template insertion modes is not empty, then process the token using the rules for the "in template" insertion mode.

  Otherwise, follow these steps:

  1. If there is a node in the stack of open elements that is not either a `dd` element, a `dt` element, an `li` element, an `optgroup` element, an `option` element, a `p` element, an `rp` element, an `rt` element, a `tbody` element, a `td` element, a `tfoot` element, a `th` element, a `thead` element, a `tr` element, the `body` element, or the `html` element, then this is a parse error.

  2. Stop parsing.

An end tag whose tag name is "body"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `body` element in scope, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, if there is a node in the stack of open elements that is not either a `dd` element, a `dt` element, an `li` element, an `optgroup` element, an `option` element, a `p` element, an `rp` element, an `rt` element, a `tbody` element, a `td` element, a `tfoot` element, a `th` element, a `thead` element, a `tr` element, the `body` element, or the `html` element, then this is a parse error.

  Switch the insertion mode to "after body".

An end tag whose tag name is "html"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `body` element in scope, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, if there is a node in the stack of open elements that is not either a `dd` element, a `dt` element, an `li` element, an `optgroup` element, an `option` element, a `p` element, an `rp` element, an `rt` element, a `tbody` element, a `td` element, a `tfoot` element, a `th` element, a `thead` element, a `tr` element, the `body` element, or the `html` element, then this is a parse error.

  Switch the insertion mode to "after body".

  Reprocess the token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "address", "article", "aside", "blockquote", "center", "details", "dialog", "dir", "div", "dl", "fieldset", "figcaption", "figure", "footer", "header", "hgroup", "main", "menu", "nav", "ol", "p", "section", "summary", "ul"

  If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "h1", "h2", "h3", "h4", "h5", "h6"

  If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  If the current node is an HTML element whose tag name is one of "h1", "h2", "h3", "h4", "h5", or "h6", then this is a parse error; pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "pre", "listing"

  If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  If the next token is a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character token, then ignore that token and move on to the next one. (Newlines at the start of `pre` blocks are ignored as an authoring convenience.)

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

A start tag whose tag name is "form"

  If the `form` element pointer is not null, and there is no `template` element on the stack of open elements, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  Insert an HTML element for the token, and, if there is no `template` element on the stack of open elements, set the `form` element pointer to point to the element created.

A start tag whose tag name is "li"

  Run these steps:

  1. Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  2. Initialise node to be the current node (the bottommost node of the stack).

  3. Loop: If node is an `li` element, then run these substeps:

     1. Generate implied end tags, except for `li` elements.

     2. If the current node is not an `li` element, then this is a parse error.

     3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until an `li` element has been popped from the stack.

     4. Jump to the step labeled done below.

  4. If node is in the special category, but is not an `address`, `div`, or `p` element, then jump to the step labeled done below.

  5. Otherwise, set node to the previous entry in the stack of open elements and return to the step labeled loop.

  6. Done: If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  7. Finally, insert an HTML element for the token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "dd", "dt"

  Run these steps:

  1. Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  2. Initialise node to be the current node (the bottommost node of the stack).

  3. Loop: If node is a `dd` element, then run these substeps:

     1. Generate implied end tags, except for `dd` elements.

     2. If the current node is not a `dd` element, then this is a parse error.

     3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `dd` element has been popped from the stack.

     4. Jump to the step labeled done below.

  4. If node is a `dt` element, then run these substeps:

     1. Generate implied end tags, except for `dt` elements.

     2. If the current node is not a `dt` element, then this is a parse error.

     3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `dt` element has been popped from the stack.

     4. Jump to the step labeled done below.

  5. If node is in the special category, but is not an `address`, `div`, or `p` element, then jump to the step labeled done below.

  6. Otherwise, set node to the previous entry in the stack of open elements and return to the step labeled loop.

  7. Done: If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  8. Finally, insert an HTML element for the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "plaintext"

  If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Switch the tokenizer to the PLAINTEXT state.

  Once a start tag with the tag name "plaintext" has been seen, that will be the last token ever seen other than character tokens (and the end-of-file token), because there is no way to switch out of the PLAINTEXT state.

A start tag whose tag name is "button"

  1. If the stack of open elements has a `button` element in scope, then run these substeps:

     1. Parse error.

     2. Generate implied end tags.

     3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `button` element has been popped from the stack.

  2. Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  3. Insert an HTML element for the token.

  4. Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "address", "article", "aside", "blockquote", "button", "center", "details", "dialog", "dir", "div", "dl", "fieldset", "figcaption", "figure", "footer", "header", "hgroup", "listing", "main", "menu", "nav", "ol", "pre", "section", "summary", "ul"

  If the stack of open elements does not have an element in scope that is an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, run these steps:

  1. Generate implied end tags.

  2. If the current node is not an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then this is a parse error.

  3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until an HTML element with the same tag name as the token has been popped from the stack.

An end tag whose tag name is "form"

  If there is no `template` element on the stack of open elements, then run these substeps:

  1. Let node be the element that the `form` element pointer is set to, or null if it is not set to an element.

  2. Set the `form` element pointer to null.

  3. If node is null or if the stack of open elements does not have node in scope, then this is a parse error; abort these steps and ignore the token.

  4. Generate implied end tags.

  5. If the current node is not node, then this is a parse error.

  6. Remove node from the stack of open elements.

  If there is a `template` element on the stack of open elements, then run these substeps instead:

  1. If the stack of open elements does not have a `form` element in scope, then this is a parse error; abort these steps and ignore the token.

  2. Generate implied end tags.

  3. If the current node is not a `form` element, then this is a parse error.

  4. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `form` element has been popped from the stack.

An end tag whose tag name is "p"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `p` element in button scope, then this is a parse error; insert an HTML element for a "p" start tag token with no attributes.

  Close a `p` element.

An end tag whose tag name is "li"

  If the stack of open elements does not have an `li` element in list item scope, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, run these steps:

  1. Generate implied end tags, except for `li` elements.

  2. If the current node is not an `li` element, then this is a parse error.

  3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until an `li` element has been popped from the stack.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "dd", "dt"

  If the stack of open elements does not have an element in scope that is an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, run these steps:

  1. Generate implied end tags, except for HTML elements with the same tag name as the token.

  2. If the current node is not an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then this is a parse error.

  3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until an HTML element with the same tag name as the token has been popped from the stack.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "h1", "h2", "h3", "h4", "h5", "h6"

  If the stack of open elements does not have an element in scope that is an HTML element and whose tag name is one of "h1", "h2", "h3", "h4", "h5", or "h6", then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, run these steps:

  1. Generate implied end tags.

  2. If the current node is not an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then this is a parse error.

  3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until an HTML element whose tag name is one of "h1", "h2", "h3", "h4", "h5", or "h6" has been popped from the stack.

An end tag whose tag name is "sarcasm"

  Take a deep breath, then act as described in the "any other end tag" entry below.

A start tag whose tag name is "a"

  If the list of active formatting elements contains an `a` element between the end of the list and the last marker on the list (or the start of the list if there is no marker on the list), then this is a parse error; run the adoption agency algorithm for the tag name "a", then remove that element from the list of active formatting elements and the stack of open elements if the adoption agency algorithm didn't already remove it (it might not have if the element is not in table scope).

  In the non-conforming stream `<a href="a">a<table><a href="b">b</table>x`, the first `a` element would be closed upon seeing the second one, and the "x" character would be inside a link to "b", not to "a". This is despite the fact that the outer `a` element is not in table scope (meaning that a regular `</a>` end tag at the start of the table wouldn't close the outer `a` element). The result is that the two `a` elements are indirectly nested inside each other — non-conforming markup will often result in non-conforming DOMs when parsed.

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Push onto the list of active formatting elements that element.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "b", "big", "code", "em", "font", "i", "s", "small", "strike", "strong", "tt", "u"

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Push onto the list of active formatting elements that element.

A start tag whose tag name is "nobr"

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  If the stack of open elements has a `nobr` element in scope, then this is a parse error; run the adoption agency algorithm for the tag name "nobr", then once again reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Push onto the list of active formatting elements that element.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "a", "b", "big", "code", "em", "font", "i", "nobr", "s", "small", "strike", "strong", "tt", "u"

  Run the adoption agency algorithm for the token's tag name.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "applet", "marquee", "object"

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Insert a marker at the end of the list of active formatting elements.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

An end tag token whose tag name is one of: "applet", "marquee", "object"

  If the stack of open elements does not have an element in scope that is an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, run these steps:

  1. Generate implied end tags.

  2. If the current node is not an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then this is a parse error.

  3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until an HTML element with the same tag name as the token has been popped from the stack.

  4. Clear the list of active formatting elements up to the last marker.
A start tag whose tag name is "table"

  If the `Document` is not set to quirks mode, and the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  Switch the insertion mode to "in table".

An end tag whose tag name is "br"

  Parse error. Drop the attributes from the token, and act as described in the next entry; i.e. act as if this was a "br" start tag token with no attributes, rather than the end tag token that it actually is.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "area", "br", "embed", "img", "keygen", "wbr"

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

A start tag whose tag name is "input"

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

  If the token does not have an attribute with the name "type", or if it does, but that attribute's value is not an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`hidden`", then: set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "menuitem", "param", "source", "track"

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

A start tag whose tag name is "hr"

  If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

A start tag whose tag name is "image"

  Parse error. Change the token's tag name to "img" and reprocess it. (Don't ask.)

A start tag whose tag name is "isindex"

  Parse error.

  If there is no `template` element on the stack of open elements and the `form` element pointer is not null, then ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  Insert an HTML element for a "form" start tag token with no attributes, and, if there is no `template` element on the stack of open elements, set the `form` element pointer to point to the element created.

  If the token has an attribute called "action", set the `action` attribute on the resulting `form` element to the value of the "action" attribute of the token.

  Insert an HTML element for an "hr" start tag token with no attributes. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for a "label" start tag token with no attributes.

  Insert characters (see below for what they should say).

  Insert an HTML element for an "input" start tag token with all the attributes from the "isindex" token except "name", "action", and "prompt", and with an attribute named "name" with the value "isindex". (This creates an `input` element with the `name` attribute set to the magic value "`isindex`".) Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Insert more characters (see below for what they should say).

  Pop the current node (which will be the `label` element created earlier) off the stack of open elements.

  Insert an HTML element for an "hr" start tag token with no attributes. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Pop the current node (which will be the `form` element created earlier) off the stack of open elements, and, if there is no `template` element on the stack of open elements, set the `form` element pointer back to null.

  Prompt: If the token has an attribute with the name "prompt", then the first stream of characters must be the same string as given in that attribute, and the second stream of characters must be empty. Otherwise, the two streams of character tokens together should, together with the `input` element, express the equivalent of "This is a searchable index. Enter search keywords: (input field)" in the user's preferred language.

A start tag whose tag name is "textarea"

  Run these steps:

  1. Insert an HTML element for the token.

  2. If the next token is a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character token, then ignore that token and move on to the next one. (Newlines at the start of `textarea` elements are ignored as an authoring convenience.)

  3. Switch the tokenizer to the RCDATA state.

  4. Let the original insertion mode be the current insertion mode.

  5. Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  6. Switch the insertion mode to "text".

A start tag whose tag name is "xmp"

  If the stack of open elements has a `p` element in button scope, then close a `p` element.

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  Follow the generic raw text element parsing algorithm.

A start tag whose tag name is "iframe"

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  Follow the generic raw text element parsing algorithm.

A start tag whose tag name is "noembed"
A start tag whose tag name is "noscript", if the scripting flag is enabled

  Follow the generic raw text element parsing algorithm.

A start tag whose tag name is "select"

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

  If the insertion mode is one of "in table", "in caption", "in table body", "in row", or "in cell", then switch the insertion mode to "in select in table". Otherwise, switch the insertion mode to "in select".

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "optgroup", "option"

  If the current node is an `option` element, then pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "rp", "rt"

  If the stack of open elements has a `ruby` element in scope, then generate implied end tags. If the current node is not then a `ruby` element, this is a parse error.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "math"

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Adjust MathML attributes for the token. (This fixes the case of MathML attributes that are not all lowercase.)

  Adjust foreign attributes for the token. (This fixes the use of namespaced attributes, in particular XLink.)

  Insert a foreign element for the token, in the MathML namespace.

  If the token has its self-closing flag set, pop the current node off the stack of open elements and acknowledge the token's self-closing flag.

A start tag whose tag name is "svg"

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Adjust SVG attributes for the token. (This fixes the case of SVG attributes that are not all lowercase.)

  Adjust foreign attributes for the token. (This fixes the use of namespaced attributes, in particular XLink in SVG.)

  Insert a foreign element for the token, in the SVG namespace.

  If the token has its self-closing flag set, pop the current node off the stack of open elements and acknowledge the token's self-closing flag.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "caption", "col", "colgroup", "frame", "head", "tbody", "td", "tfoot", "th", "thead", "tr"

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Any other start tag

  Reconstruct the active formatting elements, if any.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  This element will be an ordinary element.

Any other end tag

  Run these steps:

  1. Initialise node to be the current node (the bottommost node of the stack).

  2. Loop: If node is an HTML element with the same tag name as the token, then:

     1. Generate implied end tags, except for HTML elements with the same tag name as the token.

     2. If node is not the current node, then this is a parse error.

     3. Pop all the nodes from the current node up to node, including node, then stop these steps.

  3. Otherwise, if node is in the special category, then this is a parse error; ignore the token, and abort these steps.

  4. Set node to the previous entry in the stack of open elements.

  5. Return to the step labeled loop.

When the steps above say the user agent is to close a `p` element, it means that the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Generate implied end tags, except for `p` elements.

2. If the current node is not a `p` element, then this is a parse error.

3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `p` element has been popped from the stack.

The adoption agency algorithm, which takes as its only argument a tag name subject for which the algorithm is being run, consists of the following steps:

1. If the current node is an HTML element whose tag name is subject, and the current node is not in the list of active formatting elements, then pop the current node off the stack of open elements, and abort these steps.

2. Let outer loop counter be zero.

3. Outer loop: If outer loop counter is greater than or equal to eight, then abort these steps.

4. Increment outer loop counter by one.

5. Let formatting element be the last element in the list of active formatting elements that:

   - is between the end of the list and the last marker in the list, if any, or the start of the list otherwise, and
   - has the tag name subject.

   If there is no such element, then abort these steps and instead act as described in the "any other end tag" entry above.

6. If formatting element is not in the stack of open elements, then this is a parse error; remove the element from the list, and abort these steps.

7. If formatting element is in the stack of open elements, but the element is not in scope, then this is a parse error; abort these steps.

8. If formatting element is not the current node, this is a parse error. (But do not abort these steps.)

9. Let furthest block be the topmost node in the stack of open elements that is lower in the stack than formatting element, and is an element in the special category. There might not be one.

10. If there is no furthest block, then the UA must first pop all the nodes from the bottom of the stack of open elements, from the current node up to and including formatting element, then remove formatting element from the list of active formatting elements, and finally abort these steps.

11. Let common ancestor be the element immediately above formatting element in the stack of open elements.

12. Let a bookmark note the position of formatting element in the list of active formatting elements relative to the elements on either side of it in the list.

13. Let node and last node be furthest block. Follow these steps:

    1. Let inner loop counter be zero.

    2. Inner loop: Increment inner loop counter by one.

    3. Let node be the element immediately above node in the stack of open elements, or if node is no longer in the stack of open elements (e.g. because it got removed by this algorithm), the element that was immediately above node in the stack of open elements before node was removed.

    4. If node is formatting element, then go to the next step in the overall algorithm.

    5. If inner loop counter is greater than three and node is in the list of active formatting elements, then remove node from the list of active formatting elements.

    6. If node is not in the list of active formatting elements, then remove node from the stack of open elements and then go back to the step labeled inner loop.

    7. Create an element for the token for which the element node was created, in the HTML namespace, with common ancestor as the intended parent; replace the entry for node in the list of active formatting elements with an entry for the new element, replace the entry for node in the stack of open elements with an entry for the new element, and let node be the new element.

    8. If last node is furthest block, then move the aforementioned bookmark to be immediately after the new node in the list of active formatting elements.

    9. Insert last node into node, first removing it from its previous parent node if any.

    10. Let last node be node.

    11. Return to the step labeled inner loop.

14. Insert whatever last node ended up being in the previous step at the appropriate place for inserting a node, but using common ancestor as the override target.

15. Create an element for the token for which formatting element was created, in the HTML namespace, with furthest block as the intended parent.

16. Take all of the child nodes of furthest block and append them to the element created in the last step.

17. Append that new element to furthest block.

18. Remove formatting element from the list of active formatting elements, and insert the new element into the list of active formatting elements at the position of the aforementioned bookmark.

19. Remove formatting element from the stack of open elements, and insert the new element into the stack of open elements immediately below the position of furthest block in that stack.

20. Jump back to the step labeled outer loop.

This algorithm's name, the "adoption agency algorithm", comes from the way it causes elements to change parents, and is in contrast with other possible algorithms for dealing with misnested content, which included the "incest algorithm", the "secret affair algorithm", and the "Heisenberg algorithm".

###### 12.2.5.4.8 The "text" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "text" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token

  Insert the token's character.

  This can never be a U+0000 NULL character; the tokenizer converts those to U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER characters.

An end-of-file token

  Parse error.

  If the current node is a `script` element, mark the `script` element as "already started".

  Pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Switch the insertion mode to the original insertion mode and reprocess the token.

An end tag whose tag name is "script"

  If the stack of script settings objects is empty, perform a microtask checkpoint.

  Let script be the current node (which will be a `script` element).

  Pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Switch the insertion mode to the original insertion mode.

  Let the old insertion point have the same value as the current insertion point. Let the insertion point be just before the next input character.

  Increment the parser's script nesting level by one.

  Prepare the script. This might cause some script to execute, which might cause new characters to be inserted into the tokenizer, and might cause the tokenizer to output more tokens, resulting in a reentrant invocation of the parser.

  Decrement the parser's script nesting level by one. If the parser's script nesting level is zero, then set the parser pause flag to false.

  Let the insertion point have the value of the old insertion point. (In other words, restore the insertion point to its previous value. This value might be the "undefined" value.)

  At this stage, if there is a pending parsing-blocking script, then:

  If the script nesting level is not zero:

    Set the parser pause flag to true, and abort the processing of any nested invocations of the tokenizer, yielding control back to the caller. (Tokenization will resume when the caller returns to the "outer" tree construction stage.)

    The tree construction stage of this particular parser is being called reentrantly, say from a call to `document.write()`.

  Otherwise:

    Run these steps:

    1. Let the script be the pending parsing-blocking script. There is no longer a pending parsing-blocking script.

    2. Block the tokenizer for this instance of the HTML parser, such that the event loop will not run tasks that invoke the tokenizer.

    3. If the parser's `Document` has a style sheet that is blocking scripts or the script's "ready to be parser-executed" flag is not set: spin the event loop until the parser's `Document` has no style sheet that is blocking scripts and the script's "ready to be parser-executed" flag is set.

    4. If this parser has been aborted in the meantime, abort these steps.

       This could happen if, e.g., while the spin the event loop algorithm is running, the browsing context gets closed, or the `document.open()` method gets invoked on the `Document`.

    5. Unblock the tokenizer for this instance of the HTML parser, such that tasks that invoke the tokenizer can again be run.

    6. Let the insertion point be just before the next input character.

    7. Increment the parser's script nesting level by one (it should be zero before this step, so this sets it to one).

    8. Execute the script.

    9. Decrement the parser's script nesting level by one. If the parser's script nesting level is zero (which it always should be at this point), then set the parser pause flag to false.

    10. Let the insertion point be undefined again.

    11. If there is once again a pending parsing-blocking script, then repeat these steps from step 1.

Any other end tag

  Pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Switch the insertion mode to the original insertion mode.

###### 12.2.5.4.9 The "in table" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in table" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token, if the current node is `table`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `thead`, or `tr` element

  Let the pending table character tokens be an empty list of tokens.

  Let the original insertion mode be the current insertion mode.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in table text" and reprocess the token.

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "caption"

  Clear the stack back to a table context. (See below.)

  Insert a marker at the end of the list of active formatting elements.

  Insert an HTML element for the token, then switch the insertion mode to "in caption".

A start tag whose tag name is "colgroup"

  Clear the stack back to a table context. (See below.)

  Insert an HTML element for the token, then switch the insertion mode to "in column group".

A start tag whose tag name is "col"

  Clear the stack back to a table context. (See below.)

  Insert an HTML element for a "colgroup" start tag token with no attributes, then switch the insertion mode to "in column group".

  Reprocess the current token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "tbody", "tfoot", "thead"

  Clear the stack back to a table context. (See below.)

  Insert an HTML element for the token, then switch the insertion mode to "in table body".

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "td", "th", "tr"

  Clear the stack back to a table context. (See below.)

  Insert an HTML element for a "tbody" start tag token with no attributes, then switch the insertion mode to "in table body".

  Reprocess the current token.

A start tag whose tag name is "table"

  Parse error.

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `table` element in table scope, ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Pop elements from this stack until a `table` element has been popped from the stack.

  Reset the insertion mode appropriately.

  Reprocess the token.

An end tag whose tag name is "table"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `table` element in table scope, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Pop elements from this stack until a `table` element has been popped from the stack.

  Reset the insertion mode appropriately.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "body", "caption", "col", "colgroup", "html", "tbody", "td", "tfoot", "th", "thead", "tr"

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "style", "script", "template"
An end tag whose tag name is "template"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is "input"

  If the token does not have an attribute with the name "type", or if it does, but that attribute's value is not an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`hidden`", then: act as described in the "anything else" entry below.

  Otherwise:

  Parse error.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

  Pop that `input` element off the stack of open elements.

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

A start tag whose tag name is "form"

  Parse error.

  If there is a `template` element on the stack of open elements, or if the `form` element pointer is not null, ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Insert an HTML element for the token, and set the `form` element pointer to point to the element created.

  Pop that `form` element off the stack of open elements.

An end-of-file token

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

Anything else

  Parse error. Enable foster parenting, process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode, and then disable foster parenting.

When the steps above require the UA to clear the stack back to a table context, it means that the UA must, while the current node is not a `table`, `template`, or `html` element, pop elements from the stack of open elements.

This is the same list of elements as used in the has an element in table scope steps.

The current node being an `html` element after this process is a fragment case.

###### 12.2.5.4.10 The "in table text" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in table text" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is U+0000 NULL

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Any other character token

  Append the character token to the pending table character tokens list.

Anything else

  If any of the tokens in the pending table character tokens list are character tokens that are not space characters, then this is a parse error: reprocess the character tokens in the pending table character tokens list using the rules given in the "anything else" entry in the "in table" insertion mode.

  Otherwise, insert the characters given by the pending table character tokens list.

  Switch the insertion mode to the original insertion mode and reprocess the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.11 The "in caption" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in caption" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

An end tag whose tag name is "caption"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `caption` element in table scope, this is a parse error; ignore the token. (fragment case)

  Otherwise:

  Generate implied end tags.

  Now, if the current node is not a `caption` element, then this is a parse error.

  Pop elements from this stack until a `caption` element has been popped from the stack.

  Clear the list of active formatting elements up to the last marker.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in table".

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "caption", "col", "colgroup", "tbody", "td", "tfoot", "th", "thead", "tr"
An end tag whose tag name is "table"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `caption` element in table scope, this is a parse error; ignore the token. (fragment case)

  Otherwise:

  Generate implied end tags.

  Now, if the current node is not a `caption` element, then this is a parse error.

  Pop elements from this stack until a `caption` element has been popped from the stack.

  Clear the list of active formatting elements up to the last marker.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in table".

  Reprocess the token.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "body", "col", "colgroup", "html", "tbody", "td", "tfoot", "th", "thead", "tr"

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Anything else

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

###### 12.2.5.4.12 The "in column group" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in column group" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Insert the character.

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is "col"

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

An end tag whose tag name is "colgroup"

  If the current node is not a `colgroup` element, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, pop the current node from the stack of open elements. Switch the insertion mode to "in table".

An end tag whose tag name is "col"

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "template"
An end tag whose tag name is "template"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

An end-of-file token

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

Anything else

  If the current node is not a `colgroup` element, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, pop the current node from the stack of open elements.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in table".

  Reprocess the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.13 The "in table body" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in table body" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A start tag whose tag name is "tr"

  Clear the stack back to a table body context. (See below.)

  Insert an HTML element for the token, then switch the insertion mode to "in row".

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "th", "td"

  Parse error.

  Clear the stack back to a table body context. (See below.)

  Insert an HTML element for a "tr" start tag token with no attributes, then switch the insertion mode to "in row".

  Reprocess the current token.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "tbody", "tfoot", "thead"

  If the stack of open elements does not have an element in table scope that is an HTML element with the same tag name as the token, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Clear the stack back to a table body context. (See below.)

  Pop the current node from the stack of open elements. Switch the insertion mode to "in table".

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "caption", "col", "colgroup", "tbody", "tfoot", "thead"
An end tag whose tag name is "table"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `tbody`, `thead`, or `tfoot` element in table scope, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Clear the stack back to a table body context. (See below.)

  Pop the current node from the stack of open elements. Switch the insertion mode to "in table".

  Reprocess the token.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "body", "caption", "col", "colgroup", "html", "td", "th", "tr"

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Anything else

  Process the token using the rules for the "in table" insertion mode.

When the steps above require the UA to clear the stack back to a table body context, it means that the UA must, while the current node is not a `tbody`, `tfoot`, `thead`, `template`, or `html` element, pop elements from the stack of open elements.

The current node being an `html` element after this process is a fragment case.

###### 12.2.5.4.14 The "in row" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in row" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "th", "td"

  Clear the stack back to a table row context. (See below.)

  Insert an HTML element for the token, then switch the insertion mode to "in cell".

  Insert a marker at the end of the list of active formatting elements.

An end tag whose tag name is "tr"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `tr` element in table scope, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Clear the stack back to a table row context. (See below.)

  Pop the current node (which will be a `tr` element) from the stack of open elements. Switch the insertion mode to "in table body".

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "caption", "col", "colgroup", "tbody", "tfoot", "thead", "tr"
An end tag whose tag name is "table"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `tr` element in table scope, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Clear the stack back to a table row context. (See below.)

  Pop the current node (which will be a `tr` element) from the stack of open elements. Switch the insertion mode to "in table body".

  Reprocess the token.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "tbody", "tfoot", "thead"

  If the stack of open elements does not have an element in table scope that is an HTML element with the same tag name as the token, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `tr` element in table scope, ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Clear the stack back to a table row context. (See below.)

  Pop the current node (which will be a `tr` element) from the stack of open elements. Switch the insertion mode to "in table body".

  Reprocess the token.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "body", "caption", "col", "colgroup", "html", "td", "th"

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Anything else

  Process the token using the rules for the "in table" insertion mode.

When the steps above require the UA to clear the stack back to a table row context, it means that the UA must, while the current node is not a `tr`, `template`, or `html` element, pop elements from the stack of open elements.

The current node being an `html` element after this process is a fragment case.

###### 12.2.5.4.15 The "in cell" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in cell" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "td", "th"

  If the stack of open elements does not have an element in table scope that is an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Generate implied end tags.

  Now, if the current node is not an HTML element with the same tag name as the token, then this is a parse error.

  Pop elements from the stack of open elements stack until an HTML element with the same tag name as the token has been popped from the stack.

  Clear the list of active formatting elements up to the last marker.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in row".

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "caption", "col", "colgroup", "tbody", "td", "tfoot", "th", "thead", "tr"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `td` or `th` element in table scope, then this is a parse error; ignore the token. (fragment case)

  Otherwise, close the cell (see below) and reprocess the token.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "body", "caption", "col", "colgroup", "html"

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "table", "tbody", "tfoot", "thead", "tr"

  If the stack of open elements does not have an element in table scope that is an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then this is a parse error; ignore the token.

  Otherwise, close the cell (see below) and reprocess the token.

Anything else

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

Where the steps above say to close the cell, they mean to run the following algorithm:

1. Generate implied end tags.

2. If the current node is not now a `td` element or a `th` element, then this is a parse error.

3. Pop elements from the stack of open elements stack until a `td` element or a `th` element has been popped from the stack.

4. Clear the list of active formatting elements up to the last marker.

5. Switch the insertion mode to "in row".

The stack of open elements cannot have both a `td` and a `th` element in table scope at the same time, nor can it have neither when the close the cell algorithm is invoked.

###### 12.2.5.4.16 The "in select" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in select" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is U+0000 NULL

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

Any other character token

  Insert the token's character.

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is "option"

  If the current node is an `option` element, pop that node from the stack of open elements.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "optgroup"

  If the current node is an `option` element, pop that node from the stack of open elements.

  If the current node is an `optgroup` element, pop that node from the stack of open elements.

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

An end tag whose tag name is "optgroup"

  First, if the current node is an `option` element, and the node immediately before it in the stack of open elements is an `optgroup` element, then pop the current node from the stack of open elements.

  If the current node is an `optgroup` element, then pop that node from the stack of open elements. Otherwise, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

An end tag whose tag name is "option"

  If the current node is an `option` element, then pop that node from the stack of open elements. Otherwise, this is a parse error; ignore the token.

An end tag whose tag name is "select"

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `select` element in select scope, this is a parse error; ignore the token. (fragment case)

  Otherwise:

  Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `select` element has been popped from the stack.

  Reset the insertion mode appropriately.

A start tag whose tag name is "select"

  Parse error.

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `select` element in select scope, ignore the token. (fragment case)

  Otherwise:

  Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `select` element has been popped from the stack.

  Reset the insertion mode appropriately.

  It just gets treated like an end tag.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "input", "keygen", "textarea"

  Parse error.

  If the stack of open elements does not have a `select` element in select scope, ignore the token. (fragment case)

  Otherwise:

  Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `select` element has been popped from the stack.

  Reset the insertion mode appropriately.

  Reprocess the token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "script", "template"
An end tag whose tag name is "template"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

An end-of-file token

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

Anything else

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.17 The "in select in table" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in select in table" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "caption", "table", "tbody", "tfoot", "thead", "tr", "td", "th"

  Parse error.

  Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `select` element has been popped from the stack.

  Reset the insertion mode appropriately.

  Reprocess the token.

An end tag whose tag name is one of: "caption", "table", "tbody", "tfoot", "thead", "tr", "td", "th"

  Parse error.

  If the stack of open elements does not have an element in table scope that is an HTML element with the same tag name as that of the token, then ignore the token.

  Otherwise:

  Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `select` element has been popped from the stack.

  Reset the insertion mode appropriately.

  Reprocess the token.

Anything else

  Process the token using the rules for the "in select" insertion mode.

###### 12.2.5.4.18 The "in template" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in template" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token
A comment token
A DOCTYPE token

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "base", "basefont", "bgsound", "link", "meta", "noframes", "script", "style", "template", "title"
An end tag whose tag name is "template"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "caption", "colgroup", "tbody", "tfoot", "thead"

  Pop the current template insertion mode off the stack of template insertion modes.

  Push "in table" onto the stack of template insertion modes so that it is the new current template insertion mode.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in table", and reprocess the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "col"

  Pop the current template insertion mode off the stack of template insertion modes.

  Push "in column group" onto the stack of template insertion modes so that it is the new current template insertion mode.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in column group", and reprocess the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "tr"

  Pop the current template insertion mode off the stack of template insertion modes.

  Push "in table body" onto the stack of template insertion modes so that it is the new current template insertion mode.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in table body", and reprocess the token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "td", "th"

  Pop the current template insertion mode off the stack of template insertion modes.

  Push "in row" onto the stack of template insertion modes so that it is the new current template insertion mode.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in row", and reprocess the token.

Any other start tag

  Pop the current template insertion mode off the stack of template insertion modes.

  Push "in body" onto the stack of template insertion modes so that it is the new current template insertion mode.

  Switch the insertion mode to "in body", and reprocess the token.

Any other end tag

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

An end-of-file token

  If there is no `template` element on the stack of open elements, then stop parsing. (fragment case)

  Otherwise, this is a parse error.

  Pop elements from the stack of open elements until a `template` element has been popped from the stack.

  Clear the list of active formatting elements up to the last marker.

  Pop the current template insertion mode off the stack of template insertion modes.

  Reset the insertion mode appropriately.

  Reprocess the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.19 The "after body" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "after body" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

A comment token

  Insert a comment as the last child of the first element in the stack of open elements (the `html` element).

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

An end tag whose tag name is "html"

  If the parser was originally created as part of the HTML fragment parsing algorithm, this is a parse error; ignore the token. (fragment case)

  Otherwise, switch the insertion mode to "after after body".

An end-of-file token

  Stop parsing.

Anything else

  Parse error. Switch the insertion mode to "in body" and reprocess the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.20 The "in frameset" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "in frameset" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Insert the character.

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

A start tag whose tag name is "frameset"

  Insert an HTML element for the token.

An end tag whose tag name is "frameset"

  If the current node is the root `html` element, then this is a parse error; ignore the token. (fragment case)

  Otherwise, pop the current node from the stack of open elements.

  If the parser was not originally created as part of the HTML fragment parsing algorithm (fragment case), and the current node is no longer a `frameset` element, then switch the insertion mode to "after frameset".

A start tag whose tag name is "frame"

  Insert an HTML element for the token. Immediately pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, if it is set.

A start tag whose tag name is "noframes"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

An end-of-file token

  If the current node is not the root `html` element, then this is a parse error.

  The current node can only be the root `html` element in the fragment case.

  Stop parsing.

Anything else

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.21 The "after frameset" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "after frameset" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Insert the character.

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

An end tag whose tag name is "html"

  Switch the insertion mode to "after after frameset".

A start tag whose tag name is "noframes"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

An end-of-file token

  Stop parsing.

Anything else

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.22 The "after after body" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "after after body" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A comment token

  Insert a comment as the last child of the `Document` object.

A DOCTYPE token
A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE
A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

An end-of-file token

  Stop parsing.

Anything else

  Parse error. Switch the insertion mode to "in body" and reprocess the token.

###### 12.2.5.4.23 The "after after frameset" insertion mode

When the user agent is to apply the rules for the "after after frameset" insertion mode, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A comment token

  Insert a comment as the last child of the `Document` object.

A DOCTYPE token
A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE
A start tag whose tag name is "html"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in body" insertion mode.

An end-of-file token

  Stop parsing.

A start tag whose tag name is "noframes"

  Process the token using the rules for the "in head" insertion mode.

Anything else

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

##### 12.2.5.5 The rules for parsing tokens in foreign content

When the user agent is to apply the rules for parsing tokens in foreign content, the user agent must handle the token as follows:

A character token that is U+0000 NULL

  Parse error. Insert a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER character.

A character token that is one of U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION, U+000A LINE FEED (LF), U+000C FORM FEED (FF), U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or U+0020 SPACE

  Insert the token's character.

Any other character token

  Insert the token's character.

  Set the frameset-ok flag to "not ok".

A comment token

  Insert a comment.

A DOCTYPE token

  Parse error. Ignore the token.

A start tag whose tag name is one of: "b", "big", "blockquote", "body", "br", "center", "code", "dd", "div", "dl", "dt", "em", "embed", "h1", "h2", "h3", "h4", "h5", "h6", "head", "hr", "i", "img", "li", "listing", "menu", "meta", "nobr", "ol", "p", "pre", "ruby", "s", "small", "span", "strong", "strike", "sub", "sup", "table", "tt", "u", "ul", "var"
A start tag whose tag name is "font", if the token has any attributes named "color", "face", or "size"

  Parse error.

  If the parser was originally created for the HTML fragment parsing algorithm, then act as described in the "any other start tag" entry below. (fragment case)

  Otherwise:

  Pop an element from the stack of open elements, and then keep popping more elements from the stack of open elements until the current node is a MathML text integration point, an HTML integration point, or an element in the HTML namespace.

  Then, reprocess the token.

Any other start tag

  If the adjusted current node is an element in the MathML namespace, adjust MathML attributes for the token. (This fixes the case of MathML attributes that are not all lowercase.)

  If the adjusted current node is an element in the SVG namespace, and the token's tag name is one of the ones in the first column of the following table, change the tag name to the name given in the corresponding cell in the second column. (This fixes the case of SVG elements that are not all lowercase.)

  Tag name | Element name
  --- | ---
  `altglyph` | `altGlyph`
  `altglyphdef` | `altGlyphDef`
  `altglyphitem` | `altGlyphItem`
  `animatecolor` | `animateColor`
  `animatemotion` | `animateMotion`
  `animatetransform` | `animateTransform`
  `clippath` | `clipPath`
  `feblend` | `feBlend`
  `fecolormatrix` | `feColorMatrix`
  `fecomponenttransfer` | `feComponentTransfer`
  `fecomposite` | `feComposite`
  `feconvolvematrix` | `feConvolveMatrix`
  `fediffuselighting` | `feDiffuseLighting`
  `fedisplacementmap` | `feDisplacementMap`
  `fedistantlight` | `feDistantLight`
  `fedropshadow` | `feDropShadow`
  `feflood` | `feFlood`
  `fefunca` | `feFuncA`
  `fefuncb` | `feFuncB`
  `fefuncg` | `feFuncG`
  `fefuncr` | `feFuncR`
  `fegaussianblur` | `feGaussianBlur`
  `feimage` | `feImage`
  `femerge` | `feMerge`
  `femergenode` | `feMergeNode`
  `femorphology` | `feMorphology`
  `feoffset` | `feOffset`
  `fepointlight` | `fePointLight`
  `fespecularlighting` | `feSpecularLighting`
  `fespotlight` | `feSpotLight`
  `fetile` | `feTile`
  `feturbulence` | `feTurbulence`
  `foreignobject` | `foreignObject`
  `glyphref` | `glyphRef`
  `lineargradient` | `linearGradient`
  `radialgradient` | `radialGradient`
  `textpath` | `textPath`

  If the adjusted current node is an element in the SVG namespace, adjust SVG attributes for the token. (This fixes the case of SVG attributes that are not all lowercase.)

  Adjust foreign attributes for the token. (This fixes the use of namespaced attributes, in particular XLink in SVG.)

  Insert a foreign element for the token, in the same namespace as the adjusted current node.

  If the token has its self-closing flag set, then run the appropriate steps from the following list:

  If the token's tag name is "script", and the new current node is in the SVG namespace

    Acknowledge the token's self-closing flag, and then act as described in the steps for a "script" end tag below.

  Otherwise

    Pop the current node off the stack of open elements and acknowledge the token's self-closing flag.

An end tag whose tag name is "script", if the current node is a `script` element in the SVG namespace

  Pop the current node off the stack of open elements.

  Let the old insertion point have the same value as the current insertion point. Let the insertion point be just before the next input character.

  Increment the parser's script nesting level by one. Set the parser pause flag to true.

  Process the `script` element according to the SVG rules, if the user agent supports SVG. [SVG]

  Even if this causes new characters to be inserted into the tokenizer, the parser will not be executed reentrantly, since the parser pause flag is true.

  Decrement the parser's script nesting level by one. If the parser's script nesting level is zero, then set the parser pause flag to false.

  Let the insertion point have the value of the old insertion point. (In other words, restore the insertion point to its previous value. This value might be the "undefined" value.)

Any other end tag

  Run these steps:

  1. Initialise node to be the current node (the bottommost node of the stack).

  2. If node's tag name, converted to ASCII lowercase, is not the same as the tag name of the token, then this is a parse error.

  3. Loop: If node is the topmost element in the stack of open elements, abort these steps. (fragment case)

  4. If node's tag name, converted to ASCII lowercase, is the same as the tag name of the token, pop elements from the stack of open elements until node has been popped from the stack, and then abort these steps.

  5. Set node to the previous entry in the stack of open elements.

  6. If node is not an element in the HTML namespace, return to the step labeled loop.

  7. Otherwise, process the token according to the rules given in the section corresponding to the current insertion mode in HTML content.

#### 12.2.6 The end

Once the user agent stops parsing the document, the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Set the current document readiness to "`interactive`" and the insertion point to undefined.

2. Pop all the nodes off the stack of open elements.

3. If the list of scripts that will execute when the document has finished parsing is not empty, run these substeps:

   1. Spin the event loop until the first `script` in the list of scripts that will execute when the document has finished parsing has its "ready to be parser-executed" flag set and the parser's `Document` has no style sheet that is blocking scripts.

   2. Execute the first `script` in the list of scripts that will execute when the document has finished parsing.

   3. Remove the first `script` element from the list of scripts that will execute when the document has finished parsing (i.e. shift out the first entry in the list).

   4. If the list of scripts that will execute when the document has finished parsing is still not empty, repeat these substeps again from substep 1.

4. Queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `DOMContentLoaded` at the `Document`.

5. Spin the event loop until the set of scripts that will execute as soon as possible and the list of scripts that will execute in order as soon as possible are empty.

6. Spin the event loop until there is nothing that delays the load event in the `Document`.

7. Queue a task to run the following substeps:

   1. Set the current document readiness to "`complete`".

   2. Load event: If the `Document` is in a browsing context, fire a simple event named `load` at the `Document`'s `Window` object, with target override set to the `Document` object.

8. If the `Document` is in a browsing context, then queue a task to run the following substeps:

   1. If the `Document`'s page showing flag is true, then abort this task (i.e. don't fire the event below).

   2. Set the `Document`'s page showing flag to true.

   3. Fire a trusted event with the name `pageshow` at the `Window` object of the `Document`, with target override set to the `Document` object, using the `PageTransitionEvent` interface, with the `persisted` attribute initialised to false. This event must not bubble, must not be cancelable, and has no default action.

9. If the `Document` has any pending application cache download process tasks, then queue each such task in the order they were added to the list of pending application cache download process tasks, and then empty the list of pending application cache download process tasks. The task source for these tasks is the networking task source.

10. If the `Document`'s print when loaded flag is set, then run the printing steps.

11. The `Document` is now ready for post-load tasks.

12. Queue a task to mark the `Document` as completely loaded.

When the user agent is to abort a parser, it must run the following steps:

1. Throw away any pending content in the input stream, and discard any future content that would have been added to it.

2. Set the current document readiness to "`interactive`".

3. Pop all the nodes off the stack of open elements.

4. Set the current document readiness to "`complete`".

Except where otherwise specified, the task source for the tasks mentioned in this section is the DOM manipulation task source.

#### 12.2.7 Coercing an HTML DOM into an infoset

When an application uses an HTML parser in conjunction with an XML pipeline, it is possible that the constructed DOM is not compatible with the XML tool chain in certain subtle ways. For example, an XML toolchain might not be able to represent attributes with the name `xmlns`, since they conflict with the Namespaces in XML syntax. There is also some data that the HTML parser generates that isn't included in the DOM itself. This section specifies some rules for handling these issues.

If the XML API being used doesn't support DOCTYPEs, the tool may drop DOCTYPEs altogether.

If the XML API doesn't support attributes in no namespace that are named "`xmlns`", attributes whose names start with "`xmlns:`", or attributes in the XMLNS namespace, then the tool may drop such attributes.

The tool may annotate the output with any namespace declarations required for proper operation.

If the XML API being used restricts the allowable characters in the local names of elements and attributes, then the tool may map all element and attribute local names that the API wouldn't support to a set of names that are allowed, by replacing any character that isn't supported with the uppercase letter U and the six digits of the character's Unicode code point when expressed in hexadecimal, using digits 0-9 and capital letters A-F as the symbols, in increasing numeric order.

For example, the element name `foo<bar`, which can be output by the HTML parser, though it is neither a legal HTML element name nor a well-formed XML element name, would be converted into `fooU00003Cbar`, which is a well-formed XML element name (though it's still not legal in HTML by any means).

As another example, consider the attribute `xlink:href`. Used on a MathML element, it becomes, after being adjusted, an attribute with a prefix "`xlink`" and a local name "`href`". However, used on an HTML element, it becomes an attribute with no prefix and the local name "`xlink:href`", which is not a valid NCName, and thus might not be accepted by an XML API. It could thus get converted, becoming "`xlinkU00003Ahref`".

The resulting names from this conversion conveniently can't clash with any attribute generated by the HTML parser, since those are all either lowercase or those listed in the adjust foreign attributes algorithm's table.

If the XML API restricts comments from having two consecutive U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (--), the tool may insert a single U+0020 SPACE character between any such offending characters.

If the XML API restricts comments from ending in a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-), the tool may insert a single U+0020 SPACE character at the end of such comments.

If the XML API restricts allowed characters in character data, attribute values, or comments, the tool may replace any U+000C FORM FEED (FF) character with a U+0020 SPACE character, and any other literal non-XML character with a U+FFFD REPLACEMENT CHARACTER.

If the tool has no way to convey out-of-band information, then the tool may drop the following information:

- Whether the document is set to no-quirks mode, limited-quirks mode, or quirks mode
- The association between form controls and forms that aren't their nearest `form` element ancestor (use of the `form` element pointer in the parser)
- The template contents of any `template` elements.

The mutations allowed by this section apply after the HTML parser's rules have been applied. For example, a `<a::>` start tag will be closed by a `</a::>` end tag, and never by a `</aU00003AU00003A>` end tag, even if the user agent is using the rules above to then generate an actual element in the DOM with the name `aU00003AU00003A` for that start tag.

#### 12.2.8 An introduction to error handling and strange cases in the parser

This section is non-normative.

This section examines some erroneous markup and discusses how the HTML parser handles these cases.

##### 12.2.8.1 Misnested tags: <b><i></b></i>

This section is non-normative.

The most-often discussed example of erroneous markup is as follows:

    <p>1<b>2<i>3</b>4</i>5</p>

The parsing of this markup is straightforward up to the "3". At this point, the DOM looks like this:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `p`
      - `#text`: 1
      - `b`
        - `#text`: 2
        - `i`
          - `#text`: 3

Here, the stack of open elements has five elements on it: `html`, `body`, `p`, `b`, and `i`. The list of active formatting elements just has two: `b` and `i`. The insertion mode is "in body".

Upon receiving the end tag token with the tag name "b", the "adoption agency algorithm" is invoked. This is a simple case, in that the formatting element is the `b` element, and there is no furthest block. Thus, the stack of open elements ends up with just three elements: `html`, `body`, and `p`, while the list of active formatting elements has just one: `i`. The DOM tree is unmodified at this point.

The next token is a character ("4"), triggers the reconstruction of the active formatting elements, in this case just the `i` element. A new `i` element is thus created for the "4" `Text` node. After the end tag token for the "i" is also received, and the "5" `Text` node is inserted, the DOM looks as follows:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `p`
      - `#text`: 1
      - `b`
        - `#text`: 2
        - `i`
          - `#text`: 3
      - `i`
        - `#text`: 4
      - `#text`: 5

##### 12.2.8.2 Misnested tags: <b><p></b></p>

This section is non-normative.

A case similar to the previous one is the following:

    <b>1<p>2</b>3</p>

Up to the "2" the parsing here is straightforward:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
      - `#text`: 1
      - `p`
        - `#text`: 2

The interesting part is when the end tag token with the tag name "b" is parsed.

Before that token is seen, the stack of open elements has four elements on it: `html`, `body`, `b`, and `p`. The list of active formatting elements just has the one: `b`. The insertion mode is "in body".

Upon receiving the end tag token with the tag name "b", the "adoption agency algorithm" is invoked, as in the previous example. However, in this case, there is a furthest block, namely the `p` element. Thus, this time the adoption agency algorithm isn't skipped over.

The common ancestor is the `body` element. A conceptual "bookmark" marks the position of the `b` in the list of active formatting elements, but since that list has only one element in it, the bookmark won't have much effect.

As the algorithm progresses, node ends up set to the formatting element (`b`), and last node ends up set to the furthest block (`p`).

The last node gets appended (moved) to the common ancestor, so that the DOM looks like:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
      - `#text`: 1
    - `p`
      - `#text`: 2

A new `b` element is created, and the children of the `p` element are moved to it:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
      - `#text`: 1
    - `p`

- `b`
  - `#text`: 2

Finally, the new `b` element is appended to the `p` element, so that the DOM looks like:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
      - `#text`: 1
    - `p`
      - `b`
        - `#text`: 2

The `b` element is removed from the list of active formatting elements and the stack of open elements, so that when the "3" is parsed, it is appended to the `p` element:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
      - `#text`: 1
    - `p`
      - `b`
        - `#text`: 2
      - `#text`: 3

##### 12.2.8.3 Unexpected markup in tables

This section is non-normative.

Error handling in tables is, for historical reasons, especially strange. For example, consider the following markup:

    <table><b><tr><td>aaa</td></tr>bbb</table>ccc

The highlighted `b` element start tag is not allowed directly inside a table like that, and the parser handles this case by placing the element before the table. (This is called foster parenting.) This can be seen by examining the DOM tree as it stands just after the `table` element's start tag has been seen:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `table`

...and then immediately after the `b` element start tag has been seen:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
    - `table`

At this point, the stack of open elements has on it the elements `html`, `body`, `table`, and `b` (in that order, despite the resulting DOM tree); the list of active formatting elements just has the `b` element in it; and the insertion mode is "in table".

The `tr` start tag causes the `b` element to be popped off the stack and a `tbody` start tag to be implied; the `tbody` and `tr` elements are then handled in a rather straight-forward manner, taking the parser through the "in table body" and "in row" insertion modes, after which the DOM looks as follows:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
    - `table`
      - `tbody`
        - `tr`

Here, the stack of open elements has on it the elements `html`, `body`, `table`, `tbody`, and `tr`; the list of active formatting elements still has the `b` element in it; and the insertion mode is "in row".

The `td` element start tag token, after putting a `td` element on the tree, puts a marker on the list of active formatting elements (it also switches to the "in cell" insertion mode).

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
    - `table`
      - `tbody`
        - `tr`
          - `td`

The marker means that when the "aaa" character tokens are seen, no `b` element is created to hold the resulting `Text` node:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
    - `table`
      - `tbody`
        - `tr`
          - `td`
            - `#text`: aaa

The end tags are handled in a straight-forward manner; after handling them, the stack of open elements has on it the elements `html`, `body`, `table`, and `tbody`; the list of active formatting elements still has the `b` element in it (the marker having been removed by the "td" end tag token); and the insertion mode is "in table body".

Thus it is that the "bbb" character tokens are found. These trigger the "in table text" insertion mode to be used (with the original insertion mode set to "in table body"). The character tokens are collected, and when the next token (the `table` element end tag) is seen, they are processed as a group. Since they are not all spaces, they are handled as per the "anything else" rules in the "in table" insertion mode, which defer to the "in body" insertion mode but with foster parenting.

When the active formatting elements are reconstructed, a `b` element is created and foster parented, and then the "bbb" `Text` node is appended to it:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
    - `b`
      - `#text`: bbb
    - `table`
      - `tbody`
        - `tr`
          - `td`
            - `#text`: aaa

The stack of open elements has on it the elements `html`, `body`, `table`, `tbody`, and the new `b` (again, note that this doesn't match the resulting tree!); the list of active formatting elements has the new `b` element in it; and the insertion mode is still "in table body".

Had the character tokens been only space characters instead of "bbb", then those space characters would just be appended to the `tbody` element.

Finally, the `table` is closed by a "table" end tag. This pops all the nodes from the stack of open elements up to and including the `table` element, but it doesn't affect the list of active formatting elements, so the "ccc" character tokens after the table result in yet another `b` element being created, this time after the table:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `b`
    - `b`
      - `#text`: bbb
    - `table`
      - `tbody`
        - `tr`
          - `td`
            - `#text`: aaa
    - `b`
      - `#text`: ccc

##### 12.2.8.4 Scripts that modify the page as it is being parsed

This section is non-normative.

Consider the following markup, which for this example we will assume is the document with URL `http://example.com/inner`, being rendered as the content of an `iframe` in another document with the URL `http://example.com/outer`:

    <div id=a>
     <script>
      var div = document.getElementById('a');
      parent.document.body.appendChild(div);
     </script>
     <script>
      alert(document.URL);
     </script>
    </div>
    <script>
     alert(document.URL);
    </script>

Up to the first "script" end tag, before the script is parsed, the result is relatively straightforward:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `div` `id`="`a`"
      - `#text`:
      - `script`
        - `#text`: var div = document.getElementById('a'); ⏎ parent.document.body.appendChild(div);

After the script is parsed, though, the `div` element and its child `script` element are gone:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`

They are, at this point, in the `Document` of the aforementioned outer browsing context. However, the stack of open elements still contains the `div` element.

Thus, when the second `script` element is parsed, it is inserted into the outer `Document` object.

Those parsed into different `Document`s than the one the parser was created for do not execute, so the first alert does not show.

Once the `div` element's end tag is parsed, the `div` element is popped off the stack, and so the next `script` element is in the inner `Document`:

- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `script`
      - `#text`: alert(document.URL);

This script does execute, resulting in an alert that says "http://example.com/inner".

##### 12.2.8.5 The execution of scripts that are moving across multiple documents

This section is non-normative.

Elaborating on the example in the previous section, consider the case where the second `script` element is an external script (i.e. one with a `src` attribute). Since the element was not in the parser's `Document` when it was created, that external script is not even downloaded.

In a case where a `script` element with a `src` attribute is parsed normally into its parser's `Document`, but while the external script is being downloaded, the element is moved to another document, the script continues to download, but does not execute.

In general, moving `script` elements between `Document`s is considered a bad practice.

##### 12.2.8.6 Unclosed formatting elements

This section is non-normative.

The following markup shows how nested formatting elements (such as `b`) get collected and continue to be applied even as the elements they are contained in are closed, but that excessive duplicates are thrown away.

    <!DOCTYPE html>
    <p><b class=x><b class=x><b><b class=x><b class=x><b>X
    <p>X
    <p><b><b class=x><b>X
    <p></b></b></b></b></b></b>X

The resulting DOM tree is as follows:

- DOCTYPE: `html`
- `html`
  - `head`
  - `body`
    - `p`
      - `b` `class`="`x`"
        - `b` `class`="`x`"
          - `b`
            - `b` `class`="`x`"
              - `b` `class`="`x`"
                - `b`
                  - `#text`: X⏎
    - `p`
      - `b` `class`="`x`"
        - `b`
          - `b` `class`="`x`"
            - `b` `class`="`x`"
              - `b`
                - `#text`: X⏎
    - `p`
      - `b` `class`="`x`"
        - `b`
          - `b` `class`="`x`"
            - `b` `class`="`x`"
              - `b`
                - `b`
                  - `b` `class`="`x`"
                    - `b`
                      - `#text`: X⏎
    - `p`
      - `#text`: X⏎

Note how the second `p` element in the markup has no explicit `b` elements, but in the resulting DOM, up to three of each kind of formatting element (in this case three `b` elements with the class attribute, and two unadorned `b` elements) get reconstructed before the element's "X".

Also note how this means that in the final paragraph only six `b` end tags are needed to completely clear the list of active formatting elements, even though nine `b` start tags have been seen up to this point.

### 12.3 Serialising HTML fragments

The following steps form the HTML fragment serialisation algorithm. The algorithm takes as input a DOM `Element`, `Document`, or `DocumentFragment` referred to as the node, and either returns a string or throws an exception.

This algorithm serialises the children of the node being serialised, not the node itself.

1. Let s be a string, and initialise it to the empty string.

2. If the node is a `template` element, then let the node instead be the `template` element's template contents (a `DocumentFragment` node).

3. For each child node of the node, in tree order, run the following steps:

   1. Let current node be the child node being processed.

   2. Append the appropriate string from the following list to s:

      If current node is an `Element`

        If current node is an element in the HTML namespace, the MathML namespace, or the SVG namespace, then let tagname be current node's local name. Otherwise, let tagname be current node's qualified name.

        Append a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character (<), followed by tagname.

        For HTML elements created by the HTML parser or `Document.createElement()`, tagname will be lowercase.

        For each attribute that the element has, append a U+0020 SPACE character, the attribute's serialised name as described below, a U+003D EQUALS SIGN character (=), a U+0022 QUOTATION MARK character ("), the attribute's value, escaped as described below in attribute mode, and a second U+0022 QUOTATION MARK character (").

        An attribute's serialised name for the purposes of the previous paragraph must be determined as follows:

        If the attribute has no namespace

          The attribute's serialised name is the attribute's local name.

          For attributes on HTML elements set by the HTML parser or by `Element.setAttribute()`, the local name will be lowercase.

        If the attribute is in the XML namespace

          The attribute's serialised name is the string "`xml:`" followed by the attribute's local name.

        If the attribute is in the XMLNS namespace and the attribute's local name is `xmlns`

          The attribute's serialised name is the string "`xmlns`".

        If the attribute is in the XMLNS namespace and the attribute's local name is not `xmlns`

          The attribute's serialised name is the string "`xmlns:`" followed by the attribute's local name.

        If the attribute is in the XLink namespace

          The attribute's serialised name is the string "`xlink:`" followed by the attribute's local name.

        If the attribute is in some other namespace

          The attribute's serialised name is the attribute's qualified name.

        While the exact order of attributes is UA-defined, and may depend on factors such as the order that the attributes were given in the original markup, the sort order must be stable, such that consecutive invocations of this algorithm serialise an element's attributes in the same order.

        Append a U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character (>).

        If current node is an `area`, `base`, `basefont`, `bgsound`, `br`, `col`, `embed`, `frame`, `hr`, `img`, `input`, `keygen`, `link`, `menuitem`, `meta`, `param`, `source`, `track` or `wbr` element, then continue on to the next child node at this point.

        If current node is a `pre`, `textarea`, or `listing` element, and the first child node of the element, if any, is a `Text` node whose character data has as its first character a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, then append a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character.

        Append the value of running the HTML fragment serialisation algorithm on the current node element (thus recursing into this algorithm for that element), followed by a U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN character (<), a U+002F SOLIDUS character (/), tagname again, and finally a U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character (>).

      If current node is a `Text` node

        If the parent of current node is a `style`, `script`, `xmp`, `iframe`, `noembed`, `noframes`, or `plaintext` element, or if the parent of current node is a `noscript` element and scripting is enabled for the node, then append the value of current node's `data` IDL attribute literally.

        Otherwise, append the value of current node's `data` IDL attribute, escaped as described below.

      If current node is a `Comment`

        Append the literal string "`<!--`" (U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN, U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK, U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS, U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS), followed by the value of current node's `data` IDL attribute, followed by the literal string "`-->`" (U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS, U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS, U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN).

      If current node is a `ProcessingInstruction`

        Append the literal string "`<?`" (U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN, U+003F QUESTION MARK), followed by the value of current node's `target` IDL attribute, followed by a single U+0020 SPACE character, followed by the value of current node's `data` IDL attribute, followed by a single U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN character (>).

      If current node is a `DocumentType`

        Append the literal string "`<!DOCTYPE`" (U+003C LESS-THAN SIGN, U+0021 EXCLAMATION MARK, U+0044 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D, U+004F LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O, U+0043 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C, U+0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T, U+0059 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y, U+0050 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P, U+0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E), followed by a space (U+0020 SPACE), followed by the value of current node's `name` IDL attribute, followed by the literal string "`>`" (U+003E GREATER-THAN SIGN).

4. The result of the algorithm is the string s.

It is possible that the output of this algorithm, if parsed with an HTML parser, will not return the original tree structure.

For instance, if a `textarea` element to which a `Comment` node has been appended is serialised and the output is then reparsed, the comment will end up being displayed in the text field. Similarly, if, as a result of DOM manipulation, an element contains a comment that contains the literal string "`-->`", then when the result of serialising the element is parsed, the comment will be truncated at that point and the rest of the comment will be interpreted as markup. More examples would be making a `script` element contain a `Text` node with the text string "`</script>`", or having a `p` element that contains a `ul` element (as the `ul` element's start tag would imply the end tag for the `p`).

This can enable cross-site scripting attacks. An example of this would be a page that lets the user enter some font family names that are then inserted into a CSS `style` block via the DOM and which then uses the `innerHTML` IDL attribute to get the HTML serialisation of that `style` element: if the user enters "`</style><script>attack</script>`" as a font family name, `innerHTML` will return markup that, if parsed in a different context, would contain a `script` node, even though no `script` node existed in the original DOM.

Escaping a string (for the purposes of the algorithm above) consists of running the following steps:

1. Replace any occurrence of the "`&`" character by the string "`&amp;`".

2. Replace any occurrences of the U+00A0 NO-BREAK SPACE character by the string "`&nbsp;`".

3. If the algorithm was invoked in the attribute mode, replace any occurrences of the "`"`" character by the string "`&quot;`".

4. If the algorithm was not invoked in the attribute mode, replace any occurrences of the "`<`" character by the string "`&lt;`", and any occurrences of the "`>`" character by the string "`&gt;`".

### 12.4 Parsing HTML fragments

The following steps form the HTML fragment parsing algorithm. The algorithm optionally takes as input an `Element` node, referred to as the context element, which gives the context for the parser, as well as input, a string to parse, and returns a list of zero or more nodes.

Parts marked fragment case in algorithms in the parser section are parts that only occur if the parser was created for the purposes of this algorithm (and with a context element). The algorithms have been annotated with such markings for informational purposes only; such markings have no normative weight. If it is possible for a condition described as a fragment case to occur even when the parser wasn't created for the purposes of handling this algorithm, then that is an error in the specification.

1. Create a new `Document` node, and mark it as being an HTML document.

2. If there is a context element, and the node document of the context element is in quirks mode, then let the `Document` be in quirks mode. Otherwise, if there is a context element, and the node document of the context element is in limited-quirks mode, then let the `Document` be in limited-quirks mode. Otherwise, leave the `Document` in no-quirks mode.

3. Create a new HTML parser, and associate it with the just created `Document` node.

4. If there is a context element, run these substeps:

   1. Set the state of the HTML parser's tokenization stage as follows:

      If it is a `title` or `textarea` element
        Switch the tokenizer to the RCDATA state.
      If it is a `style`, `xmp`, `iframe`, `noembed`, or `noframes` element
        Switch the tokenizer to the RAWTEXT state.
      If it is a `script` element
        Switch the tokenizer to the script data state.
      If it is a `noscript` element
        If the scripting flag is enabled, switch the tokenizer to the RAWTEXT state. Otherwise, leave the tokenizer in the data state.
      If it is a `plaintext` element
        Switch the tokenizer to the PLAINTEXT state.
      Otherwise
        Leave the tokenizer in the data state.

      For performance reasons, an implementation that does not report errors and that uses the actual state machine described in this specification directly could use the PLAINTEXT state instead of the RAWTEXT and script data states where those are mentioned in the list above. Except for rules regarding parse errors, they are equivalent, since there is no appropriate end tag token in the fragment case, yet they involve far fewer state transitions.

   2. Let root be a new `html` element with no attributes.

   3. Append the element root to the `Document` node created above.

   4. Set up the parser's stack of open elements so that it contains just the single element root.

   5. If the context element is a `template` element, push "in template" onto the stack of template insertion modes so that it is the new current template insertion mode.

   6. Reset the parser's insertion mode appropriately.

      The parser will reference the context element as part of that algorithm.

   7. Set the parser's `form` element pointer to the nearest node to the context element that is a `form` element (going straight up the ancestor chain, and including the element itself, if it is a `form` element), if any. (If there is no such `form` element, the `form` element pointer keeps its initial value, null.)

5. Place the input into the input stream for the HTML parser just created. The encoding confidence is irrelevant.

6. Start the parser and let it run until it has consumed all the characters just inserted into the input stream.

7. If there is a context element, return the child nodes of root, in tree order.

   Otherwise, return the children of the `Document` object, in tree order.

### 12.5 Named character references

This table lists the character reference names that are supported by HTML, and the code points to which they refer. It is referenced by the previous sections.

Name | Character(s) | Glyph
--- | --- | ---
`Aacute;` | U+000C1 | Á
`Aacute` | U+000C1 | Á
`aacute;` | U+000E1 | á
`aacute` | U+000E1 | á
`Abreve;` | U+00102 | Ă
`abreve;` | U+00103 | ă
`ac;` | U+0223E | ∾
`acd;` | U+0223F | ∿
`acE;` | U+0223E U+00333 | ∾̳
`Acirc;` | U+000C2 | Â
`Acirc` | U+000C2 | Â
`acirc;` | U+000E2 | â
`acirc` | U+000E2 | â
`acute;` | U+000B4 | ´
`acute` | U+000B4 | ´
`Acy;` | U+00410 | А
`acy;` | U+00430 | а
`AElig;` | U+000C6 | Æ
`AElig` | U+000C6 | Æ
`aelig;` | U+000E6 | æ
`aelig` | U+000E6 | æ
`af;` | U+02061 | ⁡
`Afr;` | U+1D504 | 𝔄
`afr;` | U+1D51E | 𝔞
`Agrave;` | U+000C0 | À
`Agrave` | U+000C0 | À
`agrave;` | U+000E0 | à
`agrave` | U+000E0 | à
`alefsym;` | U+02135 | ℵ
`aleph;` | U+02135 | ℵ
`Alpha;` | U+00391 | Α
`alpha;` | U+003B1 | α
`Amacr;` | U+00100 | Ā
`amacr;` | U+00101 | ā
`amalg;` | U+02A3F | ⨿
`AMP;` | U+00026 | &
`AMP` | U+00026 | &
`amp;` | U+00026 | &
`amp` | U+00026 | &
`And;` | U+02A53 | ⩓
`and;` | U+02227 | ∧
`andand;` | U+02A55 | ⩕
`andd;` | U+02A5C | ⩜
`andslope;` | U+02A58 | ⩘
`andv;` | U+02A5A | ⩚
`ang;` | U+02220 | ∠
`ange;` | U+029A4 | ⦤
`angle;` | U+02220 | ∠
`angmsd;` | U+02221 | ∡
`angmsdaa;` | U+029A8 | ⦨
`angmsdab;` | U+029A9 | ⦩
`angmsdac;` | U+029AA | ⦪
`angmsdad;` | U+029AB | ⦫
`angmsdae;` | U+029AC | ⦬
`angmsdaf;` | U+029AD | ⦭
`angmsdag;` | U+029AE | ⦮
`angmsdah;` | U+029AF | ⦯
`angrt;` | U+0221F | ∟
`angrtvb;` | U+022BE | ⊾
`angrtvbd;` | U+0299D | ⦝
`angsph;` | U+02222 | ∢
`angst;` | U+000C5 | Å
`angzarr;` | U+0237C | ⍼
`Aogon;` | U+00104 | Ą
`aogon;` | U+00105 | ą
`Aopf;` | U+1D538 | 𝔸
`aopf;` | U+1D552 | 𝕒
`ap;` | U+02248 | ≈
`apacir;` | U+02A6F | ⩯
`apE;` | U+02A70 | ⩰
`ape;` | U+0224A | ≊
`apid;` | U+0224B | ≋
`apos;` | U+00027 | '
`ApplyFunction;` | U+02061 | ⁡
`approx;` | U+02248 | ≈
`approxeq;` | U+0224A | ≊
`Aring;` | U+000C5 | Å
`Aring` | U+000C5 | Å
`aring;` | U+000E5 | å
`aring` | U+000E5 | å
`Ascr;` | U+1D49C | 𝒜
`ascr;` | U+1D4B6 | 𝒶
`Assign;` | U+02254 | ≔
`ast;` | U+0002A | *
`asymp;` | U+02248 | ≈
`asympeq;` | U+0224D | ≍
`Atilde;` | U+000C3 | Ã
`Atilde` | U+000C3 | Ã
`atilde;` | U+000E3 | ã
`atilde` | U+000E3 | ã
`Auml;` | U+000C4 | Ä
`Auml` | U+000C4 | Ä
`auml;` | U+000E4 | ä
`auml` | U+000E4 | ä
`awconint;` | U+02233 | ∳
`awint;` | U+02A11 | ⨑
`backcong;` | U+0224C | ≌
`backepsilon;` | U+003F6 | ϶
`backprime;` | U+02035 | ‵
`backsim;` | U+0223D | ∽
`backsimeq;` | U+022CD | ⋍
`Backslash;` | U+02216 | ∖
`Barv;` | U+02AE7 | ⫧
`barvee;` | U+022BD | ⊽
`Barwed;` | U+02306 | ⌆
`barwed;` | U+02305 | ⌅
`barwedge;` | U+02305 | ⌅
`bbrk;` | U+023B5 | ⎵
`bbrktbrk;` | U+023B6 | ⎶
`bcong;` | U+0224C | ≌
`Bcy;` | U+00411 | Б
`bcy;` | U+00431 | б
`bdquo;` | U+0201E | „
`becaus;` | U+02235 | ∵
`Because;` | U+02235 | ∵
`because;` | U+02235 | ∵
`bemptyv;` | U+029B0 | ⦰
`bepsi;` | U+003F6 | ϶
`bernou;` | U+0212C | ℬ
`Bernoullis;` | U+0212C | ℬ
`Beta;` | U+00392 | Β
`beta;` | U+003B2 | β
`beth;` | U+02136 | ℶ
`between;` | U+0226C | ≬
`Bfr;` | U+1D505 | 𝔅
`bfr;` | U+1D51F | 𝔟
`bigcap;` | U+022C2 | ⋂
`bigcirc;` | U+025EF | ◯
`bigcup;` | U+022C3 | ⋃
`bigodot;` | U+02A00 | ⨀
`bigoplus;` | U+02A01 | ⨁
`bigotimes;` | U+02A02 | ⨂
`bigsqcup;` | U+02A06 | ⨆
`bigstar;` | U+02605 | ★
`bigtriangledown;` | U+025BD | ▽
`bigtriangleup;` | U+025B3 | △
`biguplus;` | U+02A04 | ⨄
`bigvee;` | U+022C1 | ⋁
`bigwedge;` | U+022C0 | ⋀
`bkarow;` | U+0290D | ⤍
`blacklozenge;` | U+029EB | ⧫
`blacksquare;` | U+025AA | ▪
`blacktriangle;` | U+025B4 | ▴
`blacktriangledown;` | U+025BE | ▾
`blacktriangleleft;` | U+025C2 | ◂
`blacktriangleright;` | U+025B8 | ▸
`blank;` | U+02423 | ␣
`blk12;` | U+02592 | ▒
`blk14;` | U+02591 | ░
`blk34;` | U+02593 | ▓
`block;` | U+02588 | █
`bne;` | U+0003D U+020E5 | =⃥
`bnequiv;` | U+02261 U+020E5 | ≡⃥
`bNot;` | U+02AED | ⫭
`bnot;` | U+02310 | ⌐
`Bopf;` | U+1D539 | 𝔹
`bopf;` | U+1D553 | 𝕓
`bot;` | U+022A5 | ⊥
`bottom;` | U+022A5 | ⊥
`bowtie;` | U+022C8 | ⋈
`boxbox;` | U+029C9 | ⧉
`boxDL;` | U+02557 | ╗
`boxDl;` | U+02556 | ╖
`boxdL;` | U+02555 | ╕
`boxdl;` | U+02510 | ┐
`boxDR;` | U+02554 | ╔
`boxDr;` | U+02553 | ╓
`boxdR;` | U+02552 | ╒
`boxdr;` | U+0250C | ┌
`boxH;` | U+02550 | ═
`boxh;` | U+02500 | ─
`boxHD;` | U+02566 | ╦
`boxHd;` | U+02564 | ╤
`boxhD;` | U+02565 | ╥
`boxhd;` | U+0252C | ┬
`boxHU;` | U+02569 | ╩
`boxHu;` | U+02567 | ╧
`boxhU;` | U+02568 | ╨
`boxhu;` | U+02534 | ┴
`boxminus;` | U+0229F | ⊟
`boxplus;` | U+0229E | ⊞
`boxtimes;` | U+022A0 | ⊠
`boxUL;` | U+0255D | ╝
`boxUl;` | U+0255C | ╜
`boxuL;` | U+0255B | ╛
`boxul;` | U+02518 | ┘
`boxUR;` | U+0255A | ╚
`boxUr;` | U+02559 | ╙
`boxuR;` | U+02558 | ╘
`boxur;` | U+02514 | └
`boxV;` | U+02551 | ║
`boxv;` | U+02502 | │
`boxVH;` | U+0256C | ╬
`boxVh;` | U+0256B | ╫
`boxvH;` | U+0256A | ╪
`boxvh;` | U+0253C | ┼
`boxVL;` | U+02563 | ╣
`boxVl;` | U+02562 | ╢
`boxvL;` | U+02561 | ╡
`boxvl;` | U+02524 | ┤
`boxVR;` | U+02560 | ╠
`boxVr;` | U+0255F | ╟
`boxvR;` | U+0255E | ╞
`boxvr;` | U+0251C | ├
`bprime;` | U+02035 | ‵
`Breve;` | U+002D8 | ˘
`breve;` | U+002D8 | ˘
`brvbar;` | U+000A6 | ¦
`brvbar` | U+000A6 | ¦
`Bscr;` | U+0212C | ℬ
`bscr;` | U+1D4B7 | 𝒷
`bsemi;` | U+0204F | ⁏
`bsim;` | U+0223D | ∽
`bsime;` | U+022CD | ⋍
`bsol;` | U+0005C | \
`bsolb;` | U+029C5 | ⧅
`bsolhsub;` | U+027C8 | ⟈
`bull;` | U+02022 | •
`bullet;` | U+02022 | •
`bump;` | U+0224E | ≎
`bumpE;` | U+02AAE | ⪮
`bumpe;` | U+0224F | ≏
`Bumpeq;` | U+0224E | ≎
`bumpeq;` | U+0224F | ≏
`Cacute;` | U+00106 | Ć
`cacute;` | U+00107 | ć
`Cap;` | U+022D2 | ⋒
`cap;` | U+02229 | ∩
`capand;` | U+02A44 | ⩄
`capbrcup;` | U+02A49 | ⩉
`capcap;` | U+02A4B | ⩋
`capcup;` | U+02A47 | ⩇
`capdot;` | U+02A40 | ⩀
`CapitalDifferentialD;` | U+02145 | ⅅ
`caps;` | U+02229 U+0FE00 | ∩︀
`caret;` | U+02041 | ⁁
`caron;` | U+002C7 | ˇ
`Cayleys;` | U+0212D | ℭ
`ccaps;` | U+02A4D | ⩍
`Ccaron;` | U+0010C | Č
`ccaron;` | U+0010D | č
`Ccedil;` | U+000C7 | Ç
`Ccedil` | U+000C7 | Ç
`ccedil;` | U+000E7 | ç
`ccedil` | U+000E7 | ç
`Ccirc;` | U+00108 | Ĉ
`ccirc;` | U+00109 | ĉ
`Cconint;` | U+02230 | ∰
`ccups;` | U+02A4C | ⩌
`ccupssm;` | U+02A50 | ⩐
`Cdot;` | U+0010A | Ċ
`cdot;` | U+0010B | ċ
`cedil;` | U+000B8 | ¸
`cedil` | U+000B8 | ¸
`Cedilla;` | U+000B8 | ¸
`cemptyv;` | U+029B2 | ⦲
`cent;` | U+000A2 | ¢
`cent` | U+000A2 | ¢
`CenterDot;` | U+000B7 | ·
`centerdot;` | U+000B7 | ·
`Cfr;` | U+0212D | ℭ
`cfr;` | U+1D520 | 𝔠
`CHcy;` | U+00427 | Ч
`chcy;` | U+00447 | ч
`check;` | U+02713 | ✓
`checkmark;` | U+02713 | ✓
`Chi;` | U+003A7 | Χ
`chi;` | U+003C7 | χ
`cir;` | U+025CB | ○
`circ;` | U+002C6 | ˆ
`circeq;` | U+02257 | ≗
`circlearrowleft;` | U+021BA | ↺
`circlearrowright;` | U+021BB | ↻
`circledast;` | U+0229B | ⊛
`circledcirc;` | U+0229A | ⊚
`circleddash;` | U+0229D | ⊝
`CircleDot;` | U+02299 | ⊙
`circledR;` | U+000AE | ®
`circledS;` | U+024C8 | Ⓢ
`CircleMinus;` | U+02296 | ⊖
`CirclePlus;` | U+02295 | ⊕
`CircleTimes;` | U+02297 | ⊗
`cirE;` | U+029C3 | ⧃
`cire;` | U+02257 | ≗
`cirfnint;` | U+02A10 | ⨐
`cirmid;` | U+02AEF | ⫯
`cirscir;` | U+029C2 | ⧂
`ClockwiseContourIntegral;` | U+02232 | ∲
`CloseCurlyDoubleQuote;` | U+0201D | ”
`CloseCurlyQuote;` | U+02019 | ’
`clubs;` | U+02663 | ♣
`clubsuit;` | U+02663 | ♣
`Colon;` | U+02237 | ∷
`colon;` | U+0003A | :
`Colone;` | U+02A74 | ⩴
`colone;` | U+02254 | ≔
`coloneq;` | U+02254 | ≔
`comma;` | U+0002C | ,
`commat;` | U+00040 | @
`comp;` | U+02201 | ∁
`compfn;` | U+02218 | ∘
`complement;` | U+02201 | ∁
`complexes;` | U+02102 | ℂ
`cong;` | U+02245 | ≅
`congdot;` | U+02A6D | ⩭
`Congruent;` | U+02261 | ≡
`Conint;` | U+0222F | ∯
`conint;` | U+0222E | ∮
`ContourIntegral;` | U+0222E | ∮
`Copf;` | U+02102 | ℂ
`copf;` | U+1D554 | 𝕔
`coprod;` | U+02210 | ∐
`Coproduct;` | U+02210 | ∐
`COPY;` | U+000A9 | ©
`COPY` | U+000A9 | ©
`copy;` | U+000A9 | ©
`copy` | U+000A9 | ©
`copysr;` | U+02117 | ℗
`CounterClockwiseContourIntegral;` | U+02233 | ∳
`crarr;` | U+021B5 | ↵
`Cross;` | U+02A2F | ⨯
`cross;` | U+02717 | ✗
`Cscr;` | U+1D49E | 𝒞
`cscr;` | U+1D4B8 | 𝒸
`csub;` | U+02ACF | ⫏
`csube;` | U+02AD1 | ⫑
`csup;` | U+02AD0 | ⫐
`csupe;` | U+02AD2 | ⫒
`ctdot;` | U+022EF | ⋯
`cudarrl;` | U+02938 | ⤸
`cudarrr;` | U+02935 | ⤵
`cuepr;` | U+022DE | ⋞
`cuesc;` | U+022DF | ⋟
`cularr;` | U+021B6 | ↶
`cularrp;` | U+0293D | ⤽
`Cup;` | U+022D3 | ⋓
`cup;` | U+0222A | ∪
`cupbrcap;` | U+02A48 | ⩈
`CupCap;` | U+0224D | ≍
`cupcap;` | U+02A46 | ⩆
`cupcup;` | U+02A4A | ⩊
`cupdot;` | U+0228D | ⊍
`cupor;` | U+02A45 | ⩅
`cups;` | U+0222A U+0FE00 | ∪︀
`curarr;` | U+021B7 | ↷
`curarrm;` | U+0293C | ⤼
`curlyeqprec;` | U+022DE | ⋞
`curlyeqsucc;` | U+022DF | ⋟
`curlyvee;` | U+022CE | ⋎
`curlywedge;` | U+022CF | ⋏
`curren;` | U+000A4 | ¤
`curren` | U+000A4 | ¤
`curvearrowleft;` | U+021B6 | ↶
`curvearrowright;` | U+021B7 | ↷
`cuvee;` | U+022CE | ⋎
`cuwed;` | U+022CF | ⋏
`cwconint;` | U+02232 | ∲
`cwint;` | U+02231 | ∱
`cylcty;` | U+0232D | ⌭
`Dagger;` | U+02021 | ‡
`dagger;` | U+02020 | †
`daleth;` | U+02138 | ℸ
`Darr;` | U+021A1 | ↡
`dArr;` | U+021D3 | ⇓
`darr;` | U+02193 | ↓
`dash;` | U+02010 | ‐
`Dashv;` | U+02AE4 | ⫤
`dashv;` | U+022A3 | ⊣
`dbkarow;` | U+0290F | ⤏
`dblac;` | U+002DD | ˝
`Dcaron;` | U+0010E | Ď
`dcaron;` | U+0010F | ď
`Dcy;` | U+00414 | Д
`dcy;` | U+00434 | д
`DD;` | U+02145 | ⅅ
`dd;` | U+02146 | ⅆ
`ddagger;` | U+02021 | ‡
`ddarr;` | U+021CA | ⇊
`DDotrahd;` | U+02911 | ⤑
`ddotseq;` | U+02A77 | ⩷
`deg;` | U+000B0 | °
`deg` | U+000B0 | °
`Del;` | U+02207 | ∇
`Delta;` | U+00394 | Δ
`delta;` | U+003B4 | δ
`demptyv;` | U+029B1 | ⦱
`dfisht;` | U+0297F | ⥿
`Dfr;` | U+1D507 | 𝔇
`dfr;` | U+1D521 | 𝔡
`dHar;` | U+02965 | ⥥
`dharl;` | U+021C3 | ⇃
`dharr;` | U+021C2 | ⇂
`DiacriticalAcute;` | U+000B4 | ´
`DiacriticalDot;` | U+002D9 | ˙
`DiacriticalDoubleAcute;` | U+002DD | ˝
`DiacriticalGrave;` | U+00060 | `
`DiacriticalTilde;` | U+002DC | ˜
`diam;` | U+022C4 | ⋄
`Diamond;` | U+022C4 | ⋄
`diamond;` | U+022C4 | ⋄
`diamondsuit;` | U+02666 | ♦
`diams;` | U+02666 | ♦
`die;` | U+000A8 | ¨
`DifferentialD;` | U+02146 | ⅆ
`digamma;` | U+003DD | ϝ
`disin;` | U+022F2 | ⋲
`div;` | U+000F7 | ÷
`divide;` | U+000F7 | ÷
`divide` | U+000F7 | ÷
`divideontimes;` | U+022C7 | ⋇
`divonx;` | U+022C7 | ⋇
`DJcy;` | U+00402 | Ђ
`djcy;` | U+00452 | ђ
`dlcorn;` | U+0231E | ⌞
`dlcrop;` | U+0230D | ⌍
`dollar;` | U+00024 | $
`Dopf;` | U+1D53B | 𝔻
`dopf;` | U+1D555 | 𝕕
`Dot;` | U+000A8 | ¨
`dot;` | U+002D9 | ˙
`DotDot;` | U+020DC | ◌⃜
`doteq;` | U+02250 | ≐
`doteqdot;` | U+02251 | ≑
`DotEqual;` | U+02250 | ≐
`dotminus;` | U+02238 | ∸
`dotplus;` | U+02214 | ∔
`dotsquare;` | U+022A1 | ⊡
`doublebarwedge;` | U+02306 | ⌆
`DoubleContourIntegral;` | U+0222F | ∯
`DoubleDot;` | U+000A8 | ¨
`DoubleDownArrow;` | U+021D3 | ⇓
`DoubleLeftArrow;` | U+021D0 | ⇐
`DoubleLeftRightArrow;` | U+021D4 | ⇔
`DoubleLeftTee;` | U+02AE4 | ⫤
`DoubleLongLeftArrow;` | U+027F8 | ⟸
`DoubleLongLeftRightArrow;` | U+027FA | ⟺
`DoubleLongRightArrow;` | U+027F9 | ⟹
`DoubleRightArrow;` | U+021D2 | ⇒
`DoubleRightTee;` | U+022A8 | ⊨
`DoubleUpArrow;` | U+021D1 | ⇑
`DoubleUpDownArrow;` | U+021D5 | ⇕
`DoubleVerticalBar;` | U+02225 | ∥
`DownArrow;` | U+02193 | ↓
`Downarrow;` | U+021D3 | ⇓
`downarrow;` | U+02193 | ↓
`DownArrowBar;` | U+02913 | ⤓
`DownArrowUpArrow;` | U+021F5 | ⇵
`DownBreve;` | U+00311 | ◌̑
`downdownarrows;` | U+021CA | ⇊
`downharpoonleft;` | U+021C3 | ⇃
`downharpoonright;` | U+021C2 | ⇂
`DownLeftRightVector;` | U+02950 | ⥐
`DownLeftTeeVector;` | U+0295E | ⥞
`DownLeftVector;` | U+021BD | ↽
`DownLeftVectorBar;` | U+02956 | ⥖
`DownRightTeeVector;` | U+0295F | ⥟
`DownRightVector;` | U+021C1 | ⇁
`DownRightVectorBar;` | U+02957 | ⥗
`DownTee;` | U+022A4 | ⊤
`DownTeeArrow;` | U+021A7 | ↧
`drbkarow;` | U+02910 | ⤐
`drcorn;` | U+0231F | ⌟
`drcrop;` | U+0230C | ⌌
`Dscr;` | U+1D49F | 𝒟
`dscr;` | U+1D4B9 | 𝒹
`DScy;` | U+00405 | Ѕ
`dscy;` | U+00455 | ѕ
`dsol;` | U+029F6 | ⧶
`Dstrok;` | U+00110 | Đ
`dstrok;` | U+00111 | đ
`dtdot;` | U+022F1 | ⋱
`dtri;` | U+025BF | ▿
`dtrif;` | U+025BE | ▾
`duarr;` | U+021F5 | ⇵
`duhar;` | U+0296F | ⥯
`dwangle;` | U+029A6 | ⦦
`DZcy;` | U+0040F | Џ
`dzcy;` | U+0045F | џ
`dzigrarr;` | U+027FF | ⟿
`Eacute;` | U+000C9 | É
`Eacute` | U+000C9 | É
`eacute;` | U+000E9 | é
`eacute` | U+000E9 | é
`easter;` | U+02A6E | ⩮
`Ecaron;` | U+0011A | Ě
`ecaron;` | U+0011B | ě
`ecir;` | U+02256 | ≖
`Ecirc;` | U+000CA | Ê
`Ecirc` | U+000CA | Ê
`ecirc;` | U+000EA | ê
`ecirc` | U+000EA | ê
`ecolon;` | U+02255 | ≕
`Ecy;` | U+0042D | Э
`ecy;` | U+0044D | э
`eDDot;` | U+02A77 | ⩷
`Edot;` | U+00116 | Ė
`eDot;` | U+02251 | ≑
`edot;` | U+00117 | ė
`ee;` | U+02147 | ⅇ
`efDot;` | U+02252 | ≒
`Efr;` | U+1D508 | 𝔈
`efr;` | U+1D522 | 𝔢
`eg;` | U+02A9A | ⪚
`Egrave;` | U+000C8 | È
`Egrave` | U+000C8 | È
`egrave;` | U+000E8 | è
`egrave` | U+000E8 | è
`egs;` | U+02A96 | ⪖
`egsdot;` | U+02A98 | ⪘
`el;` | U+02A99 | ⪙
`Element;` | U+02208 | ∈
`elinters;` | U+023E7 | ⏧
`ell;` | U+02113 | ℓ
`els;` | U+02A95 | ⪕
`elsdot;` | U+02A97 | ⪗
`Emacr;` | U+00112 | Ē
`emacr;` | U+00113 | ē
`empty;` | U+02205 | ∅
`emptyset;` | U+02205 | ∅
`EmptySmallSquare;` | U+025FB | ◻
`emptyv;` | U+02205 | ∅
`EmptyVerySmallSquare;` | U+025AB | ▫
`emsp;` | U+02003 |
`emsp13;` | U+02004 |
`emsp14;` | U+02005 |
`ENG;` | U+0014A | Ŋ
`eng;` | U+0014B | ŋ
`ensp;` | U+02002 |
`Eogon;` | U+00118 | Ę
`eogon;` | U+00119 | ę
`Eopf;` | U+1D53C | 𝔼
`eopf;` | U+1D556 | 𝕖
`epar;` | U+022D5 | ⋕
`eparsl;` | U+029E3 | ⧣
`eplus;` | U+02A71 | ⩱
`epsi;` | U+003B5 | ε
`Epsilon;` | U+00395 | Ε
`epsilon;` | U+003B5 | ε
`epsiv;` | U+003F5 | ϵ
`eqcirc;` | U+02256 | ≖
`eqcolon;` | U+02255 | ≕
`eqsim;` | U+02242 | ≂
`eqslantgtr;` | U+02A96 | ⪖
`eqslantless;` | U+02A95 | ⪕
`Equal;` | U+02A75 | ⩵
`equals;` | U+0003D | =
`EqualTilde;` | U+02242 | ≂
`equest;` | U+0225F | ≟
`Equilibrium;` | U+021CC | ⇌
`equiv;` | U+02261 | ≡
`equivDD;` | U+02A78 | ⩸
`eqvparsl;` | U+029E5 | ⧥
`erarr;` | U+02971 | ⥱
`erDot;` | U+02253 | ≓
`Escr;` | U+02130 | ℰ
`escr;` | U+0212F | ℯ
`esdot;` | U+02250 | ≐
`Esim;` | U+02A73 | ⩳
`esim;` | U+02242 | ≂
`Eta;` | U+00397 | Η
`eta;` | U+003B7 | η
`ETH;` | U+000D0 | Ð
`ETH` | U+000D0 | Ð
`eth;` | U+000F0 | ð
`eth` | U+000F0 | ð
`Euml;` | U+000CB | Ë
`Euml` | U+000CB | Ë
`euml;` | U+000EB | ë
`euml` | U+000EB | ë
`euro;` | U+020AC | €
`excl;` | U+00021 | !
`exist;` | U+02203 | ∃
`Exists;` | U+02203 | ∃
`expectation;` | U+02130 | ℰ
`ExponentialE;` | U+02147 | ⅇ
`exponentiale;` | U+02147 | ⅇ
`fallingdotseq;` | U+02252 | ≒
`Fcy;` | U+00424 | Ф
`fcy;` | U+00444 | ф
`female;` | U+02640 | ♀
`ffilig;` | U+0FB03 | ﬃ
`fflig;` | U+0FB00 | ﬀ
`ffllig;` | U+0FB04 | ﬄ
`Ffr;` | U+1D509 | 𝔉
`ffr;` | U+1D523 | 𝔣
`filig;` | U+0FB01 | ﬁ
`FilledSmallSquare;` | U+025FC | ◼
`FilledVerySmallSquare;` | U+025AA | ▪
`fjlig;` | U+00066 U+0006A | fj
`flat;` | U+0266D | ♭
`fllig;` | U+0FB02 | ﬂ
`fltns;` | U+025B1 | ▱
`fnof;` | U+00192 | ƒ
`Fopf;` | U+1D53D | 𝔽
`fopf;` | U+1D557 | 𝕗
`ForAll;` | U+02200 | ∀
`forall;` | U+02200 | ∀
`fork;` | U+022D4 | ⋔
`forkv;` | U+02AD9 | ⫙
`Fouriertrf;` | U+02131 | ℱ
`fpartint;` | U+02A0D | ⨍
`frac12;` | U+000BD | ½
`frac12` | U+000BD | ½
`frac13;` | U+02153 | ⅓
`frac14;` | U+000BC | ¼
`frac14` | U+000BC | ¼
`frac15;` | U+02155 | ⅕
`frac16;` | U+02159 | ⅙
`frac18;` | U+0215B | ⅛
`frac23;` | U+02154 | ⅔
`frac25;` | U+02156 | ⅖
`frac34;` | U+000BE | ¾
`frac34` | U+000BE | ¾
`frac35;` | U+02157 | ⅗
`frac38;` | U+0215C | ⅜
`frac45;` | U+02158 | ⅘
`frac56;` | U+0215A | ⅚
`frac58;` | U+0215D | ⅝
`frac78;` | U+0215E | ⅞
`frasl;` | U+02044 | ⁄
`frown;` | U+02322 | ⌢
`Fscr;` | U+02131 | ℱ
`fscr;` | U+1D4BB | 𝒻
`gacute;` | U+001F5 | ǵ
`Gamma;` | U+00393 | Γ
`gamma;` | U+003B3 | γ
`Gammad;` | U+003DC | Ϝ
`gammad;` | U+003DD | ϝ
`gap;` | U+02A86 | ⪆
`Gbreve;` | U+0011E | Ğ
`gbreve;` | U+0011F | ğ
`Gcedil;` | U+00122 | Ģ
`Gcirc;` | U+0011C | Ĝ
`gcirc;` | U+0011D | ĝ
`Gcy;` | U+00413 | Г
`gcy;` | U+00433 | г
`Gdot;` | U+00120 | Ġ
`gdot;` | U+00121 | ġ
`gE;` | U+02267 | ≧
`ge;` | U+02265 | ≥
`gEl;` | U+02A8C | ⪌
`gel;` | U+022DB | ⋛
`geq;` | U+02265 | ≥
`geqq;` | U+02267 | ≧
`geqslant;` | U+02A7E | ⩾
`ges;` | U+02A7E | ⩾
`gescc;` | U+02AA9 | ⪩
`gesdot;` | U+02A80 | ⪀
`gesdoto;` | U+02A82 | ⪂
`gesdotol;` | U+02A84 | ⪄
`gesl;` | U+022DB U+0FE00 | ⋛︀
`gesles;` | U+02A94 | ⪔
`Gfr;` | U+1D50A | 𝔊
`gfr;` | U+1D524 | 𝔤
`Gg;` | U+022D9 | ⋙
`gg;` | U+0226B | ≫
`ggg;` | U+022D9 | ⋙
`gimel;` | U+02137 | ℷ
`GJcy;` | U+00403 | Ѓ
`gjcy;` | U+00453 | ѓ
`gl;` | U+02277 | ≷
`gla;` | U+02AA5 | ⪥
`glE;` | U+02A92 | ⪒
`glj;` | U+02AA4 | ⪤
`gnap;` | U+02A8A | ⪊
`gnapprox;` | U+02A8A | ⪊
`gnE;` | U+02269 | ≩
`gne;` | U+02A88 | ⪈
`gneq;` | U+02A88 | ⪈
`gneqq;` | U+02269 | ≩
`gnsim;` | U+022E7 | ⋧
`Gopf;` | U+1D53E | 𝔾
`gopf;` | U+1D558 | 𝕘
`grave;` | U+00060 | `
`GreaterEqual;` | U+02265 | ≥
`GreaterEqualLess;` | U+022DB | ⋛
`GreaterFullEqual;` | U+02267 | ≧
`GreaterGreater;` | U+02AA2 | ⪢
`GreaterLess;` | U+02277 | ≷
`GreaterSlantEqual;` | U+02A7E | ⩾
`GreaterTilde;` | U+02273 | ≳
`Gscr;` | U+1D4A2 | 𝒢
`gscr;` | U+0210A | ℊ
`gsim;` | U+02273 | ≳
`gsime;` | U+02A8E | ⪎
`gsiml;` | U+02A90 | ⪐
`GT;` | U+0003E | >
`GT` | U+0003E | >
`Gt;` | U+0226B | ≫
`gt;` | U+0003E | >
`gt` | U+0003E | >
`gtcc;` | U+02AA7 | ⪧
`gtcir;` | U+02A7A | ⩺
`gtdot;` | U+022D7 | ⋗
`gtlPar;` | U+02995 | ⦕
`gtquest;` | U+02A7C | ⩼
`gtrapprox;` | U+02A86 | ⪆
`gtrarr;` | U+02978 | ⥸
`gtrdot;` | U+022D7 | ⋗
`gtreqless;` | U+022DB | ⋛
`gtreqqless;` | U+02A8C | ⪌
`gtrless;` | U+02277 | ≷
`gtrsim;` | U+02273 | ≳
`gvertneqq;` | U+02269 U+0FE00 | ≩︀
`gvnE;` | U+02269 U+0FE00 | ≩︀
`Hacek;` | U+002C7 | ˇ
`hairsp;` | U+0200A |
`half;` | U+000BD | ½
`hamilt;` | U+0210B | ℋ
`HARDcy;` | U+0042A | Ъ
`hardcy;` | U+0044A | ъ
`hArr;` | U+021D4 | ⇔
`harr;` | U+02194 | ↔
`harrcir;` | U+02948 | ⥈
`harrw;` | U+021AD | ↭
`Hat;` | U+0005E | ^
`hbar;` | U+0210F | ℏ
`Hcirc;` | U+00124 | Ĥ
`hcirc;` | U+00125 | ĥ
`hearts;` | U+02665 | ♥
`heartsuit;` | U+02665 | ♥
`hellip;` | U+02026 | …
`hercon;` | U+022B9 | ⊹
`Hfr;` | U+0210C | ℌ
`hfr;` | U+1D525 | 𝔥
`HilbertSpace;` | U+0210B | ℋ
`hksearow;` | U+02925 | ⤥
`hkswarow;` | U+02926 | ⤦
`hoarr;` | U+021FF | ⇿
`homtht;` | U+0223B | ∻
`hookleftarrow;` | U+021A9 | ↩
`hookrightarrow;` | U+021AA | ↪
`Hopf;` | U+0210D | ℍ
`hopf;` | U+1D559 | 𝕙
`horbar;` | U+02015 | ―
`HorizontalLine;` | U+02500 | ─
`Hscr;` | U+0210B | ℋ
`hscr;` | U+1D4BD | 𝒽
`hslash;` | U+0210F | ℏ
`Hstrok;` | U+00126 | Ħ
`hstrok;` | U+00127 | ħ
`HumpDownHump;` | U+0224E | ≎
`HumpEqual;` | U+0224F | ≏
`hybull;` | U+02043 | ⁃
`hyphen;` | U+02010 | ‐
`Iacute;` | U+000CD | Í
`Iacute` | U+000CD | Í
`iacute;` | U+000ED | í
`iacute` | U+000ED | í
`ic;` | U+02063 | ⁣
`Icirc;` | U+000CE | Î
`Icirc` | U+000CE | Î
`icirc;` | U+000EE | î
`icirc` | U+000EE | î
`Icy;` | U+00418 | И
`icy;` | U+00438 | и
`Idot;` | U+00130 | İ
`IEcy;` | U+00415 | Е
`iecy;` | U+00435 | е
`iexcl;` | U+000A1 | ¡
`iexcl` | U+000A1 | ¡
`iff;` | U+021D4 | ⇔
`Ifr;` | U+02111 | ℑ
`ifr;` | U+1D526 | 𝔦
`Igrave;` | U+000CC | Ì
`Igrave` | U+000CC | Ì
`igrave;` | U+000EC | ì
`igrave` | U+000EC | ì
`ii;` | U+02148 | ⅈ
`iiiint;` | U+02A0C | ⨌
`iiint;` | U+0222D | ∭
`iinfin;` | U+029DC | ⧜
`iiota;` | U+02129 | ℩
`IJlig;` | U+00132 | Ĳ
`ijlig;` | U+00133 | ĳ
`Im;` | U+02111 | ℑ
`Imacr;` | U+0012A | Ī
`imacr;` | U+0012B | ī
`image;` | U+02111 | ℑ
`ImaginaryI;` | U+02148 | ⅈ
`imagline;` | U+02110 | ℐ
`imagpart;` | U+02111 | ℑ
`imath;` | U+00131 | ı
`imof;` | U+022B7 | ⊷
`imped;` | U+001B5 | Ƶ
`Implies;` | U+021D2 | ⇒
`in;` | U+02208 | ∈
`incare;` | U+02105 | ℅
`infin;` | U+0221E | ∞
`infintie;` | U+029DD | ⧝
`inodot;` | U+00131 | ı
`Int;` | U+0222C | ∬
`int;` | U+0222B | ∫
`intcal;` | U+022BA | ⊺
`integers;` | U+02124 | ℤ
`Integral;` | U+0222B | ∫
`intercal;` | U+022BA | ⊺
`Intersection;` | U+022C2 | ⋂
`intlarhk;` | U+02A17 | ⨗
`intprod;` | U+02A3C | ⨼
`InvisibleComma;` | U+02063 | ⁣
`InvisibleTimes;` | U+02062 | ⁢
`IOcy;` | U+00401 | Ё
`iocy;` | U+00451 | ё
`Iogon;` | U+0012E | Į
`iogon;` | U+0012F | į
`Iopf;` | U+1D540 | 𝕀
`iopf;` | U+1D55A | 𝕚
`Iota;` | U+00399 | Ι
`iota;` | U+003B9 | ι
`iprod;` | U+02A3C | ⨼
`iquest;` | U+000BF | ¿
`iquest` | U+000BF | ¿
`Iscr;` | U+02110 | ℐ
`iscr;` | U+1D4BE | 𝒾
`isin;` | U+02208 | ∈
`isindot;` | U+022F5 | ⋵
`isinE;` | U+022F9 | ⋹
`isins;` | U+022F4 | ⋴
`isinsv;` | U+022F3 | ⋳
`isinv;` | U+02208 | ∈
`it;` | U+02062 | ⁢
`Itilde;` | U+00128 | Ĩ
`itilde;` | U+00129 | ĩ
`Iukcy;` | U+00406 | І
`iukcy;` | U+00456 | і
`Iuml;` | U+000CF | Ï
`Iuml` | U+000CF | Ï
`iuml;` | U+000EF | ï
`iuml` | U+000EF | ï
`Jcirc;` | U+00134 | Ĵ
`jcirc;` | U+00135 | ĵ
`Jcy;` | U+00419 | Й
`jcy;` | U+00439 | й
`Jfr;` | U+1D50D | 𝔍
`jfr;` | U+1D527 | 𝔧
`jmath;` | U+00237 | ȷ
`Jopf;` | U+1D541 | 𝕁
`jopf;` | U+1D55B | 𝕛
`Jscr;` | U+1D4A5 | 𝒥
`jscr;` | U+1D4BF | 𝒿
`Jsercy;` | U+00408 | Ј
`jsercy;` | U+00458 | ј
`Jukcy;` | U+00404 | Є
`jukcy;` | U+00454 | є
`Kappa;` | U+0039A | Κ
`kappa;` | U+003BA | κ
`kappav;` | U+003F0 | ϰ
`Kcedil;` | U+00136 | Ķ
`kcedil;` | U+00137 | ķ
`Kcy;` | U+0041A | К
`kcy;` | U+0043A | к
`Kfr;` | U+1D50E | 𝔎
`kfr;` | U+1D528 | 𝔨
`kgreen;` | U+00138 | ĸ
`KHcy;` | U+00425 | Х
`khcy;` | U+00445 | х
`KJcy;` | U+0040C | Ќ
`kjcy;` | U+0045C | ќ
`Kopf;` | U+1D542 | 𝕂
`kopf;` | U+1D55C | 𝕜
`Kscr;` | U+1D4A6 | 𝒦
`kscr;` | U+1D4C0 | 𝓀
`lAarr;` | U+021DA | ⇚
`Lacute;` | U+00139 | Ĺ
`lacute;` | U+0013A | ĺ
`laemptyv;` | U+029B4 | ⦴
`lagran;` | U+02112 | ℒ
`Lambda;` | U+0039B | Λ
`lambda;` | U+003BB | λ
`Lang;` | U+027EA | ⟪
`lang;` | U+027E8 | ⟨
`langd;` | U+02991 | ⦑
`langle;` | U+027E8 | ⟨
`lap;` | U+02A85 | ⪅
`Laplacetrf;` | U+02112 | ℒ
`laquo;` | U+000AB | «
`laquo` | U+000AB | «
`Larr;` | U+0219E | ↞
`lArr;` | U+021D0 | ⇐
`larr;` | U+02190 | ←
`larrb;` | U+021E4 | ⇤
`larrbfs;` | U+0291F | ⤟
`larrfs;` | U+0291D | ⤝
`larrhk;` | U+021A9 | ↩
`larrlp;` | U+021AB | ↫
`larrpl;` | U+02939 | ⤹
`larrsim;` | U+02973 | ⥳
`larrtl;` | U+021A2 | ↢
`lat;` | U+02AAB | ⪫
`lAtail;` | U+0291B | ⤛
`latail;` | U+02919 | ⤙
`late;` | U+02AAD | ⪭
`lates;` | U+02AAD U+0FE00 | ⪭︀
`lBarr;` | U+0290E | ⤎
`lbarr;` | U+0290C | ⤌
`lbbrk;` | U+02772 | ❲
`lbrace;` | U+0007B | {
`lbrack;` | U+0005B | [
`lbrke;` | U+0298B | ⦋
`lbrksld;` | U+0298F | ⦏
`lbrkslu;` | U+0298D | ⦍
`Lcaron;` | U+0013D | Ľ
`lcaron;` | U+0013E | ľ
`Lcedil;` | U+0013B | Ļ
`lcedil;` | U+0013C | ļ
`lceil;` | U+02308 | ⌈
`lcub;` | U+0007B | {
`Lcy;` | U+0041B | Л
`lcy;` | U+0043B | л
`ldca;` | U+02936 | ⤶
`ldquo;` | U+0201C | “
`ldquor;` | U+0201E | „
`ldrdhar;` | U+02967 | ⥧
`ldrushar;` | U+0294B | ⥋
`ldsh;` | U+021B2 | ↲
`lE;` | U+02266 | ≦
`le;` | U+02264 | ≤
`LeftAngleBracket;` | U+027E8 | ⟨
`LeftArrow;` | U+02190 | ←
`Leftarrow;` | U+021D0 | ⇐
`leftarrow;` | U+02190 | ←
`LeftArrowBar;` | U+021E4 | ⇤
`LeftArrowRightArrow;` | U+021C6 | ⇆
`leftarrowtail;` | U+021A2 | ↢
`LeftCeiling;` | U+02308 | ⌈
`LeftDoubleBracket;` | U+027E6 | ⟦
`LeftDownTeeVector;` | U+02961 | ⥡
`LeftDownVector;` | U+021C3 | ⇃
`LeftDownVectorBar;` | U+02959 | ⥙
`LeftFloor;` | U+0230A | ⌊
`leftharpoondown;` | U+021BD | ↽
`leftharpoonup;` | U+021BC | ↼
`leftleftarrows;` | U+021C7 | ⇇
`LeftRightArrow;` | U+02194 | ↔
`Leftrightarrow;` | U+021D4 | ⇔
`leftrightarrow;` | U+02194 | ↔
`leftrightarrows;` | U+021C6 | ⇆
`leftrightharpoons;` | U+021CB | ⇋
`leftrightsquigarrow;` | U+021AD | ↭
`LeftRightVector;` | U+0294E | ⥎
`LeftTee;` | U+022A3 | ⊣
`LeftTeeArrow;` | U+021A4 | ↤
`LeftTeeVector;` | U+0295A | ⥚
`leftthreetimes;` | U+022CB | ⋋
`LeftTriangle;` | U+022B2 | ⊲
`LeftTriangleBar;` | U+029CF | ⧏
`LeftTriangleEqual;` | U+022B4 | ⊴
`LeftUpDownVector;` | U+02951 | ⥑
`LeftUpTeeVector;` | U+02960 | ⥠
`LeftUpVector;` | U+021BF | ↿
`LeftUpVectorBar;` | U+02958 | ⥘
`LeftVector;` | U+021BC | ↼
`LeftVectorBar;` | U+02952 | ⥒
`lEg;` | U+02A8B | ⪋
`leg;` | U+022DA | ⋚
`leq;` | U+02264 | ≤
`leqq;` | U+02266 | ≦
`leqslant;` | U+02A7D | ⩽
`les;` | U+02A7D | ⩽
`lescc;` | U+02AA8 | ⪨
`lesdot;` | U+02A7F | ⩿
`lesdoto;` | U+02A81 | ⪁
`lesdotor;` | U+02A83 | ⪃
`lesg;` | U+022DA U+0FE00 | ⋚︀
`lesges;` | U+02A93 | ⪓
`lessapprox;` | U+02A85 | ⪅
`lessdot;` | U+022D6 | ⋖
`lesseqgtr;` | U+022DA | ⋚
`lesseqqgtr;` | U+02A8B | ⪋
`LessEqualGreater;` | U+022DA | ⋚
`LessFullEqual;` | U+02266 | ≦
`LessGreater;` | U+02276 | ≶
`lessgtr;` | U+02276 | ≶
`LessLess;` | U+02AA1 | ⪡
`lesssim;` | U+02272 | ≲
`LessSlantEqual;` | U+02A7D | ⩽
`LessTilde;` | U+02272 | ≲
`lfisht;` | U+0297C | ⥼
`lfloor;` | U+0230A | ⌊
`Lfr;` | U+1D50F | 𝔏
`lfr;` | U+1D529 | 𝔩
`lg;` | U+02276 | ≶
`lgE;` | U+02A91 | ⪑
`lHar;` | U+02962 | ⥢
`lhard;` | U+021BD | ↽
`lharu;` | U+021BC | ↼
`lharul;` | U+0296A | ⥪
`lhblk;` | U+02584 | ▄
`LJcy;` | U+00409 | Љ
`ljcy;` | U+00459 | љ
`Ll;` | U+022D8 | ⋘
`ll;` | U+0226A | ≪
`llarr;` | U+021C7 | ⇇
`llcorner;` | U+0231E | ⌞
`Lleftarrow;` | U+021DA | ⇚
`llhard;` | U+0296B | ⥫
`lltri;` | U+025FA | ◺
`Lmidot;` | U+0013F | Ŀ
`lmidot;` | U+00140 | ŀ
`lmoust;` | U+023B0 | ⎰
`lmoustache;` | U+023B0 | ⎰
`lnap;` | U+02A89 | ⪉
`lnapprox;` | U+02A89 | ⪉
`lnE;` | U+02268 | ≨
`lne;` | U+02A87 | ⪇
`lneq;` | U+02A87 | ⪇
`lneqq;` | U+02268 | ≨
`lnsim;` | U+022E6 | ⋦
`loang;` | U+027EC | ⟬
`loarr;` | U+021FD | ⇽
`lobrk;` | U+027E6 | ⟦
`LongLeftArrow;` | U+027F5 | ⟵
`Longleftarrow;` | U+027F8 | ⟸
`longleftarrow;` | U+027F5 | ⟵
`LongLeftRightArrow;` | U+027F7 | ⟷
`Longleftrightarrow;` | U+027FA | ⟺
`longleftrightarrow;` | U+027F7 | ⟷
`longmapsto;` | U+027FC | ⟼
`LongRightArrow;` | U+027F6 | ⟶
`Longrightarrow;` | U+027F9 | ⟹
`longrightarrow;` | U+027F6 | ⟶
`looparrowleft;` | U+021AB | ↫
`looparrowright;` | U+021AC | ↬
`lopar;` | U+02985 | ⦅
`Lopf;` | U+1D543 | 𝕃
`lopf;` | U+1D55D | 𝕝
`loplus;` | U+02A2D | ⨭
`lotimes;` | U+02A34 | ⨴
`lowast;` | U+02217 | ∗
`lowbar;` | U+0005F | _
`LowerLeftArrow;` | U+02199 | ↙
`LowerRightArrow;` | U+02198 | ↘
`loz;` | U+025CA | ◊
`lozenge;` | U+025CA | ◊
`lozf;` | U+029EB | ⧫
`lpar;` | U+00028 | (
`lparlt;` | U+02993 | ⦓
`lrarr;` | U+021C6 | ⇆
`lrcorner;` | U+0231F | ⌟
`lrhar;` | U+021CB | ⇋
`lrhard;` | U+0296D | ⥭
`lrm;` | U+0200E | ‎
`lrtri;` | U+022BF | ⊿
`lsaquo;` | U+02039 | ‹
`Lscr;` | U+02112 | ℒ
`lscr;` | U+1D4C1 | 𝓁
`Lsh;` | U+021B0 | ↰
`lsh;` | U+021B0 | ↰
`lsim;` | U+02272 | ≲
`lsime;` | U+02A8D | ⪍
`lsimg;` | U+02A8F | ⪏
`lsqb;` | U+0005B | [
`lsquo;` | U+02018 | ‘
`lsquor;` | U+0201A | ‚
`Lstrok;` | U+00141 | Ł
`lstrok;` | U+00142 | ł
`LT;` | U+0003C | <
`LT` | U+0003C | <
`Lt;` | U+0226A | ≪
`lt;` | U+0003C | <
`lt` | U+0003C | <
`ltcc;` | U+02AA6 | ⪦
`ltcir;` | U+02A79 | ⩹
`ltdot;` | U+022D6 | ⋖
`lthree;` | U+022CB | ⋋
`ltimes;` | U+022C9 | ⋉
`ltlarr;` | U+02976 | ⥶
`ltquest;` | U+02A7B | ⩻
`ltri;` | U+025C3 | ◃
`ltrie;` | U+022B4 | ⊴
`ltrif;` | U+025C2 | ◂
`ltrPar;` | U+02996 | ⦖
`lurdshar;` | U+0294A | ⥊
`luruhar;` | U+02966 | ⥦
`lvertneqq;` | U+02268 U+0FE00 | ≨︀
`lvnE;` | U+02268 U+0FE00 | ≨︀
`macr;` | U+000AF | ¯
`macr` | U+000AF | ¯
`male;` | U+02642 | ♂
`malt;` | U+02720 | ✠
`maltese;` | U+02720 | ✠
`Map;` | U+02905 | ⤅
`map;` | U+021A6 | ↦
`mapsto;` | U+021A6 | ↦
`mapstodown;` | U+021A7 | ↧
`mapstoleft;` | U+021A4 | ↤
`mapstoup;` | U+021A5 | ↥
`marker;` | U+025AE | ▮
`mcomma;` | U+02A29 | ⨩
`Mcy;` | U+0041C | М
`mcy;` | U+0043C | м
`mdash;` | U+02014 | —
`mDDot;` | U+0223A | ∺
`measuredangle;` | U+02221 | ∡
`MediumSpace;` | U+0205F |
`Mellintrf;` | U+02133 | ℳ
`Mfr;` | U+1D510 | 𝔐
`mfr;` | U+1D52A | 𝔪
`mho;` | U+02127 | ℧
`micro;` | U+000B5 | µ
`micro` | U+000B5 | µ
`mid;` | U+02223 | ∣
`midast;` | U+0002A | *
`midcir;` | U+02AF0 | ⫰
`middot;` | U+000B7 | ·
`middot` | U+000B7 | ·
`minus;` | U+02212 | −
`minusb;` | U+0229F | ⊟
`minusd;` | U+02238 | ∸
`minusdu;` | U+02A2A | ⨪
`MinusPlus;` | U+02213 | ∓
`mlcp;` | U+02ADB | ⫛
`mldr;` | U+02026 | …
`mnplus;` | U+02213 | ∓
`models;` | U+022A7 | ⊧
`Mopf;` | U+1D544 | 𝕄
`mopf;` | U+1D55E | 𝕞
`mp;` | U+02213 | ∓
`Mscr;` | U+02133 | ℳ
`mscr;` | U+1D4C2 | 𝓂
`mstpos;` | U+0223E | ∾
`Mu;` | U+0039C | Μ
`mu;` | U+003BC | μ
`multimap;` | U+022B8 | ⊸
`mumap;` | U+022B8 | ⊸
`nabla;` | U+02207 | ∇
`Nacute;` | U+00143 | Ń
`nacute;` | U+00144 | ń
`nang;` | U+02220 U+020D2 | ∠⃒
`nap;` | U+02249 | ≉
`napE;` | U+02A70 U+00338 | ⩰̸
`napid;` | U+0224B U+00338 | ≋̸
`napos;` | U+00149 | ŉ
`napprox;` | U+02249 | ≉
`natur;` | U+0266E | ♮
`natural;` | U+0266E | ♮
`naturals;` | U+02115 | ℕ
`nbsp;` | U+000A0 |
`nbsp` | U+000A0 |
`nbump;` | U+0224E U+00338 | ≎̸
`nbumpe;` | U+0224F U+00338 | ≏̸
`ncap;` | U+02A43 | ⩃
`Ncaron;` | U+00147 | Ň
`ncaron;` | U+00148 | ň
`Ncedil;` | U+00145 | Ņ
`ncedil;` | U+00146 | ņ
`ncong;` | U+02247 | ≇
`ncongdot;` | U+02A6D U+00338 | ⩭̸
`ncup;` | U+02A42 | ⩂
`Ncy;` | U+0041D | Н
`ncy;` | U+0043D | н
`ndash;` | U+02013 | –
`ne;` | U+02260 | ≠
`nearhk;` | U+02924 | ⤤
`neArr;` | U+021D7 | ⇗
`nearr;` | U+02197 | ↗
`nearrow;` | U+02197 | ↗
`nedot;` | U+02250 U+00338 | ≐̸
`NegativeMediumSpace;` | U+0200B | ​
`NegativeThickSpace;` | U+0200B | ​
`NegativeThinSpace;` | U+0200B | ​
`NegativeVeryThinSpace;` | U+0200B | ​
`nequiv;` | U+02262 | ≢
`nesear;` | U+02928 | ⤨
`nesim;` | U+02242 U+00338 | ≂̸
`NestedGreaterGreater;` | U+0226B | ≫
`NestedLessLess;` | U+0226A | ≪
`NewLine;` | U+0000A | ␊
`nexist;` | U+02204 | ∄
`nexists;` | U+02204 | ∄
`Nfr;` | U+1D511 | 𝔑
`nfr;` | U+1D52B | 𝔫
`ngE;` | U+02267 U+00338 | ≧̸
`nge;` | U+02271 | ≱
`ngeq;` | U+02271 | ≱
`ngeqq;` | U+02267 U+00338 | ≧̸
`ngeqslant;` | U+02A7E U+00338 | ⩾̸
`nges;` | U+02A7E U+00338 | ⩾̸
`nGg;` | U+022D9 U+00338 | ⋙̸
`ngsim;` | U+02275 | ≵
`nGt;` | U+0226B U+020D2 | ≫⃒
`ngt;` | U+0226F | ≯
`ngtr;` | U+0226F | ≯
`nGtv;` | U+0226B U+00338 | ≫̸
`nhArr;` | U+021CE | ⇎
`nharr;` | U+021AE | ↮
`nhpar;` | U+02AF2 | ⫲
`ni;` | U+0220B | ∋
`nis;` | U+022FC | ⋼
`nisd;` | U+022FA | ⋺
`niv;` | U+0220B | ∋
`NJcy;` | U+0040A | Њ
`njcy;` | U+0045A | њ
`nlArr;` | U+021CD | ⇍
`nlarr;` | U+0219A | ↚
`nldr;` | U+02025 | ‥
`nlE;` | U+02266 U+00338 | ≦̸
`nle;` | U+02270 | ≰
`nLeftarrow;` | U+021CD | ⇍
`nleftarrow;` | U+0219A | ↚
`nLeftrightarrow;` | U+021CE | ⇎
`nleftrightarrow;` | U+021AE | ↮
`nleq;` | U+02270 | ≰
`nleqq;` | U+02266 U+00338 | ≦̸
`nleqslant;` | U+02A7D U+00338 | ⩽̸
`nles;` | U+02A7D U+00338 | ⩽̸
`nless;` | U+0226E | ≮
`nLl;` | U+022D8 U+00338 | ⋘̸
`nlsim;` | U+02274 | ≴
`nLt;` | U+0226A U+020D2 | ≪⃒
`nlt;` | U+0226E | ≮
`nltri;` | U+022EA | ⋪
`nltrie;` | U+022EC | ⋬
`nLtv;` | U+0226A U+00338 | ≪̸
`nmid;` | U+02224 | ∤
`NoBreak;` | U+02060 | ⁠
`NonBreakingSpace;` | U+000A0 |
`Nopf;` | U+02115 | ℕ
`nopf;` | U+1D55F | 𝕟
`Not;` | U+02AEC | ⫬
`not;` | U+000AC | ¬
`not` | U+000AC | ¬
`NotCongruent;` | U+02262 | ≢
`NotCupCap;` | U+0226D | ≭
`NotDoubleVerticalBar;` | U+02226 | ∦
`NotElement;` | U+02209 | ∉
`NotEqual;` | U+02260 | ≠
`NotEqualTilde;` | U+02242 U+00338 | ≂̸
`NotExists;` | U+02204 | ∄
`NotGreater;` | U+0226F | ≯
`NotGreaterEqual;` | U+02271 | ≱
`NotGreaterFullEqual;` | U+02267 U+00338 | ≧̸
`NotGreaterGreater;` | U+0226B U+00338 | ≫̸
`NotGreaterLess;` | U+02279 | ≹
`NotGreaterSlantEqual;` | U+02A7E U+00338 | ⩾̸
`NotGreaterTilde;` | U+02275 | ≵
`NotHumpDownHump;` | U+0224E U+00338 | ≎̸
`NotHumpEqual;` | U+0224F U+00338 | ≏̸
`notin;` | U+02209 | ∉
`notindot;` | U+022F5 U+00338 | ⋵̸
`notinE;` | U+022F9 U+00338 | ⋹̸
`notinva;` | U+02209 | ∉
`notinvb;` | U+022F7 | ⋷
`notinvc;` | U+022F6 | ⋶
`NotLeftTriangle;` | U+022EA | ⋪
`NotLeftTriangleBar;` | U+029CF U+00338 | ⧏̸
`NotLeftTriangleEqual;` | U+022EC | ⋬
`NotLess;` | U+0226E | ≮
`NotLessEqual;` | U+02270 | ≰
`NotLessGreater;` | U+02278 | ≸
`NotLessLess;` | U+0226A U+00338 | ≪̸
`NotLessSlantEqual;` | U+02A7D U+00338 | ⩽̸
`NotLessTilde;` | U+02274 | ≴
`NotNestedGreaterGreater;` | U+02AA2 U+00338 | ⪢̸
`NotNestedLessLess;` | U+02AA1 U+00338 | ⪡̸
`notni;` | U+0220C | ∌
`notniva;` | U+0220C | ∌
`notnivb;` | U+022FE | ⋾
`notnivc;` | U+022FD | ⋽
`NotPrecedes;` | U+02280 | ⊀
`NotPrecedesEqual;` | U+02AAF U+00338 | ⪯̸
`NotPrecedesSlantEqual;` | U+022E0 | ⋠
`NotReverseElement;` | U+0220C | ∌
`NotRightTriangle;` | U+022EB | ⋫
`NotRightTriangleBar;` | U+029D0 U+00338 | ⧐̸
`NotRightTriangleEqual;` | U+022ED | ⋭
`NotSquareSubset;` | U+0228F U+00338 | ⊏̸
`NotSquareSubsetEqual;` | U+022E2 | ⋢
`NotSquareSuperset;` | U+02290 U+00338 | ⊐̸
`NotSquareSupersetEqual;` | U+022E3 | ⋣
`NotSubset;` | U+02282 U+020D2 | ⊂⃒
`NotSubsetEqual;` | U+02288 | ⊈
`NotSucceeds;` | U+02281 | ⊁
`NotSucceedsEqual;` | U+02AB0 U+00338 | ⪰̸
`NotSucceedsSlantEqual;` | U+022E1 | ⋡
`NotSucceedsTilde;` | U+0227F U+00338 | ≿̸
`NotSuperset;` | U+02283 U+020D2 | ⊃⃒
`NotSupersetEqual;` | U+02289 | ⊉
`NotTilde;` | U+02241 | ≁
`NotTildeEqual;` | U+02244 | ≄
`NotTildeFullEqual;` | U+02247 | ≇
`NotTildeTilde;` | U+02249 | ≉
`NotVerticalBar;` | U+02224 | ∤
`npar;` | U+02226 | ∦
`nparallel;` | U+02226 | ∦
`nparsl;` | U+02AFD U+020E5 | ⫽⃥
`npart;` | U+02202 U+00338 | ∂̸
`npolint;` | U+02A14 | ⨔
`npr;` | U+02280 | ⊀
`nprcue;` | U+022E0 | ⋠
`npre;` | U+02AAF U+00338 | ⪯̸
`nprec;` | U+02280 | ⊀
`npreceq;` | U+02AAF U+00338 | ⪯̸
`nrArr;` | U+021CF | ⇏
`nrarr;` | U+0219B | ↛
`nrarrc;` | U+02933 U+00338 | ⤳̸
`nrarrw;` | U+0219D U+00338 | ↝̸
`nRightarrow;` | U+021CF | ⇏
`nrightarrow;` | U+0219B | ↛
`nrtri;` | U+022EB | ⋫
`nrtrie;` | U+022ED | ⋭
`nsc;` | U+02281 | ⊁
`nsccue;` | U+022E1 | ⋡
`nsce;` | U+02AB0 U+00338 | ⪰̸
`Nscr;` | U+1D4A9 | 𝒩
`nscr;` | U+1D4C3 | 𝓃
`nshortmid;` | U+02224 | ∤
`nshortparallel;` | U+02226 | ∦
`nsim;` | U+02241 | ≁
`nsime;` | U+02244 | ≄
`nsimeq;` | U+02244 | ≄
`nsmid;` | U+02224 | ∤
`nspar;` | U+02226 | ∦
`nsqsube;` | U+022E2 | ⋢
`nsqsupe;` | U+022E3 | ⋣
`nsub;` | U+02284 | ⊄
`nsubE;` | U+02AC5 U+00338 | ⫅̸
`nsube;` | U+02288 | ⊈
`nsubset;` | U+02282 U+020D2 | ⊂⃒
`nsubseteq;` | U+02288 | ⊈
`nsubseteqq;` | U+02AC5 U+00338 | ⫅̸
`nsucc;` | U+02281 | ⊁
`nsucceq;` | U+02AB0 U+00338 | ⪰̸
`nsup;` | U+02285 | ⊅
`nsupE;` | U+02AC6 U+00338 | ⫆̸
`nsupe;` | U+02289 | ⊉
`nsupset;` | U+02283 U+020D2 | ⊃⃒
`nsupseteq;` | U+02289 | ⊉
`nsupseteqq;` | U+02AC6 U+00338 | ⫆̸
`ntgl;` | U+02279 | ≹
`Ntilde;` | U+000D1 | Ñ
`Ntilde` | U+000D1 | Ñ
`ntilde;` | U+000F1 | ñ
`ntilde` | U+000F1 | ñ
`ntlg;` | U+02278 | ≸
`ntriangleleft;` | U+022EA | ⋪
`ntrianglelefteq;` | U+022EC | ⋬
`ntriangleright;` | U+022EB | ⋫
`ntrianglerighteq;` | U+022ED | ⋭
`Nu;` | U+0039D | Ν
`nu;` | U+003BD | ν
`num;` | U+00023 | #
`numero;` | U+02116 | №
`numsp;` | U+02007 |
`nvap;` | U+0224D U+020D2 | ≍⃒
`nVDash;` | U+022AF | ⊯
`nVdash;` | U+022AE | ⊮
`nvDash;` | U+022AD | ⊭
`nvdash;` | U+022AC | ⊬
`nvge;` | U+02265 U+020D2 | ≥⃒
`nvgt;` | U+0003E U+020D2 | >⃒
`nvHarr;` | U+02904 | ⤄
`nvinfin;` | U+029DE | ⧞
`nvlArr;` | U+02902 | ⤂
`nvle;` | U+02264 U+020D2 | ≤⃒
`nvlt;` | U+0003C U+020D2 | <⃒
`nvltrie;` | U+022B4 U+020D2 | ⊴⃒
`nvrArr;` | U+02903 | ⤃
`nvrtrie;` | U+022B5 U+020D2 | ⊵⃒
`nvsim;` | U+0223C U+020D2 | ∼⃒
`nwarhk;` | U+02923 | ⤣
`nwArr;` | U+021D6 | ⇖
`nwarr;` | U+02196 | ↖
`nwarrow;` | U+02196 | ↖
`nwnear;` | U+02927 | ⤧
`Oacute;` | U+000D3 | Ó
`Oacute` | U+000D3 | Ó
`oacute;` | U+000F3 | ó
`oacute` | U+000F3 | ó
`oast;` | U+0229B | ⊛
`ocir;` | U+0229A | ⊚
`Ocirc;` | U+000D4 | Ô
`Ocirc` | U+000D4 | Ô
`ocirc;` | U+000F4 | ô
`ocirc` | U+000F4 | ô
`Ocy;` | U+0041E | О
`ocy;` | U+0043E | о
`odash;` | U+0229D | ⊝
`Odblac;` | U+00150 | Ő
`odblac;` | U+00151 | ő
`odiv;` | U+02A38 | ⨸
`odot;` | U+02299 | ⊙
`odsold;` | U+029BC | ⦼
`OElig;` | U+00152 | Œ
`oelig;` | U+00153 | œ
`ofcir;` | U+029BF | ⦿
`Ofr;` | U+1D512 | 𝔒
`ofr;` | U+1D52C | 𝔬
`ogon;` | U+002DB | ˛
`Ograve;` | U+000D2 | Ò
`Ograve` | U+000D2 | Ò
`ograve;` | U+000F2 | ò
`ograve` | U+000F2 | ò
`ogt;` | U+029C1 | ⧁
`ohbar;` | U+029B5 | ⦵
`ohm;` | U+003A9 | Ω
`oint;` | U+0222E | ∮
`olarr;` | U+021BA | ↺
`olcir;` | U+029BE | ⦾
`olcross;` | U+029BB | ⦻
`oline;` | U+0203E | ‾
`olt;` | U+029C0 | ⧀
`Omacr;` | U+0014C | Ō
`omacr;` | U+0014D | ō
`Omega;` | U+003A9 | Ω
`omega;` | U+003C9 | ω
`Omicron;` | U+0039F | Ο
`omicron;` | U+003BF | ο
`omid;` | U+029B6 | ⦶
`ominus;` | U+02296 | ⊖
`Oopf;` | U+1D546 | 𝕆
`oopf;` | U+1D560 | 𝕠
`opar;` | U+029B7 | ⦷
`OpenCurlyDoubleQuote;` | U+0201C | “
`OpenCurlyQuote;` | U+02018 | ‘
`operp;` | U+029B9 | ⦹
`oplus;` | U+02295 | ⊕
`Or;` | U+02A54 | ⩔
`or;` | U+02228 | ∨
`orarr;` | U+021BB | ↻
`ord;` | U+02A5D | ⩝
`order;` | U+02134 | ℴ
`orderof;` | U+02134 | ℴ
`ordf;` | U+000AA | ª
`ordf` | U+000AA | ª
`ordm;` | U+000BA | º
`ordm` | U+000BA | º
`origof;` | U+022B6 | ⊶
`oror;` | U+02A56 | ⩖
`orslope;` | U+02A57 | ⩗
`orv;` | U+02A5B | ⩛
`oS;` | U+024C8 | Ⓢ
`Oscr;` | U+1D4AA | 𝒪
`oscr;` | U+02134 | ℴ
`Oslash;` | U+000D8 | Ø
`Oslash` | U+000D8 | Ø
`oslash;` | U+000F8 | ø
`oslash` | U+000F8 | ø
`osol;` | U+02298 | ⊘
`Otilde;` | U+000D5 | Õ
`Otilde` | U+000D5 | Õ
`otilde;` | U+000F5 | õ
`otilde` | U+000F5 | õ
`Otimes;` | U+02A37 | ⨷
`otimes;` | U+02297 | ⊗
`otimesas;` | U+02A36 | ⨶
`Ouml;` | U+000D6 | Ö
`Ouml` | U+000D6 | Ö
`ouml;` | U+000F6 | ö
`ouml` | U+000F6 | ö
`ovbar;` | U+0233D | ⌽
`OverBar;` | U+0203E | ‾
`OverBrace;` | U+023DE | ⏞
`OverBracket;` | U+023B4 | ⎴
`OverParenthesis;` | U+023DC | ⏜
`par;` | U+02225 | ∥
`para;` | U+000B6 | ¶
`para` | U+000B6 | ¶
`parallel;` | U+02225 | ∥
`parsim;` | U+02AF3 | ⫳
`parsl;` | U+02AFD | ⫽
`part;` | U+02202 | ∂
`PartialD;` | U+02202 | ∂
`Pcy;` | U+0041F | П
`pcy;` | U+0043F | п
`percnt;` | U+00025 | %
`period;` | U+0002E | .
`permil;` | U+02030 | ‰
`perp;` | U+022A5 | ⊥
`pertenk;` | U+02031 | ‱
`Pfr;` | U+1D513 | 𝔓
`pfr;` | U+1D52D | 𝔭
`Phi;` | U+003A6 | Φ
`phi;` | U+003C6 | φ
`phiv;` | U+003D5 | ϕ
`phmmat;` | U+02133 | ℳ
`phone;` | U+0260E | ☎
`Pi;` | U+003A0 | Π
`pi;` | U+003C0 | π
`pitchfork;` | U+022D4 | ⋔
`piv;` | U+003D6 | ϖ
`planck;` | U+0210F | ℏ
`planckh;` | U+0210E | ℎ
`plankv;` | U+0210F | ℏ
`plus;` | U+0002B | +
`plusacir;` | U+02A23 | ⨣
`plusb;` | U+0229E | ⊞
`pluscir;` | U+02A22 | ⨢
`plusdo;` | U+02214 | ∔
`plusdu;` | U+02A25 | ⨥
`pluse;` | U+02A72 | ⩲
`PlusMinus;` | U+000B1 | ±
`plusmn;` | U+000B1 | ±
`plusmn` | U+000B1 | ±
`plussim;` | U+02A26 | ⨦
`plustwo;` | U+02A27 | ⨧
`pm;` | U+000B1 | ±
`Poincareplane;` | U+0210C | ℌ
`pointint;` | U+02A15 | ⨕
`Popf;` | U+02119 | ℙ
`popf;` | U+1D561 | 𝕡
`pound;` | U+000A3 | £
`pound` | U+000A3 | £
`Pr;` | U+02ABB | ⪻
`pr;` | U+0227A | ≺
`prap;` | U+02AB7 | ⪷
`prcue;` | U+0227C | ≼
`prE;` | U+02AB3 | ⪳
`pre;` | U+02AAF | ⪯
`prec;` | U+0227A | ≺
`precapprox;` | U+02AB7 | ⪷
`preccurlyeq;` | U+0227C | ≼
`Precedes;` | U+0227A | ≺
`PrecedesEqual;` | U+02AAF | ⪯
`PrecedesSlantEqual;` | U+0227C | ≼
`PrecedesTilde;` | U+0227E | ≾
`preceq;` | U+02AAF | ⪯
`precnapprox;` | U+02AB9 | ⪹
`precneqq;` | U+02AB5 | ⪵
`precnsim;` | U+022E8 | ⋨
`precsim;` | U+0227E | ≾
`Prime;` | U+02033 | ″
`prime;` | U+02032 | ′
`primes;` | U+02119 | ℙ
`prnap;` | U+02AB9 | ⪹
`prnE;` | U+02AB5 | ⪵
`prnsim;` | U+022E8 | ⋨
`prod;` | U+0220F | ∏
`Product;` | U+0220F | ∏
`profalar;` | U+0232E | ⌮
`profline;` | U+02312 | ⌒
`profsurf;` | U+02313 | ⌓
`prop;` | U+0221D | ∝
`Proportion;` | U+02237 | ∷
`Proportional;` | U+0221D | ∝
`propto;` | U+0221D | ∝
`prsim;` | U+0227E | ≾
`prurel;` | U+022B0 | ⊰
`Pscr;` | U+1D4AB | 𝒫
`pscr;` | U+1D4C5 | 𝓅
`Psi;` | U+003A8 | Ψ
`psi;` | U+003C8 | ψ
`puncsp;` | U+02008 |
`Qfr;` | U+1D514 | 𝔔
`qfr;` | U+1D52E | 𝔮
`qint;` | U+02A0C | ⨌
`Qopf;` | U+0211A | ℚ
`qopf;` | U+1D562 | 𝕢
`qprime;` | U+02057 | ⁗
`Qscr;` | U+1D4AC | 𝒬
`qscr;` | U+1D4C6 | 𝓆
`quaternions;` | U+0210D | ℍ
`quatint;` | U+02A16 | ⨖
`quest;` | U+0003F | ?
`questeq;` | U+0225F | ≟
`QUOT;` | U+00022 | "
`QUOT` | U+00022 | "
`quot;` | U+00022 | "
`quot` | U+00022 | "
`rAarr;` | U+021DB | ⇛
`race;` | U+0223D U+00331 | ∽̱
`Racute;` | U+00154 | Ŕ
`racute;` | U+00155 | ŕ
`radic;` | U+0221A | √
`raemptyv;` | U+029B3 | ⦳
`Rang;` | U+027EB | ⟫
`rang;` | U+027E9 | ⟩
`rangd;` | U+02992 | ⦒
`range;` | U+029A5 | ⦥
`rangle;` | U+027E9 | ⟩
`raquo;` | U+000BB | »
`raquo` | U+000BB | »
`Rarr;` | U+021A0 | ↠
`rArr;` | U+021D2 | ⇒
`rarr;` | U+02192 | →
`rarrap;` | U+02975 | ⥵
`rarrb;` | U+021E5 | ⇥
`rarrbfs;` | U+02920 | ⤠
`rarrc;` | U+02933 | ⤳
`rarrfs;` | U+0291E | ⤞
`rarrhk;` | U+021AA | ↪
`rarrlp;` | U+021AC | ↬
`rarrpl;` | U+02945 | ⥅
`rarrsim;` | U+02974 | ⥴
`Rarrtl;` | U+02916 | ⤖
`rarrtl;` | U+021A3 | ↣
`rarrw;` | U+0219D | ↝
`rAtail;` | U+0291C | ⤜
`ratail;` | U+0291A | ⤚
`ratio;` | U+02236 | ∶
`rationals;` | U+0211A | ℚ
`RBarr;` | U+02910 | ⤐
`rBarr;` | U+0290F | ⤏
`rbarr;` | U+0290D | ⤍
`rbbrk;` | U+02773 | ❳
`rbrace;` | U+0007D | }
`rbrack;` | U+0005D | ]
`rbrke;` | U+0298C | ⦌
`rbrksld;` | U+0298E | ⦎
`rbrkslu;` | U+02990 | ⦐
`Rcaron;` | U+00158 | Ř
`rcaron;` | U+00159 | ř
`Rcedil;` | U+00156 | Ŗ
`rcedil;` | U+00157 | ŗ
`rceil;` | U+02309 | ⌉
`rcub;` | U+0007D | }
`Rcy;` | U+00420 | Р
`rcy;` | U+00440 | р
`rdca;` | U+02937 | ⤷
`rdldhar;` | U+02969 | ⥩
`rdquo;` | U+0201D | ”
`rdquor;` | U+0201D | ”
`rdsh;` | U+021B3 | ↳
`Re;` | U+0211C | ℜ
`real;` | U+0211C | ℜ
`realine;` | U+0211B | ℛ
`realpart;` | U+0211C | ℜ
`reals;` | U+0211D | ℝ
`rect;` | U+025AD | ▭
`REG;` | U+000AE | ®
`REG` | U+000AE | ®
`reg;` | U+000AE | ®
`reg` | U+000AE | ®
`ReverseElement;` | U+0220B | ∋
`ReverseEquilibrium;` | U+021CB | ⇋
`ReverseUpEquilibrium;` | U+0296F | ⥯
`rfisht;` | U+0297D | ⥽
`rfloor;` | U+0230B | ⌋
`Rfr;` | U+0211C | ℜ
`rfr;` | U+1D52F | 𝔯
`rHar;` | U+02964 | ⥤
`rhard;` | U+021C1 | ⇁
`rharu;` | U+021C0 | ⇀
`rharul;` | U+0296C | ⥬
`Rho;` | U+003A1 | Ρ
`rho;` | U+003C1 | ρ
`rhov;` | U+003F1 | ϱ
`RightAngleBracket;` | U+027E9 | ⟩
`RightArrow;` | U+02192 | →
`Rightarrow;` | U+021D2 | ⇒
`rightarrow;` | U+02192 | →
`RightArrowBar;` | U+021E5 | ⇥
`RightArrowLeftArrow;` | U+021C4 | ⇄
`rightarrowtail;` | U+021A3 | ↣
`RightCeiling;` | U+02309 | ⌉
`RightDoubleBracket;` | U+027E7 | ⟧
`RightDownTeeVector;` | U+0295D | ⥝
`RightDownVector;` | U+021C2 | ⇂
`RightDownVectorBar;` | U+02955 | ⥕
`RightFloor;` | U+0230B | ⌋
`rightharpoondown;` | U+021C1 | ⇁
`rightharpoonup;` | U+021C0 | ⇀
`rightleftarrows;` | U+021C4 | ⇄
`rightleftharpoons;` | U+021CC | ⇌
`rightrightarrows;` | U+021C9 | ⇉
`rightsquigarrow;` | U+0219D | ↝
`RightTee;` | U+022A2 | ⊢
`RightTeeArrow;` | U+021A6 | ↦
`RightTeeVector;` | U+0295B | ⥛
`rightthreetimes;` | U+022CC | ⋌
`RightTriangle;` | U+022B3 | ⊳
`RightTriangleBar;` | U+029D0 | ⧐
`RightTriangleEqual;` | U+022B5 | ⊵
`RightUpDownVector;` | U+0294F | ⥏
`RightUpTeeVector;` | U+0295C | ⥜
`RightUpVector;` | U+021BE | ↾
`RightUpVectorBar;` | U+02954 | ⥔
`RightVector;` | U+021C0 | ⇀
`RightVectorBar;` | U+02953 | ⥓
`ring;` | U+002DA | ˚
`risingdotseq;` | U+02253 | ≓
`rlarr;` | U+021C4 | ⇄
`rlhar;` | U+021CC | ⇌
`rlm;` | U+0200F | ‏
`rmoust;` | U+023B1 | ⎱
`rmoustache;` | U+023B1 | ⎱
`rnmid;` | U+02AEE | ⫮
`roang;` | U+027ED | ⟭
`roarr;` | U+021FE | ⇾
`robrk;` | U+027E7 | ⟧
`ropar;` | U+02986 | ⦆
`Ropf;` | U+0211D | ℝ
`ropf;` | U+1D563 | 𝕣
`roplus;` | U+02A2E | ⨮
`rotimes;` | U+02A35 | ⨵
`RoundImplies;` | U+02970 | ⥰
`rpar;` | U+00029 | )
`rpargt;` | U+02994 | ⦔
`rppolint;` | U+02A12 | ⨒
`rrarr;` | U+021C9 | ⇉
`Rrightarrow;` | U+021DB | ⇛
`rsaquo;` | U+0203A | ›
`Rscr;` | U+0211B | ℛ
`rscr;` | U+1D4C7 | 𝓇
`Rsh;` | U+021B1 | ↱
`rsh;` | U+021B1 | ↱
`rsqb;` | U+0005D | ]
`rsquo;` | U+02019 | ’
`rsquor;` | U+02019 | ’
`rthree;` | U+022CC | ⋌
`rtimes;` | U+022CA | ⋊
`rtri;` | U+025B9 | ▹
`rtrie;` | U+022B5 | ⊵
`rtrif;` | U+025B8 | ▸
`rtriltri;` | U+029CE | ⧎
`RuleDelayed;` | U+029F4 | ⧴
`ruluhar;` | U+02968 | ⥨
`rx;` | U+0211E | ℞
`Sacute;` | U+0015A | Ś
`sacute;` | U+0015B | ś
`sbquo;` | U+0201A | ‚
`Sc;` | U+02ABC | ⪼
`sc;` | U+0227B | ≻
`scap;` | U+02AB8 | ⪸
`Scaron;` | U+00160 | Š
`scaron;` | U+00161 | š
`sccue;` | U+0227D | ≽
`scE;` | U+02AB4 | ⪴
`sce;` | U+02AB0 | ⪰
`Scedil;` | U+0015E | Ş
`scedil;` | U+0015F | ş
`Scirc;` | U+0015C | Ŝ
`scirc;` | U+0015D | ŝ
`scnap;` | U+02ABA | ⪺
`scnE;` | U+02AB6 | ⪶
`scnsim;` | U+022E9 | ⋩
`scpolint;` | U+02A13 | ⨓
`scsim;` | U+0227F | ≿
`Scy;` | U+00421 | С
`scy;` | U+00441 | с
`sdot;` | U+022C5 | ⋅
`sdotb;` | U+022A1 | ⊡
`sdote;` | U+02A66 | ⩦
`searhk;` | U+02925 | ⤥
`seArr;` | U+021D8 | ⇘
`searr;` | U+02198 | ↘
`searrow;` | U+02198 | ↘
`sect;` | U+000A7 | §
`sect` | U+000A7 | §
`semi;` | U+0003B | ;
`seswar;` | U+02929 | ⤩
`setminus;` | U+02216 | ∖
`setmn;` | U+02216 | ∖
`sext;` | U+02736 | ✶
`Sfr;` | U+1D516 | 𝔖
`sfr;` | U+1D530 | 𝔰
`sfrown;` | U+02322 | ⌢
`sharp;` | U+0266F | ♯
`SHCHcy;` | U+00429 | Щ
`shchcy;` | U+00449 | щ
`SHcy;` | U+00428 | Ш
`shcy;` | U+00448 | ш
`ShortDownArrow;` | U+02193 | ↓
`ShortLeftArrow;` | U+02190 | ←
`shortmid;` | U+02223 | ∣
`shortparallel;` | U+02225 | ∥
`ShortRightArrow;` | U+02192 | →
`ShortUpArrow;` | U+02191 | ↑
`shy;` | U+000AD |
`shy` | U+000AD |
`Sigma;` | U+003A3 | Σ
`sigma;` | U+003C3 | σ
`sigmaf;` | U+003C2 | ς
`sigmav;` | U+003C2 | ς
`sim;` | U+0223C | ∼
`simdot;` | U+02A6A | ⩪
`sime;` | U+02243 | ≃
`simeq;` | U+02243 | ≃
`simg;` | U+02A9E | ⪞
`simgE;` | U+02AA0 | ⪠
`siml;` | U+02A9D | ⪝
`simlE;` | U+02A9F | ⪟
`simne;` | U+02246 | ≆
`simplus;` | U+02A24 | ⨤
`simrarr;` | U+02972 | ⥲
`slarr;` | U+02190 | ←
`SmallCircle;` | U+02218 | ∘
`smallsetminus;` | U+02216 | ∖
`smashp;` | U+02A33 | ⨳
`smeparsl;` | U+029E4 | ⧤
`smid;` | U+02223 | ∣
`smile;` | U+02323 | ⌣
`smt;` | U+02AAA | ⪪
`smte;` | U+02AAC | ⪬
`smtes;` | U+02AAC U+0FE00 | ⪬︀
`SOFTcy;` | U+0042C | Ь
`softcy;` | U+0044C | ь
`sol;` | U+0002F | /
`solb;` | U+029C4 | ⧄
`solbar;` | U+0233F | ⌿
`Sopf;` | U+1D54A | 𝕊
`sopf;` | U+1D564 | 𝕤
`spades;` | U+02660 | ♠
`spadesuit;` | U+02660 | ♠
`spar;` | U+02225 | ∥
`sqcap;` | U+02293 | ⊓
`sqcaps;` | U+02293 U+0FE00 | ⊓︀
`sqcup;` | U+02294 | ⊔
`sqcups;` | U+02294 U+0FE00 | ⊔︀
`Sqrt;` | U+0221A | √
`sqsub;` | U+0228F | ⊏
`sqsube;` | U+02291 | ⊑
`sqsubset;` | U+0228F | ⊏
`sqsubseteq;` | U+02291 | ⊑
`sqsup;` | U+02290 | ⊐
`sqsupe;` | U+02292 | ⊒
`sqsupset;` | U+02290 | ⊐
`sqsupseteq;` | U+02292 | ⊒
`squ;` | U+025A1 | □
`Square;` | U+025A1 | □
`square;` | U+025A1 | □
`SquareIntersection;` | U+02293 | ⊓
`SquareSubset;` | U+0228F | ⊏
`SquareSubsetEqual;` | U+02291 | ⊑
`SquareSuperset;` | U+02290 | ⊐
`SquareSupersetEqual;` | U+02292 | ⊒
`SquareUnion;` | U+02294 | ⊔
`squarf;` | U+025AA | ▪
`squf;` | U+025AA | ▪
`srarr;` | U+02192 | →
`Sscr;` | U+1D4AE | 𝒮
`sscr;` | U+1D4C8 | 𝓈
`ssetmn;` | U+02216 | ∖
`ssmile;` | U+02323 | ⌣
`sstarf;` | U+022C6 | ⋆
`Star;` | U+022C6 | ⋆
`star;` | U+02606 | ☆
`starf;` | U+02605 | ★
`straightepsilon;` | U+003F5 | ϵ
`straightphi;` | U+003D5 | ϕ
`strns;` | U+000AF | ¯
`Sub;` | U+022D0 | ⋐
`sub;` | U+02282 | ⊂
`subdot;` | U+02ABD | ⪽
`subE;` | U+02AC5 | ⫅
`sube;` | U+02286 | ⊆
`subedot;` | U+02AC3 | ⫃
`submult;` | U+02AC1 | ⫁
`subnE;` | U+02ACB | ⫋
`subne;` | U+0228A | ⊊
`subplus;` | U+02ABF | ⪿
`subrarr;` | U+02979 | ⥹
`Subset;` | U+022D0 | ⋐
`subset;` | U+02282 | ⊂
`subseteq;` | U+02286 | ⊆
`subseteqq;` | U+02AC5 | ⫅
`SubsetEqual;` | U+02286 | ⊆
`subsetneq;` | U+0228A | ⊊
`subsetneqq;` | U+02ACB | ⫋
`subsim;` | U+02AC7 | ⫇
`subsub;` | U+02AD5 | ⫕
`subsup;` | U+02AD3 | ⫓
`succ;` | U+0227B | ≻
`succapprox;` | U+02AB8 | ⪸
`succcurlyeq;` | U+0227D | ≽
`Succeeds;` | U+0227B | ≻
`SucceedsEqual;` | U+02AB0 | ⪰
`SucceedsSlantEqual;` | U+0227D | ≽
`SucceedsTilde;` | U+0227F | ≿
`succeq;` | U+02AB0 | ⪰
`succnapprox;` | U+02ABA | ⪺
`succneqq;` | U+02AB6 | ⪶
`succnsim;` | U+022E9 | ⋩
`succsim;` | U+0227F | ≿
`SuchThat;` | U+0220B | ∋
`Sum;` | U+02211 | ∑
`sum;` | U+02211 | ∑
`sung;` | U+0266A | ♪
`Sup;` | U+022D1 | ⋑
`sup;` | U+02283 | ⊃
`sup1;` | U+000B9 | ¹
`sup1` | U+000B9 | ¹
`sup2;` | U+000B2 | ²
`sup2` | U+000B2 | ²
`sup3;` | U+000B3 | ³
`sup3` | U+000B3 | ³
`supdot;` | U+02ABE | ⪾
`supdsub;` | U+02AD8 | ⫘
`supE;` | U+02AC6 | ⫆
`supe;` | U+02287 | ⊇
`supedot;` | U+02AC4 | ⫄
`Superset;` | U+02283 | ⊃
`SupersetEqual;` | U+02287 | ⊇
`suphsol;` | U+027C9 | ⟉
`suphsub;` | U+02AD7 | ⫗
`suplarr;` | U+0297B | ⥻
`supmult;` | U+02AC2 | ⫂
`supnE;` | U+02ACC | ⫌
`supne;` | U+0228B | ⊋
`supplus;` | U+02AC0 | ⫀
`Supset;` | U+022D1 | ⋑
`supset;` | U+02283 | ⊃
`supseteq;` | U+02287 | ⊇
`supseteqq;` | U+02AC6 | ⫆
`supsetneq;` | U+0228B | ⊋
`supsetneqq;` | U+02ACC | ⫌
`supsim;` | U+02AC8 | ⫈
`supsub;` | U+02AD4 | ⫔
`supsup;` | U+02AD6 | ⫖
`swarhk;` | U+02926 | ⤦
`swArr;` | U+021D9 | ⇙
`swarr;` | U+02199 | ↙
`swarrow;` | U+02199 | ↙
`swnwar;` | U+0292A | ⤪
`szlig;` | U+000DF | ß
`szlig` | U+000DF | ß
`Tab;` | U+00009 | ␉
`target;` | U+02316 | ⌖
`Tau;` | U+003A4 | Τ
`tau;` | U+003C4 | τ
`tbrk;` | U+023B4 | ⎴
`Tcaron;` | U+00164 | Ť
`tcaron;` | U+00165 | ť
`Tcedil;` | U+00162 | Ţ
`tcedil;` | U+00163 | ţ
`Tcy;` | U+00422 | Т
`tcy;` | U+00442 | т
`tdot;` | U+020DB | ◌⃛
`telrec;` | U+02315 | ⌕
`Tfr;` | U+1D517 | 𝔗
`tfr;` | U+1D531 | 𝔱
`there4;` | U+02234 | ∴
`Therefore;` | U+02234 | ∴
`therefore;` | U+02234 | ∴
`Theta;` | U+00398 | Θ
`theta;` | U+003B8 | θ
`thetasym;` | U+003D1 | ϑ
`thetav;` | U+003D1 | ϑ
`thickapprox;` | U+02248 | ≈
`thicksim;` | U+0223C | ∼
`ThickSpace;` | U+0205F U+0200A |
`thinsp;` | U+02009 |
`ThinSpace;` | U+02009 |
`thkap;` | U+02248 | ≈
`thksim;` | U+0223C | ∼
`THORN;` | U+000DE | Þ
`THORN` | U+000DE | Þ
`thorn;` | U+000FE | þ
`thorn` | U+000FE | þ
`Tilde;` | U+0223C | ∼
`tilde;` | U+002DC | ˜
`TildeEqual;` | U+02243 | ≃
`TildeFullEqual;` | U+02245 | ≅
`TildeTilde;` | U+02248 | ≈
`times;` | U+000D7 | ×
`times` | U+000D7 | ×
`timesb;` | U+022A0 | ⊠
`timesbar;` | U+02A31 | ⨱
`timesd;` | U+02A30 | ⨰
`tint;` | U+0222D | ∭
`toea;` | U+02928 | ⤨
`top;` | U+022A4 | ⊤
`topbot;` | U+02336 | ⌶
`topcir;` | U+02AF1 | ⫱
`Topf;` | U+1D54B | 𝕋
`topf;` | U+1D565 | 𝕥
`topfork;` | U+02ADA | ⫚
`tosa;` | U+02929 | ⤩
`tprime;` | U+02034 | ‴
`TRADE;` | U+02122 | ™
`trade;` | U+02122 | ™
`triangle;` | U+025B5 | ▵
`triangledown;` | U+025BF | ▿
`triangleleft;` | U+025C3 | ◃
`trianglelefteq;` | U+022B4 | ⊴
`triangleq;` | U+0225C | ≜
`triangleright;` | U+025B9 | ▹
`trianglerighteq;` | U+022B5 | ⊵
`tridot;` | U+025EC | ◬
`trie;` | U+0225C | ≜
`triminus;` | U+02A3A | ⨺
`TripleDot;` | U+020DB | ◌⃛
`triplus;` | U+02A39 | ⨹
`trisb;` | U+029CD | ⧍
`tritime;` | U+02A3B | ⨻
`trpezium;` | U+023E2 | ⏢
`Tscr;` | U+1D4AF | 𝒯
`tscr;` | U+1D4C9 | 𝓉
`TScy;` | U+00426 | Ц
`tscy;` | U+00446 | ц
`TSHcy;` | U+0040B | Ћ
`tshcy;` | U+0045B | ћ
`Tstrok;` | U+00166 | Ŧ
`tstrok;` | U+00167 | ŧ
`twixt;` | U+0226C | ≬
`twoheadleftarrow;` | U+0219E | ↞
`twoheadrightarrow;` | U+021A0 | ↠
`Uacute;` | U+000DA | Ú
`Uacute` | U+000DA | Ú
`uacute;` | U+000FA | ú
`uacute` | U+000FA | ú
`Uarr;` | U+0219F | ↟
`uArr;` | U+021D1 | ⇑
`uarr;` | U+02191 | ↑
`Uarrocir;` | U+02949 | ⥉
`Ubrcy;` | U+0040E | Ў
`ubrcy;` | U+0045E | ў
`Ubreve;` | U+0016C | Ŭ
`ubreve;` | U+0016D | ŭ
`Ucirc;` | U+000DB | Û
`Ucirc` | U+000DB | Û
`ucirc;` | U+000FB | û
`ucirc` | U+000FB | û
`Ucy;` | U+00423 | У
`ucy;` | U+00443 | у
`udarr;` | U+021C5 | ⇅
`Udblac;` | U+00170 | Ű
`udblac;` | U+00171 | ű
`udhar;` | U+0296E | ⥮
`ufisht;` | U+0297E | ⥾
`Ufr;` | U+1D518 | 𝔘
`ufr;` | U+1D532 | 𝔲
`Ugrave;` | U+000D9 | Ù
`Ugrave` | U+000D9 | Ù
`ugrave;` | U+000F9 | ù
`ugrave` | U+000F9 | ù
`uHar;` | U+02963 | ⥣
`uharl;` | U+021BF | ↿
`uharr;` | U+021BE | ↾
`uhblk;` | U+02580 | ▀
`ulcorn;` | U+0231C | ⌜
`ulcorner;` | U+0231C | ⌜
`ulcrop;` | U+0230F | ⌏
`ultri;` | U+025F8 | ◸
`Umacr;` | U+0016A | Ū
`umacr;` | U+0016B | ū
`uml;` | U+000A8 | ¨
`uml` | U+000A8 | ¨
`UnderBar;` | U+0005F | _
`UnderBrace;` | U+023DF | ⏟
`UnderBracket;` | U+023B5 | ⎵
`UnderParenthesis;` | U+023DD | ⏝
`Union;` | U+022C3 | ⋃
`UnionPlus;` | U+0228E | ⊎
`Uogon;` | U+00172 | Ų
`uogon;` | U+00173 | ų
`Uopf;` | U+1D54C | 𝕌
`uopf;` | U+1D566 | 𝕦
`UpArrow;` | U+02191 | ↑
`Uparrow;` | U+021D1 | ⇑
`uparrow;` | U+02191 | ↑
`UpArrowBar;` | U+02912 | ⤒
`UpArrowDownArrow;` | U+021C5 | ⇅
`UpDownArrow;` | U+02195 | ↕
`Updownarrow;` | U+021D5 | ⇕
`updownarrow;` | U+02195 | ↕
`UpEquilibrium;` | U+0296E | ⥮
`upharpoonleft;` | U+021BF | ↿
`upharpoonright;` | U+021BE | ↾
`uplus;` | U+0228E | ⊎
`UpperLeftArrow;` | U+02196 | ↖
`UpperRightArrow;` | U+02197 | ↗
`Upsi;` | U+003D2 | ϒ
`upsi;` | U+003C5 | υ
`upsih;` | U+003D2 | ϒ
`Upsilon;` | U+003A5 | Υ
`upsilon;` | U+003C5 | υ
`UpTee;` | U+022A5 | ⊥
`UpTeeArrow;` | U+021A5 | ↥
`upuparrows;` | U+021C8 | ⇈
`urcorn;` | U+0231D | ⌝
`urcorner;` | U+0231D | ⌝
`urcrop;` | U+0230E | ⌎
`Uring;` | U+0016E | Ů
`uring;` | U+0016F | ů
`urtri;` | U+025F9 | ◹
`Uscr;` | U+1D4B0 | 𝒰
`uscr;` | U+1D4CA | 𝓊
`utdot;` | U+022F0 | ⋰
`Utilde;` | U+00168 | Ũ
`utilde;` | U+00169 | ũ
`utri;` | U+025B5 | ▵
`utrif;` | U+025B4 | ▴
`uuarr;` | U+021C8 | ⇈
`Uuml;` | U+000DC | Ü
`Uuml` | U+000DC | Ü
`uuml;` | U+000FC | ü
`uuml` | U+000FC | ü
`uwangle;` | U+029A7 | ⦧
`vangrt;` | U+0299C | ⦜
`varepsilon;` | U+003F5 | ϵ
`varkappa;` | U+003F0 | ϰ
`varnothing;` | U+02205 | ∅
`varphi;` | U+003D5 | ϕ
`varpi;` | U+003D6 | ϖ
`varpropto;` | U+0221D | ∝
`vArr;` | U+021D5 | ⇕
`varr;` | U+02195 | ↕
`varrho;` | U+003F1 | ϱ
`varsigma;` | U+003C2 | ς
`varsubsetneq;` | U+0228A U+0FE00 | ⊊︀
`varsubsetneqq;` | U+02ACB U+0FE00 | ⫋︀
`varsupsetneq;` | U+0228B U+0FE00 | ⊋︀
`varsupsetneqq;` | U+02ACC U+0FE00 | ⫌︀
`vartheta;` | U+003D1 | ϑ
`vartriangleleft;` | U+022B2 | ⊲
`vartriangleright;` | U+022B3 | ⊳
`Vbar;` | U+02AEB | ⫫
`vBar;` | U+02AE8 | ⫨
`vBarv;` | U+02AE9 | ⫩
`Vcy;` | U+00412 | В
`vcy;` | U+00432 | в
`VDash;` | U+022AB | ⊫
`Vdash;` | U+022A9 | ⊩
`vDash;` | U+022A8 | ⊨
`vdash;` | U+022A2 | ⊢
`Vdashl;` | U+02AE6 | ⫦
`Vee;` | U+022C1 | ⋁
`vee;` | U+02228 | ∨
`veebar;` | U+022BB | ⊻
`veeeq;` | U+0225A | ≚
`vellip;` | U+022EE | ⋮
`Verbar;` | U+02016 | ‖
`verbar;` | U+0007C | |
`Vert;` | U+02016 | ‖
`vert;` | U+0007C | |
`VerticalBar;` | U+02223 | ∣
`VerticalLine;` | U+0007C | |
`VerticalSeparator;` | U+02758 | ❘
`VerticalTilde;` | U+02240 | ≀
`VeryThinSpace;` | U+0200A |
`Vfr;` | U+1D519 | 𝔙
`vfr;` | U+1D533 | 𝔳
`vltri;` | U+022B2 | ⊲
`vnsub;` | U+02282 U+020D2 | ⊂⃒
`vnsup;` | U+02283 U+020D2 | ⊃⃒
`Vopf;` | U+1D54D | 𝕍
`vopf;` | U+1D567 | 𝕧
`vprop;` | U+0221D | ∝
`vrtri;` | U+022B3 | ⊳
`Vscr;` | U+1D4B1 | 𝒱
`vscr;` | U+1D4CB | 𝓋
`vsubnE;` | U+02ACB U+0FE00 | ⫋︀
`vsubne;` | U+0228A U+0FE00 | ⊊︀
`vsupnE;` | U+02ACC U+0FE00 | ⫌︀
`vsupne;` | U+0228B U+0FE00 | ⊋︀
`Vvdash;` | U+022AA | ⊪
`vzigzag;` | U+0299A | ⦚
`Wcirc;` | U+00174 | Ŵ
`wcirc;` | U+00175 | ŵ
`wedbar;` | U+02A5F | ⩟
`Wedge;` | U+022C0 | ⋀
`wedge;` | U+02227 | ∧
`wedgeq;` | U+02259 | ≙
`weierp;` | U+02118 | ℘
`Wfr;` | U+1D51A | 𝔚
`wfr;` | U+1D534 | 𝔴
`Wopf;` | U+1D54E | 𝕎
`wopf;` | U+1D568 | 𝕨
`wp;` | U+02118 | ℘
`wr;` | U+02240 | ≀
`wreath;` | U+02240 | ≀
`Wscr;` | U+1D4B2 | 𝒲
`wscr;` | U+1D4CC | 𝓌
`xcap;` | U+022C2 | ⋂
`xcirc;` | U+025EF | ◯
`xcup;` | U+022C3 | ⋃
`xdtri;` | U+025BD | ▽
`Xfr;` | U+1D51B | 𝔛
`xfr;` | U+1D535 | 𝔵
`xhArr;` | U+027FA | ⟺
`xharr;` | U+027F7 | ⟷
`Xi;` | U+0039E | Ξ
`xi;` | U+003BE | ξ
`xlArr;` | U+027F8 | ⟸
`xlarr;` | U+027F5 | ⟵
`xmap;` | U+027FC | ⟼
`xnis;` | U+022FB | ⋻
`xodot;` | U+02A00 | ⨀
`Xopf;` | U+1D54F | 𝕏
`xopf;` | U+1D569 | 𝕩
`xoplus;` | U+02A01 | ⨁
`xotime;` | U+02A02 | ⨂
`xrArr;` | U+027F9 | ⟹
`xrarr;` | U+027F6 | ⟶
`Xscr;` | U+1D4B3 | 𝒳
`xscr;` | U+1D4CD | 𝓍
`xsqcup;` | U+02A06 | ⨆
`xuplus;` | U+02A04 | ⨄
`xutri;` | U+025B3 | △
`xvee;` | U+022C1 | ⋁
`xwedge;` | U+022C0 | ⋀
`Yacute;` | U+000DD | Ý
`Yacute` | U+000DD | Ý
`yacute;` | U+000FD | ý
`yacute` | U+000FD | ý
`YAcy;` | U+0042F | Я
`yacy;` | U+0044F | я
`Ycirc;` | U+00176 | Ŷ
`ycirc;` | U+00177 | ŷ
`Ycy;` | U+0042B | Ы
`ycy;` | U+0044B | ы
`yen;` | U+000A5 | ¥
`yen` | U+000A5 | ¥
`Yfr;` | U+1D51C | 𝔜
`yfr;` | U+1D536 | 𝔶
`YIcy;` | U+00407 | Ї
`yicy;` | U+00457 | ї
`Yopf;` | U+1D550 | 𝕐
`yopf;` | U+1D56A | 𝕪
`Yscr;` | U+1D4B4 | 𝒴
`yscr;` | U+1D4CE | 𝓎
`YUcy;` | U+0042E | Ю
`yucy;` | U+0044E | ю
`Yuml;` | U+00178 | Ÿ
`yuml;` | U+000FF | ÿ
`yuml` | U+000FF | ÿ
`Zacute;` | U+00179 | Ź
`zacute;` | U+0017A | ź
`Zcaron;` | U+0017D | Ž
`zcaron;` | U+0017E | ž
`Zcy;` | U+00417 | З
`zcy;` | U+00437 | з
`Zdot;` | U+0017B | Ż
`zdot;` | U+0017C | ż
`zeetrf;` | U+02128 | ℨ
`ZeroWidthSpace;` | U+0200B | ​
`Zeta;` | U+00396 | Ζ
`zeta;` | U+003B6 | ζ
`Zfr;` | U+02128 | ℨ
`zfr;` | U+1D537 | 𝔷
`ZHcy;` | U+00416 | Ж
`zhcy;` | U+00436 | ж
`zigrarr;` | U+021DD | ⇝
`Zopf;` | U+02124 | ℤ
`zopf;` | U+1D56B | 𝕫
`Zscr;` | U+1D4B5 | 𝒵
`zscr;` | U+1D4CF | 𝓏
`zwj;` | U+0200D | ‍
`zwnj;` | U+0200C | ‌

This data is also available as a JSON file.

The glyphs displayed above are non-normative. Refer to the Unicode specifications for formal definitions of the characters listed above.

## 13 The XHTML syntax

This section only describes the rules for XML resources. Rules for `text/html` resources are discussed in the section above entitled "The HTML syntax".

### 13.1 Writing XHTML documents

The syntax for using HTML with XML, whether in XHTML documents or embedded in other XML documents, is defined in the XML and Namespaces in XML specifications. [XML] [XMLNS]

This specification does not define any syntax-level requirements beyond those defined for XML proper.

XML documents may contain a `DOCTYPE` if desired, but this is not required to conform to this specification. This specification does not define a public or system identifier, nor provide a formal DTD.

According to the XML specification, XML processors are not guaranteed to process the external DTD subset referenced in the DOCTYPE. This means, for example, that using entity references for characters in XHTML documents is unsafe if they are defined in an external file (except for `&lt;`, `&gt;`, `&amp;`, `&quot;` and `&apos;`).

### 13.2 Parsing XHTML documents

This section describes the relationship between XML and the DOM, with a particular emphasis on how this interacts with HTML.

An XML parser, for the purposes of this specification, is a construct that follows the rules given in the XML specification to map a string of bytes or characters into a `Document` object.

At the time of writing, no such rules actually exist.

An XML parser is either associated with a `Document` object when it is created, or creates one implicitly.

This `Document` must then be populated with DOM nodes that represent the tree structure of the input passed to the parser, as defined by the XML specification, the Namespaces in XML specification, and the DOM specification. DOM mutation events must not fire for the operations that the XML parser performs on the `Document`'s tree, but the user agent must act as if elements and attributes were individually appended and set respectively so as to trigger rules in this specification regarding what happens when an element is inserted into a document or has its attributes set, and the DOM specification's requirements regarding mutation observers mean that mutation observers are fired (unlike mutation events). [XML] [XMLNS] [DOM] [DOMEVENTS]

Between the time an element's start tag is parsed and the time either the element's end tag is parsed or the parser detects a well-formedness error, the user agent must act as if the element was in a stack of open elements.

This is used, e.g. by the `object` element to avoid instantiating plugins before the `param` element children have been parsed.

This specification provides the following additional information that user agents should use when retrieving an external entity: the public identifiers given in the following list all correspond to the URL given by this link. (This URL is a DTD containing the entity declarations for the names listed in the named character references section.) [XML]

- `-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN`
- `-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN`
- `-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN`
- `-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Frameset//EN`
- `-//W3C//DTD XHTML Basic 1.0//EN`
- `-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1 plus MathML 2.0//EN`
- `-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1 plus MathML 2.0 plus SVG 1.1//EN`
- `-//W3C//DTD MathML 2.0//EN`
- `-//WAPFORUM//DTD XHTML Mobile 1.0//EN`

Furthermore, user agents should attempt to retrieve the above external entity's content when one of the above public identifiers is used, and should not attempt to retrieve any other external entity's content.

This is not strictly a violation of the XML specification, but it does contradict the spirit of the XML specification's requirements. This is motivated by a desire for user agents to all handle entities in an interoperable fashion without requiring any network access for handling external subsets. [XML]

XML parsers can be invoked with XML scripting support enabled or disabled. Except where otherwise specified, XML parsers are invoked with XML scripting support enabled.

When an XML parser with XML scripting support enabled creates a `script` element, it must be marked as being "parser-inserted" and its "force-async" flag must be unset. If the parser was originally created for the XML fragment parsing algorithm, then the element must be marked as "already started" also. When the element's end tag is subsequently parsed, the user agent must perform a microtask checkpoint, and then prepare the `script` element. If this causes there to be a pending parsing-blocking script, then the user agent must run the following steps:

1. Block this instance of the XML parser, such that the event loop will not run tasks that invoke it.

2. Spin the event loop until the parser's `Document` has no style sheet that is blocking scripts and the pending parsing-blocking script's "ready to be parser-executed" flag is set.

3. Unblock this instance of the XML parser, such that tasks that invoke it can again be run.

4. Execute the pending parsing-blocking script.

5. There is no longer a pending parsing-blocking script.

Since the `document.write()` API is not available for XML documents, much of the complexity in the HTML parser is not needed in the XML parser.

When the XML parser has XML scripting support disabled, none of this happens.

When an XML parser would append a node to a `template` element, it must instead append it to the `template` element's template contents (a `DocumentFragment` node).

This is a willful violation of the XML specification; unfortunately, XML is not formally extensible in the manner that is needed for `template` processing. [XML]

When an XML parser creates a `Node` object, its node document must be set to the node document of the node into which the newly created node is to be inserted.

Certain algorithms in this specification spoon-feed the parser characters one string at a time. In such cases, the XML parser must act as it would have if faced with a single string consisting of the concatenation of all those characters.

When an XML parser reaches the end of its input, it must stop parsing, following the same rules as the HTML parser. An XML parser can also be aborted, which must again by done in the same way as for an HTML parser.

For the purposes of conformance checkers, if a resource is determined to be in the XHTML syntax, then it is an XML document.

### 13.3 Serialising XHTML fragments

The XML fragment serialisation algorithm for a `Document` or `Element` node either returns a fragment of XML that represents that node or throws an exception.

For `Document`s, the algorithm must return a string in the form of a document entity, if none of the error cases below apply.

For `Element`s, the algorithm must return a string in the form of an internal general parsed entity, if none of the error cases below apply.

In both cases, the string returned must be XML namespace-well-formed and must be an isomorphic serialisation of all of that node's relevant child nodes, in tree order. User agents may adjust prefixes and namespace declarations in the serialisation (and indeed might be forced to do so in some cases to obtain namespace-well-formed XML). User agents may use a combination of regular text and character references to represent `Text` nodes in the DOM.

A node's relevant child nodes are those that apply given the following rules:

For `template` elements
  The relevant child nodes are the child nodes of the `template` element's template contents, if any.
For all other nodes
  The relevant child nodes are the child nodes of node itself, if any.

For `Element`s, if any of the elements in the serialisation are in no namespace, the default namespace in scope for those elements must be explicitly declared as the empty string. (This doesn't apply in the `Document` case.) [XML] [XMLNS]

For the purposes of this section, an internal general parsed entity is considered XML namespace-well-formed if a document consisting of an element with no namespace declarations whose contents are the internal general parsed entity would itself be XML namespace-well-formed.

If any of the following error cases are found in the DOM subtree being serialised, then the algorithm must throw an `InvalidStateError` exception instead of returning a string:

- A `Document` node with no child element nodes.
- A `DocumentType` node that has an external subset public identifier that contains characters that are not matched by the XML `PubidChar` production. [XML]
- A `DocumentType` node that has an external subset system identifier that contains both a U+0022 QUOTATION MARK (") and a U+0027 APOSTROPHE (') or that contains characters that are not matched by the XML `Char` production. [XML]
- A node with a local name containing a U+003A COLON (:).
- A node with a local name that does not match the XML `Name` production. [XML]
- An `Attr` node with no namespace whose local name is the lowercase string "`xmlns`". [XMLNS]
- An `Element` node with two or more attributes with the same local name and namespace.
- An `Attr` node, `Text` node, `Comment` node, or `ProcessingInstruction` node whose data contains characters that are not matched by the XML `Char` production. [XML]
- A `Comment` node whose data contains two adjacent U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS characters (-) or ends with such a character.
- A `ProcessingInstruction` node whose target name is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`xml`".
- A `ProcessingInstruction` node whose target name contains a U+003A COLON (:).
- A `ProcessingInstruction` node whose data contains the string "`?>`".

These are the only ways to make a DOM unserialisable. The DOM enforces all the other XML constraints; for example, trying to append two elements to a `Document` node will throw a `HierarchyRequestError` exception.

### 13.4 Parsing XHTML fragments

The XML fragment parsing algorithm either returns a `Document` or throws a `SyntaxError` exception. Given a string input and an optional context element context, the algorithm is as follows:

1. Create a new XML parser.

2. If there is a context element, feed the parser just created the string corresponding to the start tag of that element, declaring all the namespace prefixes that are in scope on that element in the DOM, as well as declaring the default namespace (if any) that is in scope on that element in the DOM.

   A namespace prefix is in scope if the DOM `lookupNamespaceURI()` method on the element would return a non-null value for that prefix.

   The default namespace is the namespace for which the DOM `isDefaultNamespace()` method on the element would return true.

   If there is a context element, no `DOCTYPE` is passed to the parser, and therefore no external subset is referenced, and therefore no entities will be recognized.

3. Feed the parser just created the string input.

4. If there is a context element, feed the parser just created the string corresponding to the end tag of that element.

5. If there is an XML well-formedness or XML namespace well-formedness error, then throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.

6. If there is a context element, and the root element of the resulting `Document` has any sibling nodes, then throw a `SyntaxError` exception and abort these steps.

7. If there is a context element, then return the child nodes of the root element of the resulting `Document`, in tree order.

   Otherwise, return the children of the `Document` object, in tree order.

## 14 Rendering

User agents are not required to present HTML documents in any particular way. However, this section provides a set of suggestions for rendering HTML documents that, if followed, are likely to lead to a user experience that closely resembles the experience intended by the documents' authors. So as to avoid confusion regarding the normativity of this section, RFC2119 terms have not been used. Instead, the term "expected" is used to indicate behavior that will lead to this experience. For the purposes of conformance for user agents designated as supporting the suggested default rendering, the term "expected" in this section has the same conformance implications as the RFC2119-defined term "must".

### 14.1 Introduction

In general, user agents are expected to support CSS, and many of the suggestions in this section are expressed in CSS terms. User agents that use other presentation mechanisms can derive their expected behavior by translating from the CSS rules given in this section.

In the absence of style-layer rules to the contrary (e.g. author style sheets), user agents are expected to render an element so that it conveys to the user the meaning that the element represents, as described by this specification.

The suggestions in this section generally assume a visual output medium with a resolution of 96dpi or greater, but HTML is intended to apply to multiple media (it is a media-independent language). User agent implementors are encouraged to adapt the suggestions in this section to their target media.

An element is being rendered if it has any associated CSS layout boxes, SVG layout boxes, or some equivalent in other styling languages.

Just being off-screen does not mean the element is not being rendered. The presence of the `hidden` attribute normally means the element is not being rendered, though this might be overridden by the style sheets.

User agents that do not honor author-level CSS style sheets are nonetheless expected to act as if they applied the CSS rules given in these sections in a manner consistent with this specification and the relevant CSS and Unicode specifications. [CSS] [UNICODE] [BIDI]

This is especially important for issues relating to the 'display', 'unicode-bidi', and 'direction' properties.

### 14.2 The CSS user agent style sheet and presentational hints

The CSS rules given in these subsections are, except where otherwise specified, expected to be used as part of the user-agent level style sheet defaults for all documents that contain HTML elements.

Some rules are intended for the author-level zero-specificity presentational hints part of the CSS cascade; these are explicitly called out as presentational hints.

Some of the rules regarding left and right margins are given here as appropriate for elements whose 'direction' property is 'ltr', and are expected to be flipped around on elements whose 'direction' property is 'rtl'. These are marked "LTR-specific".

These markings only affect the handling of attribute values, not attribute names or element names.

When the text below says that an attribute attribute on an element element maps to the pixel length property (or properties) properties, it means that if element has an attribute attribute set, and parsing that attribute's value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers doesn't generate an error, then the user agent is expected to use the parsed value as a pixel length for a presentational hint for properties.

When the text below says that an attribute attribute on an element element maps to the dimension property (or properties) properties, it means that if element has an attribute attribute set, and parsing that attribute's value using the rules for parsing dimension values doesn't generate an error, then the user agent is expected to use the parsed dimension as the value for a presentational hint for properties, with the value given as a pixel length if the dimension was an integer, and with the value given as a percentage if the dimension was a percentage.

When a user agent is to align descendants of a node, the user agent is expected to align only those descendants that have both their 'margin-left' and 'margin-right' properties computing to a value other than 'auto', that are over-constrained and that have one of those two margins with a used value forced to a greater value, and that do not themselves have an applicable `align` attribute. When multiple elements are to align a particular descendant, the most deeply nested such element is expected to override the others. Aligned elements are expected to be aligned by having the used values of their left and right margins be set accordingly.

### 14.3 Non-replaced elements

#### 14.3.1 Hidden elements

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    [hidden], area, base, basefont, datalist, head, link, menu[type=popup i], meta,
    noembed, noframes, param, rp, script, source, style, template, track, title {
      display: none;
    }

    embed[hidden] { display: inline; height: 0; width: 0; }

The user agent is expected to force the 'display' property of `noscript` elements for whom scripting is enabled to compute to 'none', irrespective of CSS rules.

The user agent is expected to force the 'display' property of `input` elements whose `type` attribute is in the Hidden state to compute to 'none', irrespective of CSS rules.

#### 14.3.2 The page

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    html, body { display: block; }

For each property in the table below, given a `body` element, the first attribute that exists maps to the pixel length property on the `body` element. If none of the attributes for a property are found, or if the value of the attribute that was found cannot be parsed successfully, then, if the `body` element's node document's browsing context does not have its seamless browsing context flag set, a default value of 8px is expected to be used for that property instead.

Property | Source
--- | ---
'margin-top' | `body` element's `marginheight` attribute
The `body` element's container frame element's `marginheight` attribute
`body` element's `topmargin` attribute
'margin-right' | `body` element's `marginwidth` attribute
The `body` element's container frame element's `marginwidth` attribute
`body` element's `rightmargin` attribute
'margin-bottom' | `body` element's `marginheight` attribute
The `body` element's container frame element's `marginheight` attribute
`body` element's `bottommargin` attribute
'margin-left' | `body` element's `marginwidth` attribute
The `body` element's container frame element's `marginwidth` attribute
`body` element's `leftmargin` attribute

If the `body` element's node document's browsing context is a nested browsing context, and the browsing context container of that nested browsing context is a `frame` or `iframe` element, then the container frame element of the `body` element is that `frame` or `iframe` element. Otherwise, there is no container frame element.

The above requirements imply that a page can change the margins of another page (including one from another origin) using, for example, an `iframe`. This is potentially a security risk, as it might in some cases allow an attack to contrive a situation in which a page is rendered not as the author intended, possibly for the purposes of phishing or otherwise misleading the user.

If a `Document` is in a nested browsing context, it is expected to be positioned and sized to fit inside the content box of its browsing context container. If a browsing context is not being rendered, it is expected to have a viewport with zero width and zero height.

If the `Document` is in a nested browsing context, and the browsing context container of that nested browsing context is a `frame` or `iframe` element, and that element has a `scrolling` attribute, and that attribute's value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`off`", "`noscroll`", or "`no`", then the user agent is expected to prevent any scroll bars from being shown for the viewport of the nested browsing context, regardless of the 'overflow' property that applies to that viewport.

When a `body` element has a `background` attribute set to a non-empty value, the new value is expected to be resolved relative to the element, and if this is successful, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'background-image' property to the resulting absolute URL.

When a `body` element has a `bgcolor` attribute set, the new value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'background-color' property to the resulting colour.

When a `body` element has a `text` attribute, its value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'color' property to the resulting colour.

When a `body` element has a `link` attribute, its value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the 'color' property of any element in the `Document` matching the ':link' pseudo-class to the resulting colour.

When a `body` element has a `vlink` attribute, its value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the 'color' property of any element in the `Document` matching the ':visited' pseudo-class to the resulting colour.

When a `body` element has an `alink` attribute, its value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the 'color' property of any element in the `Document` matching the ':active' pseudo-class and either the ':link' pseudo-class or the ':visited' pseudo-class to the resulting colour.

#### 14.3.3 Flow content

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    address, blockquote, center, div, figure, figcaption, footer, form, header, hr,
    legend, listing, main, p, plaintext, pre, summary, xmp {
      display: block;
    }

    blockquote, figure, listing, p, plaintext, pre, xmp {
      margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;
    }

    blockquote, figure { margin-left: 40px; margin-right: 40px; }

    address { font-style: italic; }
    listing, plaintext, pre, xmp {
      font-family: monospace; white-space: pre;
    }

    dialog:not([open]) { display: none; }
    dialog {
      position: absolute;
      left: 0; right: 0;
      width: fit-content;
      height: fit-content;
      margin: auto;
      border: solid;
      padding: 1em;
      background: white;
      color: black;
    }
    dialog::backdrop {
      position: fixed;
      top: 0; right: 0; bottom: 0; left: 0;
      background: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    }

    /* for small devices, modal dialogs go full-screen */
    @media screen and (max-width: 540px) {
      dialog:modal {
        top: 0;
        width: auto;
        margin: 1em;
      }
    }

The following rules are also expected to apply, as presentational hints:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    pre[wrap] { white-space: pre-wrap; }

In quirks mode, the following rules are also expected to apply:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    form { margin-bottom: 1em; }

The `center` element, and the `div` element when it has an `align` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for either the string "`center`" or the string "`middle`", are expected to center text within themselves, as if they had their 'text-align' property set to 'center' in a presentational hint, and to align descendants to the center.

The `div` element, when it has an `align` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`left`", is expected to left-align text within itself, as if it had its 'text-align' property set to 'left' in a presentational hint, and to align descendants to the left.

The `div` element, when it has an `align` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`right`", is expected to right-align text within itself, as if it had its 'text-align' property set to 'right' in a presentational hint, and to align descendants to the right.

The `div` element, when it has an `align` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`justify`", is expected to full-justify text within itself, as if it had its 'text-align' property set to 'justify' in a presentational hint, and to align descendants to the left.

#### 14.3.4 Phrasing content

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    cite, dfn, em, i, var { font-style: italic; }
    b, strong { font-weight: bolder; }
    code, kbd, samp, tt { font-family: monospace; }
    big { font-size: larger; }
    small { font-size: smaller; }

    sub { vertical-align: sub; }
    sup { vertical-align: super; }
    sub, sup { line-height: normal; font-size: smaller; }

    ruby { display: ruby; }
    rt { display: ruby-text; }

    :link { color: #0000EE; }
    :visited { color: #551A8B; }
    :link, :visited { text-decoration: underline; }
    a:link[rel~=help], a:visited[rel~=help],
    area:link[rel~=help], area:visited[rel~=help] { cursor: help; }

    :focus { outline: auto; }

    mark { background: yellow; color: black; } /* this colour is just a suggestion and can be changed based on implementation feedback */

    abbr[title], acronym[title] { text-decoration: dotted underline; }
    ins, u { text-decoration: underline; }
    del, s, strike { text-decoration: line-through; }
    blink { text-decoration: blink; }

    q::before { content: open-quote; }
    q::after { content: close-quote; }

    br { display-outside: newline; } /* this also has bidi implications */
    nobr { white-space: nowrap; }
    wbr { content: '\200B'; } /* this also has bidi implications */
    nobr wbr { white-space: normal; }

The following rules are also expected to apply, as presentational hints:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    br[clear=left i] { clear: left; }
    br[clear=right i] { clear: right; }
    br[clear=all i], br[clear=both i] { clear: both; }

For the purposes of the CSS ruby model, runs of children of `ruby` elements that are not `rt` or `rp` elements are expected to be wrapped in anonymous boxes whose 'display' property has the value 'ruby-base'. [CSSRUBY]

When a particular part of a ruby has more than one annotation, the annotations should be distributed on both sides of the base text so as to minimise the stacking of ruby annotations on one side.

When it becomes possible to do so, the preceding requirement will be updated to be expressed in terms of CSS ruby. (Currently, CSS ruby does not handle nested `ruby` elements or multiple sequential `rt` elements, which is how this semantic is expressed.)

User agents that do not support correct ruby rendering are expected to render parentheses around the text of `rt` elements in the absence of `rp` elements.

User agents are expected to support the 'clear' property on inline elements (in order to render `br` elements with `clear` attributes) in the manner described in the non-normative note to this effect in CSS2.1.

The initial value for the 'color' property is expected to be black. The initial value for the 'background-color' property is expected to be 'transparent'. The canvas' background is expected to be white.

When a `font` element has a `color` attribute, its value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'color' property to the resulting colour.

When a `font` element has a `face` attribute, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'font-family' property to the attribute's value.

When a `font` element has a `size` attribute, the user agent is expected to use the following steps, known as the rules for parsing a legacy font size, to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'font-size' property:

1. Let input be the attribute's value.

2. Let position be a pointer into input, initially pointing at the start of the string.

3. Skip whitespace.

4. If position is past the end of input, there is no presentational hint. Abort these steps.

5. If the character at position is a U+002B PLUS SIGN character (+), then let mode be relative-plus, and advance position to the next character. Otherwise, if the character at position is a U+002D HYPHEN-MINUS character (-), then let mode be relative-minus, and advance position to the next character. Otherwise, let mode be absolute.

6. Collect a sequence of characters that are ASCII digits, and let the resulting sequence be digits.

7. If digits is the empty string, there is no presentational hint. Abort these steps.

8. Interpret digits as a base-ten integer. Let value be the resulting number.

9. If mode is relative-plus, then increment value by 3. If mode is relative-minus, then let value be the result of subtracting value from 3.

10. If value is greater than 7, let it be 7.

11. If value is less than 1, let it be 1.

12. Set 'font-size' to the keyword corresponding to the value of value according to the following table:

    value | 'font-size' keyword | Notes
    --- | --- | ---
    1 | x-small |
    2 | small |
    3 | medium |
    4 | large |
    5 | x-large |
    6 | xx-large |
    7 | xxx-large | see below

    The 'xxx-large' value is a non-CSS value used here to indicate a font size 50% larger than 'xx-large'.

#### 14.3.5 Bidirectional text

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    [dir]:dir(ltr), bdi:dir(ltr), input[type=tel]:dir(ltr) { direction: ltr; }
    [dir]:dir(rtl), bdi:dir(rtl) { direction: rtl; }

    address, blockquote, center, div, figure, figcaption, footer, form, header, hr,
    legend, listing, main, p, plaintext, pre, summary, xmp, article, aside, h1, h2,
    h3, h4, h5, h6, hgroup, nav, section, table, caption, colgroup, col, thead,
    tbody, tfoot, tr, td, th, dir, dd, dl, dt, menu, ol, ul, li, bdi, output,
    [dir=ltr i], [dir=rtl i], [dir=auto i] {
      unicode-bidi: isolate;
    }

    bdo, bdo[dir] { unicode-bidi: isolate-override; }

    textarea[dir=auto i], pre[dir=auto i] { unicode-bidi: plaintext; }

    /* the rules setting the 'content' property on br and wbr elements also has bidi implications */

Input fields (i.e. `textarea` elements, and `input` elements when their `type` attribute is in the Text, Search, Telephone, URL, or E-mail state) are expected to present an editing user interface with a directionality that matches the element's 'direction' property.

When the document's character encoding is ISO-8859-8, the following rules are additionally expected to apply, following those above: [ENCODING]

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    address, blockquote, center, div, figure, figcaption, footer, form, header, hr,
    legend, listing, main, p, plaintext, pre, summary, xmp, article, aside, h1, h2,
    h3, h4, h5, h6, hgroup, nav, section, table, caption, colgroup, col, thead,
    tbody, tfoot, tr, td, th, dir, dd, dl, dt, menu, ol, ul, li, [dir=ltr i],
    [dir=rtl i], [dir=auto i], *|* {
      unicode-bidi: bidi-override;
    }
    input:not([type=submit i]):not([type=reset i]):not([type=button i]),
    textarea, keygen {
      unicode-bidi: normal;
    }

#### 14.3.6 Quotes

This block is automatically generated from the Unicode Common Locale Data Repository. [CLDR]

User agents are expected to use either the block below (which will be regularly updated) or to automatically generate their own copy directly from the source material. The language codes are derived from the CLDR file names. The quotes are derived from the `delimiter` blocks, with fallback handled as specified in the CLDR documentation.

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    :root                                                         { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(af),       :not(:lang(af)) > :lang(af)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(agq),      :not(:lang(agq)) > :lang(agq)           { quotes: '\201e' '\201d' '\201a' '\2019' } /* „ ” ‚ ’ */
    :root:lang(ak),       :not(:lang(ak)) > :lang(ak)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(am),       :not(:lang(am)) > :lang(am)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(ar),       :not(:lang(ar)) > :lang(ar)             { quotes: '\201d' '\201c' '\2019' '\2018' } /* ” “ ’ ‘ */
    :root:lang(asa),      :not(:lang(asa)) > :lang(asa)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ast),      :not(:lang(ast)) > :lang(ast)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(az),       :not(:lang(az)) > :lang(az)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(az-Cyrl),  :not(:lang(az-Cyrl)) > :lang(az-Cyrl)   { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(bas),      :not(:lang(bas)) > :lang(bas)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201e' '\201c' } /* « » „ “ */
    :root:lang(bem),      :not(:lang(bem)) > :lang(bem)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(bez),      :not(:lang(bez)) > :lang(bez)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(bg),       :not(:lang(bg)) > :lang(bg)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201e' '\201c' } /* „ “ „ “ */
    :root:lang(bm),       :not(:lang(bm)) > :lang(bm)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(bn),       :not(:lang(bn)) > :lang(bn)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(br),       :not(:lang(br)) > :lang(br)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(brx),      :not(:lang(brx)) > :lang(brx)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(bs),       :not(:lang(bs)) > :lang(bs)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\2018' '\2019' } /* „ “ ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(bs-Cyrl),  :not(:lang(bs-Cyrl)) > :lang(bs-Cyrl)   { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(ca),       :not(:lang(ca)) > :lang(ca)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(cgg),      :not(:lang(cgg)) > :lang(cgg)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(chr),      :not(:lang(chr)) > :lang(chr)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(cs),       :not(:lang(cs)) > :lang(cs)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(cy),       :not(:lang(cy)) > :lang(cy)             { quotes: '\2018' '\2019' '\201c' '\201d' } /* ‘ ’ “ ” */
    :root:lang(da),       :not(:lang(da)) > :lang(da)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(dav),      :not(:lang(dav)) > :lang(dav)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(de),       :not(:lang(de)) > :lang(de)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(de-CH),    :not(:lang(de-CH)) > :lang(de-CH)       { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(dje),      :not(:lang(dje)) > :lang(dje)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(dsb),      :not(:lang(dsb)) > :lang(dsb)           { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(dua),      :not(:lang(dua)) > :lang(dua)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2018' '\2019' } /* « » ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(dyo),      :not(:lang(dyo)) > :lang(dyo)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(dz),       :not(:lang(dz)) > :lang(dz)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ebu),      :not(:lang(ebu)) > :lang(ebu)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ee),       :not(:lang(ee)) > :lang(ee)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(el),       :not(:lang(el)) > :lang(el)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\0022' '\0022' } /* « » " " */
    :root:lang(en),       :not(:lang(en)) > :lang(en)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(es),       :not(:lang(es)) > :lang(es)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(et),       :not(:lang(et)) > :lang(et)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(eu),       :not(:lang(eu)) > :lang(eu)             { quotes: '\0022' '\0022' '\0022' '\0022' } /* " " " " */
    :root:lang(ewo),      :not(:lang(ewo)) > :lang(ewo)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(fa),       :not(:lang(fa)) > :lang(fa)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(ff),       :not(:lang(ff)) > :lang(ff)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201d' '\201a' '\2019' } /* „ ” ‚ ’ */
    :root:lang(fi),       :not(:lang(fi)) > :lang(fi)             { quotes: '\201d' '\201d' '\2019' '\2019' } /* ” ” ’ ’ */
    :root:lang(fil),      :not(:lang(fil)) > :lang(fil)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(fr),       :not(:lang(fr)) > :lang(fr)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\00ab' '\00bb' } /* « » « » */
    :root:lang(fr-CA),    :not(:lang(fr-CA)) > :lang(fr-CA)       { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(fr-CH),    :not(:lang(fr-CH)) > :lang(fr-CH)       { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(ga),       :not(:lang(ga)) > :lang(ga)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(gd),       :not(:lang(gd)) > :lang(gd)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(gl),       :not(:lang(gl)) > :lang(gl)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(gsw),      :not(:lang(gsw)) > :lang(gsw)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(gu),       :not(:lang(gu)) > :lang(gu)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(guz),      :not(:lang(guz)) > :lang(guz)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ha),       :not(:lang(ha)) > :lang(ha)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(he),       :not(:lang(he)) > :lang(he)             { quotes: '\05f4' '\05f4' '\05f3' '\05f3' } /* ״ ״ ׳ ׳ */
    :root:lang(hi),       :not(:lang(hi)) > :lang(hi)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(hr),       :not(:lang(hr)) > :lang(hr)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(hsb),      :not(:lang(hsb)) > :lang(hsb)           { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(hu),       :not(:lang(hu)) > :lang(hu)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201d' '\00bb' '\00ab' } /* „ ” » « */
    :root:lang(hy),       :not(:lang(hy)) > :lang(hy)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\00ab' '\00bb' } /* « » « » */
    :root:lang(id),       :not(:lang(id)) > :lang(id)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ig),       :not(:lang(ig)) > :lang(ig)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(is),       :not(:lang(is)) > :lang(is)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(it),       :not(:lang(it)) > :lang(it)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(ja),       :not(:lang(ja)) > :lang(ja)             { quotes: '\300c' '\300d' '\300e' '\300f' } /* 「 」 『 』 */
    :root:lang(jgo),      :not(:lang(jgo)) > :lang(jgo)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(jmc),      :not(:lang(jmc)) > :lang(jmc)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ka),       :not(:lang(ka)) > :lang(ka)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\00ab' '\00bb' } /* „ “ « » */
    :root:lang(kab),      :not(:lang(kab)) > :lang(kab)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(kam),      :not(:lang(kam)) > :lang(kam)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(kde),      :not(:lang(kde)) > :lang(kde)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(kea),      :not(:lang(kea)) > :lang(kea)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(khq),      :not(:lang(khq)) > :lang(khq)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ki),       :not(:lang(ki)) > :lang(ki)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(kk),       :not(:lang(kk)) > :lang(kk)             { quotes: '\201c' '\0022' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ " ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(kkj),      :not(:lang(kkj)) > :lang(kkj)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2039' '\203a' } /* « » ‹ › */
    :root:lang(kln),      :not(:lang(kln)) > :lang(kln)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(km),       :not(:lang(km)) > :lang(km)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(kn),       :not(:lang(kn)) > :lang(kn)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ko),       :not(:lang(ko)) > :lang(ko)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ksb),      :not(:lang(ksb)) > :lang(ksb)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ksf),      :not(:lang(ksf)) > :lang(ksf)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2018' '\2019' } /* « » ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ky),       :not(:lang(ky)) > :lang(ky)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201e' '\201c' } /* « » „ “ */
    :root:lang(lag),      :not(:lang(lag)) > :lang(lag)           { quotes: '\201d' '\201d' '\2019' '\2019' } /* ” ” ’ ’ */
    :root:lang(lb),       :not(:lang(lb)) > :lang(lb)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(lg),       :not(:lang(lg)) > :lang(lg)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ln),       :not(:lang(ln)) > :lang(ln)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(lo),       :not(:lang(lo)) > :lang(lo)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(lt),       :not(:lang(lt)) > :lang(lt)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201e' '\201c' } /* „ “ „ “ */
    :root:lang(lu),       :not(:lang(lu)) > :lang(lu)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(luo),      :not(:lang(luo)) > :lang(luo)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(luy),      :not(:lang(luy)) > :lang(luy)           { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(lv),       :not(:lang(lv)) > :lang(lv)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(mas),      :not(:lang(mas)) > :lang(mas)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(mer),      :not(:lang(mer)) > :lang(mer)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(mfe),      :not(:lang(mfe)) > :lang(mfe)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(mg),       :not(:lang(mg)) > :lang(mg)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(mgo),      :not(:lang(mgo)) > :lang(mgo)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(mk),       :not(:lang(mk)) > :lang(mk)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(ml),       :not(:lang(ml)) > :lang(ml)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(mn),       :not(:lang(mn)) > :lang(mn)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(mr),       :not(:lang(mr)) > :lang(mr)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ms),       :not(:lang(ms)) > :lang(ms)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(mt),       :not(:lang(mt)) > :lang(mt)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(mua),      :not(:lang(mua)) > :lang(mua)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(my),       :not(:lang(my)) > :lang(my)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(naq),      :not(:lang(naq)) > :lang(naq)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(nb),       :not(:lang(nb)) > :lang(nb)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2018' '\2019' } /* « » ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(nd),       :not(:lang(nd)) > :lang(nd)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ne),       :not(:lang(ne)) > :lang(ne)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(nl),       :not(:lang(nl)) > :lang(nl)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(nmg),      :not(:lang(nmg)) > :lang(nmg)           { quotes: '\201e' '\201d' '\00ab' '\00bb' } /* „ ” « » */
    :root:lang(nn),       :not(:lang(nn)) > :lang(nn)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2018' '\2019' } /* « » ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(nnh),      :not(:lang(nnh)) > :lang(nnh)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(nus),      :not(:lang(nus)) > :lang(nus)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(nyn),      :not(:lang(nyn)) > :lang(nyn)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(pa),       :not(:lang(pa)) > :lang(pa)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(pl),       :not(:lang(pl)) > :lang(pl)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201d' '\00ab' '\00bb' } /* „ ” « » */
    :root:lang(pt),       :not(:lang(pt)) > :lang(pt)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(pt-PT),    :not(:lang(pt-PT)) > :lang(pt-PT)       { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(rn),       :not(:lang(rn)) > :lang(rn)             { quotes: '\201d' '\201d' '\2019' '\2019' } /* ” ” ’ ’ */
    :root:lang(ro),       :not(:lang(ro)) > :lang(ro)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\00ab' '\00bb' } /* “ ” « » */
    :root:lang(rof),      :not(:lang(rof)) > :lang(rof)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ru),       :not(:lang(ru)) > :lang(ru)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201e' '\201c' } /* « » „ “ */
    :root:lang(rw),       :not(:lang(rw)) > :lang(rw)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\2018' '\2019' } /* « » ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(rwk),      :not(:lang(rwk)) > :lang(rwk)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(saq),      :not(:lang(saq)) > :lang(saq)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(sbp),      :not(:lang(sbp)) > :lang(sbp)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(seh),      :not(:lang(seh)) > :lang(seh)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ses),      :not(:lang(ses)) > :lang(ses)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(sg),       :not(:lang(sg)) > :lang(sg)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(shi),      :not(:lang(shi)) > :lang(shi)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201e' '\201d' } /* « » „ ” */
    :root:lang(shi-Latn), :not(:lang(shi-Latn)) > :lang(shi-Latn) { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201e' '\201d' } /* « » „ ” */
    :root:lang(si),       :not(:lang(si)) > :lang(si)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(sk),       :not(:lang(sk)) > :lang(sk)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(sl),       :not(:lang(sl)) > :lang(sl)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\201a' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‚ ‘ */
    :root:lang(sn),       :not(:lang(sn)) > :lang(sn)             { quotes: '\201d' '\201d' '\2019' '\2019' } /* ” ” ’ ’ */
    :root:lang(so),       :not(:lang(so)) > :lang(so)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(sq),       :not(:lang(sq)) > :lang(sq)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201c' '\201d' } /* « » “ ” */
    :root:lang(sr),       :not(:lang(sr)) > :lang(sr)             { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\2018' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‘ ‘ */
    :root:lang(sr-Latn),  :not(:lang(sr-Latn)) > :lang(sr-Latn)   { quotes: '\201e' '\201c' '\2018' '\2018' } /* „ “ ‘ ‘ */
    :root:lang(sv),       :not(:lang(sv)) > :lang(sv)             { quotes: '\201d' '\201d' '\2019' '\2019' } /* ” ” ’ ’ */
    :root:lang(sw),       :not(:lang(sw)) > :lang(sw)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(swc),      :not(:lang(swc)) > :lang(swc)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ta),       :not(:lang(ta)) > :lang(ta)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(te),       :not(:lang(te)) > :lang(te)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(teo),      :not(:lang(teo)) > :lang(teo)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(th),       :not(:lang(th)) > :lang(th)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(ti-ER),    :not(:lang(ti-ER)) > :lang(ti-ER)       { quotes: '\2018' '\2019' '\201c' '\201d' } /* ‘ ’ “ ” */
    :root:lang(to),       :not(:lang(to)) > :lang(to)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(tr),       :not(:lang(tr)) > :lang(tr)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(twq),      :not(:lang(twq)) > :lang(twq)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(tzm),      :not(:lang(tzm)) > :lang(tzm)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(uk),       :not(:lang(uk)) > :lang(uk)             { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201e' '\201c' } /* « » „ “ */
    :root:lang(ur),       :not(:lang(ur)) > :lang(ur)             { quotes: '\201d' '\201c' '\2019' '\2018' } /* ” “ ’ ‘ */
    :root:lang(ur-IN),    :not(:lang(ur-IN)) > :lang(ur-IN)       { quotes: '\0022' '\0022' '\0027' '\0027' } /* " " ' ' */
    :root:lang(uz),       :not(:lang(uz)) > :lang(uz)             { quotes: '\0022' '\0022' '\0027' '\0027' } /* " " ' ' */
    :root:lang(uz-Cyrl),  :not(:lang(uz-Cyrl)) > :lang(uz-Cyrl)   { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(vai),      :not(:lang(vai)) > :lang(vai)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(vai-Latn), :not(:lang(vai-Latn)) > :lang(vai-Latn) { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(vi),       :not(:lang(vi)) > :lang(vi)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(vun),      :not(:lang(vun)) > :lang(vun)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(xog),      :not(:lang(xog)) > :lang(xog)           { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(yav),      :not(:lang(yav)) > :lang(yav)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\00ab' '\00bb' } /* « » « » */
    :root:lang(yo),       :not(:lang(yo)) > :lang(yo)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(zgh),      :not(:lang(zgh)) > :lang(zgh)           { quotes: '\00ab' '\00bb' '\201e' '\201d' } /* « » „ ” */
    :root:lang(zh),       :not(:lang(zh)) > :lang(zh)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */
    :root:lang(zh-Hant),  :not(:lang(zh-Hant)) > :lang(zh-Hant)   { quotes: '\300c' '\300d' '\300e' '\300f' } /* 「 」 『 』 */
    :root:lang(zu),       :not(:lang(zu)) > :lang(zu)             { quotes: '\201c' '\201d' '\2018' '\2019' } /* “ ” ‘ ’ */

#### 14.3.7 Sections and headings

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    article, aside, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hgroup, nav, section {
      display: block;
    }

    h1 { margin-top: 0.67em; margin-bottom: 0.67em; font-size: 2.00em; font-weight: bold; }
    h2 { margin-top: 0.83em; margin-bottom: 0.83em; font-size: 1.50em; font-weight: bold; }
    h3 { margin-top: 1.00em; margin-bottom: 1.00em; font-size: 1.17em; font-weight: bold; }
    h4 { margin-top: 1.33em; margin-bottom: 1.33em; font-size: 1.00em; font-weight: bold; }
    h5 { margin-top: 1.67em; margin-bottom: 1.67em; font-size: 0.83em; font-weight: bold; }
    h6 { margin-top: 2.33em; margin-bottom: 2.33em; font-size: 0.67em; font-weight: bold; }

The `article`, `aside`, `nav`, and `section` elements are expected to affect the margins and font size of `h1` elements, as well as `h2`–`h5` elements that follow `h1` elements in `hgroup` elements, based on the nesting depth. If x is a selector that matches elements that are either `article`, `aside`, `nav`, or `section` elements, then the following rules capture what is expected:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    x h1 { margin-top: 0.83em; margin-bottom: 0.83em; font-size: 1.50em; }
    x x h1 { margin-top: 1.00em; margin-bottom: 1.00em; font-size: 1.17em; }
    x x x h1 { margin-top: 1.33em; margin-bottom: 1.33em; font-size: 1.00em; }
    x x x x h1 { margin-top: 1.67em; margin-bottom: 1.67em; font-size: 0.83em; }
    x x x x x h1 { margin-top: 2.33em; margin-bottom: 2.33em; font-size: 0.67em; }

    x hgroup > h1 ~ h2 { margin-top: 1.00em; margin-bottom: 1.00em; font-size: 1.17em; }
    x x hgroup > h1 ~ h2 { margin-top: 1.33em; margin-bottom: 1.33em; font-size: 1.00em; }
    x x x hgroup > h1 ~ h2 { margin-top: 1.67em; margin-bottom: 1.67em; font-size: 0.83em; }
    x x x x hgroup > h1 ~ h2 { margin-top: 2.33em; margin-bottom: 2.33em; font-size: 0.67em; }

    x hgroup > h1 ~ h3 { margin-top: 1.33em; margin-bottom: 1.33em; font-size: 1.00em; }
    x x hgroup > h1 ~ h3 { margin-top: 1.67em; margin-bottom: 1.67em; font-size: 0.83em; }
    x x x hgroup > h1 ~ h3 { margin-top: 2.33em; margin-bottom: 2.33em; font-size: 0.67em; }

    x hgroup > h1 ~ h4 { margin-top: 1.67em; margin-bottom: 1.67em; font-size: 0.83em; }
    x x hgroup > h1 ~ h4 { margin-top: 2.33em; margin-bottom: 2.33em; font-size: 0.67em; }

    x hgroup > h1 ~ h5 { margin-top: 2.33em; margin-bottom: 2.33em; font-size: 0.67em; }

#### 14.3.8 Lists

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    dir, dd, dl, dt, menu, ol, ul { display: block; }
    li { display: list-item; }

    dir, dl, menu, ol, ul { margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; }

    dir dir, dir dl, dir menu, dir ol, dir ul,
    dl dir, dl dl, dl menu, dl ol, dl ul,
    menu dir, menu dl, menu menu, menu ol, menu ul,
    ol dir, ol dl, ol menu, ol ol, ol ul,
    ul dir, ul dl, ul menu, ul ol, ul ul {
      margin-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0;
    }

    dd { margin-left: 40px; } /* LTR-specific: use 'margin-right' for rtl elements */
    dir, menu, ol, ul { padding-left: 40px; } /* LTR-specific: use 'padding-right' for rtl elements */

    ol { list-style-type: decimal; }

    dir, menu, ul { list-style-type: disc; }

    dir dir, dir menu, dir ul,
    menu dir, menu menu, menu ul,
    ol dir, ol menu, ol ul,
    ul dir, ul menu, ul ul {
      list-style-type: circle;
    }

    dir dir dir, dir dir menu, dir dir ul,
    dir menu dir, dir menu menu, dir menu ul,
    dir ol dir, dir ol menu, dir ol ul,
    dir ul dir, dir ul menu, dir ul ul,
    menu dir dir, menu dir menu, menu dir ul,
    menu menu dir, menu menu menu, menu menu ul,
    menu ol dir, menu ol menu, menu ol ul,
    menu ul dir, menu ul menu, menu ul ul,
    ol dir dir, ol dir menu, ol dir ul,
    ol menu dir, ol menu menu, ol menu ul,
    ol ol dir, ol ol menu, ol ol ul,
    ol ul dir, ol ul menu, ol ul ul,
    ul dir dir, ul dir menu, ul dir ul,
    ul menu dir, ul menu menu, ul menu ul,
    ul ol dir, ul ol menu, ul ol ul,
    ul ul dir, ul ul menu, ul ul ul {
      list-style-type: square;
    }

The following rules are also expected to apply, as presentational hints:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    ol[type=1], li[type=1] { list-style-type: decimal; }
    ol[type=a], li[type=a] { list-style-type: lower-alpha; }
    ol[type=A], li[type=A] { list-style-type: upper-alpha; }
    ol[type=i], li[type=i] { list-style-type: lower-roman; }
    ol[type=I], li[type=I] { list-style-type: upper-roman; }
    ul[type=none i], li[type=none i] { list-style-type: none; }
    ul[type=disc i], li[type=disc i] { list-style-type: disc; }
    ul[type=circle i], li[type=circle i] { list-style-type: circle; }
    ul[type=square i], li[type=square i] { list-style-type: square; }

When rendering `li` elements, non-CSS user agents are expected to use the ordinal value of the `li` element to render the counter in the list item marker.

This specification does not yet define the CSS-specific rules for rendering `li` elements, because CSS doesn't yet provide sufficient hooks for this purpose.

#### 14.3.9 Tables

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    table { display: table; }
    caption { display: table-caption; }
    colgroup, colgroup[hidden] { display: table-column-group; }
    col, col[hidden] { display: table-column; }
    thead, thead[hidden] { display: table-header-group; }
    tbody, tbody[hidden] { display: table-row-group; }
    tfoot, tfoot[hidden] { display: table-footer-group; }
    tr, tr[hidden] { display: table-row; }
    td, th, td[hidden], th[hidden] { display: table-cell; }

    colgroup[hidden], col[hidden], thead[hidden], tbody[hidden],
    tfoot[hidden], tr[hidden], td[hidden], th[hidden] {
      visibility: collapse;
    }

    table {
      box-sizing: border-box;
      border-spacing: 2px;
      border-collapse: separate;
      text-indent: initial;
    }
    td, th { padding: 1px; }
    th { font-weight: bold; }

    thead, tbody, tfoot, table > tr { vertical-align: middle; }
    tr, td, th { vertical-align: inherit; }

    table, td, th { border-color: gray; }
    thead, tbody, tfoot, tr { border-color: inherit; }
    table[rules=none i], table[rules=groups i], table[rules=rows i],
    table[rules=cols i], table[rules=all i], table[frame=void i],
    table[frame=above i], table[frame=below i], table[frame=hsides i],
    table[frame=lhs i], table[frame=rhs i], table[frame=vsides i],
    table[frame=box i], table[frame=border i],
    table[rules=none i] > tr > td, table[rules=none i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=groups i] > tr > td, table[rules=groups i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=rows i] > tr > td, table[rules=rows i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=cols i] > tr > td, table[rules=cols i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=all i] > tr > td, table[rules=all i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=none i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=none i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=groups i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=groups i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=rows i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=rows i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=cols i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=cols i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=all i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=all i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=none i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=none i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=groups i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=groups i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=rows i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=rows i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=cols i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=cols i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=all i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=all i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=none i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=none i] > tfoot > tr > th,
    table[rules=groups i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=groups i] > tfoot > tr > th,
    table[rules=rows i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=rows i] > tfoot > tr > th,
    table[rules=cols i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=cols i] > tfoot > tr > th,
    table[rules=all i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=all i] > tfoot > tr > th {
      border-color: black;
    }

The following rules are also expected to apply, as presentational hints:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    table[align=left i] { float: left; }
    table[align=right i] { float: right; }
    table[align=center i] { margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; }
    thead[align=absmiddle i], tbody[align=absmiddle i], tfoot[align=absmiddle i],
    tr[align=absmiddle i], td[align=absmiddle i], th[align=absmiddle i] {
      text-align: center;
    }

    caption[align=bottom i] { caption-side: bottom; }
    p[align=left i], h1[align=left i], h2[align=left i], h3[align=left i],
    h4[align=left i], h5[align=left i], h6[align=left i] {
      text-align: left;
    }
    p[align=right i], h1[align=right i], h2[align=right i], h3[align=right i],
    h4[align=right i], h5[align=right i], h6[align=right i] {
      text-align: right;
    }
    p[align=center i], h1[align=center i], h2[align=center i], h3[align=center i],
    h4[align=center i], h5[align=center i], h6[align=center i] {
      text-align: center;
    }
    p[align=justify i], h1[align=justify i], h2[align=justify i], h3[align=justify i],
    h4[align=justify i], h5[align=justify i], h6[align=justify i] {
      text-align: justify;
    }
    thead[valign=top i], tbody[valign=top i], tfoot[valign=top i],
    tr[valign=top i], td[valign=top i], th[valign=top i] {
      vertical-align: top;
    }
    thead[valign=middle i], tbody[valign=middle i], tfoot[valign=middle i],
    tr[valign=middle i], td[valign=middle i], th[valign=middle i] {
      vertical-align: middle;
    }
    thead[valign=bottom i], tbody[valign=bottom i], tfoot[valign=bottom i],
    tr[valign=bottom i], td[valign=bottom i], th[valign=bottom i] {
      vertical-align: bottom;
    }
    thead[valign=baseline i], tbody[valign=baseline i], tfoot[valign=baseline i],
    tr[valign=baseline i], td[valign=baseline i], th[valign=baseline i] {
      vertical-align: baseline;
    }

    td[nowrap], th[nowrap] { white-space: nowrap; }

    table[rules=none i], table[rules=groups i], table[rules=rows i],
    table[rules=cols i], table[rules=all i] {
      border-style: hidden;
      border-collapse: collapse;
    }
    table[border] { border-style: outset; } /* only if border is not equivalent to zero */
    table[frame=void i] { border-style: hidden; }
    table[frame=above i] { border-style: outset hidden hidden hidden; }
    table[frame=below i] { border-style: hidden hidden outset hidden; }
    table[frame=hsides i] { border-style: outset hidden outset hidden; }
    table[frame=lhs i] { border-style: hidden hidden hidden outset; }
    table[frame=rhs i] { border-style: hidden outset hidden hidden; }
    table[frame=vsides i] { border-style: hidden outset; }
    table[frame=box i], table[frame=border i] { border-style: outset; }

    table[border] > tr > td, table[border] > tr > th,
    table[border] > thead > tr > td, table[border] > thead > tr > th,
    table[border] > tbody > tr > td, table[border] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[border] > tfoot > tr > td, table[border] > tfoot > tr > th {
      /* only if border is not equivalent to zero */
      border-width: 1px;
      border-style: inset;
    }
    table[rules=none i] > tr > td, table[rules=none i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=none i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=none i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=none i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=none i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=none i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=none i] > tfoot > tr > th,
    table[rules=groups i] > tr > td, table[rules=groups i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=groups i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=groups i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=groups i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=groups i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=groups i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=groups i] > tfoot > tr > th,
    table[rules=rows i] > tr > td, table[rules=rows i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=rows i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=rows i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=rows i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=rows i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=rows i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=rows i] > tfoot > tr > th {
      border-width: 1px;
      border-style: none;
    }
    table[rules=cols i] > tr > td, table[rules=cols i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=cols i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=cols i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=cols i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=cols i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=cols i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=cols i] > tfoot > tr > th {
      border-width: 1px;
      border-style: none solid;
    }
    table[rules=all i] > tr > td, table[rules=all i] > tr > th,
    table[rules=all i] > thead > tr > td, table[rules=all i] > thead > tr > th,
    table[rules=all i] > tbody > tr > td, table[rules=all i] > tbody > tr > th,
    table[rules=all i] > tfoot > tr > td, table[rules=all i] > tfoot > tr > th {
      border-width: 1px;
      border-style: solid;
    }

    table[rules=groups i] > colgroup {
      border-left-width: 1px;
      border-left-style: solid;
      border-right-width: 1px;
      border-right-style: solid;
    }
    table[rules=groups i] > thead,
    table[rules=groups i] > tbody,
    table[rules=groups i] > tfoot {
      border-top-width: 1px;
      border-top-style: solid;
      border-bottom-width: 1px;
      border-bottom-style: solid;
    }

    table[rules=rows i] > tr, table[rules=rows i] > thead > tr,
    table[rules=rows i] > tbody > tr, table[rules=rows i] > tfoot > tr {
      border-top-width: 1px;
      border-top-style: solid;
      border-bottom-width: 1px;
      border-bottom-style: solid;
    }

In quirks mode, the following rules are also expected to apply:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    table {
      font-weight: initial;
      font-style: initial;
      font-variant: initial;
      font-size: initial;
      line-height: initial;
      white-space: initial;
      text-align: initial;
    }

For the purposes of the CSS table model, the `col` element is expected to be treated as if it was present as many times as its `span` attribute specifies.

For the purposes of the CSS table model, the `colgroup` element, if it contains no `col` element, is expected to be treated as if it had as many such children as its `span` attribute specifies.

For the purposes of the CSS table model, the `colspan` and `rowspan` attributes on `td` and `th` elements are expected to provide the special knowledge regarding cells spanning rows and columns.

In HTML documents, the user agent is expected to force the 'display' property of `form` elements that are children of `table`, `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, or `tr` elements to compute to 'none', irrespective of CSS rules.

The `table` element's `cellspacing` attribute maps to the pixel length property 'border-spacing' on the element.

The `table` element's `cellpadding` attribute maps to the pixel length properties 'padding-top', 'padding-right', 'padding-bottom', and 'padding-left' of any `td` and `th` elements that have corresponding cells in the table corresponding to the `table` element.

The `table` element's `hspace` attribute maps to the dimension properties 'margin-left' and 'margin-right' on the `table` element.

The `table` element's `vspace` attribute maps to the dimension properties 'margin-top' and 'margin-bottom' on the `table` element.

The `table` element's `height` attribute maps to the dimension property 'height' on the `table` element.

The `table` element's `width` attribute maps to the dimension property 'width' on the `table` element.

The `col` element's `width` attribute maps to the dimension property 'width' on the `col` element.

The `tr` element's `height` attribute maps to the dimension property 'height' on the `tr` element.

The `td` and `th` elements' `height` attributes map to the dimension property 'height' on the element.

The `td` and `th` elements' `width` attributes map to the dimension property 'width' on the element.

The `caption` element unless specified otherwise below, and the `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `tr`, `td`, and `th` elements when they have an `align` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for either the string "`center`" or the string "`middle`", are expected to center text within themselves, as if they had their 'text-align' property set to 'center' in a presentational hint, and to align descendants to the center.

The `caption`, `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `tr`, `td`, and `th` elements, when they have an `align` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`left`", are expected to left-align text within themselves, as if they had their 'text-align' property set to 'left' in a presentational hint, and to align descendants to the left.

The `caption`, `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `tr`, `td`, and `th` elements, when they have an `align` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`right`", are expected to right-align text within themselves, as if they had their 'text-align' property set to 'right' in a presentational hint, and to align descendants to the right.

The `caption`, `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `tr`, `td`, and `th` elements, when they have an `align` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`justify`", are expected to full-justify text within themselves, as if they had their 'text-align' property set to 'justify' in a presentational hint, and to align descendants to the left.

User agents are expected to have a rule in their user agent stylesheet that matches `th` elements that have a parent node whose computed value for the 'text-align' property is its initial value, whose declaration block consists of just a single declaration that sets the 'text-align' property to the value 'center'.

When a `table`, `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `tr`, `td`, or `th` element has a `background` attribute set to a non-empty value, the new value is expected to be resolved relative to the element, and if this is successful, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'background-image' property to the resulting absolute URL.

When a `table`, `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `tr`, `td`, or `th` element has a `bgcolor` attribute set, the new value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'background-color' property to the resulting colour.

When a `table` element has a `bordercolor` attribute, its value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'border-top-color', 'border-right-color', 'border-bottom-color', and 'border-right-color' properties to the resulting colour.

The `table` element's `border` attribute maps to the pixel length properties 'border-top-width', 'border-right-width', 'border-bottom-width', 'border-left-width' on the element. If the attribute is present but parsing the attribute's value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers generates an error, a default value of 1px is expected to be used for that property instead.

Rules marked "only if border is not equivalent to zero" in the CSS block above is expected to only be applied if the `border` attribute mentioned in the selectors for the rule is not only present but, when parsed using the rules for parsing non-negative integers, is also found to have a value other than zero or to generate an error.

In quirks mode, a `td` element or a `th` element that has a `nowrap` attribute but also has a `width` attribute whose value, when parsed using the rules for parsing dimension values, is found to be a length (not an error or a number classified as a percentage), is expected to have a presentational hint setting the element's 'white-space' property to 'normal', overriding the rule in the CSS block above that sets it to 'nowrap'.

User agents are expected to render sorting interface `th` elements in such a manner as to indicate that activating the elements will cause the table to be sorted.

#### 14.3.10 Margin collapsing quirks

A node is substantial if it is a text node that is not inter-element whitespace, or if it is an element node.

A node is blank if it is an element that contains no substantial nodes.

The elements with default margins are the following elements: `blockquote`, `dir`, `dl`, `h1`, `h2`, `h3`, `h4`, `h5`, `h6`, `listing`, `menu`, `multicol`, `ol`, `p`, `plaintext`, `pre`, `ul`, `xmp`

In quirks mode, any element with default margins that is the child of a `body`, `td`, or `th` element and has no substantial previous siblings is expected to have a user-agent level style sheet rule that sets its 'margin-top' property to zero.

In quirks mode, any element with default margins that is the child of a `body`, `td`, or `th` element, has no substantial previous siblings, and is blank, is expected to have a user-agent level style sheet rule that sets its 'margin-bottom' property to zero also.

In quirks mode, any element with default margins that is the child of a `td` or `th` element, has no substantial following siblings, and is blank, is expected to have a user-agent level style sheet rule that sets its 'margin-top' property to zero.

In quirks mode, any `p` element that is the child of a `td` or `th` element and has no substantial following siblings, is expected to have a user-agent level style sheet rule that sets its 'margin-bottom' property to zero.

#### 14.3.11 Form controls

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    input, select, option, optgroup, button, textarea, keygen {
      text-indent: initial;
    }

    textarea { white-space: pre-wrap; }

    input[type="radio"], input[type="checkbox"], input[type="reset"], input[type="button"],
    input[type="submit"], select, button {
      box-sizing: border-box;
    }

In quirks mode, the following rules are also expected to apply:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    input:not([type=image]), textarea { box-sizing: border-box; }

Each kind of form control is also given a specific default binding, as described in subsequent sections, which implements the look and feel of the control.

#### 14.3.12 The `hr` element

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    hr { color: gray; border-style: inset; border-width: 1px; margin: 0.5em auto; }

The following rules are also expected to apply, as presentational hints:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    hr[align=left] { margin-left: 0; margin-right: auto; }
    hr[align=right] { margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0; }
    hr[align=center] { margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; }
    hr[color], hr[noshade] { border-style: solid; }

If an `hr` element has either a `color` attribute or a `noshade` attribute, and furthermore also has a `size` attribute, and parsing that attribute's value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers doesn't generate an error, then the user agent is expected to use the parsed value divided by two as a pixel length for presentational hints for the properties 'border-top-width', 'border-right-width', 'border-bottom-width', and 'border-left-width' on the element.

Otherwise, if an `hr` element has neither a `color` attribute nor a `noshade` attribute, but does have a `size` attribute, and parsing that attribute's value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers doesn't generate an error, then: if the parsed value is one, then the user agent is expected to use the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'border-bottom-width' to 0; otherwise, if the parsed value is greater than one, then the user agent is expected to use the parsed value minus two as a pixel length for presentational hints for the 'height' property on the element.

The `width` attribute on an `hr` element maps to the dimension property 'width' on the element.

When an `hr` element has a `color` attribute, its value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'color' property to the resulting colour.

#### 14.3.13 The `fieldset` and `legend` elements

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    fieldset {
      margin-left: 2px; margin-right: 2px;
      border: groove 2px ThreeDFace;
      padding: 0.35em 0.625em 0.75em;
      min-width: min-content;
    }

    legend {
      padding-left: 2px; padding-right: 2px;
    }

The `fieldset` element is expected to establish a new block formatting context.

If the `fieldset` element has a child that matches the conditions in the list below, then the first such child is the `fieldset` element's rendered legend:

- The child is a `legend` element.
- The child is not out-of-flow (e.g. not absolutely positioned or floated).
- The child is generating a box (e.g. it is not 'display:none').

A `fieldset` element's rendered legend, if any, is expected to be rendered over the top border edge of the `fieldset` element as a 'block' box (overriding any explicit 'display' value). In the absence of an explicit width, the box should shrink-wrap. If the `legend` element in question has an `align` attribute, and its value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for one of the strings in the first column of the following table, then the `legend` is expected to be rendered horizontally aligned over the border edge in the position given in the corresponding cell on the same row in the second column. If the attribute is absent or has a value that doesn't match any of the cases in the table, then the position is expected to be on the right if the 'direction' property on this element has a computed value of 'rtl', and on the left otherwise.

Attribute value | Alignment position
--- | ---
`left` | On the left
`right` | On the right
`center` | In the middle

### 14.4 Replaced elements

#### 14.4.1 Embedded content

The `embed`, `iframe`, and `video` elements are expected to be treated as replaced elements.

A `canvas` element that represents embedded content is expected to be treated as a replaced element; the contents of such elements are the element's bitmap, if any, or else a transparent black bitmap with the same intrinsic dimensions as the element. Other `canvas` elements are expected to be treated as ordinary elements in the rendering model.

An `object` element that represents an image, plugin, or nested browsing context is expected to be treated as a replaced element. Other `object` elements are expected to be treated as ordinary elements in the rendering model.

An `applet` element that represents a plugin is expected to be treated as a replaced element. Other `applet` elements are expected to be treated as ordinary elements in the rendering model.

The `audio` element, when it is exposing a user interface, is expected to be treated as a replaced element about one line high, as wide as is necessary to expose the user agent's user interface features. When an `audio` element is not exposing a user interface, the user agent is expected to force its 'display' property to compute to 'none', irrespective of CSS rules.

Whether a `video` element is exposing a user interface is not expected to affect the size of the rendering; controls are expected to be overlaid above the page content without causing any layout changes, and are expected to disappear when the user does not need them.

When a `video` element represents a poster frame or frame of video, the poster frame or frame of video is expected to be rendered at the largest size that maintains the aspect ratio of that poster frame or frame of video without being taller or wider than the `video` element itself, and is expected to be centered in the `video` element.

Any subtitles or captions are expected to be overlayed directly on top of their `video` element, as defined by the relevant rendering rules; for WebVTT, those are the rules for updating the display of WebVTT text tracks. [WEBVTT]

When the user agent starts exposing a user interface for a `video` element, the user agent should run the rules for updating the text track rendering of each of the text tracks in the `video` element's list of text tracks that are showing and whose text track kind is one of `subtitles` or `captions` (e.g., for text tracks based on WebVTT, the rules for updating the display of WebVTT text tracks). [WEBVTT]

Resizing `video` and `canvas` elements does not interrupt video playback or clear the canvas.

The following CSS rules are expected to apply:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    iframe:not([seamless]) { border: 2px inset; }
    iframe[seamless] { display: block; }
    video { object-fit: contain; }

#### 14.4.2 Images

User agents are expected to render `img` elements and `input` elements whose `type` attributes are in the Image Button state, according to the first applicable rules from the following list:

If the element represents an image
  The user agent is expected to treat the element as a replaced element and render the image according to the rules for doing so defined in CSS.
If the element does not represent an image, but the element already has intrinsic dimensions (e.g. from the dimension attributes or CSS rules), and either:

- the user agent has reason to believe that the image will become available and be rendered in due course, or
- the element has no `alt` attribute, or
- the `Document` is in quirks mode

  The user agent is expected to treat the element as a replaced element whose content is the text that the element represents, if any, optionally alongside an icon indicating that the image is being obtained (if applicable). For `input` elements, the element is expected to appear button-like to indicate that the element is a button.
If the element is an `img` element that represents some text and the user agent does not expect this to change
  The user agent is expected to treat the element as a non-replaced phrasing element whose content is the text, optionally with an icon indicating that an image is missing, so that the user can request the image be displayed or investigate why it is not rendering. In non-graphical contexts, such an icon should be omitted.
If the element is an `img` element that represents nothing and the user agent does not expect this to change
  The user agent is expected to treat the element as an empty inline element. (In the absence of further styles, this will cause the element to essentially not be rendered.)
If the element is an `input` element that does not represent an image and the user agent does not expect this to change
  The user agent is expected to treat the element as a replaced element consisting of a button whose content is the element's alternative text. The intrinsic dimensions of the button are expected to be about one line in height and whatever width is necessary to render the text on one line.

The icons mentioned above are expected to be relatively small so as not to disrupt most text but be easily clickable. In a visual environment, for instance, icons could be 16 pixels by 16 pixels square, or 1em by 1em if the images are scalable. In an audio environment, the icon could be a short bleep. The icons are intended to indicate to the user that they can be used to get to whatever options the UA provides for images, and, where appropriate, are expected to provide access to the context menu that would have come up if the user interacted with the actual image.

All animated images with the same absolute URL and the same image data are expected to be rendered synchronised to the same timeline as a group, with the timeline starting at the time of the least recent addition to the group.

In other words, when a second image with the same absolute URL and animated image data is inserted into a document, it jumps to the point in the animation cycle that is currently being displayed by the first image.

When a user agent is to restart the animation for an `img` element showing an animated image, all animated images with the same absolute URL and the same image data in that `img` element's node document are expected to restart their animation from the beginning.

The following CSS rules are expected to apply when the `Document` is in quirks mode:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    img[align=left i] { margin-right: 3px; }
    img[align=right i] { margin-left: 3px; }

#### 14.4.3 Attributes for embedded content and images

The following CSS rules are expected to apply as presentational hints:

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    iframe[frameborder=0], iframe[frameborder=no i] { border: none; }

    applet[align=left i], embed[align=left i], iframe[align=left i],
    img[align=left i], input[type=image i][align=left i], object[align=left i] {
      float: left;
    }

    applet[align=right i], embed[align=right i], iframe[align=right i],
    img[align=right i], input[type=image i][align=right i], object[align=right i] {
      float: right;
    }

    applet[align=top i], embed[align=top i], iframe[align=top i],
    img[align=top i], input[type=image i][align=top i], object[align=top i] {
      vertical-align: top;
    }

    applet[align=baseline i], embed[align=baseline i], iframe[align=baseline i],
    img[align=baseline i], input[type=image i][align=baseline i], object[align=baseline i] {
      vertical-align: baseline;
    }

    applet[align=texttop i], embed[align=texttop i], iframe[align=texttop i],
    img[align=texttop i], input[type=image i][align=texttop i], object[align=texttop i] {
      vertical-align: text-top;
    }

    applet[align=absmiddle i], embed[align=absmiddle i], iframe[align=absmiddle i],
    img[align=absmiddle i], input[type=image i][align=absmiddle i], object[align=absmiddle i],
    applet[align=abscenter i], embed[align=abscenter i], iframe[align=abscenter i],
    img[align=abscenter i], input[type=image i][align=abscenter i], object[align=abscenter i] {
      vertical-align: middle;
    }

    applet[align=bottom i], embed[align=bottom i], iframe[align=bottom i],
    img[align=bottom i], input[type=image i][align=bottom i],
    object[align=bottom i] {
      vertical-align: bottom;
    }

When an `applet`, `embed`, `iframe`, `img`, or `object` element, or an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Image Button state, has an `align` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`center`" or the string "`middle`", the user agent is expected to act as if the element's 'vertical-align' property was set to a value that aligns the vertical middle of the element with the parent element's baseline.

The `hspace` attribute of `applet`, `embed`, `iframe`, `img`, or `object` elements, and `input` elements with a `type` attribute in the Image Button state, maps to the dimension properties 'margin-left' and 'margin-right' on the element.

The `vspace` attribute of `applet`, `embed`, `iframe`, `img`, or `object` elements, and `input` elements with a `type` attribute in the Image Button state, maps to the dimension properties 'margin-top' and 'margin-bottom' on the element.

When an `img` element, `object` element, or `input` element with a `type` attribute in the Image Button state has a `border` attribute whose value, when parsed using the rules for parsing non-negative integers, is found to be a number greater than zero, the user agent is expected to use the parsed value for eight presentational hints: four setting the parsed value as a pixel length for the element's 'border-top-width', 'border-right-width', 'border-bottom-width', and 'border-left-width' properties, and four setting the element's 'border-top-style', 'border-right-style', 'border-bottom-style', and 'border-left-style' properties to the value 'solid'.

The `width` and `height` attributes on `applet`, `embed`, `iframe`, `img`, `object` or `video` elements, and `input` elements with a `type` attribute in the Image Button state and that either represents an image or that the user expects will eventually represent an image, map to the dimension properties 'width' and 'height' on the element respectively.

#### 14.4.4 Image maps

Shapes on an image map are expected to act, for the purpose of the CSS cascade, as elements independent of the original `area` element that happen to match the same style rules but inherit from the `img` or `object` element.

For the purposes of the rendering, only the 'cursor' property is expected to have any effect on the shape.

Thus, for example, if an `area` element has a `style` attribute that sets the 'cursor' property to 'help', then when the user designates that shape, the cursor would change to a Help cursor.

Similarly, if an `area` element had a CSS rule that set its 'cursor' property to 'inherit' (or if no rule setting the 'cursor' property matched the element at all), the shape's cursor would be inherited from the `img` or `object` element of the image map, not from the parent of the `area` element.

### 14.5 Bindings

#### 14.5.1 Introduction

A number of elements have their rendering defined in terms of the 'binding' property. [BECSS]

The CSS snippets below set the 'binding' property to a user-agent-defined value, represented below by keywords like `button`. The rules then described for these bindings are only expected to apply if the element's 'binding' property has not been overridden (e.g. by the author) to have another value.

Exactly how the bindings are implemented is not specified by this specification. User agents are encouraged to make their bindings set the 'appearance' CSS property appropriately to achieve platform-native appearances for widgets, and are expected to implement any relevant animations, etc, that are appropriate for the platform. [CSSUI]

#### 14.5.2 The `button` element

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    button { binding: button; }

When the button binding applies to a `button` element, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box rendered as a button whose contents are the contents of the element.

When the `button` element's `type` attribute is in the Menu state, the user agent is expected to indicate that activating the element will display a menu, e.g. by displaying a down-pointing triangle after the button's label.

#### 14.5.3 The `details` element

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    details { binding: details; }

When the details binding applies to a `details` element, the element is expected to render as a 'block' box with its 'padding-left' property set to '40px' for left-to-right elements (LTR-specific) and with its 'padding-right' property set to '40px' for right-to-left elements. The element's shadow tree is expected to take the element's first child `summary` element, if any, and place it in a first 'block' box container, and then take the element's remaining descendants, if any, and place them in a second 'block' box container.

The first container is expected to contain at least one line box, and that line box is expected to contain a disclosure widget (typically a triangle), horizontally positioned within the left padding of the `details` element. That widget is expected to allow the user to request that the details be shown or hidden.

The second container is expected to have its 'overflow' property set to 'hidden'. When the `details` element does not have an `open` attribute, this second container is expected to be removed from the rendering.

#### 14.5.4 The `input` element as a text entry widget

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    input { binding: input-textfield; }
    input[type=password i] { binding: input-password; }
    /* later rules override this for other values of type="" */

When the input-textfield binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Text, Search, Telephone, URL, or E-mail state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box rendered as a text field.

When the input-password binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Password state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box rendered as a text field whose contents are obscured.

If these text fields provide a text selection, then, when the user changes the currect selection in such a binding, the user agent is expected to queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `select` at the element, using the user interaction task source as the task source.

If an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in one of the above states has a `size` attribute, and parsing that attribute's value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers doesn't generate an error, then the user agent is expected to use the attribute as a presentational hint for the 'width' property on the element, with the value obtained from applying the converting a character width to pixels algorithm to the value of the attribute.

If an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in one of the above states does not have a `size` attribute, then the user agent is expected to act as if it had a user-agent-level style sheet rule setting the 'width' property on the element to the value obtained from applying the converting a character width to pixels algorithm to the number 20.

The converting a character width to pixels algorithm returns (size-1)×avg + max, where size is the character width to convert, avg is the average character width of the primary font for the element for which the algorithm is being run, in pixels, and max is the maximum character width of that same font, also in pixels. (The element's 'letter-spacing' property does not affect the result.)

When the input-textfield binding applies to an element, the 'line-height' property, if it has a computed value equivalent to a value that is less than 1.0, must have a used value of 1.0.

#### 14.5.5 The `input` element as domain-specific widgets

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    input[type=datetime i] { binding: input-datetime; }
    input[type=date i] { binding: input-date; }
    input[type=month i] { binding: input-month; }
    input[type=week i] { binding: input-week; }
    input[type=time i] { binding: input-time; }
    input[type=datetime-local i] { binding: input-datetime-local; }
    input[type=number i] { binding: input-number; }

When the input-datetime binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Date and Time state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box depicting a Date and Time control.

When the input-date binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Date state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box depicting a Date control.

When the input-month binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Month state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box depicting a Month control.

When the input-week binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Week state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box depicting a Week control.

When the input-time binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Time state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box depicting a Time control.

When the input-datetime-local binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Local Date and Time state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box depicting a Local Date and Time control.

When the input-number binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Number state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box depicting a Number control.

These controls are all expected to be about one line high, and about as wide as necessary to show the widest possible value.

#### 14.5.6 The `input` element as a range control

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    input[type=range i] { binding: input-range; }

When the input-range binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Range state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box depicting a slider control.

When the control is wider than it is tall (or square), the control is expected to be a horizontal slider, with the lowest value on the right if the 'direction' property on this element has a computed value of 'rtl', and on the left otherwise. When the control is taller than it is wide, it is expected to be a vertical slider, with the lowest value on the bottom.

Predefined suggested values (provided by the `list` attribute) are expected to be shown as tick marks on the slider, which the slider can snap to.

User agents are expected to use the used value of the 'direction' property on the element to determine the direction in which the slider operates. Typically, a left-to-right ('ltr') horizontal control would have the lowest value on the left and the highest value on the right, and vice versa.

#### 14.5.7 The `input` element as a colour well

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    input[type=color i] { binding: input-color; }

When the input-color binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Colour state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box depicting a colour well, which, when activated, provides the user with a colour picker (e.g. a colour wheel or colour palette) from which the colour can be changed.

Predefined suggested values (provided by the `list` attribute) are expected to be shown in the colour picker interface, not on the colour well itself.

#### 14.5.8 The `input` element as a checkbox and radio button widgets

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    input[type=checkbox i] { binding: input-checkbox; }
    input[type=radio i] { binding: input-radio; }

When the input-checkbox binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Checkbox state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box containing a single checkbox control, with no label.

When the input-radio binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Radio Button state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box containing a single radio button control, with no label.

#### 14.5.9 The `input` element as a file upload control

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    input[type=file i] { binding: input-file; }

When the input-file binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the File Upload state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box containing a span of text giving the file name(s) of the selected files, if any, followed by a button that, when activated, provides the user with a file picker from which the selection can be changed.

#### 14.5.10 The `input` element as a button

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    input[type=submit i], input[type=reset i], input[type=button i] {
      binding: input-button;
    }

When the input-button binding applies to an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Submit Button, Reset Button, or Button state, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box rendered as a button, about one line high, containing the contents of the element's `value` attribute, if any, or text derived from the element's `type` attribute in a user-agent-defined (and probably locale-specific) fashion, if not.

#### 14.5.11 The `marquee` element

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    marquee { binding: marquee; }

When the marquee binding applies to a `marquee` element, while the element is turned on, the element is expected to render in an animated fashion according to its attributes as follows:

If the element's `behavior` attribute is in the scroll state

  Slide the contents of the element in the direction described by the `direction` attribute as defined below, such that it begins off the start side of the `marquee`, and ends flush with the inner end side.

  For example, if the `direction` attribute is left (the default), then the contents would start such that their left edge are off the side of the right edge of the `marquee`'s content area, and the contents would then slide up to the point where the left edge of the contents are flush with the left inner edge of the `marquee`'s content area.

  Once the animation has ended, the user agent is expected to increment the marquee current loop index. If the element is still turned on after this, then the user agent is expected to restart the animation.

If the element's `behavior` attribute is in the slide state

  Slide the contents of the element in the direction described by the `direction` attribute as defined below, such that it begins off the start side of the `marquee`, and ends off the end side of the `marquee`.

  For example, if the `direction` attribute is left (the default), then the contents would start such that their left edge are off the side of the right edge of the `marquee`'s content area, and the contents would then slide up to the point where the right edge of the contents are flush with the left inner edge of the `marquee`'s content area.

  Once the animation has ended, the user agent is expected to increment the marquee current loop index. If the element is still turned on after this, then the user agent is expected to restart the animation.

If the element's `behavior` attribute is in the alternate state

  When the marquee current loop index is even (or zero), slide the contents of the element in the direction described by the `direction` attribute as defined below, such that it begins flush with the start side of the `marquee`, and ends flush with the end side of the `marquee`.

  When the marquee current loop index is odd, slide the contents of the element in the opposite direction than that described by the `direction` attribute as defined below, such that it begins flush with the end side of the `marquee`, and ends flush with the start side of the `marquee`.

  For example, if the `direction` attribute is left (the default), then the contents would with their right edge flush with the right inner edge of the `marquee`'s content area, and the contents would then slide up to the point where the left edge of the contents are flush with the left inner edge of the `marquee`'s content area.

  Once the animation has ended, the user agent is expected to increment the marquee current loop index. If the element is still turned on after this, then the user agent is expected to continue the animation.

The `direction` attribute has the meanings described in the following table:

`direction` attribute state | Direction of animation | Start edge | End edge | Opposite direction
--- | --- | --- | --- | ---
left | ← Right to left | Right | Left | → Left to Right
right | → Left to Right | Left | Right | ← Right to left
up | ↑ Up (Bottom to Top) | Bottom | Top | ↓ Down (Top to Bottom)
down | ↓ Down (Top to Bottom) | Top | Bottom | ↑ Up (Bottom to Top)

In any case, the animation should proceed such that there is a delay given by the marquee scroll interval between each frame, and such that the content moves at most the distance given by the marquee scroll distance with each frame.

When a `marquee` element has a `bgcolor` attribute set, the value is expected to be parsed using the rules for parsing a legacy colour value, and if that does not return an error, the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'background-color' property to the resulting colour.

The `width` and `height` attributes on a `marquee` element map to the dimension properties 'width' and 'height' on the element respectively.

The intrinsic height of a `marquee` element with its `direction` attribute in the up or down states is 200 CSS pixels.

The `vspace` attribute of a `marquee` element maps to the dimension properties 'margin-top' and 'margin-bottom' on the element. The `hspace` attribute of a `marquee` element maps to the dimension properties 'margin-left' and 'margin-right' on the element.

The 'overflow' property on the `marquee` element is expected to be ignored; overflow is expected to always be hidden.

#### 14.5.12 The `meter` element

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    meter { binding: meter; }

When the meter binding applies to a `meter` element, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box with a 'height' of '1em' and a 'width' of '5em', a 'vertical-align' of '-0.2em', and with its contents depicting a gauge.

When the element is wider than it is tall (or square), the depiction is expected to be of a horizontal gauge, with the minimum value on the right if the 'direction' property on this element has a computed value of 'rtl', and on the left otherwise. When the element is taller than it is wide, it is expected to depict a vertical gauge, with the minimum value on the bottom.

User agents are expected to use a presentation consistent with platform conventions for gauges, if any.

Requirements for what must be depicted in the gauge are included in the definition of the `meter` element.

#### 14.5.13 The `progress` element

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    progress { binding: progress; }

When the progress binding applies to a `progress` element, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box with a 'height' of '1em' and a 'width' of '10em', and a 'vertical-align' of '-0.2em'.

When the element is wider than it is tall, the element is expected to be depicted as a horizontal progress bar, with the start on the right and the end on the left if the 'direction' property on this element has a computed value of 'rtl', and with the start on the left and the end on the right otherwise. When the element is taller than it is wide, it is expected to depicted as a vertical progress bar, with the lowest value on the bottom. When the element is square, it is expected to be depicted as a direction-independent progress widget (e.g. a circular progress ring).

User agents are expected to use a presentation consistent with platform conventions for progress bars. In particular, user agents are expected to use different presentations for determinate and indeterminate progress bars. User agents are also expected to vary the presentation based on the dimensions of the element.

For example, on some platforms for showing indeterminate progress there is an asynchronous progress indicator with square dimensions, which could be used when the element is square, and an indeterminate progress bar, which could be used when the element is wide.

Requirements for how to determine if the progress bar is determinate or indeterminate, and what progress a determinate progress bar is to show, are included in the definition of the `progress` element.

#### 14.5.14 The `select` element

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    select { binding: select; }

When the select binding applies to a `select` element whose `multiple` attribute is present, the element is expected to render as a multi-select list box.

When the select binding applies to a `select` element whose `multiple` attribute is absent, and the element's display size is greater than 1, the element is expected to render as a single-select list box.

When the element renders as a list box, it is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box whose 'height' is the height necessary to contain as many rows for items as given by the element's display size, or four rows if the attribute is absent, and whose 'width' is the width of the `select`'s labels plus the width of a scrollbar.

When the select binding applies to a `select` element whose `multiple` attribute is absent, and the element's display size is 1, the element is expected to render as a one-line drop down box whose width is the width of the `select`'s labels.

In either case (list box or drop-down box), the element's items are expected to be the element's list of options, with the element's `optgroup` element children providing headers for groups of options where applicable.

An `optgroup` element is expected to be rendered by displaying the element's `label` attribute.

An `option` element is expected to be rendered by displaying the element's label, indented under its `optgroup` element if it has one.

The width of the `select`'s labels is the wider of the width necessary to render the widest `optgroup`, and the width necessary to render the widest `option` element in the element's list of options (including its indent, if any).

If a `select` element contains a placeholder label option, the user agent is expected to render that `option` in a manner that conveys that it is a label, rather than a valid option of the control. This can include preventing the placeholder label option from being explicitly selected by the user. When the placeholder label option's selectedness is true, the control is expected to be displayed in a fashion that indicates that no valid option is currently selected.

User agents are expected to render the labels in a `select` in such a manner that any alignment remains consistent whether the label is being displayed as part of the page or in a menu control.

#### 14.5.15 The `textarea` element

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    textarea { binding: textarea; white-space: pre-wrap; }

When the textarea binding applies to a `textarea` element, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box rendered as a multiline text field. If this text field provides a selection, then, when the user changes the currect selection in such a binding, the user agent is expected to queue a task to fire a simple event that bubbles named `select` at the element, using the user interaction task source as the task source.

If the element has a `cols` attribute, and parsing that attribute's value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers doesn't generate an error, then the user agent is expected to use the attribute as a presentational hint for the 'width' property on the element, with the value being the textarea effective width (as defined below). Otherwise, the user agent is expected to act as if it had a user-agent-level style sheet rule setting the 'width' property on the element to the textarea effective width.

The textarea effective width of a `textarea` element is size×avg + sbw, where size is the element's character width, avg is the average character width of the primary font of the element, in CSS pixels, and sbw is the width of a scroll bar, in CSS pixels. (The element's 'letter-spacing' property does not affect the result.)

If the element has a `rows` attribute, and parsing that attribute's value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers doesn't generate an error, then the user agent is expected to use the attribute as a presentational hint for the 'height' property on the element, with the value being the textarea effective height (as defined below). Otherwise, the user agent is expected to act as if it had a user-agent-level style sheet rule setting the 'height' property on the element to the textarea effective height.

The textarea effective height of a `textarea` element is the height in CSS pixels of the number of lines specified the element's character height, plus the height of a scrollbar in CSS pixels.

User agents are expected to apply the 'white-space' CSS property to `textarea` elements. For historical reasons, if the element has a `wrap` attribute whose value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`off`", then the user agent is expected to treat the attribute as a presentational hint setting the element's 'white-space' property to 'pre'.

#### 14.5.16 The `keygen` element

    @namespace url(http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml);

    keygen { binding: keygen; }

When the keygen binding applies to a `keygen` element, the element is expected to render as an 'inline-block' box containing a user interface to configure the key pair to be generated.

### 14.6 Frames and framesets

User agent are expected to render `frameset` elements as a box with the height and width of the viewport, with a surface rendered according to the following layout algorithm:

1. The cols and rows variables are lists of zero or more pairs consisting of a number and a unit, the unit being one of percentage, relative, and absolute.

   Use the rules for parsing a list of dimensions to parse the value of the element's `cols` attribute, if there is one. Let cols be the result, or an empty list if there is no such attribute.

   Use the rules for parsing a list of dimensions to parse the value of the element's `rows` attribute, if there is one. Let rows be the result, or an empty list if there is no such attribute.

2. For any of the entries in cols or rows that have the number zero and the unit relative, change the entry's number to one.

3. If cols has no entries, then add a single entry consisting of the value 1 and the unit relative to cols.

   If rows has no entries, then add a single entry consisting of the value 1 and the unit relative to rows.

4. Invoke the algorithm defined below to convert a list of dimensions to a list of pixel values using cols as the input list, and the width of the surface that the `frameset` is being rendered into, in CSS pixels, as the input dimension. Let sized cols be the resulting list.

   Invoke the algorithm defined below to convert a list of dimensions to a list of pixel values using rows as the input list, and the height of the surface that the `frameset` is being rendered into, in CSS pixels, as the input dimension. Let sized rows be the resulting list.

5. Split the surface into a grid of w×h rectangles, where w is the number of entries in sized cols and h is the number of entries in sized rows.

   Size the columns so that each column in the grid is as many CSS pixels wide as the corresponding entry in the sized cols list.

   Size the rows so that each row in the grid is as many CSS pixels high as the corresponding entry in the sized rows list.

6. Let children be the list of `frame` and `frameset` elements that are children of the `frameset` element for which the algorithm was invoked.

7. For each row of the grid of rectangles created in the previous step, from top to bottom, run these substeps:

   1. For each rectangle in the row, from left to right, run these substeps:

      1. If there are any elements left in children, take the first element in the list, and assign it to the rectangle.

         If this is a `frameset` element, then recurse the entire `frameset` layout algorithm for that `frameset` element, with the rectangle as the surface.

         Otherwise, it is a `frame` element; render its nested browsing context, positoned and sized to fit the rectangle.

      2. If there are any elements left in children, remove the first element from children.

8. If the `frameset` element has a border, draw an outer set of borders around the rectangles, using the element's frame border colour.

   For each rectangle, if there is an element assigned to that rectangle, and that element has a border, draw an inner set of borders around that rectangle, using the element's frame border colour.

   For each (visible) border that does not abut a rectangle that is assigned a `frame` element with a `noresize` attribute (including rectangles in further nested `frameset` elements), the user agent is expected to allow the user to move the border, resizing the rectangles within, keeping the proportions of any nested `frameset` grids.

   A `frameset` or `frame` element has a border if the following algorithm returns true:

   1. If the element has a `frameborder` attribute whose value is not the empty string and whose first character is either a U+0031 DIGIT ONE (1) character, a U+0079 LATIN SMALL LETTER Y character (y), or a U+0059 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y character (Y), then return true.

   2. Otherwise, if the element has a `frameborder` attribute, return false.

   3. Otherwise, if the element has a parent element that is a `frameset` element, then return true if that element has a border, and false if it does not.

   4. Otherwise, return true.

   The frame border colour of a `frameset` or `frame` element is the colour obtained from the following algorithm:

   1. If the element has a `bordercolor` attribute, and applying the rules for parsing a legacy colour value to that attribute's value does not result in an error, then return the colour so obtained.

   2. Otherwise, if the element has a parent element that is a `frameset` element, then return the frame border colour of that element.

   3. Otherwise, return gray.

The algorithm to convert a list of dimensions to a list of pixel values consists of the following steps:

1. Let input list be the list of numbers and units passed to the algorithm.

   Let output list be a list of numbers the same length as input list, all zero.

   Entries in output list correspond to the entries in input list that have the same position.

2. Let input dimension be the size passed to the algorithm.

3. Let count percentage be the number of entries in input list whose unit is percentage.

   Let total percentage be the sum of all the numbers in input list whose unit is percentage.

   Let count relative be the number of entries in input list whose unit is relative.

   Let total relative be the sum of all the numbers in input list whose unit is relative.

   Let count absolute be the number of entries in input list whose unit is absolute.

   Let total absolute be the sum of all the numbers in input list whose unit is absolute.

   Let remaining space be the value of input dimension.

4. If total absolute is greater than remaining space, then for each entry in input list whose unit is absolute, set the corresponding value in output list to the number of the entry in input list multiplied by remaining space and divided by total absolute. Then, set remaining space to zero.

   Otherwise, for each entry in input list whose unit is absolute, set the corresponding value in output list to the number of the entry in input list. Then, decrement remaining space by total absolute.

5. If total percentage multiplied by the input dimension and divided by 100 is greater than remaining space, then for each entry in input list whose unit is percentage, set the corresponding value in output list to the number of the entry in input list multiplied by remaining space and divided by total percentage. Then, set remaining space to zero.

   Otherwise, for each entry in input list whose unit is percentage, set the corresponding value in output list to the number of the entry in input list multiplied by the input dimension and divided by 100. Then, decrement remaining space by total percentage multiplied by the input dimension and divided by 100.

6. For each entry in input list whose unit is relative, set the corresponding value in output list to the number of the entry in input list multiplied by remaining space and divided by total relative.

7. Return output list.

User agents working with integer values for frame widths (as opposed to user agents that can lay frames out with subpixel accuracy) are expected to distribute the remainder first to the last entry whose unit is relative, then equally (not proportionally) to each entry whose unit is percentage, then equally (not proportionally) to each entry whose unit is absolute, and finally, failing all else, to the last entry.

The contents of a `frame` element that does not have a `frameset` parent are expected to be rendered as transparent black; the user agent is expected to not render the nested browsing context in this case, and that nested browsing context is expected to have a viewport with zero width and zero height.

### 14.7 Interactive media

#### 14.7.1 Links, forms, and navigation

User agents are expected to allow the user to control aspects of hyperlink activation and form submission, such as which browsing context is to be used for the subsequent navigation.

User agents are expected to allow users to discover the destination of hyperlinks and of forms before triggering their navigation.

User agents are expected to inform the user of whether a hyperlink includes hyperlink auditing, and to let them know at a minimum which domains will be contacted as part of such auditing.

User agents may allow users to navigate browsing contexts to the resources indicated by the `cite` attributes on `q`, `blockquote`, `ins`, and `del` elements.

User agents may surface hyperlinks created by `link` elements in their user interface.

While `link` elements that create hyperlinks will match the ':link' or ':visited' pseudo-classes, will react to clicks if visible, and so forth, this does not extend to any browser interface constructs that expose those same links. Activating a link through the browser's interface, rather than in the page itself, does not trigger `click` events and the like.

#### 14.7.2 The `title` attribute

User agents are expected to expose the advisory information of elements upon user request, and to make the user aware of the presence of such information.

On interactive graphical systems where the user can use a pointing device, this could take the form of a tooltip. When the user is unable to use a pointing device, then the user agent is expected to make the content available in some other fashion, e.g. by making the element a focusable area and always displaying the advisory information of the currently focused element, or by showing the advisory information of the elements under the user's finger on a touch device as the user pans around the screen.

U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters are expected to cause line breaks in the tooltip; U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) characters are expected to render as a non-zero horizontal shift that lines up the next glyph with the next tab stop, with tab stops occurring at points that are multiples of 8 times the width of a U+0020 SPACE character.

For example, a visual user agent could make elements with a `title` attribute focusable, and could make any focused element with a `title` attribute show its tooltip under the element while the element has focus. This would allow a user to tab around the document to find all the advisory text.

As another example, a screen reader could provide an audio cue when reading an element with a tooltip, with an associated key to read the last tooltip for which a cue was played.

#### 14.7.3 Editing hosts

The current text editing caret (i.e. the active range, if it is empty and in an editing host), if any, is expected to act like an inline replaced element with the vertical dimensions of the caret and with zero width for the purposes of the CSS rendering model.

This means that even an empty block can have the caret inside it, and that when the caret is in such an element, it prevents margins from collapsing through the element.

#### 14.7.4 Text rendered in native user interfaces

User agents are expected to honor the Unicode semantics of text that is exposed in user interfaces, for example supporting the bidirectional algorithm in text shown in dialogs, title bars, pop-up menus, and tooltips. Text from the contents of elements is expected to be rendered in a manner that honors the directionality of the element from which the text was obtained. Text from attributes is expected to be rendered in a manner that honours the directionality of the attribute.

Consider the following markup, which has Hebrew text asking for a programming language, the languages being text for which a left-to-right direction is important given the punctuation in some of their names:

    <p dir="rtl" lang="he">
     <label>
      בחר שפת תכנות:
      <select>
       <option dir="ltr">C++</option>
       <option dir="ltr">C#</option>
       <option dir="ltr">FreePascal</option>
       <option dir="ltr">F#</option>
      </select>
     </label>
    </p>

If the `select` element was rendered as a drop down box, a correct rendering would ensure that the punctuation was the same both in the drop down, and in the box showing the current selection.

The directionality of attributes depends on the attribute and on the element's `dir` attribute, as the following example demonstrates. Consider this markup:

    <table>
     <tr>
      <th abbr="(א" dir=ltr>A
      <th abbr="(א" dir=rtl>A
      <th abbr="(א" dir=auto>A
    </table>

If the `abbr` attributes are rendered, e.g. in a tooltip or other user interface, the first will have a left parenthesis (because the direction is 'ltr'), the second will have a right parenthesis (because the direction is 'rtl'), and the third will have a right parenthesis (because the direction is determined from the attribute value to be 'rtl').

However, if instead the attribute was not a directionality-capable attribute, the results would be different:

    <table>
     <tr>
      <th data-abbr="(א" dir=ltr>A
      <th data-abbr="(א" dir=rtl>A
      <th data-abbr="(א" dir=auto>A
    </table>

In this case, if the user agent were to expose the `data-abbr` attribute in the user interface (e.g. in a debugging environment), the last case would be rendered with a left parenthesis, because the direction would be determined from the element's contents.

A string provided by a script (e.g. the argument to `window.alert()`) is expected to be treated as an independent set of one or more bidirectional algorithm paragraphs when displayed, as defined by the bidirectional algorithm, including, for instance, supporting the paragraph-breaking behaviour of U+000A LINE FEED (LF) characters. For the purposes of determining the paragraph level of such text in the bidirectional algorithm, this specification does not provide a higher-level override of rules P2 and P3. [BIDI]

When necessary, authors can enforce a particular direction for a given paragraph by starting it with the Unicode U+200E LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK or U+200F RIGHT-TO-LEFT MARK characters.

Thus, the following script:

    alert('\u05DC\u05DE\u05D3 HTML \u05D4\u05D9\u05D5\u05DD!')

...would always result in a message reading "למד LMTH היום!" (not "דמל HTML םויה!"), regardless of the language of the user agent interface or the direction of the page or any of its elements.

For a more complex example, consider the following script:

    /* Warning: this script does not handle right-to-left scripts correctly */
    var s;
    if (s = prompt('What is your name?')) {
      alert(s + '! Ok, Fred, ' + s + ', and Wilma will get the car.');
    }

When the user enters "`Kitty`", the user agent would alert "`Kitty! Ok, Fred, Kitty, and Wilma will get the car.`". However, if the user enters "`لا أفهم`", then the bidirectional algorithm will determine that the direction of the paragraph is right-to-left, and so the output will be the following unintended mess: "`لا أفهم! derF ,kO, لا أفهم, rac eht teg lliw amliW dna.`"

To force an alert that starts with user-provided text (or other text of unknown directionality) to render left-to-right, the string can be prefixed with a U+200E LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK character:

    var s;
    if (s = prompt('What is your name?')) {
      alert('\u200E' + s + '! Ok, Fred, ' + s + ', and Wilma will get the car.');
    }

### 14.8 Print media

User agents are expected to allow the user to request the opportunity to obtain a physical form (or a representation of a physical form) of a `Document`. For example, selecting the option to print a page or convert it to PDF format. [PDF]

When the user actually obtains a physical form (or a representation of a physical form) of a `Document`, the user agent is expected to create a new rendering of the `Document` for the print media.

### 14.9 Unstyled XML documents

HTML user agents may, in certain circumstances, find themselves rendering non-HTML documents that use vocabularies for which they lack any built-in knowledge. This section provides for a way for user agents to handle such documents in a somewhat useful manner.

While a `Document` is an unstyled document, the user agent is expected to render an unstyled document view.

A `Document` is an unstyled document while it matches the following conditions:

- The `Document` has no author style sheets (whether referenced by HTTP headers, processing instructions, elements like `link`, inline elements like `style`, or any other mechanism).
- None of the elements in the `Document` have any presentational hints.
- None of the elements in the `Document` have any CSS styling attributes.
- None of the elements in the `Document` are in any of the following namespaces: HTML namespace, SVG namespace, MathML namespace
- The `Document` has no focusable area (e.g. from XLink) other than the viewport.
- The `Document` has no hyperlinks (e.g. from XLink).
- There exists no script whose settings object specifies this `Document` as the responsible document.
- None of the elements in the `Document` have any registered event listeners.

An unstyled document view is one where the DOM is not rendered according to CSS (which would, since there are no applicable styles in this context, just result in a wall of text), but is instead rendered in a manner that is useful for a developer. This could consist of just showing the `Document` object's source, maybe with syntax highlighting, or it could consist of displaying just the DOM tree, or simply a message saying that the page is not a styled document.

If a `Document` stops being an unstyled document, then the conditions above stop applying, and thus a user agent following these requirements will switch to using the regular CSS rendering.

## 15 Obsolete features

### 15.1 Obsolete but conforming features

Features listed in this section will trigger warnings in conformance checkers.

Authors should not specify a `border` attribute on an `img` element. If the attribute is present, its value must be the string "`0`". CSS should be used instead.

Authors should not specify a `language` attribute on a `script` element. If the attribute is present, its value must be an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`JavaScript`" and either the `type` attribute must be omitted or its value must be an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`text/javascript`". The attribute should be entirely omitted instead (with the value "`JavaScript`", it has no effect), or replaced with use of the `type` attribute.

Authors should not specify the `name` attribute on `a` elements. If the attribute is present, its value must not be the empty string and must neither be equal to the value of any of the IDs in the element's home subtree other than the element's own ID, if any, nor be equal to the value of any of the other `name` attributes on `a` elements in the element's home subtree. If this attribute is present and the element has an ID, then the attribute's value must be equal to the element's ID. In earlier versions of the language, this attribute was intended as a way to specify possible targets for fragment identifiers in URLs. The `id` attribute should be used instead.

Authors should not, but may despite requirements to the contrary elsewhere in this specification, specify the `maxlength` and `size` attributes on `input` elements whose `type` attributes are in the Number state. One valid reason for using these attributes regardless is to help legacy user agents that do not support `input` elements with `type="number"` to still render the text field with a useful width.

In the HTML syntax, specifying a DOCTYPE that is an obsolete permitted DOCTYPE will also trigger a warning.

#### 15.1.1 Warnings for obsolete but conforming features

To ease the transition from HTML4 Transitional documents to the language defined in this specification, and to discourage certain features that are only allowed in very few circumstances, conformance checkers must warn the user when the following features are used in a document. These are generally old obsolete features that have no effect, and are allowed only to distinguish between likely mistakes (regular conformance errors) and mere vestigial markup or unusual and discouraged practices (these warnings).

The following features must be categorised as described above:

- The presence of an obsolete permitted DOCTYPE in an HTML document.

- The presence of a `border` attribute on an `img` element if its value is the string "`0`".

- The presence of a `language` attribute on a `script` element if its value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`JavaScript`" and if there is no `type` attribute or there is and its value is an ASCII case-insensitive match for the string "`text/javascript`".

- The presence of a `name` attribute on an `a` element, if its value is not the empty string.

- The presence of a `maxlength` attribute on an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Number state.

- The presence of a `size` attribute on an `input` element whose `type` attribute is in the Number state.

Conformance checkers must distinguish between pages that have no conformance errors and have none of these obsolete features, and pages that have no conformance errors but do have some of these obsolete features.

For example, a validator could report some pages as "Valid HTML" and others as "Valid HTML with warnings".

### 15.2 Non-conforming features

Elements in the following list are entirely obsolete, and must not be used by authors:

`applet`

  Use `embed` or `object` instead.

`acronym`

  Use `abbr` instead.

`bgsound`

  Use `audio` instead.

`dir`

  Use `ul` instead.

`frame`
`frameset`
`noframes`

  Either use `iframe` and CSS instead, or use server-side includes to generate complete pages with the various invariant parts merged in.

`isindex`

  Use an explicit `form` and text field combination instead.

`listing`

  Use `pre` and `code` instead.

`nextid`

  Use GUIDs instead.

`noembed`

  Use `object` instead of `embed` when fallback is necessary.

`plaintext`

  Use the "`text/plain`" MIME type instead.

`rb`

  Providing the ruby base directly inside the `ruby` element is sufficient; the `rb` element is unnecessary. Omit it altogether.

`strike`

  Use `del` instead if the element is marking an edit, otherwise use `s` instead.

`xmp`

  Use `pre` and `code` instead, and escape "`<`" and "`&`" characters as "`&lt;`" and "`&amp;`" respectively.

`basefont`
`big`
`blink`
`center`
`font`
`marquee`
`multicol`
`nobr`
`spacer`
`tt`

  Use appropriate elements or CSS instead.

  Where the `tt` element would have been used for marking up keyboard input, consider the `kbd` element; for variables, consider the `var` element; for computer code, consider the `code` element; and for computer output, consider the `samp` element.

  Similarly, if the `big` element is being used to denote a heading, consider using the `h1` element; if it is being used for marking up important passages, consider the `strong` element; and if it is being used for highlighting text for reference purposes, consider the `mark` element.

  See also the text-level semantics usage summary for more suggestions with examples.

The following attributes are obsolete (though the elements are still part of the language), and must not be used by authors:

`charset` on `a` elements
`charset` on `link` elements

  Use an HTTP Content-Type header on the linked resource instead.

`coords` on `a` elements
`shape` on `a` elements

  Use `area` instead of `a` for image maps.

`methods` on `a` elements
`methods` on `link` elements

  Use the HTTP OPTIONS feature instead.

`name` on `a` elements (except as noted in the previous section)
`name` on `embed` elements
`name` on `img` elements
`name` on `option` elements

  Use the `id` attribute instead.

`rev` on `a` elements
`rev` on `link` elements

  Use the `rel` attribute instead, with an opposite term. (For example, instead of `rev="made"`, use `rel="author"`.)

`urn` on `a` elements
`urn` on `link` elements

  Specify the preferred persistent identifier using the `href` attribute instead.

`accept` on `form` elements

  Use the `accept` attribute directly on the `input` elements instead.

`nohref` on `area` elements

  Omitting the `href` attribute is sufficient; the `nohref` attribute is unnecessary. Omit it altogether.

`profile` on `head` elements

  When used for declaring which `meta` terms are used in the document, unnecessary; omit it altogether, and register the names.

  When used for triggering specific user agent behaviors: use a `link` element instead.

`version` on `html` elements

  Unnecessary. Omit it altogether.

`ismap` on `input` elements

  Unnecessary. Omit it altogether. All `input` elements with a `type` attribute in the Image Button state are processed as server-side image maps.

`usemap` on `input` elements

  Use `img` instead of `input` for image maps.

`longdesc` on `iframe` elements
`longdesc` on `img` elements

  Use a regular `a` element to link to the description, or (in the case of images) use an image map to provide a link from the image to the image's description.

`lowsrc` on `img` elements

  Use a progressive JPEG image (given in the `src` attribute), instead of using two separate images.

`target` on `link` elements

  Unnecessary. Omit it altogether.

`scheme` on `meta` elements

  Use only one scheme per field, or make the scheme declaration part of the value.

`archive` on `object` elements
`classid` on `object` elements
`code` on `object` elements
`codebase` on `object` elements
`codetype` on `object` elements

  Use the `data` and `type` attributes to invoke plugins. To set parameters with these names in particular, the `param` element can be used.

`declare` on `object` elements

  Repeat the `object` element completely each time the resource is to be reused.

`standby` on `object` elements

  Optimise the linked resource so that it loads quickly or, at least, incrementally.

`type` on `param` elements
`valuetype` on `param` elements

  Use the `name` and `value` attributes without declaring value types.

`language` on `script` elements (except as noted in the previous section)

  Use the `type` attribute instead.

`event` on `script` elements
`for` on `script` elements

  Use DOM Events mechanisms to register event listeners. [DOM]

`media` on `source` elements

  Use script to select the media resource(s) to use.

`datapagesize` on `table` elements

  Unnecessary. Omit it altogether.

`summary` on `table` elements

  Use one of the techniques for describing tables given in the `table` section instead.

`abbr` on `td` elements

  Use text that begins in an unambiguous and terse manner, and include any more elaborate text after that. The `title` attribute can also be useful in including more detailed text, so that the cell's contents can be made terse. If it's a heading, use `th` (which has an `abbr` attribute).

`axis` on `td` and `th` elements

  Use the `scope` attribute on the relevant `th`.

`scope` on `td` elements

  Use `th` elements for heading cells.

`datasrc` on `a`, `applet`, `button`, `div`, `frame`, `iframe`, `img`, `input`, `label`, `legend`, `marquee`, `object`, `option`, `select`, `span`, `table`, and `textarea` elements
`datafld` on `a`, `applet`, `button`, `div`, `fieldset`, `frame`, `iframe`, `img`, `input`, `label`, `legend`, `marquee`, `object`, `param`, `select`, `span`, and `textarea` elements
`dataformatas` on `button`, `div`, `input`, `label`, `legend`, `marquee`, `object`, `option`, `select`, `span`, and `table` elements

  Use script and a mechanism such as `XMLHttpRequest` to populate the page dynamically. [XHR]

`alink` on `body` elements
`bgcolor` on `body` elements
`bottommargin` on `body` elements
`leftmargin` on `body` elements
`link` on `body` elements
`marginheight` on `body` elements
`marginwidth` on `body` elements
`rightmargin` on `body` elements
`text` on `body` elements
`margintop` on `body` elements
`vlink` on `body` elements
`clear` on `br` elements
`align` on `caption` elements
`align` on `col` elements
`char` on `col` elements
`charoff` on `col` elements
`valign` on `col` elements
`width` on `col` elements
`align` on `div` elements
`compact` on `dl` elements
`align` on `embed` elements
`hspace` on `embed` elements
`vspace` on `embed` elements
`align` on `hr` elements
`color` on `hr` elements
`noshade` on `hr` elements
`size` on `hr` elements
`width` on `hr` elements
`align` on `h1`—`h6` elements
`align` on `iframe` elements
`allowtransparency` on `iframe` elements
`frameborder` on `iframe` elements
`hspace` on `iframe` elements
`marginheight` on `iframe` elements
`marginwidth` on `iframe` elements
`scrolling` on `iframe` elements
`vspace` on `iframe` elements
`align` on `input` elements
`border` on `input` elements
`hspace` on `input` elements
`vspace` on `input` elements
`align` on `img` elements
`border` on `img` elements (except as noted in the previous section)
`hspace` on `img` elements
`vspace` on `img` elements
`align` on `legend` elements
`type` on `li` elements
`compact` on `menu` elements
`align` on `object` elements
`border` on `object` elements
`hspace` on `object` elements
`vspace` on `object` elements
`compact` on `ol` elements
`align` on `p` elements
`width` on `pre` elements
`align` on `table` elements
`bgcolor` on `table` elements
`border` on `table` elements
`bordercolor` on `table` elements
`cellpadding` on `table` elements
`cellspacing` on `table` elements
`frame` on `table` elements
`height` on `table` elements
`hspace` on `table` elements
`rules` on `table` elements
`vspace` on `table` elements
`width` on `table` elements
`align` on `tbody`, `thead`, and `tfoot` elements
`char` on `tbody`, `thead`, and `tfoot` elements
`charoff` on `tbody`, `thead`, and `tfoot` elements
`valign` on `tbody`, `thead`, and `tfoot` elements
`align` on `td` and `th` elements
`bgcolor` on `td` and `th` elements
`char` on `td` and `th` elements
`charoff` on `td` and `th` elements
`height` on `td` and `th` elements
`nowrap` on `td` and `th` elements
`valign` on `td` and `th` elements
`width` on `td` and `th` elements
`align` on `tr` elements
`bgcolor` on `tr` elements
`char` on `tr` elements
`charoff` on `tr` elements
`height` on `tr` elements
`valign` on `tr` elements
`compact` on `ul` elements
`type` on `ul` elements
`background` on `body`, `table`, `thead`, `tbody`, `tfoot`, `tr`, `td`, and `th` elements

  Use CSS instead.

### 15.3 Requirements for implementations

#### 15.3.1 The `applet` element

The `applet` element is a Java-specific variant of the `embed` element. The `applet` element is now obsoleted so that all extension frameworks (Java, .NET, Flash, etc) are handled in a consistent manner.

When the element matches any of the following conditions, it represents its contents:

- The element is still in the stack of open elements of an HTML parser or XML parser.
- The element is not in a `Document`.
- The element's node document is not fully active.
- The element's node document's active sandboxing flag set has its sandboxed plugins browsing context flag set.
- The element has an ancestor media element.
- The element has an ancestor `object` element that is not showing its fallback content.
- No Java Language runtime plugin is available.
- A Java runtime plugin is available but it is disabled.

Otherwise, the user agent should instantiate a Java Language runtime plugin, and should pass the names and values of all the attributes on the element, in the order they were added to the element, with the attributes added by the parser being ordered in source order, and then a parameter named "PARAM" whose value is null, and then all the names and values of parameters given by `param` elements that are children of the `applet` element, in tree order, to the plugin used. If the plugin supports a scriptable interface, the `HTMLAppletElement` object representing the element should expose that interface. The `applet` element represents the plugin.

The `applet` element is unaffected by the CSS 'display' property. The Java Language runtime is instantiated even if the element is hidden with a 'display:none' CSS style.

The `applet` element must implement the `HTMLAppletElement` interface.

    interface HTMLAppletElement : HTMLElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString alt;
               attribute DOMString archive;
               attribute DOMString code;
               attribute DOMString codeBase;
               attribute DOMString height;
               attribute unsigned long hspace;
               attribute DOMString name;
               attribute DOMString _object; // the underscore is not part of the identifier
               attribute unsigned long vspace;
               attribute DOMString width;
    };

The `align`, `alt`, `archive`, `code`, `height`, `hspace`, `name`, `object`, `vspace`, and `width` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name. For the purposes of reflection, the `applet` element's `object` content attribute is defined as containing a URL.

The `codeBase` IDL attribute must reflect the `codebase` content attribute, which for the purposes of reflection is defined as containing a URL.

#### 15.3.2 The `marquee` element

The `marquee` element is a presentational element that animates content. CSS transitions and animations are a more appropriate mechanism. [CSSANIMATIONS] [CSSTRANSITIONS]

The task source for tasks mentioned in this section is the DOM manipulation task source.

The `marquee` element must implement the `HTMLMarqueeElement` interface.

    interface HTMLMarqueeElement : HTMLElement {
               attribute DOMString behavior;
               attribute DOMString bgColor;
               attribute DOMString direction;
               attribute DOMString height;
               attribute unsigned long hspace;
               attribute long loop;
               attribute unsigned long scrollAmount;
               attribute unsigned long scrollDelay;
               attribute boolean trueSpeed;
               attribute unsigned long vspace;
               attribute DOMString width;

               attribute EventHandler onbounce;
               attribute EventHandler onfinish;
               attribute EventHandler onstart;

      void start();
      void stop();
    };

A `marquee` element can be turned on or turned off. When it is created, it is turned on.

When the `start()` method is called, the `marquee` element must be turned on.

When the `stop()` method is called, the `marquee` element must be turned off.

When a `marquee` element is created, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `start` at the element.

The `behavior` content attribute on `marquee` elements is an enumerated attribute with the following keywords (all non-conforming):

Keyword | State
--- | ---
`scroll` | scroll
`slide` | slide
`alternate` | alternate

The missing value default is the scroll state.

The `direction` content attribute on `marquee` elements is an enumerated attribute with the following keywords (all non-conforming):

Keyword | State
--- | ---
`left` | left
`right` | right
`up` | up
`down` | down

The missing value default is the left state.

The `truespeed` content attribute on `marquee` elements is a boolean attribute.

A `marquee` element has a marquee scroll interval, which is obtained as follows:

1. If the element has a `scrolldelay` attribute, and parsing its value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers does not return an error, then let delay be the parsed value. Otherwise, let delay be 85.

2. If the element does not have a `truespeed` attribute, and the delay value is less than 60, then let delay be 60 instead.

3. The marquee scroll interval is delay, interpreted in milliseconds.

A `marquee` element has a marquee scroll distance, which, if the element has a `scrollamount` attribute, and parsing its value using the rules for parsing non-negative integers does not return an error, is the parsed value interpreted in CSS pixels, and otherwise is 6 CSS pixels.

A `marquee` element has a marquee loop count, which, if the element has a `loop` attribute, and parsing its value using the rules for parsing integers does not return an error or a number less than 1, is the parsed value, and otherwise is −1.

The `loop` IDL attribute, on getting, must return the element's marquee loop count; and on setting, if the new value is different than the element's marquee loop count and either greater than zero or equal to −1, must set the element's `loop` content attribute (adding it if necessary) to the valid integer that represents the new value. (Other values are ignored.)

A `marquee` element also has a marquee current loop index, which is zero when the element is created.

The rendering layer will occasionally increment the marquee current loop index, which must cause the following steps to be run:

1. If the marquee loop count is −1, then abort these steps.

2. Increment the marquee current loop index by one.

3. If the marquee current loop index is now equal to or greater than the element's marquee loop count, turn off the `marquee` element and queue a task to fire a simple event named `finish` at the `marquee` element.

   Otherwise, if the `behavior` attribute is in the alternate state, then queue a task to fire a simple event named `bounce` at the `marquee` element.

   Otherwise, queue a task to fire a simple event named `start` at the `marquee` element.

The following are the event handlers (and their corresponding event handler event types) that must be supported, as event handler content attributes and event handler IDL attributes, by `marquee` elements:

Event handler | Event handler event type
--- | ---
`onbounce` | `bounce`
`onfinish` | `finish`
`onstart` | `start`

The `behavior`, `direction`, `height`, `hspace`, `vspace`, and `width` IDL attributes must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `bgColor` IDL attribute must reflect the `bgcolor` content attribute.

The `scrollAmount` IDL attribute must reflect the `scrollamount` content attribute. The default value is 6.

The `scrollDelay` IDL attribute must reflect the `scrolldelay` content attribute. The default value is 85.

The `trueSpeed` IDL attribute must reflect the `truespeed` content attribute.

#### 15.3.3 Frames

The `frameset` element acts as the body element in documents that use frames.

The `frameset` element must implement the `HTMLFrameSetElement` interface.

    interface HTMLFrameSetElement : HTMLElement {
               attribute DOMString cols;
               attribute DOMString rows;
    };
    HTMLFrameSetElement implements WindowEventHandlers;

The `cols` and `rows` IDL attributes of the `frameset` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `frameset` element exposes as event handler content attributes a number of the event handlers of the `Window` object. It also mirrors their event handler IDL attributes.

The `onblur`, `onerror`, `onfocus`, `onload`, `onresize`, and `onscroll` event handlers of the `Window` object, exposed on the `frameset` element, replace the generic event handlers with the same names normally supported by HTML elements.

The `frame` element defines a nested browsing context similar to the `iframe` element, but rendered within a `frameset` element.

A `frame` element is said to be an active `frame` element when it is in a `Document`.

When a `frame` element is created as an active `frame` element, or becomes an active `frame` element after not having been one, the user agent must create a nested browsing context, and then process the `frame` attributes for the first time.

When a `frame` element stops being an active `frame` element, the user agent must discard the nested browsing context.

Whenever a `frame` element with a nested browsing context has its `src` attribute set, changed, or removed, the user agent must process the `frame` attributes.

When the user agent is to process the `frame` attributes, it must run the first appropriate steps from the following list:

If the element has no `src` attribute specified, and the user agent is processing the `frame`'s attributes for the first time

  Queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the `frame` element.

Otherwise

  1. If the value of the `src` attribute is the empty string, let url be the string "`about:blank`".

     Otherwise, resolve the value of the `src` attribute, relative to the `frame` element.

     If that is not successful, then let url be the string "`about:blank`". Otherwise, let url be the resulting absolute URL.

  2. Navigate the element's child browsing context to url.

Any navigation required of the user agent in the process the `frame` attributes algorithm must be completed as an explicit self-navigation override and with the `frame` element's node document's browsing context as the source browsing context.

Furthermore, if the active document of the element's child browsing context before such a navigation was not completely loaded at the time of the new navigation, then the navigation must be completed with replacement enabled.

Similarly, if the child browsing context's session history contained only one `Document` when the process the `frame` attributes algorithm was invoked, and that was the `about:blank` `Document` created when the child browsing context was created, then any navigation required of the user agent in that algorithm must be completed with replacement enabled.

When a `Document` in a `frame` is marked as completely loaded, the user agent must queue a task to fire a simple event named `load` at the `frame` element.

The task source for the tasks above is the DOM manipulation task source.

When a `frame` element's nested browsing context's active document is not ready for post-load tasks, and when anything is delaying the load event of the `frame` element's browsing context's active document, and when the `frame` element's browsing context is in the delaying `load` events mode, the `frame` must delay the load event of its document.

When the browsing context is created, if a `name` attribute is present, the browsing context name must be set to the value of this attribute; otherwise, the browsing context name must be set to the empty string.

Whenever the `name` attribute is set, the nested browsing context's name must be changed to the new value. If the attribute is removed, the browsing context name must be set to the empty string.

The `frame` element must implement the `HTMLFrameElement` interface.

    interface HTMLFrameElement : HTMLElement {
               attribute DOMString name;
               attribute DOMString scrolling;
               attribute DOMString src;
               attribute DOMString frameBorder;
               attribute DOMString longDesc;
               attribute boolean noResize;
      readonly attribute Document? contentDocument;
      readonly attribute WindowProxy? contentWindow;

      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString marginHeight;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString marginWidth;
    };

The `name`, `scrolling`, and `src` IDL attributes of the `frame` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name. For the purposes of reflection, the `frame` element's `src` content attribute is defined as containing a URL.

The `frameBorder` IDL attribute of the `frame` element must reflect the element's `frameborder` content attribute.

The `longDesc` IDL attribute of the `frame` element must reflect the element's `longdesc` content attribute, which for the purposes of reflection is defined as containing a URL.

The `noResize` IDL attribute of the `frame` element must reflect the element's `noresize` content attribute.

The `contentDocument` IDL attribute of the `frame` element must return the `Document` object of the active document of the `frame` element's nested browsing context, if any and if its effective script origin is the same origin as the effective script origin specified by the incumbent settings object, or null otherwise.

The `contentWindow` IDL attribute must return the `WindowProxy` object of the `frame` element's nested browsing context.

The `marginHeight` IDL attribute of the `frame` element must reflect the element's `marginheight` content attribute.

The `marginWidth` IDL attribute of the `frame` element must reflect the element's `marginwidth` content attribute.

#### 15.3.4 Other elements, attributes and APIs

User agents must treat `acronym` elements in a manner equivalent to `abbr` elements in terms of semantics and for purposes of rendering.

    partial interface HTMLAnchorElement {
               attribute DOMString coords;
               attribute DOMString charset;
               attribute DOMString name;
               attribute DOMString rev;
               attribute DOMString shape;
    };

The `coords`, `charset`, `name`, `rev`, and `shape` IDL attributes of the `a` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLAreaElement {
               attribute boolean noHref;
    };

The `noHref` IDL attribute of the `area` element must reflect the element's `nohref` content attribute.

    partial interface HTMLBodyElement {
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString text;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString link;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString vLink;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString aLink;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString bgColor;
                                attribute DOMString background;
    };

The `text` IDL attribute of the `body` element must reflect the element's `text` content attribute.

The `link` IDL attribute of the `body` element must reflect the element's `link` content attribute.

The `aLink` IDL attribute of the `body` element must reflect the element's `alink` content attribute.

The `vLink` IDL attribute of the `body` element must reflect the element's `vlink` content attribute.

The `bgColor` IDL attribute of the `body` element must reflect the element's `bgcolor` content attribute.

The `background` IDL attribute of the `body` element must reflect the element's `background` content attribute. (The `background` content is not defined to contain a URL, despite rules regarding its handling in the rendering section above.)

    partial interface HTMLBRElement {
               attribute DOMString clear;
    };

The `clear` IDL attribute of the `br` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLTableCaptionElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
    };

The `align` IDL attribute of the `caption` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLTableColElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString ch;
               attribute DOMString chOff;
               attribute DOMString vAlign;
               attribute DOMString width;
    };

The `align` and `width` IDL attributes of the `col` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `ch` IDL attribute of the `col` element must reflect the element's `char` content attribute.

The `chOff` IDL attribute of the `col` element must reflect the element's `charoff` content attribute.

The `vAlign` IDL attribute of the `col` element must reflect the element's `valign` content attribute.

User agents must treat `dir` elements in a manner equivalent to `ul` elements in terms of semantics and for purposes of rendering.

The `dir` element must implement the `HTMLDirectoryElement` interface.

    interface HTMLDirectoryElement : HTMLElement {
               attribute boolean compact;
    };

The `compact` IDL attribute of the `dir` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLDivElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
    };

The `align` IDL attribute of the `div` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLDListElement {
               attribute boolean compact;
    };

The `compact` IDL attribute of the `dl` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLEmbedElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString name;
    };

The `name` and `align` IDL attributes of the `embed` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `font` element must implement the `HTMLFontElement` interface.

    interface HTMLFontElement : HTMLElement {
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString color;
                                attribute DOMString face;
                                attribute DOMString size;
    };

The `color`, `face`, and `size` IDL attributes of the `font` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLHeadingElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
    };

The `align` IDL attribute of the `h1`–`h6` elements must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `profile` IDL attribute on `head` elements (with the `HTMLHeadElement` interface) is intentionally omitted. Unless so required by another applicable specification, implementations would therefore not support this attribute. (It is mentioned here as it was defined in a previous version of the DOM specifications.)

    partial interface HTMLHRElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString color;
               attribute boolean noShade;
               attribute DOMString size;
               attribute DOMString width;
    };

The `align`, `color`, `size`, and `width` IDL attributes of the `hr` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `noShade` IDL attribute of the `hr` element must reflect the element's `noshade` content attribute.

    partial interface HTMLHtmlElement {
               attribute DOMString version;
    };

The `version` IDL attribute of the `html` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLIFrameElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString scrolling;
               attribute DOMString frameBorder;
               attribute DOMString longDesc;

      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString marginHeight;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString marginWidth;
    };

The `align` and `scrolling` IDL attributes of the `iframe` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `frameBorder` IDL attribute of the `iframe` element must reflect the element's `frameborder` content attribute.

The `longDesc` IDL attribute of the `iframe` element must reflect the element's `longdesc` content attribute, which for the purposes of reflection is defined as containing a URL.

The `marginHeight` IDL attribute of the `iframe` element must reflect the element's `marginheight` content attribute.

The `marginWidth` IDL attribute of the `iframe` element must reflect the element's `marginwidth` content attribute.

    partial interface HTMLImageElement {
               attribute DOMString name;
               attribute DOMString lowsrc;
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute unsigned long hspace;
               attribute unsigned long vspace;
               attribute DOMString longDesc;

      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString border;
    };

The `name`, `align`, `border`, `hspace`, and `vspace` IDL attributes of the `img` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `longDesc` IDL attribute of the `img` element must reflect the element's `longdesc` content attribute, which for the purposes of reflection is defined as containing a URL.

The `lowsrc` IDL attribute of the `img` element must reflect the element's `lowsrc` content attribute, which for the purposes of reflection is defined as containing a URL.

    partial interface HTMLInputElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString useMap;
    };

The `align` IDL attribute of the `input` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `useMap` IDL attribute of the `input` element must reflect the element's `usemap` content attribute.

    partial interface HTMLLegendElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
    };

The `align` IDL attribute of the `legend` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLLIElement {
               attribute DOMString type;
    };

The `type` IDL attribute of the `li` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLLinkElement {
               attribute DOMString charset;
               attribute DOMString rev;
               attribute DOMString target;
    };

The `charset`, `rev`, and `target` IDL attributes of the `link` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

User agents must treat `listing` elements in a manner equivalent to `pre` elements in terms of semantics and for purposes of rendering.

    partial interface HTMLMenuElement {
               attribute boolean compact;
    };

The `compact` IDL attribute of the `menu` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLMetaElement {
               attribute DOMString scheme;
    };

User agents may treat the `scheme` content attribute on the `meta` element as an extension of the element's `name` content attribute when processing a `meta` element with a `name` attribute whose value is one that the user agent recognizes as supporting the `scheme` attribute.

User agents are encouraged to ignore the `scheme` attribute and instead process the value given to the metadata name as if it had been specified for each expected value of the `scheme` attribute.

For example, if the user agent acts on `meta` elements with `name` attributes having the value "eGMS.subject.keyword", and knows that the `scheme` attribute is used with this metadata name, then it could take the `scheme` attribute into account, acting as if it was an extension of the `name` attribute. Thus the following two `meta` elements could be treated as two elements giving values for two different metadata names, one consisting of a combination of "eGMS.subject.keyword" and "LGCL", and the other consisting of a combination of "eGMS.subject.keyword" and "ORLY":

    <!-- this markup is invalid -->
    <meta name="eGMS.subject.keyword" scheme="LGCL" content="Abandoned vehicles">
    <meta name="eGMS.subject.keyword" scheme="ORLY" content="Mah car: kthxbye">

The suggested processing of this markup, however, would be equivalent to the following:

    <meta name="eGMS.subject.keyword" content="Abandoned vehicles">
    <meta name="eGMS.subject.keyword" content="Mah car: kthxbye">

The `scheme` IDL attribute of the `meta` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLObjectElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString archive;
               attribute DOMString code;
               attribute boolean declare;
               attribute unsigned long hspace;
               attribute DOMString standby;
               attribute unsigned long vspace;
               attribute DOMString codeBase;
               attribute DOMString codeType;

      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString border;
    };

The `align`, `archive`, `border`, `code`, `declare`, `hspace`, `standby`, and `vspace` IDL attributes of the `object` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `codeBase` IDL attribute of the `object` element must reflect the element's `codebase` content attribute, which for the purposes of reflection is defined as containing a URL.

The `codeType` IDL attribute of the `object` element must reflect the element's `codetype` content attribute.

    partial interface HTMLOListElement {
               attribute boolean compact;
    };

The `compact` IDL attribute of the `ol` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLParagraphElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
    };

The `align` IDL attribute of the `p` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLParamElement {
               attribute DOMString type;
               attribute DOMString valueType;
    };

The `type` IDL attribute of the `param` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `valueType` IDL attribute of the `param` element must reflect the element's `valuetype` content attribute.

User agents must treat `plaintext` elements in a manner equivalent to `pre` elements in terms of semantics and for purposes of rendering. (The parser has special behavior for this element, though.)

    partial interface HTMLPreElement {
               attribute long width;
    };

The `width` IDL attribute of the `pre` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLScriptElement {
               attribute DOMString event;
               attribute DOMString htmlFor;
    };

The `event` and `htmlFor` IDL attributes of the `script` element must return the empty string on getting, and do nothing on setting.

    partial interface HTMLTableElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString border;
               attribute DOMString frame;
               attribute DOMString rules;
               attribute DOMString summary;
               attribute DOMString width;

      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString bgColor;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString cellPadding;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString cellSpacing;
    };

The `align`, `border`, `frame`, `summary`, `rules`, and `width`, IDL attributes of the `table` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `bgColor` IDL attribute of the `table` element must reflect the element's `bgcolor` content attribute.

The `cellPadding` IDL attribute of the `table` element must reflect the element's `cellpadding` content attribute.

The `cellSpacing` IDL attribute of the `table` element must reflect the element's `cellspacing` content attribute.

    partial interface HTMLTableSectionElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString ch;
               attribute DOMString chOff;
               attribute DOMString vAlign;
    };

The `align` IDL attribute of the `tbody`, `thead`, and `tfoot` elements must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `ch` IDL attribute of the `tbody`, `thead`, and `tfoot` elements must reflect the elements' `char` content attributes.

The `chOff` IDL attribute of the `tbody`, `thead`, and `tfoot` elements must reflect the elements' `charoff` content attributes.

The `vAlign` IDL attribute of the `tbody`, `thead`, and `tfoot` element must reflect the elements' `valign` content attributes.

    partial interface HTMLTableCellElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString axis;
               attribute DOMString height;
               attribute DOMString width;

               attribute DOMString ch;
               attribute DOMString chOff;
               attribute boolean noWrap;
               attribute DOMString vAlign;

      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString bgColor;
    };

The `align`, `axis`, `height`, and `width` IDL attributes of the `td` and `th` elements must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

The `ch` IDL attribute of the `td` and `th` elements must reflect the elements' `char` content attributes.

The `chOff` IDL attribute of the `td` and `th` elements must reflect the elements' `charoff` content attributes.

The `noWrap` IDL attribute of the `td` and `th` elements must reflect the elements' `nowrap` content attributes.

The `vAlign` IDL attribute of the `td` and `th` element must reflect the elements' `valign` content attributes.

The `bgColor` IDL attribute of the `td` and `th` elements must reflect the elements' `bgcolor` content attributes.

    partial interface HTMLTableDataCellElement {
               attribute DOMString abbr;
    };

The `abbr` IDL attribute of the `td` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

    partial interface HTMLTableRowElement {
               attribute DOMString align;
               attribute DOMString ch;
               attribute DOMString chOff;
               attribute DOMString vAlign;

      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString bgColor;
    };

The `align` IDL attribute of the `tr` element must reflect the content attribute of the same name.

The `ch` IDL attribute of the `tr` element must reflect the element's `char` content attribute.

The `chOff` IDL attribute of the `tr` element must reflect the element's `charoff` content attribute.

The `vAlign` IDL attribute of the `tr` element must reflect the element's `valign` content attribute.

The `bgColor` IDL attribute of the `tr` element must reflect the element's `bgcolor` content attribute.

    partial interface HTMLUListElement {
               attribute boolean compact;
               attribute DOMString type;
    };

The `compact` and `type` IDL attributes of the `ul` element must reflect the respective content attributes of the same name.

User agents must treat `xmp` elements in a manner equivalent to `pre` elements in terms of semantics and for purposes of rendering. (The parser has special behavior for this element though.)

The `blink`, `bgsound`, `isindex`, `multicol`, `nextid`, `rb`, and `spacer` elements must use the `HTMLUnknownElement` interface.

    partial interface Document {
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString fgColor;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString linkColor;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString vlinkColor;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString alinkColor;
      [TreatNullAs=EmptyString] attribute DOMString bgColor;

      readonly attribute HTMLCollection anchors;
      readonly attribute HTMLCollection applets;

      void clear();
      void captureEvents();
      void releaseEvents();

      readonly attribute HTMLAllCollection all;
    };

The attributes of the `Document` object listed in the first column of the following table must reflect the content attribute on the body element with the name given in the corresponding cell in the second column on the same row, if the body element is a `body` element (as opposed to a `frameset` element). When there is no body element or if it is a `frameset` element, the attributes must instead return the empty string on getting and do nothing on setting.

IDL attribute | Content attribute
--- | ---
`fgColor` | `text`
`linkColor` | `link`
`vlinkColor` | `vlink`
`alinkColor` | `alink`
`bgColor` | `bgcolor`

The `anchors` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only `a` elements with `name` attributes.

The `applets` attribute must return an `HTMLCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches only `applet` elements.

The `clear()`, `captureEvents()`, and `releaseEvents()` methods must do nothing.

The `all` attribute must return an `HTMLAllCollection` rooted at the `Document` node, whose filter matches all elements.

The object returned for `all` has several unusual behaviors:

- The user agent must act as if the ToBoolean() operator in JavaScript converts the object returned for `all` to the false value.

- The user agent must act as if, for the purposes of the `==` and `!=` operators in JavaScript, the object returned for `all` compares as equal to the `undefined` and `null` values. (Comparisons using the `===` operator, and comparisons to other values such as strings or objects, are unaffected.)

- The user agent must act such that the `typeof` operator in JavaScript returns the string `undefined` when applied to the object returned for `all`.

These requirements are a willful violation of the JavaScript specification current at the time of writing (ECMAScript edition 5). The JavaScript specification requires that the ToBoolean() operator convert all objects to the true value, and does not have provisions for objects acting as if they were `undefined` for the purposes of certain operators. This violation is motivated by a desire for compatibility with two classes of legacy content: one that uses the presence of `document.all` as a way to detect legacy user agents, and one that only supports those legacy user agents and uses the `document.all` object without testing for its presence first. [ECMA262]

    partial interface Window {
      void captureEvents();
      void releaseEvents();
    };

The `captureEvents()` and `releaseEvents()` methods must do nothing.

## 16 IANA considerations

### 16.1 `text/html`

This registration is for community review and will be submitted to the IESG for review, approval, and registration with IANA.

Type name:
  text
Subtype name:
  html
Required parameters:
  No required parameters
Optional parameters:
  `charset`

    The `charset` parameter may be provided to specify the document's character encoding, overriding any character encoding declarations in the document other than a Byte Order Mark (BOM). The parameter's value must be one of the labels of the character encoding used to serialise the file. [ENCODING]

Encoding considerations:
  8bit (see the section on character encoding declarations)
Security considerations:

  Entire novels have been written about the security considerations that apply to HTML documents. Many are listed in this document, to which the reader is referred for more details. Some general concerns bear mentioning here, however:

  HTML is scripted language, and has a large number of APIs (some of which are described in this document). Script can expose the user to potential risks of information leakage, credential leakage, cross-site scripting attacks, cross-site request forgeries, and a host of other problems. While the designs in this specification are intended to be safe if implemented correctly, a full implementation is a massive undertaking and, as with any software, user agents are likely to have security bugs.

  Even without scripting, there are specific features in HTML which, for historical reasons, are required for broad compatibility with legacy content but that expose the user to unfortunate security problems. In particular, the `img` element can be used in conjunction with some other features as a way to effect a port scan from the user's location on the Internet. This can expose local network topologies that the attacker would otherwise not be able to determine.

  HTML relies on a compartmentalization scheme sometimes known as the same-origin policy. An origin in most cases consists of all the pages served from the same host, on the same port, using the same protocol.

  It is critical, therefore, to ensure that any untrusted content that forms part of a site be hosted on a different origin than any sensitive content on that site. Untrusted content can easily spoof any other page on the same origin, read data from that origin, cause scripts in that origin to execute, submit forms to and from that origin even if they are protected from cross-site request forgery attacks by unique tokens, and make use of any third-party resources exposed to or rights granted to that origin.

Interoperability considerations:
  Rules for processing both conforming and non-conforming content are defined in this specification.
Published specification:
  This document is the relevant specification. Labeling a resource with the `text/html` type asserts that the resource is an HTML document using the HTML syntax.
Applications that use this media type:
  Web browsers, tools for processing Web content, HTML authoring tools, search engines, validators.
Additional information:
  Magic number(s):
    No sequence of bytes can uniquely identify an HTML document. More information on detecting HTML documents is available in the MIME Sniffing specification. [MIMESNIFF]
  File extension(s):
    "`html`" and "`htm`" are commonly, but certainly not exclusively, used as the extension for HTML documents.
  Macintosh file type code(s):
    `TEXT`
Person & email address to contact for further information:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Intended usage:
  Common
Restrictions on usage:
  No restrictions apply.
Author:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Change controller:
  W3C

Fragment identifiers used with `text/html` resources either refer to the indicated part of the document or provide state information for in-page scripts.

### 16.2 `multipart/x-mixed-replace`

This registration is for community review and will be submitted to the IESG for review, approval, and registration with IANA.

Type name:
  multipart
Subtype name:
  x-mixed-replace
Required parameters:
  - `boundary` (defined in RFC2046) [RFC2046]
Optional parameters:
  No optional parameters.
Encoding considerations:
  binary
Security considerations:
  Subresources of a `multipart/x-mixed-replace` resource can be of any type, including types with non-trivial security implications such as `text/html`.
Interoperability considerations:
  None.
Published specification:
  This specification describes processing rules for Web browsers. Conformance requirements for generating resources with this type are the same as for `multipart/mixed`. [RFC2046]
Applications that use this media type:
  This type is intended to be used in resources generated by Web servers, for consumption by Web browsers.
Additional information:
  Magic number(s):
    No sequence of bytes can uniquely identify a `multipart/x-mixed-replace` resource.
  File extension(s):
    No specific file extensions are recommended for this type.
  Macintosh file type code(s):
    No specific Macintosh file type codes are recommended for this type.
Person & email address to contact for further information:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Intended usage:
  Common
Restrictions on usage:
  No restrictions apply.
Author:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Change controller:
  W3C

Fragment identifiers used with `multipart/x-mixed-replace` resources apply to each body part as defined by the type used by that body part.

### 16.3 `application/xhtml+xml`

This registration is for community review and will be submitted to the IESG for review, approval, and registration with IANA.

Type name:
  application
Subtype name:
  xhtml+xml
Required parameters:
  Same as for `application/xml` [RFC3023]
Optional parameters:
  Same as for `application/xml` [RFC3023]
Encoding considerations:
  Same as for `application/xml` [RFC3023]
Security considerations:
  Same as for `application/xml` [RFC3023]
Interoperability considerations:
  Same as for `application/xml` [RFC3023]
Published specification:
  Labeling a resource with the `application/xhtml+xml` type asserts that the resource is an XML document that likely has a root element from the HTML namespace. Thus, the relevant specifications are the XML specification, the Namespaces in XML specification, and this specification. [XML] [XMLNS]
Applications that use this media type:
  Same as for `application/xml` [RFC3023]
Additional information:
  Magic number(s):
    Same as for `application/xml` [RFC3023]
  File extension(s):
    "`xhtml`" and "`xht`" are sometimes used as extensions for XML resources that have a root element from the HTML namespace.
  Macintosh file type code(s):
    `TEXT`
Person & email address to contact for further information:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Intended usage:
  Common
Restrictions on usage:
  No restrictions apply.
Author:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Change controller:
  W3C

Fragment identifiers used with `application/xhtml+xml` resources have the same semantics as with any XML MIME type. [RFC3023]

### 16.4 `application/x-www-form-urlencoded`

This registration is for community review and will be submitted to the IESG for review, approval, and registration with IANA.

Type name:
  application
Subtype name:
  x-www-form-urlencoded
Required parameters:
  No parameters
Optional parameters:
  No parameters
Encoding considerations:
  7bit (US-ASCII encoding of octets that themselves can be encoding text using any ASCII-compatible character encoding)
Security considerations:

  In isolation, an `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` payload poses no security risks. However, as this type is usually used as part of a form submission, all the risks that apply to HTML forms need to be considered in the context of this type.

Interoperability considerations:
  Rules for generating and processing `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` payloads are defined in this specification.
Published specification:
  This document is the relevant specification. Algorithms for encoding and decoding are defined.
Applications that use this media type:
  Web browsers and servers.
Additional information:
  Magic number(s):
    There is no reliable mechanism for recognising `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` payloads.
  File extension(s):
    Not applicable.
  Macintosh file type code(s):
    Not applicable.
Person & email address to contact for further information:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Intended usage:
  Common
Restrictions on usage:
  This type is only intended to be used to describe HTML form submission payloads.
Author:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Change controller:
  W3C

Fragment identifiers have no meaning with the `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` type.

### 16.5 `text/cache-manifest`

This registration is for community review and will be submitted to the IESG for review, approval, and registration with IANA.

Type name:
  text
Subtype name:
  cache-manifest
Required parameters:
  No parameters
Optional parameters:
  `charset`

    The `charset` parameter may be provided. The parameter's value must be "`utf-8`". This parameter serves no purpose; it is only allowed for compatibility with legacy servers.

Encoding considerations:
  8bit (always UTF-8)
Security considerations:

  Cache manifests themselves pose no immediate risk unless sensitive information is included within the manifest. Implementations, however, are required to follow specific rules when populating a cache based on a cache manifest, to ensure that certain origin-based restrictions are honored. Failure to correctly implement these rules can result in information leakage, cross-site scripting attacks, and the like.

Interoperability considerations:
  Rules for processing both conforming and non-conforming content are defined in this specification.
Published specification:
  This document is the relevant specification.
Applications that use this media type:
  Web browsers.
Additional information:
  Magic number(s):
    Cache manifests begin with the string "`CACHE MANIFEST`", followed by either a U+0020 SPACE character, a U+0009 CHARACTER TABULATION (tab) character, a U+000A LINE FEED (LF) character, or a U+000D CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) character.
  File extension(s):
    "`appcache`"
  Macintosh file type code(s):
    No specific Macintosh file type codes are recommended for this type.
Person & email address to contact for further information:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Intended usage:
  Common
Restrictions on usage:
  No restrictions apply.
Author:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Change controller:
  W3C

Fragment identifiers have no meaning with `text/cache-manifest` resources.

### 16.6 `text/ping`

This registration is for community review and will be submitted to the IESG for review, approval, and registration with IANA.

Type name:
  text
Subtype name:
  ping
Required parameters:
  No parameters
Optional parameters:
  `charset`

    The `charset` parameter may be provided. The parameter's value must be "`utf-8`". This parameter serves no purpose; it is only allowed for compatibility with legacy servers.

Encoding considerations:
  Not applicable.
Security considerations:

  If used exclusively in the fashion described in the context of hyperlink auditing, this type introduces no new security concerns.

Interoperability considerations:
  Rules applicable to this type are defined in this specification.
Published specification:
  This document is the relevant specification.
Applications that use this media type:
  Web browsers.
Additional information:
  Magic number(s):
    `text/ping` resources always consist of the four bytes 0x50 0x49 0x4E 0x47 (ASCII 'PING').
  File extension(s):
    No specific file extension is recommended for this type.
  Macintosh file type code(s):
    No specific Macintosh file type codes are recommended for this type.
Person & email address to contact for further information:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Intended usage:
  Common
Restrictions on usage:
  Only intended for use with HTTP POST requests generated as part of a Web browser's processing of the `ping` attribute.
Author:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Change controller:
  W3C

Fragment identifiers have no meaning with `text/ping` resources.

### 16.7 `application/microdata+json`

This registration is for community review and will be submitted to the IESG for review, approval, and registration with IANA.

Type name:
  application
Subtype name:
  microdata+json
Required parameters:
  Same as for `application/json` [JSON]
Optional parameters:
  Same as for `application/json` [JSON]
Encoding considerations:
  8bit (always UTF-8)
Security considerations:
  Same as for `application/json` [JSON]
Interoperability considerations:
  Same as for `application/json` [JSON]
Published specification:
  Labeling a resource with the `application/microdata+json` type asserts that the resource is a JSON text that consists of an object with a single entry called "`items`" consisting of an array of entries, each of which consists of an object with an entry called "`id`" whose value is a string, an entry called "`type`" whose value is another string, and an entry called "`properties`" whose value is an object whose entries each have a value consisting of an array of either objects or strings, the objects being of the same form as the objects in the aforementioned "`items`" entry. Thus, the relevant specifications are the JSON specification and this specification. [JSON]
Applications that use this media type:

  Applications that transfer data intended for use with HTML's microdata feature, especially in the context of drag-and-drop, are the primary application class for this type.

Additional information:
  Magic number(s):
    Same as for `application/json` [JSON]
  File extension(s):
    Same as for `application/json` [JSON]
  Macintosh file type code(s):
    Same as for `application/json` [JSON]
Person & email address to contact for further information:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Intended usage:
  Common
Restrictions on usage:
  No restrictions apply.
Author:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Change controller:
  W3C

Fragment identifiers used with `application/microdata+json` resources have the same semantics as when used with `application/json` (namely, at the time of writing, no semantics at all). [JSON]

### 16.8 `Ping-From`

This section describes a header for registration in the Permanent Message Header Field Registry. [RFC3864]

Header field name:
  Ping-From
Applicable protocol:
  http
Status:
  standard
Author/Change controller:
  W3C
Specification document(s):
  This document is the relevant specification.
Related information:
  None.

### 16.9 `Ping-To`

This section describes a header for registration in the Permanent Message Header Field Registry. [RFC3864]

Header field name:
  Ping-To
Applicable protocol:
  http
Status:
  standard
Author/Change controller:
  W3C
Specification document(s):
  This document is the relevant specification.
Related information:
  None.

### 16.10 `web+` scheme prefix

This section describes a convention for use with the IANA URI scheme registry. It does not itself register a specific scheme. [RFC4395]

URI scheme name:
  Schemes starting with the four characters "`web+`" followed by one or more letters in the range `a`-`z`.
Status:
  permanent
URI scheme syntax:
  Scheme-specific.
URI scheme semantics:
  Scheme-specific.
Encoding considerations:
  All "`web+`" schemes should use UTF-8 encodings where relevant.
Applications/protocols that use this URI scheme name:
  Scheme-specific.
Interoperability considerations:
  The scheme is expected to be used in the context of Web applications.
Security considerations:
  Any Web page is able to register a handler for all "`web+`" schemes. As such, these schemes must not be used for features intended to be core platform features (e.g. network transfer protocols like HTTP or FTP). Similarly, such schemes must not store confidential information in their URLs, such as usernames, passwords, personal information, or confidential project names.
Contact:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
Author/Change controller:
  Ian Hickson <ian@hixie.ch>
References:
  Custom scheme and content handlers, HTML Living Standard: http://www.whatwg.org/specs/web-apps/current-work/#custom-handlers

## Index

The following sections only cover conforming elements and features.

### Elements

This section is non-normative.

List of elements
Element | Description | Categories | Parents† | Children | Attributes | Interface
--- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | ---
`a` | Hyperlink | flow; phrasing*; interactive | phrasing | transparent* | globals; `href`; `target`; `download`; `ping`; `rel`; `hreflang`; `type` | `HTMLAnchorElement`
`abbr` | Abbreviation | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`address` | Contact information for a page or `article` element | flow | flow | flow* | globals | `HTMLElement`
`area` | Hyperlink or dead area on an image map | flow; phrasing | phrasing* | empty | globals; `alt`; `coords`; `shape`; `href`; `target`; `download`; `ping`; `rel`; `hreflang`; `type` | `HTMLAreaElement`
`article` | Self-contained syndicatable or reusable composition | flow; sectioning | flow | flow | globals | `HTMLElement`
`aside` | Sidebar for tangentially related content | flow; sectioning | flow | flow | globals | `HTMLElement`
`audio` | Audio player | flow; phrasing; embedded; interactive | phrasing | `source`*; transparent* | globals; `src`; `crossorigin`; `preload`; `autoplay`; `mediagroup`; `loop`; `muted`; `controls` | `HTMLAudioElement`
`b` | Keywords | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`base` | Base URL and default target browsing context for hyperlinks and forms | metadata | `head`; `template` | empty | globals; `href`; `target` | `HTMLBaseElement`
`bdi` | Text directionality isolation | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`bdo` | Text directionality formatting | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`blockquote` | A section quoted from another source | flow; sectioning root | flow | flow | globals; `cite` | `HTMLQuoteElement`
`body` | Document body | sectioning root | `html` | flow | globals; `onafterprint`; `onbeforeprint`; `onbeforeunload`; `onhashchange`; `onlanguagechange`; `onmessage`; `onoffline`; `ononline`; `onpagehide`; `onpageshow`; `onpopstate`; `onstorage`; `onunload` | `HTMLBodyElement`
`br` | Line break, e.g. in poem or postal address | flow; phrasing | phrasing | empty | globals | `HTMLBRElement`
`button` | Button control | flow; phrasing; interactive; listed; labelable; submittable; reassociateable; form-associated | phrasing | phrasing* | globals; `autofocus`; `disabled`; `form`; `formaction`; `formenctype`; `formmethod`; `formnovalidate`; `formtarget`; `menu`; `name`; `type`; `value` | `HTMLButtonElement`
`canvas` | Scriptable bitmap canvas | flow; phrasing; embedded | phrasing | transparent | globals; `width`; `height` | `HTMLCanvasElement`
`caption` | Table caption | none | `table`; `template` | flow* | globals | `HTMLTableCaptionElement`
`cite` | Title of a work | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`code` | Computer code | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`col` | Table column | none | `colgroup`; `template` | empty | globals; `span` | `HTMLTableColElement`
`colgroup` | Group of columns in a table | none | `table`; `template` | `col`*; `template`* | globals; `span` | `HTMLTableColElement`
`data` | Machine-readable equivalent | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals; `value` | `HTMLDataElement`
`datalist` | Container for options for combo box control | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing*; `option`*; script-supporting elements* | globals | `HTMLDataListElement`
`dd` | Content for corresponding `dt` element(s) | none | `dl`; `template` | flow | globals | `HTMLElement`
`del` | A removal from the document | flow; phrasing* | phrasing | transparent | globals; `cite`; `datetime` | `HTMLModElement`
`details` | Disclosure control for hiding details | flow; sectioning root; interactive | flow | `summary`*; flow | globals; `open` | `HTMLDetailsElement`
`dfn` | Defining instance | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing* | globals | `HTMLElement`
`dialog` | Dialog box or window | flow; sectioning root | flow | flow | globals; `open` | `HTMLDialogElement`
`div` | Generic flow container | flow | flow | flow | globals | `HTMLDivElement`
`dl` | Association list consisting of zero or more name-value groups | flow | flow | `dt`*; `dd`*; script-supporting elements | globals | `HTMLDListElement`
`dt` | Legend for corresponding `dd` element(s) | none | `dl`; `template` | flow* | globals | `HTMLElement`
`em` | Stress emphasis | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`embed` | Plugin | flow; phrasing; embedded; interactive | phrasing | empty | globals; `src`; `type`; `width`; `height`; any* | `HTMLEmbedElement`
`fieldset` | Group of form controls | flow; sectioning root; listed; reassociateable; form-associated | flow | `legend`*; flow | globals; `disabled`; `form`; `name` | `HTMLFieldSetElement`
`figcaption` | Caption for `figure` | none | `figure`; `template` | flow | globals | `HTMLElement`
`figure` | Figure with optional caption | flow; sectioning root | flow | `figcaption`*; flow | globals | `HTMLElement`
`footer` | Footer for a page or section | flow | flow | flow* | globals | `HTMLElement`
`form` | User-submittable form | flow | flow | flow* | globals; `accept-charset`; `action`; `autocomplete`; `enctype`; `method`; `name`; `novalidate`; `target` | `HTMLFormElement`
`h1`, `h2`, `h3`, `h4`, `h5`, `h6` | Section heading | flow; heading | `hgroup`; flow | phrasing | globals | `HTMLHeadingElement`
`head` | Container for document metadata | none | `html` | metadata content* | globals | `HTMLHeadElement`
`header` | Introductory or navigational aids for a page or section | flow | flow | flow* | globals | `HTMLElement`
`hgroup` | heading group | flow; heading | flow | One or more `h1`, `h2`, `h3`, `h4`, `h5`, `h6`, and `template` | globals | `HTMLElement`
`hr` | Thematic break | flow | flow | empty | globals | `HTMLHRElement`
`html` | Root element | none | none* | `head`*; `body`* | globals; `manifest` | `HTMLHtmlElement`
`i` | Alternate voice | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`iframe` | Nested browsing context | flow; phrasing; embedded; interactive | phrasing | text* | globals; `src`; `srcdoc`; `name`; `sandbox`; `seamless`; `allowfullscreen`; `width`; `height` | `HTMLIFrameElement`
`img` | Image | flow; phrasing; embedded; interactive*; form-associated | phrasing | empty | globals; `alt`; `src`; `srcset`; `crossorigin`; `usemap`; `ismap`; `width`; `height` | `HTMLImageElement`
`input` | Form control | flow; phrasing; interactive*; listed; labelable; submittable; resettable; reassociateable; form-associated | phrasing | empty | globals; `accept`; `alt`; `autocomplete`; `autofocus`; `checked`; `dirname`; `disabled`; `form`; `formaction`; `formenctype`; `formmethod`; `formnovalidate`; `formtarget`; `height`; `inputmode`; `list`; `max`; `maxlength`; `min`; `minlength`; `multiple`; `name`; `pattern`; `placeholder`; `readonly`; `required`; `size`; `src`; `step`; `type`; `value`; `width` | `HTMLInputElement`
`ins` | An addition to the document | flow; phrasing* | phrasing | transparent | globals; `cite`; `datetime` | `HTMLModElement`
`kbd` | User input | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`keygen` | Cryptographic key-pair generator form control | flow; phrasing; interactive; listed; labelable; submittable; resettable; reassociateable; form-associated | phrasing | empty | globals; `autofocus`; `challenge`; `disabled`; `form`; `keytype`; `name` | `HTMLKeygenElement`
`label` | Caption for a form control | flow; phrasing; interactive; reassociateable; form-associated | phrasing | phrasing* | globals; `form`; `for` | `HTMLLabelElement`
`legend` | Caption for `fieldset` | none | `fieldset`; `template` | phrasing | globals | `HTMLLegendElement`
`li` | List item | none | `ol`; `ul`; `menu`*; `template` | flow | globals; `value`* | `HTMLLIElement`
`link` | Link metadata | metadata; flow*; phrasing* | `head`; `template`; `noscript`*; phrasing* | empty | globals; `href`; `crossorigin`; `rel`; `media`; `hreflang`; `type`; `sizes` | `HTMLLinkElement`
`main` | Container for the dominant contents of another element | flow | flow | flow | globals | `HTMLElement`
`map` | Image map | flow; phrasing* | phrasing | transparent; `area`* | globals; `name` | `HTMLMapElement`
`mark` | Highlight | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`menu` | Menu of commands | flow | flow; `menu`* | `li`*; flow*; `menuitem`*; `hr`*; `menu`*; script-supporting elements* | globals; `type`; `label` | `HTMLMenuElement`
`menuitem` | Menu command | none | `menu`; `template` | empty | globals; `type`; `label`; `icon`; `disabled`; `checked`; `radiogroup`; `default`; `command` | `HTMLMenuItemElement`
`meta` | Text metadata | metadata; flow*; phrasing* | `head`; `template`; `noscript`*; phrasing* | empty | globals; `name`; `http-equiv`; `content`; `charset` | `HTMLMetaElement`
`meter` | Gauge | flow; phrasing; labelable | phrasing | phrasing* | globals; `value`; `min`; `max`; `low`; `high`; `optimum` | `HTMLMeterElement`
`nav` | Section with navigational links | flow; sectioning | flow | flow | globals | `HTMLElement`
`noscript` | Fallback content for script | metadata; flow; phrasing | `head`*; `template`*; phrasing* | varies* | globals | `HTMLElement`
`object` | Image, nested browsing context, or plugin | flow; phrasing; embedded; interactive*; listed; submittable; reassociateable; form-associated | phrasing | `param`*; transparent | globals; `data`; `type`; `typemustmatch`; `name`; `usemap`; `form`; `width`; `height` | `HTMLObjectElement`
`ol` | Ordered list | flow | flow | `li`; script-supporting elements | globals; `reversed`; `start`; `type` | `HTMLOListElement`
`optgroup` | Group of options in a list box | none | `select`; `template` | `option`; script-supporting elements | globals; `disabled`; `label` | `HTMLOptGroupElement`
`option` | Option in a list box or combo box control | none | `select`; `datalist`; `optgroup`; `template` | text* | globals; `disabled`; `label`; `selected`; `value` | `HTMLOptionElement`
`output` | Calculated output value | flow; phrasing; listed; labelable; resettable; reassociateable; form-associated | phrasing | phrasing | globals; `for`; `form`; `name` | `HTMLOutputElement`
`p` | Paragraph | flow | flow | phrasing | globals | `HTMLParagraphElement`
`param` | Parameter for `object` | none | `object`; `template` | empty | globals; `name`; `value` | `HTMLParamElement`
`pre` | Block of preformatted text | flow | flow | phrasing | globals | `HTMLPreElement`
`progress` | Progress bar | flow; phrasing; labelable | phrasing | phrasing* | globals; `value`; `max` | `HTMLProgressElement`
`q` | Quotation | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals; `cite` | `HTMLQuoteElement`
`rp` | Parenthesis for ruby annotation text | none | `ruby`; `template` | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`rt` | Ruby annotation text | none | `ruby`; `template` | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`ruby` | Ruby annotation(s) | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing; `rt`; `rp`* | globals | `HTMLElement`
`s` | Inaccurate text | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`samp` | Computer output | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`script` | Embedded script | metadata; flow; phrasing; script-supporting | `head`; phrasing; script-supporting | script, data, or script documentation* | globals; `src`; `type`; `charset`; `async`; `defer`; `crossorigin` | `HTMLScriptElement`
`section` | Generic document or application section | flow; sectioning | flow | flow | globals | `HTMLElement`
`select` | List box control | flow; phrasing; interactive; listed; labelable; submittable; resettable; reassociateable; form-associated | phrasing | `option`; `optgroup`; script-supporting elements | globals; `autocomplete`; `autofocus`; `disabled`; `form`; `multiple`; `name`; `required`; `size` | `HTMLSelectElement`
`small` | Side comment | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`source` | Media source for `video` or `audio` | none | `video`; `audio`; `template` | empty | globals; `src`; `type` | `HTMLSourceElement`
`span` | Generic phrasing container | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLSpanElement`
`strong` | Importance | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`style` | Embedded styling information | metadata; flow* | `head`; `noscript`*; flow* | varies* | globals; `media`; `type`; `scoped` | `HTMLStyleElement`
`sub` | Subscript | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`summary` | Caption for `details` | none | `details` | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`sup` | Superscript | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`table` | Table | flow | flow | `caption`*; `colgroup`*; `thead`*; `tbody`*; `tfoot`*; `tr`*; script-supporting elements | globals; `sortable` | `HTMLTableElement`
`tbody` | Group of rows in a table | none | `table`; `template` | `tr`; script-supporting elements | globals | `HTMLTableSectionElement`
`td` | Table cell | sectioning root | `tr`; `template` | flow | globals; `colspan`; `rowspan`; `headers` | `HTMLTableDataCellElement`
`template` | Template | metadata; flow; phrasing; script-supporting | metadata; phrasing; script-supporting; `colgroup`* | it's complicated* | globals | `HTMLTemplateElement`
`textarea` | Multiline text field | flow; phrasing; interactive; listed; labelable; submittable; resettable; reassociateable; form-associated | phrasing | text | globals; `autofocus`; `cols`; `dirname`; `disabled`; `form`; `inputmode`; `maxlength`; `minlength`; `name`; `placeholder`; `readonly`; `required`; `rows`; `wrap` | `HTMLTextAreaElement`
`tfoot` | Group of footer rows in a table | none | `table`; `template` | `tr`; script-supporting elements | globals | `HTMLTableSectionElement`
`th` | Table header cell | interactive* | `tr`; `template` | flow* | globals; `colspan`; `rowspan`; `headers`; `scope`; `sorted`; `abbr` | `HTMLTableHeaderCellElement`
`thead` | Group of heading rows in a table | none | `table`; `template` | `tr`; script-supporting elements | globals | `HTMLTableSectionElement`
`time` | Machine-readable equivalent of date- or time-related data | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals; `datetime` | `HTMLTimeElement`
`title` | Document title | metadata | `head`; `template` | text* | globals | `HTMLTitleElement`
`tr` | Table row | none | `table`; `thead`; `tbody`; `tfoot`; `template` | `th`*; `td`; script-supporting elements | globals | `HTMLTableRowElement`
`track` | Timed text track | none | `audio`; `video`; `template` | empty | globals; `default`; `kind`; `label`; `src`; `srclang` | `HTMLTrackElement`
`u` | Keywords | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`ul` | List | flow | flow | `li`; script-supporting elements | globals | `HTMLUListElement`
`var` | Variable | flow; phrasing | phrasing | phrasing | globals | `HTMLElement`
`video` | Video player | flow; phrasing; embedded; interactive | phrasing | `source`*; transparent* | globals; `src`; `crossorigin`; `poster`; `preload`; `autoplay`; `mediagroup`; `loop`; `muted`; `controls`; `width`; `height` | `HTMLVideoElement`
`wbr` | Line breaking opportunity | flow; phrasing | phrasing | empty | globals | `HTMLElement`

An asterisk (*) in a cell indicates that the actual rules are more complicated than indicated in the table above.

† Categories in the "Parents" column refer to parents that list the given categories in their content model, not to elements that themselves are in those categories. For example, the `a` element's "Parents" column says "phrasing", so any element whose content model contains the "phrasing" category could be a parent of an `a` element. Since the "flow" category includes all the "phrasing" elements, that means the `th` element could be a parent to an `a` element.

### Element content categories

This section is non-normative.

List of element content categories
Category | Elements | Elements with exceptions
--- | --- | ---
Metadata content | `base`; `link`; `meta`; `noscript`; `script`; `style`; `template`; `title` | —
Flow content | `a`; `abbr`; `address`; `article`; `aside`; `audio`; `b`; `bdi`; `bdo`; `blockquote`; `br`; `button`; `canvas`; `cite`; `code`; `data`; `datalist`; `del`; `details`; `dfn`; `dialog`; `div`; `dl`; `em`; `embed`; `fieldset`; `figure`; `footer`; `form`; `h1`; `h2`; `h3`; `h4`; `h5`; `h6`; `header`; `hgroup`; `hr`; `i`; `iframe`; `img`; `input`; `ins`; `kbd`; `keygen`; `label`; `main`; `map`; `mark`; `math`; `menu`; `meter`; `nav`; `noscript`; `object`; `ol`; `output`; `p`; `pre`; `progress`; `q`; `ruby`; `s`; `samp`; `script`; `section`; `select`; `small`; `span`; `strong`; `sub`; `sup`; `svg`; `table`; `template`; `textarea`; `time`; `u`; `ul`; `var`; `video`; `wbr`; Text | `area` (if it is a descendant of a `map` element); `link` (if the `itemprop` attribute is present); `meta` (if the `itemprop` attribute is present); `style` (if the `scoped` attribute is present)
Sectioning content | `article`; `aside`; `nav`; `section` | —
Heading content | `h1`; `h2`; `h3`; `h4`; `h5`; `h6`; `hgroup` | —
Phrasing content | `a`; `abbr`; `audio`; `b`; `bdi`; `bdo`; `br`; `button`; `canvas`; `cite`; `code`; `data`; `datalist`; `del`; `dfn`; `em`; `embed`; `i`; `iframe`; `img`; `input`; `ins`; `kbd`; `keygen`; `label`; `map`; `mark`; `math`; `meter`; `noscript`; `object`; `output`; `progress`; `q`; `ruby`; `s`; `samp`; `script`; `select`; `small`; `span`; `strong`; `sub`; `sup`; `svg`; `template`; `textarea`; `time`; `u`; `var`; `video`; `wbr`; Text | `area` (if it is a descendant of a `map` element); `link` (if the `itemprop` attribute is present); `meta` (if the `itemprop` attribute is present)
Embedded content | `audio`; `canvas`; `embed`; `iframe`; `img`; `math`; `object`; `svg`; `video` | —
Interactive content* | `a`; `button`; `details`; `embed`; `iframe`; `keygen`; `label`; `select`; `textarea` | `audio` (if the `controls` attribute is present); `img` (if the `usemap` attribute is present); `input` (if the `type` attribute is not in the Hidden state); `object` (if the `usemap` attribute is present); `th` (for sorting interface `th` elements) `video` (if the `controls` attribute is present)
Sectioning roots | `blockquote`; `body`; `details`; `dialog`; `fieldset`; `figure`; `td` | —
Form-associated elements | `button`; `fieldset`; `input`; `keygen`; `label`; `object`; `output`; `select`; `textarea`; `img` | —
Listed elements | `button`; `fieldset`; `input`; `keygen`; `object`; `output`; `select`; `textarea` | —
Submittable elements | `button`; `input`; `keygen`; `object`; `select`; `textarea` | —
Resettable elements | `input`; `keygen`; `output`; `select`; `textarea` | —
Labelable elements | `button`; `input`; `keygen`; `meter`; `output`; `progress`; `select`; `textarea` | —
Reassociateable elements | `button`; `fieldset`; `input`; `keygen`; `label`; `object`; `output`; `select`; `textarea` | —
Palpable content | `a`; `abbr`; `address`; `article`; `aside`; `b`; `bdi`; `bdo`; `blockquote`; `button`; `canvas`; `cite`; `code`; `data`; `details`; `dfn`; `div`; `em`; `embed`; `fieldset`; `figure`; `footer`; `form`; `h1`; `h2`; `h3`; `h4`; `h5`; `h6`; `header`; `hgroup`; `i`; `iframe`; `img`; `ins`; `kbd`; `keygen`; `label`; `main`; `map`; `mark`; `math`; `meter`; `nav`; `object`; `output`; `p`; `pre`; `progress`; `q`; `ruby`; `s`; `samp`; `section`; `select`; `small`; `span`; `strong`; `sub`; `sup`; `svg`; `table`; `textarea`; `time`; `u`; `var`; `video` | `audio` (if the `controls` attribute is present); `dl` (if the element's children include at least one name-value group); `input` (if the `type` attribute is not in the Hidden state); `menu` (if the `type` attribute is in the toolbar state); `ol` (if the element's children include at least one `li` element); `ul` (if the element's children include at least one `li` element); Text that is not inter-element whitespace
Script-supporting elements | `script`; `template` | —

* The `tabindex` attribute can also make any element into interactive content.

### Attributes

This section is non-normative.

List of attributes (excluding event handler content attributes)
Attribute | Element(s) | Description | Value
--- | --- | --- | ---
`abbr` | `th` | Alternative label to use for the header cell when referencing the cell in other contexts | Text*
`accept` | `input` | Hint for expected file type in file upload controls | Set of comma-separated tokens* consisting of valid MIME types with no parameters or `audio/*`, `video/*`, or `image/*`
`accept-charset` | `form` | Character encodings to use for form submission | Ordered set of unique space-separated tokens, ASCII case-insensitive, consisting of labels of ASCII-compatible character encodings*
`accesskey` | HTML elements | Keyboard shortcut to activate or focus element | Ordered set of unique space-separated tokens, case-sensitive, consisting of one Unicode code point in length
`action` | `form` | URL to use for form submission | Valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`allowfullscreen` | `iframe` | Whether to allow the `iframe`'s contents to use `requestFullscreen()` | Boolean attribute
`alt` | `area`; `img`; `input` | Replacement text for use when images are not available | Text*
`async` | `script` | Execute script asynchronously | Boolean attribute
`autocomplete` | `form` | Default setting for autofill feature for controls in the form | "`on`"; "`off`"
`autocomplete` | `input`; `select`; `textarea` | Hint for form autofill feature | Autofill field name and related tokens*
`autofocus` | `button`; `input`; `keygen`; `select`; `textarea` | Automatically focus the form control when the page is loaded | Boolean attribute
`autoplay` | `audio`; `video` | Hint that the media resource can be started automatically when the page is loaded | Boolean attribute
`challenge` | `keygen` | String to package with the generated and signed public key | Text
`charset` | `meta` | Character encoding declaration | Encoding label*
`charset` | `script` | Character encoding of the external script resource | Encoding label*
`checked` | `menuitem`; `input` | Whether the command or control is checked | Boolean attribute
`cite` | `blockquote`; `del`; `ins`; `q` | Link to the source of the quotation or more information about the edit | Valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`class` | HTML elements | Classes to which the element belongs | Set of space-separated tokens
`cols` | `textarea` | Maximum number of characters per line | Valid non-negative integer greater than zero
`colspan` | `td`; `th` | Number of columns that the cell is to span | Valid non-negative integer greater than zero
`command` | `menuitem` | Command definition | ID*
`content` | `meta` | Value of the element | Text*
`contenteditable` | HTML elements | Whether the element is editable | "`true`"; "`false`"
`contextmenu` | HTML elements | The element's context menu | ID*
`controls` | `audio`; `video` | Show user agent controls | Boolean attribute
`coords` | `area` | Coordinates for the shape to be created in an image map | Valid list of integers*
`crossorigin` | `audio`; `img`; `link`; `script`; `video` | How the element handles crossorigin requests | "`anonymous`"; "`use-credentials`"
`data` | `object` | Address of the resource | Valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`datetime` | `del`; `ins` | Date and (optionally) time of the change | Valid date string with optional time
`datetime` | `time` | Machine-readable value | Valid month string, valid date string, valid yearless date string, valid time string, valid local date and time string, valid time-zone offset string, valid global date and time string, valid week string, valid non-negative integer, or valid duration string
`default` | `menuitem` | Mark the command as being a default command | Boolean attribute
`default` | `track` | Enable the track if no other text track is more suitable | Boolean attribute
`defer` | `script` | Defer script execution | Boolean attribute
`dir` | HTML elements | The text directionality of the element | "`ltr`"; "`rtl`"; "`auto`"
`dir` | `bdo` | The text directionality of the element | "`ltr`"; "`rtl`"
`dirname` | `input`; `textarea` | Name of form field to use for sending the element's directionality in form submission | Text*
`disabled` | `button`; `menuitem`; `fieldset`; `input`; `keygen`; `optgroup`; `option`; `select`; `textarea` | Whether the form control is disabled | Boolean attribute
`download` | `a`; `area` | Whether to download the resource instead of navigating to it, and its file name if so | Text
`draggable` | HTML elements | Whether the element is draggable | "`true`"; "`false`"
`dropzone` | HTML elements | Accepted item types for drag-and-drop | Unordered set of unique space-separated tokens, ASCII case-insensitive, consisting of accepted types and drag feedback*
`enctype` | `form` | Form data set encoding type to use for form submission | "`application/x-www-form-urlencoded`"; "`multipart/form-data`"; "`text/plain`"
`for` | `label` | Associate the label with form control | ID*
`for` | `output` | Specifies controls from which the output was calculated | Unordered set of unique space-separated tokens, case-sensitive, consisting of IDs*
`form` | `button`; `fieldset`; `input`; `keygen`; `label`; `object`; `output`; `select`; `textarea` | Associates the control with a `form` element | ID*
`formaction` | `button`; `input` | URL to use for form submission | Valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`formenctype` | `button`; `input` | Form data set encoding type to use for form submission | "`application/x-www-form-urlencoded`"; "`multipart/form-data`"; "`text/plain`"
`formmethod` | `button`; `input` | HTTP method to use for form submission | "`GET`"; "`POST`"
`formnovalidate` | `button`; `input` | Bypass form control validation for form submission | Boolean attribute
`formtarget` | `button`; `input` | Browsing context for form submission | Valid browsing context name or keyword
`headers` | `td`; `th` | The header cells for this cell | Unordered set of unique space-separated tokens, case-sensitive, consisting of IDs*
`height` | `canvas`; `embed`; `iframe`; `img`; `input`; `object`; `video` | Vertical dimension | Valid non-negative integer
`hidden` | HTML elements | Whether the element is relevant | Boolean attribute
`high` | `meter` | Low limit of high range | Valid floating-point number*
`href` | `a`; `area` | Address of the hyperlink | Valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`href` | `link` | Address of the hyperlink | Valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`href` | `base` | Document base URL | Valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`hreflang` | `a`; `area`; `link` | Language of the linked resource | Valid BCP 47 language tag
`http-equiv` | `meta` | Pragma directive | Text*
`icon` | `menuitem` | Icon for the command | Valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`id` | HTML elements | The element's ID | Text*
`inputmode` | `input`; `textarea` | Hint for selecting an input modality | "`verbatim`"; "`latin`"; "`latin-name`"; "`latin-prose`"; "`full-width-latin`"; "`kana`"; "`kana-name`"; "`katakana`"; "`numeric`"; "`tel`"; "`email`"; "`url`"
`ismap` | `img` | Whether the image is a server-side image map | Boolean attribute
`itemid` | HTML elements | Global identifier for a microdata item | Valid URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`itemprop` | HTML elements | Property names of a microdata item | Unordered set of unique space-separated tokens, case-sensitive, consisting of valid absolute URLs, defined property names, or text*
`itemref` | HTML elements | Referenced elements | Unordered set of unique space-separated tokens, case-sensitive, consisting of IDs*
`itemscope` | HTML elements | Introduces a microdata item | Boolean attribute
`itemtype` | HTML elements | Item types of a microdata item | Unordered set of unique space-separated tokens, case-sensitive, consisting of valid absolute URL*
`keytype` | `keygen` | The type of cryptographic key to generate | Text*
`kind` | `track` | The type of text track | "`subtitles`"; "`captions`"; "`descriptions`"; "`chapters`"; "`metadata`"
`label` | `menuitem`; `menu`; `optgroup`; `option`; `track` | User-visible label | Text
`lang` | HTML elements | Language of the element | Valid BCP 47 language tag or the empty string
`list` | `input` | List of autocomplete options | ID*
`loop` | `audio`; `video` | Whether to loop the media resource | Boolean attribute
`low` | `meter` | High limit of low range | Valid floating-point number*
`manifest` | `html` | Application cache manifest | Valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`max` | `input` | Maximum value | Varies*
`max` | `meter`; `progress` | Upper bound of range | Valid floating-point number*
`maxlength` | `input`; `textarea` | Maximum length of value | Valid non-negative integer
`media` | `link`; `style` | Applicable media | Valid media query list
`mediagroup` | `audio`; `video` | Groups media elements together with an implicit `MediaController` | Text
`menu` | `button` | Specifies the element's designated pop-up menu | ID*
`method` | `form` | HTTP method to use for form submission | "`GET`"; "`POST`"; "`dialog`"
`min` | `input` | Minimum value | Varies*
`min` | `meter` | Lower bound of range | Valid floating-point number*
`minlength` | `input`; `textarea` | Minimum length of value | Valid non-negative integer
`multiple` | `input`; `select` | Whether to allow multiple values | Boolean attribute
`muted` | `audio`; `video` | Whether to mute the media resource by default | Boolean attribute
`name` | `button`; `fieldset`; `input`; `keygen`; `output`; `select`; `textarea` | Name of form control to use for form submission and in the `form.elements` API | Text*
`name` | `form` | Name of form to use in the `document.forms` API | Text*
`name` | `iframe`; `object` | Name of nested browsing context | Valid browsing context name or keyword
`name` | `map` | Name of image map to reference from the `usemap` attribute | Text*
`name` | `meta` | Metadata name | Text*
`name` | `param` | Name of parameter | Text
`novalidate` | `form` | Bypass form control validation for form submission | Boolean attribute
`open` | `details` | Whether the details are visible | Boolean attribute
`open` | `dialog` | Whether the dialog box is showing | Boolean attribute
`optimum` | `meter` | Optimum value in gauge | Valid floating-point number*
`pattern` | `input` | Pattern to be matched by the form control's value | Regular expression matching the JavaScript Pattern production
`ping` | `a`; `area` | URLs to ping | Set of space-separated tokens consisting of valid non-empty URLs
`placeholder` | `input`; `textarea` | User-visible label to be placed within the form control | Text*
`poster` | `video` | Poster frame to show prior to video playback | Valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`preload` | `audio`; `video` | Hints how much buffering the media resource will likely need | "`none`"; "`metadata`"; "`auto`"
`radiogroup` | `menuitem` | Name of group of commands to treat as a radio button group | Text
`readonly` | `input`; `textarea` | Whether to allow the value to be edited by the user | Boolean attribute
`rel` | `a`; `area`; `link` | Relationship between the document containing the hyperlink and the destination resource | Set of space-separated tokens*
`required` | `input`; `select`; `textarea` | Whether the control is required for form submission | Boolean attribute
`reversed` | `ol` | Number the list backwards | Boolean attribute
`rows` | `textarea` | Number of lines to show | Valid non-negative integer greater than zero
`rowspan` | `td`; `th` | Number of rows that the cell is to span | Valid non-negative integer
`sandbox` | `iframe` | Security rules for nested content | Unordered set of unique space-separated tokens, ASCII case-insensitive, consisting of "`allow-forms`", "`allow-pointer-lock`", "`allow-popups`", "`allow-same-origin`", "`allow-scripts` and "`allow-top-navigation`"
`spellcheck` | HTML elements | Whether the element is to have its spelling and grammar checked | "`true`"; "`false`"
`scope` | `th` | Specifies which cells the header cell applies to | "`row`"; "`col`"; "`rowgroup`"; "`colgroup`"
`scoped` | `style` | Whether the styles apply to the entire document or just the parent subtree | Boolean attribute
`seamless` | `iframe` | Whether to apply the document's styles to the nested content | Boolean attribute
`selected` | `option` | Whether the option is selected by default | Boolean attribute
`shape` | `area` | The kind of shape to be created in an image map | "`circle`"; "`default`"; "`poly`"; "`rect`"
`size` | `input`; `select` | Size of the control | Valid non-negative integer greater than zero
`sizes` | `link` | Sizes of the icons (for `rel`="`icon`") | Unordered set of unique space-separated tokens, ASCII case-insensitive, consisting of sizes*
`sortable` | `table` | Enables a sorting interface for the table | Boolean attribute
`sorted` | `th` | Column sort direction and ordinality | Set of space-separated tokens, ASCII case-insensitive, consisting of neither, one, or both of "`reversed`" and a valid non-negative integer greater than zero
`span` | `col`; `colgroup` | Number of columns spanned by the element | Valid non-negative integer greater than zero
`src` | `audio`; `embed`; `iframe`; `img`; `input`; `script`; `source`; `track`; `video` | Address of the resource | Valid non-empty URL potentially surrounded by spaces
`srcdoc` | `iframe` | A document to render in the `iframe` | The source of an `iframe` `srcdoc` document*
`srclang` | `track` | Language of the text track | Valid BCP 47 language tag
`srcset` | `img` | Images to use in different situations (e.g. high-resolution displays, small monitors, etc) | Comma-separated list of image candidate strings
`start` | `ol` | Ordinal value of the first item | Valid integer
`step` | `input` | Granularity to be matched by the form control's value | Valid floating-point number greater than zero, or "`any`"
`style` | HTML elements | Presentational and formatting instructions | CSS declarations*
`tabindex` | HTML elements | Whether the element is focusable, and the relative order of the element for the purposes of sequential focus navigation | Valid integer
`target` | `a`; `area` | Browsing context for hyperlink navigation | Valid browsing context name or keyword
`target` | `base` | Default browsing context for hyperlink navigation and form submission | Valid browsing context name or keyword
`target` | `form` | Browsing context for form submission | Valid browsing context name or keyword
`title` | HTML elements | Advisory information for the element | Text
`title` | `abbr`; `dfn` | Full term or expansion of abbreviation | Text
`title` | `input` | Description of pattern (when used with `pattern` attribute) | Text
`title` | `menuitem` | Hint describing the command | Text
`title` | `link` | Title of the link | Text
`title` | `link`; `style` | Alternative style sheet set name | Text
`translate` | HTML elements | Whether the element is to be translated when the page is localized | "`yes`"; "`no`"
`type` | `a`; `area`; `link` | Hint for the type of the referenced resource | Valid MIME type
`type` | `button` | Type of button | "`submit`"; "`reset`"; "`button`"; "`menu`"
`type` | `embed`; `object`; `script`; `source`; `style` | Type of embedded resource | Valid MIME type
`type` | `input` | Type of form control | `input` type keyword
`type` | `menu` | Type of menu | "`popup`"; "`toolbar`"
`type` | `menuitem` | Type of command | "`command`"; "`checkbox`"; "`radio`"
`type` | `ol` | Kind of list marker | "`1`"; "`a`"; "`A`"; "`i`"; "`I`"
`typemustmatch` | `object` | Whether the `type` attribute and the Content-Type value need to match for the resource to be used | Boolean attribute
`usemap` | `img`; `object` | Name of image map to use | Valid hash-name reference*
`value` | `button`; `option` | Value to be used for form submission | Text
`value` | `data` | Machine-readable value | Text*
`value` | `input` | Value of the form control | Varies*
`value` | `li` | Ordinal value of the list item | Valid integer
`value` | `meter`; `progress` | Current value of the element | Valid floating-point number
`value` | `param` | Value of parameter | Text
`width` | `canvas`; `embed`; `iframe`; `img`; `input`; `object`; `video` | Horizontal dimension | Valid non-negative integer
`wrap` | `textarea` | How the value of the form control is to be wrapped for form submission | "`soft`"; "`hard`"

An asterisk (*) in a cell indicates that the actual rules are more complicated than indicated in the table above.

List of event handler content attributes
Attribute | Element(s) | Description | Value
--- | --- | --- | ---
`onabort` | HTML elements | `abort` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onautocomplete` | HTML elements | `autocomplete` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onautocompleteerror` | HTML elements | `autocompleteerror` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onafterprint` | `body` | `afterprint` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onbeforeprint` | `body` | `beforeprint` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onbeforeunload` | `body` | `beforeunload` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onblur` | HTML elements | `blur` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`oncancel` | HTML elements | `cancel` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`oncanplay` | HTML elements | `canplay` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`oncanplaythrough` | HTML elements | `canplaythrough` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onchange` | HTML elements | `change` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onclick` | HTML elements | `click` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onclose` | HTML elements | `close` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`oncontextmenu` | HTML elements | `contextmenu` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`oncuechange` | HTML elements | `cuechange` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondblclick` | HTML elements | `dblclick` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondrag` | HTML elements | `drag` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondragend` | HTML elements | `dragend` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondragenter` | HTML elements | `dragenter` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondragexit` | HTML elements | `dragexit` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondragleave` | HTML elements | `dragleave` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondragover` | HTML elements | `dragover` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondragstart` | HTML elements | `dragstart` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondrop` | HTML elements | `drop` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ondurationchange` | HTML elements | `durationchange` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onemptied` | HTML elements | `emptied` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onended` | HTML elements | `ended` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onerror` | HTML elements | `error` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onfocus` | HTML elements | `focus` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onhashchange` | `body` | `hashchange` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`oninput` | HTML elements | `input` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`oninvalid` | HTML elements | `invalid` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onkeydown` | HTML elements | `keydown` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onkeypress` | HTML elements | `keypress` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onkeyup` | HTML elements | `keyup` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onlanguagechange` | `body` | `languagechange` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onload` | HTML elements | `load` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onloadeddata` | HTML elements | `loadeddata` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onloadedmetadata` | HTML elements | `loadedmetadata` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onloadstart` | HTML elements | `loadstart` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onmessage` | `body` | `message` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onmousedown` | HTML elements | `mousedown` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onmouseenter` | HTML elements | `mouseenter` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onmouseleave` | HTML elements | `mouseleave` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onmousemove` | HTML elements | `mousemove` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onmouseout` | HTML elements | `mouseout` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onmouseover` | HTML elements | `mouseover` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onmouseup` | HTML elements | `mouseup` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onmousewheel` | HTML elements | `mousewheel` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onoffline` | `body` | `offline` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`ononline` | `body` | `online` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onpagehide` | `body` | `pagehide` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onpageshow` | `body` | `pageshow` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onpause` | HTML elements | `pause` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onplay` | HTML elements | `play` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onplaying` | HTML elements | `playing` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onpopstate` | `body` | `popstate` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onprogress` | HTML elements | `progress` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onratechange` | HTML elements | `ratechange` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onreset` | HTML elements | `reset` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onresize` | HTML elements | `resize` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onscroll` | HTML elements | `scroll` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onseeked` | HTML elements | `seeked` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onseeking` | HTML elements | `seeking` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onselect` | HTML elements | `select` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onshow` | HTML elements | `show` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onsort` | HTML elements | `sort` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onstalled` | HTML elements | `stalled` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onstorage` | `body` | `storage` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onsubmit` | HTML elements | `submit` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onsuspend` | HTML elements | `suspend` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ontimeupdate` | HTML elements | `timeupdate` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`ontoggle` | HTML elements | `toggle` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onunload` | `body` | `unload` event handler for `Window` object | Event handler content attribute
`onvolumechange` | HTML elements | `volumechange` event handler | Event handler content attribute
`onwaiting` | HTML elements | `waiting` event handler | Event handler content attribute

### Element Interfaces

This section is non-normative.

List of interfaces for elements
Element(s) | Interface(s)
--- | ---
`a` | `HTMLAnchorElement` : `HTMLElement`
`abbr` | `HTMLElement`
`address` | `HTMLElement`
`area` | `HTMLAreaElement` : `HTMLElement`
`article` | `HTMLElement`
`aside` | `HTMLElement`
`audio` | `HTMLAudioElement` : `HTMLMediaElement` : `HTMLElement`
`b` | `HTMLElement`
`base` | `HTMLBaseElement` : `HTMLElement`
`bdi` | `HTMLElement`
`bdo` | `HTMLElement`
`blockquote` | `HTMLQuoteElement` : `HTMLElement`
`body` | `HTMLBodyElement` : `HTMLElement`
`br` | `HTMLBRElement` : `HTMLElement`
`button` | `HTMLButtonElement` : `HTMLElement`
`canvas` | `HTMLCanvasElement` : `HTMLElement`
`caption` | `HTMLTableCaptionElement` : `HTMLElement`
`cite` | `HTMLElement`
`code` | `HTMLElement`
`col` | `HTMLTableColElement` : `HTMLElement`
`colgroup` | `HTMLTableColElement` : `HTMLElement`
`menuitem` | `HTMLMenuItemElement` : `HTMLElement`
`data` | `HTMLDataElement` : `HTMLElement`
`datalist` | `HTMLDataListElement` : `HTMLElement`
`dd` | `HTMLElement`
`del` | `HTMLModElement` : `HTMLElement`
`details` | `HTMLDetailsElement` : `HTMLElement`
`dfn` | `HTMLElement`
`dialog` | `HTMLDialogElement` : `HTMLElement`
`div` | `HTMLDivElement` : `HTMLElement`
`dl` | `HTMLDListElement` : `HTMLElement`
`dt` | `HTMLElement`
`em` | `HTMLElement`
`embed` | `HTMLEmbedElement` : `HTMLElement`
`fieldset` | `HTMLFieldSetElement` : `HTMLElement`
`figcaption` | `HTMLElement`
`figure` | `HTMLElement`
`footer` | `HTMLElement`
`form` | `HTMLFormElement` : `HTMLElement`
`h1` | `HTMLHeadingElement` : `HTMLElement`
`h2` | `HTMLHeadingElement` : `HTMLElement`
`h3` | `HTMLHeadingElement` : `HTMLElement`
`h4` | `HTMLHeadingElement` : `HTMLElement`
`h5` | `HTMLHeadingElement` : `HTMLElement`
`h6` | `HTMLHeadingElement` : `HTMLElement`
`head` | `HTMLHeadElement` : `HTMLElement`
`header` | `HTMLElement`
`hgroup` | `HTMLElement`
`hr` | `HTMLHRElement` : `HTMLElement`
`html` | `HTMLHtmlElement` : `HTMLElement`
`i` | `HTMLElement`
`iframe` | `HTMLIFrameElement` : `HTMLElement`
`img` | `HTMLImageElement` : `HTMLElement`
`input` | `HTMLInputElement` : `HTMLElement`
`ins` | `HTMLModElement` : `HTMLElement`
`kbd` | `HTMLElement`
`keygen` | `HTMLKeygenElement` : `HTMLElement`
`label` | `HTMLLabelElement` : `HTMLElement`
`legend` | `HTMLLegendElement` : `HTMLElement`
`li` | `HTMLLIElement` : `HTMLElement`
`link` | `HTMLLinkElement` : `HTMLElement`
`main` | `HTMLElement`
`map` | `HTMLMapElement` : `HTMLElement`
`mark` | `HTMLElement`
`menu` | `HTMLMenuElement` : `HTMLElement`
`meta` | `HTMLMetaElement` : `HTMLElement`
`meter` | `HTMLMeterElement` : `HTMLElement`
`nav` | `HTMLElement`
`noscript` | `HTMLElement`
`object` | `HTMLObjectElement` : `HTMLElement`
`ol` | `HTMLOListElement` : `HTMLElement`
`optgroup` | `HTMLOptGroupElement` : `HTMLElement`
`option` | `HTMLOptionElement` : `HTMLElement`
`output` | `HTMLOutputElement` : `HTMLElement`
`p` | `HTMLParagraphElement` : `HTMLElement`
`param` | `HTMLParamElement` : `HTMLElement`
`pre` | `HTMLPreElement` : `HTMLElement`
`progress` | `HTMLProgressElement` : `HTMLElement`
`q` | `HTMLQuoteElement` : `HTMLElement`
`rp` | `HTMLElement`
`rt` | `HTMLElement`
`ruby` | `HTMLElement`
`s` | `HTMLElement`
`samp` | `HTMLElement`
`script` | `HTMLScriptElement` : `HTMLElement`
`section` | `HTMLElement`
`select` | `HTMLSelectElement` : `HTMLElement`
`small` | `HTMLElement`
`source` | `HTMLSourceElement` : `HTMLElement`
`span` | `HTMLSpanElement` : `HTMLElement`
`strong` | `HTMLElement`
`style` | `HTMLStyleElement` : `HTMLElement`
`sub` | `HTMLElement`
`summary` | `HTMLElement`
`sup` | `HTMLElement`
`table` | `HTMLTableElement` : `HTMLElement`
`tbody` | `HTMLTableSectionElement` : `HTMLElement`
`td` | `HTMLTableDataCellElement` : `HTMLTableCellElement` : `HTMLElement`
`template` | `HTMLTemplateElement` : `HTMLElement`
`textarea` | `HTMLTextAreaElement` : `HTMLElement`
`tfoot` | `HTMLTableSectionElement` : `HTMLElement`
`th` | `HTMLTableHeaderCellElement` : `HTMLTableCellElement` : `HTMLElement`
`thead` | `HTMLTableSectionElement` : `HTMLElement`
`time` | `HTMLTimeElement` : `HTMLElement`
`title` | `HTMLTitleElement` : `HTMLElement`
`tr` | `HTMLTableRowElement` : `HTMLElement`
`track` | `HTMLTrackElement` : `HTMLElement`
`u` | `HTMLElement`
`ul` | `HTMLUListElement` : `HTMLElement`
`var` | `HTMLElement`
`video` | `HTMLVideoElement` : `HTMLMediaElement` : `HTMLElement`
`wbr` | `HTMLElement`

### All Interfaces

This section is non-normative.

- `AbstractWorker`
- `ApplicationCache`
- `AudioTrack`
- `AudioTrackList`
- `AutocompleteErrorEvent`
- `BarProp`
- `BeforeUnloadEvent`
- `BroadcastChannel`
- `CanvasDrawingStyles`
- `CanvasGradient`
- `CanvasPathMethods`
- `CanvasPattern`
- `CanvasProxy`
- `CanvasRenderingContext2D`
- `CloseEvent`
- `DOMElementMap`
- `DOMStringMap`
- `DataTransfer`
- `DataTransferItem`
- `DataTransferItemList`
- `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope`
- `Document`, partial
- `DragEvent`
- `DrawingStyle`
- `ErrorEvent`
- `EventSource`
- `External`
- `GlobalEventHandlers`
- `HTMLAllCollection`
- `HTMLAnchorElement`, partial
- `HTMLAppletElement`
- `HTMLAreaElement`, partial
- `HTMLAudioElement`
- `HTMLBRElement`, partial
- `HTMLBaseElement`
- `HTMLBodyElement`, partial
- `HTMLButtonElement`
- `HTMLCanvasElement`
- `HTMLDListElement`, partial
- `HTMLDataElement`
- `HTMLDataListElement`
- `HTMLDetailsElement`
- `HTMLDialogElement`
- `HTMLDirectoryElement`
- `HTMLDivElement`, partial
- `HTMLElement`
- `HTMLEmbedElement`, partial
- `HTMLFieldSetElement`
- `HTMLFontElement`
- `HTMLFormControlsCollection`
- `HTMLFormElement`
- `HTMLFrameElement`
- `HTMLFrameSetElement`
- `HTMLHRElement`, partial
- `HTMLHeadElement`
- `HTMLHeadingElement`, partial
- `HTMLHtmlElement`, partial
- `HTMLIFrameElement`, partial
- `HTMLImageElement`, partial
- `HTMLInputElement`, partial
- `HTMLKeygenElement`
- `HTMLLIElement`, partial
- `HTMLLabelElement`
- `HTMLLegendElement`, partial
- `HTMLLinkElement`, partial
- `HTMLMapElement`
- `HTMLMarqueeElement`
- `HTMLMediaElement`
- `HTMLMenuElement`, partial
- `HTMLMenuItemElement`
- `HTMLMetaElement`, partial
- `HTMLMeterElement`
- `HTMLModElement`
- `HTMLOListElement`, partial
- `HTMLObjectElement`, partial
- `HTMLOptGroupElement`
- `HTMLOptionElement`
- `HTMLOptionsCollection`
- `HTMLOutputElement`
- `HTMLParagraphElement`, partial
- `HTMLParamElement`, partial
- `HTMLPictureElement`
- `HTMLPreElement`, partial
- `HTMLProgressElement`
- `HTMLPropertiesCollection`
- `HTMLQuoteElement`
- `HTMLScriptElement`, partial
- `HTMLSelectElement`
- `HTMLSourceElement`, partial
- `HTMLSpanElement`
- `HTMLStyleElement`
- `HTMLTableCaptionElement`, partial
- `HTMLTableCellElement`, partial
- `HTMLTableColElement`, partial
- `HTMLTableDataCellElement`, partial
- `HTMLTableElement`, partial
- `HTMLTableHeaderCellElement`
- `HTMLTableRowElement`, partial
- `HTMLTableSectionElement`, partial
- `HTMLTemplateElement`
- `HTMLTextAreaElement`
- `HTMLTimeElement`
- `HTMLTitleElement`
- `HTMLTrackElement`
- `HTMLUListElement`, partial
- `HTMLUnknownElement`
- `HTMLVideoElement`
- `HashChangeEvent`
- `History`
- `ImageBitmap`
- `ImageBitmapFactories`
- `ImageData`
- `Location`
- `MediaController`
- `MediaError`
- `MessageChannel`
- `MessageEvent`
- `MessagePort`
- `MimeType`
- `MimeTypeArray`
- `MouseEvent`, partial
- `Navigator`
- `NavigatorContentUtils`
- `NavigatorID`
- `NavigatorLanguage`
- `NavigatorOnLine`
- `NavigatorPlugins`
- `NavigatorStorageUtils`
- `PageTransitionEvent`
- `Path2D`
- `Plugin`
- `PluginArray`
- `PopStateEvent`
- `PortCollection`
- `PropertyNodeList`
- `RadioNodeList`
- `RelatedEvent`
- `SharedWorker`
- `SharedWorkerGlobalScope`
- `Storage`
- `StorageEvent`
- `TextMetrics`
- `TextTrack`
- `TextTrackCue`
- `TextTrackCueList`
- `TextTrackList`
- `TimeRanges`
- `Touch`, partial
- `TrackEvent`
- `ValidityState`
- `VideoTrack`
- `VideoTrackList`
- `WebSocket`
- `Window`, partial
- `WindowBase64`
- `WindowEventHandlers`
- `WindowLocalStorage`
- `WindowModal`
- `WindowSessionStorage`
- `WindowTimers`
- `Worker`
- `WorkerGlobalScope`, partial
- `WorkerLocation`
- `WorkerNavigator`
- `XMLDocument`, partial

### Events

This section is non-normative.

List of events
Event | Interface | Interesting targets | Description
--- | --- | --- | ---
`abort` | `Event` | `Window` | Fired at the `Window` when the download was aborted by the user
`autocomplete` | `Event` | `form` elements | Fired at a `form` element when it is autofilled
`autocompleteerror` | `Event` | `form` elements | Fired at a `form` element when a bulk autofill fails
`DOMContentLoaded` | `Event` | `Document` | Fired at the `Document` once the parser has finished
`afterprint` | `Event` | `Window` | Fired at the `Window` after printing
`afterscriptexecute` | `Event` | `script` elements | Fired at `script` elements after the script runs (just before the corresponding `load` event)
`beforeprint` | `Event` | `Window` | Fired at the `Window` before printing
`beforescriptexecute` | `Event` | `script` elements | Fired at `script` elements just before the script runs; canceling the event cancels the running of the script
`beforeunload` | `BeforeUnloadEvent` | `Window` | Fired at the `Window` when the page is about to be unloaded, in case the page would like to show a warning prompt
`blur` | `Event` | `Window`, elements | Fired at nodes when they stop being focused
`cancel` | `Event` | `dialog` elements | Fired at `dialog` elements when they are canceled by the user (e.g. by pressing the Escape key)
`change` | `Event` | Form controls | Fired at controls when the user commits a value change (see also the `change` event of `input` elements)
`click` | `MouseEvent` | Elements | Normally a mouse event; also synthetically fired at an element before its activation behavior is run, when an element is activated from a non-pointer input device (e.g. a keyboard)
`close` | `Event` | `dialog` elements, `WebSocket` | Fired at `dialog` elements when they are closed, and at `WebSocket` elements when the connection is terminated
`connect` | `MessageEvent` | `SharedWorkerGlobalScope` | Fired at a shared worker's global scope when a new client connects
`contextmenu` | `Event` | Elements | Fired at elements when the user requests their context menu
`error` | `Event` | Global scope objects, `Worker` objects, elements, networking-related objects | Fired when unexpected errors occur (e.g. networking errors, script errors, decoding errors)
`focus` | `Event` | `Window`, elements | Fired at nodes gaining focus
`hashchange` | `HashChangeEvent` | `Window` | Fired at the `Window` when the fragment identifier part of the document's address changes
`input` | `Event` | Form controls | Fired at controls when the user changes the value (see also the `change` event of `input` elements)
`invalid` | `Event` | Form controls | Fired at controls during form validation if they do not satisfy their constraints
`languagechange` | `Event` | Global scope objects | Fired at the global scope object when the user's preferred languages change
`load` | `Event` | `Window`, elements | Fired at the `Window` when the document has finished loading; fired at an element containing a resource (e.g. `img`, `embed`) when its resource has finished loading
`loadend` | `Event` or `ProgressEvent` | `img` elements | Fired at `img` elements after a successful load
`loadstart` | `ProgressEvent` | `img` elements | Fired at `img` elements when a load begins (see also media element events)
`message` | `MessageEvent` | `Window`, `EventSource`, `WebSocket`, `MessagePort`, `BroadcastChannel`, `DedicatedWorkerGlobalScope`, `Worker` | Fired at an object when it receives a message
`offline` | `Event` | Global scope objects | Fired at the global scope object when the network connections fails
`online` | `Event` | Global scope objects | Fired at the global scope object when the network connections returns
`open` | `Event` | `EventSource`, `WebSocket` | Fired at networking-related objects when a connection is established
`pagehide` | `PageTransitionEvent` | `Window` | Fired at the `Window` when the page's entry in the session history stops being the current entry
`pageshow` | `PageTransitionEvent` | `Window` | Fired at the `Window` when the page's entry in the session history becomes the current entry
`popstate` | `PopStateEvent` | `Window` | Fired at the `Window` when the user navigates the session history
`progress` | `ProgressEvent` | `img` elements | Fired at `img` elements during a CORS-same-origin image load (see also media element events)
`readystatechange` | `Event` | `Document` | Fired at the `Document` when it finishes parsing and again when all its subresources have finished loading
`reset` | `Event` | `form` elements | Fired at a `form` element when it is reset
`select` | `Event` | Form controls | Fired at form controls when their text selection is adjusted (whether by an API or by the user)
`show` | `RelatedEvent` | `menu` elements | Fired at a `menu` element when it is shown as a context menu
`sort` | `Event` | `table` elements | Fired at `table` elements before it is sorted; canceling the event cancels the sorting of the table
`storage` | `StorageEvent` | `Window` | Fired at `Window` event when the corresponding `localStorage` or `sessionStorage` storage areas change
`submit` | `Event` | `form` elements | Fired at a `form` element when it is submitted
`toggle` | `Event` | `details` element | Fired at `details` elements when they open or close
`unload` | `Event` | `Window` | Fired at the `Window` object when the page is going away

See also media element events, application cache events, and drag-and-drop events.

### MIME Types

This section is non-normative.

The following MIME types are mentioned in this specification:

`application/atom+xml`
  Atom [ATOM]
`application/ecmascript`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`application/javascript`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`application/json`
  JSON [JSON]
`application/x-ecmascript`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`application/x-javascript`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`application/octet-stream`
  Generic binary data [RFC2046]
`application/microdata+json`
  Microdata as JSON
`application/rss+xml`
  RSS
`application/x-www-form-urlencoded`
  Form submission
`application/xhtml+xml`
  HTML
`application/xml`
  XML [XML] [RFC3023]
`image/gif`
  GIF images [GIF]
`image/jpeg`
  JPEG images [JPEG]
`image/png`
  PNG images [JPEG]
`image/svg+xml`
  SVG images [JPEG]
`multipart/form-data`
  Form submission [RFC2388]
`multipart/mixed`
  Generic mixed content [RFC2046]
`multipart/x-mixed-replace`
  Streaming server push
`text/cache-manifest`
  Offline application cache manifests
`text/css`
  CSS [CSS]
`text/ecmascript`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/event-stream`
  Server-sent event streams
`text/javascript`
  JavaScript [ECMA262]
`text/javascript1.0`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/javascript1.1`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/javascript1.2`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/javascript1.3`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/javascript1.4`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/javascript1.5`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/jscript`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/livescript`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/plain`
  Generic plain text [RFC2046]
`text/html`
  HTML
`text/ping`
  Hyperlink auditing
`text/uri-list`
  List of URLs [RFC2483]
`text/vcard`
  vCard [RFC6350]
`text/x-ecmascript`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/x-javascript`
  JavaScript (legacy type) [ECMA262]
`text/xml`
  XML [XML] [RFC3023]
`video/mp4`
  MPEG-4 video [RFC4337]
`video/mpeg`
  MPEG video [RFC2046]

## References

All references are normative unless marked "Non-normative".

[ABNF]
  Augmented BNF for Syntax Specifications: ABNF, D. Crocker, P. Overell. IETF.
[ABOUT]
  The 'about' URI scheme, S. Moonesamy. IETF.
[APNG]
  (Non-normative) APNG Specification. S. Parmenter, V. Vukicevic, A. Smith. Mozilla.
[ARIA]
  Accessible Rich Internet Applications (WAI-ARIA), J. Craig, M. Cooper, L. Pappas, R. Schwerdtfeger, L. Seeman. W3C.
[ARIAIMPL]
  WAI-ARIA 1.0 User Agent Implementation Guide, A. Snow-Weaver, M. Cooper. W3C.
[ATAG]
  (Non-normative) Authoring Tool Accessibility Guidelines (ATAG) 2.0, J. Richards, J. Spellman, J. Treviranus. W3C.
[ATOM]
  (Non-normative) The Atom Syndication Format, M. Nottingham, R. Sayre. IETF.
[BCP47]
  Tags for Identifying Languages; Matching of Language Tags, A. Phillips, M. Davis. IETF.
[BECSS]
  Behavioral Extensions to CSS, I. Hickson. W3C.
[BEZIER]
  Courbes à poles, P. de Casteljau. INPI, 1959.
[BIDI]
  UAX #9: Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm, M. Davis. Unicode Consortium.
[BOCU1]
  (Non-normative) UTN #6: BOCU-1: MIME-Compatible Unicode Compression, M. Scherer, M. Davis. Unicode Consortium.
[CESU8]
  (Non-normative) UTR #26: Compatibility Encoding Scheme For UTF-16: 8-BIT (CESU-8), T. Phipps. Unicode Consortium.
[CHARMOD]
  (Non-normative) Character Model for the World Wide Web 1.0: Fundamentals, M. Dürst, F. Yergeau, R. Ishida, M. Wolf, T. Texin. W3C.
[CLDR]
  Unicode Common Locale Data Repository. Unicode.
[COMPOSITE]
  Compositing and Blending. R. Cabanier, N. Andronikos. W3C.
[COMPUTABLE]
  (Non-normative) On computable numbers, with an application to the Entscheidungsproblem, A. Turing. In Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society, series 2, volume 42, pages 230-265. London Mathematical Society, 1937.
[COOKIES]
  HTTP State Management Mechanism, A. Barth. IETF.
[CP50220]
  (Non-normative) CP50220, Y. Naruse. IANA.
[CSP]
  (Non-normative) Content Security Policy, B. Sterne, A. Barth. W3C.
[CSS]
  Cascading Style Sheets Level 2 Revision 1, B. Bos, T. Çelik, I. Hickson, H. Lie. W3C.
[CSSANIMATIONS]
  (Non-normative) CSS Animations, D. Jackson, D. Hyatt, C. Marrin, S. Galineau, L. Baron. W3C.
[CSSATTR]
  CSS Styling Attribute Syntax, T. Çelik, E. Etemad. W3C.
[CSSCOLOR]
  CSS Color Module Level 3, T. Çelik, C. Lilley, L. Baron. W3C.
[CSSFONTLOAD]
  CSS Font Loading, T. Atkins, J. Daggett. W3C.
[CSSFONTS]
  CSS Fonts, J. Daggett. W3C.
[CSSGC]
  CSS Generated Content, H. Lie, E. Etemad, I. Hickson. W3C.
[CSSIMAGES]
  CSS Image Values and Replaced Content Module, E. Etemad, T. Atkins. W3C.
[CSSOM]
  Cascading Style Sheets Object Model (CSSOM), S. Pieters, G. Adams. W3C.
[CSSOMVIEW]
  CSSOM View Module, S. Pieters, G. Adams. W3C.
[CSSRUBY]
  CSS3 Ruby Module, R. Ishida. W3C.
[CSSTRANSITIONS]
  (Non-normative) CSS Transitions, D. Jackson, D. Hyatt, C. Marrin, L. Baron. W3C.
[CSSUI]
  CSS3 Basic User Interface Module, T. Çelik. W3C.
[CSSSCOPED]
  CSS Scoping, T. Atkins, E. Etemad. W3C.
[CSSSYNTAX]
  CSS Syntax, T. Atkins, S. Sapin. W3C.
[CSSVALUES]
  CSS3 Values and Units, H. Lie, T. Atkins, E. Etemad. W3C.
[CSSWM]
  CSS Writing Modes, E. Etemad, K. Ishii. W3C.
[DASH]
  Dynamic adaptive streaming over HTTP (DASH). ISO.
[DOM]
  DOM, A. van Kesteren, A. Gregor, Ms2ger. WHATWG.
[DOMEVENTS]
  Document Object Model (DOM) Level 3 Events Specification, G. Kacmarcik, T. Leithead, J. Rossi, D. Schepers, B. Höhrmann, P. Le Hégaret, T. Pixley. W3C.
[DOMPARSING]
  DOM Parsing and Serialization, Ms2ger. WHATWG.
[DOT]
  (Non-normative) The DOT Language. Graphviz.
[E163]
  Recommendation E.163 — Numbering Plan for The International Telephone Service, CCITT Blue Book, Fascicle II.2, pp. 128-134, November 1988.
[ECMA262]
  ECMAScript Language Specification. ECMA.
[EDITING]
  HTML Editing APIs, A. Gregor. W3C Editing APIs CG.
[ENCODING]
  Encoding, A. van Kesteren, J. Bell. WHATWG.
[FETCH]
  Fetch, A. van Kesteren. WHATWG.
[FILEAPI]
  File API, A. Ranganathan. W3C.
[FULLSCREEN]
  Fullscreen, A. van Kesteren, T. Çelik. WHATWG.
[GIF]
  (Non-normative) Graphics Interchange Format. CompuServe.
[GRAPHICS]
  (Non-normative) Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice in C, Second Edition, J. Foley, A. van Dam, S. Feiner, J. Hughes. Addison-Wesley. ISBN 0-201-84840-6.
[GREGORIAN]
  (Non-normative) Inter Gravissimas, A. Lilius, C. Clavius. Gregory XIII Papal Bull, February 1582.
[HTTP]
  Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP/1.1): Message Syntax and Routing, R. Fielding, J. Reschke. IETF.
  Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP/1.1): Semantics and Content, R. Fielding, J. Reschke. IETF.
  Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP/1.1): Conditional Requests, R. Fielding, J. Reschke. IETF.
  Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP/1.1): Range Requests, R. Fielding, Y. Lafon, J. Reschke. IETF.
  Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP/1.1): Caching, R. Fielding, M. Nottingham, J. Reschke. IETF.
  Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP/1.1): Authentication, R. Fielding, J. Reschke. IETF.
[HTTPS]
  (Non-normative) HTTP Over TLS, E. Rescorla. IETF.
[IANAPERMHEADERS]
  Permanent Message Header Field Names. IANA.
[INBAND]
  Sourcing In-band Media Resource Tracks from Media Containers into HTML, S. Pfeiffer, B. Lund. W3C.
[ISO3166]
  ISO 3166: Codes for the representation of names of countries and their subdivisions. ISO.
[ISO8601]
  (Non-normative) ISO8601: Data elements and interchange formats — Information interchange — Representation of dates and times. ISO.
[JLREQ]
  Requirements for Japanese Text Layout. W3C.
[JPEG]
  JPEG File Interchange Format, E. Hamilton.
[JSON]
  The application/json Media Type for JavaScript Object Notation (JSON), D. Crockford. IETF.
[MAILTO]
  (Non-normative) The 'mailto' URI scheme, M. Duerst, L. Masinter, J. Zawinski. IETF.
[MATHML]
  Mathematical Markup Language (MathML), D. Carlisle, P. Ion, R. Miner, N. Poppelier. W3C.
[MEDIAFRAG]
  Media Fragments URI, R. Troncy, E. Mannens, S. Pfeiffer, D. Van Deursen. W3C.
[MEDIASOURCE]
  Media Source Extensions, A. Colwell, A. Bateman, M. Watson. W3C.
[MEDIASTREAM]
  Media Capture and Streams, D. Burnett, A. Bergkvist, C. Jennings, A. Narayanan. W3C.
[MFREL]
  Microformats Wiki: existing rel values. Microformats.
[MIMESNIFF]
  MIME Sniffing, G. Hemsley. WHATWG.
[MNG]
  MNG (Multiple-image Network Graphics) Format. G. Randers-Pehrson.
[MPEG2]
  ISO/IEC 13818-1: Information technology — Generic coding of moving pictures and associated audio information: Systems. ISO/IEC.
[MPEG4]
  ISO/IEC 14496-12: ISO base media file format. ISO/IEC.
[MQ]
  Media Queries, H. Lie, T. Çelik, D. Glazman, A. van Kesteren. W3C.
[NPAPI]
  (Non-normative) Gecko Plugin API Reference. Mozilla.
[OGGSKELETONHEADERS]
  SkeletonHeaders. Xiph.Org.
[OPENSEARCH]
  Autodiscovery in HTML/XHTML. In OpenSearch 1.1 Draft 4, Section 4.6.2. OpenSearch.org.
[ORIGIN]
  The Web Origin Concept, A. Barth. IETF.
[PAGEVIS]
  (Non-normative) Page Visibility, J. Mann, A. Jain. W3C.
[PDF]
  (Non-normative) Document management — Portable document format — Part 1: PDF. ISO.
[PINGBACK]
  Pingback 1.0, S. Langridge, I. Hickson.
[PNG]
  Portable Network Graphics (PNG) Specification, D. Duce. W3C.
[POINTERLOCK]
  Pointer Lock, V. Scheib. W3C.
[PPUTF8]
  (Non-normative) The Properties and Promises of UTF-8, M. Dürst. University of Zürich. In Proceedings of the 11th International Unicode Conference.
[PSL]
  Public Suffix List. Mozilla Foundation.
[RFC1034]
  Domain Names - Concepts and Facilities, P. Mockapetris. IETF, November 1987.
[RFC1123]
  Requirements for Internet Hosts -- Application and Support, R. Braden. IETF, October 1989.
[RFC1345]
  (Non-normative) Character Mnemonics and Character Sets, K. Simonsen. IETF.
[RFC1468]
  (Non-normative) Japanese Character Encoding for Internet Messages, J. Murai, M. Crispin, E. van der Poel. IETF.
[RFC1554]
  (Non-normative) ISO-2022-JP-2: Multilingual Extension of ISO-2022-JP, M. Ohta, K. Handa. IETF.
[RFC1557]
  (Non-normative) Korean Character Encoding for Internet Messages, U. Choi, K. Chon, H. Park. IETF.
[RFC1842]
  (Non-normative) ASCII Printable Characters-Based Chinese Character Encoding for Internet Messages, Y. Wei, Y. Zhang, J. Li, J. Ding, Y. Jiang. IETF.
[RFC1922]
  (Non-normative) Chinese Character Encoding for Internet Messages, HF. Zhu, DY. Hu, ZG. Wang, TC. Kao, WCH. Chang, M. Crispin. IETF.
[RFC2046]
  Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) Part Two: Media Types, N. Freed, N. Borenstein. IETF.
[RFC2119]
  Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate Requirement Levels, S. Bradner. IETF.
[RFC2237]
  (Non-normative) Japanese Character Encoding for Internet Messages, K. Tamaru. IETF.
[RFC2313]
  PKCS #1: RSA Encryption, B. Kaliski. IETF.
[RFC2318]
  The text/css Media Type, H. Lie, B. Bos, C. Lilley. IETF.
[RFC2388]
  Returning Values from Forms: multipart/form-data, L. Masinter. IETF.
[RFC2397]
  The "data" URL scheme, L. Masinter. IETF.
[RFC2445]
  Internet Calendaring and Scheduling Core Object Specification (iCalendar), F. Dawson, D. Stenerson. IETF.
[RFC2483]
  URI Resolution Services Necessary for URN Resolution, M. Mealling, R. Daniel. IETF.
[RFC3676]
  The Text/Plain Format and DelSp Parameters, R. Gellens. IETF.
[RFC3023]
  XML Media Types, M. Murata, S. St. Laurent, D. Kohn. IETF.
[RFC3279]
  Algorithms and Identifiers for the Internet X.509 Public Key Infrastructure Certificate and Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Profile, W. Polk, R. Housley, L. Bassham. IETF.
[RFC3490]
  Internationalizing Domain Names in Applications (IDNA), P. Faltstrom, P. Hoffman, A. Costello. IETF.
[RFC3864]
  Registration Procedures for Message Header Fields, G. Klyne, M. Nottingham, J. Mogul. IETF.
[RFC4281]
  The Codecs Parameter for "Bucket" Media Types, R. Gellens, D. Singer, P. Frojdh. IETF.
[RFC4329]
  (Non-normative) Scripting Media Types, B. Höhrmann. IETF.
[RFC4337]
  (Non-normative) MIME Type Registration for MPEG-4, Y. Lim, D. Singer. IETF.
[RFC4395]
  Guidelines and Registration Procedures for New URI Schemes, T. Hansen, T. Hardie, L. Masinter. IETF.
[RFC4648]
  The Base16, Base32, and Base64 Data Encodings, S. Josefsson. IETF.
[RFC5280]
  Internet X.509 Public Key Infrastructure Certificate and Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Profile, D. Cooper, S. Santesson, S. Farrell, S. Boeyen, R. Housley, W. Polk. IETF.
[RFC5322]
  Internet Message Format, P. Resnick. IETF.
[SMS]
  (Non-normative) URI Scheme for Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Short Message Service (SMS), E. Wilde, A. Vaha-Sipila. IETF.
[RFC6266]
  Use of the Content-Disposition Header Field in the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), J. Reschke. IETF.
[RFC6350]
  vCard Format Specification, S. Perreault. IETF.
[SCSU]
  (Non-normative) UTR #6: A Standard Compression Scheme For Unicode, M. Wolf, K. Whistler, C. Wicksteed, M. Davis, A. Freytag, M. Scherer. Unicode Consortium.
[SELECTORS]
  Selectors, E. Etemad, T. Çelik, D. Glazman, I. Hickson, P. Linss, J. Williams. W3C.
[SRGB]
  IEC 61966-2-1: Multimedia systems and equipment — Colour measurement and management — Part 2-1: Colour management — Default RGB colour space — sRGB. IEC.
[SVG]
  Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) Tiny 1.2 Specification, O. Andersson, R. Berjon, E. Dahlström, A. Emmons, J. Ferraiolo, A. Grasso, V. Hardy, S. Hayman, D. Jackson, C. Lilley, C. McCormack, A. Neumann, C. Northway, A. Quint, N. Ramani, D. Schepers, A. Shellshear. W3C.
[TOR]
  (Non-normative) Tor.
[TOUCH]
  Touch Events, D. Schepers, S. Moon, M. Brubeck, A. Barstow. W3C.
[TZDATABASE]
  (Non-normative) Time Zone Database. IANA.
[UAAG]
  (Non-normative) User Agent Accessibility Guidelines (UAAG) 2.0, J. Allan, K. Ford, J. Richards, J. Spellman. W3C.
[UCA]
  UTR #10: Unicode Collation Algorithm, M. Davis, K. Whistler. Unicode Consortium.
[UNICODE]
  The Unicode Standard. Unicode Consortium.
[UNIVCHARDET]
  (Non-normative) A composite approach to language/encoding detection, S. Li, K. Momoi. Netscape. In Proceedings of the 19th International Unicode Conference.
[URL]
  URL, A. van Kesteren. WHATWG.
[URN]
  URN Syntax, R. Moats. IETF.
[UTF7]
  (Non-normative) UTF-7: A Mail-Safe Transformation Format of Unicode, D. Goldsmith, M. Davis. IETF.
[UTF8DET]
  (Non-normative) Multilingual form encoding, M. Dürst. W3C.
[UTR36]
  (Non-normative) UTR #36: Unicode Security Considerations, M. Davis, M. Suignard. Unicode Consortium.
[WCAG]
  (Non-normative) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.0, B. Caldwell, M. Cooper, L. Reid, G. Vanderheiden. W3C.
[WEBGL]
  WebGL Specification, D. Jackson. Khronos Group.
[WEBIDL]
  Web IDL, C. McCormack. W3C.
[WEBLINK]
  Web Linking, M. Nottingham. IETF.
[WEBMCG]
  WebM Container Guidelines. The WebM Project.
[WEBVTT]
  WebVTT, I. Hickson. W3C.
[WHATWGWIKI]
  The WHATWG Wiki. WHATWG.
[WSP]
  The WebSocket protocol, I. Fette, A. Melnikov. IETF.
[X121]
  Recommendation X.121 — International Numbering Plan for Public Data Networks, CCITT Blue Book, Fascicle VIII.3, pp. 317-332.
[X690]
  Recommendation X.690 — Information Technology — ASN.1 Encoding Rules — Specification of Basic Encoding Rules (BER), Canonical Encoding Rules (CER), and Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER). International Telecommunication Union.
[XFN]
  XFN 1.1 profile, T. Çelik, M. Mullenweg, E. Meyer. GMPG.
[XHR]
  `XMLHttpRequest`, A. van Kesteren. WHATWG.
[XML]
  Extensible Markup Language, T. Bray, J. Paoli, C. Sperberg-McQueen, E. Maler, F. Yergeau. W3C.
[XMLBASE]
  XML Base, J. Marsh, R. Tobin. W3C.
[XMLNS]
  Namespaces in XML, T. Bray, D. Hollander, A. Layman, R. Tobin. W3C.
[XMLSSPI]
  Associating Style Sheets with XML documents, J. Clark, S. Pieters, H. Thompson. W3C.
[XPATH10]
  XML Path Language (XPath) Version 1.0, J. Clark, S. DeRose. W3C.
[XSLT10]
  (Non-normative) XSL Transformations (XSLT) Version 1.0, J. Clark. W3C.

## Acknowledgements

Thanks to Tim Berners-Lee for inventing HTML, without which none of this would exist.

Thanks to Aankhen, Aaron Boodman, Aaron Leventhal, Adam Barth, Adam de Boor, Adam Hepton, Adam Klein, Adam Roben, Addison Phillips, Adele Peterson, Adrian Bateman, Adrian Sutton, Agustín Fernández, Aharon (Vladimir) Lanin, Ajai Tirumali, Akatsuki Kitamura, Alan Plum, Alastair Campbell, Alejandro G. Castro, Alex Bishop, Alex Nicolaou, Alex Rousskov, Alexander Farkas, Alexander J. Vincent, Alexandre Morgaut, Alexey Feldgendler, Алексей Проскуряков (Alexey Proskuryakov), Alexis Deveria, Allan Clements, Ami Fischman, Amos Jeffries, Anders Carlsson, André E. Veltstra, Andrea Rendine, Andreas, Andreas Kling, Andrei Popescu, Andres Gomez, Andrew Barfield, Andrew Clover, Andrew Gove, Andrew Grieve, Andrew Oakley, Andrew Sidwell, Andrew Simons, Andrew Smith, Andrew W. Hagen, Andrey V. Lukyanov, Andry Rendy, Andy Earnshaw, Andy Heydon, Andy Palay, Anne van Kesteren, Anthony Boyd, Anthony Bryan, Anthony Hickson, Anthony Ricaud, Antti Koivisto, Arkadiusz Michalski, Arne Thomassen, Aron Spohr, Arphen Lin, Arthur Stolyar, Arun Patole, Aryeh Gregor, Asbjørn Ulsberg, Ashley Gullen, Ashley Sheridan, Atsushi Takayama, Aurelien Levy, Ave Wrigley, Axel Dahmen, Ben Boyle, Ben Godfrey, Ben Lerner, Ben Leslie, Ben Meadowcroft, Ben Millard, Benjamin Carl Wiley Sittler, Benjamin Hawkes-Lewis, Benoit Ren, Bert Bos, Bijan Parsia, Bil Corry, Bill Mason, Bill McCoy, Billy Wong, Bjartur Thorlacius, Björn Höhrmann, Blake Frantz, Bob Lund, Bob Owen, Boris Zbarsky, Brad Fults, Brad Neuberg, Brad Spencer, Brady Eidson, Brendan Eich, Brenton Simpson, Brett Wilson, Brett Zamir, Brian Blakely, Brian Campbell, Brian Korver, Brian Kuhn, Brian M. Dube, Brian Ryner, Brian Smith, Brian Wilson, Bryan Sullivan, Bruce Bailey, Bruce D'Arcus, Bruce Lawson, Bruce Miller, C. Williams, Cameron McCormack, Cameron Zemek, Cao Yipeng, Carlos Amengual, Carlos Gabriel Cardona, Carlos Perelló Marín, Chao Cai, 윤석찬 (Channy Yun), Charl van Niekerk, Charles Iliya Krempeaux, Charles McCathieNevile, Chris Apers, Chris Cressman, Chris Evans, Chris Morris, Chris Pearce, Chris Peterson, Chris Weber, Christian Biesinger, Christian Johansen, Christian Schmidt, Christoph Päper, Christophe Dumez, Christopher Aillon, Christopher Ferris, Chriswa, Clark Buehler, Cole Robison, Colin Fine, Collin Jackson, Corprew Reed, Craig Cockburn, Csaba Gabor, Csaba Marton, Cynthia Shelly, Dan Yoder, Daniel Barclay, Daniel Bratell, Daniel Brooks, Daniel Brumbaugh Keeney, Daniel Cheng, Daniel Davis, Daniel Glazman, Daniel Peng, Daniel Schattenkirchner, Daniel Spång, Daniel Steinberg, Daniel Trebbien, Danny Sullivan, Darin Adler, Darin Fisher, Darxus, Dave Camp, Dave Hodder, Dave Lampton, Dave Singer, Dave Townsend, David Baron, David Bloom, David Bruant, David Carlisle, David E. Cleary, David Egan Evans, David Fink, David Flanagan, David Gerard, David Håsäther, David Hyatt, David I. Lehn, David John Burrowes, David Kendal, David Matja, David Remahl, David Smith, David Woolley, DeWitt Clinton, Dean Edridge, Dean Edwards, Debi Orton, Derek Featherstone, Devarshi Pant, Devdatta, Dimitri Glazkov, Dimitry Golubovsky, Dirk Pranke, Dirk Schulze, Dirkjan Ochtman, Divya Manian, Dmitry Titov, dolphinling, Domenic Denicola, Dominique Hazaël-Massieux, Don Brutzman, Doron Rosenberg, Doug Kramer, Doug Simpkinson, Drew Wilson, Edmund Lai, Eduard Pascual, Eduardo Vela, Edward O'Connor, Edward Welbourne, Edward Z. Yang, Ehsan Akhgari, Eira Monstad, Eitan Adler, Eliot Graff, Elisabeth Robson, Elizabeth Castro, Elliott Sprehn, Elliotte Harold, Eric Carlson, Eric Casler, Eric Lawrence, Eric Rescorla, Eric Semling, Erik Arvidsson, Erik Rose, Evan Martin, Evan Prodromou, Evan Stade, Evert, fantasai, Felix Sasaki, Francesco Schwarz, Francis Brosnan Blazquez, Franck 'Shift' Quélain, Frank Barchard, Fredrik Söderquist, 鵜飼文敏 (Fumitoshi Ukai), Futomi Hatano, Gavin Carothers, Gavin Kistner, Gareth Rees, Garrett Smith, Geoff Richards, Geoffrey Garen, Geoffrey Sneddon, George Lund, Gianmarco Armellin, Giovanni Campagna, Giuseppe Pascale, Glenn Adams, Glenn Maynard, Graham Klyne, Greg Botten, Greg Houston, Greg Wilkins, Gregg Tavares, Gregory J. Rosmaita, Grey, Guilherme Johansson Tramontina, Gytis Jakutonis, Håkon Wium Lie, Habib Virji, Hallvord Reiar Michaelsen Steen, Hans S. Tømmerhalt, Hans Stimer, Harald Alvestrand, Henri Sivonen, Henrik Lied, Henry Mason, Henry Story, Hugh Guiney, Hugh Winkler, Ian Bicking, Ian Clelland, Ian Davis, Ian Fette, Ido Green, Ignacio Javier, Ivan Enderlin, Ivo Emanuel Gonçalves, J. King, Jacob Davies, Jacques Distler, Jake Verbaten, Jakub Łopuszański, James Craig, James Graham, James Greene, James Justin Harrell, James Kozianski, James M Snell, James Perrett, James Robinson, Jamie Lokier, Janusz Majnert, Jan-Klaas Kollhof, Jared Jacobs, Jason Duell, Jason Kersey, Jason Lustig, Jason White, Jasper Bryant-Greene, Jasper St. Pierre, Jatinder Mann, Jed Hartman, Jeff Balogh, Jeff Cutsinger, Jeff Schiller, Jeff Walden, Jeffrey Zeldman, 胡慧鋒 (Jennifer Braithwaite), Jens Bannmann, Jens Fendler, Jens Lindström, Jens Meiert, Jeremey Hustman, Jeremy Keith, Jeremy Orlow, Jeroen van der Meer, Jian Li, Jim Jewett, Jim Ley, Jim Meehan, Jim Michaels, Jirka Kosek, Jjgod Jiang, João Eiras, Joe Clark, Joe Gregorio, Joel Spolsky, Joel Verhagen, Johan Herland, John Boyer, John Bussjaeger, John Carpenter, John Daggett, John Fallows, John Foliot, John Harding, John Keiser, John Snyders, John Stockton, John-Mark Bell, Johnny Stenback, Jon Ferraiolo, Jon Gibbins, Jon Perlow, Jonas Sicking, Jonathan Cook, Jonathan Rees, Jonathan Watt, Jonathan Worent, Jonny Axelsson, Jordan Tucker, Jorgen Horstink, Jorunn Danielsen Newth, Joseph Kesselman, Joseph Mansfield, Joseph Pecoraro, Josh Aas, Josh Hart, Josh Levenberg, Joshua Bell, Joshua Randall, Jukka K. Korpela, Jules Clément-Ripoche, Julian Reschke, Jürgen Jeka, Justin Lebar, Justin Novosad, Justin Schuh, Justin Sinclair, Ka-Sing Chou, Kai Hendry, 呂康豪 (KangHao Lu), Kartikaya Gupta, Kathy Walton, Kelly Ford, Kelly Norton, Kevin Benson, Kevin Gadd, Kevin Cole, Kornél Pál, Kornel Lesinski, Kris Northfield, Kristof Zelechovski, Krzysztof Maczyński, 黒澤剛志 (Kurosawa Takeshi), Kyle Barnhart, Kyle Hofmann, Kyle Huey, Léonard Bouchet, Léonie Watson, Lachlan Hunt, Larry Masinter, Larry Page, Lars Gunther, Lars Solberg, Laura Carlson, Laura Granka, Laura L. Carlson, Laura Wisewell, Laurens Holst, Lawrence Forooghian, Lee Kowalkowski, Leif Halvard Silli, Leif Kornstaedt, Lenny Domnitser, Leonard Rosenthol, Leons Petrazickis, Lobotom Dysmon, Logan, Loune, Łukasz Pilorz, Luke Kenneth Casson Leighton, Maciej Stachowiak, Magnus Kristiansen, Maik Merten, Malcolm Rowe, Manish Tripathi, Marc Hoyois, Marcus Bointon, Mark Birbeck, Mark Davis, Mark Miller, Mark Nottingham, Mark Pilgrim, Mark Rowe, Mark Schenk, Mark Vickers, Mark Wilton-Jones, Martijn Wargers, Martin Atkins, Martin Dürst, Martin Honnen, Martin Janecke, Martin Kutschker, Martin Nilsson, Martin Thomson, Masataka Yakura, Masatoshi Kimura, Mason Mize, Mathias Bynens, Mathieu Henri, Matias Larsson, Matt Falkenhagen, Matt Schmidt, Matt Wright, Matthew Gregan, Matthew Mastracci, Matthew Noorenberghe, Matthew Raymond, Matthew Thomas, Mattias Waldau, Max Romantschuk, Menachem Salomon, Menno van Slooten, Micah Dubinko, Michael 'Ratt' Iannarelli, Michael A. Nachbaur, Michael A. Puls II, Michael Carter, Michael Daskalov, Michael Day, Michael Dyck, Michael Enright, Michael Gratton, Michael Nordman, Michael Powers, Michael Rakowski, Michael(tm) Smith, Michael Walmsley, Michal Zalewski, Michel Fortin, Michelangelo De Simone, Michiel van der Blonk, Mihai Şucan, Mihai Parparita, Mike Brown, Mike Dierken, Mike Dixon, Mike Hearn, Mike Schinkel, Mike Shaver, Mikko Rantalainen, Mohamed Zergaoui, Mohammad Al Houssami, Mounir Lamouri, Ms2ger, Nadia Heninger, NARUSE Yui, Neil Deakin, Neil Rashbrook, Neil Soiffer, Nicholas Shanks, Nicholas Stimpson, Nicholas Zakas, Nickolay Ponomarev, Nicolas Gallagher, Noah Mendelsohn, Noah Slater, Noel Gordon, Nolan Waite, NoozNooz42, Norbert Lindenberg, Ojan Vafai, Olaf Hoffmann, Olav Junker Kjær, Oldřich Vetešník, Oli Studholme, Oliver Hunt, Oliver Rigby, Olivier Gendrin, Olli Pettay, oSand, Pablo Flouret, Patrick Garies, Patrick H. Lauke, Patrik Persson, Paul Adenot, Paul Norman, Per-Erik Brodin, Perry Smith, Peter Beverloo, Peter Karlsson, Peter Kasting, Peter Moulder, Peter Occil, Peter Stark, Peter Van der Beken, Peter-Paul Koch, Phil Pickering, Philip Jägenstedt, Philip Taylor, Philip TAYLOR, Philippe De Ryck, Prateek Rungta, Pravir Gupta, 李普君 (Pujun Li), Rachid Finge, Rafael Weinstein, Rafał Miłecki, Raj Doshi, Rajas Moonka, Ralf Stoltze, Ralph Giles, Raphael Champeimont, Remci Mizkur, Remco, Remy Sharp, Rene Saarsoo, Rene Stach, Ric Hardacre, Rich Clark, Rich Doughty, Richard Ishida, Rigo Wenning, Rikkert Koppes, Rimantas Liubertas, Riona Macnamara, Rob Ennals, Rob Jellinghaus, Rob S, Robert Blaut, Robert Collins, Robert Kieffer, Robert Millan, Robert O'Callahan, Robert Sayre, Robin Berjon, Robin Schaufler, Rodger Combs, Roland Steiner, Roma Matusevich, Roman Ivanov, Roy Fielding, Ruud Steltenpool, Ryan King, Ryosuke Niwa, S. Mike Dierken, Salvatore Loreto, Sam Dutton, Sam Kuper, Sam Ruby, Sam Weinig, Samuel Bronson, Samy Kamkar, Sander van Lambalgen, Sanjoy Pal, Sarven Capadisli, Scott González, Scott Hess, Sean Fraser, Sean Hayes, Sean Hogan, Sean Knapp, Sebastian Markbåge, Sebastian Schnitzenbaumer, Seth Call, Seth Dillingham, Shannon Moeller, Shanti Rao, Shaun Inman, Shiki Okasaka, Sierk Bornemann, Sigbjørn Finne, Sigbjørn Vik, Silver Ghost, Silvia Pfeiffer, Šime Vidas, Simon Montagu, Simon Pieters, Simon Spiegel, skeww, Smylers, Stanton McCandlish, Stefan Håkansson, Stefan Haustein, Stefan Santesson, Stefan Weiss, Steffen Meschkat, Stephen Ma, Stephen White, Steve Comstock, Steve Faulkner, Steve Runyon, Steven Bennett, Steven Garrity, Steven Tate, Stewart Brodie, Stuart Ballard, Stuart Langridge, Stuart Parmenter, Subramanian Peruvemba, Sunava Dutta, Susan Borgrink, Susan Lesch, Sylvain Pasche, T. J. Crowder, Tab Atkins, Takeshi Yoshino, Tantek Çelik, 田村健人 (TAMURA Kent), Ted Mielczarek, Terrence Wood, Thijs van der Vossen, Thomas Broyer, Thomas Koetter, Thomas O'Connor, Tim Altman, Tim Johansson, TJ VanToll, Toby Inkster, Todd Moody, Tom Baker, Tom Pike, Tommy Thorsen, Tony Ross, Travis Leithead, Trevor Saunders, Tyler Close, Victor Carbune, Vipul Snehadeep Chawathe, Vitya Muhachev, Vladimir Katardjiev, Vladimir Vukićević, voracity, Wakaba, Wayne Carr, Wayne Pollock, Wellington Fernando de Macedo, Weston Ruter, Wilhelm Joys Andersen, Will Levine, William Chen, William Swanson, Wladimir Palant, Wojciech Mach, Wolfram Kriesing, Xan Gregg, Yang Chen, Ye-Kui Wang, Yehuda Katz, Yi-An Huang, Yngve Nysaeter Pettersen, Yonathan Randolph, Yuzo Fujishima, Zhenbin Xu, Zoltan Herczeg, and Øistein E. Andersen, for their useful comments, both large and small, that have led to changes to this specification over the years.

Thanks also to everyone who has ever posted about HTML to their blogs, public mailing lists, or forums, including all the contributors to the various W3C HTML WG lists and the various WHATWG lists.

Special thanks to Richard Williamson for creating the first implementation of `canvas` in Safari, from which the canvas feature was designed.

Special thanks also to the Microsoft employees who first implemented the event-based drag-and-drop mechanism, `contenteditable`, and other features first widely deployed by the Windows Internet Explorer browser.

Special thanks and $10,000 to David Hyatt who came up with a broken implementation of the adoption agency algorithm that the editor had to reverse engineer and fix before using it in the parsing section.

Thanks to the participants of the microdata usability study for allowing us to use their mistakes as a guide for designing the microdata feature.

Thanks to the many sources that provided inspiration for the examples used in the specification.

Thanks also to the Microsoft blogging community for some ideas, to the attendees of the W3C Workshop on Web Applications and Compound Documents for inspiration, to the #mrt crew, the #mrt.no crew, and the #whatwg crew, and to Pillar and Hedral for their ideas and support.

Thanks to Igor Zhbanov for generating PDF versions of the specification.

This specification is written by Ian Hickson (Google, ian@hixie.ch), with contributions from Simon Pieters (Opera, simonp@opera.com) in the `img` section.

The image in the introduction is based on a photo by Wonderlane. (CC BY 2.0)

The image of two cute kittens in a basket used in the context menu example is based on a photo by Alex G. (CC BY 2.0)

The Blue Robot Player sprite used in the canvas demo is based on a work by JohnColburn. (CC BY-SA 3.0)

The photograph of robot 148 climbing the tower at the FIRST Robotics Competition 2013 Silicon Valley Regional is based on a work by Lenore Edman. (CC BY 2.0)

Parts of this specification are © Copyright 2004-2014 Apple Inc., Mozilla Foundation, and Opera Software ASA. You are granted a license to use, reproduce and create derivative works of this document.